Characters T of War Backgrounds for Your Scales of War Hero
by David Noonan illustrations by Austin Hsu, and Tina Young
he setting of the Scales of War Adventure Path is more implied than actual. That’s intentional on our part. We want you to make the world your own rather than define it for you (beyond the degree of definition required to place future adventures). But from “Rescue at Rivenroar” onward, your characters at your table will come to life and develop their own backstories, goals, and agendas. As a launching pad for those backstories, we offer the following character backgrounds. Each one comes with a small game benefit, usually a small skill modifier. But power-gamers beware! You’ll search in vain for significant advantage. The bonuses are intentionally small because we don’t want a character’s past to overshadow that character’s present. Think of these backgrounds as aids to roleplaying, not the means to eke out an incremental advantage to a skill check.
TM & © 2008 Wizards of the Coast, Inc. All rights reserved.
August 20 08
|
D r ag o n 3 6 6
17
Scales of War Background
We’ve identified some backgrounds as being particularly good for a given race or class. Check the ones for your race and class out first, of course, but don’t limit yourself to those. Sometimes it’s fun to play against type and choose a background that stands at odds with what people would expect from your race and class. It’s your story, and your PC is a singular character within it. Don’t feel like you have to obey a sort of demographic imperative to be a “typical” elf or a “typical” fighter. One final note: You’ll notice proper names lurking in some of the backgrounds. Feel free to run with those, and don’t be surprised if some of the places, groups, and people mentioned here appear in future steps on the Scales of War adventure path.
Wandering Duelist I am a student of the True Blade. Perhaps you’d like to match yours against mine? I guarantee we’ll both learn something. You are an itinerant warrior—sometimes a conscript, sometimes a mercenary, but often just a wanderer with a sharp sword and an empty coin-purse. How did you learn your initial training in the combat arts? Why haven’t you resorted to out-and-out banditry? What places have you visited in your wandering? What would it take for you to settle down? Benefit: You add Intimidate to your class skill list and give yourself a +3 bonus to Intimidate checks. Good Background: Dragonborn.
Scorned Noble I am an exile of honor, set apart from my people. Yet in my heart, I remain as steadfast as ever to those I will never see again. You grew up as one of the best and brightest, but what happened to send you away from your life of privilege? Was it a legal matter, an affair of the heart, or the skullduggery of a rival noble family? Are members of your noble family secretly supporting you or
remaining sympathetic to your cause? Do you intend to go back, and if so, what needs to happen first? Benefit: You are used to going it alone. You gain a +2 bonus to saving throws whenever no allies are within 5 squares of you. Good Background: Dragonborn.
Redemption Seeker I am an instrument of honor. I am he who seeks the weight to balance the scales. Somewhere in your past, you behaved less than honorably. Perhaps it was a moment of ill-considered rage, a flirtation outside society’s boundaries, or maybe you took the blame for someone else’s lack of honor. Ever since, you have been striving to act impeccably and with such valor that you redeem yourself for the transgression in your past. What great event started your quest for redemption? Is there anyone trying to thwart your efforts? Have you given any thought to what will happen after you balance the scales of honor? Benefit: You add Diplomacy and Insight to your class skill list, and you gain a +1 bonus to Diplomacy and Insight checks. Good Background: Dragonborn.
Seeker for the Lost Clan I’m an ordinary sort, but those I’m seeking are extraordinary. Quite extraordinary indeed. Some say you are the last of your breed, but you don’t think so. Although your family is gone for good, you’ve been tracking down rumors of another branch of your ancestry. They’re out there somewhere, and you want desperately to be reunited with them. What clues do you have that the lost clan exists? Who raised you, if not this lost clan? And on a fundamental level, why do you want to find them so intensely? Benefit: You add History and Dungeoneering to your class skill list, and you gain a +1 bonus to History and Dungeoneering checks. Good Background: Dwarf.
Warsmith “Crafter” is too mundane a term for me, but “artist” implies a concern with form, not function. Place me somewhere in between. Call me an artisan. You make powerful weapons and armor, instruments of warfare both elegant and deadly. Who taught you your craft, and what is your relationship like with your mentor? Is there something you’ve always wanted to make, but you’ve lacked the proper materials for it? To what degree do you insist on wielding weapons you make yourself, and how do you react when you examine someone else’s work?
August 20 08
|
D r ag o n 3 6 6
18
Scales of War Background
Benefit: You can construct your own weapons and armor, given proper tools and raw materials. Making a weapon takes two days, and making armor takes four days. Doing so confers no economic advantage, however. The item ultimately costs the same as it would if you’d purchased it directly. And you can cast Creation rituals as if you had the Ritual Caster feat. Good Background: Dwarf.
Brother in Battle I’m the sort that craves only a sharp axe, a bitter ale—and companions true to share them with. Not everyone needs to be chased across the world by black-cloaked assassins. You crave fighting, beerdrinking, and companionship of either the friendly or the romantic sort. Have you always had such simple desires, or did you come to this simplicity after years spent striving for something more esoteric? Are there particular enemies you relish fighting—or particular brands of ale you savor? Benefit: You add Endurance to your class skill list, and you gain a +3 bonus to Endurance checks. Good Background: Dwarf.
Seducer I assure you my reputation is exaggerated—at least a little. But my reputation had to have piqued your curiosity, or you wouldn’t be here, would you? You can’t keep away from romantic liaisons with the attractive and the alluring. And after practice, you’re good at it, having slept your way through a dozen manor-houses and noble villas. How mercenary are your seductions—do you genuinely fall in love easily, or is there always an ulterior motive? Are you motivated by the sheer beauty of your paramours, the chase and conquest, or the fringe benefits of bedding the wealthy and influential? Is there someone who got away, or someone unusually resistant to your charms?
Benefit: You add Bluff and Insight to your class skill list, and you gain a +1 bonus to Bluff and Insight checks. Good Background: Eladrin.
Magic Scholar I can recite the Twelve Trigonomystiks from memory, and I’ve read all the Moon-Opal Analects. I favor the Vallander Folio, but I do concede that the Braytonburg Folio is more concise. You believe that magic is the key to unlocking fundamental secrets of the universe, and you’ll eagerly delve into eldritch tomes to learn from the masters of bygone ages. Is there a particular aspect of magic that you’re eager to master? A particular scholar or school of thought you favor? And how do you react when you encounter a magic phenomenon that doesn’t behave the way your theories tell you it should? Benefit: You add Arcana and History to your class skill list, and you gain a +1 bonus to Arcana and History checks. Good Background: Eladrin.
Are there partners in crime in your past, and what’s your relationship with them like? How does someone inclined to mischief make a living? Under what circumstances can you overcome your natural instinct and toe the line? Benefit: You add Bluff and Thievery to your class skill list, and you gain a +1 bonus to Bluff and Thievery checks. Good Background: Eladrin.
Silent Hunter I’m either someone you never see, or I’m the last someone you see. From a young age, you were trained to track, stalk, and bring down your prey. The hunter’s outlook is now pervasive in your life—your problems are merely elusive quarry that you relentlessly hunt down and ultimately claim as a trophy. Is there a particular monster you’re particularly good at hunting? One that frustrates you? Or frightens you? Who taught you the art of stealth? And have you ever had the tables turned on you, when someone or something hunted you?
You believe that magic is the key to unlocking fundamental secrets of the universe, and you’ll eagerly delve into eldritch tomes to learn from the masters of bygone ages. Eldritch Harlequin I’m the fly in the proverbial ointment, I suppose. But I’ve never been much for proverbs. They’re just rules that happen to rhyme sometimes. Your tie to the mysterious and fey places in the world is particularly strong. You’ve always been a mischievous sort—a troublemaker, and the person who upsets the apple-cart just to see how far the apples will roll. What sorts of trouble has your mischief resulted in?
Benefit: You add Stealth and Perception to your class skill list, and you gain a +1 bonus to Stealth and Perception checks. Good Background: Elf.
August 20 08
|
D r ag o n 3 6 6
19
Scales of War Background Forest Warden I’m just part of the Whorlwood. But I’m its leaves, its branches, its trunk, its roots. You regard yourself as part of the natural world—but you’re the part of the natural world that nurtures and protects the rest. You strive against dangers both mundane (like a rapacious woodcutter) and magical (a mysterious taint that kills vegetation by night). Why are you now an adventurer rather than still in your forest? How do you react when you’re taken far from the natural world, like the heart of a city or another plane of existence? Is there a particular enemy of the forest that you’re still striving against? Benefit: You add Nature and Perception to your class skill list, and you gain a +1 bonus to Nature and Perception checks. Good Background: Elf.
for you—and good enough for the other party that he comes back for more. Is there a particular trade or commodity that you’re expert at doing business in? Who gets you your goods, and to whom do you sell? Who are your business partners? Investors? Rivals? Benefit: Learn an extra language of your choice, add Insight to your class skill list, and you gain a +2 bonus to Insight checks. Good Background: Half-elf.
The art of war is one you know well, and you’ve marched with armies both to victory and to defeat. What key battles did you take part in? What was your rank, and did you have any particular duties? Do you have old war comrades around, and how do they feel about you? Benefit: It takes four failed death saves to kill you. Good Background: Half-elf.
You have a justifiable pride in your powers of observation and deduction, and you take a delight in surprising others with your conclusions that borders on the theatrical. Detective
Con Artist
I’m the only one who can get you from here to Rythan Keep in less than two weeks. And I’ll make sure you don’t wind up in a gnoll tribe’s soup cauldron. Ever since you saw your first map, you wanted to know what the lands beyond the margin looked like. And as an inveterate traveler, you’ve started to find out. What places have you seen on your journeys? How do you make ends meet? What’s the greatest danger you’ve ever faced? Is there a mythical place you’re particularly keen to visit someday? Benefit: Learn an extra language of your choice, add Nature to your class skill list, and you gain a +2 bonus to Nature checks. Good Background: Elf.
I’m the guy who noticed how sharp your sword is, despite the fact that you aren’t carrying a whetstone. But I suppose calling it “your” sword isn’t really accurate, is it? You have a justifiable pride in your powers of observation and deduction, and you take a delight in surprising others with your conclusions that borders on the theatrical. How did you hone your inquisitive nature? With the city watch, in a noble court, or among the priesthood? Are there particularly notable crimes you’ve solved? If so, did your efforts earn you any lifetime friends or enemies? Benefit: You add Perception and Insight to your class skill list, and you gain a +1 bonus to Perception and Insight checks. Good Background: Half-elf.
I’m not the guy you’re looking for. Seriously, I was in Oakmont last night. I wasn’t even here. You’ve long made a living on the backs of the greedy, the gullible, and the unobservant. What sort of confidence games did you favor—elaborate conspiracies, rigged games of chance, or ruses that facilitated traditional crimes like burglary, robbery, or kidnapping? How did you learn your trade? How close have you come to being caught? And how many enemies are out there, looking for a chance to get even? Benefit: You add Bluff and Thievery to your class skill list, and you gain a +1 bonus to Bluff and Thievery checks. Good Background: Halfling.
Merchant Prince
Wandering Mercenary
I’m the only guy who can get you spiderhaunt silk within 10 leagues of here. And that’s just the start of the business we can accomplish together. You’ve always had a knack for mercantile affairs, and nothing pleases you more than a deal that’s profitable
I served with the Targa Lancers throughout the Montesi Incursion, then I trained the Wallach family retinue when they took back Blackbarrow Castle. That led to a promotion when the orcs invaded, and I . . .
Explorer/Guide
August 20 08
|
D r ag o n 3 6 6
20
Scales of War Background River Smuggler I’m either a simple boatman, or a not-so-simple boatman. Depends who’s askin’. You’ve plied the rivers and coastlines of the world, making a little money on official cargo and a lot of money on the crates hidden in the bow compartment. What did you smuggle, and why was it contraband? Who did you deal with on each end of your journey? Did you ever get caught? Or double-crossed? Benefit: You add Athletics and Streetwise to your class skill list, and you gain a +1 bonus to Athletics and Streetwise checks. Good Background: Halfling.
Cloistered Priest
Street Urchin I’m part of the Redboot crew, and that’s all you need to hear. You grew up on the mean streets of an urban metropolis, and you quickly found safety amid numbers of likeminded poor youths. They taught you to fight, to steal (mostly from those who had something worth stealing), and to protect what little you had. How did you escape that life of poverty and petty crime? Under what circumstances will you go back? And what happened to your family friends in the meantime? Benefit: You add Intimidate and Streetwise to your class skill list, and you gain a +1 bonus to Intimidate and Streetwise checks. Good Background: Halfling
I took my vows as a child in the grand temple at Tarsalee, and I’ve served there faithfully ever since. You’ve grown up in the heart of religious worship, and you know the rituals and rites of your faith better than most. What event sent you out into the wider world? Under what circumstances will you return? Given your sheltered upbringing, how do you react to the strange and the dangerous? Benefit: You add Religion to your class skill list, and you gain a +3 bonus to Religion checks. Good Background: Human.
Gritty Sergeant Don’t call me ‘sir.’ I work for a living, soldier! I was picking boys like you off the turf back when your mama was picking daisies in the field. Your papa, too. You’ve led people into battle and had them bleed on you as they died. But many of them lived to fight again. You’ve seen them come and go, sometimes so quickly that you never learned their names. Are there particular battles you remember well—or curse? Particular generals who wasted the lives of the those in your care? To what degree have you made the
transition to civilian life? Ever get caught giving orders just like the old days, or are you glad to have that responsibility lifted from your shoulders? Benefit: You gain proficiency in a simple or military weapon of your choice, and you gain a +1 bonus to initiative checks. Good Background: Human.
Noble Scion The last name is Rocannon. Our lands are east of here, encompassing the towns of New Laurel and Krindelton and extending up to Plover Pass. You grew up as one of the best and brightest, having access to more training and more opportunity than anyone else around you. What sorts of esoteric activities—falconry, courtly intrigues, fine art—were you exposed to? What event set you on the adventurer’s path? How do you feel about those who didn’t have the privilege and opportunity you did? Benefit: You add a knowledge skill of your choice to your class skill list, and you gain a +2 bonus to checks with that skill. Good Background: Human.
Scion of an Ancient Bloodline The blood of the Khavarran runs through my veins. Aha! I see you’re schooled enough to recognize the dynastic name. Your circumstances might be reduced at the moment, but the nigh-mythical sorcerer-kings of the tiefling empire are among your ancestors. You cannot help but dream of those bygone days. What sort of ruler was your ancestor . . . according to your family and according to the history books? Are there particular qualities of your ancestor that you’re eager to emulate, or perhaps repudiate? Do you entertain dreams of ruling an empire yourself someday? Benefit: You add History to your class skill list, and you gain a +3 bonus to History checks. Good Background: Tiefling.
August 20 08
|
D r ag o n 3 6 6
21
Scales of War Background Cult Escapee The tattoo means I was a member of the Six-Fingered Hand. You’ll notice I said “was” a member. At first the group appeared to be on to something big, and you wanted to be part. But when you saw how dark their grand design was, you escaped. What drew you to the cult in the first place, and what caused you to spurn it? Who was in the cult: your friends, your family, your whole community? Are they hunting you still? Benefit: You add Arcana and Bluff to your class skill list, and you gain a +1 bonus to Arcana and Bluff checks. Good Background: Tiefling.
Young Cutthroat You’ve heard of the Chillbain Clan in New Shardaluum? I’ve got a lot of Chillbain friends. Close friends, if you know what I mean. You were the violent arm of an organized crime cartel, dispensing bloody punishment for real and imagined slights. How were you recruited into the syndicate; was it based on family, trade guild, or neighborhood ties? How high did you rise in its ranks? Why aren’t you still there? Is there a price on your head from the authorities, the crime syndicate, or both? Benefit: You add Intimidate and Thievery to your class skill list, and you gain a +1 bonus to Intimidate and Thievery checks. Good Background: Tiefling.
Auspicious Birth I was born on the slopes of Mount Emberstare during an eclipse, when the moon turned as red as blood. The circumstances of your birth were somehow blessed, and you grew up knowing you were somehow set apart and special. Who regards your birth as auspicious? Are you tied to a specific prophecy, and if
so, what does it say? How were you treated differently as a child? Benefit: You substitute your highest ability score for Constitution to determine your initial hit points. Good Background: Cleric.
Traveling Missionary I bring you the unending light of Pelor—light that illuminates the darkness, comforts the weary and wounded, and vexes the black of heart. Your calling is to bring the light of your chosen faith to the dark corners of the world. What places have you seen in your journeys, and were they receptive, indifferent, or antagonistic to your message? How do you feel when you’re back in the temples of the faithful? What circumstances will cause you to leave the road and settle down? Benefit: Learn an extra language of your choice, add Religion to your class skill list, and gain a +2 bonus to Religion checks. Good Background: Cleric.
Recent Convert Look, I was once an ordinary fellow like you. But during the Shrieking Plague, I found a source of power I’d never imagined. Or perhaps it found me. You weren’t always the religious sort. But you recently had a supernatural experience that changed your outlook and showed you your true calling. What was that event? Are there unanswered questions in its wake? And how did you feel about religion (both your new one and religions in general) prior to your conversion? Benefit: Once per encounter, reroll a failed saving throw against a charm effect. Good Background: Cleric.
Former Gladiator I trained under Thool Rhak, fighting in various pits across the northern trade towns. Then I survived two seasons in the Terrimula Arena over in Jarrak City. So yeah, I know my stuff. You’ve grown up fighting for the amusement of the crowd. Did you seek out this life, or was it thrust upon you? What sorts of gladiatorial spectacles did you take part in: individual combats, staged mass battles, gladiator-vs.-monster fights, or inherently unfair gladiator
August 20 08
|
D r ag o n 3 6 6
22
Scales of War Background
punishments (like unarmed prisoners against beasts)? And what kept you going? The whips of your masters, the lure of competition, or the roar of the crowd? Benefit: It takes four failed death saves to kill you. Good Background: Fighter.
Haunted Veteran I marched south into the jungle with Atrelius. Can we talk about something else? You saw things in the war that no one should have to see, and the horrors of war changed your personality. What were you like before you went to war? Under what circumstances will you share what you experienced? How do you keep those memories at bay: By adventuring and other hardships, through prayer, or with a bottle? Benefit: Once per encounter, reroll a failed saving throw against a fear effect. Good Background: Fighter.
Former Barbarian My people are the Khartalli Narash—the “wolves of the desert” in your tongue. Your formative years were spent as part of an indigenous tribe of hunter-gatherers. As a nomad, you went where the food was, traveling across the wilderness from season to season. What happened to your tribe? What would it take for you to return? And were you a typical member of the tribe, or was there something that set you apart? Benefit: You add Nature to your class skill list, and you gain a +1 bonus to Nature checks. Good Background: Fighter.
Prison Conversion The scars are just evidence of a wayward youth. I’m actually a testament to the power of prison ministry. You did something bad enough to result in your imprisonment, but while there, your life changed. Upon your release, you took up your new life with a
crusader’s zeal. For what crime were you imprisoned? How did you attain your release? Do you have difficulty reconciling your old life with your new calling? How do you react when your old life re-emerges unexpectedly? Benefit: You add Streetwise to your class skill list, and you gain a +3 bonus to Streetwise checks. Good Background: Paladin.
Crusading Zealot I am but a humble instrument of my god. But I’m an instrument with several sharp edges, to be sure. Your calling is an intensely personal one. The voices of the gods themselves have sent you on your crusade, and they periodically guide you to this day. How do others react when you tell them what drives you forward? What was it like the first time you received divine inspiration? Do you ever doubt or question the voices from the gods?
whether your fate is truly ordained? And who or what is standing in your way? Benefit: Once per day, you can reroll an initiative check if you don’t like the result. You keep the second result whether it’s better, the same, or worse. Good Background: Paladin.
Last of the Breed Everyone says that the Resolute Two Hundred are no more. That’s not true—not as long I draw breath, anyway. You were part of an elite order of roving guardians— but they’re all gone and only you remain. What caused the order to die out? How did you escape that fate? Will you try to rejuvenate the order, or are you resigned to it passing into history? Benefit: You add Endurance and Perception to your class skill list, and you gain a +1 bonus to Endurance and Perception checks. Good Background: Ranger.
Other people run away screaming when they see a monster. You run toward it screaming. Benefit: You gain a +1 bonus to saving throws until you fail a saving throw, and then the bonus is gone until you rest. Good Background: Paladin.
Trained from Birth for a Specific Prophecy The doves? They come and go as they please. By Choinero’s wisdom, the doves will watch over me until the day of the Great Rift. The prophetic words were written in scripture long before you were born, and you’re part of a concentrated effort to fulfill, safeguard, or thwart that prophecy. What is the nature of the prophecy, and what’s your relationship to it? Do you question
Monster Hunter I’m a hunter of exotic game. The more cunning and elusive, the better. And if the locals all call it a legend, that’s best of all. Other people run away screaming when they see a monster. You run toward it screaming. You like testing your mettle against the strangest and most horrible creatures that the dark places of the world spawn. What’s your greatest trophy taken to date? Is there a particular sort of monster that is your nemesis? And are there certain circumstances that make your hunt a “fair” one or make your quarry a “worthy” adversary?
August 20 08
|
D r ag o n 3 6 6
23
Scales of War Background
Benefit: You gain a +2 bonus whenever you use a knowledge skill to make a monster knowledge check (as described on page 180 of the Player’s Handbook). Good Background: Ranger.
Did you work alone or as part of a gang? If you worked with others, what do they think of you now? Did you ever get caught? Benefit: You add Athletics and Thievery to your class skill list, and you gain a +1 bonus to Athletics and Thievery checks. Good Background: Rogue.
Fugitive from a Vengeful Rival Suffice it to say that Lord Sakrath is no friend of mine. There was a falling out, followed by several impromptu duels and an abrupt departure. You’ve angered someone powerful enough to make you a fugitive. Every month brings new evidence that your rival’s wrath hasn’t waned: a bounty hunter, trouble with the authorities, or posters indicated yet another increase in the price on your head. What event caused you to take flight? How long have you been on the run, and what lands have you traveled through on the way? Is there something other than your death that will end the chase? Are you trying to escape, or will you ultimately turn the tables on your rival? Benefit: You add Bluff and Stealth to your class skill list, and you gain a +1 bonus to Bluff and Stealth checks. Good Background: Ranger.
Political Rebel I’m the guy who’s going to put Lord Chaulchert’s head on a pike and free the whole Mirrin Valley from the whip of his taskmasters. You struggle against political injustice. Perhaps the nobles are oppressing the serfs, the church is quashing religious rivals, the king is crushing the trade guilds, or the guilds are suppressing independent mercantilists. You’re on the side of the underdog, and you’ve escalated the struggle beyond words to direct action. Against whom are you rebelling? Are you part of a larger revolutionary cell, or do you act alone? What will things look like when you’ve won? What put you on the adventurer’s path? Benefit: You add Diplomacy and Streetwise to your class skill list, and you gain a +1 bonus to Diplomacy and Streetwise checks. Good Background: Rogue.
Assassin I bear the Sigil of Vaurom. I have tasted the Black Lotus Tea and seen the sublime mysteries within Vaurom’s Impossible Crypt. I say this not as a boast, but as a warning. You’ve been trained in the thousand arts of death, sent to preemptively kill the powerful. What secret order taught you your trade, and how did they recruit you? What targets have you assassinated, and did any escape your clutches? Do you have a current contract, did you give up the assassin’s life, or are you on the run? Benefit: You add Arcana and Stealth to your class skill list, and you gain a +1 bonus to Arcana and Stealth checks. Good Background: Rogue.
Cat Burglar The Hrulla Tower in Jarrak City? I’ve been in and out of there three times. The ivy on the courtyard walls is pretty much a “Please Steal From Me” sign. You take an artisan’s approach to large-scale burglary, stealing from the most well-protected treasure troves you can find. What particularly notable items have you stolen, and what did you do with the proceeds?
August 20 08
|
D r ag o n 3 6 6
24
Scales of War Background On the Run from the Devil I’m just a guy who’s looking for a little more time before the bill comes due. You’ve made an eldritch bargain, but you no longer like the terms. Accordingly, you’re trying to alter or escape the bargain any way you can. Who is the bargain with, and what element of it are you trying to break (the term that involves your death, the devilish imprisonment of your family, or the forfeiture of your soul)? What specific form is the enforcement taking? In other words, who’s chasing you? Benefit: You add Bluff and Perception to your class skill list, and you gain a +1 bonus to Bluff and Perception checks. Good Background: Warlock.
Apprentice of Sinister Cabal I learned that trick from the very best: The Black Constellation. To call your fellow conspirators a “cult” is to credit them with more fervor and less intelligence than they’ve earned. You are part of a secret group that wields arcane power for a dark, mysterious purpose— and there might be secrets within the cabal that you don’t know about yet. How were you recruited into this cabal, and what is their professed aim? Do you have mentors, friends, or rivals in the cabal? Are you still an active member, or have you left the cabal temporarily or permanently? Benefit: You add Arcana and Dungeoneering to your class skill list, and you gain a +1 bonus to Arcana and Dungeoneering checks. Good Background: Warlock.
Born Under a Bad Sign My mother told me that the caul was just superstition, and the howling wolves were just a coincidence. But I’ve seen enough to know that something . . . dark . . . is involved. Your entire childhood was one superstitious omen after another. Individually, they’re easy to ignore or
explain away. But collectively, it’s clear that something sinister has designs on your soul. What phenomena did you experience as a child? Do you still see omens in your daily life? And do you have any clues about the specifics of your dark destiny? Benefit: You substitute your highest ability score for Constitution to determine your initial hit points. Good Background: Warlock.
Vet Who Can’t Let Go We were encamped on the southern banks of the Trellisha River when the orcs came. It was like watching ants on the march. You could see the glint of spears from horizon to horizon. Then they just started throwing themselves into the river. You’ve mustered out of the army, but you’re forever bound to military life and you still see events through a soldier’s eyes. What was your army career like? What major battles did you fight in, and did you encounter any great heroes or generals on the battlefield? Why aren’t you still in the military? Under what circumstances could you reenlist? Benefit: You add History and Intimidate to your class skill list, and you gain a +1 bonus to History and Intimidate checks. Good Background: Warlord.
Noble Bred for War My father, the fourth Lord of the Parapets, gave me that blade. More importantly, he taught me how to use it —and why. You’re part of a noble family with an ancestral mandate to safeguard the lands in your care. Often, that means marching off to war, and you learned the solemnity of that duty from an early age. What is your family protecting its lands against: monsters, barbaric hordes, bandits, or an invading army? Were there family members who spurned their duty? How does the adventurer’s life fulfill your noble duty?
Benefit: You gain proficiency in a simple or military weapon of your choice, and you gain a +1 bonus to Diplomacy checks. Good Background: Warlord.
Officer Who Came Out of Retirement Well, we didn’t do it that way during the Eastern Campaigns, I can tell you that. You gave up a life in the army or the city watch long ago, but somehow you wound up eating hardtack and sleeping on a bedroll amid well-meaning but green recruits half your age. Under what circumstances did you retire, and then what got you back out on the trail? What lessons are you trying to pass on? What quirks of your comrades drive you crazy? What is it going to take for you to retire once again? Benefit: You gain a +1 bonus to initiative checks, you add History to your class skill list, and you gain a +1 bonus to History checks. Good Background: Warlord.
Arcane Student Who Saw Too Much I was one of the brightest students in the Ebon Tower. But I was curious. And after I saw the demons bound in the basement, I knew some of my instructors were even more curious—and less scrupulous—than I was. You’ve received extensive arcane training, but then you learned something sinister about your teachers. What did you learn? Did you confront them, or did you flee? Are they chasing you to try to win you back into the fold, or to make sure that you don’t reveal their secrets? Benefit: You receive a +1 bonus to saving throws to end effects that daze, stun, immobilize, or restrain you. Good Background: Wizard.
August 20 08
|
D r ag o n 3 6 6
25
Scales of War Background Backgrounds at a Glance Name Apprentice of Sinister Cabal Arcane Student Who Saw Too Much Assassin Auspicious Birth Born Under a Bad Sign Brother in Battle Cat Burglar Cloistered Priest Con Artist Crusading Zealot Cult Escapee Detective Eldritch Harlequin Explorer/Guide Forest Warden Former Barbarian Former Gladiator Fugitive from a Vengeful Rival Gritty Sergeant Haunted Veteran Imbuer Last of the Breed Magic Scholar Merchant Prince
Background Warlock Wizard Rogue Cleric Warlock Dwarf Rogue Human Halfling Paladin Tiefling Half-elf Eladrin Elf Elf Fighter Fighter Ranger Human Fighter Wizard Ranger Eladrin Half-elf
Missing Master I learned the Art at the hands of Rodraig the Raven. He fled into the portal when the . . . things . . . came, and I’ve been looking for him ever since. Your mentor disappeared under mysterious circumstances, and you’ve been trying to find him or her ever since. What was your master like, and what were the circumstances of the disappearance? What clues do you have that drive you forward? What will do when you find your missing master?
Name
Background
Missing Master Wizard Monster Hunter Ranger Noble Bred for War Warlord Noble Scion Human Officer Who Came Out of Retirement Warlord On the Run from the Devil Warlock Political Rebel Rogue Prison Conversion Paladin Recent Convert Cleric Redemption Seeker Dragonborn River Smuggler Halfling Scion of an Ancient Bloodline Tiefling Scorned Noble Dragonborn Seducer Eladrin Seeker for the Lost Clan Dwarf Silent Hunter Elf Street Urchin Halfling Trained from Birth for a Specific Prophecy Paladin Traveling Missionary Cleric Vet Who Can’t Let Go Warlord Wandering Duelist Dragonborn Wandering Mercenary Half-elf Warsmith Dwarf Young Cutthroat Tiefling
new wondrous items and implements to channel your power. Who taught you how to make such items? Is there a particular item you’re keen to make, once you gather the rare and expensive materials for it? How do you assess the work of other arcane artisans when you encounter magic items in the treasure troves you find? Benefit: You can construct your own implements and wondrous items, given proper tools and raw materials. Making an implement takes two days, and making a wondrous item takes four days. Doing so confers no economic advantage, however. The item ultimately costs the same as it would if you’d purchased it directly. And you can cast Creation rituals as if you had the Ritual Caster feat. Good Background: Wizard. D
About the Author
David Noonan is a game designer for Wizards of the Coast, Inc. He contributed to the 4th edition core rules and co-wrote the Scepter Tower of Spellgard adventure. He lives in Washington state with his wife and two children.
Benefit: You add Perception and Insight to your class skill list, and you gain a +1 bonus to Perception and Insight checks. Good Background: Wizard.
Imbuer In two different ways, you could call me a collector. I gather antiquities—items who’ve borne silent witness to great events. And then I collect magic potence to imbue within those antiquities, improving them to the limit of my ability. The blending of magical power with mundane objects has been your forte, and you delight in the creation of
August 20 08
|
D r ag o n 3 6 6
26
Rescue at Rivenroar
by David Noonan
Rescue at Rivenroar
illustrations by Jason A. Engle and Steve Prescott ✦ cartography by Mike Schley
The world has never been a safe place. Bastions of civilization populate a dark, menacing world—islands of order and reason exist in a land otherwise overrun by dark cults, vile monsters, creatures from the dark edges of the imagination, and worse. As deadly as the world is on a normal day, something has begun to stir on the fringes of the civilized Elsir Vale. Formerly the site of an attack by an army known as the Red Hand, the Vale has known several years of peace since brave adventurers stormed into the teeth of the approaching Hand and sent them scurrying back into the darkness.
TM & © 2008 Wizards of the Coast, Inc. All rights reserved.
July 20 08
|
D u n g e o n 1 56
4
Rescue at Rivenroar
What’s an Adventure Path? Scales of War is the fourth Adventure Path to appear in the pages of Dungeon Magazine. But what, you ask, is an Adventure Path? Quite simply, it is a series of related adventures intended to form a complete D&D campaign that takes your players from 1st level all the way to, in the case of Scales of War, 30th level. Previous Adventure Paths, presented with the 3rd Edition D&D rules, took characters from 1st to 20th level. But with all three tiers in the new edition ripe and ready to explore, we’re pushing the limit with Scales of War. Each tier takes roughly six adventures to traverse, which means we’ll finish off this Adventure Path in about eighteen issues. Each adventure advances characters from between one and a half to two levels of experience. We recognize that not everyone will meet every encounter or complete every quest, however, so periodically, we point DMs to a supplemental Side Trek or short adventure to keep your PCs on pace. Plus, roughly every other month, Dragon will feature new support content for Scales of War. The first such article appears in Dragon #366 in August 2008, and it details possible character backgrounds for your brand-new Scales of War characters. Finally, this Adventure Path is intended to function as a complete D&D campaign. That means we make some assumptions about the history of the world as we move along, just as you would in any campaign you run. We borrow heavily from the D&D mythology of 4th Edition, as well as all the great ideas that have cropped up in other products over the years— including the pages of past issues of Dungeon! Enjoy your stay in Scales of War, and keep an eye out for next month’s installment, “Siege of Bordrin’s Watch,” by Robert J. Schwalb.
But the peace of Elsir Vale—and specifically, the town of Brindol, heart of the former conflict with the Red Hand—has been shattered. The vague shadow of unease the locals have been experiencing lately has crystallized in the form of an attack on the town itself. Now Brindol finds itself once more in need of brave heroes willing to come to the aid of their citizens. In “Rescue at Rivenroar,” the player characters must brave the depths of ancient catacombs in search of prisoners taken from the town of Brindol in a midnight raid. The hobgoblins, bandits that style themselves after an invading horde from long ago, have taken refuge in a dungeon under a ruined mountain fortress, and the PCs must clear them out to find the captive townsfolk and the treasures taken from Brindol. “Rescue at Rivenroar” also marks the first step in a great journey—the Scales of War Adventure Path, which spans 30 levels and put the PCs at the crux of events that shapes the world for centuries to come. While the scope of this adventure isn’t as grand, it represents the seed from which an epic tale will surely grow. “Rescue at Rivenroar” is an adventure for 1st-level PCs.
Background Sinruth is a hobgoblin with greater aspirations than a life spent preying on the fringes of civilization. He listened closely at the campfires when his fathers and uncles told tales of the Red Hand of Doom, a mighty army that ran across the land like a scythe. And when he became an adult and a leader of his own band of hobgoblins, he found a cache of tunics and weapons left behind by that army. Sinruth felt
his destiny calling. He declared himself the new Warlord of Sinruth’s Hand (as he named the group), emblazoned every possible surface with a crudely painted, downward thrusting red hand insignia, and set about recruiting the massive army that he felt was his birthright. But starting an army isn’t as easy as those campfire tales led Sinruth to believe. Years passed with Sinruth’s band eking out a meager existence in the wilderness. But slowly, he started to gain allies. A temporary bargain with some sinister, mischievous gnomes blossomed into a lasting friendship. The Red Hand’s exploration of the mountains unearthed some undisturbed catacombs beneath the long-ruined Castle Rivenroar. Sinruth struck another bargain, and the undead guardians let the Red Hand move in, in exchange for periodic payment of kidnapped prisoners. Sinruth and the reconstituted Red Hand had a base and a growing reputation, but they were far from a mighty army. An emissary from another remnant of the Red Hand offered to join forces under Sinruth’s banner and more than double Sinruth’s fifty soldiers under arms. All Sinruth had to do was attack Brindol, steal some relics from the original Red Hand invasion, and take enough prisoners to keep the undead guardians of Rivenroar satisfied. The new Red Hand did recently, with Sinruth personally leading the assault on Brindol. The Red Hand sacked Brindol’s Hall of Great Valor, stealing back many of the museum pieces on display there. Sinruth brought back seven prisoners, despite the fact that the new Red Hand lost half its number in the attack. So now Sinruth waits in the Rivenroar catacombs for the emissary to return with reinforcements, and he bides
July 20 08
|
D u n g e o n 1 56
5
Rescue at Rivenroar
his time by contemplating the stolen treasures of a grander age and dreaming of conquests yet to come. Meanwhile in Brindol, the dead have been buried and the damage to the town repaired. But seven of the townsfolk are missing—taken by Sinruth and the Red Hand. The town council is willing to pay handsomely for brave adventurers to rescue the prisoners and recover the antique treasures taken from the Hall of Great Valor . . . adventurers like those at your table.
Adventure Synopsis In “Rescue at Rivenroar,” the PCs must rescue seven kidnapped citizens of Brindol. Part of Sinruth’s rise to power is due to his evangelizing to his fellow goblinoids and other vile creatures that he will overthrow local bastions of civilization. He reserves special loathing, however, for Brindol, scene of the Red Hand’s defeat. The recent attack has the locals unnerved, and early in the adventure, the PCs witness firsthand that the kidnappings are not an isolated incident. To sow more fear and uncertainty, more of Sinruth’s Hand continues raids on the town. After foiling a pair of such attacks, the PCs are approached by Councilmember Troyas, a member of Brindol’s ruling town council, to recover the missing citizens. The PCs travel to Sinruth’s lair—a sprawling underground complex called Rivenroar. There they face Sinruth’s Hand, free the lost citizens of Brindol, face Sinruth himself . . . and discover some uncomfortable information about the nature of Sinruth in Elsir Vale.
The Prisoners “Rescue at Rivenroar” includes a puzzle in the form of the seven prisoners the PCs are trying to rescue. The hobgoblins have been moving their captives around the Rivenroar catacombs, so each prisoner knows something about the Rivenroar layout. When the PCs reach their first prisoner, that prisoner gives them clues about where one or two of the other prisoners are. And while none of the prisoners are effective combatants, some have useful knowledge or skills. Rescuing the prisoners amounts to a major quest, but it’s likely the PCs rescue some captives, return them to civilization, then come back for the rest. The PCs don’t earn the 500 XP until all the captives return to Brindol or die trying. (One prisoner, Kartenix, has died in captivity.) Below you’ll find brief descriptions of each of the prisoners. Each one knows something—but by no means everything— about the location of the other prisoners. All the prisoners are scared out of their wits to greater or lesser degree. Some have been tormented—though not yet tortured—by their captors. And while the hobgoblins have been moving the prisoners around the Rivenroar catacombs, the prisoners often have bags over their heads. And when you’ve been dragged, kicking and screaming, down hallway after darkened hallway, they all start to look alike. Any maps that captives draw for PCs are inaccurate and out of proportion. And if you
emphasize that these six people have been held prisoner by hobgoblins for four days, marched into the mountains, then moved around seemingly at random within ancient catacombs, the PCs likely understand why a particular captive can’t remember whether the hallway is 40 feet or 50 feet long. Adronsius is an exception; as a dwarf, he has an instinctive grasp of
July 20 08
|
D u n g e o n 1 56
6
Rescue at Rivenroar
The Quests
underground space that make his recollections of the places he has been more accurate. None of the captives are effective combatants. They can wield captured weapons, but they attack only in extremis and prefer to stay well behind the PCs. It’s easiest to just give them a turn at initiative point 0, moving them away from potential threats. If you need combat statistics for them, give them 15 hit points, 12 in all defenses, a speed of 6, and a melee basic attack at +0 for 1d4 damage if unarmed and 1d8 damage if armed. Jalissa: Jalissa is an acolyte of Ioun who is held in room 16. She hysterically clings to whichever PC comes through the door from room 15 first. She does anything that PC says without question, and she looks for approval from that PC if someone else tries to give her even an innocuous order.
Jalissa isn’t a spellcaster per se, but she is trained in the arcane arts (Arcana +10) and knows the following rituals: comprehend language, silence, and eye of alarm. She doesn’t have the alchemical reagents or residuum, but the PCs might have some reagents, and they can find some residuum in room 7—just down the stairs from where the hobgoblins are holding Jalissa. Jalissa also knows that Thurann, the 8-year-old boy, is being held somewhere nearby—she heard him shouting only a few hours ago. They were held together in room 16 until yesterday, and Thurann proved adept at stealing extra food for himself and Jalissa. Sertanian: Sertanian, the castellan of the Hall of Great Valor, is held in room 6. Sertanian tries to weather his captivity with dignity, and when rescued, he brushes off questions about his captivity as “Just a few hard days, nothing more. Let’s get on with the rescue, shall we?” But Sertanian has a past—he served
“Rescue at Rivenroar” offers the opportunity for PCs to earn quest XP in a couple of places. Provided here is the list of quests, and their rewards, in the adventure. Major Quest—Rescue Rescuing the prisoners from Rivenroar amounts to a major quest. The PCs don’t earn the quest XP until the prisoners’ fate has been determined, and those still living returned to Brindol. Reward: 500 XP (and 200 gp if the prisoners are returned). Minor Quest—Treasure Returning the stolen items described in The Treasure to Brindol results in the PCs fulfilling the quest conditions and earning the XP. Reward: 100 XP (and the 200 gp promised in The Treasure). as a soldier during the great “Red Hand” invasion years ago. So he has an utter hatred of hobgoblins that comes out the first time he’s present when the PCs battle goblins or hobgoblins. Sertanian hurls invective, taunts the hobgoblins, and recommends that any unconscious ones be “put to the sword” immediately. Sertanian is the only captive who can identify the treasures from the Hall of Great Valor on sight (they’ve been his responsibility for years). He also knows that Mirtala the cook is being held downstairs in a chamber near a spiral staircase with frescos on the walls. The hobgoblins sent Sertanian away (perhaps a day ago— Sertanian has lost track of time), saying that the plump Mirtala will make a better meal. And he suspects that Kartenix is dead; Kartenix told Sertanian a couple of days ago that he was going to try to overpower the
July 20 08
|
D u n g e o n 1 56
7
Rescue at Rivenroar
ettercap guarding him the following morning by pretending to be asleep. But then they moved Kartenix, so Sertanian doesn’t know where he is. Thurann: The 8-year-old son of Kartenix the guard captain, Thurann is held in room 17. Thurann is a brave, observant boy. Outwardly, he’s handling his ordeal better than many of the adults. He even stole food for Jalissa and himself. Since he reached Rivenroar, Thurann spent most of his time with Jalissa while keeping an eye out for his father. Yesterday they moved him from room 16 to room 17, but they took a
roundabout path so Thurann doesn’t know how close he is. Thurann also knows that “the old witch” Zerriksa is being held in a “magic circle just beyond the big room with all the mushrooms downstairs”—the hobgoblins brought Thurann down there to threaten him in front of Zerriksa. Thurann has some skills you wouldn’t expect the son of a watch captain to have. Despite his small size, he has Athletics +7 and Thievery +9. And while he can’t really fight, he’s brave when it comes to climbing or handling other hazards. The only thing that makes
Thurann upset is incontrovertible evidence that his father is dead, and he is distrustful of anyone who doubts that “my father said he’d figure out a way to escape and then come rescue me.” Mirtala: The cook Mirtala is held in room 10. Mirtala has been bitten repeatedly by the dire rats in room 10 and has filth fever. She’s almost catatonic with fear and it takes careful diplomacy (described in the room 10 encounter) to persuade her to say anything. Mirtala knows that Adronsius is being held upstairs in “a family crypt . . . the name started with J, but I don’t remember it exactly.” And she was held with Sertanian briefly, so she knows that he was held someplace that’s “up a spiral staircase, then around a bunch of corners and down two separate flights of stairs” from room 10. That was several days ago, though. She also thought she heard Kartenix’s voice during that blindfolded walk, so he might be somewhere on that path. Zerriksa: The crone Zerriksa is held in room 12. She resists as passively as a woman in her seventies can manage. A naturally cranky woman, she has made her captors more than a little miserable. And she has played on the rumors in Brindol and intimated she might have “dark powers,” hoping that she’d scare the hobgoblins into treating her better. Her plan worked—to a point. The hobgoblins put Zerriksa inside a magic trap in room 12, hoping she wouldn’t be able to turn them into toads once she was inside. Now she’s stuck there, but at least the hobgoblins are giving her a wide berth. Everyone in Brindol thinks that Zerriksa is a witch, but she’s really just an accomplished herbalist (Heal +9, Nature +9). While they can’t attack her directly,
July 20 08
|
D u n g e o n 1 56
8
Rescue at Rivenroar the gnomes and ettercaps have been trying to intimidate her and perhaps persuade her to switch sides. Two days ago the ettercaps showed her Kartenix’s corpse, half-wrapped in webbing. And yesterday one of the gnomes brought the boy Thurann to the edge of the circle and threatened to slit his throat. Zerriksa doesn’t care for her fellow prisoners, but she knows that she wouldn’t last long with the denizens of Rivenroar once they realized she has no magic powers. So she’s just playing out her bluff and biding her time. Adronsius: Adronsius the alchemist is held in room 14. For some reason, the hobgoblins are particularly keen on beating dwarves, and Adronsius has borne the brunt of their physical abuse. All the prisoners have been roughed up a little, but Adronsius has been beat bloody every day since the hobgoblins took him prisoner. When the PCs rescue Adronsius, he has only 5 hit points out of 15. While Adronsius is an accomplished alchemist, he has none of the tools of his trade and so can’t mix anything up until he gets back to Brindol. He knows Mirtala is alive, but he isn’t sure where they’re keeping her. And he was brought to the upper level for an interrogation session where he saw Jelissa. Because he’s a dwarf, Adronsius remembers the way pretty well—for a guy who was blindfolded. It was “down the stairs, straight across the entry chamber, turning left in the room that smelled of goblin, then left again in the room with the crackling sound, around two right corners, then through a room that smelled of the dead, then up the stairs to a room with a sticky floor, right and up another set of stairs, then through a dusty room and left through a door. That good enough directions for ya?” Kartenix: Kartenix the guard captain is now deceased. His body is in room 7. He tried to over-
power the ettercaps, who’ve webbed him up. They intend to scare the other prisoners with the corpse for a while and then consume it. The PCs can bring his body back to Brindol for a decent burial if they wish.
The Treasure The people of Brindol want their friends and neighbors back; that’s their primary concern. But they also want some of the treasures back from their “Hall of Great Valor.” Most of the “treasures” have little or no intrinsic value. They’re museum pieces from the “Red Hand” invasion many years ago. But the sentimental value to the town is immense. PCs can earn an addi-
tional 100 XP (plus the 200 gp reward) when the following items are brought back to Brindol. • Ornate, gilded dragoncrest helm (room 21). • Ceremonial platinum longsword; too heavy and blunt to be useful as a weapon (room 23). • Set of three shields with the Red Hand insignia, each with a charred hole near the center (room 23). • Set of iron gauntlets with extensive filigree (room 21). • Heraldic battle standard depicting two hands clasped in a handshake (room 23).
BRINDOL First visited in the 3rd edition adventure Red Hand of Doom, Brindol has a smaller population than it did before the events of that adventure. But the last decade has brought mild prosperity to the region, with only bandits (such as Sinruth and his ilk) disturbing the peace. Population: 6,700; another 1,000 live within a five-mile radius of the town itself. The people of Brindol are mostly humans, half-elves, and dwarves. The town’s population swells by several hundred whenever some connected halfling clans known as “the river people” are in town. Government: A town has a council, two-thirds of whom are hereditary landlords and the remainder of whom are guildmasters from the city’s important trade guilds. Lord Warden Harrik Orenna is the public face of the council and commander of the city militia. Defense: The city has 200 soldiers under arms
at all times, with about one-quarter on duty at any given time. In times of crisis, the Lord Warden has access to another 200 well-equipped but poorly trained soldiers by calling up the militia. Inns: Chatrenn and Sons; The Red Door; Avandrian Hostel; The Silk and Spoon; Pantashi Inn. Taverns: Ilya’s Cardhouse; The Marooned Schooner; Cleftie’s; Brindol Gentleman’s Club; the Blue Parrot; the Antler and Thistle. Major Guilds: Prospectors; Blacksmiths and Smelters; Teamsters and Farriers; Weavers; River Bargemen (halfling controlled). Supplies: Alchemy by Adronsius (currently closed); Gavriel Arms and Smithy; Staghunter Outfitters; Alpenglow Trading House. Temples: Temple of Erathis; College of Ioun; Shrine of the Sun (Pelor); Moondust Temple (Sehanine); Shrine of Bahamut (no permanent clergy); Shrine of the Open Door (Avandra).
July 20 08
|
D u n g e o n 1 56
9
Rescue at Rivenroar
Preparing for Adventure “Rescue at Rivenroar” introduces the characters to one another and kicks off the new Scales of War Adventure Path. This Adventure Path takes the characters across the countryside of the Elsir Vale and into a deadly dungeon, where they face Sinruth’s Hand, a force of goblins, hobgoblins, and other monsters bent on the conquest of the Vale and its environs. As a DM, the best way to spend your precious preparation time is by looking at the encounters ahead
of time so that you can give yourself a sneak preview of how each room will play out. No one knows your table better than you do, so you can foresee how the monstrous denizens of the Rivenroar catacombs interact with the specific players at your table. If you want to jump straight into the action, see the Kicking Off the Action Quickly sidebar for details.
What You Need to Play This adventure includes the encounters the PCs face as they explore and adventure in the area. It also provides tactical maps and more for the adventure. If you and your players haven’t read through the
Treasure Parcels Parcel A: _______________________, room 5. Parcel B: _______________________, room 5. Parcel C: _______________________, room 7. Parcel D: _______________________, room 9. Parcel E: ________________________, room 9. Parcel F: _______________________, room 9. Parcel G: ______________________, room 15. Parcel H: ______________________, room 15. Parcel I: _______________________, room 17. Parcel J: _______________________, room 21. Parcel K: ______________________, room 21. Parcel L: _______________________, room 24. Parcel M: ______________________, room 24. Parcel N: ______________________, room 24. Based on the guidelines in the Dungeon Master’s Guide, the following parcels can go in the lines above. Rely on the wish lists your players gave you for the first four parcels. Parcel 1: Magic item, level 5 Parcel 2: Magic item, level 5 Parcel 3: Magic item, level 4 Parcel 4: Magic item, level 3
Parcel 5: Magic item, level 3 Parcel 6: Magic item, level 2 Parcel 7: Two potions of healing, 100 gp Parcel 8: One 100 gp gem, 80 gp Parcel 9: 260 gp Parcel 10: One potion of healing, 70 gp Parcel 11: 170 gp Parcel 12: 100 gp, 200 sp Parcel 13: One potion of healing, 10 gp Parcel 14: 30 gp, 100 sp Large or Small Groups: As mentioned above, “Rescue at Rivenroar” is designed for five PCs. If you have more or fewer players at your table, you should adjust the monster and treasure mix according to the rules in the Dungeon Master’s Guide. Doing so rarely takes more than a few minutes—it’s just a matter of adding or subtracting monsters and treasure parcels here and there. Smaller groups can face fewer monsters and find fewer treasure parcels, while larger groups can face more numerous foes and earn greater rewards (which are split up more ways, naturally).
Dungeons & Dragons 4th Edition rules yet, that is your first best step so that you make certain you understand the rules. Also as mentioned above, read through at least the first few encounters described in this adventure before starting. This review enables you to become familiar with the material and the style of presentation. You might also want to take a look at the sections below regarding the adventure format.
Using Tactical Encounters Each encounter includes several common elements, as described below.
Encounter Level Each tactical encounter assumes a group of five PCs. An encounter of average difficulty is one where the encounter level is equal to the level of the party. Encounters that are 1 or 2 levels lower than the party are easy encounters, while encounters that are 2 or more levels higher than the party are difficult encounters. For overcoming an encounter, a group earns the XP value listed beside the encounter level. This amount should be divided by the number of group members, and an equal amount should be awarded to each character.
Setup This section of a tactical encounter provides you with the basic parameters of the encounter. First, it provides context or background information for the encounter. Next, it provides a key to the monsters in the encounter so you can locate them on the tactical map. The map of each encounter area indicates where the monsters are located when the encounter begins. The setup section also describes what monsters are doing and how they react when the PCs arrive.
July 20 08
|
D u n g e o n 1 56
10
Rescue at Rivenroar Read Aloud Text
Treasure Preparation
Read aloud text provides information about what the characters can see and are aware of. You do not have to read it word for word; feel free to paraphrase and use your own words when describing this information. Use read aloud text wisely; they are written for the most common approach to a particular situation and what your player characters do might require you to alter the information in any number of ways.
“Rescue at Rivenroar” employs the “parcel” technique of treasure distribution described in the Dungeon Master’s Guide. You need 14 treasure parcels in addition to the rewards from the people of Brindol, which are worth three parcels (return the captives) and two parcels (recover the treasures from the Great Hall of Valor). Consult your players’ wish lists, then apportion treasure parcels to the following list:
Monster Statistics Encounters include stat blocks for each monster type present in the encounter. If more than one monster of a particular kind is present, the stat block indicates how many creatures can be found.
Tactics This entry describes special actions the monsters take to defeat the adventurers. Sometimes this means the monsters take advantage of special features of the area or make use of special powers or equipment.
Map Each encounter includes a map keyed with the initial locations of each monster. The map also indicates the location of any special features of the area.
Features of the Area This section describes special features noted on the map. If the location has items or areas of interest with which the characters can interact, those features are described here. Look here to see if a door is out of the ordinary, if an altar has a secret compartment, or if the area includes treasure.
Starting the Adventure The default beginning of the adventure, and indeed the campaign, assumes the PCs want some time to explore the city. Feel free to extend events in Brindol during and after the hobgoblin attack. You can do the following, for example: • Give the players plenty of time to talk to each other and to the other bar patrons before the hobgoblins attack. A more measured pace delays the action, but it also gives the players at your table time to “get into character” and learn more about their comrades before the bitumen torches start flying. • Give the PCs some NPC rivals: Brindol locals who think they’re brave and capable enough to rescue the prisoners. The locals could be in over their heads (and maybe need rescuing themselves eventually), or they might indeed be capable . . . or at least capable of sabotaging the PCs’ efforts.
Connecting Rivenroar to Red Hand of Doom Sinruth is, at the end of the day, something of a wannabe. He aspires to be part of a great horde like the one that menaced Brindol and the entire region in the Red Hand of Doom adventure. We’ve set the timeline forward by a decade, but the exact time doesn’t matter. If it works better for you, then by all means place the original Red Hand of Doom anywhere from a year to a century in the past, but adjust the story behind the adventure accordingly. As long as the (embellished) tale of hobgoblins on the march finds its way to young Sinruth’s ears, the villains’ motivation is intact. But you don’t need to have played Red Hand of Doom to play “Rescue at Rivenroar.” There’s merely a common thread of history that connects the two adventures. The hobgoblins in this adventure hope to become something like the great goblin army that once threatened Brindol with utter destruction— destruction averted only by the timely efforts of the adventurers.
July 20 08
|
D u n g e o n 1 56
11
Rescue at Rivenroar
Bar Fight! Encounter Level 1 (580 XP; monsters aren’t solely focused on the PCs, however)
Setup This encounter is a simple affair that introduces the PCs to each other and gives the players a little practice with their new characters. It also shows how surprised Brindol is by the hobgoblin attack. 10 hobgoblin grunts (H) 2 goblin blackblades (G) 8 human rabble (R) Put three human rabble at the card table in the back, one human behind the bar, and the rest scattered around the tavern as you see fit. Have the players decide where their PCs are sitting. The monsters begin the fight outside the bar, and a few of them come in the front door every round. Once the players have described to the rest of the table what their characters look like and what they’re doing at the bar, read or paraphrase the following description: The gentle hubbub of an evening at the Antler and Thistle tavern is shattered by the crack of the front door f lying off its hinges to land amid the nearest tables. Four hobgoblins rush into the bar, swords outstretched to skewer the nearest bar patrons. “For Sinruth! For the Hand!” they cry.
Tactics The fight begins when four of the hobgoblin grunts burst through the door. They attack the bar patrons (probably wounding or killing a couple of them). Then roll initiative.
More goblins come through the door each round. Move the following creatures in the room at the hobgoblin’s initiative point each round. Round 2: 3 hobgoblins and 1 goblin blackblade enter. The blackblade throws a bitumen torch at the bottles of alcohol behind the bar. Round 3: 2 hobgoblins enter. Round 4: 1 hobgoblin and 1 goblin blackblade enter. The new blackblade throws a bitumen torch at the card table. At first, the goblins attack the closest person. No more than two hobgoblins at a time fight each PC, with the rest menacing the bar patrons and serving wenches. But by the third round, the goblins realize that the PCs are the only ones providing resistance, so they start ignoring the other bar patrons. The goblin blackblades have been given instructions to focus on property damage, so they throw their bitumen torches rather than engage in melee if given a chance. 10 Hobgoblin Grunts (H)
Level 3 Minion
Medium natural humanoid XP 38 Initiative +4 Senses Perception +1; low-light vision HP 1: a missed attack never damages a minion. AC 17 (19 with phalanx soldier); Fortitude 15, Reflex 13, Will 12 Speed 6 m Longsword (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon +6 vs. AC; 5 damage. Hobgoblin Resilience (immediate reaction, when the hobgoblin grunt suffers an effect that a save can end; encounter) The hobgoblin grunt rolls a saving throw against the effect. Phalanx Soldier The hobgoblin grunt gains a +2 bonus to AC while at least one hobgoblin ally is adjacent to it. Alignment Evil Languages Common, Goblin Skills Athletics +6, History +2 Str 18 (+4) Dex 14 (+2) Wis 13 (+1) Con 15 (+2) Int 10 (+0) Cha 9 (–1) Equipment leather armor, light shield, longsword
2 Goblin Blackblades (G)
Level 1 Lurker
8 Human Rabble (R)
Level 2 Minion
Small natural humanoid XP 100 Initiative +7 Senses Perception +1; low-light vision HP 25; Bloodied 12 AC 16; Fortitude 12, Reflex 14, Will 11 Speed 6; see also goblin tactics m Short Sword (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon +5 vs. AC; 1d6 + 2 damage. R Bitumen Torch (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon +6 vs. Reflex; 1d4 damage; starts a fire in that square whether it hits or misses (see “Spreading the Fire” sidebar above). Each blackblade has one lit torch when it enters the bar. Combat Advantage The goblin blackblade deals an extra 1d6 damage against any target it has combat advantage against. Goblin Tactics (immediate reaction, when missed by a melee attack; at-will) The goblin shifts 1 square. Sneaky When shifting, a goblin blackblade can move into a space occupied by an ally of its level or lower. The ally shifts into the blackblade’s previous space as a free action. Alignment Evil Languages Common, Goblin Skills Stealth +10, Thievery +10 Str 14 (+2) Dex 17 (+3) Wis 12 (+1) Con 13 (+1) Int 8 (–1) Cha 8 (–1) Equipment leather armor, short sword, 3 bitumen torches
Medium natural humanoid XP 31 Initiative +0 Senses Perception +0 HP 1; a missed attack never damages a minion. AC 15; Fortitude 13, Reflex 11, Will 11; see also mob rule Speed 6 m Club (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon +6 vs. AC; 4 damage. Mob Rule The human rabble gains a +2 power bonus to all defenses while at least two other human rabble are within 5 squares of it. Alignment Any Languages Common Str 14 (+2) Dex 10 (+0) Wis 10 (+0) Con 12 (+1) Int 9 (–1) Cha 11 (+0) Equipment club
July 20 08
|
D u n g e o n 1 56
12
Rescue at Rivenroar The PCs are the only bar patrons who fight back effectively. The others flee, freeze, or fight poorly, only to die on the hobgoblins’ swords. The hobgoblins are flush with easy victory so far, and they don’t flee even when the fight turns against them. But the blackblades might slink away if it looks like they’ll die otherwise. Don’t let them flee with unused torches, however.
Features of the Area Illumination: Bright light. The area is illuminated by several lanterns. Tables: The tables are all tall enough that a Small creature can move under them and gain cover from doing so. Hopping onto a table costs 1 extra square of movement. A character can use a standard action to tip over a table, which can then grant cover to a standing creature or superior cover to a prone creature. The Bar: The bartender hunkers down behind the bar, which provides cover against ranged and melee attacks. It takes a DC 30 Athletics check to jump up on the bar with a standing high jump and a DC 15 check to do it with a 2-square running start. If any of squares behind the bar catch on fire, then they all catch fire at the end of the blackblade’s next turn. That’s high-proof stuff back there. The Patrons: The bar patrons aren’t all human (though most are), but it’s easiest to use the human rabble stat block for them all. Assume that they act on initiative point 0. If an interesting course of action doesn’t suggest itself, just roll 1d6 for each of them. A result of 1 or 2 means they freeze, cower, or move behind nearby cover. A 3 or 4 means they flee out the nearest door as long as they can do so without suffering an opportunity attack. A 5 or 6 means they grab
an improvised weapon such as a chair, bottle, or table cutlery (a +4 attack at 1d8 damage for them). Improvised Weapons: The great thing about this tavern (other than the beer) is that it’s full of improvised weapons such as chairs, bottles, table cutlery, kebob skewers, and bowls of hot stew. Behind your screen, all improvised weapons are treated the same: They’re 1d8 weapons that confer no proficiency bonus. For the bar patrons, that means they can make +4 attacks dealing 4 damage. If a PC uses an improvised weapon, it deals 1d8 + Strength modifier damage. Card Table: There’s 30 gp stacked here. The three bar patrons sitting here won’t flee—not while there’s money on the table, at any rate.
Handling All the NPCs Almost all the NPCs in this battle go down in a single hit. And the whole point of the encounter is to introduce the PCs to each other and give the players at your table a little practice with new characters and new rules. So you needn’t be a stickler for tracking the exact position and welfare of each NPC—especially the bar patrons. As a DM, you have better ways to spend your time than figuring out the exact details of NPCon-NPC violence (after all, how many NPCs are sitting at your table?). It’s fine to just toss 1d20 when a hobgoblin attacks the bartender. A high roll means the bartender dies, a medium roll means he’s wounded, and a low roll means he’s unscathed. If you want a hobgoblin to put one of the serving wenches in a headlock and try to drag her out into the street, just do it—don’t keep your players waiting while you work out the details of the grab attack.
Windows: If a creature is pushed through the windows at the front of the bar (such as from a bull rush), it takes an extra 1d6 damage from the glass.
Aftermath When the hobgoblins have been defeated, the surviving bar patrons organize a bucket brigade from a nearby well to quell the fire. A clearly wounded city watch patrol arrives as the bucket brigade douses the last flames, and they quickly try to learn what’s happening from anyone who speaks to them (probably the PCs). This conversation gives the PCs enough time to have a short rest before the next encounter.
July 20 08
|
D u n g e o n 1 56
13
Rescue at Rivenroar
The Ogre Bombardier Encounter Level 1 (650 XP)
Setup The PCs do battle with more of the marauders menacing the town of Brindol. 1 ogre savage (O) 2 hobgoblin archers (H) Have the ogre round the corner north of the main tavern entrance, pulling the pitch wagon behind him. The archers ride atop the wagon. One is lighting pitch casks and handing them to the ogre while the other one shoots arrows at any fleeing townsfolk. When the players place their PC miniatures near the tavern door, read: As you’ve been talking to the guards, you’ve been hearing shouts in the distance. But now those shouts are a lot closer, and a throng of townsfolk comes running around the street corner to the north. They’re fleeing a curious sight: a full-grown ogre pulling a wagon by a yoke around its waist. The ogre holds a cask in one hand and a massive club in the other. Riding atop the wagon are two hobgoblins with bows.
Tactics These monsters are focused on property destruction, and they haven’t faced serious opposition yet, so they might be slow to take the PCs seriously. If the hobgoblins beat the ogre’s initiative, they delay until the ogre throws his cask.
2 Hobgoblin Archers (H)
Level 3 Artillery
Medium natural humanoid XP 150 Initiative +7 Senses Perception +8; low-light vision HP 39; Bloodied 19 AC 17; Fortitude 13, Reflex 15, Will 13 Speed 6 m Longsword (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon +6 vs. AC; 1d8 + 2 damage. r Longbow (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon Ranged 20/40; +9 vs. AC; 1d10 + 4 damage, and the hobgoblin archer grants an ally within 5 squares of it a +2 bonus to its next ranged attack roll against the same target. Hobgoblin Resilience (immediate reaction, when the hobgoblin archer suffers an effect that a save can end; encounter) The hobgoblin archer rolls a saving throw against the effect. Alignment Evil Languages Common, Goblin Skills Athletics +5, History +6 Str 14 (+3) Dex 19 (+5) Wis 14 (+3) Con 15 (+3) Int 11 (+1) Cha 10 (+1) Equipment leather armor, longsword, longbow, quiver of 30 arrows
Ogre Savage (O)
Level 8 Brute
Large natural humanoid XP 350 Initiative +4 Senses Perception +4 HP 111; Bloodied 55 AC 19; Fortitude 21, Reflex 16, Will 16 Speed 8 m Greatclub (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon Reach 2; +11 vs. AC; 2d10 + 5 damage. r Pitch Cask (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon Ranged 20; –1 vs. Reflex; 2d6 fire damage, then the pitch cask explodes as described in Pitch Cask section. M Angry Smash (standard; recharge ⚅ ) ✦ Weapon The ogre savage makes a greatclub attack, but gets two attack rolls and takes the better result. Alignment Chaotic evil Languages Giant Str 21 (+9) Dex 11 (+4) Wis 11 (+4) Con 21 (+9) Int 4 (+1) Cha 6 (+2) Equipment hide armor, greatclub
In the first round, the ogre throws a cask in the PCs’ direction; he’s unlikely to hit, but it’s a useful demonstration of the casks’ potential. (See the Features of the Area for rules on hitting and missing with
the casks.) One hobgoblin shoots at the PCs, while the other one lights another pitch cask (a standard action) then picks it up and hands it to the ogre for next round (two minor actions). After the first round, the hobgoblins take their cues from what the ogre is doing. The ogre moves forward and throws a cask if no one is within reach 2 at the end of its 4-square move. But once it starts making melee attacks, it stops throwing casks, and then both hobgoblins shoot their bows. The hobgoblins flee if reduced to 5 hit points or fewer or if one of the PCs rushes the wagon with a lit
July 20 08
|
D u n g e o n 1 56
14
Rescue at Rivenroar
Spreading Fire Whether the blackblades’ bitumen torches hit or not, they light the square they’re in on fire. A creature in a square that’s on fire takes 1d6 damage at the start of the blackblade’s turn. At the end of the blackblade’s next turn, roll 1d8 for each square that’s on fire to see where it spreads. The square to the north catches fire on a 1, to the northeast on 2, east on 3, southeast on 4, south on 5, southwest on 6, west on 7, and northwest on 8. Over successive rounds, the fire should spread at an increasingly rapid rate. torch or other obvious source of fire in hand. The ogre doesn’t flee outright—being yoked to the wagon makes a retreat difficult in any case—but he might try to leave the area if faced with fire. Additionally, if fewer than half of the monsters remain, they attempt to escape.
Features of the Area Wagon: The wagon is 2 squares by 3 squares, with the hobgoblins riding in the forward 2 squares. While yoked to the wagon, the ogre has a speed of only 4. The ogre and the hobgoblins collectively must spend 2 standard actions to free the ogre from the wagon yoke. If the casks on the back of the wagon take at least 5 fire damage, they start to explode. The casks in one of the 4 squares in the back of the wagon detonate each round. Each explosion is a +6 attack against Reflex defense in a burst 3 area, dealing 3d6 fire damage (half on miss). When the first casks explode, tell the players that it’s clear that not all the casks have exploded yet, and that the wagon is afire. When the explosions are over, the wreckage of the wagon
becomes difficult terrain that deals 1d6 fire damage to any creature that starts its turn in a wagon square. Pitch Casks: These casks are filled with roofing pitch, which is flammable enough to make a primitive bomb. The ogre can hurl a lit pitch cask as a standard action. It has lousy aim, however. After choosing a target square for the attack, roll 1d8 (for direction) and 1d4–1 (for distance) to see where the pitch cask actually lands. This becomes the origin square for a burst 1 attack. The pitch cask lands 1d4–1 squares to the north on a d8 result of 1, 1d4–1 squares to the northeast on 2, east on 3, southeast on 4, south on 5, southwest on 6, west on 7, and northwest on 8.
Pitch Cask Filled with roofing pitch, this cask is flammable enough to make a primitive bomb. Standard Action Area burst 1 within 10 squares Target: Each creature in burst Attack: Dexterity vs. Reflex Special: The pitch cask rarely lands where the ogre wants it to. See the text above for details. Hit: 3d6 fire damage. Effect: The origin square of the burst burns for the rest of the encounter. Any character entering the square or starting his turn in the square takes 1d6 fire damage.
Aftermath A crowd gathers after the PCs defeat the ogre, and more guards arrive a few minutes later. They immediately ask for the PCs’ help defending the bridge. But by the time the PCs reach the bridge, Sinruth’s band has already retreated. The residents of Brindol spend the rest of the night putting out the fires that the goblins set, tending to the wounded, and keeping a nervous watch from the ramparts.
Fighting the Ogre and the Fire! Under ordinary circumstances, level 8 brutes aren’t appropriate for level 1 PCs. But the PCs have a key advantage: the wagon attached to the ogre’s waist. The presence of the wagon means the ogre can’t effectively chase the PCs, so PCs can flee if they need to do so. Depending on the PCs at your table, you might have another problem: the ogre’s outrageous 111 hit points. Some PCs can deal a lot of damage even at 1st level, and others might blow up the wagon while the ogre is still attached (meaning the ogre takes the explosion damage for 4 consecutive rounds). If neither of those situations applies at your table, it’s fine to have the ogre die early. There’s no sense in slogging through a long fight whose outcome is obvious to everyone at your table. As for the fire, PCs can put out an adjacent square of fire as a standard action. A minor action keeps an adjacent square of fire from spreading during that round. Reward your PCs for other creative methods of putting out a fire (such as using a cold-based power to douse one or more squares simultaneously). The next morning, the full extent of Sinruth’s attack is known, including the captives taken and the treasures stolen from the Hall of Great Valor. At that point, the PCs receive the job offer from the Brindol town council. They can either try to track the goblins through the wilderness, or they can first try interrogating a captured hobgoblin currently held in the town stockades.
July 20 08
|
D u n g e o n 1 56
15
Rescue at Rivenroar
The Summons Councilmember Eoffram Troyas is a new addition to the Brindol city council. As such, he is less prone to the traditional means of accomplishing important tasks. In a short time, he has established a reputation as an outspoken, and sometimes combative, public figure. A half-elf, he has shown little of his race’s good-natured tendency toward patience. One of Troyas’s most recent controversial remarks was that he intended to use adventurers to aid in cutting down on recent bandit attacks in the Elsir Vale. Other members of the council—despite the city’s recent history and survival thanks to the efforts of adventurers—were dubious, but willing to give Councilmember Troyas’s policy a chance—to fail. Many of the more entrenched public figures secretly believe that the mercurial nature of adventurers makes them eminently unsuitable for the defense of the city. At least, that’s their public stance. Privately, rumors on the street continue to circulate about graft and embezzlement among the council, causing many to wonder if such members of the council would rather see the funds that are used to hire adventurers end up in their pockets. As soon as the PCs have defeated the ogre, word reaches Councilmember Troyas within the day. The assaults upon the city proper are a fresh outrage, especially to a man who lost his family to the Red Hand’s assault ten years earlier. He doesn’t have blind faith in the PCs, however, and wants to meet them himself. The Councilmember has several goals in his meeting with the characters. Before he promises them any money, he wants to ascertain their motivations. He’s not looking for absolute trust, but he doesn’t want his faith to be misplaced. He already has a fair idea of their competence after the ogre battle, so this meeting is mostly a formality and a roleplaying opportunity. Councilmem-
ber Troyas is a somber man, who speaks carefully and methodically. He maintains eye contact, and attempts at levity are met with a long, cold stare, followed by a reminder about the nature of the threat to Brindol. If you’re interested in making the meeting with Councilmember Troyas more than just a roleplaying encounter, consider the following skill challenge. Refer to The Quests sidebar on page 7 for information about the quests and their rewards.
Skill Challenge As Councilmember Eoffram Troyas greets you solemnly, he makes eye contact with each of you in turn. “I am considering something, and I wished to speak to you about it in person—and in private.” This skill challenge is a social challenge that allows Troyas to determine the character of the PCs and also allows the PCs to take the job for the rescue effort. This might be a good opportunity for each player to introduce himself or herself “in character” and describe the sorts of things the character can do in a dangerous situation. Setup: For Troyas to provide full assistance, the PCs need to convince him of their trustworthiness and that they can handle the challenges he sets them.
Level: 1. XP: 200 Complexity: 2 (requires 6 successes before 3 failures). Primary Skills: Diplomacy, Insight, History. Diplomacy (DC 15): You attempt to convince Troyas that your goals and his match up nicely, or that you are the right person for what he has in mind. The first success with this skill opens up the use of the History skill (Troyas mentions the Red Hand’s attacks ten years ago).
Insight (DC 15): You empathize with Troyas and use that knowledge to encourage assistance. First success with this skill reveals that any use of the Intimidate skill earns a failure. History (DC 13): You make an insightful remark about the attack 10 years ago. This is available only after one character has gained a success using the Diplomacy skill, and it can be used only once in this way during the challenge. Intimidate: Troyas refuses to be intimidated by the PCs. Each use of this skill earns a failure. Success: Troyas gives the PCs the deal outlined above, as well as the promise of “whatever aid the good people of Brindol can muster.” Failure: Troyas gives the PCs the deal outlined above, but more reluctantly. In addition, the PCs find the rest of the town council reluctant to deal with them (–2 penalty on later skill checks made to influence the council until the quest is successful), and they receive vague warnings that failure to achieve rapid results can cause them to be replaced. Finally, the council halves the monetary reward for bringing prisoners back.
Interrogating Morrik This is unlikely to end up as a combat encounter, although the statistics for the main players are provided, just in case.
Setup In this skill challenge, the PCs try to learn as much information as they can from Morrik, a hobgoblin captured in the raid on Brindol.
July 20 08
|
D u n g e o n 1 56
16
Rescue at Rivenroar Exact positioning doesn’t matter in this encounter, because it’s not a battle. Assume the PCs are within earshot of Morrik throughout the skill challenge. When the PCs arrive at the town green, read: Just as the guards said, there’s a lone hobgoblin in stocks and shackles here. His wounds from last night’s battle have been bandaged, but a number of tomatoes on the ground near him and on the surface of the stocks indicate that his treatment hasn’t been completely kind. He takes one weary look at you and says, “I ain’t saying nothin’ unless you people let me go.”
Skill Challenge Level: 1. XP: 200
Complexity: 2 (requires 6 successes before 3 failures). Primary Skills: Bluff, Diplomacy, History, Intimidate. Bluff (DC 20): You try the threat of extensive violence or long imprisonment. If you convince the guards to play along, you receive a +5 bonus to the check. Diplomacy (DC 15): You try to cut a deal. If the guards hear you directly offer Morrik his freedom, they’ll tell Morrik, “You aren’t getting away, hobgoblin.” That closes off this approach. History (DC 13): You ask about the crimson hand insignia on the hobgoblin’s tunic in an effort to make the hobgoblin to open up about Sinruth’s band and its plans. Intimidate (DC 15): You use subtle or overt threats involving Morrik’s safety. A failure means that Morrik doesn’t respect you as a warrior; it closes off this approach and increases the DCs of other checks by 2 for the duration of the challenge.
Hobgoblin Soldier
Level 3 Soldier
Medium natural humanoid XP 150 Initiative +7 Senses Perception +3; low-light vision HP 47; Bloodied 23 AC 20 (22 with phalanx soldier); Fortitude 18, Reflex 16, Will 16 Speed 5 m Flail (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon +7 vs. AC; 1d10 + 4 damage, the target is marked and slowed until the end of the hobgoblin soldier’s next turn. M Formation Strike (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon Requires flail; +7 vs. AC; 1d10 + 4 damage, and the hobgoblin soldier shifts 1 square provided it ends in a space adjacent to another hobgoblin. Hobgoblin Resilience (immediate reaction, when the hobgoblin soldier suffers an effect that a save can end; encounter) The hobgoblin soldier rolls a saving throw against the effect. Phalanx Soldier The hobgoblin soldier gains a +2 bonus to AC while at least one hobgoblin ally is adjacent to it. Alignment Evil Languages Common, Goblin Skills Athletics +10, History +8 Str 19 (+5) Dex 14 (+3) Wis 14 (+3) Con 15 (+3) Int 11 (+1) Cha 10 (+1) Equipment scale armor, heavy shield, flail
Success: The PCs learn that Sinruth is the leader of the goblins, and he eventually wants to raise an army and carve out a fiefdom of his own. The goblins are using catacombs under the ruins of Castle Rivenroar as a base for now. Morrik and the other hobgoblins were ordered to take prisoners during the raid to give to the “undead horrors” that guard part
2 Human Guards
Level 3 Soldier
Medium natural humanoid XP 150 Initiative +5 Senses Perception +6 HP 47; Bloodied 23 AC 18; Fortitude 16, Reflex 15, Will 14 Speed 5 m Halberd (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon Reach 2; +10 vs. AC; 1d10 + 3 damage, and the target is marked until the end of the human guard’s next turn. M Powerful Strike (standard; recharge ⚄ ⚅ ) ✦ Weapon Requires halberd; reach 2; +10 vs. AC; 1d10 + 7 damage, and the target is knocked prone. R Crossbow (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon Ranged 15/30; +9 vs. AC; 1d8 + 2 damage. Alignment Any Languages Common Skills Streetwise +7 Str 16 (+4) Dex 14 (+3) Wis 11 (+1) Con 15 (+3) Int 10 (+1) Cha 12 (+2) Equipment chainmail, halberd, crossbow with 20 bolts
of the goblins’ lair. Morrik draws a crude map of the mountain path that leads to Castle Rivenroar. Morrik doesn’t know anything about the treasures taken from the Hall of Great Valor. “Must have been Sinruth himself, I suppose, because he didn’t say anything about it,” he says. In addition, if the PCs used History for at least two of the successes, they learn that Sinruth and the goblins see themselves as descendants of the Red Hand horde that menaced Brindol years ago. But it’s also apparent to a student of history that they have no
No Rough Stuff The town guards don’t mind the occasional slap or punch, and they aren’t against threats of violence (as long as their own Insight checks reveal that they’re indeed threats and not stated intent). With the whole town watching, however, they do not put up with persistent violence. “We need him to be healthy and well treated for trial,” one says. “And the last thing this town needs is mob violence right now.” The other guard points out a different (and more pragmatic) reason for not getting physical with the prisoner. “Goblins are cowards at heart, and if you start breaking fingers or whatever, they’ll say anything to make the pain stop. You’ll just get a bunch of lies,” he says to a PC, out of the hobgoblin’s earshot.
July 20 08
|
D u n g e o n 1 56
17
Rescue at Rivenroar actual connection with the historic Red Hand. They’re flying the Red Hand insignia upside-down, for starters. Failure: As success, except that Morrik’s map leads the PCs on a circuitous route to Rivenroar—a path that takes them right into a kruthik nest.
Features of the Area The Town Guards: The two guards here have been given simple orders by the town council: Keep the prisoner alive . . . but keep the prisoner. They do not consent to letting him out of the stocks. Stocks: The hobgoblin is shackled with his head and arms through the stocks. Breaking him free requires either the use of the guards’ key or the PCs must somehow pick the lock without the guards noticing. Then it takes a standard action to let Morrik out of the stocks.
Tracking the Goblins Hot on the trail of the hobgoblins and their captives, the PCs head into the mountains northeast of Brindol. In this skill challenge, they must track the goblins to their lair while staying safe from the other dangers of the wilderness. During the challenge the PCs roll multiple sets of skill checks; each set equates to roughly an hour or two of travel. Typically one character makes a Nature check, another makes a Perception check, and everyone makes Endurance checks. In each set of checks, a character can assist only one other character’s check.
Skill Challenge Level: 1. XP: 300 Complexity: 3 (requires 8 successes before 3 failures). Primary Skills: Perception, Nature, Endurance. Perception (DC 18): One or more PCs watch for signs that the hobgoblins have passed this way and otherwise keep the rest of the travelers on track. Only one character can attempt this check in each set of checks, but other characters can assist if they’re not already assisting another check (see above). If the PCs got a map from Morrik (whether it’s a good map or the map that leads to the kruthiks), they can worry less about following the tracks of the goblins and gain a +5 bonus on the check. A successful check counts as one success toward completing the skill challenge (maximum five successes). A failed check means that the PCs lose their way temporarily, extending the duration of the trek by 1 hour. Nature (DC 15): One or more PCs use their talent to guide the group around dead ends and natural hazards such as unstable rock slopes. Only one character can attempt this check in each set of checks, but other characters can assist if they’re not already assisting another check (see above). A successful check counts as one success toward completing the skill challenge (maximum five successes). A failed check indicates that the PCs had to take a treacherous detour that adds one hour to the trip and requires each PC to succeed on a DC 10 Athletics check or lose one healing surge from a nasty fall or other accident (these Athletics checks don’t count as successes or failures toward the skill challenge). Endurance (DC 10): In each set of checks, each character must roll an Endurance check to resist the effects of altitude and exposure to bad mountain
weather. If at least three characters in the group succeed, this counts as a success toward the skill challenge (maximum four successes; but keep rolling after this number is reached to check for failures). If two characters succeed, it is neither a success nor a failure. If one or no characters succeed, each member of the group loses one healing surge, in addition to counting as a failure for the challenge. For every two additional characters in the party above or below five, add +1 to the number of successful rolls required for a success. For every two characters less than five, decrease it by 1. Success: The PCs reach the ruins of Rivenroar Castle without incident. The trip takes 8 hours, plus one hour per failed Perception or Nature check. Failure: The trip leads the PCs right into a monster lair. Use the kruthik encounter if the PCs either received no map or a good map from Morrik. If the PCs ended up with a bad map, they’re going to have the kruthik encounter anyway. In that case, let them stumble into the hunting grounds of a cave bear. After dealing with the monster, the PCs still haven’t reached Rivenroar Castle. They must repeat the task at complexity 1 (requiring four successes before three failures) to reach Rivenroar thereafter. Cave Bear
Level 6 Elite Brute
Medium natural beast XP 500 Initiative +4 Senses Perception +5; darkvision HP 170; Bloodied 85 AC 20; Fortitude 21, Reflex 17, Will 18 Saving Throws +2 Speed 8 Action Points 1 m Claw (standard; at-will) +10 vs. AC; 2d8 + 5 damage. C Cave Bear Frenzy (standard; recharge ⚄ ⚅ ) Close burst 1; targets enemies; +10 vs. AC; 2d8 + 5 damage. Alignment Unaligned Languages — Str 20 (+8) Dex 13 (+4) Wis 14 (+5) Con 15 (+5) Int 2 (–1) Cha 12 (+4) July 20 08
|
D u n g e o n 1 56
18
Rescue at Rivenroar
Kruthik Ambush Encounter Level 2 (600 XP)
Setup PCs encounter these hunting kruthiks in one of two ways: by failing the challenge to interrogate Morrik, or by failing the challenge to track the hobgoblins. 2 kruthik adults (A) 2 kruthik young (Y) The kruthik adults and young emerge from a tunnel beneath the rock to the north when the PCs reach roughly the middle of the map. Midway through the battle, they might be joined by these creatures: 4 kruthik hatchlings (in the nest to the west) When the PCs have placed themselves along the path, read: This canyon winds between two ridges. Suddenly, chittering, armored buglike creatures emerge from the ground just north of you and quickly move in your direction.
Tactics The kruthik young charge into the fray immediately, while the adults hang back. Adults use their toxic spikes in the first round. The kruthiks don’t flee, but might retreat to the west, hoping to reach the hatchlings there.
Features of the Area Weak Ground: The marked (!) positions on the map have just a thin layer of rock above abandoned kruthik warrens. It takes a successful DC 15 Perception check or Dungeoneering check to notice cracks in the round that indicate the presence of the warrens.
2 Kruthik Adults (A)
Level 4 Brute
Medium natural beast (reptile) XP 175 each Initiative +6 Senses Perception +4; low-light vision, tremorsense 10 Gnashing Horde aura 1; an enemy that ends its turn in the aura takes 2 damage. HP 67; Bloodied 33 AC 17; Fortitude 14, Reflex 15, Will 13 Speed 6, burrow 3 (tunneling), climb 6 m Claw (standard; at-will) +8 vs. AC; 1d10 + 3 damage. R Toxic Spikes (standard; recharge ⚄ ⚅ ) ✦ Poison The kruthik makes 2 attacks against two different targets: ranged 5; +7 vs. AC; 1d8 + 4 damage, and the target takes ongoing 5 poison damage and is slowed (save ends both). Alignment Unaligned Languages — Str 17 (+5) Dex 18 (+6) Wis 12 (+4) Con 17 (+5) Int 4 (–1) Cha 8 (+1)
2 Kruthik Young (Y)
Level 2 Brute
Small natural beast (reptile) XP 125 each Initiative +4 Senses Perception +1; low-light vision, tremorsense 10 Gnashing Horde aura 1; an enemy that ends its turn in the aura takes 2 damage. HP 43; Bloodied 21 AC 15; Fortitude 13, Reflex 14, Will 11 Speed 8, burrow 2, climb 8 m Claw (standard; at-will) +5 vs. AC; 1d8 + 2 damage. Alignment Unaligned Languages — Str 15 (+3) Dex 16 (+4) Wis 10 (+1) Con 13 (+2) Int 4 (–2) Cha 6 (–1)
If a PC steps into one of those squares, the area of weak ground gives way. The PC must immediately make a saving throw or fall 10 feet (taking 1d10 damage). PCs who fall find themselves in the bottom of a shallow pit. It takes a DC 15 Athletics check to climb back to the surface. The kruthiks automatically sense the weak ground with tremorsense, so they don’t fall in. An observant PC (DC 10 Insight) might notice that they sometimes take circuitous paths for no reason.
4 Kruthik Hatchlings
Level 2 Minion
Small natural beast (reptile) XP 31 each Initiative +3 Senses Perception +0; low-light vision, tremorsense 10 Gnashing Horde aura 1; an enemy that ends its turn in the aura takes 2 damage. HP 1; a missed attack never damages a minion. AC 15; Fortitude 13, Reflex 15, Will 12 Speed 8, burrow 2 (tunneling), climb 8 mClaw (standard; at-will) +5 vs. AC; 4 damage. Alignment Unaligned Languages — Str 13 (+1) Dex 16 (+3) Wis 10 (+0) Con 13 (+1) Int 4 (–3) Cha 6 (–2)
Kruthik Nest: To the west is a pile of rocks that hides the nest where the kruthik hatchlings live. The hatchlings don’t join the fight unless a PC takes cover in the rocks within 4 squares of their nest. Steep Slopes: The slopes on either side of the path are considered difficult ground for creatures moving uphill, but not for moving downhill. July 20 08
|
D u n g e o n 1 56
19
Rescue at Rivenroar
Rivenroar Wandering in the Wilderness
they each lose one healing surge trying to walk back to the trail and 1 hour is added to the duration of the trek. Up to two characters can assist this check. Endurance (DC 10): Every character must roll one Endurance check to avoid the rigors of wilderness travel such as exposure to the elements and mundane woes such as twisted ankles and exhaustion. Each successful check counts as a success toward the skill challenge (maximum three successes;). If no characters succeed, each member of the group loses one healing surge, in addition to counting as a failure for the challenge, and everyone must reroll the Endurance check. Each character may assist only one other character on an Endurance check made as part of this challenge. Success: The PCs reach Brindol or Rivenroar without incident after 8 hours of travel. Failure: Roll on the table below and begin a combat encounter with the indicated monsters. After dealing with the monster, the PCs must start the challenge over again to reach their intended destination.
It’s a brisk walk of 8 hours between Brindol and Rivenroar, so many groups will choose to take extended rests near Rivenroar rather than making the trek back and forth. If your group prefers to head back to Brindol, and you want to give them a little workout, consider using this optional skill challenge for any or all of the journeys between Brindol and Rivenroar. Setup: The PCs must use their wilderness lore to avoid hazards and monsters traveling between Brindol and the Rivenroar catacombs. Level: 1. XP: 100 Complexity: 1 (requires 4 successes before 3 failures). Primary Skills: Perception, Nature, Endurance. Special: After the PCs have made the trip between Brindol and Rivenroar in both directions, they gain a +2 bonus to all checks every time they have to repeat this challenge. Perception (DC 20): You notice a shortcut. This doesn’t directly contribute to a success, but it gives each character in the party a +2 bonus to their next Endurance or Nature check made as part of the challenge. Each character may attempt this check (or assist with another’s Perception check) only once, and unsuccessful checks don’t count as a failure toward the skill challenge. Nature (DC 12): You stay on course and avoid local hazards common to the mountain (maximum three successes). If this check is failed twice during the same challenge, the group gets sufficiently lost that
Wilderness Encounters
d% 01–10 11–20 21–30 31–40 41–50 51–60 61–70 71–80 81–90 91–100
Monsters 2 adult kruthiks, 2 young kruthiks 3 fey panthers 3 rage drakes 1 vine horror, 3 stirges 3 dire wolves 3 deathjump spiders 5 hyenas 1 cave bear 2 dire boars 3 hippogriffs
Sinruth wants to raise an army and carve out a fiefdom of his own, but to do so, he knew that he needed a place for his command center, so he went looking for one. When they found the catacombs of Castle Rivenroar, Sinruth decided that they could serve as a starting point—and perhaps expand as needed later. So, he set to work clearing it out and making alliances when he found a need for them. The castle itself and its catacombs housed the Rivenroar family (living and deceased) long ago. Some other local families of note used the catacombs as a place of interment as well. These families and the Rivenroars had more than one thing in common, but now only those who know what they’re looking at as they journey through the catacombs can figure it out: a reverence for Vecna. Now the castle and the catacombs house a much different set of inhabitants than those who built it long ago might have envisioned.
Common Dungeon Elements The Rivenroar catacombs were constructed over the course of only about a decade, so its architecture is remarkably consistent. Doors: None of the doors lock, though all have simple sliding latches accessible on both sides. They exist merely for the privacy of those visiting their ancestors—the countermeasures against grave robbers (such as the magma claws, the evistro, and at least some of the undead) are more lethal. The doors swing in both directions, and they baffle sound better than most doors. All DCs for listening through a door (described on page 37 of the Dungeon Master’s Guide) are 5 higher than they’d otherwise be.
July 20 08
|
D u n g e o n 1 56
20
Rescue at Rivenroar
Rivenroar Overview The catacombs now host Sinruth’s crew, and they haven’t taken much care with their treatment of things during their occupation. With the addition of the prisoners, some of the areas serve as a sort of jail.
1. Chamber of Flame Unbound Room 1: Bound iron doors open into other areas of the catacombs here, and four defenders stand guard. Tactical Encounter: “Chamber of Flame Unbound” (page 25).
2. Goblin Warren Rooms 2 and 3: The first room here serves as the hobgoblins’ living quarters, and the hallway provides access to most of the level. Seven creatures are in this area. Tactical Encounter: “Goblin Warren” (page 26). Floors: The floors are made of flagstone—slightly slippery because the catacombs are damp, but not dangerous. Ceilings: Thick wooden beams hold up the ceilings. Most are 10 feet off the ground at the walls and 15 feet high at the center of the room. Sarcophagi: Many of the rooms have stone sarcophagi. Most have a family name engraved on them and year of death that indicates they were buried about 300 years ago. Some have a likeness of the deceased carved into the lid, while others have abstract designs. The skeleton inside each sarcophagus is moldy due to the damp, and most burial garb has long since rotted away. It takes a successful DC 20
Strength check to pry the lid off a sarcophagus. Up to two PCs can usefully aid the PC making the attempt. Alcoves: Niches in the walls are another common burial technique here in the catacombs. The skeletons are in the same bad condition as the ones in the sarcophagus. Each alcove goes 2 to 3 feet into the wall. Sometimes a section of wall has three alcoves (high, middle, and low). Stairs: All stairs are difficult terrain. Other than the iron spiral staircase between rooms 8 and 9, all the stairs are made of flagstone.
3. Portal Room Room 4: The portal in this room sometimes allows creatures to come through it—but it is only a one-way portal. An ochre jelly and two specters are in this room. Tactical Encounter: “Portal Room” (page 28).
4. Von Urstadt Crypt Rooms 5 and 6: The crypt contains alcoves holding deceased members of the Von Urstadt clan, plus a few more surprises, which include two magma claws and two gnomes. Prisoner: Sertanian. Tactical Encounter: “Von Urstadt Crypt” (page 29).
July 20 08
|
D u n g e o n 1 56
21
Rescue at Rivenroar 5. Spiderweb Landing Room 7: Ettercaps lurk in this room. Prisoner: The body of Kartenis is here. Tactical Encounter: “Spiderweb Landing” (page 30).
6. Rivenroar Family Crypt Rooms 8 and 9: While hobgoblins live in the first room (along with a guard drake), altars, sarcophagi, and inscriptions are among the features of the room below it. Tactical Encounter: “Rivenroar Family Crypt” (page 31).
7. Fresco Chamber Room 10: This single room features some dire rats and gnomes. The statues are of displacer beasts. Prisoner: Mirtala. Mirtala is near catatonic, and requires special attention to bring around (see the sidebar). Tactical Encounter: “Fresco Chamber” (page 33).
8. Mushroom Chamber Rooms 11 and 12: Various mushrooms grow within the room, which is defended by two rage drakes. Prisoner: Zerriksa. Tactical Encounter: “Mushroom Chamber” (page 34).
9. Von Jallach Crypt Rooms 13 and 14: A floor trap and some swarms are the more obvious features of the first room. Runes decorate the latter room. Two needlefang drakes and a gnome hold this room. Prisoner: Adronsius. Tactical Encounter: “Von Jallach Crypt” (page 35).
10. Von Adrez-Kauthin Crypt Rooms 15 and 16: Hobgoblins guard the first room, which ascends to the next one. Within it are one goblin and two spitting drakes. Prisoner: Jalissa. Tactical Encounter: “Von Adrez-Kauthin Crypt” (page 37).
July 20 08
|
D u n g e o n 1 56
22
Rescue at Rivenroar Getting Mirtala to Talk It takes significant effort to convince Mirtala to tell the PCs what she knows—or anything, for that matter. Level: 1. XP: 100 Complexity: 1 (requires 4 successes before 3 failures). Primary Skills: Bluff, Diplomacy, Intimidate, Insight. Bluff (DC 15): You trick Mirtala into believing that she knows you from back in Brindol. The PCs can earn only one success this way. Diplomacy (DC 15): You coax Mirtala to come out of her shell, convincing her that she’s now safe. Insight (DC 10): You might realize that Mirtala has some had some sort of severe mental trauma. This grants a +2 bonus on Diplomacy checks made during the challenge. The PCs can earn only one success this way. Intimidate (DC 15): You threaten Mirtala (directly or indirectly) with consequences for being uncooperative. A failure closes off this approach and applies a –2 penalty to other checks made for the duration of the challenge. Success: Mirtala tells the PCs what she
knows, as described on page 33. Failure: Mirtala meekly follows the PCs around but doesn’t say anything.
July 20 08
|
D u n g e o n 1 56
23
Rescue at Rivenroar 11. Honor Guard Crypt Rooms 17, 18, and 19: Alcoves fill one room, while a fountain that serves as a scrying pool is in the otherwith the boy prisoner Thurann. The third room has a sunburst mosaic within it. Two ghouls and two zombies move throughout these rooms. Prisoner: Thurann. Tactical Encounter: “Honor Guard Crypt” (page 39).
Session Chars Enc 1 XP Enc 2 XP Enc 3 XP Enc 4 XP Enc 5 XP Enc 6 XP Treasure date Present found
12. Sinruth’s Abode Rooms 20 and 21: Sinruth is in one of these two rooms, which also features menhirs in the first room and a sarcophagus in the second. The dragoncrest helm and the gauntlets are in this room along with Sinruth. Tactical Encounter: “Sinruth's Abode” (page 41).
13. Crypt Guardian Chamber Room 22: A square prison in this room holds an evistro, and some wererats are also within this room. Tactical Encounter: “Crypt Guardian Chamber” (page 42).
Tactical Encounter: “Lords of Rivenroar Audience Chamber” (page 44).
14. Shrine of the Obelisk Room 23: This shrine has lines of pews facing a rune-encrusted obelisk at the northern end of the room. A gnome and some wererats watch this room for intruders. The PCs can find the longsword, three shields, and the battle standard in this room. Tactical Encounter: “Shrine of the Obelisk” (page 43).
15. Lords of Rivenroar Audience Chamber Room 24: Two thrones stand along the north wall of the chamber, and one contains a fleshy corpse, while the other has a skeleton. Skeletons and a wight start battle with PCs here.
Conclusion When the captives have been freed and the antiques recovered, the PCs can make a final trip back to Rivenroar and claim their reward. Unless most of the prisoners perished, the town is delighted with the PCs’ success, and they throw a great feast in the repaired Hall of Great Valor to honor them. With great ceremony, each of the antiques is restored to its place on the mantles and walls of the great hall. But Sinruth’s letter should give the PCs pause. Clearly something beyond a single band of hobgoblins with delusions of grandeur is out there. And the pres-
ence of powerful necromantic magic indicates that Rivenroar Castle might have had a secret history of its own. Such matters are beyond the scope of this adventure, but they are fertile ground for future exploits of the heroes of “Rescue at Rivenroar.”
XP and Treasure Tracker Use the chart above to keep track of your progress through “Rescue at Rivenroar.” Doing so can help you keep track of milestones/action points and the rewards (XP and treasure) you’ve handed out. Shade in the XP box if the PCs took an extended rest afterward; that way you’ll know when to award action points.
July 20 08
|
D u n g e o n 1 56
24
Rescue at Rivenroar
Chamber of Flame Unbound Encounter Level 1 (550 XP)
Setup This is a fairly straightforward battle. 2 hobgoblin soldiers (H) 2 goblin sharpshooters (G) When the PCs descend into the catacomb, read: Two flail-wielding hobgoblins stand ready in the center of this dank chamber. Braziers flank double doors on the north wall. Two goblins with crossbows stand in front of that door. If the characters have a passive Perception score of 15 or higher, read: You can make out faint grooves in the f loor that begin underneath the braziers and extend to the south wall.
Tactics The hobgoblins screen the sharpshooters. One of the sharpshooters spends a minor action to open one of the center doors to set the braziers in motion. All the monsters know how to avoid the gouts of flame. If reduced to 5 hit points or fewer, a goblinoid flees through the nearest exit, putting the next room on alert and joining its denizens for the rest of the day.
Features of the Area Illumination: The braziers provide bright light for 10 squares. Braziers: When any of the doors in this chamber are open, the braziers start to move north and south on grooves in the floor. They move at initiative point 10, and they shoot a gout of flame from one brazier to the other at initiative point 0. The fire is not a 2 Goblin Sharpshooters (G)
Level 2 Artillery
Small natural humanoid (goblin) XP 125 each Initiative +5 Senses Perception +2; low-light vision HP 31; Bloodied 15 AC 16; Fortitude 12, Reflex 14, Will 11 Speed 6; see also goblin tactics m Short Sword (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon +6 vs. AC; 1d6 + 2 damage. r Hand Crossbow (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon Ranged 10/20; +9 vs. AC; 1d6 + 4 damage. Sniper When a goblin sharpshooter makes a ranged attack from hiding and misses, it is still considered to be hiding. Combat Advantage The goblin sharpshooter deals an extra 1d6 damage against any target it has combat advantage against. Goblin Tactics (immediate reaction, when missed by a melee attack; at-will) The goblin shifts 1 square. Alignment Evil Languages Common, Goblin Skills Stealth +12, Thievery +12 Str 14 (+3) Dex 18 (+5) Wis 13 (+2) Con 13 (+2) Int 8 (+0) Cha 8 (+0) Equipment leather armor, short sword, hand crossbow with 20 bolts
trap, per se. It was intended more to be impressive to family members paying their respects. At initiative 10, move each of the braziers south 1 square. If a creature is in the way, the brazier makes an attack at +5 vs. Fortitude. If the brazier hits, it pushes the creature 1 square. If it misses, neither brazier moves that turn. When the braziers reach the wall, start moving them 1 square north each turn. At initiative point 0, the braziers send a gout of flame from one to the other, alternating between right and left. The brazier makes an attack (+5 vs. Reflex) against each creature in the path. If the brazier hits, it deals 1d6 fire damage. Doors: These bound iron doors have latches, but no locks. The west doors have a plaque on it that says “To Von Urstadt.” The north doors say “To Rivenroar Family.” The east doors say “To Von Jallach.” 2 Hobgoblin Soldiers (H)
Level 3 Soldier
Medium natural humanoid XP 150 each Initiative +7 Senses Perception +3; low-light vision HP 47; Bloodied 23 AC 20 (22 with phalanx soldier); Fortitude 18, Reflex 16, Will 16 Speed 5 m Flail (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon +7 vs. AC; 1d10 + 4 damage, the target is marked and slowed until the end of the hobgoblin soldier’s next turn. M Formation Strike (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon Requires flail; +7 vs. AC; 1d10 + 4 damage, and the hobgoblin soldier shifts 1 square provided it ends in a space adjacent to another hobgoblin. Hobgoblin Resilience (immediate reaction, when the hobgoblin soldier suffers an effect that a save can end; encounter) The hobgoblin soldier rolls a saving throw against the effect. Phalanx Soldier The hobgoblin soldier gains a +2 bonus to AC while at least one hobgoblin ally is adjacent to it. Alignment Evil Languages Common, Goblin Skills Athletics +10, History +8 Str 19 (+5) Dex 14 (+3) Wis 14 (+3) Con 15 (+3) Int 11 (+1) Cha 10 (+1) Equipment scale armor, heavy shield, flail
July 20 08
|
D u n g e o n 1 56
25
Rescue at Rivenroar
Goblin Warren Encounter Level 1 (500 XP)
Setup Room 2 serves as basic living quarters for the hobgoblins, and room 3 is the central hallway that provides access to most of this level.
1 hobgoblin soldier (H) 2 goblin sharpshooters (G) 4 hobgoblin grunts (R)
The hobgoblins start in a cluster in room 2, and the goblins are in area 3. When the PCs reach the southern doorway, read: This L-shaped room has doors in the north and west walls. A group of angry hobgoblins is near the middle of the room. Around the periphery of the room are bedrolls, sacks, and a roasting rack near the brazier. A narrow fissure in the ceiling carries the smoke from the brazier away.
Tactics The hobgoblins try to use superior numbers to envelop the PCs. The goblins join the fray, rolling initiative prior to the start of the second round. The hobgoblins fight until slain, but goblins reduced to 10 hit points or fewer flee north through room 3 and put rooms 8 and 9 on alert for 10 minutes. Goblin sharpshooters leap or use ropes to move across pits in room 3.
Features of the Area Illumination: The brazier in room 2 provides bright light for 10 squares. Room 3 has only whatever light the PCs bring with them. Pits: It’s a 20-foot fall (and 2d10 damage) into room 11. Creatures can clear the pit with a successful DC 10 Athletics check (DC 20 if they don’t have a running start) or a DC 12 Acrobatics check (to swing across on the rope). The goblins try the DC 10 Athletics check (at +3) if they have a running start and the DC 12 Acrobatics check (at +5) if they don’t.
When the PCs reach area 3, read: A hallway stretches north into the darkness. A jagged hole in the floor runs the width of the passageway about 10 feet ahead. Two ropes hang from the ceiling and extend down into the pit.
July 20 08
|
D u n g e o n 1 56
26
Rescue at Rivenroar 4 Hobgoblin Grunts (R)
Level 3 Minion
Medium natural humanoid XP 38 each Initiative +4 Senses Perception +1; low-light vision HP 1: a missed attack never damages a minion. AC 17 (19 with phalanx soldier); Fortitude 15, Reflex 13, Will 12 Speed 6 m Longsword (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon +6 vs. AC; 5 damage. Hobgoblin Resilience (immediate reaction, when the hobgoblin grunt suffers an effect that a save can end; encounter) The hobgoblin grunt rolls a saving throw against the effect. Phalanx Soldier The hobgoblin grunt gains a +2 bonus to AC while at least one hobgoblin ally is adjacent to it. Alignment Evil Languages Common, Goblin Skills Athletics +6, History +2 Str 18 (+4) Dex 14 (+2) Wis 13 (+1) Con 15 (+2) Int 10 (+0) Cha 9 (–1) Equipment leather armor, light shield, longsword
2 Goblin Sharpshooter (G)
Level 2 Artillery
Small natural humanoid (goblin) XP 125 each Initiative +5 Senses Perception +2; low-light vision HP 31; Bloodied 15 AC 16; Fortitude 12, Reflex 14, Will 11 Speed 6; see also goblin tactics m Short Sword (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon +6 vs. AC; 1d6 + 2 damage. r Hand Crossbow (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon Ranged 15/30; +9 vs. AC; 1d6 + 4 damage. Sniper When a goblin sharpshooter makes a ranged attack from hiding and misses, it is still considered to be hiding. Combat Advantage The goblin sharpshooter deals an extra 1d6 damage against any target it has combat advantage against. Goblin Tactics (immediate reaction, when missed by a melee attack; at-will) The goblin shifts 1 square. Alignment Evil Languages Common, Goblin Skills Stealth +12, Thievery +12 Str 14 (+3) Dex 18 (+5) Wis 13 (+2) Con 13 (+2) Int 8 (+0) Cha 8 (+0) Equipment leather armor, short sword, hand crossbow with 20 bolts
Hobgoblin Soldier (H)
Level 3 Soldier
Medium natural humanoid XP 150 Initiative +7 Senses Perception +3; low-light vision HP 47; Bloodied 23 AC 20 (22 with phalanx soldier); Fortitude 18, Reflex 16, Will 16 Speed 5 m Flail (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon +7 vs. AC; 1d10 + 4 damage, the target is marked and slowed until the end of the hobgoblin soldier’s next turn. M Formation Strike (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon Requires flail; +7 vs. AC; 1d10 + 4 damage, and the hobgoblin soldier shifts 1 square provided it ends in a space adjacent to another hobgoblin. Hobgoblin Resilience (immediate reaction, when the hobgoblin soldier suffers an effect that a save can end; encounter) The hobgoblin soldier rolls a saving throw against the effect. Phalanx Soldier The hobgoblin soldier gains a +2 bonus to AC while at least one hobgoblin ally is adjacent to it. Alignment Evil Languages Common, Goblin Skills Athletics +10, History +8 Str 19 (+5) Dex 14 (+3) Wis 14 (+3) Con 15 (+3) Int 11 (+1) Cha 10 (+1) Equipment scale armor, heavy shield, flail
July 20 08
|
D u n g e o n 1 56
27
Rescue at Rivenroar
Portal Room Encounter Level 2 (650 XP)
Setup This room is the destination of a one-way portal from another castle from a bygone age—and monsters sometimes come through the portal. 1 ochre jelly (O) 2 specters The encounter doesn’t start until the PCs pause for more than a few seconds to examine the image of the castle. When the PCs enter the chamber, read: A picture in the middle of this room shows f lickering images of a sinister castle in the middle of a swamp. If the PCs examine the picture for more than 1 round, read: A slimy creature slithers through the image and roils toward you.
Tactics The ochre jelly comes through the portal if it detects someone studying the image (the hobgoblins have learned the hard way to rush through this room). The specters, mere opportunists who aren’t affiliated with the ochre jelly, roll for initiative before the start of the third round. They attack from the rear. All these creatures fight until slain, but they don’t pursue PCs beyond this room. Another ochre jelly spawns from the picture portal provided at least an
hour has passed and provided the last ochre jelly to come through is dead.
Features of the Area Illumination: The portal itself glows, providing bright light within 5 squares. Portal: The portal, once a connection to another faraway castle allied with Rivenroar, crackles whenever the image flickers away. It’s a phantasm and can be walked through as if it wasn’t there. But it’s a one-way portal from somewhere, as the PCs learn when an ochre jelly slithers through. Ochre Jelly (O)
Level 3 Elite Brute
Large natural beast (blind, ooze) XP 300 Initiative +0 Senses Perception +2; blindsight 10, tremorsense 10 HP 102; Bloodied 51 see also split below AC 18; Fortitude 16, Reflex 14, Will 14 Immune gaze; Resist 5 acid Saving Throws +2 Speed 4; see also flowing form Action Points 1 m Slam (standard; at-will) ✦ Acid +8 vs. AC; 2d6 + 1 damage, and ongoing 5 acid damage (save ends). Flowing Form (move; at-will) The ochre jelly shifts 4 squares. Split (when first bloodied; encounter) The ochre jelly splits into two, each with hit points equal one-half its current hit points. Effects applied to the original ochre jelly do not apply to the second one. An ochre jelly can’t split if it is reduced to 0 hit points by the attack that bloodied it. Left alone, the two halves of the ochre jelly recombine into a single creature at the end of the encounter. Alignment Unaligned Languages — Str 13 (+2) Dex 8 (+0) Wis 12 (+2) Con 11 (+1) Int 1 (–4) Cha 1 (–4)
2 Specters
Level 4 Lurker
Medium shadow humanoid (undead) XP 175 each Initiative +8 Senses Perception +6; darkvision Spectral Chill (Cold) aura 1; enemies in the aura take a –2 penalty to all defenses. HP 30; Bloodied 15 AC 16; Fortitude 16, Reflex 16, Will 17 Immune disease, poison; Resist 10 necrotic, insubstantial; Vulnerable 5 radiant Speed fly 6 (hover); phasing m Spectral Touch (standard; at-will) ✦ Necrotic +7 vs. Reflex; 1d6 + 2 necrotic damage. C Spectral Barrage (standard; recharge ⚄ ⚅ ) ✦ Illusion, Psychic Close burst 2; targets enemies; +7 vs. Will; 2d6 + 2 psychic damage, and the target is knocked prone. Invisibility (standard; at-will) ✦ Illusion The specter becomes invisible until it attacks or until it is hit by an attack. Alignment Chaotic evil Languages Common Skills Stealth +9 Str 10 (+2) Dex 15 (+4) Wis 8 (+1) Con 13 (+3) Int 6 (+0) Cha 15 (+4)
July 20 08
|
D u n g e o n 1 56
28
Rescue at Rivenroar
Von Urstadt Crypt Encounter Level 2 (600 XP)
Setup The gnomes working for Sinruth have figured out that leaving the doors between rooms 5 and 6 open for more than a few seconds summons two magma claws, presumably to destroy tomb robbers. 2 magma claws 2 gnome skulks (G) The encounter starts when one of the gnomes summons the magma claws. When the PCs reach the middle of the room, read: One of the north doors swings open. Nothing comes through the doors, but after a few tense seconds, two fiery creatures appear, making the room uncomfortably hot—and dangerous.
Tactics One gnome hides near the north doors and waits for intruders to approach before summoning the magma claws. Then, once the PCs are engaged, the gnomes sneak behind them to strike at a vulnerable PC. The magma claws fight until slain, but they don’t leave room 5. If the gnomes fall below 10 hit points, they try to make it to their allies, the ettercaps in room 7.
Features of the Area Illumination: The only illumination is from the magma claws, which emit bright light for 10 squares. Jail Cells: A DC 15 Thievery check can pick the lock, or the PCs can take the key from one of the skulks. Alcoves: Alcoves on the north and south walls hold the skeletons of the Von Urstadt clan, once prominent
in the region (DC 15 History). An inscription along the east wall says “Hail Von Urstadts! Ascend with Glory!” and a dust-covered fresco on the west wall depicts human knights riding pegasi into the clouds. Some of the bodies in the alcoves were buried with treasure. It takes 20 minutes (divided by the number of searchers) to find treasure parcels A and B. Prisoner: Sertanian, the castellan of the Great Hall of Valor, is kept in one of the jail cells. Sertanian is described on page 7. He knows what all the treasures from the Great Hall look like, and he knows that Mirtala is held downstairs near a spiral staircase. 2 Gnome Skulks (G)
North Doors in Room 5: These doors summon the magma claws if left open for more than a few seconds. Once magma claws have been summoned, they remain for 1 day. The doors don’t summon magma claws more frequently than that in any case.
Level 2 Lurker
Small fey humanoid XP 125 each Initiative +8 Senses Perception +2; low-light vision HP 34; Bloodied 17 AC 16; Fortitude 14, Reflex 14, Will 12 Speed 5 m War Pick (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon +7 vs. AC; 1d8 + 3 damage (crit 1d8 + 11). R Hand Crossbow (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon Ranged 10/20; +7 vs. AC; 1d6 + 3 damage. Combat Advantage The gnome skulk deals an extra 1d6 damage on melee and ranged attacks against any target it has combat advantage against. Fade Away (immediate reaction, when the gnome skulk takes damage; encounter) ✦ Illusion The gnome skulk turns invisible until it attacks or until the end of its next turn. Reactive Stealth If a gnome has cover or concealment when it makes an initiative check at the start of an encounter, it can make a Stealth check to escape notice. Shadow Skulk When a gnome skulk makes a melee or a ranged attack from hiding and misses, it is still considered to be hiding. Alignment Unaligned Languages Common, Elven Skills Arcana +10, Stealth +11, Thievery +9 Str 8 (+0) Dex 17 (+4) Wis 12 (+2) Con 16 (+4) Int 14 (+3) Cha 13 (+2) Equipment leather armor, war pick, hand crossbow with 20 bolts
2 Magma Claws
Level 4 Brute
Medium elemental magical beast (earth, fire) XP 175 each Initiative +3 Senses Perception +7 HP 64; Bloodied 32 AC 16; Fortitude 16, Reflex 14, Will 13 Immune petrification; Resist 10 fire; Vulnerable cold (slowed until the end of the magma claw’s next turn) Speed 4 (8 while charging) m Claw (standard; at-will) ✦ Fire +7 vs. AC; 1d6 + 4 damage plus 1d6 fire damage. M Spew Lava (standard; at-will) ✦ Fire +5 vs. Reflex; the target takes ongoing 5 fire damage and is immobilized (save ends both). Alignment Unaligned Languages Primordial Skills Endurance +9, Stealth +8 Str 18 (+6) Dex 12 (+3) Wis 11 (+2) Con 14 (+4) Int 2 (–2) Cha 6 (+0) July 20 08
|
D u n g e o n 1 56
29
Rescue at Rivenroar
Spiderweb Landing Encounter Level 1 (550 XP)
Setup This room features some difficult terrain—and a potentially tragic situation if the PCs have prisoners with them when they discover the body of Kartenix the guard captain. 2 ettercap fang guards (G) 1 ettercap webspinner (W) The webspinner is in the northwest corner of the room and the fang guards are near the middle. When the PCs reach a point where they can see into the room, read: This landing is covered with spiderwebs, and the f loor under your feet is sticky. A trio of ettercaps shuff les around the room ahead of you, which has passages heading up and to the west, down and to the south, and north turning east.
Tactics The webspinner tries to immobilize or restrain as many PCs as it can with its webs, and then the fang guards concentrate on that target. The ettercaps fight bravely until two are dead. The sole survivor flees as best it can, unless it thinks it can revenge itself against an adjacent bloodied PC.
Features of the Area Illumination: None beyond what the PCs bring with them. Spiderwebs: About half the squares in the room are covered with spiderwebs (difficult terrain for crea-
2 Ettercap Fang Guards (G)
Level 4 Soldier
Medium natural humanoid (spider) XP 175 each Initiative +6 Senses Perception +3 HP 56; Bloodied 28 AC 20; Fortitude 17, Reflex 16, Will 15 Resist 10 poison Speed 5, climb 5 (spider climb); see also web walker m Greataxe (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon +9 vs. AC; 1d12 + 5 damage (crit 1d12 + 17). M Spider Bite (standard; at-will) ✦ Poison Requires combat advantage; +9 vs. AC; 1d6 + 4 damage. If the attack hits, the ettercap makes a secondary attack against the same target. Secondary Attack: +7 vs. Fortitude; the target is stunned until the end of the ettercap’s next turn and takes ongoing 5 poison damage (save ends). M Web Tangle (standard; at-will) +7 vs. Reflex; the target is immobilized (save ends). Web Reaper The ettercap fang guard gains a +2 bonus to attack rolls and deals an extra 2 damage against restrained and immobilized creatures. Web Walker An ettercap ignores movement effects of spider webs and difficult terrain related to spider swarms. Alignment Unaligned Languages — Skills Stealth +9 Str 16 (+5) Dex 14 (+4) Wis 13 (+3) Con 16 (+5) Int 5 (–1) Cha 11 (+2) Equipment leather armor, greataxe
tures that aren’t ettercaps). A character who enters a spiderweb square must make a successful DC 10 Athletics or Acrobatics check or become immobilized until the creature succeeds on the escape action. Spiderweb squares also provide concealment. Corpse: Kartenix’s corpse is webbed to the wall in the southeast corner, his face a rictus of pain and his eyes bulging.
Ettercap Webspinner (W)
Level 5 Controller
Medium natural humanoid (spider) Initiative +4 Senses Perception +9 HP 64; Bloodied 32 AC 18; Fortitude 17, Reflex 16, Will 16 Resist 10 poison Speed 5, climb 5 (spider climb); see also web
XP 200
walker
m Longspear (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon
Reach 2, +10 vs. AC; 1d10 + 3 damage.
M Spider Bite (standard; at-will) ✦ Poison
Requires combat advantage; +10 vs. AC; 1d6 + 3 damage, and the ettercap makes a secondary attack against the same target. Secondary Attack: +8 vs. Fortitude; ongoing 5poison damage (save ends). R Web Net (minor 1/round; at-will) Ranged 5; +9 vs. Reflex; the target is restrained (save ends). A Webbed Terrain (standard; recharge z ) ✦ Zone Area burst 2 within 10; +9 vs. Reflex; the target is immobilized (save ends). The zone is filled with spider webs and is considered difficult terrain until the end of the encounter. Web Walker An ettercap ignores movement effects of spider webs and difficult terrain related to spider swarms. Alignment Unaligned Languages — Skills Stealth +9 Str 16 (+5) Dex 14 (+4) Wis 15 (+4) Con 16 (+5) Int 5 (–1) Cha 13 (+3) Equipment leather armor, longspear
Silk Bag: A bag in the southeast corner contains treasure parcel C and 100 gp in residuum.
July 20 08
|
D u n g e o n 1 56
30
Rescue at Rivenroar
Rivenroar Family Crypt Encounter Level 1 (525 XP)
Setup Some of the hobgoblins live in room 8, and room 9 below it is a major crypt. Either way, the PCs face a two-stage fight when the two rooms reinforce each other. 1 hobgoblin archer (A) 4 hobgoblin grunts (R) 1 hobgoblin soldier (H) 1 guard drake (D)
Tactics
Features of the Area
It takes two turns for any of the hobgoblins or the drake to make it all the way up or down the staircase, so no matter which room the PCs enter first, they have to contend with reinforcements in the third round. The drake fights until slain, but the hobgoblins flee if they’re reduced to 10 hit points or fewer and are outnumbered by PCs. They flee toward the entrance through room 3 if they can reach it or through rooms 7, 5, 4, and 2 if the PCs have cut off that escape route. The hobgoblins have lived with that garbage pit for so long that they’ve almost forgotten it’s there. They aren’t smart enough to stay away from the edge during a fight.
Illumination: There’s a lantern (10 squares bright light) at the northwest corner of room 9. That’s enough to illuminate the squares adjacent to the staircase in room 8; that room is otherwise dark. The altars have candles (2 squares dim light) on them. Altars: The altars are devoted to Bane (Religion DC 10). But astute observers (Religion DC 15) notice that they weren’t always so—they’re originally altars to Vecna that the hobgoblins have “rededicated.” Sarcophagi: The northernmost two sarcophagi hold treasure parcels D, E, and F. They aren’t locked or trapped, but it takes a DC 20 Strength check to move the heavy stone lids off the sarcophagi. Spiral Staircase: The staircase connects rooms 8 and 9 and takes 12 squares to ascend or descend 20 feet. It’s difficult terrain.
4 Hobgoblin Grunts (R)
Hobgoblin Archer (A)
The hobgoblin soldier and guard drake start in room 8, and the grunts and archers start in room 9. If the PCs enter room 8, read: Furs and bedrolls cover the f loor, with sacks and rucksacks leaned against the walls. A hobgoblin stands with a guard drake at his side. A spiral staircase of wrought iron descends from an alcove in the north. If the PCs enter room 9, read: Five hobgoblins stand amid four stone sarcophagi in this chamber. A side chamber to the east has two marble altars. A spiral staircase made of wrought iron ascends from an alcove to the north. And there’s a hole in the f loor in the northeast corner.
Level 3 Minion
Medium natural humanoid XP 38 each Initiative +4 Senses Perception +1; low-light vision HP 1: a missed attack never damages a minion. AC 17 (19 with phalanx soldier); Fortitude 15, Reflex 13, Will 12 Speed 6 m Longsword (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon +6 vs. AC; 5 damage. Hobgoblin Resilience (immediate reaction, when the hobgoblin grunt suffers an effect that a save can end; encounter) The hobgoblin grunt rolls a saving throw against the effect. Phalanx Soldier The hobgoblin grunt gains a +2 bonus to AC while at least one hobgoblin ally is adjacent to it. Alignment Evil Languages Common, Goblin Skills Athletics +6, History +2 Str 18 (+4) Dex 14 (+2) Wis 13 (+1) Con 15 (+2) Int 10 (+0) Cha 9 (–1) Equipment leather armor, light shield, longsword
Level 3 Artillery
Medium natural humanoid XP 150 Initiative +7 Senses Perception +8; low-light vision HP 39; Bloodied 19 AC 17; Fortitude 13, Reflex 15, Will 13 Speed 6 m Longsword (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon +6 vs. AC; 1d8 + 2 damage. r Longbow (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon Ranged 20/40; +9 vs. AC; 1d10 + 4 damage, and the hobgoblin archer grants an ally within 5 squares of it a +2 bonus to its next ranged attack roll against the same target. Hobgoblin Resilience (immediate reaction, when the hobgoblin archer suffers an effect that a save can end; encounter) The hobgoblin archer rolls a saving throw against the effect. Alignment Evil Languages Common, Goblin Skills Athletics +5, History +6 Str 14 (+3) Dex 19 (+5) Wis 14 (+3) Con 15 (+3) Int 11 (+1) Cha 10 (+1) Equipment leather armor, longsword, longbow, quiver of 30 arrows
July 20 08
|
D u n g e o n 1 56
31
Rescue at Rivenroar Hobgoblin Soldier (H)
Level 3 Soldier
Medium natural humanoid XP 150 Initiative +7 Senses Perception +3; low-light vision HP 47; Bloodied 23 AC 20 (22 with phalanx soldier); Fortitude 18, Reflex 16, Will 16 Speed 5 m Flail (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon +7 vs. AC; 1d10 + 4 damage, the target is marked and slowed until the end of the hobgoblin soldier’s next turn. M Formation Strike (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon Requires flail; +7 vs. AC; 1d10 + 4 damage, and the hobgoblin soldier shifts 1 square provided it ends in a space adjacent to another hobgoblin. Hobgoblin Resilience (immediate reaction, when the hobgoblin soldier suffers an effect that a save can end; encounter) The hobgoblin soldier rolls a saving throw against the effect. Phalanx Soldier The hobgoblin soldier gains a +2 bonus to AC while at least one hobgoblin ally is adjacent to it. Alignment Evil Languages Common, Goblin Skills Athletics +10, History +8 Str 19 (+5) Dex 14 (+3) Wis 14 (+3) Con 15 (+3) Int 11 (+1) Cha 10 (+1) Equipment scale armor, heavy shield, flail
Guard Drake (D)
Level 2 Brute
Small natural beast (reptile) XP 125 Initiative +3 Senses Perception +7 HP 48; Bloodied 24 AC 15; Fortitude 15, Reflex 13, Will 12 Immune fear (while within 2 squares of an ally) Speed 6 m Bite (standard; at-will) +6 vs. AC; 1d10 + 3 damage, or 1d10 + 9 damage while within 2 squares of an ally. Alignment Unaligned Languages — Str 16 (+4) Dex 15 (+3) Wis 12 (+2) Con 18 (+5) Int 3 (–3) Cha 12 (+2)
Living Quarters: It takes one person about 20 minutes to look through the sacks in room 9—and it’s just ragged goblin clothing and primitive tools, worthless back in civilization. Pit: The goblins throw all their garbage down
this 40-foot-deep pit. The stench that wafts out of the pit makes that obvious. Wall Inscription: Running around the walls near the ceiling is the following message, repeated every 10 feet or so: “Here lie the Rivenroars until the Day of the Black Sun. If you seek their monument, look at the lands around you.”
July 20 08
|
D u n g e o n 1 56
32
Rescue at Rivenroar
Fresco Chamber
2 Gnome Skulks (G)
Encounter Level 1 (550 XP)
Setup This encounter includes a straightforward fight with rats and gnomes, then a roleplaying opportunity as the PCs must contend with a shell-shocked prisoner. 3 dire rats (R) 2 gnome skulks (G) When the PCs round the corner and can see into this room, read: Four statues of displacer beasts, their eyes glowing amber, stare at you. Beyond them is a candlelit altar. Tied to the front of it is a human female, her eyes wild with terror.
Tactics The gnome skulks stay hidden in the shadows until the battle falls into a stable position, then they sidle around to the party’s rear and attack vulnerable PCs. The rats bite whatever’s nearest. The rats fight until slain, but then gnomes try to hide and flee if reduced below 10 hit points.
Features of the Area Illumination: The candles on the altar emit dim light for 2 squares, and the eyes of each displacer
Filth Fever The target ! is cured.
Level 2 Lurker
Small fey humanoid XP 125 each Initiative +8 Senses Perception +2; low-light vision HP 34; Bloodied 17 AC 16; Fortitude 14, Reflex 14, Will 12 Speed 5 m War Pick (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon +7 vs. AC; 1d8 + 3 damage (crit 1d8 + 11). R Hand Crossbow (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon Ranged 10/20; +7 vs. AC; 1d6 + 3 damage. Combat Advantage The gnome skulk deals an extra 1d6 damage on melee and ranged attacks against any target it has combat advantage against. Fade Away (immediate reaction, when the gnome skulk takes damage; encounter) ✦ Illusion The gnome skulk turns invisible until it attacks or until the end of its next turn. Reactive Stealth If a gnome has cover or concealment when it makes an initiative check at the start of an encounter, it can make a Stealth check to escape notice. Shadow Skulk When a gnome skulk makes a melee or a ranged attack from hiding and misses, it is still considered to be hiding. Alignment Unaligned Languages Common, Elven Skills Arcana +10, Stealth +11, Thievery +9 Str 8 (+0) Dex 17 (+4) Wis 12 (+2) Con 16 (+4) Int 14 (+3) Cha 13 (+2) Equipment leather armor, war pick, hand crossbow with 20 bolts
beast statue likewise provide dim light in squares adjacent to a statue. Displacer Beast Statues: Each displacer beast statue has glowing eyes but are otherwise ordinary statues. Level 3 Disease
Initial Effect The target loses 1 healing surge.
!"
The target takes a –2 penalty to AC, Fortitude defense, and Reflex defense.
!
Final Effect: The target takes a –2 penalty to AC, Fortitude defense, and Reflex defense. The target loses all healing surges and cannot regain hit points.
3 Dire Rats (R)
Level 1 Brute
Medium natural beast XP 100 each Initiative +2 Senses Perception +5; low-light vision HP 38; Bloodied 19 AC 15; Fortitude 15, Reflex 13, Will 11 Immune filth fever (see below) Speed 6, climb 3 m Bite (standard; at-will) ✦ Disease +4 vs. AC; 1d6 + 2 damage, and the target contracts filth fever (see below). Alignment Unaligned Languages — Skills Stealth +7 Str 14 (+2) Dex 15 (+2) Wis 10 (+0) Con 18 (+4) Int 3 (–4) Cha 6 (–2)
Altar: With a large marble raven atop it, it doesn’t take a Religion check to figure out that this altar is devoted to the Raven Queen. Prisoner: Mirtala the cook has been tied to
the altar and menaced by the rats for days. She’s caught filth fever from them, and she’s frightened to the point of catatonia. See the sidebar on page 23 for information on dealing with Mirtala. She follows obvious rescuers around, but she doesn’t talk unless PCs succeed at breaking through her mental trauma. She has a clue where Adronsius and Sertanian are being held. July 20 08
|
D u n g e o n 1 56
33
Rescue at Rivenroar
Mushroom Chamber Encounter Level 1 (500 XP)
Setup The PCs must contend not only with rage drakes, but a number of toxic mushrooms. 2 rage drakes (D) The rage drakes have a passive Perception of 13. When the PCs can see into room 11, read: This room, filled with all sorts of architectural debris, has a wet, musty smell. Amid the ruins are all sorts of mushrooms, mostly with brown or gray caps. When the PCs round the corner into room 12, read: You see an old woman within a glowing magic circle. You can hear her muffled voice: “Get me out of here!”
Tactics The rage drakes lurk out of sight behind chunks of rubble until the PCs run afoul of the mushrooms, when they rush in. The rage drakes are affected by the spores, but they’re cunning enough to know that certain mushrooms are to be avoided. The drakes fight until slain, but they won’t leave room 11.
Features of the Area Illumination: Phosphorescent fungi cover the walls and ceiling, bathing the chamber in dim light. Magic Circle: Zerriksa is trapped in this circle in room 12. Anyone pressing against the invisible barrier along the perimeter of the circle takes 1d10 damage per round, and deals half as much damage to a creature
2 Rage Drakes (D)
Level 5 Brute
Large natural beast (mount, reptile) XP 200 each Initiative +3 Senses Perception +3 HP 77; Bloodied 38; see also bloodied rage AC 17; Fortitude 17, Reflex 15, Will 15 Immune fear (while bloodied only) Speed 8 m Bite (standard; at-will) +9 vs. AC; 1d10 + 4 damage; see also bloodied rage. M Claw (standard; at-will) +8 vs. AC; 1d6 + 4 damage; see also bloodied rage. M Raking Charge (standard; at-will) When the rage drake charges, it makes two claw attacks against a single target. Bloodied Rage (while bloodied) The rage drake gains a +2 bonus to attack rolls and deals an extra 5 damage per attack. Raging Mount (while bloodied and mounted by a friendly rider of 5th level or higher; at-will) ✦ Mount The rage drake grants its rider a +2 bonus to attack rolls and damage rolls with melee attacks. Alignment Unaligned Languages — Str 19 (+6) Dex 13 (+3) Wis 13 (+3) Con 17 (+5) Int 3 (–2) Cha 12 (+3)
inside. Disrupting the circle requires a successful DC 20 Thievery, Arcana, and/or Perception (no retries) to notice that the circle sometimes flickers out of existence for a split-second. If the circle is vacant, then there’s no barrier and anyone can walk (or be pushed) in. At that point the barrier reappears and the trap resets. Shafts: It’s a 20-foot climb (Athletics DC 20 up the wall or DC 5 up the slippery rope) to reach room 3. Mushrooms: Some squares have toxic mushrooms in them, in one of the varieties below. Roll 1d4 when a PC enters one of these patches to determine the variety. All mushroom squares are difficult terrain. PCs can figure out what the mushrooms do with a DC 15 Dungeoneering check ahead of time or after the fact by observing what color of mushroom had what effect. Once identified, a DC 15 Acrobatics or Dungeoneering
check allows a PC to enter a square of mushrooms without disturbing it. Cloudspores: Described in the Dungeon Master’s Guide (page 67), cloudspores are brown. If a PC distrubs a cloudspore, it emits a cloud of spores that provides concealment in that square for 5 minutes. Shrieker Mushrooms: The white mushrooms shriek when someone steps adjacent to or in their square. Doomspores: These gray mushrooms, described in the Dungeon Master’s Guide (page 88), make a +6 attack against Fortitude if a PC steps into their square, dealing 1d10 poison damage and ongoing 5 poison (save ends). Slumberspores: These red-capped mushrooms, when disturbed, make a +6 attack against the Will of whoever disturbed them and all adjacent creatures. On a hit, a creature is slowed (save ends). If that creature fails its first saving throw, it becomes unconscious (save ends). Prisoner: Zerriksa the crone is within a magic
circle in room 12. She’s described on page 8. To rescue her, the PCs must somehow deal with the magic circle. She’s the only one who knows for sure that Kartenix is dead and in the clutches of the ettercaps. If rescued, the PCs have to put up with her criticism and complaints until they return her to Brindol. She’s too grumpy to be grateful.
July 20 08
|
D u n g e o n 1 56
34
Rescue at Rivenroar
Von Jallach Crypt Encounter Level 1 (525 XP)
Setup This room features some swarms, an obvious floor trap, and a gnome that reveals himself at an inconvenient time for the PCs. 2 needlefang drake swarms (D) 1 gnome skulk (G) The needlefangs coalesce into two swarms once the PCs cross the threshold into room 13, coming out from the alcoves around the perimeter of the room. When the PCs ascend to room 13, read: A square bounded by glowing runes dominates the f loor in this room. The east wall has two doors. The walls are covered with empty alcoves designed to hold dead bodies.
Tactics The needlefangs overwhelm the first PC or PCs into the room. The needlefangs have learned through painful experience not to touch the runes on the floor. The gnome skulk waits until the needlefang drakes are fighting and the runes glowing to attack. The gnome flees if reduced to below 10 hit points and if he thinks it can make it to the stairs.
Features of the Area Illumination: The floor runes in room 13 glow like candles—dim light within 2 squares. Room 14 has only the illumination that the PCs bring with them.
Lintel Inscription: At the top of the stairs leading to room 13, “Von Jallach Family Tomb” is carved above the doorway. Alcoves: The Von Jallachs never got to use this family crypt—Rivenroar Castle fell before they had a chance. But in the back corners of the alcoves in room 13 are the debris and detritus that the needlefang drakes have gathered into their nests. Floor Runes: The runes in room 13 pulse with light every few seconds. They deal 2d6 damage to any creature that steps on them, and 1d4 damage to any creature that leaps or flies over them. A DC 10 Arcana check reveals that the runes spell out “Von Jallach” in a phonetic alphabet that wizards sometimes use.
Fountain: The water in room 14 is cool and pure— fed by an intact cistern in the ruins above. Prisoner: Adronsius the alchemist is chained to
the wall in room 14. He’s described on page 9. It takes a DC 20 Strength check to pull his shackles out of the wall, a DC 15 Thievery check to pick the lock, or use of the key (in possession of the gnome at the start of the encounter). Adronsius can provide directions to where Jelissa is being held.
July 20 08
|
D u n g e o n 1 56
35
Rescue at Rivenroar Gnome Skulk (G)
Level 2 Lurker
Small fey humanoid XP 125 Initiative +8 Senses Perception +2; low-light vision HP 34; Bloodied 17 AC 16; Fortitude 14, Reflex 14, Will 12 Speed 5 m War Pick (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon +7 vs. AC; 1d8 + 3 damage (crit 1d8 + 11). R Hand Crossbow (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon Ranged 10/20 +7 vs. AC; 1d6 + 3 damage. Combat Advantage The gnome skulk deals an extra 1d6 damage on melee and ranged attacks against any target it has combat advantage against. Fade Away (immediate reaction, when the gnome skulk takes damage; encounter) ✦ Illusion The gnome skulk turns invisible until it attacks or until the end of its next turn. Reactive Stealth If a gnome has cover or concealment when it makes an initiative check at the start of an encounter, it can make a Stealth check to escape notice. Shadow Skulk When a gnome skulk makes a melee or a ranged attack from hiding and misses, it is still considered to be hiding. Alignment Unaligned Languages Common, Elven Skills Arcana +10, Stealth +11, Thievery +9 Str 8 (+0) Dex 17 (+4) Wis 12 (+2) Con 16 (+4) Int 14 (+3) Cha 13 (+2) Equipment leather armor, war pick, hand crossbow with 20 bolts
2 Needlefang Drake Swarms (D)
Level 2 Soldier
Medium natural beast (reptile, swarm) XP 125 each Initiative +7 Senses Perception +7 Swarm Attack aura 1; the needlefang drake swarm makes a basic attack as a free action against each enemy that begins its turn in the aura. HP 38; Bloodied 19 AC 18; Fortitude 15, Reflex 17, Will 14 Immune fear; Resist half damage from melee and ranged attacks; Vulnerable +5 damage from close and area attacks. Speed 7 m Swarm of Teeth (standard; at-will) +8 vs. AC; 1d10 + 4 damage, or 2d10 + 4 damage against a prone target. M Pull Down (minor; at-will) + 7 vs. Fortitude; the target is knocked prone. Alignment Unaligned Languages — Str 15 (+3) Dex 18 (+5) Wis 12 (+2) Con 14 (+3) Int 2 (–3) Cha 10 (+1)
July 20 08
|
D u n g e o n 1 56
36
Rescue at Rivenroar
Von Adrez-Kauthin Crypt Encounter Level 1 (550 XP)
Setup This room, the gateway to the upper level, has a fight with a mix of drake artillery and hobgoblin soldiers. 1 goblin hexer (G) 2 spitting drakes (S) 4 hobgoblin grunts (H) The hobgoblin grunts are in the middle of the room 15, and the spitting drakes are along the western edge of the room. The goblin hexer comes out of room 16 to join the battle at the start of the second round. When the PCs ascend the stairs, read: Carved into the last three steps of the staircase are the words “Von Adrez,” “Kauthin,” and “Crypt.” And once you climb high enough to see into the chamber at the top of the stairs, you see bas-relief images of humans laden with baskets, bags, and boxes—all depicted walking clockwise around the room. Four hobgoblin guards stand in the middle of the room, and behind them are two spitting drakes.
Tactics The hobgoblin strategy is straightforward: Move into melee and stay together. Likewise, the spitting drakes try to spit every round. The goblin uses its vexing cloud if the PCs are clustered together. Then it hexes PCs that are maneuvering away from the hobgoblins and uses incite bravery if it thinks the hobgoblins are going to die.
The drakes fight until slain. The hobgoblins don’t flee unless the hexer flees or falls, at which point they flee for room 21. The hexer flees toward room 21 if it’s below 10 hit points.
Features of the Area Illumination: Braziers in the northeast and southeast corners of room 15 cast bright light for 10 squares. Room 16 has only the lights that PCs bring with them. Bas-Reliefs: The carvings depict the merchant operations of the Von Adrez-Kauthin family (DC 20 History), once quite prominent in the region.
Low Sarcophagi: Each sarcophagus is set into the floor so that it protrudes only 6 inches or so (not enough to affect movement). It takes a DC 20 Strength check to pull each lid off the sarcophagus. The southwest one has treasure parcels G and H in it. Prisoner: Shackled to the wall in room 16 is
Jalissa, an acolyte of Ioun and one of the Brindol residents the PCs are trying to save. See page 7 for a full description. Jalissa knows that the boy Thurann is somewhere nearby. A DC 20 Strength check is sufficient to yank the shackles from the wall, and a DC 15 Thievery check can pick the lock. Or PCs can do the obvious thing and use the key that the goblin hexer has.
July 20 08
|
D u n g e o n 1 56
37
Rescue at Rivenroar Goblin Hexer (G)
Level 3 Controller (Leader)
Small natural humanoid XP 150 Initiative +3 Senses Perception +2; low-light vision HP 46; Bloodied 23 AC 17; Fortitude 14, Reflex 15, Will 16; see also lead from the rear Speed 6; see also goblin tactics m Hexer Rod (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon +7 vs. AC; 1d6 + 1 damage. R Blinding Hex (standard; at-will) Ranged 10; +7 vs. Fortitude; 2d6 + 1 damage, and the target is blinded (save ends). R Stinging Hex (standard; recharge ⚄ ⚅ ) Ranged 10; +7 vs. Will; the target takes 3d6 + 1 damage if it moves during its turn (save ends). A Vexing Cloud (standard; sustain minor; encounter) ✦ Zone Area burst 3 within 10; automatic hit; all enemies within the zone take a –2 penalty to attack rolls. The zone grants concealment to the goblin hexer and its allies. The goblin hexer can sustain the zone as a minor action, moving it up to 5 squares. R Incite Bravery (immediate reaction, when an ally uses goblin tactics; at-will) Range 10; the targeted ally can shift 2 squares and make an attack. Goblin Tactics (immediate reaction, when missed by a melee attack; at-will) The goblin shifts 1 square. Lead from the Rear (immediate interrupt, when targeted by a ranged attack; at-will) The goblin hexer can change the attack’s target to an adjacent ally of its level or lower. Alignment Evil Languages Common, Goblin Skills Stealth +10, Thievery +10 Str 10 (+1) Dex 15 (+3) Wis 13 (+2) Con 14 (+3) Int 9 (+0) Cha 18 (+5) Equipment leather robes, hexer rod
4 Hobgoblin Grunts (H)
Level 1 Minion
Medium natural humanoid XP 25 each Initiative +4 Senses Perception +1; low-light vision HP 1: a missed attack never damages a minion. AC 17 (19 with phalanx soldier); Fortitude 15, Reflex 13, Will 12 Speed 5 m Longsword (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon +6 vs. AC; 3 damage. Phalanx Soldier The hobgoblin grunt gains a +2 bonus to AC while at least one hobgoblin ally is adjacent to it. Alignment Evil Languages Common, Goblin Skills Athletics +6, Stealth +9 Str 18 (+4) Dex 14 (+2) Wis 13 (+1) Con 15 (+2) Int 10 (+0) Cha 9 (–1) Equipment leather armor, light shield, longsword
Spitting Drake (S)
Level 3 Artillery
Medium natural beast (reptile) XP 150 Initiative +5 Senses Perception +3 HP 38; Bloodied 19 AC 17; Fortitude 14, Reflex 16, Will 14 Resist 10 acid Speed 7 m Bite (standard; at-will) +6 vs. AC; 1d6 + 2 damage. R Caustic Spit (standard; at-will) ✦ Acid Ranged 10; +8 vs. Reflex; 1d10 + 4 acid damage. Alignment Unaligned Languages — Str 14 (+3) Dex 18 (+5) Wis 14 (+3) Con 14 (+3) Int 3 (–3) Cha 12 (+2)
July 20 08
|
D u n g e o n 1 56
38
Rescue at Rivenroar
Honor Guard Crypt Encounter Level 2 (650 XP)
Setup This encounter could take place in any of the three rooms; the ghouls and zombies walk an endless patrol in the center of the level, and the PCs are bound to run into them eventually. 2 ghouls 2 zombies Place the monsters at whichever doorway they normally walk through as they follow their patrol (see below). When the PCs reach the doorway to room 17, read: This room has alcoves full of skeletal remains along the south wall, plus an annex with a fountain and a tied-up boy to the east. When the PCs reach the doorway to room 18, read: A still pool of water dominates this room, which is noticeably more humid than others inside the catacombs. A sheen of water droplets covers the walls. When the PCs reach the doorway to room 19, read: The middle of this room has a sunburst mosaic in it. Passageways head west then north, north then east, and due east.
Tactics The zombies and ghouls travel together. They start in room 19, walk down to room 17 where they check
on Thurann, then they go down the stairs to room 18 and the ghouls disturb the water. After the ghouls spend a minute or so watching the ripples, they head up the western stairs back to room 19, where they spend about 5 minutes basking in the power of the black sun before repeating their circuit. It takes them about 10 minutes altogether. The zombies attack the nearest enemy, but the ghouls try to paralyze whichever PCs look like clerics or look fast. If a ghoul paralyzes a PC, then both ghouls attack the paralyzed PC. The ghouls shout at the zombies to do likewise, but the zombies won’t listen. The zombies and ghouls fight until slain. They give chase throughout rooms 17, 18, and 19, but not beyond.
Features of the Area Illumination: Room 17 has only the illumination that the PCs bring with them. The decorative spire in the center of the fountain in room 18 glows like a torch, casting bright light for 5 squares. The sunburst in the floor in room 19 actively absorbs light—it never gets brighter than dim light, no matter how powerful the light source. Scrying Pool Room: If disturbed, the pool of water in the center of room 18 shows faint images of many of the rooms in the catacombs. Rather than ordinary ripples, the waves and ripples form crude but recognizable images. DMs might need to alter some of these images to reflect rooms the PCs have already cleared out and prisoners they’ve already rescued. Room 9: A chamber with four sarcophagi and hobgoblin guards milling around. Room 10: A room with a displacer beast statue and an altar with a raven atop it. A woman (Mirtala) is trussed up atop the altar.
Room 15: A room with hobgoblins and two drakes. Room 21: A room with a single sarcophagus. A ridged helmet sits atop the sarcophagus, and a massive hobgoblin in spiked armor is regarding it. If present, Adronsius recognizes the dragoncrest helm. Room 22: An empty room with four heavy square columns near the corners. Room 23: A shrine with pews and an obelisk. At the base of the obelisks are shattered shields with the Red Hand insignia on them. You don’t have to be Adronsius to figure that one out. Room 24: A room with two thrones next to each other. One has a skeleton, and the other has a biped of uncertain race. Room 5: An empty room with funerary alcoves in the walls. Room 6: A room with two jail cells, one of which holds an older man (Sertanian). The pool shows each room for only 3 seconds, and the ripples don’t show a lot of detail. Splashing or dipping a hand in the water provides sufficient ripples to work through the above list once, with more or less vigorous ripples lasting longer or shorter correspondingly. Sunburst: When any creature crosses the threshold to enter room 19, the sunburst design set into the flow turns black and the lights dim. Undead creatures that start their turn on a square that’s part of the black sunburst regain 5 hit points. Faultline: The hallway heading west from room 19 has a large faultline running along its length. A DC 15 Dungeoneering check is sufficient to reveal that the floor will collapse if the PCs walk too close together (and anyone can plainly see that the hallway is hazardous). PCs at least two squares away from other PCs are safe, but any two creatures closer
July 20 08
|
D u n g e o n 1 56
39
Rescue at Rivenroar 2 Ghouls
Level 5 Soldier
Medium natural humanoid (undead) XP 200 each Initiative +8 Senses Perception +2; darkvision HP 63; Bloodied 31 AC 21; Fortitude 18, Reflex 20, Will 17 Immune disease, poison; Resist 10 necrotic; Vulnerable 5 radiant Speed 8, climb 4 m Claws (standard; at-will) +12 vs. AC; 1d6 + 4 damage, and the target is immobilized (save ends). M Ghoulish Bite (standard; at-will) Target must be immobilized, stunned, or unconscious; +10 vs. AC; 3d6 + 4 damage and the target is stunned (save ends). Alignment Chaotic evil Languages Common Skills Stealth +11 Str 14 (+4) Dex 19 (+6) Wis 11 (+2) Con 15 (+4) Int 10 (+2) Cha 12 (+3)
2 Zombies
Level 2 Brute
Medium natural animate (undead) XP 125 each Initiative –1 Senses Perception +0; darkvision HP 40; Bloodied 20 see also zombie weakness AC 13; Fortitude 13, Reflex 9, Will 10 Immune disease, poison; Resist 10 necrotic; Vulnerable 5 radiant Speed 4 m Slam (standard; at-will) +6 vs. AC; 2d6 + 2 damage. M Zombie Grab (standard; at-will) +4 vs. Fortitude; the target is grabbed (until escape). Checks made to escape the zombie’s grab take a –5 penalty. Zombie Weakness Any critical hit to the zombie reduces it to 0 hit points instantly. Alignment Unaligned Languages — Str 14 (+3) Dex 6 (–1) Wis 8 (+0) Con 10 (+1) Int 1 (–4) Cha 3 (–3)
together than that triggers a collapse that deals 1d10 damage to everyone in the hallway as the entire length collapses 10 feet. After the collapse, the hallway is difficult terrain and must be climbed 10 feet at each end (Athletics DC 10). Wall Inscriptions: Carved into the walls is this repeating message: “Honor the Heroic Guardians of Rivenroar.” Alcoves: Skeletal human remains are in alcoves along the south wall of room 17. PCs who spend the 20 minutes necessary to search them (dividing the work if necessary) find treasure parcel I. Prisoner: Thurann, the 8-year-old son of the guard captain, is tied up at the base of the still fountain in the room 17 annex. Thurann is described on page 8. He doesn’t know that his father is dead, but he does know that Zerriksa is being held in a magic circle beyond the mushroom chamber downstairs.
July 20 08
|
D u n g e o n 1 56
40
Rescue at Rivenroar
Sinruth’s Abode Encounter Level 2 (625 XP)
Setup This room has a solo knock-down, drag-out fight with Sinruth, the leader of the hobgoblins. Sinruth (S) Sinruth starts in room 21 but he moves to room 20 if he hears the PCs in there.
When the PCs reach room 20, read: Thin menhirs are scattered across the f loor of this triangular room. A passageway leads north, then turns west—and something beyond that turn is casting light.
Tactics Sinruth fights with reckless abandon—he wants to be surrounded by the PCs so his chain can do its work. He pulls people close if possible, and then uses chain whirlwind as soon as two or three PCs are adjacent. If there are adjacent enemies but no one 2 squares away, Sinruth alternates between pulling people into his armor spikes and knocking them prone, then stomping on them. If he’s fighting in room 20, he tries to position himself so that he pulls his enemies into a square with a menhir on it. Sinruth fights until slain unless you want to save him as a future adversary, in which case he runs through any rooms he believes to be inhabited, figuring that slows down pursuers.
Features of the Area Illumination: Room 20 has no illumination beyond what the PCs bring with them. Room 21 has a lantern that emits bright light for 10 squares. Menhirs: The menhirs in room 20 are 8 feet tall and narrow—they don’t take up the whole square. They’re noticeably cold to the touch. Any creature that starts its turn in a square with a menhir takes 1d6 cold damage. Sarcophagus: Treasure parcels J and K can be found inside, and it takes only a DC 15 Strength check to open it—this lid is loose.
Sinruth, Hobgoblin Chieftain (S) Level 2 Soldier Solo
Medium natural humanoid, goblin XP 150 Initiative +7 Senses Perception +3; low-light vision HP 185; Bloodied 92 AC 22 (24 with phalanx soldier); Fortitude 16, Reflex 16, Will 12 Saving Throws +5 Speed 5 Action Points 2 M Chain Yank (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon Requires spiked chain; reach 2; +8 vs. AC; 1d10 + 4 damage, and the target is pulled 1. If creature is adjacent, chain yank instead briefly bashes the creature against Sinruth’s armor spikes for an extra 1d6 damage. M Chain Trip (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon Requires spiked chain; reach 2; +6 vs. Reflex; 1d6 + 4 damage, and the target is knocked prone. C Chain Whirlwind (standard; recharge ⚄ ⚅ ) ✦ Weapon Requires spiked chain; close burst 1; +8 vs. AC; 1d6 + 4 damage. M Jackboot Stomp (minor; at-will) ✦ Weapon Requires adjacent prone target; +6 vs. AC; 1d6 + 4 damage. Hobgoblin Resilience (immediate reaction, when the hobgoblin soldier suffers an effect that a save can end; encounter) Sinruth rolls a saving throw against the effect. Phalanx Soldier Sinruth gains a +2 bonus to AC while at least one hobgoblin ally is adjacent to it. Alignment Evil Languages Common, Goblin Skills Athletics +9, Intimidate +8 Str 17 (+4) Dex 14 (+3) Wis 10 (+1) Con 13 (+2) Int 10 (+1) Cha 14 (+3) Equipment plate armor, spiked chain
Brindol Treasure: Sinruth is wearing the gauntlets from the Hall of Great Valor, and the dragoncrest helm is sitting on the sarcophagus in room 21. Sinruth’s Papers: In his breast pocket, Sinruth keeps a region map (similar to the one on page 6, but with several paths and good ambush spots marked), a map of Brindol (similar to the one on page 8, but with the Hall of Great Valor), and the letter from the Emissary (see page 45).
July 20 08
|
D u n g e o n 1 56
41
Rescue at Rivenroar
Crypt Guardian Chamber Encounter Level 1 (550 XP)
Setup The wererats trigger a rampaging evistro, then join in the mayhem themselves. 1 evistro (E) 2 wererats (W) When the PCs move close to either the southern or the eastern doorway, read: A foul creature stalks the space bounded by the square columns, but it stops short of crossing that boundary.
2 Wererats (W)
Level 3 Skirmisher
Medium natural humanoid (shapechanger) XP 150 each Initiative +7 Senses Perception +7; low-light vision HP 48; Bloodied 24 Regeneration 5 (if the wererat takes damage from a silver weapon, its regeneration doesn’t function on its next turn) AC 17; Fortitude 15, Reflex 16, Will 13 Immune filth fever (see below) Speed 6, climb 4 (not in human form) m Short Sword (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon +8 vs. AC; 1d6 + 4 damage. m Bite (standard; at-will) ✦ Disease +8 vs. AC; 1d4 + 2 damage, and the target takes ongoing 2 damage (save ends) and contracts filth fever (see below). Change Shape (minor; at-will) ✦ Polymorph A wererat can alter its physical form to appear as a dire rat or a unique human (see Change Shape on page 280 in the Monster Manual). It loses its bite attack in human form. Combat Advantage The wererat deals an extra 1d6 damage on melee attacks against any target it has combat advantage against. Alignment Evil Languages Common Skills Bluff +6, Stealth +10, Streetwise +6, Thievery +10 Str 10 (+1) Dex 18 (+5) Wis 12 (+2) Con 16 (+4) Int 10 (+1) Cha 11 (+1) Equipment cloak, short sword
When the PCs attract the evistro’s attention, read: The evistro throws itself against an invisible barrier, unable to get to you. But then a wererat appears at the northern doorway and yells, “I release you, crypt guardian!
Tactics The evistro fights until slain. The wererats flee when reduced to below 10 hit points, heading to room 23.
Filth Fever The target ! is cured.
Evistro (Carnage Demon) (E)
Level 6 Brute
Medium elemental magical beast (demon) XP 250 Initiative +4 Senses Perception +4 HP 90; Bloodied 45 AC 16; Fortitude 18, Reflex 14, Will 14 Resist 10 variable (1/encounter; see glossary) Speed 6 m Claws (standard; at-will) +9 vs. AC; 1d8 + 5 damage. M Destructive Bite (minor; at-will) Bloodied target only; +8 vs. AC; 1d6 + 5 damage. Carnage The carnage demon gains a +1 bonus to melee attacks if it has one or more allies adjacent to its target (+3 if one of these allies is another carnage demon). This bonus stacks with combat advantage. Alignment Chaotic evil Languages Abyssal Str 21 (+8) Dex 12 (+4) Wis 12 (+4) Con 20 (+8) Int 5 (+0) Cha 7 (+1)
Unlike other guardians that were bound to specific chambers, the evistro pursues fleeing PCs all the way to the entry room.
Features of the Area Illumination: The brazier in the corner provides bright light within 10 squares. Square Prison: The evistro is bound to remain within the square in the middle of the chamber until someone gives it permission to leave. Then it gets an hour to find and kill as many intruders as it can find. It considerd the goblins, hobgoblins, and other creatures that live here as “residents.”
Level 3 Disease Initial Effect The target loses 1 healing surge.
!"
The target takes a –2 penalty to AC, Fortitude defense, and Reflex defense.
!
Final Effect: The target takes a –2 penalty to AC, Fortitude defense, and Reflex defense. The target loses all healing surges and cannot regain hit points.
July 20 08
|
D u n g e o n 1 56
42
Rescue at Rivenroar
Shrine of the Obelisk Encounter Level 1 (450 XP)
Setup The rest of the wererats are here, along with the arcanist that leads the gnomes. 1 gnome arcanist (A) 2 wererats (W) When the PCs reach the southwest doorway, read: Lines of pews make it clear that this was once a shrine dedicated to the rune-encrusted obelisk at the north end of the room. A gnome stands next to the obelisk, and sidling toward the doorway are two more wererats, their teeth glinting in the torchlight.
Gnome Arcanist (A)
Level 3 Controller (Leader)
Small fey humanoid XP 150 Initiative +1 Senses Perception +1; low-light vision Aura of Illusion (Illusion) aura 5; the gnome arcanist and all allies in the aura gain concealment and can hide in the aura. HP 46; Bloodied 23 AC 16; Fortitude 13, Reflex 15, Will 13 Speed 5; see also fey step m Dagger (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon +6 vs. AC; 1d4 damage. R Scintillating Bolt (standard; at-will) ✦ Radiant Ranged 10; +6 vs. Fortitude; 1d6 + 4 radiant damage, and the target is dazed (save ends). R Startling Glamor (minor; at-will) ✦ Fear, Illusion Ranged 10; +7 vs. Will; the target shifts 1 square C Illusory Terrain (standard; recharge ⚃ ⚄ ⚅ ) ✦ Illusion Close burst 5; targets enemies; +7 vs. Will; the target is slowed (save ends). Fade Away (immediate reaction, when the gnome arcanist takes damage; encounter) ✦ Illusion The gnome arcanist turns invisible until it attacks or until the end of its next turn. Fey Step (move; encounter) ✦ Teleportation The gnome arcanist teleports 5 squares. Reactive Stealth If a gnome has cover or concealment when it makes an initiative check at the start of an encounter, it can make a Stealth check to escape notice. Alignment Unaligned Languages Common, Elven Skills Arcana +12, Bluff +8, Insight +6, Stealth +8 Str 10 (+1) Dex 10 (+1) Wis 11 (+1) Con 14 (+3) Int 18 (+5) Cha 15 (+3) Equipment robes, dagger
Tactics The wererats try to keep the PCs occupied in melee so that the gnome can make ranged attacks safely. The wererats try to flank a PC, but not if it means risking an enemy running over to engage the gnome. The wererats know they’re cornered. They fight to the death. But the gnome saves fey step and reactive stealth to try to escape if reduced below 15 hit points.
2 Wererats (W)
Level 3 Skirmisher
Medium natural humanoid (shapechanger) XP 150 each Initiative +7 Senses Perception +7; low-light vision HP 48; Bloodied 24 Regeneration 5 (if the wererat takes damage from a silver weapon, its regeneration doesn’t function on its next turn) AC 17; Fortitude 15, Reflex 16, Will 13 Immune filth fever (see below) Speed 6, climb 4 (not in human form) m Short Sword (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon +8 vs. AC; 1d6 + 4 damage. m Bite (standard; at-will) ✦ Disease +8 vs. AC; 1d4 + 2 damage, and the target takes ongoing 2 damage (save ends) and contracts filth fever (see below). Change Shape (minor; at-will) ✦ Polymorph A wererat can alter its physical form to appear as a dire rat or a unique human (see Change Shape, page 280 in the Monster Manual). It loses its bite attack in human form. Combat Advantage The wererat deals an extra 1d6 damage on melee attacks against any target it has combat advantage against. Alignment Evil Languages Common Skills Bluff +6, Stealth +10, Streetwise +6, Thievery +10 Str 10 (+1) Dex 18 (+5) Wis 12 (+2) Con 16 (+4) Int 10 (+1) Cha 11 (+1) Equipment cloak, short sword
Features of the Area Illumination: Torches to the left and right of the obelisks would ordinarily emit bright light for 5 squares, but the obelisk appears to have the same light-absorbing property as the sunburst in room 19, so the illumination in this room never exceeds dim. Pews: Squares with pews count as difficult terrain. Obelisk: A DC 15 Religion check reveals iconography common to worshipers of Vecna. Other than the weird effect on lighting, the obelisk is not magical. Rivenroar Treasure: The ceremonial sword, the broken shields, and the battle standard are here.
July 20 08
|
D u n g e o n 1 56
43
Rescue at Rivenroar
Lords of Rivenroar Audience Chamber Encounter Level 1 (500 XP)
Setup The deathlock commands the other undead in the Rivenroar catacombs. Unlike Sinruth, the wight loves intruders—they have the life energy that he craves. 1 deathlock wight (D) 1 boneshard skeleton (B) 5 decrepit skeletons The decrepit skeletons arise in the middle of the first round (roll initiative for them, but don’t place them yet). When the PCs reach either doorway, read: Two thrones sit along the north wall of this immense chamber. One has a rotting but still f leshy corpse on it, and the other has a bleached skeleton. Other piles of bone litter the ground. The eyes of the fleshy corpse begin to glow. “Intruderssssss!” it lisps. “Consssssssume them!”
the wight uses horrific visage to make some breathing room. It saves its reanimate power for when the boneshard skeleton dies, because it knows that the decrepit skeletons keep coming back indefinitely. The boneshard skeleton picks whatever appears to be the most competent melee combatant and attacks, first with the boneshard and then with the scimitar. It uses its boneshard blast if it can hit three or more PCs with it. The decrepit skeletons are bolstered by the necromantic energies coursing through the catacombs. Each round at the beginning of the decrepit skeletons’ turn, one slain decrepit skeleton returns to life. The only way to stop this perpetual reanimation is for all living creatures to leave the chamber or for all five decrepit skeletons to be dead at the start of the decrepit skeletons’ turn.
Features of the Area Illumination: None beyond what the PCs bring with them. Thrones: They appear golden, but it’s just gilt. Bone Piles: Five of these—you choose which ones—animate and become decrepit skeletons at the start of the deathlock wight’s first turn. The others are merely difficult terrain—not that the PCs are likely to step in those squares anyway. Frescos: Paintings on the walls depict a series of older, robed humans, standing on clouds or riding chariots through the sky. The faces are more realistic than the other elements, suggesting that the art is intended as portraiture. A History check (DC 20) indicates that at least some match historical descriptions of the lords of Rivenroar. Three of the portraits along the south wall have been defaced. Treasure: Parcels L, M, and N are in this room, preferably mounted on the walls or attached to the throne somehow.
Tactics The first thing the deathlock wight does is shout “Arise, my warriors!” At that point, five of the bone piles coalesce into decrepit skeletons—place them on the map at this point. Then the wight takes its turn, and the decrepit skeletons take their normal place in the initiative order. The wight tries to paralyze as many enemies with grave bolt as possible, especially any PC that looks like a cleric or paladin. When PCs move too close,
July 20 08
|
D u n g e o n 1 56
44
Rescue at Rivenroar Deathlock Wight (D)
Level 4 Controller
Medium natural humanoid (undead) XP 175 Initiative +4 Senses Perception +1; darkvision HP 54; Bloodied 27 AC 18; Fortitude 15, Reflex 16, Will 17 Immune disease, poison; Resist 10 necrotic; Vulnerable 5 radiant Speed 6 m Claw (standard; at-will) ✦ Necrotic +9 vs. AC; 1d6 necrotic damage, and the target loses 1 healing surge. R Grave Bolt (standard; at-will) ✦ Necrotic Ranged 20; +6 vs. Reflex; 1d6 + 4 necrotic damage, and the target is immobilized (save ends). R Reanimate (minor; encounter) ✦ Healing, Necrotic Ranged 10; affects a destroyed undead creature of a level no higher than the deathlock wight’s level + 2; the target stands as a free action with a number of hit points equal to one-half its bloodied value. This power does not affect minions. C Horrific Visage (standard; recharge ⚃ ⚄ ⚅ ) ✦ Fear Close blast 5; +7 vs. Will; 1d6 damage, and the target is pushed 3 squares. Alignment Evil Languages Common Skills Arcana +10, Religion +10 Str 10 (+2) Dex 14 (+4) Wis 9 (+1) Con 14 (+4) Int 16 (+5) Cha 18 (+6)
5 Decrepit Skeletons
Level 1 Minion
Medium natural animate (undead) XP 25 each Initiative +3 Senses Perception +2; darkvision HP 1; a missed attack never damages a minion. AC 16; Fortitude 13, Reflex 14, Will 13 Immune disease, poison Speed 6 m Longsword (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon +6 vs. AC; 4 damage. r Shortbow (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon Ranged 15/30; +6 vs. AC; 3 damage. Alignment Unaligned Languages — Str 15 (+2) Dex 17 (+3) Wis 14 (+2) Con 13 (+1) Int 3 (–4) Cha 3 (–4) Equipment heavy shield, longsword, shortbow, quiver of 10 arrows
Boneshard Skeleton (B)
Level 5 Brute
Medium natural animate (undead) XP 200 Initiative +5 Senses Perception +4; darkvision HP 77; Bloodied 38 see also boneshard burst AC 17; Fortitude 16, Reflex 16, Will 15 Immune disease, poison; Resist 10 necrotic; Vulnerable 5 radiant Speed 6 m Scimitar (standard; at-will) ✦ Necrotic, Weapon +9 vs. AC; 1d8 + 3 damage (crit 1d8 + 11) plus 5 necrotic damage. m Boneshard (standard; at-will) ✦ Necrotic +9 vs. AC; 1d4 + 3 damage, and ongoing 5 necrotic damage (save ends). C Boneshard Burst (when first bloodied and again when the boneshard skeleton is reduced to 0 hit points) ✦ Necrotic Close burst 3; +8 vs. Reflex; 2d6 + 3 necrotic damage. Alignment Unaligned Languages — Str 16 (+5) Dex 16 (+5) Wis 14 (+4) Con 17 (+5) Int 3 (–2) Cha 3 (–2) Equipment scimitar
About the Author
David Noonan is a designer/developer for Wizards of the Coast. His credits include co-designing Dungeon Master’s Guide II, Heroes of Battle, and numerous products for the Eberron campaign setting. He lives in Washington state with his wife, son, and daughter.
Brave Sinruth, The Red Hand will rise again! The other remnants take great cheer in your recent attacks on commerce coming into The Blight That is Brindol. We’re particularly pleased with your ability to inspire a fighting spirit in others, whether they have true goblin blood or merely wish they did. To be blunt, we think you should have many more soldiers under your command. Many, many more. And recent events have rendered some remnants leaderless. With a bold stroke on your part, the remnants would rally to the Red Hand you so proudly display. As your bold stroke, do this: Attack the The Blight That is Brindol by night. Focus your efforts on their Hall of Great Valor, for it mocks the many hard-won victories by the first Red Hand of Doom. Take from them the spoils of war they shamelessly hang on their walls and bring those antiques back to Rivenroar. Do this before the moon is next full. And with regard to your previous question, turning over captives to your unliving allies at Rivenroar is perfectly acceptable. War sometimes makes strange bedfellows, and we appreciate how you’ve united such disparate forces under your banner. Whatever prisoners you take from Rivenroar you can give to the wight. Fight with the valor of your ancestors, Sinruth. And keep your hands stained red with the blood of the weak! I will visit you again next month, at a time of my choosing. The Emissary July 20 08
|
D u n g e o n 1 56
45
Siege of Bordrin's Watch
Siege of Bordrin’s Watch by Robert J. Schwalb illustrations by William O'Connor and David Griffith ✦ cartography by Mike Schley
How can we forget the suffering of our kin during the Age of Chains? How can we set aside those ancient grudges when the risk of slavery is now greater than ever? Fellow warriors, the orcs are upon us, marching once more to the beat of the giants’ drum. It falls to us to stop them—to hold fast no matter their numbers. If we falter, we give into fear. It’s not just ourselves and our way of life that will suffer; all people of the Elsir Vale will perish as well. War is upon us. Now is the time for men and women of courage to stand up and defend those who cannot defend themselves.
TM & © 2008 Wizards of the Coast, Inc. All rights reserved.
August 20 08
|
D u n g e o n 1 57
4
Siege of Bordrin's Watch
What’s an Adventure Path? Scales of War is the fourth Adventure Path to appear in the pages of Dungeon Magazine. But what, you ask, is an Adventure Path? Quite simply, it is a series of related adventures intended to form a complete D&D campaign that takes your players from 1st level all the way to, in the case of Scales of War, 30th level. Previous Adventure Paths, presented with the 3rd Edition D&D rules, took characters from 1st to 20th level. But with all three tiers in the new edition ripe and ready to explore, we’re pushing the limit with Scales of War. Each tier takes roughly six adventures to traverse, which means we’ll finish off this Adventure Path in about eighteen issues. Each adventure advances characters from between one and a half to two levels of experience. We recognize that not everyone will meet every encounter or complete every quest, however, so periodically, we’ll point you to a supplemental Side Trek or short adventure to keep your PCs on pace. Plus, roughly every few months, Dragon will feature new support content for Scales of War. Finally, this Adventure Path is intended to function as a complete D&D campaign. That means we’ll be making some assumptions about the history of the world as we move along, just as you would in any campaign you run. We’ll be borrowing heavily from the D&D mythology of 4th Edition, as well as all the great ideas that have cropped up in other products over the years— including the pages of past issues of Dungeon! Enjoy your stay in Scales of War, and keep an eye out for next month’s installment.
“Siege of Bordrin’s Watch” is an adventure for five 3rd-level characters. By the end of the adventure, the characters should be halfway through 4th-level. You can run this adventure as the sequel to “Rescue at Rivenroar,” continuing the unfolding story of the Scales of War campaign, or run it as part of a campaign of your own design. This adventure features exploration, roleplaying opportunities, and combats in dynamic environments, making it a perfect addition to any campaign. In this adventure, a new threat looms to the west: A vast horde of orcs and their despicable kin emerge from the barren lands bent on plunder and conquest. While the Elsir Vale and other lands mobilize their meager forces to respond to the danger, a call has gone out to those heroes of the Vale to join forces and help to push back this new evil before it’s too late.
Background The lands west of the Stonehome Mountains have been a festering mire of want and suffering. This parched and barren landscape is suited only for orcs, goblinoids, and other fell creatures. From time to time, a warlord gathers a small army and tumbles out of these badlands to test their strength and arms against the stalwart dwarf defenders, but never have they crossed the mountains because straddling its single pass is an ancient dwarven stronghold named Bordrin’s Watch. No matter how many orcs muster, they die upon its walls, painting the sturdy stone with their black blood. So the rumors of a new host in these forlorn bogs and dead woods seemed a small threat—nothing the guardians could not handle. This army, though, is different. Unlike all the many times
the orcs have emerged, they now have a leader who can keep them together long enough to win. The orc leader is an overlarge warrior and chieftain named Tusk. Not a true orc, he has the blood of ogres in his veins, which makes him larger, tougher, and eminently more dangerous. Having slaughtered half a dozen orc chieftains, he drew together the unruly tribes to mount an offensive against Bordrin’s Watch to lay claim to the soft lands beyond its walls. Tusk knows the history of the Stonehome Mountains well, knowing that unless he can find some way to bypass the fortress in the mountains, it won’t matter how many warriors he commands since he would fail. What Tusk needs is a way around the fortress. Ever resourceful and with numerous contacts and allies, Tusk turned to his occasional lover and advisor, a shadar-kai witch named Myrissa. He sent her back to the Shadowfell to recruit allies to help his cause, and a short time later she returned with a small army of dark ones, led by a mysterious and sinister dark creeper, known as the emissary. This leader offered to assist Tusk in exchange for an exclusive arrangement in which they would supply Tusk’s armies with weaponry for whatever price the dark creeper and his fellows asked, and in exchange, the dark creepers would find a way through the mountains. Tusk readily agreed and paid the exorbitant price, gaining a fine arsenal, and also, he hoped, the key to victory. Not long after, the dark creepers returned and revealed a number of tunnels burrowed beneath the mountain. They showed the chieftain the locations of each, explaining how the passages connected one side of the mountains to the other. No tunnel was large enough to accommodate his entire army, so, Tusk gave his horde their marching orders, sending them to climb the mountain slopes, while his scouts moved
August 20 08
|
D u n g e o n 1 57
5
Siege of Bordrin's Watch
ahead to secure the tunnels and prepare the way for Tusk and his elite warriors to strike the fortress from below.
Adventure Synopsis Even though the dwarves have been successful in containing the orc hordes in the past, this time it’s different and the dwarves of Overlook are concerned that the walls of the Bordrin’s Watch might not be enough to staunch the flood. All their misgivings stem from the reports brought back by their own scouts, who mention endless ranks of orcs, trolls, and worse marching inexorably to the Stonehome Mountains. To shore up the thin number of defenders to man the Watch, Overlook dispatched a call to arms, beseeching able-bodied men and women across the Elsir Vale to mobilize at Overlook and then join forces with the defenders in the mountains. With the memory of the last war that ravaged the Vale, militias formed up and adventurers from as far away as Brindol answered the call. This adventure assumes the characters are among those who go to aid the dwarves. Being seasoned adventurers and with some notoriety for their success in Rivenroar, it should be clear from the locals and any NPC allies the characters might have made that joining the dwarves is the right thing to do. Of course, if the PCs need a bit more prompting, you might convince them to head in this direction by throwing a few orcs at their current residence to drive home the severity of the threat. Alternatively, Overlook is a city of some size, and it makes an ideal place for the characters to spend their hard-earned gold.
Along the way, the characters encounter a patrol of orcs, which suggests that the orcs have somehow crossed the mountains. Armed with this information, the characters should approach the Council of Elders to reveal the new threat. With this revelation, the Council believes they have been compromised and that the tunnels beneath the mountains breached. Even though this development poses great danger to their defenses, the orc horde is still far enough away that there is time to seal the tunnels and prevent the orcs from coming through the tunnels. Thus, it falls to the PCs and two other groups to secure the tunnels and seal the Nexus to prevent the orcs from breaching the defenses. The Council of Elders assigns the task of securing the tunnels beneath the Monastery of the Sundered Chain to the PCs, and they dispatch other groups to the other weak points in their defenses. Once the characters arrive at the old monastery, it is clear the other locations might be compromised and the other adventuring groups might be overmatched. Assuming the PCs find Kalad (see page 38), the heroes learn the dwarf paladin already secured the tunnel to Bordrin’s Watch, but discover the Vents are likely not secure. So, the characters must travel down to the lower tunnels, make their way past the orc invaders, and locate the ancient Nexus to complete their mission before the orc hordes arrive. Sealing the Nexus, then, constitutes a major quest worth 750 XP.
The Quest “Siege of Bordrin’s Watch” offers the opportunity for PCs to earn quest XP in a couple of places. Provided here is the list of quests, and their rewards, in the adventure. Major Quest—Sealing the Nexus The PCs must travel down to the lower tunnels, make their way past the orc invaders, and locate the ancient Nexus to complete their mission before the orc hordes arrive. R e w a r d : 750 X P (a n d 1, 0 0 0 g p [four parcels]).
August 20 08
|
D u n g e o n 1 57
6
Siege of Bordrin's Watch
Preparing for Adventure “Siege of Bordrin’s Watch” takes the characters into a deadly environment and pits them against the advance troops of a deadly orc horde. As such, the characters venture into enormous chambers and use their talents against terrifying foes, all the while racing to reach the Nexus before the horde arrives. Obviously, a good reading of the adventure can only help, but if you’re under the gun, you can skip over the introductory materials and go straight to the adventure. You should, at the very least, review the encounters, while paying attention to the creatures, their powers, and the settings in which the characters face them.
What You Need to Play This adventure includes the encounters the PCs face as they explore and adventure in the area. It also provides tactical maps and more for the adventure. If you and your players haven’t read through the Dungeons & Dragons 4th Edition rules yet, that is your first best step so that you make certain you understand the rules. Also as mentioned above, read through at least the first few encounters described in this adventure before starting. This review enables you to become familiar with the material and the style of presentation. You might also want to take a look at the sections below regarding the adventure format.
Using Tactical Encounters Each encounter includes several common elements, as described below.
Encounter Level
Monster Statistics
Each tactical encounter assumes a group of five player characters. An encounter of average difficulty is one where the encounter level is equal to the level of the party. Encounters that are 1 or 2 levels lower than the party are easy encounters, while encounters that are 2 or more levels higher than the party are difficult encounters. For overcoming an encounter, a group earns the XP value listed beside the encounter level. This amount should be divided by the number of group members, and an equal amount should be awarded to each character.
Encounters include stat blocks for each monster type present in the encounter. If more than one monster of a particular kind is present, the stat block indicates how many creatures can be found.
Setup This section of a tactical encounter provides you with the basic parameters of the encounter. First, it provides context or background information for the encounter. Next, it provides a key to the monsters in the encounter so you can locate them on the tactical map. The map of each encounter area indicates where the monsters are located when the encounter begins. The setup section also describes what monsters are doing and how they react when the PCs arrive.
Tactics This entry describes special actions the monsters take to defeat the adventurers. Sometimes this means the monsters take advantage of special features of the area or make use of special powers or equipment.
Map Each encounter includes a map keyed with the initial locations of each monster. The map also indicates the location of any special features of the area.
Features of the Area This section describes special features noted on the map. If the location has items or areas of interest with which the characters can interact, those features are described here. Look here to see if a door is out of the ordinary, if an altar has a secret compartment, or if the area includes treasure.
Read-Aloud Text
Treasure Preparation
Read aloud text provides information about what the characters can see and are aware of. You do not have to read it word for word; feel free to paraphrase and use your own words when describing this information. Use read aloud text wisely; they are written for the most common approach to a particular situation and what your player characters do might require you to alter the information in any number of ways.
As with the first installment of the Scales of War campaign, “Siege of Bordrin’s Watch” makes use of the parcel system of treasure rewards as described in the Dungeon Master’s Guide. The characters should accumulate 15 parcels by the end of the adventure. Of these, they should gain the reward for completing the mission (four parcels for 1,000 gp), and then whatever treasures they find along the way (the remaining eleven). You can supply these treasures in whatever way you wish, but the following sidebar presents the
August 20 08
|
D u n g e o n 1 57
7
Siege of Bordrin's Watch most likely rooms to bear treasure. During your preparation, assign parcels from those that follow to the rooms in the spaces provided. Use the players’ wish lists to come up with magic items for the first six parcels.
Starting the Adventure You can kick off the adventure in two ways: quick and slow. Use the quick-start method if you want to move straight to the action. The slow start emphasizes roleplaying and stretches out the opening sequence to build the tension leading up to the major quest.
Quick Start When using this method, read aloud the following text and proceed to the skill challenge described under the Monastery of the Sundered Chain on page 27. War approaches. A week ago, a call to arms sounded throughout the Elsir Valley, summoning warriors to help defend Bordrin’s Watch in the Stonehome Mountains far to the west. Word of an army of orcs on the march had spread through the Vale for months, but now, it appeared the rumors were true. You, along with militia groups and other adventurers from all over the Vale, marched west until you came to the city of Overlook, a large fortified community raised by dwarves centuries ago. Once there, you and two other groups were invited to attend the Council of Elders, where you learned the Bordrin’s Watch had already been compromised—advanced parties of orcs had uncovered the tunnels beneath the mountains and were already coming through
Treasure Parcels Parcel A: _______________________, M-2. Parcel B: _______________________, M-4. Parcel C: _______________________, M-4. Parcel D: _______________________, M-5. Parcel E: _______________________, M-5. Parcel F: _______________________, M-5. Parcel G: _______________________, V-3. Parcel H: _______________________, V-3. Parcel I: ________________________, V-4. Parcel J: ________________________, V-4. Parcel K: _______________________, V-4. Based on the guidelines in the Dungeon Master’s Guide, the following parcels can go in the lines above. Rely on the wish lists your players gave you for the first four parcels. Parcel 1: Magic item, level 7 Parcel 2: Magic item, level 7 Parcel 3: Magic item, level 6 Parcel 4: Magic item, level 5 Parcel 5: Magic item, level 5 Parcel 6: Magic item, level 4 Parcel 7: Two potions of healing, two gems worth 100 gp, 80gp Parcel 8: One potion of healing, 250 gp art object, 40 gp
Parcel 9: 80 gp, 300 sp Parcel 10: One potion of healing, 90 gp Parcel 11: 50 gp, 400 sp Adapting the Adventure: “Siege at Bordrin’s Watch” is designed with five players in mind. This said, you can adapt the adventure for larger groups easily by adding more treasure and inserting a few extra monsters using the guidelines presented in the Dungeon Master’s Guide. When adapting the adventure for larger groups, keep it simple. Where possible, just add one monster whose level equals the encounter level for each additional PC. Otherwise, look for appropriate monsters from this adventure and the Monster Manual to help stiffen up the resistance. This adventure is also designed for 3rd-level characters. As written, a group of 2nd-level characters can play through the adventure, as could a slightly larger party of 1st-level characters, but be sure to give the characters plenty of chances to take extended rests so that they can have a fair shot at surviving the expedition. For higher-level groups, adapting the adventure takes a bit more work. You’ll need to add monsters and increase the treasure rewards to amounts appropriate for the characters. In all, adjusting the adventure is not too arduous, and with a little work, you can run this scenario for groups of three to eight players, and for characters of 1st through 5th level.
August 20 08
|
D u n g e o n 1 57
8
Siege of Bordrin's Watch to harass supply trains and reinforcements bound for the fortress. The Council asked your group and the others to descend into these tunnels, clear them out, and seal them off before the main host of the enemy army arrived. For your efforts, the Council promised to pay each group 1,000 gp upon their return. Your team is to head to the old Monastery of the Sundered Chain to the southwest, where they can gain access to the tunnels below, while one group heads for Bordrin’s Watch to secure those passages, and the other to Bordrin’s Watch. With your mission clear, you and your companions head for the mountains to meet your destiny.
Slow Start Rather than jumping straight into the adventure, you can extend the opening sequence to allow the adventure to unfold more naturally, giving the players the chance to develop their characters and participate in the events leading up to the adventure proper. Consider using some or all the following events summarized in the quick start. ✦ Have the characters hear about the call to arms while spending some downtime in their favorite watering hole or someplace else the characters spend a lot of time. Interested characters might do some snooping about to learn more about the nature of the threat, Bordrin’s Watch, and the Stonehome Mountains. You could resolve this through roleplaying alone, portioning out information from local NPCs or other characters introduced in the previous adventure. At some point, the town council approaches the PCs and asks that they lend their support to the dwarves. Mercenary characters might engage in a social challenge to negotiate the terms of their service. This level 3 skill challenge has a complexity of 2 and uses Bluff, Diplomacy, Insight, and Intimidate as the primary skills. A success grants the characters
a monetary reward (choose one or two parcels and don’t use them later in the adventure). A failure results in a monetary reward (one parcel) and a general frostiness (–2 penalty to all Diplomacy checks) whenever the PCs return to Brindol. ✦ Once the characters set out from Brindol, they need to travel along the Dwarfroad or the Elsir River to reach Overlook. Along the way, they might have a few encounters in the wilderness (especially if the PCs aren’t quite 3rd level when the adventure begins). Wilderness Encounters on page 23 provides several options. ✦ After a long (and possibly uneventful) journey out of the Elsir Vale, the characters stumble onto a band of orcs just outside the Westdeep. These scouts left the mountains—against orders—to do a bit of looting in the countryside. The characters face two orc raiders and five orc drudges. Astute players might realize if orcs are on this side of the mountain, perhaps this means the enemy has already breached Bordrin’s Watch!
gray and wrinkled. The third is younger, with black hair and hard features. The two female elders are both attractive, one with red hair and the other with brown. All five wear the robes of their office—luxuriant purple and silver damask. Arranged beneath them, filling the chamber completely, is a motley crowd of common soldiers, militia, and adventurers, with each race and occupation represented, and most standing in small groups, but a few mingling. Characters that met any other groups while in the city—the Freeriders, the Farstriders, or others (see page 26 for names)—should see them here as well as any other parties you design. Allow the characters to mingle with these groups as the players like, but few groups know much about what’s going on and if the PCs faced orcs, they likely know more than the rest of the host. Most groups are polite, but the Farstriders drip with self-confidence bordering on arrogance. When ready to proceed, the youngest male elder steps forward and addresses the crowd. Read or paraphrase the following text:
At Overlook, the adventurers are free to explore the city, resupply, and purchase new equipment. Not long after they arrive, they should learn they aren’t the only adventurers in the city. In fact, the city crawls with them. Also, the Council of Elders convenes shortly after the PCs enter Overlook to discuss the threat to the city and the vale beyond, and then they summon the various adventuring groups, militias, and others to Caer Overlook (see page 10). Once there, the PCs and other adventurers are led through a maze of corridors until they reach the High Hall. Standing on the 20-foot tall dais are the five elders. Each of the three male dwarves have long beards that hang to their feet, and two are old, being
Welcome to High Hall friends. I am Elder Cadrick. I don’t much see the point in bandying words, so I’ll lay it out for you. War is upon us. A great host of orcs comes from the west. Their intention is clear. They will come through the mountains bent on slaughter. Those they spare can look forward to a short life of slavery. Overlook, and Bordrin’s Watch in the mountains, have long held fast against these raids, but our scouts say never has such an army gathered. Thus, we turn to you brave souls to help defend not only Overlook, but also all the Elsir Vale. When the orcs arrive, we’re certain they will come up through the pass. We know this because already there have been attacks from the tunnels below, compromising the
August 20 08
|
D u n g e o n 1 57
9
Siege of Bordrin's Watch fastness. The defenders have fought back the savages, but it’s clear the rest are coming and fast. So here’s the plan. Durkik Forgeheart will lead the militias and most of you to bolster Bordrin’s Watch. Orc trailblazers infest the tunnels below, so we’ve tasked their security to the Farstriders. One more mission remains, though. We need a group to evacuate the monastery on the other side of the mountains. It’s dangerous work, what with the orcs and all, but priests need a warning of what’s coming if they don’t know already. Do we have any volunteers?
If the group doesn’t step forward, you can have the Freeriders (see page 24) or another group step up instead. The Council sends the PCs to defend Bordrin’s Watch. Not long after they arrive, word comes that the other group hasn’t yet returned, so an officer sends the PCs to find out what happened, though with only half the reward. Assuming they don’t mutiny, proceed with the Monastery as normal.
No one steps forward to take this mission, so it falls to the PCs to do so. When they volunteer, Edgar Sommerfield, the leader of the Farstriders, angrily steps forward and says, “Should I remind the Council of our previous arrangement?” Cadrick responds with a nod and a placating gesture, thanks the PCs for their service, and dismisses the gathered crowd. The elder speaks with the Farstrider’s leader for a few moments, after which Sommerfield storms out of the hall. Cadrick holds the PCs and promises them 1,000 gp upon their return. Unless the PCs have any other business, you’re free to proceed with the adventure at the Monastery of the Sundered Chain described on page 27.
The city of Overlook stands on the eastern slopes of the Stonehome Mountains, a hoary range of crumbling peaks as old as the world. The city’s founding lies sometime far back in the mists of time, at a point after the dwarves in this region threw off the shackles of slavery and chased the giants and orcs west across the mountains at the end of the Age of Chains. Overlook, and the fastness of Bordrin’s Watch, were raised to safeguard the liberated dwarf peoples and to be the first line of defense should their ancient enemies forget their defeat and seek to enslave the dwarves once more. Since its founding, Overlook has never come under attack, though Bordrin’s Watch has time and again, at least once every century. Overlook supplies the mountain pass with soldiers, supplies, and needed resources, ensuring the Watch is never without the goods they need to live up to their ancient responsibility. While doughty dwarf warriors hold the Watch, the city is far more cosmopolitan and includes peoples of nearly every race and culture known in this corner of the world. Dwarves are still the dominate group, but humans and halflings make up a close second, followed by dragonborn, tieflings, and a
Troubleshooting: The PCs might be curious about the Farstriders, and a little chatting (DC 15 Streetwise) reveals the group has a storied career, having slain a black dragon, wiped out tribes of savage humanoids, recovered fabled relics, and more. Should the characters ask Cadrick about them, he mentions that the Farstriders met with the Council earlier and negotiated for the job with the most danger and glory, which is why they are descending into the mountains to secure them.
Overlook
smattering of eladrin and elves, and an assortment of other, less familiar, races. Overlook is largely a trading center, and people on both sides of the mountain come to the city to exchange goods, rumors, and information. The city’s numerous markets and bustling streets makes it the ideal place to do business, thus characters in search of a particular tool or device are more likely to find it here than anywhere for miles around. Supplementing its trade is a robust mining industry. The mountains are rich in iron, silver, tin, and no few gemstones. Dwarf and human miners and prospectors set out from Overlook each day, some working in the blackness of the deep mines, while others scour the heights in search of treasures—some succeeding, others failing, and others still vanishing in the misty peaks never to be seen again. Although the city depends on Bordrin’s Watch to endure most of the attacks from the west, the city is not without its own defenses. The dwarves erected steep walls to protect themselves, but as the city outgrew its original protections, the inhabitants raised more walls to encircle the growing population. So far, this has happened four times, giving the city four sets of walls, one inside of the other. The shantytown, the unofficial ninth district, grows beyond the eastern walls and it’s just a matter of time before the Council decides to raise another wall and add those squatters to the rest of the city. Piercing each wall, on both the western side and the eastern side, is a large gate flanked by two square stone towers. Most times, the gates stand open, even in the dead of night, but when trouble looms, such as now, the gates are closed at dusk, and the inner gates—the ones leading into High Hall—might close even earlier.
August 20 08
|
D u n g e o n 1 57
10
Siege of Bordrin's Watch The outer walls are 100 feet tall,—taller where they travel over higher elevation. Each inner wall stands another 20 feet tall. Guards patrol the walls infrequently, though the gatehouses are held by a half-dozen warriors (dwarf bolters, Monster Manual, page 97).
Districts Overlook has eight districts, each distinguished by the types of its people there as well as the industry one finds there.
Blister “Looking for work? You ought to prick the blister an’ see what bubbles up . . .” The Blister is a rough-and-tumble section of the city, populated by mercenaries, adventurers, and the usual sort of traveling folk with few roots. Characterized by a great number of winesinks, taverns, pleasure dens, gambling halls, and bordellos, Blister is not a place to get lost. Buildings: Blister’s buildings are a mix of timber and stone of architectural styles ranging the gamut. Old dwarven buildings stand next to almost organic tiefling dreaming halls, while a halfling gambling den sits in the shadow of an old temple dedicated to Sehanine in her more larcenous aspect. Streets: Blister’s roads thread their way through the press of buildings, darkened by shadows cast by structures built too close together. Filth and detritus clog the alleys, sometimes spilling out onto the major thoroughfares—that is, roads large enough to accommodate a horse. People: Humans, halflings, and dragonborn have the largest numbers in Blister, though one can find a variety of races here. As mentioned, most are adven-
turers, thieves, and traveling folk, representing the city’s most diverse population. Sights: Visitors and inhabitants alike might see a pair of human thugs beating a half-orc with their clubs in an alley, a scantily clad man calling out to passersby, a street magician performing tricks, an elderly alchemist selling cure-alls, street preachers prophesizing the end of the world, tents and stalls, clotheslines stretched across the streets, and bands of adventurers looking for trouble. Smells: All sorts of odors waft up from Blister, including smells of exotic cuisine to the expected
stench of a crowded district. Wood smoke hangs over the streets, mixing with other, more sinister smells. Sounds: Merchants hawk their wares amid laughter, screams, the murmur of crowds, the clatter of kitchens, cries of “thief!,” the whistle of a constable in pursuit, the sounds of barking dogs, the hiss of cats, and the growls of spiretop drakes.
Boneyard “Not much to do in the Boneyard aside from sicking up.” Occupying the southeast corner of Overlook, Boneyard has every distasteful business and venture,
August 20 08
|
D u n g e o n 1 57
11
Siege of Bordrin's Watch including everything from the city’s slaughterhouses, renderers, tanners, dyers, and even the city’s graveyards. Buildings: As an industrial corner of the city, most buildings are plain and functional, and they are constructed to serve the operation and little else. Streets: The Boneyard features broad roads in good repair so wagons can easily navigate the district. People: Humans are the largest group of people here and most are dirty, lacking in sophistication, and
inured to the foul odors wafting up from the more toxic parts of the district. Sights: Common sights include wagons laden with animal carcasses, workers trudging to their jobs, plumes of acrid smoke, and pipes leaking toxic fluids into the gutters. The Boneyard is as unpleasant to look at as it is to smell. Smells: A pall of smoke stinking of urine and sulfur hangs over the Boneyard, turning the sun a pale shade of brown. Even though the locals do their
Overlook This city of stone stands on the side of the Stonehome Mountains. Constructed as a haven for newly liberated dwarves from their former giant masters, Overlook has since outgrown its noble roots and become a haven for peoples all over the Elsir Vale and beyond. Population: 12,250; about another 5,000 people live in small settlements scattered on the lower slopes. The people of Overlook are mostly dwarves, humans, and halflings, though pockets of dragonborn, tiefling, eladrin, and elf communities are isolated in their own ethnic neighborhoods. Overlook’s importance as a trade center results in great numbers of travelers from faraway lands and of a wild assortment of races, cultures, and beliefs, lending the city its cosmopolitan atmosphere. Government: The Council of Elders, a group of five male and female dwarves, governs Overlook. Each is elected to office and serves a 10-year term. The dwarves see ruling as a burden and none relish the job, preferring to hand power off to someone else. Heading up the Council is the Great Elder, Morgoff Stonefirst, an aging dwarf who’s ready to retire. One representative from each of the eight districts of Overlook attends the Council, serving as
advisors and also to air the grievances of their particular constituencies. Although these individuals have the power to influence, they have no real authority in the city, though many are wealthy and powerful by means other than the office they hold. Defense: Overlook keeps a standing garrison of 150 warriors armed and ready for any threat. In times of trouble (such as now), Overlook can muster another 500 warriors from the local militia, and another 100 from the outlying settlements. At Bordrin’s Watch, another 500 hundred warriors protect the mountain pass from within its steep walls and skyscraping towers. Districts: Blister, Boneyard, Elftown, Forgeworks, High Hall, Nine Bells, Stonehammer, Tradetown, Shantytown (unofficial). Inns: Belden’s Rest; Cadrick’s Boarding House; Clean Sheets; House of Sleep; Mountain’s Hearth; Polliver’s; the Turned Spoon; and numerous others. Taverns: Coxcomb Spirits; Dergan’s XXX Brewery; Michael’s Blond; Pickled Imp; Pig and Bucket; the Salty Mug; and numerous others. Supplies: Dungeoneer’s Survival Emporium; Elsir Consortium; Merty’s; Stonehome Treasures. Temples: Divine Knot (various); Shrine of Erathis; Stone Anvil (Moradin).
best to keep the streets free of rubbish, the materials and industries produce ripe odors a shade better than death. Sounds: One can hear the creaks of wagons, the spillage of liquids, crackling fire, the screams of animals at the slaughter, and the grunts of hard labor.
Elftown “Don’t know why they still call it Elftown; can’t say as I’ve ever seen an elf there.” Elftown covers the northwestern corner of the inner city and takes its name from the one elf to live there some seventy years ago. The community consists of upscale and well-off entrepreneurs, merchants, bankers, lawyers, physicians, and other members of Overlook’s upper crust, and many folk elsewhere want to inhabit a small house on the edge of this fine quarter. Buildings: With fine buildings of astonishing architecture, white-washed or painted in pastel colors, Elftown has some of the nicest homes and shops in the city. Even the smaller houses are sumptuous compared to those of pretty much anywhere else in the city, and all are accented by parks, lawns of green grass, statuary, and beds of exotic flowers and semimobile plants. Streets: Aside from the broad Dwarfroad that winds though Elftown, most streets are large enough to accommodate two carriages side by side. The roads are covered in pale white stone and maintained by a legion of well-paid servants. Even the side streets are clean and lit with everburning torches contained in iron lanterns to chase away the shadows. People: In spite of the name, few, if any, elves live in Elftown, though several eladrin are affiliated with the ambassador who takes residence here. Instead,
August 20 08
|
D u n g e o n 1 57
12
Siege of Bordrin's Watch wealthy humans and dwarves command this section of the city, though one can be sure to find a handful of dragonborn, a smattering of tieflings, and a few reckless halflings. Sights: Observers can see black carriages pulled by teams of matching horses, patrols of uniformed guards, and fountains sending spray into the air, as well as servants painting houses, cleaning the streets, and avoiding attention. Smells: One is likely to smell fine cooking, freshcut grass, the perfume of brilliant flowers, incense, and other pleasant aromas. Sounds: Notes played on a harp, the singing of a lovely young woman (or a younger man), a haughty noble screaming at a servant, the whinny of horses, and the clink of gold are common sounds.
Forgeworks “Let me tell you about this place I know. If you’re looking for armor, I can think of nowhere better to go.” The Forgeworks, or just the Forge, is a middle-class district given over to successful artisans, tradesfolk, and other men and women who work hard and are successful in their professions. More than half of the buildings here are workshops with apartments overhead. Warehouses, businesses, stables, and other places of industry round out the rest. The Forgeworks stands in the Middle City, south of Tradetown. Buildings: Small shops with flats above line the streets, punctuated with the occasional tavern, shrine to Moradin or Erathis, and speckled with overlarge warehouses. Streets: Broad streets, wide enough to accommodate aurochs and wagons, run through this district, while narrow alleys branch off to disappear in the maze of buildings beyond. Cobbles cover the ground
and most are even to provide smooth transport to and from the Forge. People: Dwarves and humans live side by side in the Forgeworks, but one can also find a small population of half-elves, gnomes, and a few others as well. During the day, business here brings folk from all over the city to do business. Sights: Blacksmiths hard at work at their forges, weavers chatting while working their looms, painters, tailors, and a host of other shops and business, all produce goods for the citizens of Overlook and beyond. Smells: The air is pregnant with the smells of sweat, smoke, and industry. Street vendors sell meat
pies, sausages, and other portable foods for workers and visitors alike, lending the pleasant (or not so pleasant) aromas of their fare to the atmosphere. Although a busy part of Overlook, the Forgeworks is surprisingly clean. Sounds: Frequent sounds are hammers on anvils, a sharp curse, the hum of conversation, wagons creaking, aurochs straining in their traces, and the sound of footfalls from passersby.
High Hall “The heart and soul of Overlook, son, High Hall is where the movers and shakers make all the decisions.”
August 20 08
|
D u n g e o n 1 57
13
Siege of Bordrin's Watch High Hall, or the Old City, is where the city leaders convene to govern Overlook. Few folk still live in High Hall since nearly every inch of available space is given over to the various ministries making up the city’s government. Thus, aside from a few extremely wealthy folks, most people funnel out of High Hall at the end of the day to head home to Elftown, Stonehammer, or elsewhere. Buildings: High Hall consists of a forest of massive buildings packed tightly inside its walls. Towers thrust up from the fortresslike structures, climbing high above the walls and affording a look at the entire city and the lands all around. Most buildings house one of the dozen or so ministries that see to keeping the city operating. Examples include the Ministry of Commerce, the Ministry of Foreign Affairs, the Ministry of War, and so on. Each operates out of a marble or brick building fronted by impressive statues of dwarf warriors, artisans, and historical figures, while the walls themselves bear intricate carvings and basreliefs capturing key moments from the city’s history. The outer edge of High Hall holds the businesses and few homes of those who grease the engines of politics. Restaurants, inns, and a few shops provide patronage to the city’s elite, but they shut down at nightfall. Streets: Suffering from too many buildings in a confined space, High Hall’s roads are positively perilous. Tight and cramped while winding through the heart of Overlook, they contain numerous shadowy alcoves, dead-ends, and limited range of sight as they turn and twist. Although High Hall doesn’t have a thievery problem, it does suffer from hired killers. The dwarves deal honorably with one another, but the same cannot be said for all the city’s representatives, and rival humans, tieflings, and others might resort
to murder to eliminate an inflexible politician. Thus, most high-ranking officials surround themselves with guards, making travel anywhere in High Hall all the harder. People: The Council of Elders might all be dwarves, but the rest of the city’s government is as diverse as the city. Bureaucrats, functionaries, messengers, and palanquins bearing representatives from other districts all make their way through High Hall throughout the day, and sometimes at night. Sights: Buildings, buildings, and more buildings crowd the district, their carved façades telling ancient stories of heroic dwarves, the end of the Age of Chains, and other historical events that helped shape this region. One might see workers cleaning up a murder scene, while street vendors sell everything from amulets that promise to bring good luck in the courts, to food dealers, and tattered street lawyers searching for clients. Smells: Overcrowding and the malaise of too many people gives High Hall an unpleasant aroma in spite of the fact that the Council spares no expense in keeping this part of the city clean. Wafting up from the streets is a mix of rubbish, food, and sweat, but compared to other sections of Overlook, High Hall is tolerable. Sounds: Throughout the day, a steady hum of conversation sounds, punctuated with the ringing of bells, the angry shouts of guards as they escort their worthy charges through the press of people, voices raised in protest at some new law, and an assortment of other noises make High Hall loud. At night, however, it becomes deathly quiet.
Nine Bells “Nine Bells, Nine Hells, all the same to me.” Nine Bells district takes its name for the nine temples found in the heart of the district. Since these temples cater to the sick and the poor, this district draws the hungry, the diseased, and the destitute to its streets. Before the walls were raised here, Nine Bells was a place of great wealth—a community favored by those rich citizens who wanted to escape the clamor of the city. However, after it was annexed along with Blister and the Boneyard, the estates were abandoned and the folks fled to Stonehammer or Elftown to escape the flood of destitute people that washed into the place. Now, Nine Bells is the worst part of the city and is ever a source of embarrassment for the city’s elite. Buildings: With rotting estates, old vineyards now overrun by tents and wooden shacks, sagging rowhouses, and communities of tents, Nine Bells decays even while the rest of the city grows strong. The businesses, such as they are, cater to darker interests, including dreaming halls, sinister taverns, fighting pits, and disease-ridden brothels. Huddled in one corner of this district are nine great temples, raised long ago, but faced, on all sides, by poverty, despair, and the worst sorts of people imaginable. Called the Divine Knot, a few of these temples have been abandoned, while the rest keep small staffs of dedicated servants who soldier on to fight the misery plaguing this district. Streets: As one might expect, Nine Bells’ streets are muddy lanes and narrow alleys, all filthy and most worming through the press of decaying buildings. Closest to the temples, the muddy roads gain cobbles, typically clean and free of debris. People: Nine Bells is the bottom of the barrel, so to speak, and it welcomes anyone who has nowhere
August 20 08
|
D u n g e o n 1 57
14
Siege of Bordrin's Watch else to go. Humans, dwarves, tieflings, halflings, gnomes, and even a few half-orcs scratch out an existence in this wretched mire. Despair is strong here and it drives many of its people to commit unspeakable acts to survive. Drugs, prostitution, and even slavery can all be found here. Sights: A dead dog rotting in the streets, a swarm of rats cornering a gaunt gnome in a darkened alley, a hideous crone hobbling under the weight of her scavenged scraps, a gang of children armed with sharp knives and hungry eyes, and a robed priest swinging a smoking censer to chase away the spirits can all be found in Nine Bells. Smells: A fecal stench hangs in the air, mixed with the equally nauseating odors of vomit, rot, and rubbish. People here are unclean and their odors mingle with that of the befouled air to create a symphony of noxious odors. Nearest to the temples, the air grows a bit more tolerable thanks to incense and the modicum of respect the people show the men and women of the cloth. Sounds: Within this area, one can hear mad laughter echoing out of a darkened ally, a woman’s cry, a wailing child, the sound of flies devouring an abandoned carcass, the splash of effluvia, and the whisper of a threat.
Stonehammer “There’s a different kind of stench in Stonehammer . . . it’s the stench of arrogance.” Stonehammer occupies the southern half of the inner city, and it wraps around High Hall up to the Dwarfroad. Like Elftown, Stonehammer is home to the wealthy citizens of Overlook, specifically the dwarves. Since this district is cleaner, safer, and more exclusive than other parts of the city, great deal of resentment
exists toward the folks of Stonehammer from those of lower means and status. Buildings: Stonehammer is the most dwarven of districts, and its buildings are grand, sweeping, and magnificent to behold. Towers that thrust up from lower levels rival those found in High Hall in terms of height and grandeur. Since space is at a premium, the dwarves here have built upward. The wealthiest citizens live in the aeries, while servants, low-born dwarves, and all those who support the sumptuous lifestyles of the elite dwell in the ’Dark—the bowels of Stonehammer. Streets: The towers feature wide, sturdy bridges of stone, each fitted with high railings to prevent accidents and equipped with everburning torches for safety. In the ’Dark, the roads are tight and twisting, threading around the towers’ bases, and plunged in nearly perpetual darkness. People: Stonehammer is exclusively a dwarven district and nondwarves are not permitted to live here. Other races often work in the ’Dark, but even they must keep their residences outside the district. Folk here are wealthy and powerful, and they represent the best the city has to offer. Sights: A knot of dwarf priests bestow blessings on a newly completed bridge, a palanquin borne by a dozen human thralls bears a dwarf lady to an upscale market, a pompous dwarf aristocrat waxes on about his successful ventures in Tradetown, and stern-faced guards armed with halberds block access into the innards of an impressive tower. Smells: None; the air is clean, although a breeze might push the fetid odors from the rest of the city, but such occasions are rare and brief. In the ’Dark, dust, sweat, and wood smoke fill the air, tinged with a faint chemical smell.
Sounds: Deep, resonating laughter, the bass voice of a dwarf noble, the grunt of a thrall bearing the weight of his charge, the hiss of a spiretop drake, and the sounds of good living permeate the district.
Tradetown “Have a care in Tradetown, son. You can go there with a full purse and come out with nothing more than a pail of beans.” Tradetown is a melting pot of all races, cultures, and occupations. In many ways, Tradetown is a lot like the Blister, but it has been established for longer and it has a mix of fabulous wealth and appalling poverty. Tradetown, as one might expect, is a commercial and retail district, where merchants, tradesfolk, and prospectors come to do business. Most middle-tier business-inclined people have homes here and gather in coffee houses, upscale bars, and bathhouses to do business. In stark contrast to the bustling commerce, Tradetown is also home to a powerful thieving guild named the Lost Ones. A clandestine organization, they have agreements with nearly all the major enterprises here, offering protection (or rather exemption) from thievery and the promise to leave their customers alone. Buildings: Tradetown is a hodgepodge of stone buildings (many of dwarven architecture), wooden structures, warehouses, shops, inns, taverns, and everything and anything a person might want in a city of this size. Streets: Tradetown is every bit as cramped as the Blister and in some ways more so for the vendors and hawkers crowding the streets. Moving merchandise into Tradetown is a chore and often requires porters rather than wagons to transport anything of size. The
August 20 08
|
D u n g e o n 1 57
15
Siege of Bordrin's Watch roads are cobbled, but alleys and side-streets might be muddy and covered in rubbish. People: Tradetown is home to a dizzying number of people, from elves and eladrin to lumbering halforcs and goliaths. Humans and gnomes rub elbows in taverns, while dwarves of low character might engage in backroom deals with sinister tieflings. Sights: Merchants line the roads, selling an assortment of goods that range from magic items, ritual ingredients, and curiosities, to common goods such as pots, pans, cutlery, trade goods, and everything in between. Shady men and women walk the streets, eyes in constant motion as they search for new marks, while grifters and charlatans peddle cure-alls or use trickery to part their customers from their coin. Urchins run through the alleys, leading visitors through the safer parts of Tradetown, while disguised halflings lead other visitors to the nastier corners, where the travelers can find beatings and robberies instead of their destinations. Smells: An unsettling mixture of roasting meats, beer, ale, and spices blends with excrement, sweat, and the strange odors of illegal substances, wreathing the district in a perpetual haze. Sounds: One can hear woman’s laughter, a dragonborn’s growl, an argument, a shout of “thief!,” children playing, a yelping dog, a persistent merchant’s pitch, and the whispered invitations from second-story rooms overlooking the narrow streets.
Shantytown “You think Nine Bells is bad? Spend a night in the Shantytown.” Not a true district, Shantytown clings to the back of the city like festering boil. Shantytown is a wretched maze of tents, shacks, and rotting wooden buildings,
and it is home to the poorest and most desperate of people that have nowhere else to go. Most of Shantytown’s people are refugees from other lands, victims of tragedy and circumstance, or exiles who keep a low profile so they can go about their wicked business without attracting attention. Thus, Shantytown’s people are beggars, destitute farmers, maimed adventurers, undead, necromancers, cultists, and worse, all thrown together in one of the most desperate spots in the region. Buildings: Tents and lean-tos make up the majority of “buildings” in Shantytown, though some wooden structures rise up from the mess like islands in a sea of misery. Streets: Little better than muddy paths wending through heaps of debris and filth, no one is sure if the mud is actually mud. . . . People: People of all races and from all lands live here, though humans appear to be the most numerous. Most have hard luck stories, but a few live here by choice—for easy hunting or to escape notice. Sights: One can see a filthy child screaming in the middle of a street, a flock of chickens fleeing from a hungry cat, a brown-clad cultist with a rat skull on a thong around his neck, a shrine dedicated to a sinister god, and a bloated corpse ripening in the sun. Smells: Filth, filth, and more filth—the stench of Shantytown is staggering. Sounds: Within this area one can hear laughter and crying, moans and sighs, the squelch of footfalls, the grunt of pain, the short shriek of butchered animal, the howl of a dog in pain.
Key Locations The districts are broadly described so you can stock them with shops, temples, and inns as you need, but a
few locations warrant mentioning. Each entry corresponds with a location shown on the Overlook map.
1. Dwarfroad The old Dwarfroad emerges from the Elsir Vale and climbs the slopes of the Stonehome Mountains, moving through Overlook and ascending up to Bordrin’s Watch and down the other side into the badlands beyond. The old road is far older than Overlook, having been paved during the Age of Chains by dwarf slaves for their giant masters. After the dwarves successfully rebelled, the Dwarfroad served as a primary trade route for the old dwarven kingdom that followed, but over the last century or so, goblins, bandits, and worse, have made travel along it perilous. Still, closer to Overlook, the road is somewhat safe and folk near the city still make use of it.
2. The Gray Redoubt of Rufus Crumley The so-called “gray redoubt” is a leaning tower of gray and black stone that has the dubious distinction of being the tallest structure in Shantytown. Speculated as being as old as the city, the tower has had many owners over the centuries, but is currently the home to one Rufus Crumley. A dabbler in necromancy and the dark arts, Crumley is a wildly unpopular figure in the Shantytown, but powerful enough that no one dares report him to the authorities. For the most part, Crumley keeps to himself, working in his laboratory to master the secrets of undeath and foul magic. It’s whispered that undead horrors guard the tower, so not even the thieves of the “district” dare attempt burglary. It’s well known that Crumley pays good gold for cadavers and
August 20 08
|
D u n g e o n 1 57
16
Siege of Bordrin's Watch Rufus Crumley Level 9 Elite Controller
Medium natural humanoid, human XP 800 Initiative +7 Senses Perception +8 HP 188; Bloodied 94 AC 25; Fortitude 20, Reflex 24, Will 22 Saving Throws +2 Speed 6 Action Points 1 m Dagger (standard; at-will) Poison, Weapon +13 vs. AC; 1d4 + 3 damage, and ongoing 5 poison damage (save ends). r Ray of Rot (standard; at-will) Necrotic Ranged 10; +13 vs. Fortitude; 1d6 + 6 necrotic damage, and the target is slowed until the end of Rufus’s next turn. A A Grave Wind (standard; recharge ⚄ ⚅ ) Necrotic Area burst 2 within 10; +14 vs. Fortitude; 2d8 + 6 necrotic damage. A swirling cloud of souls appears in the area and remains until the end of Rufus’s next turn. It grants concealment, and any creature that starts its turn in the area takes 6 necrotic damage. Invisibility (standard; sustain: standard; encounter) Illusion Rufus can turn invisible until the end of his next turn. Alignment Evil Languages Common, Infernal, Supernal Skills Arcana +16, Religion +13 Str 11 (+4) Dex 16 (+7) Wis 19 (+8) Con 14 (+6) Int 22 (+10) Cha 14 (+6) Equipment patched robes, dagger, staff
is knowledgeable in a few rituals useful for removing afflictions, and, if it can believed, thwart death. DM Tip: Although Rufus deals in black magic, he doesn’t pose much of a threat to Overlook since his work is largely theoretical. Should the PCs need discreet healing for an ailment or death, Rufus provides it with no questions asked, making him a useful, if shady ally.
3. Clean Sheets A sagging, rotting building leaning out over the old Dwarfroad, this inn hasn’t had clean sheets since it first opened for business a decade ago. What it does offer is shelter and a suspicious meal. Clean Sheets’ accommodations include a pair of private rooms, or
a cot in a large common room in the attic. The main floor consists of a kitchen and dining hall where a patron can buy a burned or undercooked meal, tepid beer, and cloudy water for a reasonable price. DM’s Tip: Yerrin Dalovoy, a halfling with a wicked scar on his left cheek, runs the place, having won it in a game of Three Dragon Ante a few years back. He uses the inn as a front to smuggle drugs and poisons into Overlook, supplying his contacts in the Lost Folk with useful commodities for their criminal interests.
4. Mountain’s Hearth Just inside the east gates and facing the old Dwarfroad is a three-story inn named the Mountain’s Hearth. Famed for its clean and neat accommodations, fine meals, and pleasant staff, the Hearth is one of the more popular stops in Overlook. The dwarf matron Reggen runs the place like clockwork, and her persistence and dedication has paid off. Unfortunately, the Lost Folk have been putting pressure on her to pay for protection. So far, she has resisted and has paid the price for her refusal in the vandalism and dark threats she has endured. She’d pay well if someone could get these thugs off her back.
5. Pig and Bucket One of the Blister’s most famous dives, the Pig and Bucket is a one-story tavern squashed between two boarding houses of ill-repute. Most of the tavern consists of the beer hall, where booths line the walls, and row tables and benches fill the open area in the center. A wooden bar, replete with names and curses carved onto its surface, runs along the back wall, where a dozen casks hold a variety of beers.
Adventurers and mercenaries loiter in the Pig and Bucket, because it’s a good place to find work and exchange news. Merchants, wizards, and shady types drift in and out the bat-wing doors day or night, so one doesn’t have to wait long before someone blows in with a job offer. Kyle Rester cultivates this atmosphere since he was an adventurer in his youth. His bright red hair has gone to gray and his freckled face is creased and wrinkled with age, but he’s competent and knows his way around a sword.
6. Dungeoneer’s Survival Emporium A narrow building, but deep, the Dungeoneer’s Survival Emporium is a general store specializing in common goods such as rope, packs, tents, and bedrolls—all available for reasonable prices. The shop doesn’t deal in weapons or armor, but if a customer flirts enough with Myra Edgerton, a half-elf of prodigious size, he might just gain access to the store of wondrous items she has collected over the years. DM’s Tip: Myra is in fact a doppelganger assassin (Monster Manual, page 71) and uses her cover to avert suspicion toward her nocturnal ventures. She’s careful to conceal her true nature, and she acts as a facilitator for those needing a discreet blade, claiming she knows people, when in fact, she is the “people.”
7. Tombs Adventurers don’t have much reason to explore the Boneyard unless they’re in need of leathers, dyes, or a funeral service. In fact, the thing that brings most people to the Boneyard is the Tombs, Overlook’s old graveyard. As large above ground as it is below, Tombs contains the burial vaults for citizens dating back to the city’s founding. The city eventually swallowed it
August 20 08
|
D u n g e o n 1 57
17
Siege of Bordrin's Watch up when it annexed the Boneyard a hundred years ago. For as much as the groundskeepers maintain Tombs, the cemetery is a grim and foreboding place, aided by the overlarge temple of the Raven Queen that crouches in the heart of the maze of headstones, vaults, and crypts. DM’s Tip: Although not advertised, Tombs loses a dozen cadavers every year. No one is sure where they go or if there are robbers about, but the attendants— who leave much to be desired in their vigilance—see the loss as acceptable.
8. Dergan’s XXX Brewery Dergan’s XXX Brewery is home of Dergan’s XXX Stout, a full-bodied black lager brewed using a recipe passed down through a dozen generations of dwarf brewmasters. The current brewer is a dwarf by the name of Forsworth Clangman, and he takes pride in continuing his family’s tradition. The Brewery is beloved by laborers throughout the Forgeworks, and off-duty workers come each day to drink away their wages in the comfort of this dark tavern and brewery.
9. Stonehome Treasures Mikal Rensfield runs Stonehome Treasures, an unassuming shop specializing in selling goods produced in and around Overlook. Rensfield, an enterprising human merchant, solicits finished materials from artisans in the city and from the outlying villages and turns them around for a profit in the Forgeworks. His merchandise is an eclectic mix of mundane equipment, weapons, armor, and a smattering of magic items he has picked up for a steal from local explorers. Treasures, as it’s often called, does a brisk business in the city, and adventurers of discerning taste shop here exclusively.
10. Belden’s Rest An adorable elderly couple runs Belden’s Rest. Rory Teng, human, and his wife Ruth, half-elf, have operated the inn since it was first built, and the inn has a reputation for its comfortable rooms, excellent food, and courteous staff. Prices are reasonable and the owners find new ways to surprise and please their guests during their stay. The inn consists of a lounge and restaurant on the main floor, with the upper two floors given over to private rooms. They’re best known for their pressed duck. DM’s Tip: Rory and his wife are secret cultists of Asmodeus and the couple keeps a shrine to the dark god in a secret room attached to their cellar. On (un)holy days, they and their fellow dedicates gather beneath the inn to perform blood sacrifices to their master. They hide their activities well, but the fact that tieflings stay here for free is a big clue to where their loyalties truly lie.
11. The Salty Mug This tavern nestles between the steep cliff that runs through the Tradetown and the middle wall, so the sun shines upon the building only in the middle of the day. The rest of time, shadows cloak the place, providing a fitting atmosphere for a haven of thieves and scum. Founded a dozen years ago by an ex-pirate named Kyne, the Salty Mug immediately attracted the worst sort of clientele—prostitutes, thugs, murderers, thieves, and, of course, adventurers. Fights break out here all the time and murders are common enough that when a stabbing occurs, the bartender—a brutish hobgoblin named Krunk, collects the body and sells it to the renderer the next morning. In spite of the danger, the Salty Mug is a good place to pick up rumors and happenings in the city. People
haunting its booths are connected and they keep a finger on the pulse of the city.
12. Merty’s This gaudy shop fronts the old Dwarfroad as it passes between Tradetown and Forgeworks. The place is painted in pastel colors and big glass windows in the front display adventurers battling with papier-mâché monsters. Merty’s sells a variety of gear and equipment, all for 150% above the normal prices. What the place lacks in good deals, it more than makes up for in variety, making this shop an excellent choice for adventurers looking to track down ingredients, magic items, and other hard-to-find gear. A halfling named Riley Swifttoe owns the place and keeps a gnome artificer on hand to put together custom goods.
13. Shrine of Erathis In the heart of Tradetown stands a small shrine dedicated to Erathis. Little more than a covered altar, littered with stubs of incense and scraps of paper containing prayers offered up by locals for good fortune, and a large idol of the goddess looking off to the horizon, people come here throughout the day or night. A gentle old woman named Haelyn attends the shrine and accepts tithes from penitents and those seeking the deity’s blessings. Haelyn might know a few rituals to remove afflictions, but she is not, in fact, a cleric.
14. Coxcomb Spirits A proud rooster adorns a hanging sign above the entrance to Coxcomb Spirits. More restaurant than tavern, Coxcomb Spirits offers a fine selection of wines, beers, ales, and liquors to accompany the artful meals prepared by Chef Drebben. The Spirits
August 20 08
|
D u n g e o n 1 57
18
Siege of Bordrin's Watch caters mostly to the city’s elite, and a nonpolitician might wait for months for reservations. Ironically, a ghost in its cellar haunts the Spirits. Drebben has contained the unruly and unwanted guest by arranging holy symbols around its lair, but he fears his solution is temporary at best. He’d hire someone to clear out the ghost, but fears it would be bad for business.
15. Stone Anvil Easily one of the largest buildings in Overlook, Stone Anvil is a grand cathedral dedicated to Moradin. The church’s foundation extends deep into the earth, where copyists work to transcribe the holy texts of Moradin, write holy books, and compile ritual books for the clergy. Some say these cavernous vaults hold far more than the legion of scribes and that ancient relics from the Age of Chains are buried in the deepest of vaults. Above, stone walls assembled from blocks of stone larger than many homes climb far above the bridges and buildings of Stonehammer. Its uppermost levels are studded with leaded windows that sparkle in the sun, each of which is shaped to resemble hammers. Doors to the worship hall rise 40 feet and require six dwarves to open or close them such is their great weight. The Stone Anvil is open to all who would pay homage to Moradin, but its placement in the city as well as an unwelcoming atmosphere results in its congregation being nearly all dwarves. The current high priest is Durkik Forgeheart, and he has served three decades. Durkik, a dwarf, began his career as a pious servant of his god, but years of corruption, wealth, and status have chipped away at his idealism, leaving him grasping and opportunistic, which makes him
little better than any of the bureaucrats choking the life from the city.
16. House of Sleep The House of Sleep specializes in exemplary service and keeps out unwanted guests with its exorbitant prices. A great tower that stands seven stories tall and is pierced with so many arched windows, the building appears as if it has more glass than stone in its construction. The House offers private accommodations only; each suite of pleasant rooms includes a small kitchen, lounge, and bedroom, as well as the service of two servants who see to the guest’s every need. Kalaban Whisperwind, an eladrin expatriate, owns the House of Sleep and dotes on his guests. A cultured and educated man, his life is one of service. Those who can afford a room here are never disappointed.
17. The Turned Spoon The Turned Spoon is a quaint restaurant on the southern edge of Elftown. Founded by a cadre of halfling chefs from the riverlands to the south, they offer a large menu and a dizzying array of spirits. The restaurant is comfortable, with padded chairs and low tables. Deemed a romantic spot by the elite, and the epitome of excess by everyone else, the Turned Spoon offers large meals of unimpeachable quality.
18. Elsir Consortium Forty years ago, a group of merchants set aside their differences and combined their businesses to found the Elsir Consortium. Their unified front allowed them to expand their individual markets to nearly every community in the Elsir Vale until a decade later, and they have emerged as one of the most pow-
erful commercial forces in the region. Ever since, the Consortium has only grown larger and more successful, which is a fact not lost on the folk of Tradetown and elsewhere who have begun to resent the Consortium’s influence. Overlook houses the Consortium’s warehouses and production facilities in Elftown. Fronting these buildings is a small shop that provides goods, weapons, armor, and other materials (none of which is magical) at a 10% discount below those prices listed in the Player’s Handbook. DM’s Tip: The Consortium is indeed a powerful merchant conglomerate, but its interests extend much further than moving mundane goods around the Elsir Vale. The Consortium has turned hungry eyes at a bigger prize; they hope to oust the ruling Council and install a government friendlier to the Consortium’s interests, preferably consisting of individuals handpicked by the merchants. A small cadre believes the coming conflict will be good for them, since they expect that a disastrous defeat at Bordrin’s Watch will weaken the Council’s influence and open the door for a coup. When this occurs, the Consortium intends to move in with their mercenary soldiers, which are hidden throughout the city, seize the government, and shatter the orc armies themselves.
19. Polliver’s Polliver’s is a small inn and club used by visiting officials and for local officials in need of clandestine meetings. A large building, four stories tall, it sits atop a tower near the eastern gate into the High Hall. Tall glass windows face out on all sides, with burgundy curtains inside that can drawn closed for privacy, while a pair of golden griffons stands watch to either side of the bronzed doors. The inside is just as grand
August 20 08
|
D u n g e o n 1 57
19
Siege of Bordrin's Watch as the outside, with high ceilings, patterned floors in priceless woods, and a legion of servants that cater to their guests. Large rooms, on scale with those found in the House of Sleep, fill the upper levels, while a bar, restaurant, game room, and smoking lounge fill out the main floor. Officials and envoys use Polliver’s to conduct private meetings, to make secret deals, andto chart the course for the future of Overlook. As such, membership is gained by not only circumstances of birth and wealth, but also for a candidate’s discretion. Being a member of Polliver’s is an expense many in Overlook find worthwhile.
20. Michael’s Blond In stark contrast to Polliver’s and the other pricey establishments in High Hall and Stonehammer, Michael’s Blond is a down-to-earth tavern that specializes in serving the working class, offering honest fare, good brew, and a comfortable environment all for a modest fee. Few officials would sully their names by having dinner here, but those looking for information on the elite might pry a few secrets from disgruntled servants deep in their cups.
21. Caer Overlook (Government) Rising above all the other districts and buildings in the city is Caer Overlook, a sprawling fortress of stone hauled out from the depths of the earth from the very mines the dwarves excavated during the dark days of their enslavement. The castle consists of eight round towers arranged in a star pattern surrounding a central keep capped with a domed roof. Hedging in all the towers and the keep is another stone wall, taller than the wall bounding the High Hall, and it raises 200-feet tall.
If the scale were not impressive enough, the architecture in the details establishes the fortress as one of the greatest in the lands. Carvings, engravings, and bas-reliefs adorn the walls, capturing moments of dwarven history and inscribing those grudges to which all dwarves still cling. Scrollwork bears threats and promises, vows of vengeance against orcs, giants, and anyone or anything else that had wronged these people. Inside, the same degree of artistry appears throughout the building, from the brilliant tapestries to the inlaid stone work covering the floors, and statues of the courageous Firstborn who sacrificed their lives to liberate their kin. All this, inside and out, pales before the brilliant majesty of the Council Chamber: the High Hall. This magnificent room measures 200 feet in diameter with a great dome overhead. A dais, raised 20 feet above the echoing chamber, holds the five high-backed chairs for the councilors. The floor around the dais is polished to a mirror finish to reflect the mural on the dome overhead. In it, one can see an artist’s rendition of Moradin’s wrath against the primordials, telling the story of the god’s gift, the betrayal, the Age of Chains, and culminating in the dwarves’ liberation. Caer Overlook provides quarters for the elders as well as smaller apartments for the districts’ representatives and their families. Each is a sumptuous room with high ceilings and marble floors. Fireplaces large enough for a grown man to stand hold roaring fires, heating the entire castle through a feat of engineering, while everburning torches illuminate the halls and chambers with a soft white light. Few, however, have the chance to behold the splendor of this place, since the guardians protecting the councilors are
vigilant in safeguarding the private rooms and inner vaults.
22. Ministry of War The Ministry of War is more compound than single structure, consisting of six buildings arranged inside a walled-in courtyard. Three buildings are barracks for the garrison that protects and patrols the city. The fourth serves as an armory and smithy, producing weapons, ammunition, and armor for recruits. The fifth building houses the officers quarters, while the sixth contains the officers of the War Minister. The Ministry of War produces both soldiers and watchmembers, and their training regimens are nearly identical. The Ministry accepts most candidates provided they are fit and able, but it allocates recruits to the city watch or garrison. Some candidates, no matter how eager, are refused. Topping the list are gnomes, any goblinoids (reformed or not), orcs (and their kin), and any other individual that lacks the strength, discipline, or ethical substance to serve. DM’s Tip: Rumors tell of a third branch of the Ministry of War, a covert group of operatives that combine teams of individuals with untraditional talents, such as wizards, warlocks, and others. If such a group exists, the Council and the Ministry both deny their existence.
23. Cadrick’s Boarding House When other districts provide lodgings, one might wonder why anyone would rent a room in the Nine Bells. There are few good reasons and those who do seek out a place to stay here are either too poor or too desperate to hunker down anywhere else, or, worse, need or have to keep a low profile. In any event, Cadrick’s Boarding House welcomes any and all
August 20 08
|
D u n g e o n 1 57
20
Siege of Bordrin's Watch inside its mildewed walls, offering dirt cheap rates that even include a loaf of bread (with crunchies!) and a pail of murky water. One never fears being alone in the rooms, because lice, fleas, and other vermin infest the straw mattress beneath stained sheets. No detail is spared in this interesting place, with peeling wallpaper revealing swathes of black, quivering mold, clouds of flies, and spiders so big, a shoe large enough has not been cobbled to silence their scuttling. Wendell the Sott owns the Boarding House and is not sure who Cadrick was, though he’ll tell you he did at one time if he can be sobered up long enough to reply. An army of sycophants and hangers-on lurk in the shadows of this building, taking residence here thanks to Wendell’s good graces or his obliviousness. DM’s Tip: The folk loitering around Cadrick’s Boarding House are a band of a rabble-rousers and agitators—anarchists that want to see the Council dissolved and laws removed, letting the city go back to a more natural state. They hide their intentions and their purpose well, except for the bits of graffiti that show up all around the inn, with such profundity as “Dwarves suck! Orcs Rool!” and “Armen wuz here.” Clearly, this group is disorganized and doomed to failure, but if an individual could unite them and give them some direction, there are enough of them to be dangerous.
24. Divine Knot The Divine Knot is the name given to the nine temples filling out the northwest corner of the Nine Bells district. Each temple is a grand house of worship designed to honor the gods, but is marred by the squalor and filth contaminating this district. For years, the priests worked to clean up their environs but frequent failures have chipped away at their
resolve, leading a few of the temples to close their doors (specifically Ioun, Moradin, and Pelor). The rest—Avandra, Bahamut, Erathis, Kord, the Raven Queen, and, oddly, Zehir—remain, but with small clergies and smaller congregations.
Fear about the orc army spreads through Overlook like a cancer, but it also emboldens groups who see the confusion and chaos as a singular opportunity for mischief. A group of anarchists emerges from Nine Bells to cause trouble in a higher-class district.
25. Pickled Imp
Outraged Drakes (Level 1; XP 500)
The Pickled Imp is an infamous tavern located just inside the Nine Bells. Taking its name from the large jar containing a dead imp suspended in brown fluid sitting proudly on the old wooden bar, the Pickled Imp is no place for the meek. Tucked away on a side street a few blocks away from the western gates, the Pickled Imp squats at the end of a foul alley, which is littered with slop tossed from the windows of tenements on all sides. The favored watering hole of beggars, storytellers, vagabonds, madmen, and shiftless folk, the Pickled Imp provides watery wine and a bitter yellow fluid that passes for beer. Fights are common, and in the cellar, the Imp’s patrons can watch kobolds fight brutal death matches.
Urban Encounters Between expeditions, the characters can retreat to Overlook to rest and recover, to acquire rituals and gear, or gather additional information. While in the city, you can use any of the following encounters to make their time in the city more interesting.
Anarchists (Level 1; XP 498) ✦ 2 human bandits (level 2 skirmisher; Monster Manual, page 162) ✦ 8 human rabble (level 2 minion; Monster Manual, page 162)
✦ 5 spiretop drakes (level 1 skirmisher; Monster Manual, page 90) Years ago, Overlook brought in spiretop drakes to control the growing rat problem. It worked, but now the drakes are everywhere. Generally, the drakes are comfortable enough around humanoid races, but if their eggs are disturbed, they can become fierce, as in the case of this clutch. An enterprising thief sought to snatch a few eggs and turn a profit outside the city and for his trouble, he found death instead of gold.
Pressgangs (Level 1; XP 524) ✦ 2 halfling thieves (level 2 skirmisher; Monster Manual, page 152) ✦ 2 human lackeys (level 7 minion; Monster Manual, page 162) ✦ 4 human rabble (level 2 minion; Monster Manual, page 162) Overlook has sounded the call to war, and many people have answered without the need of having to pressgang folk into service. A few gangs, however, emerged from Nine Bells, Blister, and the Boneyard, and they now roam the streets, ambushing anyone they find in the name of patriotism and delivering their bloody charges to the Ministry of War for fresh recruits.
August 20 08
|
D u n g e o n 1 57
21
Siege of Bordrin's Watch Lost Ones (Level 2; XP 675)
Beyond Overlook
✦ 1 human mage (level 4 artillery; Monster Manual, page 163) ✦ 4 human bandits (level 2 skirmisher; Monster Manual, page 162)
Overlook is one of the most interesting features of the Stonehome Mountains, but it isn’t the only one. Ruins of the old dwarven kingdom dot the peaks for hundreds of miles to the north and south, while old caves lead to tunnels worming through the rock. Closest to the Overlook, though, the land is safer and is home to numerous villages and other places of interest. Armistice: Purported to be the site of victory of the giants and orcs, here the freed dwarves signed a compact of peace that would bind them into one nation. Now the kingdom is no more, so Armistice is just a relic of the past filled with old codgers who think back on better days. Bordrin’s Watch: Straddling the old Dwarfroad is a mighty fortress that was raised to control traffic across the mountains and protect the Elsir Vale from attack. Bordrin’s Watch contains one of the three access points to the tunnels beneath the mountains. The stronghold consists of a long wall, which is 150-feet tall and over 80 feet thick at the base, and it is punctuated with steep towers fitted with arrowslits. Battlements cap the wall, allowing sentries to watch the pass and defend the fortress from attack. Atop each tower is a pair of catapults. Ballistae and scorpions are positioned every 40 feet along the wall’s length. In the center of the pass is a massive gate. Its doors stand 100-feet tall, and it takes 40 aurochs to pull them open. The gatehouse surrounding the doors consists of two towers, each as tall as the wall and wider than three standing towers together. Bordrin’s Watch can accommodate 3,000 soldiers on the walls and in the towers, but the grounds on the eastern side of the pass can hold up to 100 times this number if need be. Granaries are replenished
The characters stumble onto a group of Lost Ones intimidating a shop owner into coughing up gold for “protection.” These enforcers respond with violence to any interference, but they scatter if the mage is taken out. Henceforth, the PCs gain the Lost Ones as enemies, and during the adventurers’ stay, they discover that some shops and taverns refuse them service and that their steps are dogged by gangs of these criminals.
Mysterious Killers (Level 3; XP 750) ✦ 2 doppelganger sneaks (level 3 skirmisher; Monster Manual, page 71) ✦ 3 human guards (level 3 soldier; Monster Manual, page 162) While moving through the city, the PCs come upon a vicious fight in a darkened alley. There, the attackers are finishing up slaughtering another group of adventurers. Should the PCs defeat the attackers, they find on them a list of names, some unknown, others known, including those of the Freeriders (see page 24) and four of the five player characters. These killers were hired by a mysterious agency in the city who’s working to eliminate potential problems as his plans unfold. A future adventure can provide greater revelations in this sinister plot.
each season, fed by towns, hamlets, and communities all under Overlook’s protection. The stores can keep a modest-sized force fed and watered for up to six months without needing to resupply. Like the Monastery, the Watch contains a secret staircase that winds down into the mountain and connects at a large room called the Nexus. There, soldiers at the Watch could move beneath the feet of their enemy and strike them from behind. This passage hasn’t been used in centuries and only a scant few know of its existence. Elsir River: The headwaters of the Elsire River flow in a series of waterfalls that drain the mountains back into the valley to the east. West of Sodden (see below), the river is too rough and hides too many rocks for boats to navigate, though from Sodden, one can travel across the valley, going as far as Brindol. Feud: Two dwarf families dominate this tiny hamlet and, as their name indicated, they are prone to violence. The only thing they can’t stand more than one another is outsiders. Hope: Another speck of a town, Hope appeared after prospectors found a vein of silver nearby. Once the vein played out, most of the miners moved north to Armistice, but a few stubborn folk live here still, working the mines in search of precious metals. Travelers have reported that something is not right with these people and there’s a feeling that the citizens of Hope are hiding something sinister. Lantern: A minuscule settlement of just fifty souls, Lantern is little more than a logging camp. Monastery of the Sundered Chain: About eighteen miles southwest of Overlook stands the old Monastery of the Sundered Chain. Raised to house an order of holy warriors in service to Moradin, the templars have largely withdrawn from Overlook,
August 20 08
|
D u n g e o n 1 57
22
Siege of Bordrin's Watch seeing the city as having lost its identity. Even though the relationship is strained, the monastery and the city remain allies. The monastery contains one of three access points to the tunnels beneath the Stonehome Mountains. The templars are reputed to be the only ones with the knowledge of how to close off the tunnels. Myler’s Stone: This town was once a large city, but years of decay, disease, and tragedy reduced the place to a handful of desperate people eking out an existence in the ruins of the past. Old Den: A trade depot used by rangers and elves alike, this site is a cluster of wooden buildings surrounded by a palisade. Shackles: Overlook’s sister, Shackles was a powerful city and was the former capital of the fallen dwarven kingdom. It fell nearly two centuries ago when the orcs sacked it before the kingdom could respond. Sodden: A small town at the headwaters of the Elsir River, this is a quaint community of farmers and fisherfolk. They work well with the elves, which is perhaps the only thing that stops the elves from erasing Lantern altogether. The Vents: Natural fissures vent steam from a superheated underground lake. The tunnels are dangerous since they are also choked with foul monsters of the Underdark, dangerous flora, and vicious fauna. For more information on the Vents, see page 39. The Westdeep: This dense forest grows in the narrow depression between the Stonehome and Wyrmsmoke Mountains. A dangerous place, several tribes of xenophobic elves live here, and they do not take kindly to trespassers. Conflict between the loggers at Lantern and the elves has come close to open war, and it’s known that if the elves attack, the dwarves will be forced to respond.
Wilderness Encounters
Opportunists (Level 1; XP 500)
The characters have plenty of opportunities to get in trouble while traveling to Overlook or when they explore the city’s surrounding countryside. They can stumble into trouble while attempting to complete their mission, or if the characters aren’t quite of the level they need to be to survive this adventure, you can add any of the following encounters.
✦ 1 bugbear warrior (level 5 brute; Monster Manual, page 135) ✦ 2 goblin warriors (level 1 skirmisher; Monster Manual, page 137) ✦ 4 goblin cutters (level 1 minion; Monster Manual, page 136) A brutish bugbear named Rorrag leads a small force out of the Westdeep to strike the smaller settlements for plunder and slaughter. Rorrag is aware of the approaching orc horde and seizes the chance to strike
August 20 08
|
D u n g e o n 1 57
23
Siege of Bordrin's Watch these hamlets while their garrisons defend the Vale against the attack.
Deserters (Level 1; XP 518) ✦ 1 human berserker (level 4 brute; Monster Manual, page 163) ✦ 2 human bandits (level 2 skirmisher; Monster Manual, page 162) ✦ 3 human rabble (level 2 minion; Monster Manual, page 162) Not all those called to defend Elsir Vale have the courage to do so, and as reports have filtered in from the west, a few warriors have abandoned their posts. Since deserters face death if captured, these men and women have turned to banditry to survive.
Orc Scouts (Level 1; XP 520) ✦ 2 orc scouts (level 3 skirmisher; page 53) ✦ 5 orc drudges (level 4 minion; Monster Manual, page 203) A band of orcs, having slipped through the vents, now prowl the countryside, ambushing militias, adventurers, and anyone else they encounter to soften up the defenses against the horde’s attack. All these orcs have the tell-tale tusks that mark their allegiance to their orog chieftain.
Westdeep Elves (Level 2; XP 625) ✦ 2 elf archers (level 2 artillery; Monster Manual, page 106) ✦ 3 elf scouts (level 2 skirmisher; Monster Manual, page 106)
Elf hunters patrol the fringes of the Westdeep, scouring the forest for loggers and trappers. They aren’t interested in a fight with the PCs, unless the characters are despoiling the forest in some way. This said, characters treating the elves with respect might learn about orcs who have slipped through the mountains. Resolve this as a complexity 2 social challenge, using Bluff, Diplomacy, Insight, and Nature as the key skills. A success (six successes before three defeats) reveals the elves have encountered orcs in the forest, but not in considerable numbers. They suspect they might be part of the horde since their armor and weapons bristle with boar tusks.
The Freeriders The characters aren’t the only band of adventurers called to help defend Bordrin’s Watch; and numerous groups, of varying skill and expertise, have come to Overlook to lend their talents in the fight against the approaching army. Most of these adventuring groups are pleasant enough, but rivalries, even good-natured ones, are bound to arise. During their stay in Overlook, the characters should eventually cross paths with the Freeriders. If you’re using the slow start option, consider introducing these adventurers before the PCs are called to the Council of Elders. The Freeriders formed up six months ago in Elsir’s Crossing. They left the small community and headed east, where they dealt with a foul cabal of cultists in an isolated town called Beacon. After, they returned to Brindol for some down time and learned of the impending threat. Like the PCs, the Freeriders went west to do their part in defending their homeland.
Megan Swiftblade Megan Swiftblade was the pretty daughter of a poor farmer not far from Brindol. When the Red Hand invaded the Vale, the goblins and dragonspawn slew her family and left her scarred—physically and emotionally. She spent the last decade honing her fighting skills, vowing she would give her life to protect innocents from the encroaching darkness so other young people would never face the horrors she was forced to endure. Megan Swiftblade
Level 3 Soldier
Medium natural humanoid, human XP 150 Initiative +4 Senses Perception +3 HP 44; Bloodied 22 AC 19; Fortitude 18, Reflex 15, Will 16 Speed 5 m Longsword (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon +11 vs. AC; 1d8 + 5 damage, and the target is marked until the end of Megan’s next turn. r Longbow (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon Ranged 20/40; +4 vs. AC; 1d10 + 1 damage. M Sure Strike (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon +13 vs. AC; 1d8 + 1 damage. M Tide of Iron (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon Requires shield; +11 vs. AC; 1d8 + 5 damage, and the target, if Large or smaller, is pushed 1 square. The target is marked until the end of Megan’s next turn. Megan can shift into the space the pushed target vacated. M Dance of Steel (standard; encounter) ✦ Weapon +11 vs. AC; 2d8 + 5 damage, and the target is marked and slowed until the end of Megan’s next turn. No Opening (immediate interrupt, when an enemy attacks and has combat advantage; encounter) Megan cancels the combat advantage she was about to grant. Alignment Good Languages Common, Goblin Skills Intimidate +6 Str 18 (+5) Dex 13 (+2) Wis 14 (+3) Con 12 (+2) Int 11 (+1) Cha 10 (+1) Equipment scale armor, light shield, longsword, longbow with quiver of 20 arrows, adventurer’s kit
August 20 08
|
D u n g e o n 1 57
24
Siege of Bordrin's Watch As the leader of the Freeriders, Megan sees her fellow adventurers as extended family and is protective of them—protective to the point that conflicts sometimes arise. She can come off as brusque, but she means well and is fearless in battle. Megan is sword thin with an attractive figure, keeps her blond hair cut short, and has a vicious scar that runs from her forehead and down her left cheek.
Ragnum Dourstone The heart of the Freeriders is Ragnum Dourstone, a graying dwarf priest of Moradin. Born and raised in Overlook, he left the city in disgust after witnessing the decay in his church. Although estranged from his kin, he would not abandon the city to the orc armies and so he convinced his companions to make the journey west. Ragnum is just over 4-1/2 feet tall and weighs upward of 200 pounds. He has auburn hair streaked with gray and a thick beard he wears in braids. Gruff and serious, he believes in doing his duty with honor and is an implacable foe when crossed.
Sylen Leafrunner Born in the Westdeep, Sylen left his woodland home, disagreeing with their distrust and remembering how his people aided in the defense of the Vale against the Red Hand. He fell in with Megan and began a torrid love affair that has endured over the years. Although he feels strongly for the woman, he is secretly ashamed, feeling as though he has betrayed his people and his culture by his dalliance in human realms. Sylen is whip thin, with long brown hair and angular features that give him the look of a fox. He’s most comfortable in his hunting garb and wears clothing
Ragnum Dourstone Level 3 Controller (Leader)
Medium natural humanoid, dwarf XP 150 Initiative +1 Senses Perception +4; low-light vision HP 46; Bloodied 23 AC 17; Fortitude 16, Reflex 13, Will 16 Saving Throws +5 against poison effects Speed 5 m Warhammer (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon +8 vs. AC; 1d10 + 4 damage. r Crossbow (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon Ranged 15/30; +5 vs. AC; 1d8 damage. M Priest’s Shield (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon +8 vs. AC; 1d10 + 4 damage, and Ragnum or one adjacent ally gains a +1 power bonus to AC until the end of Ragnum’s next turn. M Wrathful Thunder (standard; encounter) ✦ Thunder, Weapon +8 vs. AC; 1d10 + 4 thunder damage, and the target is dazed until the end of Ragnum’s next turn. C Healing Word (minor; 2/encounter [1/round]) ✦ Healing One ally; the target spends a healing surge and regains an additional 1d6 + 3 hit points. M Cure Light Wounds (standard; daily) ✦ Healing Melee touch; the target regains a number of hit points equal to its surge value + 3. Stand Your Ground When an effect forces a dwarf to move—through a pull, a push, or a slide—the dwarf moves 1 square less than the effect specifies. When an attack would knock the dwarf prone, the dwarf can roll a saving throw to avoid falling prone. Alignment Lawful good Languages Common, Dwarven Skills Dungeoneering +6, Endurance +5, Religion +6 Str 16 (+4) Dex 10 (+1) Wis 16 (+4) Con 14 (+3) Int 11 (+1) Cha 13 (+2) Equipment chainmail, warhammer, crossbow with case of 10 bolts, symbol, adventurer’s kit
dyed in greens and browns. He’s friendly and a constant companion, keeping his secret guilt close to his heart.
Ghena Tenson An arcanist of some talent, Ghena was apprenticed to a wizard who helped save the Elsir Vale from the
Sylen Leafrunner Level 3 Skirmisher
Medium fey humanoid, elf XP 150 Initiative +7 Senses Perception +10; low-light vision Group Awareness aura 5; all allies inside the aura gain a +1 racial bonus to Perception checks. HP 44; Bloodied 22 AC 19; Fortitude 15, Reflex 17, Will 15 Speed 7 m Longsword (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon +8 vs. AC; 1d8 + 2 damage. r Longbow (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon Ranged 20/40; +9 vs. AC; 1d10 + 4 damage. Elven Accuracy (free; encounter) Sylen can reroll an attack roll. It must use the second roll, even if it’s lower. Hunter’s Quarry (minor; at-will [1/round]) Closest enemy becomes Sylen’s quarry. Once per round, Sylen can deal an extra 1d6 damage on an attack against his quarry. Sylen can have just one quarry at a time. R Twin Strike (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon Requires longbow; ranged 20/40; +9 vs. AC, two attacks; 1d10 damage per attack. R Cut and Run (standard; encounter) ✦ Weapon Requires longbow; ranged 20/40; +9 vs. AC, two attacks; 1d10 + 4 damage per attack. Sylen can shift up to 3 squares after the first or second attack. Yield Ground (immediate reaction, when damaged by a melee attack; encounter) Sylen can shift 2 squares and gains a +2 power bonus to all defenses until the end of his next turn. Alignment Good Languages Common, Elven Skills Nature +10, Stealth +10 Str 14 (+3) Dex 18 (+5) Wis 15 (+3) Con 12 (+2) Int 11 (+1) Cha 10 (+1) Equipment leather armor, longsword, longbow with a quiver of 20 arrows, adventurer’s kit
Red Hand a decade past. When she had learned all she could, she left to find her own place in the world. Ghena is content to work with the Freeriders, but sees it as a short-term venture, since she believes she’s destined for greatness, far more than her current companions will ever achieve. Short, pudgy, with a round face and small eyes, she has shoulder-length blond hair, a face full of
August 20 08
|
D u n g e o n 1 57
25
Siege of Bordrin's Watch Ghena Tenson Level 3 Controller
Medium natural humanoid, human XP 150 Initiative +2 Senses Perception +3 HP 44; Bloodied 22 AC 19; Fortitude 15, Reflex 18, Will 16 Speed 6 m Quarterstaff (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon +5 vs. AC; 1d8 damage. r Magic Missile (standard; at-will) ✦ Force Ranged 20; +7 vs. Reflex; 2d4 + 4 force damage. This power counts as a ranged basic attack. A Cloud of Daggers (standard; at-will) ✦ Force Area burst 1 within 10; +7 vs. Reflex; 1d6 + 4 force damage. The power’s area is filled with sharp daggers of force. Any creature that enters the area or starts its turn there takes 2 force damage. The cloud remains in place until the end of Ghena’s next turn. C Color Spray (standard; encounter) ✦ Radiant Close blast 5; +7 vs. Will; 1d6 + 4 radiant damage, and the target is dazed until the end of Ghena’s next turn. Shield (immediate interrupt, when hit by an attack; encounter) Ghena gains a +4 power bonus to AC and Reflex defense until the end of her next turn. Alignment Unaligned Languages Common, Draconic Skills Arcana +10, History +10, Religion +10 Str 10 (+1) Dex 13 (+2) Wis 14 (+3) Con 12 (+2) Int 18 (+5) Cha 10 (+1) Equipment robes, staff, spellbook, adventurer’s kit
freckles, and long, slender fingers. She wears traveling clothes and carries a black staff with silver ferrules at either end.
Madrick Madrick never planned on becoming an adventurer; he was content in his forest home in the Feywild with his pet raccoon, Bandit. However, the formorians raided his community, and only by his quick wit and a timely warning from Bandit did Madrick escape. Unfortunately for him, he went through a doorway into the natural world. Confused, surprised, and a little homesick, Madrick took up with the Freeriders for lack of anything else to do and has remained with
Madrick Level 3 Skirmisher
Small fey humanoid XP 150 Initiative +6 Senses Perception +6; low-light vision HP 44; Bloodied 22 AC 18; Fortitude 14, Reflex 16, Will 16 Speed 5 m Dagger (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon +8 vs. AC; 1d4 + 1 damage. r Dagger (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon Ranged 5/10; +10 vs. AC; 1d4 + 3 damage. M or R Sly Flourish (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon Requires dagger; melee 1 or ranged 5/10; +10 vs. AC; 1d4 + 6 damage. M Positioning Strike (standard; encounter) ✦ Weapon Requires dagger; +10 vs. Will; 1d4 + 3 damage, and slide the target 3 squares. Sneak Attack Once per round, Madrick’s attack deals an extra 2d6 damage to a target he has combat advantage against. Fade Away (immediate reaction, when Madrick takes damage; encounter) ✦ Illusion Madrick is invisible until he attacks or until the end of his next turn. Reactive Stealth If Madrick has cover or concealment when he makes an initiative check, he can make a Stealth check to escape notice. Fleeting Ghost (move; at-will) Madrick can move his speed and make a Stealth check. He does not take the normal penalty from movement on this check. Alignment Good Languages Common, Elven Skills Arcana +4, Stealth +11, Thievery +9 Str 13 (+2) Dex 16 (+4) Wis 11 (+1) Con 12 (+2) Int 12 (+2) Cha 16 (+4) Equipment leather armor, 5 daggers, adventurer’s kit, raccoon named Bandit
them ever since. Although he enjoys their company, he’s always looking for a way back to his home so he might rescue his captured kin. Madrick is short, with pale skin, and large black eyes. He wears brown and gray clothing to help him sneak about. His best friend in the world is Bandit and the raccoon is never far from his side.
Other Adventuring Groups Numerous other adventuring bands have come to Overlook, including the Farstriders, the Green Hand, the Company of Wolves, the Slayers, and others. You can flesh these out as needed, or just drop their names, and others of your own creation, into the background to emphasize the severity of the threat to the city. Of these other groups, only the Farstriders bear special mention. Led by Edgar Sommerfield, a warlord of some fame, the Farstriders are far and above the most successful adventuring party in these lands, hence their being tasked with the Vents. They’ve slain a black dragon, ousted a nest of kobolds, and even undertaken an expedition into the Shadowfell. Aside from Sommerfield, the group includes twin elf rangers, Uulath and Reiner, a half-elf warlock named Jen, and Corben, a human fighter. Their statistics aren’t necessary since they are all slain in their attempt to seal the Nexus, leaving it to the PCs to save Overlook and the Elsir Vale from the attackers. DM’s Tip: If the characters spend any time in Overlook before they head out for the monastery, you could introduce this party along with the Freeriders. This experienced group might serve as mentors, for a time, or close friends, making their deaths all the more poignant when the characters find their corpses.
August 20 08
|
D u n g e o n 1 57
26
Siege of Bordrin's Watch
Monastery of the Sundered Chain Constructed centuries ago to house an elite fighting force of Moradin dedicates, the Monastery of the Sundered Chain preserves the memories of the hardships endured at the hands of the giants, and it trains initiates in fighting arts useful for battling these foes. For generations, the monastery has stood as a symbol of dwarven perseverance and expertise in the fighting arts and one who trains there not only receives an
excellent education in religion and combat, but also gains a mark of pride and honor. The monastery is about 20 miles from Overlook, higher up in the mountains, and just beneath the Hammer, a great peak that loosely resembles a downturned hammer. The trip to the monastery can be free of danger, or, if the PCs are in need of additional experience points, can be reached safely with an extended skill challenge. Setup: The PCs must navigate the mountains using their expertise and cunning to avoid monsters
and hazards lurking at the higher elevations between Overlook and the monastery. Level: 3. Complexity: 1 (requires 4 successes before 3 failures). Primary Skills: Endurance, Nature, Perception, Stealth. Special: Once the characters reach the monastery, they gain a +2 bonus to all checks each time they repeat this challenge. Endurance (DC 15): A trek through the trackless wilderness is slow and arduous. At least two characters must make Endurance checks to preserve their stamina and avoid fatigue, injury, and exhaustion. Failed checks result in everyone in the party losing 1 healing surge in addition to counting as a failure. Nature (DC 20): The mountain paths are twisting and confusing, making it easy to become lost. In addition to counting as a failure, two failed Nature checks result in the characters losing 1 healing surge since they have to backtrack and reorient themselves to regain their bearings. Perception (DC 20): The character notices an easier route up to the monastery, granting a +2 bonus to all Endurance, Nature, and Stealth checks for the remainder of the journey. Stealth (DC 15): The characters move cautiously through the mountains, being careful not to attract attention. A failure closes off this approach for the duration of the challenge. Success: The characters reach the monastery or Overlook without trouble. Failure: Roll on the following table and begin a combat encounter with the indicated monsters. After finishing the encounter, the PCs must start their challenge over again to reach their intended destination.
August 20 08
|
D u n g e o n 1 57
27
Siege of Bordrin's Watch Wilderness Encounters d% 01–10 11–20 21–30 31–60 61–70 71–80 81–90 91–100
Monsters Encountered 3 griffons 2 cave bears 5 hippogriffs 6 orc raiders Orc eye of Gruumsh and 4 orc berserkers 5 wights 5 ghouls 4 gnoll marauders
When arranging the battlefield, use a mountain map with difficult terrain (rubble, scree), cover (rocky outcroppings and defiles), and concealment (deep shadows) to create a dynamic fight. Orcs fight until slain; all other monsters flee when reduced to 10 hit points or fewer. None of these encounters has treasure.
Dungeon Features Certain elements of the dungeon are universal throughout the complex. Doors: Unless otherwise mentioned, none of the doors are locked and all can be opened by depressing a lever in the handle. Doors open inward, and so the hinges are in the room’s interior. Stairs: Stairs count as difficult terrain. Unless otherwise called out in the text, stairs are made from stone.
Extended Rest Few places are safe enough inside the dungeon for an extended rest since the orcs constantly move about, carrying plunder up to the temple proper. To take an extended rest, the characters have to leave the monastery and find a safe place to hide in the surrounding countryside. Any attacks are noticed while the characters are gone, and the orcs reinforce cleared rooms with fresh troops drawn from other locations.
Monastery of the Sundered Chain Overview The monastery includes the following areas.
Monastery This area includes the monastery, the courtyard, and the outer walls. The entire site butts up against the mountains, which serve as the fourth wall. The outer walls stand 50 feet tall and plinths spaced at regular intervals reinforce it. Access to the courtyard comes by way of a pair of 30-foot tall double doors, which are never locked. Inside the walls is the Hall of Moradin and the surrounding courtyard. Fine sand covers the courtyard and the spaces between endless rows of statues, each carved to commemorate the deeds of an ancient dwarf hero. The monastery is a looming structure capped with a red-tiled roof. Bas-reliefs adorn its exterior, capturing religious events and heroes in perfect stone carvings. Orcs have overrun the place, with a band outside in the courtyard and a second group in the Hall. The latter is defacing Moradin’s altar.
Hall of Heroes Accessed by way of a concealed staircase inside the Hall of Moradin, the Hall of Heroes stretches out hundreds of feet below the monastery above it. Here, the monks slept and reflected on their devotion to their god. The Hall’s north end opens onto a switchback stair that drops even deeper into the mountain to the workshops far below. The once sacred areas house only carnage, for the orcs overran the dwarves and slew them all, leaving their bodies to rot where they lay.
Chamber of Works At the bottom of the great staircase is the Chamber of Works, where the monks honored their gods by producing fine dwarfcraft weapons, armor, and other goods, which they sold to feed and clothe themselves. The orcs now use this room to tease out the secrets from their prisoners, subjecting them to awful torment before feeding their bones to the fires.
August 20 08
|
D u n g e o n 1 57
28
Siege of Bordrin's Watch
Orc Sentries
When the characters approach, read:
Encounter Level 1 (564 XP)
A grand edifice rises above steep walls, which are about 50-feet tall. These walls encircle the compound and run up to the higher slopes of the mountain beyond.
Setup A small force of orcs camps in the courtyard outside the monastery, and they keep their eyes out for intruders. Each group has settled around campfires where indicated on the tactical map. The characters can access the courtyard by moving through the closed double doors or by climbing the wall. 2 orc raiders (R) 6 orc drudges (D)
When the characters move inside the wall, read: Near the gate, you see three bonfires burning, where gray and green-skinned savages cook haunches of meat that look suspiciously like arms and legs. Perception Check DC 10: The characters spot smoke rising from the courtyard.
Tactics Although charged with guard duty, the orcs are lax and more interested in feeding their hunger. At the 2 Orc Raiders (R)
Level 3 Skirmisher
Medium natural humanoid XP 150 each Initiative +5 Senses Perception +1; low-light vision HP 46; Bloodied 23; see also warrior’s surge AC 17; Fortitude 15, Reflex 14, Will 12 Speed 6 (8 while charging) m Greataxe (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon +8 vs. AC; 1d12 + 3 damage (crit 1d12 + 15). R Handaxe (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon Ranged 5/10; +7 vs. AC; 1d6 + 3 damage; see also killer’s eye. M Warrior’s Surge (standard, usable only while bloodied; encounter) ✦ Healing, Weapon The orc raider makes a melee basic attack and regains 11 hit points. Killer’s Eye When making a ranged attack, the orc raider ignores cover and concealment (but not total concealment) if the target is within 5 squares of it. Alignment Chaotic evil Languages Common, Giant Skills Endurance +8, Intimidate +5 Str 17 (+4) Dex 15 (+3) Wis 10 (+1) Con 14 (+3) Int 8 (+0) Cha 9 (+0) Equipment leather armor, greataxe, 4 handaxes
first sign of trouble, they toss aside their meals and leap to their feet to engage the enemies.
Features of the Area Illumination: At night, the cook fires shed bright light in a 20-square radius. Ground: Fine sand covers the ground throughout the courtyard, and while somewhat slippery, it does not interfere with movement. Stairs: Stairs lead to the battlements 10 squares above the battlefield. Refer to the temple map on page 28 for a larger look at the area. Statues: Two rows of stone statues line the approach to the doors. Characters standing in a space adjacent to a statue gain cover. Climbing a statue requires a DC 10 Athletics check. Each statue has AC 22, other defenses 20; hp 50; resist 10 to all damage. Massive Statues: Hulking statues of dwarf champions spread out from this approach. Statues provide total cover to those standing behind them. Climbing a massive statue requires a DC 15 Athletics check. Finally, each massive statue has AC 22, other defenses 20; hp 500; resist 10 to all damage. Campfires: Any creature entering or starting its turn in one of these spaces takes 1d6 fire damage, and ongoing 5 fire damage (save ends). 6 Orc Drudges (D) Level 4 Minion
Medium natural humanoid XP 44 each Initiative +0 Senses Perception +0; low-light vision HP 1; a missed attack never damages a minion. AC 16; Fortitude 15, Reflex 12, Will 12 Speed 6 (8 while charging) m Club (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon +9 vs. AC; 5 damage. Alignment Chaotic evil Languages Common, Giant Str 16 (+5) Dex 10 (+2) Wis 10 (+2) Con 14 (+4) Int 8 (+1) Cha 9 (+1) Equipment hide armor, club
August 20 08
|
D u n g e o n 1 57
29
Siege of Bordrin's Watch
Hall of Moradin Encounter Level 2 (651 XP)
Setup The orcs took the dwarf priests by surprise, coming up from below through the hidden door in the altar. The battle was vicious and the dwarves were eventually slain, leaving this once breathtaking chamber in the hands of cruel orcs to despoil and destroy. An orc witch doctor (W) completes its prayers to Gruumsh by defacing the altar, while a pair of orc bolt throwers stands guard in the balcony. At the start of the second round, an orc sergeant (S) leads a squad of 4 orc drudges (D) out from the depths of the temple. At the start of the second round, place their miniatures in available spaces next to the altar. 1 orc sergeant (S) 1 orc witch doctor (W) 2 orc bolt throwers (B) 4 orc drudges (D) When the characters enter this chamber, read: The dome of this massive chamber features a brilliant mural of dwarves fighting giants in what looks like the same mountains through which you have traveled. At the center of the room is a dais ringed with blood-spattered steps. Atop it stands a cracked anvil, clearly an altar, but now desecrated by dripping gore and smears of filth. A hideous orc crone dressed in tattered rags screeches when she sees you, hopping from one leg to the other in outrage.
Perception Check DC 17: You spot movement coming from the balcony overhead—a figure wielding an impossibly large crossbow in two hands drools with excitement as it levels the weapon at you.
Tactics The orc witch doctor is none too thrilled to see the PCs and screams in the hopes of hurrying along the reinforcements from below. She and her bolt throwers buy time until the orc sergeant and the drudges arrive. The witch doctor spits curses, delaying her action until one or more PCs come within her range. The first PC to close the distance receives her unspeakable filth for his or her bravery and when the rest converge, the witch doctor follows up on the second round with curse of Gruumsh. Should any enemies reach her, she switches tactics and lays into her foes with her disgusting claws. The orc bolt throwers stay on the balcony, taking advantage of the cover. They pick off soft targets first, but switch their targets to any who try to engage in melee. After a couple of shots, the bolt throwers’ bloodlust gets the better of them and they rush down to engage their enemies. When the sergeant arrives on the second round, he takes over, directing his drudges to move and charge the closest PCs and keep them off the witch doctor. He fights from behind the drudges, using his reach weapon to press the attack, while benefiting from protection provided by his expendable troops. The drudges fight as directed, charging the PCs and fighting until slain.
The orcs know the way out is sealed behind them thanks to Kalad (see M5), so they fight to death, giving and expecting no quarter.
Features of the Area Illumination: Two braziers atop the dais fill the room with bright light. Ceiling: The ceiling stretches 140 feet overhead. Balcony: Two staircases (difficult terrain) lead up to a balcony that overlooks the hall. Characters on the balcony gain cover from attacks made from below.
August 20 08
|
D u n g e o n 1 57
30
Siege of Bordrin's Watch Sunken Areas: Stairs lead down to sunken seating areas filled with pews. The pews are packed densely enough to count as difficult terrain in any space containing a pew. Dwarf Corpses: The remains of the brave dwarf priests and paladins litter the floor, their blood cooling on the stone floor. Dais: The steps leading up to the dais count as difficult terrain. Altar: On the center of the dais is a large altar dedicated to Moradin, cut from black basalt and carved to resemble a large anvil. The orc witch doctor has desecrated the holy stone, smearing excrement on its surface and mingling the filth with the spilled entrails of murdered priests. Orcs in spaces adjacent to the defaced altar gain a +1 power bonus to their attack rolls. Hidden Door: The altar slides on a cunningly crafted base to reveal a staircase going down. Normally, a DC 25 Perception check is required to find the hidden door, but the orcs coming through it reveals its presence to any who can see them when they first emerge. Steps and Dais: Statuary, rubble, bones, trees, crates, boxes, and so on are on the steps and dais. Braziers: A character can tip over a brazier by making a DC 10 Strength check, or dealing 20 damage to it. When knocked over, the brazier makes a close blast 3 attack against each creature in the area; +6 vs. Reflex; 1d10 fire damage (crit 2d10 fire damage, and ongoing 5 fire damage [save ends]).
Orc Sergeant (S) Level 3 Soldier (Leader)
Medium natural humanoid XP 150 Initiative +2 Senses Perception +5; low-light vision Lead by Fear aura 1; orcs inside the aura gain a +1 power bonus to attack rolls. HP 46; Bloodied 23; see also warrior’s surge AC 19; Fortitude 17, Reflex 13, Will 14 Speed 6 (8 while charging) m Glaive (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon Reach 2; +10 vs. AC; 2d4 + 4 damage. M Warrior’s Surge (standard, usable only while bloodied; encounter) ✦ Healing The orc sergeant makes a melee basic attack and regains 11 hit points. Back to the Front! (immediate reaction, when orc ally within 5 squares is forcibly moved; at-will) Slide triggering ally 1 square. Alignment Chaotic evil Languages Common, Giant Skills Endurance +5, Intimidate +5 Str 19 (+5) Dex 9 (+0) Wis 13 (+2) Con 14 (+3) Int 11 (+1) Cha 11 (+1) Equipment chainmail, glaive, tattered cloak
2 Orc Bolt Throwers (B) Level 1 Artillery
Medium natural humanoid XP 100 Initiative +2 Senses Perception +4; low-light vision HP 26; Bloodied 13; see also warrior’s surge AC 13; Fortitude 14, Reflex 14, Will 11 Speed 6 (8 while charging) m Battleaxe (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon +6 vs. AC; 1d10 + 3 damage r Bellybow (standard; at-will; recharges when the creature uses a move action to reload it) ✦ Weapon Ranged 20/40; +8 vs. AC; 1d12 + 2 damage, and the target is pushed 1 square. M Warrior’s Surge (standard, usable only while bloodied; encounter) ✦ Healing The orc bolt thrower makes a melee basic attack and regains 6 hit points. Alignment Chaotic evil Languages Common, Giant Skills Stealth +7 Str 14 (+2) Dex 15 (+2) Wis 9 (–1) Con 14 (+2) Int 9 (–1) Cha 8 (–1) Equipment leather armor, battleaxe, bellybow with 10 bolts
Orc Witch Doctor (W) Level 2 Controller
Medium natural humanoid XP 125 Initiative +2 Senses Perception +3; low-light vision HP 33; Bloodied 16 AC 15; Fortitude 13, Reflex 14, Will 17 Speed 6 (8 while charging) m Disgusting Claws (standard; at-will) ✦ Poison +7 vs. AC; 1d6 + 1 damage, and ongoing 5 poison damage (save ends). R Curse of Gruumsh (standard; recharge ⚄⚅) ✦ Acid Ranged 10; +6 vs. Fortitude; target is blinded (save ends), and the orc witch doctor makes a secondary attack. Secondary Attack: Close burst 1 centered on primary target; +6 vs. Reflex; 1d6 + 4 acid damage, and ongoing 2 acid damage (save ends). R Unspeakable Filth (standard; at-will) Ranged 5/10; +5 vs. Reflex; 1d4 + 4 damage, and the target takes –2 penalty to attack rolls until the end of the orc witch doctor’s next turn. Alignment Chaotic evil Languages Common, Giant Skills Arcana +6, Intimidate +10 Str 11 (+1) Dex 12 (+2) Wis 14 (+3) Con 9 (+0) Int 11 (+1) Cha 18 (+5) Equipment befouled rags, bone rod
6 Orc Drudges (D) Level 4 Minion
Medium natural humanoid XP 44 each Initiative +0 Senses Perception +0; low-light vision HP 1; a missed attack never damages a minion. AC 16; Fortitude 15, Reflex 12, Will 12 Speed 6 (8 while charging) m Club (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon +9 vs. AC; 5 damage. Alignment Chaotic evil Languages Common, Giant Str 16 (+5) Dex 10 (+2) Wis 10 (+2) Con 14 (+4) Int 8 (+1) Cha 9 (+1) Equipment hide armor, club
August 20 08
|
D u n g e o n 1 57
31
Siege of Bordrin's Watch
Hall of Heroes
The orcs boiled up from the depths and spilled into this grand hall, killing everything they encountered. In the aftermath of the violence, the orcs are scouring the remains in search of treasure, hidden enemies, and a way to unseal the passage through the mountain. 1 orc berserker (B) 3 orog militants (M) 6 orc drudges (D)
it uses warrior’s surge before resuming its attack. The berserker fights to the death. The orog militants are far more cautious in their approach. They stay close to their allies to employ their fierce counterstrike power and discipline, preferring to stay close to other orogs or the berserker to the drudges. If the militants are bloodied, they shift back and spend their second wind, jumping back into the thick of battle at the start of their next turn. The orc drudges are reckless and overconfident. They fling themselves at their foes with little regard for strategy. All monsters here fight to the death.
When the characters descend the stairs and reach this room, read:
Features of the Area
Encounter Level 4 (889 XP)
Setup
The carnage in this grand hall is obscene. Dead dwarves, some still in their nightclothes, litter the f loor, blood painting the gray stone tiles, walls, and columns. In the light cast by burning braziers, you see the butchers: more orcs. Important!: Have the characters make Stealth checks as they descend the stairs. If their results are 12 or higher, they take the monsters by surprise.
Tactics The orcs howl in rage when they spot new enemies and surge forward to slaughter the PCs. The orc berserker charges the closest character on its first action, moving first if needed to set up the charge. The berserker viciously attacks with its greataxe each round until it’s bloodied, at which point
one of the priests’ cells. The steps count as difficult terrain. The cells are bare and devoid of much of interest. Each contains a cot, a trunk filled with personal effects such as spare robes, smallclothes, and a few relics from the dwarves’ lives before they joined the monastery. The items have no worth beyond their sentimental value.
Illumination: Braziers in each of the four corners shed light in a 10-square radius, illuminating all but the center of this massive room. Tipping a brazier requires a DC 10 Strength check or attacks that deal a total of 20 damage. When knocked over, the brazier makes a close blast 3 attack against each creature in the area; +6 vs. Reflex; 1d10 fire damage (crit 2d10 fire damage, and ongoing 5 fire damage [save ends]). Ceiling: The ceiling is 20 squares overhead. Stairs: A spiral staircase at the southern end of the room leads up to room 1–2. The stairs count as difficult terrain. Adjoining Rooms: All along either side of the room are stairs that climb 30 feet up to a landing and the entrance to
August 20 08
|
D u n g e o n 1 57
32
Siege of Bordrin's Watch Columns: Two rows of 10-foot diameter columns support the ceiling overhead. Climbing a column requires a DC 25 Athletics check. Each column has AC 20, other defenses 18; hp 100; resist 10 to all damage. Destroying a column triggers a cave-in (Dungeon Master’s Guide, page 91). The columns provide total cover to creatures standing behind them. Statue: A massive statue of a dwarf warrior battling a hydra dominates the center of the room, standing nearly as tall as the ceiling. A DC 20 History check reveals the statue describes a famous battle between Dergan Fellfist and a legendary hydra that devoured 300 warriors until the dwarf hero killed the beast in single combat. It’s said Dergan’s bones were interred somewhere in the mountains and, given the statue’s presence, it’s a safe bet that his remains are sealed beneath the statues. Climbing the statue requires a DC 20 Athletics check. The statue has AC 25, other defenses 18; hp 300; resist 15 to all damage. Dwarf Statues: At the north end of the room, flanking the exit, is a pair of 30-foot tall statues of grim dwarf warriors, each holding an axe, with the head down, between its feet. The statues wear helmets that conceal all but their beard. The statues do not depict particular dwarf warriors, but rather are idealized versions of Moradin’s chosen servants. A DC 15 Perception check reveals that the base of the statues are smooth and dark, caused by the countless hands that have touched them for the blessing they are thought to bestow. Climbing the statue requires a DC 20 Athletics check. The statue has AC 20, other defenses 18; hp 100; resist 10 to all damage. Corpses: The orcs took the dwarves by surprise. The dwarves fought bravely, but lacking their armor, they could not stand against the weapons and numbers of the invaders.
Orc Berserker (B)
Level 4 Brute
Medium natural humanoid XP 175 Initiative +3 Senses Perception +2; low-light vision HP 66; Bloodied 33; see also warrior’s surge AC 15; Fortitude 17, Reflex 13, Will 12 Speed 6 (8 while charging) m Greataxe (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon +8 vs. AC; 1d12 + 5 damage (crit 1d12 + 17). M Warrior’s Surge (standard, usable only while bloodied; encounter) ✦ Healing, Weapon The orc berserker makes a melee basic attack and regains 16 hit points. Alignment Chaotic evil Languages Common, Giant Skills Endurance +10, Intimidate +6 Str 20 (+7) Dex 13 (+3) Wis 10 (+2) Con 16 (+5) Int 8 (+1) Cha 9 (+1) Equipment leather armor, greataxe
6 Orc Drudges (D) Level 4 Minion
Medium natural humanoid XP 44 each Initiative +0 Senses Perception +0; low-light vision HP 1; a missed attack never damages a minion. AC 16; Fortitude 15, Reflex 12, Will 12 Speed 6 (8 while charging) m Club (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon +9 vs. AC; 5 damage. Alignment Chaotic evil Languages Common, Giant Str 16 (+5) Dex 10 (+2) Wis 10 (+2) Con 14 (+4) Int 8 (+1) Cha 9 (+1) Equipment hide armor, club
3 Orog Militants (M)
Level 3 Soldier
Medium natural humanoid XP 150 each Initiative +3 Senses Perception +2; low-light vision HP 48; Bloodied 24 AC 20; Fortitude 17, Reflex 13, Will 14; see also discipline Speed 5 m Bastard Sword (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon +10 vs. AC; 1d10 + 4 damage, and the target is marked until the end of the orog militant’s next turn. M Relentless (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon Requires bastard sword; +10 vs. AC; 1d10 + 4 damage, and the target is pushed 1 square. The target is marked until the orog’s next turn. The orog militant can shift into the vacated square as a free action. M Fierce Counterstrike (immediate reaction, when adjacent ally is first bloodied; encounter) ✦ Weapon Requires bastard sword; +10 vs. AC; 2d10 + 4 damage, and the target is pushed 1 square. The orog militant can shift into the vacated square as a free action. Discipline Orogs gain a +2 bonus to saving throws against any ongoing effects when adjacent to an ally. Alignment Evil Languages Common, Giant Str 19 (+5) Dex 10 (+1) Wis 13 (+2) Con 16 (+4) Int 9 (+0) Cha 11 (+1) Equipment plate armor, heavy shield, bastard sword
August 20 08
|
D u n g e o n 1 57
33
Siege of Bordrin's Watch
Into the Depths Encounter Level 3 (751 XP)
Setup The dwarves constructed this series of staircases and landings to reach the bottom of the chasm, where it connects to the deeper tunnels under the mountain. 1 orog champion (C) 1 spiretop drake (S) 3 orc bolt throwers (B) 4 orc drudges (D) When the characters enter this room, read: The floor gives way to a massive cavern. A long staircase and series of landings lead down to the cavern f loor nearly 100 feet below. A group of orcs climbs the stairs.
Tactics The orc bolt throwers concentrate their attacks against the ranged attackers, while the spiretop drake swoops in to harass characters that try the staircase going down. The orog scarred champion and the drudges race up the stairs to confront the PCs.
Features of the Area Illumination: Braziers provide bright light in a 10-square radius. Stairs: The stairs connecting the various landings count as difficult terrain. Chasm: A fall from the ledges is likely lethal, dealing damage as appropriate for the height of the fall.
Orog Scarred Champion (C)
Level 4 Brute
Medium natural humanoid, orc XP 175 Initiative +2 Senses Perception +8; low-light vision HP 66; Bloodied 33; see also champion’s scorn AC 17; Fortitude 19, Reflex 14, Will 15 Speed 5 m Greatsword (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon +10 vs. AC; 1d10 + 5 damage, and the target is marked until the end of the orog scarred champion’s next turn. C Winnowing Slash (standard; recharge when first bloodied) ✦ Weapon Requires greatsword; close burst 1; +7 vs. AC; 2d10 + 5 damage, and the target is pushed 1 square. C Champion’s Scorn (minor; at-will) ✦ Fear Close blast 5; one creature; the target becomes the object of the orog’s scorn. The orog scarred champion’s melee attacks deal an extra 1d10 damage to the target, and if the scarred champion reduces the target to 0 hit points, it regains 16 hit points. Alignment Chaotic evil Languages Common, Giant Skills Intimidate +6 Str 20 (+7) Dex 10 (+2) Wis 12 (+3) Con 16 (+5) Int 9 (+1) Cha 8 (+1) Equipment plate armor, greataxe
Spiretop Drake (S)
Level 1 Skirmisher
Small natural beast (reptile) XP 100 Initiative +6 Senses Perception +3 HP 29; Bloodied 14 AC 16; Fortitude 11, Reflex 14, Will 13 Speed 4, fly 8 (hover); see also flyby attack m Bite (standard; at-will) +6 vs. AC; 1d6 + 4 damage. m Snatch (standard; at-will) +4 vs. Reflex; 1 damage, and the spiretop drake steals a small object from the target, such as a vial, scroll, or coin. M Flyby Attack (standard; at-will) The spiretop drake flies up to 8 squares and makes one melee basic attack at any point during that movement. The drake doesn’t provoke opportunity attacks when moving away from the target of the attack. Alignment Unaligned Languages — Str 11 (+0) Dex 18 (+4) Wis 16 (+3) Con 13 (+1) Int 3 (–4) Cha 11 (+0)
3 Orc Bolt Throwers (B)
Level 1 Artillery
Medium natural humanoid XP 100 each Initiative +2 Senses Perception +4; low-light vision HP 26; Bloodied 13; see also warrior’s surge AC 13; Fortitude 14, Reflex 14, Will 11 Speed 6 (8 while charging) m Battleaxe (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon +6 vs. AC; 1d10 + 3 damage r Bellybow (standard; at-will; recharges when the creature uses a move action to reload it) ✦ Weapon Ranged 20/40; +8 vs. AC; 1d12 + 2 damage, and the target is pushed 1 square. M Warrior’s Surge (standard, usable only while bloodied; encounter) ✦ Healing The orc bolt thrower makes a melee basic attack and regains 6 hit points. Alignment Chaotic evil Languages Common, Giant Skills Stealth +7 Str 14 (+2) Dex 15 (+2) Wis 9 (–1) Con 14 (+2) Int 9 (–1) Cha 8 (–1) Equipment leather armor, battleaxe, bellybow with 10 bolts
4 Orc Drudges (D)
Level 4 Minion
Medium natural humanoid XP 44 Initiative +0 Senses Perception +0; low-light vision HP 1; a missed attack never damages a minion. AC 16; Fortitude 15, Reflex 12, Will 12 Speed 6 (8 while charging) m Club (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon +9 vs. AC; 5 damage. Alignment Chaotic evil Languages Common, Giant Str 16 (+5) Dex 10 (+2) Wis 10 (+2) Con 14 (+4) Int 8 (+1) Cha 9 (+1) Equipment hide armor, club
August 20 08
|
D u n g e o n 1 57
34
Siege of Bordrin's Watch
August 20 08
|
D u n g e o n 1 57
35
Siege of Bordrin's Watch
Chamber of Works Encounter Level 6 (1,264 XP)
Setup The Chamber of Works served two purposes. First, it connected to the deeper tunnels through a long, downward-sloping passage, and second, it housed the forges and workshops used by the priests to honor their god. The orcs discovered this passage in their searching beneath the mountain and came up through this room, slaughtering the dwarves as they raced into the complex to finish off the defenders. Their haste to overrun the temple above caused them to miss Kalad, a devout dwarf paladin. While the orcs fought his kin upstairs, Kalad pulled the lever and collapsed the tunnel, thus cutting off the route for more orcs to breach the mountain. When Og, the orog hero, returned and found the tunnel caved-in, he was enraged and has spent the last few hours beating Kalad, bringing him to the brink of death. 1 raging fire Og, orog hero (O) 1 orc eye of Gruumsh (G) 2 orc berserkers (B) 6 orc drudges (D) When the characters enter this room, read: A fearsome blaze rages on one side of this natural cavern, making silhouettes of the orcs gathered here. They seem intent on something on the opposite side of the room, where you can hear grunts and shouts above the roar of the f lame.
Perception Check DC 10: The character spots a dwarf being beaten by a hulking orog warrior. DC 15: The character hears the orog demand in broken Common that the dwarf open the tunnel.
Tactics The orcs are distracted by Og and his prisoner and so they aren’t paying attention when the PCs arrive, which allows the PCs to take advantage of surprise. Once the combat begins, the orcs turn, almost as one, loose angry shouts, and throw themselves recklessly at the intruders. Og drops Kalad to the floor, draws his bastard sword and wades into the battle. He’s irate, so if orc drudges block his path to the PCs, he doesn’t think twice about cutting his way through to reach the characters. Once there, he uses fearsome sweep to rip through his opponents, adjusting his position each round to catch as many enemies as he can. The first character to hit him with a melee attack receives lay him open on Og’s next turn. Og knows he has failed in his mission and sees this battle as his chance to redeem himself. The eye of Gruumsh hangs back, knowing not to get in Og’s way. He supports Og by hitting the PCs early with chaos hammer and then directs the battle by using swift arm of destruction to prod the berserkers into the thick of things. Even if the PCs corner the orc, he fights back with ferocity, using bull rush to shove PCs into forges or into the raging fire. The orc berserkers sweep around from different directions to hit the PCs from either side, barking promises to each other that they’ll meet in the middle. The drudges hoot and bark as they surge toward the intruders, laughing even as the PCs cut them down. Should the battle turn against the orcs, Og pulls back to murder Kalad, who is too wounded to resist. After-
ward, Og makes his stand adjacent to the flames to grab and flings his enemies into the roaring fire.
Features of the Area Illumination: The roaring fire fills the room with bright light. Ceiling: The ceiling is 30 feet overhead. Rubble: When Kalad collapsed the tunnel to the deeper tunnels, parts of the ceiling in this room collapsed, killing a number of orcs in the process. Squares contain a substantial amount of rubble and count as difficult terrain. Forge: All the intact forges are lit and roar with flame. Characters starting their turns adjacent to a
August 20 08
|
D u n g e o n 1 57
36
Siege of Bordrin's Watch Og, Orog Hero (O)
Level 6 Elite Soldier
Medium natural humanoid, orc XP 500 Initiative +5 Senses Perception +8; low-light vision HP 144; Bloodied 72 AC 24; Fortitude 23, Reflex 19, Will 16 Speed 5 m Bastard Sword (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon +14 vs. AC; 1d10 + 5 damage, and the target is marked until the end of Og’s next turn. C Fearsome Sweep (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon Requires bastard sword; close burst 1; +14 vs. AC; 1d10 + 5 damage, and the target is marked until the end of Og’s next turn. M Orog’s Rebuke (immediate reaction, when marked target shifts, moves, or makes an attack that does not include Og as a target; at-will) ✦ Weapon Og makes a basic attack. M Lay Him Open (standard; recharge when first bloodied) ✦ Weapon Requires bastard sword; +14 vs. AC; 2d10 + 5 damage, and ongoing 5 damage (save ends). Miss: Half damage, and no ongoing damage. Alignment Evil Languages Common, Giant Skills Intimidate +7 Str 20 (+8) Dex 15 (+5) Wis 10 (+3) Con 16 (+6) Int 11 (+3) Cha 9 (+2) Equipment plate armor, shield, bastard sword
2 Orc Berserkers (B)
Level 4 Brute
Medium natural humanoid XP 175 each Initiative +3 Senses Perception +2; low-light vision HP 66; Bloodied 33; see also warrior’s surge AC 15; Fortitude 17, Reflex 13, Will 12 Speed 6 (8 while charging) m Greataxe (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon +8 vs. AC; 1d12 + 5 damage (crit 1d12 + 17). M Warrior’s Surge (standard, usable only while bloodied; encounter) ✦ Healing, Weapon The orc berserker makes a melee basic attack and regains 16 hit points. Alignment Chaotic evil Languages Common, Giant Skills Endurance +10, Intimidate +6 Str 20 (+7) Dex 13 (+3) Wis 10 (+2) Con 16 (+5) Int 8 (+1) Cha 9 (+1) Equipment leather armor, greataxe
6 Orc Drudges (D)
Level 4 Minion
Medium natural humanoid XP 44 each Initiative +0 Senses Perception +0; low-light vision HP 1; a missed attack never damages a minion. AC 16; Fortitude 15, Reflex 12, Will 12 Speed 6 (8 while charging) m Club (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon +9 vs. AC; 5 damage. Alignment Chaotic evil Languages Common, Giant Str 16 (+5) Dex 10 (+2) Wis 10 (+2) Con 14 (+4) Int 8 (+1) Cha 9 (+1) Equipment hide armor, club
Orc Eye of Gruumsh (G) Level 5 Controller (Leader)
Medium natural humanoid XP 200 Initiative +6 Senses Perception +3; low-light vision Wrath of Gruumsh aura 10; orcs in the aura can use death strike (see below). HP 64; Bloodied 32; see also warrior’s surge and death strike AC 19; Fortitude 17, Reflex 14, Will 15 Speed 6 (8 while charging) m Spear (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon +10 vs. AC; 1d8 + 3 damage. M Warrior’s Surge (standard, usable only while bloodied; encounter) ✦ Healing, Weapon The eye of Gruumsh makes a melee basic attack and regains 16 hit points. M Death Strike (when reduced to 0 hit points) The eye of Gruumsh makes a melee basic attack. R Eye of Wrath (minor; at-will) ✦ Fear Ranged 5; +8 vs. Will; the target takes a –4 penalty to AC (save ends). R Swift Arm of Destruction (standard; recharge ⚄ ⚅) ✦ Healing Ranged 5; one orc within range makes a melee basic attack (as a free action) and regains 15 hit points on a hit or 5 hit points on a miss. A Chaos Hammer (standard; encounter) ✦ Force Area burst 1 within 10; +8 vs. Reflex; 2d6 + 3 force damage, and the target is knocked prone. Miss: Half damage, and the target is not knocked prone. Alignment Chaotic evil Languages Common, Giant Skills Endurance +9, Intimidate +10, Religion +7 Str 17 (+5) Dex 14 (+4) Wis 12 (+3) Con 16 (+5) Int 11 (+2) Cha 17 (+5) Equipment leather armor, fur cloak, spear
forge take 5 fire damage. Forges count as difficult terrain and characters entering or starting their turn inside a space containing a forge take 10 fire damage and ongoing 5 fire damage (save ends). Caved-In Tunnel: The tunnel leading through the mountain has been collapsed for at least 2 miles. Movement through the tunnel is impossible. Raging Fire Hazard
Level 2 Blaster XP 250
Damage to one of the forges caused hot coals to spill onto the floor and set fire to discarded materials. The fire is now out of control and is spreading across the room. At the start of the encounter, the fire fills a 6-square-by-6-square area. Hazard: A 6-by-6 square area has a fire. Perception No check is necessary to notice the fire. ✦ DC 16: The character notices the fire is spreading. Trigger When a creature enters a space adjacent to the raging fire or starts its turn in a space adjacent to or inside the raging fire, the raging fire attacks. Attack Free Action Melee 1 Target: The triggering creature Attack: +6 vs. Reflex Special: The raging fire gains a +5 bonus to its attack roll if the target stands inside the fire. Hit: 2d6 fire damage and ongoing 5 fire damage (save ends). Miss: Half damage, and no ongoing damage. Effect: The fire also provides concealment to all creatures inside it and within 2 squares of it. Special: Each time the fire attacks, it spreads into its target’s space whether it hits or misses. Countermeasures ✦ A character can move into a square of raging fire or a square adjacent to the raging fire without triggering the attack with a DC 20 Acrobatics check. ✦ Two gallons of water destroys 1 square of raging fire. ✦ Targeting 1 or more squares with a water attack automatically destroys the fire in those squares.
August 20 08
|
D u n g e o n 1 57
37
Siege of Bordrin's Watch
Kalad Once the characters defeat Og and his warriors, they can find Kalad crumpled on the floor in the space indicated on the tactical map. Assuming the characters stopped Og before he could kill the dwarf, the PCs can talk with the last dwarf of the monastery. Failing that, the characters might take Kalad’s remains back to Overlook to have him raised by the Raise Dead ritual or converse with him using Speak with Dead. In any event, Kalad is helpful, for he knows what’s at stake if the orcs come through the mountains.
Using Kalad Provided Kalad survives (or is restored to life), the dwarf can be an invaluable aid to the PCs as they work to complete their quest. Kalad knows how
to seal the Nexus, thus closing off all the passages through the mountains and forcing the orcs and orogs to face Bordrin’s Watch. He also has a good idea about how to reach the Nexus (granting a +2 bonus to all checks made to navigate the Vents; see below). Finally, he also has a score to settle against the orcs and gladly accompanies the PCs on the final leg of their mission with no convincing required. Should any of the PCs think to mention the tunnels beneath Bordrin’s Watch, Kalad mentions they are already sealed, for he closed them a few days ago after the news of the approaching army grew dire. As for the Vents, Kalad insists they go to the tunnels to make certain the other group completed their mission. “There’s too much at stake, friends!” He adds, “it’s a labyrinth down there, easy to get turned around. Would you risk the lives of everyone in that valley on the efforts of just one group?”
Description Kalad is tall for a dwarf, thickly muscled, but his beard was savagely cut from his face and his injuries are extensive (he’s at 1 hit point and out of healing surges). His armor and weapon are still inside the Chamber of Works, and he dons them when he can. Even when fully recovered, he has a haunted look about him, for he’s plagued with the horrors of the attack and he won’t know peace until the orcs are stopped. Deeply pious, as one would expect of a holy warrior, Kalad spends a portion of each day in deep prayer, calling out to his god for guidance, comfort, and a renewal of his resolve to continue his fight against the darkness. Outside these private times, Kalad is friendly,
Kalad the Paladin
Level 4 Elite Soldier
Medium natural humanoid, dwarf XP 350 Initiative +4 Senses Perception +4; low-light vision HP 54; Bloodied 27 AC 21; Fortitude 17, Reflex 14, Will 16 Saving Throws +2; +7 against poison effects Speed 5 Action Points 1 m Greataxe (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon +8 vs. AC; 1d12 + 3 damage (crit 1d12 + 18), and the target is marked until the end of Kalad’s next turn. If the target moves or makes an attack that does not include Kalad as the target, the target takes 5 radiant damage. M Arcing Smite (standard; encounter) ✦ Weapon One or two creatures; +8 vs. AC, one attack per target; 1d12 + 3 damage (crit 1d12 + 18) damage, and the target is marked until end of Kalad’s next turn. M Holy Strike (standard; at-will) ✦ Radiant, Weapon +8 vs. AC; 1d12 + 3 damage (crit 1d12 + 18) radiant damage, and if Kalad marked the target, he deals an extra 2 radiant damage. C Sacred Circle (standard; daily) ✦ Zone Close burst 3; the burst creates a zone that, until the end of the encounter, gives Kalad and allies within it a +1 power bonus to AC. Divine Strength (minor; encounter) Kalad applies his Strength modifier as extra damage on his next attack this turn. Stand Your Ground When an effect forces Kalad to move—through a pull, a push, or a slide—he moves 1 square less than the effect specifies. When an attack would knock Kalad prone, he can roll a saving throw to avoid falling prone. Alignment Lawful good Languages Common, Dwarven Skills Dungeoneering +6, Endurance +11, Heal +9, History +7, Religion +7 Str 17 (+5) Dex 10 (+2) Wis 14 (+4) Con 14 (+4) Int 11 (+2) Cha 14 (+4) Equipment plate armor, greataxe
if gruff, constant in his support, but always detached. He doesn’t have much use for humor and ignores the banter of those around him. He has a mission and he intends to see it to its end. He might be reserved in his relations, but the PCs couldn’t ask for a more
August 20 08
|
D u n g e o n 1 57
38
Siege of Bordrin's Watch committed ally. Kalad sees the PCs as divine agents— heroes sent by the gods to save him and reveal to him his life’s purpose. Thus, he watches the characters for further revelations that might shed light on what lies in store for him next.
Unexpected Developments Upon rescuing Kalad, the adventurers learn that the dwarf paladin has sealed two of the three possible routes through the mountain. If the PCs didn’t save the paladin or if they dismiss his warnings, the characters might head up to Bordrin’s Watch to
grow worried enough to send the PCs or the Freeriders into the Vents to make sure the job was done. Shift the Perspective: Without Kalad, the characters have an even chance of going back to the city or heading up to the fortress. To deal with this eventuality, adjust the plot so that, in the case of Bordrin’s Watch, the tunnel was never sealed and the characters stumble across the entrance while patrolling the walls of the fortress, or, in the case of the city, all three groups succeed, but a fourth entrance exists, but this time underneath Caer Overlook. In either case, you can use the encounters described under the Vents by changing the location of the entrance. Let the Orcs Through: For particularly stubborn groups, you might just let the orcs break through.
Even when fully recovered, he has a haunted look about him, for he’s plagued with the horrors of the attack . . . lend support to the troops, or worse, head back to Overlook, believing their mission is complete. Both possibilities can cause difficulties in resolving the adventure, since extended time in the city or at the fortress takes the adventure into unexpected directions. Naturally, if you’re comfortable with reworking the plot on the fly or even adapting the adventure for a different sort of outcome, you can go with the flow. On the other hand, you could try any of the following options to get the adventure back on track. Extend the Timetable: For groups at the fortress or the city, you can extend the length of time it takes for Tusk’s armies to arrive. Eventually, when the Farstriders never make it back, the Council of Elders
A host of a thousand orcs spilling out of the Vents ought to be enough to grab their attention. Just treat the orcs as an advance force so the PCs, should they choose to enter the dungeon, can still face Tusk at the conclusion. Go with the Flow: Finally, no group likes to be “railroaded” by an adventure. Take a step back, relax, and let the players decide what to do and where to go. Depending on the players’ choices, you might shift the action so that it occurs in different ways. Perhaps instead of braving the Vents, the PCs fail to close the Nexus and the orcs encircle Overlook and crush Bordrin’s Watch. The PCs might be trapped in the city, hiding behind the walls along with everyone else. They might undertake a mission to infiltrate the
orc armies to find and destroy Tusk in the hopes of unraveling the glue that holds this force together. This doesn’t require a lot of work; you need only change the dynamics of the battlefield, alter the order of encounters, insert a few extra ones, and remove a few unnecessary ones and the adventure can still come to a satisfactory end.
The Vents The Vents are easy to find, even if they are several miles away near the foot of the mountains, for the steam rising from the fissures is visible from quite a distance, so there is no challenge in reaching the these caves. Once the characters reach the vents, read or paraphrase the following text: Scattered across the lower slopes are numerous steaming fissures, some as small as tiny cracks in the stone with others large enough to accommodate an ogre. The rocks here are slippery and aside from ropes of brown-black fungus, moss, and lichen, nothing lives here. The air stinks of sulfur and grows stronger nearest the plumes of acrid smoke wafting up from the holes. About a hundred feet down from the lowest cracks is a campsite. There, you see five horses tied up and empty feedbags hanging from their heads. Perception Check DC 18: A smothered campfire sits a few yards away from the horses. DC 22: Footprints lead into one of the larger openings. DC 26: There are five different sets of prints. There’s no sign of any prints coming out.
August 20 08
|
D u n g e o n 1 57
39
Siege of Bordrin's Watch The Farstriders camped outside the tunnels when they arrived and set out at first light on the day after the PCs set out for the monastery. These adventurers went in and never came out again, falling victim to the orcs already infesting the tunnels. When the PCs are ready to proceed, they can enter through any of the entrances and make their way through the maze of tunnels. A map is not provided for the first leg of their descent, since the characters must rely on instincts and cunning to make their way to the deeper tunnels and, eventually, the Nexus. Setup: The entrances on the mountainside all worm into the rock, tangling into a convoluted network of passages and chambers that are thick with mist and slippery with moisture. The adventurers must navigate these passages using a variety of skills to reach the deeper tunnels. Level: 3. Complexity: 2 (requires 6 successes before 3 failures). Primary Skills: Athletics, Dungeoneering, Endurance, Perception. Special: If Kalad is with the PCs, they gain a +2 bonus to all checks made during the challenge. Once the characters succeed on the challenge, they gain a +2 bonus to all checks each time they repeat it. Athletics (DC 15): Working through the tunnels, the characters need to squeeze through tight spots, leap across smoking cracks, climb slippery walls, and perform a variety of physical stunts. At least three characters must make a successful Athletics checks to overcome these obstacles. In addition to counting as a failure, a failed check indicates each party member loses 1 healing surge from injuries sustained while traveling.
Dungeoneering (DC 20): A character experienced in spelunking can make a successful Dungeoneering check to help navigate the tunnels. A successful check counts as a success or removes 1 failure. A successful DC 25 Dungeoneering check also grants the characters an extra +4 bonus to all other checks related to this skill challenge (one-time bonus). Endurance (DC 15): There’s nothing easy about this descent and the poor air and dangerous environment is taxing. At least two characters must make successful Endurance checks to preserve their stamina and avoid fatigue, injury, and exhaustion. Failed checks result in everyone in the party losing 1 healing surge in addition to counting as a failure. Perception (DC 20): A character can attempt a Perception check to notice tracks left by the Farstriders. A successful check counts as two successes. Once made, the characters cannot use Perception again for this skill challenge. Success: The characters reach the lower tunnels intact. Failure: The characters are turned around and come to a cave mouth 3d6 squares from the cave they first entered. They must start the skill challenge again to reach the deeper tunnels, though they gain a +2 bonus to their skill checks since they eliminate one possible route from their travels.
Deeper Tunnels Once the characters successfully make their way through the Vents, they reach an old network of excavated passages and chambers. An advance troop of orcs have breached these tunnels, but they have not yet found their way through the Vents. As they make ready to plunge into the misty tunnels, Tusk and his cadre are even now closing in on the Nexus, leading
August 20 08
|
D u n g e o n 1 57
40
Siege of Bordrin's Watch a large force through the western tunnels to take Bordrin’s Watch from behind.
Extended Rest Once the characters enter the deeper tunnels, they have no place to take an extended rest safely, so they must use their resources wisely, preserving their strength until the final encounter. Should disaster strike, the characters can retreat to the Vents and hole up there until they recover enough to complete the adventure. Unless you have an unusually small group of characters, let the PCs use this option once. If they try to do it again, Tusk should break free. See Unexpected Developments on the previous page for tips on how to adjust the plot for this potential outcome.
The Vents Overview The Vents are a complex series of tunnels that leak out a sulfurous steam and the occasional burst of noxious smoke. Navigating the Vents is dangerous because it’s easy to get turned around and hidden dangers lurk in the dark. The vents include the following encounter areas.
V1. Entering the Vents Beyond the mazelike Vents is the buried passage, a hidden route through the mountains beneath Bordrin’s Watch far above. Opening onto the rest of the complex is a simple antechamber, shrouded in mist. Here a band of orcs, having survived a gauntlet of traps, argue about their next course of action. Tactical Encounter: “Entering the Vents” (page 42).
V2. The Gauntlet
V6. The Nexus
To safeguard the deep passage, the dwarf architects constructed a nasty trap and placed construct guardians in this long corridor. Evidence of its lethality can be seen in the orc corpses littering the floor. Tactical Encounter: “The Gauntlet” (page 43).
When the tunnels are compromised by enemy forces, the dwarves can seal off access by activating a complex trap that causes the doors to seal shut and the room to fill with water. However, with the dwarves largely wiped out, the orcs control this room and they intend to use it to breach Bordrin’s Watch above. Tactical Encounter: “The Nexus” (page 49).
V3. The Boiler Room Central to protecting the subterranean route is the ability to close off the Nexus (see V6) by filling that room with water. This chamber houses the water reservoirs, which are kept at boiling temperatures to scald as well as drown intruders. Currently, Tusk’s agents explore this chamber to ascertain its purpose and function. Tactical Encounter: “The Boiler Room” (page 44).
V4. Shrine to Moradin The dwarves that built this place were devout followers of Moradin and in between shifts of guarding and expanding the tunnels, they congregated here to receive the blessings and protections of their priests. Now, the site is the lair of a ravenous cave troll and its handlers. Tactical Encounter: “Shrine to Moradin” (page 46).
V5. Dwarf Quarters
Conclusion Once the characters seal the Nexus and defeat Tusk, they have completed their mission, but more importantly, they have delivered a deathblow to the orc hordes. With their leader dead and cut off from the tunnels, the orcs have no choice but to attack Bordrin’s Watch. The fighting is brutal, for even though the orcs have lost their advantage, they are still numerous and powerful. After five days of fighting, the defenders on the walls turn back the hordes, sending them back into the badlands once more. With the threat at an end, the surviving PCs are welcomed as heroes and given badges of distinction to recognize their courageous efforts and their parts in saving Overlook and Elsir Vale. During the ceremony, the adventurers are free to relax, drink, and enjoy some well-deserved downtime, but they can’t help but feel like they’re being watched.
These chambers once billeted the dwarf miners, warriors, and priests, but little of their presence remains with the orc infestation. Orc soldiers explore these rooms in search of plunder and grow frustrated by the spartan rooms. Tactical Encounter: “Dwarf Quarters” (page 48).
August 20 08
|
D u n g e o n 1 57
41
Siege of Bordrin's Watch
Entering the Vents Encounter Level 1 (500 XP)
Setup Having survived the Gauntlet (V2), the orcs have rested and now make ready to venture into the Vents. The orcs lost most of their drudges in the trapped corridor behind them, so they are demoralized and a bit nervous about what is ahead. 1 orc sergeant (S) 1 orc bombardier (B) 2 orc freaks (F) When the characters enter this room, read: Four orcs engage in a heated argument, one pointing back into the corridor behind them. The biggest of the lot points in your direction, growling deep in his chest. 2 Orc Freaks (F) Level 2 Skirmisher
Medium natural humanoid XP 125 each Initiative +5 Senses Perception +5; low-light vision HP 38; Bloodied 19; see also warrior’s surge AC 15; Fortitude 15, Reflex 14, Will 11 Speed 6 (8 while charging) m Battleaxe (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon +6 vs. AC; 1d10 + 3 damage. M Savage Strike (standard; encounter) ✦ Weapon Make two attacks; +6 vs. AC; 1d10 + 3 damage per attack. If both attacks hit the same target, the target also takes ongoing 5 damage (save ends). M Warrior’s Surge (standard, usable only while bloodied; encounter) ✦ Healing, Weapon The orc freak makes a melee basic attack and regains 9 hit points. Alignment Chaotic evil Languages Common, Giant Skills Athletics +9 Str 17 (+4) Dex 15 (+3) Wis 8 (+0) Con 14 (+3) Int 8 (+0) Cha 7 (–1) Equipment hide armor, 2 battleaxes
Tactics The orcs are arguing, but they abandon their dispute at the first sign of intruders. If the sergeant falls, the bombardier and the freaks move back into V2 to trigger the trap and cause a bit more mayhem.
Features of the Area Illumination: One of the orcs carries an everburning torch, which fills the room with bright light. Ceiling: The ceiling is 15 feet tall. Mist: The tunnels leading to the Vents are filled with mist. Characters inside these tunnels gain concealment. Stairs: The western stairs lead down to V2. Each square containing stairs counts as difficult terrain. Orc Bombardier (B) Level 1 Artillery
Medium natural humanoid XP 100 Initiative +3 Senses Perception –2; low-light vision HP 24; Bloodied 12; see also warrior’s surge AC 13; Fortitude 13, Reflex 15, Will 11 Speed 6 (8 while charging) m Battleaxe (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon +5 vs. AC; 1d10 + 2 damage. M Warrior’s Surge (standard, usable only while bloodied; encounter) ✦ Healing, Weapon The orc bombardier makes a melee basic attack and regains 6 hit points. A Cinderbomb (standard; recharge ⚃ ⚄ ⚅) ✦ Fire Area burst 2 within 10; +4 vs. Reflex; 1d8 + 3 fire damage, and ongoing 5 fire damage (save ends). On a crit, the orc bombardier knocks the target prone. Miss: Half damage, and no ongoing damage. C Detonation (no action, when reduced to 0 hit points; encounter) ✦ Fire The orc bombardier must have at least one cinderbomb left; close burst 2; +4 vs. Reflex; 1d8 + 3 fire damage, and ongoing 5 fire damage (save ends) (crit knock prone). Miss: Half damage, and no ongoing damage. Alignment Chaotic evil Languages Common, Giant Str 13 (+1) Dex 17 (+3) Wis 7 (–2) Con 12 (+1) Int 8 (–1) Cha 9 (–1) Equipment battleaxe, 3 cinderbombs, everburning torch
Orc Sergeant (S) Level 3 Soldier (Leader)
Medium natural humanoid XP 150 Initiative +2 Senses Perception +5; low-light vision Lead by Fear aura 1; orcs inside the aura gain a +1 power bonus to attack rolls. HP 46; Bloodied 23; see also warrior’s surge AC 19; Fortitude 17, Reflex 13, Will 14 Speed 6 (8 while charging) m Glaive (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon Reach 2; +10 vs. AC; 2d4 + 4 damage. M Warrior’s Surge (standard, usable only while bloodied; encounter) ✦ Healing The orc sergeant makes a melee basic attack and regains 11 hit points. Back to the Front! (immediate reaction, when orc ally within 5 squares is forcibly moved; at-will) Slide triggering ally 1 square. Alignment Chaotic evil Languages Common, Giant Skills Endurance +5, Intimidate +5 Str 19 (+5) Dex 9 (+0) Wis 13 (+2) Con 14 (+3) Int 11 (+1) Cha 11 (+1) Equipment chainmail, glaive, tattered cloak
August 20 08
|
D u n g e o n 1 57
42
Siege of Bordrin's Watch
The Gauntlet Encounter Level 3 (775 XP)
Setup The dwarves created a trio of homunculi to protect the Nexus. Supporting the guardians is a nasty trap. If the group dealt with the orcs in V1 easily, assume the trap in this room is already sprung. 1 arbalester (A) 2 iron defenders (I) 4 crossbow turrets (T, turrets; P, pressure plates) When the characters can see the corridor, read: A wide corridor stretches before you and ends at a pair of double doors. About halfway down, you see a strange creature that resembles a crossbow with legs, flanked by two iron dogs.
Tactics The defenders guard the arbalester, while the arbalester guards the doors. If an intruder moves for the control panel, a defender moves to intercept.
Features of the Area Illumination: None. This room is dark Ceiling: The ceiling here is 20 feet tall. Double Doors: A pair of bronze doors stand closed at the end of the hall. The doors are not locked. Magic Crossbow Turret Trap
Level 3 Elite Blaster 300 XP
Four armored crossbow turrets drop from the ceiling at the edge of the room. Each round they pepper the area with quarrels. Trap: Four crossbows attack each round on their initiative after they are triggered. Perception ✦ DC 22: The character notices the trigger plates.
✦ DC 27: The character notices the location of the turrets. ✦ DC 22: The character notices the location of the hidden control panel. Initiative +3 Trigger The trap activates and rolls initiative when a character enters one of the four trigger squares in the room. Attack Standard Action Ranged 10 Targets: Each crossbow attacks one intruder (any nondwarf, nonhomunculus). It magically distinguishes intruders from the natives of the dungeon. Attack: +8 vs. AC Hit: 2d8 + 3 damage Countermeasures ✦ A character who makes a successful Athletics check (DC 6 or DC 11 without a running start) can jump over a single pressure plate square. ✦ An adjacent character can disable a trigger plate with a DC 27 Thievery check. ✦ Attacking a trigger plate (AC 12, other defenses 10) only triggers the trap ✦ A character can attack a turret (AC 16, other defenses 13; hp 38). Destroying a turret stops its attacks. ✦ A character can engage in a skill challenge to deactivate the control panel, DC 20 Thievery. Complexity 2 (6 successes before 3 failures). Success disables the trap. Failure causes the control panel to explode (close blast 3, 2d6 + 3 damage to all creatures in blast) and the trap remains active.
2 Iron Defenders (I)
Level 3 Soldier
Medium natural animate (construct, homunculus) X P 150 each Initiative +5 Senses Perception +6; darkvision HP 47; Bloodied 23 AC 18; Fortitude 16, Reflex 15, Will 13 Immune disease, poison Speed 6 m Bite (standard; at-will) +8 vs. AC; 1d8 + 3 damage. M Guard Creature (immediate reaction, when an adjacent enemy attacks the creature guarded by the iron defender; at-will) The iron defender makes a bite attack against the enemy. Pursue and Attack When the iron defender makes an opportunity attack, it shifts 1 square before or after the attack. Alignment Unaligned Languages — Str 16 (+4) Dex 15 (+3) Wis 11 (+1) Con 15 (+3) Int 5 (–2) Cha 8 (+0)
Arbalester (A)
Level 4 Artillery
Medium natural animate (construct, homunculus) XP 175 Initiative +6 Senses Perception +8; darkvision HP 43; Bloodied 21 AC 17; Fortitude 16, Reflex 18, Will 15 Immune disease, poison Speed 6 m Slam (standard; at-will) +4 vs. AC; 1d4 + 2 damage. r Bolt (standard; at-will) Ranged 20/40; +9 vs. AC; 1d8 + 4 damage. R Double Shot (standard; recharge ⚃ ⚄ ⚅; see also guard area) The arbalester makes a bolt attack against two different targets within 5 squares of each other. Guard Area At the start of the arbalester’s turn, if an enemy is in its guarded area, the arbalester recharges its double shot power. Alignment Unaligned Languages — Str 15 (+4) Dex 18 (+6) Wis 12 (+3) Con 13 (+3) Int 5 (–1) Cha 3 (–2) August 20 08
|
D u n g e o n 1 57
43
Siege of Bordrin's Watch
Boiler Room Encounter Level 5 (1,095 XP)
Setup The dark one emissary is one of the servants of Tusk who arranged the deal to assist the orog chieftain in infiltrating the tunnels below the Stonehome Mountains. He and his cohorts have just arrived in this chamber, and he’s examining one of the valves to determine its function. The orcs are milling around, waiting for him to finish. 1 dark one emissary (D) 3 orc scouts (S) 3 fire beetles (F) 5 orc drudges (O) When the characters enter this room, read: The doors open a platform overlooking an enormous chamber. A group of orcs turns to face you, growling with rage and drooling with anticipation for the kill. Behind and below the orcs lies a sunken section of the chamber, where you see iron tubes as tall as a man running across the room. On the north side of the pit, you spot several large beetles, their mottled hides glowing red as if af lame. Perception Check DC 22: A short humanoid wearing a long black cloak is examining an iron wheel connected to the southern pipe.
Tactics The orcs mobilize when they notice the PCs, and the drudges charge while the scouts fall back to hit the PCs with ranged attacks. The fire beetles, while not allied with the orcs, are hungry and attack the closest
living creature they can reach. The orcs fight to the death. The dark one emissary is far more cautious. It joins the fight straightaway, but stays on the edge, moving in to stab at the PCs, using dark step, and then darts away. If the dark one becomes bloodied, it flees through the door to the west to warn the creatures in V4 of the impending attack.
Features of the Area Illumination: Two everburning torches sit in iron sconces on either side of the iron door set in the center of the west wall. Ceiling: The ceiling, from the main level, is 20 feet overhead. Stone Walk: Bisecting this room, at the level at which the doors stand, is a stone walkway connecting the eastern doors to the west. Scaffolding: Branching out to the south and north is a floor made of iron mesh. The mesh allows sight to the level below but blocks all attacks. Lower Level: Beneath the stone walk and scaffolding is a lower level, about 20 feet below the
doors leading into and out of this room, and reached by twin staircases descending from the eastern platform. Iron Door: The iron door to the north is closed, but not locked. It has been magically treated to resist rust. Fire Beetle Carcasses: The fire beetles attacked the first group of orcs, but were driven back. The carcasses mark those beetles killed by the orcs. Squares containing dead beetles count as difficult terrain. Stairs: The stairs leading to the lower level count as difficult terrain. Hot Pipe: Two 10-foot wide pipes run across the lower level of the room, emerging from the eastern wall and exiting through the west. The pipes carry scalding water to the Nexus. The valves (see below)
August 20 08
|
D u n g e o n 1 57
44
Siege of Bordrin's Watch are closed, so only the pipes east of the valves are hot. If the valves are opened, the entire pipe becomes hot. Characters touching a hot pipe take 5 fire damage. Valves: Each pipe is fitted with a valve that can be opened or shut with a successful DC 13 Strength check. Opening the valves is necessary to seal the Nexus. A DC 22 Dungeoneering check reveals the general function of these valves. If Kalad is present, once the creatures are all dealt with, he moves to open each valve. Dead Adventurer: Sprawled across the floor is the beheaded remains of Jen, the half-elf warlock and member of the Farstriders. She was killed by the orc sergeant at V1. 3 Orc Scouts (S)
Level 3 Skirmisher
Medium natural humanoid XP 150 each Initiative +5 Senses Perception +6; low-light vision HP 46; Bloodied 23; see also warrior’s surge AC 17; Fortitude 16, Reflex 15, Will 13 Speed 6 (8 while charging) m Scimitar (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon +8 vs. AC; 1d8 + 3 damage (crit: +1d8). r Longbow (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon Ranged 20/40; +7 vs. AC; 1d10 + 2 damage. M Warrior’s Surge (standard, usable only while bloodied; encounter) ✦ Healing, Weapon The orc scout makes a melee basic attack and regains 11 hit points. Overeager (immediate reaction, when the orc scout drops an enemy with a ranged attack; encounter) The orc scout draws its scimitar and charges the closest enemy. Alignment Chaotic evil Languages Common, Giant Skills Athletics +9, Endurance +8, Intimidate +5, Stealth +8 Str 16 (+4) Dex 15 (+3) Wis 10 (+1) Con 14 (+3) Int 8 (+0) Cha 9 (+0) Equipment leather armor, scimitar, longbow with quiver of 20 arrows
Dark One Emissary (D)
Level 5 Lurker
Small shadow humanoid XP 200 Initiative +11 Senses Perception +9; darkvision HP 48; Bloodied 24; see also killing dark AC 20 (see also dark step); Fortitude 16, Reflex 20, Will 17 Speed 6 m Dagger (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon +10 vs. AC; 1d4 + 5 damage. r Dagger (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon Ranged 5/10; +10 vs. AC; 1d4 + 5 damage. C Killing Dark (when reduced to 0 hit points) Close burst 1; targets enemies; each target is blinded (save ends). When slain, a dark one emissary explodes in a spout of darkness. Cloak of Shadow (minor; at-will) ✦ Illusion The dark one emissary shifts 1 square and gains concealment until the end of its next turn. Combat Advantage The dark one emissary deals an extra 1d6 damage on melee and ranged attacks against any target it has combat advantage against. Dark Step (move; at-will) The dark one emissary moves up to 4 squares, gains a +4 bonus to AC against opportunity attacks, and gains combat advantage against any target that it ends its move adjacent to. Alignment Evil Languages Common Skills Bluff +9, Intimidate +11, Stealth +12 Str 13 (+3) Dex 20 (+7) Wis 15 (+4) Con 12 (+3) Int 14 (+4) Cha 14 (+4) Equipment black garments, 5 daggers
3 Fire Beetles (F)
Level 1 Brute
Small natural beast XP 100 each Initiative +1 Senses Perception +0 HP 32; Bloodied 16 AC 13; Fortitude 13, Reflex 12, Will 11 Resist 10 fire Speed 6 m Bite (standard; at-will) +5 vs. AC; 2d4 + 2 damage. C Fire Spray (standard; recharge ⚄ ⚅ ) ✦ Fire Close blast 3; +4 vs. Reflex; 3d6 fire damage. Alignment Unaligned Languages — Str 14 (+2) Dex 12 (+1) Wis 10 (+0) Con 12 (+1) Int 1 (–5) Cha 8 (–1)
5 Orc Drudges (O)
Level 4 Minion
Medium natural humanoid XP 44 each Initiative +0 Senses Perception +0; low-light vision HP 1; a missed attack never damages a minion. AC 16; Fortitude 15, Reflex 12, Will 12 Speed 6 (8 while charging) m Club (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon +9 vs. AC; 5 damage. Alignment Chaotic evil Languages Common, Giant Str 16 (+5) Dex 10 (+2) Wis 10 (+2) Con 14 (+4) Int 8 (+1) Cha 9 (+1) Equipment hide armor, club
August 20 08
|
D u n g e o n 1 57
45
Siege of Bordrin's Watch
Shrine to Moradin Encounter Level 3 (764 XP)
Setup The orcs in this room are responsible for their cave troll ally. The cave troll goes where and does what it likes. The orcs watch the monster devour the last of the Farstriders with a mixture of fear and envy. 1 cave troll (T) 2 orc bombardiers (B) 6 orc drudges (D) When the characters enter this room, read: Eight orcs and one big, hulking brute befoul this sacred chamber by their mere presence. The orcs, a mix of hideous humanoids, shout warnings when they see you, causing the cave troll to turn, which reveals the blood and gore painting its chest. Perception Check DC 18 (dwarf only): You notice the altar shines brilliantly, as if Moradin was calling for you to purify this chamber.
Tactics The orcs and troll surge into battle, with the drudges charging where possible and the cave troll grabbing the first creature it can to use as an improvised weapon. The bombardiers hold back, flinging cinderbombs until they exhaust their supplies, at which point they close to fight hand to hand.
Cave Troll (T)
Level 7 Brute
Large natural humanoid XP 300 Initiative +6 Senses Perception +9; low-light vision HP 99; Bloodied 49; see also troll healing Regeneration 10 (if the cave troll takes acid or fire damage regeneration does not function until the end of its next turn) AC 19; Fortitude 21, Reflex 19, Will 17 Speed 8 m Claw (standard; at-will) Reach 2; +10 vs. AC; 2d4 + 5 damage, and the target is grabbed (until escape). A cave troll can grab up to two targets at once. M Improvised Weapon (standard; at-will) Requires grabbed creature; reach 2; +10 vs. AC; 2d8 + 5 damage, and the grabbed creature takes half this damage and is dazed (save ends). When grabbing a creature wearing heavy armor, the cave troll deals +5 damage with this attack, but the grabbed creature is not dazed. Troll Healing ✦ Healing If the cave troll is reduced to 0 hit points by an attack that does not deal acid or fire damage, it rises on its next turn (as a move action) with 10 hit points. Alignment Chaotic evil Languages Giant Skills Athletics +13, Endurance +12 Str 21 (+8) Dex 16 (+6) Wis 12 (+4) Con 19 (+7) Int 5 (+0) Cha 8 (+2)
Features of the Area Illumination: Two everburning torches in iron sconces fill the room with bright light. Ceiling: The ceiling in this room is 20 feet tall. Stone Pews: Spaces containing stone pews count as difficult terrain. A DC 17 Strength check is required to shove a stone pew 1 square. If used in conjunction with a bull rush, the attack takes a –2 penalty, but the target is also knocked prone. Altar: Any dwarf that starts its turn in a space adjacent to the altar gains a +2 power bonus to attack rolls until the end of the encounter. Tapestry: The tapestry recounts the construction of the Nexus. Characters who study it and succeed on
a DC 18 Perception check determine that they must open the valves in room V3 to seal off the Nexus. Dwarf Statues: The statues in this room stand 15-feet tall and depict dwarf warriors, head bowed as if in prayer or reflection. The statues are carved so the warriors look like they’re wearing plate armor and both are armed with hammers. Climbing a statue requires a DC 20 Athletics check. The statue has AC 20, other defenses 18; hp 100; resist 10 to all damage.
August 20 08
|
D u n g e o n 1 57
46
Siege of Bordrin's Watch Dead Adventurers: The troll has been eating the remaining members of the Farstriders. Bits of flesh, bone, and gear litter the floor here. Orc Bombardier (B)
Level 1 Artillery
Medium natural humanoid XP 100 Initiative +3 Senses Perception –2; low-light vision HP 24; Bloodied 12; see also warrior’s surge AC 13; Fortitude 13, Reflex 15, Will 11 Speed 6 (8 while charging) m Battleaxe (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon +5 vs. AC; 1d10 + 2 damage. M Warrior’s Surge (standard, usable only while bloodied; encounter) ✦ Healing, Weapon The orc bombardier makes a melee basic attack and regains 6 hit points. A Cinderbomb (standard; recharge ⚃ ⚄ ⚅) ✦ Fire Area burst 2 within 10; +4 vs. Reflex; 1d8 + 3 fire damage, and ongoing 5 fire damage (save ends). On a crit, the orc bombardier knocks the target prone. Miss: Half damage, and no ongoing damage. C Detonation (no action, when reduced to 0 hit points; encounter) ✦ Fire The orc bombardier must have at least one cinderbomb left; close burst 2; +4 vs. Reflex; 1d8 + 3 fire damage, and ongoing 5 fire damage (save ends) (crit knock prone). Miss: Half damage, and no ongoing damage. Alignment Chaotic evil Languages Common, Giant Str 13 (+1) Dex 17 (+3) Wis 7 (–2) Con 12 (+1) Int 8 (–1) Cha 9 (–1) Equipment battleaxe, 3 cinderbombs
6 Orc Drudges (O)
Level 4 Minion
Medium natural humanoid XP 44 each Initiative +0 Senses Perception +0; low-light vision HP 1; a missed attack never damages a minion. AC 16; Fortitude 15, Reflex 12, Will 12 Speed 6 (8 while charging) m Club (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon +9 vs. AC; 5 damage. Alignment Chaotic evil Languages Common, Giant Str 16 (+5) Dex 10 (+2) Wis 10 (+2) Con 14 (+4) Int 8 (+1) Cha 9 (+1) Equipment hide armor, club
August 20 08
|
D u n g e o n 1 57
47
Siege of Bordrin's Watch
Dwarf Quarters Encounter Level 2 (645 XP)
Setup The orc freaks led a band of drudges here in search of loot. Unfortunately, the dwarves emptied these chambers years ago. What the orcs haven’t discovered, however, is the presence of the cavern choker prepared to kill the first creature to enter the kitchens. 1 cavern choker (C) 2 orc freaks (F) 5 orc drudges (D) When the characters near this room, read: Flickering torchlight shines through an open door at the end of the hall.
2 Orc Freaks (F)
Level 2 Skirmisher
Medium natural humanoid XP 125 each Initiative +5 Senses Perception +5; low-light vision HP 38; Bloodied 19; see also warrior’s surge AC 15; Fortitude 15, Reflex 14, Will 11 Speed 6 (8 while charging) m Battleaxe (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon +6 vs. AC; 1d10 + 3 damage. M Savage Strike (standard; encounter) ✦ Weapon Make two attacks; +6 vs. AC; 1d10 + 3 damage per attack. If both attacks hit the same target, the target also takes ongoing 5 damage (save ends). M Warrior’s Surge (standard, usable only while bloodied; encounter) ✦ Healing, Weapon The orc freak makes a melee basic attack and regains 9 hit points. Alignment Chaotic evil Languages Common, Giant Skills Athletics +9 Str 17 (+4) Dex 15 (+3) Wis 8 (+0) Con 14 (+3) Int 8 (+0) Cha 7 (–1) Equipment hide armor, 2 battleaxes
When the characters enter this room, read: Two orcs hold torches, shining light in this cavernous chamber. Stone doors stand open, leading into other rooms.
Tactics The orcs charge the PCs and fight to the death. The choker uses the resulting chaos as its chance to escape, striking a PC as it backs into the hall.
Features of the Area Illumination: The orc freaks carry torches, each shedding bright light in a 10-square radius. Once combat begins, the orcs drop the torches. Each round, at the start of their turns, there’s a 50% chance that the torch gutters out. Ceiling: The ceilings here are 20-feet tall. Barracks: The barracks hold bunk beds and empty chests.
5 Orc Drudges (D)
Level 4 Minion
Cavern Choker (C)
Level 4 Lurker
Medium natural humanoid XP 44 each Initiative +0 Senses Perception +0; low-light vision HP 1; a missed attack never damages a minion. AC 16; Fortitude 15, Reflex 12, Will 12 Speed 6 (8 while charging) m Club (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon +9 vs. AC; 5 damage. Alignment Chaotic evil Languages Common, Giant Str 16 (+5) Dex 10 (+2) Wis 10 (+2) Con 14 (+4) Int 8 (+1) Cha 9 (+1) Equipment hide armor, club Small natural humanoid XP 175 Initiative +9 Senses Perception +3; darkvision HP 42; Bloodied 21 AC 17 (see also chameleon hide); Fortitude 15, Reflex 15 Will 13 Speed 6, climb 6 (spider climb) m Tentacle Claw (standard; at-will) Reach 2; +9 vs. AC; 1d8 + 3 damage, and the target is grabbed (until escape). A target trying to escape the grab takes a –4 penalty to the check. M Choke (standard; at-will) Grabbed target only; +9 vs. Fortitude; 1d8 + 3 damage. Chameleon Hide (minor; at-will) The cavern choker gains concealment until the start of its next turn. It can’t use this power while grabbing a creature or while grabbed. Body Shield (immediate interrupt, when targeted by a melee or a ranged attack against Reflex or AC; recharges when the choker makes a successful tentacle claw or choke attack) The cavern choker makes its grabbed victim the target instead. The choker cannot use this power to redirect attacks made by a creature it is currently grabbing. Alignment Unaligned Languages Common Skills Stealth +10 Str 17 (+5) Dex 17 (+5) Wis 13 (+3) Con 12 (+3) Int 6 (+0) Cha 6 (+0)
Mess Hall: Dusty tables and benches fill out this room. Squares containing tables count as difficult terrain. Kitchens: This room’s walls are lined with empty cabinets and cold hearths.
August 20 08
|
D u n g e o n 1 57
48
Siege of Bordrin's Watch
The Nexus
When the characters enter this room, read:
Encounter Level 7 (1,590 XP)
Setup When the characters first enter this chamber, there are no creatures. Once the PCs start climbing to the top, have the players roll for initiative. At the start of each round until the adventurers seal the Nexus, a wave of creatures enters the chamber. Roll 1d6 to determine which tunnel the enemies appear in and then roll for their initiative as normal, placing them at the mouth of the tunnel at the start of their turn. If the die results in a tunnel sealed off by the activated control panel, no additional creatures appear that round. This encounter includes the following creatures organized by waves. Wave One 2 orc drudges (D) Wave Two 2 orc militants (M) 2 orc drudges (D) Wave Three Tusk (T) Myrissa, shadar-kai dark warlock (S) 2 orc bolt throwers (B) Wave Four and Onward 3 orc drudges (D)
You step into a massive chamber in which the ceiling rises 100 feet above you. At the center of the chamber is a pillar of solid steel that is screwed into the stone and that stand as tall as the ceiling. Two bronze and steel pipes emerge from the eastern walls and travel toward the steel column before vanishing into the stone. Rising around the outside of the room is a stone catwalk that connects to steel grating that wraps around the steel pillar like scaffolding. Dark tunnels pock the walls, leading to who knows where. Perception Check DC 21: You smell the faint odor of sulfur in this room. DC 26: The stone around the base of the steel column is dark, as if damp.
Tactics Tusk’s objective here is obvious: Stop the PCs from sealing the Nexus. Once he arrives, he heads straight for the top, smashing through allies and enemies to block the PCs’ efforts. The drudges and bolt throwers harass the PCs and support their leader. Myrissa, finally, hits the characters with ranged attacks, hoping to slow their ascent or disrupt their efforts to activate the control panel. All the creatures here fight to the death.
Features of the Area Illumination: This room is dark. Ceiling: From the bottom of this room, the ceiling is 100 feet overhead. Tunnels: Six passages, marked 1–6, lead into the chamber. The passages are 5-feet wide and lead off,
August 20 08
|
D u n g e o n 1 57
49
Siege of Bordrin's Watch eventually coming out on the western side of the mountains. Ladders: Two ladders are in this room. One leads to tunnel 1 and the other leads up to the escape hatch. Climbing a ladder requires a DC 5 Athletics check (DC 10 when in boiling water; see below). The ladders are 10 feet tall. Stairs: Around the outer edge of the room, stairs climb up to higher levels. Stairs count as difficult terrain. Platforms: The platforms are fashioned out of steel grating, which allows a character standing on them to see, but it blocks ranged and melee attacks.
Pipes: Two massive pipes run across the floor. When the valves in V3 are opened, any character touching them takes 5 fire damage. Control Panel: The control panel stands at the top of the room. Activating the control panel requires a skill challenge. DC 18 Dungeoneering or Thievery. Complexity 1 (4 successes before 3 failures). Success activates the control panel. Failure results in two more orc drudges entering the room from a random tunnel (roll 1d6), and the character must start the skill challenge all over again. If Kalad is present, the character gains a +5 bonus to all checks related to the skill challenge. Boiling Water: Once the control panel is activated, boiling water floods the chamber. At the start of each round, a steel door drops down over the lowest tunnel and the water level rises to cover that tunnel. After 6 rounds, the room is flooded enough that no more enemies join the fight. Creatures that fall into the water or start their turn in the water take 2d8 + 4 scalding (fire) damage. Steam: Steam rises from the boiling water. Any characters above the water level, but below the next higher tunnel entrance, gain concealment. Escape Hatch: A ladder near the control panel leads up 10 feet to a trapdoor set in the ceiling. The door opens easily. It can be sealed shut from the other side by depressing a button. Once sealed, the door can be opened by only pressing the button a second time, or by succeeding on a DC 37 Strength check.
Tusk, Orog Chieftain (T) Level 5 Elite Soldier
Large natural humanoid XP 400 Initiative +4 Senses Perception +3; low-light vision HP 138; Bloodied 69 AC 23; Fortitude 22, Reflex 17, Will 16 Saving Throws +2 Speed 5 Action Points 1 m Falchion (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon Reach 2; +12 vs. AC; 2d4 + 7 damage. M Brutal Offensive (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon Requires falchion; +12 vs. AC; 2d4 + 7 damage, and Tusk can shift 1 and make a secondary attack. Secondary Attack: +12 vs. AC; 4d4 + 7 damage. C Skull Harvest (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon Requires falchion; close burst 2; +12 vs. Reflex; 2d4 + 7 damage. C Champion’s Scorn (minor; at-will) ✦ Fear, Healing Close blast 5; one creature; the target becomes the object of the orog’s scorn. Tusk’s melee attacks deal an extra 2d4 damage to the target, and if he reduces the target to 0 hit points, he heals 34 hit points. Tusk can designate only one target as the object of its scorn at a time. R Fearsome Leader (minor; at-will) Targets one orc or orog; the target gains a +2 bonus to its next attack roll before the end of Tusk’s next turn. Alignment Chaotic evil Languages Common, Giant Skills Endurance +12, Intimidate +8 Str 24 (+9) Dex 15 (+4) Wis 13 (+3) Con 21 (+7) Int 11 (+2) Cha 12 (+3) Equipment plate armor, falchion
August 20 08
|
D u n g e o n 1 57
50
Siege of Bordrin's Watch Myrissa, Shadar-Kai Dark Warlock (S) Level 2 Elite Skirmisher Medium shadow humanoid XP 250 Initiative +3 Senses Perception +1; low-light vision HP 74; Bloodied 37 AC 17; Fortitude 14, Reflex 16, Will 16 Saving Throws +2 Speed 6 Action Points 1 m Dagger (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon +6 vs. AC; 1d4 + 2 damage. R Spiteful Glamour (standard; at-will) ✦ Psychic Ranged 10; +7 vs. Will; 1d8 + 3 psychic damage, or 1d12 + 3 psychic damage against targets at full hit points. C Cursebite (standard; encounter) ✦ Necrotic Close burst 20; +7 vs. Fortitude; 2d8 + 3 necrotic damage; affects all creatures suffering from warlock’s curse. Warlock’s Curse (minor; at-will, 1/round) Closest enemy; Myrissa designates target as cursed. Her attacks deal an extra 1d6 damage. A target can have only one curse at a time. Darkspiral Aura (free; at-will) ✦ Necrotic, Psychic Whenever an enemy Myrissa has cursed is reduced to 0 hit points, she adds 1 point to her darkspiral aura. Once per round as a free action, when an enemy makes a melee or ranged attack against her, she can use her darkspiral aura to deal 1d6 necrotic and psychic damage per point in the aura and reset the aura to 0. If her aura deals at least 12 damage, she can reset the aura to 1 instead, but the attack deals half damage. Shadow Jaunt (move; encounter) ✦ Teleportation Myrissa teleports 3 squares and becomes insubstantial until the start of her next turn. Alignment Evil Languages Common Skills Acrobatics +5, Bluff +9, Insight +6, Intimidate +9, Stealth +5 Str 10 (+1) Dex 14 (+3) Wis 11 (+1) Con 13 (+2) Int 16 (+4) Cha 16 (+4) Equipment leather armor, dagger, rod
7 Orc Drudges (D) Level 4 Minion
Medium natural humanoid XP 44 each Initiative +0 Senses Perception +0; low-light vision HP 1; a missed attack never damages a minion. AC 16; Fortitude 15, Reflex 12, Will 12 Speed 6 (8 while charging) m Club (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon +9 vs. AC; 5 damage. Alignment Chaotic evil Languages Common, Giant Str 16 (+5) Dex 10 (+2) Wis 10 (+2) Con 14 (+4) Int 8 (+1) Cha 9 (+1) Equipment hide armor, club
2 Orog Militants (M) Level 3 Soldier
Medium natural humanoid XP 150 each Initiative +3 Senses Perception +2; low-light vision HP 48; Bloodied 24 AC 20; Fortitude 17, Reflex 13, Will 14; see also discipline Speed 5 m Bastard Sword (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon +10 vs. AC; 1d10 + 4 damage, and the target is marked until the end of the orog militant’s next turn. M Relentless (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon Requires bastard sword; +10 vs. AC; 1d10 + 4 damage, and the target is pushed 1 square. The target is marked until the orog’s next turn. The orog militant can shift into the vacated square as a free action. M Fierce Counterstrike (immediate reaction, when adjacent ally is first bloodied; encounter) ✦ Weapon Requires bastard sword; +10 vs. AC; 2d10 + 4 damage, and the target is pushed 1 square. The orog militant can shift into the vacated square as a free action. Discipline Orogs gain a +2 bonus to saving throws against any ongoing effects when adjacent to an ally. Alignment Evil Languages Common, Giant Str 19 (+5) Dex 10 (+1) Wis 13 (+2) Con 16 (+4) Int 9 (+0) Cha 11 (+1) Equipment plate armor, heavy shield, bastard sword
2 Orc Bolt Throwers (B) Level 1 Artillery
Medium natural humanoid XP 100 each Initiative +2 Senses Perception +4; low-light vision HP 26; Bloodied 13; see also warrior’s surge AC 13; Fortitude 14, Reflex 14, Will 11 Speed 6 (8 while charging) m Battleaxe (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon +6 vs. AC; 1d10 + 3 damage r Bellybow (standard; at-will; recharges when the creature uses a move action to reload it) ✦ Weapon Ranged 20/40; +8 vs. AC; 1d12 + 2 damage, and the target is pushed 1 square. M Warrior’s Surge (standard, usable only while bloodied; encounter) ✦ Healing The orc bolt thrower makes a melee basic attack and regains 6 hit points. Alignment Chaotic evil Languages Common, Giant Skills Stealth +7 Str 14 (+2) Dex 15 (+2) Wis 9 (–1) Con 14 (+2) Int 9 (–1) Cha 8 (–1) Equipment leather armor, battleaxe, bellybow with 10 bolts
August 20 08
|
D u n g e o n 1 57
51
Siege of Bordrin's Watch
Appendix: Monsters
Orc Bolt Thrower Tactics
Orc
The orc bolt thrower hangs back, lobbing bolts into the thick of its enemies. It draws its battleaxe and throws itself into combat if its enemies draw near.
Orcs are a race of savage humanoids, hailing from some of the most desolate regions in the world. From the hardships of their lives as well as their ingrained love of slaughter, these vicious marauders boil out of the darkness to wage war against other races, plundering and killing until finally repulsed once more. The Monster Manual includes a broad selection of orc monsters, representing a great many of the iconic orc adversaries player characters might face. The following entries expand on those by providing additional orcs, which are featured in this adventure. Orc Bolt Thrower
Level 1 Artillery
Medium natural humanoid XP 100 Initiative +2 Senses Perception +4; low-light vision HP 26; Bloodied 13; see also warrior’s surge AC 13; Fortitude 14, Reflex 14, Will 11 Speed 6 (8 while charging) m Battleaxe (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon +6 vs. AC; 1d10 + 3 damage. r Bellybow (standard; at-will; recharges when the creature uses a move action to reload it) ✦ Weapon Ranged 20/40; +8 vs. AC; 1d12 + 2 damage, and the target is pushed 1 square. M Warrior’s Surge (standard, usable only while bloodied; encounter) ✦ Healing The orc bolt thrower makes a melee basic attack and regains 6 hit points. Alignment Chaotic evil Languages Common, Giant Skills Stealth +7 Str 14 (+2) Dex 15 (+2) Wis 9 (–1) Con 14 (+2) Int 9 (–1) Cha 8 (–1) Equipment leather armor, battleaxe, bellybow with 10 bolts
Orc Bombardier
Level 1 Artillery
Medium natural humanoid XP 100 Initiative +3 Senses Perception –2; low-light vision HP 24; Bloodied 12; see also warrior’s surge AC 13; Fortitude 13, Reflex 15, Will 11 Speed 6 (8 while charging) m Battleaxe (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon +5 vs. AC; 1d10 + 2 damage. M Warrior’s Surge (standard, usable only while bloodied; encounter) ✦ Healing, Weapon The orc bombardier makes a melee basic attack and regains 6 hit points. A Cinderbomb (standard; recharge ⚃ ⚄ ⚅) ✦ Fire Area burst 2 within 10; +4 vs. Reflex; 1d8 + 3 fire damage, and ongoing 5 fire damage (save ends). On a crit, the orc bombardier knocks the target prone. Miss: Half damage, and no ongoing damage. C Detonation (no action, when reduced to 0 hit points; encounter) ✦ Fire The orc bombardier must have at least one cinderbomb left; close burst 2; +4 vs. Reflex; 1d8 + 3 fire damage, and ongoing 5 fire damage (save ends) (crit knock prone). Miss: Half damage, and no ongoing damage. Alignment Chaotic evil Languages Common, Giant Str 13 (+1) Dex 17 (+3) Wis 7 (–2) Con 12 (+1) Int 8 (–1) Cha 9 (–1) Equipment battleaxe, 3 cinderbombs, everburning torch
Orc Witch Doctor
Level 2 Controller
Medium natural humanoid XP 125 Initiative +2 Senses Perception +3; low-light vision HP 33; Bloodied 16 AC 15; Fortitude 13, Reflex 14, Will 17 Speed 6 (8 while charging) m Disgusting Claws (standard; at-will) ✦ Poison +7 vs. AC; 1d6 + 1 damage, and ongoing 5 poison damage (save ends). R Curse of Gruumsh (standard; recharge ⚄ ⚅) ✦ Acid Ranged 10; +6 vs. Fortitude; target is blinded (save ends), and the orc witch doctor makes a secondary attack. Secondary Attack: Close burst 1 centered on primary target; +6 vs. Reflex; 1d6 + 4 acid damage, and ongoing 2 acid damage (save ends). R Unspeakable Filth (standard; at-will) Ranged 5/10; +5 vs. Reflex; 1d4 + 4 damage, and the target takes –2 penalty to attack rolls until the end of the orc witch doctor’s next turn. Alignment Chaotic evil Languages Common, Giant Skills Arcana +6, Intimidate +10 Str 11 (+1) Dex 12 (+2) Wis 14 (+3) Con 9 (+0) Int 11 (+1) Cha 18 (+5) Equipment befouled rags, bone rod
Orc Witch Doctor Tactics An orc witch doctor spits a curse at a divine character and hurls insults and filth, falling back to its claws if cornered.
Orc Bombardier Tactics The orc bombardier hurls cinderbombs at clumps of PCs, but it is not above catching a few drudges in the burst. Should enemies close to melee, it draws its battleaxe.
August 20 08
|
D u n g e o n 1 57
52
Siege of Bordrin's Watch Orc Freak
Level 2 Skirmisher
Medium natural humanoid XP 125 Initiative +5 Senses Perception +5; low-light vision HP 38; Bloodied 19; see also warrior’s surge AC 15; Fortitude 15, Reflex 14, Will 11 Speed 6 (8 while charging) m Battleaxe (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon +6 vs. AC; 1d10 + 3 damage. M Savage Strike (standard; encounter) ✦ Weapon Make two attacks; +6 vs. AC; 1d10 + 3 damage per attack. If both attacks hit the same target, the target also takes ongoing 5 damage (save ends). M Warrior’s Surge (standard, usable only while bloodied; encounter) ✦ Healing, Weapon The orc freak makes a melee basic attack and regains 9 hit points. Alignment Chaotic evil Languages Common, Giant Skills Athletics +9 Str 17 (+4) Dex 15 (+3) Wis 8 (+0) Con 14 (+3) Int 8 (+0) Cha 7 (–1) Equipment hide armor, 2 battleaxes
Orc Freak Tactics
Orc Sergeant
The orc freak is a savage and uncontrollable warrior who rushes headlong into danger no matter the odds. Orc Scout
Level 3 Skirmisher
Medium natural humanoid XP 150 Initiative +5 Senses Perception +6; low-light vision HP 46; Bloodied 23; see also warrior’s surge AC 17; Fortitude 16, Reflex 15, Will 13 Speed 6 (8 while charging) m Scimitar (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon +8 vs. AC; 1d8 + 3 damage (crit: +1d8) r Longbow (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon Ranged 20/40; +7 vs. AC; 1d10 + 2 damage. M Warrior’s Surge (standard, usable only while bloodied; encounter) ✦ Healing, Weapon The orc scout makes a melee basic attack and regains 11 hit points. Overeager (immediate reaction, when the orc scout drops an enemy with a ranged attack; encounter) The orc scout draws its scimitar and charges the closest enemy. Alignment Chaotic evil Languages Common, Giant Skills Athletics +9, Endurance +8, Intimidate +5, Stealth +8 Str 16 (+4) Dex 15 (+3) Wis 10 (+1) Con 14 (+3) Int 8 (+0) Cha 9 (+0) Equipment leather armor, scimitar, longbow with quiver of 20 arrows
Orc Scout Tactics An orc scout shoots arrows at its foes, but once it drops an enemy, its bloodlust gets the better of it, driving it to draw its scimitar and charge.
Level 3 Soldier (Leader)
Medium natural humanoid XP 150 Initiative +2 Senses Perception +5; low-light vision Lead by Fear aura 1; orcs inside the aura gain a +1 power bonus to attack rolls. HP 46; Bloodied 23; see also warrior’s surge AC 19; Fortitude 17, Reflex 13, Will 14 Speed 6 (8 while charging) m Glaive (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon Reach 2; +10 vs. AC; 2d4 + 4 damage. M Warrior’s Surge (standard, usable only while bloodied; encounter) ✦ Healing The orc sergeant makes a melee basic attack and regains 11 hit points. Back to the Front! (immediate reaction, when orc ally within 5 squares is forcibly moved; at-will) Slide triggering ally 1 square. Alignment Chaotic evil Languages Common, Giant Skills Endurance +5, Intimidate +5 Str 19 (+5) Dex 9 (+0) Wis 13 (+2) Con 14 (+3) Int 11 (+1) Cha 11 (+1) Equipment chainmail, glaive, tattered cloak
Orc Sergeant Tactics The orc sergeant commands other orcs, directing the combat from the second rank. It follows its soldiers into battle, taking advantage of its superior reach and the bodies between himself and his enemies. Should any ally think about retreating, the orc sergeant can command him back to the frontlines.
Orog Hulking warriors with uncommon discipline and fighting expertise, orogs are the filthy offspring of orcs and ogres. Like half-elves, orogs breed true and are a separate race from orcs. Sometimes called greater orcs or ogrillons, orogs are a vastly superior breed, rising far above their lesser kin in terms of their mastery over weaponry and also their mastery of warfare. Where common orcs rely on superior numbers to overcome their enemies, orogs use clever
August 20 08
|
D u n g e o n 1 57
53
Siege of Bordrin's Watch
tactics and teamwork, ranking up in orderly lines of heavily armored soldiers. Rumors tell of orog cities in the far-flung places in the world, though no one is certain where they are or what they might look like. Instead, orogs crop up wherever ogres and orcs congregate in large numbers. Orogs swiftly rise to the top and take over tribes, crushing their rivals until the rest of the horde surrenders to the orog’s will. Orog Militant
Level 3 Soldier
Medium natural humanoid XP 150 Initiative +3 Senses Perception +2; low-light vision HP 48; Bloodied 24 AC 20; Fortitude 17, Reflex 13, Will 14; see also discipline Speed 5 m Bastard Sword (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon +10 vs. AC; 1d10 + 4 damage, and the target is marked until the end of the orog militant’s next turn. M Relentless (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon Requires bastard sword; +10 vs. AC; 1d10 + 4 damage, and the target is pushed 1 square. The target is marked until the orog’s next turn. The orog militant can shift into the vacated square as a free action. M Fierce Counterstrike (immediate reaction, when adjacent ally is first bloodied; encounter) ✦ Weapon Requires bastard sword; +10 vs. AC; 2d10 + 4 damage, and the target is pushed 1 square. The orog militant can shift into the vacated square as a free action. Discipline Orogs gain a +2 bonus to saving throws against any ongoing effects when adjacent to an ally. Alignment Evil Languages Common, Giant Str 19 (+5) Dex 10 (+1) Wis 13 (+2) Con 16 (+4) Int 9 (+0) Cha 11 (+1) Equipment plate armor, heavy shield, bastard sword
Orog Militant Tactics Orog militants fight best in close ranks to take advantage of their discipline and also the added protection
afforded by their fellows. The orogs engage the closest enemy and drive it before them. Orog Scarred Champion Level 4 Brute
Medium natural humanoid, orc XP 175 Initiative +2 Senses Perception +8; low-light vision HP 66; Bloodied 33; see also champion’s scorn AC 17; Fortitude 19, Reflex 14, Will 15 Speed 5 m Greatsword (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon +10 vs. AC; 1d10 + 5 damage, and the target is marked until the end of the orog scarred champion’s next turn. C Winnowing Slash (standard; recharge when first bloodied) ✦ Weapon Requires greatsword; close burst 1; +7 vs. AC; 2d10 + 5 damage, and the target is pushed 1 square. C Champion’s Scorn (minor; at-will) ✦ Fear Close blast 5; one creature; the target becomes the object of the orog’s scorn. The orog scarred champion’s melee attacks deal an extra 1d10 damage to the target, and if the scarred champion reduces the target to 0 hit points, it regains 16 hit points. Alignment Chaotic evil Languages Common, Giant Skills Intimidate +6 Str 20 (+7) Dex 10 (+2) Wis 12 (+3) Con 16 (+5) Int 9 (+1) Cha 8 (+1) Equipment plate armor, greataxe
Orog Scarred Champion Tactics The orog scarred champion is a devolved form of orog—a brutish warrior driven mad by Gruumsh’s dark will. The champion wades into the thick of battle, calling out challenges to its enemies and focusing its attacks against these foes until he slaughters them.
Orog Lore A character knows the following information about orogs with a successful Nature check. DC 15: Orogs are the spawn of orcs and ogres, and they somehow gain the better qualities of each
without any of the drawbacks. A discipline and militant people, they raise up fortified encampments, where they form up their warriors into tight ranks and demand a level of cleanliness any commander could respect.
Troll Trolls are one of the most diverse and unpredictable races in the world. Something about their nature causes them to adapt to their environments in unexpected ways, developing new abilities and losing ones less useful for feeding the bottomless pit that serves as their gullets. The following troll expands on those described in the Monster Manual. Cave Troll
Level 7 Brute
Large natural humanoid XP 300 Initiative +6 Senses Perception +9; low-light vision HP 99; Bloodied 49; see also troll healing Regeneration 10 (if the cave troll takes acid or fire damage, regeneration does not function until the end of its next turn) AC 19; Fortitude 21, Reflex 19, Will 17 Speed 8 m Claw (standard; at-will) Reach 2; +10 vs. AC; 2d4 + 5 damage, and the target is grabbed (until escape). A cave troll can grab up to two targets at once. M Improvised Weapon (standard; at-will) Requires grabbed creature; reach 2; +10 vs. AC; 2d8 + 5 damage, and the grabbed creature takes half this damage and is dazed (save ends). When grabbing a creature wearing heavy armor, the cave troll deals +5 damage with this attack, but the grabbed creature is not dazed. Troll Healing ✦ Healing If the cave troll is reduced to 0 hit points by an attack that does not deal acid or fire damage, it rises on its next turn (as a move action) with 10 hit points. Alignment Chaotic evil Languages Giant Skills Athletics +13, Endurance +12 Str 21 (+8) Dex 16 (+6) Wis 12 (+4) Con 19 (+7) Int 5 (+0) Cha 8 (+2)
August 20 08
|
D u n g e o n 1 57
54
Siege of Bordrin's Watch Cave Troll Tactics
Encounter Groups
A cave troll is an unsubtle enemy. When it detects possible food, it leaps into battle, grabbing its foes with its long claws, and snatching them off their feet. The cave troll then tenderizes its meal, using its captured victim as a weapon, pounding the hapless victim into its allies until everyone and everything around the troll is dead.
Cave trolls prefer the company of other cave trolls, but they might sometimes work with other trolls, ogres, and other monstrous races. Orogs, more than any other race, see the value of a tough cave troll, and when an orog dominates an orc tribe, there’s bound to be a handful of cave trolls supporting the chieftain.
Cave Troll Lore A character knows the following information about cave trolls with a successful Nature check. DC 15: Cave trolls are a nasty, spiteful breed of trolls, every bit as ravenous as their kin, but they take special pleasure in the destruction they wreak. Like their kin, cave trolls regenerate at an astonishing rate, which allows them to recoup from the nastiest of injuries. Their only weakness in this regard is when they are confronted with acid or fire—substances the cave troll rightly fears—for both can retard the troll’s regenerative abilities and render it more vulnerable to its prey’s attacks. DC 20: Cave trolls collect in small tribal groups, and they prefer caves that open onto verdant forests or hills. The rarely venture too deep into the Underdark, for in the depths, food becomes far scarcer, and the cave trolls have a healthy respect for drow, mind flayers, and other peoples of the depths. Some races, particularly drow, orcs, and orogs, enslave cave trolls to use them as frontline soldiers. Cave trolls are not as powerful as ordinary trolls, and they are more tractable and are easier to train.
Level 7 Encounter (XP 1,500) ✦ 1 orc eye of Gruumsh (level 5 controller [leader]) ✦ 2 cave trolls (level 7 brute) ✦ 4 orc berserkers (level 4 brute) G
About the Author
Robert J. Schwalb works as a freelance designer for Wizards of the Coast and has contributed design to such books as Tyrants of the Nine Hells and Elder Evils, and the forthcoming Forgotten Realms Player’s Guide, Draconomicon: Chromatic Dragons, Manual of the Planes, and Demon Queen’s Enclave, as well as numerous articles for D&D Insider. Robert lives in Tennessee with his incredibly patient wife Stacee and his pride of chaotic evil werecats.
August 20 08
|
D u n g e o n 1 57
55
“We are mercenaries, all of us, but only a precious few have honesty enough to admit it. Whether we sell ourselves for coin, for honor, or ideals, we all have a price whose continued payment leads us inevitably to our end. But when that end comes, will you admit to your balance sheet? Or will you lie when you claim that the blood on your hands was spilled for just cause, not simply your hunger for glory?”
The Shadow Rift of Umbraforge
by Scott Fitzgerald Gray illustrations by Dave Allsop, Ryan Barger, Nicole Cardiff, Saejin Oh, and Chris Stevens cartography by Mike Schley
TM & © 2008 Wizards of the Coast, Inc. All rights reserved.
September 20 08
|
D u n g e o n 1 58
4
The Shadow Rift of Umbraforge
What’s an Adventure Path? Scales of War is the fourth Adventure Path to appear in the pages of Dungeon Magazine. But what, you ask, is an Adventure Path? Quite simply, it is a series of related adventures intended to form a complete D&D campaign that takes your players from 1st level all the way to, in the case of Scales of War, 30th level. Previous Adventure Paths, presented with the third edition D&D rules, took characters from 1st to 20th level. But with all three tiers in the new edition ripe and ready to explore, we’re pushing the limit with Scales of War. Each tier takes roughly six adventures to traverse, which means we’ll finish off this Adventure Path in about eighteen issues. Each adventure advances characters from between one and a half to two levels of experience. We recognize that not everyone will meet every encounter or complete every quest, however, so periodically, we’ll point you DMs to a supplemental Side Trek or short adventure to keep your PCs on pace. Plus, roughly every other month, Dragon will feature new support content for Scales of War. Finally, this Adventure Path is intended to function as a complete D&D campaign. That means we’ll be making some assumptions about the history of the world as we move along, just as you would in any campaign you run. We’ll be borrowing heavily from the D&D mythology of 4th Edition, as well as all the great ideas that have cropped up in other products over the years—including the pages of past issues of Dungeon! Enjoy your stay in Scales of War, and keep an eye out for next month’s installment.
“The Shadow Rift of Umbraforge” is an adventure for five 4th-level characters who are approximately halfway to 5th level. Characters should be 6th level by the adventure’s end. This adventure is a sequel to “Siege of Bordrin’s Watch” and the third part of the Scales of War Adventure Path. However, with a little modification, it can be played as a standalone adventure or integrated into an existing campaign.
Background In “Siege of Bordrin’s Watch,” the PCs discovered that dark creepers had sold arms and tactical intelligence to the orc war chief Tusk, aiding him in his attack against the folk of the Stonehome Mountains. In this adventure, the PCs investigate the link between the orcs and the dark ones, stumbling into an armsrunning operation bridging two planes, and finally confronting the charismatic figure behind it. Sarshan is an opportunistic shadar-kai arms dealer. For years, he has built an invisible mercantile empire around the sale and brokering of weapons, armor, mercenaries, and intelligence from his domain in the Shadowfell. Though Sarshan plays a significant part in this adventure, the PCs’ initial focus is on one of his lieutenants—a dark creeper shadowborn stalker named Modra. Before the “Siege of Bordrin’s Watch,” Modra was approached by Tusk’s advisor Myrissa, a shadar-kai witch who knew of Sarshan’s operations. However, the success of Sarshan’s arms running and mercenary services turns on his ability to maintain a low profile in his dealings with clients in the world. Sometimes this means turning down jobs that run too much risk of exposure. Tusk’s massive raid, aimed at the heart of the
civilized frontier and a stone’s throw from Sarshan’s operations in the city of Overlook, was one of these. When Sarshan rebuffed Myrissa’s request, Modra approached the witch in secret. He struck a deal to supply Tusk with weapons and intelligence, sending in a group of his followers (the dark creepers in “Siege of Bordrin’s Watch,” including Iranda) to do the job. In going behind Sarshan’s back, Modra expected that an overwhelming orc victory (won with the help of dark one subterfuge) would win his master’s respect. However, with Tusk’s forces routed and Modra’s servants scattered or killed, the dark creeper has had to go to ground to escape Sarshan’s wrath. The brass key that Iranda carried in “Siege of Bordrin’s Watch” sets Modra on the PCs’ trail—and leads them into the next stage of the adventure path.
Adventure Synopsis Back in Overlook after the events of “Siege of Bordrin’s Watch,” the PCs find themselves targeted by a group of street toughs seeking the mysterious brass key they obtained at the end of that previous adventure. Through their would-be assailants, the PCs obtain the name of the one who ordered the assault—”Modra.” By way of a skill challenge that takes them into the darkest corners of the city, the PCs learn that Modra is a dark creeper with connections to an arms-running operation and a poorhouse known as the Happy Beggar. In a network of secret caverns beneath the Beggar, the PCs discover that the weapons-running operation extends from the Shadowfell to Overlook by way of a pair of ancient magic portals. When the dark creeper flees to the Shadowfell, the PCs give chase.
September 20 08
|
D u n g e o n 1 58
5
The Shadow Rift of Umbraforge Transported to the Shadowfell, the PCs find themselves in Umbraforge—an isolated military enclave that grows ever larger in its preparations for war. Foundries, forges, mercenary camps, and slave pens stand between a dark tower and a volcanic rift venting a river of lava and shadow. As they infiltrate by stealth and sword, the PCs discover that Modra is an underling to the shadar-kai Sarshan, master of Umbraforge. In addition to arms running, Sarshan sells mercenaries and creatures bred for war—horrid mutants created in an arcane foundry fueled by the raw power of the magma shadow rift. Within the foundry, the PCs eliminate Modra and his followers, then use a secret tunnel to gain access to the tower. As they infiltrate Sarshan’s inner sanctum, they face off against his house guards and allies before being brought before the shadar-kai and given a chance to join him. Then a massive tremor generated by the magma shadow rift shakes the tower, allowing the PCs to flee back to the Shadowfell gate. As Sarshan’s foundry is leveled by the destructive forces of shadow and fire, the PCs escape back to the world, followed by a trio of savage specters bent on destruction. When that battle is done, Sarshan’s Shadowfell gate is destroyed and Overlook is safe. However, the PCs have uncovered information indicating that the apparently isolated conflicts that led them first to Rivenroar, then to Bordrin’s Watch, touch on secret plots that threaten the end the world.
Setting The first part of this adventure makes use of the city of Overlook section in “Siege of Bordrin’s Watch.”
Key to the Shadowfell Gate In “Siege of Bordrin’s Watch,” the heroes fight a dark one emissary in the boiler room in the Vents. This emissary’s name was Iranda, and he reported directly to Modra, the dark creeper villain of this adventure, something the characters will learn over the course of this adventure. Iranda kept a key to the Shadowfell gate below Overlook. If you’ve already run “Siege of Bordrin’s Watch,” feel free to give the PCs the key before this adventure begins. Alternatively, it’s possible Iranda stashed it somewhere in Overlook, and the PCs need to track it down at some point during “The Shadow Rift of Umbraforge.” This latter tactic is especially handy if the characters are not quite halfway to 5th level when this adventure begins. Finally, consider including the key among the possessions of the shadar-kai witch at the transfer portal (see page 19).
However, though the adventure starts and finishes in Overlook, the bulk of it takes place in the Shadowfell. Since this is likely the PCs’ first excursion to this dark plane, familiarize yourself with “The Planes,” page 160 of the Dungeon Master’s Guide. The gateway to the Shadowfell that Sarshan uses to smuggle his armaments into the world (and which Modra co-opted for his own dealings with Tusk) lies within Overlook—a series of ancient caverns hidden beneath the cellars of an out-of-the-way poorhouse. The city’s status as a major trading center provides Sarshan with the perfect cover for his clandestine trafficking in arms, armor, and mercenaries across the frontier. With
the bustle of its streets, the endless dance of commerce in the Forge and Tradetown districts, and the steady stream of wains and carts passing through its gates, Overlook gives the shadar-kai an invisibility on which he has built a prosperous career.
Preparing for Adventure “The Shadow Rift of Umbraforge” is divided into three parts. The first part, consisting of five encoun-
The Quests As the PCs find themselves targeted by Modra, they slowly uncover the identity and plans of the dark creeper. However, as they pursue him into the Shadowfell, they come to realize that Modra’s plots are only portents of a much greater danger. Minor Quest—Modra’s Threat In parts one and two of the adventure, the PCs must determine Modra’s connection to the orc raid and eliminate his continued threat. However, by the time they face off against the dark creeper in the Shadowfell, they realize that he is only a small part of a larger operation. Reward: 200 XP. Major Quest—The Opportunist In parts two and three of the adventure, the PCs discover that Modra’s threat is insignificant compared to that of his former master, the shadar-kai arms dealer Sarshan. The PCs must infiltrate Sarshan’s domain in the Shadowfell, discover the extent of the shadar-kai’s weaponsrunning operations, and learn that war is coming to the world. Reward: 250 XP per character.
September 20 08
|
D u n g e o n 1 58
6
The Shadow Rift of Umbraforge ters, details the PCs’ pursuit of Modra and their discovery of Sarshan’s Shadowfell gate. This part should bring the party to 5th level (assuming they were about halfway through 4th level at the completion of “Siege of Bordrin’s Watch”). The remainder of the adventure (featuring the party’s search for Modra in the Shadowfell, the incursion into Sarshan’s tower, and the climactic confrontation with the savage specters that pursue the PCs from the Shadowfell back to the world) should bring them to 6th level. Assuming you are already familiar with the layout of Overlook from “Siege of Bordrin’s Watch,” you need only to read this introductory material and The Beggar’s Gate (including the Street Skirmish tactical encounter and the “Modra’s Plots” skill challenge) to get ready for your first game session. Modra’s role in the attack on Bordrin’s Watch should be enough to inspire a mostly good or lawful good party to want to capture or kill him. However, if the PCs are strongly unaligned, you might need to make things personal. During the “Modra’s Plots” skill challenge (page 11), have Modra continue his vendetta against the PCs by attacking (or even killing) one or more NPCs close to them. Any characters the party became involved with during the “Siege of Bordrin’s Watch” can fit the bill.
What You Need to Play This adventure includes the encounters the PCs face as they explore and adventure in the area. It also provides tactical maps and more for the adventure. Also as mentioned above, read through at least the first few encounters described in this adventure before starting. This review enables you to become familiar with the material and the style of presentation.
Using Tactical Encounters Each encounter includes several common elements, as described below.
Encounter Level Each tactical encounter assumes a group of five player characters. An encounter of average difficulty is one where the encounter level is equal to the level of the party. Encounters that are 1 or 2 levels lower than the party are easy, while encounters that are 2 or more levels higher than the party are difficult encounters. For overcoming an encounter, a group earns the XP value listed beside the encounter level. This amount should be divided by the number of group members, and an equal amount should be awarded to each character.
Setup This section of a tactical encounter provides you with the basic parameters of the encounter. First, it provides context or background information for the encounter. Next, it provides a key to the monsters in the encounter so you can locate them on the tactical map. The map of each encounter area indicates where the monsters are located when the encounter begins. The setup section also describes what monsters are doing and how they react when the PCs arrive.
Read-Aloud Text Read aloud text provides information about what the characters can see and are aware of. You do not have to read it word for word; feel free to paraphrase and use your own words when describing this information. Use read aloud text wisely; they are written for the most common approach to a particular situation
and what your player characters do might require you to alter the information in any number of ways.
Monster Statistics Encounters include stat blocks for each monster type present in the encounter. If more than one monster of a particular kind is present, the stat block indicates how many creatures can be found.
Tactics This entry describes special actions the monsters take to defeat the adventurers. Sometimes this means the monsters take advantage of special features of the area or make use of special powers or equipment.
Map Each encounter includes a map keyed with the initial locations of each monster. The map also indicates the location of any special features of the area.
Features of the Area This section describes special features noted on the map. If the location has items or areas of interest with which the characters can interact, those features are described here. Look here to see if a door is out of the ordinary, if an altar has a secret compartment, or if the area includes treasure.
Treasure This adventure makes use of the parcel system of treasure rewards described in Chapter 7 of the Dungeon Master’s Guide. The characters should accumulate fifteen parcels by the end of the adventure. Use the players’ wish lists to determine which magic items you place as treasure.
September 20 08
|
D u n g e o n 1 58
7
The Shadow Rift of Umbraforge
These parcels can be given out at any point in the adventure you decide is appropriate, or you might reserve some treasure as a reward given to the PCs by the people of Overlook when the adventure is done. Whenever possible, tie treasure to the most climactic points of the adventure (the battle in the secret caverns, the foundry showdown with Modra, and so on).
Skirmish, on the following page) should take place within a few days of the party’s return to Overlook. On assignment from Modra, a squad of enforcers from the Lost Ones have been quietly following the PCs while they carry out their routine business in the city. Their orders are to retrieve the key as quietly as possible, then kill the PCs. The Lost Ones wait now for the opportunity to strike.
Part 1: The Beggar’s Gate
Other Locations
In the aftermath of the sealing of the mountain tunnels and the flooding of the Nexus in “Siege of Bordrin’s Watch,” Modra learned of the PCs’ role in thwarting Tusk’s plans. He has quietly kept tabs on them since their return to Overlook. The key found at the end of the previous adventure (see The Key to the Shadowfell Gate sidebar on page 6) is a hollow brass tube 6 inches long, set with a round ring at one end and four flanges of differing lengths at the other. The PCs can find no information in Overlook on the nature or origin of the key. However, any inquiries along those lines come back to Modra through his contacts in the thieves’ guild known as the Lost Ones. (If the PCs are more circumspect, assume that the key has a magical property that allows Modra to eventually determine who carries it.) With the last of his coin, the dark creeper hires a squad of guild enforcers to dispense with the PCs and retrieve the key—Modra’s only way to return to the Shadowfell and attempt to turn the tables on the vindictive Sarshan. Between the end of “Siege of Bordrin’s Watch” and this adventure, the PCs have plenty of time to rest up, replenish missing supplies, and take care of any miscellaneous business. The first encounter (Street
The PCs might not automatically be inclined to return to Overlook to rest and recuperate when the
“Siege of Bordrin’s Watch” is done. (This is most likely to be the case if the party was in the middle of unfinished business in Brindol before being summoned to help defend against the orc raid.) If so, don’t force the issue. Simply have the Lost Ones track the PCs to their alternate location and move encounter G1 accordingly. When the Lost Ones are searched or questioned, the PCs find that they received their orders from someone named Modra in Overlook. This should inspire the party to return to the mountain city.
Treasure Parcels
Parcel A: Parcel B: Parcel C: Parcel D: Parcel E: Parcel F: Parcel G: Parcel H:
Parcel I: Parcel J: Parcel K: Parcel L: Parcel M: Parcel N: Parcel O:
Treasure Parcels (Monetary Treasure 2,840 gp) Parcel 1: Parcel 2: Parcel 3: Parcel 4: Parcel 5: Parcel 6: Parcel 7: Parcel 8: Parcel 9: Parcel 10: Parcel 11: Parcel 12: Parcel 13: Parcel 14: Parcel 15:
Magic item, level 9 Magic item, level 8 Magic item, level 8 Magic item, level 7 Magic item, level 6 Magic item, level 6 550 gp, or two 250-gp art objects + 50 gp, or one 500-gp gem + 50 gp 500 gp, or one 250-gp art object + 250 gp, or five 100-gp gems 340 gp, or three 100-gp gems + 40 gp, or one 250-gp art object + one potion of healing + 40 gp 340 gp, or one 250-gp art object + 90 gp, or 300 gp + 400 sp 300 gp, or three 100-gp gems, or one potion of healing + one 250-gp art object 280 gp, or two 100-gp gems + 80 gp, or one 100-gp gem + 2 potions of healing + 80 gp 260 gp, or one 250-gp art object + 10 gp, or two potions of healing + 100-gp gem + 60 gp 160 gp, or one 100-gp gem + 60 gp, or one potion of healing + 110 gp 110 gp, or one 100-gp gem + 10 gp, or one potion of healing + 60 gp
September 20 08
|
D u n g e o n 1 58
8
The Shadow Rift of Umbraforge
Street Skirmish Encounter Level 5 (975 XP)
Setup The Lost Ones follow the PCs in search of a likely ambush spot, using their knowledge of Overlook to slip ahead of the party as they approach an enclosed laneway between two of the city’s warehouses.
2 human berserkers (B) 3 human guards (G) 1 human mage (M)
At the outset of the encounter, the human guards are hiding behind the wagon to the north. Unless the PCs notice them (DC 20 Perception), do not place them on the battle grid. The mage starts out with total cover up the narrow alley to the north. Do not place his miniature on the battle grid until he is spotted or unless he attacks. As the PCs enter the area, read: Sudden movement catches your eye—a horse tethered to a hitching post stomps as you approach. From behind you, a voice calls out, “Took a wrong turn, friends. Too bad it’ll be your last.” Two human warriors move up from where they must have been following you, battleaxes pulled from beneath their cloaks as they attack. If the PCs spot the guards to the north, read: Behind a wagon to the north, you see movement in the shadows. Three figures crouch in hiding, waiting to spring.
Let the players place their miniatures anywhere in the center of the map.
We Meet Again If the PCs had a previous altercation with the Lost Ones (page 22 of “Siege of Bordrin’s Watch”), play up any lingering hostility in this encounter. Although the berserkers and guards here are a more elite squad than the street bravos the PCs faced in Overlook, the mage might well be the same character (assuming he survived). Even if they are new foes, these Lost Ones are aware of the PCs’ run-in with their order, and they seek their own revenge even as they fulfill Modra’s commission.
Tactics The berserkers wade into combat in the first round, hoping to draw the PCs’ attention while their mage leader attacks from hiding. They target the strongestlooking melee combatants with battleaxe attacks, saving their handaxes for thrown attacks against PCs trying to stay out of melee. The berserkers fight to the death. The human guards engage those PCs who avoid or retreat from the berserkers’ attacks. They use their halberds against any foes within reach, leaving PCs knocked prone by their powerful strike for the berserkers as they seek new targets. The guards flee if reduced to 10 hit points or fewer. In the first round, the mage moves up behind the baskets (granting him cover) and makes a Stealth check to stay hidden (+4). He strikes first with dancing lightning, targeting spellcasters if possible. In subsequent rounds, he snipes with magic missile, reserving his thunder burst until he can target two or more PCs. The mage flees if reduced to 10 hit points or fewer, or if all the other Lost Ones are killed.
Development If any of the Lost Ones survive to be interrogated, they reveal that they were hired to retrieve a brass key the PCs carry. Any other wealth on the PCs was theirs to take, hinting at the key’s value to whoever seeks it. The PCs find a scrap of parchment on one of the Lost Ones (their only clue if all the assailants were slain). A hastily drawn rendering of the brass key accompanies a note indicating the importance of its return and a name—”Modra.” However, these Lost Ones know nothing more of Modra than his name.
September 20 08
|
D u n g e o n 1 58
9
The Shadow Rift of Umbraforge Human Mage (M)
Level 4 Artillery
Medium natural humanoid XP 175 Initiative +4 Senses Perception +5 HP 42; Bloodied 21 AC 17; Fortitude 13, Reflex 14, Will 15 Speed 6 m Quarterstaff (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon +4 vs. AC; 1d8 damage. r Magic Missile (standard; at-will) ✦ Force Ranged 20; +7 vs. Reflex; 2d4 + 4 force damage. R Dancing Lightning (standard; encounter) ✦ Lightning The mage makes a separate attack against 3 different targets: ranged 10; +7 vs. Reflex; 1d6 + 4 lightning damage. A Thunder Burst (standard; encounter) ✦ Thunder Area burst 1 within 10; +7 vs. Fortitude; 1d8 + 4 thunder damage, and the target is dazed (save ends). Alignment Any Languages Common Skills Arcana +11 Str 10 (+2) Dex 14 (+4) Wis 17 (+5) Con 12 (+3) Int 18 (+6) Cha 12 (+3) Equipment robes, quarterstaff, wand
2 Human Berserkers (B)
Level 4 Brute
Medium natural humanoid XP 175 each Initiative +3 Senses Perception +2 HP 66; Bloodied 33; see also battle fury AC 15; Fortitude 15, Reflex 14, Will 14 Speed 7 m Greataxe (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon +7 vs. AC; 1d12 + 4 damage (crit 1d12 + 16). M Battle Fury (free, when first bloodied; encounter) The human berserker makes a melee basic attack with a +4 bonus to the attack roll and deals an extra 1d6 damage on a hit. R Handaxe (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon Ranged 5/10; +5 vs. AC; 1d6 + 3 damage. Alignment Any Languages Common Skills Athletics +9, Endurance +9 Str 17 (+5) Dex 12 (+3) Wis 11 (+2) Con 16 (+5) Int 10 (+2) Cha 12 (+3) Equipment hide armor, greataxe, 2 handaxes
3 Human Guards (G)
Level 3 Soldier
Medium natural humanoid XP 150 each Initiative +5 Senses Perception +6 HP 47; Bloodied 23 AC 18; Fortitude 16, Reflex 15, Will 14 Speed 5 m Halberd (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon Reach 2; +10 vs. AC; 1d10 + 3 damage, and the target is marked until the end of the human guard’s next turn. M Powerful Strike (standard; recharge ⚄ ⚅ ) ✦ Weapon Requires halberd; reach 2; +10 vs. AC; 1d10 + 7 damage, and the target is knocked prone. R Crossbow (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon Ranged 15/30; +9 vs. AC; 1d8 + 2 damage. Alignment Any Languages Common Skills Streetwise +7 Str 16 (+4) Dex 14 (+3) Wis 11 (+1) Con 15 (+3) Int 10 (+1) Cha 12 (+2) Equipment chainmail, halberd, crossbow with 20 bolts
Doors: These warehouse doors are barred from within. They cannot be opened from the outside. Crates: These squares provide cover. A stack of crates stands 5 feet high and can be climbed with a successful DC 10 Athletics check. Baskets: These 4-foot-high woven baskets are for transporting grain. Full baskets provide cover and are difficult terrain. Empty baskets provide cover but do not hinder movement.
Features of the Area Illumination: Dim light at dusk or dawn. Bright light by day. At night, lanterns hang on both the carts (bright 10). Wagons: These empty wains are waiting to be loaded. A wagon provides cover and is tall enough that a Small creature can move under it and gain superior cover. It costs 2 squares of movement to jump up onto a wagon. With a successful DC 17 Strength check (a move action), a character can move a wagon forward or backward 1 square. Draft Horse: This draft horse (marked “H” on the tactical map) is tied to a hitching post and normally not easily spooked. However, once combat starts, any characters entering the indicated squares behind the horse are subject to attack (+6 vs. AC, 1d6 + 5 damage) since the creature lashes out with a kick. If hit by any attack, the horse breaks its rope and leaves the area at a run.
September 20 08
|
D u n g e o n 1 58
10
The Shadow Rift of Umbraforge
Rumors
The Streets of Overlook In the aftermath of the ambush by the Lost Ones, the PCs have a chance to discover who hunts them. Modra's Plots Skill Challenge
Level 4 XP 700
Overlook, a fortified city on the eastern slopes of the Stonehome Mountains, is a bustling center of commerce and trade. Among its many people, you’re sure to find more information about those who hunt you. Now you just need to figure out how you want to go about unearthing this information.
As the characters immerse themselves in the bustle and business of Overlook, they must seek information among the city’s traders, brokers, and black marketeers. Modra has covered his tracks since coming back to the city (since he knows that Sarshan is looking for him), but by determining his movements and activities prior to the events of “Siege of Bordrin’s Watch,” the characters gain valuable insight into the dark creeper’s mission. This skill challenge should be treated as a city crawl, making use of the full Overlook write-up in the previous adventure. As the characters pursue their quarry, you can break up the skill challenge with some of the optional encounters in “Urban Encounters,” which is on page 21 of “Siege of Bordrin’s Watch.” You can also read details on the city, its various districts, and some of its key inhabitants in that adventure. Complexity 4 (requires 10 successes before 3 failures). Primary Skills Bluff, Diplomacy, Intimidate, Streetwise, Thievery.
1 “The threat of the orcs might be ended after the siege of Bordrin’s Watch, but word from the frontier is there’s more trouble on the march. Just like Tusk’s clan, the rabble of the mountains are getting their hands on good-grade weapons and armor, and they’re looking to use it.” 2 “You get all races in Overlook, but the dark ones that pass through the city keep to themselves. More often than not, those you do see are in the company of Lost Ones bodyguards and enforcers.” 3 “Someone by the name ‘Modra’ was said to be buying information a few months back, looking for those with experience mining the old caverns of the Stonehome.” 4 “Modra is a dark creeper, and well known in the city’s criminal underworld.” 5 “It’s said that the dark creeper Modra brokers weapons and armor through the Overlook black markets.”
Other Skills Acrobatics, Athletics, Insight, Stealth. Victory The characters do not draw attention to themselves when they discover the connection between Modra and the Happy Beggar almshouse. See “An Unexpected Ally,” below. Failure The characters determine the connection between Modra and the Happy Beggar, but they draw attention to themselves in the process. Their inquiries get back to Sarshan, who takes steps to secure the caverns beneath the Happy Beggar. Add an additional dark creeper to the Transfer Portal tactical encounter, making it 7th level and worth 1,500 XP. Bluff DC 12 (1 success, maximum 3 successes; see Acrobatics or Athletics and Insight). On a successful check, the characters learn one piece of information
6 “Modra met up with a shadar-kai witch a month ago. Some said she was doing a deal for weapons, but she didn’t look much like a warrior.” 7 “The far traders coming into Overlook talk of more and more trouble on the roads. They say the Red Hand of Doom was behind what happened in Brindol a few months past, but there’s more cults than that on the rise across the frontier.” 8 “The dark creeper is just the front man for arms dealing in the city. No one knows who’s behind the operation, but rumor says it’s bigger than anyone in Overlook will ever know.” 9 “Modra was in the city three weeks past, but he was keeping a low profile. He had a squad of dark creepers with him, must have figured they’d stand out.” 10 “Last time anyone saw Modra was just before the raid on Bordrin’s Watch. I heard he’s been on the run since then. Some job that went bad.”
from the rumor table. On a failed check, the PC takes a –2 penalty to his or her next Bluff or Intimidate check. If the PC spends 50 gp or more for favors and bribes, he or she gains a +1 bonus to the check. The characters seeks out the seamy underside of Overlook, posing as those connected to or desiring to do business with the Lost Ones. Diplomacy DC 7 (1 success, maximum 2 successes; see Acrobatics or Athletics and Insight). The PCs learn a rumor from the rumor table. By lending a sympathetic ear to an NPC victimized by the Lost Ones, the PC hears a rumor. If the PCs have not already met her, Reggen at the Mountain’s Hearth Inn (page 17 of the “Siege of Bordrin’s Watch”) is one such character.
September 20 08
|
D u n g e o n 1 58
11
The Shadow Rift of Umbraforge Intimidate DC 17 (1 success, maximum 3 successes; see Acrobatics or Athletics and Insight). On a failed check, the PC cannot make any further Intimidate or Bluff checks in this challenge. The characters take a direct approach, shaking down an NPC connected to the Lost Ones to hear a rumor from the rumor table. Streetwise DC 12 (1 success, maximum 4 successes; see Stealth). On a successful check, the characters hear a rumor from the rumor table. If a character spends 50 gp or more for favors and entertainment, he or she gains a +1 bonus to the check. The PC spends his or her time on the street or in the taverns with one ear to the ground. Thievery DC 12 (1 success, maximum 2 successes; see Stealth) This check can be made only by a PC who has previously made a successful Bluff or Streetwise check. On a successful check, the PC hears a rumor from the rumor table. The PC follows up on earlier information by picking pockets, intercepting private messages, or another bit of useful subterfuge. Acrobatics or Athletics DC varies (0 successes). A successful DC 7 check provides the character with a +2 bonus to the next Bluff, Diplomacy, or Intimidate check. A successful DC 12 check grants the character information from the rumor table. Failure results in a –2 penalty to any subsequent Bluff checks.
By performing feats of juggling, tumbling, knife-throwing, arm-wrestling, or other physical entertainments in one of the city’s markets or taverns, the PC is in a perfect position to observe and listen. Insight DC 12 (0 successes). With a successful check, the character gains a +2 bonus to his or her next Bluff, Diplomacy, or Intimidate check. The PC’s ability to read people is brought to bear on the search for information. Stealth DC 12 (0 successes). On a successful check, the character gains a +2 bonus to his or her next Streetwise or Thievery check. On a failed check, the character takes a –2 penalty to his or her next Streetwise or Thievery check. The PC keeps an especially low profile.
Reniss, Half-Elf Ranger
Level 4 Striker
Medium natural humanoid Initiative +5 Senses Perception +2; low-light vision HP 47; Bloodied 23 AC 18 (20 against opportunity attacks); Fortitude 18, Reflex 19, Will 15 Speed 6 m Longsword (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon +5 vs. AC; 1d8 + 2 damage. r Longbow (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon Ranged 20/40; +6 vs. AC; 1d10 + 3 damage R Eyebite (standard; encounter) ✦ Arcane, Charm, Implement, Psychic Ranged 10; +4 vs. Will; 1d6 + 1 psychic damage, and Reniss is invisible to the target until the start of her next turn. R Hunter’s Bear Trap (standard; daily) ✦ Martial, Weapon Requires longbow; +6 vs. AC; 2d10 + 3 damage, and the target is slowed and takes ongoing 5 damage (save ends). Requires longsword; +5 vs. AC; 2d8 + 2 damage, and the target is slowed and takes ongoing 5 damage (save ends). R Nimble Strike (standard; at-will) ✦ Martial, Weapon Requires longbow; +6 vs. AC; 1d10 + 3 damage; Reniss can shift 1 square before or after she attacks. R Shadow Wasp Strike (standard; encounter) ✦ Martial, Weapon Requires longbow; target quarry; +6 vs. AC; 2d10 + 3 damage. Requires longsword; target quarry; +5 vs. AC; 2d8 + 2 damage. Hunter’s Quarry Once per turn as a minor action, Reniss can designate the enemy nearest to her as her quarry. Once per round, Reniss deals 1d6 extra damage on an attack made against her quarry. Unbalancing Parry (immediate reaction, when an enemy misses Reniss with a melee attack; encounter) Reniss slides the enemy into a square adjacent to her and gains combat advantage against it until the end of her next turn. Group Diplomacy Reniss grants allies within 10 squares of her a +1 racial bonus to Diplomacy checks. Alignment Good Languages Common, Elven, Dwarven Skills Acrobatics +10, Diplomacy +5, Dungeoneering +5, Insight +2 Str 15 (+4) Dex 17 (+5) Wis 10 (+2) Con 15 (+4) Int 12 (+3) Cha 13 (+3) Equipment leather armor, longsword, longbow, quiver of 30 arrows September 20 08
|
D u n g e o n 1 58
12
The Shadow Rift of Umbraforge This skill challenge lets the PCs immerse themselves in the bustle and business of Overlook, seeking information among the city’s traders, brokers, and black marketeers. Modra has covered his tracks since coming back to the city (since he knows that Sarshan is looking for him), but by determining his movements and activities prior to the events of “Siege of Bordrin’s Watch,” the PCs gain valuable insight into the dark creeper’s mission. This skill challenge should be treated as a city crawl, making use of the full Overlook write-up in the previous adventure. As the PCs pursue their quarry, you can break up the skill challenge with some of the optional encounters in “Urban Encounters,” which is on page 21 of “Siege of Bordrin’s Watch.” You can also read details on the city, its various districts, and some of its key inhabitants in that adventure.
Word on the Street As the PCs progress through the skill challenge, they hear rumors from the table below. Some of these are specific to Modra, while others are tangential information regarding the slow spread of conflict across the frontier—conflict the party is already caught up in. Information can be given out in the order presented, or you can decide what to reveal based on the PCs’ specific lines of inquiry. Where a rumor has a time frame, adjust it as necessary depending on how much time has passed since “Siege of Bordrin’s Watch” and “Rescue at Rivenroar.”
An Unexpected Ally In the course of their investigation, the PCs run into another character making similar lines of inquiry regarding the dark creeper Modra. This is Reniss, sister of the half-elf warlock Jen of the Farstriders
(“Siege of Bordrin’s Watch” page 26). When Jen was slain in the vents of the Stonehome, she used a sending stone to whisper her last words to her sister, a name the Farstriders tripped across before they were cut down—”Modra. . . .”
Beggar is normally the last place to look for potential intrigue, if only because its reputation for piety among the locals means no self-respecting adventurers ever go near it.
The female who approaches you wears brown leather beneath a green cloak, and a longbow is slung across her chest. Quietly, she says “I’ve heard word that there’s a group in the city looking for someone named Modra. I’m doing the same, though I doubt it’s for the same reasons. Perhaps we should compare notes.”
Once in Tradetown, you have no trouble getting directions to the Happy Beggar, though you get your share of strange looks when you ask. “The kind of place you want to stay if you find group reading of Pelor’s scriptures an entertaining evening,” is one description you get. However, the sign above the door of a single-story hovel—a stooped and tattered mendicant with a broad grin—tells you you’ve arrived.
Reniss is a valuable ally in the PCs’ search. She explains her connection to the Farstriders. If the characters tell her they found her sister’s body, she takes comfort in the fact that Jen’s remains were spared the degradation of the orcs. In exchange for the PCs sharing what they’ve learned during the skill challenge, she passes on one piece of information they have not yet obtained.
The Beggar sits sandwiched between a warehouse block and a section of rundown tenements. What no one outside of a small number of dark one and shadar-kai operatives knows is that the almshouse is owned by Sarshan, and it conceals the heart of his arms-running enterprise within the city.
“I met a dark creeper close to death in the Clean Sheets, looking like he’d been in the fight to end them all. He said he’d been working for this Modra when it happened. For a quart of bad beer, he told me that if I was looking for Modra, I’d better be fast. Someone else is hunting him— someone looking to kill him. The creeper didn’t know where Modra was, but he’d heard him talk about some Tradetown almshouse called the Happy Beggar.” Reniss accompanies the PCs to the Happy Beggar.
The Happy Beggar The Happy Beggar is an out-of-the-way poorhouse run by a husband-and-wife team of retired paladins. The
The atmosphere inside the Beggar is as dingy as the whitewash on the outside walls. A plain common room sits two dozen miserable-looking patrons, most asleep in their chairs or sipping at cracked mugs. A few appear to be doubling as volunteer staff, carrying steaming teapots from table to table. Behind what would be a bar in any other establishment, a dour-looking human woman in white robes boils water at a wood stove. A similarly attired male greets you as he limps up a flight of stairs across the room. “Greetings and welcome. You are just in time for tea and songs of devotion. Please, join us!” Prashant and his wife Ausma run the Happy Beggar on the proceeds of their former life as adventurers. Both are scrupulously lawful good, their honesty obvi-
September 20 08
|
D u n g e o n 1 58
13
The Shadow Rift of Umbraforge ous to anyone making an Insight check. The paladins rent this space from one of Sarshan’s front companies, but they know nothing of him, his operations, or the hidden areas of the cellar. The manner of the infiltration and investigation of the Beggar is entirely up to the PCs. Because Prashant and Ausma have no reason to distrust them (and because the Beggar contains nothing worth stealing), the party can effectively have the run of the upper level. PCs are welcome to take advantage of the questionable accommodations in the common room, or to join in prayer and tea (the only libation served here). Though the Happy Beggar sits atop Sarshan’s Shadowfell gate, the almshouse is rarely used as a transit point. Instead, creatures and goods arriving from the Shadowfell are sent through a teleportation portal to one of a number of nearby warehouses. (See area 6, on page 15, and the Transfer Portal tactical encounter on page 19 for details.) The Beggar’s paladin proprietors and its patrons thus speak the truth when they say they have no knowledge of the dark creeper (with one exception; see below). At some point, the PCs must investigate the cellar. None of the patrons take notice of the party, and Prashant and Ausma make only passive Perception checks (13 for either) against any clandestine activities.
Friendly Advice At some point before the PCs descend the stairs to the cellars, they attract the attention of a figure in the corner of the common room. Alone in a rickety chair, a hunched form in a tattered cloak is watching you. When he catches your gaze, he smiles. The old man appears human or halfelf, but his face is deeply scarred by the ravages of disease. He coughs wetly into a grimy handkerchief and beckons you to sit. Though the PCs have no way of knowing it, this is the shadar-kai arms dealer Sarshan. As a child, Sarshan was a victim of an arcane Shadowfell plague that left him orphaned and badly scarred. The shadar-kai became an outcast among his kind, forging his own path
September 20 08
|
D u n g e o n 1 58
14
The Shadow Rift of Umbraforge
The Happy Beggar
T
he Happy Beggar is a nondescript poorhouse serving the neediest transients of Tradetown. Though rundown and worn, Prashant and Ausma keep the place clean and comfortable. Walls, Floors, and Ceilings: The walls of the upper level are lath and plaster under several dozen layers of whitewash. The ceilings are rough planks darkened by years of woodsmoke. The floors are close-fitting planks worn smooth and strewn with clean straw. The cellar walls are rough-hewn stone, while the walls of the secret caverns are dressed stone except where indicated. The floors of the cellar and the dressed stone chambers are unmortared flagstones. Illumination: The upper floor has lanterns burning by day and night. The cellar and the secret caverns have no light. 1. Main Floor. The main floor of the Happy Beggar consists of the common room and Prashant and Ausma’s small bedchamber. 2. Kitchen. A large wood stove downstairs burns throughout the day, heating the common room above by way of narrow vents. This is the preparation place for Ausma’s legendary (for all the wrong reasons) porridge. The Beggar serves it to the needy at no cost three times per day, and there are 1d4 volunteers in the kitchen or the larder from dawn to dusk. Ausma might be here as well. Volunteering to help with the cooking is an easy way to gain access to the lower levels, but it takes a successful DC 18 Bluff check to win Ausma over. 3. Larder. The downstairs larder stores oats, barley, and enormous quantities of average-quality tea.
4. Collapsed Cellar. Beyond a locked door, a section of stone wall appears to have collapsed, completely blocking a passageway that once led farther beneath the Beggar. However, a successful DC 22 Perception check made to search the area reveals that the rubble pile has been arranged by hand long ago, creating a hidden access to the secret caverns beyond. A second successful DC 22 Perception check uncovers signs that a creature (Modra) passed this way recently, and reveals the secret door. The secret door is a carefully balanced stone slab. When pushed, it swivels open to reveal a narrow passage wide enough only for Medium or smaller creatures. The passage slopes sharply downward at the end, requiring a successful DC 20 Athletics check to safely descend. On a failed check, a character slides the last 10 feet to the cavern floor (taking 1d6 damage) and is knocked prone at the beginning of Black Cavern tactical encounter. 5. Black Cavern (Tactical Encounter). This rough cavern is a natural barrier between the Happy Beggar’s cellar and the ancient Shadowfell shrine below it. When the transfer portal is shut down, this cavern is the only route between Sarshan’s Shadowfell gate and the world. The cavern is warded by deadly doomspore fungus and home to a group of shadowhunter bats. The bats ignore shadow creatures unless they are attacked. They attack all others on sight. 6. Transfer Portal (Tactical Encounter). Weapons, armor, and creatures moved through the Shadowfell gate in area 7 are transferred to one of Sarshan’s warehouses through a magic archway in this chamber. The portal acts as a permanent teleportation circle,
affecting any creature or object that passes through it from either side. If the archway is touched, its interior displays a view into a darkened warehouse stacked high with crates and boxes. From his warehouses, Sarshan sends his goods by porter or wagon out through Overlook, where they blend in with the trade of the city before passing into the world beyond. Sarshan changes warehouses regularly for his operations, reconfiguring the portal and even shutting it down for extended periods in order to maintain a maximum amount of security. A shadar-kai witch guards this area. Three dark creepers are also here, transferring a pair of caged shadow hounds to the warehouse for delivery. The PCs can step through the portal to find themselves in a Tradetown warehouse a few blocks from the Happy Beggar. The other side of the portal is a permanent teleportation circle scribed on the warehouse wall. The warehouse can be used as an alternate entrance to the secret caverns, but it does not otherwise play a part in this adventure. 7. The White Shrine (Tactical Encounter). This ancient shrine is the location of Sarshan’s portal to the Shadowfell. The shadar-kai discovered this gate by way of its other side in the Shadowfell, eventually working his way into the cellars above. Realizing that he had discovered an access point into Overlook, he spent a year activating the ancient teleportation portal in area 6 and setting up his operations in the city. From its days as a shrine to ancient shadow gods, this area is guarded by wraiths that can be summoned by any shadow creature. It is occupied by Modra when the PCs arrive.
September 20 08
|
D u n g e o n 1 58
15
The Shadow Rift of Umbraforge with blood and steel as the leader of an elite mercenary company called the Black Arrow. One beneficial side-effect of Sarshan’s scarring is that his gray shadar-kai complexion and black eyes naturally pale whenever he spends time away from the Shadowfell. This allows him to easily disguise himself as a human or half-elf in the world. He has come to the Beggar as a crippled veteran (a guise he adopts frequently in Overlook), seeking Modra with the intent of executing him slowly for his betrayal. If the PCs have been asking questions regarding the dark creeper (quietly or otherwise), Sarshan overhears them. Otherwise, the shadar-kai recognizes Reniss from a previous near-encounter and guesses why the PCs have come here. The old man introduces himself as Brenat. He plays the part of a doddering fool seeking conversation, fixating at first on the PCs’ arms and armor as he marks them as adventurers. If the PCs make any mention of seeking Modra, he becomes animated, sharing a taste of his personal philosophy in an attempt to gauge the worth of the PCs and discover what they know. “I know the one you mean. A dark creeper, and none as dark as him, or so I’ve heard. Time was, he used the Happy Beggar as a meeting place, but I’d reckon he hasn’t been seen here in two years or more. I ran him off one time myself. I might not look it, but I fought dark creepers in the mountains as a younger man, sellsword to a dozen lords. Much as yourselves, I’d wager. Adventurers all have a price, eh?”
In the end, Sarshan deduces that the PCs are hunting Modra for themselves and decides to let them try their hand at the job. His need to maintain secrecy is absolute, and with the damage Modra has already done to his operation, he is happy to let someone else eliminate the dark creeper.
Sarshan leaves as soon as the PCs have no further questions for him, though he gives them this final bit of advice as he gets up. “Wherever you find this Modra, heed me. He’s a black-hearted one—make no mistake and strike no bargains with him. Kill him quickly before he gets the chance to return the favor.” Sarshan assumes that the PCs will seek and find Modra in Overlook. Because he doesn’t know that Modra has lost the brass key he stole, he has no worries about the PCs being in the Beggar. Sarshan’s mission in the city turns mostly on meeting existing clients and doing damage control in the aftermath of Modra’s botched deal. This keeps him conveniently away from the Beggar and his fortress in the Shadowfell until the end of the adventure. If the PCs talk to Prashant or Ausma afterward, a successful DC 17 Insight or Diplomacy check reveals that contrary to his story of knowing Modra, the stranger was asking about the dark creeper just a half hour before the party arrived.
September 20 08
|
D u n g e o n 1 58
16
The Shadow Rift of Umbraforge
Black Cavern Encounter Level 4 (750 XP)
Setup A group of shadowhunter bats roosts among the stalagmites in this cavern, while patches of deadly doomspore form a barrier against those would cross it. If the PCs enter with any light sources, or if a character fails an Athletics check and slides into the cavern, the bats attack at once with surprise. If the bats have surprise, do not place their miniatures until they attack.
When the PCs can see into the cavern, read:
When the PCs can see over the cliff, read:
This natural stone cavern is cut in half by a cliff, and the eastern side descends into darkness. Stalagmites and stalactites obscure your view, and barely visible to the far southeast is an archway of finished stone that opens up to the south.
The cliff descends 20 feet to the floor of the cavern’s eastern side. However, as you look down, you can see that the rough cliff wall is dotted by patches of toadstool-shaped fungus.
When the shadowhunter bats attack, read: A f lurry of movement erupts from the shadows of the ceiling. Four enormous bats shriek as they drop toward you, their bladed tails slashing the air.
4 shadowhunter bats (B)
Tactics The bats descend from the ceiling to make f lyby attacks, swooping up again to stay out of melee range and maintain cover. If a character is knocked prone as he or she enters the cavern, the bats attack with combat advantage in the hope of a quick kill. Likewise, if the PCs attempt to flee through the chamber, the bats attack with combat advantage while they are climbing down the cliff. If three bats are killed, the fourth flees shrieking for area 6, alerting the creatures there and joining them in the Transfer Portal tactical encounter.
Doomspore Gauntlet The rough cliff that separates the eastern and western sides of the cavern is entirely covered with doomspore. Sarshan’s operatives have carefully cultivated the deadly fungus to ward off those who might explore this area.
Doomspore Hazard
Level 3 Obstacle XP 150
Usually found in large, natural caverns, or in areas tainted by the Shadowfell, these patches of large, toadstool-shaped fungus can grow to be about 3 feet tall. When disturbed, a doomspore unleashes a cloud of deadly spores. Hazard: A doomspore fills a square (the square is difficult terrain). When triggered, it releases a cloud of spores. Perception No check is necessary to notice the fungus. Additional Skill: Dungeoneering ✦ DC 17: The character identifies the fungus as doomspore. Trigger When a creature enters a square of doomspore, or kicks or pokes at it from an adjacent square, or attacks it in any way, the fungus releases a cloud of spores. A bloodied character in the initial burst or that begins its turn in a doomspore cloud is attacked by the poison. Attack Standard Action Close burst 1 Target: Bloodied creature in burst Attack: +6 vs. Fortitude Hit: 1d10 poison damage and ongoing 5 poison damage (save ends). Effect: The cloud provides concealment for creatures inside it. The cloud persists until the end of the encounter or for 5 minutes. Once a patch of doomspore creates a cloud, it can’t create another one for 24 hours. Countermeasures ✦ A character can move into a square of doomspore without triggering the cloud by making a DC 21 Dungeoneering check. The character’s move must end in the doomspore’s square.
September 20 08
|
D u n g e o n 1 58
17
The Shadow Rift of Umbraforge
4 Shadowhunter Bats (B)
Level 3 Lurker
Medium shadow beast XP 150 each Initiative +9 Senses Perception +7; darkvision HP 38; Bloodied 19 AC 17; Fortitude 14, Reflex 17, Will 12 Speed 2 (clumsy), fly 8; see also f lyby attack m Tail Slash (standard; at-will) +8 vs. AC; 1d6 + 4 damage. In dim light or darkness, a shadowhunter bat gains a +2 bonus to the attack roll and deals an extra 6 damage. M Flyby Attack (standard; at-will) The shadowhunter bat flies up to 8 squares and makes one melee basic attack at any point during that movement. The bat doesn’t provoke opportunity attacks when moving away from the target of the attack. Alignment Unaligned Languages — Skills Stealth +10 Str 13 (+2) Dex 18 (+5) Wis 13 (+2) Con 14 (+3) Int 2 (–3) Cha 11(+1)
Features of the Area Ceiling: The ceiling is roughly level, rising 20 feet above the western side of the chamber and 40 feet above the eastern side. Tunnel Mouth: The tunnel from the cellar bottoms out here in a steep slope of crumbling stone. Characters must make a successful DC 20 Athletics check to safely descend. On a failed check, a character slides the last 10 feet to the cavern floor (taking 1d6 damage) and is knocked prone. Stalactites and Stalagmites: These narrow columns of stone extend from the ceiling and floor of the cavern, providing cover. AC 5, Reflex 5, Fortitude 10; hp 40. Rubble: These areas of loose scree are difficult terrain. A character who runs through rubble must make a DC 20 Acrobatics check or fall prone. Characters can move at normal speed without difficulty. Cliff: This steep slope drops 20 feet from the western side of the cavern to the east. Scaling the cliff requires a successful DC 20 Athletics check. A creature that drops down from above takes 2d10 falling damage. Also see Doomspore Gauntlet.
September 20 08
|
D u n g e o n 1 58
18
The Shadow Rift of Umbraforge
Transfer Portal Encounter Level 6 (1,325 XP)
Setup A shadar-kai witch (one of Sarshan’s personal guard) keeps watch over this area. A large cage on a cart holds two shadow hounds that the dark creepers are in the process of transferring to the warehouse, where they’ll be shipped out of the city to their new owners. The cage has a magical property that prevents the hounds from teleporting. The intelligent hounds are far from happy about their fate.
3 dark creepers (D) 2 shadow hounds (H) 1 shadar-kai witch (W)
When the PCs are at the head of the stairs, read: A savage howl echoes up the stairs as you approach. A lantern is burning somewhere beyond, giving a glimpse of a finished stone chamber set with marble f lagstones. When the PCs can see the entire chamber, read: This odd-shaped chamber extends outward in three sections, and it is about 60 feet wide at its end. Though its frescoed walls suggest a sort of temple, it resembles a storeroom now, with boxes and crates stacked in piles. In the center of room stands an enormous open stone archway. Adjacent to it is a large steel cage on a low cart, somehow obscured in shadow. Within the cage, two fierce hounds appear to be wrapped in darkness as they snarl and claw at the door.
If the witch and the dark creepers have been alerted by the shadowhunter bat, they are hiding behind crates while the bat circles the room. Place the bat’s miniature but do not place the others until they attack. If the other occupants of the room have not been alerted, read: A short figure all in black threatens the snarling hounds with a spear through the bars of the cage. Two more dark creepers push the cart toward the arch. Farther along, a tall, gray-skinned female is inspecting a stack of crates. None of them appear to notice you.
Tactics If they have been alerted, the witch and the dark creepers attack with surprise when three or more PCs have descended the stairs. If not, they are distracted and have their backs to the stairs, giving the party a chance to gain surprise. The dark creepers take the first round to open the shadow hounds’ cage, then hide beneath the cart to avoid behind attacked. Once in melee, the creepers use dark step to shift throughout the area of combat and maintain combat advantage. The enraged hounds race for the PCs, alternating the use of their baying power to maximize its effect. They use shadow ambush to teleport from target to target, attacking with combat advantage. The witch uses her shadow jaunt to dart in and out of melee, targeting slower-moving foes with her blackfire touch and using beshadowed mind against PCs making ranged attacks. If forced into melee, she orders the dark creepers to her side and casts deep shadow as a defensive barrier.
If both the dark creepers are killed, the witch retreats to area 7, summoning the wraiths there and fighting with them in the White Shrine tactical encounter.
Development The shadar-kai witch carries a brass key identical to the one held by the PCs. This activates the Shadowfell gate in area 7 (White Shrine tactical encounter).
September 20 08
|
D u n g e o n 1 58
19
The Shadow Rift of Umbraforge 2 Shadow Hounds (H)
Level 6 Skirmisher
Medium shadow magical beast XP 250 each Initiative +7 Senses Perception +9; darkvision Shroud of Night aura 5; bright light in the aura is reduced to dim light, and dim light becomes darkness. HP 70; Bloodied 35 AC 19; Fortitude 20, Reflex 18, Will 17 Vulnerable 5 radiant Speed 7, teleport 7 m Bite (standard; at-will) +11 vs. AC; 1d8 + 4 damage; see also shadow ambush. C Baying (minor; recharge ⚄ ⚅ ) ✦ Fear Close burst 5; deafened creatures are immune; +8 vs. Will; the target takes a –2 penalty to all defenses until the end of the shadow hound’s next turn. Shadow Ambush When the shadow hound teleports adjacent to an enemy, it gains combat advantage and deals an extra 1d6 damage on the next attack it makes against that enemy this turn. Alignment Unaligned Languages — Skills Endurance +10, Stealth +10 Str 19 (+7) Dex 15 (+5) Wis 13 (+4) Con 14 (+5) Int 6 (+1) Cha 16 (+6)
Features of the Area Illumination: A lantern hangs on the north side of the teleportation portal archway (bright 10). Frescoes: Faded images adorn the walls here, most appearing to show humans in the act of worshiping faint, shadowy creatures. Cart and Cage: This well-built steel cage is 10 feet square and stands 5 feet high, with bars set every 6 inches (AC 8, Reflex 8, Fortitude 8; hp 30). It is imbued with a magical property that prevents creatures within it from teleporting. The cage sits on a four-wheeled heavy wooden cart. The cart and cage provide cover and can be climbed with a successful DC 10 Athletics check. A Small creature can drop prone under the cart to gain superior cover.
Shadar-kai Witch (W)
Level 7 Controller
Medium shadow humanoid XP 300 Initiative +6 Senses Perception +4; low-light vision HP 77; Bloodied 38 AC 21; Fortitude 18, Reflex 19, Will 19 Speed 6; see also shadow jaunt m Blackfire Touch (standard; at-will) ✦ Fire, Necrotic +11 vs. Reflex; 2d6 + 4 fire and necrotic damage. R Beshadowed Mind (standard; recharge ⚃ ⚄ ⚅ ) ✦ Necrotic Ranged 10; +11 vs. Will; 2d6 + 4 necrotic damage, and the target has no line of sight to anything more than 2 squares from it (save ends). C Deep Shadow (standard; sustain minor; encounter) ✦ Necrotic Aura 2; thick, writhing shadows surround the shadar-kai witch. The witch and any other shadow creatures in the aura gain concealment. In addition, enemies that enter or start their turns in the aura take 5 necrotic damage, and enemies (including flying ones) also treat the area within the aura as difficult terrain. The shadar-kai witch can sustain the aura as a minor action. However, the effect ends if she uses shadow jaunt or moves more than half her speed on her turn. Shadow Jaunt (move; encounter) ✦ Teleportation The shadar-kai witch teleports 3 squares and becomes insubstantial until the start of her next turn. Alignment Unaligned Languages Common Skills Acrobatics +8, Arcana +12, Religion +12, Stealth +13 Str 13 (+4) Dex 16 (+6) Wis 12 (+4) Con 13 (+4) Int 19 (+7) Cha 17 (+6)
With a successful DC 15 Strength check (a move action), a character can move the cart and cage forward or backward 2 squares. Crates: These squares provide cover. A stack of crates stands 5 feet high and can be climbed with a successful DC 10 Athletics check. Teleportation Portal: This black stone archway is a semicircle 30 feet in diameter and 15 feet high. Silver crystals are set within the stone in a random pattern. Runes in Common cover it, but their ancient dialect requires a DC 17 History check to decipher.
3 Dark Creepers (D)
Level 4 Skirmisher
Small shadow humanoid XP 175 each Initiative +8 Senses Perception +4; darkvision HP 54; Bloodied 27; see also killing dark AC 18 (see also dark step); Fortitude 15, Reflex 17, Will 15 Speed 6 m Dagger (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon +9 vs. AC; 1d4 + 4 damage. R Dagger (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon Ranged 5/10; +9 vs. AC; 1d4 + 4 damage. C Killing Dark (when reduced to 0 hit points) Close burst 1; targets enemies; each target is blinded (save ends). When slain, a dark creeper explodes in a spout of darkness. Combat Advantage The dark creeper deals an extra 1d6 damage on melee and ranged attacks against any target it has combat advantage against. Dark Step (move; at-will) The dark creeper moves up to 4 squares, gains a +4 bonus to AC against opportunity attacks, and gains combat advantage against any target that it ends its move adjacent to. Alignment Unaligned Languages Common Skills Stealth +11, Thievery +11 Str 11 (+2) Dex 18 (+6) Wis 14 (+4) Con 14 (+4) Int 13 (+3) Cha 13 (+3) Equipment black garments, 5 daggers
They identify the arch as an ancient shadar-kai teleportation portal. The portal acts as a permanent teleportation circle, affecting any creature or object that passes through it from either side. If the archway is touched, its interior displays a view into a darkened warehouse stacked high with crates and boxes. The PCs can step through the portal to find themselves in a Tradetown warehouse a few blocks from the Happy Beggar. The other side of the portal is a permanent teleportation circle scribed on the warehouse wall. The warehouse can be used as an alternate entrance to the secret caverns, but it does not otherwise play a part in this adventure.
September 20 08
|
D u n g e o n 1 58
20
The Shadow Rift of Umbraforge
The White Shrine Encounter Level 7 (1,500 XP)
Another dark creeper stands before the arch, his hands pressed to it as he mutters an incantation. Suddenly aware of your presence, he spins toward you, then vanishes.
Setup This chamber holds the portal connecting the caverns to the Shadowfell.
Modra, dark creeper shadowborn stalker (M) 5 wraiths (W) 1 seething wraith (R)
When the PCs enter this area, read: This enormous darkened chamber has walls and ceiling of white marble. The northwest corner of the room has collapsed, a fall of stone spreading out across the f loor. To the south, a stone arch similar to that seen in the chamber to the east stands against the wall. Another archway stands in the center of the chamber. However, the interior of this arch is obscured by a wall of black mist that roils and twists as if blown by a fierce wind. If the witch from the Transfer Portal encounter did not come here, Modra stands before the Shadowfell gate, attempting to activate it without the use of the brass key. (He knows that the witch carries a key, but he cannot take on her and the dark creepers together.) The witch and the creepers in area 6 are unaware of Modra’s presence here, since he hid behind the rubble pile when the portal was activated as they passed through it. When the PCs see Modra at the portal, read:
Modra, Shadowborn Stalker
Level 7Elite Lurker
Small shadow humanoid, dark creeper XP 600 Initiative +11 Senses Perception +5; darkvision HP 124; Bloodied 62; see also killing dark AC 23 (see also dark step), Fortitude 20, Reflex 22, Will 20 Saving Throws +2 Speed 6 Action Points 1 m Short Sword (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon +12 vs. AC; 1d6 + 5 damage. M Double Strike (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon Requires combat advantage; Modra makes 2 short sword attacks. If both attacks hit the same target, the target takes ongoing 5 damage (save ends). R Dagger (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon Ranged 5/10; +12 vs. AC; 1d4 + 5 damage. A Cloud of Darkness (minor; encounter) ✦ Zone Close burst 1; this power creates a zone of darkness that remains in place until the end of Modra’s next turn. The zone blocks line of sight for all creatures except Modra. Any creature entirely within the area (except Modra) is blinded. Combat Advantage Modra deals an extra 1d6 damage on melee and ranged attacks against any target he has combat advantage against. Dark Step (move; at-will) Modra moves up to 4 squares, gains a +4 bonus to AC against opportunity attacks, and gains combat advantage against any target that he ends his move adjacent to. Cloak of Shadows (minor; encounter) ✦ Illusion Modra is invisible until the end of his next turn. Alignment Evil Languages Common Skills Bluff +9, Stealth +12, Thievery +12 Str 11 (+3) Dex 18 (+7) Wis 14 (+5) Con 14 (+5) Int 13 (+4) Cha 13 (+4) Equipment black cloak, chainmail, short sword, 5 daggers
If the witch fled here, the PCs see her taking cover behind the archway, while Modra hides behind the main rubble pile to the northwest. Both the witch and Modra know that this chamber is protected by undead guardians. As soon as the PCs appear, one of them summons the wraiths. When the wraiths are summoned, read: The words of an incantation in Common ring out through the chamber: “Protect this place with shadow’s claws!” Suddenly, the dark mist obscuring the archway is torn through by a flash of white light. Six spectral shapes emerge from the archway, racing toward you. 5 Wraiths (W)
Level 5 Lurker
Medium shadow humanoid (undead) XP 200 each Initiative +10 Senses Perception +2; darkvision HP 37; Bloodied 18 Regeneration 5 (if the wraith takes radiant damage, regener tion is negated until the end of the wraith’s next turn) AC 16; Fortitude 13, Reflex 16, Will 14 Immune disease, poison; Resist 10 necrotic, insubstantial; Vulnerable 5 radiant (see also regeneration above) Speed fly 6 (hover); phasing ; see also shadow glide m Shadow Touch (standard; at-will) ✦ Necrotic +8 vs. Reflex; 1d6 + 4 necrotic damage, and the target is weakened (save ends). Combat Advantage ✦ Necrotic The wraith deals an extra 1d6 necrotic damage against any target it has combat advantage against. Shadow Glide (move; encounter) The wraith shifts 6 squares. Spawn Wraith Any humanoid killed by a wraith rises as a free-willed wraith at the start of its creator’s next turn, appearing in the space where it died (or in the nearest unoccupied space). Raising the slain creature (using the Raise Dead ritual) does not destroy the spawned wraith. Alignment Chaotic evil Languages Common Skills Stealth +11 Str 4 (–1) Dex 18 (+6) Wis 10 (+2) Con 13 (+3) Int 6 (+0) Cha 15 (+4) September 20 08
|
D u n g e o n 1 58
21
The Shadow Rift of Umbraforge
Seething Wraith (R)
Level 7 Controller
Medium shadow humanoid (undead) XP 300 Initiative +8 Senses Perception +6; darkvision Seething Whispers (Psychic) aura 3; deafened creatures are immune; any enemy in the aura at the start of its turn takes 5 psychic damage and is dazed until the start of its next turn. (If the mad wraith takes radiant damage, the aura is negated until the end of the seething wraith’s next turn.) HP 76; Bloodied 38 AC 19; Fortitude 16, Reflex 19, Will 18 Immune disease, poison; Resist 10 necrotic, insubstantial; Vulnerable 5 radiant (see also seething whispers above) Speed fly 6 (hover); phasing m Touch of Hate (standard; at-will) ✦ Psychic +9 vs. Will; 1d6 + 5 psychic damage, and the target takes a –2 penalty to Will defense (save ends). M Touch of Chaos (standard; recharge ⚄ ⚅ ) ✦ Psychic +10 vs. Will; 2d6 + 4 psychic damage, and the target moves up to its speed and makes a basic attack against its nearest ally as a free action. Spawn Wraith Any humanoid killed by a seething wraith rises as a freewilled seething wraith at the start of its creator’s next turn, appearing in the space where it died (or in the nearest unoccupied space). Raising the slain creature (using the Raise Dead ritual) does not destroy the spawned wraith. Alignment Chaotic evil Languages Common Skills Stealth +13 Str 6 (+1) Dex 20 (+8) Wis 6 (+1) Con 12 (+4) Int 11 (+3) Cha 19 (+7)
Tactics The wraiths work together to flank foes, using their shadow touch with combat advantage. The mad wraith throws itself at the PCs, hoping to catch as many as it can within the area of its mad whispers. It uses touch of chaos against the most powerful-looking melee combatants, and it uses touch of madness while waiting for that power to recharge. The wraiths do not attack shadow creatures. They pursue foes out of this area if necessary, but they
cannot pass through the gate if the PCs flee to the Shadowfell. They otherwise fight until destroyed. After using his cloak of shadows to vanish, Modra stays as far away from the fight as possible, taking cover behind rubble and throwing daggers at PCs who attempt to close with him.
Dark Bargain Modra is desperate to retrieve the brass key and return to the Shadowfell and his allies there. In the second round of combat, he shouts out to the closest PC that he is willing to strike a bargain. If the PCs give him the brass key, he promises to call off the wraiths (he can’t) and leave the party in peace. The PCs can make Sense Motive checks against Modra’s Bluff check. If they decide to give him the key, the dark creeper laughs as he runs behind the archway, fits the key, then disappears into the roiling black mists.
Into the Shadowfell One way or another, the PCs must go through the Shadowfell gate in pursuit of Modra. If they give him the brass key (either the original or the one they took off the witch), they can use the other key to follow. If they seem disinclined to do so (even to escape the wraiths), you might have to take matters into your own hands. If necessary, have a tremor in the Shadowfell (see “Umbraforge,” page 25) strike while the PCs are in the thick of combat here or investigating the archway in the aftermath of the fight. The tremor can’t be felt in the world, but it creates a surge of energy within the gate. Tendrils of shadow lash out into the room, carrying the PCs (and Modra if necessary) into the Shadowfell.
September 20 08
|
D u n g e o n 1 58
22
The Shadow Rift of Umbraforge
Development Modra is meant to escape this encounter. However, if the PCs have the upper hand, don’t force the issue. Once they are in the Shadowfell, the party can hear rumors that lead them in the direction of one of Modra’s allies, who takes over his goal of crippling Sarshan’s operations. Simply change his name in the later encounters.
Features of the Area Rubble: Where the northwest corner of the chamber has collapsed, it spreads into areas of loose scree that are difficult terrain. A character who runs through rubble must make a successful DC 20 Acrobatics check or fall prone. Characters can move at normal speed without difficulty. Larger rubble piles provide cover. The main rubble pile in the northwest corner provides superior cover. Teleportation Portal: This black stone archway is a semicircle 30 feet in diameter and 15 feet high, set against the stone wall of the chamber. Silver crystals are set within the stone in a random pattern. Runes in Common cover it, but their ancient dialect requires a successful DC 17 History check to decipher. They identify the arch as an ancient shadar-kai teleportation portal. Though it resembles the portal in area 6, this archway is inert. Shadowfell Gate: This white stone archway is a semicircle 30 feet in diameter and 15 feet high. Black crystals are set within the stone in a random pattern. Runes in Common cover it, but their ancient dialect requires a successful DC 17 History check to decipher. They identify the arch as an ancient shadar-kai portal leading to the Shadowfell. On the left side of both faces of the arch is a circular indentation set within the stone. This fits one of
the brass keys carried by the PCs and the shadar-kai witch in the Transfer Portal encounter. By fitting the key into the archway (a minor action), the Shadowfell gate is activated for 1 round. The character fitting the key intuitively knows that the arch is attuned to him or her plus up to five additional creatures of his or her choice and any gear they are in contact with as they pass through the portal. Even when activated, the Shadowfell gate does not function for any other creatures.
September 20 08
|
D u n g e o n 1 58
23
The Shadow Rift of Umbraforge
Part 2: Umbraforge The dominion of Sarshan in the Shadowfell is a military enclave that grows larger every day in preparation for war. Two features dominate the site: Tower Umbraforge, the angular edifice that serves as the center of Sarshan’s operations, and the magma shadow rift that flows from a low, rocky ridge overlooking the area. Close to the tower stands the arcane foundry where Sarshan magically augments living creatures for combat. This second part of the adventure takes place in the camps, training grounds, and other areas around the tower. (Part three of the adventure takes place within the tower.) As they seek the escaped Modra
once more, the PCs learn the nature of this place and discover the full extent of Sarshan’s arms-running operations. The areas around Umbraforge—including the magma shadow rift—will see further development when the PCs return here later on in the adventure path.)
Arrival When the PCs step through the Shadowfell gate beneath the Happy Beggar, they find themselves in a mirror-image copy of the chamber they just left (see area 1, below).
You feel a wrenching sensation as bitter darkness swallows you. Then the light returns, dimmed somehow. As your eyes grow accustomed to the gloom, you find yourself in a chamber that appears to be a strange inversion of the one you just left. The walls, floor, and ceiling here are jet black, and the orientation of the room is reversed so that the door now lies to the west and the second stone arch is on the north wall. What was a rubble fall to the northeast is now a rift where the floor has collapsed in the southwest. Along the walls, globes of gray glass give off a dim light. Though the chamber is deserted, overturned stools and a burning brazier show that it has been recently occupied. A successful DC 20 Perception check notes signs of a struggle. A pair of dark creeper guards here
September 20 08
|
D u n g e o n 1 58
24
The Shadow Rift of Umbraforge
S
Umbraforge
arshan’s domain is a chaotic collection of mercenary camps, training grounds, slave pens, and the marketplaces that serve this massive military enclave. Over it all, the shadowy pall of the magma shadow rift glows a dull red. 1. The Black Shrine (Encounter T5): The cavern the PCs arrive in after passing through the Shadowfell gate is a mirror-image inversion of the White Shrine (area 7 and encounter G4 in the first part of the adventure). The walls, floor, and ceilings here are black stone. The teleportation portal is white stone with silver crystals inlaid, while the Shadowfell arch is black stone inset with white crystals. The fall of rubble in the northwest corner of the White Shrine is a collapsed rift in the southeast corner of the black shrine. Unlike in the mirror-image white shrine, the teleportation portal against the north wall here is functional. Touching it reveals a forest shrouded in shadow (area 10 of Umbraforge Tower), but any PC trying to enter the archway is pushed back by an unseen force. A successful DC 22 Arcana check indicates that the portal is attuned to a specific creature. 2. Magma Shadow Rift: A low black ridge dominates the landscape around which the camps of Umbraforge spread. A rift along the northeast face of the ridge vents what appears to be black-streaked lava to the air. From the road below, one can see that the lava is shot through with what appears to be liquid shadow, a magical effect that Sarshan draws on to power his foundry. Creatures within 10 feet of the edge of the rift or the lava channel must make successful DC 20 Endurance checks against the extreme heat or lose one healing surge. Creatures that enter the lava take 4d12 fire damage per round.
3. Mercenary Camps: These tightly packed tent villages spread across the plain between the tower and the ridge. At least twice a day, a mercenary company packs up and heads out to the east or west to a location from which they can subsequently be deployed to the world. New mercenaries trickle in along the roads at the same rate. See the “Sarshan’s Secrets” skill challenge (page 27) for more information. 4. Training Grounds (Encounter S1): These open fields of stinking mud and cast-off armor and weapons are in use day and night by the mercenary companies of the camps. 5. Slave Bazaar (Encounter S2): In addition to his mercenaries and arms dealing, Sarshan has recently begun to transport slaves into and across the Shadowfell. The slaves confined here represent a host of lesser races, from dark ones and shadowgoblins (see encounter S3), to goblins, kobolds, elves, humans, gnomes, and dwarves. A majority of these wretches are destined to become conscript troops or workers in the war effort that Sarshan’s operations support. However, the shadar-kai also uses the bazaar as a source of creatures to be transformed in the dark foundry. Aside from being the peripheral location for encounter S2, the slave bazaar plays no part in this adventure. If this rankles players or PCs who feel that the party has an obligation to try to correct this injustice, create some extreme defenses for the slave pens and let the PCs know that it’s not time to take on the slavers yet. Then when the camp is overthrown in the aftermath of encounter T5, let the players know that the slave masters of the bazaar have been permanently overthrown. 6. Market Tents: With the mercenaries that pass through Umbraforge come the crafters and traders who support them. These areas are composed of virtual villages of tents and wagons. Their specific features are left up to you, but the PCs can find any goods or services here normally available in a large town.
7. Bridge: This arched stone bridge rises 40 feet above the smoking flow of the lava trench below. The heat is intense enough to be felt from the bridge, but it presents no danger. A force of dark creepers and shadowgoblins guard the bridge at all times. They keep only a nominal watch on traffic east, west, and south, but no one proceeds north to the tower without an escort by Sarshan’s house guard. 8. Forges: This collection of buildings serves as the center of Sarshan’s armaments operation. Crews of dark ones and shadowgoblins work here night and day, forging the weapons and armor on which Sarshan’s wealth is built. 9. Dark Foundry (Encounter S3): The most recent addition to Sarshan’s war machine, this foundry produces weapons of a different sort. Fell beasts of battle are created here by dark arcane craft, as are humanoid soldier races spawned of the slaves in the bazaar. Two entrances lead into the foundry—the main gate, normally guarded by a force of dark creepers, and a break in the eastern wall caused by one of the recent tremors (see the “Life in Umbraforge” skill challenge and encounter S3 for details). When the PCs enter this area, the regular guards have been overcome and replaced by shadowgoblins loyal to Modra. See the Dark Foundry tactical encounter (page 35) for details. 10. Umbraforge Tower: Sarshan’s tower is a monolithic edifice of black stone set atop a rocky rise. Its squared sides are indented and planed in smooth straight lines, and four round towers stand at its corners. The tower rises 80 feet, its upper level sloping to a dome and topped with a four-pointed spire. From the outside, the PCs can move no closer to the tower than the bridge (see area 6, above). However, even from there, they can see that the open gatehouse is heavily guarded, preventing a frontal assault. See the third part of the adventure (starting on page 38) for the interior of the tower.
September 20 08
|
D u n g e o n 1 58
25
The Shadow Rift of Umbraforge attacked Modra as he came through, then chased after him as he fled. (If the PCs come through the gate immediately after Modra, they see the dark creepers tearing out of the cavern.) The mouth of the chamber emerges from a rocky hillside. There, an incredible vista opens up. The land before you is like nothing you’ve ever seen before. A wide plain of gray-green grass and stunted black trees spreads beneath a sky scoured by fast-moving clouds. The sun is bright above but somehow doesn’t cut the darkness that drapes every rock and every blade of grass in gray gloom. This is the Shadowfell. From the mouth of the cavern, a wide and well-traveled road runs in a curving line to the north. There, perhaps a quarter-mile away, a military camp spreads. Buildings are scattered here and there, with tents and pavilions spreading between them. Torches and fires burn brightly against the ever-present shadow, and lone trees and tall stands of graygreen grass are whipped by a hissing wind. Looming above it all, a rise of black rock to the west is rent by a seething volcanic rift. Black-streaked lava courses from it to descend into a narrow channel, and a permanent pall of glowing red-black smoke rises above it. Over this molten flow, a great stone bridge is arched. This wide eastwest road meets the road north from the cavern. North of the bridge, a tall tower stands and a lower building spreads in its shadow.
Approaching Umbraforge The PCs are likely to expect that they have to make a stealthy approach into the camps outside the tower. However, as they move past the halfway mark from the cavern (whether on the road or in the fields), they are hailed by a pair of dark creeper sentries on patrol.
(Assume that the dark creepers’ Stealth checks beat the PCs’ Perception checks if applicable.) A voice rings out, and two dark creeper sentries suddenly appear where the shadows of the tall grass had hidden them. “All mercenaries stay within the borders of the camps!” one shouts angrily. “Next time you go wandering, you get shot, sellswords!” The camps at Umbraforge are completely open to the PCs, who are assumed to be either prospective customers of Sarshan or mercenaries looking to join one of the companies forming up on the plain beneath the tower. You approach the frontier of the mercenary camps unchallenged, and a virtual city spreads out before you. Beneath patched canvas tents stand open-air taverns, market stalls, apothecaries and herbalists, weaponsmiths and armorers, butchers and greengrocers—all doing roaring trade. Training grounds open up between the various camps, and soldiers of different races clash against each other with sword and shield. In the quieter corners, you see combat casters training—the f lare of arcane fire dancing between them. But as you approach, you notice with surprise that these are not Shadowfell mercenaries for the most part. Though shadar-kai and dark ones are well represented, the fields and camps are packed with orcs and hobgoblins, ogres and trolls, lizardfolk and kobolds and a dozen other monstrous races of the world.
As they discover later, mercenaries and buyers coming to Sarshan’s domain typically reach the Shadowfell by way of more distant portals, traveling overland to come here. The PCs should infer from this that it’s a good idea to keep their knowledge of the Overlook gate to themselves. If they insist on trumpeting this information, they inevitably attract the attention of a squad of Sarshan’s house guards and a bonus combat encounter, to be placed within the skill challenge on the next page. Use the statistics for the shadar-kai in the Library tactical encounter (page 40).
Tremors The flow from the magma shadow rift has been tapped by Sarshan to fuel the arcane engines within his foundry. Doing so has affected the complex pressure of shadow and elemental fire within the rift. Minor tremors pass through the area at regular intervals, enough to be felt by the PCs but not to affect movement or deal damage. The residents of the camps around the tower have grown used to these tremors, so they pay them no mind. Over the course of the adventure, the intensity of the tremors builds. See the Smoke and Shadow and Last Stand encounters for more information.
The Brass Key The brass key plays no further part in this adventure. However, since the PCs cannot return through the Shadowfell gate without it, it is imperative that they hang onto it while they are here.
The camps around the tower hold a total population of approximately two thousand. The PCs can find private tent accommodation for 1 gp each per day.
September 20 08
|
D u n g e o n 1 58
26
The Shadow Rift of Umbraforge
The Shadow Rift of Umbraforge
Rumors
Once the PCs have established themselves in the camps of Umbraforge, they seek out information regarding Sarshan’s operations—and discover chilling rumors of war spreading unseen across the world. Sarshan’s Secrets Skill Challenge
Level 6 XP 1,000
As you make your way through the camps around the tower, you have the opportunity to interact with mercenaries and war chiefs, slaves and slave-traders, forge workers, merchants, and more. What information will you discover? Can it help you find a way around without attracting hostile attention?
This skill challenge lets the PCs explore the areas around Umbraforge, posing either as mercenaries or as prospective buyers of Sarshan’s services. Interrupt the skill challenge for the Training Session and Smoke and Shadow encounters, which should be played after the PCs attempt a skill check in the challenge in the appropriate area. If the PCs are short on experience (especially if they failed to attain 5th level after the first part of the adventure), increase the level of these encounters. When the players talk about their intended actions in the skill challenge, ask them what specific area they are working in when they make the check. Certain skill checks have modifiers depending on the area in which they are made, as indicated. Complexity 4 (requires 10 successes before 3 failures). Primary Skills Arcana, Diplomacy, Endurance, Intimidate, Streetwise. Other Skills Bluff.
1 “This is Umbraforge, dominion of Sarshan, a trader of great reputation and even greater wealth. The tower, foundry, and forges are his. The camps are those of the mercenaries and slaves whose services he sells across the Shadowfell and the world.” 2 “Sarshan is shadar-kai, an outcast who made a name for himself as the leader of a legendary mercenary band known as the Black Arrow. At their height, the Arrow put so much fear in generals and kings alike that Sarshan would take payment to fight for one group, then take a bigger payment from their foe to stand down.” 3 “Modra is known well in Umbraforge, but for all the wrong reasons now. He was one of Sarshan’s trusted lieutenants before he tried to a broker a weapons deal that Sarshan had already turned down.” 4 “The job that Sarshan refused was some orc king’s raid on a dwarven citadel. Sarshan never makes a sale if it has a chance of coming back to him, and for good reason. This job went bad, they say, and people know that Modra sold the orc his weapons.” 5 “Modra is long gone from Umbraforge and the Shadowfell, believe me. Sarshan’s got a long arm and a longer memory. The creeper would have to be crazy to come back here.”
6 “The foundry is the new jewel of Sarshan’s operations. Its power comes from the fire and shadow driving its furnaces. Sarshan’s sages create beasts of battle there, born killers with magic in their blood.” 7 “It used to be that Sarshan brokered mercenaries mostly within the Shadowfell, but that’s changing. Dark ones and shadar-kai are still his elite troops, but more and more, he brings creatures from the world to Umbraforge for training, then marches them off to places unknown.” 8 “The Shadowfell is only a stopping-off place for Sarshan’s mercenaries. A force of archons from the Elemental Chaos was here not six months ago. I saw githzerai from the Astral Sea in Umbraforge once. I don’t know what job they took for Sarshan, but woe be to whoever got in their way.” 9 “Sarshan’s slave bazaar is about more than just servants and soldiers. His experiments in the foundry only begin with dumb beasts. He’s building new soldier races there, born from the slaves he traffics.” 10 “Sarshan’s mercenary operations have tripled in size in months past, but it’s not the Shadowfell they’re fighting in. When his forces are bought and sent on the march, they’re bound for portals to the world. Shadar-kai, dark ones, undead, giants, ogres, trolls, gnolls, orcs— Sarshan has the armies of two planes on the march. War is brewing in the world, but the forces that will fight it are moving into position in the Shadowfell, unseen.”
September 20 08
|
D u n g e o n 1 58
27
The Shadow Rift of Umbraforge
Victory In addition to the information in the rumors table, the PCs’ movement around the foundry lets them discover a break in the wall out of sight of any guards or patrols. When Leena directs them to the foundry (see below and the Dark Foundry encounter), they have the opportunity to enter unseen. Defeat The PCs fail to note the break in the foundry wall, and they must fight their way through the main doors in the Dark Foundry tactical encounter. Whether the PCs fail or succeed in the skill challenge, see Friends on the Inside, below.
Arcana DC 12 (1 success, maximum 3 successes; see Bluff ). This check can be made only in the vicinity of the foundry. On a successful check, the characters learn one piece of information from the rumor table. The PC uses his or her insight into arcane craft to observe the activities taking place around the foundry. Diplomacy DC 12 (1 success, maximum 2 successes; see Bluff ). On a successful check, the PC learns one piece of information from the rumor table. If this skill is used within any of the markets, the PC gains a +2 bonus to the check.
The PC acts as a confidante to one of the creatures of the camps. Endurance DC 12 (1 success, maximum 2 successes). This check can be made only in the mercenary camps or the training grounds. On a successful check, the characters learn one piece of information from the rumor table. On a failed check, any subsequent checks in the skill challenge made by the PC in the mercenary camps or the training grounds take a –2 penalty. The PC hooks up with a mercenary unit for martial training, keeping his or her ears open for information.
September 20 08
|
D u n g e o n 1 58
28
The Shadow Rift of Umbraforge
Intimidate DC 7 (1 success, maximum 3 successes; see Bluff ). On a successful check, the characters learn one piece of information from the rumor table. If this skill is used within the slave bazaar or the markets, the PC gains a +2 bonus to the check. Once a PC makes an Intimidate check, any subsequent Bluff, Diplomacy, or Streetwise checks he or she makes take a –2 penalty. The PC singles out weaker characters for coercion and questioning. Streetwise DC 12 (1 success, maximum 2 successes). On a successful check, the characters learn one piece of information from the rumor table. This check can be made only in the markets, the slave bazaar, or the mercenary camps.
The PC seeks out rumors in the mess halls and tent taverns that spread around the tower. Bluff DC 17 (0 successes). On a successful check, the PC gains a +2 bonus to his or her next Arcana, Diplomacy, or Intimidate check. The PC plays the part of an Umbraforge insider or a powerful visitor to the tower.
actively working in, or you can decide what to reveal based on their specific lines of inquiry. The rumors of war (including the fact that Sarshan is brokering powerful forces from the Elemental Chaos and the Astral Dominion) play no direct part in this adventure. However, they provide hooks and foreshadowing for later episodes of the adventure path.
Rumors of War
Friends on the Inside
As the PCs progress through the skill challenge, they hear rumors from the table below. Information should be given out according to the area the PCs are
In the course of the skill challenge, the PCs meet Leena, a shadar-kai war witch working to train combat casters in the mercenary camps. She is a follower of Sarshan and a former ally of Modra, but her sense of honor caused her to break with the dark
September 20 08
|
D u n g e o n 1 58
29
The Shadow Rift of Umbraforge creeper when he decided to work behind Sarshan’s back. Introduce her to the PCs early on in the skill challenge, making her one of the many people they talk to or eavesdrop on in their attempts to uncover the truth behind Sarshan’s operations. The shadar-kai witch wears a black cloak edged with adamantine beads, and she keeps her long hair plaited to hang down her back. Gold piercings line her ears and lower lip, and a black starburst tattoo encloses her right eye. Whether the PCs succeed or fail on the initial check in the skill challenge, Leena suspects that they are not who they pretend to be. She keeps an eye on the party as they complete the skill challenge. Then at the end Shadar-kai War Witch
Level 5 Controller
Medium shadow humanoid XP 200 Initiative +5 Senses Perception +3; low-light vision HP 61; Bloodied 30 AC 19; Fortitude 15, Reflex 18, Will 17 Speed 6; see also shadow jaunt m Blackfire Touch (standard; at-will) ✦ Fire, Necrotic +9 vs. Reflex; 2d6 + 3 fire and necrotic damage. R Beshadowed Mind (standard; recharge ⚃ ⚄ ⚅ ) ✦ Necrotic Ranged 10; +9 vs. Will; 2d6 + 3 necrotic damage, and the target has no line of sight to anything more than 2 squares from it (save ends). R Shadow Bind (standard; encounter) Tendrils of shadow make separate attacks against 3 different targets: Ranged 10; +9 vs. Reflex; 1d8 + 3 damage, and the target is immobilized (save ends). Shadow Jaunt (move; encounter) ✦ Teleportation The shadar-kai war witch teleports 3 squares and becomes insubstantial until the start of her next turn. Alignment Unaligned Languages Common Skills Acrobatics +7, Arcana +11, Religion +11, Stealth +12 Str 13 (+3) Dex 16 (+5) Wis 12 (+3) Con 13 (+3) Int 19 (+6) Cha 17 (+5)
of the skill challenge (whether the PCs succeed or fail), Leena seeks them out. Leena is a kind of moral reflection of Sarshan. Every bit the opportunist, she is happy to take advantage of the march to war as long as it offers profit for her. However, like many of her kind, Leena’s conception of the world is as a land of weak, immoral, and alien creatures. The mercenaries and warmasters who travel to the Shadowfell to do business with Sarshan do nothing to soften this impression. In meeting the PCs, Leena has a chance to witness a nobility and a sense of purpose she has never seen in creatures of the world before. Though the PCs might be concerned about Leena betraying them to Sarshan’s forces, any successful Insight check shows her trustworthiness.
if Sarshan captures him, he’ll die slowly. If it’s you, I’ll hope you make it quick.”
Modra’s Gambit After their last success or failure in the skill challenge, Leena approaches the PCs. Having clandestinely observed their inquiries, she has guessed that the traitor Modra—once a close friend—is their target. After revealing that she knows the PCs’ plan, she confides the following. “Modra and I worked together for a time, but when he elected to go behind Sarshan’s back, I told him we were done. I heard word of him in the camps even before you started asking around. He has a plan to disrupt Sarshan’s operations by destroying the foundry, then the tower. Sarshan has a private tunnel connecting the two, and Modra is planning on venting the foundry’s destructive energy there. A mass of mercenaries is moving out tonight. He’ll be using that as cover when he goes inside. “Modra’s made his bargain with fate, and honor decrees that he die for his betrayal. He won’t get tears from me. But
September 20 08
|
D u n g e o n 1 58
30
The Shadow Rift of Umbraforge
Training Session Encounter Level 5 (1,000 XP)
Setup As the PCs wander into one of Umbraforge’s combat training grounds, they inadvertently find themselves targeted by a squad of mercenaries. These young ogres see the PCs as a way to show off for their more powerful kin.
2 ogre umbral savages (O) 2 ogre umbral skirmishers (S) 1 tangler beetle (B)
As the PCs cross the training grounds, read: You find yourselves surrounded by a mob of hulking ogres, one leading an enormous beetle on a leash. In broken Common, the largest shouts: “You mercenaries? You think you good enough to fight alongside Bonecruncher clan? Think again!” As the group moves to attack, you see a crowd of ogres move up to watch, shouting insults at you and words of encouragement to your foes.
Close Combat Though this encounter takes place in the open space of the training grounds, the shaded area around the edge of the tactical map represents a very real barrier. Some two dozen ogre spectators gather around to hem the PCs and their assailants in, jeeringly pushing them back into the thick of combat if they stumble too close. Any creature that enters one of the shaded squares is pushed back by the ogre mob. Medium and Small creatures slide 1d6 squares; Large creatures slide 1d4
squares. Roll 1d6 for direction relative to the edge or corner the creature is pushed back from (1–2 left diagonal, 3–4 straight back, 5–6 right diagonal). A creature whose slide would take it into an occupied square stops moving and must make a successful DC 20 Acrobatics check to stay standing. On a failed check, the creature falls prone in the square in which it stopped.
Tactics The ogres are unsophisticated combatants. The savages tear into the closest foes while the beetle attempts to immobilize the strongest-looking melee combatants with entangling spittle between bite attacks. The skirmishers make a hurling charge against spellcasters, then stay in constant motion in melee. The ogres would rather die than lose face in front of their kin. All creatures here fight to the death.
Development The ogres are spoiling for a fight, but their primary goal is to make themselves look good. If the PCs break off or ask for quarter with all the party members at bloodied hit points or fewer, the ogres accept their concession and let them go. However, the PCs can make no further Intimidate checks in the skill challenge. If the ogres fall, their disgusted clan kin make no effort at retribution. Additionally, a PC gains a +2 bonus to the next Intimidate check made in the skill challenge.
Features of the Area Illumination: Torches flicker along the edges of the training ground (bright throughout). Foul-Smelling Mud: A field of wastewater has created a foul mud pit in the middle of the training ground. These squares are difficult terrain. Creatures knocked prone in the mud are weakened (save ends). Broken Weapons: The remains of shattered blades and spears litter the battlefield. A creature moving through one of these squares is subject to an attack: +5 vs. Reflex; 1d6 damage. 2 Ogre Umbral Skirmishers (S) Level 5 Skirmisher
Large natural humanoid XP 200 each Initiative +2 Senses Perception +2 HP 67; Bloodied 33 AC 19; Fortitude 19, Reflex 17, Will 15 Speed 8 m Club (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon Reach 2; +10 vs. AC; 1d8 + 2 damage; see also skirmish. R Javelin (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon Ranged 10/20; +10 vs. AC; 1d8 + 2 damage; see also skirmish. M Hurling Charge (standard; encounter) ✦ Weapon The ogre umbral skirmisher makes a javelin attack followed by a charge attack. Skirmish +1d8 If, on its turn, the ogre umbral skirmisher ends its move at least 4 squares away from its starting point, it deals an extra 1d8 damage on its melee attacks until the start of its next turn. Alignment Chaotic evil Languages Common, Giant Str 18 (+6) Dex 14 (+4) Wis 11 (+2) Con 19 (+6) Int 4 (–1) Cha 6 (+0) Equipment hide armor, club, quiver of 6 javelins
September 20 08
|
D u n g e o n 1 58
31
The Shadow Rift of Umbraforge
2 Ogre Umbral Savages (O)
Level 5 Brute
Large natural humanoid XP 200 each Initiative +2 Senses Perception +2 HP 81; Bloodied 40 AC 16; Fortitude 18, Reflex 13, Will 13 Speed 8 m Greatclub (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon Reach 2; +8 vs. AC; 2d10 + 3 damage. M Flatten (standard; recharge ⚅ ) ✦ Weapon The ogre umbral savage makes a greatclub attack; on a hit, the target is also pushed 1 square and knocked prone. Alignment Chaotic evil Languages Giant Str 21 (+7) Dex 11 (+2) Wis 11 (+2) Con 21 (+7) Int 4 (–1) Cha 6 (+0) Equipment hide armor, greatclub
Tangler Beetle (B)
Level 5 Controller
Large natural beast XP 200 Initiative +2 Senses Perception +3; darkvision HP 62; Bloodied 31 AC 19; Fortitude 17, Reflex 13, Will 14 Speed 6 m Bite (standard; at-will) Reach 2; +10 vs. AC; 1d10 + 4 damage. R Entangling Spittle (standard; recharge ⚃ ⚄ ⚅ ) Ranged 5; +8 vs. Reflex; the target is immobilized (save ends). Alignment Unaligned Languages — Str 18 (+6) Dex 10 (+2) Wis 12 (+3) Con 14 (+4) Int 1 (–3) Cha 8 (+1)
September 20 08
|
D u n g e o n 1 58
32
The Shadow Rift of Umbraforge
Smoke and Shadow Encounter Level 4 (875 XP)
Setup As the PCs make their way alongside the area of the slave bazaar, they feel another of Umbraforge’s intermittent earth tremors. However, this tremor is accompanied by a volcanic fissure that acts as a portal to the Elemental Chaos, spewing forth a pack of creatures bent on destruction.
2 fire bats (B) 1 hell hound (H) 1 magma hurler (M)
As the PCs approach the slave bazaar, read: A sudden rumbling rises as another tremor rattles through the area. However, while previous incidents have passed quickly, this one builds to a furious shaking that threatens to knock you off your feet. At the same time, a blast of molten rock and raw darkness erupts from the earth ahead of you. The fissure abuts the palisade fence that blocks off the slave bazaar. The PCs can hear shouts of fear as the slaves beyond the fence flee the area. However, while the rift is not an imminent threat, the creatures that emerge from it are.
These creatures have been formed from the raw essence of the Elemental Chaos by the increasing instability of the magma shadow rift.
Tactics The fire bats keep to the air, using their fiery swoop to target as many PCs as possible. If only two characters can be targeted, both bats attack them in turn. The hell hound stays in the thick of combat, trying to maximize the number of targets in the area of its fire shield and fiery breath. While waiting for that power to recharge, the hound focuses its bite attacks on lightly armored PCs. The magma hurler stays at the edge of combat, hurling its magma ball into the midst of any group of PCs to maximize the effect of a miss. Because all these creatures have resistance to fire damage, they don’t worry about striking each other with their attacks. Likewise, they cross through the rift at will, hoping to prevent the PCs from following them.
Development
Features of the Area Illumination: Torches flicker along the fenced perimeter of the slave bazaar (bright 5). The rift exudes a dull red glow (dim 5). Rift Vent: A hissing geyser of fire and shadow spews out from this section of upthrust ground. Any creature that enters the rift takes 2d12 fire damage. Any creature that ends its turn adjacent to the rift takes 1d12 fire damage. The rift’s power is tied to the Elemental Chaos. As a result, it deals no damage to the creatures it creates (including the monsters in this encounter). Thickets: These areas of dense undergrowth provide concealment and are difficult terrain. Any power with the fire descriptor that deals damage in a square containing a thicket sets that square and all adjacent squares ablaze. The thicket burns for 2 rounds before flaring out, during which time it deals 1d8 fire damage to any creatures in the area. Fence: This 8-foot-high palisade of logs lashed together with rope surrounds the slave bazaar. It takes a successful DC 10 Athletics check to climb the fence.
The vent continues to spew fire and shadow for a few minutes after combat ends. It then begins to slowly close until all traces of it have gone. The party’s selfless act of bravery within sight of the slave bazaar does not go unnoticed. Any subsequent Diplomacy or Streetwise checks made in the area gain a +2 bonus.
Even as the tremor subsides, you see movement through a haze of smoke and shadow. From the boiling fissure, a pair of winged shapes erupts—plus a large hound and a humanoid creature claws their way up behind them. All four creatures writhe with living f lame, howling as they attack. September 20 08
|
D u n g e o n 1 58
33
The Shadow Rift of Umbraforge
Hell Hound (H)
Level 7 Brute
Medium elemental beast (fire) XP 300 Initiative +5 Senses Perception +11 Fire Shield (Fire) aura 1; any creature that enters or begins its turn in the aura takes 1d6 fire damage. HP 96; Bloodied 48 AC 20; Fortitude 18, Reflex 17, Will 18 Resist 20 fire Speed 7 m Bite (standard; at-will) ✦ Fire +10 vs. AC; 1d8 + 2 plus 1d8 fire damage. C Fiery Breath (standard; recharge ⚃ ⚄ ⚅ ) ✦ Fire Close blast 3; +9 vs. Reflex; 2d6 + 3 fire damage. Alignment Unaligned Languages — Str 14 (+5) Dex 14 (+5) Wis 17 (+6) Con 16 (+6) Int 2 (–1) Cha 10 (+3)
Magma Hurler (M) Level 4 Artillery
Medium elemental humanoid (earth, fire) XP 175 Initiative +8 Senses Perception +4 HP 41; Bloodied 20 AC 18; Fortitude 15, Reflex 17, Will 13 Immune petrification; Resist 10 fire; Vulnerable cold (slowed until the end of the magma hurler’s next turn) Speed 4 m Slam (standard; at-will) +8 vs. AC; 1d6 + 4 damage. R Magma Ball (standard; at-will) ✦ Fire Ranged 15; +7 vs. Reflex; 1d6 + 6 fire damage. Miss: Creatures adjacent to the target take 1d6 fire damage. Alignment Unaligned Languages Primordial Skills Endurance +7 Str 18 (+6) Dex 22 (+8) Wis 14 (+4) Con 11 (+2) Int 5 (–1) Cha 8 (+1)
2 Fire Bats (B)
Level 5 Skirmisher
Medium elemental beast (fire) XP 200 each Initiative +8 Senses Perception +8 HP 60; Bloodied 30 AC 20; Fortitude 15, Reflex 20, Will 13 Resist 10 fire Speed 2 (clumsy), fly 8; see also fiery swoop m Fiery Touch (standard; at-will) ✦ Fire +6 vs. Reflex; 1d6 + 4 fire damage, and ongoing 5 fire damage (save ends). M Fiery Swoop (standard; at-will) ✦ Fire The fire bat shifts up to 4 squares and can move through occupied squares as it moves. It makes a melee basic attack against any creature whose space it enters. The fire bat cannot attack a target more than once in this fashion, and it must end its movement in an unoccupied square. Alignment Unaligned Languages — Str 6 (+0) Dex 19 (+6) Wis 12 (+3) Con 12 (+3) Int 2 (–2) Cha 7 (+0)
September 20 08
|
D u n g e o n 1 58
34
The Shadow Rift of Umbraforge
Dark Foundry Encounter Level 8 (1,852 XP)
Setup Modra and a band of shadowgoblins loyal to him have taken control of Sarshan’s dark foundry after killing the dark creeper guards there. Modra plans to disrupt the great arcane engines that leech power from the flow of fire and shadow, destroying his former master’s operations as a means of ending his threat.
8 shadowgoblin maulers (M) 2 shadowgoblin snarlers (S) 1 death boar (B) Modra, dark creeper shadowborn stalker
As the PCs prepare to enter the foundry, read: A claxon call of horns sounds out from the west. A haze of red light glimmers against the clouds as the cascade of the magma shadow rift f lares. As Leena predicted, a huge force of mercenaries is on the move, heading out along the east road. The area around the foundry is deserted; the guards at the tower and the bridge have turned eastward to watch as Sarshan’s forces move out.
Into the Foundry If the PCs succeeded on the “Sarshan's Secrets” skill challenge (page 27), they enter the foundry through a break in the wall, out of sight of any guards or patrols. It takes a successful DC 17 Thievery check to secure the wall against collapse, followed by a successful DC 12 Strength check to open the break wide enough for a Medium creature to squeeze through. Once inside, the PCs can attack Modra and his guards with surprise.
If the PCs failed the skill challenge, they cannot find the break in the wall and must enter the foundry through the front doors. Getting the doors open requires either a successful DC 12 Strength check or a successful DC 21 Bluff check to convince the shadowgoblin guards that the PCs are allies of their master. If the PCs can open the door with a single Strength check, they gain surprise. Otherwise, the shadowgoblins are ready for them. Any combat in the entrance is noticed by Modra and the others. When the PCs enter the foundry, read: The red glow of the lava trench is shrouded by shifting clouds of shadow and steam. Huge stone vats with steel doors line both sides of this massive chamber, where great arrangements of pipes and vents connect them. When the PCs can see Modra and his followers, read: Two squads of what look like hobgoblins, their bodies seemingly cloaked in shadow, work here, supervised by another cloaked figure. They work busily at two sections of pipe that divert and channel the lava f low. Closer to the door, two other shadowgoblins stand guard. Modra is intentionally dressed in dark clothes that make him indistinguishable from his shadowgoblin minions. Place him as a goblin initially unless a PC succeeds at a DC 20 Perception check. As soon as combat begins, Modra rushes to the nearest vat and breaks its seals, releasing the two-headed death boar and revealing himiself.
When Modra releases the death boar, read: The dark creeper snarls as he sprints for the closest vat, pulling down on a great lever next to the door. He dodges out of the way of a blast of steam. As the door opens, it spills a huge mass to the ground in a fountain of viscous green fluid. Out of it rises an enormous two-headed boar, bellowing as it claws the ground. The creature takes 1 round to shake itself out of its birth stupor before it attacks.
September 20 08
|
D u n g e o n 1 58
35
The Shadow Rift of Umbraforge Modra, Shadowborn Stalker
Level 7 Elite Lurker
Small shadow humanoid, dark creeper XP 600 Initiative +11 Senses Perception +5; darkvision HP 124; Bloodied 62; see also killing dark AC 23 (see also dark step), Fortitude 20, Reflex 22, Will 20 Saving Throws +2 Speed 6 Action Points 1 m Short Sword (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon +12 vs. AC; 1d6 + 5 damage. M Double Strike (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon Requires combat advantage; Modra makes 2 short sword attacks. If both attacks hit the same target, the target takes ongoing 5 damage (save ends). R Dagger (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon Ranged 5/10; +12 vs. AC; 1d4 + 5 damage. A Cloud of Darkness (minor; encounter) ✦ Zone Close burst 1; this power creates a zone of darkness that remains in place until the end of Modra’s next turn. The zone blocks line of sight for all creatures except Modra. Any creature entirely within the area (except Modra) is blinded. Combat Advantage Modra deals an extra 1d6 damage on melee and ranged attacks against any target he has combat advantage against. Dark Step (move; at-will) Modra moves up to 4 squares, gains a +4 bonus to AC against opportunity attacks, and gains combat advantage against any target that he ends his move adjacent to. Cloak of Shadows (minor; encounter) ✦ Illusion Modra is invisible until the end of his next turn. Alignment Evil Languages Common Skills Bluff +9, Stealth +12, Thievery +12 Str 11 (+3) Dex 18 (+7) Wis 14 (+5) Con 14 (+5) Int 13 (+4) Cha 13 (+4) Equipment black cloak, chainmail, short sword, 5 daggers
Tactics The maulers throw themselves at the PCs in the defense of their master, attacking by twos and threes to take advantage of shadow soldier. The snarlers use snarling shot as often as possible, attempting to immobilize foes for the boar. The shadowgoblins use the terrain of the foundry to best advantage. See Features of the Area.
2 Shadowgoblin Snarlers (S) Level 5 Artillery
Medium natural humanoid XP 200 each Initiative +6 Senses Perception +4; low-light vision HP 51; Bloodied 25 AC 18; Fortitude 14, Reflex 16, Will 14 Speed 6 m Mace (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon +6 vs. AC; 1d8 + 3 damage. r Longbow (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon Ranged 20/40; +10 vs. AC; 1d10 + 5 damage, and the hobgoblin archer grants an ally within 5 squares of it a +2 bonus to its next ranged attack roll against the same target. R Snarling Shot (standard; recharge ⚃ ⚄ ⚅ ) ✦ Weapon Ranged 20/40; +10 vs. AC; 1d10 + 5 damage, and the target is immobilized by strands of shadow (save ends). Shadowgoblin Resilience (immediate reaction, when the shadowgoblin snarler suffers an effect that a save can end; encounter) The snarler makes a saving throw against the effect. Shadow Soldier The shadowgoblin snarler gains concealment while at least one shadowgoblin ally is adjacent to it. Alignment Evil Languages Common, Goblin Skills Athletics +6, Stealth +11 Str 14 (+4) Dex 19 (+6) Wis 14 (+4) Con 15 (+4) Int 11 (+2) Cha 10 (+2) Equipment leather armor, longsword, longbow, quiver of 30 arrows
If it cannot attack a prone target, the death boar attacks heavily armored PCs, making two gore attacks in an attempt to maximize damage and knock foes prone. If two PCs are adjacent, it makes a furious charge and separate bite attacks on each target, hoping to knock both prone or into the lava trench. Having fled from the PCs before, Modra is determined to finish them this time. He uses dark step to maintain combat advantage as he moves from foe to foe, making double strike attacks against single targets if possible. He uses cloak of shadows or cloud of darkness to reorient himself in the fight if he is pressed by more than one PC or targeted with ranged attacks. All the creatures here fight to the death.
Death Boar (B) Level 6 Elite Brute
Huge natural beast (mount) XP 500 Initiative +3 Senses Perception +2 HP 170; Bloodied 85; see also death strike AC 19; Fortitude 23, Reflex 19, Will 18 Saving Throws +2 Speed 8 Action Points 1 m Gore (standard; at-will) +9 vs. AC; 1d10 + 4 damage, or 1d10 + 9 damage against a prone target. M Frenzied Gore (standard; at-will) The death boar makes two gore attacks. If it hits with both attacks against the same target, the target is knocked prone. M Death Strike (when reduced to 0 hit points) The death boar makes a gore attack. Furious Charge When a death boar charges, its gore attacks deal an extra 5 damage, pushes the targets 2 squares, and knocks the targets prone on a hit. Alignment Unaligned Languages — Str 19 (+7) Dex 10 (+3) Wis 9 (+2) Con 15 (+5) Int 2 (–1) Cha 8 (+2)
8 Shadowgoblin Maulers (A)
Level 8 Minion
Medium shadow humanoid XP 88 each Initiative +6 Senses Perception +6; low-light vision HP 1; a missed attack never damages a minion. AC 22; Fortitude 20, Reflex 18, Will 18 Speed 6 m Mace (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon +10 vs. AC; 6 damage. Shadowgoblin Resilience (immediate reaction, when the shadowgoblin mauler suffers an effect that a save can end; encounter) The mauler makes a saving throw against the effect. Shadow Soldier The shadowgoblin mauler gains concealment while at least one shadowgoblin ally is adjacent to it. Combat Advantage The shadowgoblin mauler deals an extra 2 damage on melee attacks against any target it has combat advantage against. Alignment Evil Languages Common, Goblin Skills Athletics +10, Stealth +11 Str 19 (+8) Dex 14 (+6) Wis 14 (+6) Con 15 (+6) Int 11 (+4) Cha 10 (+4) Equipment black leather armor, mace September 20 08
|
D u n g e o n 1 58
36
The Shadow Rift of Umbraforge
Development
Features of the Area
The PCs’ intervention here prevents Modra from completing his sabotage and destroying the tower. However, the damage his team has done is enough to cause a failure of the foundry’s systems during the Last Stand tactical encounter. If the PCs investigate the area where the shadowgoblins were working, they note damage to the great pipes channeling the lava flow, though it appears superficial. Within the vats, the PCs can see various creatures in the midst of a dark transformation. A successful DC 22 Perception check made to search the area confirms the rumors the PCs have heard—half the creatures here are humanoids mutated into horrible warlike forms, their skin growing spiky armor plates, their hands turned to razor-sharp claws, and so on.
Illumination: The chamber is lit by the fiery glow of the lava flow (dim throughout). Ceiling: The arched ceiling rises to a height of 30 feet. Lava Trench: The river of lava and liquid shadow courses through this chamber, interrupted by a network of pipes and conduits that magically siphon off arcane power for Sarshan’s metamorphosis vats. The sluggish surface of the lava rises to 5 feet below the lip of the trench. Creatures entering the lava take 2d12 fire damage per round. (The processes by which Sarshan’s equipment draws arcane energy from the lava trench reduces the damage as compared to outside.) The temperature in the enclosed foundry is stifling. When first entering the area, creatures must make successful DC 17 Endurance checks against the heat or lose one healing surge. (Modra and the shadowgoblins protected themselves with magic before entering the foundry.) Creatures that have no healing surges remaining lose hit points equal to their level. When a creature is first bloodied, it must make a successful Crates and Barrels: These crates and barrels contain the toxic reagents that fill the vats. Squares containing barrels and crates provide cover. A stack of crates stands 5 feet high and can be climbed with a successful DC 10 Athletics check. It costs 2 squares of movement to hop up onto a barrel. Bridges: These rough stone bridges arch 5 feet above the ground (so they rise 10 feet above the lava in the trench). They have no railings. A creature running across a bridge must make a successful DC 15 Acrobatics check or slip and fall to the lava below. A creature that slips can make a saving throw to throw itself at the opposite bank. Creatures that fall into the
Into the Tower The secret door to the west leads to a tunnel serving as Sarshan’s private access between the foundry and the tower. It can be located with a successful DC 20 Perception check. After what they’ve observed around Umbraforge, the PCs should hopefully be ready to enter the tower in search of more information about Sarshan’s plans. However, if they linger too long in the foundry, feel free to have a squad of dark creeper and shadar-kai guards appear at the main doors. Remind the PCs of the secret door if necessary, then give them time to move into the tunnel before being spotted by the guards.
lava take 1d10 falling damage plus 2d12 fire damage per round. Vents and Piping: Each vat is connected to a complex mass of metal and ceramic piping that plunges into the lava trench. Most of these pipes run up to and across the ceiling, but a series of main conduits runs across the foundry floor, each a bundle of pipe set with pressure release valves. As a standard action, a creature can smash through a pressure release valve anywhere along the length of the conduit to create a close blast 3; +5 vs. Reflex, 1d8 fire damage. A creature that ends its turn adjacent to a section of conduit takes 1d6 fire damage. Stepping over a conduit costs 2 squares of movement. Bodies: These dark creeper guards were killed guarding against Modra’s incursion. Metamorphosis Vats: These great vats hold the fruits of Sarshan’s dark experiments. Each stone vat is 15 feet on a side, open at the top, and fronted by a huge steel door with a quick-release lever. As a standard action, a creature can open the vat, releasing the creature within and a wave of viscous green fluid that creates a close blast 5; +5 vs. Reflex; 1d10 damage and the target is slowed (save ends). Unless the PCs are having too easy a time with this encounter, any additional creatures in the vats have not completed their transformation. They die immediately after being released.
September 20 08
|
D u n g e o n 1 58
37
The Shadow Rift of Umbraforge
Part 3: Umbraforge Tower From the foundry, the PCs make their way to the lower level of the tower by way of Sarshan’s private tunnel access. There, they take on Sarshan’s guards, some of his allies, and finally come face to face with the shadar-kai.
Levitation Lift Within the center of the tower, a 15-foot wide opening in the ceiling or floor of each level serves as a
magical levitation lift for Sarshan and his servants. Characters stepping into any square of the open area are subject to a levitation effect. Characters hover in midair until they mentally command the lift to move them. As a move action, a character can rise or descend one level, or can move up to 15 feet horizontally (from one side of the lift to the other). As a minor action, a character can shift 1 square horizontally. Moving from the tower’s lower level to Sarshan’s quarters on the top level thus requires three move actions (to climb) and a minor action (to shift from the open lift to the floor again).
While within the lift (whether moving or not), a creature is unsteady, taking a –2 penalty to AC and Reflex defense. Characters who stand within the area of the lift on the tower’s ground floor feel unsteady on their feet and take the above penalties. However, unless they mentally command the lift to carry them up, they can move through the area normally. Creatures that move into the open area of the lift (as opposed to simply stepping into it) continue their movement through midair. A creature can travel across the open space of the lift by making a DC 15 Acrobatics check as part of the move action that takes it into the lift. On a result of 20 or higher, the creature gains 2 extra squares of movement. On a failed check, the creature loses momentum and slides to the center of the lift.
Shock and Aftershock The penultimate climax of the adventure (Last Stand tactical encounter) takes place in the aftermath of another tremor caused by the magma shadow rift. Foreshadow this by having harmless tremors ripple through the tower at different points.
No Quarter The tower is an occupied fortress, and once this stage of the adventure begins, the PCs have no opportunity to take an extended rest. Early on, the Library encounter can easily spill over into the Great Hall tactical encounter, which can in turn pull in additional guards from the gatehouse for an extended melee. This might create problems later if the party returns to Overlook since the climactic battle could have already exhausted their healing surges and daily powers. Though Sarshan regularly uses the foundry tunnel, he is not aware of the lost shrine there (area 2). If the PCs need an extra boost, that hidden chamber provides a secure place for them to rest up. September 20 08
|
D u n g e o n 1 58
38
The Shadow Rift of Umbraforge
Umbraforge Tower
T
his is Sarshan’s domain, and with the number of troops at his disposal, he doesn't fear attack. His guards watch the tower’s interior and gate house, but it has no ramparts or exterior patrols. Walls, Floors, and Ceilings: The interior of the tower is polished gray marble from floor to ceiling. The ceilings on each level of the tower are uniformly 20 feet high. Doors and Windows: Wooden doors within the tower are unlocked (with the exception of the gate house). Each room of the tower features narrow windows looking out on the ground below. These windows are wide enough only for a Small character to squeeze through. Illumination: Magic lamps shed dim light in all areas of the tower, allowing those with low-light vision (most of the tower’s inhabitants) to see clearly. 1. Foundry Tunnel: This 5-foot wide tunnel connects the foundry with the library in the tower. Sarshan and his personal guards are the only ones allowed access to it. Though it is locked from the foundry side, the library door opens easily. 2. Lost Shrine: Halfway along the foundry tunnel, an undiscovered secret door (DC 26 Perception) leads to an ancient shrine. The crumbling walls of this chamber were once covered with muted frescoes, but only fragments of plaster now remain. In the center of the room, a black stone altar rises, its surface buried beneath a thick layer of dust. Sarshan does not know of the shrine’s existence, and the PCs can take an extended rest here. 3. Library (Tactical Encounter): These two adjoining chambers are the research center for Sarshan’s sages. Shelves of books and scrolls line the walls here. Two shadar-kai guard the entrance to the foundry, while two more are working here when the PCs enter. 4. Guest Quarters (Tactical Encounter): Important visitors reside in these well-appointed rooms while in the tower. The guest quarters are currently occupied by a pack of gnolls negotiating a mercenary contract for their clan.
5. Laboratory: These tower chambers are all functionally identical, though you can change up their specific descriptions as need be. Dark experiments realized in the foundry are first carried out here. The various laboratories feature a wealth of alchemical equipment and reagents, ritual components, dead creatures in jars of clear oil, vials of brightly colored powders and viscous fluids, and other experimental gear. The lower northeast laboratory (adjoining the library) is empty. All other laboratories have a 50% chance of being occupied by a noncombatant shadar-kai or dark one sage at work. If the PCs attack, treat the sages as minions with no attacks of their own. However, unless they are attacked, the sages of the tower assume that the PCs work for Sarshan. They yell at the characters for interrupting their work, but allow them to pass through. If combat occurs in area 9, sages in adjacent laboratories cower under a table until the danger passes. 6. Great Hall (Tactical Encounter): Most of the main floor is given over to this visitor’s gallery and feast hall. Dark tapestries line the walls, and thick carpets cover the floors. A banquet table occupies the center of the room, and comfortable couches are arrayed along the walls. A fire pit before the doors burns with magical flame. When the PCs enter, a pair of shadar-kai guards and one of Sarshan’s dark one allies are arguing here. 7. Sages’ Quarters: These chambers are the residences of the sages who labor to perfect Sarshan’s vile experiments. Each chamber has four beds and is occupied by two noncombatant shadar-kai or dark one sages, either sleeping (if no combat has occurred in an adjacent chamber) or cowering beneath a bed (if it has). Treat the sages as minions with no attacks. 8. Gate House: The interior doors to area 6 are locked and barred, requiring a successful DC 26 Thievery check and a successful DC 21 Strength check to open. The exterior stone double doors are normally open so the guards within can see the road and the bridge. They can be closed with two standard actions (one for each door) and barred from the inside (a successful DC 40 Strength check to open).
Four shadar-kai warriors and four shadar-kai chainfighters are on guard here at all times. However, they do not expect trouble from inside the tower, and so they are distracted if the PCs enter from area 6. Use the statistics from the Library and Great Hall tactical encounters. 9. Garden of Shadows (Tactical Encounter): The second level of the tower is given over to a shadar-kai pleasure garden. Tall trees, hoary ferns, and dense thickets of shrubs grow here. Within the foliage of this chamber lurk three rot scarab swarms and a shadow beetle kept as pets by Sarshan. They ignore shadow creatures but attack all others. To the south stands the teleportation portal that takes Sarshan to the black shrine (see area 1 on page 25). Normally the portal can be used only by Sarshan. 10. Training Floor: This is the private training area for the guards of the tower. 11. Guards’ Mess: Two large tables fill this mess hall, and a magical fire burns in the fire pit to the northeast. Six guards are here at any given time—they can be warriors, gloomblades, or chainfighters (use the statistics from the Library and Great Hall tactical encounters). 12. Guards’ Barracks: Sarshan’s house guards live here when off duty. Five sets of triple bunks in each chamber house thirty guards total, with half the bunks occupied at any given time. Guards found here have a 50% chance of being asleep, which means they require 2 rounds to grab weapons if attacked. Guards not sleeping are distracted and require 1 round to grab weapons. Use the statistics for the shadar-kai warrior, gloomblade, and chainfighter from the Library and Great Hall tactical encounters. None of the guards are in armor; they take a –4 penalty to AC. 13. Sarshan’s Chambers: The shadar-kai’s sanctum occupies the space beneath the tower’s upper dome. Unlike the lower levels, the open area of the levitation lift is walled off here. The door here is locked (DC 26 Thievery). This area contains only mundane personal effects, since Sarshan keeps all important documents and relics hidden outside the tower.
September 20 08
|
D u n g e o n 1 58
39
The Shadow Rift of Umbraforge
Library
When the trap is triggered, read:
Encounter Level 7 (1,500 XP)
Setup
The shadar-kai backpedals toward the door, hitting a mechanical switch set into the wall. With a hiss, the air is filled with streaks of shadow.
Four members of Sarshan’s personal guard are here— two warriors guarding the access to the foundry passage, a gloomblade running an errand for one of the tower’s sages, and a witch in the midst of researching an experiment.
Once the trap is triggered, darts of magical shadow fill the air in both sections of the room. They shoot out from tiny holes in the frames of the chamber’s bookshelves.
2 shadar-kai warriors (S) 1 shadar-kai gloomblade (G) 1 shadar-kai witch (W) When the PCs can see into this area, read: Dim light fills this area from globes of gray glass set around the room. Shelves of books and scrolls line the walls here, and a large table covered with scrolls and bound volumes dominates an adjoining chamber. A female shadar-kai stands there, looking up in astonishment. Two shadar-kai warriors, katars at their belts, scramble away from the door in surprise. A third warrior is digging through books on a nearby shelf, his greatsword leaning against the wall a few feet away. The shadar-kai know that only Sarshan uses the foundry tunnel. They treat the PCs as intruders and attack at once.
Shadow Dart Attack In addition to the guards stationed here, a deadly trap wards this entrance into the tower. The trap is not active when the PCs enter, but it is manually triggered by the shadar-kai witch in the second round of combat.
Shadow Dart Wall Trap
Tactics
Level 6 Blaster 250 XP
A host of immaterial black darts streaks through the air, filling the room with a deadly web of shadow. Trap: Each round on its initiative, the trap fires a barrage of immaterial shadow darts that randomly attack 2d4 targets in range. Shadow creatures are not targeted by the magic darts. Perception ✦ DC 17: The character notices the small holes within the frames of the bookshelves along the walls. ✦ DC 21: The character notices the switch by the west door. Initiative +7 Trigger When the switch beside the west door is flipped (a standard action), the trap rolls initiative. Attack Standard Action Ranged 10 Targets: 2d4 targets (not including shadow creatures) in range. Attack: +11 vs. AC Hit: 1d8 + 2 damage and ongoing 5 necrotic damage (save ends) Countermeasures ✦ A character adjacent to the switch, which is now locked into its position, can disable the trap with a DC 21 Thievery check. ✦ A character who ends his or her turn directly adjacent to one of the interior walls (not adjacent to the open doorway) gains a +5 bonus to AC against the dart attacks. ✦ A character who moves no more than 1 square on a turn gains a +5 bonus to AC against the dart attacks.
The shadar-kai warriors focus their first attacks on the most powerful-looking melee combatants, hoping to restrain them using cage of gloom. They use shadow jaunt consistently to protect themselves from damage, pulling down a bookshelf first to slow pursuers and compensate for their decreased movement. The gloomblade uses veil of shadows to move invisibly between attacks, using gloomstrike to blind PCs making ranged attacks. Once bloodied, he uses shadow jaunt to protect himself from damage as he attacks the strongest-looking melee combatants. Shadar-kai Witch (W) Level 7 Controller
Medium shadow humanoid XP 300 Initiative +6 Senses Perception +4; low-light vision HP 77; Bloodied 38 AC 21; Fortitude 18, Reflex 19, Will 19 Speed 6; see also shadow jaunt m Blackfire Touch (standard; at-will) ✦ Fire, Necrotic +11 vs. Reflex; 2d6 + 4 fire and necrotic damage. R Beshadowed Mind (standard; recharge 4 5 6 ) ✦ Necrotic Ranged 10; +11 vs. Will; 2d6 + 4 necrotic damage, and the target has no line of sight to anything more than 2 squares from it (save ends). C Deep Shadow (standard; sustain minor; encounter) ✦ Necrotic Aura 2; thick, writhing shadows surround the shadar-kai witch. The witch and any other shadow creatures in the aura gain concealment. In addition, enemies that enter or start their turns in the aura take 5 necrotic damage, and enemies (including flying ones) also treat the area within the aura as difficult terrain. The shadar-kai witch can sustain the aura as a minor action. However, the effect ends if she uses shadow jaunt or moves more than half her speed on her turn. Shadow Jaunt (move; encounter) ✦ Teleportation The shadar-kai witch teleports 3 squares and becomes insubstantial until the start of her next turn. Alignment Unaligned Languages Common Skills Acrobatics +8, Arcana +12, Religion +12, Stealth +13 Str 13 (+4) Dex 16 (+6) Wis 12 (+4) Con 13 (+4) Int 19 (+7) Cha 17 (+6)
September 20 08
|
D u n g e o n 1 58
40
The Shadow Rift of Umbraforge
Shadar-kai Gloomblade (G) Level 6 Lurker
Medium shadow humanoid XP 250 Initiative +12 Senses Perception +5; low-light vision HP 54; Bloodied 27; see also veil of shadows AC 20; Fortitude 17, Reflex 18, Will 15 Speed 5; see also shadow jaunt m Greatsword (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon +11 vs. AC; 1d10 + 3 damage; see also gloomstrike. Gloomstrike If the shadar-kai gloomblade hits a target that can’t see him, the target is blinded until the end of the gloomblade’s next turn. Shadow Jaunt (move; encounter) ✦ Teleportation The shadar-kai gloomblade teleports 3 squares and becomes insubstantial until the start of his next turn. Veil of Shadows (move; at-will) ✦ Illusion The shadar-kai gloomblade turns invisible and moves up to his speed. The gloomblade cannot use this power while bloodied. Alignment Unaligned Languages Common Skills Acrobatics +14, Stealth +14 Str 17 (+6) Dex 20 (+8) Wis 15 (+5) Con 12 (+4) Int 10 (+3) Cha 11 (+3) Equipment chainmail, greatsword
In the first round, the witch uses beshadowed mind against the first PC through the secret door. She then activates the shadow dart wall trap in the second round. In the third round, she uses her deep shadow power, maintaining it as she closes with the warriors to grant them concealment. She uses blackfire touch against PCs at the periphery of melee, reserving subsequent beshadowed mind attacks for spellcasters and ranged combatants. If the witch is bloodied and the other shadar-kai are killed, she flees to area 6 (Great Hall tactical encounter) through the closest door and summons the shadar-kai chainfighters there. If the PCs enter area 6, add the witch to the Great Hall encounter. If the PCs stay in area 3, the chainfighters and the witch enter after 1 round. The dark haunter remains in area 6 but sends the mad wraith in to attack the PCs.
2 Shadar-kai Warriors (S) Level 8 Soldier
Medium shadow humanoid XP 350 each Initiative +11 Senses Perception +6; low-light vision HP 86; Bloodied 43 AC 24; Fortitude 19, Reflex 20, Will 17 Speed 5; see also shadow jaunt m Katar (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon +13 vs. AC; 1d6 + 3 damage (crit 1d6 + 9). M Double Attack (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon The shadar-kai warrior makes two katar attacks. M Cage of Gloom (standard; recharge 5 6 ) The shadar-kai warrior makes a katar attack. If the attack hits, the shadar-kai warrior makes a secondary attack as strands of shadow coil around the target. Secondary Attack: +11 vs. Reflex; the target is restrained (save ends). Shadow Jaunt (move; encounter) ✦ Teleportation The shadar-kai warrior teleports 3 squares and becomes insubstantial until the start of its next turn. Alignment Unaligned Languages Common Skills Acrobatics +15, Stealth +15 Str 17 (+7) Dex 20 (+9) Wis 14 (+6) Con 14 (+6) Int 12 (+5) Cha 11 (+4) Equipment shadowmail, 2 katars
Development Combat in this area puts the gnolls in area 4 on alert for 5 minutes, though they do not come to investigate. No one is in the northeast tower, and the sound of combat cannot be heard on the level above. If the PCs take a few minutes to examine the books the gloomblade was retrieving or the scrolls and books the witch was working with, they find confirmation of the dark research going on here. Sarshan’s long-term plans involve breeding advanced races of warrior-slaves to be sold to the highest bidder.
Features of the Area Illumination: Magic lanterns provide light to the area (dim throughout). Bookshelves: These freestanding heavy wooden shelves stand 10 feet high and 4 feet wide, and they
are stacked with scrolls and leather-bound volumes. Standing bookshelves have no effect on movement. However, a creature can pull a shelf down as a minor action, which turns the 2 squares in front of the shelf into difficult terrain. A character standing in a square where a shelf falls is subject to an attack at +5 vs. Reflex; 1d6 damage and the target is stunned until the start of its next turn. Table: The table is tall enough that a Small creature can move under it and gain cover (–2 penalty to attack rolls). It costs 2 squares of movement to hop up onto a table. A successful DC 10 Strength check allows a character to tip over a table, which then grants superior cover (–5 penalty to attack rolls). Chairs: These are difficult terrain.
September 20 08
|
D u n g e o n 1 58
41
The Shadow Rift of Umbraforge
Great Hall Encounter Level 5 (1,000 XP)
Setup The shadar-kai chainfighters (both members of Sarshan’s personal guard) are engaged in a heated argument with a dark haunter whose lord is reconsidering his allegiance to Sarshan. The dark haunter’s mad wraith bodyguard floats nearby. The creatures here are distracted while they argue. Unless the witch alerts them (see the Library tactical encounter), they do not hear combat in area 3. 2 shadar-kai chainfighters (C) 1 dark haunter (D) 1 mad wraith (W) When the PCs can see into this area, read: This chamber appears to be a great hall or gallery, with fine couches spaced along walls hung with dark tapestries. In the center of the ceiling is an opening 15 feet across, and dim light is visible from the f loor above. The f loor directly beneath the opening has tiles of a lighter shade of gray than the rest of the room. On the far side of the chamber, two shadar-kai armed with spiked chains argue with an angry cloaked figure. At the creature’s side, a spectral wraith shifts within a cloud of shadow, and the shadar-kai watch it carefully.
When the creatures here see the PCs, read: Suddenly you are spotted, and the shadar-kai lose all interest in their argument with the dark one as they shout a challenge and race toward you. The dark figure steps back as it appraises you, then orders the wraith forward with a command to attack. 2 Shadar-kai Chainfighters (C) Level 6 Skirmisher
Medium shadow humanoid XP 250 each Initiative +9 Senses Perception +5; low-light vision HP 68; Bloodied 39 AC 20; Fortitude 19, Reflex 19, Will 17 Speed 6; see also dance of death and shadow jaunt m Spiked Chain (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon Reach 2; +11 vs. AC; 2d4 + 3 damage. M Dance of Death (standard; recharge 6 ) ✦ Necrotic, Weapon The shadar-kai chainfighter shifts 6 squares and makes 3 spiked chain attacks at any points during his move. He can attack a given enemy only once, but he deals an extra 1d6 necrotic damage with each successful hit. Shadow Jaunt (move; encounter) ✦ Teleportation The shadar-kai chainfighter teleports 3 squares and becomes insubstantial until the start of his next turn. Alignment Unaligned Languages Common Skills Acrobatics +14, Stealth +14 Str 17 (+6) Dex 18 (+7) Wis 14 (+5) Con 12 (+4) Int 10 (+3) Cha 11 (+3) Equipment leather armor, spiked chain
Dark Haunter (D) Level 6 Lurker
Small shadow humanoid XP 250 Initiative +12 Senses Perception +5; darkvision HP 57; Bloodied 28; see also killing dark AC 20 (see also dark step); Fortitude 17, Reflex 20, Will 19 Speed 6 m Scimitar (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon +11 vs. AC; 1d8 + 3 damage (crit 1d8 + 11). R Dagger (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon Ranged 5/10; +11 vs. AC; 1d4 + 3 damage. A Dark Fog (standard; sustain minor; encounter) ✦ Zone Area burst 4 within 10; creates a zone of darkness that blocks line of sight (creatures with darkvision ignore this effect). C Killing Dark (when reduced to 0 hit points) Close burst 1; targets enemies; each target is blinded (save ends). When slain, a dark haunter explodes in a spout of darkness. Combat Advantage The dark haunter deals an extra 2d6 damage on melee and ranged attacks against any target it has combat advantage against. Dark Step (move; at-will) The dark haunter moves up to 4 squares, gains a +4 bonus to AC against opportunity attacks, and gains combat advantage against any target that it ends its move adjacent to. Invisibility (minor; recharge 3 4 5 6 ) ✦ Illusion The dark haunter becomes invisible until the end of its next turn. Alignment Unaligned Languages Common Skills Stealth +13, Thievery +13 Str 12 (+4) Dex 21 (+8) Wis 14 (+5) Con 15 (+5) Int 14 (+5) Cha 19 (+7) Equipment black garments, scimitar, 4 daggers
PCs who can eavesdrop (DC 10 Perception) make out that the discussion focuses on the dark one’s liege lord reneging on a promise to grant Sarshan’s mercenary forces access to a portal to the world within his territory.
September 20 08
|
D u n g e o n 1 58
42
The Shadow Rift of Umbraforge
Mad Wraith (W) Level 6 Controller
Medium shadow humanoid (undead) XP 250 Initiative +8 Senses Perception +6; darkvision Mad Whispers (Psychic) aura 3; deafened creatures are immune; any enemy in the aura at the start of its turn takes 5 psychic damage and is dazed until the start of its next turn. (If the mad wraith takes radiant damage, the aura is negated until the end of the mad wraith’s next turn.) HP 54; Bloodied 27 AC 18; Fortitude 15, Reflex 18, Will 17 Immune disease, poison; Resist 10 necrotic, insubstantial; Vulnerable 5 radiant (see also mad whispers above) Speed fly 6 (hover); phasing m Touch of Madness (standard; at-will) ✦ Psychic +8 vs. Will; 1d6 + 5 psychic damage, and the target takes a –2 penalty to Will defense (save ends). M Touch of Chaos (standard; recharge 5 6 ) ✦ Psychic +9 vs. Will; 2d6 + 4 psychic damage, and the target moves up to its speed and makes a basic attack against its nearest ally as a free action. Spawn Wraith Any humanoid killed by a mad wraith rises as a free-willed mad wraith at the start of its creator’s next turn, appearing in the space where it died (or in the nearest unoccupied space). Raising the slain creature (using the Raise Dead ritual) does not destroy the spawned wraith. Alignment Chaotic evil Languages Common Skills Stealth +13 Str 6 (+1) Dex 20 (+8) Wis 6 (+1) Con 12 (+4) Int 11 (+3) Cha 19 (+7)
Tactics The shadar-kai chainfighters use dance of death to weave through the PCs and attack poorly armored foes, then flank a single target with spiked chain attacks. The chainfighters do not coordinate attacks with either the dark haunter or the wraith. Both fight to the death. The wraith targets the strongest-looking melee combatant with touch of chaos, then strikes the closest foes with touch of madness attacks. If the PCs have left any creatures in the library unconscious, the
wraith enters that area in the third round and attacks with touch of madness, hoping to spawn additional mad wraiths. The dark haunter uses dark step to target spellcasters and ranged combatants. If taken to 10 hit points or fewer, it flees south through the main doors and out of the tower, followed by the wraith (if it survives). Half the guards in the gatehouse follow the dark haunter, while the others (two warriors and two chainfighters) join the fight against the PCs.
Features of the Area Illumination: Magic lanterns provide light to the area (dim throughout). Levitation Lift: The ceiling of this chamber features a 15-foot wide opening, and the floor beneath it is marked out in tiles of lighter gray. This magic lift allows creatures to reach the floor above. As a move action, a character can rise to the next level. Once on that level, the character moves up to 15 feet horizontally as a move action. As a minor action, a character in the air can shift 1 square horizontally. Characters who stand within the area of lighter tiles feel unsteady on their feet and take a –2 penalty to their AC and Reflex defense. However, unless they mentally command the lift to carry them up, they can move through the area normally. Table: The table is tall enough that a Small creature can move under it and gain cover (–2 penalty to attack rolls). It costs 2 squares of movement to hop up onto a table. A successful DC 17 Strength check allows a character to tip over the oversized table,
which then grants superior cover (–5 penalty to attack rolls). Chairs: These are difficult terrain. Couches: These elegantly upholstered couches provide cover. It costs 2 squares of movement to hop up on a couch. Fire Pit: This magic fire pit is difficult terrain. Any creature that enters the fire pit takes 1d8 + 5 fire damage.
Guest Quarters Encounter Level 4 (900 XP)
Setup A pack of gnoll mercenaries of the Wicked Fang page resides here, awaiting their next mission after selling their packs’ services to Sarshan. Each gnoll wears a
September 20 08
|
D u n g e o n 1 58
43
The Shadow Rift of Umbraforge symbol of a bloody, serrated fang in a prominent place on their armor. The gnolls go on alert for 5 minutes after any combat in area 3. They are otherwise distracted (and can be surprised if the PCs approach quietly). 2 gnoll huntmasters (H) 1 gnoll claw fighter (C) 1 gnoll marauder (M) If the PCs listen at this door, read: Growling voices can be heard from beyond the door. A yipping snarl punctuates them. When the PCs enter this area, read: This pair of adjoining rooms appears to be well-appointed guest chambers. Unfortunately, the present occupants seem ill-suited to their comforts. Four gnolls are here, and a reek of dog fills the air and the blankets on the beds pulled off and piled in the corners. If the gnolls are not surprised, read: The closest two snarl as they lunge at you with spear and claw, and the others prepare their longbows as they take cover behind a couch.
2 Gnoll Huntmasters (H) Level 5 Artillery
Medium natural humanoid XP 200 each Initiative +6 Senses Perception +11; low-light vision HP 50; Bloodied 25 AC 19; Fortitude 16, Reflex 17, Will 14 Speed 7 m Handaxe (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon +9 vs. AC; 1d6 + 3 damage, or 1d6 + 5 damage while bloodied; see also pack attack. R Longbow (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon Ranged 20/40; +10 vs. AC; 1d10 + 4 damage, or 1d10 + 6 damage while bloodied; see also pack attack. Pack Attack The gnoll huntmaster deals an extra 5 damage on melee and ranged attacks against an enemy that has two or more of the huntmaster’s allies adjacent to it. Alignment Chaotic evil Languages Abyssal, Common Skills Intimidate +7, Stealth +11 Str 16 (+5) Dex 19 (+6) Wis 14 (+4) Con 14 (+4) Int 8 (+1) Cha 7 (+0) Equipment leather armor, handaxe, longbow, quiver of 30 arrows
Gnoll Marauder (M) Level 6 Brute
Medium natural humanoid XP 250 Initiative +5 Senses Perception +7; low-light vision HP 84; Bloodied 42 AC 18; Fortitude 18, Reflex 15, Will 15 Speed 7 m Spear (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon +10 vs. AC; 1d8 + 6 damage, or 1d8 + 8 while bloodied; see also quick bite and pack attack. M Quick Bite (free, when the gnoll marauder hits a bloodied enemy with a melee attack; at-will) The gnoll marauder makes a bite attack against the same target: +7 vs. AC; 1d6 + 2 damage, or 1d6 + 4 damage while bloodied. Pack Attack The gnoll marauder deals an extra 5 damage on melee attacks against an enemy that has two or more of the marauder’s allies adjacent to it. Alignment Chaotic evil Languages Abyssal, Common Skills Intimidate +8, Stealth +10 Str 20 (+8) Dex 14 (+5) Wis 14 (+5) Con 14 (+5) Int 9 (+2) Cha 7 (+1) Equipment leather armor, light shield, spear
Gnoll Claw Fighter (C) Level 6 Skirmisher
Medium natural humanoid XP 250 Initiative +7 Senses Perception +6; low-light vision HP 70; Bloodied 35 AC 20; Fortitude 18, Reflex 16, Will 15 Speed 8; see also mobile melee attack m Claw (standard; at-will) +11 vs. AC; 1d6 + 4 damage, or 1d6 + 6 while bloodied; see also pack attack below. M Clawing Charge (standard; at-will) The gnoll claw fighter charges and makes two claw attacks against a single target instead of one melee basic attack. M Mobile Melee Attack (standard; at-will) The gnoll claw fighter can move up to 4 squares and make one melee basic attack at any point during that movement. The gnoll doesn’t provoke opportunity attacks when moving away from the target of its attack. Pack Attack The gnoll claw fighter deals an extra 5 damage on melee attacks against an enemy that has two or more of the gnoll claw fighter’s allies adjacent to it. Alignment Chaotic evil Languages Abyssal, Common Skills Intimidate +8 Str 19 (+7) Dex 15 (+5) Wis 12 (+4) Con 14 (+5) Int 9 (+2) Cha 7 (+1) Equipment leather armor
Tactics The huntmasters shoot from behind the cover of the wall, falling back behind one of the beds if the PCs press them. They concentrate their fire on those characters engaged by the claw fighter and the marauder to deal extra damage with their pack attack. The gnoll claw fighter uses its mobile melee attack against the weakest-looking PC, then moves into position with the marauder so the huntmasters gain their pack attack bonus. If the marauder falls, it switches to clawing charge attacks against the strongest melee combatants. The gnoll marauder focuses its spear attacks against the weakest-looking PCs, hoping for a chance to use its quick bite.
September 20 08
|
D u n g e o n 1 58
44
The Shadow Rift of Umbraforge
Development Among the gnolls’ personal effects is a letter outlining their clans’ proposed deal with Sarshan. It has only sketchy details of the assignment and terms, but Sarshan speaks of “a great need for troops ready to take advantage of unforeseen disaster.”
Features of the Area Illumination: Magic lanterns provide light to the area (dim throughout). Beds: A bed provides cover (–2 penalty to attack rolls). It costs 2 squares of movement to hop up on a bed. A successful DC 15 Strength check allows a character to tip over a bed, which then grants superior cover (–5 penalty to attack rolls). Table: The table is tall enough that a Small creature can move under it and gain cover (–2 penalty to attack rolls). It costs 2 squares of movement to hop up onto a table. A character can make a DC 10 Strength check to tip over a table, which then grants superior cover (–5 penalty to attack rolls). Chairs: These are difficult terrain. Blankets: The gnolls have piled blankets from the beds to create rough dens for themselves. These areas are difficult terrain. Fire Pit: This magic fire pit is difficult terrain. Any creature that enters the fire pit takes 1d8 + 5 fire damage.
September 20 08
|
D u n g e o n 1 58
45
The Shadow Rift of Umbraforge
Garden of Shadows Encounter Level 6 (1,250 XP)
Setup This uninhabited garden poses no threat to shadow creatures. All others draw the unwelcome attention of the creatures that dwell here. 3 rot scarab swarms (R) 1 shadow beetle (B) When the PCs enter this area, read: Dim light from globes of gray glass casts faint shadows throughout a dark garden. Though the trees and other foliage here appear healthy and luxurious, the leaves, stems, and flowers of these plants are sickly shades of dark blue, gray, and black. Along the south wall of this chamber stands a stone arch identical to the teleportation portals you’ve seen before. The rot scarab swarms and the shadow beetle are well hidden within the foliage (DC 20 Perception). If the PCs do not spot them, give the party a round or two to explore before the insects attack with surprise. Do not place their miniatures unless they are spotted or until they attack. When the PCs see the lurking insects, read: A hissing sound precedes a cloud of insects suddenly boiling up from the shadows, swarming to attack. At the same time, what appeared to be a mass of mottled leaves rises up to reveal itself as an enormous beetle, which has viscous black fluid dripping from its joints as it lurches toward you.
3 Rot Scarab Swarms (R) Level 8 Soldier
Medium shadow beast (swarm) XP 350 each Initiative +9 Senses Perception +7; darkvision Swarm Attack aura 1; the rot scarab swarm makes a basic attack as a free action against each enemy that begins its turn in the aura. HP 88; Bloodied 44 AC 22; Fortitude 21, Reflex 21, Will 19 Resist half damage from melee and ranged attacks; Vulnerable 10 against close and area attacks Speed 8, climb 8 m Swarm of Mandibles (standard; at-will) ✦ Necrotic +12 vs. Reflex; 1d8 + 5 necrotic damage, and ongoing 5 necrotic damage (save ends). Alignment Unaligned Languages — Str 20 (+9) Dex 16 (+7) Wis 16 (+7) Con 16 (+7) Int 1 (–1) Cha 11 (+4)
Shadow Beetle (B) Level 5 Controller
Large shadow beast XP 200 Initiative +2 Senses Perception +3; darkvision HP 62; Bloodied 31 AC 19; Fortitude 17, Reflex 13, Will 14 Speed 6 m Bite (standard; at-will) +10 vs. AC; 1d10 + 4 damage. C Shadow Spray (standard; recharge 5 6 ) Close blast 3; +8 vs. Reflex; 2d6 damage, plus the target is immobilized and all creatures have concealment against it (save ends). Alignment Unaligned Languages — Str 18 (+6) Dex 10 (+2) Wis 12 (+3) Con 14 (+4) Int 1 (–3) Cha 8 (+1)
The View From Above If the PCs reach this area without going through the great hall (area 6, Great Hall tactical encounter), they can see and hear the argument between the shadarkai and the dark haunter before the insects attack. When combat breaks out here, the shadar-kai ascend the lift to join in. The dark haunter sends the mad wraith up, but stays in area 6.
Tactics The rot scarab swarms stay close together to catch as many foes as possible in the area of their swarm attack aura. They concentrate their swarm of mandibles attacks on the same targets, hoping to drop one foe before moving onto the next. The swarm cannot move through the area of the levitation lift. The shadow beetle hits the strongest-looking melee or ranged combatants with its shadow spray, making bite attacks against lightly armored foes while it waits for that power to recharge. The beetle moves through the area of the levitation lift without making Acrobatics checks. All these creatures fight to the death.
Features of the Area Levitation Lift: The floor and ceiling of this chamber feature 15-foot wide openings. This magical lift allows creatures to reach the floors above or below. Characters in the area of the lift hover in midair until they mentally command the lift to move them. As a move action, a character can rise or descend one level, or can move up to 15 feet horizontally. As a minor action, a character can shift 1 square horizontally. While within the lift (whether moving or not), a creature is unsteady, taking a –2 penalty to AC and Reflex defense. Creatures that move into the open area of the lift (as opposed to simply stepping into it) continue their movement through midair. A creature can travel across the open space of the lift by making a successful DC 15 Acrobatics check as part of the move action that takes it into the lift. On a result of 20 or higher, the creature gains 2 extra squares of movement. On a failed check, the creature loses momentum and slides
September 20 08
|
D u n g e o n 1 58
46
The Shadow Rift of Umbraforge to the center of the lift (but can use another move action or a minor action to continue its move). Trees: Squares containing trees are difficult terrain (requiring 1 extra square of movement to enter) and provide concealment (–2 penalty to attack rolls) to anyone standing in them. A tree’s trunk provides cover (–2 penalty to attack rolls) to anyone standing adjacent to it. Thickets: These areas of dense undergrowth provide concealment and are difficult terrain. Stagnant Pool: This pool of dark water is only 2 feet deep at its center but is thick with black slime. A character who runs through the pool must make a successful DC 20 Acrobatics check or fall prone. Characters can move at normal speed without difficulty.
Teleportation Portal: This black stone archway is a semicircle 30 feet in diameter and 15 feet high, set against the stone wall of the chamber. Silver crystals are set within the stone in a random pattern. Runes in Common cover it, but their ancient dialect requires a successful DC 17 History check to decipher. They identify the arch as an ancient shadar-kai teleportation portal. This arch functions as the arch in the black shrine (page 25). If it is touched, it reveals that area within it, but the PCs cannot pass through. The portal can normally be used by only Sarshan. See the Last Stand tactical encounter for more information.
Unexpected Parley When the PCs have completed the last of the previous three encounters, they find their luck running out. Sarshan’s guards, alerted by the combat in the tower, begin to close in. Do not allow the PCs a short rest in the aftermath of the previous encounter. If the party is not in area 10, modify the read aloud text accordingly. As soon as the previous combat is done, read: Before you can catch your breath, a sudden shout comes from below. Through the open f loor, you see shadar-kai guards coming through the main doors.
bared as they hiss. “Stand down!” the captain shouts, “or your lives are forfeit!” The shadar-kai captain is Thannu (see the Last Stand tactical encounter for his statistics). Though he means business, his inclination to slay the PCs outright is tempered by his knowledge that the absent Sarshan will want to question them first. The PCs should hopefully recognize that this is a fight they cannot win, and that standing down is their best bet in the short term. However, if the party is more the fight-to-the-death crowd, allow them to strike back but have a pair of shadar-kai witches show up to immobilize them with magic. Be careful not to be too heavy-handed with this scenario. This section of the adventure involves important revelations and decisions for the PCs. Allowing the players to feel like they’re being railroaded is likely to undercut the importance of what they learn here. The PCs are outnumbered to such a degree that Thannu does not bother taking their weapons or equipment. If the party is not in area 10, Thannu orders them to be taken up to the guards’ quarters on the third level for questioning. Adjust the following read aloud text and use it when the PCs and their escorts are passing through the garden of shadows. Once the PCs stand down, read:
Give the PCs time to strategize, then continue: Six shadar-kai hit the levitation lift, and footsteps in the distance herald groups of four coming through the doors of each of the towers. The squad that comes up from below is led by a grizzled captain, who has ritual scars standing out on his cheeks. Two panthers move at his side with teeth
Suddenly, the garden is illuminated by a pulse of white light. The archway to the south flares as it reveals the black shrine, and a familiar figure steps from that chamber to this. It’s the veteran you spoke to in the Happy Beggar, but he is no longer stooped with the appearance of age and his scarred skin turns gray before your eyes.
September 20 08
|
D u n g e o n 1 58
47
The Shadow Rift of Umbraforge The guards around you salute the shadar-kai, who doesn’t hide his surprise at seeing you. He takes in the scene before him with a cold eye. “I am Sarshan. I assume someone has an explanation for this?” Whatever the PCs’ initial response, Thannu quickly interrupts to deliver a military-style report on the PCs’ incursion of the tower, noting the areas they’ve infiltrated and the number of the dead and wounded. However, before he can finish, additional information arrives. Even as the captain finishes, a warrior enters at a run, calling to his master. As he approaches to whisper in Sarshan’s ear, the shadar-kai turns to you with a look of wonder. “You are, quite literally, the last people I ever expected to see here. The charges leveled by my captain warrant torture and death. However, I am told that an episode of sabotage in my foundry appears to have been thwarted, and that the traitorous Modra has been executed by persons unknown. What might you know of this?”
If the PCs admit to the action in the foundry, Sarshan nods thoughtfully. If they are suspicious enough of Sarshan’s motivations that they deny everything, assume that his Sense Motive automatically beats their Bluff. “As far as you’ve managed to infiltrate my operations, I can only assume you know a little of who I am. My wealth and reputation turn largely on honor, obligation, and secrecy. When I spoke to you of Modra, I hoped you would kill him and save me the risk of more exposure than he had already caused. The fact that you journeyed here to do the job is
a surprise, but for your part in ending his threat to me and whatever he meant to do in the foundry, I am in your debt. However, for your role in the death of my personal guards, you are more greatly in mine. Here is a bargain that balances the obligation for all of us. Join me.” Allow the PCs a chance to respond, then continue: “Your skill at arms is clearly first rate. I offer you a place to use and advance that skill. Moreover, I offer you a place where you might live long enough to enjoy the fruits of your bravery. In a month, or six, or a year, your world will be a place you will not want to live. Join me here instead.” If the PCs attempt to question Sarshan on what he means, he equivocates. “Though I am nicely positioned to take advantage of these things, I know relatively little yet. What I do know, I cannot share for professional reasons, but trust me when I say that you do not want to know. Name your choice, friends.” If the PCs refuse outright to join Sarshan, or if they attempt to kill time before making a decision, go to the Last Stand encounter.
The Easy Way Out If the PCs decide to pretend to accept Sarshan’s bargain as a means of avoiding combat with his elite troops, allow a single character speaking for the party to make a DC 21 Bluff check. Up to two other characters can aid the first. On a failed check, Sarshan tells the PCs they should leave lying to those more skilled at it. Go to the Last Stand tactical encounter. If the check is successful, Sarshan accepts the PCs into his service. He orders Thannu to escort the party
to the guards’ quarters on the third level, saying that he will have orders for them once they have rested. How you play out the end of this scenario is up to you, but consider the following two options. • Shortly after the PCs are taken to the guards’ quarters, the larger tremor described in the Last Stand encounter rips through the tower. Thannu and his guards leave to investigate, allowing the PCs to slip back to the portal in the garden, then flee. • Sarshan might be fooled by the PCs, but his captain isn’t. Thannu waits until Sarshan is gone before ordering his troops to slay the party. For either of these scenarios, adopt the Last Stand encounter accordingly, but you should end up with the PCs facing Thannu and his panthers in the garden while they try to activate the portal and escape.
September 20 08
|
D u n g e o n 1 58
48
The Shadow Rift of Umbraforge
Last Stand Encounter Level 7 (1,500 XP)
Setup The party has either rejected Sarshan’s offer of employment outright, or the Shadar-kai has seen through their false consent. One way or the other, the PCs are prepared to meet their fate. Thannu, elite shadar-kai warrior battle champion (T) 2 umbral panthers (P) When Sarshan’s offer falls through, read: You feel a familiar shaking beneath your feet as another tremor rises and falls quickly. The shadar-kai’s dark eyes blaze, but he smiles as he shakes his head. “Your conviction is to be commended. A pity it failed you in the end.” Then suddenly, an ear-splitting explosion shakes the tower. Near the eastern side of the chamber, one of Sarshan’s guards shouts out: “My lord! The foundry is in flames!” The guards are in motion, Sarshan all but ignoring you as he barks orders. One group is sent to the foundry, and another receives orders to keep the mercenary camps under control. Sarshan takes a last squad of chainfighters with him as he moves for the lift. Thannu and his panthers are the only ones left with you. “If I was as cruel as my reputation implies, I would send you back to watch your world die,” Sarshan calls. “Be thankful that I am merciful.” Then to Thannu: “Kill them.”
Thannu, Shadar-kai Battle Champion (T) Level 8 Elite Soldier Medium shadow humanoid XP 700 Initiative +11 Senses Perception +6; low-light vision HP 172; Bloodied 86 AC 26; Fortitude 21, Reflex 23, Will 19 Saving Throws +2 Speed 5; see also shadow jaunt Action Points 1 m Katar (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon +13 vs. AC; 1d6 + 3 damage (crit 1d6 + 11). M Double Attack (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon Thannu makes two katar attacks. M Cage of Gloom (standard; recharge 5 6 ) Thannu makes a katar attack. If the attack hits, he makes a secondary attack as strands of shadow coil around the target. Secondary Attack: +11 vs. Reflex; the target is restrained (save ends). Battle Lord Tactics Thannu and his allies deal an extra 1d6 damage against enemies that he flanks. Battle Talent Thannu can score critical hits on attack rolls of natural 19 and 20. Inspiring Assault Whenever he scores a critical hit, Thannu and all allies within 5 squares of him regain 4 hit points. Shadow Jaunt (move; encounter) ✦ Teleportation Thannu teleports 3 squares and becomes insubstantial until the start of his next turn. Alignment Unaligned Languages Common Skills Acrobatics +15, Stealth +15 Str 17 (+7) Dex 20 (+9) Wis 14 (+6) Con 14 (+6) Int 12 (+5) Cha 11 (+4) Equipment shadowmail, 2 katars
2 Umbral Panthers (P) Level 6 Lurker
Medium shadow beast XP 250 each Initiative +12 Senses Perception +9; low-light vision HP 76; Bloodied 38 AC 20; Fortitude 19, Reflex 21, Will 17 Speed 7 m Claws (standard; at-will) +11 vs. AC; 2d6 + 4 damage. M Tail Spike (immediate reaction, when an enemy moves or shifts into a square adjacent to the umbral panther; at-will) +11 vs. AC; 1d6 + 1 damage. Combat Advantage The umbral panther deals an extra 2d6 damage against any target it has combat advantage against. Invisibility (standard, usable only while in spectral form; atwill) ✦ Illusion The umbral panther is invisible until it makes an attack. It can end this effect on its turn as a free action. Spectral Form (standard; at-will) The umbral panther becomes insubstantial. It gains a +5 power bonus to Stealth checks but deals only half damage with its attacks. It can end this effect on its turn as a free action. Alignment Unaligned Languages — Skills Stealth +13 (+18 in spectral form) Str 15 (+5) Dex 21 (+8) Wis 13 (+4) Con 16 (+6) Int 2 (–1) Cha 12 (+4)
Tactics Thannu targets the most powerful-looking combatant with cage of shadow, then makes double attacks against the closest foes. He uses shadow jaunt to avoid the difficult terrain of the garden and reduce any damage from attacks made against him. The umbral panthers flank with Thannu, dealing extra damage from their own combat advantage and his battle lord tactics. They stay close in combat, hoping that foes attacking the other panther trigger a tail spike attack. They give up an attack to use their spectral form only if bloodied, ending the effect before they attack the creature that bloodied them.
September 20 08
|
D u n g e o n 1 58
49
The Shadow Rift of Umbraforge Thannu and his panthers have the utmost faith in their superiority over the PCs. They fight to the death.
Through the Arch If the PCs activate the portal during combat (as opposed to dispensing with Thannu and his panthers first), the captain orders the panthers to pursue the party. He does not pass through the arch himself, believing that his cats can handle the PCs and sensing the gravity of the situation outside the tower.
Configuring the Portal This skill challenge sees the PCs attempt to reconfigure Sarshan’s teleportation portal to function for any creature, allowing them to escape the tower. Configuring the Portal Skill Challenge
Level 7 XP 300
Overlook, a fortified city on the eastern slopes of the Stonehome Mountains, is a bustling center of commerce and trade. Among its many people, you’re sure to find more information about those who hunt you. Now you just need to figure out how you want to go about unearthing this information.
Complexity: 1 (requires 4 successes before 3 failures). Primary Skills: Arcana, History, Perception, Thievery. Victory: The portal is properly reconfigured to allow use by any creature. The PCs (and the umbral panthers) can step through it to be taken to the black shrine (area 1, page 25). Failure: The PCs partially restore the portal’s full function. Though any creature can now use it, the teleportation effect remains attuned to Sarshan, causing any other creatures stepping through the arch to lose one healing surge. Creatures that have no healing
surges remaining (including the umbral panthers) lose hit points equal to their level. Arcana DC 14 (2 successes). The PC detects magic to tap into the creature-specific configuration of the arch. On a failed check, arcane feedback deals 1d6 damage to the PC. History DC 14 (2 successes; see Arcana). The PC studies the ancient runes inscribed on the arch, gleaning insight into its initial construction and its subsequent reconfiguration. On a result of 23 or higher, a PC also gains a +2 bonus to the next Arcana check made in the challenge. Perception DC 14 (2 successes; see Thievery). The PC makes a close examination of the construction of the arch, seeing several points where the silver crystals set into the stone have been augmented with a kind of alchemical reagent. On a result of 23 or higher, a PC also gains a +2 bonus to the next Thievery check made in the challenge. Thievery DC 14 (2 successes). The PC carefully reconfigures the pattern of crystals inset into the stone, altering the flow of arcane power within the archway.
Door Number One It should be obvious to the PCs that the teleportation portal and the Shadowfell gate beyond it are their best hope for getting out of the tower and back to the world while avoiding the chaos outside. However, if the PCs ignore the arch (perhaps believing that the climax of the adventure is set to take place in the foundry), have another tremor collapse the gatehouse and the access to the foundry tunnel. Likewise, if the PCs take out Thannu and his panthers, then decide to take their time looking around the tower once more, use additional aftershocks,
incursions of new guards, or both to convince them to start moving.
The Getaway Though the PCs might already have enough of a sense of Sarshan’s threat to want to eliminate him, it is imperative that he escapes this encounter. The opportunistic shadar-kai arms dealer plays an even larger part in an upcoming episode of the adventure path. However, if the PCs make an honest effort to reach Sarshan, don’t be too heavy-handed with them. Though his statistics are not provided here, you can let the party get in a couple of good shots before the shadar-kai’s guards close in and allow him to limp away.
Development Any PCs peering out the eastern windows can see the foundry being consumed by ongoing explosions of shadow and flame. Although Modra didn’t complete his sabotage in a way that would destroy the tower, the foundry’s systems have failed, releasing the arcane energy that fuels Sarshan’s dark experiments. From the south windows, chaos can be seen in the camps as mercenary bands try to pull back from the destruction. The pens of the slave bazaar have been broken open, and the slaves have overthrown their masters and started fleeing to the north. If the PCs pass through the portal alone, go to the Shadows of Doom encounter on the next page. If the umbral panthers follow them, continue this encounter in the black shrine (area 1, page 25). Use the tactical map for the white shrine (White Shrine tactical encounter, page 21), rotated 90 degrees and altered as per the area description (page 15).
September 20 08
|
D u n g e o n 1 58
50
The Shadow Rift of Umbraforge
Features of the Area Levitation Lift: The floor and ceiling of this chamber feature 15-foot wide openings. This magical lift allows creatures to reach the floors above or below. Characters in the area of the lift hover in midair until they mentally command the lift to move them. As a move action, a character can rise or descend one level, or can move up to 15 feet horizontally. As a minor action, a character can shift 1 square horizontally. While within the lift (whether moving or not), a creature is unsteady, taking a –2 penalty to AC and Reflex defense. Creatures that move into the open area of the lift (as opposed to simply stepping into it) continue their movement through midair. A creature can travel across the open space of the lift by making a successful DC 15 Acrobatics check as part of the move action that takes it into the lift. On a result of 20 or higher, the creature gains 2 extra squares of movement. On a failed check, the creature loses momentum and slides to the center of the lift (but can use another move action or a minor action to continue its move). Trees: Squares containing trees are difficult terrain (requiring 1 extra square of movement to enter) and provide concealment (–2 penalty to attack rolls) to anyone standing in them. A tree’s trunk provides cover (–2 penalty to attack rolls) to anyone standing adjacent to it. Thickets: These areas of dense undergrowth provide concealment and are difficult terrain. Stagnant Pool: This pool of dark water is only 2 feet deep at its center but is thick with black slime. A character who runs through the pool must make a successful DC 20 Acrobatics check or fall prone. Characters can move at normal speed without difficulty.
Teleportation Portal: This black stone archway is a semicircle 30 feet in diameter and 15 feet high, set against the stone wall of the chamber. Silver crystals are set within the stone in a random pattern. Runes in Common cover it, but their ancient dialect requires a successful DC 17 History check to decipher. They identify the arch as an ancient shadar-kai teleporta-
tion portal. This arch functions as the arch in the black shrine (page 25). If it is touched, it reveals that area within it, but the PCs cannot pass through. The portal can normally be used by only Sarshan. See the Last Stand tactical encounter for more information.
September 20 08
|
D u n g e o n 1 58
51
The Shadow Rift of Umbraforge
Shadows of Doom
characters see the six specters emerge before they slip through the arch.
When the specters emerge through the arch in the white shrine, read:
6 specters (S)
The boiling field of shadow within the archway is suddenly rent by the five figures as they claw their way through it. With a shriek like shredding steel, the black mists within the Shadowfell gate are torn apart, the six specters seeming to absorb the darkness as it fades away.
Encounter Level 5 (875 XP)
Setup The PCs pass through the teleportation portal from the tower and arrive back at the Shadowfell gate that can take them home. From the cavern entrance, they see the destruction of Umbraforge in the distance. The guards normally stationed here have returned to the tower, giving the PCs a chance to take a short rest if they wish to. When the big tremor hits, the PCs are likely to flee at once. Interrupt or paraphrase the read aloud text according to their actions, but make sure the
When the PCs have completed a short rest, or if they are intent on immediately activating the Shadowfell gate, read: A skittering fall of rock down the rift gives a split-second’s warning of another tremor, bigger this time. The cavern pitches around you—a crack like thunder echoing as the northern wall splits and heaves. And with a groan, the archway you just passed through crumbles and falls as a blast of arcane energy slams out across the chamber. Where it strikes the Shadowfell archway, a f lare of black erupts from the stone, congealing into six humanoid forms. It is most likely that the PCs will flee through the arch in the hope that the specters cannot follow. In that case, this encounter uses the tactical map and features of the white shrine (page 21), below. If the PCs choose to play out the encounter entirely in the Shadowfell’s black shrine before returning to the world, use the tactical map for the white shrine, rotated 90 degrees and altered as per the area description (page 21). When the PCs finally cross through to the world, have a tremor burn out the Shadowfell gate as they pass through it for the last time.
The Shadowfell gate has just burned out and the six specters have consumed its power. 6 Specters (S) Level 4 Lurker
Medium shadow humanoid (undead) XP 175 each Initiative +8 Senses Perception +6; darkvision Spectral Chill (Cold) aura 1; enemies in the aura take a –2 penalty to all defenses. HP 30; Bloodied 15 AC 16; Fortitude 16, Reflex 16, Will 17 Immune disease, poison; Resist 10 necrotic, insubstantial; Vulnerable 5 radiant Speed fly 6 (hover); phasing m Spectral Touch (standard; at-will) ✦ Necrotic +7 vs. Reflex; 1d6 + 2 necrotic damage. C Spectral Barrage (standard; recharge 5 6 ) ✦ Illusion, Psychic Close burst 2; targets enemies; +7 vs. Will; 2d6 + 2 psychic damage, and the target is knocked prone. Invisibility (standard; at-will) ✦ Illusion The specter becomes invisible until it attacks or until it is hit by an attack. Alignment Chaotic evil Languages Common Skills Stealth +9 Str 10 (+2) Dex 15 (+4) Wis 8 (+1) Con 13 (+3) Int 6 (+0) Cha 15 (+4)
Tactics The specters attempt to keep the PCs in melee, maximizing the effect of their spectral touch. If a specter is targeted by more than one foe or by ranged attacks, it uses its turn to become invisible, using spectral barrage
September 20 08
|
D u n g e o n 1 58
52
The Shadow Rift of Umbraforge
against the maximum number of targets in the following round. The specters fight until destroyed.
Concluding the Adventure
Expanding the Encounter
In the aftermath of the final battle against the power of the Shadowfell, the PCs can take a well-deserved rest. The noise of the battle is heard in the Happy Beggar, with Prashant and Ausma discovering the secret cellar and the route the PCs took into the caverns below. They arrive just as the PCs are cleaning up and are astounded to discover what lies beneath their establishment. The paladins take care of contacting the Overlook authorities. While they wait for the city guard to arrive, the PCs can confirm that the Shadowfell gate has been permanently destroyed. Sarshan’s route into Overlook has been shut down for good. With their religious background, Ausma and Prashant can give the PCs more information on the white shrine, since they recognize it as a place of ancient demon worship. They conclude that the dark power that created the specters has festered within both sides of the Shadowfell archway all this time—a potentially grave danger to Overlook that the PCs have eliminated. The teleportation portal is still operational, but it can be shut down by representatives of the Council. The discovery and destruction of the Shadowfell gate makes the PCs heroes in Overlook, especially when Sarshan’s connection to the recent orc raid is revealed. The shadar-kai’s warehouses will be raided, but in the aftermath of Modra’s treachery, Sarshan has been careful to clean up any evidence of his recent activities. Though his operations are shut down for good, no further information on the shadar-kai’s presence in Overlook can be found.
Feel free to take this encounter into the other areas of the secret caverns beneath the Happy Beggar. The specters pursue the PCs into any area if they attempt to flee and can even move into the almshouse or the streets around it if you wish. Have the specters drawn to the life force of the creatures in the city, which could put the PCs into a position to protect the innocent as they take on this final threat.
Features of the Area Rubble: Where the northwest corner of the chamber has collapsed, it spreads into areas of loose scree that are difficult terrain. A character who runs through rubble must make a successful DC 20 Acrobatics check or fall prone. Characters can move at normal speed without difficulty. Larger rubble piles provide cover. The main rubble pile in the northwest corner provides superior cover. Teleportation Portal: This black stone archway is a semicircle 30 feet in diameter and 15 feet high, set against the stone wall of the chamber. Silver crystals are set within the stone in a random pattern. Runes in Common cover it, but their ancient dialect requires a successful DC 17 History check to decipher. They identify the arch as an ancient shadar-kai teleportation portal. Though it resembles the portal in area 6, this archway is inert. Shadowfell Gate: This white stone archway is a semicircle 30 feet in diameter and 15 feet high. The gate is nonfunctioning now that its magic has been drained by the specters.
The PCs have plenty of time to rest up and plan their subsequent moves. Little do they know, however, that their notoriety will take an unexpectedly dark turn in the next adventure. G
About the Author
Scott Fitzgerald Gray (9th-level layabout, vindictive neutral) started gaming in high school and has worked as a writer and editor much of the time since then. After belatedly realizing he could combine both vocations in 2004, he’s been making up for lost time as a freelance RPG editor and designer, primarily for Wizards of the Coast. He lives in the Canadian hinterland with a schoolteacher, two daughters, and a large number of animal companions.
September 20 08
|
D u n g e o n 1 58
53
“This is a mission for heroes who have shown their mettle in the defense of others. If the evidence you have uncovered is true, the Siege of Bordrin’s Watch was but the first sortie in a larger campaign, against which Overlook and Elsir Vale cannot stand for long. I will tell you of the Karak Lode, and of lost wealth with which we might defend our land against the war that is coming.”
The Lost Mines of Karak
by Greg A. Vaughan with James Larrison illustrations by Wayne Reynolds, Rob Alexander, and Ryan Barger cartography by Mike Schley
TM & © 2008 Wizards of the Coast, Inc. All rights reserved.
October 20 08
|
D U N G E O N 1 59
56
The Lost Mines of Karak
“The Lost Mines of Karak” is an adventure for five 6th-level characters. Characters should be midway through 7th level by the adventure’s end. This adventure is the sequel to “The Shadow Rift of the Umbraforge” and the fourth part of the Scales of War adventure path. However, with a little modification, it can be played as a standalone adventure or integrated into any existing wilderness campaign in an area where a dwarven kingdom might once have stood.
ADVENTURE BACKGROUND The city of Overlook stands at the base of the Stonehome Mountains at the farthest western reaches of the Elsir Vale. This age-old redoubt was the center of the ancient dwarf-kingdom that once dominated the vale, but which faded into obscurity generations ago. Though little is remembered of this lost kingdom, its folk ventured far and wide in their day. One dwarf clan—the Ironfell—made forays in search of mineral wealth in the deserts beyond the Thornwaste to the southwest of Elsir Vale. There, they established a mine they called the Karak Lode, after the first dwarf of Clan Ironfell to fall in its defense. Over long years, Karak became a legendary source of wealth as its folk pulled rich deposits of gold, silver, and other precious metals from beneath the desert sands. A supply depot was established at the desert’s edge to service the caravans traveling between the mine and Elsir Vale, but the location of the Karak Lode was kept a closely guarded secret. Only oathsworn members of Clan Ironfell ever made the final leg of the journey across the sands.
Dwarves hold their secrets close, and their grip is doubly tight where wealth is concerned. So it was that Karak’s secrecy eventually became its downfall. Under the pressure of monstrous marauders, famine, and migrant human tribes, the dwarf kingdom of Elsir Vale declined. As its resources were taxed past the breaking point, the kingdom’s borders began to contract until little more than the territory immediately surrounding Overlook was left. In time, sandstorms struck the southern wastes and the Karak supply depot was abandoned. Soon, all contact with the mine was lost, and the Karak Lode was consigned to history.
ADVENTURE SYNOPSIS After their successes in “Siege of Bordrin’s Watch” and “Shadow Rift of the Umbraforge,” the PCs have established something of a reputation for themselves within Overlook. The party is introduced to a wealthy dwarf named Bram Ironfell, a member of the Elsir Consortium and scion of Clan Ironfell. Bram takes the PCs into his confidence as he tells them of the recent discovery of a parchment connected to the shadar-kai arms dealer Sarshan. Bram believes that the parchment details the location of the Karak Lode—a mine belonging to his clan that has been lost for generations. Bram hopes that if the mine is found, its wealth can be used to defend Overlook and the Elsir Vale against the brewing conflict that the PCs saw hints of in the Shadowfell. Following the directions on the ancient scroll, the party heads south past the Westdeep and into the dry lands known as the Thornwaste. There, they are beset by dwarf warriors from a rival clan who have caught
wind of Bram’s discovery. They also encounter a wanderer named Mag Blackthorn, from whom they can seek guidance through the treacherous wastes. Beyond the Thornwaste, the PCs come to Dunesend—a small village at the edge of the desert, controlled by a cruel gnoll called the Warden. After defeating the Warden and his allies, the PCs learn that the village is held in thrall by a mysterious desert despot calling herself Shephatiah, Queen of the Drylands. The Warden’s path through the desert follows a forgotten track to Shephatiah’s lair in a lost mine—the
QUESTS “Lost Mines of Karak” offers the opportunity for PCs to earn quest XP in a couple of places. Provided here is the list of quests, and their rewards, in the adventure. Major Quest—Lost Karak: The PCs undertake an arduous journey across wasteland and desert in an attempt to locate the lost mines of the Karak Lode. They complete this quest upon their successful return to Overlook, having secured the mines against the depredations of Queen Shephatiah and her followers. Reward: 1,250 XP. Minor Quest—Saving Dunesend: The folk of the tiny village of Dunesend have become unwitting vassals of the Queen of the Drylands. By overcoming the immediate threat of Shephatiah’s lieutenant (the Warden) and routing her in Karak, the PCs free the village from further threats and earn the gratitude of its people. Reward: 250 XP.
October 20 08
|
D U N G E O N 1 59
57
The Lost Mines of Karak
Karak Lode. However, the PCs find the ancient dwarven ruins occupied and defended by desert raiders and foul subterranean creatures led by an evil dryad. However, though the PCs make short work of the queen and her followers, they can find no trace of the mines. As they wait out a sandstorm, the PCs find themselves beset by a band of cavern choker assassins led by a troglodyte curse chanter. Only by retracing the steps of these marauders do the characters locate the previously hidden entrance to the mines. There, the true Queen Shephatiah holds court. Exploring the ancient dwarven caverns, the PCs battle Shephatiah’s followers before confronting the real Queen of the Drylands—a powerful naga. Having discovered a rift linking the mines with the Elemental Chaos, Shephatiah has made the Karak Lode her lair. However, after defeating the naga and her servants, the PCs uncover evidence that Karak’s wealth is now controlled by an unknown group from another plane. The PCs return to Overlook and recount their findings to Bram Ironfell, who tells them he will leave the mine sealed. However, the forces responsible for shipping the mine’s wealth through the Elemental Chaos have a long reach and dark plans.
PREPARING FOR ADVENTURE “Lost Mines of Karak” takes the PCs across the arid badlands known as the Thornwaste, then into the desert beyond in search of the Karak Lode. On their journey of exploration, the PCs find themselves under assault by Queen Shephatiah’s forces aboveground and below, culminating in a deadly showdown along-
side a rift leading to the Elemental Chaos. If you are pressed for time before beginning the adventure, read the adventure background and synopsis, “Part 1: The Road to Karak,” “Through the Thornwaste,” and the first two encounters. This gets the PCs caught up in the adventure and into the village of Dunesend—an action-packed first session of play.
What You Need to Play This adventure contains everything you need to play, including background information, setup, and encounters (including tactical maps). Reading through the DUNGEONS & DRAGONS 4th Edition rules is your first best step to understanding and preparing to run the adventure. As mentioned above, read through at least the opening sections and initial encounters before starting. This review enables you to become familiar with the material and the style of presentation. The sections below describe the adventure format.
Using Tactical Encounters
Setup This section of a tactical encounter provides you with the basic parameters of the encounter. First, it provides a key to the monsters in the encounter so you can locate them on the tactical map. Next, it provides context or background information for the encounter. The map of each encounter area indicates where the monsters are located when the encounter begins. The setup section also describes what the monsters are doing and how they react when the PCs arrive.
Read Aloud Text Read aloud text provides information detailing what the characters can see and are aware of. You do not have to read it word for word; feel free to paraphrase and use your own words when describing this information. Use read aloud text wisely. It is written for the most common approach to a particular situation, but what your player characters do might require you to alter the information in any number of ways.
Each encounter includes several common elements.
Monster Statistics
Encounter Level
Encounters include stat blocks for each monster type present in the encounter. If more than one monster of a particular kind is present, the stat block indicates how many creatures can be found.
Each tactical encounter assumes a group of five player characters. An encounter of average difficulty is one where the encounter level is equal to the level of the party. Encounters that are 1 or 2 levels lower than the party are easy encounters, while encounters that are a higher level than the party are difficult encounters. For overcoming an encounter, a group earns the XP value noted beside the encounter level. This amount should be divided by the number of group members, and an equal amount should be awarded to each character.
Tactics This entry describes special actions the monsters take to defeat the adventurers. Sometimes this means the monsters take advantage of special features of the area or make use of special powers or equipment.
October 20 08
|
D U N G E O N 1 59
58
The Lost Mines of Karak Map
Treasure Preparation
Each encounter includes a map keyed with the initial locations of each monster. The map also indicates the location of any special features of the area.
As with the previous installments of the Scales of War adventure path, this adventure makes use of the parcel system of treasure rewards described in the Dungeon Master’s Guide. The characters should accumulate 14 parcels by the end of the adventure. You can supply these treasures in whatever way you wish, but the following sidebar presents the most likely areas to feature treasure. During your preparation, assign parcels from those that follow to the areas in the spaces provided. Use the players’ wish lists to come up with magic items for the first six parcels.
Features of the Area This section describes special features noted on the map. If the location has items or areas of interest with which the characters can interact, those features are described here. Look here to see if a door is out of the ordinary, if an altar has a secret compartment, or if the area includes treasure.
TREASURE PARCELS Parcel A: _________________________________ , Clan Rivals. Parcel B: ________________________________, The Warden. Parcel C: ________________________________, The Warden. Parcel D: _______________________________ , Desert Patrol. Parcel E: __________________________________ , Courtyard. Parcel F: ____________________________________ , Area 10. Parcel G: _________________________________ , Guard Hall.
Parcel H: __________________________________, Great Hall. Parcel I: ___________________________________, Great Hall. Parcel J: ______________________________________, Crypts. Parcel K: ______________________________ , Mine Entrance. Parcel L: ________________________________ , Chaos Mines. Parcel M: ____________________________ , Queen’s Retinue. Parcel N: ____________________________ , Queen’s Retinue.
Based on the guidelines in the Dungeon Master’s Guide, the following parcels can go in the spaces above. Rely on the wish lists your players gave you for the first four parcels. Parcel 1: Magic item, level 10 Parcel 2: Magic item, level 9 Parcel 3: Magic item, level 9 Parcel 4: Magic item, level 8 Parcel 5: Magic item, level 7 Parcel 6: Magic item, level 7 Parcel 7: Two 250 gp art objects + 500 gp Parcel 8: 900 gp Parcel 9: Four 100 gp gems + 400 gp Parcel 10: One 250 gp art object + two potions of healing + 250 gp Parcel 11: 600 gp Parcel 12: Three 100 gp gems Parcel 13: One potion of healing + two 100 gp gems + 50 gp Parcel 14: Two potions of healing + 100 gp
PART 1: THE ROAD TO KARAK The adventure begins in the city of Overlook, where the PCs were left at the end of “Shadow Rift of the Umbraforge.” However, if the PCs have traveled elsewhere since the end of that adventure, the initial setup below can take place in Brindol or any other settlement between Elsir Vale and the mountains.
Sarshan’s Plots As a result of saving the city not once but twice, the PCs have become well known in Overlook. This notoriety sees them approached by Kalad, the dwarf paladin they rescued in “Siege of Bordrin’s Watch.” In the aftermath of the thwarted raid, Kalad has taken up a position as a sergeant in the Overlook watch. It is official business that brings him to the PCs, where he asks them to meet with a member of the Elsir Consortium (see “Siege of Bordrin’s Watch,” page 19). If Kalad did not survive the previous adventure, some other emissary of the guard seeks the party out. At a time of the PCs’ choosing, Kalad escorts them to a private room in an upscale Elftown tavern. There, he introduces them to a well-dressed dwarf wearing the rich robes of a successful merchant, his golden beard braided with silver bands. “Greetings, Heroes of Overlook. I am Bram Ironfell of the Clan Ironfell and representative of the Elsir Consortium. Your reputations precede you, and for your actions, you have my personal thanks in addition to that of the city. I have a tale I wish to share with you, over dinner and drinks of course.”
October 20 08
|
D U N G E O N 1 59
59
The Lost Mines of Karak
the name of Clan Ironfell. I had never seen this parchment before. However, at the watch’s request, I undertook a bit of research into my family’s archives. If what I discovered there holds true, this parchment holds the directions to the Karak Lode.” Although Bram Ironfell obviously has a personal stake in the search for the lost mines, he downplays his own self-interest. If the information the PCs discovered in “Shadow Rift of the Umbraforge” has not yet become common knowledge in Overlook, Bram has already guessed correctly that the siege of Bordrin’s Watch represents a larger threat to Elsir Vale.
Bram relates the information found in the “Adventure Background” section, which you can read or paraphrase as you see fit. Then read the following. “The location of the Karak Lode was known to few even within the clan, and it was thought that all who had such knowledge were lost when the mines were reclaimed by the desert. Even within the clan, Karak is all but forgotten. However, recent events might change that. “The destruction of Sarshan’s operations in Overlook saw the shadar-kai’s many warehouses and transit points raided. In one of those raids, the watch uncovered documents connected to Sarshan’s operations, including an ancient fragment of parchment. On it was written a list of landmarks and bearings for a journey, along with
“Discovering what became of my kin would end a sad chapter in Ironfell history, but that is not my primary motive in seeking your aid. If the Karak Lode can be found, its wealth offers the means to shore up the defenses of Overlook and the Elsir Vale. However, it is anyone’s guess what manner of creatures might lair there, or what defenses the last of the clan left to guard the mines. This is not a job for the city watch, I fear.” Bram offers the PCs 1,000 gp (half in gold, half in gems) as an upfront payment for undertaking the search for the Karak Lode. In addition, the PCs can claim any other treasure they recover along the way. Following the directions to the Karak Lode, the PCs first head south across the Thornwaste that stretches between Elsir Vale and the Stonehome Mountains. (On the area map in “Rescue at Rivenroar,” the Thornwaste is the area directly west of the Wyvernwatch Mountains.) A four-day journey takes the PCs to a location Bram believes was once the ancient supply depot for the mines. From there, the PCs must head south into the heart of the desert.
Bram Ironfell’s Secret The parchment is genuine, but there is more to Bram Ironfell’s story than he lets on. For more than a year, the dwarf has been one of Sarshan’s agents in the city, using his position on the Elsir Consortium to aid the shadar-kai’s operations. Bram’s story of how the directions to Karak were found in one of Sarshan’s warehouses is the truth. However, it was the dwarf who originally sent them to Sarshan after discovering them in a cache of family records months before. Bram was in the process of seeking the shadar-kai’s aid in locating and clearing out the mine. With Sarshan’s operations shut down, the dwarf now needs a new set of agents to find the Karak Lode and overcome whatever defenses might be found there. The PCs can make Sense Motive checks against Bram, but the dwarf ’s stated intention in using the wealth of the mines to defend Overlook and Elsir Vale is entirely truthful. If the PCs have previously heard of the consortium’s secret plots to replace the ruling council with a hand-picked body loyal to the merchants’ own interests, Kalad confirms that Bram is known to be opposed to that group. (In truth, the canny dwarf opposes them because he plans to one day rule the council single-handedly.) Kalad is familiar with the Ironfell clan and vouches for Bram’s good character. However, his duties with the watch prevent him from accompanying the party on their mission.
October 20 08
|
D U N G E O N 1 59
60
The Lost Mines of Karak
Through the Thornwaste Skill Challenge
Level 6 XP 750
South of the Westdeep, the broken ground of the Thornwaste stretches before you. Ridges of knife-edged stone spread as far as the eye can see, interspersed with heavy growths of twisted brambles. Your first investigation of these reveal that their thorns are iron-sharp, capable of drawing blood even through the thickest clothing. No trail or tracks lead into the wasteland ahead. This skill challenge sees the PCs make their way across the desolate landscape of the Thornwaste, seeking the supply depot that marks the beginning of their journey into the desert. The Thornwaste is a parched landscape of washed-out gullies and tangled briars. The directions from the parchment indicate that a road once passed this way, but it has long since disappeared. Though the area appears inhospitable, dozens of species of desert animal dwell here, hunted by predators including lions and wild boar. The PCs meet Mag Blackthorn (see below) after their second success or first failure (whichever comes first) in the skill challenge. The first combat encounter (“Clan Rivals,” page 72) takes place after the party’s fourth success or second failure. Complexity 3 (requires 8 successes before 3 failures). Primary Skills Endurance, Nature, Perception. Other Skills Nature, Perception. Victory If the PCs achieve 8 successes before 3 failures, they emerge from the Thornwaste near Dunesend. Defeat If the PCs get 3 failures before attaining 8 successes, they stumble out of the Thornwaste one day away from Dunesend. This extra day of travel costs each PC 1 extra healing surge. Additionally, the party attracts the attention of a satyr rake that shadows them, then joins the combat in “The Warden” encounter. Special If the PCs ally themselves with Mag Blackthorn, they gain a +2 bonus to further checks in this skill challenge. Endurance (DC 12). The PCs must endure the harsh environment and deadly briars of the barren Thornwaste as they make their way south. This is a group check. One character acts as lead, while the others make checks to aid that character. Each ally that gets a result of 10 or higher provides a +2 bonus to the lead character’s check (which counts as the check to determine a success or a failure). A failed check indicates that all members of the party lose one healing surge, in addition to counting as a failure for the challenge.
Nature (DC 12). The PC makes a Nature check to help find a safe path through the briars, or to find sufficient water to sustain the group. Perception (DC 17). The PC seeks and finds a good vantage point atop a stony ridge, from which the best path can be seen through the scrubland ahead. Nature or Perception (DC 12). The PC notes signs of predatory beasts or finds a remnant of the ancient dwarf track through the wastes. On a successful check, the next primary skill check made in the challenge gains a +2 bonus. This use of these skills does not count as a success or failure toward the completion of this challenge.
Mag Blackthorn After their second success or first failure in the skill challenge, the PCs happen upon another wanderer in the Thornwaste. In the distance, you spot something. Slipping through the brush and brambles is a human male in a tattered black coat and leggings. A battered, wide-brimmed hat shrouds his face, his boots held together with coarse twine. He carries a spear in one hand, a leather-bound book in the other. Mag Blackthorn is a ranger and a disciple of the Ghostlord—a legendary druid lich said to linger within the Thornwaste. (The Ghostlord appears in the 3rd edition adventure Red Hand of Doom, but does not play a part in this adventure path.) Mag hails the PCs, declaring himself protector of the Thornwaste and demanding to know their business. If the characters react in an even-handed manner and indicate that they are simply passing through, Mag relaxes and becomes friendly. If the PCs react with hostility, Mag challenges one of them to a duel for the right of passage. Once the challenge is issued, a DC 18 Diplomacy check is necessary to get Mag back on friendly footing. If the PCs take up his challenge, this DC increases to
Mag Blackthorn, Ranger
Level 6 Skirmisher
Medium natural humanoid (human) XP 250 Initiative +6 Senses Perception +8 HP 70; Bloodied 35 AC 20; Fortitude 16, Reflex 19, Will 19 Speed 6 m Spear (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon +11 vs. AC; 1d8 + 6 damage. r Crossbow (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon Ranged 15/30; +11 vs. AC; 1d8 + 6 damage Defensive Mobility Mag gains a +2 bonus to AC against opportunity attacks. Hunter’s Quarry (minor; at-will) Mag can designate the enemy nearest to him as his quarry. Once per round, he deals +1d6 damage to his quarry. This effect remains active until the end of the encounter, until the quarry is defeated, or until he designates a different target as his quarry. Nimble Strike (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon Ranged 15/30; +11 vs. AC; 1d8 + 6 damage; Mag shifts 1 before or after the attack. Disruptive Strike (immediate interrupt, when Mag or an ally is attacked by a creature; encounter) ✦ Weapon Ranged 15/30; +11 vs. AC; 1d8 + 6 damage. Hit: The target takes a –6 penalty to its attack roll. Splintering Shot (standard; daily) ✦ Weapon Ranged 15/30; +11 vs. AC. Hit: 3d8 + 6 damage, and the target takes a –2 penalty to attack rolls until the end of the encounter. Miss: Half damage, and the target takes a –1 penalty to attack roles until the end of the encounter. Weave Through the Fray (immediate interrupt, when an enemy moves adjacent to Mag; encounter) Mag can shift 3 squares. Alignment Unaligned Languages Common, Elven Skills Nature +11, Endurance +10 Str 13 (+4) Dex 16 (+6) Wis 16 (+6) Con 14 (+5) Int 11 (+3) Cha 10 (+3) Equipment warhammer, crossbow, quiver of 15 bolts
23. If Mag is fought and defeated in single combat, he becomes automatically friendly (and apologetic) if he is allowed to live. Mag knows nothing of Karak if he is asked about the mines, though he identifies Dunesend as the only settlement in the vicinity of the PCs route.
October 20 08
|
D U N G E O N 1 59
61
The Lost Mines of Karak
He is willing to escort the PCs through the Thornwaste, granting a +2 bonus to subsequent checks in the skill challenge. Once within sight of Dunesend, Mag wishes the party well and departs back into the scrubland.
Showdown in Dunesend The village of Dunesend marks the frontier of two equally desolate lands. To the north lies the forbidding Thornwaste, across which only the most experienced— or most desperate—explorers tread. To the south, endless desert dunes march to the far horizon. As the PCs approach the edge of the village from the north, they find one of Queen Shephatiah’s lieutenants— a gnoll demonic scourge called “the Warden”—in the process of collecting the village’s tribute. Tactical Encounter: The Warden (page 74).
Dunesend Village, Population 183 Dunesend was built on the ruins of the dwarven supply depot that once served Clan Ironfell’s hidden mining operations in the desert. All that remains of the original dwarven enclave are scattered foundations and a single watchtower. However, the dwarves’ carefully constructed system of spring-fed wells and cisterns still functions, allowing those who dwell here to farm the scrubland and eke out an existence in the harsh landscape. In years past, trade caravans made Dunesend a waypoint along an east-west road. Today, the road is sand and the caravans have all but vanished. The handful of families remaining in Dunesend do so because they have nowhere else to go.
Leadership: Lotho Elberesk, owner of the Dunesend caravansary is a village elder and the settlement’s de facto leader. Demographics: The isolated population of Dunesend are all human with the exception of Bede, the halfling baker. Though they have little exposure to nonhumans, the folk of the village have no malice or prejudice against them.
1. Serpent Wall This weathered stone wall is formed of ancient basalt blocks and carved in the form of a serpentine creature with a crest running down its back. It stretches for miles in either direction, marking the end of the rolling desert sands and the beginning of the Thornwaste. A wooden stockade gate of recent construction features great serpent-headed gate posts. With a DC 17 History check, a PC recalls that the serpent wall was here long before the dwarven supply depot was established. It dates back thousands of years to an ancient serpent kingdom that once ruled this region.
2. Public Well This bucket-drawn stone well features a wooden roof set on stanchions. This can be lowered during high winds to keep blown sand out of the village’s water supply. The well is part of the ancient dwarven waterworks, and holds an inexhaustible supply of fresh water even during the driest months.
3. Smithy An aged human named Darkus Comahni works the forge here, repairing tools and household implements for the villagers. Though he has little call for it, he can repair weapons and armor as well.
October 20 08
|
D U N G E O N 1 59
62
The Lost Mines of Karak 4. Dunesend Caravansary Built on the foundations of an older dwarven hostel, the caravansary once served the traders that regularly passed through this farflung outpost. A low wall of mud bricks surrounds a courtyard that encloses another well, an outbuilding, and a small herd of goats. On those rare occasions when travelers stop in Dunesend, an adjacent paddock is opened up for their animals. Lotho Elberesk is the proprietor here. He lives within the main building, where he runs a poorly stocked trading post. Twice a week, the caravansary courtyard becomes a barter market where the locals trade crops, goat, lamb, and wild boar hunted in the Thornwaste.
5. Bede’s Bakery A wizened halfling from distant eastern lands runs a bakery whose half-dozen tables provide the village’s only communal gathering place. Old Bede can usually be found by the fire pit, smoking an exotic pipe as he strokes his long gray mustache. He is an excellent source of information regarding the village, though his accent is heavy. Bede keeps accounts for the villagers who spend their evenings here, trading his goods for labor. PCs can buy a cup of sweet tea and a pastry for 1 cp.
6. Dwarf Tower This stout watchtower is built of great blocks of granite imported from the Wyvernswatch mountains. The only surviving part of the dwarven supply depot, it serves as Dunesend’s defensive redoubt as well as a shrine to Melora, the village’s matron deity. It is attended by the aging priestess Fawma Bruth, a cleric who retired to the wilderness long ago. She has the
October 20 08
|
D U N G E O N 1 59
63
The Lost Mines of Karak
healing word power (3rd level), which she uses for any PCs who make a stand against the Warden.
7. Villagers’ Huts Each of these simple structures of mud bricks and scavenged wood holds a single family of eight villagers and their animals.
8. Irrigated Fields These are just two of a dozen fields of crops bordering the Thornwaste along the wall to the east and west of the village. Each has a crude wooden pump house containing still-functioning dwarven pumps that bring water from underground cisterns to the surface.
The Situation in Dunesend In the aftermath of the encounter with the Warden, the PCs find themselves in a complex dilemma. The folk of Dunesend have been saved from the predations of the Warden and his allies, but they fear that reprisals from Queen Shephatiah will soon follow. As a result, most of the villagers are noticeably cool toward the PCs, though none are hostile. If Darkus Comahni is approached as he gathers up the remains of his apprentice for burial, a DC 12 Diplomacy check inspires him to speak to the PCs. Likewise, a DC 17 Diplomacy check inspires Lotho Elberesk or the halfling Bede to open up. Attempts to communicate with other villagers result only in sullen anger. “The queen’s wrath will surely come down on us. Where will you outsiders be then, I wonder?”
In response to specific questions, Elberesk, Darkus, or Bede respond with the following: What was going on here? Who was that gnoll and those other creatures? “That creature was the Warden, a foul tyrant that serves the Queen of the Drylands. The blue worm was his steed and enforcer, and it has slain several among us in recent months. The others were creatures of the Thornwaste in league with the Warden. They are the ones that prevent us from fleeing this place or seeking aid for our plight. “The Warden was here to make his monthly collection of tribute. Poor weather has delayed our crops, but he accused us of holding out. He used poor Vaudnim to set an example for us all.” Where did the Warden come from? Why was he collecting tribute? Who is the Queen of the Drylands? “The Warden first appeared from the desert a year ago, stating that Queen Shephatiah had come to reclaim her ancient throne. The name meant nothing to us, but the Warden slew several of our strongest when we stood against him. Now he orders us to pay tribute in goods and food or his blue worm will devour us.”
carry no more than a few days’ water to get here. A few of our folk tried to follow the Warden’s trail when he first appeared, but they never returned. All I can tell you is that the Warden came once with a shifter who spoke out loud of returning to somewhere called Karak. This creature was soundly beaten by the Warden for his slip.” If the PCs indicate their intent to end the threat from Queen Shephatiah, Lotho puts them up and feeds them free of charge at the caravansary while they prepare for their journey.
Desert Trek Setting out from Dunesend, the PCs make their way into the desert. Though the arid sands are inhospitable, their hard-packed dunes make for easier going than the Thornwaste. As you travel, the intermittent desert landmarks you pass are a perfect match for the course set out by Bram’s directions. These are a scattered series of basalt pillars, the remnants of long-ago volcanic eruptions rising now like sentinels from the sand. On the second day of travel, the PCs are spotted and attacked by a patrol sent out by Queen Shephatiah. Tactical Encounter: Desert Patrol (page 76).
Where can this Queen Shephatiah be found? Are there more of her followers? “The satyrs live within the Thornwaste along the desert frontier. Like the shifter brigands of the desert, they have eagerly pledged themselves to the Warden’s service. The Warden comes always from the desert to the south. Where his queen is, we do not know, but he and his followers
October 20 08
|
D U N G E O N 1 59
64
The Lost Mines of Karak
PART 2: FORTRESS IRONFELL Deep in the desert three days south of Dunesend, an isolated outcropping of basalt marks the location of the famous Karak Lode. When the members of Clan Ironfell began their excavations here, they constructed a defensible fortress to protect the mines below. Within the rock of the basalt bluff, they carved a multilevel complex whose gatehouse was the only sign of what lay below. From this bastion, the Ironfells controlled the desert for 50 miles in all directions. As part of the complex’s unparalleled security, access from the fortress to the mines was carefully hidden. Only by using special signet rings could the dwarves of the clan access the mines once their secret gate was sealed. In case the fortress ever fell to
invaders, the clan created false trails leading off into the desert, creating the appearance that the fortress was simply a stop-over point for shipping ore back to the supply depot.
Approaching the Fortress The PCs reach Karak the day after the “Desert Patrol” encounter. Earlier that morning, the course you have been following became a rocky track leading toward another basalt bluff in the distance. However, as the track curves around to its south side, you see two guard towers of hewn stone set into the face of the bluff. Narrow gouges that might be arrow slits flank a narrow track leading directly into the rock. Though worn by long years of sand and wind, the towers are clearly of dwarven construction, standing as strong as the day they were built.
Secret History Despite what the PCs have been told, the history of the mines of Karak is more complicated than Bram Ironfell would have them believe. Though the mines were rich with deposits of precious metals, the caverns of Karak were tainted by veins of raw elemental energy. These were the physical remnants of powerful magical experiments performed here by the sorcerers of the serpent kingdom that ruled this area millennia ago. The arcanists of Clan Ironfell determined that the elemental energy of the mines presented no danger. However, though the mines made the clan rich, so too were they the dwarves’ undoing. A rift leading directly to the Elemental Chaos was uncovered in the deepest part of Karak, its energy flooding the mines with madness. The dwarves of Ironfell turned on each other, the folk of the supply depot waiting in vain
October 20 08
|
D U N G E O N 1 59
65
The Lost Mines of Karak
when an expected shipment of riches from the mines failed to appear. Though expeditions were made in search of Karak, none but the dwarves within knew its location. Eventually, the supply depot was abandoned, and the Karak Lode passed from memory.
Outside the Mines The fortress guarding the Karak Lode consists of two levels within the basalt bluff, plus a lower level that hides the secret entrance to the mines. The basalt bluff is 50 feet high and requires a DC 15 Athletics check to climb. From its top, the PCs have a view of the desert for several miles in every direction. Fireplaces and braziers within the complex are vented to chimneys that route through narrow cracks and crevices, making entry from above impossible. However, in the long years since the mine was lost, a collapse on the bluff above has created an entrance into area 9. A flight of harpies lairs here (see the “Courtyard” tactical encounter, page 80), but these creatures raise no alarm at the approach of intruders. They can be spotted atop the bluff with a DC 17 Perception check. If their nest is explored, it contains only the foul remains of the desert creatures on which the harpies feed.
The Fortress The ancient halls of the Karak lode remain essentially unchanged since the days of the dwarves. Illumination: Unless otherwise noted, there is no illumination within the fortress. Walls, Floors, and Ceilings: The interior spaces of the fortress are constructed of close-fitted stone (DC 20 to climb). Ceilings are 20 feet high except as noted.
Portals: Rusted iron portcullises bar the way into the fortress. See individual encounter areas for specific information on raising and lowering the portcullises. All doors within the complex are of sturdy wood (Strength DC 16 to break open if locked). Except for the main gates (which are barred), all the doors within the complex, as well as the portcullises, can be opened or activated by the touch of an Ironfell signet ring (a minor action). The curse chanter in the “Foiled Ambush” encounter (page 86) carries an Ironfell signet ring, as does the real Queen Shephatiah (the “Queen’s Retinue” encounter, page 92). Rot and Debris: With the exception of area 19, much of the fortress has been given over to filth and decay. Rubble and the dry-rotted remains of furniture are spread across the floors, and the walls are stained with condensation and mildew. In the year since Karak was reoccupied, Shephatiah’s followers have discarded rotten food and other filth in the areas they do not inhabit.
1. Entry Tunnel A rusted portcullis blocks this long tunnel, with another raised and hidden beyond it. The down portcullis can be raised only from this area, but it cannot be locked in the up position. Arrow slits and murder holes along the length of the tunnel provide defenders with multiple angles of attack. Anyone looking in through the arrow slits sees shadowy figures beyond (see below or the tactical encounter). Tactical Encounter: Gatehouse (page 78).
2. West Gatehouse Sand blown in through the southern arrow slits spreads across the floor. Straw dummies have been erected behind the arrow slits to give the illusion of numerous guardians. Tactical Encounter: Gatehouse.
3. East Gatehouse Old weapons racks line the wall of this chamber. The rotting and rusted polearms they once held have been used to arm more straw dummies. Tactical Encounter: Gatehouse.
4. West Upper Gatehouse Bones scattered across the floor show where a desert predator once laired in this chamber. Tactical Encounter: Gatehouse.
5. East Upper Gatehouse A winch in this chamber once controlled the first portcullis in area 1. However, it is rusted and broken, so that the portcullis cannot be raised from here or locked in the down position.
6. Southern Overlook This chamber allowed defenders to fire down through murder holes into the entry tunnel, or through arrow slits into the courtyard below. A working winch controls the second portcullis in area 1. Tactical Encounter: Gatehouse.
7. West Guardhouse Stone benches and a rusted brazier mark this as a resting place for off-duty gate guards. Access to the northern overlook (area 19) is barred by a portcullis along the passage to the north.
October 20 08
|
D U N G E O N 1 59
66
The Lost Mines of Karak 8. East Guardhouse This chamber is identical to area 7. A portcullis along the passage to the north blocks access to area 19.
9. Courtyard This vast chamber features an arched ceiling supported by massive carved columns. A portion of the ceiling has collapsed, covering the floor here in wind-blown sand and creating an opening to the top of the basalt bluff. Tactical Encounter: Courtyard (page 80).
10. Stables and Cart Storage Dusty bones, rotting wood, and bands of rusted iron are scattered across the floor here. These are the remains of the wide-wheeled wagons once used to haul ore shipments across the desert and the mules that pulled them. A scattering of blue scales show where the behir has made this area its lair.
11. Stable Master’s Quarters This chamber was taken over by the Warden. A rough bed built of scavenged wood sits against one wall, while the gnoll’s filthy and foul-smelling gear is strewn across the room.
12. Ore Storage Ore from the mines was stored here and made ready for transport. Though the area is empty, the dust of the floor shows where crates have been moved through here recently (Perception DC 12).
13. Entry Hall This corridor once guarded entry into the fortress’s great hall. Footprints show where numerous creatures have recently passed this way. Tactical Encounter: Great Hall (page 83).
14. West Guard Post
15. East Guard Post
This former guard chamber is the habitat of a sussur tree growing up from the cracked stone floor. See the tactical encounter for a description. Tactical Encounter: Great Hall.
Like area 14, this chamber is empty except for a pair of sussur trees growing through the stone of the floor. Tactical Encounter: Great Hall.
October 20 08
|
D U N G E O N 1 59
67
16. Great Hall
19. Northern Overlook
21. Smithy
The dwarves of Karak once feasted here before the high seat of their mine-thane. This chamber is now the lair of an evil dryad who has raised a grove of sussur trees within it. Tactical Encounter: Great Hall.
Cold forges and dusty anvils show where dwarf smiths repaired and crafted the mine’s weapons and tools.
This chamber now serves as the den of a pair of cacklefiend hyenas. An open well accesses a cistern filled with drinkable water. Tactical Encounter: Great Hall.
This defensive position commanded a view of the courtyard below. Along its northern wall were the quarters of the mine-thane, the clan accountant, and the head of the guard, as well as a private latrine. The personal chambers have long since been stripped of any valuables. As well as being easily defensible, this area is free of the stench and squalor that fills much of the rest of the fortress. It makes a good place for the PCs to take an extended rest. Tactical Encounter: Foiled Ambush (page 86).
18. Larder
20. Alehouse
A layer of rot and mold surrounds the roots of a lone sussur tree. Tactical Encounter: Great Hall.
This storage area contains only a few dry and splintered kegs.
17. Kitchen
22. Coal Storage Dusty lumps of anthracite are scattered across the floor here, a pair of rusted shovels set against the wall.
23. Guard Hall This wide hall blocks access to the fortress’s lower level with a portcullis controlled from the barracks. The desert brigands who occupy the fortress have filled this area with supplies taken from caravans they have attacked. A rusted iron statue of a dwarf miner stands on the stairwell landing below. Tactical Encounter: Guard Hall (page 81).
October 20 08
|
D U N G E O N 1 59
68
The Lost Mines of Karak 24. Latrine This privy contains nothing of interest or use. Tactical Encounter: Guard Hall.
25. Barracks The miners, crafters, and guards of the Karak Lode lived in this area, while the smaller side chamber housed shift-captains. Six stone bunks stand here, along with roughly made wooden tables, benches, and chairs. Tactical Encounter: Guard Hall.
26. Lower Guard Hall This locked door controlled access to the fortress’s lower level. Tactical Encounter: Guard Hall.
27. Lower Guard Post When the fortress was occupied, guards here maintained a watch through the arrow slit looking out onto the hall. Tactical Encounter: Guard Hall.
28. Guardroom A squad of guards watched over the empty cells in area 29—actually the secret entrance to the mines below.
29. Dungeon Four cells with barred portcullis doors are empty except for stone cots and manacles set into the walls. Set within the floor of one of the cells is the only entrance to the Karak Lode, but it cannot be detected from this side as long as it is closed. See the “Foiled Ambush” tactical encounter (page 86) for more information.
30. Storerooms
31. Crypts
These chambers once held supplies for the maintenance and upkeep of the fortress. A fine layer of moldy debris is all that remains
The dwarves of Ironfell interred their dead here. The vaults were half filled (mostly with victims of mining accidents or folk who died in the desert) by the time the mine was abandoned. Tactical Encounter: Crypts (page 85).
October 20 08
|
D U N G E O N 1 59
69
The Lost Mines of Karak
THE BIRDMAN When the PCs first explore area 29, they find one of the cells with a prisoner recently captured by a patrol. This ancient dungeon shows signs of recent use, with scuff marks along the floor indicating traffic in both directions. Four large cells stand in the center of the chamber, the entrance of each blocked by a lowered portcullis controlled by a nearby winch and pulley. From the darkness ahead comes a bright chirping sound. The southwest cell is occupied by an aged human male, his lined face sporting a snow-white beard to match his fringe of hair. He wears the garb of a simple desert peasant, and appears to have not been here long. Seven yellow canaries perch on his shoulders and hop around his cell. The Birdman whistles and chirps at his tiny charges. If spoken to, he simply nods and smiles. The prisoner offers no resistance and allows himself to be led about by the PCs. If any survivors from the fortress are questioned, they state that the Birdman is a simple-minded peasant found wandering the desert not far from Dunesend a few days before. He was captured and brought here to feed the behir. The Birdman wanders those areas of the fortress already cleared out by the PCs, hiding from any subsequent combat. He accepts food and water if it is offered, smiling if spoken to but otherwise ignoring the party. The Birdman plays a role in the aftermath of the “Foiled Ambush” encounter (page 86).
October 20 08
|
D U N G E O N 1 59
70
The Lost Mines of Karak
PART 3: THE LOST MINES OF KARAK Beyond the secret portal in the dungeon lies the Karak Lode—now the lair and sanctum of the real Queen Shephatiah and her followers. The Karak mines are a meandering series of tunnels extending deep underground. Karak’s abandoned passages are not mapped. They contain nothing of interest and play no part in the adventure. In the areas the PCs explore, they notice seams of red stone glowing with a dull light. A DC 17 Dungeoneering or Nature check reveals that this is not a known Underdark phenomena. A DC 17 Arcana check identifies the stuff as veins of raw elemental energy that has somehow leached into the natural world.
1. Mine Entrance The secret portal in the dungeon (area 29, above) leads to a lift system descending down an 80-foot passage. There, a final portcullis and guardroom are defended by a force of troglodytes. Beyond lies access to the dark caverns of the Karak Lode. Tactical Encounter: Mine Entrance (page 88).
2. Chaos Mines In the heart of Karak, this open gallery chamber leads off into a half-dozen shafts under excavation when the mines were lost. A vein of elemental energy passes through the cavern, bolstering the barlgura (Shephatiah’s devoted servant) that guards this area with the help of a host of undead and monstrous creatures. Tactical Encounter: Chaos Mines (page 90).
3. Queen’s Retinue This deep cavern is the lair of Shephatiah, and the place where the Queen of the Drylands and her followers make a final stand. A rift to the Elemental Chaos lies at the bottom of a deep chasm here—the source of the deadly energy that flooded the mines and destroyed Clan Ironfell. Tactical Encounter: Queen’s Retinue (page 92).
CONCLUSION In the “Queen’s Retinue” encounter, the PCs discover how Shephatiah reopened the Karak Lode, and that the naga works for unseen masters to whom the mine’s output is being shipped by way of the elemental rift. If the PCs return to Dunesend, they are welcomed as heroes. The folk of the village provide food and supplies for the party’s return trip to Overlook. Once back in the mountain city, the PCs can relay their findings to Bram Ironfell. The dwarf is disheartened by the news, and he tells the PCs that he will leave the mines closed in order to prevent others from suffering the fate of his clanfolk who perished there. However, though Bram promises to seal off the mines, the forces controlling Shephatiah have a long reach and dark plans. Though neither the dwarf nor the PCs know it yet, they are all caught up in a dark plot whose full extents have yet to be revealed.
October 20 08
|
D U N G E O N 1 59
71
The Lost Mines of Karak
CLAN RIVALS
If the bolters are spotted, or when the PCs approach the ravine, read:
Encounter Level 6 (1,250 XP)
Setup 3 dwarf hammerers (D) 2 dwarf bolters (B) 1 hell hound (D) As the PCs make their way across the Thornwaste, they discover that dwarves of the rival Hammerfist Clan have caught wind of their expedition and seek to steal the secret directions to the lost mines. This ambush occurs after the party’s fourth success or second failure in the “Through the Thornwaste” skill challenge (page 61). The area the PCs pass through is thick with thorn brambles and studded with outcroppings of rock. The dwarves attack at dawn or sunset, depending on whether the PCs are traveling by day or night. The PCs begin the encounter with their miniatures along the northern edge of the tactical map. The two dwarf hammerers are hiding in the brambles with total concealment, while the other creatures in the encounter are behind boulders and out of line of sight. If the PCs spot the dwarf hammerers, read: Hidden within the brambles, two dwarves lie in wait, warhammers in hand.
Over the crest of a large outcropping just beyond a ravine ahead, a crossbow appears, trained on your group. A scuff ling to the east reveals another dwarf bolter rising from behind a hedge of screening brambles. Show the dwarf bolters when they appear, but do not place the miniatures for the hammerers and the hell hound unless they are spotted or until they attack. 3 Dwarf Hammerers
Level 5 Soldier
Medium natural humanoid XP 200 Initiative +4 Senses Perception +4; low-light vision HP 64; Bloodied 32 AC 23; Fortitude 18, Reflex 15, Will 17 Saving Throws +5 against poison effects Speed 5 m Warhammer (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon +11 vs. AC; 1d10 + 3 damage. M Shield Bash (minor; recharge 5 6 ) +9 vs. Fortitude; 2d6 + 3 damage, and the target is knocked prone or pushed 1 square (dwarf hammerer’s choice). R Throwing Hammer (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon Ranged 5/10; +10 vs. AC; 1d6 + 3 damage. Stubborn (immediate interrupt, when an enemy tries to push the dwarf or knock it prone; at-will) The hammerer makes a melee basic attack against the enemy. Stand Your Ground When an effect forces a dwarf to move—through a pull, a push, or a slide—the dwarf moves 1 square less than the effect specifies. When an attack would knock the dwarf prone, the dwarf can roll a saving throw to avoid falling prone. Alignment Unaligned Languages Common, Dwarven Skills Dungeoneering +11, Endurance +5 Str 17 (+5) Dex 10 (+2) Wis 14 (+4) Con 16 (+5) Int 11 (+2) Cha 12 (+3) Equipment plate armor, heavy shield, warhammer, 3 throwing hammers
October 20 08
|
D U N G E O N 1 59
72
The Lost Mines of Karak
2 Dwarf Bolters
Level 4 Artillery
Medium natural humanoid XP 175 Initiative +5 Senses Perception +8; low-light vision HP 46; Bloodied 23 AC 17; Fortitude 16, Reflex 16, Will 14 Saving Throws +5 against poison effects Speed 5 m Warhammer (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon +8 vs. AC; 1d10 + 2 damage. R Crossbow (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon Ranged 15/30; +10 vs. AC; 1d8 + 3 damage. Aimed Shot The dwarf bolter gains a +2 bonus to attack rolls and deals an extra 1d6 damage with ranged attacks against creatures that don’t have cover. Stand Your Ground When an effect forces a dwarf to move—through a pull, a push, or a slide—the dwarf moves 1 square less than the effect specifies. When an attack would knock the dwarf prone, the dwarf can roll a saving throw to avoid falling prone. Alignment Unaligned Languages Common, Dwarven Skills Dungeoneering +10, Endurance +7 Str 14 (+4) Dex 16 (+5) Wis 12 (+3) Con 16 (+5) Int 11 (+2) Cha 10 (+2) Equipment chainmail, warhammer, crossbow with 20 bolts
Hell Hound
Level 7 Brute
Medium elemental beast (fire) XP 300 Initiative +5 Senses Perception +11 Fire Shield (Fire) aura 1; any creature that enters or begins its turn in the aura takes 1d6 fire damage. HP 96; Bloodied 48 AC 20; Fortitude 18, Reflex 17, Will 18 Resist 20 fire Speed 7 m Bite (standard; at-will) ✦ Fire +10 vs. AC; 1d8 + 2 plus 1d8 fire damage. C Fiery Breath (standard; recharge 4 5 6 ) ✦ Fire Close blast 3; +9 vs. Reflex; 2d6 + 3 fire damage. Alignment Unaligned Languages — Str 14 (+5) Dex 14 (+5) Wis 17 (+6) Con 16 (+6) Int 2 (–1) Cha 10 (+3)
Tactics The bolters open fire while the hammerers charge forward in an attempt to force the PCs into the ravine. If the PCs attempt to cross the ravine, the third hammerer releases the hell hound to charge them, then follows quickly behind. The hell hound tries to catch any PCs in the ravine in its fiery breath while the hammerer attacks anyone trying to climb out. The dwarves are sure of their combat superiority. They and their hell hound fight to the death.
Treasure: In addition to any treasure you place here (see “Treasure Parcels,” page 59), one of the dwarves bears a fist-and-hammer crest on the side of his warhammer. A DC 15 History check (DC 10 for a resident of Elsir Vale) recognizes the crest as that of Hammerfist, a clan of local dwarves that have long been bitter rivals of the Ironfells. One of the dwarves also carries a journal hinting at his clan’s hunger to claim the lost Karak Lode in defiance of Clan Ironfell. This journal makes note of “the secret route to the mine” being discovered months before, but makes no mention of who did so.
Features of the Area Illumination: Dim light. Thorn Brambles: These thick, thorny brambles grow to a height of 8 feet and are difficult terrain. Within the brambles, adjacent creatures have concealment, while creatures not adjacent have total concealment. Boulders: These 5-foot-high rocks provide cover. A boulder can be climbed with a DC 10 Athletics check. A creature on top of a boulder reduces concealment for creatures in the brambles within 4 squares of it, from full concealment to concealment, or from concealment to none. Rock Outcropping: These outcroppings of basalt stand 20 feet high and can be climbed with a DC 15 Athletics check. Creatures on top of an outcropping have superior cover against creatures below. Ravine: This ravine is 10 feet deep with steep, crumbling sides. A creature in the ravine has cover against all creatures not adjacent to the edge. Scaling the sides of the ravine requires a DC 15 Athletics check.
October 20 08
|
D U N G E O N 1 59
73
The Lost Mines of Karak
THE WARDEN
As the PCs approach, read:
Encounter Level 8 (1,750 XP)
In the center of the settlement, sun-darkened human villagers observe in angry silence as a massive gnoll raises a bloodflecked flail over its head. At its feet, a human male lies dead. Behind the gnoll coils a serpentine creature with glittering blue scales and dozens of legs. It watches the villagers hungrily.
Setup The Warden, gnoll demonic scourge (G) 1 behir (B) 3 satyr rakes (R) 12 villagers (V) The PCs’ arrival in Dunesend comes at a critical moment. Believing that the villagers are holding out on tribute of crops and livestock to Queen Shephatiah, the Warden has decided to teach them a deadly lesson. In addition to his behir, the Warden has a trio of satyr rakes patrolling the perimeter of the village. The satyrs are hidden as the PCs approach. Perception Check DC 12: A rustling in the thorny bracken reveals the presence of a creature ahead. DC 17: You catch a glimpse of a bearded face, its forehead marked with goat’s horns. It snarls as it turns and races away to the south, quickly disappearing within the briars. As the PCs enter Dunesend, read: You crest a low rise to see the expanse of thorns suddenly end, a great sea of sand beyond it. At the transition from the Thornwaste to the desert, a decrepit village sprawls, its huts and fields spreading to either side of an ancient stone tower. A sudden cry of pain drifts toward you on the wind.
The satyrs remain hidden in the briars off the map until the PCs make a move. (They are loyal to Shephatiah but not anxious to get in the Warden’s way.) Do not place their miniatures unless they are spotted or attack. The Warden, Level 8 Brute (Leader) Gnoll Demonic Scourge Medium natural humanoid XP 350 Initiative +6 Senses Perception +7; low-light vision Leader of the Pack aura 5; allies in the aura gain a +1 bonus to attack rolls. While this creature is bloodied, the bonus increases to +2. HP 106; Bloodied 53 AC 20; Fortitude 21, Reflex 18, Will 18 Speed 5 m Heavy Flail (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon +13 vs. AC; 2d6 + 5 damage, or 2d6 + 7 while bloodied; against a bloodied enemy, this attack also knocks the target prone; see also pack attack. Bloodthirst If the gnoll demonic scourge bloodies an enemy with a melee attack, an ally adjacent to the enemy can make a melee attack against that enemy as an immediate reaction. Overwhelming Attack (free; encounter) The gnoll demonic scourge applies its bloodthirst power to two allies instead of one. Pack Attack The gnoll demonic scourge deals an extra 5 damage on melee attacks against an enemy that has two or more of the demonic scourge’s allies adjacent to it. Alignment Chaotic evil Languages Abyssal, Common Skills Insight +10, Intimidate +13, Religion +10 Str 20 (+9) Dex 14 (+6) Wis 12 (+5) Con 16 (+7) Int 13 (+5) Cha 15 (+6) Equipment hide armor, heavy flail
Juvenile Behir Thunderlance
Level 10 Artillery
Large natural magical beast (reptile) XP 500 Initiative +6 Senses Perception +7, darkvision HP 87; Bloodied 43 AC 22; Fortitude 24, Reflex 22, Will 22 Resist 15 lightning Speed 8, climb 4 m Bite (standard; at-will) +17 vs. AC; 1d8 + 5 damage. R Lightning Breath (standard; recharge 3 4 5 6 ) ✦ Lightning Area blast 1 within 10; +15 vs. Reflex; 3d6 + 5 lightning damage, and all creatures adjacent to the target take 5 lightning damage. Miss: Half damage. R Thunder Lance (standard; encounter) ✦ Lightning The behir thunderlance sends a spear of crackling electricity from its mouth. The behir thunderlance targets up to two creatures with its thunder lance; the first target must be within 10 squares of the behir, and the second target must be within 10 squares of the first; +15 vs. Reflex; 3d8 + 5 lightning damage, and the target is pushed 2 and knocked prone. M Devour (standard; sustain minor; recharge when no creature is affected by this power) +19 vs. Reflex; 2d8 + 4 damage and the target is grabbed (until escape). While grabbed, the grabbed creature is pulled into the behir’s space, is restrained, and can only target the behir. The behir thunderlance can sustain the power as a minor action, dealing 10 damage and maintaining the grab. After escaping, the target is placed in any square adjacent to the behir. Alignment Unaligned Languages Common Skills Athletics +14 Str 19 (+9) Dex 13 (+6) Wis 14 (+7) Con 21 (+10) Int 7 (+3) Cha 12 (+6)
October 20 08
|
D U N G E O N 1 59
74
The Lost Mines of Karak
3 Satyr Rakes
Level 7 Skirmisher
Medium fey humanoid XP 300 Initiative +9 Senses Perception +9; low-light vision HP 80; Bloodied 40 AC 21; Fortitude 18, Reflex 19, Will 19 Speed 6 m Short Sword (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon +12 vs. AC; 1d6 + 4 damage. r Shortbow (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon Ranged 15/30; +12 vs. AC; 1d8 + 4 damage. M Feint (move; at-will) +10 vs. Reflex; the satyr rake gains combat advantage against the target (see below). M Harrying Attack (standard; recharge 5 6 ) ✦ Weapon The satyr rake makes a basic attack, shifts 3 squares, and makes another basic attack. Combat Advantage The satyr rake deals an extra 2d6 damage against any target it has combat advantage against. Alignment Unaligned Languages Common, Elven Skills Bluff +12, Nature +9, Stealth +12 Str 12 (+4) Dex 18 (+7) Wis 12 (+4) Con 16 (+6) Int 10 (+3) Cha 18 (+7) Equipment leather armor, short sword, shortbow, quiver of 30 arrows
Tactics The Warden and the behir turn their attention to the PCs as soon as they are spotted. The villagers flee for cover and do not return until the battle is over. The Warden wades into melee with his heavy flail against the most powerful looking combatants. Once the banshrae and satyrs arrive, he stays close to them to maximize the effect of his bloodthirst and pack attack powers. The behir stays at the edge of melee to make breath weapon attacks against spellcasters and ranged combatants. While waiting for its breath weapon to recharge, it makes bite attacks against the closest foes.
The satyrs make their first attacks with superior cover from behind the northernmost houses. The rakes make shortbow attacks against lightly armored PCs until they are pressed into melee. They then draw short swords, fighting close to the warden to take advantage of his bloodthirst and pack attack powers. The Warden and his behir fight to the death. The satyrs are strictly hired help, and they flee if the Warden and the behir are both killed.
Features of the Area Illumination: Bright light (sunlight by day; lanterns hanging on the adjacent buildings at night). Wooden Huts: The huts of the villagers are crudely constructed of mud and bramblewood thatch. A hut can be climbed with a DC 10 Athletics check. A creature on the roof of a hut has cover against creatures on the ground. The wall of a hut can be broken through with a DC 13 Strength check. A hut provides superior cover to anyone inside it. Stone Tower: The stone walls of this three-story dwarf-built tower still stand strong, though its wooden interior floors have long since rotted away. It has no door, but creatures within the open doorway gain cover against those outside. Covered Well: The low stone wall that surrounds this well provides cover to anyone behind it. Its wooden roof is supported on stanchions 8 feet above the ground. The well is 60 feet deep and holds 10 feet of cool, fresh water.
October 20 08
|
D U N G E O N 1 59
75
The Lost Mines of Karak
DESERT PATROL
When the PCs first see a razorclaw stalker, read:
Encounter Level 6 (1,200 XP)
A bestial humanoid suddenly rises from the ground, the layer of sand that concealed it streaming down its mottled brown cloak. It wields a razor-sharp short sword, snarling as it attacks.
Setup 1 howling hag (H) 3 razorclaw stalkers (R)
When the PCs see the hag in her true form, read: As they make their way across the desert, the PCs are harried by one of Queen Shephatiah’s patrols. As the PCs approach from the north, the razorclaw stalkers spot their dust from behind the cover of the dune ridge. The razorclaws cover themselves with cloaks and a layer of sand that grants them total concealment. Do not place their miniatures unless they are spotted or until the PCs attack. The howling hag’s miniature should reflect her human form. As the PCs enter the area, read: Ahead, a figure emerges from a haze of wind-blown sand. The emaciated form of an elderly human female crawls toward you on hands and knees, her face lined and sunburned beneath the hood of a ragged cloak. Her voice raised against the wind, she calls out: “Turn back! Nothing but death awaits you in the heart of the desert!” Perception Check DC 22: A cloaked form lies on the ground a short distance behind the old woman, all but invisible beneath a thin layer of sand. The PCs have a chance to spot the closest razorclaw stalker, but the rest are out of line of sight on the other side of the dune ridge.
The old woman’s form shimmers like heat haze. In her place stands a wizened hag, pointed teeth bared in a hideous smile as she laughs. Howling Hag
Level 7 Controller
Medium fey humanoid XP 300 Initiative +7 Senses Perception +10; low-light vision Baleful Whispers (Psychic) aura 5; an enemy that ends its turn in the aura takes 1d6 psychic damage. HP 83; Bloodied 41; see also shriek of pain AC 21; Fortitude 20, Reflex 19, Will 18 Resist 10 thunder Speed 6; see also fey step m Quarterstaff (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon +9 vs. AC; 1d8 + 4 damage. C Howl (standard; at-will) ✦ Thunder Close blast 5; +10 vs. Fortitude; 1d6 + 4 thunder damage, and the target is pushed 3 squares. C Shriek of Pain (standard; recharges when first bloodied) ✦ Thunder Close blast 5; +8 vs. Fortitude; 3d6 + 4 thunder damage, or 3d6 + 9 thunder damage if the howling hag is bloodied. Miss: Half damage. Change Shape (minor; at-will) ✦ Polymorph A howling hag can alter its physical form to appear as an old crone of any Medium humanoid race (MM 280). Fey Step (move; encounter) ✦ Teleportation The howling hag can teleport 10 squares. Alignment Evil Languages Common, Elven Skills Bluff +11, Insight +10, Intimidate +11, Nature +10 Str 18 (+7) Dex 18 (+7) Wis 15 (+5) Con 19 (+7) Int 12 (+4) Cha 16 (+6) Equipment quarterstaff
October 20 08
|
D U N G E O N 1 59
76
The Lost Mines of Karak
3 Razorclaw Stalkers
Level 7 Skirmisher
Medium natural humanoid, shifter XP 300 Initiative +7 Senses Perception +9; low-light vision HP 79; Bloodied 39 AC 21; Fortitude 20, Reflex 20, Will 18; see also razorclaw shifting Speed 6; see also razorclaw shifting m Short Sword (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon +13 vs. AC; 1d6 + 4 damage; see also skirmish. M Short Sword Riposte (free, when an enemy makes an opportunity attack against the razorclaw stalker; at-will) ✦ Weapon The razorclaw stalker makes a short sword attack against the enemy. Skirmish +1d6 If, on its turn, the razorclaw stalker ends its move at least 4 squares away from its starting point, it deals an extra 1d6 damage on its attacks until the start of its next turn. Razorclaw Shifting (minor, usable only while bloodied; encounter) Until the end of the encounter or until rendered unconscious, the razorclaw stalker gains +2 speed and a +1 bonus to AC and Reflex defense. Alignment Unaligned Languages Common Skills Acrobatics +12, Stealth +12, Streetwise +8 Str 18 (+7) Dex 14 (+5) Wis 13 (+4) Con 15 (+5) Int 12 (+4) Cha 11 (+3) Equipment leather armor, short sword
Tactics
Features of the Area
The howling hag in crone form attempts to lure the PCs toward her through the soft sand. With a successful Insight check made against her Bluff check (+11), a PC senses that all is not as it appears. As soon as two or more PCs come within 5 squares of her (or if she is attacked at once), the hag unleashes her shriek of pain and uses fey step to teleport to the south side of the dune ridge. She then changes into her natural form, using howl to push PCs into areas of soft sand and staying out of melee with fey step. The razorclaw stalkers hold their positions until the PCs cross over the dune ridge in pursuit of the howling hag. They then rise from hiding and attack. They stay in constant motion to make use of their skirmish power, while trusting their short sword riposte to turn opportunity attacks against their foes.
Illumination: Bright light by day; dim light at night. Sand Dunes: The hard-packed sand in this area rises and falls in sweeping dunes. The direction of each dune’s slope is indicated on the map. The upward slope of a dune is difficult terrain, but moving along the downward slope incurs no penalty. Creatures on opposite sides of a dune slope have cover against each other. Soft Sand: These patches of deep shifting sand are difficult terrain. Additionally, movement through soft sand requires a DC 17 Acrobatics or Athletics check. On a failed check, a creature is restrained as its movement stops and it sinks up to its knees. With a DC 20 Nature check, a creature recognizes all the squares of soft sand adjacent to it. (Seeing a creature sink in soft sand automatically warns other creatures of the effect in that square.) The razorclaw stalkers and the howling hag know the location of all patches of soft sand in the area.
October 20 08
|
D U N G E O N 1 59
77
The Lost Mines of Karak
GATEHOUSE Encounter Level 7 (1,450 XP)
Setup 1 troglodyte curse chanter (C) 2 troglodyte impalers (I) 2 troglodyte maulers (M) This encounter takes place in areas 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, and 6 of the fortress map. Troglodyte Curse Chanter
Level 8 Controller (Leader)
Medium natural humanoid (reptile) XP 350 Initiative +5 Senses Perception +13; darkvision Troglodyte Stench aura 1; living enemies in the aura take a –2 penalty to attack rolls. HP 93; Bloodied 46 AC 23; Fortitude 22, Reflex 17, Will 22 Speed 5 m Quarterstaff (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon +12 vs. AC; 1d8 + 2 damage. m Claw (standard; at-will) +10 vs. AC; 1d4 + 2 damage. R Poison Ray (standard; at-will) ✦ Poison Ranged 10; +11 vs. Fortitude; 1d6 + 5 poison damage, and the target is weakened (save ends). R Cavern Curse (standard; recharge 3 4 5 6 ) ✦ Necrotic Ranged 5; +11 vs. Fortitude; the target takes ongoing 5 necrotic damage and is slowed (save ends both). C Tunnel Grace (minor 1/round; recharge 4 5 6 ) Close burst 10; all allies in the burst gain +5 speed until the end of the troglodyte shaman’s next turn. C Chant of Renewal (standard; encounter) ✦ Healing Close burst 5; bloodied allies in the burst regain 15 hit points. Alignment Chaotic evil Languages Draconic Skills Dungeoneering +13, Endurance +14, Religion +9 Str 15 (+6) Dex 12 (+5) Wis 18 (+8) Con 21 (+9) Int 10 (+4) Cha 14 (+6) Equipment robes, quarterstaff, skull mask
Queen Shephatiah has placed a group of troglodytes on guard at the entrance to the fortress. After several months with no sign of anyone even approaching Karak (never mind attacking), their attention to duty has grown lax. The troglodytes have placed straw dummies in front of the arrow slits facing the entrance hall, hoping to create the appearance that the fortress is well guarded or haunted. This facade is also designed to distract intruders’ attention from the portcullis trap the troglodytes have prepared. When the PCs enter this area, read: The darkened entry corridor extends inward between rows of arrow slits. At the far end, a massive stone gate banded
with iron stands closed. Halfway along the corridor, a rusty portcullis blocks further movement. The sand that has drifted in to cover the corridor f loor is well marked by recent footprints and signs of heavy objects being dragged. Perception Check DC 7: Dark figures loom on the other side of the closest arrow slits, silently watching you. A foul odor comes from beyond. DC 12 (automatic if a light source is introduced into the arrow slit): The unmoving figure is a crudely made straw dummy, an old dwarven helm on its head and an ancient polearm lashed to it with rope. DC 17: The shadows of the corridor ceiling conceal a deep groove 10 feet before the stone door. Spikes can be seen within, another portcullis there, ready to be dropped.
October 20 08
|
D U N G E O N 1 59
78
The Lost Mines of Karak
2 Troglodyte Impalers
Level 7 Artillery
Medium natural humanoid (reptile) XP 300 Initiative +5 Senses Perception +9; darkvision Troglodyte Stench aura 1; living enemies in the aura take a –2 penalty to attack rolls. HP 69; Bloodied 34 AC 22; Fortitude 22, Reflex 19, Will 18 Speed 5 m Spear (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon +11 vs. AC; 1d8 + 4 damage. m Claw (standard; at-will) +9 vs. AC; 1d4 + 4 damage. r Javelin (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon Ranged 10/20; +12 vs. AC; 1d6 + 4 damage. R Impaling Shot (standard; recharge 3 4 5 6 ) ✦ Weapon Requires javelin; ranged 10; +12 vs. AC; 2d6 + 4 damage, and the troglodyte impaler makes a secondary attack against the same target. Secondary Attack: +10 vs. Fortitude; the target is restrained (save ends). Alignment Chaotic evil Languages Draconic Skills Athletics +12, Endurance +13 Str 19 (+7) Dex 14 (+5) Wis 13 (+4) Con 21 (+8) Int 7 (+1) Cha 9 (+2) Equipment spear, quiver of 6 javelins
Tactics As long as the troglodytes remain behind arrow slits and murder holes, the PCs are unaffected by their stench. If possible, the troglodytes wait until two or more PCs have reached the gates before springing their trap. At that point, the curse chanter releases the northern portcullis with a minor action, locking it in place. It then attacks PCs south of the portcullis with poison ray and cavern curse, targeting them through one of the murder holes in the floor. The troglodyte impalers fling javelins through the murder holes against targets south of the portcullis, using their impaling shot as often as possible.
2 Troglodyte Maulers
Level 6 Soldier
Medium natural humanoid (reptile) XP 250 Initiative +6 Senses Perception +5; darkvision Troglodyte Stench aura 1; living enemies in the aura take a –2 penalty to attack rolls. HP 74; Bloodied 37 AC 22; Fortitude 21, Reflex 18, Will 19 Speed 5 m Greatclub (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon +12 vs. AC; 2d4 + 4 damage, and the target is marked until the end of the troglodyte mauler’s next turn. m Claw (standard; at-will) +10 vs. AC; 1d4 + 4 damage. M Bite (minor 1/round; at-will) Requires combat advantage; +10 vs. Fortitude; 1d6 + 4 damage, and until the end of the troglodyte mauler’s next turn, healing on the target restores only half the total amount. R Javelin (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon Ranged 10/20; +12 vs. AC; 1d6 + 4 damage. Alignment Chaotic evil Languages Draconic Skills Athletics +12, Endurance +12 Str 18 (+7) Dex 12 (+4) Wis 15 (+5) Con 18 (+7) Int 6 (+1) Cha 8 (+2) Equipment greatclub, 2 javelins
The troglodyte maulers target PCs trapped north of the portcullis, hurling javelins through the arrow slits. All the creatures here are content to snipe at the PCs from behind cover. If the PCs break through the gates, all the troglodytes rush to the first level. They attempt to keep the PCs in the corridor as they fight to the death.
Stone Gates: The stone gates are closed and barred from within with rough timbers (Strength DC 18 to break through). Rusted Portcullises: The southern portcullis is down but its winch (on the second level of this area) is damaged. It cannot be locked in place (up or down), and can be lifted with a DC 15 Strength check. If the northern portcullis is dropped from above by the troglodyte impalers, it can be locked in place, requiring a DC 23 Strength check to raise or break through. A character at the winch on the second level can lower the northern portcullis as a minor action, or can raise it with two move actions and a DC 10 Strength check. The portcullis can also be raised or lowered in 1 round by anyone bearing an Ironfell signet ring that is touched to the bars or the winch (a minor action). Arrow Slits and Murder Holes: These apertures provide superior cover to creatures on either side of them. However, they allow attacks to be made only in the two squares adjacent to them. A creature standing in a square adjacent to the wall 5 feet or more from an arrow slit cannot be seen by anyone on the other side. Creatures on the second level more than 5 feet from a murder hole cannot be seen by creatures below.
Features of the Area Illumination: During the day, the entrance corridor is filled with bright light for 10 squares, while sunlight through the southern arrow slits fills both gatehouses with dim light. The rest of this area is dark. Ceiling: 20 feet high.
October 20 08
|
D U N G E O N 1 59
79
The Lost Mines of Karak
COURTYARD Encounter Level 6 (1,300 XP)
Setup 1 carrion crawler (C) 4 harpies The carrion crawler lairs out of sight beneath the great sand pile that has collected beneath the hole in the ceiling. The harpies begin the encounter in their lair on the bluff above the hole, out of line of sight from below. Do not place the monsters’ miniatures unless they are spotted or until they attack.
Carrion Crawler
Level 7 Controller
Large aberrant beast XP 300 Initiative +6 Senses Perception +5; darkvision HP 81; Bloodied 40 AC 20; Fortitude 19, Reflex 18, Will 17 Speed 6, climb 6 (spider climb) m Tentacles (standard; at-will) ✦ Poison Reach 2; +10 vs. Fortitude; 1d4 + 5 damage, and the target takes ongoing 5 poison and is slowed (save ends both). First Failed Save: The target is immobilized instead of slowed (save ends). Second Failed Save: The target is stunned instead of immobilized (save ends). Saving throws made against the carrion crawler’s paralytic tentacles take a –2 penalty. M Bite (standard; at-will) +12 vs. AC; 1d10 + 5 damage. Alignment Unaligned Languages — Str 20 (+8) Dex 16 (+6) Wis 14 (+5) Con 17 (+6) Int 2 (–1) Cha 16 (+6)
When the PCs can see into this area, read:
Perception Check DC 25: Within the sand pile, something is stirring.
The ceiling of this huge pillared chamber has collapsed, a great pile of sand collecting near the east wall. Three sets of doors exit this area, arrow slits lining the walls high above.
The carrion crawler bursts from the sand pile when the first PC passes the midpoint of the room.
Tactics The carrion crawler makes tentacle attacks against any PCs within reach, focusing on targets previously immobilized or stunned. The harpies fly down in the second round, using their alluring song to pull PCs into melee with the carrion crawler. The crawler has gained immunity to their alluring song but takes damage from their deadly screech. If two harpies are killed, the survivors flee through the hole in the ceiling once both are bloodied. The carrion crawler fights to the death.
4 Harpies
Level 6 Controller
Medium fey humanoid XP 250 Initiative +5 Senses Perception +5 HP 71; Bloodied 35 AC 20; Fortitude 17, Reflex 17, Will 19 Resist 10 thunder Speed 6, fly 8 (clumsy) m Claw (standard; at-will) +11 vs. AC; 1d8 + 2 damage. C Alluring Song (standard; sustain minor; at-will) ✦ Charm Close burst 10; deafened creatures are immune; +12 vs. Will; the target is pulled 3 squares and immobilized (save ends). When the harpy sustains the power, any target that has not yet saved against the effect is pulled 3 squares and immobilized (save ends). C Deadly Screech (standard; recharge 5 6 ) ✦ Thunder Close burst 4; +12 vs. Fortitude; 1d6 + 4 thunder damage, and the target is dazed (save ends). Alignment Evil Languages Common Skills Stealth +10 Str 15 (+5) Dex 15 (+5) Wis 14 (+5) Con 15 (+5) Int 10 (+3) Cha 19 (+7)
Features of the Area Illumination: Dim light by day; dark at night. Ceiling: 40 feet high. The hole rises through 10 feet of rough rock to the top of the bluff beyond. Pillars: These provide cover and can be climbed with a DC 15 Athletics check. Sand Pile: This pile of wind-blown sand stands 10 feet high and is difficult terrain. It takes a DC 12 Acrobatics or Athletics check to move through the area of the sand pile.
October 20 08
|
D U N G E O N 1 59
80
The Lost Mines of Karak
GUARD HALL Encounter Level 5 (1,125 XP)
Setup 2 longtooth hunters (L) 1 iron cobra guardian (I) 5 human lackeys (H) This encounter takes place in areas 23, 24, 25, 26, and 27 of the fortress map. The guards stationed here are charged with preventing access to the lower level. The portcullis is always down and locked. One human lackey pulls watch duty in the hallway while the others eat or sleep in the barracks. The longtooth hunters maintain a post down below. Do not place the other lackeys, the longtooth hunters, or the iron cobra unless they are spotted or until they attack. When the PCs can see into the first section of corridor, read: The corridor ahead is stacked high with boxes, barrels, and crates. Beyond them, a lowered portcullis blocks access to a wide stairway leading down. A single human male, his face and cloak tanned by the sun, stands guard here. When the PCs have a good view of the stairwell, read: Halfway down the stairs is a landing upon which stands a rusted iron statue of a dwarf, an upraised pickaxe in one hand and a smith’s hammer in the other. Around its waist is a gleaming steel belt.
2 Longtooth Hunters
Level 6 Soldier
Medium natural humanoid, shifter XP 250 Initiative +7 Senses Perception +9; low-light vision HP 71; Bloodied 35 AC 22; Fortitude 20, Reflex 17, Will 16 Speed 5 m Longsword (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon +12 vs. AC; 1d8 + 5 damage, and the target is marked until the end of the longtooth hunter’s next turn. M Hamstring (standard; encounter) ✦ Weapon The longtooth hunter makes a longsword attack. If the attack hits, it makes a secondary attack against the same target. Secondary Attack: +9 vs. Reflex; the target is slowed (save ends). Follow Quarry (immediate reaction, when an adjacent enemy shifts; at-will) The longtooth hunter shifts toward the enemy. Longtooth Shifting (minor, usable only while bloodied; encounter) ✦ Healing Until the end of the encounter or until rendered unconscious, the longtooth hunter gains a +2 bonus to damage rolls. In addition, for as long as it is bloodied, the longtooth hunter gains regeneration 2. Alignment Unaligned Languages Common Skills Athletics +14, Endurance +11, Nature +9 Str 20 (+8) Dex 14 (+5) Wis 13 (+4) Con 15 (+5) Int 10 (+3) Cha 9 (+2) Equipment chainmail, light shield, longsword
The statue’s ornate steel belt is actually an iron cobra charged with guarding this area. Perception Check DC 17: What appeared to be a steel belt is some sort of creature or construct, moving slowly as you approach. The iron cobra maintains its position as part of the stairwell sculpture until the PCs enter its guarded area (see the statistics block).
Tactics
Iron Cobra Guardian
Level 6 Skirmisher
Medium natural animate (construct, homunculus) XP 250 Initiative +7 Senses Perception +9; darkvision HP 75; Bloodied 37 AC 20; Fortitude 20, Reflex 18, Will 17 Immune disease, poison Speed 7; see also slithering shift m Bite (standard; at-will) ✦ Poison +11 vs. AC; 1d8 + 3 damage, and ongoing 5 poison damage (save ends). R Poison the Mind (standard; recharge 3 4 5 6 ) ✦ Psychic Ranged 10; only affects creatures taking ongoing poison damage; +8 vs. Will; the target is dazed and slowed (save ends both); see also guard area. Guard Area The iron cobra has been attuned to guard the landing of the stairwell, as well as the first 2 squares up and down the adjacent stairs. It defends this area with its life. The iron cobra can use its poison the mind power against any creature in its guarded area, even if the power hasn’t recharged and even if the target isn’t taking ongoing poison damage. Slithering Shift (move; at-will) The iron cobra shifts 3 squares as a move action. Alignment Unaligned Languages — Skills Stealth +10 Str 17 (+6) Dex 15 (+5) Wis 13 (+4) Con 19 (+7) Int 5 (+0) Cha 12 (+4)
5 Human Lackeys
Level 7 Minion
Medium natural humanoid XP 75 Initiative +3 Senses Perception +4 HP 1; a missed attack never damages a minion. AC 19; Fortitude 17, Reflex 14, Will 15; see also mob rule Speed 6 m Club (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon +12 vs. AC; 6 damage. Mob Rule The human lackey gains a +2 power bonus to all defenses while at least two other human lackeys are within 5 squares of it. Alignment Unaligned Languages Common Str 16 (+6) Dex 11 (+3) Wis 12 (+4) Con 14 (+5) Int 10 (+3) Cha 13 (+4) Equipment leather armor, club
The human lackey on guard shouts out as soon as he sees the PCs. The others emerge from the barracks
October 20 08
|
D U N G E O N 1 59
81
The Lost Mines of Karak
1 round later (or 1 round after they hear any sound of combat in the corridor). The lackeys fight in close proximity to take advantage of their mob rule power, flanking for combat advantage if possible. At any sound of combat from above, the longtooth hunters move onto the stairs and wait for the PCs to come through the portcullis. They open with hamstring attacks, then flank with their longswords. Once bloodied, they use longtooth shifting to stay in the fight. The iron cobra attacks any PCs that enter its guarded area, using poison the mind as often as possible.
Development If any of these guards are captured and interrogated, they reveal what they know of the complex in exchange for their freedom. However, their knowledge is incomplete. They believe that Queen Shephatiah is an eladrin who lairs in the great hall, and they know nothing of the mines below the fortress. See area 16 (page 68) and the “Great Hall” encounter (page 83) for more information.
Features of the Area Illumination: Lanterns shed bright light in the barracks, the upper corridor, and the lower guard post. Dim light on the stairs and the landing. Ceiling: 20 feet high. Crates and Boxes: These low stacks of crates and boxes provide cover and are difficult terrain. They hold rations stolen from Dunesend and a handful of caravans attacked by Queen Shephatiah’s raiders. Rusted Portcullis: The portcullis is locked in place, requiring a DC 23 Strength check to raise or break through. A character at the winch in the barracks can raise the portcullis with two move actions and a DC 10 Strength check, or can lower it as a
minor action. The portcullis can also be raised or lowered in 1 round by anyone bearing an Ironfell signet ring that is touched to the bars or the winch (a minor action). Barracks: This area housed the miners, crafters, and guards of the Karak Lode, while the smaller side chamber housed shift-captains. The stairs lead up to another barracks that is not part of this encounter area. Bunks: These triple-deck stone bunks are anchored to floor and ceiling. A few are in use by the guards, and are covered by rough mattresses and threadbare blankets. The side chamber holds double bunks of similar construction, though these remain unused.
Tables and Benches: A long trestle table with benches has been haphazardly constructed from old crates. An old table and a set of chairs sized for dwarves occupies the side room, but these are so full of dry rot that they crumble into dust and splinters if used. Lower Guardroom: A single bunk and table with two chairs occupies this small chamber. An arrow slit looks out into the corridor beyond. The door is locked (the longtooth hunters each have a key). Iron Statue: The statue on the landing stands 10 feet tall and depicts a dwarf miner of the Ironfell Clan.
October 20 08
|
D U N G E O N 1 59
82
The Lost Mines of Karak
GREAT HALL Encounter Level 8 (1,625 XP)
Setup 1 dryad (D) 5 human lackeys (H) 1 longtooth hunter (L) 2 cacklefiend hyenas (C) This encounter takes place in areas 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, and 18 of the fortress map. Queen Shephatiah has placed a loyal dryad follower in command of the fortress, creating an effective decoy in the event that intruders manage to slip past the defenders of the upper levels. The real queen’s duplicity extends so far as to having all her servants in the fortress believe that this dryad is their true leader. The dryad cloaks herself in the illusion of an eladrin female. When the PCs enter this area, read: The heavy scent of decay is sharp here. Strange trees with silver-gray bark and gnarled branches rise almost to the ceiling, their thick roots punching down into the stone of the floor. Atop a dais to the north, an eladrin female sits upon an ornate throne. Five human brigands and a shifter warrior stand between you and the throne, moving to attack. If a PC succeeds on an Insight check opposed to the dryad’s Bluff, read: As if a veil had been lifted, you see through the corporeal disguise of the eladrin queen, revealing a foul humanoid plant creature beneath.
Dryad
Level 9 Skirmisher
Medium fey humanoid (plant) XP 400 Initiative +9 Senses Perception +12 HP 92; Bloodied 46 AC 23; Fortitude 22, Reflex 21, Will 21 Speed 8 (forest walk) m Claws (standard; at-will) +14 vs. AC; 1d8 + 4 damage, or 1d8 + 9 damage if the target is the only enemy adjacent to the dryad. Deceptive Veil (minor; at-will) ✦ Illusion The dryad can disguise itself to appear as any Medium humanoid, usually a beautiful elf or eladrin. A successful Insight check (opposed by the dryad’s Bluff check) pierces the disguise. Treestride (move; at-will) ✦ Teleportation The dryad can teleport 8 squares if it begins and ends adjacent to a tree, a treant, or a plant of Large size or bigger. Alignment Evil Languages Common, Elven Skills Bluff +10, Insight +12, Stealth +12 Str 19 (+8) Dex 17 (+7) Wis 17 (+7) Con 12 (+5) Int 10 (+4) Cha 13 (+5)
5 Human Lackeys
Level 7 Minion
Medium natural humanoid XP 75 Initiative +3 Senses Perception +4 HP 1; a missed attack never damages a minion. AC 19; Fortitude 17, Reflex 14, Will 15; see also mob rule Speed 6 m Club (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon +12 vs. AC; 6 damage. Mob Rule The human lackey gains a +2 power bonus to all defenses while at least two other human lackeys are within 5 squares of it. Alignment Unaligned Languages Common Str 16 (+6) Dex 11 (+3) Wis 12 (+4) Con 14 (+5) Int 10 (+3) Cha 13 (+4) Equipment leather armor, club
October 20 08
|
D U N G E O N 1 59
83
The Lost Mines of Karak
Longtooth Hunter
Level 6 Soldier
2 Cacklefiend Hyenas
Level 7 Brute
Medium natural humanoid, shifter XP 250 Initiative +7 Senses Perception +9; low-light vision HP 71; Bloodied 35 AC 22; Fortitude 20, Reflex 17, Will 16 Speed 5 m Longsword (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon +12 vs. AC; 1d8 + 5 damage, and the target is marked until the end of the longtooth hunter’s next turn. M Hamstring (standard; encounter) ✦ Weapon The longtooth hunter makes a longsword attack. If the attack hits, it makes a secondary attack against the same target. Secondary Attack: +9 vs. Reflex; the target is slowed (save ends). Follow Quarry (immediate reaction, when an adjacent enemy shifts; at-will) The longtooth hunter shifts toward the enemy. Longtooth Shifting (minor, usable only while bloodied; encounter) ✦ Healing Until the end of the encounter or until rendered unconscious, the longtooth hunter gains a +2 bonus to damage rolls. In addition, for as long as it is bloodied, the longtooth hunter gains regeneration 2. Alignment Unaligned Languages Common Skills Athletics +14, Endurance +11, Nature +9 Str 20 (+8) Dex 14 (+5) Wis 13 (+4) Con 15 (+5) Int 10 (+3) Cha 9 (+2) Equipment chainmail, light shield, longsword
Large elemental beast XP 300 Initiative +5 Senses Perception +11; low-light vision HP 96; Bloodied 48; see also acid bloodspurt AC 19; Fortitude 20, Reflex 17, Will 18 Resist 20 acid Speed 8 m Bite (standard; at-will) ✦ Acid +10 vs. AC; 1d6 + 5 damage, and ongoing 5 acid damage (save ends); see also pack attack. C Fiendish Cackle (minor; recharge 5 6 ) ✦ Fear Close burst 3; deafened creatures are immune; targets enemies; +8 vs. Will; the target takes a –2 penalty to attack rolls until the end of the cacklefiend hyena’s next turn. C Acid Bloodspurt (when first bloodied; encounter) ✦ Acid Close burst 1; automatic hit; 2d8 acid damage, and ongoing 5 acid damage (save ends). Pack Attack A cacklefiend hyena deals an extra 1d6 damage against an enemy adjacent to two or more of the cacklefiend hyena’s allies. Harrier If a cacklefiend hyena is adjacent to an enemy, all other creatures have combat advantage against that enemy when making melee attacks. Alignment Chaotic evil Languages Abyssal, Common Str 20 (+8) Dex 14 (+5) Wis 14 (+5) Con 16 (+6) Int 6 (+1) Cha 10 (+3)
Tactics
behind one of her sussur trees if a PC steps onto the dais or hits her with a ranged attack. She stays at the edge of combat, hoping to pick off a lone PC to deal extra damage with her claw attacks.
The human lackeys stay close to take advantage of mob rule as they prevent anyone from reaching their queen. The longtooth hunter chooses a lightly armored target for his first hamstring attack. He stays in the thick of melee, flanking with the human lackeys or the cacklefiend hyenas if possible. The cacklefiend hyenas enter the fray in the second round, using fiendish cackle to harry foes, then following up with bite attacks. The dryad stays out of combat for as long as possible, holding her action and using treestride to teleport
Features of the Area Illumination: Dim light from shrouded oil lamps set high on the pillars. Ceiling: 40 feet high. Pillars: These provide cover and can be climbed with a DC 15 Athletics check. Dais and Throne: This stone platform stands 2 feet above the floor. Atop it is a marble throne carved
with bas-reliefs of dwarf miners at work. The throne provides superior cover to anyone who squeezes behind it. Sussur Trees: The power of the dryad has caused a grove of sussur trees to erupt through the flagstones of the floor, their topmost limbs brushing the ceiling. Also known as deeproot trees, sussurs grow only in the caverns of the Underdark. Their gnarled branches have few leaves but feature sprawling clusters of aerial roots. With a DC 17 Nature check, a PC determines that these trees must somehow be feeding on energy within the ground (the subtle emanations of chaos energy from the mines below). The trunks of these trees can be climbed with a DC 17 Athletics check. The sparse branches of a tree (beginning 10 feet up) provide concealment to anyone within them. Kitchen: The fortress’s main kitchen lies just off the great hall. It includes a side larder, now empty except for a lone sussur tree. Tables: These stone tables are tall enough that a Small creature can move under them and gain cover. It costs 2 squares of movement to hop up onto a table. A character can make a DC 17 Strength check to tip over a stone table, which then grants superior cover. Cistern: A well shaft descends 20 feet to a cistern of cold, crystal-clear water. A steel bucket and chain are bolted to the wall nearby. Dead Villager: The decomposing corpse of a villager from Dunesend lies next to the throne. If the PCs see through the dryad’s deceptive veil before she enters combat, they see her feet turn to roots digging deep into the body.
October 20 08
|
D U N G E O N 1 59
84
The Lost Mines of Karak
CRYPTS
When the PCs enter this area, read:
Encounter Level 7 (1,500 XP)
Where this long hall turns back on itself, its walls are lined to both sides with steel doors etched with glowing Dwarven runes.
Setup 1 lesser berbalang (B) The dwarves of Karak interred their dead here. A berbalang now makes its lair among these ancient corpses.
When the berbalang emerges, read: One of the vault doors slams open. Within is a hideous creature with batlike wings and feral claws, shrieking as it attacks.
Tactics The berbalang summons a duplicate each round in an adjacent cell. The creatures focus on one or two lightly armored PCs, flanking to make use of their Lesser Berbalang
Level 7 Solo Skirmisher
Medium immortal humanoid XP 1,500 Initiative +13 Senses Perception +6 AC 22; Fortitude 19, Reflex 22, Will 18; see also psychic deflection HP 312; Bloodied 156 Saving Throws +5 Speed 6, fly 8 Action Points 2 m Claw (standard; at-will) +11 vs. AC; 1d8 + 5 damage. Summon Duplicate (minor, not while bloodied; at-will) ✦ Conjuration, Psychic The berbalang manifests an exact duplicate of itself in an unoccupied adjacent square. It can have no more than four duplicates at once, and duplicates cannot summon other duplicates. When a duplicate appears, it makes an initiative check and joins the battle on that initiative count. All damage a duplicate deals is treated as psychic damage. A duplicate has the same statistics as the berbalang except for its hit points. When the berbalang manifests a duplicate, the berbalang loses onequarter of its current hit points and the duplicate appears with that quantity of hit points. The berbalang’s maximum number of hit points remains the same. Duplicates last until the berbalang reaches 0 hit points, absorbs them, or uses sacrifice. A duplicate must stay within 10 squares of the berbalang at all times or it disappears.
berbalang sneak attack. When a duplicate is reduced to 20 hit points or fewer, the berbalang maneuvers next to it to make use of its sacrifice power. If reduced to 50 hit points or fewer, the berbalang flees the crypt and the fortress.
Features of the Area Illumination: The glowing runes of the vault doors fill the area with dim light. Ceiling: 20 feet high. Burial Vaults: The steel vault doors are scribed with glowing runes that list the names of those interred within. The remains held here have mostly been consumed by the berbalang.
Absorb Duplicate (standard, at-will) ✦ Healing The berbalang absorbs a duplicate adjacent to it and regains 30 hit points. Berbalang Sneak Attack A berbalang or a duplicate that flanks an enemy with another duplicate deals an extra 1d8 damage on melee attacks against that enemy. A Sacrifice (standard; at-will) ✦ Psychic Area burst 1 centered on a duplicate; the berbalang can cause one of its duplicates to explode in a burst of psychic gore; +8 vs. Fortitude; 2d8 + 5 psychic damage, plus the target is dazed (save ends). Miss: No damage, but the target is dazed (save ends). Hit or Miss: The berbalang takes 15 damage. Psychic Deflection (immediate reaction, when the berbalang is damaged by an attack; at-will) ✦ Psychic The berbalang can deflect the damage it takes from an attack to one of its duplicates. Any effects or secondary attacks included in the attack are also deflected to the duplicate. The damage a duplicate takes in this way is considered psychic damage. Alignment Evil Languages Supernal Str 16 (+8) Dex 22 (+11) Wis 13 (+6) Con 14 (+7) Int 14 (+7) Cha 15 (+7)
October 20 08
|
D U N G E O N 1 59
85
The Lost Mines of Karak
FOILED AMBUSH Encounter Level 6 (1,225 XP)
Setup 1 troglodyte curse chanter (T) 5 cavern chokers (C) This encounter occurs only after the party has finished exploring the upper levels. Before the PCs can make further plans, a sandstorm descends on the area, forcing them to linger within the fortress. When the PCs return to the entry tunnel, read: The path you followed around the bluff is gone, swallowed by a raging sandstorm. It is not clear how long the storm will last, but the empty fortress offers shelter. However, on the sand-strewn floor past the portcullis, you notice something. Humanoid tracks have been laid down by bare feet, a telltale yellow feather trodden beneath them. The Birdman appears to have left the fortress, setting out into the deadly storm. If the PCs are inclined to go after the Birdman, they can brave the storm for only a few minutes before being forced back to shelter. No sign of the Birdman can be found. Queen Shephatiah learns of the PCs’ infiltration when the dryad fails to appear at area 29 with her daily report. The troglodyte curse chanter is charged with maintaining contact with the dryad, opening the secret tunnel from the mines with his Ironfell signet ring (see “Return to the Cells,” below). When the dryad failed to report and the curse chanter saw the Birdman’s cell empty, he sent word to Shephatiah and took a team of chokers to investigate.
Troglodyte Curse Chanter
Level 8 Controller (Leader)
Medium natural humanoid (reptile) XP 350 Initiative +5 Senses Perception +13; darkvision Troglodyte Stench aura 1; living enemies in the aura take a –2 penalty to attack rolls. HP 93; Bloodied 46 AC 23; Fortitude 22, Reflex 17, Will 22 Speed 5 m Quarterstaff (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon +12 vs. AC; 1d8 + 2 damage. m Claw (standard; at-will) +10 vs. AC; 1d4 + 2 damage. R Poison Ray (standard; at-will) ✦ Poison Ranged 10; +11 vs. Fortitude; 1d6 + 5 poison damage, and the target is weakened (save ends). R Cavern Curse (standard; recharge 3 4 5 6 ) ✦ Necrotic Ranged 5; +11 vs. Fortitude; the target takes ongoing 5 necrotic damage and is slowed (save ends both). C Tunnel Grace (minor 1/round; recharge 4 5 6 ) Close burst 10; all allies in the burst gain +5 speed until the end of the troglodyte shaman’s next turn. C Chant of Renewal (standard; encounter) ✦ Healing Close burst 5; bloodied allies in the burst regain 15 hit points. Alignment Chaotic evil Languages Draconic Skills Dungeoneering +13, Endurance +14, Religion +9 Str 15 (+6) Dex 12 (+5) Wis 18 (+8) Con 21 (+9) Int 10 (+4) Cha 14 (+6) Equipment robes, quarterstaff, skull mask
This encounter assumes that the PCs set up camp in the northern overlook (area 19 of the fortress map). This area is the least despoiled and most defensible area of the complex. If the PCs choose to rest in another location, rework the encounter as necessary. This encounter occurs 4 hours after the PCs finish their previous exploration. This interrupts any attempt to take an extended rest. If some of the PCs indicate they are sleeping, note which characters are awake and which are on watch. The troglodyte curse chanter and one cavern choker come up from area 25. Four more cavern chokers approach from the courtyard and the corridor to
5 Cavern Chokers
Level 4 Lurker
Medium natural humanoid XP 175 Initiative +9 Senses Perception +3; darkvision HP 42; Bloodied 21 AC 17 (see also chameleon hide); Fortitude 15, Reflex 15, Will 13 Speed 6, climb 6 (spider climb) m Tentacle Claw (standard; at-will) Reach 2; +9 vs. AC; 1d8 + 3 damage, and the target is grabbed (until escape). A target trying to escape the grab takes a –4 penalty to the check. M Choke (standard; at-will) Grabbed target only; +9 vs. Fortitude; 1d8 + 3 damage. Body Shield (immediate interrupt, when targeted by a melee or a ranged attack against Reflex or AC; recharges when the choker makes a successful tentacle claw or choke attack) The cavern choker makes its grabbed victim the target instead. The choker cannot use this power to redirect attacks made by a creature it is currently grabbing. Chameleon Hide (minor; at-will) The cavern choker gains concealment until the start of its next turn. It can’t use this power while grabbing a creature or while grabbed. Alignment Unaligned Languages Common Skills Stealth +10 Str 17 (+5) Dex 17 (+5) Wis 13 (+3) Con 12 (+3) Int 6 (+0) Cha 6 (+0)
the west after slipping through the fortress’s lower level. The curse chanter uses his Ironfell signet ring to open any locked doors and raise the portcullis. Perception Check DC 17 (if the PCs left the portcullis down): From beyond the eastern door, you hear the rattling of a portcullis being raised. Just before the attack, the PCs receive a mysterious warning: Suddenly, the silence is shattered by a frantic chirping. The Birdman’s canaries are nowhere to be seen, yet their shrill warning echoes from the stones.
October 20 08
|
D U N G E O N 1 59
86
The Lost Mines of Karak
When the chokers attack, read: You see sudden movement at the arrow slits along the south wall. Three gray-skinned creatures with long, spindly arms are squeezing through the narrow gaps. If the PCs have barred or spiked the eastern door, it takes the troglodyte 1d4 rounds to break through. When the troglodyte enters, read: A hulking troglodyte with a skull mask and staff bursts through the east door, another gray-skinned choker behind him.
Tactics The chokers make tentacle claw attacks against lightly armored PCs, grabbing in order to choke. They stay in the thick of melee with grabbed foes, trusting their body shield to deflect attacks. The troglodyte curse chanter hits the chokers with tunnel grace each round, using cavern curse against the strongest-looking melee combatants. It uses poison ray against PCs on the edge of the fray. All these creatures fight to the death for the Queen of the Drylands.
Development Any search of the curse chanter reveals the Ironfell signet ring he carries.
and a DC 10 Strength check, or can lower it as a minor action. A portcullis can also be raised or lowered in 1 round by anyone bearing an Ironfell signet ring that is touched to the bars or the winch (a minor action). Arrow Slits: These apertures provide superior cover to creatures on either side of them. However, they allow attacks to be made only in the two squares adjacent to them. A creature standing in a square adjacent to the wall 5 feet or more from an arrow slit cannot be seen by anyone on the other side. The cavern chokers’ rubbery bones allow them to squeeze through these narrow openings at half speed.
Features of the Area
RETURN TO THE CELLS
Illumination: Whatever the PCs use. Ceiling: 20 feet high. Rusted Portcullises: The portcullises are locked in place, requiring a DC 23 Strength check to raise or break through. A character at a winch near one of the arrow slits can raise a portcullis with two move actions
In the aftermath of combat, any Perception check notices a scattering of yellow feathers near the passage to area 16. Subsequent checks reveal more feathers in the hall at area 23 and outside area 29. If the PCs enter the area of the cells, they see the following.
The solid f loor of the southeast cell now contains a perfectly round hole at the head of a smooth-walled shaft leading straight down. Below the floor, an aging pulley system descends into darkness. The pulley raises and lowers an 8-foot-wide wooden lift platform that sits now a few feet below the hole. The battered platform is emblazoned with the faded crest of Clan Ironfell. Touching an Ironfell signet ring to the floor of the cell causes the magic portal to close or open. Of the mysterious Birdman, there is no further sign.
The Way Down The ancient hoist shows signs of repair and much use. Unless the PCs elect to descend the shaft in some other way (it takes a DC 25 Athletics check to scale its smooth walls), up to six characters can descend on the platform. It takes a DC 10 Strength check to lower the lift and a DC 15 Strength check to raise it. Up to two other characters can aid the character making the check.
October 20 08
|
D U N G E O N 1 59
87
The Lost Mines of Karak
MINE ENTRANCE Encounter Level 8 (1,625 XP)
Setup 3 troglodyte spear warriors (W) 1 troglodyte mauler (M) 2 troglodyte impalers (I) The entrance to Queen Shephatiah’s mines are guarded by a force of troglodytes and the ancient dwarven trap they have restored. The troglodytes are on alert and waiting for the return of the curse chanter’s strike team. The tactical map shows their position if the PCs approach unseen and unheard (for example, by sending a scout down to reconnoiter). If these creatures are aware of the PCs’ approach, see below. When the PCs can see beyond the portcullis, read: The passage ahead is blocked by a portcullis, a pair of troglodytes on guard beyond it. From behind them comes the sound of voices speaking in hushed tones. The troglodytes sound an alarm as soon as they see the PCs, or if the curse chanter and its party do not reappear immediately after the descent of the lift. If the PCs take more than 1 round to decide how to attack, the troglodytes all move into defensive positions in the corridor.
Tactics The troglodytes initially stay back from the portcullis, trying to lure the PCs into approaching and triggering the poisoned dart wall trap. Once that trap is activated or bypassed, they approach. (The trap fires only south of the portcullis.)
3 Troglodyte Spear Warriors
Level 12 Minion
Medium natural humanoid (reptile) XP 175 Initiative +6 Senses Perception +5; darkvision Troglodyte Stench aura 1; living enemies in the aura take a –2 penalty to attack rolls. HP 1; a missed attack never damages a minion. AC 25; Fortitude 25, Reflex 22, Will 21 Speed 5 M Longspear (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon Reach 2; +15 vs. AC; 7 damage. Alignment Chaotic evil Languages Draconic Skills Athletics +14, Endurance +13 Str 18 (+9) Dex 12 (+6) Wis 11 (+5) Con 16 (+8) Int 6 (+3) Cha 8 (+4) Equipment light shield, longspear
Troglodyte Mauler
Level 6 Soldier
Medium natural humanoid (reptile) XP 250 Initiative +6 Senses Perception +5; darkvision Troglodyte Stench aura 1; living enemies in the aura take a –2 penalty to attack rolls. HP 74; Bloodied 37 AC 22; Fortitude 21, Reflex 18, Will 19 Speed 5 m Greatclub (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon +12 vs. AC; 2d4 + 4 damage, and the target is marked until the end of the troglodyte mauler’s next turn. m Claw (standard; at-will) +10 vs. AC; 1d4 + 4 damage. M Bite (minor 1/round; at-will) Requires combat advantage; +10 vs. Fortitude; 1d6 + 4 damage, and until the end of the troglodyte mauler’s next turn, healing on the target restores only half the total amount. R Javelin (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon Ranged 10/20; +12 vs. AC; 1d6 + 4 damage. Alignment Chaotic evil Languages Draconic Skills Athletics +12, Endurance +12 Str 18 (+7) Dex 12 (+4) Wis 15 (+5) Con 18 (+7) Int 6 (+1) Cha 8 (+2) Equipment greatclub, 2 javelins
Until the PCs raise the portcullis, the troglodyte warriors harry them with spear attacks from 2 squares away. Once the portcullis is up, the warriors
2 Troglodyte Impalers
Level 7 Artillery
Medium natural humanoid (reptile) XP 300 Initiative +5 Senses Perception +9; darkvision Troglodyte Stench aura 1; living enemies in the aura take a –2 penalty to attack rolls. HP 69; Bloodied 34 AC 22; Fortitude 22, Reflex 19, Will 18 Speed 5 m Spear (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon +11 vs. AC; 1d8 + 4 damage. m Claw (standard; at-will) +9 vs. AC; 1d4 + 4 damage. r Javelin (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon Ranged 10/20; +12 vs. AC; 1d6 + 4 damage. R Impaling Shot (standard; recharge 3 4 5 6 ) ✦ Weapon Requires javelin; ranged 10; +12 vs. AC; 2d6 + 4 damage, and the troglodyte impaler makes a secondary attack against the same target. Secondary Attack: +10 vs. Fortitude; the target is restrained (save ends). Alignment Chaotic evil Languages Draconic Skills Athletics +12, Endurance +13 Str 19 (+7) Dex 14 (+5) Wis 13 (+4) Con 21 (+8) Int 7 (+1) Cha 9 (+2) Equipment spear, quiver of 6 javelins
form a defensive line, holding the PCs in place while the impalers and the mauler make ranged attacks from behind. The troglodyte impalers launch javelin attacks against lightly armored PCs and anyone making ranged attacks, using impaling shot as often as possible. Once the PCs move past the warriors, they continue to make ranged attacks for as long as possible, falling back into the northern chamber. An impaler makes spear attacks if surrounded, but it takes any opportunity to move back into javelin range. The troglodyte mauler moves up with his warrior allies to fight in the first rank when the PCs raise the portcullis. He targets the strongest-looking melee combatant in the first rank of PCs, marking the foe with greatclub attacks. All these creatures fight to the death.
October 20 08
|
D U N G E O N 1 59
88
The Lost Mines of Karak
Seams of Chaos
Poisoned Dart Wall Trap
Within the rough mine shafts to the north, the PCs catch their first sight of the mysterious veins of red stone lining the walls of the mine.
Darts fire from the wall, preventing characters from advancing along the corridor.
Within the damp gray stone of the cavern walls, a faint light pulses. On close examination, you see veins of dark red twisting through the stone of the walls and ceiling, glowing with a dull light. A DC 17 Dungeoneering or Nature check reveals that this is not a known Underdark phenomena. A DC 17 Arcana check identifies the stuff as veins of raw elemental energy that has somehow leached into the natural world.
Features of the Area Illumination: None. Ceiling: 10 feet high Entry Shaft: The shaft descends 80 feet from the cell above to the mine below. Its sheer walls can be climbed with a DC 25 Athletics check. Lift Platform: The 8-foot-wide lift platform can carry up to six Medium or smaller creatures. It takes a DC 10 Strength check to lower the lift and a DC 15 Strength check to raise it. Up to two other characters can aid the character making the check. Mine Entrance: Just below the entry shaft, this finished stone chamber is piled high with ore carts, storage bins, shoring timbers, and spare parts for the hoist system. Guardroom: The guardroom contains a rough table and chairs, as well as the winch that controls the portcullis. Chairs: These are difficult terrain.
Level 6 Blaster XP 250
Trap: Each round on its initiative, the trap fires a barrage of poison darts that randomly attack 2d4 targets in the entire area south of the portcullis. Perception ✦ DC 17: The character notices the small holes in the walls. ✦ DC 21: The character notices the tripwire trigger. Initiative +7 Trigger When a character moves across the tripwire south of the portcullis, the trap rolls initiative. Attack Standard Action Ranged 20 Targets: 2d4 targets in range Attack: +11 vs. AC Hit: 1d8+2 damage and ongoing 5 poison damage (save ends). Countermeasures ✦ An adjacent character can disable the tripwire with a DC 17 Thievery check. ✦ A character who moves no more than 1 square on a turn gains a +5 bonus to AC against the dart attacks.
Tables: A table is tall enough that a Small creature can move under it and gain cover. It costs 2 squares of movement to hop up onto a table. A character can make a DC 10 Strength check to tip over a table, which then grants superior cover. Rusted Portcullis: The portcullis is locked in place, requiring a DC 23 Strength check to raise or break through. A character at the winch in the guardroom can raise the portcullis with two move actions and a DC 10 Strength check, or can lower it as a minor action. The portcullis can also be raised or lowered in 1 round by anyone bearing an Ironfell signet ring that is touched to the bars or the winch (a minor action).
Tunnels: Beyond the guardroom, the tunnels and chambers of the mine become hewn stone shored up by ancient timbers. Rubble: These sections of crumbling stone are difficult terrain.
October 20 08
|
D U N G E O N 1 59
89
The Lost Mines of Karak
CHAOS MINES Encounter Level 7 (1,500 XP)
Setup 1 bloodweb spider swarm (S) 1 barlgura (B) 1 chillborn zombie (Z) 2 carrion crawlers (C) As the PCs make their way through the mine, they see signs of ancient battles and renewed mining activity. Recent tracks along the main passageway lead you on. The central caverns you pass through show signs of recent mining activity, though on a much smaller scale than the dwarves’ operations of old. Here and there, dwarf skeletons are strewn across the rocky ground, rusted weapons lying nearby. The dwarves of Karak appear to have slain each other in the end. Oddly, however, many of the skeletons appear to be missing their skulls. The track the PCs follow leads them to a former main cavern that now guards access to Queen Shephatiah’s lair. One of her demonic lieutenants has taken charge of marshalling the natural predators that lair here. As the PCs approach from the southeast, the barlgura watches from the cover of his ledge. When the PCs enter this area, read: A vast gallery opens up here where the dwarves of Ironfell once worked, their long-rotted bodies now scattered before you. The rickety remains of ancient ladders and carts are spread across the cavern. One prominent vein of the strange, red-glowing stone crosses this chamber’s f loor and climbs its walls, its cold light pulsing brightly.
Perception Check DC 7: As in the chambers above, more than half the dwarven bodies here are missing their skulls. DC 12: From around the corner of an outcropping, the shaggy head of a huge beast watches you. DC 17: The sounds of skittering stone echo faintly from further into the chamber, an unseen creature moving there. The chillborn zombie rises as soon as a PC passes through any square of elemental energy adjacent to it. When the chillborn zombie rises, read: A rustling in the rubble reveals a gray-skinned hand grasping the air. A bearded face follows, the animated corpse of a long-dead dwarf lurching to its feet. A cold mist f lows from between its black teeth. Bloodweb Spider Swarm
Level 7 Soldier
Medium natural beast (spider, swarm) XP 300 Initiative +12 Senses Perception +6; tremorsense 5 Swarm Attack aura 1; the bloodweb spider swarm makes a basic attack as a free action against each enemy that begins its turn in the aura. In addition, an enemy that enters or starts its turn in the aura is slowed (save ends) by strands of crimson webbing. HP 80; Bloodied 40 AC 21; Fortitude 16, Reflex 20, Will 16 Resist half damage from melee and ranged attacks; Vulnerable 10 against close and area attacks Speed 4, climb 4 (spider climb) m Swarm of Fangs (standard; at-will) ✦ Poison +10 vs. Reflex; 2d6 + 2 damage, and ongoing 5 poison damage (save ends). Alignment Unaligned Languages — Skills Stealth +15 Str 14 (+5) Dex 24 (+10) Wis 16 (+6) Con 16 (+6) Int 1 (–2) Cha 8 (+2)
Barlgura
Level 8 Brute
Large elemental beast (demon) XP 350 Initiative +7 Senses Perception +12; low-light vision HP 108; Bloodied 54; see also savage howl AC 19; Fortitude 20, Reflex 17, Will 17 Resist 10 variable (1/encounter; see glossary) Speed 8, climb 8 m Slam (standard; at-will) Reach 2, +10 vs. AC; 1d8 + 6 damage, or 2d8 + 6 damage if the barlgura is bloodied. M Double Attack (standard; at-will) The barlgura makes two slam attacks. Savage Howl (free, when first bloodied; encounter) The barlgura and all allies within 5 squares of the barlgura gain a +2 bonus to attack rolls until the end of the barlgura’s next turn. Alignment Chaotic evil Languages Abyssal Skills Athletics +15 Str 22 (+10) Dex 16 (+7) Wis 16 (+7) Con 18 (+8) Int 6 (+2) Cha 12 (+5)
Chillborn Zombie
Level 6 Soldier
Medium natural animate (cold, undead) XP 250 Initiative +5 Senses Perception +3; darkvision Chillborn Aura (Cold) aura 2; any creature that enters or begins its turn in the aura takes 5 cold damage. Multiple chillborn auras deal cumulative damage. HP 71; Bloodied 35; see also death burst AC 22; Fortitude 20, Reflex 16, Will 16 Immune disease, poison; Resist 10 cold, 10 necrotic; Vulnerable 5 fire, 5 radiant Speed 4 m Slam (standard; at-will) ✦ Cold +11 vs. AC; 1d6 + 4 damage, and the target is immobilized until the end of the chillborn zombie’s next turn and takes ongoing 5 cold damage (save ends); see also ice reaper. C Death Burst (when reduced to 0 hit points) ✦ Cold The chillborn zombie explodes. Close burst 1; +9 vs. Fortitude; 2d6 + 2 cold damage, and the target is slowed (save ends). Ice Reaper ✦ Cold The chillborn zombie deals an extra 5 cold damage to an immobilized creature. Alignment Unaligned Languages — Str 19 (+7) Dex 10 (+3) Wis 10 (+3) Con 15 (+5) Int 2 (–1) Cha 6 (+1)
October 20 08
|
D U N G E O N 1 59
90
The Lost Mines of Karak
2 Carrion Crawlers
Level 7 Controller
Large aberrant beast XP 300 Initiative +6 Senses Perception +5; darkvision HP 81; Bloodied 40 AC 20; Fortitude 19, Reflex 18, Will 17 Speed 6, climb 6 (spider climb) m Tentacles (standard; at-will) ✦ Poison Reach 2; +10 vs. Fortitude; 1d4 + 5 damage, and the target takes ongoing 5 poison and is slowed (save ends both). First Failed Save: The target is immobilized instead of slowed (save ends). Second Failed Save: The target is stunned instead of immobilized (save ends). Saving throws made against the carrion crawler’s paralytic tentacles take a –2 penalty. M Bite (standard; at-will) +12 vs. AC; 1d10 + 5 damage. Alignment Unaligned Languages — Str 20 (+8) Dex 16 (+6) Wis 14 (+5) Con 17 (+6) Int 2 (–1) Cha 16 (+6)
Tactics The chillborn zombie wades into the largest group of PCs with slam attacks, targeting immobilized creatures for extra damage from its ice reaper power. The carrion crawlers surge into battle as soon as the zombie rises, targeting individual PCs with repeated attacks in the hope of a quick kill. The bloodweb spider swarm stays in the thick of combat to maximize the effect of its swarm attack aura, slowing the PCs in the hope of making them easier targets for the carrion crawlers. If it is not spotted, the barlgura waits until the PCs are engaged by the chillborn zombie or the bloodweb spider swarm before attacking. Once in melee, it makes double attacks, staying close to its servants to maximize the effect of its savage howl. It stays within the vein of elemental energy whenever possible, hoping that the area’s effect hinders any PC making melee attacks against it.
Development The chillborn zombie was once the mine-thane of Karak, killed with the rest of his people and raised to undeath by the lingering power of the elemental energy in this area. Any Perception check made to search the body shows that the ring finger on its right hand has been recently hacked off (when Shephatiah found and took the Ironfell signet ring).
Features of the Area Illumination: The vein of elemental energy fills the chamber with dim light. Ceiling: 60 feet high. Ledge: The barlgura’s ledge is 20 feet high. It can be climbed with a DC 20 Athletics check. Rubble: These sections of crumbling stone and debris are difficult terrain. Elemental Chaos: A vein of glowing red stone tainted with elemental energy crosses the cavern floor and climbs the walls. Creatures of chaotic evil alignment standing in a square of elemental chaos gain a +2 bonus to attack rolls and damage rolls. Creatures of any other alignment standing in a square of elemental chaos take a –2 penalty to attack rolls and damage rolls. Eggs: This clutch of a dozen 1-foot-diameter green ovoid spheres are carrion crawler eggs. If any PC approaches within 10 squares of the eggs during combat, the carrion crawlers gain a +2 bonus to attack rolls against that character.
October 20 08
|
D U N G E O N 1 59
91
The Lost Mines of Karak
QUEEN’S RETINUE Encounter Level 10 (2,600 XP)
Setup Shephatiah, guardian naga (N) 2 lesser mezzodemons (M) 1 firelasher (F) This deep cavern was Clan Ironfell’s downfall. When the dwarves broke into this area, they uncovered a Queen Shephatiah, Guardian Naga
Level 12 Elite Artillery
Large immortal elemental* magical beast (reptile) XP 1,400 Initiative +10 Senses Perception +13; darkvision HP 186; Bloodied 93 AC 25; Fortitude 23, Reflex 24, Will 22 Saving Throws +2 Speed 6 Action Points 1 m Tail Slap (standard; at-will) Reach 2; +16 vs. AC; 1d8 + 3 damage, and the target is pushed 2 squares. R Word of Pain (standard; at-will) ✦ Psychic Ranged 20; +17 vs. Will; 2d8 + 4 psychic damage, and the target is immobilized (save ends). C Spit Poison (standard; recharge 5 6 ) ✦ Poison Close blast 3; +15 vs. Fortitude; 1d8 + 2 poison damage, and the target takes ongoing 5 poison damage, a –2 penalty to Fortitude defense, and a –2 penalty to saving throws (save ends all). A Thunderstrike (standard; recharge 5 6 ) ✦ Thunder Area burst 1 within 20; +16 vs. Fortitude; 2d10 + 4 thunder damage, and the target is dazed (save ends). Miss: Half damage, and the target is not dazed. Alignment Evil Languages Common, Deep Speeh, Draconic, Abyssal, Primordial Skills Arcana +15, History +15, Insight +13 Str 16 (+9) Dex 18 (+10) Wis 14 (+8) Con 15 (+8) Int 18 (+10) Cha 12 (+7) * Shephatiah is considered to be an elemental creature while she wears her primordial ring.
2 Lesser Mezzodemons
Level 7 Soldier
Large elemental humanoid (demon) XP 300 Initiative +9 Senses Perception +13; darkvision HP 113; Bloodied 56 AC 23; Fortitude 21, Reflex 18, Will 19 Resist 20 poison, 10 variable (2/encounter; MM 282) Speed 6 m Trident (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon Requires trident; reach 2; +14 vs. AC; 1d8 + 4 damage. M Skewering Tines (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon Reach 2; +14 vs. AC; 1d8 + 4 damage, ongoing 5 damage target enemies only and the target is restrained (save ends both). While the target is restrained, the mezzodemon can’t make trident attacks. C Poison Breath (standard; recharge 5 6 ) ✦ Poison Close blast 3; targets enemies; +12 vs. Fortitude; 2d6 + 2 poison damage, and ongoing 5 poison damage (save ends). Alignment Chaotic evil Languages Abyssal Skills Intimidate +11 Str 20 (+10) Dex 15 (+7) Wis 16 (+8) Con 17 (+8) Int 10 (+5) Cha 13 (+6) Equipment trident
rift leading directly to the Elemental Chaos. Disaster struck as the rift flared, its terrible energy spreading along the veins of chaos stone throughout all the caverns of Karak. The dwarves of Clan Ironfell turned on each other in madness and were slain to the last. When those in the fortress above came down in search of their kin, they too were lost. The guardian naga Queen Shephatiah found her way to this cavern from the Elemental Chaos, discovering and learning how to control the rift. (Shephatiah is treated as an elemental creature by virtue of the primordial ring she wears. See the treasure entry in “Features of the Area.”) When the PCs can see into this area, read: A circular cavern before you shows signs of excavation on its far side. However, the way ahead is blocked by a wide
crevice that pulses with a lurid red glow. In the shadow of that light stand two red-skinned demons, slashing the air with three-clawed hands. Behind them are piled hundreds of dwarven skulls, a gruesome bier on which coils a serpentine creature with a humanlike face.
Tactics Queen Shephatiah and her defenders remain on their side of the rift, intent on forcing the PCs to come to them. The mezzodemons move to the edge of the rift and use poison breath against targets in range. They make
October 20 08
|
D U N G E O N 1 59
92
The Lost Mines of Karak
Firelasher
Level 11 Skirmisher
Large elemental magical beast (air, fire) XP 600 Initiative +12 Senses Perception +5 HP 108; Bloodied 54 AC 25; Fortitude 21, Reflex 25, Will 20 Immune disease, poison; Resist 25 fire Speed fly 8 (hover) m Fire Lash (standard; at-will) ✦ Fire Reach 2; +14 vs. Reflex; 2d8 + 5 fire damage. C Wildfire Cyclone (standard; recharge 5 6 ) ✦ Fire Close burst 2; +14 vs. Reflex; 2d6 + 5 fire damage, and the target is pushed 1 square and knocked prone. Miss: Half damage, and the target is neither pushed nor knocked prone. Whirlwind Dash (standard; recharge 6 ) ✦ Fire The firelasher can move up to twice its speed. It can move through spaces occupied by other creatures without provoking opportunity attacks. It must end its move in an unoccupied space. Any creature whose space the firelasher enters takes 10 fire damage. Mutable Shape The firelasher can squeeze through spaces as though it were a Medium creature. Alignment Unaligned Languages Primordial Str 11 (+5) Dex 21 (+10) Wis 11 (+5) Con 12 (+6) Int 7 (+3) Cha 8 (+4)
trident attacks against PCs within reach on the rift’s far side, or against those who attempt to cross it. Once engaged in melee, they make skewering tines attacks. Shephatiah uses word of pain and thunderstrike against targets on the far side of the rift, targeting ranged combatants or PCs not engaging the mezzodemons. If the PCs cross the rift, she moves behind the skull pile and continues to attack at range, making word of pain attacks. The firelasher lurks in the rift, emerging in the second round. It moves through the PCs with its whirlwind dash, making wildfire cyclone attacks in an attempt to push targets into the rift. If Shephatiah is killed or knocked unconscious, the firelasher and the mezzodemons flee through the
rift and disappear into the Elemental Chaos. The selfstyled Queen of the Drylands fights to the finish.
Conclusion Set apart from the refuse and debris of Shephatiah’s lair, the PCs find clues that explain how the naga reopened the mines—and hints of future conflicts. A DC 17 Search check within the chamber turns up a set of scrolls holding parchment correspondence written and transported by the naga’s mezzodemon lieutenants. The missives are in Deep Speech, and require a DC 17 Intelligence check to translate. The parchments detail how Shephatiah discovered the portal leading to the Karak Lode on a sojourn within the Elemental Chaos. They also make reference to the reopening of the mines being financed by a group that the scrolls do not name. These unknown masters have claimed the wealth of the Karak Lode for themselves, and are having that wealth shipped to them by way of the elemental rift. While the parchments indicate that this group intends to ramp up production in the mines in response to an increasing need for ore, the cryptic notes indicate that Shephatiah herself does not know the identity of those she works for. (If Queen Shephatiah is kept alive for questioning, do not let the PCs find the scrolls. Instead, have the naga bitterly bargain for her freedom, offering the PCs the above information if they allow her to flee.)
Features of the Area Illumination: The rift fills the area with dim light. Ceiling: 20 feet high. Bed of Skulls: Queen Shephatiah’s nest is composed of hundreds of dwarven skulls taken from the bodies that litter the mines. The pile provides cover and is difficult terrain for any creature smaller than Large.
Elemental Chaos Rift: A 20-foot-deep chasm cuts through the stone floor of the cavern, filled at the bottom with what appears to be bubbling magma shot through with vibrant hues of purple and blue. This barrier of elemental energy is a gate to the Elemental Chaos. The walls of the rift can be climbed with a DC 20 Athletics check. Elemental creatures can jump into the rift to pass through to the Elemental Chaos (a move action that deals no damage). All other creatures jumping or falling into the rift take 2d10 falling damage. Nonelemental creatures that hit the bottom of the rift find themselves waist-deep in a field of raw elemental energy. This is difficult terrain and deals 3d6 damage per round to nonelemental creatures within it. Treasure: In addition to any other treasure you place here, Queen Shephatiah wears a primordial ring on the tip of her tail and has an Ironfell signet ring hidden behind her bed of skulls (Perception DC 17).
Primordial Ring
Level 14
This ring consists of twisted metal bands whose colors shift before your eyes. Item Slot: Ring 21,000 gp Property: You are treated as an elemental creature (MM 281) as long as the ring is worn. Power (Daily): Minor Action: Gain resistance 10 variable (MM 282) until the end of the encounter or for 5 minutes. You cannot use this power to resist a damage type to which you have a vulnerability. If you’ve reached at least one milestone today, your resistance 10 variable becomes (2/encounter). G
About the Author Greg is a lifelong gamer who has been writing adventures for the past half-dozen years. He received his first ENnie award this year leaving only the Heisman Trophy and Nobel Prize left on his list of lifetime goals. He considers himself to be well ahead of schedule.
October 20 08
|
D U N G E O N 1 59
93
"The armies that today march across the fi elds and mountains of the world will tomorrow be forgotten, as will we all. But do not fear the progress of history, nor give up in today’s fight, for our efforts are far from futile. Instead, prepare your sword and shield and stand against the tide that threatens to overwhelm our lands. For though you and I may be forgotten in the years to come, what we do today will echo through the ages and determine the fate of all those who follow in our footsteps."
by Rodney Thompson illustrations by Jason A. Engle, Rob Alexander and Steve Prescott ✦ cartography by Mike Schley
Den of the Destroyer An adventure for 7th-level characters
TM & © 2008 Wizards of the Coast, Inc. All rights reserved.
November 20 08
|
D U N G E O N 16 0
14
Den of the Destroyer
“Den of the Destroyer” is an adventure for five 7thlevel characters. By the end of the adventure, the characters should reach 9th level. You can run this adventure as the sequel to “The Lost Mines of Karak,” continuing the unfolding story of the Scales of War adventure path, or run it as part of a campaign of your own design. In this adventure, the PCs are called back to Brindol by a surprising summons that sees them undertake a dangerous mission to an abandoned githzerai fortress. Along the way, they must deal with bounty hunters hired by an old enemy, and confront a vile gang of gnolls terrorizing Elsir Vale.
BACKGROUND Some months ago, a mysterious figure calling himself only the Emissary contacted the hobgoblin chieftain Sinruth and spurred him into reviving the marauding horde known as the Red Hand of Doom. Unbeknownst to both Sinruth and the PCs, this Emissary was the shadar-kai arms dealer Sarshan. Simultaneously, Sarshan began sending messages to the leader of a band of gnoll mercenaries, a disciple of Yeenoghu named Fangren, in the hopes of inciting the gnolls in a similar fashion. The gnolls were not so easily commanded, however, forcing Sarshan to take more drastic steps. While the goblins were content to raid Brindol thanks to little more than motivational letters, the gnoll mercenaries required something more. In order to secure their services, Sarshan arranged for the gnolls to receive several shipments of shadar-kai weapons from his storehouses in the Shadowfell. In exchange, Fangren agreed to lead his mercenaries
across Elsir Vale, pillaging, plundering, and seizing as many captives as possible. Fangren and his mercenaries went about the agreed-upon task with gusto, carving a swath of destruction across the borders of Elsir Vale. Using an ancient gith zerai monastery known as Fortress Graystone for their base of operations, the gnolls began kidnapping innocent inhabitants of the Vale for their own sinister pleasures. Most of their raids focused on outlying settlements, allowing them to wreak havoc without drawing the attention of more powerful parties. As the gnolls found more and more success in their raids on the Vale, their leader grew even hungrier for power. Soon, Fangren came to believe that their success was not due to shadar-kai weaponry but by the favor of the demon lord Yeenoghu. Fangren quickly started to see himself not as merely the leader of a band of gnolls, but as a chosen one of Yeenoghu, with a destiny to become one of the demon lord’s exarchs. While he sent his bands of mercenaries across the Vale, Fangren began gathering the components for the bloody ritual that would infuse him with the foul power of Yeenoghu. The gnoll shaman has completed the first phase of the ritual deep inside the githzerai fortress, opening an energy conduit to the Elemental Chaos in the hope of embracing the power of the Ruler of Ruin. However, the creation of this conduit and the powerful magic of Fangren’s ritual have had an effect the gnoll shaman did not expect. Within the Hall of Great Valor in Brindol, magic long hidden within an ancient ceremonial sword has been awoken. A week past, the sword spoke, begging the aid of a group of heroes—and asking for the PCs by name.
ADVENTURE SYNOPSIS In the aftermath of “Rescue at Rivenroar,” the PCs recovered not only the kidnapped inhabitants of Brindol but also several relics of great historical value to the inhabitants of Elsir Vale. Among these was a ceremonial platinum longsword. Though the folk of the vale have no knowledge of the sword being magic (and though the PCs would have detected no magic within it), it contains a primal essence that has been reawakened by Fangren’s powerful rituals. (If the PCs did not recover the treasures of the Hall of Great Valor, the sword was recovered by a local patrol that mopped up at Rivenroar after the party left.) The PCs are assumed to be in the city of Overlook when the adventure begins, most likely after returning and resting up from their adventures in “The Lost Mines of Karak.” The PCs hear that a messenger has recently arrived from Brindol, desperately seeking the party. On further investigation, the PCs discover that this messenger has been captured by a band of Lost Ones, the powerful thieving guild the PCs faced off against in “Shadow Rift of Umbraforge.” After rescuing the messenger, the players are beseeched to return to Brindol. Arriving in the town, the PCs head to the Hall of Great Valor and speak with the curator Sertanian, then with the sword itself. Identifying itself as Amyria, the sword charges the party with a mission: travel to an abandoned githzerai fortress now occupied by savage gnoll mercenaries, then perform a ritual to transform the sword into its true form. Even as the PCs weigh their next move, bounty hunters from Overlook attack the museum, wrecking the place as they target the party on behalf of an unknown patron.
November 20 08
|
D U N G E O N 16 0
15
Den of the Destroyer
With the sword in their possession, the PCs travel to the githzerai fortress. However, the arduous journey is made more dangerous by another bounty hunter—the elf Gilgathorn, who knows that Sarshan is the one who has put a price on the PCs’ heads. The PCs arrive at the monastery and fight their way through its gnoll defenders, Gilgathorn waiting for an opportune moment to make his move. In the end, the PCs find the ritual chamber and face off against Fangren. The energy conduit to the Elemental Chaos has been opened, the shaman channeling the power of Yeenoghu against the PCs. After defeating Fangren, the PCs perform the ritual that transforms the spirit of Amyria into its true form—a mysterious young woman who will come to play a central role in the events the PCs are caught up in.
THE QUESTS “Den of the Destroyer” offers the opportunity for PCs to earn quest XP in two places. Provided here is a list of quests, and their rewards, in the adventure. Major Quest—The Ritual of Amyria The PCs must reach the ritual chamber in Fortress Graystone, then perform the ritual described to them by the spirit trapped within the platinum longsword. Reward: 2,000 XP. Minor Quest—The Captives’ Fate The PCs need to discover what happened to the citizens of Elsir Vale who have been kidnapped by the gnolls. Reward: 350 XP.
PREPARING FOR ADVENTURE “Den of the Destroyer” takes the PCs from the city of Overlook to Brindol, and then to a gith zerai fortress hidden in the Giant’s Shield mountains. As they seek to end the threat of the gnoll shaman Fangren and his followers, the PCs are pursued by bounty hunters who they eventually discover have been sent by the shadar-kai arms dealer Sarshan. One of those bounty hunters—the elf Gilgathorn—is an ongoing threat as the PCs take the fight to the gnolls in Fortress Graystone. If you are anxious to start the adventure, read the introductory material (including the “Finding the Messenger” skill challenge) and the first two encounters (“Kidnappers” and “The Hall of Great Valor”). This will take the PCs up to the point where the sword asks for their aid, providing an exciting first adventure session. The bulk of the combat encounters take place within the ancient githzerai monastery known as Fortress Graystone. Some of the encounters within the fortress can take place in different areas, so familiarize yourself with the citadel’s overall layout.
What You Need to Play This adventure contains everything you need to play, including background information, setup, and encounters (including tactical maps). Reading through the DUNGEONS & DRAGONS 4th Edition rules is your first best step to understanding and preparing to run the adventure. As mentioned above, read through at least the opening sections and initial encounters before starting. This review enables you
to become familiar with the material and the style of presentation. The sections below describe the adventure format.
REVELATIONS “Den of the Destroyer” leads directly into the climax of the heroic tier adventures in the Scales of War adventure path. Many of the disparate pieces of information the PCs have gathered over the course of their previous adventures begin to come together in this adventure. As such, you will want to emphasize the following points of revelation to the players. ✦ The gnolls of the Wicked Fang pack have been hired by the shadar-kai arms dealer Sarshan to do his bidding in Elsir Vale. He has given them specific instructions, including seizing (and holding) Fortress Graystone and kidnapping powerful individuals from across the Vale. ✦ A bounty has been placed on the PCs’ heads by Sarshan himself. ✦ Fortress Graystone is more than an ancient ruin. The gith zerai who built it did so to protect a long-dormant energy conduit that links the site to both the Elemental Chaos and the Astral Sea. ✦ Sinruth, from “Rescue at Rivenroar,” was also manipulated into doing Sarshan’s bidding by the arms dealer’s deception. ✦ The platinum sword from Brindol is in reality the alternate form of a divine being whose full identity and purpose are yet to be revealed.
November 20 08
|
D U N G E O N 16 0
16
Den of the Destroyer
Using Tactical Encounters
Monster Statistics
Features of the Area
Each encounter includes several common elements.
Encounters include stat blocks for each monster type present in the encounter. If more than one monster of a particular kind is present, the stat block indicates how many creatures can be found.
This section describes special features noted on the map. If the location has items or areas of interest with which the characters can interact, those features are described here. Look here to see if a door is out of the ordinary, if an altar has a secret compartment, or if the area includes treasure.
Encounter Level Each tactical encounter assumes a group of five player characters. An encounter of average difficulty is one where the encounter level is equal to the level of the party. Encounters that are 1 or 2 levels lower than the party are easy encounters, while encounters that are a higher level than the party are difficult encounters. For overcoming an encounter, a group earns the XP value noted beside the encounter level. This amount should be divided by the number of group members, and an equal amount should be awarded to each character.
Setup This section of a tactical encounter provides you with the basic parameters of the encounter. First, it provides a key to the monsters in the encounter so you can locate them on the tactical map. Next, it provides context or background information for the encounter. The map of each encounter area indicates where the monsters are located when the encounter begins. The setup section also describes what the monsters are doing and how they react when the PCs arrive.
Read Aloud Text Read aloud text provides information detailing what the characters can see and are aware of. You do not have to read it word for word; feel free to paraphrase and use your own words when describing this information. Use read aloud text wisely. It is written for the most common approach to a particular situation, but what your player characters do might require you to alter the information in any number of ways.
Tactics This entry describes special actions the monsters take to defeat the adventurers. Sometimes this means the monsters take advantage of special features of the area or make use of special powers or equipment.
Map Each encounter includes a map keyed with the initial locations of each monster. The map also indicates the location of any special features of the area.
Treasure Preparation As with the previous installments of the Scales of War adventure path, this adventure makes use of the parcel system of treasure rewards described in the Dungeon Master’s Guide. The characters should accumulate fifteen parcels by the end of the adventure. You can supply these treasures in whatever way you wish, but the sidebar presents the most likely areas to feature treasure. During your preparation, assign parcels to the areas in the spaces provided.
TREASURE PARCELS Parcel A: Parcel B: Parcel C: Parcel D: Parcel E: Parcel F: Parcel G:
_____________________________ , Temple of Pelor. ___________________________ , Hall of Great Valor. __________________________________ , The Stairs. __________________________, Githzerai Mind Trap. __________________________________ , The Cells. ___________________________ , Training Chamber. _________________________ , Meditation Chamber.
Parcel H: ____________________________ , Marshaling Point. Parcel I: Parcel 14, Marshaling Point. Parcel J: ______________________________ , Ritual Chamber. Parcel K: _____________________________ , Ritual Chamber. Parcel L: ______________________________ , Thorn’s Attack. Parcel M: Parcel 15, Thorn’s Attack. Parcel N: Parcel 16, Thorn’s Attack.
Based on the guidelines in the Dungeon Master’s Guide, the following parcels can go in the spaces above. Rely on the wish lists your players gave you for the first four parcels. Parcel 1: Magic item, level 11 Parcel 2: Magic item, level 11 Parcel 3: Magic item, level 9 Parcel 4: Magic item, level 8 Parcel 5: 1,500 gp art object + 400 gp Parcel 6: Three 500 gp gems + 200 gp Parcel 7: 500 gp gem + 800 gp Parcel 8: 1,100 gp Parcel 9: Eleven 100 gp gems
Parcel 10: Three 250 gp art objects + two potions of healing Parcel 11: 600 gp Parcel 12: Four 100 gp gems Parcel 13: One 250 gp art object + 50 gp Parcel 14: Wicked Fang* Parcel 15: Figurine of wondrous power: elderwood falcon* Parcel 16: Figurine of wondrous power: ironwood hound* * See “Appendix II, New Items,” page 96.
November 20 08
|
D U N G E O N 16 0
17
Den of the Destroyer
STARTING THE ADVENTURE The adventure begins after the PCs return to Overlook following the events of “The Lost Mines of Karak.” Though a sense of urgency should prevail once things get underway, there is no set time frame for the messenger to arrive from Brindol. In particular, if the PCs are behind their expected XP totals (each character should be at about the midpoint of 7th level going into this adventure), feel free to run a side trek adventure to get them to where they need to be.
MESSAGE FROM BRINDOL The adventure begins when a messenger from Brindol arrives in Overlook searching for the PCs. The messenger, a young human woman named Alys, arrived in Overlook a day before. Unfortunately, when she sought the PCs out through the city watch, her queries also reached the ears of the Lost Ones (see “Siege of Bordrin’s Watch,” page 15, and “Shadow Rift of Umbraforge,” page 9). Alys’s arrival was unfortunately timed. Mere days ago, a bounty was placed on the PCs by Sarshan, the shadar-kai arms dealer the party dealt with in “The Shadow Rift of Umbraforge.” Sensing opportunity, the Lost Ones have kidnapped the messenger, hoping to glean information from her that might allow them to get the advantage over the PCs.
When the players are ready to begin, read the following. The day is dreary, the sky threatening rain. Suddenly a voice calls out behind you, and you turn to see a familiar face. While the PCs are out in the city, they run into either Kalad (the dwarf paladin from “Siege of Bordrin’s Watch” and “Lost Mines of Karak”) or Reniss (the half-elf ranger they met in “Shadow Rift of Umbraforge”). After initial greetings, the NPC passes on the following information. “Word on the street is that someone’s looking for you. A messenger from Brindol. She was in the market, asking everyone in earshot if they knew you. She said her name was Alys, sounded desperate.”
Settling Old Scores If the PCs tussled with the Lost Ones in “Siege of Bordrin’s Watch,” the kidnapping marks the party’s third encounter with the members of that underworld guild. Those previous encounters (and the drubbing the Lost Ones likely received at the PCs hands) have left them hungry for revenge. One of the guild’s underbosses, a human named Szagyn, assumes that Alys is a compatriot of the PCs, and hopes to use what she knows to gain the advantage. If the PCs’ previous skirmishes with the Lost Ones were particularly memorable (and especially if you added additional run-ins between the party and the guild), feel free to play up this encounter as a kind of final showdown. If the PCs are unlucky in the skill challenge below, the Lost Ones gain unexpected allies—a group of mysterious killers targeting the PCs.
The Death Squad In “Siege of Bordrin’s Watch,” the PCs might have tussled with a murderous group featuring two doppelgangers. In the aftermath, they likely discovered a note with the names of a number of adventurers, including four of the party. These death squads are actually agents hired by Sarshan with a specific goal: hunting down and slaying professional adventurers that might interfere with his plans. Following his encounter with the PCs in the Shadowfell, Sarshan dispatched one of his most powerful death squads to hunt down and slay them. Thus far, the PCs have eluded them, but should the party fail the following skill challenge, they must face both the Lost Ones and the death squad simultaneously. If the PCs do face the death squad in the temple of Pelor, they find another list among the doppelgangers’ belongings, this time with detailed descriptions of the PCs, sketches, and extensive notes on the party’s exploits. Though this does not tell them who hired the death squad, the note combined with the news of the bounty on their heads should be a strong indicator that someone is out to get them.
November 20 08
|
D U N G E O N 16 0
18
Den of the Destroyer
Finding the Messenger Skill Challenge
Level 7 XP 1,500
By a combination of investigation and stealth, you must track the kidnapped messenger across the city. As the PCs attempt to find Alys, the messenger from Brindol, they discover that she has been kidnapped by agents of the Lost Ones. Because the PCs do not immediately know that Alys has been kidnapped, this information is revealed after their first success in the skill challenge. Have an NPC the PCs are interacting with report the following: “Alys you say? That girl from Brindol, said she was looking for them that put down the orc raid? She passed this way an hour ago, but I saw her go off with some of them Lost Ones. They seemed a little too happy to see her, if you know what I mean.” Complexity 5 (requires 12 successes before 3 failures). Primary Skills Insight, Intimidate, Perception, Stealth, Streetwise, Thievery. Other Skills Bluff, Diplomacy Victory If the PCs achieve 12 successes before 3 failures, they discover that Alys is being held in an abandoned temple of Pelor in the Nine Bells district, and they are able to make their way there without drawing attention to themselves. Defeat If the PCs get 3 failures before 12 successes, they discover where Alys is being held, but their actions bring them to the attention of Sarshan’s death squad. In the “Kidnappers” encounter (page 71), the PCs face two separate groups and a much tougher challenge. Special Some of the skill checks below have specific requirements that must be met before a PC can make them. For example, the PCs must use Streetwise to track down a Lost Ones operative in order to use Intimidate. Making Intimidate checks against random people on the street yields no information. Insight (DC 14) The PC draws on his or her previous experiences fighting the Lost Ones to intuit the group’s revenge motive against the PCs, or to determine where in the city Lost Ones agents are most likely to be found. Intimidate (DC 14) After locating a Lost Ones operative or ally with a Streetwise check, the PC can seek answers by force.
Perception (DC 14) The PC spots evidence of the Lost Ones’ passage along the route where Alys was taken—a scrap of parchment with the PCs’ names on it, reeking muddy bootprints that indicate the kidnappers have recently spent time in Nine Bells, and so on. Stealth (DC 19) The PC eavesdrops on merchants, beggars, and other denizens of the streets in order to pick up information that those afraid of the Lost Ones will not reveal directly. Streetwise (DC 14) The PC keeps his ear to the ground, picking up information from his contacts within the city. In addition, a successful Streetwise check is necessary before the party can make an Intimidate or Thievery check. Thievery (DC 19) After locating a Lost Ones’ meeting place with a successful Streetwise check, the PC uncovers details of the kidnapping. Bluff or Diplomacy (DC 14) By interacting with merchants, street urchins, or associates of the Lost Ones, the PC helps to narrow down the search. With a successful check, the PC gains a +2 bonus on his or her next Insight, Perception, or Streetwise check.
Gilgathorn’s Warning Before the PCs enter the temple of Pelor to deal with Szagyn and the other kidnappers, they encounter an elf by the name of Gilgathorn. This encounter can take place at any point during the skill challenge, as you see fit. At a natural break in the action, read the following: “I’d be careful if I were you,” calls a voice from above. Looking up, you see a heavily armed elf sitting casually on the slanted eaves above the door of a nearby building. The elf wears a patch across one eye, appraising you carefully with the other. “The Lost Ones aren’t going to be gentle when you find them. They’ve got reason enough to kill you, even if you didn’t have a bounty on your head.”
The elf introduces himself as Gilgathorn, “Thorn to my friends.” He calls himself a mercenary by trade, but in truth, he is a bounty hunter. Like the Lost Ones, he has discovered that the PCs have had a large bounty placed on their heads. However, knowing the party’s reputation, he has no intention of confronting them openly. Thorn shows up later in the adventure, first in Brindol, then in Fortress Graystone where he finally makes his move. Though the PCs might be initially suspicious of Thorn, he is sincere in wanting to make sure the party survives the encounter with the Lost Ones (though only to prevent them from claiming the bounty themselves). Thorn confirms for the PCs that the Lost Ones are behind Alys’s disappearance, and that they seek revenge for their previous defeats at the party’s hands. Assuming her to be an accomplice of the PCs, the Lost Ones plan to interrogate her in order to obtain information on the party’s movements, then to set up an ambush. Thorn tells the PCs that the bounty on their heads is the hefty sum of 1,000 gp, and that the identity of the person wanting them dead remains as yet unknown. However, while it is true that the Lost Ones have no idea who they work for, the canny Thorn has already connected the bounty with Sarshan. If the PCs ask Thorn how he knows these things, he simply smiles and tells them he keeps his ear to the ground, like them. If they need further convincing, allow them to confirm what Thorn tells them with subsequent checks in the skill challenge. Thorn intends to secretly follow the PCs to the Lost Ones’ hideout in Nine Bells, watching in order to size them up. However, if the PCs have trouble in that encounter (most likely because the failed skill challenge increases the odds against them), you can
November 20 08
|
D U N G E O N 16 0
19
Den of the Destroyer
Warning on the Road
have Thorn step in to aid them. Though his goal is to slay the PCs at a point when their resources have been depleted, he is too smart to do so within the city.
The Abandoned Temple of Pelor The temple of Pelor is part of the Divine Knot, the cluster of nine temples that give the Nine Bells district its name. Abandoned for years, the temple has been taken over by the sacrilegious Lost Ones as a secret meeting place where they can avoid the attention of the city watch. Tactical Encounter: “Kidnappers” (page 71).
RETURN TO BRINDOL With the Lost Ones defeated and Alys rescued, the PCs learn the reason for the messenger’s search. Though she was beaten by the Lost Ones, Alys is strong, and she recovers herself quickly when she realizes who the PCs are. She explains that she has
been a messenger in Elsir Vale for many years, and has run into trouble more than once in her career. Alys speaks with the measured countenance of someone reciting a memorized message. “Greetings from Sertanian, castellan of the Hall of Great Valor. I beseech you to return to Brindol with all haste, as your presence is needed here. The matter concerns one of the relics that you recovered while saving myself and our town’s other captives in Rivenroar, and is most urgent.” Sertanian appeared in “Rescue at Rivenroar,” and the PCs should remember him well. If he did not survive that adventure, the message is from his apprentice Aeomon, who inherited responsibility for the Hall of Great Valor after his master’s death. Alys knows nothing more than what she has been told, though she confides to the party that she has never seen old Sertanian as fearful as when he sent her forth. The PCs have time to tie up any loose ends in Overlook before they depart for Brindol with Alys as escort.
The journey from Overlook to Brindol is relatively uneventful. However, as they approach the point where the Dwarf Road meets the Old North Road at the foot of Lake Restin, the PCs encounters a band of soldiers on patrol. They are stopped for questioning, their names quickly recognized if they give them. The leader of the patrol identifies himself as Zoram Splintershield, a dwarf whose folk dwell in the foothills of the Giant’s Shield. He and his troop are patrolling the roads around the lake and the Blackfens. Zoram tells the PCs that in the past few weeks, there have been a number of unprovoked attacks and abductions in the north of Elsir Vale. Though patrols like his scour the roads in search of these bandits, they have so far come up empty. Moreover, Zoram informs the PCs that the abductions seem to be perpetrated by gnolls, who have traditionally stayed well clear of the vale. The PCs have heard or seen no sign of gnolls during their time on the road. As such, Zoram bids them a safe journey to Brindol, but warns them to keep a wary eye out for any trouble.
Arrival at Brindol The journey to Brindol takes a little over a week. Arriving late at night, the PCs find the Hall of Valor closed up tight, Alys telling them that Sertanian will likely already be in bed at his home outside of town. However, the party’s arrival is noted by a family member of one of the captives rescued from Rivenroar. The PCs are invited to dinner and offered comfortable lodging. While speaking with their hosts, they learn the following.
November 20 08
|
D U N G E O N 16 0
20
Den of the Destroyer
“Things have been quiet in Brindol since that awful business, all thanks to your brave efforts, again and always. Still, there’s families packing up and taking to the road, more and more each week. There’s talk of gnolls attacking settlements in the north, and word of the orcs rising up in the Stonehome. Dark days are coming, or so it seems.”
The Hall of Great Valor The next morning, the PCs make their way to the Hall of Great Valor to meet Sertanian. This adventure assumes that the PCs had the opportunity to see the hall at some point during “Rescue at Rivenroar.” If not, paraphrase the following. The Hall of Great Valor is as you last saw it, its glass cases lining the walls with relics of Elsir Vale’s past. Three freestanding displays show off artifacts of the vanquished Red Hand of Doom, a large map of the surrounding lands updated with details of the Hand’s most recent forays against Elsir Vale and its people. Where he dusts relics in a display case across the room, a familiar grey-haired figure rises. Sertanian smoothes out his stained smock as he bows. “My friends,” he says. “Welcome back to Brindol.” Sertanian thanks the PCs for their quick arrival, but any Insight check reveals the castellan’s unease. Only after locking the doors of the hall will he tell the party why he has summoned them here. “You recall the platinum blade that was one of the treasures taken by Sinruth and his hobgoblin horde. Upon its return to the hall, it seemed none the worse for its ordeal. It is a relic of some worth and sentimental value, but holds no magic that I or any of my predecessors here have noted. But then a week ago, while working late at night, I heard a voice, calling
me. From its case, the sword spoke to me, beseeching me to summon heroes to its aid. It asked for all of you by name.” Sertanian explains that after the sword began speaking, he removed it from its display case and hid it in the hall’s back room. He leads the PCs to a cluttered workspace, where the platinum longsword lies beneath a cloth on a table. When the cloth is removed, read the following. Without warning, the small workroom is filled with a woman’s voice, weak. “You have come, my heroes, but my thanks must be brief. I am Amyria, and I have summoned you here from great need. I know it must seem strange to hear me speak, but I assure you that this form is only temporary. It is for that reason that I beseech you for your aid. “Decades ago, a race of monastics born of the Elemental Chaos established a fortress in Elsir Vale. These were the githzerai, who lived secretly in their remote outpost before suddenly vanishing. Their Fortress of Graystone was well hidden, and remained uninhabited for long years. “Some months ago, Fortress Graystone was invaded and claimed by a pack of gnoll mercenaries calling themselves the Wicked Fang. Their leader, a sadistic follower of the demon lord Yeenoghu, has begun to send his raiders out into Elsir Vale and beyond. In recent weeks, this gnoll chieftain Fangren has managed to open a conduit of power to Yeenoghu’s realm in the Elemental Chaos. He plans to claim some small fragment of the demon lord’s power, transforming himself into an exarch of the Beast of Butchery. It was the creation of this conduit that awoke me from my age-long slumber. “If Fangren completes his ritual, demonic forces will have gained a foothold in the mortal realm. More importantly, that conduit to the Elemental Chaos can be
manipulated through a ritual that I will provide to you. This is the boon that I pray you grant me. Bring me to Fortress Graystone and free me from this prison.” The sword explains that it can provide directions to Fortress Graystone, and that it will answer any questions as best it can. What will the ritual you are giving us do? “The ritual will free me from my current form, restoring me to my rightful body. I can say no more than that. Though I am granted the power to speak to you, my memory has been fractured by long years of sleep.” Why does the ritual have to be performed in Fortress Graystone? “In opening the conduit to the Elemental Chaos, Fangren unwittingly set the stage for my restoration. The ritual will alter the conduit such that it can channel energy from other planes to fuel my transformation.” What about the gnolls? “The Wicked Fang tribe is not to be underestimated. They are strong and steeped in demon worship. While making your way to the fortress will almost certainly be dangerous, the threat to Elsir Vale and the wider world is great.” What else do you know about Fortress Graystone? “The fortress is built into the side of a peak of the Giant’s Shield. No roads or trails travel to the fortress, so the journey will be arduous.” Can you tell us what we will find at the fortress? “Alas, I cannot. When the rift was opened, Fangren’s thoughts and plans came to me as in a dream that woke my own mind. I have not seen him since, and
November 20 08
|
D U N G E O N 16 0
21
Den of the Destroyer
my spirit grows weaker with every hour that passes. Before long, I fear that my voice and thought will be lost once more.” At a natural break in the exchange between Amyria and the PCs, trouble arrives in the form of bounty hunters intent on collecting the price on the PCs’ heads. The bounty hunter Thorn puts in an appearance, and is there to speak to the PCs in the aftermath. Tactical Encounter: “The Hall of Great Valor” (page 73).
DEPARTING BRINDOL The attack by the bounty hunters should reinforce the warning Thorn gave the PCs in Overlook. The elf tells the PCs that he is as surprised to find them there as they are to see him. He speaks of how he was passing through Brindol on his way to a job in Marthton when he saw the burning hall and came to lend what assistance he could. He also adds that before he left Overlook, he heard rumors of the PCs’ confrontation with the Lost Ones, and that the bounty on their heads had been doubled in the aftermath. Thorn’s story is, of course, a lie. He followed the bounty hunters to Brindol in the hope that they would kill the PCs, after which he would slay them and take the credit for himself. At the very least, he expected the fight to weaken the PCs enough for him to take them on, but the party’s prowess in battle has proved even more formidable than he expected. Having been eavesdropping outside the Hall of Great Valor, Thorn knows all that the PCs know of Amyria and her quest. His plan now is to get to Fortress Graystone ahead of the party, setting traps along the
way as a means of forcing them to expend resources. By chance, Thorn has been inside Fortress Graystone, and he knows a great deal about its defenses.
Amyria’s Plight When the sword spoke to the PCs in the Hall of Great Valor, they noted the weakness of its voice. If and when the PCs attempt to speak to Amyria en route to Fortress Graystone, the spirit within the sword reiterates that each time it talks, its waning life force is further diminished. If the PCs have specific questions that Amyria can answer, the sword makes the effort to speak. However, Amyria does not know any information regarding their journey beyond the general route to the fortress that she earlier described. Travel to Fortress Graystone Skill Challenge
Level 7 XP 900
The journey to Fortress Graystone is well off the established trade roads and trails of Elsir Vale. You have many challenges ahead, and you have only yourselves to rely on as you make your way to the stronghold. In addition to the natural challenges of the trip, the bounty hunter Thorn plans to wear the PCs down during their journey to the citadel, then to kill them there. The PCs must navigate the hazardous wilderness of the Giant’s Shield as they seek Fortress Graystone. However, an unseen foe shadows their route, and is intent on making their journey much more dangerous. Complexity 3 (requires 8 successes before 3 failures). Primary Skills Athletics, Endurance, History, Nature, Perception. Other Skills Perception. Victory If the PCs achieve 8 successes before 3 failures, they manage to safely reach Fortress Graystone without a significant loss of resources.
Defeat If the PCs get 3 failures before 6 successes, they reach Fortress Graystone but their delays and setbacks leave them exhausted. Each PC loses 1 healing surge. Special This skill challenge features an enemy actively working against the PCs as they attempt to find their way to Fortress Graystone. The first time the PCs fail an Athletics or Nature check, or if a successful check beats the DC by 5 or more, they see evidence that whatever hazard or pitfall they attempted to avoid has been set up for them by agents unknown. Once the PCs realize that they are being shadowed, they can make secondary Perception checks to be on the lookout for signs of ambush or entrapment. Athletics (DC 8) The PC scales a tree or climbs a rock outcropping to spot signs of the path ahead, or to catch a glimpse of Fortress Graystone in the distance. Endurance (DC 14) The PCs sleep less, take longer watches, and scout increasingly farther ahead in an attempt to thwart the actions of whoever is stalking them. This check can be made only after the PCs realize that someone is actively seeking to hinder their progress (see “Special,” above). This is a group check. One character acts as lead, while the others make checks to aid that character. Each ally that gets a result of 10 or higher provides a +2 bonus to the lead character’s check (which counts as the check to determine a success or a failure). History (DC 14) The PC attempts to recall lore regarding the history of Fortress Graystone, identifying major landmarks that help the party find a safe route. Nature (DC 14) The PC identifies natural hazards and potential dangers on the journey, finding a route that goes through easier terrain. Perception (DC 19) The PC is able to spot hazards and dangers that have been intentionally hidden or created by the unknown forces shadowing the party. A successful Perception check grants a single PC a +2 bonus to his or her next primary skill check made in the challenge.
November 20 08
|
D U N G E O N 16 0
22
Den of the Destroyer
FORTRESS GRAYSTONE Fortress Graystone sits built into the side of a low peak of the Giant’s Shield mountains. The structure is well hidden from the eyes of the inhabitants of Elsir Vale, as was the intention of its builders. A massive stone staircase leading into the side of the mountain is the only entrance. Fortress Graystone was constructed by a band of githzerai monastics whose reasons for dwelling in the mortal realm have been lost to history. Later explorers found evidence that the citadel was built as a place of training and meditation for the githzerai, and assumed that its remote location had been chosen for its defensive value. However, what no one realized is
that Fortress Graystone was built to defend what lies hidden within it. In their home in the Elemental Chaos, the githzerai discovered a thinning in the barrier between that plane and the world. Making their way to the world, they searched for and found this planar breach in the Giant’s Shield mountains. There, they built a fortress around the point of planar instability, attempting to prevent the damage that might occur to both planes should the breach be fully opened. Decades ago, the githzerai inhabiting Fortress Graystone vanished without a trace. Recently, Sarshan ordered the gnolls of the Wicked Fang pack to travel here and secure the fortress as part of their deal with the shadar-kai arms dealer. Little did
Sarshan know what Fangren would find there. Though he is hardly a scholar, the gnoll shaman obtained knowledge of planar magic that allowed him to tap into the power hidden within the fortress. Now, he seeks to use it for his own dark ends. When the PCs approach the fortress, read the following. For the last day, thick forest has been giving way to rolling foothills. Now, the hills rise to a sudden wall of rocky peaks rising high above the trees. A rough gravel path winds its way along the base of the mountains, the first sign of a true trail that you have seen since your departure from Brindol.
The Fortress Fortress Graystone reflects the aesthetic of the githzerai who built it, demonstrating balance between the chaos of their birthplace and the order they sought to impose upon their own lives. The fortress takes its name from the distinctive gray stone found in this area of the Giant’s Shield, colored that way by prevalent veins of platinum ore. The stone walls of the fortress are decorated with bas reliefs and carvings that have withstood the passage of years with little deterioration. However, the arrival of the Wicked Fang gnolls has changed that.
Features of the Fortress Different areas of Fortress Graystone share the following common features. Illumination: All rooms within the fortress except the meditation chamber are brightly lit. The secret passages are dark, except for two small areas beneath the open trapdoors at the marshaling point. Doors: The doors in Fortress Graystone are unlocked, with two exceptions. The door leading from
November 20 08
|
D U N G E O N 16 0
23
Den of the Destroyer
the marshaling point to the ritual chamber requires a key (possessed only by Fangren) or a DC 14 Thievery check to open. Likewise, the door leading into the marshaling point requires a key (possessed only by the Wicked Fang warmaster and the ruin-touched beastcaller) or a DC 19 Thievery check to open. Doors open inward from the adjacent corridors. Stairs: The rubble-strewn stairs within the fortress are difficult terrain. Secret Passages: The githzerai built several secret passages within Fortress Graystone, with entrances in the githzerai mind trap, the meditation chamber, and at the marshaling point. Thorn knows of these passages, and uses them to avoid the effects of the fortress’s traps as he reactivates them.
Extended Rests Fortress Graystone provides few places where the PCs can take an extended rest without having the gnolls regroup to search for them. In the event that the party needs to restore itself, the PCs will need to retreat into the forest outside to do so. Taking an extended rest allows any gnolls alerted to the PCs’ presence to regroup and call for backup. Feel free to use an extended rest as an opportunity for Thorn to attack (see page 77), as well as a chance to set up reinforcement encounters within the citadel. Place these new encounters in areas the PCs have already cleared out, but make sure that such encounters don’t overly tax the party’s newly replenished resources. With the PCs 7th or 8th level by now, most reinforcement encounters should be 4th or 5th level— enough to demonstrate the Wicked Fang’s resources but not to be a significant drain on the party. (Minions are a great way to fill up a reinforcement encounter.)
When the PCs end their extended rest, let them see or hear reinforcements arriving and entering the citadel. Unless the party wants to deal with the new threat immediately (in which case, you can improvise an encounter outside the fortress entrance), give the PCs time to plan for these additional encounters once they go back inside.
1. The Entrance The wide stairs rising up the mountainside climb toward a set of double doors flanked by four statues. The Wicked Fang gnolls have set up their first line of defense here. Tactical Encounter: “The Stairs” (page 75).
2.–4. Githzerai Mind Trap The mind trap is a special chamber designed by the githzerai to guard the fortress against incursion. This trap consists of a series of linked teleportation portals that shift destinations rapidly, making it impossible to quickly move a large strike force into the fortress. Called a mind trap due to the mental discipline required to pass through it to the interior of the fortress, the portal system was deactivated by Fangren when the gnolls first arrived. Unfortunately for the gnolls guarding this area, Thorn reactivated the trap before moving deeper into the building, leaving several gnolls stuck trying to find their way out when the PCs arrive. Tactical Encounter: “Gith zerai Mind Trap” (page 79).
5. The Cells This oddly shaped chamber was once the living quarters of the githzerai. It currently serves as a makeshift prison within which the Wicked Fang pack keeps a
handful of prisoners. Fangren has been using these Elsir Vale captives in twisted experiments, transforming them into abyssal wretches. Tactical Encounter: “The Cells” (page 81).
6. Training Chamber A waterfall flows into this room from above, driving a system of shallow aqueducts that allowed the githzerai of the fortress to simulate the chaos of battle in their combat training. This chamber is currently occupied by several ruin-touched gnolls and their slaughterfang hyena mounts. Knowing that the ruin-touched gnolls had undergone horrific rituals to infuse them with demonic power, Fangren called upon them to aid his quest when he first devised his plan to ascend to the status of exarch of Yeenoghu. Tactical Encounter: “Training Chamber” (page 83).
7. Meditation Chamber The doors leading into this area are covered with scrawled warnings in Common and Abyssal to stay out. This room is divided into two distinct chambers. The smooth walls of the southern portion are designed to represent the peace of law, while the rough stone of the northern chamber represents the tumult of chaos. Githzerai warriors would meditate here at the boundary between chaos and order. Spiritual echoes of the githzerai and manifestations of their inner chaos plague this chamber. The gnolls consider it a haunted place, and they will not enter. Tactical Encounter: “Meditation Chamber” (page 85).
November 20 08
|
D U N G E O N 16 0
25
Den of the Destroyer
8. Marshaling Point Once a gathering place for the gith zerai, this area has been transformed into a training ground and living space for the gnolls. Debris and refuse litter the f loor, while recruits train here under the watchful eye of their pack’s warmaster and a shadar-kai agent sent from Sarshan. The doors are locked but the ruin-touched beastcaller (in the training chamber) has a key. Present in the marshaling point is a shadar-kai weaponmaster by the name of Kyrion. One of Sarshan’s most trusted agents, Kyrion has traveled
NO PRISONERS If Kyrion is killed or flees before the PCs can interrogate him, any search of the chamber finds the following note among his belongings: Kyrion, Let me make my orders clear: you are there only to train the gnolls, not to fight for them. Watch yourself; they are a bloodthirsty and violent lot, and they may turn on you. You may need to remind them from time to time that I pay them well for their services, and that I can withdraw my support for their butchery at any time. Be careful of their leader, for he is far more cunning than others would give him credit for. I would not have even considered trying to trick them into service with that “Emissary” deception that riled up that fool Sinruth. These gnolls have the power of their foul god on their side. They are not to be trifled with. — Sarshan
to the world to deliver the sword Wicked Fang to the gnolls and to train them in the use of shadar-kai weapons. Kyrion has no loyalty to the Wicked Fang tribe, and fights only to defend himself. Tactical Encounter: “Marshaling Point” (page 87).
Sarshan’s Plots Whether Kyrion flees, is slain, or is captured alive, the PCs can discover his connection to the gnolls— and to the party’s previous adventures. If he is captured and questioned, Kyrion offers up his story and a pledge to leave Elsir Vale in exchange for his freedom and a weapon to defend himself. Whether Kyrion is interrogated or not, see the skill challenge on the next page. If Kyrion is freed by the PCs, he stays true to his word to leave Elsir Vale. Interrogating the Weaponmaster Skill Challenge
Level 8 XP 350
If he survives his encounter with the party, the shadar-kai weaponmaster Kyrion offers the PCs their best chance to uncover the full truth of the plots unfolding around them. The shadar-kai knows the truth behind the gnolls’ plots in Elsir Vale. Now the PCs just need to convince him to talk. Complexity 1 (requires 4 successes before 3 failures). Primary Skills Bluff, Diplomacy, Heal, Insight, Intimidate. Victory The PCs learn that Kyrion was sent by Sarshan to train the gnolls in the use of shadar-kai weapons. They also learn that Sarshan is responsible for convincing the gnolls to seize Fortress Graystone and to go on a kidnapping spree across Elsir Vale. Finally, they learn that Sarshan was also responsible for provoking Sinruth into reviving the Red Hand of Doom. In addition, the PCs learn that the sword wielded by the gnoll warmaster is a unique weapon, crafted specifically for the Wicked Fang pack on Sarshan’s orders. According to Kyrion, Wicked Fang—so named in honor of Fangren’s pack— is said to carry a curse and have a history steeped in blood.
Defeat If the PCs fail the skill challenge, Kyrion still imparts the knowledge from the first paragraph above, but not the second paragraph, hoping the PCs will overlook the importance of the weapon. Bluff (DC 14) The PC attempts to trick Kyrion into thinking that Fangren has betrayed him, hoping that the shadar-kai will betray the gnolls in turn. Diplomacy (DC 14) The PC earns Kyrion’s respect by praising the shadar-kai’s battle prowess. Heal (DC 8) The PC binds Kyrion’s wounds, earning his grudging gratitude by ensuring that he will live to fight again. Insight (DC 19) By listening to and watching the shadar-kai, the PC intuits some aspect of his true relationship with the gnolls. Intimidate (DC 19) The PC manages to break Kyrion’s resolve with base threats of violence.
Ritual Chamber The ritual chamber was built around the planar rift discovered within the mountain by the githzerai. Using dark rituals stolen from his ruin-touched allies, Fangren has corrupted the energy of this place, creating a conduit to the Elemental Chaos and the power of the demon lord Yeenoghu.
SHADAR-KAI WEAPONS Their shadar-kai weapons give the gnolls an advantage in their raids, but these blades require the special training Kyrion provides. The shadarkai short sword is statistically identical to the katar (PH 218), while the shadar-kai greatsword is statistically identical to the fullblade (Adventurer’s Vault 9). Though the weapons have a jagged and shadowy appearance, this provides no additional mechanical benefit.
November 20 08
|
D U N G E O N 16 0
26
Den of the Destroyer
instructs the PCs to draw it and perform its ritual. If one of the PCs has the Ritual Caster feat, the sword directs its instructions to that character. Otherwise, any PC can perform the ritual under the sword’s direction. The ritual takes 10 minutes. A vortex of brilliant energy opens up in the air as the platinum sword is gently tugged from your hands. It rises to hover in the air before the newly formed conduit, tendrils of silver light reaching out to touch it. You are blinded by a brilliant flash, then an instant later, the ritual chamber falls silent. Standing before you is a young human female of unearthly beauty and grace. Her silver hair hangs down her back, a band of chalk-white pigment stretching from one temple to the other across her eyes. She is garbed in armor made of slender, overlapping plates. In one hand, she holds a leather-bound tome; in the other, the platinum longsword. “I am Amyria,” she says. “Who are you, and why am I here?”
Unlike with most planar portals, physical objects and creatures cannot pass through the conduit, which serves only to draw energy into the mortal realm. This planar energy is critical to Fangren’s dream of ascending to exarch status, as well as to Amyria’s ritual. Tactical Encounter: “Ritual Chamber” (page 89).
AMYRIA’S RITUAL With the conduit safely closed and the threat of Fangren and his allies ended, the platinum sword from Brindol begins to speak once more. The voice sounds even weaker, its life force all but spent as it
The ritual has transformed the spirit within the platinum longsword into Amyria, a being who is far more than she appears. However, much to her own consternation, Amyria is not fully certain why she has been brought here. She does not recognize the PCs or their names, and has no memory of her words to them while her spirit lingered within the sword. “I remember that I am Amyria,” she says softly, “and I have lived many lives. I was in the sword. I remember you freed me. The ritual you performed transformed the planar breach in this place, allowing it to channel the energy of the Astral Sea. Energy necessary for my transformation.” She looks to you, eyes bright. “I have been reborn with purpose, even if that purpose is yet unclear to me.”
Beyond her minimal recollections, Amyria is a clean slate—her transformation a literal rebirth. Though she is of an adult mindset, she knows nothing of her own past. The leather-bound tome is a ritual book that Amyria gives to the party with her thanks. It contains a modified version of the ritual just performed, allowing them to stop the flow of energy that fuels a planar portal.
Seal Portal You close a portal between two locations safely, ensuring that nothing can come through it in the future. Level: 8 Category: Binding Time: 10 Minutes Duration: Permanent
Component Cost: 100 gp Market Price: 680 gp Key Skill: Arcana
You sever the magical connections that bind one place to another by way of a portal. The completion of this ritual successfully shuts a currently active portal and seals it. No creature, object, or energy can pass through a sealed portal. The portal is not destroyed, though it becomes both invisible and intangible, meaning that it cannot be perceived or interacted with while sealed. If the portal would normally disappear after a certain amount of time, it does so. At the completion of this ritual, make an Arcana check. A sealed portal can be reopened with the linked portal, planar portal, or true portal rituals, but the creature performing the ritual to reopen the portal must make an Arcana check that equals or exceeds the results of the Arcana check you made when performing this ritual. You can remove the seal on a portal you have sealed by performing this ritual on it again.
November 20 08
|
D U N G E O N 16 0
27
Den of the Destroyer
The magic of a sealed portal can be detected with the Arcana skill. The level of the magical phenomenon (the seal, not the portal itself ) is equal to your level at the time you performed this ritual.
Amyria, Scion of Bahamut The following statistics for Amyria represent her current form. Though this concludes this adventure (and Amyria will be going her own way once the PCs reach Overlook), DMs can use these statistics as both a point of reference and an NPC statistics block in case a particular campaign calls for it. Amyria
Level 10 Elite Skirmisher (Leader)
Medium immortal humanoid XP 1,000 Initiative +11 Senses Perception +10 Aura of Recovery aura 2; allies that start their turn in Amyria’s aura gain a +1 bonus to all saves until the start of their next turn. HP 200; Bloodied 100 AC 24; Fortitude 19, Reflex 22, Will 23 Resist radiant 10 Saving Throws +2 Speed 6 Action Points 1 m Longsword (standard; at-will) ✦ Radiant, Weapon +15 vs. AC; 1d8 + 5 damage plus 1d6 radiant damage. M Crusader’s Assault (standard; at-will) ✦ Radiant, Weapon Requires longsword; +15 vs. AC; 1d8 + 5 damage plus 1d6 radiant damage, and one of Amyria’s allies within 10 squares makes a basic attack as a free action against the same target. C Radiant Rebuke (immediate interrupt; when targeted by a melee attack; at-will) Close burst 1; +13 vs. Reflex; 2d6 + 5 radiant damage. Memory of A Thousand Lifetimes (free; encounter) Amyria adds 1d6 to a d20 roll she just made. Alignment Lawful good Languages Common, Draconic, Supernal Skills Diplomacy +13, Religion +15 Str 10 (+5) Dex 12 (+6) Wis 21 (+10) Con 12 (+6) Int 18 (+9) Cha 16 (+8)
Instructions from Sarshan When the PCs search Fangren’s body, they find a series of notes and missives from Sarshan to the gnoll chieftain. They relay orders to the Wicked Fang pack, including the following. I cannot stress the importance of holding Fortress Graystone. Among the assignments I have given you, this should be your top priority. I have armed you well enough that you should be able to repel all invaders. Do what you will with your prisoners, but continue taking them. Focus your efforts on those who seem to be of some importance; do not waste your time with farmers and commoners. I am sending someone to train your recruits in the use of our weapons, at your request. However, I expect you to leave this one alone. The witch I sent to you was one of my personal advisors, and now she is ruined. Do not treat my people so callously as you do your own.
CONCLUDING THE ADVENTURE Having rid Fortress Graystone of the Wicked Fang pack, performed the ritual to transform the platinum sword into Amyria, and sealed the conduit to the planes, the PCs have finished their mission and can depart at their leisure. As they exit the fortress, Amyria requests that they accompany her to Overlook, not back to Brindol, as she believes she has business there. Should the PCs resist, she will not put up a fight, though she will set off for the city without them should they choose to go elsewhere. Eventually, however, the PCs need to return to Overlook. Not only is this the starting point of the
RETURN TO THE SHADOWFELL At the conclusion of this adventure, the PCs have learned that Sarshan stands at the center of many of their recent adventures. It is understandable that the PCs might be inclined to head straight to the Shadowfell in order to deal with the shadar-kai. However, if you wish to allow such action, be aware that the PCs won’t face the arms dealer directly until a later adventure. When the PCs arrive at Umbraforge, they discover the tower’s windows dark and the entire complex seemingly abandoned. The tent camps at the foot of Sarshan’s tower remain intact and inhabited, but the only shadar-kai who remain were not in Sarshan’s service. They can tell the PCs that, shortly after their departure, Sarshan and his entire organization departed from Umbraforge for parts unknown. With no knowledge of where Sarshan went, this should put the PCs off his trail, for a while at least.
next adventure, it is (as the PCs will soon discover) a critical location in a war that expands far beyond what they suspect. If the PCs accompany Amyria to Overlook, she bids them farewell once they reach the entrance to the city, slipping away into the crowd. If any of the party should attempt to follow her, she goes to the Temple of Ioun in the Nine Bells district. There, she immediately becomes lost in prayer, lingering indefinitely.
November 20 08
|
D U N G E O N 16 0
28
Den of the Destroyer
KIDNAPPERS Encounter Level 9 (2,150 XP) Encounter Level 11 (3,050 XP)*
Setup 4 Lost One kidnappers (K) 2 ravenous attack dogs (R) Szagyn, Lost One underboss (U) 3 death squad assassins (A)* * Only if the PCs failed the “Finding the Messenger” skill challenge. After completing the skill challenge, the PCs make their way to the abandoned temple of Pelor where the messenger from Brindol is being held by the Lost Ones. When the PCs approach the temple, read: As you enter Nine Bells, the rain that has been threatening all day begins to fall. By the time you locate the temple of Pelor, the streets are all but empty, the inhabitants of the district fled to shelter. From the outside, the temple entrance is set above a short flight of stone stairs. The f lare of lightning shows where relief carvings once adorned the temple’s outer walls, but these are unrecognizable after years of neglect and abuse. When the PCs enter, read: Water covers the cracked marble floor where broken freestanding frescoes block four doors in the far wall. Rain pours down through a square opening in the ceiling, shards of stained glass clinging to its edges. Beneath it, a
young woman in tattered traveling garb has been gagged, blindfolded, and bound to a wooden chair. Perception Check DC 14: Well-gnawed bones spread across the room and the reek of wet fur suggest the presence of dogs somewhere within the temple. DC 19: A f lash of lightning through the open ceiling reveals faint movement behind the frescoes, figures lurking there. A sentry at the door alerted the Lost Ones to the PCs’ approach, giving them time to bind and gag Alys and get into position behind the frescoes. 4 Lost One Kidnappers (K)
Level 7 Soldier
Medium natural humanoid XP 300 Initiative +6 Senses Perception +4 HP 79; Bloodied 39 AC 23; Fortitude 20, Reflex 18, Will 18 Speed 6 m Longsword (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon +14 vs. AC; 1d8 + 5 damage M Grab and Go (standard; at-will) +12 vs. Fortitude; 1d8 + 5 damage, and the Lost One kidnapper slides 2 squares, then slides the target 2 squares. The target must end its slide adjacent to the kidnapper’s new position. Kidnap (free; encounter) When the Lost One kidnapper hits a target with its Grab and Go ability, the distance both creatures slide is increased to 4 squares. Alignment Unaligned Languages Common Skills Stealth +9 Str 19 (+7) Dex 13 (+4) Wis 13 (+4) Con 15 (+5) Int 9 (+2) Cha 12 (+4) Equipment leather armor, long sword
2 Ravenous Attack Dogs (R)
Level 7 Skirmisher
Small natural beast XP 300 Initiative +7 Senses Perception +3 HP 80; Bloodied 40 AC 21; Fortitude 19, Reflex 18, Will 16 Speed 6 m Bite (standard; at-will) +12 vs. AC; 1d4 + 7 damage M Tripping Lunge (standard; recharge 5 6 ) +10 vs. Reflex; 2d4 + 9 damage, and the target is knocked prone. M Drag off Prey (immediate interrupt; when an adjacent opponent moves away; at-will) +10 vs. Fortitude; 1d4 + 3 damage, and the ravenous attack dog slides 1 square, then slides the target 1 square. The target must end its slide adjacent to the attack dog’s new position. Circle for the Kill (move; at-will) The ravenous attack dog shifts 2 squares. Alignment Unaligned Languages — Skills Intimidate +6 Str 13 (+4) Dex 14 (+5) Wis 10 (+3) Con 16 (+6) Int 2 (–1) Cha 6 (+1)
Lost One Underboss (U) Level 8 Controller (Leader) Medium natural humanoid XP 350 Initiative +9 Senses Perception +7 Underboss’s Presence aura 2; at the start of each ally’s turn, if that ally is within the aura and the Lost One underboss’s line of sight, the ally gains 4 temporary hit points. HP 87; Bloodied 43 AC 22; Fortitude 19, Reflex 21, Will 20 Speed 6 m Dagger (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon +13 vs. AC; 2d4 + 4 damage A Storm of Daggers (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon Requires a number of daggers equal to number of enemies in burst; area burst 1 within 10; targets enemies the Lost One Underboss can see; +10 vs. Reflex; 2d4 + 4 damage. Get Into Position (minor 1/round; at-will) One ally within 10 squares shifts 1 square. Alignment Evil Languages Common, Dwarven Skills Bluff +12, Intimidate +12, Stealth +11 Str 12 (+5) Dex 14 (+6) Wis 16 (+7) Con 15 (+6) Int 15 (+6) Cha 17 (+7) Equipment leather armor, 18 daggers
November 20 08
|
D U N G E O N 16 0
29
Den of the Destroyer
3 Death Squad Assassins (A)
Level 7 Lurker
Medium natural humanoid (shapechanger) XP 300 Initiative +11 Senses Perception +6 HP 61; Bloodied 30 AC 21; Fortitude 18, Reflex 20, Will 19 Speed 6 m Assassin’s Longblade (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon +12 vs. AC; 1d6 + 6 damage. M Shapeshifter Feint (minor; at-will) +10 vs. Reflex; the death squad assassin gains combat advantage against the target until the end of the death squad assassin’s next turn. M Assassin’s Quarry (standard; recharge 6 ) ✦ Weapon +10 vs. Reflex; 3d6 + 8 damage, and ongoing 5 damage (save ends). Change Shape (minor; at-will) ✦ Polymorph A doppelganger can alter its physical form to take on the appearance of any Medium humanoid, including a unique individual (MM 280). Combat Advantage The death squad assassin deals an extra 2d6 damage against any target it has combat advantage against. Alignment Unaligned Languages Common Skills Bluff +10, Insight +11, Stealth +12 Str 10 (+3) Dex 19 (+7) Wis 16 (+6) Con 13 (+4) Int 13 (+4) Cha 14 (+5) Equipment dark robes, assassin's longblade
Tactics Unless they are spotted, the Lost Ones hold their attacks until at least half the PCs are inside the temple. The kidnappers use their grab and go power against lightly armored PCs or ranged attackers, pulling targets behind the frescoes and into melee range. Szagyn stays in the thick of combat, using storm of daggers as often as possible and making dagger attacks while that power recharges. The ravenous attack dogs target PCs at the periphery of combat, harrying melee combatants with tripping lunge and using drag off prey to keep their foes close.
If the death squad assassins appear in this encounter, they enter combat in the third round, having followed the PCs on their search for Alys. The doppelgangers focus assassin’s quarry attacks against the strongest-looking melee combatants, making assassin’s longblade attacks against lightlyarmored PCs while assassin’s quarry recharges. The doppelgangers are not allies of the Lost Ones, but they know that the guild fears them. The Lost Ones and the doppelgangers do not target each other, but they do not treat each other as allies.
Features of the Area Illumination: Dim light through the open ceiling. The triangular chambers beyond the doors are dark. Doors: The double doors at the front of the temple are swollen and warped, requiring a DC 14 Strength check to pull open. The doors leading to the triangular chambers open easily. Pooled Water: Most of the rain coming in through the hole in the ceiling disappears through cracks in the stone floor. However, the area directly beneath the hole is slick with pooled water and is difficult terrain. Frescoes: Numerous holes have been punched through these damaged frescoes. They provide cover to creatures standing at their corners, or total cover to creatures behind them.
November 20 08
|
D U N G E O N 16 0
30
Den of the Destroyer
THE HALL OF GREAT VALOR Encounter Level 8 (1,750 XP)
Setup 1 bounty hunter snaremaster (N) 2 bounty hunter strongarms (T) 2 bounty hunter subduers (U) A band of bounty hunters from Overlook catches up to the PCs at the Hall of Great Valor. A half ling snaremaster, two dwarf strongarms, and two human subduers are spoiling for a fight after their long
journey from Overlook, and they will go to any lengths to collect their reward. Near the end of the encounter (or sooner if the PCs are having a tough time), Thorn appears to provide assistance. If the PCs are having an easy time in the fight, have one or more of the bounty hunters attempt to flee only to be taken out by Thorn waiting at the door. Award the PCs full experience, however. For more information, see “Departing Brindol,” below. At a break in the PCs’ questioning of Amyria, read: A sudden crash from the hall outside is punctuated by an explosion of fire. A burning bottle has been lobbed through one of the hall’s windows, shattering to spread flaming liquid across tables and display cases. A moment later, the locked front door is kicked open, a squad of armed figures bursting in. Bounty Hunter Snaremaster (N)
Level 7 Artillery
Small natural humanoid, halfling XP 300 Initiative +7 Senses Perception +11 HP 61; Bloodied 30 AC 19; Fortitude 18, Reflex 20, Will 19 Speed 6 m Rapier (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon +14 vs. AC; 1d8 + 5 damage. r Bolas (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon Ranged 10/20; +12 vs. Reflex; 2d4 + 5 damage, and the target is restrained (save ends). R Keep ’Em Separated (standard; recharge 5 6 ) ✦ Weapon Requires bolas; ranged 10/20; three targets in range; +10 vs. Reflex; 4d4 + 5 damage, and the target slides 2 squares and is restrained (save ends). Second Chance (immediate interrupt; when the bounty hunter snaremaster would be hit by an attack; encounter) The bounty hunter snaremaster forces the attacker to reroll the attack and take the new result. Alignment Unaligned Languages Common, Dwarven Str 10 (+3) Dex 19 (+7) Wis 16 (+6) Con 13 (+4) Int 13 (+4) Cha 10 (+3) Equipment leather armor, rapier, 6 bolas
2 Bounty Hunter Subduers (U) Level 7 Skirmisher Medium natural humanoid, human XP 300 Initiative +8 Senses Perception +5 HP 76; Bloodied 38 AC 21; Fortitude 20, Reflex 19, Will 18 Speed 6 m Maul (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon +12 vs. AC; 2d6 + 5 damage. M Knockout Blow (standard; recharge 5 6 ) ✦ Weapon Requires maul; +10 vs. Fortitude; 4d6 + 5 damage, and the target is knocked prone and dazed (save ends). Combat Advantage The bounty hunter subduer deals an extra 2d6 damage on melee attacks against any target it has combat advantage against. Alignment Unaligned Languages Common Skills Nature +10 Str 18 (+7) Dex 16 (+6) Wis 14 (+5) Con 12 (+4) Int 10 (+3) Cha 10 (+3) Equipment leather armor, maul
2 Bounty Hunter Strongarms (T)
Level 7 Brute
Medium natural humanoid, dwarf XP 300 Initiative +4 Senses Perception +11; low-light vision HP 98; Bloodied 49 AC 19; Fortitude 20, Reflex 17, Will 19 Speed 5 m Greataxe (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon +10 vs. AC; 1d12 + 8 damage. C Clear The Area (standard; recharge 6 ) ✦ Weapon Requires greataxe; close burst 1; +8 vs. AC; 2d12 + 10 damage, and the target is pushed 1 square. Brute Rush When a bounty hunter strongarm makes a bull rush attack, he pushes the target 2 squares instead of 1 square. Stand Your Ground When an effect forces the bounty hunter strongarm to move—through a push, a pull, or a slide—the bounty hunter strongarm moves 1 square less than the effect specifies. When an attack would knock the bounty hunter strongarm prone, the bounty hunter strongarm can roll a saving throw to avoid falling prone. Alignment Unaligned Languages Common, Dwarven Str 13 (+4) Dex 12 (+4) Wis 16 (+6) Con 18 (+7) Int 11 (+3) Cha 8 (+2) Equipment leather armor, greataxe
November 20 08
|
D U N G E O N 16 0
31
Den of the Destroyer
Tactics The bounty hunters have no interest in the history of the Hall of Great Valor, and even less compunction against destroying it as they target the PCs. The bounty hunter subduers use their knockout blow as often as possible, flanking with maul attacks for combat advantage while that power recharges. The snaremaster targets powerful-looking melee combatants with keep ’em separated or individual bola attacks, hoping to keep PCs out of the fight. The strongarms stay in the thick of melee to maximize the use of their clear the area power. They make bull rush attacks with brute rush to keep the PCs in motion, giving the subduers room to maneuver.
Features of the Area Illumination: Bright light throughout Burning Floor: The wooden floors of the Hall of Great Valor become hazardous as the fire spreads. Start the fire in a square of your choice. Each round that it burns (until the PCs successfully complete the “Dousing the Flames” skill challenge), the fire spreads into an additional 1d4 squares at random. See the skill challenge and the hazard statistics block for more information. Freestanding Displays: These tall slabs of solid stone support artifacts relating to the incursions of the Red Hand of Doom. The displays provide cover. Clambering over a display costs 1 extra square of movement. Map of Elsir Vale: This three-dimensional model represents the Elsir Vale region and depicts the major sites of battles against the Red Hand of Doom. It initially provides cover. However, the map and its underlying table are fragile, and will collapse if any creature attempts to clamber over it or if it takes more
than 10 points of damage from area attacks. Once it collapses, the map and its table count as difficult terrain.
Dousing the Flames Even as they fight, the PCs must deal with the fire spreading within the Hall of Great Valor. This skill challenge allows the PCs to get the fire under control before the hall is consumed. Setup: The Hall of Great Valor is burning, and you must work fast if you hope to save it. Level: 6 (250 XP ) Complexity: 1 (requires 4 successes before 3 failures). Primary Skills: Athletics, Perception, Thievery. Special: The PCs do not earn failures in the skill challenge for failing a skill check. Instead, they accrue 1 failure at the end of any round in which no success was gained. When the top of the initiative order comes up, the failure occurs before the first creature’s turn. In addition to the checks below, a success in the skill challenge is gained by a PC who targets 1 or more squares of burning floor with a power that deals any amount of cold damage. Athletics (DC 8): With a show of strength, the PC tips over a display case to smother the flames. Perception (DC 14): The PC determines which way the flames are spreading, and can direct his or her allies’ efforts in that direction. Thievery (DC 14): The PC pries up burning floorboards, creating gaps so the flames cannot spread any further. On a failed check, the PC takes 1d6 fire damage. Success: If the PCs achieve 4 successes before 3 failures, they manage to keep the museum from
burning down, preserving the heritage of the people of Brindol. The PCs gain a +2 bonus to Diplomacy checks in Brindol until they depart for Fortress Graystone. Failure: If the PCs get 3 failures before 4 successes, the Hall of Great Valor is consumed by fire. The PCs’ efforts to save it cost each member of the party 1 healing surge. Additionally, the folk of Brindol blame them for drawing the murderous bounty hunters down on their community. Word quickly spreads, and all PCs take a –2 penalty to Diplomacy, Gather Information, and Intimidate checks made in Elsir Vale until the end of this adventure. Burning Floor Hazard
Level 4 Obstacle XP 175
The fire started by the bounty hunters spreads along the dusty timbers of the floor. Hazard: Anyone passing through the flames runs the risk of taking fire damage. Perception No check is necessary to notice the fire. Trigger The fire attacks when a creature enters a square of burning floor. Special Each round that the fire burns, it extends its range into 1d4 additional squares, chosen at random. Attack Opportunity Action Melee Target: Creature in the flames Attack: +7 vs. Reflex Hit: 1d6 + 2 fire damage. Countermeasures Any attack that deals cold damage targeting 1 or more squares of burning floor douses the flames in those squares. However, until the skill challenge has been successfully completed, new squares of flame will erupt in subsequent rounds.
November 20 08
|
D U N G E O N 16 0
32
Den of the Destroyer
THE STAIRS Encounter Level 7 (1,500 XP)
Setup 2 Wicked Fang sentries (E) 2 Wicked Fang scouts (C) 1 stonewalker spirit (S) When the PCs climb the great stairs leading up and into Fortress Graystone, they are challenged by the defenders placed here by Fangren. Gnoll sentries are aided by a creature sent by agents of the demon Lord Yeenoghu—a stonewalker spirit that lurks among the statues on the stairs. Thus far, the guards have dealt with little more than animals wandering in from the forest, and they are spoiling for a real fight. When the PCs see the stairs, read: Against the cliff face ahead, a massive stone staircase rises, narrowing as it reaches a set of double stone doors set into the rock wall. Four large statues, each depicting a githzerai warrior in full combat regalia, stand on pedestals watching over the entrance to Fortress Graystone. A small waterfall f lows down the side of the mountain, eroding a stone balcony set further up the cliff face and leaving the stone steps slick and treacherous.
2 Wicked Fang Scouts (C)
Level 7 Skirmisher
Medium natural humanoid XP 300 Initiative +7 Senses Perception +10, low-light vision HP 77; Bloodied 38 AC 21; Fortitude 19, Reflex 19, Will 18 Speed 7 m Shadar-Kai Short Sword (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon +12 vs. AC; 1d6 + 9 damage (crit 1d6 + 15), or 1d6 + 11 damage (crit 1d6 + 17) while bloodied; see also pack attack. r Hand Crossbow (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon Range 10/20; +12 vs. AC; 1d6 + 9 damage, or 1d6 + 11 damage while bloodied; see also pack attack. Cowardly Shot (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon Requires hand crossbow; ranged 10/20; +12 vs. AC; 1d6 + 9 damage, or 1d6 + 11 damage while bloodied; the gnoll scout can shift 2 squares both before and after making the attack; see also pack attack. Pack Attack The gnoll scout deals an extra 5 damage on melee and ranged attacks against an enemy that has two or more of the scout’s allies adjacent to it. Alignment Chaotic evil Languages Abyssal, Common Str 16 (+6) Dex 15 (+5) Wis 14 (+5) Con 13 (+4) Int 10 (+3) Cha 10 (+3) Equipment: hide armor, shadar-kai short sword, hand crossbow, 20 bolts
2 Wicked Fang Sentries (E)
Level 7 Soldier
Medium natural humanoid XP 300 Initiative +6 Senses Perception +11, low-light vision HP 80; Bloodied 40 AC 23; Fortitude 20, Reflex 18, Will 19 Speed 7 m Shadar-Kai Greatsword (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon +14 vs. AC; 1d12 + 5 damage (crit 1d12 + 17), or 1d12 + 7 damage (crit 1d12 + 19) while bloodied, and the target is marked until the end of the gnoll sentry’s next turn; see also pack attack. C Defend the Pack (standard; recharge 6 ) ✦ Weapon Close burst 1; +12 vs. AC; 1d12 + 5 damage, or 1d12 + 7 damage while bloodied, and the target is marked until the end of the gnoll sentry’s next turn; see also pack attack. Defensive Lure (move; encounter) The gnoll sentry shifts 3 squares, then pulls all targets it has marked 3 squares. Pack Attack The gnoll sentry deals an extra 5 damage on melee attacks against an enemy that has two or more of the gnoll sentry’s allies adjacent to it. Alignment Chaotic evil Languages Abyssal, Common Str 19 (+7) Dex 13 (+4) Wis 16 (+6) Con 16 (+6) Int 10 (+3) Cha 8 (+2) Equipment: hide armor, shadar-kai greatsword
November 20 08
|
D U N G E O N 16 0
33
Den of the Destroyer
Stonewalker Spirit (S)
Level 7 Lurker
Medium elemental magical beast (earth) XP 300 Initiative +10 Senses Perception +5 HP 45; Bloodied 22 AC 21; Fortitude 19, Reflex 19, Will 20 Immune disease, petrification, poison; Resist insubstantial Speed fly 6 (hover) m Spectral Grasp (standard; at-will) +10 vs. Reflex; 2d4 + 7 damage. M Petrifying Touch (standard; recharge 6 ) +10 vs. Fortitude; the target is slowed (save ends). First Failed Save: The target is immobilized instead of slowed (save ends). Second Failed Save: The target is petrified (no save), and is considered to be a statue for the purposes of the possess statue ability. Possess Statue (free, when entering the same space as a statue; at-will) The stonewalker spirit assumes the form of a possessed statue. Use the possessed statue stat block instead of the stonewalker spirit’s stat block. Flee the Form (free, when a possessed statue is reduced to 0 hit points; at-will) The stonewalker spirit takes 16 damage (ignores insubstantial) as it reverts to its normal form, then moves up to its speed. Alignment Unaligned Languages Abyssal, Primordial Skills Stealth +11 Str 10 (+3) Dex 17 (+6) Wis 14 (+5) Con 16 (+6) Int 11 (+3) Cha 19 (+7)
Perception Check DC 14: Though you see no sign of anyone on the stairs, telltale shadows give away the presence of creatures hiding behind the statues. As the PCs climb the stairs, read: With a yelp, four gnolls slip out of hiding places behind the statues and race forward to attack. The stonewalker spirit begins the encounter hovering behind one of the statues, which it possesses in the first round.
Possessed Statue
Level 7 Brute
Large natural animate XP — Initiative +10 Senses Perception +5 HP 24; Bloodied 12 AC 21; Fortitude 20, Reflex 17, Will 20 Speed 5 m Stone Fists (standard; at-will) +10 vs. AC; 2d8 + 7 damage. M Thundering Charge (standard; recharge 5 6 ) ✦ Thunder +10 vs. AC; 4d8 + 7 damage; the possessed statue can move up to its speed before making this attack, and any creature that hits the possessed statue with an opportunity attack during this movement takes 1d8 + 7 thunder damage. Surefooted The possessed statue ignores difficult terrain. Merely a Shell A possessed statue has a hit point total of its own, and does not share hit points with its stonewalker spirit form. Damage dealt to the possessed statue is not dealt to the stonewalker spirit form. Alignment Unaligned Languages Abyssal, Primordial Str 19 (+7) Dex 11 (+3) Wis 14 (+5) Con 19 (+7) Int 11 (+3) Cha 19 (+7)
Tactics The stonewalker spirit possesses a statue in the first round, attacking in that form. It uses thundering charge as often as possible, laying into the PCs with its stone fists while it waits for that power to recharge. If forced to flee a statue, the stonewalker spirit uses its petrifying touch power on a spellcaster or ranged combatant before possessing another statue. The gnoll sentries stay front and center in melee, maximizing the effect of their defend the pack attacks, then making greatsword attacks while that power recharges. The gnoll scouts snipe with shortbows against any PCs on the outskirts of melee. If pressed, they drop their bows and attack with short swords.
The gnolls on the stairs fight in close proximity to take advantage of their pack attack power.
Features of the Area Illumination: Bright sunlight during the day; dim starlight at night. Stairs: The wide stone stairs leading up to the entrance are difficult terrain when ascending. Characters descending or moving horizontally along the stairs treat them as normal terrain. Waterfall: Where the waterfall flows down the stairs, the stone has been worn smooth and slippery. Any creature that falls prone in one of those square slides 1 square down the stairs. Statues: The four statues depict the ancient githzerai who built Fortress Graystone. A statue provides cover unless possessed by the stonewalker spirit. When possessed by the stonewalker spirit, the statue breaks free of its pedestal, destroying it and turning the squares it occupied into difficult terrain. Wall and Balcony: The balcony juts out from the wall 50 feet above the top of the stairs. The crumbling stone wall cannot be climbed.
November 20 08
|
D U N G E O N 16 0
34
Den of the Destroyer
THORN’S ATTACK Encounter Level 11 (3,000 XP)
Setup Thorn, bounty hunter 2 elderwood falcons 2 ironwood hounds
Perception Check DC 19: A faint sound betrays footsteps behind you. The elf mercenary Thorn is attempting to approach unheard, two fierce-looking hounds at his side and a pair of hunting falcons on his shoulders. As you see him, he snarls a command, the dogs bounding forward as the falcons take to the air. 2 Elderwood Falcons
Though he has shown great caution as he follows the PCs and reactivates the traps in Fortress Graystone, the bounty hunter Thorn eventually makes his move against the party. This encounter can take place at any time once the PCs have arrived at Fortress Graystone, at your discretion. Thorn should attack at a point when the PCs’ resources have been depleted—after a difficult encounter, halfway through an attempt to take an extended rest, and so on. (Allow the PCs to take a short rest before Thorn attacks, as they are likely to need their encounter powers and have a chance to heal up in order to defeat him.) Since this encounter can take place anywhere in Fortress Graystone, use the “Features of the Area” from the appropriate location. If Thorn attacks when the PCs have left the fortress to take an extended rest in the forest, map the area to incorporate the features presented below. Thorn attempts to catch the PCs unawares in order to gain a surprise round, either approaching by way of one of the secret doors in the fortress or attacking from cover elsewhere.
Level 6 Skirmisher
Medium natural animate XP 250 Initiative +9 Senses Perception +6; low-light vision HP 70; Bloodied 35 AC 20; Fortitude 17, Reflex 19, Will 18 Speed 2, fly 6 (hover) m Talon (standard; at-will) +11 vs. AC; 2d4 + 4 damage, and the target slides 1 square. M Swoop (standard; at-will) The elderwood falcon shifts 1 square, makes a talon attack, then shifts 1 square. Alignment Unaligned Languages — Str 8 (+2) Dex 19 (+7) Wis 16 (+6) Con 14 (+5) Int 2 (–1) Cha 6 (+1)
2 Ironwood Hounds
Level 6 Soldier
Medium natural animate XP 250 Initiative +6 Senses Perception +4; low-light vision HP 69; Bloodied 34 AC 22; Fortitude 18, Reflex 17, Will 16 Speed 6 m Bite (standard; at-will) +13 vs. AC; 2d6 + 2 damage, and the target is marked until the end of the ironwood hound’s next turn. M Drive Back (standard; at-will) +11 vs. Fortitude; 2d6 + 2 damage, and the target is pushed 2 squares and the ironwood hound can shift 2 squares. The ironwood hound must end its shift adjacent to the target’s new position. Alignment Unaligned Languages — Skills Intimidate +7 Str 16 (+6) Dex 13 (+4) Wis 12 (+4) Con 13 (+4) Int 2 (–1) Cha 8 (+2)
Thorn
Level 9 Solo Skirmisher
Medium fey humanoid, elf XP 2,000 Initiative +11 Senses Perception +7 HP 388; Bloodied 194 AC 25; Fortitude 21, Reflex 24, Will 23 Saving Throws +5 Speed 6 Action Points 2 m Longsword (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon +14 vs. AC; 1d8 + 5 damage r Hand Crossbow (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon Range 10/20; +14 vs. AC; 1d6 + 6 damage R Double Bolts (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon Thorn makes two hand crossbow attacks. R Gripping Net (minor; recharge 6 ) ✦ Weapon Range 2/5; Requires net; +12 vs. Reflex; target is restrained (save ends). R Pepper Bomb (minor; recharge 4 5 6 ) ✦ Weapon Range 5/10; Requires pepper bomb; +12 vs. Reflex; target is blinded (save ends). R Retaliatory Shot (immediate reaction; when hit by a ranged or area attack; at-will) Thorn makes a hand crossbow attack against the target that hit him. A Bolt Storm (standard; encounter) ✦ Weapon Requires hand crossbow; area burst 2 within 10; +12 vs. AC; 3d6 + 8 damage. A Desperate Bolt Storm (free; when first bloodied; encounter) ✦ Weapon Thorn’s bolt storm recharges, and he uses it immediately. Elven Accuracy (free; encounter) Thorn can reroll an attack roll. He must use the second roll, even if it is lower. Wild Step Thorn ignores difficult terrain when he shifts. Alignment Unaligned Languages Common, Elven Skills Bluff +12, Insight +12, Stealth +14, Survival +12, Thievery +14 Str 13 (+5) Dex 20 (+9) Wis 16 (+7) Con 17 (+7) Int 11 (+4) Cha 10 (+4) Equipment leather armor, hand crossbow with 40 bolts, longsword, net, 6 pepper bombs
November 20 08
|
D U N G E O N 16 0
35
Den of the Destroyer
Tactics The first full round, Thorn takes two minor actions to target a wizard or other controller with pepper bomb and hit a melee combatant with gripping net. He then makes hand crossbow attacks against lightly armored foes, using bolt storm if he can target three or more PCs. While wielding his hand crossbow, he uses retaliatory shot to target PCs engaged by the hounds or the falcons. If pressed into melee, he spends his action
points to make additional pepper bomb or gripping net attacks, resorting to longsword attacks only if he has no other option. The ironwood hounds stay in the thick of melee, making bite attacks and using drive back to keep combatants away from Thorn. The elderwood falcons make swoop attacks against lightly armored PCs, staying out of melee range and sliding foes who try to engage Thorn.
Aftermath If Thorn is kept alive, he can be easily convinced to tell the PCs his story in exchange for his life. The bounty hunter is happy to bargain away his knowledge of the fortress’s secret passageways, and to fill the PCs in on the layout of any sections they have not yet seen. In addition, Thorn knows most of the history of the fortress (having explored it in his youth), and he can fill the PCs in on the information presented on page 65. Thorn reserves his most significant knowledge to bargain for his freedom, promising the PCs (truthfully) that he will abandon his pursuit of them if they let him flee the fortress. If the PCs agree, Thorn informs them that Sarshan is behind the bounty placed on their heads in Overlook. (If Thorn does not survive this encounter, the PCs discover a note on his body linking Sarshan to the bounty.)
Features of the Area Use the following features to create an encounter area outside the fortress if Thorn attacks while the PCs are taking an extended rest. Trees: Squares containing trees are difficult terrain and provide concealment to anyone standing in them. A tree’s trunk provides cover to anyone standing adjacent to it. Stream: Where the waterfall hits the tree line, it carves out a narrow stream that flows 5 feet deep and is difficult terrain. Characters in the water gain cover except against attacks from submerged enemies. Fighting in the water imposes a –2 penalty to attack rolls except with spears and crossbows. Boulders: These 5-foot-high rocks provide cover. A boulder can be climbed with a DC 10 Athletics check.
November 20 08
|
D U N G E O N 16 0
36
Den of the Destroyer
GITHZERAI MIND TRAP Encounter Level 8 (1,750 XP)
Setup 1 gnoll demonic scourge (D) 2 Wicked Fang maulers (M) 2 Wicked Fang lashers (L) The githzerai mind trap was disabled when the gnolls seized control of the fortress. However, Thorn has beaten the party here and reactivated it, hoping to Gnoll Demonic Scourge (D) Level 8 Brute (Leader) Medium natural humanoid XP 350 Initiative +6 Senses Perception +7; low-light vision Leader of the Pack aura 5; allies in the aura gain a +1 bonus to attack rolls. While this creature is bloodied, the bonus increases to +2. HP 106; Bloodied 53 AC 20; Fortitude 21, Reflex 18, Will 18 Speed 5 m Heavy Flail (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon +13 vs. AC; 2d6 + 5 damage, or 2d6 + 7 while bloodied; against a bloodied enemy, this attack also knocks the target prone; see also pack attack. Bloodthirst If the gnoll demonic scourge bloodies an enemy with a melee attack, an ally adjacent to the enemy can make a melee attack against that enemy as an immediate reaction. Overwhelming Attack (free; encounter) The gnoll demonic scourge applies its bloodthirst power to two allies instead of one. Pack Attack The gnoll demonic scourge deals an extra 5 damage on melee attacks against an enemy that has two or more of the demonic scourge’s allies adjacent to it. Alignment Chaotic evil Languages Abyssal, Common Skills Insight +10, Intimidate +13, Religion +10 Str 20 (+9) Dex 14 (+6) Wis 12 (+5) Con 16 (+7) Int 13 (+5) Cha 15 (+6) Equipment hide armor, heavy flail
wear the PCs down by pitting them against the gnoll defenders now trapped here. The gnoll demonic scourge and his two lashers begin in the second chamber, while the two gnoll maulers begin in the first chamber near the entrance to the fortress.
runes dominates the f loor of the first chamber, while a smaller circle adorns the floor of the room beyond.
Tactics
As the stone doors open, you see a wide octagonal chamber before you. On five of the walls, portals glow and pulse with arcane energy. The far side of the room appears to be made of extremely thick glass, revealing a second chamber beyond with four portals on the wall. A massive circle of carved
The gnoll maulers stay in the thick of melee, using their backhand power as often as possible alongside beat back and greatsword attacks. The gnoll lashers focus whip flay and drag around attacks on spellcasters and ranged combatants. Both the maulers and lashers use their forced movement abilities to force PCs through the portals, splitting the party. The gnoll demonic scourge stays in the area with the maximum number of allies, increasing the effectiveness of its leader of the pack aura and bloodthirst ability.
2 Wicked Fang Maulers (M)
2 Wicked Fang Lashers (L)
When the PCs enter the fortress, read:
Level 7 Brute
Medium natural humanoid XP 300 Initiative +4 Senses Perception +6; low-light vision HP 94; Bloodied 47 AC 19; Fortitude 20, Reflex 18, Will 19 Speed 7 m Shadar-Kai Greatsword (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon +10 vs. AC; 1d12 + 8 damage (crit 1d12 + 20), or 1d12 + 10 damage (crit 1d12 + 22) while bloodied; see also pack attack. M Backhand (minor; recharge 5 6 ) +10 vs. AC; 1d6 + 8 damage, or 1d6 + 10 damage while bloodied, and the target is knocked prone; see also pack attack. M Beat Back (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon +10 vs. AC; 1d12 + 8 damage (crit 1d12 + 20), or 1d12 + 10 damage (crit 1d12 + 22) while bloodied, and the target is pushed 2 squares; see also pack attack. Pack Attack The gnoll mauler deals an extra 5 damage on melee attacks against an enemy that has two or more of the gnoll mauler’s allies adjacent to it. Alignment Chaotic evil Languages Abyssal, Common Skills Athletics +12 Str 19 (+7) Dex 13 (+4) Wis 17 (+6) Con 14 (+5) Int 10 (+3) Cha 8 (+2) Equipment: hide armor, shadar-kai greatsword
Level 9 Skirmisher
Medium natural humanoid XP 400 Initiative +11 Senses Perception +7; low-light vision HP 93; Bloodied 46 AC 23; Fortitude 21, Reflex 22, Will 21 Speed 7 m Barbed Whip (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon Reach 2; +14 vs. AC; 1d8 + 4 damage (or 1d8 + 6 damage while bloodied) and ongoing 5 damage (save ends); see also pack attack. M Whip Flay (standard; encounter) ✦ Weapon Requires barbed whip; reach 2; +14 vs. AC; 3d8 + 7 damage (or 3d8 + 9 damage while bloodied) and ongoing 10 damage (save ends); see also pack attack. M Drag Around (standard; recharge 5 6 ) ✦ Weapon Requires barbed whip; reach 2; +12 vs. Fortitude; 2d8 + 5 damage (or 2d8 + 7 damage while bloodied) and the target slides 3 squares; see also pack attack. Pack Attack The gnoll lasher deals an extra 5 damage on melee attacks against an enemy that has two or more of the gnoll lasher’s allies adjacent to it. Alignment Chaotic evil Languages Abyssal, Common Skills Stealth +14 Str 16 (+7) Dex 20 (+9) Wis 16 (+7) Con 13 (+5) Int 10 (+4) Cha 10 (+4) Equipment: hide armor, barbed whip
November 20 08
|
D U N G E O N 16 0
37
Den of the Destroyer
RUNNING THE MIND TRAP The gith zerai mind trap’s shifting portals are meant to confuse the PCs, but their movement can be tracked by you in a relatively simple way. When the first creature passes through a portal, make a tally mark indicating that the portals have shifted. On subsequent turns, if a creature steps through a portal in the first room, find that portal in the second or third rooms (treating both as one area), then move a number of portals counterclockwise equal to the current tally. Afterward, add another tally mark. If a creature steps into a portal in the second room, find the correct exit portal in the first room, then move clockwise a number of portals equal to the current tally. (Do not add another tally for creatures moving from the second room to the first.) When your tally reaches 5, the portals have shifted back to their initial positions and you can start again.
in the second, and one in the final chamber. Each of the portals in the first chamber is linked to one of the other portals, as noted by the numbers on each portal. When a creature enters one portal, it exits through the other portal of the same number. However, each time a creature passes through a portal in either direction, the portals in the first chamber shift one position clockwise. For example, portal 1 begins on the north wall of the room. The first time a creature passes through any portal, portal 1 shifts to the south side of the room, with all the other portals moving with it accordingly. Only the portals in the first chamber shift position, and this movement is undetectable by simple
observation. In order to exit the mind trap, each character must reach the exit chamber by passing through portal 1, or by taking the secret door in the second chamber. Secret Door: This portal leads to the secret passages used by the gnolls (and Thorn) to move about the fortress. A DC 19 Perception check reveals the presence of the door, which can be opened normally. Translucent Walls: The stone walls between the three githzerai mind trap chambers have the magical appearance of massive sheets of glass. These walls block line of effect but not line of sight, and allow the PCs to see into the other chambers (helping them determine how to exit the mind trap).
Features of the Area Illumination: Torches on the walls and the arcane runes on the floor fill both chambers with bright light. Arcane Circles: The first and second chambers in the mind trap feature circles of glowing arcane runes that power the area’s portals. A DC 19 Arcana check and 10 minutes work allows a PC to control the circles, stabilizing the portals and preventing them from shifting each time a creature passes through (see below). Mind Trap Portals: The githzerai mind trap is designed to disorient creatures attempting an incursion of Fortress Graystone. The mind trap consists of a set of linked portals, five in the first chamber, four
November 20 08
|
D U N G E O N 16 0
38
Den of the Destroyer
THE CELLS Encounter Level 9 (1,900 XP)
Setup 1 Wicked Fang keeper (W) 2 Wicked Fang guards (G) 1 Wicked Fang mauler (M) 1 Wicked Fang lasher (L) Since taking over Fortress Graystone, the gnolls have captured dozens of prisoners on Sarshan’s orders. Three survivors of these raids are currently being held in an area the gnolls refer to as the cells. These prisoners and their unfortunate predecessors are fated to become the subjects of Fangren’s dark experiments. When the PCs first descend the stairs, read: From somewhere ahead comes a foul smell and the barking of harsh voices. When the PCs can see into this area, read: At the bottom of the second staircase is a crescent-shaped chamber set with three doors, its walls and f loors stained red-black with dried blood. The stench of rot and filth is overwhelming, a number of gnolls apparently oblivious to it as they argue among themselves.
Wicked Fang Keeper (W)
Level 8 Elite Controller
Medium natural humanoid XP 700 Initiative +9 Senses Perception +7; low-light vision HP 178; Bloodied 89 AC 24; Fortitude 20, Reflex 23, Will 20 Speed 7 m Shadar-Kai Short Sword (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon +13 vs. AC; 2d6 + 5 damage (crit 1d6 + 17), or 2d6 + 7 damage (crit 1d6 + 19) while bloodied; see also pack attack. r Handaxe (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon Ranged 5/10; +13 vs. AC; 2d6 + 5 damage (crit 1d6 + 17), or 2d6 + 7 damage (crit 1d6 + 19) while bloodied; see also pack attack. R Rain of Blades (standard; at-will) The gnoll keeper makes three handaxe attacks, each of which must be against a different target. M No Escape This Time (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon Requires short sword; +13 vs. AC; 2d6 + 5 damage (crit 1d6 + 17), or 2d6 + 7 damage (crit 1d6 + 19) while bloodied and the target is knocked prone; see also pack attack. M Keeper’s Shackles (minor; recharge 6 ) Targets adjacent prone creature; +12 vs. Fortitude; target is restrained (until escape). Caltrops (minor; encounter) The gnoll keeper can designate a 1-square burst area within 5 squares; that area is filled with caltrops. Until the end of the encounter, any creature that enters a square filled with caltrops without treating it as difficult terrain takes 1d6 + 4 damage. Pack Attack The gnoll keeper deals an extra 5 damage on melee attacks against an enemy that has two or more of the gnoll keeper’s allies adjacent to it. Alignment Chaotic evil Languages Abyssal, Common Skills Intimidate +11 Str 13 (+5) Dex 20 (+9) Wis 17 (+7) Con 17 (+7) Int 10 (+4) Cha 14 (+6) Equipment: hide armor, shadar-kai short sword
2 Wicked Fang Guards (G)
Level 6 Soldier
Medium natural humanoid XP 250 Initiative +7 Senses Perception +4; low-light vision HP 74; Bloodied 37 AC 22; Fortitude 19, Reflex 18, Will 17 Speed 7 m Shadar-Kai Greatsword (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon +13 vs. AC; 1d12 + 7 damage (crit 1d12 + 19), or 1d12 + 9 damage (crit 1d12 + 21) while bloodied, and the target is marked until the end of the gnoll guard’s next turn; see also pack attack. M Pinning Attack (standard; encounter) ✦ Weapon Requires greatsword; +11 vs. Fortitude; 1d12 + 7 damage (crit 1d12 + 19), or 1d12 + 9 damage (crit 1d12 + 21) while bloodied, and the target is immobilized until the end of the gnoll guard’s next turn; see also pack attack. Pack Attack The gnoll guard deals an extra 5 damage on melee attacks against an enemy that has two or more of the gnoll guard’s allies adjacent to it. Alignment Chaotic evil Languages Abyssal, Common Str 14 (+5) Dex 15 (+5) Wis 13 (+4) Con 18 (+7) Int 10 (+3) Cha 8 (+2) Equipment: hide armor, shadar-kai greatsword
If a PC speaks gnoll, the argument concerns the keeper reminding the other guards that the prisoners cannot be eaten, on Fangren’s orders. The PCs can make Stealth checks against the gnolls’ Perception checks in an attempt to approach unseen. However, the gnolls are alert.
November 20 08
|
D U N G E O N 16 0
39
Den of the Destroyer
Wicked Fang Mauler (M)
Level 7 Brute
Wicked Fang Lasher (L)
Level 9 Skirmisher
Medium natural humanoid XP 300 Initiative +4 Senses Perception +6; low-light vision HP 94; Bloodied 47 AC 19; Fortitude 20, Reflex 18, Will 19 Speed 7 m Shadar-Kai Greatsword (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon +10 vs. AC; 1d12 + 8 damage (crit 1d12 + 20), or 1d12 + 10 damage (crit 1d12 + 22) while bloodied; see also pack attack. M Backhand (minor; recharge 5 6 ) +10 vs. AC; 1d6 + 8 damage, or 1d6 + 10 damage while bloodied, and the target is knocked prone; see also pack attack. M Beat Back (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon +10 vs. AC; 1d12 + 8 damage (crit 1d12 + 20), or 1d12 + 10 damage (crit 1d12 + 22) while bloodied, and the target is pushed 2 squares; see also pack attack. Pack Attack The gnoll mauler deals an extra 5 damage on melee attacks against an enemy that has two or more of the gnoll mauler’s allies adjacent to it. Alignment Chaotic evil Languages Abyssal, Common Skills Athletics +12 Str 19 (+7) Dex 13 (+4) Wis 17 (+6) Con 14 (+5) Int 10 (+3) Cha 8 (+2) Equipment: hide armor, shadar-kai greatsword
Medium natural humanoid XP 400 Initiative +11 Senses Perception +7; low-light vision HP 93; Bloodied 46 AC 23; Fortitude 21, Reflex 22, Will 21 Speed 7 m Barbed Whip (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon Reach 2; +14 vs. AC; 1d8 + 4 damage (or 1d8 + 6 damage while bloodied) and ongoing 5 damage (save ends); see also pack attack. M Whip Flay (standard; encounter) ✦ Weapon Requires barbed whip; reach 2; +14 vs. AC; 3d8 + 7 damage (or 3d8 + 9 damage while bloodied) and ongoing 10 damage (save ends); see also pack attack. M Drag Around (standard; recharge 5 6 ) ✦ Weapon Requires barbed whip; reach 2; +12 vs. Fortitude; 2d8 + 5 damage (or 2d8 + 7 damage while bloodied) and the target slides 3 squares; see also pack attack. Pack Attack The gnoll lasher deals an extra 5 damage on melee attacks against an enemy that has two or more of the gnoll lasher’s allies adjacent to it. Alignment Chaotic evil Languages Abyssal, Common Skills Stealth +14 Str 16 (+7) Dex 20 (+9) Wis 16 (+7) Con 13 (+5) Int 10 (+4) Cha 10 (+4) Equipment: hide armor, barbed whip
Tactics
The gnoll lashers target spellcasters and ranged combatants with whip f lay and drag around attacks, using their reach to fight past their allies if need be.
The gnoll keeper throws his caltrops to impede the PCs’ movement, then stays back to throw handaxes at lightly armored targets. If pressed into melee, he uses no escape this time to set up his keeper’s shackles attack. The gnoll guards mark the most powerful looking melee combatants in an attempt to keep them occupied. They reserve their pinning attack for a spellcaster or ranged combatant. The gnoll mauler takes on the most powerfullooking melee combatant with beat back and greatsword attacks. When its backhand power is recharged, it uses it to push its current foe into melee with the guards or the lasher, then selects another target.
wealthy landowner, a curate at a church of Pelor, and a retired sage. If any of the gnolls are kept alive for questioning, they speak of Fangren’s experiments in the ritual chamber. They know that he uses the prisoners to test the effects of powerful magic on living subjects, but they do not know his overall plans.
Features of the Area Illumination: Torches shed bright light throughout the area. The cells are dark if their doors are closed; dimly lit if their doors are open. Cells: The cells in which the prisoners are held were once the personal chambers of the githzerai who built the fortress. Their furnishings rotted away long ago, and the prisoners now sleep on beds of filthy straw. The doors are not locked, but the prisoners’ fear keeps them in line.
Development Three prisoners occupy the cells. All are in failing health but have enough strength to flee the fortress if given food and water. The captives have no knowledge of the gnolls’ operations or plans. The prisoners are all from different areas of Elsir Vale, and they have no idea why they were kidnapped by the gnolls. Each is a person of some importance—a
November 20 08
|
D U N G E O N 16 0
40
Den of the Destroyer
TRAINING CHAMBER
When the characters can see into this area, read:
Encounter Level 8 (1,850 XP)
The ceiling of this huge chamber rises some 60 feet overhead. The sound of rushing water sounds out faintly, a meager ref lection of its source—a waterfall descending from an opening in the ceiling to a pool set within a raised platform. Two stone gutters carry water down from the pool into channels in the f loor, creating small rivers that f low through circuitous paths in the ground with great speed. Every few seconds, the noise of stone on stone sounds out as these aqueducts in the f loor shift to follow a new path.
Setup 1 ruin-touched beastcaller (R) 2 ruin-touched bloodwalkers (B) 3 slaughterfang hyenas (S) Once a githzerai training ground, this chamber has been given over to the ruin-touched gnolls within the Wicked Fang tribe. The ruin-touched—gnolls who undergo powerful rituals in order to gain the supernatural grace of their demon lord—gave Fangren the knowledge that allowed him to control the planar breach at the heart of Fortress Graystone.
2 Ruin-Touched Bloodwalker
Level 9 Skirmisher
Medium natural humanoid, gnoll XP 400 Initiative +11 Senses Perception +6; low-light vision HP 95; Bloodied 47 AC 23; Fortitude 19, Reflex 22, Will 21; see also blood defense Speed 6 m Jagged Sickle (standard; at will) ✦ Weapon +14 vs. AC; 2d6 + 5 damage (crit 1d6 + 17). m Blood Defense (standard; target must be bloodied; at will) ✦ Weapon +14 vs. AC; 2d6 + 5 damage, and the bloodwalker gains a +2 power bonus to all defenses until the end of its next turn. Bloodwalk (move; recharge 4 5 6 ) ✦ Teleportation The bloodwalker teleports up to 10 squares to a space adjacent to a bloodied creature, including itself if it is bloodied. Blood Frenzy (free; the bloodwalker must be bloodied; at-will) When the bloodwalker makes a successful melee attack, it shifts 2 squares. Pack Attack The bloodwalker deals an extra 5 damage on melee attacks against an enemy that has two or more of the bloodwalker’s allies adjacent to it. Alignment Chaotic Evil Languages Abyssal, Common Skills Intimidate +13, Religion +10, Stealth +14 Str 15 (+6) Dex 21 (+9) Wis 14 (+6) Con 15 (+6) Int 13 (+5) Cha 18 (+8) Equipment: hide armor, jagged sickle
Beastcaller
Level 7 Controller
Medium natural humanoid, gnoll XP 300 Initiative +7 Senses Perception +6; low-light vision HP 81; Bloodied 40 AC 21; Fortitude 19, Reflex 19, Will 21 Speed 6 m Claw (standard; at will) +13 vs. AC; 2d6 + 3 damage. r Javelin (standard; at will) ✦ Weapon Range 5/10; +13 vs. AC; 2d6 + 3 damage. A Murderous Flock (standard; recharge 6 ) Ravens appear from nowhere and descend upon the battlefield. Burst 3 within 20; targets enemies; +11 vs. Reflex; 2d4 + 5 damage, and the target is blinded and takes ongoing 5 damage (save ends both). Miss: Half damage, and ongoing 5 damage (save ends) and the target is not blinded. A Erupting Swarm (standard; recharge 5 6 ) Vermin boil from the earth and ravage everything in their path. Burst 3 within 10; targets enemies on the ground; +11 vs. Fortitude; 2d4 + 5 damage, and the target is immobilized and takes ongoing 5 poison damage (save ends both). Miss: Half damage, and ongoing 5 poison damage (save ends) and the target is not immobilized. Effect: The area becomes difficult terrain until the end of the encounter. R Against the Tide (minor 1/round; at-will) Ranged 10; targets one creature hit by murderous flock or erupting swarm this turn; +13 vs. Fortitude; the beastcaller slides the target 3 squares or the target is knocked prone. Alignment Chaotic Evil Languages Abyssal, Common Skills Religion +11 Str 14 (+6) Dex 17 (+7) Wis 15 (+6) Con 17 (+7) Int 15 (+6) Cha 20 (+9) Equipment leather armor, 3 javelins
November 20 08
|
D U N G E O N 16 0
41
Den of the Destroyer
3 Slaughterfang Hyenas (S)
Level 6 Skirmisher
Large natural beast XP 250 Initiative +8 Senses Perception +6; low-light vision HP 71; Bloodied 35 AC 20; Fortitude 19, Reflex 18, Will 18 Speed 8 m Bite (standard; at will) +11 vs. AC; 1d8+4 damage. Harrier If a slaughterfang is adjacent to an enemy, all other creatures have combat advantage against that enemy when making melee attacks. Pack Attack ✦ Mount The slaughterfang hyena deals an extra 5 damage on melee attacks against an enemy that has two or more of the hyena’s allies adjacent to it. When mounted by a friendly rider of 6th level or higher who also has the pack attack trait, the slaughterfang and its rider count as allies for pack attack purposes, meaning they need only one additional adjacent ally to use this ability. Ravaging Charge (when mounted by a friendly rider of 6th level or higher who also has the pack attack trait; at will) ✦ Mount When making a charge attack, the slaughterfang hyena and its rider both deal extra damage as per their pack attack power, even if they have no other allies adjacent to the foe. If they do have at least one other ally adjacent to the foe, their pack attack deals an extra point of damage (that is, 6 rather than 5). Alignment Unaligned Languages — Str 19 (+7) Dex 16 (+6) Wis 16 (+6) Con 15 (+5) Int 2 (–1) Cha 6 (+1)
Tactics The ruin-touched gnolls begin the encounter mounted on the slaughterfang hyenas. Once they are bloodied, the bloodwalkers dismount while the hyenas continue to fight on their own. The ruin-touched beastcaller sends its murderous f lock and erupting swarm against the PCs, employing against the tide to slide individual PCs into the aqueducts or into position for flanking attacks. The ruin-touched bloodwalkers focus on a single target each, making jagged sickle attacks until they are bloodied. They then use their bloodwalk power to regroup or to follow the foe that bloodied them, as appropriate. The slaughterfang hyenas make charge attacks whenever possible, staying close to grant pack attack bonuses to both them and their riders.
Features of the Area Illumination: Braziers built into the walls provide bright light throughout the area. Waterfall and Pool: The waterfall descends from an opening in the ceiling 60 feet above, where a mountain stream has been diverted into the fortress. The water cascades down from the ceiling to land in a pool set within a 10-foot-tall platform, then is shunted into aqueducts (see below). The water in the pool is 3 feet deep and is difficult terrain. Additionally, the force of the falling water deals 1d6 damage to any creature that ends its turn in the pool. The platform provides cover and can be climbed with a DC 15 Athletics check. The magical power that shunts the water through the aqueducts also mutes the noise of the waterfall to a faint roar.
Aqueducts: Shallow aqueducts mark out a circuitous path across the floor of the chamber. Water is magically shunted through these channels with enough force to move creatures, testing the balance and perception of the githzerai who trained here. Stone tiles slide over the aqueduct segments not currently in use, allowing creatures to pass over those squares unhindered. These paths are indicated on the map by red and blue lines, with arrows indicating the direction in which the water flows to drain grates cemented into the stone floor. When the encounter begins, determine which path the water is currently following by rolling 1d6. On an odd result, the water flows along the red path; on an even result, along the blue path. At the beginning of each round, roll again to determine whether the flow of water continues or changes. At the start of a creature’s turn, if it is in a square through which water is flowing, it slides 1 square along the water’s path. If the next square in the path is currently occupied, that creature also slides 1 square, and so on.
November 20 08
|
D U N G E O N 16 0
42
Den of the Destroyer
MEDITATION CHAMBER
When the PCs approach this area (whether through the secret door or the double doors), read:
When the first PC passes more than 3 squares from either the main door or the secret door, read:
The door before you appears to have been jammed shut with the broken haft of a spear. Scrawled across its face are warnings written in the Abyssal tongue of the gnolls: “DANGER! HAUNTED! STAY OUT!”
Suddenly, the air in the southern chamber begins to shimmer as the spectral figures of two githzerai appear. Though they wield no weapons, their intentions are clear as they circle around you, preparing to strike. At the same time, the chaotic colors of the walls to the north are suddenly rent by dazzling light. Three translucent forms appear, their shifting colors blazing as they move to attack.
Encounter Level 8 (1,850 XP)
Setup 2 gith zerai psionic echoes (E) 3 mindscramblers (M) The gnolls of the Wicked Fang pack consider this area haunted. As a result, it remains untouched and as it was when the githzerai abandoned this place.
When the PCs can see into this area, read: This huge chamber is divided into two zones. To the south is a wide hall with sweeping, curved walls. To the north is a rough-edged cavern full of odd angles and irregular ridges across the f loor. The walls of this second chamber have been painted in chaotic and clashing colors, three pits along its edge falling off into darkness. A wide wall separates these two areas, cut by a circular platform that rises 15 feet high. When the PCs enter the meditation chamber, their presence disturbs the area’s ancient guardians. In the southern chamber (an area dedicated to law), the ghostlike psionic echoes of two githzerai warriors perceive the PCs as intruders and manifest to attack. At the same time, the githzerai’s appearance summons three mindscramblers in the northern chamber, infused with the energy of primordial chaos.
2 Githzerai Psionic Echoes (E)
Level 9 Soldier
Medium elemental humanoid XP 400 Initiative +9 Senses Perception +9 HP 92; Bloodied 46 AC 25; Fortitude 20, Reflex 21, Will 22 Speed 7 m Unarmed Strike (standard; at-will) +16 vs. AC; 2d6 + 6 damage. r Lesser Mindstrike (standard; at-will) ✦ Psychic Range 10; +14 vs. Will; 1d10 + 9 psychic damage. M Psionic Strike (standard; encounter) ✦ Psychic +14 vs. Will; 2d8 + 9 damage plus 1d8 psychic damage; until the end of its next turn, the target has vulnerable 10 psychic. Iron Mind (immediate interrupt; when the githzerai psionic echo would be hit by an attack; encounter) The githzerai psionic echo gains a +2 bonus to all defenses until the end of its next turn. Unstable Manifestation (immediate reaction; when the githzerai psionic echo takes damage; encounter) The githzerai psionic echo becomes insubstantial until the end of its next turn. Alignment Unaligned Languages Common, Deep Speech Str 14 (+6) Dex 17 (+7) Wis 11 (+4) Con 12 (+5) Int 10 (+4) Cha 20 (+9)
November 20 08
|
D U N G E O N 16 0
43
Den of the Destroyer
3 Mindscramblers (M)
Level 8 Skirmisher
Medium elemental animate XP 350 Initiative +9 Senses Perception +3 HP 89; Bloodied 44 AC 22; Fortitude 20, Reflex 20, Will 20 Speed 6 m Chaos Touch (standard; at-will) ✦ Psychic +11 vs. Reflex; 1d6 + 7 psychic damage. M Scrambled Mind (standard; at-will) ✦ Psychic +11 vs. Will; 1d6 + 7 psychic damage, and the target makes a melee basic attack against one of its adjacent allies. M Dizzying Touch (standard; recharge 5 6 ) ✦ Psychic +11 vs. Will; 3d6 + 7 psychic damage, and the target slides 3 squares and is dazed (save ends). R Misdirection (immediate interrupt; when an enemy within 10 squares moves or shifts; encounter) +11 vs. Will; the target is pushed 3 squares and may not continue its movement. Trace Chance (standard; encounter) Ranged 5; no attack roll required; the next melee attack made against the target gains a +5 power bonus and, if it hits, it is automatically a critical hit. Alignment Chaotic evil Languages Primordial Skills Intimidate +12 Str 11 (+4) Dex 16 (+7) Wis 8 (+3) Con 17 (+7) Int 8 (+3) Cha 16 (+7)
Tactics
Features of the Area
The mindscramblers select targets for their trace chance ability, then use their dizzying touch on randomly selected foes. They make chaos touch or scrambled mind attacks while waiting for dizzying touch to recharge, reserving the latter for targets with adjacent allies. The githzerai psionic echoes open with psionic strikes, then make lesser mindstrike attacks against the same target to maximize damage. They follow up with unarmed strike and lesser mindstrike attacks against whatever PCs the mindscramblers are not engaging. The mindscramblers and the psionic echoes are diametrically opposed to each other, but they focus their attacks exclusively on the PCs. However, they do not aid each other or flank.
Illumination: The walls in both parts of the chamber glow with dim light. Ground: The ridges in the northern part of the chamber make the floor in that area difficult terrain. The floor in the southern part of the chamber is normal. Pits: Shadowy illusion magic make the pits in the northern part of the chamber appear bottomless. In actuality, each is only 10 feet deep. A creature that falls into a pit takes 1d10 damage and is blinded by the shadow until it can climb out. It takes a DC 15 Athletics check to escape a pit. Circular Platform: the platform that marks the center of the chamber stands 15 feet high. Its wide steps can be climbed or descended normally. Secret Door: A secret door on the western side of the barrier that divides the chamber leads to the passage running through the fortress. Once located (Perception DC 19), the door can be opened easily.
November 20 08
|
D U N G E O N 16 0
44
Den of the Destroyer
MARSHALING POINT
Kyrion, Shadar-kai Weaponmaster (S)
Encounter Level 8 (1,804 XP)
Medium shadow humanoid XP 350 Initiative +11 Senses Perception +7; low-light vision HP 84; Bloodied 42 AC 22; Fortitude 20, Reflex 21, Will 20 Speed 6 m Shadar-Kai Short Sword (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon +13 vs. AC; 1d6 + 9 damage (crit 1d6 + 15). r Hurl Weapon (standard; at will) ✦ Weapon Ranged 5/10; +13 vs. AC; 1d6 + 9 damage; the shadar-kai weaponmaster can use any melee weapon for this attack. M Disarming Strike (standard; recharge 5 6 ) ✦ Weapon +11 vs. Reflex; 3d6 + 9 damage (crit 1d6 + 27) and the target drops one weapon it is holding. The shadar-kai weaponmaster can choose to catch the dropped weapon in a free hand or have it land on the ground at his feet (in his square). My Weapon Now (free; when the shadar-kai weaponmaster successfully catches a weapon a target drops; at-will) The shadar-kai weaponmaster makes a basic attack with the weapon his target just dropped. Shadow Jaunt (move, encounter) ✦ Teleportation The shadar-kai weaponmaster teleports 3 squares and becomes insubstantial until the start of his next turn. Weapon Master The shadar-kai weaponmaster is considered to be proficient with all weapons. Alignment Unaligned Languages Common Skills Acrobatics +14 Str 17 (+7)Dex 20 (+9) Wis 16 (+7) Con 12 (+5) Int 10 (+4) Cha 10 (+4) Equipment: leather armor, shadar-kai short sword
Setup Kyrion, shadar-kai weaponmaster (S) 1 Wicked Fang warmaster (W) 8 Wicked Fang recruits (R) 2 gnoll huntmasters (H) This former gith zerai great hall has been converted into a training area for new Wicked Fang recruits. A shadar-kai weaponmaster, Kyrion, has been training the recruits in the fighting style of the shadar-kai and instructing the pack’s warmaster in the use of his magic weapon, a barbed sword known as Wicked Fang. Two gnoll huntmasters armed with longbows begin the encounter in the secret passage on the far west side of the room. When the PCs can see into this area, read: The foul scent of gnoll assaults you the moment the door is opened. This massive chamber was once decorated with bas-reliefs, now crumbled and defaced by the marks of weapons. Crude practice dummies scattered across the chamber are under attack by a pack of armed gnolls under the direction of a shadar-kai. The east and west walls of the chamber are lined with dark arrow slits. Two trapdoors in the southern part of the chamber are open, ladders visible and leading down.
Level 8 Skirmisher
November 20 08
|
D U N G E O N 16 0
45
Den of the Destroyer
Wicked Fang Warmaster (W) Level 8 Brute (Leader)
2 Gnoll Huntmasters (H)
Medium natural humanoid XP 350 Initiative +6 Senses Perception +7; low-light vision Warmaster’s Aura aura 5; the gnoll warmaster gains a +1 bonus to AC and all defenses for each ally within the aura (maximum +5) HP 107; Bloodied 53 AC 20; Fortitude 20, Reflex 19, Will 20 Speed 7 m Wicked Fang (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon +11 vs. AC; 2d8 + 8 damage (crit 3d8 + 24), or 2d8 + 10 (crit 3d8 + 26) damage while bloodied; see also pack attack. M Forward the Wicked Fang (standard; encounter) ✦ Weapon Requires Wicked Fang; +11 vs. AC; 4d8 + 8 damage (crit 3d8 + 40), or 4d8 + 10 damage (crit 3d8 + 42) while bloodied, and all gnoll allies within the warmaster’s aura make a basic attack; see also pack attack. Pack Attack The gnoll warmaster deals an extra 5 damage on melee attacks against an enemy that has two or more of the gnoll warmaster’s allies adjacent to it. Wicked Fang Power (free; when an attack with the weapon keyword hits; daily) The target also takes ongoing 13 damage (save ends). Alignment Chaotic evil Languages Abyssal, Common Skills Intimidate +10 Str 14 (+6) Dex 10 (+4) Wis 16 (+7) Con 17 (+7) Int 14 (+6) Cha 13 (+5) Equipment: hide armor, Wicked Fang (see page 96)
Medium natural humanoid XP 200 Initiative +6 Senses Perception +11; low-light vision HP 50; Bloodied 25 AC 19; Fortitude 16, Reflex 17, Will 14 Speed 7 m Handaxe (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon +9 vs. AC; 1d6 + 3 damage, or 1d6 + 5 damage while bloodied; see also pack attack. R Longbow (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon Ranged 20/40; +10 vs. AC; 1d10 + 4 damage, or 1d10 + 6 damage while bloodied; see also pack attack. Pack Attack The gnoll huntmaster deals an extra 5 damage on melee and ranged attacks against an enemy that has two or more of the huntmaster’s allies adjacent to it. Alignment Chaotic evil Languages Abyssal, Common Skills Intimidate +7, Stealth +11 Str 16 (+5) Dex 19 (+6) Wis 14 (+4) Con 14 (+4) Int 8 (+1) Cha 7 (+0) Equipment leather armor, handaxe, longbow, quiver of 30 arrows
8 Wicked Fang Recruits (R)
Level 8 Minion
Medium natural humanoid XP 88 Initiative +7 Senses Perception +5; low-light vision HP 1; a missed attack never damages a minion AC 22; Fortitude 20, Reflex 18, Will 18 Speed 7 m Shadar-Kai Greatsword (standard; at-will) +13 vs. AC; 8 damage, or 10 damage while bloodied; see also pack attack. Pack Attack The gnoll recruit deals an extra 5 damage on melee attacks against an enemy that has two or more of the gnoll recruit’s allies adjacent to it. Alignment Chaotic evil Languages Abyssal, Common Str 16 (+7) Dex 12 (+5) Wis 13 (+5) Con 14 (+6) Int 10 (+4) Cha 8 (+3) Equipment: hide armor, shadar-kai greatsword
Level 5 Artillery
Tactics The gnoll warmaster tries to keep minions within his warmaster’s aura at all times, maximizing his defenses. He wields Wicked Fang in melee, using forward the Wicked Fang early on in combat before his minions begin to fall. The gnoll recruits fight with abandon, staying close together in order to take advantage of their pack attack. The gnoll huntmasters enter the fray in the second round, firing their longbows through the arrow slits. They target any creatures that have two or more gnolls adjacent to them in order to take advantage of their pack attack. If the PCs pursue them into the passageway, the gnolls attack with handaxes. However, if all their allies in the main chamber fall, the hunt masters flee the fortress and are not seen again.
Kyrion engages the most powerful-looking melee combatant, using disarming strike to take the target’s weapon, making an attack against the foe with my weapon now, then using hurl weapon to attack one of the PC’s allies. He then focuses short sword attacks on the initial target, hoping for a quick kill. Though the gnolls fight to the finish, Kyrion is more concerned with saving himself. If he is bloodied and the warmaster is killed, he attempts to flee through the secret passage and out of the fortress.
Features of the Area Illumination: Torches in wall sconces fill the area with bright light. The secret passageway is filled with dim light within 10 feet of the open trapdoors, but is dark elsewhere. (The gnolls and Kyrion know the layout of the secret passages, and can move through them at full speed even with no light.) Arrow Slits: Arrow slits along the walls allow a creature to make ranged attacks from within the secret passage. An arrow slit grants a ranged attacker superior cover while granting him or her a clear view of the battlefield. The firer determines the target’s cover from the square just outside the slit. Trap Doors: Two trapdoors here lead to the secret passage running through the fortress. A ladder (Athletics DC 5 to climb) drops down to the passageway below. The trap doors are not hidden, and require a minor action to open or close.
November 20 08
|
D U N G E O N 16 0
46
Den of the Destroyer
RITUAL CHAMBER Encounter Level 12 (3,454 XP)
Setup Fangren, gnoll shaman (F) 2 disciples of Yeenoghu (D) 2 crocottas (C) 8 abyssal wretches (A) Within this chamber, Fangren is in the final stages of the ritual that will open the conduit to Yeenoghu’s
realm in the Elemental Chaos. With the link established, the gnoll shaman will be able to ascend to full power as an exarch of the Destroyer. Assisting Fangren in his foul quest are two of his most trusted disciples and two crocottas summoned from the Elemental Chaos. Additionally, eight abyssal wretches lurk in the ritual chamber—all former captives from Elsir Vale that Fangren used as test subjects to evaluate the conduit’s power. Now slaves to the shaman, they defend him with their lives. In addition to Fangren’s followers, the gnoll shaman can manipulate the energy of the conduit to create a fearsome weapon. When the PCs can see into this area, read: A deep thrumming noise echoes throughout this highdomed ritual chamber, the air crackling with energy. Three large cauldrons burn furiously along walls that rise 10 feet to a wide balcony fronted by crimson curtains. An altar sits atop a stepped dais in the center of the room, a group of hooded gnolls around it. A short distance away, the air ripples in a shifting haze of energy where a portal takes form. Scattered around the chamber are a number of hunched humanoid creatures—the helpless captives of Elsir Vale, transformed into horrid abyssal wretches. As they spot you, they raise a keening howl, lurching forward to attack.
Fangren (F)
Level 11 Elite Controller (Leader)
Medium natural humanoid, gnoll XP 1,200 Initiative +8 Senses Perception +7; low-light vision Bloodlust aura 3; all allies within the aura gain a +2 bonus to attack rolls. HP 228; Bloodied 114 AC 27; Fortitude 25, Reflex 22, Will 26 Resist 10 variable (1/encounter; MM 282) Saving Throws +2 Speed 7 Action Points 1 m Caustic Touch (standard; at-will) ✦ Fire +15 vs. Reflex; 2d6 + 5 fire damage, or 2d6 + 7 damage while bloodied; see also pack attack. r Chaos Bolt (standard; at-will) +14 vs. Reflex; 2d4 + 5 damage, and the target is slowed until the end of Fangren's next turn. M Blastback (standard; recharge 5 6 ) ✦ Fire +15 vs. Reflex; 4d8 + 5 fire damage, or 4d8 + 7 fire damage while bloodied, and the target is pushed 6 squares; see also pack attack. A Vortex of Chaos (standard, encounter) ✦ Fire, Psychic Area burst 1 within 10; +13 vs. Reflex; 3d10 + 6 fire damage, and target takes ongoing 10 psychic damage and is dazed (save ends both). Favor of Yeenoghu (minor 1/round; at-will) The Claw of Yeenoghu (see page 91) makes one attack. Shun the Nonbeliever (immediate reaction; when an enemy moves adjacent to Fangren; at-will) The target slides 3 squares. Pack Attack Fangren deals an extra 5 damage on melee attacks against an enemy that has two or more of Fangren’s allies adjacent to it. Alignment Chaotic evil Languages Abyssal, Common Skills Arcana +13, Religion +15 Str 12 (+6) Dex 13 (+6) Wis 15 (+7) Con 18 (+9) Int 16 (+8) Cha 21 (+10) Equipment ritual robes, 4 sacrificial daggers
November 20 08
|
D U N G E O N 16 0
47
Den of the Destroyer
2 Disciples of Yeenoghu (D)
Level 7 Artillery
Medium natural humanoid XP 300 Initiative +7 Senses Perception +6; low-light vision HP 62; Bloodied 31 AC 19; Fortitude 18, Reflex 20, Will 19 Speed 7 m Sacrificial Dagger (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon +14 vs. AC; 2d4 + 5 damage, or 2d4 + 7 damage while bloodied; see also pack attack. r Ray of Destruction (standard; at-will) ✦ Necrotic Range 10; +12 vs. Reflex; 2d8 + 5 necrotic damage, or 2d8 + 10 necrotic damage while bloodied; see also pack attack. A Ruinous Burst (standard; recharge 6 ) ✦ Fire, Necrotic Area burst 2 within 10; +10 vs. Reflex; 3d10 + 5 fire and necrotic damage, or 3d10 + 5 fire and necrotic damage while bloodied. Pack Attack The disciple of Yeenoghu deals an extra 5 damage on melee and ranged attacks against an enemy that has two or more of the disciple’s allies adjacent to it. Alignment Chaotic evil Languages Abyssal, Common Skills Religion +14 Str 11 (+3) Dex 12 (+4) Wis 16 (+6) Con 14 (+5) Int 18 (+7) Cha 11 (+3) Equipment ritual robes, sacrificial dagger
8 Abyssal Wretches (A)
Level 6 Minion
Medium elemental humanoid XP 63 Initiative +3 Senses Perception +1 HP 1; a missed attack never damages a minion AC 18; Fortitude 17, Reflex 15, Will 16 Speed 6 m Twisted Claw (standard; at-will) +9 vs. AC; 6 damage. C Inspire Revulsion (standard; at-will) ✦ Fear, Psychic Close burst 1; targets one enemy in burst; +7 vs. Will; 6 psychic damage, and the target takes a –2 penalty on attack rolls until the end of the abyssal wretch’s next turn. Alignment Chaotic evil Languages — Str 14 (+5) Dex 10 (+3) Wis 6 (+1) Con 11 (+3) Int 2 (–1) Cha 11 (+3)
2 Crocottas* (C)
Level 9 Skirmisher
Medium elemental beast (demon) XP 400 Initiative +9 Senses Perception +11; darkvision HP 94; Bloodied 47 AC 23; Fortitude 22, Reflex 21, Will 20 Resist 5 variable (1/encounter; MM 282) Speed 8 m Gore (standard; at-will) +14 vs. AC; 2d6 + 4 damage. C Haunting Laughter (standard; encounter) ✦ Fear, Psychic Close burst 3; +12 vs. Will; 2d10 + 6 damage, and the target slides 1 square. Miss: The target slides 1 square. C Morphic Visage (minor; recharge 4 5 6 ) ✦ Illusion Close blast 3; +12 vs. Will; the crocotta gains combat advantage against the target until the end of its next turn. Craven (immediate reaction, when targeted by a power with the fear keyword; at-will) Whenever a crocotta is the target of an attack with the fear keyword, it shifts 4 squares away from the source of the attack. Feint If a crocotta shifts at least 1 square during its turn, its melee attacks deal an extra 1d6 damage. Alignment Chaotic evil Languages — Skills Stealth +12 Str 19 (+8) Dex 17 (+7) Wis 15 (+6) Con 14 (+6) Int 5 (+1) Cha 11 (+4) *First appeared in Dragon #364.
Tactics At the first sign of trouble, Fangren hits the largest group of PCs with vortex of chaos. He then falls back to direct the Claw of Yeenoghu against the party, using shun the nonbeliever and blastback to push enemies within reach of the claw. If the conduit is disabled before the shaman is killed, he attacks the closest PCs in a fury. The Disciples of Yeenoghu stay out of melee, using ray of destruction from the edge of the fray, then climbing to the balcony to use that power and ruinous burst. The crocottas open combat with haunting laughter to draw PCs on the periphery into melee. They then
wade into the fray to make gore attacks, using morphic visage as often as possible to gain combat advantage. The abyssal wretches stay close to Fangren, using inspire revulsion to protect their leader.
Features of the Area Illumination: The blazing cauldrons fill the area with bright light. Balcony: A 10-foot wall fronts the main floor of the chamber, a balcony circling the room beyond it. Columns along the balcony rise to the ceiling, crimson curtains hanging between them. A secret entrance to the ritual chamber can be found in the southeast corner of the balcony. Dais and Altar: The steps of the dais are difficult terrain when ascending, but are normal terrain for characters moving down or along them. The altar atop the dais is the focal point of Fangren’s ritual. Any creature that touches the altar takes 10 radiant damage, as does any creature that begins its turn in contact with the altar. The Conduit: The shimmering portal is the physical manifestation of the conduit that Fangren hopes to open to Yeenoghu’s realm in the Elemental Chaos. As soon as the PCs appear, Fangren interrupts the still-incomplete ritual in order to take control of the conduit’s energy, creating the Claw of Yeenoghu.
November 20 08
|
D U N G E O N 16 0
48
Den of the Destroyer
Claw of Yeenoghu Hazard
Level 8 Lurker XP 350
Through the planar conduit, a massive, clawed hand of primal elemental energy reaches for you. Hazard: A claw of elemental energy under Fangren’s control emerges from the conduit to target any creature within 2 squares of it. Perception No check is necessary to notice the claw. Trigger The Claw of Yeenoghu attacks as directed by Fangren. Attack Minor Action Melee Target: One creature within 2 squares of the conduit Attack: +11 vs. Reflex Hit: 2d6 + 5 fire and necrotic damage, and the target is grabbed and takes ongoing 10 fire and necrotic damage (until escape; DC 19). Countermeasures The countermeasures for the Claw of Yeenoghu are described in the skill challenge.
Closing the Conduit Skill Challenge
Level 9 XP 1,200
The gnolls have been defeated, but you must still deal with vortex. You must find a way to safely disrupt the energy conduit to the Elemental Chaos, breaking the connection Fangren has created to the realm of Yeenoghu and closing the breach for good. Even if the PCs kill Fangren without disabling the Claw of Yeenoghu, the energy conduit remains a threat. The PCs need to close the vortex to the Elemental Chaos before they can perform the ritual that Amyria has charged them with. Complexity 3 (requires 8 successes before 3 failures). Primary Skills Arcana, Athletics, History, Perception, Religion. Other Skills Endurance. Victory Fangren’s ritual is undone and the conduit is closed, safely breaking the connection to the Elemental Chaos. Defeat
The PCs manage to close the conduit, but in doing so, they release a backlash of elemental energy that floods the chamber. All creatures in the room are plagued by terrible nightmares of destruction and ruin each time they sleep or trance. All PCs indefinitely lose one healing surge, so that they regain one less healing surge than normal each time they take an extended rest. The Remove Affliction ritual can remove this effect. Arcana (DC 14) The PC uses his or her mastery of arcane knowledge to manipulate the energy flowing from the Elemental Chaos, turning it back on itself. Athletics (DC 14) By physically shifting the altar, the PC disrupts the complex connection to the Elemental Chaos created by Fangren’s ritual. History (DC 19) The PC recalls knowledge of Fortress Graystone and its construction that helps nullify the flow of energy through the conduit. Perception (DC 19) The PC notes subtle changes in the flow of energy from the conduit, indicating essential points of weakness in Fangren’s uncompleted ritual.
Religion (DC 14) The PC recites prayers whose power is anathema to Yeenoghu, disrupting the flow of energy between the altar and the demon lord’s domain. Endurance (DC 8) PCs making Arcana or Athletics checks in the skill challenge put themselves directly into the flow of the conduit’s energy. For each Arcana or Athletics check made, a character must also make an Endurance check or take 1d6 damage. This check does not count as a success or failure in the challenge. G
About the Author Rodney Thompson is a game designer at Wizards of the Coast, Inc. His previous design credits include the Star Wars Roleplaying Game Saga Edition, the Starships of the Galaxy supplement, and The Force Unleashed Campaign Guide supplement.
November 20 08
|
D U N G E O N 16 0
49
Den of the Destroyer
Disciple of Yeenoghu
APPENDIX I: NEW MONSTERS
Abyssal Wretch When Fangren discovered that the ritual chamber of Fortress Graystone was built around a planar breach, he drew on the knowledge of the ruin-touched gnolls to create the conduit to the Elemental Chaos. However, the shaman’s desire to become an exarch of Yeenoghu involved energy that even the ruin-touched gnolls could not predict the effects of. Fangren decided to use captives the gnolls had kidnapped on Sarshan’s orders as test subjects. The first results were abyssal wretches—humans, elves, and other humanoids twisted into horrific reflections of their original forms, tainted by the evil of Yeenoghu. Abyssal Wretch
Level 6 Minion
Medium elemental humanoid XP 63 Initiative +3 Senses Perception +1 HP 1; a missed attack never damages a minion. AC 18; Fortitude 17, Reflex 15, Will 16 Speed 6 m Twisted Claw (standard; at-will) +9 vs. AC; 6 damage. C Inspire Revulsion (standard; at-will) ✦ Fear, Psychic Close burst 1; targets one enemy in burst; +7 vs. Will; 6 psychic damage, and the target takes a –2 penalty on attack rolls until the end of the abyssal wretch’s next turn. Alignment Chaotic evil Languages — Str 14 (+5) Dex 10 (+3) Wis 6 (+1) Con 11 (+3) Int 2 (–1) Cha 11 (+3)
Abyssal Wretch Tactics Abyssal wretches are brutish minions. If an enemy is vulnerable to psychic damage, they always target that enemy with inspire revulsion. Typically, wretches serving a more powerful master will use inspire revulsion as a defense mechanism to protect their leader.
Disciples of Yeenoghu are life-long servants of the demon lord, serving gnoll cults as sages and scholars. A disciple of Yeenoghu collects the darkest, vilest lore surrounding the Ruler of Ruin, acting as a servant of the cult’s leaders and whipping gnoll packs into a frenzy in the service of the demon lord. Disciple of Yeenoghu
Level 7 Artillery
Medium natural humanoid, gnoll XP 300 Initiative +7 Senses Perception +6; low-light vision HP 62; Bloodied 31 AC 19; Fortitude 18, Reflex 20, Will 19 Speed 7 m Sacrificial Dagger (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon +14 vs. AC; 2d4 + 5 damage, or 2d4 + 7 damage while bloodied; see also pack attack. r Ray of Destruction (standard; at-will) ✦ Necrotic Range 10; +12 vs. Reflex; 2d8 + 5 necrotic damage, or 2d8 + 10 necrotic damage while bloodied; see also pack attack. A Ruinous Burst (standard; recharge 6 ) ✦ Fire, Necrotic Area burst 2 within 10; +10 vs. Reflex; 3d10 + 5 fire and necrotic damage, or 3d10 + 5 fire and necrotic damage while bloodied. Pack Attack The disciple of Yeenoghu deals an extra 5 damage on melee and ranged attacks against an enemy that has two or more of the disciple’s allies adjacent to it. Alignment Chaotic evil Languages Abyssal, Common Skills Religion +14 Str 11 (+3) Dex 12 (+4) Wis 16 (+6) Con 14 (+5) Int 18 (+7) Cha 11 (+3) Equipment ritual robes, sacrificial dagger
Disciple of Yeenoghu Tactics A disciple of Yeenoghu prefers to stand back, using ray of destruction and ruinous burst on enemies from afar.
Mindscrambler When the psionic githzerai inhabited Fortress Graystone, the meditation room enabled them to clear their minds of the chaos within and focus on the discipline
needed to achieve their top fighting form. Over long years, the githzerai were able to use their mental discipline to purge untamed emotions. As a result, the psionic residue of these chaotic emotions eventually coalesced into chaotic beings of pure mental energy. Mindscramblers appear to be translucent beings with a vaguely humanoid shape. Mindscramblers have no discernable features, appearing to be little more than a mass of shifting color and light. Mindscrambler
Level 8 Skirmisher
Medium elemental animate XP 350 Initiative +9 Senses Perception +3 HP 89; Bloodied 44 AC 22; Fortitude 20, Reflex 20, Will 20 Speed 6 m Chaos Touch (standard; at-will) ✦ Psychic +11 vs. Reflex; 1d6 + 7 psychic damage. M Scrambled Mind (standard; at-will) ✦ Psychic +11 vs. Will; 1d6 + 7 psychic damage, and the target makes a melee basic attack against one of its adjacent allies. M Dizzying Touch (standard; recharge 5 6 ) ✦ Psychic +11 vs. Will; 3d6 + 7 psychic damage, and the target slides 3 squares and is dazed (save ends). R Misdirection (immediate interrupt; when an enemy within 10 squares moves or shifts; encounter) +11 vs. Will; the target is pushed 3 squares and may not continue its movement. Trace Chance (standard; encounter) Ranged 5; no attack roll required; the next melee attack made against the target gains a +5 power bonus and, if it hits, it is automatically a critical hit. Alignment Chaotic evil Languages Primordial Skills Intimidate +12 Str 11 (+4) Dex 16 (+7) Wis 8 (+3) Con 17 (+7) Int 8 (+3) Cha 16 (+7)
Mindscrambler Tactics Mindscramblers use trace chance before approaching to use dizzying touch. If the mindscrambler is swarmed, it uses misdirection to keep an enemy at bay.
November 20 08
|
D U N G E O N 16 0
50
Den of the Destroyer
Psionic Echo
Stonewalker Spirit
Wicked Fang Gnolls
As the githzerai purged their negative emotions, so too did their disciplined minds leave imprints on Fortress Graystone. Literally a reflection of raw mental power, psionic echoes appear as spectral githzerai warriors. A psionic echo forces itself into existence by sheer will. While it manifests, it is as solid and real as any other physical object, though it continues to appear hazy and translucent.
Stonewalker spirits are conjured from the Elemental Chaos, and are incorporeal in their natural form. Little more than an elemental consciousness, a stonewalker spirit can pass into earth or rock to create a body for itself. Statues are the favored bodies of stonewalker spirits.
The Wicked Fang are a pack of gnoll mercenaries whose thirst for blood is equaled only by their greed. Initially consisting of little more than Fangren and his closest allies, the pack’s dealings with operatives of the shadar-kai Sarshan have seen its numbers swell.
Githzerai Psionic Echo
Level 9 Soldier
Medium elemental humanoid XP 400 Initiative +9 Senses Perception +9 HP 92; Bloodied 46 AC 25; Fortitude 20, Reflex 21, Will 22 Speed 7 m Unarmed Strike (standard; at-will) +16 vs. AC; 2d6 + 6 damage. r Lesser Mindstrike (standard; at-will) ✦ Psychic Range 10; +14 vs. Will; 1d10 + 9 psychic damage. M Psionic Strike (standard; encounter) ✦ Psychic +14 vs. Will; 2d8 + 9 damage plus 1d8 psychic damage; until the end of its next turn, the target has vulnerable 10 psychic. Iron Mind (immediate interrupt; when the githzerai psionic echo would be hit by an attack; encounter) The githzerai psionic echo gains a +2 bonus to all defenses until the end of its next turn. Unstable Manifestation (immediate reaction; when the githzerai psionic echo takes damage; encounter) The githzerai psionic echo becomes insubstantial until the end of its next turn. Alignment Unaligned Languages Common, Deep Speech Str 14 (+6) Dex 17 (+7) Wis 11 (+4) Con 12 (+5) Int 10 (+4) Cha 20 (+9)
Psionic Echo Tactics Psionic echoes single out a weaker target and use psionic strike to make them more vulnerable to mindstrikes. It usually waits until it is bloodied to use unstable manifestation.
Wicked Fang Scout Stonewalker Spirit
Level 7 Lurker
Medium elemental magical beast (earth) XP 300 Initiative +10 Senses Perception +5 HP 45; Bloodied 22 AC 21; Fortitude 19, Reflex 19, Will 20 Immune disease, petrification, poison; Resist insubstantial Speed fly 6 (hover) m Spectral Grasp (standard; at-will) +10 vs. Reflex; 2d4 + 7 damage. M Petrifying Touch (standard; recharge 6 ) +10 vs. Fortitude; the target is slowed (save ends). First Failed Save: The target is immobilized instead of slowed (save ends). Second Failed Save: The target is petrified (no save), and is considered to be a statue for the purposes of the possess statue ability. Possess Statue (free, when entering the same space as a statue; at-will) The stonewalker spirit assumes the form of a possessed statue. Use the possessed statue stat block instead of the stonewalker spirit’s stat block. The spirit can leave the statue as a free action. Flee the Form (free, when a possessed statue is reduced to 0 hit points; at-will) The stonewalker spirit takes 16 damage (ignores insubstantial) as it reverts to its normal form, then moves up to its speed. Alignment Unaligned Languages Abyssal, Primordial Skills Stealth +11 Str 10 (+3) Dex 17 (+6) Wis 14 (+5) Con 16 (+6) Int 11 (+3) Cha 19 (+7)
Stonewalker Spirit Tactics
Level 7 Skirmisher
Medium natural humanoid, gnoll XP 300 Initiative +7 Senses Perception +10, low-light vision HP 77; Bloodied 38 AC 21; Fortitude 19, Reflex 19, Will 18 Speed 7 m Shadar-Kai Short Sword (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon +12 vs. AC; 1d6 + 9 damage (crit 1d6 + 15), or 1d6 + 11 damage (crit 1d6 + 17) while bloodied; see also pack attack. r Hand Crossbow (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon Range 10/20; +12 vs. AC; 1d6 + 9 damage, or 1d6 + 11 damage while bloodied; see also pack attack. Cowardly Shot (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon Requires hand crossbow; ranged 10/20; +12 vs. AC; 1d6 + 9 damage, or 1d6 + 11 damage while bloodied; the gnoll scout can shift 2 squares both before and after making the attack; see also pack attack. Pack Attack The gnoll scout deals an extra 5 damage on melee and ranged attacks against an enemy that has two or more of the scout’s allies adjacent to it. Alignment Chaotic evil Languages Abyssal, Common Str 16 (+6) Dex 15 (+5) Wis 14 (+5) Con 13 (+4) Int 10 (+3) Cha 10 (+3) Equipment: hide armor, shadar-kai short sword, hand crossbow, 20 bolts
Wicked Fang Scout Tactics Wicked Fang scouts prefer to fight from range, using cowardly shot to leap out from behind cover, make an attack, and then retreat back behind cover.
Stonewalker spirits want to be in possessed statue form when possible. If no statue is available, the spirit uses petrifying touch to create one. November 20 08
|
D U N G E O N 16 0
51
Den of the Destroyer
Wicked Fang Sentry
Level 7 Soldier
Medium natural humanoid, gnoll XP 300 Initiative +6 Senses Perception +11, low-light vision HP 80; Bloodied 40 AC 23; Fortitude 20, Reflex 18, Will 19 Speed 7 m Shadar-Kai Greatsword (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon +14 vs. AC; 1d12 + 5 damage (crit 1d12 + 17), or 1d12 + 7 damage (crit 1d12 + 19) while bloodied, and the target is marked until the end of the gnoll sentry’s next turn; see also pack attack. C Defend the Pack (standard; recharge 6 ) ✦ Weapon Close burst 1; +12 vs. AC; 1d12 + 5 damage, or 1d12 + 7 damage while bloodied, and the target is marked until the end of the gnoll sentry’s next turn; see also pack attack. Defensive Lure (move; encounter) The gnoll sentry shifts 3 squares, then pulls all targets it has marked 3 squares. Pack Attack The gnoll sentry deals an extra 5 damage on melee attacks against an enemy that has two or more of the gnoll sentry’s allies adjacent to it. Alignment Chaotic evil Languages Abyssal, Common Str 19 (+7) Dex 13 (+4) Wis 16 (+6) Con 16 (+6) Int 10 (+3) Cha 8 (+2) Equipment: hide armor, shadar-kai greatsword
Wicked Fang Sentry Tactics Wicked Fang sentries use defend the pack frequently to mark multiple enemies, attempting to make enemies focus on them. If a marked enemy tries to move away, the sentry uses defensive lure to draw them back into the area.
MORE MONSTERS
Wicked Fang Mauler
Level 7 Brute
Wicked Fang Lasher
Level 9 Skirmisher
Medium natural humanoid, gnoll XP 300 Initiative +4 Senses Perception +6; low-light vision HP 94; Bloodied 47 AC 19; Fortitude 20, Reflex 18, Will 19 Speed 7 m Shadar-Kai Greatsword (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon +10 vs. AC; 1d12 + 8 damage (crit 1d12 + 20), or 1d12 + 10 damage (crit 1d12 + 22) while bloodied; see also pack attack. M Backhand (minor; recharge 5 6 ) +10 vs. AC; 1d6 + 8 damage, or 1d6 + 10 damage while bloodied, and the target is knocked prone; see also pack attack. M Beat Back (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon +10 vs. AC; 1d12 + 8 damage (crit 1d12 + 20), or 1d12 + 10 damage (crit 1d12 + 22) while bloodied, and the target is pushed 2 squares; see also pack attack. Pack Attack The gnoll mauler deals an extra 5 damage on melee attacks against an enemy that has two or more of the gnoll mauler’s allies adjacent to it. Alignment Chaotic evil Languages Abyssal, Common Skills Athletics +12 Str 19 (+7) Dex 13 (+4) Wis 17 (+6) Con 14 (+5) Int 10 (+3) Cha 8 (+2) Equipment: hide armor, shadar-kai greatsword
Medium natural humanoid, gnoll XP 400 Initiative +11 Senses Perception +7; low-light vision HP 93; Bloodied 46 AC 23; Fortitude 21, Reflex 22, Will 21 Speed 7 m Barbed Whip (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon Reach 2; +14 vs. AC; 1d8 + 4 damage (or 1d8 + 6 damage while bloodied) and ongoing 5 damage (save ends); see also pack attack. M Whip Flay (standard; encounter) ✦ Weapon Requires barbed whip; reach 2; +14 vs. AC; 3d8 + 7 damage (or 3d8 + 9 damage while bloodied) and ongoing 10 damage (save ends); see also pack attack. M Drag Around (standard; recharge 5 6 ) ✦ Weapon Requires barbed whip; reach 2; +12 vs. Fortitude; 2d8 + 5 damage (or 2d8 + 7 damage while bloodied) and the target slides 3 squares; see also pack attack. Pack Attack The gnoll lasher deals an extra 5 damage on melee attacks against an enemy that has two or more of the gnoll lasher’s allies adjacent to it. Alignment Chaotic evil Languages Abyssal, Common Skills Stealth +14 Str 16 (+7) Dex 20 (+9) Wis 16 (+7) Con 13 (+5) Int 10 (+4) Cha 10 (+4) Equipment: hide armor, barbed whip
Wicked Fang Mauler Tactics
Wicked Fang Lasher Tactics
Wicked Fang maulers are frequently used to defend other gnolls, using beat back to keep enemies from getting too close. If the mauler and its target are close to hazardous terrain, it uses backhand to knock the target into that area.
The Wicked Fang lasher uses whip flay against a bloodied opponent when possible, trying to bring them down quickly. When an enemy gets close, the lasher uses drag around to maneuver the enemy into a place where other gnolls can get pack attack bonuses.
For more information on some of the monsters used in this adventure, see Ari Marmell’s Creature Incarnations: Gnolls from Dragon #369 (which includes more information on the ruin-touched gnolls and the slaughterfang hyenas) and Robert J. Schwalb’s Demonomicon of Iggwilv: Yeenoghu (which includes the crocotta) from Dragon #364.
November 20 08
|
D U N G E O N 16 0
52
Den of the Destroyer
Wicked Fang Keeper
Level 8 Elite Controller
Medium natural humanoid, gnoll XP 700 Initiative +9 Senses Perception +7; low-light vision HP 178; Bloodied 89 AC 24; Fortitude 20, Reflex 23, Will 20 Speed 7 m Shadar-Kai Short Sword (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon +13 vs. AC; 2d6 + 5 damage (crit 1d6 + 17), or 2d6 + 7 damage (crit 1d6 + 19) while bloodied; see also pack attack. r Handaxe (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon Ranged 5/10; +13 vs. AC; 2d6 + 5 damage (crit 1d6 + 17), or 2d6 + 7 damage (crit 1d6 + 19) while bloodied; see also pack attack. R Rain of Blades (standard; at-will) The keeper makes three handaxe attacks, each of which must be against a different target. M No Escape This Time (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon Requires short sword; +13 vs. AC; 2d6 + 5 damage (crit 1d6 + 17), or 2d6 + 7 damage (crit 1d6 + 19) while bloodied and the target is knocked prone; see also pack attack. M Keeper’s Shackles (minor; recharge 6 ) Targets adjacent prone creature; +12 vs. Fortitude; target is restrained (until escape). Caltrops (minor; encounter) The keeper can designate a 1-square burst area within 5 squares; that area is filled with caltrops. Until the end of the encounter, any creature that enters a square filled with caltrops without treating it as difficult terrain takes 1d6 + 4 damage. Pack Attack The keeper deals an extra 5 damage on melee attacks against an enemy that has two or more of the keeper’s allies adjacent to it. Alignment Chaotic evil Languages Abyssal, Common Skills Intimidate +11 Str 13 (+5) Dex 20 (+9) Wis 17 (+7) Con 17 (+7) Int 10 (+4) Cha 14 (+6) Equipment: hide armor, shadar-kai short sword
Wicked Fang Keeper Tactics The Wicked Fang warden primarily concerns itself with keeping enemies hemmed in close to allies. As such, it uses caltrops to block off one avenue of escape. The Wicked Fang warden attempts to use no escape this time to knock enemies prone before restraining them with keeper’s shackles.
Wicked Fang Guard
Level 6 Soldier
Medium natural humanoid, gnoll XP 250 Initiative +7 Senses Perception +4; low-light vision HP 74; Bloodied 37 AC 22; Fortitude 19, Reflex 18, Will 17 Speed 7 m Shadar-Kai Greatsword (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon +13 vs. AC; 1d12 + 7 damage (crit 1d12 + 19), or 1d12 + 9 damage (crit 1d12 + 21) while bloodied, and the target is marked until the end of the gnoll guard’s next turn; see also pack attack. M Pinning Attack (standard; encounter) ✦ Weapon Requires greatsword; +11 vs. Fortitude; 1d12 + 7 damage (crit 1d12 + 19), or 1d12 + 9 damage (crit 1d12 + 21) while bloodied, and the target is immobilized until the end of the gnoll guard’s next turn; see also pack attack. Pack Attack The gnoll guard deals an extra 5 damage on melee attacks against an enemy that has two or more of the gnoll guard’s allies adjacent to it. Alignment Chaotic evil Languages Abyssal, Common Str 14 (+5) Dex 15 (+5) Wis 13 (+4) Con 18 (+7) Int 10 (+3) Cha 8 (+2) Equipment: hide armor, shadar-kai greatsword
Wicked Fang Guard Tactics The Wicked Fang guards engage as many enemies as possible, using pinning attack when foes attempt to escape. Wicked Fang Recruit
Level 8 Minion
Medium natural humanoid, gnoll XP 88 Initiative +7 Senses Perception +5; low-light vision HP 1; a missed attack never damages a minion AC 22; Fortitude 20, Reflex 18, Will 18 Speed 7 m Shadar-Kai Greatsword (standard; at-will) +13 vs. AC; 8 damage, or 10 damage while bloodied; see also pack attack. Pack Attack The gnoll recruit deals an extra 5 damage on melee attacks against an enemy that has two or more of the gnoll recruit’s allies adjacent to it. Alignment Chaotic evil Languages Abyssal, Common Str 16 (+7) Dex 12 (+5) Wis 13 (+5) Con 14 (+6) Int 10 (+4) Cha 8 (+3) Equipment: hide armor, shadar-kai greatsword
Wicked Fang Recruit Tactics Wicked Fang recruits do their best to swarm their enemies. They always try to keep at least two recruits adjacent to a target at all times, giving other Wicked Fang pack members a pack attack bonus. Wicked Fang Warmaster
Level 8 Brute (Leader)
Medium natural humanoid, gnoll XP 350 Initiative +6 Senses Perception +7; low-light vision Warmaster’s Aura aura 5; the gnoll warmaster gains a +1 bonus to AC and all defenses for each ally within the aura (maximum +5) HP 107; Bloodied 53 AC 20; Fortitude 20, Reflex 19, Will 20 Speed 7 m Wicked Fang (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon +11 vs. AC; 2d8 + 8 damage (crit 3d8 + 24), or 2d8 + 10 (crit 3d8 + 26) damage while bloodied; see also pack attack. M Forward the Wicked Fang (standard; encounter) ✦ Weapon Requires Wicked Fang; +11 vs. AC; 4d8 + 8 damage (crit 3d8 + 40), or 4d8 + 10 damage (crit 3d8 + 42) while bloodied, and all gnoll allies within the warmaster’s aura make a basic attack; see also pack attack. Pack Attack The gnoll warmaster deals an extra 5 damage on melee attacks against an enemy that has two or more of the gnoll warmaster’s allies adjacent to it. Wicked Fang Power (free; when an attack with the weapon keyword hits; daily) The target also takes ongoing 10 damage (save ends). Alignment Chaotic evil Languages Abyssal, Common Skills Intimidate +10 Str 14 (+6) Dex 10 (+4) Wis 16 (+7) Con 17 (+7) Int 14 (+6) Cha 13 (+5) Equipment: hide armor, Wicked Fang (see page 96)
Wicked Fang Warmaster Tactics Wicked Fang warmasters try to keep as many allies within the range of warmaster’s aura as possible. They use forward the wicked fang early, preferably when many other pack members are nearby.
November 20 08
|
D U N G E O N 16 0
53
Den of the Destroyer
APPENDIX 2: NEW ITEMS The following new magic items are featured in this adventure, and can be claimed as treasure by the PCs.
Figurines of Wondrous Power Elderwood Falcon
Level 10
This wooden statuette depicts a falcon with wings outspread. Wondrous Item 5,000 gp Power (Daily ✦ Conjuration): Standard Action. Use this figurine to conjure an ancient falcon of the Feywild (see below for statistics). As a free action, you can spend a healing surge when activating this item to give the creature temporary hit points equal to your healing surge value.
Elderwood Falcon Medium natural animate Initiative as conjurer
Senses Perception +9; low-light vision
HP 15; Bloodied 7 AC 24; Fortitude 21, Reflex 22, Will 22 Speed 6, fly 8 m Talons (standard; at-will) +15 vs. AC; 2d4 + 4 damage. M Swoop (standard; at-will) The elderwood falcon shifts 1 square, makes a talon attack, then shifts 1 square. Alignment Unaligned Languages — Str 11 (+5) Dex 19 (+9) Wis 18 (+9) Con 16 (+8) Int 2 (+1) Cha 8 (+4)
Ironwood Hound
Level 10
This wooden statuette depicts a hunting hound dashing toward its prey. Wondrous Item 5,000 gp Power (Daily ✦ Conjuration): Standard Action. Use this figurine to conjure a yellow-furred hunting hound (see below for statistics). As a free action, you can spend a healing surge when activating this item to give the creature temporary hit points equal to your healing surge value.
Quest Ideas
Ironwood Hound Medium natural animate Initiative as conjurer
Senses Perception +8; low-light vision
HP 15; Bloodied 7 AC 24; Fortitude 22, Reflex 19, Will 21 Speed 6 m Bite (standard; at-will) +15 vs. AC; 2d6 + 3 damage. M Drive Back (standard; at-will) +13 vs. Fortitude; 2d6 + 3 damage, and the target is pushed 2 squares and the ironwood hound can shift 2 squares. The ironwood hound must end its shift adjacent to the target’s new position. Alignment Unaligned Languages — Str 13 (+6) Dex 12 (+6) Wis 16 (+8) Con 18 (+9) Int 2 (+1) Cha 8 (+4)
Wicked Fang The sword known as Wicked Fang was crafted as a gift for the gnoll pack of the same name. Sarshan ordered his shadar-kai warriors to travel to Overlook and kidnap one of the greatest dwarven weaponsmiths in the city, bringing him back to the Shadowfell to do the arms dealer’s bidding. Sarshan commanded the weaponsmith to craft Wicked Fang. When the job was done, Sarshan ordered the weaponsmith killed and his blood used in the ritual that bestowed the sword with its magical properties. The completed sword was sent back to the world as a gift to Fangren, who in turn gave it to his most trusted warmaster. However, before the weapon was sent from the Shadowfell, several of the shadar-kai witches in Sarshan’s service warned him that the weapon was destined to be at the center of great events, and urged him to not let the weapon pass from his possession. Sarshan ignored the witches’ warnings, sending his lieutenant Kyrion to train the gnolls in the proper use of shadar-kai weapons, including Wicked Fang.
The Vengeful Family: The family of the dwarf weaponsmith from Overlook has learned of the existence of Wicked Fang and seeks to reclaim it. When they discover that the PCs have the weapon, they assume the party was involved in the weaponsmith’s death, vowing vengeance against them. The PCs must clear their names and convince the dwarves that their loved one has already been avenged. The Cursed Blade: Bad luck (of the DM’s design) seems to follow the PC carrying Wicked Fang, and he or she learns that the blade holds a dark curse. The PC’s only hope is to travel to an ancient holy site of Moradin and beseech the god of creation to remove the curse from the weapon. Tipping the Scales of War: The shadar-kai witches were right in their prophecy, and as the PCs find themselves caught up in further adventures, they discover that Wicked Fang was created for a higher purpose. Having fallen into the PCs’ hands as a part of their destiny, the weapon is the only thing that can destroy an enemy they will one day face.
Wicked Fang
Level 13
This weapon’s jagged blade seems permanently stained with the blood of those it has slain. Lvl 13 +3 17,000 gp Lvl 23 +5 425,000 gp Lvl 18 +4 85,000 gp Lvl 28 +6 2,125,000 gp Weapon: Longsword Enhancement: Attack rolls and damage rolls Critical: +1d8 damage per plus Property: Whenever you use a power with the weapon keyword that deals ongoing damage, increase that ongoing damage by an amount equal to the weapon’s enhancement bonus. Power (Daily): Free action. Use this power when you hit with an attack with the weapon keyword. In addition to the normal effects of the attack, the target takes ongoing 10 damage (save ends). Level 23 or 28: Ongoing 15 damage.
November 20 08
|
D U N G E O N 16 0
54
“Our eyes are open, our fi sts are closed. Our walls are stone, our shields are steel. Our faces are many, our soul is dwarf. And thus is there no foe against whom Overlook cannot stand.” It is an ancient Overlook proverb—some would even call it a prayer— and it’s about to be put to the ultimate test.
by Ari Marmell illustrations by Michael Komarck, Rob Alexander and William O'Connor ✦ cartography by Mike Schley
the
An adventure for 9th-level characters
Temple Between
TM & © 2008 Wizards of the Coast, Inc. All rights reserved.
December 20 08
|
D U N G E O N 161
4
The Temple Between
The western end of Elsir Vale has been greatly troubled in recent days. The threat of the orc hordes from beyond the Stonehome Mountains, though turned back at Bordrin’s Watch, still lingers in the people’s minds. Peculiar and hostile creatures of shadow lurk in the caverns and caves below. Political squabbling grows among the city’s powerful dwarf clans. All this makes the city particularly vulnerable to an enemy nobody saw coming—that nobody even imagined. This enemy has goals and objectives far beyond the ultimately unimportant Elsir Vale, but the first step is the utter subjugation of Overlook. An enemy who, at least in part, is already here. “The Temple Between” is an adventure for 9thlevel characters, and it is challenging enough to take them to 11th level by the time all is said and done. Although intended as the final chapter of the heroic tier portion of the Scales of War Adventure Path, it can be run as a standalone adventure, or as an adventure in a campaign of your own making, with a small degree of modification. It contains elements of urban investigation, dungeon delving, and even wartime conflict, making it a suitable adventure to players of many tastes and preferences.
BACKGROUND Few today are aware of it, but the western regions of Elsir Vale have long been rich in planar magic. Perhaps this is due to the fact that the giants, soldiers, and servants of the primordials once dwelt nearby in large numbers, driving their dwarf slaves to great works. Whatever the cause, the region is run through with “cracks” in reality—portals that lead to
other worlds. In the course of the Adventure Path, the PCs have already discovered one, traveling to the Shadowfell through the caverns beneath the Happy Beggar poorhouse. What they do not yet know— though they might discover it soon enough—is that a gateway to the Astral Sea waits in a great cathedral beneath the Stonehome Mountains, and a doorway to the Feywild lies hidden where the Elsir River flows from the mountains. (The region might well also contain a portal to the Elemental Chaos, but if so, it does not influence this adventure.) No, the humans and elves and dwarves of Elsir Vale know nothing about this, but not everyone is so ignorant. A few sages know. A few priests know. And the githyanki know. Indeed, at the behest of their leaders in the astral city of Tu’narath, they have caused much of Elsir’s worries of late. They arranged the theft of the platinum sword from Brindol, and they employed the shadar-kai, not only as weapons suppliers but to encourage the orcs of the west to rise. For the githyanki want Elsir Vale, badly, and particularly the planar portals it contains. Using it as a beachhead, they could easily launch an incursion, not merely into the mortal realm, but other worlds besides. And there is no reality, no plane of existence, on which the githyanki do not have some design or other. The semi-disgraced General Zithiruun is in charge of this operation, or at least commands the forces seeking to carry it out. Forced to make use of mercenaries and lesser soldiers, to keep the githyanki involvement secret, he has carefully set up his pawns, maneuvering and manipulating, and now the time draws near to take Overlook by force. Unknown to Zithiruun, and even to his commanding officers, they themselves are merely pawns
WHAT IS AN ADVENTURE PATH? Scales of War is the fourth Adventure Path to appear in the pages of Dungeon® Magazine. But what, you ask, is an Adventure Path? Quite simply, it is a series of related adventures intended to form a complete D&D campaign that takes your players from 1st level all the way to, in the case of Scales of War, 30th level. Previous Adventure Paths, presented with the 3rd Edition D&D® rules, took characters from 1st to 20th level. But with all three tiers in the new edition ripe and ready to explore, we’re pushing the limit with Scales of War. Each tier takes roughly six adventures to traverse, which means we’ll finish off this Adventure Path in about eighteen issues. Each adventure advances characters from between one and a half to two levels of experience. We recognize that not everyone will meet every encounter or complete every quest, however, so periodically, we’ll point you to a supplemental Side Trek or short adventure to keep your PCs on pace. Plus, roughly every few months, Dragon® will feature new support content for Scales of War. Finally, this Adventure Path is intended to function as a complete D&D campaign. That means we’ll be making assumptions about the history of the world as we move along, just as you would in any campaign you run. We’ll be borrowing heavily from the D&D mythology of 4th Edition, as well as all the great ideas that have cropped up in other products over the years—including the pages of past issues of Dungeon! Enjoy your stay in Scales of War, and keep an eye out for next month’s installment.
December 20 08
|
D U N G E O N 161
5
The Temple Between
on a larger board; schemes far more devious than a simple githyanki invasion are afoot. But this is a discovery, and a challenge, for a future adventure. For now, the PCs have more than enough on their plates as it is.
The Mountainroot Temple A subterranean structure built by the same order that would later go on to construct the Monastery of the Sundered Chain, the Mountainroot Temple stands deep beneath the Stonehome Mountains. Built when the dwarves were still celebrating their freedom from the giants, it was not a dwarven structure, but a temple built for anyone who wanted to pay tribute to Moradin, of any race. It held great reliquaries of holy icons, enormous cathedrals where hundreds could worship at once, and even a doorway to the Astral Plane whence angels and exarchs of Moradin would appear to discourse with the god’s most favored priests and champions. To facilitate a grand community of Moradin worshipers, the Mountainroot Temple had, in addition to its astral doors and its main entryway into the mountains, four mystical doorways constructed. Each linked to another temple of Moradin elsewhere in the world, so the faithful could come and go with ease. And for decades, even centuries, the temple thrived. Slowly, however, relations between Moradin’s faithful grew strained. Priests assigned to other, “lesser” temples grew envious of those at Mountainroot. Many of the dwarf faithful grew haughty, considering themselves Moradin’s “true” children, and sought to oust all others, or at least put them in lesser places, denying them access to the temple’s wonders.
Was it Moradin’s wrath? A curse brought upon them by the giants they’d so long ago escaped? Or simply a natural catastrophe without greater meaning? None can say. Whatever the case, some centuries ago, the mountain was struck by an earthquake. Portions of the inner tunnels collapsed, damaging several chambers of the Mountainroot Temple, destroying others entirely. Panicked, the priests and the faithful grabbed up their treasures and holy icons—at least most of them—and fled using the surviving magical portals. Once they’d settled elsewhere, the bulk of Moradin’s priests decided that this way was better. By scattering from the temple, they would allow the dwarves to build their own shrines, without feeling constrained by the other races, and the jealousy that marred the priesthood would fade. Although they mourned the loss of the great cathedral, and those few treasures they’d been unable to save, they declared the quake to have been Moradin’s will and left the temple abandoned. In time, most faithful, even most priests save those most thoroughly learned in their history, forgot it had ever been. Most, but not all. After a few decades, a small group of Moradin worshipers—mostly dwarves, but with members of other races as well—returned to the Mountainroot Temple. They cleaned it up as best they could and vowed to maintain it until it should some day become important once again. The most powerful of their number took on the title of Caretaker and lived within the temple, in a small structure built inside the larger reliquary. The Caretaker carefully attuned himself to the temple’s surviving magic, allowing him to control the constructs and divine defenses and traps that protected the structure from outside invasion.
Zithiruun’s Plan And so it remained, until the githyanki learned of the temple and decided controlling it would better enable them to control Overlook, and by extension, Elsir Vale. Zithiruun’s plan is to take Overlook by simultaneously attacking from without and from within. Already he has a force of mercenary soldiers hiding in the wilds, ready to march on the city. Now, he’s working to gain full control of the Mountainroot Temple—and the Stone Anvil, its anchor in Overlook— through which he can move a second force from the Astral Sea into the city’s undefended heart. To that end, Zithiruun has suborned a number of Overlook’s priests and military officers. Most of them, including several priests and Watch Captain Aerun, were kidnapped and subject to a difficult psychic ritual cast by incredibly powerful githyanki. The result is that these poor people’s minds were destroyed, and they have been possessed by several githyanki, who are even capable of manifesting some of their normal powers (albeit in weakened form). Unfortunately, the possessing githyanki cannot access anything more than the victim’s base personality; they have no access to specific memories. So High Priest Durkik of the Stone Anvil has not been possessed. Rather, he is being held captive and tortured for information, while a hired doppelganger takes his place in public, holding the Stone Anvil in readiness for Zithiruun’s forces. All of which would have gone undetected, if not for the alertness and curiosity of an old woman named Haelyn . . .
December 20 08
|
D U N G E O N 161
6
The Temple Between
THE QUESTS “The Temple Between” offers PCs several opportunities to earn quest XP. Provided here is a list of quests, and their rewards, in the adventure. Minor Quest—Learn Haelyn’s Fate As requested by the priest Lavinya, the PCs must investigate the shrine of Erathis, and Grovald, its new caretaker, to learn what happened to the kindly old woman who once attended it. Reward: 400 XP. Major Quest—Recover the Incunabulum Primeval This ancient religious text, dating back to the dwarf rebellion against the giants, exists somewhere within the depths of the Mountainroot Temple. Durkik wants it returned before their enemies can get their hands on it. (It’s currently on the hag Hethralga, in area M8 of the Mountainroot Temple.) Reward: 2,000 XP (and 3,600 gp—the equivalent of three 9th-level treasure parcels—as promised by the priests of Moradin). Major Quest—Prevent the Fall of Overlook Once his scheme is prematurely cut short, General Zithiruun decides to take the city with what forces he already has available. Although Overlook is hardly a population of weaklings, they do require the PCs’ aid. Reward: Up to 2,500 XP, depending on Victory Point totals; see page 37 (and up to 7,000 gp—the equivalent of four 10th-level treasure parcels—as promised by the Council of Elders).
ADVENTURE SYNOPSIS The PCs have just completed an adventure of obvious importance (the freeing of Amyria from her imprisonment in the form of a platinum sword, if they’re playing through the Adventure Path). It appears as though nothing of consequence immediately follows— at least until the next night, when the PCs, through one of various means, receive hints that all is not well back in Overlook. Returning to their home away from home, the heroes initially find nothing amiss. Slowly, however, they discover—through the prodding of Lavinya, priestess of Erathis, if not on their own—that several of the city’s priests are acting peculiarly and, perhaps more importantly, Haelyn, keeper of Erathis’s shrine, has vanished. Following up on these minor discrepancies, the PCs swiftly find hints leading to a conspiracy worming its way into the city’s hierarchy. Several of the conspiracy’s members are possessed (though the PCs do not learn by whom), while others—including High Priest Durkik Forgeheart of the Stone Anvil— have been replaced by doppelganger mercenaries. The PCs trace the conspirators back to their headquarters in a large warehouse, where they have the opportunity to rescue the real Durkik. The PCs then learn of the Mountainroot Temple and find out that one of its mystical portals is located in a hidden sepulcher beneath the Stone Anvil. Using it, the PCs go to the abandoned ancient temple, where they must confront both a cadre of fey and a band of mercenaries employed by General Zithiruun. They also find, unfortunately, that they cannot leave! Here, assuming the PCs defeat their various foes, they make the following discoveries:
✦ The Caretaker of the temple is currently being tortured, and the pain and madness inflicted upon him have thrown the temple’s defenses into chaos. This is why, among other things, nobody can leave. ✦ The fey are seeking an ancient tome of great power. They were sent by Cachlain, the StoneSkinned King, a fomorian noble who—along with his new advisor, Sovacles—will play an important role in future installments of the Scales of War. ✦ The mercenaries serve someone called General Zithiruun, who seeks the temple—and indeed, the entire region!—for access to the various planar portals. The conspiracy in Overlook was only the first step, and the city will soon be facing a full-scale military invasion! Finally, once the Caretaker allows them to leave, the PCs must return to the Council of Elders with a warning of the forthcoming siege. Here, the PCs can finally cement their place as heroes to this military city, as their help proves instrumental in Overlook’s survival—and as they finally come face to face with General Zithiruun, and learn of the githyanki involvement in all that has come before.
December 20 08
|
D U N G E O N 161
7
The Temple Between
PREPARING FOR ADVENTURE “The Temple Between” allows the PCs a variety of opportunities to shine, from investigation to exploration, and from skill challenges to a variety of combat situations. They face a diversity of foes and must
SKILL CHALLENGES AND EXPERIENCE POINTS This adventure makes use of a number of skill challenges—in particular, offering several opportunities for the PCs to interrogate prisoners or survivors of their various combats. It’s important for you, as DM, to give XP only for those skill challenges that are meaningful, without allowing unnecessary repetition. Here’s what we mean, by way of example. In the Shrine of Erathis, the PCs have the opportunity to interrogate Grovald, as well as a number of his soldiers, both human and doppelganger. Because the PCs receive different information from Grovald than from his soldiers, they can receive XP for both skill challenges—one for Grovald, one for any of the soldiers. Once they have successfully interrogated a soldier, however, they should not receive XP for interrogating any other soldiers at the same location, because they all offer the same information. Similarly, because all the fey in the Mountain Root temple give the same information, and all the soldiers of the githyanki give the same information, the PCs can gain XP for only two interrogations— one fey, one other—in that area.
figure out the right questions to ask the right people. As such, it’s important that you, as DM, have at least a reasonable level of familiarity with the events herein. It’s best if you can read through the entire adventure beforehand, but if you’re in a hurry, you should at least review each specific section, and its related encounters, before play. (The adventure is divided into three chapters, making a piecemeal approach feasible, if not the most recommended.)
What You Need to Play This adventure includes the encounters the PCs face as they explore and adventure in the area. It also provides tactical maps and more for the adventure. If you and your players haven’t read through the DUNGEONS & DRAGONS 4th Edition rules yet, that is your first best step so that you make certain you understand the rules. Also as mentioned above, read through at least the first of the adventure’s three “chapters” before starting. This review enables you to become familiar with the material and the style of presentation. You might also want to take a look at the sections below regarding the adventure format.
Using Tactical Encounters Each encounter includes several common elements, as described below.
Encounter Level Each tactical encounter assumes a group of five player characters. An encounter of average difficulty is one where the encounter level is equal to the level of the party. Encounters that are 1 or 2 levels lower than the party are easy encounters, while encounters that are 2 or more levels higher than the party are difficult encounters.
For overcoming an encounter, a group earns the XP value noted beside the encounter level. This amount should be divided by the number of group members, and an equal amount should be awarded to each character.
ADAPTING THE ADVENTURE “The Temple Between” is designed with five players in mind. You can easily adapt the adventure for larger groups easily by adding more treasure and inserting a few extra monsters using the guidelines presented in the Dungeon Master’s Guide. When adapting the adventure for larger groups, keep it simple. Where possible, just add one monster whose level equals the encounter level for each additional PC. Otherwise, look for appropriate monsters from this adventure (see the Appendix, in particular) and the Monster Manual to help stiffen up the resistance. This adventure is also designed for 9th-level characters. As written, a slightly larger group of 8th-level characters can play through the adventure, but be sure to give the characters plenty of chances to take extended rests so that they can have a fair shot at surviving the expedition. For higher-level groups, adapting the adventure takes a bit more work. You need to add monsters and increase the treasure rewards to amounts appropriate for the characters. In all, adjusting the adventure is not too arduous, and with a little work, you can run this scenario for groups of three to eight players, and for characters of 8th through 13th level.
December 20 08
|
D U N G E O N 161
8
The Temple Between Setup
Read-Aloud Text
Tactics
This section of a tactical encounter provides you with the basic parameters of the encounter. First, it provides context or background information for the encounter. Next, it provides a key to the monsters in the encounter so you can locate them on the tactical map. The map of each encounter area indicates where the monsters are located when the encounter begins. The setup section also describes what monsters are doing and how they react when the PCs arrive. Several encounters include monsters that are either hidden, or do not appear until later in combat. In these instances, do not place those monsters on the map unless at least one PC has succeeded on the Perception check to notice them, or when they enter combat.
Read aloud text provides information about what the characters can see and are aware of. You do not have to read it word for word; feel free to paraphrase and use your own words when describing this information. Use read aloud text wisely; they are written for the most common approach to a particular situation and what your player characters do might require you to alter the information in any number of ways.
This entry describes special actions the monsters take to defeat the adventurers. Sometimes this means the monsters take advantage of special features of the area or make use of special powers or equipment.
Monster Statistics Encounters include stat blocks for each monster type present in the encounter. If more than one monster of a particular kind is present, the stat block indicates how many creatures can be found.
Treasure Parcels Parcel A: _________________ C-4 (the Shrine of Erathis). Parcel B: ________________ C-9 (the Warehouse). Parcel C: ________________ M-5 (the Vault). Parcel D: _________________ M-5 (the Vault). Parcel E: ________________ M-5 (the Vault). Parcel F: ________________ M-6 (the Grand Cathedral, on the persons of the spitting trolls and/or the two-headed troll). Parcel G: _________________ M-8 (the Lesser Sanctum, on the persons of Hethralga and/or the cyclopses).
Parcel H: ________________ Parcel I: ________________ Parcel J: ________________ Parcel K: _________________ Parcel L: ________________ person of the berbalang). Parcel M: ________________ person of Zithiruun).
M-9 (the Reliquary). M-9 (the Reliquary). M-9 (the Reliquary). M-10 (the Underchambers). T-2 (Death from Above, on the T-5 (the Final Encounter, on the
Based on the guidelines in the Dungeon Master’s Guide, the following parcels can go in the spaces above. Rely on the wish lists your players gave you for the first eight parcels. Parcel 1: Magic item, level 14. Parcel 2: Magic item, level 13. Parcel 3: Magic item, level 13. Parcel 4: Magic item, level 12. Parcel 5: Magic item, level 12. Parcel 6: Magic item, level 11. Parcel 7: Magic item, level 11. Parcel 8: Magic item, level 10. Parcel 9: A gold statuette of a female dwarf blacksmith at work at the forge, worth 1,500 gp; and a sapphire worth 1,000 gp.
Parcel 10: A small ruby carefully chiseled into the shape of a burning flame, worth 1,500 gp; 800 gp; and 2 potions of healing. Parcel 11: A small pouch containing 4 polished stones of alexandrite, worth 500 gp each (2,000 gp total); and 100 gp. Parcel 12: A silver hammer (useless as a tool or weapon) worth 250 gp; and 3 potions of healing. Parcel 13: A small gold-framed portrait of an old priest, worth 400 gp; and two potions of healing.
Map Each encounter includes a map keyed with the initial locations of each monster. The map also indicates the location of any special features of the area.
Features of the Area This section describes special features noted on the map. If the location has items or areas of interest with which the characters can interact, those features are described here. Look here to see if a door is out of the ordinary, if an altar has a secret compartment, or the like.
Treasure Preparation As with previous installments of the Scales of War campaign, “The Temple Between” makes use of the parcel system of treasure rewards as described in the Dungeon Master’s Guide. The characters should accumulate seventeen parcels by the end of the adventure. Of these, they should gain the reward for completing the quests (four parcels for 1,000 gp), and then whatever treasures they find along the way (the remaining thirteen). You can supply these treasures in whatever way you wish, but the Treasure Parcels sidebar presents the most likely rooms to bear treasure. During your preparation, assign parcels from those that follow to the rooms in the spaces provided. Use the players’ wish lists to come up with magic items for the first eight parcels. (Consider saving at least one or two of the highest level magic items for later in the adventure, after the PCs have obtained 10th level.)
December 20 08
|
D U N G E O N 161
9
The Temple Between
STARTING THE ADVENTURE As noted in the previous adventure, Amyria requests that the PCs accompany her to Overlook as they leave the fortress. If they choose not to go with her, she goes by herself. If they do travel with her, she fares them well once they reach the entrance to the city, and then she slips into the crowd around the entrance. PCs can choose to attempt to follow her at this point, and if so, they find that she heads to the Temple of Ioun in the Nine Bells district, where she prays.
Alternate Hooks If you’re running this adventure on its own or as part of your own campaign, rather than as part of the Scales of War—or if you prefer a different means of starting things off—one of these hooks might work better for you.
The Message One night, as the party beds down to camp, a PC abruptly hears a voice in his head. A DC 10 Arcana check identifies it as the result of the Sending ritual. “My name is Lavinya. I believe a hidden danger is growing within Overlook. Please come to Erathis’s old temple as soon as you’re able.” It’s a cryptic message, yes, but that’s the problem with Sending. The PCs might wonder how a woman they’ve never met can send them a Sending at all. If they ask her later on, Lavinya tells them that she was in one of the crowds that greeted them after their heroic triumph against the orc hordes in “The Siege of Bordrin’s Watch” (or some other adventure in your own campaign).
No Place Like Home It’s entirely possible that the PCs have taken to thinking of Overlook as their home—or at least a base of operations—by this point in the Adventure Path. If they appear inclined to return to Overlook on their own, without any outside encouragement, allow
them to do so. They can arrive at the city without any inkling that something is amiss, and remain that way until they either visit the shrine of Erathis or the Stone Anvil, or until they receive Lavinya’s message at their favorite inn or tavern.
OVERLOOK LOCATIONS SUMMARY The following Overlook locations come into play in this adventure. The numbers given refer to the location’s position on the map of Overlook in “Siege of Bordrin’s Watch.” Caer Overlook (High Hall district), 21: The seat of government in Overlook, this fortress houses the meeting chamber of the Council of Elders—called the High Hall, after which the district is named—as well as the offices of various district representatives. The Divine Knot (Nine Bells District), 24: The Divine Knot is a corner of the Nine Bells district, occupied by an array of dirty, dilapidated temples all but clustered together, like old men huddling against the cold. The temples of Avandra, Bahamut, Erathis, Kord, the Raven Queen, and Zehir still operate, albeit with small and impoverished congregations. The old temples of Ioun, Moradin, and Pelor have long since closed. The temple of Moradin was replaced with the Stone Anvil, while the other two no longer have organized services in the city. The Ministry of War (High Hall District), 22: A complex of several buildings around a courtyard, the Ministry of War trains Overlook’s soldiers, and houses the barracks and offices of the city garrison. The Pig and Bucket Tavern (Blister District), 5: An infamous tavern, well known for its beer hall, its wide selection of cheap drinks, and the great many criminals, mercenaries, and adventurers who frequent the place looking for work. The Shrine of Erathis (Tradetown District), 13: A small shrine, little more than an altar and a statue. So far as the PCs know, the shrine is tended by a kindly old woman named Haelyn. The Stone Anvil (Hammerstone District), 15: A grand cathedral to Moradin, the Stone Anvil is a combination temple and fortress. It is the most powerful church in the city, and it is currently run by High Priest Durkik Forgeheart, an old dwarf whose faith and sense of social responsibility have been slowly chipped away beneath the weight of years.
December 20 08
|
D U N G E O N 161
10
The Temple Between
PART ONE: RETURN TO OVERLOOK Parts One and Three of this adventure take place in the city of Overlook, first introduced in “The Siege of Bordrin’s Watch,” the second installment of the Scales of War (Dungeon #157). “The Temple Between” assumes that PCs are familiar with—and somewhat well known within—Overlook, and it details only those portions of the city important to this adventure. You might wish to have that adventure handy, for easy reference. As the PCs approach the city, read: The towering walls of Overlook rise slowly but steadily over the horizon as you draw ever nearer your destination. From a distance, the city looks as secure and serene as ever, but as you move closer, you can see that all is not as you left it. A great mass of activity bustles around the gates, people lugging stone and timber this way and that, all beneath the watchful eyes of sentinels who stand dutifully atop the wall. One particular blond-bearded dwarf in plate armor—an officer, you would assume—stands atop the gate shouting orders to everyone in sight. Although the activity doesn’t appear especially rushed or frantic—indeed, you see people pausing to talk or jest with one another as they work (and when the officer isn’t looking)—it appears as though Overlook were mobilizing for war. The PCs are hailed as they approach, while the sentinels atop the walls and by the gates offering friendly but careful greetings. Multiple crossbows are trained on the party until they identify themselves, but once they do, their welcome becomes far warmer. Several workers and soldiers stop to claps their hands, and
the sentinels swiftly lower their weapons and stand taller at their posts. Word has spread of the PCs’ heroics on behalf of the city so far, and their return is seen as a good omen. If the PCs ask, any one of the workers or soldiers— or the officer, who introduces himself as Captain Aerun—tells them that yes, the city is making preparations for war. It’s not that they anticipate any specific trouble, and indeed, the Council of Elders and the various priesthoods have reason to hope that, with the defeat of the orc invasion and the closing of the Shadowfell gate, their city is good and safe for a long time to come. Still, recent troubles have stirred up a strong “better safe than slaughtered” mentality among the populace and the city leaders, and so the Council of Elders have ordered that Overlook’s defenses be repaired and enhanced. Should the PCs question any of the locals about any current troubles, they receive only puzzled and slightly concerned replies. “No problems going on that I know about,” is the common response. “Why, is there something we should be worried about?” For at least their first few hours in Overlook, then, the PCs find no signs of the troubles that drew them here—or at least, they probably don’t. At least in this part of the adventure, no random urban encounters occur. At this point, the PCs are famous enough—and, more importantly, skilled enough and of a high enough level—that your average street thief or other ne’er-do-well gives them a substantially wide berth.
Subtle Changes If the PCs have come in response to Lavinya’s sending, they can proceed immediately to the temple of Erathis in the Divine Knot. If so, continue with “The
Shadow of Civilization,” below. Similarly, depending on what personal connections they’ve made in past visits to Overlook, they might also decide to visit either the Stone Anvil or Haelyn at the Shrine of Erathis. In these cases, proceed either to C3 or C4, respectively. But in most instances, the PCs likely find somewhere to take their ease, an establishment where they can grab a bite to eat other than trail rations, and a bed somewhat softer and less bug-infested than the open earth. It is possible that the PCs might seek out old allies (or enemies), as long as they feel they have nothing else to do. At the moment, this isn’t likely to accomplish much of anything. The Council is currently far too busy dealing with preparations for war and various administrative catastrophes (some of which were engineered by Captain Aerun or other infiltrators to keep them busy), and has nothing for the PCs to do except maybe lend a hand reinforcing the gates. Bram Ironfell is currently out of town. Although you’re welcome to have the PCs talk to any NPCs with whom they have a past relationship, none of it amounts to much.
KEEP TRACK OF TIME From the moment the PCs arrive in Overlook, keep track of how much time they spend. Whether they complete their exploration of the Mountainroot Temple within five days from this point, or not, impacts their ultimate chances of success when the city falls under siege. See “Victory Points,” page 37, in Part Three: The Siege of Overlook.
December 20 08
|
D U N G E O N 161
11
The Temple Between The First Night Home
The Shadow of Civilization
Lavinya has been making a concerted effort at contacting the PCs, and there are few places in the city she hasn’t visited. Regardless of what establishment the PCs wind up patronizing, one of the servers or proprietors approaches them a few moments after they’ve ordered refreshments or paid for a room.
As the PCs pass through the Divine Knot, read the following:
Read the following aloud: “Begging your pardon, m’lords and ladies, but you look familiar to me. You are the folks who saved us from the orcs, and from those foul creatures of shadow, aren’t you?” Assuming the PCs affirm their identities, the server continues: “Well, I’m sorry to disturb you and all, but there’s someone been looking for you. Woman named Lavinya? She’s a priestess at the temple of Erathis, over in the Divine Knot. She’s been leaving messages all over town—says she desperately needs to speak with you. She begs you to come see her at the temple, just as soon as you can get there.” It’s vaguely possible the PCs might refuse to go (in which case, one has to wonder if they’re the heroes they’re reputed to be), in which case you can have Lavinya track them down at some point over the next day or two. The adventure, as written, assumes that the PCs agree to meet with her, either immediately or the following day.
You cannot help but notice, as you pass, that the old temple of Moradin appears to be under as much construction as the city ramparts. Great frameworks and ladders stand alongside the building, and you can see lumber stacked along the inner walls through the open windows. It looks as though not every priesthood in Overlook is as badly off these days as that of Erathis. Even as compared to other temples of the Knot, the temple of Erathis has seen better days. As the PCs approach, read: It’s all but impossible to tell what color the stones of this temple might once have been, for now they’re a repugnant mixture of smoke-stained gray, dirty-handprint brown, and bird-dropping white. The stenches of the Nine Bells district appear to congregate here, as though seeking admittance and absolution, and you’ve seen zombies that looked (and smelled) healthier than some of the unfortunate, impoverished souls shambling along the streets with empty eyes. Three wide steps that don’t appear to have been swept in days rise toward a heavy wooden door that boasts a relatively fresh coat of polish—one that cannot begin to conceal the rot beneath. Regardless of the time of day or night, when the PCs enter they see a largely empty cathedral, its pews old and candles burned down to nubs. At the far end stands an altar to Erathis, which is far better maintained than anything around it. A dark-haired and gold-robed half-elf, grown old before her time, kneels
before the altar, rising and turning at the sound of the door. “Thank you,” she says as she recognizes the PCs. “I knew Erathis would guide you to me.” For a few moments she waits on the PCs, offering what comfort she can, pointing them toward the pews at the front of the cathedral (the cleanest ones), offering a few glasses of cheap wine, and the like. Only once they’re settled—or when they lose patience and press her on why she summoned them—does she frown thoughtfully and begin. “My name is Lavinya,” she tells you. “I’m the last priestess here; the others all departed years ago, when the Nine Bells went all to seed, and the temples with it. I keep it open and functioning as best I can on my own, but . . ” She shakes her head, as though reminding herself to stay on topic. “Do you know Haelyn?” she asks. If the PCs do not, she says the following: “Haelyn is a wonderful old woman. She’s the caretaker of the shrine to Erathis, over in Tradetown.” If the PCs do know Haelyn, skip that particular bit of dialogue and continue with the following sets of text. They have been broken up to allow for more interaction, but if none is forthcoming, continue to the next set of text. “I’m sure you know,” she continues, “that most worship of Erathis in Overlook takes place there, rather than here. I must admit, I haven’t always been a friend to Haelyn. I was . . . bitter, very bitter, at what happened to my temple. But after a time, we got to know each other, and we’ve become great friends.
December 20 08
|
D U N G E O N 161
12
The Temple Between
“And that’s why I need you!” Lavinya looks up, her eyes suddenly narrowed. “Something is wrong! Something’s happened to Haelyn, I know it, and maybe not just to her!” At this point, Lavinya takes a sip of her drink, then says: “A few weeks ago, Haelyn just disappeared. I went by the shrine to speak with her and she was gone. There’s a man named Grovald maintaining the shrine now. I don’t know him; I’ve never met him before, and nobody I talk to knows him, either. He told me that Haelyn left on a spiritual retreat and would be back in a few months. “But I know better! Haelyn needed no ‘spiritual retreat.’ Her faith was strong, and it was centered on that shrine! And even if she had, she wouldn’t have up and left—not without telling me.” Now Lavinya shakes her head and gauges the reactions of the PCs, then continues: “I must confess, I went back at night and snooped around a bit, not just in the shrine, but peering through the windows of the groundskeeper’s cottage. I’ve offered penance to Erathis for my trespass, but I had to know what happened! I didn’t . . . I found no trace of Haelyn, but I did catch a glimpse of a letter through the cracks in the shutters. I couldn’t read much of it, and I dared not stay long, but I’m certain it was addressed to ‘G’—that must be Grovald, right?—and it began with ‘I am commanded to ask if you’ve had any further problems with the worshipers of . . .’ That’s all I saw, but it sounds sinister enough! “And that,” she says morosely, “is where things got even worse. I went to the authorities, but they told me there was nothing to look into, that Haelyn—or any citizen—can travel as they please. I spoke to some of the other priests—Aelys of Bahamut, Durkik of Moradin at the Stone Anvil, Kyrrist of
Avandra, even Matron Volorvyn of the Raven Queen. Some of these have long been my friends, and even those who were not have at least been respected colleagues. And all of them brushed me off! They were distant, uncaring, even cold, as though my worries were of no moment! Volorvyn appeared barely to recognize me, and while we’ve never been close, we’ve known one another on and off for years.” Lavinya looks at each of the PCs, one by one, while continuing: “And that’s when I thought of you, Overlook’s new heroes. I’m terrified that something has happened to my friend and that something is wrong with my fellow priests. I should, we all should, be showering you with gifts and thanks, not heaping even more cares onto your shoulders—but I’ve little inf luence left in this city, and I have nobody else to whom I can turn.” Lavinya smiles gratefully when the PCs agree. (Again, the adventure, as written, assumes they do so.) She can’t offer much in the way of additional information, though she does try to advise the PCs if they ask her council. “You could talk to one of the priests, I suppose,” she mutters doubtfully. “I’m not sure they’d agree to speak with you at any length, though. Everyone’s so busy with the mobilization. And these are important people; you can’t just, uh, ‘hero’ your way into the building and confront them,” she adds with a smile. “Still you might learn something from them. “You could examine the shrine of Erathis. You might well find something I missed. Or you could search Haelyn’s home, which is on the same lot as the shrine. I looked for her there, but when she didn’t answer, it felt wrong for me to just barge in. But now . . .” She shrugs.
Lavinya can, of course, give the PCs directions to any of these locations, or any other public location of which they might ask her. If the PCs ask her (or anyone else around town) about the work going on at the old temple of Moradin, she answers as follows: “Oh, that. High Ancestor Durkik recently assigned most of his underpriests to restoring the old temple. Something about wanting to expand, I think, so that other races who might not be comfortable in the Stonehammer district could return to Moradin.” Finally, if your players are accustomed to using sword and spell to deal with every obstacle and aren’t used to subtlety and restraint, you can use Lavinya—who is, after all, a priest of the goddess of civilization—to remind them to behave themselves. The PCs do not have any legal authority here, after all. They can fight to defend themselves, and against any criminal element they might discover, but they can’t just pull steel on a high priest or a squad of city watch and expect things to go their way. Some element of discretion is vital.
OUT OF ORDER Don’t worry if the PCs do things in a different order than presented here; everything still works. For instance, if they go to the Shrine of Erathis and begin investigating Haelyn’s disappearance on their own, you can still have them receive Lavinya’s message later that same evening. Everything that needs to happen can happen regardless of when the PCs get to it.
December 20 08
|
D U N G E O N 161
13
The Temple Between
Investigating Overlook
C1: The Stone Anvil
The PCs have a variety of approaches they can take here, and a number of locations of interest. Don’t, however, feel that you must force the PCs to stick only to the locations presented below. If they come up with another avenue of investigation, you can “wing it” and let them pursue that course, perhaps allowing them to find their answers some other way. You can try to gently guide them back on track; perhaps other NPCs also express suspicion of Grovald, or comment on priests acting peculiarly. Or you might run an extra ambush encounter (see C7, below), giving the PCs another opportunity to question their attackers, and thus pointing them back toward Captain Aerun.
Under normal circumstances, a group with such a disparate racial makeup as the party would have a few problems sauntering through the dwarf-heavy (and elitist) district of Stonehammer. Their current status as heroes of the city, however, grants the PCs a bit of leeway. As they approach the Stone Anvil, read the following: As compared to so much of the rest of Overlook, the Stonehammer district might almost be a different city. Broad, clean streets flow like rivers of rock between enormous, sweeping edifices, carved with near magical
precision. The air is clean here, and the voices you hear are raised in laughter or negotiation, without the tinge of desperation so common in some of the poorer quarters. And then you are there. It rises up before you like a fortress, constructed of blocks of stone larger than many of Overlook’s houses. At its height, looking down upon even its tallest neighboring buildings, glint leaded windows in the shape of hammers. The doors at the entryway stand open, inviting all who would worship, and a good thing it is—for these doors are 40 feet high if they’re an inch, and the lot of you together might have difficulty dragging them open. This is the Stone Anvil, temple of Moradin and the spiritual heart of Overlook.
A COLLECTION OF CLUES For DMs not accustomed to running this sort of investigation, this sidebar presents the various bits of information the PCs can pick up in each of the following encounters, just to help you keep it straight. C1: At the Stone Anvil, the PCs learn that High Ancestor Durkik adamantly doesn’t want them snooping around. C2: The PCs learn that the Ironfell Clan is one of the investors in the reconstruction of the old temple of Moradin in the Divine Knot—but this is a red herring and is not relevant to the ongoing investigation. More relevant is the admission by Ancestor Karros that High Ancestor Durkik is not acting himself lately. C3: At the other temples, the PCs can experience for themselves the fact that many of the city’s high priests are acting peculiarly. C4 and C5: During the day, the PCs learn only that the people don’t especially trust the new caretaker,
Grovald, and possibly that Haelyn didn’t pack up for a “spiritual journey.” If they return at night, they can locate the body of Haelyn and learn of Grovald’s connection to Durkik either through an interrogation or the half-burned note. C6: If the PCs go to the authorities, they might discover that Captain Aerun appears more interested in keeping them out of any subsequent investigation than in investigating. C7: If the PCs question their ambushers, they learn that a corrupt city watchperson has hired them and can be found nightly at the Pig and Bucket. C8: At the Pig and Bucket, the PCs learn (or confirm) that the corrupt guardsman is Aerun. Culmination: The PCs should be suspicious of either Durkik, Aerun, or both. They can follow either of them to the warehouse (C9), leading to the conclusion of this portion of the adventure.
December 20 08
|
D U N G E O N 161
14
The Temple Between
If the PCs peer into the sanctuary—which is no less sweeping, magnificent, and ostentatious than the building’s exterior—they see about a hundred worshipers (if they came during the day) or about a dozen worshipers (if they came at night) engaged in prayer, heads bowed and chanting in low, sonorous voices. As usual, the overwhelming majority of the faithful here are dwarves. The services are being led by a young dwarf female who reads from a great, steel-bound tome that, when open, is nearly as broad as she is. There is no sign here of anything out of the ordinary, or of High Ancestor Durkik himself. If the PCs examine the halls surrounding the main sanctuary, however, things don’t appear so mundane. A great many tasks appear to have been left undone; floors are not swept, candelabras are unpolished, torches and braziers have been allowed to burn out. (If the PCs ask any of the faithful about this, they are once again told that most of Durkik’s underpriests are currently hard at work restoring the old temple in the Divine Knot.) If they explore farther still, going deeper into the temple than most worshipers ever travel, they don’t have long to explore. Within mere moments, High Ancestor Durkik appears, accompanied by a contingent of the city watch. He demands, in no uncertain terms, that the PCs depart immediately. The guards are apologetic—they recognize the PCs as heroes— but adamant. The priest has the legal and religious authority to demand that the party leaves, and the guards are here to ensure they do just that. Still, while they haven’t learned any concrete details, the PCs can now be pretty sure that something odd is afoot at the Stone Anvil.
If the PCs return at night, with the intent of spying on or following High Ancestor Durkik, proceed to the Heart of the Conspiracy skill challenge, below.
INTERROGATION Several of the following encounters allow the PCs the opportunity to interrogate their foes, if they take any alive. When dealing with a human thug or a doppelganger assassin, this is a level 8 skill challenge; when dealing with Grovald or the false Durkik, it is level 9. In either case, the challenge has a complexity of 2, with Bluff, Diplomacy, Intimidate, and Insight as the primary skills. PCs can use Religion, with an easy check, against Grovald or the false Durkik (revealing that they’re not true followers of Erathis or Moradin), or Streetwise, with an easy check, against the others (to discover some of their criminal affiliations). These don’t qualify as successes, but grant the PCs +2 bonuses to other checks in the challenge until their next failure. Similarly, a promise of freedom buys a +2 bonus to all such checks, and a bribe of at least 100 gp grants an automatic success with the thugs and doppelgangers, but not Grovald or the false Durkik. If the PCs succeed, the subject answers all their questions. If they fail, but with one or more successes, the subject answers a number of questions equal to the PCs successes, but at least one answer is a lie. If the PCs wish, they can question enemies they’ve killed, using the Speak with Dead ritual. In this case, use the “Dead Witness” skill challenge (Dungeon Master’s Guide, page 78, as either a level 8 or level 9 challenge, as appropriate). See the individual entries for suggestions on what information the NPCs can offer.
C2: The Temple of Moradin in the Divine Knot The PCs might decide to look more thoroughly at the old temple of Moradin to see if any answers lie there. Although the PCs might be briefly misdirected by a red herring or two, they can also make a friend within the ranks of Moradin’s priests who reinforces their suspicions of High Ancestor Durkik. As the PCs arrive at the temple, read: The amount of work going on here makes the place look less like a house of worship and more like an anthill on a massive scale. Workers of all races scurry through doors and windows, clambering up scaffolds of wood and iron. The sounds of grunts, curses, shouted orders, and the monotonous thump of hammers on nails make it all but impossible to hear yourself think. Once the PCs enter the structure, continue: The work continues inside as well as out. Workers with boards on their shoulders, wheelbarrows, or heavy hammers move back and forth before you. The floor is covered with dust, both stone and wood, and heaps of rubble lie in every corner. Not everyone here is a simple laborer, however. Leaning against the leftmost wall, her eyes narrowing as she watches you, is a young, heavily muscled woman clad in scale armor. One hand rests on the hilt of a longsword at her waist. Assuming the PCs have played through prior installments of the Scales of War, they recognize the warrior immediately. This is Megan Swiftblade, leader of an adventuring party called the Freeriders. Though their interactions when they first met might have been friendly enough, Megan and her team resent the PCs
December 20 08
|
D U N G E O N 161
15
The Temple Between
for becoming greater heroes of Overlook than they, and while that resentment doesn’t equate to true hatred or hostility—the Freeriders aren’t evil—they aren’t inclined to do the PCs any favors.
Once it appears ready to escalate into violence, the PCs agree to back down, or they continue to insist to see someone in charge, read the following:
Then again, Megan’s not the one the PCs have the most worry about. As soon as the PCs attempt to move farther into the room, or to speak to or attract anyone’s attention, read:
A red-bearded dwarf, clad in worker’s leathers and a smock but with the hammer of Moradin hanging about his neck, pushes his way through the crowd. “All right, all of you back to work!” he barks. Turning to you, he bows his head with cold politeness. “I’m Ancestor Karros of Moradin,” he says. “Why don’t I escort you out?”
Abruptly, one of the dwarf workers turns and stops in front of you, coming within inches of running his wheelbarrow over [insert a character’s name]’s foot. He hitches his thumbs through his belt—a gesture that puts one hand uncomfortably near the haft of his hammer—and glares with beady eyes above a dirty beard. “You bastards ain’t welcome here,” he announces gruff ly. “You might have the rest of the city hoodwinked, but not us.” This particularly unpleasant dwarf is Murrik Ironfell, a member of the Ironfell Clan with whom the PCs came into conflict back in “The Lost Mines of Karak.” He’s not shy about introducing himself, so the PCs shouldn’t wonder long why he’s bothering them. And many of the other workers on site are also of that clan, slowly assembling around Murrik as he continues to taunt the PCs. Megan and the other Freeriders begin to assemble as well. If the PCs ask her why she’s here, she tells them, “The priests of Moradin hired us to make sure the old temple was free of any dangerous people or creatures for the renovation. You’re starting to look dangerous to me.” You can let this go on for a few minutes, allowing the PCs and Murrik to exchange threats and insults.
Ancestor Karros says little as he walks with the PCs back through the main door and down the steps, but the party can get him to open up. This level 7 skill challenge has a complexity of 1 and uses Bluff, Diplomacy, and Religion (to establish a common ground) as the primary skills. If the PCs succeed, Karros becomes a bit more talkative and—assuming the PCs ask the right questions or steer the conversation in the right direction—eventually provides the following information. ✦ High Priest Durkik has assigned almost the entire staff of the Stone Anvil to working on the reconstruction of the old temple. He’s barely kept enough priests on hand there to conduct regular services. Karros doesn’t speak ill of Durkik, but he hints at the fact that he doesn’t approve. The idea of the renovation came out of nowhere, and neither Karros nor the other priests can figure out why it’s being done. ✦ Durkik called for investors from Overlook’s dwarves to aid in the reconstruction. The Ironfell Clan was among those to contribute money and workers. Many of the workers have been speaking poorly about the PCs any time their status as “heroes” comes up in conversation.
✦ Although he appears almost unwilling to admit it, Karros confesses that Durkik hasn’t been himself for weeks now. He’s worried about the old priest.
C3: Other Temples in the Divine Knot If the PCs attempt to speak with any of the other priests in the Divine Knot, the priests politely listen to their concerns, promise to look into them, thank the PCs for their time, and ask them to leave. Allow the PCs to attempt a DC 20 Insight check; if they succeed, they realize that the priests act somewhat distant— as though they were distracted or preoccupied with something pressing. If the PCs return at night, with the intent of spying on or following any of the priests, proceed to the Heart of the Conspiracy skill challenge, below.
C4: The Shrine of Erathis As the PCs approach the shrine, read: As compared to Overlook’s temples, this shrine is poor indeed—and yet it offers a sense of intimacy that the greater edifices do not. Several wooden poles stuck in the earth support walls and ceiling of heavy fabric, barely enough to keep the rain off the altar within it. The altar is littered with candle stubs and scraps of parchment, which are the remnants of prayers and offerings. Beyond the makeshift sanctuary, a statue of Erathis stands in the middle of a pool of stagnant water, staring off toward the horizon. Many of the bricks of the pool are broken or missing, and a closer glance suggests that the “statue” was in fact a fountain at one point, but the mechanism has failed—likely many years ago. Several rickety cottages stand on the edge of the property, apparently held together by little more than faith and an extra coating of paint.
December 20 08
|
D U N G E O N 161
16
The Temple Between
If the PCs come during the day, continue with the following: Several townsfolk move in and out of the curtain-housed shrine, leaving written prayers on the altar and occasionally glancing askance at a fellow who paces behind it. He is a tall human, bald-headed with features sharp as an eagle’s, clad all in somber black. He mutters to himself as he paces. Insight Check DC 16: It’s pretty clear from his body language that the man doesn’t want to be here, though any time one of the citizens utters a prayer to Erathis, he replies with a quick “So may it be.” If the PCs speak with him, he introduces himself as Grovald. He answers any questions about Haelyn with the same “spiritual retreat” story he gave Lavinya (and no, he doesn’t know where she went or when she’ll be back). If the PCs press him or try to talk about any other issue, he insists that he’s busy praying along with his faithful and returns to pacing. At this point, he starts muttering more loudly, offering prayers to Erathis. A DC 18 Insight check suggests he’s lying about Haelyn. Again, the PCs’ reputation as saviors of Overlook comes to the rescue. After the quick exchange with Grovald (and before the PCs can contemplate doing something foolish in front of witnesses), read the following: One of the faithful, an older woman dressed in shabby but well-mended shawl and dress, stands up from the altar and turns her eyes on you. “I know you!” she calls out. “Thank you so much for all you’ve done!” As she approaches you, however, she glances once at Grovald and her eyes narrow. In a much softer tone of
voice, she says, “I couldn’t help but overhear, and a lot of us have asked him the same questions. We don’t trust him, and we’re worried about Haelyn. Almost nobody comes here after dark anymore, so if you want the chance to talk to him in private, when he’s not so ‘busy,’ that’d be a good time to come back. Maybe you can find out what’s going on.”
The PCs can take a casual look around the grounds during the day, and Grovald doesn’t stop them. But any attempt to look inside cottage C4A, or any thorough searching (such as climbing inside the fountain) brings threats of him calling the watch and having the PCs charged with trespassing. (As long as they’re at least a little bit subtle, he doesn’t appear to notice if
INTERROGATING GROVALD OR HIS SOLDIERS Assuming the PCs ask the right questions or guide the conversation down the proper path, they learn the following information. From the Thugs or Doppelgangers: These are simple hoods and members of the Lost Ones criminal organization. Someone has been coming to the Lost Ones to hire out a lot of extra muscle. This particular group of thugs was hired by Grovald. They don’t know who he works for, but they’ve seen him meeting with a dwarf on occasion. They don’t know who else has been hiring muscle, or if they’re tied into the same conspiracy, but they know that they’re far from the only thugs to be hired as soldiers lately. From Grovald: Grovald grudgingly admits that he killed Haelyn and buried her behind the fountain. He claims he was ordered to do so by individuals who didn’t like her poking her nose in where it wasn’t wanted. If pressed, he confesses that he’s ultimately working for someone named General Zithiruun. Grovald doesn’t know what he’s a general of, and he doesn’t know what species, for the general wears a hooded cloak, but he does wear a strange armor of iron joints and leather harnesses. At the moment, though, Grovald takes his orders from Durkik, high priest of “that rock-headed idiot god.” He knows that Durkik spends
most of his time at the temple, but that the high priest frequently disappears for the night; to where, Grovald doesn’t know. If pressed on the issue, Grovald confesses that he is the priest of “the master of darkness.” (A DC 10 Religion check reveals this to be an occasional title for Zehir.) Grovald claims that his involvement here is purely mercenary—and this is the truth because he was paid for his assistance—but PCs who don’t believe him might wind up chasing false clues for a bit, seeking a Zehir connection..
SPEAKING WITH HAELYN If the PCs use Speak with Dead on Haelyn, there’s no need for a skill challenge; she’s happy to aid them. Alas, all she can tell them is that Grovald murdered her as she prayed in the shrine for guidance. She had recently noticed a change in the personalities of various priests in the city, but was laughed off when she confronted them. (She admits, now, that it was foolish of her to let on that she suspected them, but she’s been a trusting sort.) She was praying that Erathis would send a sign of what to do next when Grovald entered and slew her with his magic. She asks the PCs to please thank Lavinya for her concern.
December 20 08
|
D U N G E O N 161
17
The Temple Between
they poke around Haelyn’s shack at C5, at least not during the day.) If and when the PCs return here at night, proceed to the tactical encounter. Tactical Encounter: C4/C5 The Shrine of Erathis and Haelyn’s Home (page 41).
C5: Haelyn’s Home
C6: The Ministry of War At some point in their investigations, the PCs might decide to try going to the authorities and getting some help. If they do so, they’re directed to the Ministry of War—specifically, the office wherein the officers of the city garrison work. As the PCs approach, read the following:
As the PCs approach, read: This small cottage on the grounds of the shrine looks comfortable, but old and rickety. Bricks are missing from the chimney, and the paint is peeling from the walls. The door is locked, requiring a DC 18 Thievery check to open. Once the PCs enter, read: The dust of days, if not weeks, lies over a homey little abode. An ash-filled fireplace stands in one corner, with an old table and two equally old, but comfortable looking, chairs beside it. A pantry stands alongside a door that would almost have to lead to the bedroom. A faint stench, foul and out of place with the cottage’s peaceful appearance, tickles your nostrils.
The Ministry of War is huge, consisting of six buildings arrayed around a central courtyard—all within an imposing set of guard walls, of course. As you approach the gate, two guards, a dwarf and a dragonborn, step forward and cross their spears before you. “State your business within,” the dwarf demands. The guards have no intention of barring the PCs’ path, since the Ministry of War is open to all during business hours. They’re just following protocol. Once the PCs explain their purpose, the guards are happy to provide directions to the office, which is in one of the buildings nearest the main entrance to the compound. Once the PCs enter the office, read:
The PCs find no trace that anyone has been in here in some time. In the bedroom, clothes are packed neatly in the chest by the foot of the bed, piled almost as high as the lid will allow. The stench is coming from the pantry, which contains several rotting vegetables, fruits, and cuts of meat, all swarming with ants and fruit flies. The players can probably figure out what this means, but if not, allow them a DC 5 Intelligence check to realize that perishable foods in the pantry and a chest of clothes almost completely full are not signs of someone who was preparing for a long journey.
A dwarf stands up from behind the desk as you enter. His blond beard is tightly braided, his armor brightly polished. It takes you only a moment to recognize him as the officer you saw shouting orders from the wall when you first arrived in Overlook. “I’m Captain Aerun,” he says in a gruff voice. “I’m honored to have Overlook’s heroes in my office. What can I help you with?”
Aerun listens intently and politely, scowling in anger when the PCs mention some of the vile things they’ve seen, and shaking his head if they mention having found Haelyn’s body and/or killing Grovald. Ultimately, however, regardless of what the PCs tell him, Aerun’s response is the same. “These are indeed grave matters you bring to me,” he says. “I’ll get looking into them at once. And you once again have the thanks of a grateful city. Go on and take a load off, wherever you’re staying. I’ll let you know how the investigation turns out.” No matter how the PCs argue, Aerun refuses to allow them to take part in the investigation, going so far as to order them to stay out of it, and leave further efforts to the proper authorities. If they show any signs of hostility, argue with him for too long, or demand to speak to someone else, he calls in several guards to escort the PCs out. The guards are deferential, since they respect the party a great deal, but they follow orders. During this exchange, allow the PCs to make Insight checks. With a DC 16, a character recognizes that Aerun is more interested in keeping them out of the investigation than he is in finding out the truth. With a DC 20, the character realizes that something about Aerun’s behavior isn’t right; even though he’s engaged in the conversation, something about him appears vaguely distant, as though he’s thinking about something else. If the PCs have been to visit the priests at the various temples in the Divine Knot, they recognize this as the same behavioral quirk. If the PCs come back at night, with the intent of spying on or following Aerun, they see him depart in civilian clothes. Eventually, he leads them to the Pig and Bucket (see C8).
December 20 08
|
D U N G E O N 161
18
The Temple Between C7: Ambush in the Alley Precisely when this encounter occurs depends on the PCs. (Don’t assume it has to happen after the scenes described previously, just because it’s given as C7 on the list.) The attack happens on a random street corner when any one of the following events have occurred:
INTERROGATING THE AMBUSHERS Assuming the PCs ask the right questions or guide the conversation down the proper path, they can learn the following information: These hoods had orders to attack them. They normally work for the Lost Ones criminal organization, but in recent weeks, customers have been coming to the Lost Ones to hire out a lot of extra muscle. This particular group of thugs was hired out to, of all people, a city watch member! The hoods don’t know his name, but they know him by appearance. He shows up at the Pig and Bucket almost every night so they can report to him and receive their orders. They don’t know who he works for, only that they’re to follow his orders. They know that he often heads out into the city after leaving the Pig and Bucket, and not in the direction of the High Hall district, but they don’t know where he goes. Similarly, they don’t know who else has been hiring muscle, or if they’re tied into the same conspiracy, but they know that they’re far from the only thugs to be hired as soldiers lately. If asked, they describe the guardsman as a blondbearded dwarf with a gruff voice. If the PCs have been to see Captain Aerun, further description appears to match him perfectly.
✦ The PCs have been to the Stone Anvil and at least one other location mentioned here as part of this investigation, or ✦ The PCs have been to see Captain Aerun and at least one other location mentioned here as part of this investigation, or ✦ The PCs have defeated Grovald and his soldiers in combat. Obviously, the attack doesn’t occur instantly after these conditions are met, but some point in the next few hours, as the PCs are traveling about the city. Tactical Encounter: C7 Ambush in the Alley (page 43).
C8: The Pig and Bucket The Pig and Bucket is a cheap, filthy, yet unaccountably popular one-story tavern in the district called the Blister. Squished between a couple of boarding houses said to sell a lot more than just board, it’s known for its wide variety of beers, and its wide variety of crooks, mercenaries, and thugs who frequent the place looking for work. If the PCs enter, read: Most of the building’s interior consists of the beer hall. Booths line the walls, while long tables and rear-bruising benches fill the middle of the room between. Along the far wall runs a wooden bar—you can see the graffiti carved into it even from here—behind which stand stacks of kegs.
Assuming the PCs are here at night, looking for (or having followed) Captain Aerun, they can see him in one of the far booths, speaking to a scruffy looking individual in a shabby gray cloak. If the PCs have taken steps to disguise themselves, Aerun doesn’t recognize them. If they have not, they have exactly 1 round to do something with themselves before he notices them. Hopefully, the PCs are wise enough either to disguise themselves, or to wait outside. If he sees them, he keeps drinking for a few minutes, then leaves and casually returns to the Ministry of War, and the PCs have lost their chance to follow him that night. If the PCs remain unnoticed, however, and try to follow Aerun after he departs, continue with the Heart of the Conspiracy skill challenge.
INTERROGATING THE POSSESSED Unfortunately, the possessed individuals—including Aerun and several priests other than Durkik—are effectively immune to interrogation. After all, the PCs cannot offer them anything they require, and they have no fear, for they can abandon the body and return to their own. If, however, the PCs try to interrogate them, a DC 21 Insight check reveals that the individuals are possessed by an outside force. If the possessing githyanki realizes the PCs know this, it immediately leaves the body, which falls to the ground as a dead shell.
December 20 08
|
D U N G E O N 161
19
The Temple Between
The Heart of the Conspiracy After a day or two of investigation, the PCs should have a couple of strong suspects: Captain Aerun and High Ancestor Durkik. They might suspect some of the other priests as well. If they choose, and put themselves in a position to do so, they can follow any one of these individuals to the warehouse wherein the conspiracy makes its headquarters. They can accomplish this with an extended skill challenge. Skill Challenge: SC1 Catching Durkik (page 44).
C9: The Warehouse This warehouse, located in the midst of the Blister district, is the headquarters of the conspiracy and the location where they’re holding the real Durkik.
As the PCs approach, read: Nothing in particular makes this warehouse stand out. It’s a large, squat building, with a huge front door that opens by sliding up into the ceiling on rails. A rickety wooden staircase along one wall leads to a door that presumably opens onto an upper level. Under normal circumstances, assume that the two githyanki-possessed individuals at the warehouse are Captain Aerun and Goodman Kyrrist, priest of Avondra. If the PCs have done something to prevent one of these two from being present, replace the missing with one of the other possessed priests (named in Lavinya’s tale). Tactical Encounter: C9 The Warehouse (page 45).
INTERROGATING THE CONSPIRATORS As before, the PCs can interrogate any captives or survivors (except the two possessed individuals). Assuming the PCs ask the right questions or guide the conversation down the proper path, they can learn the following information: The conspirator reveals that a doppelganger has taken the place of the real high priest Durkik, who is being held prisoner in a secret chamber beneath the warehouse. He tells the PCs he is working for someone called General Zithiruun. Like Grovald, he hasn’t seen Zithiruun’s face, but recognizes him by his hooded cloak and his strange leather-and-steel harness. He knows that Zithiruun wants them to hold the Stone Anvil, and to question Durkik about the security and magic of another temple, called “Mountainroot.” The false Durkik assigned most of the priests of Moradin to rebuilding the old temple as a means of keeping them occupied and out of the Stone Anvil. The conspirator does not know why Zithiruun is interested in this “Mountainroot Temple.” He knows only that Zithiruun has grown more and more frustrated with Durkik’s failure to answer their questions; a few days ago, he stormed off insisting that he was going to “find out for himself,” though he ordered them to keep trying in his absence, and record what they learned.
December 20 08
|
D U N G E O N 161
20
The Temple Between C9A: Rescuing Durkik When the PCs descend the ladder beneath the trapdoor in the warehouse, read: You are within a narrow, stone-walled hallway. Mildew darkens the mortar between the bricks and fills the air with the damp scent of rot. A steel door, speckled with rust, stands at the far end of the hall. It boasts a small barred window, but from here you cannot see what might lie beyond. Once the PCs near the door and can see through the bars, continue: A dwarf, his flesh bruised and beaten, his hair and beard matted with blood, stands chained to the far wall of a stench-ridden, claustrophobic cell. It takes you a moment to recognize him as none other than High Priest Durkik Forgeheart! Slowly, as though even so minor a move pains him, he looks up to meet your gaze through the bars, his eyes widening slightly as he recognizes you. “Be careful,” he rasps in a hoarse voice. “The door’s trapped.” He gestures with a finger, the chain clinking, to indicate a series of tubes that protrude from the walls of the cell, pointing in his direction. “And not to kill you, either,” he adds impassively. “They don’t want me escaping.” The door can be picked with a DC 21 Thievery check (as can the chains on his wrists, once the PCs move inside), but if the door is opened without the safeguards being disabled, one or more of the tubes fires a sharpened spike into Durkik’s chest, killing him. The “trap” is three traps, each of which must be disabled.
3 Spike Tubes Trap
Level 9 Warder XP 400
Hidden tubes with powerful springs lurk within the walls, waiting to launch brutal iron spikes. Perception ✦ DC 24: Through careful study, you determine how the mechanism fits together, allowing you to advise your allies how to work on it. This grants your allies a +2 bonus to Thievery checks made to disable the trap. (Each of the three traps requires a separate Perception check to grant this bonus.) Initiative +10 Trigger If the PCs open the door without disarming all three traps, or if the characters fail four total countermeasure attempts (see below), all remaining traps fire. Attack Standard Action Melee 2 Target: Everyone within the cell. Attack: +17 vs. AC; a prisoner chained by the manacles in the cell is hit automatically. Hit: 2d8+7 damage; against a prisoner chained by the manacles, this is considered a coup de grace attack, dealing 23 damage per functioning trap. In Durkik’s case, this is more than enough to kill him. Countermeasures ✦ A character adjacent to the cell door can reach through the bars and attempt to physically wrench a tube offtarget, thus disarming it, with a DC 28 Athletics check. Only two of the three traps are positioned to make this possible. ✦ A character adjacent to the cell door can disarm one of the three tubes with a DC 28 Thievery check.
If the PCs accidentally trigger the trap, Durkik gasps, “Bring me . . . to Karros . . .” with his last, choking breath.
Some Answers and Some Help The following section is written under the assumption that the PCs successfully rescue Durkik from the cell (or, failing that, that one of them casts the Raise Dead ritual on him). If this is not the case, the PCs might
cast Speak with Dead or, if they follow his dying wish, take him to Ancestor Karros. After finding out from the PCs what happened, Karros casts Speak with Dead. In these cases, do not use the standard rules for Speak with Dead, since Durkik’s spirit is lingering, hoping to help. Instead, it uses the connection opened by the ritual to converse with them normally. Thus, you can still run the scene largely as written here; change any of his offers to accompany the PCs to him ordering Karros to do the same. Once the PCs free Durkik, read the following: The dwarf slowly limps from his cell, wincing with every step. Clearly he is in a great deal of pain, but despite that fact, his eyes are alert. “Thank you,” he says simply. “You’re the answer to every prayer I’ve offered Moradin. But I fear, as grateful as I am to be out and alive, that I’ve little good news for you.” The PCs can help him as he talks. You can allow the PCs to ask questions and roleplay the conversation, or give them the information Durkik provides. First, thanks to everything he overheard and the questions he was asked, Durkik knows roughly what the conspirators were up to. If the PCs don’t already have it, he can provide all the information given above under the “Interrogating the Conspirators” text. He tells the PCs that Aerun and some of the other priests were possessed in a dark ritual, but that he was not because General Zithiruun required information from him. At this point, Durkik tells the PCs about the Mountainroot Temple (all the information presented under that heading in the Background section).
December 20 08
|
D U N G E O N 161
21
The Temple Between
Once he has shared the above information, read the following: “As you’ve doubtless guessed,” he says to you, his voice still weak, “the Stone Anvil contains one of those portals to the Mountainroot Temple. I don’t know why this General Zithiruun wants the temple, but it’s clearly what he’s after. “It’s funny, he’s had me tortured for days to make me describe the Mountainroot’s mystical defenses, but the truth is, I don’t know much about them. I know about the temple only because, as High Priest, I was told of it by my predecessor. I can tell you that the defenses are psychically linked to the Caretaker, allowing him to control them, but beyond that, I know little. But even had I told them that much, I doubt they’d have believed me.” Durkik coughs twice, then continues: “I don’t know why he wants the temple,” he repeats, “but I know it cannot be good for us. I know not who else in this city might have been compromised—who can be trusted. That leaves only you. “The entrance from the Stone Anvil is carefully hidden within an old sepulcher. The chamber is hidden behind a secret door; I can escort you to it, but no farther. What I cannot do is tell you how to access the portal, for I don’t know, and I am oathbound never to enter the sepulcher. But my hope is that, once you find it, you can figure out how to use it. “I must ask you one thing more,” he adds swiftly. “When the Mountainroot Temple was abandoned, the priesthood took most of our ancient religious relics with them. Most, but not all. Somewhere within the temple lies a tome entitled, when translated into Common, the Incunabulum Primeval. It is a book of great power for those who know how to use it. If you can find it and return it to us, I can promise you a reward of no less than 3,600 gp from the temple treasury, as well as legal right to any other treasure you find in, and can carry out of, the Mountainroot.”
Back to the Stone Anvil Durkik (or Karros, if Durkik is dead) leads the PCs back through the towering halls of the Stone Anvil. (The PCs might decide to take an extended rest first and approach the temple the following day. If they’re badly depleted, you might even suggest this to them.) Several of the priests and guards appear nervous about allowing the PCs to pass, but none are prepared to gainsay their guide. Read the following: After a dozen halls and several wide stairs, your guide stops inside a great chamber. Shelves of old scrolls line the stone walls, and great marble tables occupy the room’s center. Dust lies thick over it all, proving that this room is rarely used. For a few moments, the priest fumbles with the scrolls on one particular rack. Finally, a loud click resounds throughout the room, and one of the walls slides open with a deafening rumble and a cascade of powdered stone. “This is it,” he tells you. “The sepulcher. I cannot go any farther.”
C10: The Portal in the Sepulcher Read the following (and consider drawing out the map whether or not combat ensues, since the room can be difficult to envision): You are standing at one end of a long chamber. Chandeliers hanging from the ceiling spring to life even as you pass through the secret door, illuminating all that lies before you. To the right and left, stairs lead down to an open lower level, transforming the f loor on which you now stand into a central walkway, with two narrower ledges along both sides of the room. At even intervals along those walkways the f loor abruptly widens, almost like the teeth on a gear.
At the far end of the chamber, a bright silver filigree of unimaginable complexity bulges from the wall. It shows a scene of Moradin hard at work at his forge. Four statues— two flanking the filigree, two flanking the entrance—show Moradin with a pair of ravens perched on his shoulders. Perhaps these are meant to honor the Raven Queen, who watches over even Moradin’s dead? The PCs can discover that the remains of the honored dead must be interred inside, and they must descend to the lower level to find the name plates. Read the following when they move down: The open space between those protrusions slopes sharply down from the walkway to lower level. Once the PCs draw near the filigree imagine, continue: Now that you’ve come closer, you can see an old stone door in the wall behind the filigree image. You can, however, see no way to access it. Should any PC touch the filigree in any way, read: The image suddenly bends as the face of Moradin turns toward you and speaks in a voice of rending metal. “Who would step through the portal to the heart of Moradin’s worship must first prove he understands Moradin in his own heart. “Think you carefully on Moradin’s precepts, his teachings, his actions, and his favored disciples. Then speak unto me a parable, a tale of Moradin, not that you have learned from his texts, but that you have created yourself. Let it show your understanding of his words and his ways, and you may pass.”
December 20 08
|
D U N G E O N 161
22
The Temple Between
Should any PC touch the filigree in any way, begin the skill challenge. Skill Challenge: SC2 Entering the Portal (page 48). Tactical Encounter: C10 The Portal in the Sepulcher (page 49).
PART TWO: THE MOUNTAINROOT TEMPLE The PCs are almost certainly expecting danger in the Mountainroot Temple. They’re probably not expecting two competing factions.
No Exit
Extended Rest Fortunately for the PCs, since they cannot depart, they have several areas in which they can safely rest. Once they have defeated the fey in M1, the broken corridors in the northeast are a safe place to camp. Areas A and F of M10 are safe, and once the PCs have dealt with the marching hammers and the trap, the rest of M10 is safe as well. Should the PCs try to sleep in M2, M3, or M4, they’re attacked briefly by some of the fey from M5, who then retreat back to that area. Similarly, if the PCs try to sleep in M6, the forces from M9 might launch a few attacks. Keep track of how much time the PCs spend resting; remember they’re still on a deadline if they want to earn the most victory points.
Perhaps the single most important feature of the Mountainroot is that nobody can leave. Because of the Caretaker’s torment, the magical security has gone off-kilter. Anyone can enter the temple, but nobody can leave. Any attempt to do so, even by using teleportation, rebounds as though the individual has hit an invisible wall. (This is why the fey have not departed and why Zithiruun hasn’t returned to Overlook.) The PCs can leave only by locating the Caretaker and assisting in his recovery.
Mountainroot Temple Overview
Dungeon Features
M2: Tea Room
Certain elements of the dungeon are universal throughout the complex. Doors: Unless otherwise mentioned, none of the doors are locked and all can be opened by depressing a lever in the handle. Doors open inward, and so the hinges are in the room’s interior. Stairs: Stairs count as difficult terrain and are made from stone.
Read the following:
The temple includes the following areas.
M1: The Chamber of Doors Numerous doors open up into a chamber that leads to other connected temples, and deeper into the Mountainroot. Tactical Encounter: M1 The Chamber of Doors (page 50).
A small round table and a few chairs occupy this otherwise empty chamber. Several cracked teacups and ale mugs, covered in dust and cobwebs, stand on the table where they were abandoned so long ago.
The secret door requires a DC 22 Perception check to locate. It is not locked, and it opens by depressing a hidden catch in the wall.
M3: Dining Room and Kitchen Read the following: Several long tables, capable of seating dozens, stretch the length of the room. Chairs are scattered about, some having been knocked over or broken just recently. A few humanoid corpses—small, with gray skin and wicked teeth—lie strewn about. Of whatever slew them, there’s no sign. These are the bodies of several quicklings who came out second-best against some of Zithiruun’s trolls. The above description applies to M3A: The Dining Room. If the PCs enter M3B: The Kitchen, they find huge fire pits full of ash, large wooden counters with knife marks and meat stains, and a plethora of old brass tools and pots that are worth pretty much nothing. The door in the east wall leads to M10, the area beneath M6.
M4: Wine Storage Read the following: Wooden racks line the walls, empty and dust-covered. From their size and shape, you’d guess that they once held bottles of wine and kegs of ale.
M5: The Vault The vault is a multilevel room that contains storage for valuables behind heavy portcullises. Tactical Encounter: M5 The Vault (page 52).
December 20 08
|
D U N G E O N 161
23
The Temple Between
QUESTIONING THE FALLEN As with their enemies in the city, the PCs can learn much by interrogating survivors here in the temple. (Well, some of the survivors; any attempt to interrogate the trolls or the two-headed troll is likely met with an utter lack of anything useful or even intelligible.) This interrogation is a level 10 skill challenge with a complexity of 2 and Bluff, Diplomacy, Intimidate, and Insight as the primary skills. PCs can use Arcana, with an easy check, against any of the fey (to know that they are not behaving as normal fey of their type should). This doesn’t qualify as a success, but it grants the PCs +2 bonuses to other checks in the challenge until their next failure. Similarly, a promise of freedom buys a +2 bonus to all such checks. If the PCs succeed, the subject answers all their questions. If they fail, but with one or more successes, the subject answers a number of questions equal to the PCs successes, but at least one answer is a lie. If the PCs wish, they can question dead foes by using the Speak with Dead ritual. In this case, use the “Dead Witness” skill challenge (Dungeon Master’s Guide, page 78, as a level 10 skill challenge).
FROM THE FEY . . . The characters learn that the fey were sent “to this foul place” by someone they call Cachlain, the StoneSkinned King. (Further questioning, or a DC 25 Arcana check, reveals that Cachlain is an infamous fomorian king of the Feywild.) He sent these fey in search of a valuable prize, which they refer to as “the parchment voice you call Incunabulum Primeval.” They know that it is a tome of great power and that Cachlain has sought
it for some time. Only recently, however, have they learned that its retrieval has become urgent, because the court’s divinations suggested that someone else was about to get their hands on it. The fey admit that Cachlain’s new counselor—someone named Sovacles, whom they have never met—tried to talk him out of sending them, but that the king was too desperate to get the book. The fey admit that their group’s leader, whom they call “Our Lady of the Deathly Song,” already has the tome. (If the PCs are questioning Hethralga, the howling hag, she admits to having it on her person after a bit of hemming and hawing.) Alas, they cannot leave because “the Others”—a band of humanoids consisting mostly of trolls—appeared and took the Caretaker prisoner, thus cutting off all possible exit. “They are organized and serve some higher master,” the fey muse, “but we know not who. Perhaps they are the reason Cachlain felt we must retrieve the parchment voice so swiftly.” If the PCs ask the fey what they want, they answer with, “Now? We seek only to escape the temple. A portal to the Feywild stands at the base of the mountains, where the waters flow from above to reach the plains. We would return home—with the Incunabulum if possible, but at least with our lives.”
FROM THE SOLDIERS OF GENERAL ZITHIRUUN . . .
soldiers, even as he worked and fought alongside them. They know he is humanoid and tall (for a human), but nothing more; his hood, cloak, and the combination armorand-harness hide his features. The soldiers admit that they have been instructed to look for the Incunabulum Primeval, but that the book is only a secondary objective. Zithiruun wants the temple. He intends to make use of its various magical portals to funnel soldiers into Overlook from elsewhere in the vale so that he can take the city in a combined attack from within and without. (This is why he wanted to keep people out of the Stone Anvil; he intends to use it as his assembly point for the soldiers who come through the portal.) Zithiruun seeks control over the entire western Elsir Vale, due to both its economic importance and because of the various portals that exist throughout it. Overlook is about to face an attack from the soldiers Zithiruun has assembled throughout the vale. He gathered these soldiers slowly enough, and in small enough groups that they’ve utterly bypassed Bordrin’s Watch— even if the PCs do stop him here! And it’s happening in a matter of days! They also admit that, as frustrated as Zithiruun was over Durkik’s refusal to break, he has grown all but enraged that the Caretaker won’t relinquish control over the temple’s defenses, or even allow them to leave. He is keeping the Caretaker prisoner, and he has come near to torturing the fellow to death.
The characters learn that, as with the thugs in Overlook, these are hired mercenaries. They can confirm the name “General Zithiruun,” but also as with his minions in Overlook, the general has avoided showing his face to these
December 20 08
|
D U N G E O N 161
24
The Temple Between M6: The Grand Cathedral The Grand Cathedral is an enormous central chamber with multiple levels. The room served as the heart of Moradin worship in the days that the temple still functioned. Tactical Encounter: M6 The Grand Cathedral (page 54).
M7 and M8: The Shattered Barracks and the Lesser Sanctum This portion of the temple, most thoroughly damaged by the ancient cave-ins, is currently the home camp for the invading fey.
Tactical Encounter: M7/M8 The Shattered Barracks and the Lesser Sanctum (page 58).
M9: The Reliquary This peculiar chamber housed the greatest of the temple’s religious treasures, as well as the astral portal through which Moradin’s exarchs occasionally traveled. It includes a great many subchambers. Tactical Encounter: M9 The Reliquary (page 61).
M10: The Underchambers These rooms beneath the upper levels of M6 were the day-to-day living quarters of the priests. Tactical Encounter: M10 The Underchambers (page 65).
Departing the Temple Once the PCs have found the Caretaker in area M9I, they might at first be stunned—or even believe that they are being tricked—to find that he is no normal dwarf, but an azer! (Monster Manual, page 22; his stats should not prove necessary, but if they do, treat him as an azer foot soldier with the Ritual Caster feat and training in Arcana and Religion.) The PCs can free him from his shackles with a DC 22 Thievery check, but freeing his mind is something else entirely. The Caretaker has been subject to hideous tortures, and he’s hovering on the brink of insanity.
A DC 17 Heal check reveals that a Remove Affliction ritual could set him right in the head again. Alternatively, the PCs can attempt to help him by using skills. Do not treat this as a skill challenge; rather, the PCs must make four skill checks against a DC of 21. One success must be with the Heal skill; the others can be Diplomacy, Heal, or Religion. Once they’ve achieved four successes, they bring the Caretaker back from the brink of insanity. Each attempt, regardless of which skill is being used, takes 15 minutes, so even four straight successes requires a full hour. Incidentally, should the PCs ask, the Caretaker has no other name; he abandoned it when he assumed this duty and answers to nothing else. Once the PCs succeed, read the following: The azer blinks once, and when he looks at you again, his eyes are clear—or rather, they appear to burn with an inner fire that they lacked earlier. He speaks in heavily accented Common. “You have my thanks, strangers. You should not be here, but as you are—and as I needed you—I will take this to be Moradin’s will. I know not who these creatures were, who invaded my home and dealt so cruelly with me, but I know their intentions! I heard them plan! They seek to attack the city of Overlook, from both without and—through my temple—within! Even though the latter has been thwarted, the former might yet lie ahead; Overlook, and indeed Elsir Vale, might suffer greatly. But tell me, who are these villains? Do you know? Tell me all that has happened, please.” Assuming the PCs are at least vaguely forthcoming, the Caretaker listens, shaking his head sadly. “I knew that the tall one wanted me to turn over stewardship of the temple to him,” he says. “I fear that, in my pain, I might indeed have granted him control over some of the constructs, but I denied him any more than December 20 08
|
D U N G E O N 161
25
The Temple Between
that. I . . . I fear that when you awoke me from my stupor, the portals were instantly unbarred. He has likely fled already. But at least I can swiftly return you to Overlook the same way.” If the PCs ask him about the Incunabulum, he reluctantly agrees to let them take it if they swear that they indeed intend to turn it over to Moradin’s church. As they are preparing to leave, however, read the following: “I realize time is short,” he tells you, “and that you must hurry back to warn the people of Overlook. Nevertheless, I must ask you . . . can you spare an hour, and perhaps a bit of your hard-won gains, to aid me with one final task? After the blood that was shed here, I must perform a ritual to reconsecrate the temple to Moradin. I cannot do it alone, and if you do not aid me, I will have to walk several miles through the mountains to find assistance at Bordrin’s Watch. Perhaps this sounds to you like the ramblings of an old fool, but I believe fully that Moradin will smile upon us for doing so.” If the PCs agree, they need not make any rolls; the Caretaker is casting the ritual, while they assist. They do, however, have to provide 500 gp worth of precious metals that the ritual requires. They might feel as though they’re wasting time and money both, but indeed, reconsecrating the temple does aid them in their struggles to come. (See “Victory Points,” page 37). When they complete the ritual, read the following: For just an instant, as the last echoes of the rite fade away, the entire room grows ever so slightly warmer, as though heated from within by the fires of a small forge. The faint chime of hammers on steel reverberates from all around you, and then once more there is silence. December 20 08
|
D U N G E O N 161
26
The Temple Between
In addition, PCs who think quickly can provide even more aid to the city. Although he won’t think of it himself—he’s been through too much, and still isn’t thinking clearly—the Caretaker can make the walk to Bordrin’s Watch and request aid for the coming battle at Overlook. If a player suggests this, additional dwarves arrive in time to aid in the city’s defense, and the PCs earn additional victory points. Once these tasks are complete (or the PCs choose not to complete them at all), they can return to Overlook by using the Stone Anvil and bring warning of what’s to come to the Council of Elders.
THE INCUNABULUM PRIMEVAL When the PCs finally get their hands on this tome, they find it to be an enormous book, nearly 2 feet tall by 18 inches wide, and almost a foot thick. The pages are an incredibly heavy parchment, while the cover consists of thin planks of wood that are bound and hinged in iron. The book is written in Dwarven, but also in a sort of cipher; no attempt at translating or decoding it functions without either the proper rituals, known only to the priesthood of Moradin, or magic more potent than any the PCs currently possess. The Incunabulum indeed has great powers, of which the PCs might see the slightest hint during the siege of Overlook, but any more detailed familiarity with this potent item must wait for future adventures.
PART THREE: THE TAKING OF OVERLOOK The endgame is upon the PCs now—not only of Zithiruun’s plans, but the heroic tier, and the first third of the Scales of War. And that endgame is nothing less than the siege of Overlook. Zithiruun’s plans to funnel a “fifth column” into the heart of the city might have been thwarted, but his mercenary armies throughout the Vale still pose a deadly threat. The PCs are not Overlook’s only defenders, but at this point they’re the most potent and the most important.
Victory Points As with some prior DUNGEONS & DRAGONS adventures, “The Temple Between” makes use of a victory point system to help determine the outcome of the siege. Throughout the adventure so far, and indeed on into the siege, the PCs can accomplish certain goals that ultimately determine how well Overlook stands up to the attack. Once the adventure is concluded with the defeat (or victory) of Zithiruun, consult the table below to determine how many victory points the PCs have earned. The “Concluding the Adventure” section tells you how to interpret those points. In addition, some entries on the table include a read-aloud description. Insert these at various points throughout the days of the siege, wherever they are most appropriate, as hints to the PCs that their prior actions have indeed proved effective and are aiding them now.
Wartime Urban Encounters During the siege, the PCs might have several extra encounters. This option exists in case the PCs have missed enough encounters or skill challenges that you don’t think they’ll make 11th level by the end of the adventure. Be careful, however, not to use too many of these encounters (or even any) if the PCs appear to be on track. Although you want them to achieve 11th level, you do not want them to do so before encountering Zithiruun. Enemy Soldiers (Level 9; XP 2,200) ✦ 2 dragonborn gladiators (level 10 soldier; MM 86 or encounter T5) ✦ 3 trolls (level 9 brute; MM 254 or encounter T3) More Death from Above (Level 10; XP 2,500) ✦ berbalang (level 10 solo skirmisher; MM 34 or encounter T2) Traitors Within (Level 9; XP 2,250) ✦ 1 of the surviving possessed citizens (level 10 soldier; encounter C9) ✦ 3 doppelganger assassins (level 8 lurker; MM 71 or encounter C9) ✦ 5 streetwise thugs (level 9 minion; encounter C9) Looters (Level 8; XP 1,800) ✦ 18 streetwise thugs (level 9 minion; encounter C9)
December 20 08
|
D U N G E O N 161
27
The Temple Between
Victory Point Accumulation If the PCs... Rescue Durkik alive*
Kill or defeat Captain Aerun Complete their adventures in the Mountainroot Temple and return to Overlook within 5 days of first arriving in Overlook Assist the Caretaker in casting the ritual
They earn . . . Read-Aloud 1 “As you race through the city toward your next objective, you notice a squad of soldiers standing victorious over a band of defeated trolls. Durkik stands beside them, his hands flickering with holy fire.” 1 — 3
“Although the sentries fearfully report a large force of trolls and other creatures approaching the gates, the army sounds smaller than you feared. Perhaps Zithiruun wasn’t able to assemble as many troops as he’d hoped.”
2
Send the Caretaker to Bordrin’s Watch for help
2
Return the Incunabulum to Durkik or Karros
1
Succeed in the skill challenge to aid the Council in formulating defensive strategies Defeat the berbalang at encounter T2 Defeat the enemies at encounter T3 Defeat Zithiruun at encounter T5
2
“For just an instant, as you face your enemies, you once again feel a faint warmth, as of a forge fire, and hear the distant sound of chiming hammers. Your spirits soar with Moradin’s blessing.” “A cheer arises from the sentries atop the wall, as a force of several hundred dwarves appears on the western horizon, striking at the enemy from behind.” “Farther down the street, you spot a team of dwarves wearing the holy hammer of Moradin. They are charging unharmed through a burning building to reach a band of mercenaries threatening civilians. Standing behind them, Durkik (or Karros) chants passages from the Incunabulum.” —
1
—
2
—
3
—
*If the PCs used their own magic and resources to resurrect Durkik, they earn these points as well.
The Battle for the City: Day One The PCs emerge from the Stone Anvil to a welcoming committee of several Overlook soldiers. “The Council of Elders needs to speak with you immediately,” the squad’s commander tells the PCs. “Please come with me.”
Read the following: Through the streets of Overlook and the gates of the mighty Caer Overlook, the soldiers escort you, until finally you have reached the imposing doors of the High Hall. Standing on the dais in the center of the chamber are three of the Council’s five members, as well as several more soldiers and High Priest Durkik Forgeheart.
Upon seeing you, Great Elder Morgoff Stonefirst waves at you, not to speak to them from below, but to join them upon the dais! Once the PCs are on the dais, read: “I was hoping to wait until all our members were present,” he tells you without preamble, “but we’ve still not heard from Elders Itrika Mountainhome or Olman Sledgemore— they are, presumably, occupied with other duties and our messengers haven’t reached them to tell them of this emergency conclave—and we’ve no more time to wait. High Ancestor Durkik, as well as several other citizens, such as Priestess Lavinya, have told us a bit of what’s been happening our city. But I’m given to understand that you can tell us far more. Please, what’s going on? Is Overlook in danger? Obviously, if Durkik is dead, replace the prior references, and all subsequent references, with Ancestor Karros.
SC3. Council of War Once the PCs tell the Council what has happened, and what is to come, Great Elder Morgoff asks them, as well as the guard officers and Durkik, to adjourn with the Council to the war room, where they can discuss defenses. On the way, Durkik moves to the PCs and asks, softly and almost reverently, if they’ve recovered the Incunabulum Primeval. If they give it to him, his eyes tear up, and he immediately hands the party a small pouch of platinum and gold coins equaling their promised reward. Skill Challenge: SC3 Council of War (page 67).
December 20 08
|
D U N G E O N 161
28
The Temple Between
The Battle for the City: Day Two Over the course of the night, a small but fearsome mercenary army—consisting mostly of human soldiers and trolls, but with dragonborn and other creatures scattered throughout—creeps from the surrounding wilds and surrounds Overlook. The PCs awaken in the morning to the sound of catapult boulders slamming against the ramparts, and are swiftly summoned to the Council’s war room. The following three encounters can occur in whatever order you prefer. They are written as assignments from the Council, but if you’d rather have the PCs stumble upon them while out and about, that’s fine, too. Other battles and events take place over the course of this day and into the night, but unless you
wish to add some of the extra encounters previously described, the following are the only ones to involve the PCs directly.
T2: Death From Above Read the following: As you stand in the war room, discussing tactics, a messenger barges in and drops to one knee, panting, at Great Elder Morgoff ’s feet. “My apologies for interrupting,” he gasps, “but Nine Bells is burning! A creature—gods, I’ve never seen anything like them—they’re f lying over the district and dropping alchemical fire bombs! The local soldiers are dealing with some of them, but there are just too many!” Unless the PCs, for some bizarre reason, refuse to go investigate, proceed to the tactical encounter. Tactical Encounter: T2 Death From Above (page 68).
T3: Hold the Gate! Either back at Caer Overlook or while out in the streets, a military courier catches up with the PCs. “The outer wall!” he shouts at them. “They’ve breached the outer wall, just north of the west gate!” Tactical Encounter: T3 Hold the Wall! (page 70).
SC4: Combing the Wreckage The PCs need to find one of the city councilmembers before she’s killed by the attackers. Skill Challenge: SC4 Combing the Wreckage (page 72).
The Battle for the City: Day Three The PCs face only one major encounter on the third day—which is fine, because they’re going to need everything they have to win.
T5: The Final Encounter Read the following: Even as you rise from a night of troubled, martial dreams, a knock sounds on your chamber door. High Ancestor Durkik stands outside, looking grim. “I bring word from Councilor Morgoff. In the late hours of the night, a squadron of soldiers was dispatched to investigate reports of enemies in the streets close to Caer Overlook. None have returned. As soon as you’ve risen and readied yourself, I’m to show you on the map where they were assigned, and ask you to investigate.” Tactical Encounter: T5 The Final Encounter (page 73).
December 20 08
|
D U N G E O N 161
29
The Temple Between
CONCLUDING THE ADVENTURE Once word of Zithiruun’s death spreads through the invaders, they gradually break off and retreat back into the wild. Most are mercenaries, after all, and there’s little point in fighting on behalf of someone who’s too dead to pay. (If the PCs attempt to question Zithiruun—or his corpse—treat it as an interrogation skill challenge, as per his soldiers in the Mountainroot Temple, but at 14th level. He can explain that the githyanki wanted the region for its various portals, and that the assignment came down from officers above him, but he knows nothing about who originated it or why it was happening now. These are details for a future adventure.) But for now, the PCs have learned that the githyanki are behind at least some of the troubles that have beset Elsir Vale, and they can be content in the knowledge that they’ve defeated one of their major enemies and saved Overlook. Or at least, they’ve probably saved it.
Victory Point Totals How well the PCs did—and how well Overlook survives—depends on their total number of victory points. (Future adventures in the Scales of War adventure path assume that the PCs achieved at least 13 victory points. If this is not the case in your campaign, you can either modify future adventures to make use of different NPCs than those who died here, or you can arrange to have these NPCs resurrected “behind the scenes.”
6 or fewer: If the PCs did this poorly, Overlook has likely either been conquered, or razed to the point where it requires almost complete rebuilding. The PCs gain no XP or monetary reward for the “Prevent the Fall of Overlook” quest. You’ll have to modify future adventures in the Scales of War to account for the city’s destruction—but then again, it’s almost impossible for the PCs to have done this poorly without dying, so odds are you have other alterations to make anyway. 7 to 12: Overlook is severely damaged, but not to the point of destruction. The PCs earn 1,500 XP and 3,000 gp as reward for the “Prevent the Fall of Overlook” quest; the Council of Elders cannot afford to spare any more money from the reconstruction effort. Lavinya and Durkik, alas, did not survive the city’s final battles, though they gave their lives fighting for their homes and their neighbors. Any alliances the PCs might have established with them will have to be reforged with new NPCs. The PCs are heroes of the city, but nobody has the time to honor them; in fact, the PCs are probably put to work with the rebuilding. Still, Overlook remains, and things have returned to at least some semblance of normal by the time the next adventure in the Scales of War begins. 13 or more: Overlook has weathered the storm, and though damaged, the city stands tall and proud. The PCs are hailed as great heroes, and several different establishments offer them free room and board for several months. The PCs gain 2,500 XP and 7,000 gp as rewards for the “Prevent the Fall of Overlook” quest, and they are invited to dine with the Council of Elders several times over the next few weeks.
Lavinya abandons the temple and instead takes over Haelyn’s duties at the shrine. “If this is where the people wish to pray,” she tells the PCs, “then who am I to tell them otherwise? Erathis needs no stone walls, merely the hearts and souls of those who would bring civilization and culture to the world. Haelyn understood this long ago,” she adds with a sad smile. “I wish I’d not taken so long to learn it myself.” Durkik, if he survived, has experienced a reawakening of faith. His time of confinement and torture, followed by his rescue at the hands of the PCs and his survival of the siege, have caused him to reevaluate the previous years. From a beaten-down, tired, and increasingly corrupt politician, he returns to his younger identity as a devout priest of Moradin. In helping to turn him around, the PCs have gained a grateful and powerful ally, and they have done great good to the religious community of Overlook as a whole. This is particularly important, considering that the high priests of other temples were suborned by the githyanki, and their replacements are all younger and inexperienced. Over the next months, Durkik emerges as a spiritual leader for the entire city. And thus does the curtain fall on the PCs’ heroic tier. Greater dangers and challenges await, as those behind the githyanki’s efforts plot their vengeance and advance schemes of which the heroes have not yet learned. But for now, at least, the PCs have earned a few weeks of rest and the acclaim of Overlook’s citizenry.
December 20 08
|
D U N G E O N 161
30
The Temple Between
C4/C5: THE SHRINE OF ERATHIS AND HAELYN’S HOME Encounter Level 9 (2,000 XP)
Setup 2 doppelganger assassins (D) Grovald, human priest (G) 5 streetwise thugs (S)
When a doppelganger assassin is slain, read: The body at your feet warps and shifts, the skin turning pale gray, the eyes growing wide and dark. This is no human who lies before you! When the PCs enter C4, read: This cottage—more of a hut—is no more enticing inside than out. An old, rickety table and chair stand beside an ash- and charcoal-filled fireplace, and a door, standing slightly ajar, reveals what appears to be an equally cheap bed beyond.
The shrine of Erathis is currently under the auspices of Grovald, Haelyn’s “replacement.” He dwells here, with a number of hired guards who spend the days lurking in Grovald’s shack (C4A). None of these individuals are present at first if the PCs appear at night. Grant them five minutes to search the grounds as they see fit before their enemies arrive. Use the positions marked in RED if the PCs are in the shrine when the enemies appear; those marked in GREEN if the PCs are in or near the fountain, or in cottage C5; and those marked in BLUE if the PCs are in cottage C4A. The doppelgangers appear as humans, though dressed in darker clothes than the other thugs. When the enemies first appear, read:
Perception Check DC 20: A scrap of parchment, only partly burned, lies in the ashes of the fireplace.
From the darkness, an arrogant voice says, “I’m just as glad you chose to come here at night. It makes things so much neater when we need not involve the authorities, don’t you think?” You see a bald, sharp-faced man in dark clothes all but fading into the shadows, and movement comes from several other individuals in the night around him.
Features of the Area
Perception Check DC 24: Two other individuals, cloaked in darker hues than the rest, lurk around corners or in pools of shadow.
Beds, Chests, and Tables: Each of these can provide cover. Creatures can step up onto the furniture; this costs an extra square of movement. Chairs: The chairs are not sufficient to provide cover, but a character can step up onto one with an extra square of movement, or use one as a makeshift weapon. Doors: The outer doors of the two shacks are locked (DC 18 Thievery to open). The inner doors are not locked. Fabric Curtains: The curtains that make up the covering of the shrine block line of sight. Pushing through or past them costs an extra square of movement.
THE NOTE The PCs have found an important clue in this scrap, even though much of it has been burned away. The legible portions read as follows: . . . unreachable for a time, as I must . . . the priests’ orders as you would my own, for he . . . s always, be certain you destroy this mis . . . . . . eneral Zi . . .
Illumination: Several lanterns, hanging on the posts that support the fabric “tent,” cast their light over the area. The bulk of the area is brightly lit, but the interiors of the buildings marked C4A and C5 are dimly lit. Ceiling: The bulk of the shrine is outdoors. The shacks (C4A and C5) have 8-foot ceilings, and the fabric roof of the shrine is 10 feet overhead.
December 20 08
|
D U N G E O N 161
31
The Temple Between
Fireplaces: Both fireplaces hold ashes and charcoal. A character can move into the fireplace (though a Medium character has to squeeze; see Player’s Handbook, page 292). Climbing up the inside of the chimney requires a DC 15 Athletics check. Pantry: The pantry in C5 provides cover. Pool: The water in the pool is not deep enough to swim in. It qualifies as difficult terrain. If the PCs conduct a thorough search of the fountain, and make a DC 19 Perception Check, read: Behind the fountain, not far from the nearest tree, a faint bulge in the earth mars the contours of the soil. It looks as though something was buried here recently. If the PCs dig here, they find Haelyn’s dead body. Statue: The large statue of Erathis in the pool’s center provides cover, and it can be climbed with a DC 12 Athletics check. 5 Streetwise Thugs (S)
Level 9 Minion
Medium natural humanoid, human XP 100 each Initiative +3 Senses Perception +3 HP 1; a missed attack never damages a minion. AC 21; Fortitude 19, Reflex 16, Will 16 Speed 6 m Longsword (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon +14 vs. AC; 6 damage. r Crossbow (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon Ranged 15/30; +13 vs. AC; 6 damage. Murder is a Team Sport If a streetwise thug is flanking an enemy, it deals 1 extra point of damage per ally adjacent to the flanked enemy (including the ally who is granting the flank), to a maximum of +4. Alignment Evil Languages Common Skills Athletics +11, Thievery +8 Str 16 (+7) Dex 12 (+5) Wis 10 (+4) Con 15 (+6) Int 9 (+3) Cha 11 (+4) Equipment leather armor, crossbow, longsword, case with 20 bolts
Trees: The trees provide cover and can be climbed with a DC 15 Athletics check. Most are only between 10 and 20 feet (2 to 4 squares) high. 2 Doppelganger Assassins (D)
Level 8 Lurker
Medium natural humanoid (shapechanger) XP 350 each Initiative +13 Senses Perception +10 HP 69; Bloodied 34 AC 23; Fortitude 18, Reflex 21, Will 21 Speed 6 m Dagger (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon +13 vs. AC; 1d4 + 5 damage. r Hand Crossbow (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon Ranged 10/20; +13 vs. AC; 1d4+5 damage. M Shapeshifter Feint (minor; at-will) +11 vs. Reflex; the doppelganger assassin gains combat advantage against the target until the end of the doppelganger assassin’s next turn. C Cloud Mind (standard; sustain minor; encounter) ✦ Charm Close burst 5; +11 vs. Will; the doppelganger assassin is invisible to the target. Affected targets are unable to see the doppelganger for as long as it sustains the effect, until the doppelganger attacks, or until it is hit by an attack. Combat Advantage The doppelganger assassin deals 2d6 extra damage against any target it has combat advantage against. Change Shape (minor; at-will) ✦ Polymorph A doppelganger can alter its physical form to take on the appearance of any Medium humanoid, including a unique individual (see Change Shape, Monster Manual page 280). Alignment Evil Languages Common Skills Bluff +15, Insight +12, Stealth +14 Str 12 (+5) Dex 21 (+9) Wis 12 (+5) Con 15 (+6) Int 13 (+5) Cha 19 (+8) Equipment dagger, hand crossbow, case with 20 bolts
Grovald (G)
Level 9 Elite Controller (Leader)
Medium natural humanoid, human XP 800 Initiative +5 Senses Perception +9 Unhallowed Resilience aura 3; when allies enter the aura or start their turns there, they gain a +1 bonus to all saving throws. HP 194; Bloodied 97 AC 25; Fortitude 21, Reflex 23, Will 24 Saving Throws +2 Speed 5 Action Points 1 m Longsword (standard; at-will) ✦ Force, Weapon +13 vs. Fortitude; 1d6 + 5 damage, plus 1d6 force damage and push 3. r Phantom Spear (standard; at-will) ✦ Force Ranged 12; +13 vs. Reflex; 1d8 + 5 force damage, and the target is immobilized until the end of Grovald’s next turn. R Twin Spears (standard; at-will) ✦ Force Grovald makes two phantom spear attacks. A Phantom Spikes (standard; sustain minor; recharge ⚄ ⚅) ✦ Force, Zone Area burst 1 within 15; +13 vs. Reflex; 3d8 + 5 force damage. Aftereffect: Any enemy that begins its turn in the area takes 5 force damage, and Grovald’s enemies treat the zone as difficult terrain. Grovald can sustain or dismiss the zone as a minor action. R Phantom Riposte (immediate reaction when hit or missed by a melee attack; at-will) ✦ Force Grovald makes an immediate phantom spear attack against the triggering enemy. This use of phantom spear does not provoke opportunity attacks. Alignment Evil Languages Common, Deep Speech Skills Religion +12 Str 10 (+4) Dex 12 (+5) Wis 20 (+9) Con 17 (+7) Int 16 (+7) Cha 14 (+6) Equipment chainmail, longsword
Tactics Since Grovald’s area attack affects enemies only, he stays in the back and lobs area and ranged powers, trying to weaken the PCs fast and impair their ability to maneuver. The thugs make straightforward attacks,
while the doppelgangers move around the combat, working to flank or otherwise gain combat advantage. Everyone involved fights to the end.
December 20 08
|
D U N G E O N 161
32
The Temple Between
C7: ALLEY AMBUSH Encounter Level 9 (2,100 XP)
Setup 4 doppelganger assassins (D) 7 streetwise thugs (S) The conspirators have learned that the PCs are investigating them, and they want the party dead. A band of cutthroats ambushes the PCs in an alley or on a street corner somewhere. Once again, the doppelgangers begin the encounter in human form.
When the attack begins, read:
7 Streetwise Thugs (S)
Without warning, a number of thugs come charging from around corners and out of doorways, and they hold their blades high!
Medium natural humanoid, human XP 100 each Initiative +3 Senses Perception +3 HP 1; a missed attack never damages a minion. AC 21; Fortitude 19, Reflex 16, Will 16 Speed 6 m Longsword (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon +14 vs. AC; 6 damage. r Crossbow (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon Ranged 15/30; +13 vs. AC; 6 damage. Murder is a Team Sport If a streetwise thug is flanking an enemy, it deals 1 extra point of damage per ally adjacent to the flanked enemy (including the ally who is granting the flank), to a maximum of +4. Alignment Evil Languages Common Skills Athletics +11, Thievery +8 Str 16 (+7) Dex 12 (+5) Wis 10 (+4) Con 15 (+6) Int 9 (+3) Cha 11 (+4) Equipment leather armor, crossbow, longsword, case with 20 bolts
Perception Check DC 24: A handful of other attackers, clad in black, blend into the shadows, but you spot them coming. When a doppelganger assassin is slain, read: The body at your feet warps and shifts—the skin turns pale gray and the eyes grow wide and dark. This is no human who lies before you! 4 Doppelganger Assassins (D)
Level 8 Lurker
Medium natural humanoid (shapechanger) XP 350 each Initiative +13 Senses Perception +10 HP 69; Bloodied 34 AC 23; Fortitude 18, Reflex 21, Will 21 Speed 6 m Dagger (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon +13 vs. AC; 1d4 + 5 damage. r Hand Crossbow (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon Ranged 10/20; +13 vs. AC; 1d4+5 damage. M Shapeshifter Feint (minor; at-will) +11 vs. Reflex; the doppelganger assassin gains combat advantage against the target until the end of the doppelganger assassin’s next turn. C Cloud Mind (standard; sustain minor; encounter) ✦ Charm Close burst 5; +11 vs. Will; the doppelganger assassin is invisible to the target. Affected targets are unable to see the doppelganger for as long as it sustains the effect, until the doppelganger attacks, or until it is hit by an attack. Combat Advantage The doppelganger assassin deals 2d6 extra damage against any target it has combat advantage against. Change Shape (minor; at-will) ✦ Polymorph A doppelganger can alter its physical form to take on the appearance of any Medium humanoid, including a unique individual (see Change Shape, Monster Manual page 280). Alignment Evil Languages Common Skills Bluff +15, Insight +12, Stealth +14 Str 12 (+5) Dex 21 (+9) Wis 12 (+5) Con 15 (+6) Int 13 (+5) Cha 19 (+8) Equipment dagger, hand crossbow, case with 20 bolts
Level 9 Minion
Tactics The combat is straightforward. The thugs attack en masse, while the doppelgangers flit in and out of shadows or flank the PCs, trying for combat advantage.
Features of the Area Illumination: The lighting here is dependent entirely on the time: brightly lit by the sun during the day or dimly lit by distant street-side lanterns at night. Buildings: The buildings here range from two to four stories (figure 4 to 8 squares) in height. The walls can be climbed with a DC 15 Athletics check. The List: If the PCs search the bodies, they find on one of the doppelgangers a list of descriptions—of the PCs themselves! The parchment is stained with something which (with a DC 16 Perception check) appears to be beer and sausage grease. A DC 17 Streetwise check suggests that the source for the stain is the Pig and Bucket tavern.
December 20 08
|
D U N G E O N 161
33
The Temple Between
SC1: CATCHING DURKIK Encounter Level 9 (1,200 XP)
Setup Begin by reading the following: After some time waiting, when the city is fully cloaked in the shadows of night, your quarry finally emerges. Glancing around, he turns and begins walking at a swift but inconspicuous pace. If the PCs are following Durkik in specific, continue with: Durkik ducks into an alley after walking a few blocks. Mere seconds later, another dwarf—slightly taller, with different hair and beard—emerges onto the street. You wouldn’t even have noticed had you not been specifically watching, but much of his outfit appears to match Durkik’s own, and his posture as he walks is identical. If the PCs glance into the alley as they pass, they can confirm that neither Durkik, nor anyone else, remains within it. They’ve just witnessed the doppelganger who has taken Durkik’s place alter his form, hoping to make himself less noticeable. At this point, regardless of who they’re following, begin the skill challenge.
Catching Durkik Skill Challenge
Level 9 XP 1,200
You make your way as silently through the streets of Overlook as you can, attempting to keep Durkik in sight without alerting him to your presence. The party attempts to shadow their target through the city. Complexity 3 (requires 8 successes before 3 failures). Primary Skills Acrobatics, Athletics, Perception, Stealth, Streetwise. Victory If the PCs succeed with 0 failures, they reach the warehouse without being detected. Only half their potential enemies are present (run the scene as two separate combat encounters, as described in the tactical encounter), and the PCs gain a surprise round when they arrive. Partial Victory If the PCs succeed with 1 failure, they’re detected only at the last minute. Only half their potential enemies are present (run the scene as two separate encounters, as described in the tactical encounter), but the enemies are not surprised. If the PCs succeed with 2 failures, they’re detected as they near the warehouse. They face the entire complement of enemies (run the scene as a single 12th-level encounter), and the enemy is not surprised. Defeat The PCs are detected, and their quarry shakes them as he nears the warehouse. The PCs know the general area to which their target went, but not the specific building. They eventually find the warehouse, but it takes 2d6 hours of wandering, searching, and perhaps various bribes or Diplomacy and Streetwise checks made to the merchants and citizens of the area. The result is that not only must they face the entire complement of enemies (a single 12th-level encounter), but they’ve lost a great deal of time off their deadline. (See “Victory Points,” page 37.) Special If at least one member of the party is capable of turning invisible, the party gains 1 success automatically. Acrobatics (DC 16) Any given character can attempt Acrobatics only once in this fashion, whether he or she succeeds or fails, and a failure costs the PC a healing surge as well as counting as a failure. A successful check counts as a success on the skill challenge.
The PC darts around a corner, tumbles over a gap between rooftops, or otherwise stays near the quarry at an angle that makes the PC harder to detect. Athletics (DC 16) Any given character can attempt Athletics only once in this fashion, whether the PC succeeds or fails, and a failure costs the PC a healing surge as well as counting as a failure. A successful check counts as a success on the skill challenge. Much like Acrobatics, the PC climbs walls, leaps between roofs or balconies, and otherwise follows by staying out of direct line of sight. Perception (DC 20) This does not qualify as a success, but succeeding on this check grants the party a +2 bonus to all further checks in this challenge until someone fails a check. The PC carefully watches the target to keep him in view even from a distance or behind other people on the street. Stealth (DC 20) A successful check counts as a success on the skill challenge. Darting behind pedestrians, into doorways, and through shadows, you move street to street without being seen. Streetwise (DC 24) A successful check counts as two successes. Once made, the characters cannot use Streetwise again for this skill challenge. By using knowledge of Overlook’s seedier areas, the PC can anticipate where the quarry is going.
Other Methods If the PCs can’t (or don’t think to) follow Durkik or Aerun, they have other ways to find out what they need to know. If they can catch Durkik alone, they can attempt to interrogate him, as described previously. If they successfully interrogate him, Durkik can tell the PCs where the warehouse is. He also reveals all the information presented in the “Interrogating the Conspirators” sidebar, below. Because the false Durkik didn’t show up at the warehouse, the forces there are ready for trouble. Run the scenario as a 12th-level encounter, and the enemy cannot be surprised.
December 20 08
|
D U N G E O N 161
34
The Temple Between
C9: THE WAREHOUSE Encounter Level 12 (3,250 XP) or Encounter Level 8 (1,700 XP) and Encounter Level 8 (1,550 XP)
Setup 3 doppelganger assassins (D) 2 possessed citizens (P) 12 streetwise thugs (S) Or First encounter (use RED placements) 2 doppelganger assassins (D) 1 possessed citizen (P) 5 streetwise thugs (S) And Second encounter (do not use the marks on the map since these enemies enter through one or two of the doors and position themselves based on the PCs’ actions) 1 doppelganger assassin 1 possessed citizen 7 streetwise thugs This warehouse has long been used by one of the criminal elements of Overlook as a headquarters, a central depot for illegal goods, and an occasional hideout. It has since been taken over by General Zithiruun’s conspiracy. Any creature on the map placed on the catwalk is on the catwalk; no enemies begin directly beneath it. If the PCs enter on the ground f loor, read: A vast chamber stretches before you. Rows upon rows of crates—some stacked as high as 15 feet—form aisles and corridors. A catwalk runs around the perimeter, as well as across the cavernous room at several points, with an array of chains and pulleys dangling beneath.
If the PCs are in a position to see the office and balcony, read: In one corner, a f light of stairs leads to a balcony built into the catwalk. Several walls surround what you would guess to be an office or counting house. Perception Check DC 13: Several gruff-looking fellows, the sort you might not want to meet in a dark alley but wouldn’t be surprised to find there, lurk atop the catwalk, atop several crates, and around a few corners, crossbows held at the ready. DC 24: A few other foes stand hiding in the shadows, also aiming weapons your way. Their gray f lesh and huge dark eyes are strong indications that they’re not human! If the PCs somehow prevented Aerun from getting here, refer to one of the possessed priests instead in the text below this. If they haven’t met Aerun, describe him as the officer from the wall when they first arrived. If the PCs enter by the office door, read: You are in a small counting house, which is occupied by little more than a table, a chair—and Captain Aerun, shock evident on his face as he rises. The wall behind him boasts a shuttered, glass-free window.
Tactics The doppelgangers and thugs initially launch volleys of crossbow bolts at the PCs, using the crates as cover. They keep moving, almost never staying in the same spot from round to round. The thugs prefer to close on the PCs in groups, but do so by maneuvering around and atop crates; they know better than to make a beeline for the enemy in an open corridor. The doppelgangers make use of similar tactics, but switch
constantly from melee to range and back again. The possessed citizens use their telekinetic leap to obtain an optimal position, and then maintain melee combat. If the PCs enter through the office, the githyankipossessed citizen takes his first move to fly out the window into the main warehouse, so as not to face the PCs alone. The possessed citizens fight to the death. If two of the doppelgangers and over half the thugs are slain, the remainder attempt to flee.
1, 2, or 3 Doppelganger Assassins (D)
Level 8 Lurker
Medium natural humanoid (shapechanger) XP 350 each Initiative +13 Senses Perception +10 HP 69; Bloodied 34 AC 23; Fortitude 18, Reflex 21, Will 21 Speed 6 m Dagger (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon +13 vs. AC; 1d4 + 5 damage. r Hand Crossbow (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon Ranged 10/20; +13 vs. AC; 1d4+5 damage. M Shapeshifter Feint (minor; at-will) +11 vs. Reflex; the doppelganger assassin gains combat advantage against the target until the end of the doppelganger assassin’s next turn. C Cloud Mind (standard; sustain minor; encounter) ✦ Charm Close burst 5; +11 vs. Will; the doppelganger assassin is invisible to the target. Affected targets are unable to see the doppelganger for as long as it sustains the effect, until the doppelganger attacks, or until it is hit by an attack. Combat Advantage The doppelganger assassin deals 2d6 extra damage against any target it has combat advantage against. Change Shape (minor; at-will) ✦ Polymorph A doppelganger can alter its physical form to take on the appearance of any Medium humanoid, including a unique individual (see Change Shape, Monster Manual page 280). Alignment Evil Languages Common Skills Bluff +15, Insight +12, Stealth +14 Str 12 (+5) Dex 21 (+9) Wis 12 (+5) Con 15 (+6) Int 13 (+5) Cha 19 (+8) Equipment dagger, hand crossbow, case with 20 bolts
December 20 08
|
D U N G E O N 161
35
The Temple Between
1 or 2 Possessed Citizens (P)
Level 10 Soldier
Medium natural humanoid XP 500 each Initiative +10 Senses Perception +6 HP 101; Bloodied 50 AC 26; Fortitude 23, Reflex 21, Will 20 Saving Throws +2 against charm effects Speed 5; see also telekinetic leap m Greatsword (standard; at-will) ✦ Psychic, Weapon +17 vs. AC; 1d12 + 4, plus 3d6 extra psychic damage if the target is immobilized, and the target takes a –2 penalty to saving throws against the immobilized condition until the start of the possessed citizen’s next turn. R Telekinetic Grasp (standard; encounter) Ranged 5; Medium or smaller target; +15 vs. Fortitude; the target is immobilized (save ends). Telekinetic Leap (move; encounter) Ranged 10; the possessed citizen can fly 5 squares. Alignment Evil Languages Common, Deep Speech Skills History +11, Insight +11 Str 20 (+10) Dex 16 (+8) Wis 12 (+6) Con 13 (+6) Int 12 (+6) Cha 13 (+6) Equipment leather armor, greatsword
5, 7, or 12 Streetwise Thugs (S)
Level 9 Minion
Medium natural humanoid, human XP 100 each Initiative +3 Senses Perception +3 HP 1; a missed attack never damages a minion. AC 21; Fortitude 19, Reflex 16, Will 16 Speed 6 m Longsword (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon +14 vs. AC; 6 damage. r Crossbow (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon Ranged 15/30; +13 vs. AC; 6 damage. Murder is a Team Sport If a streetwise thug is flanking an enemy, it deals 1 extra point of damage per ally adjacent to the flanked enemy (including the ally who is granting the flank), to a maximum of +4. Alignment Evil Languages Common Skills Athletics +11, Thievery +8 Str 16 (+7) Dex 12 (+5) Wis 10 (+4) Con 15 (+6) Int 9 (+3) Cha 11 (+4) Equipment leather armor, crossbow, longsword, case with 20 bolts
If the fight is divided into two encounters (see the rules for the Heart of the Conspiracy skill challenge, page 30), the second group arrives 1d4 + 4 minutes after the first battle ends. Unless a member of the first group escaped, they all enter through the office and the PCs can ambush them, thus gaining surprise. If someone did escape the first encounter, this second group has been warned, and they split up, entering by both the office and the door. They are ready for trouble and cannot be surprised.
Features of the Area Illumination: The warehouse is brightly illuminated by a sequence of lanterns and sunrods placed along the railing of the catwalk. Ceiling: The ceiling is 35 feet overhead. Catwalks: These metallic walkways, standing 20 feet above the floor, aid in the movement and placement of crates. A sequence of chains and pulleys runs across the underside of the catwalks. This enables a character to climb, hand-over-hand, along the underside of these catwalks with a DC 22 Acrobatics or Athletics check, at normal climbing speed. Except where the ladders stand, the catwalk has a railing all the way around. Anyone wishing to deliberately climb or leap over the railing must spend an extra square of movement to do so, and any push, pull, or slide effect that would drag a creature over that railing must also spend an extra square to do so. Chair: The chair is not sufficient to provide cover, but a character can step up onto it with an extra square of movement or use it as a makeshift weapon. Crates: Each individual crate is roughly 5 feet (1 square) high, but they are often stacked two or three crates (that is, 10 or 15 feet, or 2 or 3 squares) in height, as marked on the map. Stepping up on a
single crate requires an extra square of movement, while moving down a single crate does not cost any additional movement. Climbing two or three crates requires a DC 20 Athletics check. Doors: The central door slides upward into the ceiling. It isn’t locked, but it cannot be opened stealthily, since the chains and pulleys rumble. The two side doors are both locked, and require a DC 19 Thievery check to open. Ladders: The ladders are all 20 feet (4 squares) in height, but count as 6 squares of movement. A DC 12 Acrobatics or Athletics check allows a character to climb them at the normal 4 squares of movement. Stairs: The stairs count as difficult terrain. Table: A character can step up onto the table with an extra square of movement. A DC 19 Strength check topples the table over, allowing it to serve as cover and knocking prone any creatures standing on it. Trapdoor: The trapdoor requires a DC 21 Thievery check to open. The ladder beneath leads to an underground passage (unmapped) that itself leads to the cell (C9A) containing High Priest Durkik. Weakened Crates: Several of the crates, as marked on the map, are weaker than others. A creature that moves atop that crate partially breaks through the wood. This immediately ends the creature’s move action, even if it had movement remaining, and that crate is considered difficult terrain from that point onward. Window: The window in the “office” upstairs is a simple wooden shutter over an empty frame. Moving through it does not cost extra squares (though anyone incapable of flight had better be prepared for a 20-foot fall).
December 20 08
|
D U N G E O N 161
36
The Temple Between
December 20 08
|
D U N G E O N 161
37
The Temple Between
SC2: ENTERING THE PORTAL Encounter Level 9 (2,000 XP)
Setup Once one of the PCs touches the filigree, the skill challenge begins. Entering the Portal Skill Challenge
Level 9 XP 2,000
The image suddenly bends as the face of Moradin turns toward you and speaks in a voice of rending metal. “Who would step through the portal to the heart of Moradin’s worship must first prove he understands Moradin in his own heart. “Think you carefully on Moradin’s precepts, his teachings, his actions, and his favored disciples. Then speak unto me a parable, a tale of Moradin, not that you have learned from his texts, but that you have created yourself. Let it show your understanding of his words and his ways, and you may pass.” The PCs must convince the mystical portal that they have a sufficient understanding of Moradin’s teachings by constructing a parable that accurately portrays the god’s behavior and precepts, yet all is not lost if the PCs fail. They can still attempt to physically break through the filigree to reach the door. Doing so activates the room’s magical defenses: a number of homunculi. Proceed to tactical encounter C10. Once the PCs have successfully completed that encounter, they can cut through the filigree as though it were a standard wooden door (it’s metal, but it’s thin). Complexity 5 (12 successes before 3 failures) Primary Skills Athletics, Bluff, Diplomacy, History, Religion. Victory The portal judges the PCs worthy and opens, allowing them access to the Mountainroot Temple.
Partial Victory The PCs are partially worthy, and this deactivates part of the malfunctioning magical wards. Their partial success means they have to fight fewer of the guardians in tactical encounter C10. 3 or fewer successes: The PCs are considered to have failed the challenge completely, as described below. 4 or 5 successes: The PCs face four writhing chains. 6 or 7 successes: The PCs face three writhing chains. 8 or 9 successes: The PCs face two writhing chains. 10 or 11 successes: The PCs fight only one writhing chain. Defeat The PCs must face all five writhing chain homunculi in the tactical encounter if they attempt to force their way through. Special If the players go through the effort of coming up with a Moradin-based parable, grant them 2 automatic successes. If the party contains a divine character who worships Moradin, they gain 1 success automatically, and that character gains a +2 bonus to all Religion checks in this challenge. Athletics (DC 20) This does not count as a success in itself, but grants a +2 bonus to the next check attempted in this challenge. Any given character can attempt this use of Athletics only once. The PC portrays (or fakes) a knowledge of forging techniques and other endeavors of which Moradin approves. Bluff (DC 20) This does not grant any successes, but it can be used to remove 1 failure. Bluff can be used in this fashion only once during this challenge. The PC swiftly steps into the conversation, covering for an error made by one of his or her companions. Diplomacy (DC 16) Only one success can be achieved in this fashion. A failure on this check bestows a –2 penalty to further checks in this challenge until the next success, in addition to counting as a failure. The PC attempts to convince the portal that the party is worthy, without offering any solid knowledge of Moradin’s teachings.
History (DC 20) Each success on this check counts as a success toward the skill challenge. Although there are no limits on the number of successes that can be obtained with History, History cannot account for all successes; the party must rely on at least one other skill to achieve complete success. Using the PC’s knowledge of past champions, priests, and followers of Moradin, the PC contributes to the construction of the parable. Religion (DC 20) Each success on this check counts as a success toward the skill challenge. A success against DC 25 counts as a success and removes 1 failure; this extra level of success can occur only once in this challenge. The PC draws on religious knowledge and an understanding of Moradin’s precepts and teachings to aid in the construction of the parable.
December 20 08
|
D U N G E O N 161
38
The Temple Between
C10: THE PORTAL IN THE SEPULCHER Encounter Level 9 (2,500 XP*)
Setup 5 or fewer writhing chains (W) If the PCs fail the skill challenge to enter the Mountainroot Temple, they can attempt to force their way past the filigree imagery. Doing so activates the temple’s defenses, which causes several constructs to attack. If the PCs successfully defeat the homunculi, however, nothing prevents them from destroying the barrier between them and the door. Remove one or more writhing chains based on the number of successes, as described in the challenge. The first chain to be removed is the southwestern one, then the northwestern, than the southern, then the northeastern. When the chains appear, read: From the iron image, thin strings of metal—liquid, as though melting—shoot forth. They strike not at you, but at several of the hanging chandeliers, forming a canopy of metallic strands overhead. From those chandeliers, great lengths of chain drop to the f loor and then rear up like striking serpents
If the PCs attack the iron strands running overhead, the strings break but instantly reform. Hacking at them provides no benefit.
Features of the Area Illumination: The room is brightly lit by everburning flames in the chandeliers. The chandeliers hang 10 feet down from the ceiling (and thus, 10 feet above the upper level and 20 above the lower). Ceiling: The ceiling is 30 feet overhead from the lowest level. Slopes: The slopes count as difficult terrain for creatures moving up, but not down. A creature pushed or slid down a slope moves an extra square, and a character who falls prone on the slope slides 1 square toward the bottom. Stairs: The stairs are considered difficult terrain. Statues: These statues are of the god Moradin, with a pair of ravens—representing the Queen of Death—perched on his shoulders. Writhing Chains Guarded Area: The guarded areas of the homunculi are marked on the map.
5* Writhing Chains (W)
Level 10 Skirmisher
Medium natural animate (construct, homunculus) XP 500 each Initiative +10 Senses Perception +7; darkvision HP 131; Bloodied 65 AC 23; Fortitude 23, Reflex 23, Will 21 Immune disease, poison Speed 7; see also serpentine strike m Slam (standard; at-will) +13 vs. AC; 2d6 + 5 damage. M Winding Strike (standard; recharge ⚄ ⚅) +13 vs. AC; 2d6 + 5 damage, and target slides 2 squares and is grabbed and restrained. Guarded Area When making attacks against a creature in its guarded area, the writhing chain gains a +2 bonus to hit, and can stretch itself, granting itself reach 3 on all melee attacks. Threatening Reach (within guarded area only) This creature can make opportunity attacks against all enemies within its reach (3 squares). Serpentine Strike (move; at-will) The chain shifts 3 squares. Alignment Unaligned Languages — Skills Stealth +13 Str 19 (+9) Dex 17 (+8) Wis 15 (+7) Con 21 (+10) Int 18 (+9) Cha 12 (+6) *Exact number of writhing chains could be fewer than five. Adjust encounter XP as necessary.
Tactics The writhing chains might attempt to yank a PC off a ledge, but they otherwise fight in a straightforward fashion. They are smart enough to focus on one or two PCs, with one chain restraining the foe while the others pound on him.
December 20 08
|
D U N G E O N 161
39
The Temple Between
M1: THE CHAMBER OF DOORS Encounter Level 9 (1,800 XP)
Setup 2 harpy screechers (H) 2 slystone dwarf ruffians (S) The great vestibule of the Mountainroot Temple once held mystic portals to four separate temples of Moradin, as well as a single nonmagical entry: a stair that leads up into the Stonehome Mountains. Now, one of those magical doorways has been destroyed—as has much of the eastern side of the chamber—in various cave-ins. The PCs arrive through the door in the southwest. The contingent of fey dispatched by King Cachlain has left behind a rearguard, assigned to watch for anyone entering the temple. When the PCs enter the chamber by using the portal, read: You feel no magic—no tingling or shimmering. It occurs between steps; one instant, you’re in the sepulcher, and the next you’re . . . not. You are in a great, stone-walled chamber. Numerous doorways—many of which are contained within deep stone arches, almost like artificial caves—provide egress. A platform with multiple stairs stands near the chamber’s center, presumably for a ceremonial purpose long since forgotten. The eastern portion of the room appears to have been largely damaged in an ancient cave-in, marring one of two great reliefs that adorn the far wall.
Perched on one of the archways and atop the undamaged relief, a pair of foul females with ragged hair and the claws and wings of vultures turn piercing eyes in your direction, letting loose with a terrible, predatory cry. Only a few yards from you, what appears to be a scruffy, abnormally short dwarf peers at you between slitted lids. Perception Check DC 22: From the corner of your eye, you spot a second thuggish-looking dwarf skulking quietly in the shadows of the broken wall. 2 Harpy Screechers (H)
Level 9 Controller
Medium fey humanoid XP 400 each Initiative +7 Senses Perception +6 HP 96; Bloodied 48 AC 23; Fortitude 20, Reflex 20, Will 22 Resist 10 thunder Speed 6, fly 8 (clumsy) m Claw (standard; at-will) +14 vs. AC; 1d8 + 3 damage. C Alluring Song (standard; at-will) ✦ Charm Close burst 5; deafened creatures are immune; +15 vs. Will; the target is pulled 3 squares and immobilized (save ends). C Brutal Scream (standard; recharge ⚄ ⚅) ✦ Thunder Close burst 5; +15 vs. Fortitude; 1d6 + 5 thunder damage. Secondary Attack: Area burst 1 within 5; centered on a target hit by brutal scream’s primary attack; targets enemies only; +15 vs. Fortitude; 1d6 + 5 thunder damage and the target slides 3 squares. Alignment Evil Languages Common Skills Stealth +12 Str 16 (+7) Dex 16 (+7) Wis 15 (+6) Con 16 (+7) Int 11 (+4) Cha 20 (+9)
2 Slystone Dwarf Ruffians (S)
Level 10 Soldier
Small fey humanoid XP 500 each Initiative +12 Senses Perception +5; low-light vision HP 104; Bloodied 52 AC 26; Fortitude 23, Reflex 22, Will 21 Speed 6; see also mad dash m Hammer (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon +17 vs. AC; 2d6 + 5 damage, and the target is marked until the end of the slystone ruffian’s next turn. M Mighty Strike (standard; recharge ⚄ ⚅) ✦ Weapon +17 vs. AC; 3d8 + 5 damage, and target is pushed 3 squares. The slystone dwarf ruffian can use this power as a part of a charge. Mad Dash When the slystone dwarf ruffian makes a charge attack, the enemy is knocked prone on a hit, in addition to any other effects of the attack. Alignment Evil Languages Common, Elven Skills Athletics +14 Str 18 (+9) Dex 21 (+10) Wis 11 (+5) Con 16 (+8) Int 11 (+5) Cha 18 (+9) Equipment leather armor, hammer
Tactics The harpies use alluring song to split up the PCs and move them into position where the slystone ruffians can attack—preferably with combat advantage—then shift to brutal scream as soon as a foe is in range. The harpies take to the air only if they must to keep the PCs in effective range, or if a foe draws too near their perch, and they attempt to remain perched on spots too high for melee combatants to easily reach. The slystone ruffians use ranged attacks initially, then charge their foes from multiple sides. The fey know that the broken passage in the east leads back to the room, and one of them might fake a retreat in an attempt to sneak up on the party from behind. If three of the fey are slain and the last is bloodied, the survivor attempts to escape and might surrender if escape proves impossible.
December 20 08
|
D U N G E O N 161
40
The Temple Between
Features of the Area Illumination: The chamber is brightly lit by the fires carved into the two reliefs and the statue, which glow with a magical light. In the broken passage in the east, however, the only light is what the PCs bring with them. Ceiling: The ceiling is 25 feet overhead. Archways: The stone archways surrounding the double doors are 10 feet high and are steady enough for perching, standing, or even combat. They require a mere DC 14 Athletics check to climb.
Reliefs: These reliefs show scenes of dwarf smiths at work on a huge forge, while Moradin looks on from beyond. The eastern relief is broken off halfway across, but the fires still glow. The reliefs stick out far enough from the wall that they can serve the harpies as perches, but a normal humanoid attempting to stand on one must make a DC 17 Acrobatics check every round or topple off. They are, however, easy to climb, with a DC 10 Athletics check. Doors: The southeast door, the southwest door (through which the PCs entered), and the western door are the surviving magical portals.
THE MAGIC DOORS If the PCs open the door through which they entered, they see the sepulcher—but of course they can no longer reach it. If they open one of the other two, decide for yourself what sort of sights they see, based on where else in the campaign world you want the two remaining portals to lead. (You might use these to provide side adventures later on, as a brief diversion from the Scales of War adventure path.) Remember that, until the PCs rescue the Caretaker, none of the external doors—either these magic ones, or the southern door that leads into the Stonehome Mountains—are usable. The PCs can look through them, but passing through them proves impossible. Platform: The platform stands 10 feet off the ground. It has no sides or guardrail. Statue: A statue of Moradin holds two fistfuls of fire that provide some of the chamber’s lighting.
December 20 08
|
D U N G E O N 161
41
The Temple Between
M5: THE VAULT Encounter Level 10 (2,500 XP)
Setup 2 harpy screechers (H) 3 quickling runners (Q) Daggerspring f loor The Mountainroot Temple used the vault to store its valuables—not its religious icons and relics, which were kept in the reliquary (M9), but simple monetary treasures. These included works of art, jewels, the legal forms for grants of land, raw ore, and of course coins. When the PCs enter the vault, read: This uneven room is clearly a repository of a sort. The walls are of heavy stone—heavier, even, than you’ve seen elsewhere in the temple—and several short f lights of stairs lead to vaultlike rooms. These separate chambers boast heavy portcullises, though the gates are currently all raised. A pair of twisted, grotesque little humanoids, with deadgray skin and inhuman features, drop the coins they were examining as you enter. Perception Check DC 25: You spot another pair of harpies, skulking just beyond two of the entries to the vaults! DC 26: You can just barely make out another twisted gray humanoid, lurking in the chamber to the northeast.
2 Harpy Screechers (H)
Level 9 Controller
Medium fey humanoid XP 400 each Initiative +7 Senses Perception +6 HP 96; Bloodied 48 AC 23; Fortitude 20, Reflex 20, Will 22 Resist 10 thunder Speed 6, fly 8 (clumsy) m Claw (standard; at-will) +14 vs. AC; 1d8 + 3 damage. C Alluring Song (standard; at-will) ✦ Charm Close burst 5; deafened creatures are immune; +15 vs. Will; the target is pulled 3 squares and immobilized (save ends). C Brutal Scream (standard; recharge ⚄ ⚅) ✦ Thunder Close burst 5; +15 vs. Fortitude; 1d6 + 5 thunder damage. Secondary Attack: Area burst 1 within 5; centered on a target hit by brutal scream’s primary attack; targets enemies only; +15 vs. Fortitude; 1d6 + 5 thunder damage and the target slides 3 squares. Alignment Evil Languages Common Skills Stealth +12 Str 16 (+7) Dex 16 (+7) Wis 15 (+6) Con 16 (+7) Int 11 (+4) Cha 20 (+9)
3 Quickling Runners (Q)
Level 9 Skirmisher
Small fey humanoid XP 400 each Initiative +13 Senses Perception +7; low-light vision HP 96; Bloodied 48 AC 24 (28 against opportunity attacks); Fortitude 20, Reflex 24, Will 20 Speed 12, climb 6; see also fey shift and quick cuts m Short Sword (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon +14 vs. AC; 1d6 + 7 damage. M Quick Cuts (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon The quickling moves its speed. At any two points during its move, the quickling makes a melee basic attack at a –2 penalty. The quickling cannot use this power while immobilized or slowed. Fey Shift (standard; encounter) The quickling runner shifts 10 squares. Maintain Mobility (minor; recharge ⚃ ⚄ ⚅) An immobilized quickling runner is no longer immobilized. Alignment Evil Languages Elven Skills Acrobatics +21, Bluff +9, Stealth +16 Str 9 (+3) Dex 24 (+11) Wis 17 (+7) Con 16 (+7) Int 14 (+6) Cha 10 (+4) Equipment short sword
Daggerspring Floor Trap
Level 10 Obstacle 500 XP
Several squares of the room (marked on the map) are trapped with spring-loaded blades, which trigger when stepped on. The trigger plates are old and stiff, and do not trigger when stepped on by Small or smaller creatures. While this renders any halfling (or other Small) PCs safe, it also means that the quicklings can run across the squares without harm. Perception ✦ DC 26: The character can discern all adjacent trapped plates. Additional Skill: Thievery ✦ DC 22: The party gains a +2 bonus to Perception checks to notice the trapped plates and Thievery checks to delay or disable the plates. Trigger When a creature enters or begins its turn in a trapped square, the trap attacks that creature. Attack Opportunity Action Melee 1 Target: Creature in a trapped square Attack: +13 vs. Reflex Hit: 2d10+6 damage. On a critical hit, the target is knocked prone and slowed (save ends). Miss: Half damage. Countermeasures ✦ A character who makes a successful Athletics check (DC 6, or DC 11 without a running start) can jump over a single plate. ✦ An adjacent character can disable a trigger plate with a DC 26 Thievery check.
December 20 08
|
D U N G E O N 161
42
The Temple Between
Tactics
Features of the Area
The harpies use alluring song to drag PCs onto trapped squares, while the quicklings take advantage of the fact that they are too small to trigger the trap and seek to trick characters into chasing them onto the plates. (Because the harpies know where these squares are, they never voluntarily land or step onto them.) Otherwise, both use the interconnecting nature of the vault to maneuver, striking and then dashing behind cover, only to strike again from a different angle. The quicklings have no interest in parley, but if all are slain, the surviving harpies might surrender (particularly if only one is left, or if both are bloodied).
Illumination: The fey have scattered several sunrods across the room and in the vaults. This provides lighting for the entire area. The larger, central chamber is brightly lit, while the individual vaults are dimly lit. Ceiling: The ceiling is 20 feet overhead. Daggerspring Squares: The trapped squares are marked on the map. Portcullises: The gates are all currently raised and are corroded in place. A DC 22 Strength check allows a character to yank the bars down, thus closing a portcullis, at which point it requires a DC 20 Strength check to open again. See the sidebar. Secret Door: The secret door to the east requires a DC 22 Perception check to locate. If the PCs entered by this door, however, they need not roll to find it again. Secret Trapdoor: The trapdoor requires a DC 25 Perception check to locate. It opens onto a spiral stair that leads into an underground passage (not mapped). This eventually leads to another spiral stair, which comes up to the secret door in the statue in the northwest corner of the reliquary (M9).
SPECIAL ATTACK A creature adjacent to a portcullis can yank it shut with a DC 22 Strength check. If another creature is directly beneath the gate (that is, in the square with the gate marked on the map), the character pulling down the gate can make a Strength vs. Reflex attack. If the attack succeeds, the gate closes on the creature, knocking it prone and causing ongoing 5 damage and restraining the creature (save ends both). The prone creature cannot stand until it has saved against the restraint. Only Medium or larger creatures can attempt this, since Small or smaller creatures cannot reach the portcullis.
Slope: The slope counts as difficult terrain for creatures moving up, but not down. A creature pushed or slid down the slope moves an extra square, and a character who falls prone on the slope slides 1 square south.
December 20 08
|
D U N G E O N 161
43
The Temple Between
M6: THE GRAND CATHEDRAL Encounter Level 13 (4,300 XP, but see below)
Setup This encounter initially includes the following creatures: 3 banshrae dartswarmers (B) 5 quickling runners (Q) 1 slystone dwarf ruffian (S) Once the second wave of adversaries appears, the encounter also includes the following creatures (not marked on the map, since they aren’t present at the beginning of the encounter):
around the sides, climb to the second level 20 feet above. One of those ramps has partly collapsed along with the walls. Steeps stairs and slopes lead from there to a third level, and a platform not unlike the one in the temple’s entry chamber stands high atop that. Huge chunks of wall and stone stand along the broken edge, forming natural ledges, and a deep crevice runs a jagged path to the southeast. Perception Check DC 20: There’s another of the vile, bestial-looking dwarves hiding in the lee of the stairs. DC 21: Above, you spot several insectoid-featured humanoids perched on various ledges. DC 26: And there are yet more foes—twisted gray humanoids roughly the size of half lings, lurking around various corners and in the shadows. At the start of the third round of combat, read:
1 redspawn firebelcher 2 spitting trolls 4 trolls 1 two-headed troll
A deafening boom rings out over the chamber, echoing through the vastness. Twice, three times, and then you hear a sudden shattering and the sound of wood rebounding off stone.
For years, the grand cathedral of the Mountainroot Temple was the heart of Moradin worship in the region. A truly gargantuan chamber—more an artificial cavern than a “room”—it has suffered the ravages of time. It has been badly damaged by cave-ins over the years, and rubble covers the floor.
If a PC is in a position to see the northernmost door at this time, read:
When the PCs enter, read: Some of you have seen keeps smaller than the vast chamber around you. Roughly oval in shape, save for the crumbling walls to the east, the chamber consists of multiple levels. Stairs in the room’s center, as well as great sweeping ramps
The double doors burst open, and jagged bits of the lock hang loose. Through the open doorway barges an array of horrific figures: several green and mottled trolls, a pair of smaller creatures with similar features and narrowed eyes, and—most terrifying—a broad-shouldered troll with two shrieking heads. Accompanying one of the small trolls is a red-scaled reptile on a heavy chain, and smoke rises from its nostrils and from between its jagged teeth.
3 Banshrae Dartswarmers (B)
Level 11 Artillery
Medium fey humanoid XP 600 each Initiative +11 Senses Perception +7; low-light vision HP 89; Bloodied 44 AC 23; Fortitude 20, Reflex 23, Will 22 Speed 8 m Slam (standard; at-will) +13 vs. AC; 1d8 + 3 damage. R Blowgun Dart (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon Ranged 5/10; +16 vs. AC; 1d10 + 6 damage, and the target is dazed and takes a –2 penalty to attack rolls (save ends both). C Dart Flurry (standard; recharge ⚃ ⚄ ⚅) ✦ Weapon Close blast 5; +16 vs. AC; 1d10 + 6 damage, plus the target is dazed and takes a –2 penalty to attack rolls (save ends both). Alignment Unaligned Languages telepathy 20 Str 16 (+8) Dex 22 (+11) Wis 15 (+7) Con 17 (+8) Int 14 (+7) Cha 20 (+10) Equipment blowgun, darts
5 Quickling Runners (Q)
Level 9 Skirmisher
Small fey humanoid XP 400 each Initiative +13 Senses Perception +7; low-light vision HP 96; Bloodied 48 AC 24 (28 against opportunity attacks); Fortitude 20, Reflex 24, Will 20 Speed 12, climb 6; see also fey shift and quick cuts m Short Sword (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon +14 vs. AC; 1d6 + 7 damage. M Quick Cuts (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon The quickling moves its speed. At any two points during its move, the quickling makes a melee basic attack at a –2 penalty. The quickling cannot use this power while immobilized or slowed. Fey Shift (standard; encounter) The quickling runner shifts 10 squares. Maintain Mobility (minor; recharge ⚃ ⚄ ⚅) An immobilized quickling runner is no longer immobilized. Alignment Evil Languages Elven Skills Acrobatics +21, Bluff +9, Stealth +16 Str 9 (+3) Dex 24 (+11) Wis 17 (+7) Con 16 (+7) Int 14 (+6) Cha 10 (+4) Equipment short sword
December 20 08
|
D U N G E O N 161
44
The Temple Between
Slystone Dwarf Ruffian
Level 10 Soldier
Small fey humanoid XP 500 Initiative +12 Senses Perception +5; low-light vision HP 104; Bloodied 52 AC 26; Fortitude 23, Reflex 22, Will 21 Speed 6; see also mad dash m Hammer (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon +17 vs. AC; 2d6 + 5 damage, and the target is marked until the end of the slystone ruffian’s next turn. M Mighty Strike (standard; recharge ⚄ ⚅) ✦ Weapon +17 vs. AC; 3d8 + 5 damage, and target is pushed 3 squares. The slystone dwarf ruffian can use this power as a part of a charge. Mad Dash When the slystone dwarf ruffian makes a charge attack, the enemy is knocked prone on a hit, in addition to any other effects of the attack. Alignment Evil Languages Common, Elven Skills Athletics +14 Str 18 (+9) Dex 21 (+10) Wis 11 (+5) Con 16 (+8) Int 11 (+5) Cha 18 (+9) Equipment leather armor, hammer
Redspawn Firebelcher
Level 12 Artillery
Large natural beast (reptile) XP 700 Initiative +7 Senses Perception +6; low-light vision Fire Within (Fire) aura 5; allies who enter or start their turns within the aura gain resist 10 fire. HP 97; Bloodied 48 AC 25; Fortitude 25, Reflex 22, Will 21 Resist 20 fire Speed 4 m Bite (standard; at-will) ✦ Fire +16 vs. AC; 1d10 + 4 damage, and ongoing 5 fire damage (save ends).] R Fire Belch (standard; at-will) ✦ Fire Ranged 12; +15 vs. Reflex; 2d6 + 1 damage, and ongoing 5 fire damage (save ends). A Fire Burst (standard; recharge ⚄ ⚅) ✦ Fire Area burst 2 within 10; +15 vs. Reflex 3d6 + 1 damage, and ongoing 5 fire damage (save ends). Miss: Half damage, and no ongoing fire damage. Alignment Unaligned Languages — Str 18 (+10) Dex 13 (+7) Wis 13 (+6) Con 19 (+10) Int 2 (+2) Cha 8 (+5)
2 Spitting Trolls
Level 10 Soldier (Leader)
Medium natural humanoid XP 500 each Initiative +12 Senses Perception +8 HP 106; Bloodied 53; see also troll healing Regeneration 10 (if the troll takes acid or fire damage, regeneration does not function until the end of its next turn) AC 26; Fortitude 22, Reflex 23, Will 22 Speed 6, climb 4 m Claw (standard; at-will) ✦ Poison +17 vs. AC; 1d6 + 5 damage, plus 1d6 poison damage. r Javelin (standard; at-will) ✦ Poison, Weapon Ranged 10/20; +17 vs. AC; 1d6 + 5 damage, plus 1d6 poison damage. R Acid Spit (minor; recharge ⚄ ⚅) ✦ Acid Ranged 5; +15 vs. Reflex; 1d6 acid damage. Regenerative Empowerment (minor 1/turn, at-will) One troll within 10 squares whose regeneration is currently inactive (as a result of taking acid or fire damage) immediately reactivates the regeneration. Troll Healing ✦ Healing If the troll is reduced to 0 hit points by an attack that does not deal acid or fire damage, it rises on its next turn (as a move action) with 10 hit points. Alignment Chaotic evil Languages Common, Giant Skills Athletics +13, Endurance +14 Str 16 (+8) Dex 21 (+10) Wis 17 (+8) Con 18 (+9) Int 10 (+5) Cha 13 (+6) Equipment leather armor, 10 javelins
Two-Headed Troll
Level 10 Elite Brute
Large natural humanoid XP 1,000 Initiative +5 Senses Perception +7 HP 264; Bloodied 132; see also troll healing Regeneration 10 (if the troll takes acid or fire damage, regeneration does not function until the end of its next turn) AC 25; Fortitude 27, Reflex 19, Will 20 Saving Throws +2 Speed 6 Action Points 1 m Claw (standard; at-will) Reach 2; +13 vs. AC; 3d6 + 7 damage. M Smackdown (immediate reaction, when an enemy moves into a position that flanks the two-headed troll; at-will) The two-headed troll targets one creature flanking it; +11 vs. Fortitude; the target is knocked prone. Double Actions A two-headed troll rolls initiative twice, gets two turns during a round, and has a full set of actions (standard, move, minor) on each turn. Each set of actions corresponds to a different head. The troll’s ability to take immediate actions refreshes on each of its turns. Dual Brain At the end of its turn, the two-headed troll automatically succeeds on all saving throws against the dazed and stunned conditions and against charm effects that a save can end. Troll Healing ✦ Healing If the troll is reduced to 0 hit points by an attack that does not deal acid or fire damage, it rises on its next turn (as a move action) with 10 hit points. Alignment Chaotic evil Languages Giant Str 24 (+12) Dex 10 (+5) Wis 14 (+7) Con 22 (+11) Int 6 (+3) Cha 10 (+5) Equipment hide armor
December 20 08
|
D U N G E O N 161
45
The Temple Between
4 Trolls
Level 9 Brute
Large natural humanoid XP 400 each Initiative +7 Senses Perception +11 HP 100; Bloodied 50; see also troll healing Regeneration 10 (if the troll takes acid or fire damage, regeneration does not function until the end of its next turn) AC 20; Fortitude 21, Reflex 18, Will 17 Speed 8 m Claw (standard; at-will) Melee 2; +13 vs. AC; 2d6 + 6 damage; see also frenzied strike. M Frenzied Strike (free, when the troll’s attack bloodies an enemy; at-will) The troll makes a claw attack. Troll Healing ✦ Healing If the troll is reduced to 0 hit points by an attack that does not deal acid or fire damage, it rises on its next turn (as a move action) with 10 hit points. Alignment Chaotic evil Languages Giant Skills Athletics +15, Endurance +14 Str 22 (+10) Dex 16 (+7) Wis 14 (+6) Con 20 (+9) Int 5 (+1) Cha 10 (+4)
Tactics Initially, the fey fight to their strengths. The banshrae stay at range and snipe the PCs, while the quicklings and slystone ruffian maneuver in and out of melee combat. The slystone ruffian is particularly fond of bullrushing enemies off edges or into the ravine. The quicklings and slystone avoid bunching up or staying in one spot for long, preferring to make the PCs keep moving across the room and up and down between levels.
Once the trolls arrive, however, the fey split their attentions between the party and the new foes. Similarly, the trolls and firebelcher treat the fey and the PCs as equal threats. The trolls spread out once they appear through the northernmost door. One spitting troll attempts to stay within 10 squares or so of the two-headed troll, where it can move in and use poison spit if the troll takes acid or fire damage. The other spitting troll—the one accompanying the firebelcher—remains near one of the other, normal trolls. Where possible, that spitting
troll also tries to remain near the firebelcher to take advantage of the creature’s granted fire resistance. The trolls and firebelcher fight to the death, no matter what, but if any fey survive after all the trolls and firebelcher are slain, they attempt to flee rather than continuing the fight against the PCs. If cornered, they surrender.
THREE-WAY FIGHTING Once the battle between all three factions is engaged, it’s vital that the DM play the monsters as focusing on both the PCs and the other monstrous faction. Some DMs might be tempted to have the monsters focus more on the PCs than on each other, while others might be tempted to give the PCs an easy time by having the monsters focus more on each other. Avoid these temptations! This encounter (and its XP reward) is balanced under the assumption that, once all three factions are involved, each group of creatures focuses equally on the party and the other group. That doesn’t mean that any individual monster needs to split its attacks, or that a monster should be stupid and ignore a particular threat. But in any given round, the troll faction should average the same number of attacks against the PCs as it does against the fey, and vice-versa.
Obviously, if one faction is whittled down faster than the others, the larger faction can devote more attacks to the PCs, and that’s fine. But this should happen only if and when one group becomes markedly smaller than the other, and even then, the winning faction’s attentions should be split proportionately between the party and the smaller group of foes. Players might grow impatient if the DM spends too long rolling dice for NPCs attacking NPCs. Feel free to use average results for damage for each creature during this encounter. Do not use these averages when rolling damage against a PC, or when a monster is attempting to save against a PC’s ability. But when monsters are attacking each other, these average values speed up play and allow the DM to more swiftly return to the players.
December 20 08
|
D U N G E O N 161
46
The Temple Between
Features of the Area Illumination: The grand cathedral generates its own magical light. The chamber is brightly lit. Ceiling: The ceiling is 70 feet overhead from the bottom level. Altar: This great stone altar, shaped roughly like a primitive anvil, stands 5 feet in height, atop the platform at the highest level. Stepping up onto the altar requires an extra square of movement, and the altar provides cover. Broken Stone Platforms: Along the eastern side of the room, enormous chunks of stone—broken parts of the wall, bits of the ceiling, and the like—lie scattered about. Many are f lat enough that combatants can maneuver on top of them. They require a DC 21 Athletics check to climb, and vary in height as marked. Crevice: The jagged crevice is roughly 20 feet deep, and—thanks to various doors and passages that were caved in long ago—provides the only means of accessing areas M7 and M8. It requires a DC 21 Athletics check to climb. Doors: The doors to the reliquary at M9 were locked, until the trolls broke through them. Now they cannot be locked. Edges: The edge of the second level overhangs level one slightly; see the map of M10. Gap: This wide break in the eastern ramp has a ragged edge, and it ranges from 15 to 20 feet across. Rubble: The rubble scattered across the floor is difficult terrain.
Slope, Shallow: The two curved ramps that provide access from the first to the second level are shallow and do not qualify as difficult terrain. A creature pushed or slid down the slope moves an extra square. Slope, Steep: The northern slopes require a DC 11 Athletics check to climb. A creature that steps (or is moved) onto the slope from the top immediately slides to the bottom of the slope and, unless it makes a DC 10 Acrobatics check, falls prone. Stairs, Steep: The stairs that provide access from the second level to the third level are particularly steep. They are difficult terrain. A creature pushed or slid down the stairs moves an extra square, and a character who falls prone on the stairs also slides 1 square south. Statue: The statue in the southwest is another statue of Moradin; this one holds an enormous hammer in both hands.
December 20 08
|
D U N G E O N 161
47
The Temple Between
M7/M8: THE SHATTERED BARRACKS AND THE LESSER SANCTUM
walls and sharp corners suggest that the cave-in reshaped what was once a part of the temple. A faint glimmer of light, almost invisible, shines from the east.
Encounter Level 14 (5,100 XP)
Perception Check DC 20: Barely visible, outlined against that faint light, are a pair of those short, gruff-looking dwarves.
Perception Check DC 20: A handful of gnome-sized fey skulk in the shadows and around the various pillars. DC 21: You spy an old dwarf crone, ancient beyond belief, atop the dais, almost blending in to the relief beyond. DC 22: Not far from her, another of the insectoid fey crouches upon the steps of the dais, its unblinking eyes gazing in your direction.
If the players enter M7 by using the door from M8, read:
If the players enter M8 through the door from M7, read:
You are in a small chamber that has clearly seen better days. Whatever furniture was once here has long since either been removed or crumbled to dust, and the walls are webbed with cracks.
The fleeing fey have led you into a much larger chamber. You are in a cathedral or religious sanctuary, far smaller than the main one behind you, and the hall boasts a dais at the far end, behind which looms a great relief of Moradin at his forge. A line of columns runs down both sides of the room; two of the great pillars have fallen, apparently toppled in the same cataclysm that created the crevice. Retreating off the dais as you approach are another of the inhuman, insectoid fey and what appears to be an ancient dwarf crone, at least several centuries old. From beyond them, a cadre of one-eyed giants, axes held high, converges on you!
Setup 1 banshrae dartswarmer (B) 4 cyclops guards (C) Hethralga, unique howling hag (H) 4 slystone ruffians (S) Cave-in hazard Here, in these broken and precarious chambers where the priests of the Mountainroot Temple once made their homes, and in the smaller sanctuary where they conducted services and rites too small or private for the grand cathedral, the leaders of the fey have made their camp. Hethralga, personal servant of King Cachlain, lurks here with her bodyguards and most trusted servants. She has already acquired the Incunabulum; now she seeks a way to return to the Feywild and grows ever more nervous with each passing hour that her followers fail to find a means of escape. If the players enter M7 by using the crevice, read: Hauling yourself up onto the ledge, you are in an uneven cave—clearly a result of one of the ancient cave-ins and not of any deliberate building. To the right, rubble litters the floor, making footing precarious. Once the players move in far enough to see the eastern portion of M7, continue: As you progress, it becomes apparent that some construction took place here at one point. Several broken
Once the players move down the western passage, or through the northern door, continue: More wreckage and ruin. Clearly, old cave-ins have reduced what was once a series of carved chambers to broken rooms, twisted passages, and the occasional freestanding wall. Thick heaps of rubble stand here and there on the f loor. If the players enter M8 by using the crevice, read: Climbing up from the crevice, you have a brief instant to look around. You are in a cathedral or religious sanctuary, far smaller than the main one behind you, and the hall boasts a dais at the far end, behind which looms a great relief of Moradin at his forge. A line of columns runs down both sides of the room; two of the great pillars have fallen, apparently toppled in the same cataclysm that created the crevice. And then your brief moment of observation has passed, as a cadre of one-eyed giants, axes held high, converges on you!
Perception Check DC 20: A handful of gnome-sized fey skulk in the shadows and around the various pillars. When a cyclops makes a cave-in attack, read: The enormous figure slams a palm into the nearby pillar. The entire column of stone shudders—followed by a much louder rumble as a portion of the roof jars loose from above and tumbles downward! When the cave-in hazard is triggered, read: A low groan reverberates through the sanctum, sending dust raining down from above. And then the rain is far more than dust, as bits of rock begin to shake loose.
December 20 08
|
D U N G E O N 161
48
The Temple Between
Banshrae Dartswarmer (B)
Level 11 Artillery
Hethralga, Unique Howling Hag Level 12 Controller
Medium fey humanoid XP 600 Initiative +11 Senses Perception +7; low-light vision HP 89; Bloodied 44 AC 23; Fortitude 20, Reflex 23, Will 22 Speed 8 m Slam (standard; at-will) +13 vs. AC; 1d8 + 3 damage. R Blowgun Dart (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon Ranged 5/10; +16 vs. AC; 1d10 + 6 damage, and the target is dazed and takes a –2 penalty to attack rolls (save ends both). C Dart Flurry (standard; recharge ⚃ ⚄ ⚅) ✦ Weapon Close blast 5; +16 vs. AC; 1d10 + 6 damage, plus the target is dazed and takes a –2 penalty to attack rolls (save ends both). Alignment Unaligned Languages telepathy 20 Str 16 (+8) Dex 22 (+11) Wis 15 (+7) Con 17 (+8) Int 14 (+7) Cha 20 (+10) Equipment blowgun, darts
Medium fey humanoid XP 700 Initiative +11 Senses Perception +10; low-light vision HP 126; Bloodied 63; see also shriek of pain AC 26; Fortitude 25, Reflex 24, Will 23 Speed 6; see also fey step m Quarterstaff (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon +15 vs. AC; 1d10 + 5 damage. C Howl (standard; at-will) ✦ Thunder Close blast 3; +16 vs. Fortitude; 1d6 + 6 thunder damage, and the target is pushed 3 squares. C Shriek of Pain (standard; recharges when first bloodied) ✦ Thunder Close blast 5; +16 vs. Fortitude; 3d6 + 6 thunder damage, or 3d6 + 11 thunder damage if the howling hag is bloodied. Miss: Half damage. Change Shape (minor; at-will) ✦ Polymorph A howling hag can alter its physical form to appear as an old crone of any Medium humanoid race (see Change Shape, Monster Manual page 280). Fey Step (move; encounter) ✦ Teleportation The howling hag can teleport 10 squares. Alignment Evil Languages Common, Elven Skills Bluff +15, Insight +15, Nature +15 Str 21 (+11) Dex 21 (+11) Wis 18 (+10) Con 22 (+12) Int 13 (+7) Cha 19 (+10) Equipment quarterstaff
4 Slystone Dwarf Ruffians (S)
Level 10 Soldier
Small fey humanoid XP 500 each Initiative +12 Senses Perception +5; low-light vision HP 104; Bloodied 52 AC 26; Fortitude 23, Reflex 22, Will 21 Speed 6; see also mad dash m Hammer (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon +17 vs. AC; 2d6 + 5 damage, and the target is marked until the end of the slystone ruffian’s next turn. M Mighty Strike (standard; recharge ⚄ ⚅) ✦ Weapon +17 vs. AC; 3d8 + 5 damage, and target is pushed 3 squares. The slystone dwarf ruffian can use this power as a part of a charge. Mad Dash When the slystone dwarf ruffian makes a charge attack, the enemy is knocked prone on a hit, in addition to any other effects of the attack. Alignment Evil Languages Common, Elven Skills Athletics +14 Str 18 (+9) Dex 21 (+10) Wis 11 (+5) Con 16 (+8) Int 11 (+5) Cha 18 (+9) Equipment leather armor, hammer
4 Cyclops Guards (C)
Level 14 Minion
Large fey humanoid XP 250 each Initiative +8 Senses Perception +13; truesight 6 HP 1; a missed attack never damages a minion. AC 27; Fortitude 26, Reflex 23, Will 23 Speed 6 m Battleaxe (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon Melee 2; +17 vs. AC; 7 damage. M Evil Eye (immediate reaction, when a melee attack misses the cyclops guard; at-will) The cyclops guard makes a melee basic attack against the attacker. Alignment Unaligned Languages Elven Str 22 (+11) Dex 16 (+8) Wis 17 (+8) Con 20 (+10) Int 11 (+5) Cha 11 (+5) Equipment hide armor, heavy shield, battleaxe
Cave-In Hazard
Level 13 Lurker 800 XP
A disruption sets off a chain reaction that doesn’t end until all the room is covered in rubble. Perception ✦ DC 31: The character notices that the area is unstable. Additional Skill: Dungeoneering ✦ DC 26: Same as Perception, above. Initiative +6 Trigger Two rounds after the first time a cyclops makes a cave-in attack, or 4 rounds after combat has begun (whichever comes first), the cave-in hazard is triggered. Between the trigger and the cave-in’s attack, characters in the area know that a cave-in is beginning. On its turn, the cave-in attacks a random area within the encounter area (M8). Attack Standard Action Close burst 1 Targets: Creatures in burst Attack: +16 vs. Reflex Hit: 2d12 + 8 damage Miss: Half damage Effect: The burst area becomes difficult terrain. Sustain Standard: The cave-in attacks each round, targeting a different square. Countermeasures ✦ A character who makes a DC 31 Dungeoneering check as a minor action can determine the square the trap will attack on its next turn.
Tactics The cyclopses immediately attempt to converge on the PCs, making use of their ability to trigger cave-ins any time a PC is appropriately positioned. They’re also fond of bullrushing PCs back into the crevice as they climb out, and might even ready actions to do so. The hag and the banshrae stay at maximum range for their various powers; if the PCs attempt to close, the pair conducts a fighting retreat, moving either through the door to M7 or into the crevice, depending on which way the PCs are coming from. At least one of the slystones accompanies them when they do this,
December 20 08
|
D U N G E O N 161
49
The Temple Between
potentially leading to a combat that makes multiple circuits of M7 and M8. The hag resumes her normal form after several rounds of combat. If the PCs approach M8 by M7, rather than by the crevice, the slystone ruffians retreat so they can fight alongside their allies. Otherwise, they enter M8 in the second round of combat, having heard the commotion. Once the random cave-in begins, Hethralga and the banshrae retreat to M7. The slystones and the cyclopses retreat as well, but more slowly, attempting to maintain melee as they do so (and, hopefully, keeping the PCs in the sanctum, and in range of the cave-in, longer).
Features of the Area Illumination: Area M8 is brightly lit by a magical glow emanating from the relief and the standing pillars. The light leaks through the door to M7, providing dim light for the easternmost room and passage. The rest of M7 is illuminated only by whatever light the PCs bring with them. Ceiling: The ceiling of M7 is 15 feet overhead, while that of M8 is 30 feet overhead. Crevice: The jagged crevice at the southwest is roughly 20 feet deep, and—thanks to various doors and passages that were caved in long ago—provides the only means of accessing area M6 from here. It requires a DC 21 Athletics check to climb its ledges.
Dais: The steps of the dais are shallow enough that they do not impede movement. The Incunabulum Primeval: In addition to any other treasure she might have, Hehtralga has the Incunabulum on her person. Pillar, Fallen: The fallen pillar provides cover. A creature can climb over or onto it; this requires an extra square of movement, and requires a DC 17 Acrobatics check if the creature wishes to move more than 1 square atop it. Pillar, Leaning: The southwesternmost pillar in M8 leans precariously against the wall. It can be used as a makeshift weapon, as described above. Rubble: The rubble is difficult terrain.
SPECIAL ATTACK A Large or larger creature can deliberately cause rocks to fall from the ceiling by striking high up on one of the chamber’s standing pillars. This requires a standard action, and the attacker can decide what square the attack is centered on, as long as it is within 4 squares of the pillar. This is a close burst 1, Strength vs. Reflex attack that deals 2d12 + 8 damage (half damage on miss) and causes the area to become difficult terrain. The leaning pillar (see below) can also be used as a makeshift attack. If pushed from the west with a DC 19 Strength check (being jammed against the wall, it won’t move if shoved from any other direction), it falls to the ground and rolls to the position marked on the map. It makes a +16 vs. Reflex attack against anyone standing in its path; if it hits, it deals 2d8 damage, pushes the target as far as it needs to for the target to be out of the way, and knocks the target prone. Once it lands, it is another fallen pillar, as defined below.
December 20 08
|
D U N G E O N 161
50
The Temple Between
M9: THE RELIQUARY Encounter Level 12 (3,700 XP)
Setup 2 dragonborn gladiators (G) 1 eidolon (E) 1 spitting troll (P) 6 streetwise thugs (S) 2 trolls (T) The first portion of the Mountainroot Temple ever carved from the Stonehome range, the reliquary served as the home for the sect’s greatest religious treasures for years on end, though most were removed when the temple was largely abandoned. Its peculiar design was intended to allow priests and worshipers to come and gaze upon these great relics, without allowing anyone to approach. It was also here that angels and exarchs of Moradin appeared from the Astral Sea, entering by using the great double doors to the north. (Remember that, until the PCs rescue the Caretaker, exit from the temple—even by these astral doors—is impossible.) Zithiruun and his soldiers arrived here from the Astral Sea as well, and here they have set up camp. They are holding the Caretaker hostage in the small building labeled I, where they have spent days torturing him. Although the Caretaker hasn’t broken, he has slowly gone slightly mad, resulting in the peculiar behavior of some of the temple’s magical defenses. This, alas, includes the temple’s guardian eidolon, which has come to accept the githyanki soldiers and treats them as allies in combat.
Although they do not face him here, or even identify him for what he is, this is the PCs’ first opportunity to spot their true enemy, General Zithiruun. He is the cloaked figure (described below) they see atop the platform. As soon as he steps out of sight, he heads at full speed for the secret door in the northwest. Given his ability to fly, he can reach that hidden exit and be through it in 2 rounds—possibly before the PCs even reach the platform. Creatures indicated on the map in red are on the top platform or stairs. Creatures in yellow are on the ground floor, although possibly visible through the platform. When the PCs enter, read: You are in a wide corridor. Ahead of you, two f lights of stairs, separated by a long landing, lead to a platform high above. Two figures stand atop that platform, apparently conversing. One is a rust-hued dragonborn clad in heavy armor. The other is a slender figure, its features hidden by a hooded cloak. He is clad in a sort of leather-and-steel harness. It looks less like armor than like the creation of a maddened surgeon—a full-bodysuit version of a brace designed to hold a broken limb in place. You see them only for a split second, for before the door has even fully opened, both have stepped away from the edge and out of sight. When the PCs reach the center platform, read: Four stone stairs come together here, forming a small platform about 20 feet above a larger, circular surface. That surface appears to be made of glass or crystal, allowing a full view of the various chambers below. Some of those chambers extend out from beneath the crystal—openroofed so that you can still see in. The stairs to the north rise upward, rather than down, culminating in a large
set of double doors several dozen feet above your current level, and a pair of massive statues of Moradin stand in the northwest and northeast corners. To the southwest stand a pair of small buildings—the only structures in the entire cavern that appear to have a roof. An array of humanoid creatures stands scattered about the chamber, both on the platform or stairs, and down on the ground level. Not a one of them looks especially thrilled to see you.
WHAT IF THEY COME FROM THE VAULT? If the PCs make their way to the reliquary from the hidden trapdoor in the vault (M5), rather than from the grand cathedral, the situation is only moderately different. You can give the PCs the same basic description (though obviously from a ground perspective, rather than above the platform). They still catch only a quick glimpse of Zithiruun, before he disappears—down to the south, rather than toward the secret door through which the PCs have emerged.
If the PCs open the double-doors in the north (marked A), read: For an eternal instant, the world fades away as you stand upon the precipice of infinity. An ocean of pearlescent silver stretches ever onward, its tides and crests all but invisible as they slowly traverse the great expanse. Beneath those waters, stars and constellations twinkle with almost blinding clarity, and far in the distance, the great peaks of an unknown isle protrude from the endless waters. The sense of vertigo here, at the edge of the world, is almost overwhelming, striking not merely at the body but at the mind and soul.
December 20 08
|
D U N G E O N 161
51
The Temple Between
When the PCs first enter area B (or examine it from above), read: Pedestals and podiums scattered across the room, as well as hooks and shelves along the walls, suggest that this was once a display chamber or gallery. Though most are empty, a few hooks still boast old tapestries and paintings, while the occasional podium displays a small sculpture. It looks as though the vast majority of the artwork has been gone for ages.
Perception Check DC 20: One of the piles of books has recently been disturbed. It looks much like something was removed from the bottom, allowing the rest of the heap to crumple inward. (Although the PCs cannot know this for sure, they might guess that this is where the Incunabulum Primeval was taken from—and they’d be right.) When the PCs first enter area F (or examine it from above), read:
When the PCs first enter area C (or examine it from above), read:
The specially carved racks and concave shelves suggest that this was once a repository for scrolls of various sizes.
Alcoves along the walls and great stone sarcophagi across the chamber indicate rather dramatically that this was once a sepulcher, likely for particularly holy members of the Church. Most of the sarcophagi have been broken into, ransacked, and desecrated. The air here smells a bit stale and dusty, but any scent of decay faded centuries ago.
When the PCs first enter area G (or examine it from above), read:
When the PCs first enter area D (or examine it from above), read: Apparently a sitting or study room, this chamber contains little but old, decaying chairs and a few small tables barely wide enough for a large tome. When the PCs first enter area E (or examine it from above), read: This room was obviously a library at some point. The shelves are mostly empty now, but they are large enough to have held several hundred books. A few heaps of molding parchment and leather are all that remain of those books that were dropped and left behind when the temple was abandoned.
This rather sizable room boasts a smattering of large statues, idols, and carven pillars. Their random placement around the chamber indicates that they’ve been moved, and the great empty spaces suggest that this room once held many more such relics than it currently does. When the PCs first enter area H, read: This building and its attachment, the only two structures in this cavern to have roofs, are clearly of far more recent construction than most everything else herein. The walls are of thin stone and do not match the surroundings, and the floor is covered haphazardly with a thin rug. Several tables and chairs sit scattered about, and a cooking cauldron occupies one corner. When the PCs first enter area I, read: What was once a bedroom has been transformed into a chamber of horrors. Old blood has matted the carpet into a thin film that crunches beneath your feet. Dull blades and needles protrude from the surface of a desk, where they
were apparently stuck for safekeeping. A wooden bed frame leans against the wall at an angle; chained to it, dangling by his chafed and bloody wrists, is what appears to be a dwarf with hair and beard of writhing flame! Despite its touch, the wood of the frame shows no evidence of burning. Once the PCs begin interacting with the Caretaker—assuming combat is over—consult “Departing the Temple” in the “Mountainroot Temple Overview.” 2 Dragonborn Gladiators (G)
Level 10 Soldier
Medium natural humanoid XP 500 each Initiative +9 Senses Perception +6 HP 106; Bloodied 53; see also dragonborn fury AC 24; Fortitude 23, Reflex 20, Will 21 Speed 5 m Bastard Sword (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon +15 vs. AC (+16 while bloodied); see also lone fighter; 1d10 + 5 damage. M Finishing Blow (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon Target must be bloodied; +15 vs. AC (+16 while bloodied); 2d10 + 5 damage, and the dragonborn gladiator’s allies gain a +2 bonus to attack rolls until the end of the dragonborn gladiator’s next turn. C Dragon Breath (minor; encounter) ✦ Fire Close blast 3; +12 vs. Reflex (+13 while bloodied); 1d6 + 4 fire damage. Dragonborn Fury (only while bloodied) A dragonborn gains a +1 racial bonus to attack rolls. Gladiator’s Strike When the dragonborn gladiator hits an enemy with an opportunity attack, the target is knocked prone. Lone Fighter The dragonborn gladiator gains a +2 bonus to melee attack rolls when adjacent to only one enemy. Alignment Unaligned Languages Common, Draconic Skills Athletics +15, History +7, Intimidate +15 Str 12 (+10) Dex 15 (+7) Wis 12 (+6) Con 18 (+9) Int 10 (+5) Cha 16 (+8) Equipment scale armor, bastard sword
December 20 08
|
D U N G E O N 161
52
The Temple Between
Eidolon (E)
Level 13 Controller (Leader)
Large natural animate (construct) XP 800 Initiative +8 Senses Perception +9 Fearless Followers aura 5; allies who enter or start their turns within the aura are immune to fear. HP 132; Bloodied 66 AC 28; Fortitude 26, Reflex 22, Will 23 Immune disease, fear, sleep Speed 5 m Slam (standard; at-will) Melee 2; +19 vs. AC; 2d8+6 damage. R Divine Retribution (immediate reaction, when an enemy attacks the eidolon while hallowed stance is active; at-will) ✦ Radiant Divine radiance strikes the creature that attacked the eidolon: ranged 20; +17 vs. Reflex; 2d8 + 5 radiant damage. Miss: Half damage. This attack does not provoke opportunity attacks. R Vengeful Flames (immediate reaction, when an enemy kills one of the eidolon’s allies in the eidolon’s line of sight; at-will) ✦ Fire Divine fire engulfs the enemy: ranged 20; +17 vs. Reflex; 1d8 + 5 fire damage, and ongoing 5 fire (save ends). This attack does not provoke opportunity attacks. Hallowed Stance (standard; at-will) ✦ Radiant The eidolon assumes a meditative stance. Until the end of its next turn, the eidolon gains resist 20 to all damage, and all allies in its line of sight deal 1d8 extra radiant damage on their melee attacks. If the eidolon moves, the effect ends. Alignment Unaligned Languages — Str 22 (+12) Dex 14 (+8) Wis 16 (+9) Con 20 (+11) Int 7 (+4) Cha 11 (+6)
Tactics The monsters’ tactics depend largely on the PCs. If the heroes allow themselves to become trapped up on the platform, the monsters converge and try to surround them. Otherwise, they use a combination of focusing on specific PCs and fighting withdrawals to try to force the party to split up. In either case, the monsters do not remain in their starting positions, but converge on their foes as rapidly as possible. The
Spitting Troll
Level 10 Soldier (Leader)
Medium natural humanoid XP 500 each Initiative +12 Senses Perception +8 HP 106; Bloodied 53; see also troll healing Regeneration 10 (if the troll takes acid or fire damage, regeneration does not function until the end of its next turn) AC 26; Fortitude 22, Reflex 23, Will 22 Speed 6, climb 4 m Claw (standard; at-will) ✦ Poison +17 vs. AC; 1d6 + 5 damage, plus 1d6 poison damage. r Javelin (standard; at-will) ✦ Poison, Weapon Ranged 10/20; +17 vs. AC; 1d6 + 5 damage, plus 1d6 poison damage. R Acid Spit (minor; recharge ⚄ ⚅) ✦ Acid Ranged 5; +15 vs. Reflex; 1d6 acid damage. Regenerative Empowerment (minor 1/turn, at-will) One troll within 10 squares whose regeneration is currently inactive (as a result of taking acid or fire damage) immediately reactivates the regeneration. Troll Healing ✦ Healing If the troll is reduced to 0 hit points by an attack that does not deal acid or fire damage, it rises on its next turn (as a move action) with 10 hit points. Alignment Chaotic evil Languages Common, Giant Skills Athletics +13, Endurance +14 Str 16 (+8) Dex 21 (+10) Wis 17 (+8) Con 18 (+9) Int 10 (+5) Cha 13 (+6) Equipment leather armor, 10 javelins
larger and stronger creatures are fond of bullrushing foes off the edge of the stairs or the crystal platform. The eidolon never retreats to ground level, since it can keep line of sight to more allies from on high. If all the creatures but the eidolon are slain, it freezes, awaiting further instructions from the Caretaker. All other creatures here fight to the death.
6 Streetwise Thugs (S)
Level 9 Minion
Medium natural humanoid, human XP 100 each Initiative +3 Senses Perception +3 HP 1; a missed attack never damages a minion. AC 21; Fortitude 19, Reflex 16, Will 16 Speed 6 m Longsword (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon +14 vs. AC; 6 damage. r Crossbow (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon Ranged 15/30; +13 vs. AC; 6 damage. Murder is a Team Sport If a streetwise thug is flanking an enemy, it deals 1 extra point of damage per ally adjacent to the flanked enemy (including the ally who is granting the flank), to a maximum of +4. Alignment Evil Languages Common Skills Athletics +11, Thievery +8 Str 16 (+7) Dex 12 (+5) Wis 10 (+4) Con 15 (+6) Int 9 (+3) Cha 11 (+4) Equipment leather armor, crossbow, longsword, case with 20 bolts
2 Trolls (T)
Level 9 Brute
Large natural humanoid XP 400 each Initiative +7 Senses Perception +11 HP 100; Bloodied 50; see also troll healing Regeneration 10 (if the troll takes acid or fire damage, regeneration does not function until the end of its next turn) AC 20; Fortitude 21, Reflex 18, Will 17 Speed 8 m Claw (standard; at-will) Melee 2; +13 vs. AC; 2d6 + 6 damage; see also frenzied strike. M Frenzied Strike (free, when the troll’s attack bloodied an enemy; at-will) The troll makes a claw attack. Troll Healing ✦ Healing If the troll is reduced to 0 hit points by an attack that does not deal acid or fire damage, it rises on its next turn (as a move action) with 10 hit points. Alignment Chaotic evil Languages Giant Skills Athletics +15, Endurance +14 Str 22 (+10) Dex 16 (+7) Wis 14 (+6) Con 20 (+9) Int 5 (+1) Cha 10 (+4)
December 20 08
|
D U N G E O N 161
53
The Temple Between
Features of the Area Illumination: The crystalline platform provides its own glow, as does the door to the Astral Sea, and it brightly illuminates the entire chamber. Ceiling: The ceiling of the chamber is a full 100 feet above the ground floor. The crystal platform— which forms a ceiling or partial ceiling for the rooms on the ground—is 20 feet above that level. The ceiling of buildings H and I is 10 feet above the ground. Crystal Platform: Although hard as stone, the crystal platform is as transparent as fine glass. This allows line of sight, but not line of effect. There is no railway or wall around the platform. Doors: The doors into areas H and I are locked, requiring a DC 22 Thievery check to open. The doors to the Astral Sea (marked A) are covered in all manner of abstract carvings and flowing runes. Furniture, Display Cases, and Shelves: The various chambers are filled with furniture—some intact, some broken. Assume that, at any time it matters, a piece of furniture requires an extra square of movement to stand on and can provide cover. Secret Doors: The secret doors in the statues require a DC 25 Perception check to locate. The door in the northwest statue opens onto a spiral stair that leads into an underground passage (not mapped). This eventually leads to another spiral stair, which comes up to the secret trapdoor in the vault (M5). The secret door in the northeast statue leads to a spiral stair that leads to a dead end passage (not mapped). This used to connect to the barracks at M7, but most of the corridor, and the specific room to which it connected, have long since collapsed.
Walls: The walls of the chamber, and the walls of the southern passage/ staircase, rise from floor to ceiling. The walls of the various chambers that stand partly or entirely beneath the crystalline platform rise 20 feet high. The portions of those rooms that jut beyond the crystal are not roofed; a creature can walk along the top of the walls, but they’re narrow, requiring a DC 25 Acrobatics check for each standard or move action taken.
December 20 08
|
D U N G E O N 161
54
The Temple Between
M10: THE UNDERCHAMBERS Encounter Level 8 (1,800 XP)
Setup 2 marching hammers (H) Radiant tendrils trap In the chambers formerly used by priests of Moradin for elements of daily life, the temple’s mystical defenses are as crazed as ever, thanks to the Caretaker’s incipient madness. When the PCs trigger the radiant tendrils, read: A whiplike tendril of piercing white light, so bright it threatens to blind the eye, reaches through the f loor, as though the room seeks to wrap you in its coils. When the PCs first see the marching hammers, either because they have come to the constructs or vice-versa, read: A halfling-sized block of iron lumbers into view. It appears to be little more than an anvillike body with squat legs and a pair of heavy hammers at the end of long, writhing arms. When the PCs first enter area A, read: This chamber was apparently a foyer or waiting room. A ragged rug covers the f loor, with a few old indentations indicating where chairs used to sit. The northeast door is ajar, showing a cloakroom with empty pegs protruding from the walls.
When the PCs first enter area B, read:
When the PCs first enter area F, read:
A great many doors line the walls in this chamber. A few are ajar, showing what appear to be wooden-walled monastic cells beyond them.
Whatever purpose this cave-in damaged chamber might once have served, it now appears as little more than an empty hollow.
When the PCs first enter area C, read: Nothing remains in this room but a few smatterings of broken furniture. Any hint of its original purpose was lost when the eastern wall partially collapsed long ago. When the PCs first enter area D, read: Despite the damage, this room still obviously serves as a combination meeting hall and library. A long table sits amid a smattering of chairs, and the chamber’s western side is occupied by a more heavily upholstered chair, a bookcase, and a small altar to Moradin. All are covered in a fine coating of dust. When the PCs first enter area E, read: You’ve stepped into what appears to be an actual forge, which was perhaps used for ceremonial purposes or the creation of magic items. Two anvils occupy the room’s northern side, while a fire pit filled with ancient white-gray ashes takes up the center of the chamber. Against the south wall, a larger anvil stands beneath the unblinking gaze of a statue of Moradin.
Radiant Tendrils Trap
Level 13 Obstacle 800 XP
Gleaming tendrils of white light whip out to lash at you. Perception ✦ DC 27: The character notices something strange about the area ahead, as though the floor was somehow absorbing a bit of the ambient light. Additional Skill: Arcana ✦ DC 23: The character recognizes a faint glow from, and a sequence of runes scratched into, the fire pit, and realizes this is the trap’s source. (The character must be in the forge [room E] to accomplish this.) ✦ DC 31: The party gains a +2 bonus to Thievery checks to disable the trap. Trigger When a creature enters or begins its turn in a trapped square, the trap attacks. Attack Opportunity Action Melee Target: Creature in a trapped square Attack: +18 vs. AC Hit: 2d10 + 6 radiant damage and blind until the end of the target’s next turn. Aftereffect: –2 to attack rolls and checks until the end of the target’s next turn. Countermeasures ✦ A character who makes a successful DC 27 Acrobatics check can move through a trigger square without provoking the attack. The squares count as difficult terrain. ✦ An adjacent character can disable a trigger plate with a DC 31 Thievery check.
December 20 08
|
D U N G E O N 161
55
The Temple Between
2 Marching Hammers (H)
Level 10 Brute
Small natural animate (construct, homunculus) XP 500 each Initiative +4 Senses Perception +12; darkvision HP 129; Bloodied 64 AC 23; Fortitude 23, Reflex 17, Will 19 Immune disease, poison, sleep Speed 6 m Hammer Hand (standard; at-will) +13 vs. AC; 3d6 + 5 damage. M Hammering Charge (standard; at-will) The marching hammer can use this power as a part of a charge; +13 vs. AC; 3d6 + 5 damage, plus target is knocked prone. Beat Them When They’re Down The marching hammer deals 1d6 extra damage when attacking a prone enemy. Guard Area (see Monster Manual, page 156) A marching hammer can make a hammering charge attack against any creature in its guarded area, even if the power hasn’t recharged. If the marching hammer uses a charge attack to make its hammering charge, its speed increases to 8 when making that charge. Alignment Unaligned Languages — Skills Perception +12 Str 21 (+10) Dex 8 (+4) Wis 14 (+7) Con 19 (+9) Int 5 (+2) Cha 13 (+6)
Tactics The marching hammers attack characters in their guarded area over other targets, but otherwise seek to slay all intruders. They try to approach intruders from opposite directions, making use of various doorways and corridors to flank foes. They fight in or near the trapped squares, since the trap is mystically attuned to them and they do not trigger it. The hammers have no compunctions about going through the wooden walls between penitent’s cells if that’s the best means of getting at an enemy.
Features of the Area Illumination: The only illumination is what the PCs bring with them. Ceiling: The ceiling is 15 feet overhead. Anvils: The three anvils in the forge are all but impossible to move. They provide cover, and a creature can step up onto one with an extra square of movement. Bookcase: The bookcase in room D has no more books left on it, but it can be climbed with a DC 10 Athletics check. Chairs: The chairs are not sufficient to provide cover, but a character can step up onto one with an extra square of movement, or use one as a makeshift weapon. Fire Pit: The fire pit has no fire in it, but it is the source of the radiant tendrils trap. Marching Hammer Guarded Areas: The guarded areas of the homunculi are marked on the map. Radiant Tendrils: The trapped squares are marked on the map. Statue: This statue of Moradin carries a hammer and tongs, as though in the midst of forging. Table: A character can step up onto the table with an extra square of movement. A DC 25 Strength check topples the table over, allowing it to serve as cover and knocking prone any creatures standing on it.
Wooden Walls: The walls between the penitent’s cells are flimsy wood. They can be broken through with a DC 15 Strength check; this takes an extra square of movement. If the creature beats a DC 20 Strength check, this does not require an extra square.
December 20 08
|
D U N G E O N 161
56
The Temple Between
SC3: COUNCIL OF WAR Encounter Level 9 (1,200 XP)
Setup Once the PCs reach the council chamber, begin the skill challenge. Council of War Skill Challenge
Level 9 XP 1,200
You find yourselves, along with the present members of the council, High Priest Durkik, and several officers, standing in a perfectly square room of stone walls. A table in the center of the room boasts an intricate model of Overlook, while each of the walls showcases maps of the surrounding area. Great Elder Morgoff asks Durkik to offer a prayer to Moradin to open the meeting. Once done, he says, “Overlook is a martial city. We have mighty walls, strong soldiers. But we are accustomed to fighting foes such as orcs, not monstrous enemies such as trolls, who rise again each time they fall. My friends, you have more experience with such things. Will you help us plan? And would you make yourselves available to us throughout the siege, to deal with such dangers as our guards— skilled though they are—are unprepared to face? I offer you what reward I can for your help, though I cannot cite you numbers or amounts until I see what resources remain when— if—Overlook survives the coming days.” The PCs must aid the Council of Elders and the officers of the garrison in devising a defense for the city. Complexity 3 (requires 8 successes before 3 failures). Primary Skills History, Insight, Intimidate, Religion, Thievery. Victory The PCs have helped come up with a viable defensive plan, and they gain victory points accordingly.
Defeat The PCs cannot meaningfully contribute, and do not gain victory points. Special If the players themselves come up with any creative uses of the city map or terrain for defensive purposes, grant them 1 or 2 automatic successes. History (DC 20) A successful check counts as a success on the skill challenge. The PC draws on knowledge of past sieges over the course of history and suggests strategies accordingly. Insight (DC 16) This doesn’t qualify as a success, but succeeding on this check grants the party a +2 bonus to all further checks in this challenge until someone fails a check. However, failure on this check imposes a –2 penalty to all further checks in this challenge until someone succeeds on a check. In either case, Insight can be used only once in this fashion. With thought and contemplation, the PC anticipates some of the actions that the enemy is likely to take. Intimidate (DC 20) A successful check counts as a success on the skill challenge, but the group can gain up to 3 successes with this skill only. By giving careful consideration to what sorts of positions and defenses are likely to be the most frightening or disheartening, the PC suggests effective placements for the soldiers. Religion (DC 20) A successful check counts as a success on the skill challenge. Rather than focusing on historical accounts, the PC instead draws on knowledge of various battles described in the myths and tales of the world’s religions. Thievery (DC 20) A successful check counts as a success on the skill challenge, but the group can gain up to 3 successes with this skill only. The PC’s knowledge of tricks and traps allows the PC to suggest various means to slow the enemy’s advance, either through stealthily placed troops or hidden traps and obstacles.
Once the skill challenge is complete (for good or ill), Great Elder Morgoff ’s shoulders slump. “I fear we’ve done all we can for now,” he says. “We must go and spread word to our soldiers of what is to come, and what they must do. My friends,” he says to the PCs, “if you are willing, I would have you stay here at Caer Overlook tonight, so that you are ready on a moment’s notice. I can have people show you to guest quarters. I suggest we all get a good night’s sleep; I fear the next days will be tiring indeed.”
December 20 08
|
D U N G E O N 161
57
The Temple Between
T2: DEATH FROM ABOVE Encounter Level 10 (2,500 XP)
Setup 1 berbalang (B), initially with two duplicates (D) Among the various forces Zithiruun has hired for the assault on Overlook is a trio of berbalangs, who have been promised not only substantial riches, but first pick of the captives and of the dead for their larders. Thankfully, the PCs themselves only have to deal with one. As the battle commences, the berbalang swoops over a poor neighborhood in the Nine Bells district, dropping alchemical firebombs. It’s not a tactically important target, but it’s great for spreading panic, and the plethora of old buildings and wooden structures mean the flames will spread. The berbalang is already split into three different forms (the original and two duplicates), meaning the original currently has 204 hit points and the two duplicates each have 102.
Berbalang
Level 10 Solo Skirmisher
Medium immortal humanoid XP 2,500 Initiative +13 Senses Perception +6 HP 408; Bloodied 204 AC 25; Fortitude 22, Reflex 25, Will 21; see also psychic deflection Saving Throws +5 Speed 6, fly 8 Action Points 2 m Claw (standard; at-will) +14 vs. AC; 1d8 + 6 damage. Summon Duplicate (minor, not while bloodied; at-will) ✦ Conjuration, Psychic The berbalang manifests an exact duplicate of itself in an unoccupied adjacent square. It can have no more than four duplicates at once, and duplicates cannot summon other duplicates. When a duplicate appears, it makes an initiative check and joins the battle on that initiative count. All damage a duplicate deals is treated as psychic damage. A duplicate has the same statistics as the berbalang except for its hit points. When the berbalang manifests a duplicate, the berbalang loses one-quarter of its current hit points and the duplicate appears with that quantity of hit points. The berbalang’s maximum number of hit points remains the same.
When the PCs approach, read: Flames dance across a cluster of rooftops, and the crackling from the fire drowns out the screams of panic as citizens scramble in all directions. In the smoky air above, a trio of horrid winged humanoids, with mottled blue skin, whirl about on the inferno-birthed updrafts. Every few moments, one of them hurls a clay jug that bursts into f lames as it strikes a nearby building.
Duplicates last until the berbalang reaches 0 hit points, absorbs them, or uses sacrifice. A duplicate must stay within 10 squares of the berbalang at all times or it disappears. Absorb Duplicate (standard; at-will) ✦ Healing The berbalang absorbs a duplicate adjacent to it and regains 50 hit points. Berbalang Sneak Attack A berbalang or a duplicate that flanks an enemy with another duplicate deals 1d8 extra damage on melee attacks against that enemy. A Sacrifice (standard; at-will) ✦ Psychic Area burst 1 centered on a duplicate; the berbalang can cause one of its duplicates to explode in a burst of psychic gore; +11 vs. Fortitude; 2d8 + 6 psychic damage, plus the target is dazed (save ends). Miss: No damage, but the target is dazed (save ends). Effect: The berbalang takes 25 damage. Psychic Deflection (immediate reaction, when the berbalang is damaged by an attack; at-will) ✦ Psychic The berbalang can deflect the damage it takes from an attack to one of its duplicates. Any effects or secondary attacks included in the attack are also deflected to the duplicate. The damage a duplicate takes in this way is considered psychic damage. Alignment Evil Languages Supernal Str 16 (+8) Dex 22 (+11) Wis 13 (+6) Con 14 (+7) Int 14 (+7) Cha 15 (+7)
Tactics The true berbalang stays at range for the first few rounds, allowing its duplicates to close for melee. If any PCs are far enough from its duplicates that it won’t hit them, it makes use of its special “firebomb” attack (see below). When a duplicate nears death (down to about one-quarter of its starting hit points), the berbalang moves in and absorbs it. It might then engage in combat, or spawn a new duplicate and retreat to range, depending on how effective the PCs are with distance attacks. Once the berbalang is down to fewer than 50 hit points, it won’t spawn any more duplicates, for fear of—so to speak—spreading itself too thin.
December 20 08
|
D U N G E O N 161
58
The Temple Between
Features of the Area SPECIAL ATTACK The berbalang has three more firebombs in its possession. It makes an attack roll when it throws the firebomb, but it misses only on a natural 1, because it’s not aiming for an individual, merely a particular square. (On a natural 1, select a random square adjacent to the one at which it was aiming.) The firebomb explodes in a burst 1. It causes no immediate damage, but it fills those squares with fire as defined in “Features of the Area.”
Illumination: The combination of daylight and fire provide as much bright light as the PCs could ever want. Boards: These boards were placed to facilitate evacuation from one building to another. They can be kicked or pushed off with a DC 5 Athletics check, or a DC 20 Athletics check if someone is currently standing on them. Buildings: The buildings range from one to four stories (2 to 8 squares) in height. Climbing the walls requires a DC 15 Athletics check.
Fire: The marked squares are on fire when combat begins. Creatures can enter or move through the squares unharmed—essentially running through the flames—but any creature that begins its turn in a fiery square takes 2d6 fire damage. At the start of the berbalang’s turn each round, one square adjacent to each fiery square becomes a fiery square. (Either choose or determine randomly.)
December 20 08
|
D U N G E O N 161
59
The Temple Between
T3: HOLD THE WALL! Encounter Level 12 (3,500 XP)
Setup 1 spitting troll (P) 1 two-headed troll (T) 2 war trolls (W) A squad of monstrous trolls, using a battering ram made of a bronze-capped tree trunk, has smashed a hole in one of the outer walls. The soldiers there have been driven back, and if someone doesn’t stop them, the trolls will have free run of the city. “Someone” being the PCs, of course. (Assume a few other trolls are present, but that the Overlook soldiers are dealing with them. On occasion, throw in a bit of description to remind the PCs that they aren’t the only ones fighting.) When the PCs arrive, read: Rubble lies strewn about—rubble that used to be a 15-foot stretch of wall. Visible just beyond is a huge tree trunk, capped with bronze—presumably, the battering ram that created that hole. Moving through the gap are several hideous trolls. The city guards appear to have a few occupied, but others—two in heavy armor, one with two heads, and one far smaller than the others—are moving unimpeded into the streets.
Spitting Troll (P)
Level 10 Soldier (Leader)
Medium natural humanoid XP 500 Initiative +12 Senses Perception +8 HP 106; Bloodied 53; see also troll healing Regeneration 10 (if the troll takes acid or fire damage, regeneration does not function until the end of its next turn) AC 26; Fortitude 22, Reflex 23, Will 22 Speed 6, climb 4 m Claw (standard; at-will) ✦ Poison +17 vs. AC; 1d6 + 5 damage, plus 1d6 poison damage. r Javelin (standard; at-will) ✦ Poison, Weapon Ranged 10/20; +17 vs. AC; 1d6 + 5 damage, plus 1d6 poison damage. R Acid Spit (minor; recharge ⚄ ⚅) ✦ Acid Ranged 5; +15 vs. Reflex; 1d6 acid damage. Regenerative Empowerment (minor 1/turn, at-will) One troll within 10 squares whose regeneration is currently inactive (as a result of taking acid or fire damage) immediately reactivates the regeneration. Troll Healing ✦ Healing If the troll is reduced to 0 hit points by an attack that does not deal acid or fire damage, it rises on its next turn (as a move action) with 10 hit points. Alignment Chaotic evil Languages Common, Giant Skills Athletics +13, Endurance +14 Str 16 (+8) Dex 21 (+10) Wis 17 (+8) Con 18 (+9) Int 10 (+5) Cha 13 (+6) Equipment leather armor, 10 javelins
Tactics The two-headed troll is a straightforward combatant, charging in and attempting to pulp the PCs into the ground. The war trolls make use of slightly more intelligent tactics, flanking or trying to fight from behind difficult terrain, taking full advantage of reach. The spitting troll remains at range and throws javelins.
Two-Headed Troll
Level 10 Elite Brute
Large natural humanoid XP 1,000 Initiative +5 Senses Perception +7 HP 264; Bloodied 132; see also troll healing Regeneration 10 (if the troll takes acid or fire damage, regeneration does not function until the end of its next turn) AC 25; Fortitude 27, Reflex 19, Will 20 Saving Throws +2 Speed 6 Action Points 1 m Claw (standard; at-will) Melee 2; +13 vs. AC; 3d6 + 7 damage. M Smackdown (immediate reaction, when an enemy moves into a position that flanks the two-headed troll; at-will) The two-headed troll targets one creature flanking it; +11 vs. Fortitude; the target is knocked prone. Double Actions A two-headed troll rolls initiative twice, gets two turns during a round, and has a full set of actions (standard, move, minor) on each turn. Each set of actions corresponds to a different head. The troll’s ability to take immediate actions refreshes on each of its turns. Dual Brain At the end of its turn, the two-headed troll automatically succeeds on all saving throws against the dazed and stunned conditions and against charm effects that a save can end. Troll Healing ✦ Healing If the troll is reduced to 0 hit points by an attack that does not deal acid or fire damage, it rises on its next turn (as a move action) with 10 hit points. Alignment Chaotic evil Languages Giant Str 24 (+12) Dex 10 (+5) Wis 14 (+7) Con 22 (+11) Int 6 (+3) Cha 10 (+5) Equipment hide armor
December 20 08
|
D U N G E O N 161
60
The Temple Between
2 War Trolls (W)
Level 14 Soldier
Large natural humanoid XP 1,000 each Initiative +12 Senses Perception +15 HP 110; Bloodied 55; see also troll healing Regeneration 10 (if the troll takes acid or fire damage, regeneration does not function until the end of its next turn) AC 30; Fortitude 29, Reflex 25, Will 25 Speed 7 m Greatsword (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon Melee 2; +20 vs. AC; 1d12 + 7 damage, and the target is marked until the end of the war troll’s next turn. m Claw (standard; at-will) Melee 2; +20 vs. AC; 2d6 + 7 damage. r Longbow (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon Ranged 20/40; +20 vs. AC; 1d12 + 3 damage. C Sweeping Strike (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon Requires greatsword; close blast 2; +20 vs. AC; 1d12 + 7 damage, and the target is knocked prone. Blood Pursuit (immediate reaction, when a bloodied enemy within 2 squares of the war troll moves or shifts; at-will) The war troll shifts 1 square closer to the enemy. Threatening Reach The war troll can make opportunity attacks against all enemies within its reach (2 squares). Troll Healing ✦ Healing If the war troll is reduced to 0 hit points by an attack that does not deal acid or fire damage, it rises on its next turn (as a move action) with 15 hit points. Alignment Chaotic evil Languages Giant Skills Athletics +17, Endurance +15 Str 24 (+14) Dex 16 (+10) Wis 16 (+10) Con 20 (+12) Int 10 (+7) Cha 12 (+8) Equipment plate armor, greatsword, longbow, quiver of 30 arrows
Features of the Area Illumination: This encounter takes place in bright daylight. Buildings: The buildings range from two to eight stories (4 to 16 squares) in height. Climbing the walls requires a DC 15 Athletics check. Rubble: The rubble qualifies as difficult terrain.
December 20 08
|
D U N G E O N 161
61
The Temple Between
SC4: COMBING THE WRECKAGE Encounter Level 11 (1,800 XP)
Setup One of the councilors is in trouble, and the PCs receive a request for assistance. The skill challenge begins with this request. Combing the Wreckage Skill Challenge
Level 11 XP 1,800
Without warning, you hear Great Elder Morgoff ’s voice in your head. “Our diviners have located Councilor Mountainhome. A siege missile struck her home, which now burns as she lies unconscious! Please save her!” Although the PCs likely don’t know where Elder Mountainhome lives, anyone they ask can point them in the right direction: an expensive apartment in Stonehammer. The PCs must search through a burning, crumbling building in search of Counselor Itrika Mountainhome. Complexity 3 (requires 8 successes before 3 failures). Primary Skills Acrobatics, Athletics, Endurance, Heal, Perception. Victory The party finds the unconscious Itrika and successfully pulls her out before she chokes to death or is crushed. Defeat The party is too late to save the councilor, who dies in the inferno. Special Reward creative use of magic. Perhaps various resistance-based spells can grant automatic Endurance successes, while using cold-based spells on the fires reduces the DCs of some of the checks.
Acrobatics (DC 21) A successful check counts as a success on the skill challenge. Moving as swiftly and lithely as possible, the PC dodges around falling timbers and pockets of flame. Athletics (DC 21) A successful check counts as a success on the skill challenge. With a surge of strength, the PC bursts through intervening doors, reaches up to deflect crumbling roofs, or hauls a companion off a collapsing stair. Endurance (DC 17) At least one character must attempt this check every round, or it counts as attempting and failing the check. A success on this check grants no benefit; a failure on this check costs everyone in the party a healing surge, but does not count as a failure for purposes of the skill challenge. Despite the blazing heat, the choking smoke, and the blinding dust, the PC is not only able to keep going, but to keep friends moving as well. Heal (DC 25) A success on this check counts as both a success on the skill challenge and grants an automatic success on the party’s next Endurance check in this challenge (or counters an Endurance failure rolled earlier in the round). Acting swiftly, the PC uses moistened cloths and herbal remedies to alleviate some of the burns and choking among the party. Perception (DC 21) This does not count as a success on the skill challenge, but grants you a +2 bonus to all future Acrobatics, Athletics, and Heal checks in this challenge, until the next failure. Squinting and concentrating, the PC finds his or her way, and leads allies through the smoke, the embers, and the falling rubble.
If the PCs succeed in rescuing the councilor, they receive thanks and an offer to meet up again after the current troubles are over. If she isn’t brought to consciousness by the PCs, you could allow them to find someone who is willing to do so and possibly even help get her to safety.
December 20 08
|
D U N G E O N 161
62
The Temple Between
T5: THE FINAL ENCOUNTER Encounter Level 15 (6,100 XP)
Setup General Zithiruun (Z) Rathoraiax (R) 2 dragonborn gladiators (G) 1 dragonborn raider (D) 1 redspawn firebelcher (B) This is it. The party is about to come face to face with General Zithiruun and learn the identity of their enemy. This is the final battle of the siege and of the adventure, at least where the PCs are concerned. And if they’re not very careful and skilled, it might be their last one ever. When the PCs arrive, read: Scattered around the open courtyard, and across the stoops of the nearby buildings, are the corpses of dozens of Overlook’s soldiers. Some are badly burned, some slashed to ribbons, and some rotting as though they’d lain dead for weeks on end. Two dragonborn in heavy armor wait across the courtyard; one stands beside a large, red-scaled reptile exhaling large puffs of smoke.
Perception Check DC 26: Hiding amid the rubble and ruin is another dragonborn, one of darker scales and armor, wielding a pair of broad-bladed daggers. On the second round of combat, on Zithiruun’s initiative, read: A horrific boom reverberates from a nearby building as a massive beast soars over the rooftop, knocking several of the stones from their place. What appears to be a dead dragon, its scales dull, its gray leather skin showing between the gaps, rises into the air on broken wings. The entire top of its jaw is missing, showing upward pointing teeth and a wormlike tongue that thrashes about with a mind of its own. And riding atop that beast is a humanoid figure clad in heavy hides, contained within a body harness of iron joints and leather straps. His limbs and face are gaunt, nearly desiccated. Several old wounds hang open, leaking trails of blood and puss, showing bare bone in some spots and metal plates in others. But despite his old injuries and deformities, his narrow features and his yellowed, leathery skin clearly mark him as one of the dread githyanki, raiders and conquerors of the Astral Sea.
Zithiruun, the Broken General (Z) Skirmisher (Leader)
Level 14 Elite
Medium natural humanoid XP 2,000 Initiative +15 Senses Perception +9 HP 280; Bloodied 140 AC 30; Fortitude 26; Reflex 29; Will 28 Resist 10 psychic Saving Throws +2 (+4 against charm effects) Speed 6 Action Points 1 m Silver Saber (standard; at-will) ✦ Psychic, Weapon +19 vs. AC; 1d8 + 6 damage plus 1d8 psychic damage. r Thrown Saber (standard; at-will) ✦ Psychic, Weapon Ranged 5/10 if thrown; +19 vs. AC; 1d8 + 6 damage plus 1d8 psychic damage. Special: If thrown, the weapon returns to Zithiruun’s hand immediately after the attack is resolved. M Silver Barrage (standard; at-will) ✦ Psychic, Weapon Zithiruun makes two silver saber attacks. M Silver Flurry (standard; recharge ⚄ ⚅) ✦ Psychic, Weapon Zithiruun makes up to 2 attacks, each against a different target; he can shift 2 squares before the first attack, between each attack, and after the final attack; +19 vs. AC; 2d8 + 6 damage plus 2d8 psychic damage. Psionic Aim (immediate reaction when an ally within 5 squares misses with an attack; encounter) The ally can reroll the attack, keeping the second result. Mind Over Body Due to the psionic energy of the harness and armor he wears, Zithiruun uses Charisma in place of Wisdom for determining hit points and Fortitude defense. (He still uses Constitution for other purposes such as Endurance checks.) Mind Shock ✦ Charm Whenever Zithiruun damages a target with his silver saber, thrown saber, silver flurry, or silver barrage attacks, the target cannot make opportunity attacks until the end of Zithiruun’s next turn. Telekinetic Leap (move; at-will) Zithiruun can fly 5 squares. Alignment Evil Languages Common, Deep Speech, Draconic Skills History +16, Insight +14 Str 6 (+5) Dex 23 (+13) Wis 15 (+9) Con 6 (+5)* Int 19 (+11) Cha 20 (+12) *See mind over body Equipment: Hide armor and body harness, two silver sabers
December 20 08
|
D U N G E O N 161
63
The Temple Between
Dragonborn Raider (D)
Level 13 Skirmisher
Medium natural humanoid XP 800 Initiative +13 Senses Perception +13 HP 129; Bloodied 64; see also dragonborn fury AC 27; Fortitude 23, Reflex 24, Will 21 Speed 7 m Katar (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon +19 vs. AC (+20 while bloodied); 1d6 + 4 damage (crit 2d6 + 10). M Twin Katar Strike (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon If the dragonborn raider doesn’t take a move action on its turn, it shifts 1 square and makes two katar attacks, or vice versa. C Dragon Breath (minor; encounter) ✦ Fire Close blast 3; +14 vs. Reflex (+15 while bloodied); 1d6 + 3 fire damage. Combat Advantage The dragonborn raider deals 1d6 extra damage on melee and ranged attacks against any target it has combat advantage against. Dragonborn Fury (only while bloodied) A dragonborn gains a +1 racial bonus to attack rolls. Infiltrating Stride (move; recharges after the dragonborn raider attacks two different enemies with twin katar strike) The dragonborn raider shifts 3 squares. Alignment Unaligned Languages Common, Draconic Skills History +8, Intimidate +9, Stealth +16 Str 18 (+10) Dex 21 (+11) Wis 14 (+8) Con 17 (+9) Int 10 (+6) Cha 12 (+7) Equipment leather armor, 2 katars
Tactics The dragonborn gladiators close as rapidly as possible, while the dragonborn raider attempts to sneak or shift around the battle, working to obtain combat advantage. The redspawn firebelcher is trained to avoid its allies; it remains at range and snipes at the PCs. When they appear on round two, Zithiruun is mounted on Rathoraiax, but they immediately separate, preferring to fight as two entities. The undead dragon is a clumsy flier, so once it lands and engages in battle, it normally remains on the ground.
Zithiruun uses silver barrage to cut through the party, and then makes use of whatever powers are most appropriate for the circumstances. He keeps in constant motion and tries to avoid getting in melee with defenders (since loss of mobility is crippling for him), preferring to let his allies deal with them while he takes down controllers and leaders. He is willing to retreat from the battle, but only to regroup and come back at the PCs again. (Although Zithiruun normally doesn’t fight to the death, the success of this operation is his only means of regaining his position among the githyanki; he’ll die trying to make it work.)
Rathoraiax (R)
Level 13 Elite Brute
Large natural animate (dragon, undead) XP 1,600 Initiative +5 Senses Perception +9; darkvision HP 328; Bloodied 164 AC 27; Fortitude 29; Reflex 22; Will 24 Immune disease, poison; Resist 15 necrotic; Vulnerable 15 radiant Saving Throws +2 Speed 4, fly 8 (clumsy) Action Points 1 m Claw (standard; at-will) Reach 2; +16 vs. AC; 2d10 + 6 damage, and the target is knocked prone if it is Large size or smaller. M Tail Crush (minor; at-will) Reach 2; prone targets only; +14 vs. Fortitude; 3d8 + 6 damage. M Savage Fury (standard; recharge ⚃ ⚄ ⚅) Rathoraiax makes two claw attacks. C Breath of the Grave (standard; encounter) ✦ Necrotic, Poison Close blast 5; +14 vs. Fortitude; 4d10 + 6 poison and necrotic damage, plus the target takes ongoing 10 poison and necrotic damage and is weakened (save ends both). Alignment Unaligned Languages — Str 22 (+12) Dex 9 (+5) Wis 16 (+9) Con 24 (+13) Int 1 (+1) Cha 3 (+2)
SPECIAL ATTACK When Rathoraiax first appears—and if it takes to the air again later in combat—it might attempt to knock loose stones off the tops of buildings onto PCs below. It can only target characters who are within 2 squares of a building, and it must be adjacent to the top of that building, on the same side as the target. This is an area burst 1, +14 vs. the target’s Reflex. The target takes 2d10 + 6 damage and is knocked prone. (On a miss, the target takes half damage and is not knocked prone.) The area becomes difficult terrain.
2 Dragonborn Gladiators (G)
Level 10 Soldier
Medium natural humanoid XP 500 each Initiative +9 Senses Perception +6 HP 106; Bloodied 53; see also dragonborn fury AC 24; Fortitude 23, Reflex 20, Will 21 Speed 5 m Bastard Sword (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon +15 vs. AC (+16 while bloodied); see also lone fighter; 1d10 + 5 damage. M Finishing Blow (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon Target must be bloodied; +15 vs. AC (+16 while bloodied); 2d10 + 5 damage, and the dragonborn gladiator’s allies gain a +2 bonus to attack rolls until the end of the dragonborn gladiator’s next turn. C Dragon Breath (minor; encounter) ✦ Fire Close blast 3; +12 vs. Reflex (+13 while bloodied); 1d6 + 4 fire damage. Dragonborn Fury (only while bloodied) A dragonborn gains a +1 racial bonus to attack rolls. Gladiator’s Strike When the dragonborn gladiator hits an enemy with an opportunity attack, the target is knocked prone. Lone Fighter The dragonborn gladiator gains a +2 bonus to melee attack rolls when adjacent to only one enemy. Alignment Unaligned Languages Common, Draconic Skills Athletics +15, History +7, Intimidate +15 Str 21 (+10) Dex 15 (+7) Wis 12 (+6) Con 18 (+9) Int 10 (+5) Cha 16 (+8) Equipment scale armor, bastard sword December 20 08
|
D U N G E O N 161
64
The Temple Between
Redspawn Firebelcher
Level 12 Artillery
Large natural beast (reptile) XP 700 Initiative +7 Senses Perception +6; low-light vision Fire Within (Fire) aura 5; allies who enter or start their turns within the aura gain resist 10 fire. HP 97; Bloodied 48 AC 25; Fortitude 25, Reflex 22, Will 21 Resist 20 fire Speed 4 m Bite (standard; at-will) ✦ Fire +16 vs. AC; 1d10 + 4 damage, and ongoing 5 fire damage (save ends). R Fire Belch (standard; at-will) ✦ Fire Ranged 12; +15 vs. Reflex; 2d6 + 1 damage, and ongoing 5 fire damage (save ends). A Fire Burst (standard; recharge ⚄ ⚅) ✦ Fire Area burst 2 within 10; +15 vs. Reflex 3d6 + 1 damage, and ongoing 5 fire damage (save ends). Miss: Half damage, and no ongoing fire damage. Alignment Unaligned Languages — Str 18 (+10) Dex 13 (+7) Wis 13 (+6) Con 19 (+10) Int 2 (+2) Cha 8 (+5)
Features of the Area Illumination: This encounter takes place in early morning and is thus brightly lit. Bodies: The corpses qualify as difficult terrain. Buildings: The buildings range from two to eight stories (4 to 16 squares) in height. Climbing the walls requires a DC 15 Athletics check. Rubble: The rubble is difficult terrain. Trees: The trees provide cover and can be climbed with a DC 15 Athletics check. Most are only between 10 and 20 feet (2 to 4 squares) high.
December 20 08
|
D U N G E O N 161
65
The Temple Between
APPENDIX I: NEW MONSTERS
Harpy HARPIES USE THEIR SWEET SONGS to pacify victims before tearing them to pieces with their claws. For more on harpies in general, see the Monster Manual, page 154. Harpy screechers are closely related to the typical harpy, but they are a lot more potent—and hold a fearsome power in reserve. Harpy Screecher
Level 9 Controller
Medium fey humanoid XP 400 Initiative +7 Senses Perception +6 HP 96; Bloodied 48 AC 23; Fortitude 20, Reflex 20, Will 22 Resist 10 thunder Speed 6, fly 8 (clumsy) m Claw (standard; at-will) +14 vs. AC; 1d8 + 3 damage. C Alluring Song (standard; at-will) ✦ Charm Close burst 5; deafened creatures are immune; +15 vs. Will; the target is pulled 3 squares and immobilized (save ends). C Brutal Scream (standard; recharge ⚄ ⚅) ✦ Thunder Close burst 5; +15 vs. Fortitude; 1d6 + 5 thunder damage. Secondary Attack: Area burst 1 within 5; centered on a target hit by brutal scream’s primary attack; targets enemies only; +15 vs. Fortitude; 1d6 + 5 thunder damage and the target slides 3 squares. Alignment Evil Languages Common Skills Stealth +12 Str 16 (+7) Dex 16 (+7) Wis 15 (+6) Con 16 (+7) Int 11 (+4) Cha 20 (+9)
Harpy Screecher Tactics
Marching Hammer
Like other harpies, screechers use alluring song to lure victims in close, and they prefer to fight from the ground rather than in the air. A harpy screecher uses brutal scream if foes clump together, not merely to cause great harm but to force them to disperse, hopefully leaving one or more in a vulnerable position.
Small natural animate (construct, homunculus) XP 500 Initiative +4 Senses Perception +12; darkvision HP 129; Bloodied 64 AC 23; Fortitude 23, Reflex 17, Will 19 Immune disease, poison, sleep Speed 6 m Hammer Hand (standard; at-will) +13 vs. AC; 3d6 + 5 damage. M Hammering Charge (standard; at-will) The marching hammer can use this power as a part of a charge; +13 vs. AC; 3d6 + 5 damage, plus target is knocked prone. Beat Them When They’re Down The marching hammer deals 1d6 extra damage when attacking a prone enemy. Guard Area (see Monster Manual, page 156) A marching hammer can make a hammering charge attack against any creature in its guarded area, even if the power hasn’t recharged. If the marching hammer uses a charge attack to make its hammering charge, its speed increases to 8 when making that charge. Alignment Unaligned Languages — Skills Perception +12 Str 21 (+10) Dex 8 (+4) Wis 14 (+7) Con 19 (+9) Int 5 (+2) Cha 13 (+6)
Harpy Lore In addition to the information given in the Monster Manual, a character knows the following information with a successful Arcana check. DC 20: Screechers are tougher relatives of normal harpies. Their attacks appear to infuse the target with the harpy’s own deadly scream, forcing them to unleash it upon their allies.
Homunculus HOMUNCULI ARE MINOR CONSTRUCTS created to guard specific places, objects, or beings. They require no food or sleep, and they can maintain their watch indefinitely. The following types of homunculi, both dwarfcreated, follow the same rules as other homunculi (Monster Manual, page 156). Marching hammers are small bodies of iron—shaped vaguely like anvils—with squat legs and a pair of long, writhing arms that end in heavy, double-headed warhammers. Writhing chains are little more than their name implies— long, heavy chains that writhe, move, and strike like serpents.
Level 10 Brute
Marching Hammer Tactics Marching hammers are tasked with guarding a particular area. They attack directly, moving in on the enemy—favoring foes already in their guarded area above those merely approaching it—and crushing them into pulp.
December 20 08
|
D U N G E O N 161
66
The Temple Between
Writhing Chain
Level 10 Skirmisher
Medium natural animate (construct, homunculus) XP 500 Initiative +10 Senses Perception +7; darkvision HP 131; Bloodied 65 AC 23; Fortitude 23, Reflex 23, Will 21 Immune disease, poison Speed 7; see also serpentine strike m Slam (standard; at-will) +13 vs. AC; 2d6 + 5 damage. M Winding Strike (standard; recharge ⚄ ⚅) +13 vs. AC; 2d6 + 5 damage, and target slides 2 squares and is grabbed and restrained. Guarded Area When making attacks against a creature in its guarded area, the writhing chain gains a +2 bonus to hit and can stretch itself, granting itself reach 3 on all melee attacks. Threatening Reach (within guarded area only) This creature can make opportunity attacks against all enemies within its reach (3 squares). Serpentine Strike (move; at-will) The chain shifts 3 squares. Alignment Unaligned Languages — Skills Stealth +13 Str 19 (+9) Dex 17 (+8) Wis 15 (+7) Con 21 (+10) Int 18 (+9) Cha 12 (+6)
Writhing Chain Tactics Like the hammers, writhing chains are normally assigned to guard an area. They prefer to stay out of range of enemies within that area, striking with their reach. Writhing chains are particularly fond of teaming up, which allows one to restrain a foe while the others pummel him.
Slystone Dwarf Ruffians CRAFTY, ILL-TEMPERED, AND VIOLENT, slystone dwarves are fey cousins of gnomes, with whom they share little in common, though they more closely resemble squat, scruffy dwarves. (It is that resemblance that gave them their Common-tongue name.) Slystone dwarves possess a gift they call “the unyielding soul,” which allows them several magical abilities. The slystone dwarf ruffian, below, represents only one of the most common varieties of this brutal race. Slystone Dwarf Ruffian
Level 10 Soldier
Small fey humanoid XP 500 Initiative +12 Senses Perception +5; low-light vision HP 104; Bloodied 52 AC 26; Fortitude 23, Reflex 22, Will 21 Speed 6; see also mad dash m Hammer (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon +17 vs. AC; 2d6 + 5 damage, and the target is marked until the end of the slystone ruffian’s next turn. M Mighty Strike (standard; recharge ⚄ ⚅) ✦ Weapon +17 vs. AC; 3d8 + 5 damage, and target is pushed 3 squares. The slystone dwarf ruffian can use this power as a part of a charge. Mad Dash When the slystone dwarf ruffian makes a charge attack, the enemy is knocked prone on a hit, in addition to any other effects of the attack. Alignment Evil Languages Common, Elven Skills Athletics +14 Str 18 (+9) Dex 21 (+10) Wis 11 (+5) Con 16 (+8) Int 11 (+5) Cha 18 (+9) Equipment leather armor, hammer
Slystone Dwarf Ruffian Tactics Slystone ruffians initiate combat with raging stone, then charge into melee with mad dash. Once engaged in melee, they prefer to knock a foe away with mighty strike if they need some distance (perhaps to use raging stone again), rather than retreating.
Slystone Dwarf Lore A character knows the following information with a successful Arcana check. DC 15: Slystone dwarves were misnamed by the first humans to encounter them. Though they might appear to be small dwarves, they are in fact cousins to gnomes, albeit far more vicious and cruel. They take pleasure in the pain of others, and grow murderous at the slightest insult. DC 20: Some slystone dwarves serve fomorian kings, others evil eladrins. They’re mercenary and are happy working for anyone who offers them the opportunity for violence.
December 20 08
|
D U N G E O N 161
67
The Temple Between
Troll A TROLL EATS ANYTHING THAT MOVES, from grubs to humans, and is rightly feared for its ravenous appetite, feral cunning, and remarkable regenerative powers. For more on trolls in general, see the Monster Manual, page 254. Spitting trolls are smaller than their kin—averaging only the size of an adult human—but they’re also far smarter. A combination of their natural intelligence and the power that their poison spit grants them over other trolls often allows them to take leadership positions in troll packs. Spitting Troll
Level 10 Soldier (Leader)
Medium natural humanoid XP 500 Initiative +12 Senses Perception +8 HP 106; Bloodied 53; see also troll healing Regeneration 10 (if the troll takes acid or fire damage, regeneration does not function until the end of its next turn) AC 26; Fortitude 22, Reflex 23, Will 22 Speed 6, climb 4 m Claw (standard; at-will) ✦ Poison +17 vs. AC; 1d6 + 5 damage, plus 1d6 poison damage. r Javelin (standard; at-will) ✦ Poison, Weapon Ranged 10/20; +17 vs. AC; 1d6 + 5 damage, plus 1d6 poison damage. R Acid Spit (minor; recharge ⚄ ⚅) ✦ Acid Ranged 5; +15 vs. Reflex; 1d6 acid damage. Regenerative Empowerment (minor 1/turn, at-will) One troll within 10 squares whose regeneration is currently inactive (as a result of taking acid or fire damage) immediately reactivates the regeneration. Troll Healing ✦ Healing If the troll is reduced to 0 hit points by an attack that does not deal acid or fire damage, it rises on its next turn (as a move action) with 10 hit points. Alignment Chaotic evil Languages Common, Giant Skills Athletics +13, Endurance +14 Str 16 (+8) Dex 21 (+10) Wis 17 (+8) Con 18 (+9) Int 10 (+5) Cha 13 (+6) Equipment leather armor, 10 javelins
The rare two-headed trolls are just as brutal as their standard cousins, but far more dangerous.
Spitting Troll Tactics Spitting trolls prefer to let their allies move into melee and soften up the foe, while the spitting troll hangs back and throws javelins. After a few rounds, however, their bloodlust takes hold and they move in close. When fighting alongside other trolls, spitting trolls rarely use their poison spit as a weapon, preferring to hold it in reserve to aid their troll allies. The poison on a spitting troll’s claws and javelins is a variant of their naturally occurring poison, but the act of treating it for application to weapons removes its special properties where other trolls are concerned.
Two-Headed Troll Tactics Like other trolls, the two-headed variety is not a subtle combatant. It wades into its foes, lashing out and counting on regeneration to keep it alive. Essentially, it fights just like a traditional troll, but with twice as many attacks.
Troll Lore In addition to the information given in the Monster Manual, a character knows the following information with a successful Nature check. DC 20: Spitting trolls are smaller but smarter than other trolls. They boast a poison spit that can either harm other trolls like acid, or cause a troll’s regeneration to resume after being suppressed by fire or acid. Two-headed trolls are much like normal trolls, but even more brutal and dangerous. Sages debate whether two-headed trolls are the results of crossbreeding between trolls and ettins, or a mutation caused when a troll’s regeneration ability manifests too early and warps the embryo while still in the womb.
Two-Headed Troll
Level 10 Elite Brute
Large natural humanoid XP 1,000 Initiative +5 Senses Perception +7 HP 264; Bloodied 132; see also troll healing Regeneration 10 (if the troll takes acid or fire damage, regeneration does not function until the end of its next turn) AC 25; Fortitude 27, Reflex 19, Will 20 Saving Throws +2 Speed 6 Action Points 1 m Claw (standard; at-will) Melee 2; +13 vs. AC; 3d6 + 7 damage. M Smackdown (immediate reaction, when an enemy moves into a position that flanks the two-headed troll; at-will) The two-headed troll targets one creature flanking it; +11 vs. Fortitude; the target is knocked prone. Double Actions A two-headed troll rolls initiative twice, gets two turns during a round, and has a full set of actions (standard, move, minor) on each turn. Each set of actions corresponds to a different head. The troll’s ability to take immediate actions refreshes on each of its turns. Dual Brain At the end of its turn, the two-headed troll automatically succeeds on all saving throws against the dazed and stunned conditions and against charm effects that a save can end. Troll Healing ✦ Healing If the troll is reduced to 0 hit points by an attack that does not deal acid or fire damage, it rises on its next turn (as a move action) with 10 hit points. Alignment Chaotic evil Languages Giant Str 24 (+12) Dex 10 (+5) Wis 14 (+7) Con 22 (+11) Int 6 (+3) Cha 10 (+5) Equipment hide armor
December 20 08
|
D U N G E O N 161
68
The Temple Between
APPENDIX II: ZITHIRUUN, THE BROKEN GENERAL ONCE, HE REIGNED SUPREME. General Zithiruun was a great hero—one of the most respected military leaders of a militant race. From the great city of Tu’narath, he led armies of the githyanki on raids across the Astral Sea, and into a dozen different regions and kingdoms of the mortal realm. From the deck of the astral galleon Siun’kara or the back of Rathoraiax, his great red dragon steed, Zithiruun proved an unstoppable force—a champion among a race of champions. Even Vlaakith, the fearsome githyanki lich queen, acknowledged his greatness, heaped great praise upon him. And then the great General Zithiruun took on a foe beyond even his own prowess. That it was a dragon, a dragon far greater than Rathoraiax, everyone knows, but tales of the confrontation differ as to whether it was a black wyrm, one of the fearsome scourge dragons, or something else entirely. But while not everyone knows precisely what it was Zithiruun faced, everyone knows what happened as a result.
A hideous burst of something—acid, perhaps, or pure necrotic energy—ripped the life from the red dragon Rathoraiax, shredding flesh and obliterating entire portions of the beast. And it was this attack that felled Zithiruun as well. It stripped the strength from his limbs, rotted bits of flesh and even weakened bone. Any lesser warrior would have died in that hideous moment, but the general clung to life through sheer force of stubborn, malignant will. It took years for Zithiruun to retrain and reinvigorate his broken body. Even today, he is a shadow of what he once was—weaker in body, far less sound in mind. His own people have all but turned their backs on him; though his great achievements prevented them from executing or exiling him utterly, they scorn his weakness and hold him in contempt for allowing himself and his mount to be so soundly defeated. Today, Zithiruun serves as a lowly operative of Tu’narath’s forces and he leads only lesser warriors into battle while answering to and obeying githyanki who would once have feared even to speak in his presence. Zithiruun’s native powers have mutated through his years of effort as he attempted to reinvigorate his body at the expense of his mental prowess. The ambition all githyanki share has been subsumed by a burning need to prove himself and to regain the position and the respect that were once his by right— even as he nurses a resentful hatred of the very people whose adulation he so desperately craves.
Appearance Zithiruun has been large for a githyanki, but since the destruction and atrophy of much of his musculature, he now appears almost impossibly tall and gaunt. Mixed with and attached to the traditional leathers of his people, he wears a contraption of braces and harnesses, constructed of leather straps and iron joints. These braces, supported at his shoulders and by a strap across his chest, run the length of his left arm and left leg, as well as a portion of his right leg. It is the straps that give those limbs rigidity; without them, they could scarcely move, and not support his weight. This harness also grants him full mobility; charged with both magic and psychic energy, it permits him motion and grants him strength he would otherwise lack. His flesh clings tightly to his skeleton and puckers away from old wounds, exposing muscle and even charred bone. His left cheek gapes open, revealing a bit of metal plate that replaces a fragment of skull. A leather strap holds the left side of his jaw in place, replacing obliterated muscle. He appears weak indeed, and in some ways he truly is. Yet Zithiruun wields his great silver saber with an astonishing, impossible precision, and his eyes burn with loathing and ambition to shame even the other githyanki.
December 20 08
|
D U N G E O N 161
69
The Temple Between
Zithiruun, the Broken General Skirmisher (Leader)
Level 14 Elite
Medium natural humanoid XP 2,000 Initiative +15 Senses Perception +9 HP 280; Bloodied 140 AC 30; Fortitude 26; Reflex 29; Will 28 Resist psychic 10 Saving Throws +2 (+4 against charm effects) Speed 6 Action Points 1 m Silver Saber (standard; at-will) ✦ Psychic, Weapon +19 vs. AC; 1d8 + 6 damage plus 1d8 psychic damage. r Thrown Saber (standard; at-will) ✦ Psychic, Weapon Ranged 5/10 if thrown; +19 vs. AC; 1d8 + 6 damage plus 1d8 psychic damage. Special: If thrown, the weapon returns to Zithiruun’s hand immediately after the attack is resolved. M Silver Barrage (standard; at-will) ✦ Psychic, Weapon Zithiruun makes two silver saber attacks. M Silver Flurry (standard; recharge ⚄ ⚅) ✦ Psychic, Weapon Zithiruun makes up to 2 attacks, each against a different target; he can shift 2 squares before the first attack, between each attack, and after the final attack; +19 vs. AC; 2d8 + 6 damage plus 2d8 psychic damage. Psionic Aim (immediate reaction when an ally within 5 squares misses with an attack; encounter) The ally can reroll the attack, keeping the second result. Mind Over Body Due to the psionic energy of the harness and armor he wears, Zithiruun uses Charisma in place of Wisdom for determining hit points and Fortitude. (He still uses Constitution for other purposes such as Endurance checks.) Mind Shock ✦ Charm Whenever Zithiruun damages a target with his silver saber, thrown saber, silver flurry, or silver barrage attacks, the target cannot make opportunity attacks until the end of Zithiruun’s next turn. Telekinetic Leap (move; at-will) Zithiruun can fly 5 squares. Alignment Evil Languages Common, Deep Speech, Draconic Skills History +16, Insight +14 Str 6 (+5) Dex 23 (+13) Wis 15 (+9) Con 6 (+5)* Int 19 (+11) Cha 20 (+12) *See mind over body Equipment: Hide armor and body harness, two silver sabers
Development
Zithiruun’s Tactics
Zithiruun burns with shame and resentment, even as he scrambles to fulfill the orders of his superiors. Where he once commanded legions, he now leads only a handful of soldiers. He who charted the course of entire wars now understands only his part in larger strategies. Yet, though he aches to turn on those who would dare command him, he knows that through obedience lies his only hope of regaining the honor and position he craves. The Broken General is a tactical genius, but his once renowned patience and cunning are impeded by his ever-growing temper. Zithiruun frequently flies into a rage at his subordinates for the slightest failure or perceived disobedience, transforming his resentment for those above into punishment for those below. The strap that replaces one of his jaw muscles prevents him from opening his mouth wide, forcing him to eat soft, almost dainty morsels of food and occasionally to slur his words. Zithiruun’s speech is fully intelligible most of the time, but on those rare occasions when he garbles a word, he blames others for their failure to comprehend. Despite this temper, however, Zithiruun remains a consummate planner and a terror in combat, fully capable of leading his small teams to victory in even the most complex strategies. Zithiruun can also use his reputation for mad rage to his advantage, often faking a tantrum to make others underestimate his ability to scheme, to listen, and to advance his own agenda.
Zithiruun prefers to fight alongside his mount Rathoraiax. He sweeps through his foes, opening with silver barrage if they greatly outnumber him and making use of his mind shock ability to stay mobile. If hard pressed, he flies to Rathoraiax’s back and tries to stay at range, using distance attacks. Despite his burning desire to prove himself, Zithiruun’s hatred for other githyanki means that he’s ill-disposed to sacrifice himself for their goals. Thus, he’s willing to retreat from combat if things go poorly, even abandoning other githyanki allies. Rathoraiax
Level 13 Elite Brute
Large natural animate (dragon, undead) XP 1,600 Initiative +5 Senses Perception +9; darkvision HP 328; Bloodied 164 AC 27; Fortitude 29; Reflex 22; Will 24 Immune disease, poison; Resist 15 necrotic; Vulnerable 15 radiant Saving Throws +2 Speed 4, fly 8 (clumsy) Action Points 1 m Claw (standard; at-will) Melee 2; +16 vs. AC; 2d10 + 6 damage, and the target is knocked prone if it is Large size or smaller. M Savage Fury (standard; recharge ⚃ ⚄ ⚅) Rathoraiax makes two claw attacks. M Tail Crush (minor; at-will) Reach 2; prone targets only; +14 vs. Fortitude; 3d8 + 6 damage. C Breath of the Grave (standard; encounter) ✦ Necrotic, Poison Close blast 5; +14 vs. Fortitude; 4d10 + 6 poison and necrotic damage, plus target takes ongoing 10 poison and necrotic damage and is weakened (save ends both). Alignment Unaligned Languages — Str 22 (+12) Dex 9 (+5) Wis 16 (+9) Con 24 (+13) Int 1 (+1) Cha 3 (+2)
December 20 08
|
D U N G E O N 161
70
The Temple Between
Rathoraiax
Zithiruun Lore
As a sign of his shame, Zithiruun was never granted the honor of a new dragon mount. Rather, he must make do with the animated body of Rathoraiax. This is yet another insult that burns in Zithiruun’s craw, yet he’s too intelligent a fighter to abandon a useful weapon purely out of spite. Rathoraiax is clearly dead; most of his scales are a dull, rotten gray, gleaming with a faint red only in the brightest light. Many are missing completely, revealing desiccated, leathery skin. The entire top half of Rathoraiax’s snout was destroyed in the attack that slew him. This left behind a “shelf ” of his lower jaw sticking out from beneath the broken skull around his eyes, fangs protruding upward, and a dull, dead tongue lashing slowly above.
The following information can be obtained with a successful History check. (In addition, see the standard githyanki lore, acquired with a Nature check, in the Monster Manual.)
DC 25: General Zithiruun was a great military leader and hero to the githyanki of Tu’narath. It’s said that he was crippled and his mount slain in a battle against a sort of mighty dragon or fiend. Rumors disagree on whether he still lives and what position he might hold (if any) among the weakness-intolerant githyanki.
Rathoraiax’s Tactics Rathoraiax lumbers into combat and seeks to pound its foes into the earth. After a few rounds of combat (or earlier, if Zithiruun orders it to do so), it looks for an opportunity to catch a handful of foes in its breath of the grave attack. Rathoraiax is relatively mindless and fights to the death unless ordered to retreat.
December 20 08
|
D U N G E O N 161
71
Fist Mourning of
An adventure for 10th-level characters
by Robert J. Schwalb illustrations by Gonzalo Flores, Goran Josic, Howard Lyon, and Anne Stokes ✦ cartography by Mike Schley
TM & © 2009 Wizards of the Coast LLC. All rights reserved.
Januar y 20 09
|
D U N G E O N 16 2
4
Fist of Mourning
While lords and heroes alike look to the brimming war spilling across the lands, evil blossoms in places unexpected. With the realm, and possibly the world, teetering on destruction’s precipice, new factions rise to work their wickedness. One such menace is the Cult of Exquisite Agony, a disturbed cabal dedicated to perfecting mortal flesh by infusing it with the essence of chaos to make it more adaptable, stronger, faster, and better. Gathering in a fallen hero’s tomb high in the Stonehome Mountains, this cult commits horrific acts hidden from those who cannot comprehend their effort’s magnificent end. Though careful to avoid attention, success’s proximity has made them sloppy, and their deeds leave traces those with courage and resolve can follow. “Fist of Mourning” is a DUNGEONS & DRAGONS® adventure for five 10th-level characters. Although designed as a short scenario for adventuring parties participating in the “Scales of War” adventure path, you can adapt it for use in any mountainous region of any game world and for any campaign.
BACKGROUND The Cult of Exquisite Agony blossomed and withered many times over the centuries, rising in power, but falling when madness and treachery consumed its greatest leaders. Each time the cult rose, it sought to improve on what the gods themselves had done: remake mortal flesh into something better and attain the full potential they believed was buried within all. The last time the cult stirred was over a century ago, many miles to the south in the ruins of Zannad. Believing the secrets to their evolution was within the fabled yuan-ti city, they scoured the wreckage with little luck and they, like others before them,
succumbed to insanity and malice, turning against each other in an orgy of violence. Not all perished, and at least one escaped to carry the filthy message of transformation to other lands. One such refugee made it to Overlook, and before her death, she passed on her cult’s tenets to loyal followers recruited from local folk. Over the generations, the cult grew, but its leaders did not follow in their founder’s steps until one named Obsen came to power 10 years ago. A disturbed man with a taste for the exotic, he believed he gained the power and qualities of everything he ate provided the meal was alive
while he consumed it. So he ate plenty and often. It wasn’t until he devoured a slaad tadpole, purchased at a high price in Nine Bells—the poor and crime-ridden district in Overlook—that he realized he had the means to attain perfection all along. For the next 10 years, Obsen and his cronies quietly amassed slaad tadpoles, performed hideous experiments on themselves in dank cellars, stole residuum to power their rituals, and made unconscionable pacts with otherworldly beings until they perfected the process. When Tusk’s armies marched on Bordrin’s Watch, Obsen and the cultists quit the city and marched to an
Januar y 20 09
|
D U N G E O N 16 2
5
Fist of Mourning
old tomb under the Fist, a blunted peak in the nearby Stonehome Mountains, where they murdered the witch living there, and recruited heavily from the mountain’s denizens until they were strong enough to gather victims for the glorious transformation they would create.
ADVENTURE SYNOPSIS As close as they are to their goal, the cultists’ depraved acts are bound to draw attention. Someone they crossed hires the adventurers to root out the deviants. The player characters climb the mountains and track the cultists to their lair. Once inside, the characters must navigate its perils, learn what the cultists intend, and stop them before their corruption spreads too far.
STARTING THE ADVENTURE The adventurers might come to the Fist of Mourning for a variety of reasons. Consider using either one of the following adventure hooks or come up with one of your own.
Hook: Bereft Necromancer Rufus Crumley might not be popular in Shantytown, but he is still a powerful and feared figure whose influence cannot be overstated. Because he is protected by his dire reputation and his undead thralls, no one has ever dared steal from him in his long years in the city. So when someone breaks into his tower, destroys his zombies, and makes off with his residuum stores, the necromancer is quite put out. Familiar with the adventurers’ recent escapades, the necromancer turns to them for help. He offers
the characters 2,800 gp (parcel 5) if they recover his residuum (worth 1,000 gp). It’s not that the necromancer can’t purchase more residuum; he has a reputation to protect. Characters who stamp out the cult and return the stolen property also earn 2,500 XP for completing a major quest.
Hook: Missing Adventurer While adventuring in Overlook and in its surrounding lands, the player characters have met and might have rivalries with other adventuring groups. When one such group comes under attack by these cultists, most are slain and at least one is abducted. The lone survivor begs the PCs for help in recovering his missing friends. The characters must rescue the cult’s prisoners from the Fist of Mourning and return them to Overlook. Doing so allows the PCs to earn a reward of
THE POSSIBLE QUESTS “Fist of Mourning” offers PCs an opportunity to earn quest XP. Provided here is a list of possible quests, and their rewards, from the hooks in the adventure. Major Quest—Bereft Necromancer Rufus Crumley wants his residuum back, plus he has a reputation to protect. Reward: 2,500 XP and 2,800 gp (parcel 5). Major Quest—Missing Adventurer Rescue the cult’s prisoners from the Fist of Mourning and return them to Overlook. Reward: 2,500 XP for the cult’s destruction and 2,800 gp (plus a useful contact in a future adventure if they need it).
2,800 gp, plus a useful contact in a future adventure if they need it. Also, PCs who destroy the cult in the process earn 2,500 XP for completing a major quest.
Treasure Preparation Since this adventure should help 10th-level adventurers make up any shortfalls to reaching 11th level, stock the dungeon with treasure parcels you have yet to give out for this level. “Fist of Mourning” assumes the characters are already halfway to their next level, so the adventure supplies five treasure parcels. Adjust this as needed to make sure the characters receive the proper treasure for their levels. Magic items, coins, goods, and other valuables are described in the room summaries and the parcels they represented are included for your convenience. As always, where the text specifies a magic item, you should feel free to swap it out with an item from your players’ wish lists.
PART ONE: ON EVIL’S TRAIL Once the characters are engaged in the adventure, you might start at the entrance to the Fist and proceed with the adventure as written. Or you can develop the story more slowly by roleplaying through the process by which the heroes are hired, learn about the cult, and track the cultists to their lair. What follows are tools to help you develop the adventure more slowly. If you choose to use these skill challenges, consider removing the Outraged Dead encounter on page 19 to keep the XP in line. Skill Challenge: SC1 Investigating the Cult (page 11). Skill Challenge: SC2 Travel to the Fist (page 12).
Januar y 20 09
|
D U N G E O N 16 2
6
Fist of Mourning
PART TWO: THE FIST The Fist stabs out from a high peak in the Stonehome Mountains. Named for its uncanny resemblance to a closed fist, it marks Murat’s grave, a hero who fell in the dwarf uprising against the giants. The dwarves abandoned the tomb centuries ago when cruel winter storms, orcs, and other mountain-dwelling horrors became too great to maintain it safely. In recent years, a filthy hag claimed squatter’s rights and made the place her home. However, even her gruesome appearance and sinister appetites weren’t enough to deter the cult from taking it for themselves, and she met a terrible end in the bottom of a ravine when she tried to resist. The tomb consists of the dungeon’s western tunnels and chambers. They exhibit fine dwarven architecture still in good repair even after long neglect. The eastern chambers are crude since they were hand and tool-excavated. Orc miners, who serve the cult much as they served the mountain witch before, chip away at the granite for silver, gems, and anything else they might extract from the unyielding rock.
General Features Illumination: Rooms are all dark unless otherwise mentioned in the encounter text. Ceiling: Ceilings in the complex are as tall as their widest dimension. Doors: Constructed from stone, the doors all bear intricate carvings featuring dwarves battling orcs, ogres, and giants. The doors are all unlocked, but such is their weight that it requires a standard action and a successful DC 10 Strength check to open them. Stairs: Whether crude or fine, stairs all count as difficult terrain.
Januar y 20 09
|
D U N G E O N 16 2
7
Fist of Mourning
mound of furs rises, revealing a wrinkled crone complete with a jutting chin, milky white eyes, and one black tooth in the center of her mouth. She cackles as she hobbles toward you. The crone is an oni mage in service to the cult. It assumes the hag’s appearance in case any mountain folk come to trade or seek a remedy from the nowdead wizened monster. The oni plays the part well, pretending to be an unhinged and repellent creature, offering to cure the party’s ills, trade for information, and so on, using Bluff to maintain the deception (+15 check modifier). The oni mage denies the Cult’s presence here, but if the characters are insistent, it drops the disguise and attacks. Tactical Encounter: F1 False Witch (page 13). Treasure (Parcel 9): The cultists left the hag’s personal treasures alone when they took over the place, though they tucked them away in a niche in the center of the north wall. A character who succeeds on a DC 16 Perception check locates a sodden sack containing a rotting human hand, 90 gp, a garnet (worth 100 gp), a ritual scroll of Detect Lies (worth 360 gp), a potion of healing, and a caustic whetstone (AV 190).
1. Cave of the Mountain Witch This room housed the mountain witch, the cruel hag who claimed the tomb as her lair. The cult murdered her and enslaved her minions. When the PCs can see into the room, read: An opening in the mountain extends into a wide cave. To the west, two statues carved to depict armored dwarves f lank old, weathered stone doors. To the east, a tunnel opens into a deeper chamber. What at first looks to be a
2. The Furnace Early excavations exposed a pocket of hot gasses fed by a pool of molten rock. The liquid stone has cooled somewhat to form a thin crust over the fiery substance. When the PCs enter this room, read:
Tactical Encounter: F1 False Witch (page 13). Characters who succeed on a DC 11 Perception check can hear the sound of metal striking stone coming from room 3.
3. Excavation The orc miners work this room to extract precious metals and gemstones. Tactical Encounter: F2 Infested Mine (page 15).
4. Deeper Chamber While the orcs served the hag, they dug out this chamber searching for gold and silver. When they found nothing, they changed direction. Now, aside from a few broken tools, this room is empty. When the characters enter this room, they can hear chanting echoing from the chamber ahead with a successful DC 10 Perception check.
5. Deep Mine The orc miners abandoned this room when they found nothing of value. Once the cultists moved in, they erected an idol to embody their perverse vision and awakened it with elemental power and foul rituals. Now, at all times, cultists gather to pay their respects. Tactical Encounter: F3 Entropic Thralls (page 17). Treasure (Parcel 7): Piled around the suppurating eidolon are 1,000 gp, a topaz (worth 500 gp), and two peridots (worth 100 gp each).
Dim light shines up from a cavity filling the room’s eastern extent. The ceiling is smooth stone. A path winds around the cavity and it exits through a fissure in the north wall.
Januar y 20 09
|
D U N G E O N 16 2
8
Fist of Mourning
6. Gauntlet Stalagmites cover the floor, rising up between pools of mineral-rich water formed from dripping stalactites overhead. The characters can take an extended rest in this room since the undead do not emerge from room 7 and no other denizens are likely to come here due the undead’s proximity.
7. The Dead Room The undead here were once dwarves, but they have awoken in death from their tomb’s violation—an act not even the hag would have dared. The undead creature’s efforts to oust the cultists have failed and thus they have gathered here to plan their next move. Their undead states make them completely unreasonable, and under most circumstances, they attack living creature entering this room. Tactical Encounter: F4 Outraged Dead (page 19). If the PCs spoke with Murat in room 10 and reveal this fact to the undead, proving it by showing the item they gained from the ghost, the undead break off the attack because they now see the adventurers as allies. The undead offer to help the PCs take on the remaining cultists in the complex, but they do not wait for the PCs to take short or extended rests; they continue if the PCs tarry.
8. Hall of the Fallen This room once honored Murat, the dwarf champion whose remains are interred here, by celebrating his mortal achievements and capturing them in stone carvings adorning the walls.
When the PCs can see this room, read: Stone statues depicting dwarf warriors stand in a row against this room’s southern wall. Opposite, a ledge rises 10 feet off the f loor. The ceiling and walls feature runic inscriptions. Double doors stand at the end of the chamber. Once the characters enter this room, the cultists spill out to attack. Tactical Encounter: F5 Hideous Cultists (page 20). Runic Inscriptions: Chiseled in Davek script, the inscriptions tell of Murat’s mortal deeds, each more fantastic than the last. Characters who spend at least 5 minutes reading the inscriptions gain a +2 bonus to Diplomacy checks made against Murat’s ghost in room 10.
9. Stained Landing Old blood stains the flagstones covering the landing. Several cultists met grisly ends here before their allies drove off the undead now lurking in room 7. Tactical Encounter: F5 Hideous Cultists (page 20).
10. Tomb of the Dwarf Lord The dwarves interred Murat here. Although dead, his spirit lingers on and rises if the room is disturbed. Skill Challenge: SC3 Congress with the Dead (page 22).
11. Hall of the Golden Anvil This hall honors those who fell during their service to Murat. Aside from a massive golden hammer inscribed on the floor and walls covered with accounts of ancient battles chiseled in the Davek script, this room is empty.
12. Servants’ Tombs Murat’s favored servants were interred in this chamber when they died. A dozen openings, each big enough for a corpse, pierce the eastern, southern, and western walls. Most contain bones, but a few are suspiciously empty.
13. Warriors’ Tombs This room holds the remains of Murat’s favored cohorts. Twenty or so openings pierce the southern, eastern, and northern walls. As with the Servants’ Tombs, most hold bones, but a few have been emptied.
14. Hall of Victories Honoring Murat’s greatest victories, stone statues depicting the monsters the dwarf defeated in battle stand in rows across the center of the room. When the PCs can see into this room, read: A wide hall contains statues that depict a bestiary of terrible monsters, and these statues run across the center of the room. Beyond them, a f light of stairs leads up into darkness. Tactical Encounter: F6 Living Statues? (page 23).
Januar y 20 09
|
D U N G E O N 16 2
9
Fist of Mourning
15. Dark Landing
17. Hall of Horror
Aside from the unnatural darkness shrouding this landing, this area connects the upper level to the lower chambers.
The hall of horror is the final room in the complex, and it serves as the location where the cult performs its most wicked acts. When the PCs enter this room, read:
16. Defiled Chapel When pilgrims came to the Fist of Mourning, they attended services in this small chapel dedicated to Moradin. Its sanctity made it the cult’s first targets and they defiled the room. When the PCs can see into this room, read: This room was clearly once a chapel, because an altar bearing Moradin’s hammer and anvil stands at the end, but blood, bloated corpses, and buzzing f lies testify to the atrocity committed here. The corpses belong to humans, dwarves, and other humanoid prisoners. Each has been savagely hacked apart and left to rot. Entrails cover the altar in an act of defilement. If the characters clean up the mess by removing the corpses and removing the offal and blood, they each regain 1 healing surge for their efforts.
In the dim light cast by glowing gelatinous curtains shrouding a raised platform in the center of the room, you can take in the full horror of what the cult intends. Suspended in the jellied mass are dark shapes, struggling against the foul tendrils pumping corruption into their bloated bodies. In the center, arms raised, stands a swollen mass, dark shapes blooming and writhing on the silhouette’s body. Chanting sounds from within, presumably from the figure you see.
CONCLUSION Defeating the cultists, freeing the prisoners, or recovering the stolen residuum brings the adventure to its end. Although wiped out due to the heroes’ efforts, the Cult of Exquisite Agony doesn’t need to vanish entirely from your campaign if you don’t wish it to. Their profane writings might escape the PCs’ torches, and might be found later by an enterprising adventurer with dubious morals. Or, some might still hide in Overlook, working their wickedness within the city. Whatever you decide, these twisted villains might yet have a part to play in the heroes’ uncertain future.
Tactical Encounter: F7 Beyond the Pale (page 25). Survivors: If you used the “Missing Adventurer” hook, the characters might be able to rescue a few of the survivors. Each is infected with chaos phage and must be treated if they are to survive. Treasure (Parcels 3 and 5): The cult’s treasures include a +3 orb of indisputable gravity, a chest filled with 1,800 gp, and a fat fire opal (worth 1,000 gp). If the PCs were sent to recover the residuum, it’s held here too in a silver chalice with the opening sealed with black wax. In addition, a few old tomes, scrolls, and manuscripts contain mad ravings from dead predecessors. The writings are worthless to anyone outside the cult and characters who destroy them might prevent another group from rising in this group’s place.
Januar y 20 09
|
D U N G E O N 16 2
10
Fist of Mourning
SC1: INVESTIGATING THE CULT L eve l 1 1 ( 1 , 2 0 0 X P )
Setup Begin by reading the following: So, you have your task. Now you’ve chosen to investigate elements of it. At this point, find out what the PCs are researching and how, and then begin the skill challenge.
Investigating the Cult Skill Challenge
Level 11 XP 1,200
Overlook harbors many secrets, hidden designs, and obscene stratagems. Sifting through the lies and prowling the streets might reveal the information you seek. The adventurers gather information, research dusty tomes, or tap contacts for more information about the villains in this adventure. Complexity 2 (requires 6 successes before 3 failures). Primary Skills History or Religion, Stealth, Streetwise. Other Skills Arcana, Bluff, Diplomacy, Intimidate. Victory The adventurers learn about the Cult of Exquisite Agony and the information described under “Background” on page 5. In addition, the PCs learn where these insane people hide. Defeat The adventurers attracted unwanted attention and the cult sends a red slaad (see page 25 for statistics) after them to encourage them to give up their line of questioning. History or Religion DC 21 (1 success, 1 maximum) A success allows the characters to make Arcana checks. A failed check also opens up the Arcana skill, but the DC is 21. The PC recalls the more prominent cults known to have worked in this area.
Stealth DC 16 (1 success, 2 maximum) During the skill challenge, at least one character must make a Stealth check until 2 successes are achieved. A failed check counts as 2 failures. The PC skulks through the shadows to avoid attracting unwanted attention. Streetwise DC 16 (1 success, no maximum) A success makes available the Bluff, Diplomacy, and Intimidate skills. The PC snoops around, greases some palms, and questions locals about recent cult activities. Arcana DC 16 (1 success, 1 maximum) A success grants the characters the cult’s name. The PC recalls a useful fact about one of the cults mentioned. Bluff DC 16 (1 success, no maximum) A failed check increases the DC of Diplomacy checks by 2. The PC makes false promises to find the information required. Diplomacy DC 16 (1 success, no maximum) The PC bargains with an informant to learn more about the cult and its lair. Intimidate DC 16 (1 success, no maximum) A failed check counts as 2 failures. The PC roughs up some locals to find the information sought.
Januar y 20 09
|
D U N G E O N 16 2
11
Fist of Mourning
SC2: TRAVEL TO THE FIST
Travel to the Fist Skill Challenge
Encounter Level 11 (1,800 XP)
To reach the cult’s lair, the adventurers must navigate the mountains’ perils. Complexity 3 (requires 8 successes before 3 failures). Primary Skills Endurance, Nature, Perception, Stealth Victory The characters reach the Fist of Mourning without attracting attention. Defeat The characters are spotted during their ascent and 2 warped cultists and 4 wretched and unclean attack the PCs while on the mountain path (see pages 15 and 18 respectively for statistics). The battlefield should feature a 3-square wide trail running west to east. The north side of the trail is the mountain’s face, while the south side drops 80 feet to another trail below. Endurance DC 16 (1 success, no maximum) Each turn in the challenge, at least two characters must make Endurance checks. A failed check results in 2 failures and each PC loses one healing surge. The PC resists the hardships of traveling through the mountains. Nature DC 16 (1 success, 4 maximum) At least one character must make a Nature check each turn. A failed check indicates each PC loses 1 healing surge in addition to counting as a failure. Using superior survival skills, the PC helps navigate around deadfalls, locate shortcuts, and identify hidden dangers. Perception DC 10 (0 successes) Using this skill doesn’t count as a success or failure for the challenge. Instead, it grants a +2 bonus or a –2 penalty to the next character’s Endurance or Nature check. The PC’s keen eyes find a way to ease the trek. Stealth DC 21 (1 success, no maximum) At least two characters must make a Stealth check each turn. The PC conceals his or her movements to avoid being detected.
Setup Begin by reading the following: You have started your journey to the Fist of Mourning. What dangers lie before you during this trip? At this point, begin the skill challenge.
Level 11 XP 1,800
You navigate mountain trails, avoiding obstacles and hidden perils to reach the Fist of Mourning.
Januar y 20 09
|
D U N G E O N 16 2
12
Fist of Mourning
F1: FALSE WITCH Encounter Level 9 (2,400 XP)
Setup 1 bulette (B) 1 firelasher (F) 1 oni mage (O) The oni mage pretends to be the hag said to dwell here. It drops the façade if adventurers press it with too many questions or if they see through its disguise.
Don’t place the bulette or the firelasher on the tactical map. The bulette joins the battle at the start of the second round, and the firelasher joins the fight in the third round. When the oni mage drops its disguise, read:
When the bulette appears, read: The ground erupts as an armored beast breaks through the rock, its predator’s eyes glinting with hunger. When the firelasher joins the fight, read:
The hag’s form melts away to reveal a mail-clad blue humanoid easily 9 feet tall. Horns sprout from its head and its baleful red eyes glow. It spits a curse your way as it reaches for the greatsword strapped to its back.
Features of the Area Illumination: If it’s day, the western portion of room 1 has dim light. Otherwise, room 1 is dark. Room 2 is dark regardless. Once the firelasher joins the fight, it sheds bright light in a 20-square radius. Ceiling: The ceilings throughout the encounter area are 20-feet tall. Molten Pit: A molten pit takes up much of room 2. It descends 30 feet to a thin crust covering magma. A fall from the ledge deals 3d10 damage, and characters starting their turns in the pit take 10 fire damage. If a character starts three consecutive turns in the pit, he or she breaks through the crust, plunges into the lava, and is slain instantly. Statues: Flanking the double doors in the western wall are two identical statues. Each depicts a dwarf wearing plate armor and holding a greataxe in both hands, the blades between their stone feet. Dwarf characters in spaces adjacent to the statue gain a +1 power bonus to attack rolls.
A swirling ball of fire spins out of the darkness, and you can just make out monstrous features in its elemental form. Oni Mage (O)
Level 10 Elite Lurker
Large natural humanoid XP 1,000 Initiative +10 Senses Perception +7; darkvision HP 172; Bloodied 86 AC 26; Fortitude 25, Reflex 24, Will 24 Saving Throws +2 Speed 7, fly 8 (clumsy) Action Points 1 m Greatsword (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon Reach 2; +15 vs. AC; 2d6 + 6 damage. C Freezing Blast (standard; recharge 6) ✦ Cold Close blast 5; +15 vs. Fortitude; 1d8 + 6 cold damage, and the target is slowed (save ends). A Lightning Storm (standard; recharge 5 6) ✦ Lightning Area burst 2 within 10; +15 vs. Reflex; 2d6 + 4 lightning damage. Combat Advantage An oni mage deals 1d6 extra damage on melee attacks against any target it has combat advantage against. Deceptive Veil (minor; at-will) ✦ Illusion The oni mage can disguise itself to appear as any Medium or Large humanoid. A successful Insight check (opposed by the oni’s Bluff check) pierces the disguise. Invisibility (standard; at-will) ✦ Illusion The oni turns invisible until it attacks. Alignment Evil Languages Common, Giant Skills Arcana +14, Bluff +15, Insight +12 Str 22 (+11) Dex 13 (+6) Wis 14 (+7) Con 20 (+10) Int 18 (+9) Cha 21 (+10) Equipment chainmail, greatsword
Januar y 20 09
|
D U N G E O N 16 2
13
Fist of Mourning
Bulette (B)
Level 9 Elite Skirmisher
Large natural beast XP 800 Initiative +7 Senses Perception +5; darkvision, tremorsense 20 HP 204; Bloodied 102; see also second wind AC 27; Fortitude 26, Reflex 21, Will 21 Saving Throws +2 Speed 6, burrow 6; see also earth furrow Action Points 1 m Bite (standard; at-will) Before it bites, the bulette can make a standing long jump (as a free action) without provoking opportunity attacks: +14 vs. AC; 2d6 + 7 damage, or 4d6 + 7 damage against a prone target. C Rising Burst (standard; at-will) Close burst 2; the bulette sprays rock and dirt into the air when it rises out of the ground: +13 vs. AC; 1d6 + 7 damage. M Earth Furrow (move; at-will) The bulette can move its burrow speed just below the surface of the ground, avoiding opportunity attacks as it passes underneath other creatures’ squares. As it burrows beneath the space of a Medium or smaller creature on the ground, the bulette makes an attack against the creature: +8 vs. Fortitude; on a hit, the target is knocked prone. Ground Eruption The squares into which a bulette surfaces and the squares it leaves when it burrows underground become difficult terrain. Second Wind (standard; encounter) ✦ Healing The bulette spends a healing surge and regains 51 hit points. It gains a +2 bonus to all defenses until the start of its next turn. Alignment Unaligned Languages — Skills Athletics +16, Endurance +15 Str 24 (+11) Dex 13 (+5) Wis 12 (+5) Con 22 (+10) Int 2 (+0) Cha 8 (+3)
Firelasher (F)
Level 11 Skirmisher
Large elemental magical beast (air, fire) XP 600 Initiative +12 Senses Perception +5 HP 108; Bloodied 54 AC 25; Fortitude 21, Reflex 25, Will 20 Immune disease, poison; Resist 25 fire Speed fly 8 (hover) m Fire Lash (standard; at-will) ✦ Fire Reach 2; +14 vs. Reflex; 2d8 + 5 fire damage. C Wildfire Cyclone (standard; recharge 5 6) ✦ Fire Close burst 2; +14 vs. Reflex; 2d6 + 5 fire damage, and the target is pushed 1 square and knocked prone. Miss: Half damage, and the target is neither pushed nor knocked prone. Whirlwind Dash (standard; recharge 6) ✦ Fire The firelasher can move twice its speed. It can move through spaces occupied by other creatures without provoking opportunity attacks. It must end its move in an unoccupied space. Any creature whose space the firelasher enters takes 10 fire damage. Mutable Shape The firelasher can squeeze through spaces as though it was a Medium creature. Alignment Unaligned Languages Primordial Str 11 (+5) Dex 21 (+10) Wis 11 (+5) Con 12 (+6) Int 7 (+3) Cha 8 (+4)
The bulette lacks subtlety. On its initiative during the second round, it burrows 3 squares (solid rock) and makes a rising burst attack when it surfaces in the eastern chamber. (Note the area where it surfaced; it counts as difficult terrain.) It then spends an action point to make a bite attack, making a standing long jump as a free action to reach the next closest enemy. Each round thereafter, the bulette uses earth furrow and surfaces to bite an enemy whenever its movement knocks an enemy prone. The bulette fights to the death. The firelasher prefers to fight in room 2, but if it has no targets, it leaves the area to join the closest battle. It uses whirlwind dash to position itself where its wildfire cyclone would be most effective and uses it on its next turn. While waiting for its powers to recharge, the elemental uses fire lash. If it becomes bloodied, it retreats to room 2 where it makes its stand.
Tactics When the oni mage drops deceptive veil, it uses freezing blast to catch the largest group of characters and then spends an action point to use invisibility. It flies into the room where the bulette hides and waits to press the attack for when its reinforcements arrive. Once the bulette closes, the oni mage uses lightning storm against any controllers, thus ending its invisibility. While waiting for its area and close attacks to recharge, it uses invisibility and makes greatsword attacks every other round against strikers and controllers. The oni mage flees to room 3 to warn its allies if reduced to 40 hit points or fewer.
Januar y 20 09
|
D U N G E O N 16 2
14
Fist of Mourning
F2: INFESTED MINE
Destrachan Far Voice (D)
Encounter Level 11 (3,000 XP)
Setup 1 destrachan far voice (D) 2 warped cultists (C) 4 orc miners (M) A destrachan far voice works with the orc miners to expand this chamber. A warped cultist oversees the operation, commanding the orcs to work faster, while another cultist emerges from the side passage after checking with the other cultists in the deeper tunnels. If the oni mage fled room 1, it traveled here to warn the creatures here, so the creatures are ready for the PCs. Otherwise, the adventurers automatically gain surprise due to the noise. When the PCs enter this room, read: Green light shines from a medallion around the neck of a hideously malformed human, his f lesh distended and shifting as if things crawled beneath its skin. Orcs swing picks at the walls, while a larger creature equipped with a strange tubelike snout, f lapping ears, and a stubby tail, causes the stone to shatter with blasts issued from its maw. Beyond, a steep cliff rises to a chamber above, while a small tunnel in the western wall leads off into darkness.
Chaos Phage
Level 15 Artillery
Large aberrant magical beast (blind) XP 1,200 Initiative +12 Senses Perception +14; blindsight 20 HP 122; Bloodied 61 AC 28; Fortitude 32, Reflex 27, Will 25 Immune gaze; Resist 15 thunder Speed 8, climb 4 m Claw (standard; at-will) +20 vs. AC; 1d8 + 6 damage. R Sound Pulse (standard; at-will) ✦ Thunder Ranged 10; +19 vs. Reflex; 2d8 + 8 thunder damage. C Bellowing Blast (standard; recharge 3 4 5 6) ✦ Thunder Close blast 5; +19 vs. Fortitude; 2d6 + 8 thunder damage, and the target is dazed (save ends). C Reverberate (standard; encounter) ✦ Thunder Close burst 2; +19 vs. Fortitude; 2d8 + 8 thunder damage, and the target is stunned (save ends). Miss: Half damage, and the target is dazed until the end of the destrachan far voice’s next turn. Alignment Evil Languages Deep Speech Skills Bluff +12, Stealth +17 Str 23 (+13) Dex 20 (+12) Wis 15 (+9) Con 26 (+15) Int 10 (+7) Cha 11 (+7)
4 Orc Miners (M)
Level 9 Minion Brute
Medium natural humanoid XP 100 each Initiative +4 Senses Perception +4; low-light vision HP 1; a missed attack never damages a minion. AC 21; Fortitude 19, Reflex 16, Will 16 Speed 6 (8 while charging) m War Pick (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon +14 vs. AC; 6 damage. Alignment Chaotic evil Languages Common, Giant Str 17 (+7) Dex 11 (+4) Wis 10 (+4) Con 15 (+6) Int 8 (+3) Cha 9 (+3) Equipment hide armor, war pick
Level 16 Disease
2 Warped Cultists (C)
Level 12 Skirmisher
Medium elemental humanoid, human, slaad XP 700 each Initiative +10 Senses Perception +5 HP 122; Bloodied 61; see also bloodied transformation AC 24; Fortitude 25, Reflex 22, Will 23 Immune chaos phage (see below) Speed 5; see also warp step m Greatsword (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon +17 vs. AC; 2d6 + 5 damage. C Reckless Arc (standard; encounter) ✦ Weapon Requires greatsword; close burst 1; +17 vs. AC; 4d6 + 5 damage. Effect: The warped cultist grants combat advantage to any enemy until the start of its next turn. Bloodied Transformation (when first bloodied) ✦ Polymorph A slaad abomination rips itself free from the cultist’s body. Until the end of the encounter, the warped cultist gains a +2 to all defenses, low-light vision, and can use the claws, warping flux, and warp step powers. However, the warped cultist can no longer use its greatsword or reckless arc powers. m Claws (standard; usable only while affected by bloodied transformation; at-will) ✦ Disease +17 vs. AC; 2d4 + 5 damage, and the warped cultist makes a secondary attack against the same target. Secondary Attack: +15 vs. Fortitude; the target contracts chaos phage (see below). C Warping Flux (standard; usable only while affected by bloodied transformation; encounter) ✦ Psychic, Teleportation Close burst 3; +13 vs. Will; 1d6 + 3 psychic damage, the target teleports 3 squares, and the target is dazed (save ends). Miss: No damage, but the target teleports 3 squares and is dazed until the end of the warped cultist’s next turn. Warp Step (move; usable only while affected by bloodied transformation; at-will) ✦ Teleportation The warped cultist teleports 1d6 squares. Alignment Chaotic evil Languages Common, Primordial Skills Athletics +15, Stealth +12 Str 21 (+11) Dex 15 (+8) Wis 9 (+5) Con 18 (+10) Int 8 (+5) Cha 17 (+9) Equipment chainmail, greatsword, shining medallion
Endurance improve DC 25, maintain DC 20, worsen DC 19 or lower The target is cured.
!
Initial Effect: A slaad embryo is implanted in the target.
!"
The target takes a –2 penalty to Will. While bloodied, the target succumbs to madness and attacks the nearest creature.
"
The target dies, and a slaad tadpole burrows out of its skull (see MM 237).
Januar y 20 09
|
D U N G E O N 16 2
15
Fist of Mourning
Tactics
Features of the Area
As near as the cultists are to creating a new breed of perfect specimens, the adventurers’ arrival proves intensely frustrating. As a result, the cultists commit themselves to destroying the intruders. Each cultist draws its greatsword and charges the closest character, using reckless sweep when presented with two or more targets. Once the cultist becomes bloodied, a slaad abomination rips itself free from his body and immediately sets out to butcher the PCs where they stand. The new abomination uses warping flux to teleport behind the PCs’ front ranks to worry controllers and ranged strikers with claw attacks. Thereafter, if the warped cultist becomes marked, it uses warp step to stay out of its enemy’s reach, charging another enemy as they reappear. The warped cultists fight to the death. The destrachan far voice helps with the cultists since their ambition is not far off from its own—creating death and madness. This said, it is not particularly loyal, and when it attacks, it freely catches the warped cultists in its attacks if they get in its way. The destrachan moves to use bellowing blast and then scuttles away, peppering the PCs with sound pulse until its blast attack recharges. If two or more enemies come within 2 squares of it, it uses reverberate and then slips away to blast the offending enemies once more. The destrachan fights to the death. The orc miners want no part in the struggle, but as long as the warped cultists live, they fight the PCs. They work together, all four striking one character at a time. The orc miners surrender if the warped cultists are slain.
Illumination: Each warped cultist carries a shining necklace, shedding bright light in a 5-square radius. Rubble: Squares containing rubble count as difficult terrain. Precipice: A sheer cliff rises 30 feet at the cavern’s northern end, marking the end of room 6. Climbing the cliff requires a DC 15 Athletics check. Tools: Scattered throughout the chamber are six picks, four shovels, a lantern, and two sunrods.
Conclusion If any of the orc miners live long enough to surrender, they might be convinced to help the adventurers. Getting their help requires a complexity 1 skill challenge (4 successes before 3 failures) with DC 10 Bluff, Diplomacy, or Intimidate checks. If any character failed a saving throw to avoid becoming infected by chaos phage, the PCs take a –5 penalty to all checks related to this skill challenge. A victory ensures the orc miners remain loyal enough to aid the PCs through one combat. A failure indicates the orcs won’t hinder the PCs, but they won’t help either and they try to escape at their first opportunity. The orcs, if made friendly, also volunteer information about the happenings in the tunnels. They explain the cultists have brought prisoners into the tunnels and do terrible things to them. They know the cultists can be found beyond the cliff, but warn the heroes that restless dead guard that path. The orcs also tell the PCs that a queer idol lurks down the side passage and that many crazed cultists worship it.
Januar y 20 09
|
D U N G E O N 16 2
16
Fist of Mourning
F3: ENTROPIC THRALLS Encounter Level 10 (2,500 XP)
Setup 1 suppurating eidolon (E) 2 warped cultists (C) 4 wretched and unclean (U) A warped cultist leaves the chamber containing the eidolon. The rest of the inhabitants gather around the idol, where they offer it prayers and sacrifices of their own flesh. The warped cultist is bound for room 3 when the PCs come within his line of sight. If the characters succeed on a DC 15 Stealth check, they take the room’s denizens by surprise. Furthermore, if the characters kill the warped cultist before the start of the next round, the PCs can also take a move action before the start of the next round since the other cultists are oblivious to anything but their agony. When the PCs see a warped cultist, read: A heaving wretch wrapped in sodden rags surges forward, brandishing a greatsword. You see things moving beneath its skin.
Chaos Phage
Suppurating Eidolon (E) Level 12 Controller (Leader)
2 Warped Cultists (C)
Large elemental animate (construct) XP 700 Initiative +8 Senses Perception +9 Fearless Followers aura 5; allies within the aura are immune to fear. HP 123; Bloodied 61 AC 27; Fortitude 25, Reflex 22, Will 23 Immune disease, fear, sleep Speed 5 m Slam (standard; at-will) Reach 2; +17 vs. AC; 2d6 + 5 damage. C Curse of Madness (immediate reaction, when an enemy attacks the eidolon while unspeakable stance is active; at-will) ✦ Psychic Tendrils of filthy darkness penetrate the creature that triggered the attack: close burst 10; targets the triggering enemy; +16 vs. Will; 1d8 + 5 psychic damage, and the target is dominated until the end of the suppurating eidolon’s next turn. Miss: Half damage, and the target is instead dazed until the end of the suppurating eidolon’s next turn. C Caustic Inundation (immediate reaction, when an enemy kills one of the suppurating eidolon’s allies in the eidolon’s line of sight; at-will) ✦ Acid Close burst 3; targets enemies; +14 vs. Reflex; 1d8 + 5 acid damage. Unspeakable Stance (standard; at-will) ✦ Psychic The suppurating eidolon assumes a meditative stance. Until the end of its next turn, the eidolon gains resist 20 to all damage, and allies in its line of sight deal 1d6 extra psychic damage on their melee attacks. If the eidolon moves, the effect ends. Alignment Chaotic evil Languages — Str 21 (+11) Dex 14 (+8) Wis 16 (+9) Con 19 (+10) Int 6 (+4) Cha 11 (+6)
Medium elemental humanoid, human, slaad XP 700 each Initiative +10 Senses Perception +5 HP 122; Bloodied 61; see also bloodied transformation AC 24; Fortitude 25, Reflex 22, Will 23 Immune chaos phage (see below) Speed 5; see also warp step m Greatsword (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon +17 vs. AC; 2d6 + 5 damage. C Reckless Arc (standard; encounter) ✦ Weapon Requires greatsword; close burst 1; +17 vs. AC; 4d6 + 5 damage. Effect: The warped cultist grants combat advantage to any enemy until the start of its next turn. Bloodied Transformation (when first bloodied) ✦ Polymorph A slaad abomination rips itself free from the cultist’s body. Until the end of the encounter, the warped cultist gains a +2 to all defenses, low-light vision, and can use the claws, warping flux, and warp step powers. However, the warped cultist can no longer use its greatsword or reckless arc powers. m Claws (standard; usable only while affected by bloodied transformation; at-will) ✦ Disease +17 vs. AC; 2d4 + 5 damage, and the warped cultist makes a secondary attack against the same target. Secondary Attack: +15 vs. Fortitude; the target contracts chaos phage (see below). C Warping Flux (standard; usable only while affected by bloodied transformation; encounter) ✦ Psychic, Teleportation Close burst 3; +13 vs. Will; 1d6 + 3 psychic damage, the target teleports 3 squares, and the target is dazed (save ends). Miss: No damage, the target teleports 3 squares, and is dazed until the end of the warped cultist’s next turn. Warp Step (move; usable only while affected by bloodied transformation; at-will) ✦ Teleportation The warped cultist teleports 1d6 squares. Alignment Chaotic evil Languages Common, Primordial Skills Athletics +15, Stealth +12 Str 21 (+11) Dex 15 (+8) Wis 9 (+5) Con 18 (+10) Int 8 (+5) Cha 17 (+9) Equipment chainmail, greatsword, shining medallion
Level 16 Disease
Endurance improve DC 25, maintain DC 20, worsen DC 19 or lower The target is cured.
!
Initial Effect: A slaad embryo is implanted in the target.
!"
The target takes a –2 penalty to Will. While bloodied, the target succumbs to madness and attacks the nearest creature.
"
Level 12 Skirmisher
The target dies, and a slaad tadpole burrows out of its skull (see MM 237).
Januar y 20 09
|
D U N G E O N 16 2
17
Fist of Mourning
When the PCs see a wretched and unclean, read: Clearly once human, this vile creature is a mass of dripping flesh and exposed bones, yet somehow still alive. When the PCs see the suppurating eidolon, read: A grotesque statue, all its contorted faces wailing and vomiting ichors, comes to life and steps down from its pedestal to face you. 4 Wretched and Unclean (U) Level 9 Minion Brute Medium elemental humanoid, human XP 100 each Initiative +9 Senses Perception +3 HP 1; a missed attack never damages a minion; see also corrosive eruption AC 23; Fortitude 22, Reflex 21, Will 20 Resist 5 acid Speed 6 m Claws (standard; at-will) +14 vs. AC; 5 damage. C Corrosive Eruption (when reduced to 0 hit points) ✦ Acid Close burst 3; +10 vs. Reflex; 5 acid damage. Alignment Chaotic evil Languages Common Str 19 (+8) Dex 17 (+7) Wis 8 (+3) Con 14 (+6) Int 12 (+5) Cha 14 (+6) Equipment rags
Tactics The warped cultists throw themselves against the PCs, exposing themselves to danger to trigger their bloodied transformation. Once freed, the warped cultists attack one character and then use warp step so they can attack another character. They repeat this tactic until each character has been exposed to chaos phage. The warped cultists fight to the death. The wretched and unclean support the warped cultists, each too far devolved to do much more than rend flesh with their claws. They sacrifice themselves gladly, moving into position where they can attack several enemies with corrosive eruption when they are inevitably cut down. The most important combatant, though, is the suppurating eidolon. It steps down from its pedestal and moves so it can keep all its allies in its line of sight. This way they can benefit from its unspeakable stance. Once the wretched and unclean are destroyed, the suppurating eidolon exits its stance, joins the fight, and makes slam attacks each round.
Features of the Area Illumination: Each cultist wears a shining medallion and sheds bright light in a 5-square radius. Rubble: Squares containing rubble count as difficult terrain.
Januar y 20 09
|
D U N G E O N 16 2
18
Fist of Mourning
F4: OUTRAGED DEAD Encounter Level 11 (3,000 XP)
Setup Kalan the Avenger (K) 4 skeletal hammerer (H) These animated remains of dwarf warriors were defeated by the cult and driven into the mines, where they plot their revenge.
Kalan the Avenger (K)
Level 14 Soldier (Leader)
Medium natural animate (undead) XP 1,000 Initiative +10 Senses Perception +12; darkvision Flames of Vengeance (Fire) aura 1; allies who start their turns within the aura deal 5 extra fire damage on melee attacks. HP 141; Bloodied 70 AC 28; Fortitude 28, Reflex 24, Will 27 Immune disease, poison; Resist 10 necrotic; Vulnerable 5 radiant Speed 5 m Fiery Warhammer (standard; at-will) ✦ Fire, Weapon +19 vs. AC; 1d10 + 7 damage plus 1d6 fire damage, and the target is marked until the end of Dalan’s next turn. A Volcanic Burst (standard; recharge 4 5 6) ✦ Fire Area burst 1 within 10; +15 vs. Reflex; 1d6 + 5 fire damage, and the target is pulled 5 squares. Back on Your Feet (immediate reaction, when an ally within line of sight is reduced to 0 hit points; encounter) ✦ Healing The ally regains 20 hit points, stands immediately, and makes a melee basic attack as a free action. Stand Your Ground When an effect forces Dalan to move—through a pull, a push, or a slide—Dalan moves 1 square less than the effect specifies. When an attack would knock Dalan prone, he can roll a saving throw to avoid falling prone. Alignment Unaligned Languages Common, Dwarven Str 23 (+13) Dex 13 (+8) Wis 20 (+12) Con 21 (+12) Int 9 (+6) Cha 14 (+9) Equipment plate armor, warhammer
When the PCs can see this room, read: Rubble litters the floor. Rising from the debris, you see a number of dwarf-sized skeletons, their eyes burning with hatred. Purplish light shines from a higher opening at the top of the far wall.
4 Skeletal Hammerers (H)
Level 10 Brute
Medium natural animate (undead) XP 500 each Initiative +10 Senses Perception +12; darkvision HP 126; Bloodied 63 AC 23; Fortitude 22, Reflex 23, Will 20 Immune disease, poison; Resist 10 necrotic; Vulnerable 5 radiant Speed 7 m Pounding Hammers (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon The skeletal hammerer makes two warhammer attacks against the same target: +13 vs. AC; 1d10 + 4 damage. If both attacks hit the same target, it is pushed 2 squares after the attack. M Hammerfall (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon The skeletal hammerer makes two pounding hammer attacks (four attacks total). M Sudden Strike (immediate reaction, when an adjacent enemy shifts; at-will) ✦ Weapon The skeletal hammer makes a melee basic attack against the enemy that triggered the attack. Alignment Unaligned Languages — Str 18 (+9) Dex 20 (+10) Wis 14 (+7) Con 16 (+8) Int 3 (+1) Cha 3 (+1) Equipment 4 warhammers
Tactics The skeletal hammerers engage the closest enemies. Kalan uses volcanic burst during the first round, targeting characters in the back, and then he closes to fight in melee where his presence boosts his allies’ attacks.
Features of the Area Illumination: Light from room 17 fills this chamber with dim light. Precipice: A sheer cliff rises 30 feet at the cavern’s northern end, marking the end of room 6. Climbing the cliff requires a DC 15 Athletics check.
Januar y 20 09
|
D U N G E O N 16 2
19
Fist of Mourning
F5: HIDEOUS CULTISTS
Anax the Foul
Encounter Level 12 (3,500 XP)
Setup Anax the Foul (A) 1 gray slaad (G) 2 warped cultists (C) 3 mutated thralls (T) The creatures do not appear until the PCs open the doors in room 1. The sound draws them from their hiding places. When the creatures emerge, read: Three mobile tumors, bodies fat and glistening, waddle out onto the ledge. They have spindly arms ending in blackened hands clutching greasy filth. A whip-thin humanoid comes round the corner, greatsword in his hands. His face is a nightmare of scars, and worms wriggle beneath the shiny tissue. When the PCs see the gray slaad, read: An ungainly humanoid—a cross between a man and a toad—croaks at you. Reality rejects its presence, because light bends and wavers as it falls across its hideous form. Chaos Phage
Level 13 Controller (Leader)
Medium elemental humanoid, human XP 800 Initiative +8 Senses Perception +9; low-light vision Intoxicating Musk (Poison) aura 3; all creatures other than Anax who start their turns within the aura take a –2 penalty to attack rolls and their melee attacks gain a +5 bonus to damage rolls. HP 128; Bloodied 64 AC 27; Fortitude 24, Reflex 25, Will 27 Immune chaos phage (see below) Speed 6 m Bewildering Caress (standard; at-will) ✦ Fear +18 vs. AC; 1d4 + 2 damage, and Anax makes a secondary attack against the same target. Secondary Attack: +17 vs. Will; the target is dominated until the end of Anax’s next turn. R Madness Blossoms (standard; at-will) ✦ Psychic Ranged 20; +17 vs. Reflex; 1d6 + 5 psychic damage, and the target is dazed until the end of Anax’s next turn. A Elemental Conflagration (standard; recharge 6) Area burst 1 within 10; +15 vs. Reflex; 1d8 + 6 damage, and the target slides 3 squares and grants combat advantage to any enemy (save ends). C Corrosive Vomit (immediate reaction, when hit by a melee attack; encounter) ✦ Acid Close blast 5; +15 vs. Reflex; 2d6 + 6 acid damage, and ongoing 10 acid damage (save ends). Alignment Chaotic evil Languages Common, Primordial Skills Arcana +15, Endurance +13, Insight +9 Str 9 (+5) Dex 14 (+8) Wis 6 (+4) Con 16 (+8) Int 19 (+10) Cha 23 (+12) Equipment robes, fleshy orb
Level 16 Disease
Endurance improve DC 25, maintain DC 20, worsen DC 19 or lower The target is cured.
!
Initial Effect: A slaad embryo is implanted in the target.
!"
The target takes a –2 penalty to Will. While bloodied, the target succumbs to madness and attacks the nearest creature.
"
The target dies, and a slaad tadpole burrows out of its skull (see MM 237).
Gray Slaad (G)
Level 13 Skirmisher
Medium elemental humanoid XP 800 Initiative +12 Senses Perception +7; low-light vision HP 128; Bloodied 64; see also planar flux AC 27; Fortitude 25, Reflex 26, Will 24 Immune chaos phage (see below) Speed 6, teleport 4 m Claws (standard; at-will) ✦ Disease +18 vs. AC; 2d8 + 2 damage, and the slaad makes a secondary attack against the same target. Secondary Attack: +16 vs. Fortitude; on a hit, the target contracts chaos phage (see below). R Condition Transfer (immediate reaction, when hit by an attack that applies any condition; recharge 5 6) Ranged 5; +16 vs. Fortitude; conditions applied by the triggering attack affect the target instead of the slaad. C Induce Planar Instability (standard; encounter) Close burst 3; +16 vs. Will; 1d8 + 2 damage, and the target shifts 3 squares and is knocked prone. Planar Flux (free, when first bloodied; encounter) ✦ Teleportation The slaad teleports 8 squares and becomes insubstantial until the end of its next turn. Alignment Chaotic evil Languages Primordial Skills Athletics +13, Stealth +15 Str 15 (+8) Dex 18 (+10) Wis 12 (+7) Con 16 (+9) Int 9 (+5) Cha 14 (+8)
4 Mutated Thralls (T)
Level 10 Minion
Medium elemental humanoid, human XP 125 each Initiative +10 Senses Perception +4 HP 1; a missed attack never damages a minion AC 24; Fortitude 21, Reflex 24, Will 19 Speed 7 m Tentacles (standard; at-will) +14 vs. AC; 6 damage, and slide the target 1 square. r Gobs of Filth (standard; at-will) ✦ Poison Ranged 5; +17 vs. AC; 6 poison damage. Alignment Chaotic evil Languages Common Str 17 (+8) Dex 22 (+11) Wis 8 (+4) Con 12 (+6) Int 6 (+3) Cha 13 (+6) Equipment rags
Januar y 20 09
|
D U N G E O N 16 2
20
Fist of Mourning
2 Warped Cultists (C)
Level 12 Skirmisher
Medium elemental humanoid, human, slaad XP 700 each Initiative +10 Senses Perception +5 HP 122; Bloodied 61; see also bloodied transformation AC 24; Fortitude 25, Reflex 22, Will 23 Immune chaos phage (see below) Speed 5; see also warp step m Greatsword (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon +17 vs. AC; 2d6 + 5 damage. C Reckless Arc (standard; encounter) ✦ Weapon Requires greatsword; close burst 1; +17 vs. AC; 4d6 + 5 damage. Effect: The warped cultist grants combat advantage to any enemy until the start of its next turn. Bloodied Transformation (when first bloodied) ✦ Polymorph A slaad abomination rips itself free from the cultist’s body. Until the end of the encounter, the warped cultist gains a +2 to all defenses, low-light vision, and can use the claws, warping flux, and warp step powers. However, the warped cultist can no longer use its greatsword or reckless arc powers. m Claws (standard; usable only while affected by bloodied transformation; at-will) ✦ Disease +17 vs. AC; 2d4 + 5 damage, and the warped cultist makes a secondary attack against the same target. Secondary Attack: +15 vs. Fortitude; the target contracts chaos phage (see below). C Warping Flux (standard; usable only while affected by bloodied transformation; encounter) ✦ Psychic, Teleportation Close burst 3; +13 vs. Will; 1d6 + 3 psychic damage, the target teleports 3 squares, and the target is dazed (save ends). Miss: No damage, the target teleports 3 squares, and is dazed until the end of the warped cultist’s next turn. Warp Step (move; usable only while affected by bloodied transformation; at-will) ✦ Teleportation The warped cultist teleports 1d6 squares. Alignment Chaotic evil Languages Common, Primordial Skills Athletics +15, Stealth +12 Str 21 (+11) Dex 15 (+8) Wis 9 (+5) Con 18 (+10) Int 8 (+5) Cha 17 (+9) Equipment chainmail, greatsword, shining medallion
When the PCs see Anax, read: You catch a faint, strangely pleasant odor when you first see this misshapen human dressed in lilac robes. With a thatch of greasy red hair pasted to his smooth skull, he seems perverse—wrong somehow. He pulls his hand up to reveal a shuddering tumor spilling foulness through his fingers and down his upraised arm. He cackles madly as the f leshy orb quivers in similar delight.
Tactics The mutated thralls hold their positions on the ledge and throw gobs of filth at the characters closest to them. As with the other warped cultists, the ones found here are reckless, and they expose themselves to attacks to trigger their bloodied transformation. The cultists and the mutated thralls fight to the death. Anax and the gray slaad support their lackeys. Anax keeps the warped cultists inside the aura of his intoxicating musk and uses elemental conf lagration at the encounter’s start. While waiting for this power to recharge, he throws madness blossoms and gropes adjacent enemies with bewildering caress. Anax fights until the gray slaad is slain, at which point he retreats to the landing, where he shouts a warning to the enemies in room 14 and makes a stand there. The gray slaad teleports around the battlefield, training its attacks against low-Fortitude enemies such as wizards, rogues, and the like. It uses planar instability only if faced with two or more foes at once. The slaad fights until slain.
Features of the Area Illumination: The warped cultists each wear medallions that shed bright light in a 5-square radius. Stairs: Spaces containing stairs count as difficult terrain. Ledge: The ledge stands 10 feet above the floor. Climbing the wall requires a DC 20 Athletics check. A fall from the ledge deals 1d10 damage. Statues and Pillars: The statues in room 8 and the pillars in room 10 are stone. Each has an AC 4; Fortitude 10, Reflex 4, and 50 hit points. Reducing a statue to 0 hit points fills its square with rubble and the square counts as difficult terrain until cleared.
Januar y 20 09
|
D U N G E O N 16 2
21
Fist of Mourning
SC3: CONGRESS WITH THE DEAD
Congress with the Dead Skill Challenge
Level 10 (500 XP)
To gain the ghost’s aid, the PCs must convince it of their good intentions. Complexity 1 (requires 4 successes before 3 failures). Primary Skills Diplomacy, History, Insight Other Skills Bluff, Intimidate Victory Murat believes the adventurers and grants them a boon (see Treasure). Defeat The ghost disbelieves the characters and vanishes, but not before stealing a healing surge from each character within 5 squares. Diplomacy DC 16 (1 success, no maximum) Characters who spent at least 5 minutes reading the inscriptions in room 8 gain a +2 bonus to Diplomacy checks. Paying the fallen hero proper respect, the PC explains the reason for being here. History DC 16 (1 success, 1 maximum) Characters who spent at least 5 minutes reading the inscriptions in room 8 gain a +2 bonus to History checks. The PC recounts some of the dwarf ’s great deeds. Insight DC 16 (1 success, 2 maximum) In addition to counting as a success, a character also gains a +2 bonus to its next Diplomacy check. A failed Insight check also results in a –2 penalty to the next Diplomacy check made, and closes off future uses of this skill. The PC watches the ghost, trying to read its emotions though centuries stand between the PC’s life and his. Bluff DC 21 (1 success, no maximum) A failed check cancels all other successes and closes off future uses of the Bluff skill for this challenge. The PC tries to deceive the dwarf, masking the PC’s true intentions behind a lie. Intimidate DC 21 (1 success, no maximum) An Intimidate check results in an automatic failure. In addition to counting as a failure, the character making the Intimidate check loses 1 healing surge. Bluster and threats are the PC’s weapons against this old fool.
Setup When the PCs enter this room, read: Wide pillars featuring reliefs depicting axes and hammers march down to the chamber’s end on either side. Centered between them, against the far wall, stands a stone sarcophagus, its lid shattered and lying on the f loor. When a PC comes within 3 squares of the sarcophagus, read: The temperature plunges as a ghostly form rises from the tomb. A dwarf, with a long beard, hard eyes beneath bushy eyebrows, and wearing spectral plate armor with a great hammer slung over his back, examines you and speaks: “You! Why have you violated this sacred place?” Murat’s ghost does not fight the PCs and vanishes if attacked. However, if the PCs speak with the ghost and treat it with respect, they might gain his aid in defeating the cultists. Begin the skill challenge. Treasure (Parcel 2): If the characters succeeded on the skill challenge, Murat rewards them with a +3 thundering warhammer. A failed skilled challenge requires the characters to succeed on a DC 21 Perception check to find the hammer. It is within a secret compartment beneath the sarcophagus.
Level 10 XP 500
The ghost regards you with suspicion, awaiting an explanation for why you disturbed his rest.
Januar y 20 09
|
D U N G E O N 16 2
22
Fist of Mourning
F6: LIVING STATUES? Encounter Level 11 (3,000 XP)
Setup Animating spirit (A) 1 beholder eye of f lame (E) 3 shardsoul slayers (S) What once captured Murat’s greatest victories in stone is now a mustering place for the cult’s greatest thralls. Awaiting the final preparations and emergence of the mutated host in the upper chambers beyond, they loiter here. The beholder passes the time scorching the occasional rat with its fire ray and hovers in the darkness near the ceiling. Three shardsoul slayers, each containing a fragment of a long dead primordial, linger near the statues, while a malevolent spirit flits about the room, too terrified of the creatures to attack them directly. When the PCs see the beholder, read: A large ruddy red sphere f loats near the ceiling, spinning and fixing you with its horrible eyes. When the PCs see a shardsoul slayer, read: The shadows coalesce into a strange, horned automaton. A fiery red eye burns in the center of its head.
Tactics The denizens attack when the PCs enter the room. The beholder stays out of melee reach but descends so the PCs are within 4 squares to keep them in its aura. While the constructs keep the strikers and defenders busy, the beholder targets ranged characters with
Beholder Eye of Flame (E)
Level 13 Elite Artillery
Large aberrant magical beast XP 1,600 Initiative +11 Senses Perception +15; all-around vision, darkvision Eyes of the Beholder aura 5; at the start of each enemy’s turns, if that creature is within the aura and in the eye of flame’s line of sight, the eye of flame uses one random eye ray power against that creature. HP 204; Bloodied 102; see also fiery burst AC 26; Fortitude 26, Reflex 27, Will 28 Saving Throws +2 Speed fly 6 (hover) Action Points 1 m Bite (standard; at-will) +18 vs. AC; 2d6 damage. R Central Eye (minor; at-will) Ranged 8; the target gains vulnerable 10 fire, and any attack that deals fire damage to the target also deals ongoing 5 fire damage (save ends both). R Eye Rays (standard; at-will) ✦ see text The eye of flame can use up to two eye ray powers (chosen from the list below), at least one of which must be a fire ray. Each power must target a different creature. Using eye rays does not provoke opportunity attacks. 1—Fire Ray (Fire): Ranged 8; +17 vs. Reflex; 2d8 + 6 fire damage. 2—Telekinesis Ray: Ranged 8; +17 vs. Fortitude; the target slides 4 squares. 3—Fear Ray (Fear): Ranged 8; +17 vs. Will; the target moves its speed away from the eye of flame by the safest route possible and takes a –2 penalty to attack rolls (save ends). C Fiery Burst (when first bloodied and again when the eye of flame is reduced to 0 hit points) ✦ Fire Close burst 2; +17 vs. Reflex; 2d8 + 6 fire damage. Alignment Evil Languages Deep Speech Str 10 (+6) Dex 20 (+11) Wis 19 (+10) Con 18 (+10) Int 14 (+8) Cha 23 (+12)
its central eye followed by its fire ray. As long as the animating spirit is present, the beholder uses its telekinesis ray to slide an enemy into a space adjacent to a statue. It resorts to its fear ray only if an enemy comes too close.
3 Shardsoul Slayers (S)
Level 8 Soldier
Medium elemental animate (construct) XP 350 each Initiative +13 Senses Perception +5; darkvision Deranging Aura (Charm) aura 5; any enemy who starts its turn within the aura take a –2 penalty to attack rolls and gain a +2 bonus to damage rolls. Each enemy whose attack misses the shardsoul slayer must make a melee basic attack against the nearest ally within reach as a free action. HP 90; Bloodied 45; see also shardsoul release AC 23; Fortitude 21, Reflex 20, Will 18 Immune disease, poison; Resist 5 radiant Speed 6, jump 4 m Claw (standard; at-will) +14 vs. AC; 1d8 + 5 damage, and the target is marked until the end of the shardsoul slayer’s next turn. M Slaying Frenzy (standard; recharge 5 6) The shardsoul slayer makes two claw attacks. If either attack hits a target marked by the shardsoul slayer, or if both attacks hit the same target, that target is also dazed until the end of the slayer’s next turn. R Shardsoul Release (when reduced to 0 hit points) Ranged 10; affects one other shardsoul of the shardsoul slayer’s level or lower; the target can take one extra standard action on each of its next two turns. Focused Killer (immediate interrupt, when an adjacent enemy marked by the shardsoul slayer shifts; at-will) The shardsoul slayer makes a claw attack against that enemy. Skyfall Charge When a shardsoul slayer charges, it deals 1d8 extra damage. Alignment Chaotic evil Languages understands Common, Primordial Str 21 (+9) Dex 18 (+8) Wis 3 (+0) Con 17 (+7) Int 6 (+2) Cha 15 (+6) Equipment greatsword
The shardsoul slayers spring out of their hiding places, charging the closest PC and then following up on the next round with slaying frenzy. The slayers, knowing the animating spirit’s tactics, pull back to lure the PCs into spaces adjacent to the statues while their slaying frenzy powers recharge.
Januar y 20 09
|
D U N G E O N 16 2
23
Fist of Mourning
The animating spirit flies to the nearest statue with a PC adjacent to it and then attacks. Each round, it flies to a new statue and attacks again. All creatures and the hazard fight to the death.
Features of the Area Illumination: This room is dark. Ceiling: The ceiling is 60 feet overhead. Statues: There are eleven statues in all, each depicting a different kind of creature. They include the following creatures: dragon, beholder, minotaur, marilith, pit fiend, shadar-kai, a weird jellyfish creature with eyestalks, owlbear, an earth titan, an ice archon, and a carrion crawler. The statues are all scaled down or up so they are the same size. See below for statistics. Stairs: A set of stairs leads up to room 15. Squares containing the stairs count as difficult terrain.
Animating Spirit (A) Hazard
Level 8 Lurker XP 350
A cruel spirit flits from statue to statue, animating the stone to deliver a nasty attack to the unprepared. Hazard: An invisible spirit moves into a statue’s space and smashes intruders with the statue’s animated appendages. Perception ✦ DC 19: The character notices a disturbance in the animating spirit’s space, thus revealing the hazard’s position until it moves again. Additional Skill: Arcana ✦ DC 14: The character recognizes the nature of the animating spirit, including its attack. Trigger When a living creature other than the beholder enters the room, the animating spirit rolls initiative and it moves on its turn. If it ends its movement in a space containing a statue, it attacks one adjacent enemy. Speed fly 4 Attack Standard Action Melee 1 Target: One creature Attack: +13 vs. AC Hit: 1d8 + 5 damage, and the target is knocked prone. If the target grants the animating spirit combat advantage, the hazard deals 2d8 extra damage. Countermeasures ✦ A character can attack a statue animated by a spirit. The statue has an AC 4; Fortitude 10, Reflex 4; 50 hit points. An attack that hits the statue also damages and pushes the animating spirit 1 square. ✦ A character can attack the spirit when it is not in a space containing the statue. The spirit is invisible and has an AC 23; all other defenses 19, 50 hit points; vulnerable 5 radiant. Destroying the animating spirit ends the hazard.
Januar y 20 09
|
D U N G E O N 16 2
24
Fist of Mourning
F7: BEYOND THE PALE
2 Red Slaad (R)
E n co u n te r L eve l 1 4 ( 5 , 2 0 0 X P )
Setup Obsen (Z) 2 red slaads (R) 3 horrid spawn (H) Obsen, the cult leader, performs the final incantations for the ritual to complete his victims’ transformations into horrific abominations. It’s best if he’s nearing the end of his ritual when the PCs arrive, but if they took too many extended rests before getting here, you might consider altering the encounter, possibly adding additional horrid spawn or having the tunnels leading up to this encounter filled with these twisted wretches. In any event, two red slaad look on eagerly, while three “early adopters” step free from the gelatinous webbing to serve their new master at the start of the second round. When the characters enter, have them make Stealth checks against the passive Perceptions of everyone in this room (20 for Obsen, 18 for the slaad, and 11 for the spawn) to see which opponents are surprised. Perception Check DC 26: Two hulking humanoid figures loiter beyond the curtains.
Chaos Phage
Level 15 Soldier
Large elemental humanoid XP 1,200 each Initiative +13 Senses Perception +8; low-light vision HP 146; Bloodied 73 AC 29; Fortitude 28, Reflex 29, Will 25 Immune chaos phage (see below) Speed 8, teleport 4 m Bite (standard; at-will) Reach 2; +21 vs. AC; 2d8 + 6 damage. m Claw (standard; at-will) ✦ Disease Reach 2; +21 vs. AC; 1d6 + 3 damage, and the slaad makes a secondary attack against the same target. Secondary Attack: +19 vs. Fortitude; on a hit, the target contracts chaos phage (see below). M Leaping Pounce (standard; recharge 5 6) The slaad shifts 4 squares and makes two claw attacks. If either claw attack hits, the target is marked until the end of the slaad’s next turn. C Horrid Croak (standard; encounter) ✦ Fear Close blast 5; +19 vs. Fortitude; the target is immobilized until the end of the slaad’s next turn. Alignment Chaotic evil Languages Primordial Skills Athletics +15, Stealth +16 Str 17 (+10) Dex 19 (+11) Wis 12 (+8) Con 18 (+11) Int 11 (+7) Cha 15 (+9)
When the PCs can see Obsen clearly, read: A horrific figure emerges from the slimy tendrils. Nude, genderless, and sporting terrifying growths that inf late and release, its flesh bristles with grasping tentacles, slackened maws, and spurting blue flames from dimpled holes in its f lesh. Its hands are black with old blood and it grips a f leshy knife in its left hand.
Level 16 Disease
Endurance improve DC 25, maintain DC 20, worsen DC 19 or lower The target is cured.
!
Initial Effect: A slaad embryo is implanted in the target.
!"
The target takes a –2 penalty to Will. While bloodied, the target succumbs to madness and attacks the nearest creature.
"
The target dies, and a slaad tadpole burrows out of its skull (see MM 237).
Obsen (Z)
Level 13 Elite Controller (Leader)
Medium elemental humanoid, human XP 1,600 Initiative +9 Senses Perception +10 Entropic Imperative aura 3; allies who start their turns within the aura gain a +2 bonus to attack rolls and damage rolls. HP 256; Bloodied 128 AC 29; Fortitude 24, Reflex 27, Will 27 Saving Throws +2 Speed 6; see also chaos stride Action Points 1 m Chaos Blade (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon +18 vs. AC; 1d4 + 3 damage, and the target is stunned until the end of Obsen’s next turn. R Tumescent Nodule (standard; at-will, usable 4/day) ✦ Acid, Poison Obsen rips a nodule from his body and hurls it at an enemy within range: Obsen takes 5 damage: Ranged 5/10; +17 vs. Reflex; 1d6 + 5 acid damage, and ongoing 5 poison damage (save ends). Each creature adjacent to the target takes 5 acid damage. A Chaos Seed (standard; sustain: minor; encounter) ✦ Zone Area burst 2 within 10; targets enemies; +15 vs. Will; on a hit, the target is dazed and makes a melee basic attack against one ally adjacent to it. Miss: The target is dazed and does not make an attack. Effect: The burst creates a zone that persists until the end of Obsen’s next turn. Obsen can sustain the effect by spending a minor action, and can move the zone 3 squares by spending a move action. Any creature that starts its turn inside the zone is subject to another attack. C Chaos Blast (standard; recharge 4 5 6) Close blast 5; +15 vs. Fortitude; 2d8 + 6 damage, and the target grants combat advantage to any enemy (save ends). Aftereffect: The target takes 5 damage. R Writhing Chaos (standard; encounter) ✦ Teleportation Three ribbons of light appear in the air and attack: Ranged 10; three targets; +15 vs. Reflex, three attacks; 1d8 + 6 damage, and the target teleports to a square of Obsen’s choosing within 5 squares of him. C Chaos Stride (minor; recharge when first bloodied) ✦ Teleportation Close burst 1; +15 vs. Will; 1d8 + 6 damage, and the target is dazed (save ends). After the attack, Obsen teleports 1 square for each enemy he hit with this attack. Alignment Chaotic evil Languages Common, Primordial Skills Arcana +17, Dungeoneering +10, History +17, Nature +10 Str 11 (+6) Dex 17 (+9) Wis 8 (+5) Con 16 (+9) Int 23 (+12) Cha 19 (+10) Equipment chaos blade, 4 tumescent nodules Januar y 20 09
|
D U N G E O N 16 2
25
Fist of Mourning
3 Horrid Spawn (H)
Level 9 Brute
Medium elemental humanoid, human XP 400 each Initiative +7 Senses Perception +1 Sickening Stench aura 2; any living enemy that starts its turn within the aura takes a –2 penalty to attack rolls. HP 120; Bloodied 60 AC 21; Fortitude 23, Reflex 21, Will 20 Immune chaos phage (see below), fear Speed 5 m Toothy Tentacle (standard; at-will) Reach 2; +12 vs. AC; 2d6 + 5 damage, and if the target moves, shifts, or is forcibly moved before the start of the horrid spawn’s next turn, it takes 5 extra damage. M Mutilating Rend (standard; recharge when a horrid spawn reduces an enemy to 0 hit points) Reach 2; +12 vs. AC; 4d6 + 5 damage, and ongoing 5 damage (save ends). Aftereffect: The target is dazed until the end of its next turn. Shuddering Delight (when a horrid spawn reduces an enemy to 0 hit points) The horrid spawn gains 20 temporary hit points, but grants combat advantage to any enemy until the start of its next turn. Alignment Chaotic evil Languages understands Common and Primordial Str 21 (+9) Dex 17 (+7) Wis 4 (+1) Con 20 (+9) Int 5 (+1) Cha 14 (+6) Equipment rags
When the PCs can see the slaad, read:
Features of the Area Illumination: The ghastly curtain fills the room with dim light. Gelatinous Curtains: Characters moving through a space containing the gelatinous curtains are subject to an attack: +21 vs. Fortitude; on a hit, the character is infected with chaos phage. Each square containing the curtain has an AC 10; Fortitude 12, Reflex 10, and 50 hit points. Reducing a square to 0 hit points destroys the curtain in that space.
Nine-foot tall monstrosities, each resembling red-skinned humanoid frogs, stride with heavy steps and issue gurgling croaks.
Tactics Obsen starts the combat by using chaos seed to create a shimmering zone of madness to disrupt its enemies’ actions and sow discord in their ranks. He then spends his action point to fling a tumescent nodule against a ranged striker, leader, or controller. On the subsequent rounds, he flings the rest of his nodules, switching to chaos blast when he gets a clear shot, or chaos stride if he’s surrounded. He fights to the death. The red slaads target defenders and melee strikers by using leaping pounce to infect them with chaos phage. Once an enemy is infected, it switches to bite attacks, abandoning the enemy once it’s bloodied to attack an uninfected enemy. The tight confines makes maneuvering difficult, and so one fights from the north side, while the other fights from the south. The horrid spawn attack the closest enemy each round until destroyed. G
About the Author Robert J. Schwalb contributed design to such books as the FORGOTTEN REALMS ® Player’s Guide, Draconomicon™ I: Chromatic Dragons, Manual of the Planes®, P2: Demon Queen’s Enclave, Martial Power ™ , Player’s Handbook® 2, Eberron® Campaign Guide, Eberron Player’s Guide, Adventurer’s Vault™ 2, Divine Power ™ , Draconomicon II: Metallic Dragons, and Primal Power ™ as well as numerous articles for D&D INSIDER®. Robert lives in Tennessee.
At the start of the second round, read: Three struggling shapes fall inside the curtain and unfold into maddening abominations—all claws, fangs, and slime.
Januar y 20 09
|
D U N G E O N 16 2
26
Beyond the Mottled Tower by Creighton Broadhurst, Bruce R. Cordell, and David Noonan illustrations by William O'Connor, and Chris Seaman cartography by Mike Schley TM & © 2009 Wizards of the Coast LLC All rights reserved.
“All my careful work destroyed by that traitorous bastard Modra and those ‘Heroes of Overlook.’ Now, I must begin again, seeking new allies on different worlds to make good my losses. But first, some vengeance on the Vale, as well as a way to eradicate all hints of my involvement with the githyanki. After all, anonymity is the key to any successful betrayal. . .”
Januar y 20 09
|
D U N G E O N 16 2
12
Beyond the Mottled Tower
“Beyond the Mottled Tower” is an adventure for five 11th-level characters. By the end of the adventure, the PCs should be midway to 13th level. This adventure is the first paragon adventure for the Scales of War adventure path. “Beyond the Mottled Tower” is the sequel to “The Temple Between,” or it can be adapted for use in your own ongoing campaign. In this adventure, the PCs receive an urgent summons from Overlook’s Council of Elders on behalf of Megan Swiftblade, leader of the Freeriders. Answering her call, the PCs witness the near-destruction of the village of Talar. Subsequent revelations propel them on a dangerous hunt for those responsible, before all Elsir Vale suffers the same fate.
BACKGROUND The shadar-kai arms dealer Sarshan has grown wealthy and powerful through his shadowy dealings. Over many years, Sarshan built up a vast, invisible mercantile empire supplying weapons, intelligence, and mercenaries to anyone with sufficient coin. Sarshan’s success (and continued survival) hinged in equal part on his clients’ discretion, his duplicitous nature, and his ruthless cunning. Sarshan is cautious, and his desire for anonymity is such that he has walked away from numerous deals that presented an unacceptably high risk of exposing his operation. However, one of Sarshan’s trusted lieutenants, the dark creeper Modra, betrayed his master when he supplied the orc war chief Tusk with arms and equipment for his attack on the folk of the Stonehome Mountains. Tusk’s subsequent defeat brought the PCs into direct contact with Sarshan’s operation for the first time.
THE QUESTS In “Beyond the Mottled Tower,” the PCs save the village of Talar from Sarshan’s attacks, then pursue the shadar-kai to his final lair. There, Sarshan’s threat can be ended once and for all. Minor Quest—Save Talar When the village of Talar is threatened with utter destruction by a flow of elemental blood chaos, the PCs must find its source beneath the Mottled Tower and eliminate those responsible. Reward: 600 XP. Major Quest—Defeat Sarshan By pursuing the agents attacking Talar, the PCs retrace their route through a vast swamp and finally to Sarshan’s new lair in the Elemental Chaos. There, they must run a gauntlet of deadly traps and defenders before finally facing off against the shadar-kai. Reward: 3,000 XP
Subsequently, in “The Shadow Rift of Umbraforge,” the treacherous Modra attempted to slay the PCs. Pursuing their assailant to the Shadowfell, the party discovered the shadar-kai’s fortress—the isolated citadel of Umbraforge. Its resultant destruction earned the PCs Sarshan’s relentless ire.
In the aftermath, another of Sarshan’s schemes was stymied in “The Temple Between.” The githyanki war leader General Zithiruun, a valued client and ally of the shadar-kai, was slain attempting to capture Overlook. Sarshan had worked with the disgraced githyanki for some time, funneling troops through the network of portals scattered across Elsir Vale and coordinating the assassination of troublemakers. The relationship was a profitable one for Sarshan, and its loss irked the shadar-kai greatly. These setbacks have badly damaged Sarshan and his carefully built operation. In an effort to salvage what he can of his power in the world, the shadar-kai has decided to destroy all evidence of his association with the githyanki. Sarshan has recently become aware that Megan Swiftblade, leader of the Freeriders, has discovered his association with General Zithiruun. Assassins sent by the shadar-kai have attempted to silence the Freeriders, but have succeeded only in forcing Megan to flee to her home village of Talar, near the town of Brindol. There, she has thrown herself on the mercy of an old family friend, the sage Falrinth. As the adventure begins, Sarshan’s servants have caught up with Megan and are about to unleash an indiscriminate assault on the village.
Fe b r u a r y 2 0 0 9
|
D U N G E O N 16 3
13
Beyond the Mottled Tower
ADVENTURE SYNOPSIS BLOOD CHAOS Blood chaos is a potent acidic distillation of raw elemental essence, first collected and refined from the Elemental Chaos by Djamela, a long-dead efreet conjurer. The efreet created this horrid ooze in the course of experimenting with the fundamental mutability of her home plane, storing it in a vast reservoir in her remote tower home. After Djamela’s death, Sarshan discovered the tower and its blood chaos stores. Recognizing the material’s potential as a weapon, he claimed the tower as his lair. Now, the shadar-kai forges plans to route the blood chaos by way of portals into Elsir Vale. This potent distillation of elemental energy burns inanimate objects and melts living flesh. A creature that enters or begins its turn in an area of blood chaos takes 2d6 + 3 acid and fire damage and is slowed (save ends). Blood chaos at a depth of 3 feet or less is difficult terrain. In deeper areas of blood chaos, creatures must use their swim speed or make a DC 10 Athletics check to move. They gain cover except against attacks from submerged enemies. Fighting in deep blood chaos imposes a –2 penalty to attack rolls except with spears and crossbows. Powers that have the fire keyword take a –2 penalty to attack rolls. On rare occasions, creatures who suffer exposure to blood chaos undergo horrid physical changes. This foul substance begins to imbue their physical nature with chaotic energy, disfiguring them but granting them powerful abilities.
Overlook’s Council of Elders has received a missive from Megan Swiftblade, begging their aid in the light of repeated assassination attempts against her and her group—the Freeriders. The letter also includes an intriguing note indicating that Megan has discovered who was behind General Zithiruun’s recent attack on the city. Megan is in hiding for her life, but asks that a courier be sent to the Green Dragon tavern in the village of Talar. The council summons the PCs, asking them to meet with Megan and assess the truth and value of her information. The PCs reach Talar without incident, but as they rest in the tavern waiting for Megan to make contact, an earthquake hits the area. However, before they flee the collapsing tavern, the PCs must aid other trapped patrons. When they finally reach the street, the screams of the fleeing populace herald the sight of an unearthly ooze—blood chaos—inundating and destroying nearby buildings. The PCs face off against several creatures lurking within the blood chaos. However, even as they determine that this deadly flow is emanating from a tunnel blasted out through the side of a nearby hill, the PCs see the tower atop the hill shudder and sink into the earth. In the aftermath, the PCs battle their way down through the tower, defeating a number of beasts freed by the earthquake, and rescuing the sage Falrinth, his servant, and Megan. In a cavern deep beneath the tower, the PCs discover that servants of Sarshan are behind the attack on the town, and are set to flee by way of a teleportation circle. After defeating them, the PCs glean enough information from Falrinth and Megan to
determine that this attack is just the first of many, and that Sarshan must be stopped for good. After activating the portal, the PCs arrive at the Ever-Tree—a living tower growing in the midst of a lake tainted with blood chaos. Immediately beset by a pair of green dragons, the PCs fight their way into the tunnels beneath the tree, catching their first glimpse of Sarshan as he flees. After defeating Sarshan’s guards, the PCs follow the shadar-kai through another portal to the Elemental Chaos. Arriving atop an earthberg drifting on the Sea of Fire, the PCs discover the monolithic tower that now serves as Sarshan’s lair. Inside, the shadar-kai has configured a portal network leading through the tower to pass through a series of guarded and trapped chambers. When they finally reach the roof, the PCs and Sarshan face each other in a final showdown.
SETTING “Beyond the Mottled Tower” plays out in three distinct sections. The adventure opens in the village of Talar moments before an earthquake strikes. Escaping the destruction, the PCs are drawn to the nearby Mottled Tower, home of the sage Falrinth, and the previously secret caves beneath it. From the tower, the party travels by portal to the Ever-Tree. This huge and ancient oak grows at the center of a lake tainted with blood chaos, and features a series of dank, noisome tunnels through which the PCs pursue Sarshan. In the end, the PCs travel to the Sea of Fire in the Elemental Chaos, within sight of the black walls of the City of Brass. A f loating island houses the obsidian tower in which the climax of the adventure plays out.
Fe b r u a r y 2 0 0 9
|
D U N G E O N 16 3
14
Beyond the Mottled Tower
STARTING THE ADVENTURE To get the adventure moving quickly, read the text below, then proceed to “Part 1: The Green Dragon”. The summons from the Council of Elders was sudden and unannounced. Standing once again in the High Hall, you are told that the Freeriders, led by Megan Swiftblade, have uncovered the identity of a powerful ally to General Zithiruun—an ally who helped prepare the recent attack on Overlook. Megan has since fled to the village of Talar in the face of repeated assassination attempts. In return for the name of the general’s mysterious benefactor, she has requested the council’s aid. The council, concerned that this mysterious figure might still have designs on the city, has dispatched you to rescue Megan, eliminate any immediate threat to her safety, and return her to Overlook. If you prefer a slower start to the adventure, give the players a chance to ease into the action and learn a bit more about recent events. The PCs can receive the Council of Elders’ summons while in Overlook or at any location in Elsir Vale. The summons asks the PCs to come to the High Hall. Any characters who participated in “Siege of Bordrin’s Watch” (Dungeon 157) have visited the hall and spoken with the elders before.
The Council of Elders
Getting to Talar
In this roleplaying encounter, the PCs learn more about their quest. Read or paraphrase the following, then use the notes below to facilitate play and answer any questions the PCs might have.
The party’s journey from Overlook to the eastern portion of Elsir Vale and the village of Talar is uneventful. If the PCs initially wish to bypass Talar for Brindol, they can resupply and purchase new equipment as you permit. When the PCs finally reach Talar, read:
Once more, you stand in the High Hall to be greeted by Overlook’s elders, though their welcome is less brusque this time. “Greetings, friends,” intones Elder Cadrick as you approach the dais upon which he and the city’s other four leaders stand. “We have received a desperate message from Megan Swiftblade, leader of the Freeriders, who you might remember. The Freeriders have discovered that General Zithiruun had a powerful ally in his recent attack on the city. Although she does not identify this ally in her message, Megan has already survived three attempts on her life and fears that more will follow. If we help her, she will tell us who was ultimately behind the attack, hopefully in time to prevent another.” “Again, we find ourselves in need of aid, and again we call upon you. Travel to the village of Talar and find out what Megan knows. Keep her safe, neutralize any immediate threat to her, and then return her to us.” Cadrick and the others know the following additional information. & The village of Talar, where Megan was born, lies outside the city of Brindol. & Though Megan does not know who is behind the attacks against her, she believes it to be the ally she is threatening to name. & Megan’s message to the council makes no mention of where she is staying, saying only that they should leave a message for her at the village’s Green Dragon tavern.
The journey to Talar is long but not overly arduous. Just before dusk, you arrive at the village’s tavern and inn, the Green Dragon. Having secured rooms for the night and left your message, you take your rest in the dimly lit common room. Megan’s message to the council stated that she would contact its emissaries only after making sure you had not been followed. All you can do now is slake your thirst and wait.
THE GREEN DRAGON Allow this roleplaying and scene-setting encounter to run as long as the players are enjoying themselves, using the notes below to facilitate play. The Green Dragon is a typical two-story village tavern and traveler’s inn. Its outer walls are dressed stone, while internal walls and the floor are stout oak boards laid over thick joists. The roof is slate, and a small beer cellar is found under the common room. Inside and outside shutters keep the evening chill at bay. The common room takes up the majority of the first floor, with a large fireplace opposite the bar filling the area with warmth and light. The walls are covered in faded tapestries showing hunting and woodland scenes. The second floor houses the inn’s guests.
Fe b r u a r y 2 0 0 9
|
D U N G E O N 16 3
15
Beyond the Mottled Tower
The Provender Rooms are available for 5 sp a night. Bernath the innkeeper can also provide hearty meals (2 sp for stew, thick-cut bread, and boiled vegetables) and ale (2 sp a pitcher). The wine in his cellar is carefully kept for wealthy patrons. Before opening a bottle, however, he demands payment up front (5 gp).
The Folk Most of the folk in the tavern are villagers relaxing after a hard day’s work. A few travelers round out the clientele. Bernath: The owner of the Green Dragon (male human; Diplomacy +7, Insight +6) is a jovial, portly widower who welcomes one and all to his establishment. However, a DC 10 Insight check reveals that the innkeeper’s cheery disposition is a front. Although this might pique the PCs’ suspicions, Bernath is simply ill at ease in the presence of armed adventurers. Once he sees to the PCs’ room, food, and drink, he avoids them whenever possible. Bernath and his son Niall are the only people in town who know that Megan is staying with Falrinth at the Mottled Tower. However, Bernath has been well paid by Megan to keep his silence. He plans to secretly deliver the PCs’ message later that night. Niall: Bernath’s twelve-year-old son (male human; Thievery +6) is ostensibly in the common room to help his father. In reality, he is a daring, mischievous sort who doesn’t think twice about helping himself to a traveler’s unattended possessions. At some point before the earthquake strikes, Niall makes a move to pilfer several silver coins that have fallen unnoticed under Leucis’s chair (see below). The PCs and the merchant have a chance to notice (Perception DC 10).
Niall overheard his father talking with Serten (Falrinth’s servant) about Megan’s presence in the Mottled Tower, though his father does not know that Niall shares his secret. Leucis: This frail cloth merchant (male tiefling; Bluff +12, Diplomacy +12) is deep in his cups when the PCs arrive. Leucis’s business has taken a downturn recently, and when he spies the PCs, he attempts to start a conversation with the not-so-subtle goal of off-loading his wares on the (hopefully) wealthy adventurers. Sariel: This slim female eladrin carries the weapons and armor of a warrior. She sits on her own, humming a tuneless song while nursing her ale. Though she is polite to anyone conversing with her, she is tightlipped as to her reasons for being in Talar. The other patrons ignore her, often while discussing spurious explanations for her presence. Though her appearance is likely to arouse suspicion, Sariel is merely a courier for a well-to-do merchant in Brindol. She knows nothing about Megan, but takes any questioning by the PCs as an attempt to shake her down and steal the mundane documents she carries.
Farmers: These hardy humans are relaxing after a hard day’s work in the fields. Most sit in small groups drinking and talking quietly among themselves. They are polite and deferential to the PCs, and can provide the following information. & Everyone in the village knows of Megan’s reputation as an adventurer, and all remember her as a child. However, she hasn’t lived in Talar for years. & Megan’s parents died five years before, and she has no other family in Talar. & Megan’s father was a good friend of Finrath the sage—or at least as much of a friend as the antisocial sage let him be. When the players have done as much roleplaying and information gathering in the Green Dragon as they wish, the earthquake strikes. Skill Challenge: “Walls Come Tumbling Down” (page 22). In the aftermath of the earthquake, the village lies in ruins. However, Talar’s ordeal is far from over. Tactical Encounter: “Flowing Death” (page 24).
Fe b r u a r y 2 0 0 9
|
D U N G E O N 16 3
16
Beyond the Mottled Tower
AT THE TOWER Even as the PCs defeat the creatures that have emerged from the flow of blood chaos through the village, they witness the Mottled Tower sinking into its hill on the edge of town. The horrid ooze continues to slowly flow through the village, destroying everything it touches. However, sudden movement atop the nearby hill catches your attention. Even as you watch, the mottled tower shudders, then begins to sink into the ground. Two frantic figures—one dragging the other—appear on the rooftop. As the PCs approach the tower, read: The tower continues to sink into the earth, so that by the time you reach the crest of the hill, only the roof and its battlements remain above ground. Two figures cling to the slate—one a human male dressed in sage’s garb; the other a human female clad in armor, sword in hand. Though the male seems utterly terrified, the woman is defiant despite what appears to be a badly broken leg. The figures atop the tower are Serten, Falrinth’s apprentice, and Megan Swiftblade, leader of the Freeriders. Serten: This portly human male (Arcana +9) wears an ink-stained robe, now tattered and torn. He is groggy and bleeding from a head wound caused by falling stone. Megan Swiftblade: Badly injured and covered with dust, this slender human female has shortcropped blond hair. A vicious scar runs from her forehead down her left cheek. If the PCs took part in “Siege of Bordrin’s Watch” (Dungeon 157) or “The Temple Between” (Dungeon 161), they recognize Megan at once.
Crossing the Moat Although the tower has sunk into the hill, the PCs must still cross the moat to reach the roof. Normally dry, this broad ditch is now filled with blood chaos. However, the collapse of the tower has left huge chunks of stone spread through the moat. Though the blood chaos is slowly eating away at them, these blocks remain solid enough that the PCs can easily cross (no skill checks necessary).
Learning More The PCs can yell across the moat to Serten and Megan, but initially only Megan responds. Megan: Although she desperately needs help, Megan is less than happy to see the PCs. She resents them for denying the Freeriders the glory of defeating General Zithiruun. The rest of the Freeriders went into hiding elsewhere in Elsir Vale after the first assassination attempt against them, as the group felt that splitting up would make them less vulnerable. Megan is anxious to rescue Falrinth, but her broken leg has her trapped. Serten dragged her up to the roof, but the apprentice is now too terrified to move. She fears that escaped monsters have trapped the old sage below. She can identify all three of the monster types once caged in the tower, but she knows nothing of their particular abilities. Megan does not know who or what is behind the earthquake. Though she suspects that Sarshan is trying to kill her, she does not yet share her knowledge of the shadar-kai with the PCs. Serten: Serten is terrified, but gentle questioning calms him somewhat. He knows little more than the PCs at this point. He was in his quarters when the earthquake struck, but he has no idea what caused it or where the blood chaos is coming from.
Serten tells how the earthquake released several monsters kept by Falrinth for research purposes. Megan rescued him from these foul creatures, then he returned the favor by dragging her to the roof when a collapsing wall broke her leg. He, too, fears for Falrinth’s life.
Mottled Tower Overview The Mottled Tower once stood within a dry moat atop a low, steep hill on the periphery of the village. Constructed of cut and dressed stone, the tower was in good repair before its collapse. The sage Falrinth lives within, attended by his apprentice.
Features of the Tower Illumination: Dim light (sun or moonlight filtering through the tower’s narrow windows on the fourth floor, a few guttering candles and torches on lower floors). Wooden Doors: Doors within the tower are not locked. AC/Reflex 5, Fortitude 10, 20 hit points. Walls: The inside walls are of wooden slats over thick posts. AC/Reflex 4, Fortitude 12, 40 hit points. Floors: Worn oaken floorboards over heavy joists make up the floors. AC/Reflex 4, Fortitude 12, 40 hit points. Ceilings: Ceilings are the joists and bare floorboards of the level above, and are 20 feet high. Dust and the sound of footsteps sift down when creatures are moving on the next level. Spiral Staircase: A wooden spiral staircase climbs the height of the tower, providing access to all levels. Narrow Windows: Window slits in the stone walls allow dim light into the tower’s interior. These windows are shuttered both inside and out. On levels now below the ground, the shutters hold the earth and mud outside at bay. Fe b r u a r y 2 0 0 9
|
D U N G E O N 16 3
17
Beyond the Mottled Tower
Mess and Clutter: The earthquake and the tower’s subsequent plunge into the hill have caused chaos within. Chairs and tables are overturned, while the contents of cupboards and shelves lie scattered upon the floor. External Staircase: This covered walkway spirals around the tower, providing access between the second, third, and fourth floors. Structural Damage: The earthquake has caused extensive damage to the tower. Though the ancient structure is in no danger of collapse, sections of its walls have been badly weakened. Cracks have appeared above all the windows and doors, while stone dust and crumbled mortar cover the floor. Here and there, the massive stone blocks of the walls jut inward from the pressure of the earth outside.
Library: High wooden bookshelves dominate this chamber, their volumes now spread across the floor. An overturned table lies in the middle of the room. Laboratory: This large chamber is a shambles, with much of the floor covered in shattered laboratory equipment. Megan’s Quarters: Falrinth’s guest room sees use only infrequently, as the antisocial sage seldom welcomes visitors. The plainly furnished room shows signs of recent occupation but contains nothing of value.
Fifth Floor The only features of note on this level are the tower’s battlements and chimney stack. Megan and Serten have taken refuge here from the raging monsters and the blood chaos below.
Falrinth uses the second floor as his living space. A curtained-off section holds a four-poster bed, while a large banquet table dominates the rest of the chamber.
Fourth Floor
First Floor
Falrinth’s apprentice Serten slept here, and the sage kept several monsters caged in this area as part of his questionable research. When the PCs reach this level, they discover that these test subjects have escaped. Enraged by their long captivity and their mistreatment at Falrinth’s hands, they attack anyone they see. Tactical Encounter: “Unbound” (page 26).
The tower’s ground floor is used mainly for storage, with two smaller chambers set up as a kitchen and pantry. Large sliding doors of iron in the east wall provide access for crates, barrels, and so forth. Pantry: Shelves once crammed with foodstuffs line the walls of this room, but their contents have joined the boxes, crates, and barrels filling much of the available floor space.
Third Floor A library, laboratory, and guest room make up this level. Falrinth does most of his work and research here.
Second Floor
Fe b r u a r y 2 0 0 9
|
D U N G E O N 16 3
18
Beyond the Mottled Tower
Kitchen: A large fireplace dominates this chamber. Cooking paraphernalia fallen from cupboards and sideboards lies scattered about.
When the PCs reach this area, they discover Falrinth huddled in a corner. Read:
THE EVER-TREE
A portly human male huddles within the devastation of this kitchen. His straggly brown hair is disheveled, mud staining his robes.
Once the skill challenge is complete, the PCs are ready to use the teleportation circle to follow the route taken by Sarshan’s servants. Stepping through the portal takes them to the Ever-Tree, below which Sarshan has created a lair to help him regulate and direct the flow of blood chaos. Tactical Encounter: “Draconic Wrath (page 31).
The reclusive Falrinth is less than grateful to his rescuers, asking only if the PCs have seen Megan and Serten. If the PCs speak to Falrinth (either here or later), refer to the skill challenge “The Chase Is On (Part 1)” (page 30).
Below the Tower A series of caverns unknown to Falrinth lie beneath the tower. Sarshan’s attack squad is using a trio of ancient floodgates within the caves to destroy Talar— the first test of Sarshan’s equipment and capability. Tactical Encounter: “Blood Chaos Caverns” (page 28).
The Chase Is On (Part 1) In this first part of a connected two-part skill challenge, the PCs obtain information from Megan and Falrinth, then step through a portal to follow the route of Sarshan’s servants back to their master. Skill Challenge: “The Chase Is On (Part 1)” (page 30).
The Chase Is On (Part 2) In this second part of the connected skill challenge, the PCs enter the fetid tunnels below the Ever-Tree in search of Sarshan. Skill Challenge: “The Chase Is On (Part 2)” (page 33).
Blood Chaos Pools In the depths of the tunnels beneath the Ever-Tree, Sarshan and his servants funnel a pool of blood chaos into Elsir Vale by way of two ancient portals. Tactical Encounter: “In Fetid Darkness” (page 34).
Fe b r u a r y 2 0 0 9
|
D U N G E O N 16 3
19
Beyond the Mottled Tower
THE TOWER OF DJAMELA Sarshan’s lair and final hiding place lies in the Elemental Chaos—a tower on a floating island set in the midst of the Sea of Fire. After activating the portal through which the shadar-kai fled the “In Fetid Darkness” encounter (page 34), the PCs appear within a permanent teleportation circle on the shore of a floating earthberg. Close by, they see the larger island whose obsidian tower is Sarshan’s lair. On the horizon, the distant spires of the legendary City of Brass shimmer above the haze of the lava sea.
The Island Sarshan’s island is a steep-sided rise that juts up from the Sea of Fire. An ancient stone dike surrounds the island, bolstered by arcane rituals that help keep the lava at bay. Environmental conditions on the island are described in the “Sea of Fire” encounter (page 37). The PCs can learn more about the island with a successful History check. DC 15: Years ago, this island was home to an eccentric efreet mage named Djamela. When her dangerous research saw her driven from the City of Brass, Djamela relocated to this remote location to continue her work. The monolithic tower that dominates the island was raised by her hand, and filled with traps and conjured creatures to defend against intrusion.
DC 20: Djamela’s passion was the study of raw chaos. The mage was particularly interested in the mutability of the matter of the Elemental Chaos, and sought to harness the innate chaotic quality of such matter to effect its controlled change. DC 25: Djamela’s enemies eventually found her, and the efreet mage was slain. In the aftermath, the golems and spectral defenders that Djamela had conjured were left to run free, preventing others from continuing Djamela’s research. With its dike decaying, the island was nearly consumed by the Sea of Fire.
Djamela’s Tower The efreet mage’s tower is a sheer-sided obsidian monolith. Sarshan has constructed a path leading from his access portal at the edge of the island to the monolith’s base. However, the shadar-kai has prepared for unwelcome visitors by reestablishing control over the mage’s traps and wards—including a great reservoir of blood chaos in the tower’s lower level. Height: The tower is 200 feet high and constructed of polished obsidian (Athletics DC 30 to climb). Ceiling: Unless otherwise noted, ceilings within the monolith are 60 feet high. The top level is open to the sky. Level Access: The monolith contains seven levels, some of which are sunk below the island’s surface. However, knowing that the PCs are after him, Sarshan has reconfigured the portals that once provided access between levels. Now, they lead through the chambers where Djamela’s most dangerous traps lie in wait.
The End is Nigh Sarshan’s plans involve the shunting of huge amounts of blood chaos between the planes. However, the Fe b r u a r y 2 0 0 9
|
D U N G E O N 16 3
20
Beyond the Mottled Tower
shadar-kai’s knowledge of Djamela’s work is less complete than he thinks. In the course of establishing the portal links between the obsidian tower and the world, Sarshan has inadvertently diverted arcane power from the wards that imbue the island’s walls. Now, even as the PCs hunt the shadar-kai, a torrent of lava threatens to breach the dikes. This race against time means that the PCs do not have time to take an extended rest while on the island. When his work is complete, Sarshan attempts to establish a portal to escape the island. Unfortunately, the breakdown of the wards interferes with his ritual, costing him time that allows the PCs to catch up.
Crusher Rooms
Final Battle
The portal in the galleries leads to a deadly gauntlet of traps and defenders still present from the time of Djamela. Tactical Encounter: “Crusher Rooms” (page 42).
As Sarshan prepares his final escape, the PCs have one chance to catch the shadar-kai and end his threat to Overlook and Elsir Vale. Tactical Encounter: “Final Battle” (page 45).
Sea of Fire The portal takes the PCs to an earthberg floating on a lava sea. Sarshan’s tower is nearby, but the party must run a gauntlet laid down by the shadar-kai’s guards. Tactical Encounter: “Sea of Fire” (page 37).
Galleries Once the PCs have fought their way past the initial wave of defenders, they follow the path to the monolith’s well-guarded entrance. Tactical Encounter: “Galleries” (page 39).
Fe b r u a r y 2 0 0 9
|
D U N G E O N 16 3
21
Beyond the Mottled Tower
WALLS COME TUMBLING DOWN Encounter Level 11 (3,000 XP)
Setup An earthquake rocks the village of Talar, threatening to raze the Green Dragon to the ground. Walls Come Tumbling Down Skill Challenge
Level 11 XP 3,000
The tavern begins to shudder violently as if in the grip of a powerful storm. Tipped tankards slosh ale to the floor as several patrons are knocked back in their chairs. Window shutters bang wildly as the shaking increases, the floor and walls bucking as if alive. In panic, the other patrons stagger to their feet and attempt to flee the chaos. The PCs must flee the tavern as it collapses about their heads, but the plight of the trapped and terrified villagers complicates their escape. Complexity 5 (requires 12 successes before 3 failures). Primary Skills Acrobatics, Athletics, Diplomacy, Intimidate. Other Skills Acrobatics, Bluff, Perception. Victory The PCs manage to escape the tavern and evacuate the patrons trapped within. Consequently, they enter the “Flowing Death” encounter early, giving them additional time to rescue the villager on the trapped wagon before the blood chaos overwhelms her. See page 24 for more information. Defeat The PCs are injured beneath the collapsing building or hit by flying debris, though buried characters and villagers can be dug out with a few minutes’ work. Each PC loses 1 healing surge. Special Some of the timeline events (see below) incur failures or successes in the skill challenge. If the PCs simply flee the tavern, they automatically fail the skill challenge. To be successful, they must attempt to help other patrons escape.
Acrobatics (DC 10) (0 successes or failures) Moving through the collapsing tavern, whether to reach a fallen comrade or to flee, requires a successful Acrobatics check. Acrobatics (DC 21) (1 success or failure, see below) Escaping the collapsing tavern through a door or window requires a successful Acrobatics check. This check allows the PC to drag one other person with him or her. A PC can make this check only once for himself, but he can make the check again if he goes back into the tavern to rescue one of the villagers. Athletics (DC 16) (1 success or failure, see below) Different events in the skill challenge key to specific Athletics checks the PCs can attempt. See the event descriptions below. Bluff (DC 16) (0 successes or failures) With a successful check, the PC manages to convince a terrified villager to accept his or her aid. The PC gains a +2 bonus to his or her next Diplomacy or Intimidate check with the same NPC. Diplomacy or Intimidate (DC 16) (1 success or failure) With a successful check, the PC manages to convince—or threaten—one of the terrified villagers into leaving a place of refuge within the tavern. The villager subsequently escapes the tavern. Perception (DC 10) (0 successes or failures) The PC notices something of importance in the tavern, whether a villager trapped beneath a table (see “Trapped Villager,” below), parts of the floor or ceiling about to collapse (see “Roof Collapse” and “Crumbling Floor”), and so on. This check serves as the lead-in to one of the events detailed below.
Timeline of Events Once the earthquake strikes, the action develops quickly. This skill challenge takes place over 6 rounds, during which a number of specific events unfold. Some events occur at specific times, while others
are triggered by the PCs’ actions. The PCs dictate in which order they tackle these additional events. Round 0: The earthquake hits the village; the skill challenge begins. Round 1: “Leucis.” Round 2: “Crumbling Floor.” Round 3: “Fire.” Round 4: If the “Fire” event was not resolved, a tapestry bursts into flames. Round 5: If the “Fire” event was not resolved, fire spreads to the adjacent tapestries. Round 6: “Roof Collapse.” Round 7: The tavern collapses. Any PCs remaining inside are trapped beneath the rubble. The events of the skill challenge are presented in the order in which they occur, followed by events triggered by the PCs.
Leucis When the earthquake hits, the merchant Leucis is struck by a roof beam that knocks him unconscious. Unless he is rendered conscious with healing or hauled out, he dies when the roof collapses.
Crumbling Floor A section of floor gives way, dropping characters into the cellar below. The floor groans ominously as its planks and timbers begin to twist and splinter. The collapsing floor makes a melee attack against each character in the area: +15 vs. Reflex; 1d10 falling damage, and the target lands prone in the cellar amid a shower of debris. The party earns 1 failure if any of the PCs fall into the cellar.
Fe b r u a r y 2 0 0 9
|
D U N G E O N 16 3
22
Beyond the Mottled Tower
ahead of the tavern’s collapse, though you might call for final Athletics or Acrobatics checks for dramatic effect. PCs knocked prone by the collapse can dig themselves out with assistance. L=Leucis S=Sariel N=Niall B=Bernath F=Farmer
Trapped Villager A villager is trapped under a fallen table with either broken bones or a head wound. Across the room, you make out the form of a villager trapped beneath a heavy table. With a successful Athletics check, a PC can heave the table off the villager and drag him out of the tavern. This earns 1 success in the skill challenge.
Terrified Villager One of the villagers, believing that giants or monstrous beasts are outside the tavern, cowers beneath a table, refusing to come out.
Fire
Roof Collapse
A fire in the common room spreads quickly unless it is extinguished.
The Green Dragon’s weakened ceiling timbers begin to collapse in round 6.
A particularly violent tremor shakes the inn, hurling a shower of burning hot embers from the fireplace into the common room. A tapestry torn from the wall by a fleeing patron quickly begins to smolder.
The tavern convulses as more violent tremors strike. The great beams holding the upper floor aloft begin to buckle ominously.
If the PCs do not deal with the smoldering tapestry, it bursts into flames the following round. Those flames then spread to the adjacent tapestries the round after. With a successful Athletics check, a PC can smother or beat out the flames in the first or second round. This earns 1 success in the skill challenge. If the PCs fail to put out the flames, they earn 1 failure in the challenge.
It should be clear to the PCs that the tavern is about to collapse. In round 7, read: The aging timbers above your head snap like kindling. A shower of floorboards and furniture heralds the upper floor’s collapse. The collapsing roof makes an attack against each character still in the tavern: +15 vs. Reflex; 2d12 + 8 damage, and the target is knocked prone. Characters not hit by the attack manage to stagger clear just
One of the terrified locals crouches beneath a table, whimpering as the tavern is torn apart around him. The villager believes that if he emerges from under the table, he will die. A successful Diplomacy or Intimidate check coaxes him out. This earns 1 success in the skill challenge. Use the named NPCs as the subjects of this event.
Aftermath When the PCs stagger from the ruins of the Green Dragon, a scene of chaos and destruction greets them. Proceed to the “Flowing Death” tactical encounter on the next page.
Fe b r u a r y 2 0 0 9
|
D U N G E O N 16 3
23
Beyond the Mottled Tower
FLOWING DEATH Encounter Level 11 (3,000 XP)
Setup 1 scion of chaos (C) 8 chaos maulers (M) 2 skulking terrors (S) When the PCs escape or dig themselves out from the ruined tavern, a scene of devastation greets them. In only a few moments, this vibrant, thriving community has been reduced to ruins. Flames leap high in the air, silhouetting huddled survivors against the heaped mounds of rubble that were once their homes. Many of the buildings in the immediate vicinity have at least partially collapsed, and fires are spreading through the ruins. A terrified screaming rises in the distance along the main track, Villagers are running toward you, a dark shape oozing down the street behind them. To give the villagers time to flee the destruction, the PCs must defeat the monsters that have accompanied the release of the blood chaos. When the PCs are in a position to see the blood chaos f lowing from below the Mottled Tower, read: A viscous purple-red tide is flowing into Talar, pouring out from a low, craggy hill at the edge of the village. A tower of mottled stone stands atop the hill, the ooze flowing out through a hole blasted out beneath it. Where twin arms of the flow have circled a collapsed house, fire suddenly flares, trapping a terrified and heavily pregnant woman on an adjacent wagon.
Scion of Chaos (C)
Level 11 Controller
2 Skulking Terrors (S)
Level 11 Lurker
Huge elemental animate XP 600 Initiative +9 Senses Perception +9 Whirling Tentacles aura 2; the scion of chaos slides any creature that starts its turn in the aura 2 squares. HP 117; Bloodied 58 AC 25; Fortitude 24, Reflex 23, Will 24 Resist acid 10, fire 10 Speed 6 m Slam (standard; at-will) & Fire Reach 3; +16 vs. AC; 2d8+4 fire damage r Staggering Strike (standard; at-will) Ranged 10; +14 vs. Fortitude; 2d6+6 damage and the target is pushed 3 squares. A Coils of Immobility (standard; recharge 7 8) Area burst 2 within 10; targets enemies only; +13 vs. Reflex; 2d8+4 damage and the target is restrained (save ends) Liquid Body The scion of chaos is perfectly adapted to living in blood chaos. It can move through blood chaos without penalty and takes no damage from contact with blood chaos. Alignment Unaligned Languages — Str 17 (+8) Dex 19 (+9) Wis 19 (+9) Con 21 (+10) Int 16 (+8) Cha 21 (+10)
Medium elemental animate XP 600 Initiative +13 Senses Perception +11 HP 83; Bloodied 41 AC 25; Fortitude 21, Reflex 23, Will 21 Speed 6, fly 6 m Slam (standard; at-will) +16 vs. AC; 2d6+6 damage C Lethargic Countenance (standard action; at-will) Close burst 3; +12 vs. Will; the target is slowed and grants combat advantage to the skulking terror until the end of the skulking terror’s next turn. After all attacks are resolved, the skulking terror teleports 8 squares and gains a +4 power bonus to all defenses against ranged and area attacks. Combat Advantage The skulking terror deals an extra 2d6 damage on melee attacks against any target it has combat advantage against. Liquid Body The skulking terror is perfectly adapted to living in blood chaos. It can move through blood chaos without penalty and takes no damage from contact with blood chaos. Alignment Unaligned Languages — Str 14 (+7) Dex 19 (+9) Wis 13 (+6) Con 11 (+5) Int 13 (+6) Cha 12 (+6)
8 Chaos Maulers (M)
Tactics
Level 11 Minion
Large elemental animate XP 150 Initiative +9 Senses Perception +7 HP 1; a missed attack never damages a minion AC 23; Fortitude 25, Reflex 23, Will 22 Speed 6 m Slam (standard; at-will) Reach 2; +14 vs. AC; 8 fire damage Liquid Body The chaos mauler is perfectly adapted to living in blood chaos. It can move through blood chaos without penalty and takes no damage from contact with blood chaos. Alignment Unaligned Languages — Str 23 (+11) Dex 18 (+9) Wis 14 (+7) Con 16 (+8) Int 11 (+5) Cha 16 (+8)
The scion of chaos hangs back from melee, using its coils of immobility to halt foes in their tracks. While that power recharges, it makes staggering strike attacks to batter strikers and defenders out of position. The skulking terrors fight from within the blood chaos to maintain concealment. They use lethargic countenance against PCs already engaged in melee with the chaos maulers, then follow up with slam attacks against slowed targets. The chaos maulers flank to maintain combat advantage, moving freely through the blood chaos in the hope that foes follow them.
Fe b r u a r y 2 0 0 9
|
D U N G E O N 16 3
24
Beyond the Mottled Tower
terrain. A creature that enters or begins its turn in an area of blood chaos takes 2d6 + 3 acid and fire damage and is slowed (save ends).
Aftermath Once the PCs have defeated the monsters here, it becomes apparent that the flow of liquid engulfing the village shows no sign of abating. Unless the blood chaos is stopped at its source, Talar will be destroyed. Return to “At the Tower,” page 17.
CREATURES OF CHAOS
Features of the Area Illumination: The fires spreading through the village fill the area with dim light. Burning and Ruined Buildings: The three ruined buildings are now little more than piles of rubble with burning roofs. Squares containing rubble are difficult terrain. A creature that enters or starts its turn in a burning square takes 1d10 fire damage. Smoke: A haze of thick, acrid smoke billows across the area. Squares of smoke are heavily obscured. Within the smoke, adjacent creatures have concealment, while creatures not adjacent have total concealment.
Trapped Wagon: The blood chaos flow reaches the trapped wagon in 5 rounds, but the PCs’ performance in the previous skill challenge affects how long it takes them to enter this encounter. If the PCs failed the skill challenge, they have only 2 rounds until the blood chaos reaches the wagon. Once the blood chaos reaches the wagon, it destroys it and kills the terrified villager in 1 round. Blood Chaos Flow: The oozing tide of purple-red ooze is blood chaos. Blood chaos moves only 1 square per round, but this potent distillation of elemental energy burns inanimate objects and melts living flesh. Squares filled with blood chaos are difficult
This encounter features new monsters spawned from the raging blood chaos. Use these descriptive notes when the creatures appear. Scion of Chaos: This undulating orb of melting orange and purple flesh writhes toward you on a bed of muscular tentacles. A ring of larger tentacles juts from the top of the orb. Chaos Mauler: This hulking creature is seemingly composed of congealed purple-orange liquid. Its head has no eyes or other features, and a single thick tentacle grows from its belly. Skulking Terror: This paper-thin creature resembles a headless, flattened orange and purple bat. It drips a viscous ichor in its wake from a number of small holes on its underside.
Fe b r u a r y 2 0 0 9
|
D U N G E O N 16 3
25
Beyond the Mottled Tower
UNBOUND Encounter Level 11 (3,000 XP)
Setup 2 grimlock ambushers (G) 1 foulspawn seer (F) 2 mezzodemons (M) A group of monsters kept by Falrinth for experimental purposes has been freed by the tower’s collapse. Though enraged by their long incarceration, these creatures remain fearful as a result of the tower’s ongoing collapse. Claiming their stolen weapons from a nearby storage locker, they lurk here among the ruins of their prison, awaiting prey upon which they can revenge themselves. Perception Check DC 16: Something large is moving beyond the bottom of the stairs ahead. When the PCs enter this area, read: Three large cells stand along the walls of this gloomy chamber. All show signs of extensive damage, their bars wrenched free and scattered across the floor. To the left, open double doors provide access to another area beyond. To the right, a large insectoid creature bearing a trident lurks between the cells. At the sight of you, it snarls and begins to advance.
2 Grimlock Ambushers (G)
Level 11 Skirmisher
Medium natural humanoid (blind) XP 600 Initiative +9 Senses Perception +7; blindsight 10 HP 110; Bloodied 55; see also offensive shift AC 26; Fortitude 25, Reflex 23, Will 23 Immune gaze Speed 6 m Greataxe (standard; at-will) & Weapon +16 vs. AC; 1d12 + 5 damage (crit 2d12 + 17) M Offensive Shift (immediate reaction, when an enemy moves within 2 squares of the grimlock ambusher and attacks an ally of the grimlock; recharges when first bloodied) The grimlock ambusher shifts and makes a melee basic attack against the triggering creature. Alignment Evil Languages Common, Deep Speech Skills Athletics +15, Endurance +12 Str 20 (+10) Dex 14 (+7) Wis 15 (+7) Con 14 (+7) Int 9 (+4) Cha 9 (+4) Equipment greataxe
Foulspawn Seer (F)
Level 11 Artillery (Leader)
Medium aberrant humanoid XP 600 Initiative +7 Senses Perception +9; low-light vision Foul Insight aura 10; an ally in the aura that can hear the foulspawn seer gains a +2 power bonus to one attack roll, skill check, ability check, or saving throw on its turn. AC 24; Fortitude 19, Reflex 23, Will 21 HP 86; Bloodied 43 Speed 6, teleport 3 m Twisted Staff (standard; at-will) & Weapon +14 vs. AC; 1d8 + 6 damage, and the target is pushed 1 square. R Warp Orb (standard; at-will) Ranged 10; + 16 vs. Reflex; 1d8 + 6 damage, and the target is dazed (save ends). C Distortion Blast (standard; daily) Close blast 5; +12 vs. Fortitude; 2d8 + 6 damage, and the target is dazed (save ends). Aberrant creatures take half damage. Bend Space (immediate interrupt, when the foulspawn seer would be hit by an attack; recharge 7 8 ) & Teleportation The foulspawn seer teleports 3 squares. Alignment Evil Languages Deep Speech, telepathy 10 Str 10 (+5) Dex 14 (+7) Wis 8 (+4) Con 14 (+7) Int 22 (+11) Cha 18 (+9) Equipment staff
2 Mezzodemons (M)
Level 11 Soldier
Medium elemental humanoid (demon) XP 600 Initiative +9 Senses Perception +13; darkvision HP 113; Bloodied 56 AC 27; Fortitude 25, Reflex 22, Will 23 Resist 20 poison, 10 variable (2/encounter; see MM glossary) Speed 6 m Trident (standard; at-will) & Weapon Reach 2; +18 vs. AC; 1d8 + 5 damage. M Skewering Tines (standard; at-will) & Weapon Requires trident; Reach 2; +18 vs. AC; 1d8 + 5 damage, and the target takes ongoing 5 damage and is restrained (save ends both). While the target is restrained, the mezzodemon cannot make trident attacks. R Poison Breath (standard; recharge 7 8) & Poison Close blast 3; targets enemies; +16 vs. Fortitude; 2d6 + 3 poison damage, and ongoing 5 poison damage (save ends). Alignment Chaotic evil Languages Abyssal Skills Intimidate +11 Str 20 (+10) Dex 15 (+7) Wis 16 (+8) Con 17 (+8) Int 10 (+5) Cha 13 (+6) Equipment trident
Tactics The mezzodemon in the cells uses skewering tines to pin an opponent in front of it, ideally preventing that PC from entering melee. The other mezzodemon charges into the fray, using poison breath as soon as it can target two or more opponents. Lurking by the open double doors, the grimlock ambushers fight as a pair, flanking for combat advantage and enabling their offensive shift. The foulspawn seer stays back from melee, using the grimlock ambushers as a screen. It hurls warp orbs at targets at the edge of the fray, switching to distortion blast against foes that press it. It uses bend space as often as possible, moving to position another monster between it and the PCs. These former prisoners are allied in their rage but they do not flank except with creatures of their own kind. They fight to the death.
Fe b r u a r y 2 0 0 9
|
D U N G E O N 16 3
26
Beyond the Mottled Tower
Features of the Area Debris: Squares adjacent to the bookshelves, desks, and tables are covered with debris and are difficult terrain. Tables: The tables are tall enough that a Small creature can move under them and gain cover. It costs 2 squares of movement to hop up onto a table. A character can make a DC 10 Strength check to tip over a table, which then grants superior cover. Double Doors: These doors stand open. Because of damage from the collapse, closing them requires a DC 15 Strength check. Cages: The earthquake loosened the bars of these floor-to-ceiling cages, allowing the creatures here to escape. Medium or smaller characters can squeeze through the remaining bars, but doing so requires 2 extra squares of movement. Shattered Weapons Locker: Falrinth kept his prisoners’ equipment in a case near their cages. As soon as they escaped, they shattered the case and reclaimed their weapons. Structural Damage: As detailed in “Mottled Tower Overview,” this area of the tower has suffered structural damage from its plunge into the earth. Although the combatants are in no danger here, describe the floor creaking and bowing alarmingly, dust falling from above, and so on.
Fe b r u a r y 2 0 0 9
|
D U N G E O N 16 3
27
Beyond the Mottled Tower
BLOOD CHAOS CAVERNS Encounter Level 14 (5,150 XP)
Setup 1 shadar-kai witch (S) 2 githyanki warriors (G) 8 troglodyte warriors (T) Sarshan’s agents have successfully initiated the blood chaos flow far below the Mottled Tower. Having finally completed their work, the team is in the process of activating an escape portal before the chamber is completely inundated. When the PCs reach the hole leading into this area, read: A jagged hole splits the stone floor, flickering light welling up from a natural cavern below. Shadows move within the light, signs of something lurking deep beneath the tower. Perception Check DC 21: From ahead, a voice speaks the words of a ritual. Arcana Check (after a successful Perception check) DC 21: The ritual being performed is Linked Portal, and the speaker is close to completion. The shadar-kai witch and her guards attack as soon as they notice the PCs.
Tactics The shadar-kai witch cloaks herself with deep shadow, which she sustains as a minor action for as long as possible. She attacks first with beshadowed mind, reusing that power each time it recharges and making blackfire touch attacks otherwise. She uses ebon burst if attacked by more than one opponent, followed by shadow jaunt to reposition herself.
Shadar-Kai Witch (S)
Level 14 Elite Controller
2 Githyanki Warriors (G)
Level 12 Soldier
8 Troglodyte Warriors (T)
Level 12 Minion
Medium shadow humanoid XP 2,000 Initiative +11 Senses Perception +9, low-light vision HP 272; Bloodied 136 AC 30; Fortitude 27, Reflex 29, Will 25 Saving Throws +2 Speed 6; see also shadow jaunt Action Points 1 m Blackfire Touch (standard; at-will) & Fire, Necrotic +18 vs. Reflex; 2d8 + 6 fire and necrotic damage. M Beshadowed Mind (standard; recharge 6 7 8 ) & Necrotic Ranged 10; +18 vs. Will; 3d6 + 6 necrotic damage, and the target has no line of sight to anything more than 2 squares from it (save ends). C Deep Shadow (standard; sustain minor; encounter) & Necrotic Aura 2; thick, writhing shadows surround the shadar-kai witch. The witch and any other shadow creatures in the aura gain concealment. In addition, enemies that enter or start their turns in the aura take 5 necrotic damage, and enemies (including flying ones) also treat the area within the aura as difficult terrain. The shadar-kai witch can sustain the aura as a minor action. However, the effect ends if she uses shadow jaunt or moves more than half her speed on her turn. Sustain Minor: The aura persists. C Ebon Burst (standard; encounter) & Necrotic Close burst 2; +18 vs. Reflex; 2d8 + 6 damage, and the target is slowed until the end of the shadar-kai witch’s next turn. Shadow Jaunt (move; encounter) & Teleportation The shadar-kai witch teleports 3 squares and becomes insubstantial until the start of her next turn. Alignment Unaligned Languages Common Skills Acrobatics +13, Arcana +18, Religion +18, Stealth +18 Str 17 (+10) Dex 19 (+11) Wis 15 (+9) Con 16 (+10) Int 23 (+13) Cha 17 (+10) Equipment ritual book containing Linked Portal
Medium natural humanoid XP 700 Initiative +13 Senses Perception +12 HP 118; Bloodied 59 AC 28; Fortitude 25, Reflex 23, Will 22 Saving Throws +2 against charm effects Speed 5; see also telekinetic leap m Silver Greatsword (standard; at-will) & Psychic, Weapon +17 vs. AC; 1d10 + 5 plus 1d6 psychic damage, and an extra 3d6 psychic damage if the target is immobilized. R Telekinetic Grasp (standard; sustain minor; encounter) Ranged 5; Medium or small target; +15 vs. Fortitude; the target is immobilized (save ends). R Telekinetic Leap (move; encounter) Ranged 10; the githyanki warrior or an ally within range can fly up to 5 squares. Alignment Evil Languages Common, Deep Speech Skills History +9, Insight +12 Str 21 (+11) Dex 17 (+9) Wis 12 (+7) Con 14 (+8) Int 12 (+7) Cha 13 (+7) Equipment plate armor, silver greatsword
The githyanki warriors use telekinetic leap to bypass the party’s front line, then use telekinetic grasp on lightly armored opponents before attacking with their silver greatswords.
The troglodyte warriors move to surround and cut down the closest enemies, flanking for combat advantage.
Medium natural humanoid (reptile) XP 175 Initiative +6 Senses Perception +5; darkvision Troglodyte Stench aura 1; living enemies in the aura take a –2 penalty to attack rolls. HP 1; a missed attack never damages a minion. AC 25; Fortitude 25, Reflex 22, Will 21 Speed 5 m Club (standard; at-will) & Weapon +15 vs. AC; 7 damage Alignment Chaotic evil Languages Common, Draconic Skills Athletics +14, Endurance +13 Str 18 (+9) Dex 12 (+6) Wis 11 (+5) Con 16 (+8) Int 6 (+3) Cha 8 (+4) Equipment light shield, club
Fe b r u a r y 2 0 0 9
|
D U N G E O N 16 3
28
Beyond the Mottled Tower
Deadly Rockslide Hazard
Level 8 Lurker XP 350
A shower of rock and stone falls from the crumbling foundations of the sinking tower. Hazard: Rocks tumble down in a target square and make a burst 3 attack. Perception Characters can’t use Perception to detect this hazard. Additional Skills: Nature or Dungeoneering A DC 16 Nature or Dungeoneering check notices that the cavern is unstable. Initiative +13 Trigger The rockslide is triggered by the start of combat in the cavern. When combat begins, the rockslide rolls for initiative. Between the start of combat and the rockslide’s first attack, characters know that a rockslide is beginning but they do not know which squares it will effect. Attack Standard Action Close burst 3 Targets: Creatures in burst Attack: +11 vs. Reflex Hit: 3d6 + 5 damage Miss: Half damage Sustain Standard: The rockslide continues until the floodgates are closed. Countermeasures & A character in the burst can take advantage of natural openings in the slide to avoid damage by making a DC 21 Nature or Dungeoneering check. With a successful check, a character takes half damage (no damage if the slide misses).
Natural Cavern Walls: The rough cavern walls can be easily climbed (Athletics DC 10). Portal Circle: The shadar-kai witch has inscribed a circle for a Linked Portal ritual on the floor in chalk and powdered gemstone. Floodgates: Three floodgates pierce the north wall near the ceiling. The left gates are open and spewing blood chaos toward the village (it is this flow that has blasted the tunnel through the hill). The flow from the open right-hand gates has burned another tunnel through the hill to the tower’s moat. The middle gates remain closed. Large gear wheels can be turned to open and close the floodgates (Strength DC 21). Blood Chaos: Blood chaos covers the indicated squares to a depth of 3 feet. These squares are difficult terrain. This potent distillation of elemental energy burns inanimate objects and melts living flesh. A creature that enters or begins its turn in an area of blood chaos takes 2d6 + 3 acid and fire damage and is slowed (save ends).
Unstable Cavern: The earthquake and the subsequent flow of blood chaos into the chamber have undercut the foundations of this cavern. A shower of dust and stones falls constantly from the walls and ceiling. Each round, a rockslide hits (see the statistics block), centered on a square occupied by a randomly determined combatant.
Closing the Gates After the battle is over, the PCs can shut the two open floodgates without difficulty. During the battle, an adjacent character can shut the floodgates as a fullround action.
Aftermath Once the PCs have defeated Sarshan’s servants, they can learn more about recent events. Proceed to “The Chase Is On (Part 1)” skill challenge on the next page.
Features of the Area Illumination: Bright light from a lantern set in the center of the teleportation circle illuminates the floodgates and the surrounding area. The rest of the chamber is in darkness. Ceiling: 20 feet high. A wide, jagged hole in the ceiling provides access to the tower. The rubble-filled squares directly below the hole are difficult terrain.
Fe b r u a r y 2 0 0 9
|
D U N G E O N 16 3
29
Beyond the Mottled Tower
THE CHASE IS ON (PART 1) Encounter Level 11 (1,200 XP)
Setup The PCs’ pursuit of Sarshan plays out as a connected two-part skill challenge. In this first part, they must glean what Megan and Falrinth know even as they search the blood chaos caverns for clues. The Chase Is On (Part 1) Skill Challenge
Level 11 XP 1,200
The threat under the tower has been vanquished. Now, even as you attempt to activate the teleportation circle, you must overcome Megan and Falrinth’s animosity to discover who or what is behind the destruction in Talar. Once the PCs have defeated the threat under the tower, they can learn more about recent events and discover the danger Sarshan’s plans pose to Elsir Vale. Once they return to the roof to speak with Megan and Falrinth, or if they seem likely to activate the teleportation circle, begin the skill challenge. Complexity 2 (requires 6 successes before 3 failures). Primary Skills Arcana, Diplomacy, Intimidate. Other Skills Bluff. Victory The PCs collect the information they need and activate the teleportation circle in a timely fashion. Defeat Although the PCs manage to gain some relevant information and to activate the teleportation circle, the time they take in doing so alerts Sarshan that something has gone wrong with the attack. As a result, the PCs face a greater challenge in the “Draconic Wrath” encounter (page 31). Arcana (DC 16) (1 success or failure, maximum 2 successes) The PC is able to recover information regarding the disrupted Linked Portal ritual. The PCs can determine the coordinates of the teleportation circle to which the shadar-kai and her allies were attempting to flee, but they must consult Falrinth to determine where that location is (see below).
Arcana (DC 21) (1 success or failure, maximum 1 success) By investigating the floodgates, the PC discovers the secrets of their operation. The gates are of ancient construction, and were built to channel the flow of magical energy. The activation of these ancient gates caused the earthquake that preceded the blood chaos attack. Bluff (DC 16) (0 successes or failures) With a successful check, the PC manages to get on Megan and Falrinth’s good side. The next Diplomacy check made in the challenge gains a +2 bonus. Diplomacy (DC 16) (1 success or failure, maximum 3 successes) The PC attempts to convince Falrinth or Megan to work with the party. See below for more information. Intimidate (DC 16) (1 success or failure, maximum 2 successes) The PC forgoes pleasantries in an attempt to force Falrinth or Megan’s aid. Though Falrinth can be swayed with threats (see below for more information), attempts to intimidate Megan meet with no success. She gives the PCs no information, earning the party 1 failure in the skill challenge.
Falrinth The PCs can use Diplomacy or Intimidate to learn more information from Falrinth. The sage is extremely untrusting and insular, and his singleminded dedication to his work has turned him somewhat surly over the years. Falrinth is also extremely greedy, loving gold like the friends and family that abandoned him years before. Although he is grateful for the PCs’ assistance, he fears that they will attempt to shake him down for a reward. Successful Diplomacy or Intimidate checks inspire Falrinth to reveal some or all of the following. & He had no idea that tunnels existed under his tower. & He does not know the attackers and has no notion of who they work for. He has no enemies that he is aware of, and knows no shadar-kai. & If he is given the sigil sequence of the teleportation circle the shadar-kai witch was
attempting to teleport to, Falrinth recognizes it as a permanent circle in a fetid swamp far to the south. The swamp is known to sages for its rampant primordial fauna and huge trees.
Megan Swiftblade Megan already resents the party for outstripping the Freeriders’ reputation, and having been rescued by them has not improved her attitude. The PCs must tread carefully if they wish to learn more from her. Successful Diplomacy checks inspire Megan to reveal some or all of the following information. & Three assassination attempts have so far been made against Megan and the Freeriders. The rest of the group have scattered across Elsir Vale in an attempt to prevent further attacks. & Through a mercenary band that escaped from the failed attack on Overlook, the Freeriders discovered that a shadar-kai arms dealer—Sarshan—was providing mercenaries, intelligence, support, and even arms and armor to the githyanki assault. & Sarshan’s current plots revolve around something called blood chaos, with which he means to take retribution against Overlook and Elsir Vale. Though Megan had not previously known what “blood chaos” referred to, Falrinth knows the name. He can guess that this is the elemental ooze being funneled through the floodgates. Though Sarshan’s full plans remain unknown, Falrinth knows that dozens of hidden and secret portals are said to be scattered across Elsir Vale. Sarshan’s mastery of portal and planar magic gives him the power to deliver blood chaos to any part of the vale. The scene the PCs witnessed in Talar is set to be repeated across Elsir Vale unless Sarshan can be stopped.
Fe b r u a r y 2 0 0 9
|
D U N G E O N 16 3
30
Beyond the Mottled Tower
DRACONIC WRATH Encounter Level 13 (4,500 XP)
Setup Antharosk, green dragon (A) Calaunxin, green dragon (C) Using the teleportation circle beneath the Mottled Tower, the PCs arrive at the Ever-Tree—an immense oak rising within a lake of blood chaos. Two dragons—Antharosk and Calaunxin—guard the approaches to this living tower. When the PCs step through the portal, read: As you shift through the haze of the portal, you emerge on a wooden platform set upon the skeletal branch of an immense oak tree. This stands in the middle of a dismal, fog-shrouded swamp, the tree surrounded by a lake of blood chaos. Its huge roots snake through the boiling ooze like great vipers, while above you, a thick canopy of leaves cuts the light to a perpetual gloom. As soon as the PCs investigate their surroundings, Antharosk and Calaunxin become aware of their presence and attack. If the PCs failed the skill challenge of “The Chase Is On (Part 1),” Sarshan has sent a warning to Antharosk and Calaunxin to be ready for intruders. The dragons gain a surprise round, attacking with their breath weapons as soon as the PCs appear on the platform.
Antharosk, Level 10 Solo Controller Adult Green Dragon (A)
Large natural magical beast (dragon) XP 2,500 Initiative +10 Senses Perception +13; darkvision Lashing Tail aura 1; all creatures other than Antharosk treat the area within the aura as difficult terrain. Antharosk loses this aura while airborne. HP 428; Bloodied 214; see also bloodied breath AC 26; Fortitude 23, Reflex 24, Will 23 Resist 20 poison Saving Throws +5 Speed 8, fly 12 (hover), overland flight 15; see also flyby attack Action Points 2 m Bite (standard; at-will) & Poison Reach 2; +15 vs. AC; 1d10 + 5 damage, and ongoing 5 poison damage (save ends). m Claw (standard; at-will) Reach 2; +15 vs. AC; 1d8 + 5 damage. M Double Attack (standard; at-will) Antharosk makes two claw attacks. M Flyby Attack (standard; recharge 7 8 ) Antharosk flies up to 12 squares and makes a bite attack at any point during the move without provoking opportunity attacks from the target. M Tail Sweep (immediate reaction, if an adjacent enemy does not move on its turn; at-will) +13 vs. Reflex; 1d8 + 5 damage, and the target is knocked prone. C Breath Weapon (standard; recharge 7 8) & Poison Close blast 5; +13 vs. Fortitude; 1d10 + 4 poison damage, and the target takes ongoing 5 damage and is slowed (save ends both). Aftereffect: The target is slowed (save ends). C Bloodied Breath (free, when first bloodied; encounter) & Poison Antharosk’s breath weapon recharges , and he uses it immediately. C Frightful Presence (standard; encounter) & Fear Close burst 5; targets enemies; +13 vs. Will; the target is stunned until the end of Antharosk’s next turn. Aftereffect: The target takes a –2 penalty to attack rolls (save ends). Alignment Evil Languages Common, Draconic Skills Bluff +19, Diplomacy +14, Insight +18, Intimidate +14 Str 16 (+8) Dex 20 (+10) Wis 17 (+8) Con 19 (+9) Int 16 (+8) Cha 18 (+9)
Calaunxin, Adult Green Dragon (C)
Level 9 Solo Brute
Large natural magical beast (dragon) XP 2,000 Initiative +5 Senses Perception +11; darkvision HP 408; Bloodied 204; see also bloodied breath AC 23; Fortitude 26, Reflex 21, Will 22 Resist 20 poison Saving Throws +5 Speed 8, fly 12 (hover), overland flight 15; see also flyby attack Action Points 2 m Bite (standard; at-will) & Poison Reach 2; +12 vs. AC; 1d8 + 5, and ongoing 5 poison damage (save ends). m Claw (standard; at-will) Reach 2; +12 vs. AC; 1d8 + 5 damage. M Dragon’s Fury (standard; at-will) Calaunxin makes two claw attacks. If she hits a single target with both claws, she makes a bite attack against the same target. M Flyby Attack (standard; recharge 7 8 ) Calaunxin flies up to 12 squares and makes a bite attack at any point during the move without provoking opportunity attacks from the target. R Luring Glare (minor 1/round; at-will) & Charm, Gaze Ranged 10; +10 vs. Will; the target slides 2 squares. C Breath Weapon (standard; recharge 7 8 ) & Poison Close blast 5; +10 vs. Reflex; 4d6 + 6 poison damage, and the target is slowed (save ends both). Aftereffect: The target is slowed and weakened (save ends both). C Bloodied Breath (free, when first bloodied; encounter) & Poison Calaunxin’s breath weapon recharges, and she uses it immediately. C Frightful Presence (standard; encounter) & Fear Close burst 5; targets enemies; +10 vs. Will; the target is stunned until the end of Calaunxin’s next turn. Aftereffect: The target takes a -2 penalty to attack rolls (save ends). Alignment Evil Languages Common, Draconic Skills Athletics +19 Str 20 (+9) Dex 12 (+5) Wis 14 (+6) Con 22 (+10) Int 12 (+5) Cha 10 (+4)
Fe b r u a r y 2 0 0 9
|
D U N G E O N 16 3
31
Beyond the Mottled Tower
Tactics Antharosk and Calaunxin are merciless combatants, and are well versed in fighting together. Antharosk uses his breath weapon to slow opponents fighting Calaunxin before switching to f lyby attack. If an opponent is dealing significant damage with ranged attacks, he uses frightful presence to stun it. Antharosk uses one action point in the first round of combat, reserving the other for an extra double attack to finish off a badly injured target. Calaunxin is more impetuous than Antharosk, and she hurtles into melee using dragon’s fury. If two or more targets present themselves, she uses her breath weapon, relying on frightful presence to prevent foes from fleeing. Calaunxin uses her action points to make double dragon’s fury attacks in the early rounds of combat. As a mated pair, the dragons are fiercely loyal to each other. If one is slain, the other goes into a berserk fury, focusing all attacks on the opponent that delivered the killing blow.
Blood Chaos Lake: The wide, swampy lake surrounding the Ever-Tree consists of a layer of blood chaos floating atop the water. The lake is typically calm (Athletics DC 10 to swim). Around the EverTree, the lake is 20 feet deep. The enchanted bole of the Ever-Tree resists the fell effect of the blood chaos, but the lake is dangerous to all other creatures. This potent distillation of elemental energy burns inanimate objects and melts living flesh. A creature that enters or begins its turn in an area of blood chaos takes 2d6 + 3 acid and fire damage and is slowed (save ends). Creatures in the blood chaos must use their swim speed or make a DC 10 Athletics check to move. They gain cover except against attacks from submerged
enemies. Fighting in the blood chaos imposes a –2 penalty to attack rolls except with spears and crossbows. Powers that have the fire keyword take a –2 penalty to attack rolls. Tunnels: Sarshan’s servants have carved 7-foothigh tunnels through the Ever-Tree’s vast roots. Ladder: Wooden ladders have been set over the Ever-Tree’s smaller roots. Moving over a ladder costs 1 extra square of movement.
Development Once the PCs have defeated Antharosk and Calaunxin, they can enter the tunnels below the EverTree. Go to “The Chase Is On (Part 2)” on the next page.
Features of the Area Illumination: Daylight filtering down through the tree canopy fills the area with dim light. Teleportation Circle: This permanent teleportation circle is set atop a wooden platform 40 feet above the ground. AC/Reflex 2, Fortitude 20, 200 hit points. Stairway: A narrow stairway leads downward through the trunk of the Ever-Tree from the teleportation portal. The stairway is difficult terrain. Thick Mud: The Ever-Tree grows upon a low island of heavy mud. Squares of mud are difficult terrain.
Fe b r u a r y 2 0 0 9
|
D U N G E O N 16 3
32
Beyond the Mottled Tower
THE CHASE IS ON (PART 2) Encounter Level 11 (1,800 XP)
Setup In this second part of the connected skill challenge, the PCs enter the tunnels below the Ever-Tree in search of Sarshan. At the culmination of the skill challenge, the PCs catch a first glimpse of the shadar-kai as he works to redirect the flow of blood chaos to another location in the Vale. When he spies the PCs, he flees to an island amid the Sea of Fire deep in the Elemental Chaos. The Chase Is On (Part 2) Skill Challenge
Level 11 XP 1,800
The fetid tunnels beneath the Ever-Tree are a dark labyrinth, but you have no time to lose. The PCs make their way through the twisting tunnels beneath the Ever-Tree. Complexity 3 (requires 8 successes before 3 failures). Primary Skills Acrobatics, Athletics, Dungeoneering, Stealth. Other Skills Nature. Victory The PCs make their way through the tunnels beneath the EverTree without expending significant resources. As a result, they are ready to take the fight to Sarshan’s servants. Defeat The PCs emerge from the labyrinthine tunnels after a tiring journey. All the PCs lose 1 healing surge and take a –1 penalty to all defenses until the end of the next encounter. Acrobatics (DC 16) (1 success or failure, maximum 3 successes). The PCs must move carefully to traverse the tunnels without losing time. This is a group check. One character acts as lead, while the others make checks to aid that character. Each ally that gets a result of 10 or higher provides a +2 bonus to the lead character’s check (which counts as the check to determine success or failure).
Athletics (DC 16) (1 success or failure, maximum 2 successes) Huge tree roots and other hazards partially block several of the tunnels (see “Features of the Tunnels”). With a successful Athletics check, the PC clears a path. Dungeoneering (DC 16) (1 success or failure, maximum 3 successes) With a successful check, the PC picks out the correct route through the tunnel warren. Nature (DC 16) (0 successes or failures) With a successful check, the PC senses the presence of a natural hazard. This provides a +2 bonus to one subsequent Acrobatics, Athletics, or Dungeoneering check. Stealth (DC 16) (1 success or failure, maximum 3 successes) With a successful Stealth check, the party manages to slip past a group of guards. This is a group check. One character acts as lead, while the others make checks to aid that character. Each ally that gets a result of 10 or higher provides a +2 bonus to the lead character’s check (which counts as the check to determine success or failure). On a failed check, the PCs manage to flee from the guards, but this sets back their progress. Alternatively, turn a failed check into an impromptu combat encounter (see the sidebar).
Development After making their way through the labyrinth of tunnels beneath the Ever-Tree, the PCs catch a glimpse of Sarshan and must face his servants in a cavern filled with blood chaos. Go to the “In Fetid Darkness” skill challenge on the next page.
Features of the Tunnels Illumination: Passageways are in darkness; chambers are illuminated by bright light shed by strategically placed lanterns. Tunnels: Tunnels are normally 10 feet wide. Chambers: Chambers are normally in better repair than tunnels. Most have flat, packed-mud floors and walls sheathed in wood.
Stench: The smell of mold and decay hangs heavy in the chambers and passages beneath the Ever-Tree. Though unpleasant, the stench has no harmful effect. Root Curtains: Curtains of roots hang from the ceiling to within 2 feet of the floor. It costs an extra square of movement to push through them. The roots provide cover and block line of sight for any creature not adjacent to them, except creatures that are prone. The roots in a square can be hacked down (AC/Reflex 5, Fortitude 10, 10 hit points). Huge Roots: In places, huge roots pierce the island’s muck. These roots are blocking terrain; creatures must either climb over them (Athletics DC 10) or duck under them (costing 2 squares of movement). Mudslide: Mud fallen away from the wall creates an obstruction. These squares are difficult terrain.
ADDITIONAL ENCOUNTERS If it appears that the PCs will be short of 12th level when they reach the final section of the adventure, consider creating a few additional encounters with Sarshan’s followers in this section. Use the notes in “Features of the Tunnels” to create an interesting battle site, then place one of the following groups of monsters or use these groups as inspiration to create your own. Group 1 (Level 11, 3,000 XP): 1 vampire lord (MM 258), 1 banshrae dartswarmer (MM 25), 8 ogre thugs (MM 198). Group 2 (Level 12, 3,475 XP): 1 ogre warhulk (MM 199), 5 troglodyte warriors (MM 252), 1 ettin spirittalker (MM 108). Group 3 (Level 11; 2,800 XP): 1 stormrage shambler (MM 232), 4 shambling mounds (MM 232).
Fe b r u a r y 2 0 0 9
|
D U N G E O N 16 3
33
Beyond the Mottled Tower
IN FETID DARKNESS Encounter Level 14 (5,100 XP)
Setup 1 skull lord servitor (L) 2 battle wight bodyguards (W) 1 elder troglodyte curse chanter (C) 4 cyclops guards (G) As they enter this chamber, the PCs catch their first glimpse of the elusive Sarshan as he flees through a portal. Unfortunately, the shadar-kai’s defenders have no intention of allowing the PCs to pursue their master. When the PCs reach this chamber, read: A pool of blood chaos and two teleportation circles dominate this chamber, a horribly disfigured shadar-kai fleeing across a slender catwalk as you enter. Even as Sarshan disappears into a misty haze that obscures the rear of the chamber, a three-headed skeletal figure steps out in front of you. A cyclops, a troglodyte, and an armored wight stand close behind.
Tactics
Skull Lord Servitor (L)
The skull lord takes on the most powerful looking melee combatant with bone staff attacks, making skull of bonechilling fear or skull of withering f lame attacks each round at enemies at the edge of the fray. The skull lord’s battle wight bodyguards fight adjacent to one another to gain the benefit of their shieldbearer ability. They focus on PCs seeking to move to the rear of the chamber. The troglodyte curse chanter stays at the edge of combat, targeting controllers and ranged combatants with poison ray and cavern curse. The cyclops guards lay into the closest opponents, flanking for combat advantage and trusting their evil eye to grant them extra melee attacks. 4 Cyclops Guards (G)
Level 14 Minion
Large fey humanoid XP 250 Initiative +8 Perception +13; truesight 6 HP 1; a missed attack never damages a minion. AC 27; Fortitude 26, Reflex 23, Will 23 Speed 6 m Battleaxe (standard; at-will) & Weapon Reach 2; +17 vs. AC; 7 damage. M Evil Eye (immediate reaction, when a melee attack misses the cyclops guard; at-will) The cyclops guard makes a melee basic attack against the triggering attacker. Alignment Unaligned Languages Common, Elven Str 22 (+11) Dex 16 (+8) Wis 17 (+8) Con 20 (+10) Int 11 (+5) Cha 11 (+5) Equipment hide armor, heavy shield, battleaxe
Level 14 Artillery (Leader)
Medium natural humanoid (undead) XP 1,000 Initiative +12 Senses Perception +10; darkvision Master of the Grave (Healing) aura 2; undead allies in the aura gain regeneration 5 and a +2 bonus to saving throws. This aura ends when the skull of death’s command is destroyed. HP 55; Bloodied 27; see also triple skulls AC 28; Fortitude 25, Reflex 26, Will 27 Immune disease, poison; Resist 10 necrotic; Vulnerable 5 radiant Speed 6 m Bone Staff (standard; at-will) & Necrotic, Weapon +17 vs. AC; 1d8 + 4 damage plus 1d6 necrotic damage. R Skull of Bonechilling Fear (minor 1/round; at-will) & Cold, Fear Ranged 10; +19 vs. Will; 1d10 + 3 cold damage, and the target is pushed 5 squares. R Skull of Death’s Command (minor 1/round; at-will) & Necrotic Ranged 10; the skull lord restores a destroyed undead minion within range. The restored undead minion’s level must be no higher than the skull lord’s level +2. The restored minion stands in the space where is fell (or in any adjacent space if that space is occupied) as a free action, has normal full hit points, and can take actions (as normal) on its next turn. R Skull of Withering Flame (minor 1/round; at-will) & Fire, Necrotic Ranged 10; +19 vs. Fortitude; 2d6 + 5 fire and necrotic damage. Triple Skulls & Healing When a skull lord is reduced to 0 hit points, one of its skulls (determined randomly from the three powers above) is destroyed, and it loses the ability to use that power. If the creature has any skulls remaining, it instantly heals to full hit points (55 hit points). When all three skulls are destroyed, the skull lord is destroyed as well. Alignment Evil Languages Common Skills Bluff +18, Insight +15, Intimidate +18 Str 14 (+9) Dex 18 (+11) Wis 16 (+10) Con 19 (+11) Int 17 (+10) Cha 23 (+13) Equipment staff, 3 iron crowns, ritual book
Fe b r u a r y 2 0 0 9
|
D U N G E O N 16 3
34
Beyond the Mottled Tower
2 Battle Wight Bodyguards (W)
Level 11 Elite Soldier
Medium natural humanoid (undead) XP 1,200 Initiative +9 Senses Perception +4; darkvision HP 230; Bloodied 115 AC 29; Fortitude 26, Reflex 22, Will 23 Saving Throws +2 Immune disease, poison; Resist 10 necrotic; Vulnerable 5 radiant Speed 5 Action Points 1 m Souldraining Longsword (standard; at-will) & Necrotic, Weapon +18 vs. AC; 1d8 + 5 necrotic damage, and the target loses 1 healing surge and is immobilized (save ends); see also indomitable presence. R Soul Reaping (standard; recharge 7 8 ) & Healing, Necrotic Ranged 5; affects an immobilized target only; +16 vs. Fortitude; 2d8 + 5 necrotic damage, and the battle wight regains 10 hit points; see also indomitable presence. M Chosen Target (immediate interrupt, when a marked enemy shifts or makes an attack that does not include the bodyguard; at-will) & Weapon The battle wight bodyguard makes a melee basic attack against the triggering creature. Indomitable Presence Each time a bodyguard attacks an enemy, the target is marked until the end of the bodyguard’s next turn. Shieldbearer Allies adjacent to the bodyguard gain a +2 power bonus to AC. Alignment Evil Languages Common Skills Intimidate +15 Str 21 (+10) Dex 14 (+7) Wis 9 (+4) Con 19 (+9) Int 12 (+6) Cha 21 (+10)
Elder Troglodyte Curse Chanter (C)
Level 12 Controller (Leader)
Medium natural humanoid (reptile) XP 700 Initiative +7 Senses Perception +15; darkvision Troglodyte Stench aura 1; living enemies in the aura take a –2 penalty to attack rolls. HP 127; Bloodied 63 AC 27; Fortitude 26, Reflex 21, Will 26 Speed 5 m Quarterstaff (standard; at-will) & Weapon +16 vs. AC; 1d8 + 4 damage. m Claw (standard; at-will) +14 vs. AC; 1d4 + 4 damage. R Poison Ray (standard; at-will) & Poison Ranged 10; +15 vs. Fortitude; 1d8 + 6 poison damage, and the target is weakened (save ends) R Cavern Curse (standard; recharge 5 6 7 8 ) & Necrotic Ranged 5; +16 vs. Fortitude; the target takes ongoing 5 necrotic damage and is slowed (save ends both) C Tunnel Grace (minor 1/round; recharge 6 7 8 ) Close burst 10; all allies in the burst gain +5 speed until the end of the troglodyte curse chanter’s next turn. C Chant of Renewal (standard; encounter) & Healing Close burst 5; bloodied allies in the burst regain 15 hit points. Alignment Chaotic evil Languages Common, Draconic Skills Dungeoneering +15, Endurance +17, Religion +11 Str 16 (+9) Dex 12 (+7) Wis 19 (+10) Con 23 (+12) Int 10 (+6) Cha 15 (+8) Equipment robes, quarterstaff, skull mask
Development Once these defenders have been defeated, the PCs can pursue Sarshan. The entire northern portion of the cavern is undercut by a buried permanent teleportation circle that acts as a portal to the Elemental Chaos. The skull lord’s ritual book contains the location of Sarshan’s lair. A DC 16 Arcana check reveals that strengthening magic has been applied to the portal by Sarshan. As such, activating the portal does not require a full Planar Portal ritual. However, the shadar-kai magically locked the portal when he fled, so that the PCs must successfully complete a skill challenge to activate it: complexity 1 (4 successes before 3 failures); Arcana, Religion, Nature; all checks DC 21. If successful, the portal opens up 4 hours later. If unsuccessful, the PCs can attempt the skill challenge again (repeatedly if necessary) after 12 hours. Documents carried by the skull lord identify it as an envoy of Onthorirfel, a lich dwelling in the Shadowfell. These documents also suggest that Sarshan and the lich have been collaborating on some plot, though no details are provided. A DC 21 Arcana check confirms that Onthorirfel is a powerful lich famed for his specialization in ritual magic. Although this information is not immediately relevant, it will become important in later adventures.
Fe b r u a r y 2 0 0 9
|
D U N G E O N 16 3
35
Beyond the Mottled Tower
Features of the Area Illumination: Bright light is shed by lanterns set about the chamber. Walls: The walls of the chamber are a mixture of packed mud and thick root growth (Athletics DC 15 to scale). Wooden Steps: Wooden facing panels hold together these crumbling mud steps. Catwalk: A thick tree trunk planed flat on one side serves as a bridge across the blood chaos pool. It is not perfectly set in the mud floor and rocks slightly when walked on (Acrobatics DC 10 to cross). Floodgate: A great quantity of blood chaos siphoned from Sarshan’s main reservoir bubbles at the other end of the floodgate. Blood chaos flows from the floodgate in the northwest wall into the pool below. The pipe has a cap that can be closed as a fullround action by a character adjacent to or on the pipe. Characters can close the pipe while standing in the blood chaos pool (but see below). It takes a DC 20 Acrobatics check for characters to perch atop the slick pipe. Portal Circles: The portions of the floor containing teleportation circles are magically hardened mud, within which mystic sigils have been burned. These portals are currently inactive, but a DC 16 Arcana check determines that they are designed to allow the flow of blood chaos to other locations.
Pool of Blood Chaos: The pool of blood chaos stands between 10 and 15 feet deep. Squares filled with blood chaos are difficult terrain. This potent distillation of elemental energy burns inanimate objects and melts living flesh. A creature that enters or begins its turn in an area of blood chaos takes 2d6 + 3 acid and fire damage and is slowed (save ends). Creatures in the blood chaos must use their swim speed or make a DC 10 Athletics check to move. They gain cover except against attacks from submerged enemies. Fighting in the blood chaos imposes a –2 penalty to attack rolls except with spears and crossbows. Powers that have the fire keyword take a –2 penalty to attack rolls.
Fe b r u a r y 2 0 0 9
|
D U N G E O N 16 3
36
Beyond the Mottled Tower
SEA OF FIRE Encounter Level 12 (3,500 XP)
Setup 1 f lame shard (S) 1 duergar hellcaller (D) 1 redspawn firebelcher (R) 2 githyanki warriors (G) Sarshan keeps the perimeter of his island lair well guarded. Because the shadar-kai’s business dealings cross every known plane, his servants are a diverse lot. When the PCs arrive on the portal earthberg, they find the island guard alert and ready for them. They take advantage of the shifting position of the earthbergs (see “Features of the Area”), attempting to keep the PCs from reaching the main island and the tower path. When the PCs arrive in the teleportation circle, read: A blast of heat heralds your arrival in the midst of an ocean of molten rock. Around the destination teleportation circle, numerous small islands float on this burning sea like icebergs of rock and earth. These earthbergs drift in proximity to a much larger island to the south. Tall dikes on this main island shield it from the worst of the molten waves. Through the heat haze, creatures are visible. A dwarf with coal-dark skin and blonde hair is stationed on one of the earthbergs, while a large, wingless dragon guards another. On the island, two githyanki stand with silver swords drawn. Close by, a red crystal floats above the lava sea.
Perception Check DC 16: The air above the fiery sea shimmers and dances with the incredible heat. However, a magnificent city is visible far to the north, its brass towers and minarets glittering on the horizon. DC 21: The dike around the large island has clearly kept it safe from the lava for countless years, but even as you watch, high waves break over the top. Molten rock is beginning to pool and spread within the wall, the island shuddering with a faint groan.
Development Once the PCs have overcome the island’s defenders, they can follow the path to the tower. Go to the “Galleries” encounter on page 39. Flame Shard (S) Level 12 Artillery Medium elemental magical beast XP 700 Initiative +10 Senses Perception +8; darkvision Heat Wave (Fire) aura 2; any enemy that ends its turn within the aura takes 5 fire damage and takes a –2 penalty to saving throws against ongoing fire damage during its current turn. HP 100; Bloodied 50 AC 24; Fortitude 25, Reflex 23, Will 23 Immune disease, poison; Resist 10 variable (2/encounter) Speed 4, fly 4 (hover) m Burning Shard (standard; at-will) & Fire Melee 1; +17 vs. Reflex; 1d8 + 5 fire damage. C Flame Shatter (when reduced to 0 hit points) & Fire Close burst 2; +17 vs. Reflex; 1d8 + 5 fire damage, and the target takes ongoing 5 fire damage (save ends). A Flame Burst (standard; at-will) & Fire Area burst 2 within 20; +17 vs. Reflex; 1d8 + 5 fire damage. Alignment Chaotic evil Languages Abyssal, Common Str 19 (+10) Dex 19 (+10) Wis 15 (+8) Con 22 (+12) Int 7 (+4) Cha 18 (+10)
Duergar Hellcaller (D) Level 12 Artillery Medium natural humanoid, dwarf (devil) XP 700 Initiative +10 Senses Perception +13; darkvision HP 96; Bloodied 48 AC 24; Fortitude 23, Reflex 23, Will 25 Resist 10 fire, 10 poison Speed 5 m Mace (standard; at-will) & Weapon Melee 1; +19 vs. AC; 1d8 + 5 damage. R Infernal Quills (standard; at-will) & Fire, Poison Ranged 10; +19 vs. AC; 1d8 + 3 fire and poison damage, and the target takes ongoing 5 fire and poison damage and a –2 penalty to attack rolls (save ends both). R Quick Quill Strike (minor; encounter) & Fire, Poison The duergar hellcaller makes an infernal quills attack. C Asmodeus’s Ruby Curse (standard; encounter) & Fear, Psychic Close blast 5; targets enemies; +16 vs. Will; 3d8 + 5 psychic damage, and the duergar slides the target to the nearest space outside the blast. This forced movement provokes opportunity attacks. A Quill Storm (standard; encounter) & Fire, Poison Area burst 2 within 10; +17 vs. Reflex; 1d8 fire and poison damage, and the target takes ongoing 10 fire and poison damage and a –2 penalty to attack rolls (save ends both). Devilish Sacrifice (immediate interrupt, when an enemy makes a melee attack roll against the duergar hellcaller; encounter) The duergar hellcaller shifts to the nearest space beyond the triggering attack’s reach. A legion devil hellguard (MM 64) appears in the duergar’s former space and becomes the target of the triggering attack. The devil acts immediately after the duergar hellcaller’s initiative. Alignment Evil Languages Common, Deep Speech, Dwarven Skills Arcana +11, Dungeoneering +13, Religion +11 Str 14 (+8) Dex 19 (+10) Wis 14 (+8) Con 18 (+10) Int 11 (+6) Cha 22 (+12) Equipment leather armor, mace
Fe b r u a r y 2 0 0 9
|
D U N G E O N 16 3
37
Beyond the Mottled Tower
Redspawn Firebelcher (F)
Level 12 Artillery
Large natural beast (reptile) XP 700 Initiative +7 Senses Perception +6; low-light vision Fire Within (Fire) aura 5; allies in the aura gain resist 10 fire. HP 97; Bloodied 48 AC 25; Fortitude 25, Reflex 22, Will 21 Resist 20 fire Speed 4 m Bite (standard; at-will) & Fire +16 vs. AC; 1d10 + 4 damage, and ongoing 5 fire damage (save ends). R Fire Belch (standard; at-will) & Fire Ranged 12; +15 vs. Reflex; 2d6 + 1 damage, and ongoing 5 fire damage (save ends). A Fire Burst (standard; recharge 7 8 ) & Fire Area burst 2 within 10; +15 vs. Reflex; 3d6 + 1 damage, and ongoing 5 fire damage (save ends). Miss: Half damage, and no ongoing fire damage. Alignment Unaligned Languages — Str 18 (+10) Dex 13 (+7) Wis 13 (+6) Con 19 (+10) Int 2 (+2) Cha 8 (+5)
2 Githyanki Warriors (G) Medium natural humanoid
Level 12 Soldier XP 700
Initiative +13 Senses Perception +12 HP 118; Bloodied 59 AC 28; Fortitude 25, Reflex 23, Will 22 Saving Throws +2 against charm effects Speed 5; see also telekinetic leap m Silver Greatsword (standard; at-will) & Psychic, Weapon +17 vs. AC; 1d10 + 5 plus 1d6 psychic damage, and an extra 3d6 psychic damage if the target is immobilized. R Telekinetic Grasp (standard; encounter) Ranged 5; Medium or smaller target; +15 vs. Fortitude; the target is immobilized (save ends). R Telekinetic Leap (move; encounter) Ranged 10; the githyanki warrior or an ally within range can fly up to 5 squares. Alignment Evil Languages Common, Deep Speech Skills History +9, Insight +12 Str 21 (+11) Dex 17 (+9) Wis 12 (+7) Con 14 (+8) Int 12 (+7) Cha 13 (+7) Equipment plate armor, silver greatsword
Tactics
Features of the Area
The duergar hellcaller uses Asmodeus’s ruby curse to push as many PCs as possible into the magma. It then uses quick quill strike and infernal quills to target foes on other earthbergs. If pressed in melee, the duergar uses devilish sacrifice to gain an unexpected ally. The flame shard hammers all foes within range with f lame burst attacks, keeping enemies close to take advantage of its heat wave aura. The redspawn firebelcher hits the PCs first with fire burst, then alternates fire belch and bite attacks. The githyanki use telekinetic grasp to immobilize PCs fighting their allies on the earthbergs. If those defenders fall, or if the PCs make it to the island, the githyanki attack with their silver greatswords, using telekinetic leap to get quickly into the fray. Sarshan’s guards attempt to keep intruders off the island, following the PCs inland if necessary.
Illumination: The molten sea provides bright illumination throughout the area. Burning Heat: The heat of the Sea of Fire taxes creatures in proximity to it. A creature that ends its turn standing on an earthberg gains vulnerable 5 fire. Earthbergs: Like icebergs in the world, the earthbergs stay in constant motion on the lava sea. If you use separate dungeon tiles or other maps for the earthbergs, roll 1d4 and 1d8 for each one at the end of each round of combat. The d8 determines the direction of the earthberg’s drift, while the d4 indicates the number of spaces it moves. Earthbergs can end up next to each other, but an earthberg stops if it would move into another’s space. Lava: Creatures that fall into the molten lava of the Sea of Fire take 10d10 fire damage and ongoing 15 fire damage (save ends). Dikes: The eroded stone dikes that protect the island are 20 feet high (Athletics DC 16 to climb). Stile: The steps that climb up and over the dikes are difficult terrain.
Fe b r u a r y 2 0 0 9
|
D U N G E O N 16 3
38
Beyond the Mottled Tower
GALLERIES Encounter Level 12 (3,500 XP)
Setup 2 storm abishai snipers (S) 1 githyanki warrior (G) 1 centaur ravager (C) 1 arctide spiralith (A) The exterior of the 200-foot-high monolith tower is smooth-sided, polished obsidian (Athletics DC 30 to climb). Its only entrance is a single gate that opens into the upper portion of an inverse gallery. This chamber drops in a series of stepped ledges to a reservoir of blood chaos that covers the floor. This access point is guarded by more of Sarshan’s servants. When the PCs can see into this area, read: This cavernous chamber drops 50 feet to a vast reservoir of seething blood chaos. A series of stepped ledges work their way down the sides of the chamber, some connected by stairs, others by wooden ladders. Several ledges are decorated with statues. Straight across from the entrance and at the same level, a ledge contains the glowing sigils of a permanent teleportation circle. The defenders of this chamber stand in wait—two humanoid fiends with leathery wings, another githyanki warrior, a centaur bearing a greatsword, and a demon ensconced in a rune-scribed shell.
In the second round of combat, the tower shudders as the foundations of the island are inundated with inflowing lava. At the beginning of the second round of combat, read: A groaning roar suddenly shakes the tower. The seething blood chaos below begins to boil as a jet of magma shoots into the reservoir through a wide-gaping crack in the wall. Foul-smelling steam vents upward as the level of the swirling pool begins to rise. Refer to “Features of the Area” for information on how the lava and the blood chaos interact, and for the speed at which the chamber fills. 2 Storm Abishai Snipers (S)
Level 12 Artillery
Medium immortal magical beast XP 700 Initiative +9 Senses Perception +23; low-light vision HP 98; Bloodied 49 Regeneration 5 AC 24; Fortitude 24, Reflex 24, Will 22 Resist 10 lightning, 10 thunder Speed 8, fly 6, overland flight 12 m Lightning Sting (standard; at-will) & Lightning +19 vs. AC; 2d6 + 7 lightning damage. C Lightning Discharge (immediate reaction, when an enemy hits the abishai with a melee attack; encounter) & Lightning Close burst 1; +17 vs. Reflex; 1d6 + 8 lightning damage, and the triggering enemy is pushed 1 square and stunned until the end of its next turn. A Shockbolt (standard; at-will) & Thunder Area burst 2 within 10; +15 vs. Reflex; 2d6 + 8 thunder damage. Alignment Evil Languages Common, Draconic Str 18 (+20) Dex 16 (+9) Wis 13 (+7) Con 20 (+11) Int 11 (+6) Cha 21 (+11)
Tactics The creatures here seek to prevent the PCs from reaching the portal on the 50-foot-high ledge across from the entry, even as the slurry of blood chaos and magma begins to rise. The storm abishai snipers use their shockbolts as they weave through melee, hoping that their lightning discharge allows them to push a PC into the magma slurry below. The githyanki warrior harries defenders and strikers with silver greatsword attacks, reserving his telekinetic leap to jump up to another ledge as the magma slurry rises. The centaur ravager begins with a berserk rush, then attacks the closest foes with greatsword attacks. It uses its brash retaliation and its recharged berserk rush to knock foes off the ledge and into the magma slurry. The arctide spiralith stays in the thick of combat to make use of its arcane arc, alternating focused strike and charged lightning burst attacks.
Fe b r u a r y 2 0 0 9
|
D U N G E O N 16 3
39
Beyond the Mottled Tower
Centaur Ravager (C)
Level 12 Brute
Large fey humanoid XP 700 Initiative +10 Senses Perception +9; low-light vision HP 150; Bloodied 75; see also brash retaliation AC 24; Fortitude 26, Reflex 24, Will 23 Speed 8 m Greatsword (standard; at-will) & Weapon Melee 1; +15 vs. AC; 1d10 + 6 damage, plus 1d10 damage when charging. M Quick Kick (immediate reaction, when a creature moves into a space where it flanks the centaur ravager; at-will) Melee 1; targets the triggering creature; +14 vs. AC; 1d6 + 6 damage. M Berserk Rush (standard; usable only while wielding a greatsword; recharges when first bloodied) & Weapon Usable in place of a charge’s melee basic attack; melee 1; +15 vs. Fortitude; 2d10 + 6 damage (plus 1d10 damage when charging), and the target is pushed 2 squares and knocked prone. M Brash Retaliation (free, when first bloodied; usable only while wielding a greatsword; encounter) & Weapon Melee 1; +15 vs. AC; 3d10 + 6 damage, and the target is pushed 2 squares. Alignment Unaligned Languages Common, Elven Skills Athletics +17, Nature +14 Str 22 (+12) Dex 18 (+10) Wis 16 (+9) Con 20 (+11) Int 9 (+5) Cha 10 (+6) Equipment greatsword
Arctide Spiralith (A)
Level 12 Artillery
Large elemental magical beast (demon) XP 700 Initiative +12 Senses Perception +10 HP 97; Bloodied 48; see also bloodied shock AC 24; Fortitude 23, Reflex 25, Will 23 Resist 15 variable (2/encounter) Speed 7 m Bite (standard; at-will) Melee 1; +17 vs. AC; 1d6 + 5 damage. M Arcane Arc (immediate interrupt, when an enemy moves adjacent to the arctide spiralith; at-will) & Lightning Melee 1; +17 vs. Reflex; 1d8 + 5 lightning damage. R Focused Strike (standard; at-will) & Lightning Ranged 10; +19 vs. Reflex; 2d8 + 5 lightning damage C Bloodied Shock (free, when first bloodied; encounter) & Lightning Close burst 1; +15 vs. Reflex; 1d8 + 5 lightning damage, and the target is dazed (save ends). A Charged Lightning Burst (standard; at-will) & Lightning Area burst 2 within 10; +15 vs. Reflex; 1d8 + 5 lightning damage. The attack deals 1 extra lightning damage for each creature in the burst. Any ally damaged by the attack gains a +1 bonus to any recharge rolls at the start of its next turn. If the bonus causes a recharge roll to exceed six, the result is considered six. Alignment Chaotic evil Languages Abyssal, Common Str 15 (+8) Dex 23 (+12) Wis 19 (+10) Con 19 (+10) Int 7 (+4) Cha 12 (+7)
Githyanki Warrior (G) Medium natural humanoid
Level 12 Soldier XP 700
Initiative +13 Senses Perception +12 HP 118; Bloodied 59 AC 28; Fortitude 25, Reflex 23, Will 22 Saving Throws +2 against charm effects Speed 5; see also telekinetic leap m Silver Greatsword (standard; at-will) & Psychic, Weapon +17 vs. AC; 1d10 + 5 plus 1d6 psychic damage, and an extra 3d6 psychic damage if the target is immobilized. R Telekinetic Grasp (standard; encounter) Ranged 5; Medium or smaller target; +15 vs. Fortitude; the target is immobilized (save ends). R Telekinetic Leap (move; encounter) Ranged 10; the githyanki warrior or an ally within range can fly up to 5 squares. Alignment Evil Languages Common, Deep Speech Skills History +9, Insight +12 Str 21 (+11) Dex 17 (+9) Wis 12 (+7) Con 14 (+8) Int 12 (+7) Cha 13 (+7) Equipment plate armor, silver greatsword
Fe b r u a r y 2 0 0 9
|
D U N G E O N 16 3
40
Beyond the Mottled Tower
Features of the Area Illumination: Everburning torches and bubbling magma fill the area with bright light. Stairs: Creatures ascending the stairs treat them as difficult terrain. Statues: These provide cover. A statue can be climbed with a DC 15 Athletics check. Ladders: These wooden ladders are safe to climb. However, a ladder catches fire when the lava reaches its base. A character can climb a burning ladder for the first 3 rounds, but takes 1d8 fire damage in the process. After 3 rounds, a burning ladder collapses into charred cinders if anyone tries to climb it. Blood Chaos: When the PCs first enter, the lower section of this deep chamber is filled with blood chaos to a depth of 20 feet. This potent distillation of elemental energy burns inanimate objects and melts living flesh. A creature that enters or begins its turn in an area of blood chaos takes 2d6 + 3 acid and fire damage and is slowed (save ends). Creatures in the blood chaos must use their swim speed or make a DC 10 Athletics check to move. They gain cover except against attacks from submerged enemies. Fighting in the blood chaos imposes a –2 penalty to attack rolls except with spears and crossbows. Powers that have the fire keyword take a –2 penalty to attack rolls. Once magma begins to flow into the chamber from cracks in the foundation, the blood chaos becomes even more deadly (see below).
Rising Magma: At the beginning of the second round of combat, magma begins filling the chamber, rising at a rate of 5 feet per round. The magma level begins 5 feet below the lowest ledge. Ledges and ladders are submerged in the following order: Round 3: 10-foot ledge, ladder to 30-foot ledge. Round 4: 15-foot ledge, ladder to 25-foot ledge. Round 6: 25-foot ledge, ladder to rear 50-foot ledge. Round 7: 30-foot ledge. Round 11: Both 40-foot ledges. Round 13: The lava stops just short of the two 50-foot ledges. Creatures that fall into the slurry of blood chaos and magma take 10d10 acid and fire damage and ongoing 15 acid and fire damage (save ends). Teleportation Circle: This permanent teleportation circle has been set by Sarshan to send creatures to the teleportation circle in the next encounter. It cannot be reconfigured.
Fe b r u a r y 2 0 0 9
|
D U N G E O N 16 3
41
Beyond the Mottled Tower
CRUSHER ROOMS Encounter Level 12 (3,500 XP)
Setup 1 wailing ghost (banshee) (B) 1 lingering specter (S) 1 f lesh golem (G) Sarshan’s reconfigured portal system leads PCs who enter the portal in the previous encounter to the permanent teleportation circle inscribed here. Unfortunately, the portal is one way. Once they enter this chamber, the PCs’ only choice is to continue through it. This L-shaped chamber consists of three subchambers, each set 5 feet lower than the next. Each section is 40 feet high. The southern section and the eastern section contain a crushing walls trap. The middle section contains a crushing ceiling trap. When the PCs step off the teleportation circle, the first section’s trap is triggered. Each time a creature steps into a new section, that section’s trap is triggered. All three traps can be operational at the same time. A banshee, a lingering specter, and a flesh golem also defend the chamber, making it difficult to simply bolt from one end to the other. However, none of these creatures are initially visible. The banshee and specter are beneath the floor, while the golem lingers out of sight around the corner.
The guardian creatures do not trigger the traps. The banshee and the specter can phase through the crushing walls and ceiling without harm. Once the traps are activated, the golem is subject to attack, but it stays with the PCs regardless. When the PCs can see into this chamber, read: This L-shaped chamber is bare stone except for the glowing sigils of the permanent teleportation circle within which you stand. The chamber is divided into three subchambers, each set 5 feet below the previous, but the far end of the last section cannot be seen. Perception Check DC 16: Scratches mar the floor and ceiling, as if the walls have moved inward at some point, then back out. DC 21: The dull echo of your footsteps suggests that hollow spaces lie beneath the floor. When the walls begin to move, read: With a grinding of stone on stone, the walls of the subchamber lurch forward. At the same time, two ghostly forms shoot up from beneath the floorboards.
Wailing Ghost (Banshee) (B)
Level 12 Controller
Medium shadow humanoid (undead) XP 700 Initiative +8 Senses Perception +13; darkvision HP 91; Bloodied 45 AC 23; Fortitude 23, Reflex 23, Will 24 Immune disease, poison; Resist insubstantial Speed fly 6 (hover); phasing m Spirit Touch (standard; at-will) & Necrotic +15 vs. Reflex; 1d10 + 2 necrotic damage. R Death’s Visage (standard; at-will) & Fear, Psychic Ranged 5; +15 vs. Will; 2d6 + 3 psychic damage, and the target takes a –2 penalty to all defenses (save ends). C Terrifying Shriek (standard; recharge 7 8 ) & Fear, Psychic Close burst 5; targets enemies; +15 vs. Will; 2d8 + 3 psychic damage, the target is pushed 5 squares and is immobilized (save ends). Alignment Unaligned Languages Common Skills Stealth +13 Str 14 (+8) Dex 15 (+8) Wis 14 (+8) Con 13 (+7) Int 10 (+6) Cha 17 (+9)
Tactics The flesh golem makes double attacks to daze targets, hindering their advance across the trapped chamber. The banshee uses its terrifying shriek as often as possible, immobilizing PCs and pushing them back into the area of an activated trap. The specter uses spectral barrage as often as possible, falling back on spectral touch attacks while that power recharges. The ghost and the specter ignore the walls, passing through and behind them to confound the PCs.
Fe b r u a r y 2 0 0 9
|
D U N G E O N 16 3
42
Beyond the Mottled Tower
Crushing Walls and Ceiling Trap
Level 12 Blaster XP 700
As you step off the portal, the walls suddenly lurch forward and begin to press in. Trap: The first and third sections of the chamber are crushing walls traps, while the middle section is a crushing ceiling trap. All sections are activated individually. Perception & DC 16: Scratches in the floors and ceiling make it look as if the walls have moved inward at some point, then back out. Initiative +2 (roll separately for each section) Trigger The chamber is divided into three sections. Each section is triggered when a creature enters the area while standing on the floor. Special The southern section has crushing walls, the central section has a crushing ceiling, and the eastern section has crushing walls. The walls move inward every other turn, while the ceiling moves downward every turn. The walls meet each other and the ceiling meets the floor in the eighth round, assuming no countermeasures are taken. Attack Standard Action Melee Targets: Creatures in the area of each section of the trap. Once triggered, the walls in the southern and eastern sections move inward 1 square every other turn. Once triggered, the ceiling in the central area moves down 1 square every turn. Creatures adjacent to a wall are pushed 1 square. When the crushing walls come together, or when the ceiling meets the floor, all creatures in the area are slowed and are subject to an attack. The walls and floor stay in this position for 3 rounds, then move back at 1 square per round and reset. Attack: +15 vs. Fortitude Hit: 3d6 + 6 damage, and the target is immobilized (save ends). Miss: Half damage. Countermeasures & A character adjacent to a wall can delay the trigger 1 round with a DC 16 Thievery check. & A character adjacent to a moving wall can delay its movement for 1 round with a DC 21 Thievery check.
& A character adjacent to a moving wall or who is tall enough to reach the moving ceiling can prevent the wall or ceiling’s movement with a DC 16 Strength check (DC 21 if the walls are 1 square apart). All characters in the area can aid the character making this check. & The floors are riddled with niches under secret sliding trapdoors (Perception DC 21). Opening a trapdoor is a minor action, while slipping into it is a move action. The floor contains one niche per square. Each niche can be occupied by one creature. A PC in a niche can ride out the crushing walls and ceiling. However, upon leaving a niche and stepping onto the floor again, the section of the trap the PC stands in is triggered once more.
Lingering Specter (S) Level 12 Lurker Medium shadow humanoid (undead) XP 700
Initiative +16 Senses Perception +12; darkvision Spectral Chill (Cold) aura 1; enemies in the aura take a –2 penalty to all defenses. HP 66; Bloodied 33 AC 26; Fortitude 23, Reflex 25, Will 23 Immune disease, poison; Resist 15 necrotic, insubstantial; Vulnerable 5 radiant Speed fly 6 (hover); phasing m Spectral Touch (standard; at-will) & Necrotic +15 vs. Reflex; 2d8 + 5 necrotic damage. C Spectral Barrage (standard; recharge 7 8 ) & Illusion, Psychic Close burst 2; targets enemies; +15 vs. Will; 3d6 psychic damage, and the target is knocked prone. Invisibility (standard; at-will) & Illusion The specter becomes invisible until it attacks or until it is hit by an attack. Alignment Chaotic evil Languages Common Skills Stealth +17 Str 19 (+10) Dex 22 (+12) Wis 12 (+7) Con 16 (+9) Int 10 (+6) Cha 19 (+10)
Flesh Golem (G)
Level 12 Elite Brute
Large natural animate (construct) XP 1,400 Initiative +4 Senses Perception +5; darkvision HP 304; Bloodied 152; see also berserk attack AC 26; Fortitude 29, Reflex 21, Will 22 Saving Throws +2 Speed 6; can’t shift Action Points 1 m Slam (standard; at-will) Reach 2; +16 vs. AC (+18 while bloodied); 2d8 + 5 damage, and the target is dazed (save ends). M Double Attack (standard; at-will) The flesh golem makes two slam attacks. M Berserk Attack (immediate reaction, when damaged by an attack while bloodied; at-will) The flesh golem makes a slam attack against a random target within its reach. M Golem Rampage (standard; recharge 7 8 ) The flesh golem moves up to its speed plus 2 and can move through enemies’ spaces, provoking opportunity attacks as normal. When it enters a creature’s space (ally or enemy), the golem makes a slam attack against that creature. The creature remains in its space, and the golem must leave the space after it attacks. The golem must end its rampage in an unoccupied space. Alignment Unaligned Languages — Str 20 (+11) Dex 7 (+4) Wis 8 (+5) Con 22 (+12) Int 3 (+2) Cha 3 (+2)
Fe b r u a r y 2 0 0 9
|
D U N G E O N 16 3
43
Beyond the Mottled Tower
Development As soon as the PCs pass through the double doors in the eastern chamber, they are teleported to the roof of the tower. Go to the “Final Battle” encounter on page 45.
Features of the Area Illumination: Dark. Crushing Walls and Ceiling: See the trap statistics block. Niches Beneath the Floor: See “Countermeasures” in the trap statistics block. Teleportation Circle: This permanent teleportation circle leads from the previous encounter to this chamber. Sarshan has configured the portal for oneway access into this area. However, a PC who spends 10 minutes and succeeds on five DC 21 Arcana checks can reconfigure the portal to take the PCs back to the galleries. Double Doors: The double doors on the eastern side of the chamber are set in an alcove that provides enough space for two Medium creatures to avoid the crushing walls. The double doors are locked (Thievery DC 16 to open; Strength check 21 to break). Anyone who walks through the doors appears in the teleportation circle inscribed on the open roof of the monolith in the “Final Battle” encounter.
Fe b r u a r y 2 0 0 9
|
D U N G E O N 16 3
44
Beyond the Mottled Tower
FINAL BATTLE Encounter Level 16 (7,800 XP)
DC 16: The teleportation circle has been prepared for a Linked Portal ritual—one that Sarshan is only minutes away from completing.
Setup
4 Githyanki Thugs (T)
Level 12 Minion
3 Githyanki Warriors (W)
Level 12 Soldier
4 githyanki thugs (T) 3 githyanki warriors (W) 1 githyanki mindslicer (G) 2 shadar-kai warriors (K) Sarshan (S) After overcoming the tower’s defenses, the PCs finally catch up with Sarshan. The shadar-kai knows the characters are in the tower, and despite holding the upper hand in their first meeting (“Shadow Rift of Umbraforge,” Dungeon 158) he has come to fear their power. Sarshan’s escape portal was damaged when he miscalculated the amount of power needed to open the portals that vented blood chaos into Elsir Vale. As the PCs arrive on the roof of the tower, he labors behind a force sphere to activate his escape route, two shadar-kai warriors at his side. A squad of githyanki stands on guard outside the sphere. When the PCs arrive on the tower roof, read: The top of the tower is guarded by eight warrior githyanki, all bearing silver greatswords. Their leader wields a sliver longsword, eyes flashing with mystic power. On the far side of a tower, a sphere of translucent force protects three figures: Sarshan and two shadar-kai bodyguards. However, the scars that the arms dealer bore when you saw him in Umbraforge pale in comparison to his current state. The shadar-kai’s skin seethes and bubbles as tendrils of blood chaos erupt from open sores on his face and hands. Within the protective force sphere, he works intently over a teleportation circle, attempting to activate its power. Arcana Check
Medium natural humanoid XP 175 Initiative +6 Senses Perception +6 HP 1; a missed attack never damages a minion. AC 24; Fortitude 26, Reflex 21, Will 21 Speed 5 m Silver Greatsword (standard; at-will) & Psychic, Weapon +15 vs. AC; 6 damage, and the target is immobilized (save ends). Alignment Evil Languages Common, Deep Speech Str 21 (+11) Dex 11 (+6) Wis 11 (+6) Con 21 (+11) Int 11 (+6) Cha 13 (+7) Equipment silver greatsword
Medium natural humanoid XP 700 Initiative +13 Senses Perception +12 HP 118; Bloodied 59 AC 28; Fortitude 25, Reflex 23, Will 22 Saving Throws +2 against charm effects Speed 5; see also telekinetic leap m Silver Greatsword (standard; at-will) & Psychic, Weapon +17 vs. AC; 1d10 + 5 plus 1d6 psychic damage, and an extra 3d6 psychic damage if the target is immobilized. R Telekinetic Grasp (standard; encounter) Ranged 5; Medium or smaller target; +15 vs. Fortitude; the target is immobilized (save ends). R Telekinetic Leap (move; encounter) Ranged 10; the githyanki warrior or an ally within range can fly up to 5 squares. Alignment Evil Languages Common, Deep Speech Skills History +9, Insight +12 Str 21 (+11) Dex 17 (+9) Wis 12 (+7) Con 14 (+8) Int 12 (+7) Cha 13 (+7) Equipment plate armor, silver greatsword
Githyanki Mindslicer (G)
Level 13 Artillery
Medium natural humanoid XP 800 Initiative +11 Senses Perception +12 HP 98; Bloodied 49 AC 27; Fortitude 24, Reflex 25, Will 24 Saving Throws +2 against charm effects Speed 6; see also telekinetic leap m Silver Longsword (standard; at-will) & Psychic, Weapon +18 vs. AC; 1d8 + 2 plus 1d8 psychic damage. R Mindslice (standard; at-will) & Psychic Ranged 10; +16 vs. Will; 2d8 + 3 psychic damage. R Telekinetic Leap (move; encounter) Ranged 10; the githyanki mindslicer or an ally within range can fly up to 5 squares. A Psychic Barrage (standard; recharge 8 ) & Psychic Area burst 1 within 20; +16 vs. Will; 1d6 + 3 psychic damage, and the target takes ongoing 5 psychic damage and cannot use daily or encounter powers (save ends both). Alignment Evil Languages Common, Deep Speech Skills History +11, Insight +12 Str 14 (+8) Dex 16 (+9) Wis 12 (+7) Con 14 (+8) Int 17 (+9) Cha 11 (+6) Equipment robes, overcoat, silver longsword
2 Shadar-Kai Warriors (K)
Level 8 Soldier
Medium shadow humanoid XP 350 Initiative +11 Senses Perception +6; low-light vision HP 86; Bloodied 43 AC 24; Fortitude 19, Reflex 20, Will 17 Speed 5; see also shadow jaunt m Katar (standard; at-will) & Weapon +13 vs. AC; 1d6 + 3 damage (crit 1d6 + 9). M Double Attack (standard; at-will) & Weapon The shadar-kai warrior makes two katar attacks. M Cage of Gloom (standard; recharge 7 8 ) The shadar-kai warrior makes a katar attack. If the attack hits, the shadar-kai warrior makes a secondary attack as strands of shadow coil around the target. Secondary Attack: +11 vs. Reflex; the target is restrained (save ends). Shadow Jaunt (move; encounter) & Teleportation The shadar-kai warrior teleports 3 squares and becomes insubstantial until the start of its next turn. Alignment Unaligned Languages Common Skills Acrobatics +15, Stealth +15 Str 17 (+7) Dex 20 (+9) Wis 14 (+6) Con 14 (+6) Int 12 (+5) Cha 11 (+4) Equipment shadowmail, 2 katars Fe b r u a r y 2 0 0 9
|
D U N G E O N 16 3
45
Beyond the Mottled Tower
Sarshan (S)
Level 12 Solo Controller
Medium shadow humanoid, shadar-kai XP 3,500 Initiative +10 Senses Perception +15; low-light vision Blood Chaos aura 2; an enemy that ends its turn in the aura takes ongoing 10 acid damage (save ends). HP 650; Bloodied 325 AC 28; Fortitude 25, Reflex 26, Will 25 Resist 20 acid Saving Throws +5 Speed 6; see also shadow attack Action Points 2 m Katar (standard; at-will) & Weapon +17 vs. AC; 1d10 + 6 damage, and ongoing 5 acid damage (save ends). M Triple Attack (standard; at-will) Sarshan makes three katar attacks. M Shadow Attack (standard; recharge 7 8 ) & Teleportation Sarshan teleports 6 squares, makes a triple attack and teleports 6 more squares, then becomes insubstantial until the start of his next turn. C Blood Chaos Flare (standard; at-will) & Acid Close blast 5; +16 vs. Fortitude; the target takes ongoing 10 acid damage (save ends). First Failed Saving Throw: The target is slowed and takes ongoing 10 acid damage (save ends). Second Failed Saving Throw: The target is transformed into a mass of slime (treat as petrified; no save). The Remove Affliction ritual can reverse this effect. C Chaos Nova (standard; recharge 8 ) & Acid Close burst 1; +15 vs. Fortitude; 4d10 + 5 acid damage. Miss: Half damage. C Chaos Scream (free, when first bloodied; encounter) & Acid Sarshan makes a blood chaos flare attack. Alignment Unaligned Languages Abyssal, Common, Elven, Deep Speech Skills Arcana +23, Diplomacy +23 Str 31 (+16) Dex 19 (+10) Wis 18 (+10) Con 26 (+14) Int 17 (+9) Cha 17 (+9)
Tactics The githyanki defenders outside the force sphere attempt to stop the PCs from interrupting Sarshan’s work. The githyanki thugs flank with silver greatsword attacks against defenders and strikers. The githyanki warrior joins its thug allies to flank a powerful melee combatant, using telekinetic grasp to immobilize any PC attempting to batter down the force sphere. The githyanki mindslicer stays at the edge of the fray, targeting controllers and ranged combatants with psychic barrage and mindslice attacks. The shadar-kai warriors fight as a pair, flanking the most powerful looking melee combatant with double attacks. When that foe is brought down, they split up to make cage of gloom attacks on separate PCs, hitting with double attacks while cage of gloom recharges. Pushed to the brink, Sarshan abandons his plan to flee as he joins the fray. His exposure to blood chaos has granted him potent abilities, which he uses to maximum advantage from behind the protection of the force sphere (see “Features of the Area”). He uses blood chaos f lare from within the force sphere, engaging a controller or defender with shadow attack and triple attack once the sphere falls.
TWO-STAGE FIGHT This high-level encounter is designed to push the PCs to the limit, and Sarshan’s last stand promises to be a memorable fight. However, if the PCs are down on healing surges and daily powers (and especially if they have not yet attained 12th level), consider splitting this encounter into two separate combats, with the second beginning only after the force sphere is successfully brought down. In this optional encounter format, Sarshan and his shadar-kai guards ignore the PCs at first, trusting the githyanki to deal with the party while Sarshan activates his escape portal. When the force sphere is brought down, all the shadar-kai join in the fray.
Features of the Area Illumination: Bright daylight. Tower Top: 3-foot high crenellations run around the edge of the tower, granting a +2 bonus to saving throws made to avoid falling off. A creature that falls off the tower takes 20d10 damage. Force Sphere: This translucent sphere is an invisible wall of force that protects Sarshan and his shadar-kai warriors. Creatures can pass out of the sphere but not into it. Once the shadar-kai warriors enter the fray, they cannot return to the sphere’s protection. The sphere prevents all weapons, powers, and effects from reaching Sarshan, but the shadar-kai can make blood chaos flare attacks through the sphere against the PCs.
Fe b r u a r y 2 0 0 9
|
D U N G E O N 16 3
46
Beyond the Mottled Tower
As the force sphere is not subject to dispel magic, brute force is the quickest way to bring it down: AC/ Reflex 2, Fortitude 20, 500 hit points. If the PCs simply wait, Sarshan concludes his ritual after 2 minutes (20 rounds) and teleports away to a redoubt in the City of Brass. Teleportation Circle: This permanent teleportation circle teleports the PCs from the teleportation circle in the “Crusher Rooms” encounter. Treasure: Sarshan has packed all the easily accessible loot from this lair into a large chest that sits within the teleportation circle. The PCs can claim 4,000 gp, one level 13 magic item, one level 14 magic item, and one level 16 magic item.
Conclusion In the aftermath of the battle, the PCs can search through Sarshan’s belongings to discover confirmation of the shadar-kai’s plots against the Freeriders and Elsir Vale. Sarshan’s notes and journals indicate that he fled to the Elemental Chaos after the fall of his fortress at Umbraforge, discovering Djamela’s island during his travels. After saving the island from the raging lava sea, the shadar-kai found fragments of the old efreet mage’s work, and had soon completed her dangerous research. When this encounter is over, the characters have the opportunity to begin a journey back to Overlook— a likely destination. You can feel free to allow that journey to happen, or you can jump right into “The Bitter Glass,” the next installment in the Scales of War Adventure Path. The events at the beginning of “The Bitter Glass” will take place near the outskirts of Overlook, but they can also easily happen at any point during the characters journey overland through Elsir Vale or any other part of the world.
Fe b r u a r y 2 0 0 9
|
D U N G E O N 16 3
47
Beyond the Mottled Tower
APPENDIX: CREATURES OF BLOOD CHAOS Blood chaos is an incredibly destructive force, but occasionally when it consumes sentient creatures, it warps and transforms them into new forms. Creatures of blood chaos are normally encountered in the world nearby or in flows of blood chaos. In such rare encounters, normally only a few such creatures are encountered. Upon the elemental chaos, however, legions of them gather near massive lakes of blood chaos.
Chaos Mauler Creatures of elemental destruction, chaos maulers are ruled by their primal instinct to smash and destroy. Willing servants of scions of chaos, chaos maulers are created when particularly evil or violent creatures are consumed by blood chaos. Such a creature’s essence infuses the surrounding blood chaos birthing it in a new, terrifying form. In many cases, a small portion of the original creature’s form survives this “rebirth,” providing some small clue as to its origin. Most chaos maulers appear as large, hulking creature composed entirely of frozen orange-purple liquid. Its head is mainly featureless and a single thick tentacle grows from its belly.
Chaos Mauler
Level 11 Minion
Large elemental animate XP 150 Initiative +9 Senses Perception +7 HP 1; a missed attack never damages a minion AC 23; Fortitude 25, Reflex 23, Will 22 Speed 6 m Slam (standard; at-will) Reach 2; +14 vs. AC; 8 fire damage Liquid Body The chaos mauler is perfectly adapted to living in blood chaos. It can move through blood chaos without penalty and takes no damage from contact with blood chaos. Alignment Unaligned Languages — Str 23 (+11) Dex 18 (+9) Wis 14 (+7) Con 16 (+8) Int 11 (+5) Cha 16 (+8)
Chaos Mauler Lore A character knows the following information with a successful Arcana check. DC 25: Chaos maulers are the most destructive of the creatures spawned by blood chaos. Creatures driven by an unquenchable rage, they batter their opponents to death. DC 30: Chaos maulers are often encountered with other spawn of blood chaos. In particular, skulking terrors use their unsophisticated attacks as a distraction.
Chaos Mauler Tactics Chaos maulers tactics are simple ñ they move toward the nearest opponent and pound it to destruction before moving on to their next target. If they face no opposition, they incinerate any nearby flammable objects.
SCION OF CHAOS Creatures of chaos and entropy, scions of chaos lurk within blood chaos, striking out at any who venture too close. Scions of chaos spawn when an area of blood chaos has consumed enough sentient beings. When such creatures die, a small part of their being infuses the blood chaos. Scions of chaos are intelligent, bloodthirsty foes driven by their desire to grow their numbers by consuming intelligent prey. These malignant creatures appear as undulating orb of melted and mottled orange and purple flesh writhing upon a bed of small, muscular tentacles. A ring of larger tentacles juts from the top of the orb. Scion of Chaos
Level 11 Controller
Huge elemental animate XP 600 Initiative +9 Senses Perception +9 Whirling Tentacles aura 2; the scion of chaos slides any creature that starts its turn in the aura 2 squares. HP 117; Bloodied 58 AC 25; Fortitude 24, Reflex 23, Will 24 Resist acid 10, fire 10 Speed 6 m Slam (standard; at-will) & Fire Reach 3; +16 vs. AC; 2d8+4 fire damage r Staggering Strike (standard; at-will) Ranged 10; +14 vs. Fortitude; 2d6+6 damage and the target is pushed 3 squares. A Coils of Immobility (standard; recharge 7,8) Area burst 2 within 10; targets enemies only; +13 vs. Reflex; 2d8+4 damage and the target is restrained (save ends) Liquid Body The scion of chaos is perfectly adapted to living in blood chaos. It can move through blood chaos without penalty and takes no damage from contact with blood chaos. Alignment Unaligned Languages — Str 17 (+8) Dex 19 (+9) Wis 19 (+9) Con 21 (+10) Int 16 (+8) Cha 21 (+10)
Fe b r u a r y 2 0 0 9
|
D U N G E O N 16 3
48
Beyond the Mottled Tower
Scion of Chaos Lore A character knows the following information with a successful Arcana check. DC 25: Scions of chaos are spawned from the fragments of sentient beings consumed by blood chaos. DC 30: Scions of chaos can lash out with parts of their body to immobilize their enemies and are immune to corrosion and flame.
Scion of Chaos Tactics Scions of chaos prefer to hang back from melee, using coils of immobility to inhibit their foes tactical movements. If pressed, they use staggering strike to push enemies away and when cornered lash out with their mighty fists.
SKULKING TERROR Aptly named, skulking terrors are sinuous creatures of sudden ambush and merciless assault. Silent predators, they can glide through or above flows of blood chaos in search of prey. Skulking terrors much prefer to take their prey unaware and are the most cowardly of the blood chaos creatures. Skulking terrors will temporarily retreat if clearly overmatched, but often return when their opponents least expect it. They are ribbed paper-thin creature that vaguely resembles a headless, flattened orange and purple bat. They drip thick viscous ichor in their wake from a number of small holes on their underside.
Skulking Terror
Level 11 Lurker
Medium elemental animate XP 600 Initiative +13 Senses Perception +11 HP 83; Bloodied 41 AC 25; Fortitude 21, Reflex 23, Will 21 Speed 6, fly 6 m Slam (standard; at-will) +16 vs. AC; 2d6+6 damage C Lethargic Countenance (standard action; at-will) Close burst 3; +12 vs. Will; the target is slowed and grants combat advantage to the skulking terror until the end of the skulking terror’s next turn. After all attacks are resolved, the skulking terror teleports 8 squares and gains a +4 power bonus to all defenses against ranged and area attacks. Combat Advantage The skulking terror deals an extra 2d6 damage on melee attacks against any target it has combat advantage against. Liquid Body The skulking terror is perfectly adapted to living in blood chaos. It can move through blood chaos without penalty and takes no damage from contact with blood chaos. Alignment Unaligned Languages — Str 14 (+7) Dex 19 (+9) Wis 13 (+6) Con 11 (+5) Int 13 (+6) Cha 12 (+6)
Skulking Terror Lore A character knows the following information with a successful Arcana check. DC 25: Skulking terrors are perfectly at home in flows of blood chaos and often use them to get closer to their foes. Their attacks can slow down their opponents, making them easier targets. DC 30: Skulking terrors retreat from battle if injured or outnumbered but always return at a time of their choosing to defeat their prey.
Skulking Terror Tactics Skulking terrors prefer to strike from ambush, seeking combat advantage against a foe whenever possible. To this end, they hide in blood chaos flows or swoop silently down from above on unsuspecting targets. Masters of hit and run tactics, they use lethargic countenance to slow opponents. If badly injured, or obviously outnumbered, they flee to return at an advantageous moment.
About the authors
Creighton Broadhurst lives in Torquay, England where, apparently, the palm trees are plastic and the weather is warm. He shares a ramshackle old mansion with his two children (“Genghis” and “Khan”) and his very patient wife. He is famed locally for his enduring love affair with booze and pizza. A huge Greyhawk® fan he has just miraculously survived the terrors of the Temple of Elemental Evil and is now bravely investigating a certain ruined house outside Saltmarsh. His freelance credits include work with Wizards of the Coast, Paizo, and Expeditious Retreat Press. You can check out his blog at http://raging-swan.livejournal.com. Bruce R. Cordell is an Origins and ENnie award-winning game designer whose long list of professional credits include the new Forgotten Realms Campaign Guide™ , Keep on the Shadowfell™, Draconomicon I: Chromatic Dragons™ and Open Grave: Secrets of the Undead™. Bruce is also an author of Forgotten Realms novels, including Plague of Spells, first book in the new Abolethic Sovereignty series.
David Noonan has an extensive list of RPG credits, including Martial Power, Scepter Tower of Spellgard, and contributions to the 4th edition core rules. He lives in Washington state with his wife and two children.
Fe b r u a r y 2 0 0 9
|
D U N G E O N 16 3
49
Haven of the Bitter Glass by Kevin Kulp An adventure for 12th-level characters illustrations by William O'Connor and Chris Seaman cartography by Mike Schley TM & © 2009 Wizards of the Coast LLC All rights reserved.
In their cities and citadels on the Astral Sea, the githyanki tasked with e nsuring success for the upcoming war struggled with a problem: How best to handle communication between d ifferent heads of the vast githyanki army?
M a rc h 2 0 0 9
|
D u n g e o n 16 4
36
Haven of the Bitter Glass
“Haven of the Bitter Glass” is an adventure for five 12th-level characters. The characters should gain about one and a half levels worth of experience in the course of the adventure. This means that if you’re running this adventure as part of the Scales of War Adventure Path, you’re adventurers should reach 14th level by the end of the adventure. This is the ninth adventure in the Scales of War Adventure Path; you can run this adventure as the sequel to “Beyond the Mottled Tower,” the eighth adventure in Scales of War, or adapt it to run as part of your own campaign. In this adventure, the heroes must thwart a sophisticated and manipulative githyanki spy whose diplomatic skills have assured him safety within a human city. In the process, they can save potential githzerai allies from extermination, forge an alliance, infiltrate high society, and distupt the lines of githyanki communication—which will change the course of war.
Background In their cities and citadels on the Astral Sea, the githyanki tasked with ensuring success for the upcoming war struggled with a problem: How best to handle communication between different heads of the vast githyanki army? The new githyanki overlord, Emperor Zetch’r’r, was not as magically adept as the late Queen Vlaakith, and the mortal world was vast; it would only be through surprise, strength, and communication that they would carry the day and annihilate their enemies. Five years ago, an obscure githyanki scholar named Kle’th found the answer. Four hundred years ago, the Astral Sea had been disturbed by a human-crafted artifact called the
Bitter Glass, a huge arcane focus in a human city called Auger that aided in communication. It created astral turbulence when it functioned. Under the rule of the now-deceased Lich Queen Vlaakith CLVII, the githyanki did what they always did when something disturbed them; in a night of fire and death, the city of Auger was virtually annihilated by a githyanki strike force mounted on dragons. The Bitter Glass was destroyed, buried beneath dozens of feet of mud and rubble, and few non-githyanki survived who remembered what it did. The githyanki considered the problem solved. When the githyanki set their invasion plans in motion, Kle’th suspected that this long-lost human device might be the tool they needed to organize their armies, even though it triggered evil dreams of self-reflection in those who encountered its psychic effluvia. The githyanki dispatched a subtle and accomplished spy named Telicanthus to the human city of Sayre, which was built over the ruins of Auger. Telicanthus was soon able to ascertain that the Bitter Glass existed deep beneath the city, but it would take a major excavation to find and use it. He settled in Sayre for the long haul, using an unusual method for keeping himself safe in a human city. Uncharacteristically for a githyanki, he adopted the guise of a charming, aristocratic merchant, making himself well known and the center of the city’s social scene. The process was calculated and effective. Telicanthus arrived with vast amounts of money, positioning himself as an exotic noble who sought refuge from the evil of his own race. He made sure that he seemed cultured, mysterious, and important. He gave beautiful gifts and threw grand parties with exclusive guest lists, spending his money freely on those who befriended him. Within six months he was the most
well known of Sayre’s social elite, close friends with the governor, and a prized member of the city’s most prominent citizens. He used this influence to buy himself the privacy and security he needed to pursue his true agenda: securing the Bitter Glass. Telicanthus then purchased the mansion sitting over the long-buried Bitter Glass and surreptitiously smuggled in githyanki to excavate Sayre’s undercity in search of the missing glass globe. He found it within months, and was unsurprised to find it shattered. Socially secure and with most of the city’s elite convinced that he was above reproach, he quietly brought in Kle’th to put the Bitter Glass back in operating order. Unfortunately, rebuilding the Bitter Glass was beyond the capabilities of the githyanki scholar. But in his long and thorough research into the githyanki’s communication difficulties, Kle’th had also read about the powerful and ancient island nation of Nefelus, home to sages who had fostered a trading relationship with the city of Auger in ages past. Kle’th learned that the potent scholars of Nefelus had procured the rituals and secrets behind the construction of the Bitter Glass, and informed Telicanthus of his research. A team of elite githyanki agents was assembled, and the group struck out for Nefelus. There, they managed to find some of the original plans and rituals behind the construction of the Bitter Glass, but Telicanthus’s strike team was discovered before they could gather everything they needed. They found that the Nefelese had since improved on the original design of Auger, but Telicanthus’s team wasn’t able to determine the specifics. Only Telicanthus himself made it out alive, but the information he brought back was sufficient for Kle’th to repair the original Glass and render it functional once more. The activation of
M a rc h 2 0 0 9
|
D u n g e o n 16 4
37
Haven of the Bitter Glass
the rebuilt Bitter Glass marked the beginning of the githyanki invasion. At the start of this adventure, Telicanthus has had the Bitter Glass functioning for six months. Kle’th has found a method for eliminating the astral backlash through a ritual that must be constantly performed, and Telicanthus now stands at the center of a communication web that links every single githyanki general (and several important spies) in the mortal realm. So long as Telicanthus and the Bitter Glass remain unhindered, every githyanki army has near-instant communication with every other, allowing them to coordinate their attacks with deadly precision. If the mortal races want a hope of winning the upcoming war, they need to discover and destroy this asset . . . but first they need to learn that it even exists.
Adventure Synopsis In a previous adventure, “Den of the Destroyer,” the PCs freed the mysterious deva Amyria from her imprisonment in the form of a platinum sword. They have not heard from her since she parted ways with the adventurers in Overlook. If you played through “Beyond the Mottled Tower,” the PCs have just finished a momentous adventure, chasing down and destroying Sarshan in his tower within the Elemental Chaos. While this adventure assumes that the characters have returned to Overlook, the opening is easily altered to a location of your choice. The adventurers have had at least an evening to rest and recover after returning from their battle with Sarshan; you might wish to give them additional downtime if they have items to craft, rituals to perform, errands to complete, or allies to mourn. When you’re ready to begin, the PCs are summoned to the
walls of Overlook’s western gates where a mysterious flying ship was sighted heading for the city. This ship, the githyanki war galleon Conqueror, has crashed near the southwestern wall by the time the PCs arrive. The only person on board is an injured githzerai scout named Tokk’it. He will announce that his race is the sworn enemy of the githyanki and that their last fortress in the area is under attack from githyanki forces; he stole the githyanki ship to try and summon help from the Heroes of Elsir Vale (the adventurers) before the fortress of Akma’ad falls. The ship can manage one more trip back to the site of the battle, and Tokk’it is ready to start the trip back immediately with whoever is willing to come. During the journey, Tokk’it admits that an important meeting of githzerai leaders was occurring at Akma’ad, and that their lives are at grave risk. Somehow the githyanki learned of the gathering and communicated it to a group of nearby mercenaries with lightning speed (using the Bitter Glass), and the leaders were ambushed almost as soon as they all arrived. After fighting a githyanki recovery team sent to reclaim the Conqueror, the PCs reach the besieged fortress, where their actions decide the outcome of the fight and the number of githzerai survivors. They have multiple options for affecting the raging battle below. If they succeed in routing the githyanki, the PCs learn that several of the githzerai leaders were slain during the battle and the remaining leader is hostile toward humans. The surviving githzerai plan to go to the nearby city of Sayre, so far untouched by war, and they invite the PCs to accompany them if they wish to play a part in the upcoming war council called, unknown to the PCs, by their friend Amyria.
What is an Adventure Path? An Adventure Path is a connected series of adventures that comprises an entire D&D campaign, from the heroes’ humble beginnings at 1st level to their epic triumphs at the pinnacle of level 30. These adventures cover all three tiers of play: heroic, paragon and epic. Each tier is covered by roughly six adventures, meaning that the entire adventure path consist of eighteen adventures. Each adventure covers between one and three. We will also point you toward suggested side quests to help supplement XP, assuring that your PCs are the correct level to tackle each adventure. “Haven of the Bitter Glass” is the second adventure in the paragon tier. The PCs’ exploits are reaching out and affecting the world beyond their immediate surroundings, and the actions of the heroes in this adventure have some far-reaching consequences in the coming war. Be sure to emphasize this over the course of play. This Adventure Path is meant to be a complete D&D campaign. That means we’re making some assumptions about the history and mythology of the world as the adventures progress, such as Queen Vlaakith’s death (an event we’ve adopted from a Dungeon adventure, “The Lich Queen’s Beloved,” from issue #100). You’ll see some classic heroes and villains from D&D history, as well as great ideas from past issues of Dungeon and print sources.
M a rc h 2 0 0 9
|
D u n g e o n 16 4
38
Haven of the Bitter Glass
En route, a surviving githyanki assassin attacks them and possibly reveals that one of the surviving githzerai is a spy responsible for Akma’ad’s destruction. In Sayre, the PCs meet a local githyanki celebrity named Telicanthus, who lauds them as the Heroes of Elsir Vale and invites them to tea. The githzerai accompanying the PCs don’t fare as well, since locals consider them, oddly, evil and thieving undesirables. They are initially refused entry to the city unless the PCs intervene and vouch for them. In the abandoned warehouse where the githzerai in Sayre are forced to stay, the PCs meet Amyria once again, and she asks for their help in organizing the fractious githzerai. In doing so, the PCs discover a major githyanki plot in the city involving Telicanthus. A divination spell points them toward a long-forgotten library beneath a ruined temple of Ioun. The PCs are attacked by a band of “beggars” en route, and they find out the hard way that the temple of Ioun is now a temple of Tiamat instead. With clues and information that Telicanthus is maintaining a magical communication network for the githyanki armies, the PCs have the opportunity to infiltrate his mansion and look for proof, perhaps when they are invited to formal tea. Confronting him directly is sure to end poorly, as Telicanthus has Sayre’s most important citizens as political allies. Secretly searching his mansion will reveal roughly dug tunnels that lead to the ruin of a tower, and the Bitter Glass itself. With proof of hidden githyanki troops and traitorous activities, the PCs can publicly confront Telicanthus with their evidence and finish him once and for all.
Preparing for Adventure “Haven of the Bitter Glass” has an unusual villain, since Telicanthus is a foe who cannot be simply attacked if the PCs want to reach their goals. That is to say, simply attacking Telicanthus doesn’t solve the PCs’ overall problem (the existence of the Bitter Glass). He also has powerful and influential friends who are also good and kind allies of the PCs. Simply killing him on the basis of a suspicion will be considered murder by the locals, and considerable effort will go into branding the PCs as outlaws and arresting them. For the best effect, you will want to play Telicanthus as extremely friendly and charismatic, keeping in mind his tendency to look down on githzerai even when it isn’t in his best interest. Telicanthus isn’t a traditional gloating and monologuing bad guy; he’s a witty and clever socialite who uses social expectations to his own advantage. Play him as such. He’s almost impossible to force into combat unless his life is on the line, and even then he’s likely to run while shouting that he’s being attacked by murderers. His foremost concern of any action is “How will this affect peoples’ view of me?” because his mission for Emperor Zetch’r’r is more important than his own petty vendettas. Telicanthus doesn’t appear until after the PCs arrive in Sayre, so to start the adventure quickly be sure to look over the different portions of the battle of Akma’ad and understand how they fit together. After the large battle the adventure takes place mostly in the city of Sayre, so you’ll want to be familiar with the feel of the city and its different neighborhoods. You will also want to be familiar with the agendas
and personalities of the arguing githzerai on page 58. Finally, review the descriptions of the Coalition members on page 63 before running The Coalition skill challenge (page 100).
The Quests “Haven of the Bitter Glass” allows PCs to earn quest XP in several places. Provided here is a list of the adventure’s quests, along with their XP. Major Quest—Uniting the Githzerai The PCs must unite the arguing and disparate groups of githzerai taking shelter in Sayre, convincing them to band together and help defend the human lands. Reward: 4,000 XP. Major Quest—Destroying the Bitter Glass The PCs must destroy or capture the Bitter Glass, preventing the githyanki from continuing their communication rituals. Reward: 4,000 XP. Minor Quest—Defeat the Githyanki at Akma’ad Through combat and tactics, the PCs must prevent the githyanki from overrunning the fortress of Akma’ad. Reward: 800 XP. Minor Quest—Publicly Discredit Telicanthus The PCs must publicly discredit the githyanki spy Telicanthus, humiliating him in front of his allies and supporters. Reward: 800 XP.
M a rc h 2 0 0 9
|
D u n g e o n 16 4
39
Haven of the Bitter Glass
Treasure Preparation As with previous installments of the Scales of War campaign, “Haven of the Bitter Glass” makes use of the parcel system of treasure rewards as described in the Dungeon Master’s Guide. The characters should accumulate seventeen parcels by the end of the adventure. You can supply these treasures in whatever way you wish, but the following sidebar presents the most likely encounters to bear treasure. During your preparation, assign parcels from those that follow to the encounters in the spaces provided. Use the players’ wish lists to come up with magic items for the first eight parcels. (Consider saving at least one or two of the highest level magic items for later in the adventure, after the PCs have obtained 13th level.)
Treasure Parcels Parcel A: _______________________, D1 (on the githyanki lancers). Parcel B: _______________________, A1 (on the githyanki dragonknight). Parcel C: _______________________, A2 (on the githyanki captain). Parcel D: ________________________, A3 (loot from dead githyanki, or as a reward for saving Akma’ad). Parcel E: ________________________, A4 (loot from dead githyanki, or as a reward for saving Akma’ad). Parcel F: ________________________, A5 (loot from dead githyanki, or as a reward for saving Akma’ad).
Parcel G: ________________________, A5 (loot from dead githyanki, or as a reward for saving Akma’ad). Parcel H: _______________________, T5 (on the person of the Filth King). Parcel I: _______________________, T6 (in the mound of treasure guarded by the coin golem). Parcel J: _________________________, T6 (in the mound of treasure guarded by the coin golem). Parcel K: _______________________, T6 (in the mound of treasure guarded by the coin golem). Parcel L: _______________________, T6 (in the mound of treasure guarded by the coin golem). Parcel M: _______________________, T8 (on the person of the undead librarian). Parcel N: _______________________, U10 (On the person of the githyankis performing a ritual inside the Bitter Glass). Parcel O: ________________________, Z1 (the Final Encounter, on the person of Telicanthus or his secretary Pennel). Parcel P: ________________________, Z1 (the Final Encounter, on the person of Telicanthus or his secretary Pennel). Parcel Q: ________________________, Z1 (the Final Encounter, on the person of Telicanthus or his secretary Pennel).
Based on the guidelines in the Dungeon Master’s Guide, the following parcels can go in the lines above. Consult the wish lists your players gave you for the first eight parcels, making the items appear to be githyanki manufacture where appropriate. Parcel 1: Magic item, level 17. Parcel 2: Magic item, level 16. Parcel 3: Magic item, level 16. Parcel 4: Magic item, level 15. Parcel 5: Magic item, level 15. Parcel 6: Magic item, level 14. Parcel 7: Magic item, level 14. Parcel 8: Magic item, level 13. Parcel 9: A striking gold statuette of a five-headed dragon with gems for eyes, worth 7,200 gp. Parcel 10: 7,000 gp in a huge pile of gold, silver, and copper coins. Parcel 11: A leather riding harness studded with fourteen rubies, worth 500 gp each (7,000 gp total). Parcel 12: Three potions of vitality; one 1,000-gp diamond; a small exquisitely painted portrait of Auglos, founder of Auger, worth 400 gp. Parcel 13: One potion of vitality. Parcel 14: 2,000 gp. Parcel 15: Eight exquisitely crafted stained glass globes, each showing a different scene from the late Lich Queen Vlaakith’s rule, worth 1,000 gp each (8,000 gp total); and 1,500 gp. Parcel 16: A crystal and silver hourglass with sand made from gem dust, worth 8,500 gp. Parcel 17: 5,700 gp.
M a rc h 2 0 0 9
|
D u n g e o n 16 4
40
Haven of the Bitter Glass
What You Need to Play This adventure contains everything you need to play, including background information, setup, encounters and maps. You may wish to review any appropriate Dungeons & Dragons 4th Edition rules before play begins. Make sure you read at least the opening sections and initial encounters before starting. Also review Telicanthus’s description on page 56, as he’s a somewhat unusual villain who uses the social pressure of a lawful society to keep himself safe from attack.
Starting the Adventure The adventure begins once the PCs have had a chance to recover from the events in “Beyond the Mottled Tower,” most likely in the city of Overlook. The DM should make sure that the PCs have no other pressing tasks before starting the adventure; once the PCs are contacted, they will need to leave almost immediately. Events begin when the PCs are interrupted by an exhausted, panting soldier from Overlook’s city militia. The soldier, a human named Coggin, has been sprinting through the city along with nearly twenty other Overlook soldiers trying to find them. Between gasps for breath, the overwhelmed (and slightly starstruck) guard tells them why he’s been sent. Read the following aloud: “My name’s Coggin, sirs. I was sent to find you. The guard captain asked that you report immediately to the West Gate. One of our scouts to the south reported that there’s some sort of a flying warship headed for the city. It’s armed, and it isn’t built by any race they recognized. After how you’ve helped the city so much, the captain would like you on hand in case there’s trouble. Sirs.”
Depending on where the PCs are in Overlook when the messenger finds them, it may take them some time to get to the West Gate. They will be passed through checkpoints by any guards they encounter, all of whom recognize the heroes on sight. A few minutes before the PCs reach the West Gate, they hear a loud scraping and creaking noise, like the sound of heavy wooden timbers being dragged roughly across the ground. This is the sound of the airship landing— crashing, really—outside the city.
Conqueror Down When the heroes reach a point that overlooks the west and southwest of the city, they see that a flying galleon named the Conqueror has ignominiously crashed into the war-torn turf beyond the city. The mast has an improvised white flag hanging limply from it. The galleon has skidded to a halt on the ground, and the ship looks to have already been in a war. Patches of the vessel have been charred by intense fire, with other sections badly damaged as if struck by large weapons. A DC 21 Arcana check identifies the vessel as something native to the Astral Sea, while a DC 23 Nature check identifies the ship as githyanki construction. A second successful DC 23 Arcana check reveals that the damage on the ship is similar to that which would have been inflicted by red dragon’s breath. A lone humanoid figure is visible on board, waiting by the rail. Citizens outside the city are fleeing from the wreck as quickly as possible, and the adventurers can hear their screams easily from here. Every guard nearby has a crossbow trained on the humanoid. With the PCs’ arrival, the local guard captain—a female human named Captain Jerra Dauralis—asks them to accompany her down to speak with the ship. It takes only a few minutes to descend the steps and
exit the city’s gate. Captain Dauralis is clearly rattled and will defer to the PCs in the ensuing encounter.
Adapting the Adventure “Haven of the Bitter Glass” is designed with five players in mind. You can easily adjust the adventure for larger parties by adding a few more monsters and increasing the amount of treasure, using the guidelines presented in the Dungeon Master’s Guide. When adding monsters, keep your changes simple; when possible, just add one monster whose level equals the encounter level for each additional PC. You can similarly make the adventure easier for fewer than five players, reducing the number of monsters and the amount of treasure. This adventure is designed for 12th-level characters, who will be 14th level by the time the adventure finishes. If your party is less than 12th level at the start, you might wish to use a side adventure or two to give them experience before starting “Haven of the Bitter Glass.” If not, a larger than normal 11th-level party can play through this adventure, but be sure to give them an opportunity for extended rests when feasible so that they have a better chance of surviving. For higher-level groups, you will want to add a corresponding number of monsters and treasure to ensure that the group is challenged. You might also need to adjust the target DCs in skill challenges using the Skill Check Difficulty Class table on page 61 of the Dungeon Master’s Guide. With some adjustment, you should be able to run this adventure for groups of three and eight players, and for characters between 10th and 15th level.
M a rc h 2 0 0 9
|
D u n g e o n 16 4
41
Haven of the Bitter Glass
Approaching the Ship A lone githzerai male stands aboard the ship, managing to look both exhausted and anxious at the same time. He carries no weapons and makes no threatening moves. This is Tokk’it, the only githzerai to escape the githyanki siege on his fortress. Roleplaying Encounter: Meeting Tokk’it (page 72).
On Board the Conqueror Once the PCs are on board the githyanki war galleon, Tokk’it will waste no time getting the ship back in the air and pointed toward Akma’ad. He does this by moving to the bridge and standing in the ritual circle, taking the wheel, and concentrating. The sails rise and the ship begins to right itself, taking to the air with a screeching groan. It tacks around in a circle and gains altitude as it heads to the southwest. The Conqueror is specially built to be a troop transport carrying as many soldiers as possible, so tasks handled by normal sailors are instead accomplished by the psychic echoes of possessed githyanki sailors. These echoes have no personality or ability to attack, and manifest themselves as translucent shimmers as they do sailing-related work ordered by anyone standing inside a runic circle on the ship’s bridge. The ghostly crew ceases functioning if this circle is ever destroyed. Tokk’it spends his time talking about githyanki and githzerai if anyone stays in the bridge with him. He explains that he does not have much influence within the monastery and that he hopes that his actions today have some impact on his status. He will also discuss his affection for a githzerai female named Gallia, who he hopes is still alive despite the fact that she dissolved their relationship several months ago. While he may not say it explicitly, it’s clear that he is
In the Event of a Delay This adventure assumes that the PCs quickly join Tokk’it in returning to the fortress of Akma’ad. If they delay for more than an hour before departing, the two githyanki lancers on their dragons arrive at Overlook and scout from the sky before attempting to steal back their galleon. Adapt the tactical encounter D1. Repossession Team (page 74) if this occurs. If the PCs delay for more than 3 hours before departing, any PCs arriving at Akma’ad will discover the fortress empty— with the exception of the hundreds of dead githzerai and githyanki littering the ground. Without the PCs to help the githzerai, the githyanki were able to breach the fortress and kill nearly all its inhabitants, leaving only a handful able to escape and join their brethren in Sayre. Adjust later encounters accordingly, assuming that Odos and Gallia were among the handful of survivors who fled to Sayre. This refusal to help may sully the heroes’ reputation amongst people who hear of it. In addition, any checks made to influence Odos (including those made in The Coalition skill challenge on page 100) are made with a –5 penalty. If the PCs choose not to travel to Akma’ad for some reason, three days later they receive a Sending ritual call from Amyria, asking them to join her in Sayre. Continue the adventure with the arrival of the characters in Sayre.
still in love with Gallia, and does not understand why she left him. He believes it is because he has not integrated well into the monastery’s routine.
It is during the voyage that Tokk’it explains how important it is that they win this fight. Read the following aloud: “This githyanki attack could not have come at a worse time. Most of the githzerai at Akma’ad right now are visitors. Our abbot is hosting a meeting of extremely important religious and political leaders. Kath’ik from the Monastery of Nine Stones, Most Exalted Odos from the House of Reprisal, Wellik the Elder from the Tower of Dancing Flame ... all leaders that my people look up to. I think they are deciding who will lead us in the upcoming war, and how involved we will be in aiding your world.” The conclusion is inescapable: Help the githzerai, and maybe gain githzerai allies to help during the war. If asked where githzerai are from, that they would view the mortal realm as the PCs’ world but not their own, Tokk’it can reveal the basic information about githerzai from Monster Manual (pages 130–131).
A Flying Ship A normal airship costs 85,000 gp, and the Conqueror is better than most since it doesn’t require a crew. The Conqueror is a plot device to quickly move the PCs to Akma’ad; the adventure assumes that the ship is badly in need of repair and won’t last much longer than the trip. The Conqueror’s psychic helm has been badly strained by moving the damaged vessel at high speed, and any damage the ship incurs during the fight against the githyanki commander’s ship at Akma’ad will be enough to disrupt the enchantments that keep it aloft.
M a rc h 2 0 0 9
|
D u n g e o n 16 4
42
Haven of the Bitter Glass
The Conqueror, Githyanki Airship Gargantuan Vehicle HP 400 (currently 90) Space 6 squares by 23 squares Cost 125,000 gp AC 4; Fortitude 20, Reflex 4 Speed 0, fly 12 (hover), overland flight 15 Pilot The pilot must stand in a ritual circle in front of the control wheel, located forward in the bridge. Crew The Conqueror does not require additional crew, with the role of crew being handled by psychic echoes of possessed humanoids. Ramming Prow The Conqueror can ram targets. When it does so, the Conqueror takes no damage from Large or smaller targets, and only half normal damage from Huge or larger targets. Passengers take no damage unless the target is Huge or larger. Then they take half normal damage. Ballista The ship is armed with two ballistas on its main deck. These are usable by PCs. Load Fifty Medium creatures; thirty tons of cargo. Out of Control The Conqueror moves forward at half speed. Each round, it has a 50% chance of descending. It descends 5 squares for the first 10 rounds it is out of control. After 10 rounds, it descends 10 squares per round. If the ship hits the ground after descending more than 20 squares, it is destroyed. Decks The Conqueror has four decks: an exterior observation platform, the topmost main deck, the middle crew deck, and a lower cargo hold. Soul Helm The githyanki soul helm located in area C18 controls propulsion, buoyancy, and psychic crew. This object requires regular infusions of possessed souls in order to operate, something that can only be done in the docks of Tu’narath, the githyanki capital city on the Astral Sea. If the soul helm is destroyed, the ship’s psychic crew and ability to fly fades after 5 hours. The soul helm has AC 4, Fortitude 20, Reflex 4, and 100 hp.
The Conqueror This githyanki war galleon was constructed outside the githyanki city of Tu’narath, and (other than the recent battle damage) shows all the signs of a new vessel: shining wood, new fittings, and few personal belongings on board. With a main deck that has room for almost fifty troops to stand and fight, it is designed primarily for the transport of troops.
C1. Main Deck The main deck has an abundance of loose ropes, traditionally used by githyanki troops when they board another vessel. They are also useful for PCs fighting on deck who don’t wish to be accidentally knocked overboard. The two ballistas here can be used by PCs using the rules from the “Ballista” sidebar.
C2. Forecastle This raised area has one ballista and overlooks the ramming spike.
C3. Sterncastle This raised area has one ballista.
C4. Crenellations Unlike most traditional ships, the sides of the githyanki war galleon have crenellations to help protect troops. Anyone on the deck has cover from enemies outside the ship who are not attacking from above.
C5. Ramming Spike Thirty feet long, this sharpened ramming spike is designed to penetrate enemy ships or huge foes. It is wielded by the ship’s pilot in the bridge (area C6).
Ballista Light Ballista Siege Weapon Load: Standard action Aim: Minor action AC 23; Fortitude 24, Reflex 23 r Fire (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon Ranged 20/40; attack bonus as noted below; 4d6 damage. Siege Weapon Rules No Powers: You cannot use a weapon power with a siege weapon. Actions: Loading and firing require multiple actions, which can be split up between different characters. Each character must be adjacent to the weapon. Actions required to load, aim, and fire are indicated above. Aim: Choose a square as the target. Skip the aim action if you wish to continue firing at the same square as in the previous round. You can load, then aim; or aim, then load. Attack Bonus: Use the following calculation. ✦ One half the level of the lowest-level crew member. ✦ The Intelligence modifier of the crew member who spent an action to aim. ✦ The siege weapon’s proficiency bonus, if any crew member is proficient (+2 for a light ballista). ✦ The crew member firing the ballista applies a bonus from any condition that applies to weapon attacks. ✦ Both crew members apply penalties from any condition that applies to weapon attacks. For example, if either crew member is weakened, a ballista attack deals half damage. Damage: Roll the indicated damage dice. A ballista adds no ability modifier to its damage rolls.
M a rc h 2 0 0 9
|
D u n g e o n 16 4
43
Haven of the Bitter Glass
C6. Bridge The entire ship is steered and controlled from this location. The room is relatively bare, boasting a runic circle on the floor and a ship’s wheel standing before it. Windows around this room allow the captain to see forward and arrowslits allow spellcasters to target attackers to port or starboard outside the ship with superior cover. The dead githyanki captain’s body lies in a heap on the side of this room. The rear of the bridge features a heavy tapestry giving glory to a tall githyanki knight standing triumphantly before a throne. This is an image of Emperor Zetch’r’r, the ruler of the githyanki. The pilot of ship can attempt to make attacks against another ship with the ramming spike. Doing so requires a successful Intelligence attack against an AC of 20. The attack deals 4d10 + 20 points of damage.
C7. Captain’s Cabin This room is where the now-deceased githyanki captain Dav’ot slept. The desk drawer is locked, requiring a DC 23 Thievery check to open. The desk contains the captain’s orders. These are signed by Captain Iquel, and order the captain of the Conqueror to accompany the warships Sacrifice and Tyranny from Tu’narath to attack the githzerai stronghold of Akma’ad. The ship’s manifest lists a full contingent of 140 troops, one dragon and lancer, and a gish assassin named Brann’ot. An additional handwritten note (see page 45) can provide additional information.
C8. Hold Entrance Removable planks, leading down to hold.
M a rc h 2 0 0 9
|
D u n g e o n 16 4
44
Haven of the Bitter Glass
Dav’ot, We expect the attack to go smoothly and quickly. Our informer is inside Akma’ad already, and has agreed to assist Brann’ot in the assassination of the foul githzerai leaders. Once you receive the signal from my flagship that the defenses are neutralized, land the Conqueror at a safe distance from the fortress and disembark all of your troops along with the Tyranny. By the grace of High Emperor Zetch’r’r, Lord of the Astral Sea, Captain Iquel The Sacrifice
C9. First Officer’s Cabin With no first officer on board, this cabin was inhabited by the gish assassin Brann’ot. The only items of interest are small hand-drawn portraits of three githzerai: Odos, Kath’ik, and Wellik, githzerai leaders currently meeting at Akma’ad. If shown to Tokk’it, he looks exceptionally troubled. Not only does he recognize the leaders, but he recognizes the artistic style as that of Gallia, the githzerai monk he is in love with, and he will say as much.
C10. Crew Quarters This central area has room for two dozen hammocks. Crew and common soldiers sleep here.
C11–14. Elite Crew Cabins
C19–21. Storage
These cabins are used by any crew members who are too important to bunk in public areas. This might include the ship’s first officer, mindslicers, gish, or lancers.
This area is largely empty, as the Conqueror held only troops on its way to Akma’ad. The githyanki expected that this area would be filled with pillaged goods on their way back to Tu’narath. The area also holds ammunition for the ship’s ballistae and extra food and drink for the githyanki troops.
C15. Lancer Cabin This cabin belongs to a githyanki lancer, the elite warrior who rides a dragon into battle. It smells a bit like dragon, and gear to repair a riding harness and saddle is piled underneath two hammocks.
C16. Crew Quarters A dozen hammocks are stored against the walls, ready to be hung when needed. This open area is used as a central gathering area when the crew is awake.
C17. Galley This area is used to prepare food for the ship’s crew and passengers.
C18. Psychic Helm This room is dominated by a complex device made of steel, crystal, and leather. This githyanki psychic helm keeps the ship aloft and maintains its crew of psychic memories. The helm seems to emit a faint screaming sound when in operation. Destroying this helm allows the ship to operate for 5 more hours before the magic it generates fails. The ship shudders violently when it begins to lose power, hopefully giving the captain enough time to land. Destroying the soul helm is possible, and the repercussions of doing so are described on page 43 in the description of the Conqueror.
C22. Brig Five pairs of empty manacles dangle here.
Repossession Team Less than an hour after the PCs have departed with Tokk’it on the galleon (unless they delayed substantially at Overlook), the dragon riders sent by the githyanki catch up to the ship. If either githyanki lancer is captured and questioned after the battle, he gloats that the battle was proceeding as planned when they left, and that the githzerai have no chance of surviving. They also threaten that Captain Iquel will deal quite harshly with Tokk’it for stealing their ship. Tactical Encounter: D1. Repossession Team (page 74).
The Siege of Akma’ad Akma’ad is a little-used githzerai fortress and monastery located 140 miles to the southwest of Overlook. Despite having room for over four hundred people, normally only forty to fifty githzerai monks and pilgrims dwell there to train and purify themselves. Over the last week, the site played host to a gathering of important githzerai leaders from across the planes. Intending to travel to the city of Sayre for a council on the conflicts besieging the area (specifically, Overlook’s
M a rc h 2 0 0 9
|
D u n g e o n 16 4
45
Haven of the Bitter Glass
recent woes have not escaped notice outside Elsir Vale), the leaders are deciding the role of githzerai in the upcoming conflict. They know that the githyanki are on the warpath, and the githzerai’s monastic leaders disagree as to the best path to take. Acting in accordance with tradition, the githzerai leaders have come to the heart of the burgeoning war to discuss the extent to which they will become involved. Akma’ad was their choice for a neutral and secure meeting place, but a githzerai named Gallia was possessed by githyanki months ago. She revealed the location to her githyanki contacts as soon as she learned that an important meeting was occurring. The githyanki surreptitiously approached the fortress, scouted the area without being detected, assassinated several of the githzerai leaders, and launched a full-scale attack with enough force to overpower the githzerai. The githzerai have spent the time since the attack desperately defending their fortress. If the PCs do not help, the fortress will inevitably fall.
When the PCs Arrive The adventurers pass over fields and woods that gradually give way to a reddish rocky waste as they approach the githzerai fortress. They see signs of the battle before they see Akma’ad itself; fire and smoke rise from the site in a dark pillar. The fortress is utilitarian and stark, with red walls rising up over a dusty valley. An overhanging mountain cave makes it extremely defensible. When the Conqueror closes on Akma’ad, the githzerai are close to losing. The upper cliff face has been seized by githyanki, and the githzerai’s defensive landslide has not been triggered. A gish assassin managed to infiltrate the fortress and assassinate several key leaders before fleeing. A githyanki champion circles on his red dragon and assaults any fortress defenders
who reveal themselves. Githyanki troops have broken through the githzerai’s defenses several times and entered the fortress, only to be rebuffed by the githzerai. Currently the githyanki are still outside the fortress in military formation, launching attacks and working on a final assault, and the githzerai have organized into three units to hold the fortress as long as possible.
The news is not entirely bad, however. The githyanki ship Tyranny lies crashed and burning outside of the fortress, brought down by concentrated githzerai attacks. Dead litter the battlefield—far more githyanki than githzerai—but the githzerai are still outnumbered almost five to one.
M a rc h 2 0 0 9
|
D u n g e o n 16 4
46
Haven of the Bitter Glass
The Flow of Battle
Falling Rock
You will want to be familiar with the different encounters and run them in whatever order makes the most sense. Most encounters allow for the possibility of a short rest between foes. Only the highly mobile dragon can engage the PCs quickly no matter where they are on the battlefield, making it tactically sensible to fight it first. It’s up to you to briefly describe what’s going on elsewhere on the battlefield. You’ll want the PCs to feel like they’re part of a huge battle; make the siege as cinematic as possible. The PCs can proceed across the Akma’ad battlefield in a number of ways. Achieving success at all four of the following encounters means the siege is broken and the githzerai survivors saved. The following order of encounters is most likely.
The PCs kill the guards stationed at the landslide zone above the cliff and drop several hundred tons of rock onto the githyanki troops assaulting the fortress. Tactical Encounter: A3. Falling Rock (page 80).
Side Entrance and Wall Breach The PCs finish off stragglers with the aid of counterattacking githzerai. They slay the githyanki who have just begun a ritual to gain entrance into the fortress, as well as stop a wall breach (tactical encounters A4 and A5).
Tactical Encounter: A4. Side Entrance (page 82). Tactical Encounter: A5. Wall Breach (page 84).
Another possibility involves the PCs landing their ship before being seen and dropping the landslide while avoiding detection. This is difficult but possible if they keep their ship low to the ground on their approach. This tactic requires coordination with the pilot (likely Tokk’it), who if not otherwise instructed, takes the shortest and most obvious route to the battle. If the PCs pull off this attack, they will be attacked by the red dragon before they can regain the air.
Draconic Champion The Conqueror is seen approaching the battlefield. The remaining red dragon, ridden by the githyanki champion, approaches to see who crews the ship. The dragon and rider attack, and the remaining ship Sacrifice slowly tacks to join the fight after gathering some githyanki troops from the fight below. Tactical Encounter: A1. Draconic Champion (page 76).
Boarding the Sacrifice The ship Sacrifice—almost as damaged as the Conqueror at this point—closes to commandeer the Conqueror. The githyanki commander and her bodyguard, as well as the additional troops who just reboarded, engage the PCs. It is possible that the PCs or Tokk’it will try to impale the Sacrifice on the Conqueror’s ramming spike. If successful, both ships lose altitude as they begin to crash. Tactical Encounter: A2. Boarding the Sacrifice (page 78). M a rc h 2 0 0 9
|
D u n g e o n 16 4
47
Haven of the Bitter Glass
The Aftermath Once the battle is effectively over, summarize the results based on the adventurers’ victory point total (see the “Who Wins?” sidebar). Allies or enemies flee, wounded are tended to, injured enemies are dispatched or captured, and loot is gathered. The surviving githzerai gather in front of the fortress to measure the cost. Read the following aloud: The surviving githzerai, many of them wounded, gather around an old blind githzerai who seems as aware of his surroundings as if he could still see. The monk speaks in a rough tone. “We’re alive. I don’t know how they knew we were here, but the cost was high. Too high. Both Kath’ik and Wellik are dead, along with dozens of our brothers and sisters. We lost the abbot and most of the monastery. Our conference is finished. Now I must decide our path.” With an almost undetectable grimace, the stoic githzerai turns his empty eye sockets toward the lines of dead and wounded. “Gather your belongings. In the morning we travel to Sayre. There is a conference there I am obligated to attend before we depart for home.” He pauses and turns his sightless gaze in your direction. “You aren’t githzerai, but you fought for us. Who are you?” The PCs can introduce themselves and explain their role in the battle. Most githzerai hail them as heroes, and Odos (the blind githerzai) grudgingly thanks them, but he is exhausted and grieving for his slain friends. He is not amenable to being told that the githzerai must ally with humans. If Tokk’it mentions that he committed githzerai troops to serve in Overlook as an exchange for getting help, Odos will not be pleased and will tell him to take it up with the githzerai in Sayre. Odos is not an inspiring leader; he is dour, pessimistic, and suspicious. Nevertheless, he isn’t a bad person.
He is greatly respected by his people for keeping them both safe and strong in the Elemental Chaos, and his knowledge of history and tradition is legendary. While many of the githzerai might individually disagree with him at times, they would all die to protect him. Roleplaying Encounter: Negotiating with Odos (page 85).
Who Wins? In a fight of this magnitude, with hundreds of troops fighting each other in addition to the PCs, it is handy to have a shortcut measure for determining success or failure in the overall battle. You can do so using a victory point system. For each of the following goals that the PCs achieve, total the victory points and consult the table. Goal Victory Points Awarded Landslide released on githyanki army
5
Githyanki commander on Sacrifice killed
3
Sacrifice destroyed or captured
2
Githyanki champion on red dragon defeated
2
Troops assaulting fortress scattered
2
Passwall ritual disrupted
1
Githyanki troops entering the east door slain
1
0–5: Almost all the githzerai are captured or killed by githyanki. A handful escape in the confusion, including the spy Gallia. Odos of the House of Reprisal survives as well. 6–10: The githyanki are rebuffed before seizing the fortress. Roughly twenty githzerai survive, including Gallia and Odos of the House of Reprisal. 11+: The githyanki are defeated and scattered. Almost fifty githzerai survive, including Gallia and Odos of the House of Reprisal.
Odos, Githzerai Elder
Level 16 Elite Controller
Medium natural humanoid (blind) XP 2,800 Initiative +15 Senses Perception +20, blindsight 20 HP 312; Bloodied 156 AC 30; Fortitude 28, Reflex 28, Will 30; see also iron mind Saving Throws +2 Speed 8 Action Points 1 m Hammer Strike (standard; at-will) +21 vs. AC (crit 19–20); 2d8 + 5 damage, and the target is knocked prone. M Hammering Flurry (standard; at-will) The githzerai elder makes two hammer strike attacks. M Knock Out of Sync (standard; at-will) +21 vs. AC (crit 19-20); 3d8 + 5 damage, and the target’s initiative count is reduced by 5. If the target’s initiative count is reduced below 0, it loses its next turn and then reenters the initiative count at 20. R Jumping Sparks (standard; at-will) ✦ Lightning, Teleportation Ranged 10; targets three creatures; +19 vs. Fortitude (no attack roll required for allies); enemies take 2d8 + 7 lightning damage, and the target teleports 7 squares, to an unoccupied space of the elder’s choosing. C Psychic Blows (standard; recharges when first bloodied) ✦ Psychic Close burst 5; targets enemies; +20 vs. Will; 2d8 + 5 psychic damage. Avenging Storm (immediate interrupt, when targeted by a ranged or area attack; encounter) ✦ Teleportation A ranged attack targets another creature within 10 squares of the elder. The elder teleports 10 squares into a square adjacent to the attacker and makes two hammer fist attacks. Iron Mind (immediate interrupt, when the githzerai elder would be hit by an attack; encounter) The githzerai elder gains a +2 bonus to all defenses until the end of his next turn. Alignment Unaligned Languages Common, Deep Speech Skills Acrobatics +20, Athletics +18, Insight +20 Str 16 (+11) Dex 21 (+13) Wis 24 (+15) Con 20 (+13) Int 15 (+10) Cha 15 (+10)
M a rc h 2 0 0 9
|
D u n g e o n 16 4
48
Haven of the Bitter Glass
After the battle, Tokk’it seeks out the female monk Gallia to introduce her to the PCs. In the process of seeking her out, Tokk’it speaks with other githzerai, many of whom remark how they thought she was dead when she was trapped on the upper roof and surrounded. When Tokk’it finds her, she coldly shrugs off any explanation (or questions) about how she was able to survive long enough to re-enter the fortress. Gallia is polite but formal to both the PCs and Tokk’it. She denies any wrongdoing if accused of spying, although as with other possessed individuals the characters have encountered, a DC 21 Insight check reveals that she’s under the influence of an outside source. Based on their experiences in “The Temple Between,” they’re likely to assume, rightly, that a githyanki spirit is controlling the githzerai woman. Convincing any githzerai that Gallia is a githyanki spy is not as difficult as the PCs might expect, even to Tokk’it. Her behavior has been odd in the past months since her possession, and the githzerai are familiar with the githyanki’s penchant for possessing individuals to use them as spies. Even so, as outsiders, it requires a DC 23 Diplomacy check to convince Odos and the other githzerai that Gallia should be questioned about her activities leading up to and during the attack. If they discovered the portraits on the Conqueror, they even have hard evidence that Gallia was sending the githyanki information, and receive a +5 bonus on the Diplomacy check. Should she be seized and searched, she has a small piece of pale green stained glass on her person that she cannot or will not explain. The glass is magical, and a DC 23 Arcana check reveals that it is a one-way communication device; when activated with a ritual only the githyanki in command of Gallia’s body knows, it
allows her to send a message to an unknown recipient (Telicanthus in Sayre, although Gallia refuses to divulge who her contact is). The glass does not allow her to receive messages. Gallia cannot be intimidated. As with possessed individuals that the PCs have encountered in past Scales of War adventures (see “The Temple Between” in issue #161), the spirit in Gallia’s body can’t really be threatened, since it can leave at any time. If Gallia is killed, the possessing githyanki spirit simply wakes up in its rightful body, leaving behind only a lifeless githzerai shell. The spirit in Gallia refuses to answer questions. In terms of the adventure, she’s here to confirm that the githyanki spies are everywhere, and that they plotted this attack for some time right under the noses of their hated githzerai enemies. If the glass is discovered and she has the opportunity after being accused, Gallia attempts to flee and rejoin the gish assassin Brann’ot. If the PCs are able to prove her complicity as a spy, Odos orders her executed on the spot. She will laugh and not resist. She refuses to answer questions. The heroes can attempt to intercede on her behalf with a DC 25 Diplomacy or Bluff check (bluffing Odos entails convincing him that they have a way to drive the spirit out) . Success means Odos orders Gallia bound in chains and put under a 24-hour guard.
M a rc h 2 0 0 9
|
D u n g e o n 16 4
49
Haven of the Bitter Glass
Gallia
Level 11 Soldier
Medium natural humanoid, githzerai XP 600 Initiative +12 Senses Perception +13 HP 108; Bloodied 54 AC 27; Fortitude 22, Reflex 23, Will 23; see also iron mind Speed 7; see also inescapable fate m Unarmed Strike (standard; at-will) +17 vs. AC; 2d8 + 3 damage. M Stunning Strike (standard; at-will) +14 vs. Fortitude; 1d8 + 3 damage, and the target is stunned until the end of Gallia’s next turn. Inescapable Fate (immediate reaction, when an adjacent enemy shifts away from Gallia; at-will) Gallia shifts to remain adjacent to the enemy. Gallia cannot use this power if the enemy shifts using a movement mode Gallia does not possess. Iron Mind (immediate interrupt, when Gallia would be hit by an attack; encounter) Gallia gains a +2 bonus to all defenses until the end of her next turn. Telekinetic Leap (move; encounter) Gallia can fly 5 squares. Trace Chance (standard; recharge 6 ) Ranged 5; no attack roll required; the next melee attack Gallia makes against the target gains a +5 power bonus to the attack roll and, if it hits, it is automatically a critical hit. Alignment Unaligned Languages Common, Deep Speech Skills Acrobatics +15, Athletics +9, Insight +13 Str 15 (+7) Dex 17 (+8) Wis 16 (+8) Con 12 (+6) Int 10 (+5) Cha 11 (+5)
The githzerai leader Odos is the only surviving member of a group of githzerai leaders meeting at Akma’ad. As described above, he’s taciturn and especially distrustful of outsiders as a rule, and these traits are only exacerbated by recent experiences. He lost several close friends and pupils in the githyanki attack on the monastery, and he’s not interested in any negotiations with Overlook at the moment. He flatly refuses to send any githzerai to the city to help shore up its defense, despite any promises Tokk’it
might have made. Odos intends to lead his surviving people to Sayre to join with other githzerai refugees there. But despite his resolve on these issues, the characters have the option of learning some important details from Odos. See the “Negotiating with Odos” roleplaying encounter on page 85 for details. If the PCs do not offer to accompany the githzerai to Sayre, Odos simply rounds up his survivors and prepares to begin the long trek alone. At that point, Tokk’it quietly approaches and asks the heroes to come along, concerned that Odos is not necessarily making the wisest decisions in his grieving state. Tokk’it mentions that this might give Odos a chance to know “humans,” and the road will be dangerous. In addition, the PCs may wish to learn more about a supposed war council that the githzerai had met to discuss joining in the first place. Of course, if the characters have engaged Odos, they might have already learned all about the trip to Sayre and the war council (see “Negotiating with Odos” on page 85). Underneath it all, though, Tokk’it enjoys their company. He feels more like a hero when he is with the adventurers, and he would enjoy spending more time hearing their stories. Sayre is over twenty miles away across rough terrain, and the githzerai have wounded who must be pulled along in small carts. Due to the slow pace, it takes two days for the githzerai to reach Sayre with their patients. Under the ministrations of the PCs and any githzerai healers, the injured troops begin to heal.
Ambush Although the githyanki attack was thwarted, Brann’ot the gish assassin survived by fleeing early. He singlehandedly killed two of the elder githzerai, and he
Allies at Akma’ad If you want, you can certainly decide that a number of soldiers from Overlook accompany the PCs on the galleon, or introduce a rival adventuring party to act as the heroes’ foil. These other combatants can engage different githyanki than the PCs during the battle at the githzerai fortress, allowing you to emphasize the sheer number of foes without having to play out every individual battle.
hopes to finish the job while the large group is traveling. He attacks on the night of the first camp. Tactical Encounter: S1: Ambush (page 86). If the PCs somehow manage to save a githyanki war galleon and use that to travel to Sayre, Brann’ot stows away on board and attacks at the earliest opportunity. He destroys the runic circle that allows the ship to be controlled and then starts hunting Odos and the PCs. His astral slide ability makes it easy for him to move around the ship quickly. Move the “Ambush” tactical encounter to the map of the war galleon rather than the tactical map indicated on the encounter page.
The City of Sayre Sayre is an artistic, monument-filled city built in a particularly beautiful valley. Sayre holds a university and a large number of artisans, making it a popular site for those who deal in either information or fine art. Population: Approximately 12,000, including almost 1,500 students attending the University. Most inhabitants are human, elf, eladrin, or halfling. Some
M a rc h 2 0 0 9
|
D u n g e o n 16 4
50
Haven of the Bitter Glass
dwarves also live in Sayre, although they tend to keep to themselves. Government: Sayre is governed by Lord Divian Torrance, a politically astute nobleman adept at playing different factions of the city against each other. Power resides with Lord Torrance, as well as the Artisan’s Guild and the University’s archdean. Defense: The Guards of the March are a force of 100 soldiers led by General Alvro Taramin that have little to do other than patrol the safer sections in and around the city. Most merchants, guilds, and noble families have their own mercenary guards that pro-
tect their property and work together when danger appears. In a time of crisis, General Taramin has the authority to call on any house with its own private guard to cede command of their troops directly to him. Fortunately, he has never had to do so, but if he were, he could call over 2,000 troops. With a cliff, a lake, and steep hills protecting three sides of Sayre, the Guards of the March spend much of their time outside the city patrolling the farming areas to the west. Inns and Taverns: Caperly’s Dancehall; Firetree Alehouse; the Rat and Hammer Inn; the Singing River Inn; the Sodden Mage tavern; The Tankard of
Ink tavern. The River Jewel in The Glassworks is the most expensive inn in the city, and the Inn of the Ugly Dog in the Dregs is the cheapest. Supplies: The Market; the Glassworks; Low Mountain. The Market District is the home of hundreds of different vendors of almost any product conceivable, although not all are legitimate. The Glassworks is home to the city’s finest artists and artisans, and is the place to go if you’re looking for jewelers or sculptors. Low Mountain is home to most of Sayre’s dwarves, and hidden weaponsmiths and armorers are available to anyone who can gain a prior recommendation from a dwarf.
M a rc h 2 0 0 9
|
D u n g e o n 16 4
51
Haven of the Bitter Glass
Temples: Bright Forge (Moradin); Covet House (Tiamat, hidden); the Founding Tower (Erathis); Great Hall (Ioun); Shrine of the Singing Waters (Corellon); the Waypoint (Avandra).
History Sayre is built in a small, defensible valley. Steep hills to the north provide protection from overland armies and make excellent spots for small defensive guard posts. The Lake of Songs sits uphill to the northwest of the city. Dammed at its outflow to help control floods, this lake is used year-round for fishing and recreation; it is extraordinarily beautiful and the subject of many paintings and tapestries by local artists. The Singing River descends from the lake and splits briefly into three branches as it flows through Sayre. A tall cliff guards Sayre’s eastern flank, dropping 200 feet to the valley below. The only direction an invading army could easily approach Sayre from is the west, across the farms and fields, and guard towers alert the town to any threat approaching from that direction. Before Sayre was built, the city of Auger stood on this site, built over 400 years ago as a refuge for exiled diviners. A diviner named Auglos and his apprentices were driven from the island of Nefelus after he prophesized a local noble’s death and was blamed by the man’s relatives. After fleeing the family’s wrath, Auglos settled in this particularly beautiful and defensible valley to continue his research into divination and communication. More academics and sages slowly joined him, and a small city—Auger—grew up around his tower. Auglos’s skill as a craftsman began to bring him fame. At first he specialized in divinatory devices such as crystal balls. His masterpiece was a huge glass globe the color of the evening sky, a device that could transmit messages thousands of miles and even across
planes if individually crafted receiving mirrors were first attuned to it. Auglos sold the communication mirrors for extremely high prices, typically to merchant consortiums or the rulers of more prosperous city states. His customers never knew that if he chose, he could hear and see everything that passed through one of his glass devices, and that he also sold much of the information he obtained through his eavesdropping, resulting in an even more profitable secondary business in the espionage trade. Auglos knew that his glass globe created psychic ripples in the Astral Sea when it was used, but he didn’t consider it a problem; how likely was it that anyone would be bothered? He should have done more research. His master glass, the device attuned to all the others that allowed him to listen in on so many fascinating conversations, created ripples near the githyanki city of Tu’narath, and psychic debris from the glass’s communication soon caught the githyanki’s attention. The githyanki quickly determined that someone on the mortal realm was using the energy of the plane to fuel a communication device. Paranoid in the extreme, within three months, the Lich Queen Vlaakith herself named this device the Bitter Glass and decreed that the psychic pollution must be eliminated. Her knights quickly carried out her orders. The raid on Auger was terrible to behold. Githyanki dragonriders shattered the town’s dam, flooding the streets with water and mud, then proceeded to pick off fleeing citizens one by one. By the end of the night, Auglos and his assistants were dead, and the Bitter Glass was shattered and buried under the broken tower that housed it. Auger’s remains were looted and abandoned, and survivors from the raid left the area, never aware of the reason behind the attack.
Rebuilding Shepherds moved back onto the site within sixty years, but without a dam on the Singing River, the site of the former city had become a flood plain whenever it rained. Finally, dwarven engineers rebuilt the dam on the Lake of Songs, and Sayre was built where Auger once stood. The level of the land had risen after so many years of floods, and none of the old buildings were still visible above ground. All residents of the modern city know that there is an old city beneath the streets, and some families dug down to take advantage of a pre-made cellar by digging through the roofs of old buildings, but enough people caused cave-ins or unleashed monsters that it’s now illegal to dig into the undercity. Sayre is ruled by a wily half-elven politician named Lord Divian Torrance, and under his direction the city goes out of its way to attract the finest artists and craftsmen in the land. As a result, many wealthy families call Sayre home, and all of these have their own mercenary security forces to protect their houses and workshops. Not much of a public militia is needed, although a small force controlled by Torrance’s good friend General Taramin remains active. The public militia is subsidized by a public ordinance crafted by the wily Lord Torrance. Each family above a certain income level must commit a number of troops from their own personal guard units to the city’s defense. This makes the city’s safety the concern of all the wealthiest families, although it requires a charismatic and skillful general to keep all the different house troops in line. Sayre boasts a small theater and a large university that attracts scholars from cities across this corner of the mortal realm. For such a small city, Sayre is a shining beacon of light. Lord Torrance fully intends to keep it that way.
M a rc h 2 0 0 9
|
D u n g e o n 16 4
52
Haven of the Bitter Glass
The Fisher District Located at the northern tip of the city, this low-lying area is prone to floods during the spring rains. Fishermen and fishmongers who live here ply the lake for their trade and live in raised huts. It’s possible to buy fish in the market district, but the freshest fish can be bought by those brave enough to come north up muddy streets and buy the catch coming off the boats. There isn’t much crime in the Fisher District; most fishermen have large families, and they police their own neighborhood with stout clubs and many friends. Interestingly, this is the one neighborhood that isn’t defined by the breaks of the river. Fishermen live on both outer shores and both inner ones, crossing the rivers in small boats or over swaying rope bridges. Ketch’s Catch: This small fish stand has a reputation for bringing in some of the largest, tastiest fish in the lake. More importantly, the stall is run by Gloriana Ketch. She makes a business of tracking city gossip while her husband is off fishing, and she’s a good source for anyone who wants to know the latest city rumors about the nobles or anyone of importance. If you feel the need to drop any rumors about events in or around town—or further afield—Gloriana is a good source for PCs to seek out.
Prospect Hill This residential neighborhood holds the majority of the city’s grand estates and mansions. Flanked by rivers on either side, the low hill rises gradually over the rest of Sayre. This neighborhood was the heart of the ancient City of Seers. All the richest citizens of Sayre live here. There is virtually no crime here, and private mercenary units ensure that the neighborhood stays safe. Unsavory types moving through Prospect Hill should expect to be challenged several times, especially after dark.
The Pillar of Hope Reborn: This ostentatious memorial is a 60-foot-tall pillar with an eternal, magical flame atop it. According to the plaque this marks the spot of “Auglos the Wise’s tower in Auger, first founder of the city that became Sayre.” It’s not particularly accurate, being located almost 200 feet from Telicanthus’s mansion and the actual site of the tower, but it’s a good meeting spot for young couples on Prospect Hill who wish to go courting after dark. The beggars of Sayre have a yearly competition, awarding 50 gp to anyone of their ilk who can surreptitiously climb the pillar and extinguish the flame. Guardsmen usually find crippled and dead beggars under the pillar for weeks afterward. Telicanthus’s Mansion: Marked by gate pillars boasting lanterns made from exquisitely blown glass, this mansion was bought by Telicanthus and renovated after the former owner moved south. It’s one of the social epicenters of Prospect Hill, and servants and guests enter and exit it during most daylight hours (or later, if Telicanthus is hosting a party.) A competent and wily butler (Telicanthus’s sociopathic servant Pennel) monitors all guests and stops anyone who doesn’t belong. Telicanthus’s guards are notably polite as they escort interlopers off the property. A successful DC 23 Streetwise check by a character also reveals that unlike other parts of the city, none of General Taramin’s city militia come within three blocks of Telicanthus’s home. See SC3: Telicanthus’s Tea Party for more details on this bit of information.
The Glassworks This neighborhood on the eastern edge of Prospect Hill is home to the city’s artists. Sayre attracts many of the finest craftsmen to this area. The wide roads are lined with shops and stores, and are roughly grouped by type of business. Businesses selling expen-
sive goods, such as goldmakers and jewelers, typically have their own security. There’s an atmosphere of camaraderie in the Glassworks, and in the event of trouble, all locals pitch in to solve the problem. Many artists and shop owners live in apartments located over their stores. The River Jewel: This is one of the finest inns in the entire city, with superb service and prices to match. Rooms are large, secure, beautifully decorated, and extremely comfortable. The staff offers any amenity a guest might want, and will send out for food or items not offered in-house, and the chefs are renowned for truly delicious meals. Rooms here cost 15 gp a night, an outrageous amount compared to other inns in the city, but rooms seldom go empty. Telicanthus offers to house the PCs here, in individual rooms if they prefer, at his own cost. If he does, the staff will be informed that their guests are the Heroes of Elsir Vale, and will treat the PCs with inordinate respect. The Rose Window: This shop carries only the finest stained glass and sculpted crystal. Bando Hammerglass is as knowledgeable a dwarven craftsman as you can find, and can usually identify a stained glass window’s craftsman if the individual is famous enough. He charges high prices for high quality art, but is happy to talk to PCs if they come by with questions. Bando is puzzled if the PCs bring panes of the Bitter Glass to him for identification, as he’ll be fairly sure that the work is Telicanthus’s. It’s not, but it’s of a similar style thanks to Kle’th’s repairs of the original. He won’t tell the PCs that immediately, however, and will put them off for an afternoon while he consults with Telicanthus himself. Only a DC 23 Diplomacy check encourages Bando to open up with this information on an initial meeting. If Bando does speak with Telicanthus, the githyanki sends Pennel that night to murder M a rc h 2 0 0 9
|
D u n g e o n 16 4
53
Haven of the Bitter Glass
Bando in his bed and dispose of his body to prevent him from speaking with the adventurers. Bando cannot positively identify the glass pieces that might have been found at Akma’ad, or the cast-off glass shards that the beggars are using as knives in encounter V1: the Plaza of Vision, but he can confirm that they came from the same extremely qualified glassmaker.
The University of Sayre Founded by a priestess of Ioun who was appalled with the lack of learning among most people she met, the university is a bustling school of higher learning that teaches everything from agriculture to esoteric magical theory. Students tend to be young and from out of town, as the university recruits the best and brightest from many different areas. The university is often viewed as an excellent finishing school for noble sons and daughters, and it isn’t uncommon for loyal servants to be seen dragging their drunken masters back home after a rowdy night in the Dregs. The Tankard of Ink: This is a popular tavern for students who want to be in stumbling distance of their rooms after drinking, and for those who don’t care for the Dregs. Many professors from the university have adopted the tankard as their own, as well. This is the place to come if you want a philosophical debate instead of a fistfight.
Low Mountain While most races have integrated nicely in Sayre, the dwarven inhabitants tend to keep to themselves. Low Mountain is a neighborhood of high stone walls and twisting streets. Non-dwarves have trouble finding places in Low Mountain, as none of the streets are labeled, and none of the buildings are numbered or named. As they say, “If you need to know where
you are in Low Mountain, you probably shouldn’t be there.” The area is safe, with squads formed exclusively of dwarven guards patrolling the streets after nightfall, but it’s not particularly exciting to nondwarves. That changes if you’re a dwarf, or have the trust of one. Wonderful restaurants, clever sages, and master craftsmen hide within the featureless buildings. Some dwarves will accept a bribe to guide outsiders to the right place and introduce them to the right contact. Deep Cartography: This small shop contains two dwarven brothers, Andor and Toris Scrollstone, sages who specialize in maps and locations. Commonly consulted by explorers into the Underdark and merchants who have long journeys ahead of them, the Scrollstone brothers are the people to consult if the PCs wish to learn more about Sayre’s undercity. Although they know nothing about the Bitter Glass, they can talk about Auger and its destruction at unknown hands. They have old maps showing what buildings used to be where. A DC 21 Dungeoneering check reveals to the PCs that Auglos’s tower was originally below the spot where Telicanthus’s mansion now stands. Both dwarves actually know this if asked, as the incorrect location of the memorial plaque on Prospect Hill annoys them.
The Market This is the heart of the city for everyone but the wealthiest citizens. The streets are full of people from all walks of life, and any non-exotic object (as well as many exotic and rare ones) can be purchased here. Whether you’re looking for ink from a giant octopus or the feather from an angel, you’ll likely to be able to buy it—or something that the seller swears is authentic—somewhere in the market. This area is characterized by narrow streets, tiny shop stalls, yell-
ing shopkeeps, and a multitude of different bazaars. Due to the university, the market contains a great number of booksellers and scrollmakers. Debt-ridden sages who have been forced to sell their library crouch side by side with itinerant thieves peddling stolen spellbooks. Rancid Agnes: This elderly beggar holds court at the edge of the market. She is taken care of by regulars in the market who consider it good luck to throw her a few coins when they pass by. In return, she is unfailingly friendly to anyone who doesn’t treat her with contempt. Agnes is always happy to pass a few minutes chatting with strangers, and she’s the best resource for finding something quickly, as she has a good memory for what merchant has what sort of item. Secretly she is also a spy for the church of Tiamat, passing on any worthwhile gossip to the high priest. Agnes is one of the city’s original beggars, and despite their work with the temple, she is envious of the new “beggars” Telicanthus brought in to foment discord between the city’s residents and githzerai refugees. A DC 21 Diplomacy check accompanied by at least a 10-gp bribe results in Agnes making an offhand, angry reference to the “new beggars” in town and their “work agin’ the refugees,” but if confronted on these comments, Agnes looks frightened and scampers away.
Downwind The name for the farmer and tannery district is usually correct, with the stink of the livestock blowing away to the southwest. This district is characterized by wide pens, warehouses and slaughterhouses, and stockyards where herd animals are sold. On the rare occasions when exotic animals or monsters are brought into the city, they’re kept in Downwind until sold. M a rc h 2 0 0 9
|
D u n g e o n 16 4
54
Haven of the Bitter Glass
The March The March looks almost like a military parade ground. This area was once the preferred spot for Lord Limbic the Scholar, a former ruler who had an obsession with statuary and monuments. As a result, he spent a great deal of the city’s coffers on self-aggrandizing monuments. More than two dozen great statues, triumphal arches to non-existent battles, and other spectacular monuments stand in this area. They’re starting to decay somewhat due to a lack of interest in keeping them pristine, but they define this section of the city. The Dangle: This was originally named “The Triumphal Arch of Limbic the Gracious” until it was turned into the city’s location for public execution and punishment. Murderers are hanged from the 30-foottall arch and left to dangle for a few days. Public stocks are also located here, for punishments of a less severe nature. Public executions are rare in Sayre, and the city hasn’t seen one in months. The Guard Barracks: Sayre doesn’t require a large standing army thanks to the proliferation of private guards, but the one hundred full-time city militia the city employs are stationed in this gray, austere building that is also known for its statue of Lord Limbic standing on the roof.
The Dregs Most of the city’s entertainment is located in this rundown, old section of the city. Dancehalls, seedy taverns, pawn shops, breweries, and comfort houses all crowd its narrow alleys. The area isn’t immediately dangerous to visitors, as thugs paid by local businesses roam the streets with the intent of keeping people safe in the theory that “a live customer is a paying customer.” They’ve been known to look the other way after dark, though, especially for a sizeable bribe.
Inn of the Ugly Dog: This tiny inn sits above a loud and raucous tavern. The namesake dog has been stuffed by a taxidermist and magically animated; it staggers around the tavern to greet visitors. The Inn of the Ugly Dog has cheap ale, mostly clean rooms, good prices, and an ever-changing array of owners as the property is a common stake in the inn’s games of chance.
Riverdown These are the slums of Sayre, and the area where the city’s undesirables live. Beggars and unsavory visitors gather here, along with anyone too poor to pay for lodging elsewhere. Abandoned and crumbling warehouses hold rotting goods or illegal and smuggled property. The streets are narrow and twisting, made slick by constant mist that rises from the waterfalls. Dark and smoke-stained buildings house beggars with wet coughs from the constant moisture. Rats scuttling through glassless windows provide one of the few free food sources for the locals. It isn’t an attractive place to live, and visitors who show weakness are likely to be preyed upon by the locals. The Plaza of Vision: This abandoned plaza is surrounded by vacant buildings. The githzerai living in Sayre have taken over one of them, reinforcing it and using it as a temporary headquarters. Lowbridge: The local temple to Tiamat, worshipped in her role as Goddess of Greed and Envy, is located in an abandoned warehouse across the street from the last bridge in Sayre. Beggars congregate in this area each morning before heading out across the city. The beggars, strangely, won’t speak to anyone while near Lowbridge. They won’t ask for money until they’ve gone to other parts of town, as they’re careful not to draw attention to the activities of the Filth King (leader of the city’s beggars).
Approaching Sayre You hear the distant sound of church bells long before you actually see Sayre. It lies in the valley below you, nestled between three rivers. Sunlight reflects from the city’s canals. Although it has roughly the same number of inhabitants as Overlook, Sayre is a very different city. It is said to be a city of artists, artisans, and scholars, and you can see why. The sunlight filtering through the hills gives a golden glow to the entire valley. From where you stand, you can see mansions and palaces rising up from islands between the rivers, university halls jutting upward, numerous monuments and large statues, and the smoke from smithies rising into the air. Mist from a huge waterfall swirls along the southern edge of the city. A guardhouse stands in front of the great bridge that leads over the river into the city. A throng of people bustle about—buskers, salesfolk, travelers, beggars, and guards. Even a few rich nobles can be seen, riding in open-top carriages in their finery. A servant comes up, haltingly. “Excuse me,” he says, “but by any chance are you the Heroes of Elsir Vale?” If the PCs say yes, he smiles widely. “My master will be so pleased! You’re quite famous; he was just talking about you today at tea. Would you do me the honor of allowing me to introduce you?” If they say no, the servant looks disappointed and says that his master Lord Telicanthus would be sorry not to offer them hospitality. If they say yes, he looks even happier and leads them through the throng to a darkdoored wooden carriage with remarkable stained glass windows. The carriage is pulled by two horses. The servant knocks once and opens the door. “My Lord Telicanthus, may I please introduce the famous Heroes of Elsir Vale.”
M a rc h 2 0 0 9
|
D u n g e o n 16 4
55
Haven of the Bitter Glass
A tall, spindly man steps out into the sunlight. Lord Telicanthus is a githyanki. He’s quite unlike any githyanki that the PCs have seen before, however. Lord Telicanthus has a warm, quick smile and eyes that make it clear he’s very interested in whomever is speaking. He wears very fashionable, expensive clothing and has no githyanki jewelry or weaponry whatsoever. His handshake is firm, his voice is clear, and he has only the faintest trace of an accent when he addresses the PCs. “It’s such a pleasure to meet you. We’ve received some news of our friends to the north, but I never expected to meet the heroes in person! Some travelers have brought word of your many battles. It’s very rare to meet living heroes, so this is quite a moment for me. Are you just arriving here in Sayre?” If the answer is yes, then Telicanthus continues. “Well, allow me to provide you with some most humble shelter! The finest inn in the city is the River Jewel, right by the bridge in our Glassworks District. Pennel?” He turns to his secretary, just exiting the carriage. “Run ahead to the Jewel and book . . .” He looks at you and counts. “Rooms for each of them. Put it on my account there, meals included. Let them know that their guests are people of honor, and are to be treated as such.” The secretary nods and hurries off. “It’s so rare to get people of the world here, artists aside.” He considers. “Would you do me the honor of coming to tea tomorrow? All the elite in the city, from the mayor on down, would doubtlessly be honored to meet you. You’ll be the toast of the town. Tomorrow, at my estate—I’ll have Pennel leave details for you in the morning, and I’ll send a carriage.” If he observes them with the githzerai, his attitude tightens a little. A DC 23 Insight check reveals that he doesn’t like githzerai much, but that he’s working to be polite. If they accuse him of being a githyanki, he smiles.
“Of course I am! I’m not associated at all with those murderous fellows in the Astral Sea, though. No, I left that life years ago and I’ve never regretted it once. I’m a glassmaker now, and a loyal citizen of this fine city. We can’t help how we’re born, but we can choose how we live our lives. Something that everyone really ought to learn.” Telicanthus is lying, but he’s told this lie so much that it flies off his lips easily. Have him make a Bluff check with a +5 bonus (+28 total) if the PCs attempt to discern whether or not he’s lying. Odos and his fellow githzerai, on the other hand, are openly angry that a githyanki lives in the city. Odos manages to refrain from attacking Telicanthus on sight, only because he doesn’t want to risk his people being thrown out of Sayre for attacking one of the city’s residents—and a wealthy one, at that. Odos gathers his people and leaves the area immediately without another word, his wrath evident in every curt gesture.
What’s Happening Telicanthus knew the PCs were approaching from one of his agents who saw the PCs and the githzerai while traveling. Telicanthus sees the heroes as a potential enemy, one that would certainly be opposed to his mission if they found him out, but he is too egotistical to see them as an actual, credible threat. He is confident that he’ll manage to convince the adventurers that he’s harmless, just as he’s done to everyone else in the city. He believes that if he shows them kindness, flatters their egos with deference and attention, and buys them expensive gifts, they will underestimate him and become his unwitting allies without even realizing they have done so. He knows of General Zithiruun’s defeat, as well as their pursuit of Sarshan, but doesn’t believe overcoming any innate dislike of his race will cause him any more of an issue
than it has with the residents of Sayre. Telicanthus is so accustomed to racism that it doesn’t even cause him to blink anymore. His invitation to tea is a high honor, as anyone in town can tell the PCs. Telicanthus’s invitations are hotly contested, and the local social scene can revolve around who is invited and who is not. People in town know that Telicanthus is a kind and important merchant, and he is immensely popular. They’d be surprised if told that his fellow githyanki are responsible for the attacks on nearby settlements. In fact, most of Sayre’s citizens are so well insulated from the outside world that few are aware a war is underway just beyond their walls.
Entering the City Once the PCs and Telicanthus part ways, the adventurers quickly discover a new problem. Their githzerai allies are being turned away at the gates, helped not at all by their curt and now angry leader Odos. The city guards refuse to allow the githzerai to cross the bridge into the city. They are extremely rude, explaining that “their kind isn’t welcome here” since all they do is “steal and cause trouble.” If the PCs intervene, a DC 18 Diplomacy check can get the githzerai inside; a githzerai attempting Diplomacy does so with a –5 penalty to the check. A DC 18 Perception check while this negotiation takes place shows Telicanthus watching from his carriage window as it passes by into Sayre. His expression is one of amusement, and a DC 23 Insight check reveals a certain cruel satisfaction in the githzerai’s predicament. Feel free to give the PCs a bonus on their check for roleplaying the scene well (for example, if they bring up the unprovoked attack at Akma’ad). Once successful, the guards grudgingly let the githzerai pass.
M a rc h 2 0 0 9
|
D u n g e o n 16 4
56
Haven of the Bitter Glass
If the adventurers fail, the githzerai are not allowed in through this gate. They will need to walk south along the Singing River to reach the southern bridge into Riverdown, the worst section of Sayre. The PCs have the choice of heading directly to the River Jewel, accompanying the githzerai to their lodging in Riverdown, or finding lodging of their own. The party is most likely entering the city from the east if they have come from Akma’ad. Entering the city here will take them through the broad, paved streets of the University. They will walk next to academic buildings and past marble statues of long-dead deans, topping the hill and heading down toward the central fork of the river. Following the river northwest brings them into the Glassworks and right to the door of the River Jewel, the finest inn in Sayre. Telicanthus’s secretary Pennel will have arrived here before the PCs, and their rooms will be ready. They are offered baths, food, and the finest amenities, all at Telicanthus’s expense. Following the east fork of the Singing River southward brings them into Riverdown. The quality of the buildings begins to degrade quickly once they are away from the university, and an oily mildew covers the stone walls. Constant mist from the nearby waterfall fills the air here. If it is daytime, the streets boast less wealthy individuals running errands, packs of unsupervised children, stray dogs, and people of questionable repute. There are a large number of beggars living in Riverdown, and anyone with the sort of wealth and stature that the PCs have will be watched carefully. While the characters are watched, a DC 23 Streetwise check reveals that, strangely enough, no beggars approach them once they’re in this district, whereas they’re approached freely elsewhere in Sayre. While a hastily organized ambush from local gang members is possible if the PCs put themselves
in an especially vulnerable situation, the local toughs aren’t suicidal, and no one would attack a combination of the PCs and so many githzerai.
The Githzerai Sanctuary PCs accompanying the githzerai arrive at the Plaza of Vision, an open area in Riverdown only accessible by winding through back alleys that branch off of tertiary streets. It’s an isolated and dark plaza surrounded by abandoned and rotting warehouses. A corroding statue of a skyward-staring wizard stands in an empty fountain in the middle of the square. It isn’t uncommon to find a beggar or two loitering here. Finding the Plaza of Vision will require some hunting by the PCs, but isn’t a particularly difficult challenge. Odos knows that the githzerai living in Sayre live in a red building alongside the plaza, and he leads the group there directly. Odos is appalled that the githzerai aren’t living somewhere better. Riverdown is extremely poor, particularly when compared to the university district they walked through earlier, and Odos feels that this area is beneath the dignity of the githzerai. He is fuming by the time they arrive, particularly when he sees that the building used by the githzerai is an old warehouse painted with flaking, peeling red paint. A githzerai at the door readily admits them, and a DC 15 Perception check reveals raised voices coming from deeper inside the building. The words are unintelligible, but it sounds like githzerai voices raised in anger.
Kark’din, the Low Sanctuary There are thirty-five githzerai currently inside the makeshift “Low Sanctuary,” an open warehouse that has been divided into sleeping, meeting, and eating sections. The structure is rough and dilapidated,
but clean and organized. Its well-lit interior is a nice counterpoint to the slums outside. The current state of the githzerai community in Sayre could best be described as fractious. The githzerai have splintered into two groups who believe they should proceed in very different ways. One of the leaders, Aziff, urges patience and caution. She is convinced that the locals’ feelings are temporary. She has lived in Sayre for many years, and the recent change in public opinion about the city’s githzerai citizens has distressed her a great deal (although she doesn’t reveal anything but a stoic demeanor openly). Aziff has the backing of the other local githzerai, and also of a friend the PCs will recognize (see “An Old Friend” below). The other leader, an atypically fiery githzerai named Gal’ott, is urging action. Young and angry, he wants to take the fight to the streets, organizing what amounts to a githzerai gang. Gal’ott and several other githzerai are refugees from cities and monasteries from elsewhere in the world. Many have traveled several hundred miles to get to Sayre after seeing githyanki destroy their homes, and they’re appalled that nothing is being done here to combat the threat. These githzerai wear red armbands and never travel alone, only adding to the local residents’ fears of exactly what Gal’ott is asking his fellows to do. At the time the PCs arrive, the two local leaders are debating the best path with great passion and volume. The arrival of the PCs and the refugee githzerai from Akma’ad disrupt any disagreements or discussions happening inside the building, as the githzerai gather around the newcomers seeking news of the summit that was supposed to happen at Akma’ad.
M a rc h 2 0 0 9
|
D u n g e o n 16 4
57
Haven of the Bitter Glass
Local Problems In addition to discussing what happened at Akma’ad, the local githzerai relate the problems that they have been having here in Sayre. They are not sure why, as they have done nothing to provoke the response, but the people of the city have turned against them. As a result, even arriving as they have with Odos, the two arguing leaders cease all discussion as soon as the adventurers enter the room. Only after Odos has spoken up on their behalf—something he does immediately—are the PCs informed of what’s been happening to githzerai in the city since their arrival. Guards harass them and limit their movements, beggars attack them and spy on them, and any robbery or attack that occurs in the city is being blamed on the githzerai. Even more worrisome, four githzerai out on their own at night have been brutally slain by someone using knives. The other githzerai have been unable to locate the killer, and the city guard seems disinterested in helping, claiming that other githzerai are committing the crimes as they “turn on one another like a pack of rabid dogs.” The racism and hatred is growing. They blame the githyanki Telicanthus for this, although they have no solid proof and he publicly urges moderation against the githzerai.
An Old Friend Amyria heard that the PCs arrived in town in the company of Odos and the githzerai refugees of Akma’ad, so she headed to Riverdown to wait their arrival. Amyria will not seek out the PCs at the River Jewel. If the adventurers have parted ways with Odos and do not come with him to Riverdown, a street urchin soon arrives at their inn with a message from the githzerai leader requesting their presence.
The Githzerai Debate Through decisions made by the githzerai leadership, the PCs have the opportunity to influence how thousands of githzerai interact with the defenders of the mortal world during the upcoming war. Do they stay neutral? Help humans? Assassinate Telicanthus and flee the city, leaving the PCs to pick up the pieces? The githzerai elder Odos will ultimately decide his people’s course of action, and it’s up to the PCs to help convince him. During the skill challenge and discussion, here are the individuals who hold strong opinions on the subject. Amyria. Amyria is wise, quiet, and completely sincere. The deva has dark gray skin with faint purple markings, and is vehemently opposed to assassinating Telicanthus. Not only does she think it would be a death sentence for the martyrs who attempted it, she fears that the political backlash from all of his friends would put every githzerai in the city at risk. Worse, assuming it is he behind a possible githyanki communication web, she isn’t sure that killing him would stop it; he might be completely innocent. She is in favor of more investigation, and revealing Telicanthus as a fraud and traitor before dealing with him publicly. That way the githzerai can’t possibly be blamed. She will also point out that Sayre hasn’t been attacked by githyanki yet, and that may be because Telicanthus is alive, although they have no way to know for sure. Gal’ott. Gal’ott is a young githzerai leader with a fiery temper and great pride. He is tired of being mistreated by the other races, whom he considers inferior to the githzerai. The very fact that they would allow a githyanki in their midst makes them suspect. He is mistrustful, and thinks that he should lead a small group of githzerai into Telicanthus’s mansion to kill him.
Azitt: This younger, female githzerai has grown quite close to Amyria in the short time she has known her. She has lived in Sayre for a while and remembers a time when githzerai were not treated so poorly. While she doesn’t have much of a voice in the proceedings, she represents a large enough faction of local githzerai that Gal’ott has been forced to recognize her. Chend. Chend is an elderly githzerai who favors leaving the humans and the githyanki to their war. He thinks they should leave the plane until the war is decided, then deal with the survivors. Odos knows Chend from long ago and values the elder’s views. Gallia. This githzerai from Akma’ad is a traitor, as a githyanki destroyed her soul when it possessed her body months ago. In the unlikely event that she hasn’t yet been revealed, she will side with Chend and favor the githzerai abandoning the mortal plane. In this case, allow the PCs another DC 21 Insight check to see if they notice Gallia’s possession yet. Most Exalted Odos from the House of Reprisal: Now that he has had time to calm down after the siege of Akma’ad, Odos remains neutral as to what the githzerai should do. He personally favors killing Telicanthus and then abandoning the plane, but is willing to listen to each argument before he makes his decision. He knows that Amyria wishes him to join her Coalition, but is not sure that he wants anything to do with the mortal world and its defense against the githyanki threat. All the githzerai respect Odos’s final decision, as the last remaining principal elder on the mortal world. But if the PCs fail in “The Debate” skill challenge and the githzerai leave the city for parts unknown, Azitt stays behind to act as a companion and assistant to Amyria in her work with the Coalition.
M a rc h 2 0 0 9
|
D u n g e o n 16 4
58
Haven of the Bitter Glass
However they arrive, once they reach the githzerai settlement, Amyria emerges from a back chamber, concealed in a heavy, floor-length cloak. Roleplaying Encounter: Reconnecting with Amyria (page 87).
Convincing Odos Bringing Odos around to Amyria’s point of view is the first task she gives the PCs in Sayre. She knows she needs another ally on the Coalition who will echo her call for solidarity, as well as the importance of discovering the githyanki’s means of communication and expanding the breadth of the Coalition to include other cities and regions of the world. This skill challenge should happen shortly after the characters have caught up with Amyria and been able to observe the fractured state of the githzerai community in Sayre. Skill Challenge: SC1. The Debate (page 89).
Interpreting Clues The PCs don’t have enough information yet to reach any conclusions about Telicanthus, but it may be worthwhile for them to consider what clues they do have. If they have convinced Odos (see “The Debate” on page 89), he might have brought up the idea of using ritual magic to aid their investigation. Alternatively, they might think of this tactic themselves. However, there are other ways to learn about Telicanthus. Possible leads include the following: ✦ The magical piece of blue stained glass held by the githyanki captain at Akma’ad. ✦ The magical green stained glass held by Gallia. ✦ Amyria’s dream of a web, with the spider inside of Sayre (see “Reconnecting with Amyria on page 87). ✦ The odd fact that Sayre’s beggars seem to hate githzerai, despite no provocation.
✦ Someone in the city killing githzerai. Some of these clues can be investigated in Sayre; for instance, the PCs already have an invitation to Telicanthus’s mansion for tea the next afternoon, and they can easily learn more about the beggars in the city by tailing one back to Covet House (see “The Debate” on page 89 for details).
Ambush in the Plaza Secretly hired by Telicanthus to attack and kill anyone emerging from Kark’din, a trained band of beggars waits in the plaza outside the githzerai sanctuary. These are not the city’s normal cadre of beggars. Telicanthus hired a group of mercenaries known as the Laughing Shadows to do his dirty work for him. Composed of an assortment of spies, thieves, and strongarms, the Laughing Shadows now pose as Telicanthus’s household guards, as well as beggars tasked with eliminating any githzerai they encounter singly in the city. The Laughing Shadows have been so effective at infiltrating Sayre’s beggar population that most of the native beggars don’t even realize that they’ve been compromised. But they’ve certainly all bought off on the fun of singling out the githzerai as a target of scorn and fear. The Laughing Shadow beggars attack the PCs when they leave the building, unless they exit with a large group of githzerai as well. After a successful or unsuccessful attack, any surviving beggars scatter. Tactical Encounter: P1. Ambush in the Plaza (page 90).
Covet House If the attack by the beggars in “The Ambush” encounter doesn’t make the PCs suspicious enough to investigate, the mention of a spice house in “The Debate” might. The spice house referred to in the divination (see “The Debate” on page 89) is a warehouse in Lowbridge that was abandoned a decade ago but still smells faintly of exotic spices. The faded and chipped paint over the boarded main doors specifies “Ridolfi and Sons, Spice Merchants.” This building is the secret entrance to Covet House, a Temple of Tiamat kept up by the city’s beggars. The PCs can find it with a DC 18 Streetwise check. If the adventurers didn’t perform the ritual, they can still find the spice house after the “Ambush” tactical encounter. All the “beggars” who attack the heroes smell strongly of old spices. A successful Streetwise check is sufficient to point the characters in the direction of Covet House. A young homeless child sits across the street from Covet House. If she sees the PCs investigating the doorway, she shuffles over and asks them for money. If she’s convinced that they plan to break in, she departs and goes around the side of the house to a cleverly concealed rope pull coming out of the building’s foundations. She gives the rope three short pulls, the signal for trouble. No beggars in Covet House or the Temple will be surprised if she has this chance to warn them. The PCs can determine her intentions with a DC 18 Insight check. The door to Covet House appears to be boarded up. In truth, it’s locked with a combination of nails and knotholes that need to be manipulated in a certain order to open it. A DC 23 Thievery check is sufficient to unlock the door, although failing the check sounds an internal alarm bell, warning those inside.
M a rc h 2 0 0 9
|
D u n g e o n 16 4
59
Haven of the Bitter Glass
T1. Entry The spice house’s interior is 20 feet by 30 feet, and is mostly unlit. Dim light is provided by light that seeps in through cracks in the wooden exterior. The building lacks any staircase to the upper floors, as it rotted out years ago. The actual floor is covered with rubble, and the sound of squeaking rats can be heard. The smell of spices is very strong inside the building. A DC 21 Perception check reveals a clear trail through the rubble. This trail ends at a hidden trapdoor in the floor. The trapdoor is trapped. Daggerspring Floor Trap
Level 13 Lurker 800 XP
The ceiling above the trapdoor is rigged to collapse if the trap on the trapdoor isn’t first disarmed. If triggered, a pile of old garbage, debris, and disease-ridden rats is dropped on the trapdoor square and all adjacent squares. Any character in one of the affected squares is subject to the trap. Perception ✦ DC 23: The character discovers the trap on the trapdoor. Trigger Any creature that attempts to open the trapdoor without first disabling the trap sets it off. Attack Standard Action Close burst 1 Targets: All creatures in burst Attack: +16 vs. Reflex Hit: 2d10 + 8 damage. On a critical hit, the target is knocked prone and subject to the secondary attack. All affected squares become difficult terrain. Secondary Attack: +16 vs. Fortitude; 5 damage, and the target is infected with cackle fever (see Dungeon Master’s Guide page 49). Miss: Half damage. Countermeasures ✦ A character adjacent to the trapdoor can disable the trap with a DC 23 Thievery check.
This trapdoor opens into a short pit 5 feet deep. This pit is the entrance to a narrow tunnel only 4 feet
M a rc h 2 0 0 9
|
D u n g e o n 16 4
60
Haven of the Bitter Glass
tall that must be navigated on hands and knees by Medium characters. The tunnel runs for 30 feet east under the street, and ends in a second trapdoor in the floor of the tunnel. It is completely dark.
entrance to what was once a grand temple of Ioun. The icon of Ioun above the doorway has been ripped off, however, leaving no sign as to whom the temple is now dedicated.
T2. The Entrance
T4. Temple Doors
This counterweighted trapdoor in the tunnel from area T1 opens downward, and is effectively punched into the ancient roof of a buried building. Carved into the wood of the trapdoor are the words “Give, and you will be given to” in Common. The door can only be opened on this side by sliding a coin into a slot next to the door, or with a DC 23 Thievery check. A rope ladder hangs beneath the trapdoor, leading 20 feet down onto the filthy floor of one of Auger’s original buildings. This stone-walled building used to have interior floors as well, but they have rotted away. If the warning bell has been rung by the girl outside, or the PCs failed to correctly pick the door lock the first time and set off the alarm, there will be several Laughing Shadows scrabblers here. Tactical Encounter: T2: The Entrance (page 92).
The outer doors to the temple are unlocked. The vestibule is 10 feet long, and the walls of either side have an amateurish painting of a beautiful woman standing on a mountain of wealth, holding out her arms invitingly. A DC 18 Religion check reveals this to be a painting of a human aspect of Tiamat, goddess of greed and envy. The inner door is closed, trapped but not locked. Several worshipers are engaged in worship when the PCs crash Covet House, and if no one from area T2 has escaped to raise the alarm, no one inside the temple will notice the adventurers’ approach. The inner door has the painted image of a five-headed dragon on it, crouched over a mound of treasure. The mound is worn down by the passage of many greedy hands.
T3. Ancient Street
T5. Covet House Temple
This area was once an open street in the old city of Auger, but it was completely filled with mud and silt when the city was destroyed. This section of the street was excavated several generations ago, and has since served as a sleeping place and shelter to generations of beggars. Stopped up by silt and soil on either end, this 50-foot-long section of roadway is lined with ancient cobblestones and filled with sleeping pallets and the meager possessions of dozens of people. Another forgotten building, this one choked with rubble, stands next to the one from which the PCs have just emerged. Across the street is the excavated
This temple of Ioun was built hundreds of years ago and was badly damaged when Auger was destroyed by githyanki 400 years ago. It has since been excavated and restored by Sayre’s population of beggars. The Filth King, a corrupt human who rules the beggars of the city, found it when digging into the undercity almost fifteen years ago. A devotee of Tiamat already, he repurposed the chapel into a church to the goddess of greed. The purpose of the temple is to remind these worshipers that everyone else has a better life than they do. The temple inspires envy, even as it provides a place to worship it. As such,
every single pew appears more comfortable to sit in than the place you are actually sitting. A subtle magical effect makes everyone else in the room seem more wealthy and attractive, and causes the viewer to view himself as shabbier that he really is. The room is octagonal, with nine pews facing an altar. Rough paintings on the walls show beggars staring through windows, watching rich people eat a feast on golden plates. Behind the altar is a pit that runs the length of the room. It is 10 feet wide and 20 feet deep. The bottom of the pit is empty except for more than a dozen failed thieves’ skeletons, along with a handful of coins that fell when being tossed over onto the pile of treasure (area T6). There is no ladder up from the bottom of the pit; anyone who falls in must climb up the sheer walls (Athletics DC 23). For anyone standing in the room, the glittering pile of wealth lying across a black gulf of the pit has an almost unmistakable attraction, even with a rough statue of Tiamat looking down on it. Unless he has been alerted of their approach, the Filth King is leading a devotional prayer to Tiamat as the PCs enter. Tactical Encounter: T5. Covet House Temple (page 94).
M a rc h 2 0 0 9
|
D u n g e o n 16 4
61
Haven of the Bitter Glass
T6. The Guardian of Greed
T8. Vault of Knowledge
After Covet House
On the far side of the pit, a large pile of wealth beckons the greedy. This contains many, many coins along with a handful of art objects. After the Filth King and his followers in Covet House have been defeated, it is likely that the PCs will cross the pit onto this pile of wealth at T6. This activates the coin golem, guardian of Tiamat’s tribute. Tactical Encounter: T6. The Guardian of Greed (page 97).
When the githyanki attacked the town of seers, many people were unable to escape. In the vaults beneath the temple of Ioun, a senior librarian and his research aides were sealed in the vault of knowledge. After the dragon attack burst the dam and a wall of water and silt hit the city, a fallen ceiling block trapped them in the undervault of the library. The librarians were unable to pry open the door, and no help came for them. In the light of magical lanterns, trapped underground and buried under water and rubble, they slowly starved to death. “Read,” advised the Senior Librarian, and so they read as they died. They kept reading even after life had left them. After two hundred years, when the books and scrolls were starting to disintegrate, what was once the senior librarian declared that they must preserve the words for all eternity. At his instruction, and with nothing to carve with except their own finger bones, the aides began to transcribe every sentence from every scroll onto the rock walls of the secret library. It took them more than a hundred years to finish, and the last of their sanity ebbed away with their flesh. Now the archivists and bone scribes wait and read the words written on the walls, desperate for new information to consume and document. When the PCs pry open this door, they begin a tactical encounter. Tactical Encounter: T8. Vault of Knowledge (page 98).
The PCs might wish to return to their inn or return to the githzerai sanctuary of Kark’din. If night hasn’t fallen, they can also explore the city and research Telicanthus, the Bitter Glass, and the location of Auglos’s tower in Auger. They now have enough knowledge to understand that a device in the city is allowing the githyanki to communicate with one another. They may not yet have proof that Telicanthus is involved, however. The PCs may proceed however they like until Amyria brings them to meet members of her Coalition the next morning. If they seem frustrated or uncertain how to proceed, allow Amyria to come by and urge their patience, since more will become clear after the meeting with her Coalition.
T7. Secret Corridor This corridor hasn’t been entered since the temple was first converted to Tiamat. At that time, beggars descended this corridor and heard the sounds of scratching from room T8. They fled back up the corridor and built the statue in front of the secret door. Later generations have forgotten that this corridor even exists. The ramp slopes steeply downward. It ends in a small pile of stone rubble that has fallen from the ceiling and blocked the door behind it. This rubble can be moved easily. The door behind it leads into the Vault of Knowledge. The door is stuck and requires a DC 18 Strength check to pull open. A faint, flickering light can be seen from beneath the doorway once the rubble is clear.
M a rc h 2 0 0 9
|
D u n g e o n 16 4
62
Haven of the Bitter Glass
The Coalition Members of the Coalition that Amyria has managed to put together are in Sayre, but she’s disappointed that they’ve spent days bickering and disagreeing about the best way to shatter the githyanki military alliance. (In fact, they haven’t even been able to agree on a name for the group, which is why Amyria refers to the group as the Coalition. She hopes something more inspiring will come out of their talks that will help bind the leaders together.) She hopes that the PCs’ reputations (all the members have heard about the successful defense of Elsir Vale at this point), their investigation of Telicanthus and the Bitter Glass, and the membership of their new githzerai ally, Odos, will help the alliance find focus. The deva meets the PCs fairly early at their inn, waking them if necessary. Odos is with her. The weather is beautiful outside, and Amyria suggests that they walk over to the meeting place for the Coalition in the center of the city. It takes about 15 minutes for the group to reach a beautiful old building in the March. Amyria mentions that the building was once used for town meetings, but not currently. She has rented it for use as a central meeting place for her allies. The PCs walk up a large marble staircase to the second floor, where Amyria opens a set of double doors into a circular room dominated by a large semicircular table. The room is filled with strangers of various races, all swept up in the heat of argument. They all look up when Amyria enters, and she introduces everyone to the PCs and Odos.
The Coalition is divided, much as the githzerai had been the day before. A reactive nature and a lack of clear leadership has led them to second guess their best strategy. Skill Challenge: SC2. The Coalition (page 100).
The Members Amyria has not finished forming her group to oppose the githyanki, but has made great progress. Members of the Coalition include: Kalad: Last seen in “Siege of Bordrin’s Watch” when he was rescued by the PCs, this heavily muscled dwarven paladin no longer looks quite as haunted as he did in the tunnels of Bordrin’s Watch. He is gruff but friendly, and a staunch ally of the PCs. Kalad also has spoken to Amyria several times, and he backs her unflinchingly. Unfortunately, his seemingly blind willingness to support the deva makes him look intractable and foolish to the more politically savvy members of the Coalition, and his staunch support has almost proved a liability from time to time. If Kalad didn’t survive “Siege of Bordrin’s Watch” in your campaign, that’s okay. The priest of Moradin in Overlook called in several favors and had Kalad’s body sent across the land to have a ritual of Raise Dead performed on it. He has been tasked with representing Overlook’s interests in Amyria’s Coalition. Fariex the Scalehammer: This adult copper dragon has an unhealthy interest in the activities of humans. He has spent his life in human or elven form, living in human cities and studying their ways. He is light-hearted by nature, and knows more jokes than most jesters. He is far from a buffoon, however, and expects respect. His one weakness is a tendency to weigh the facts of a problem instead of quickly making up his mind.
Fariex has the ability to assume the shape of a human, and he does this at all Coalition meetings—or anywhere else he’s encountered in the city, for that matter. He does not openly reveal his true nature, but passes himself off as a powerful merchant with interests in various cities. Fariex does not represent a city or other political body, but was invited because of his connections to many far-reaching settlements, townships, and ports, and the wealth and military might they represent. In meetings, Fariex is mostly quiet, but will occasionally interject a pointed question, especially if the topic of conversation touches on his area of expertise (namely, money and its movement through business affairs). He also has an interesting sense of humor, and will sometimes try to openly catch others in duplicity or engage in some word play over a statement he perceives as absurd. The richest member of the Coalition, Fariex is a key player to ally with, since he can fund many of the operations the Coalition is ambitiously interested in pursuing. Caliandra of the Stagrunners: This ancient elf can trace her descendants back to elves who migrated from the Feywild almost eleven of her generations ago. She leads not only her own tribe, the Stag runners, but has also been named the voice of all the tribes that live in the wild reaches to the north and west of Elsir Vale. All told, she speaks for a group of twenty-five tribes. Fierce, wild, and haughty, she is stubborn and opinionated, and isn’t afraid to engage in a protracted argument about aspects of history that most people have long forgotten. She holds inf luence with many gnome, elf, and eladrin leaders, much as a respected grandmother and advisor might. In a crisis, she leans toward solutions that provide the most safety for the most people. She seems to expect
M a rc h 2 0 0 9
|
D u n g e o n 16 4
63
Haven of the Bitter Glass
subservience, making Caliandra nearly intolerable to deal with. But she also has tremendous in-roads among the barbarian tribes she represents, making her a valuable asset. One of the naysayers of the Coalition, Caliandra automatically assumes her age and experience make her the voice everyone else should listen to. She talks loudly, fiercely, and often, but she doesn’t mince words. She gets to her point quickly. She favors action of some sort, but is like a ship in need of a pilot. If given a course that she can approve of—something that will let her lead her people to glorious battle against the invaders who have killed so many of her people—she will fight honorably and without hesitation. But she demands respect, and is fond of rejecting someone else’s idea out of hand, only to bring it back up minutes later as a concept all her own. Lord Divian Torrance: The ruler of Sayre, elected by a fellowship of scholars and merchants, is a potent and skilled politician. His goal, first and foremost, is to see that his city comes out ahead in the war. He’s not willing to side with the githyanki invaders, but his goal is to lead this Coalition so that his small city is given due representation. He knows that Sayre’s leadership wouldn’t have been consulted if not for the good fortune of hosting the first meeting and the absence of a representative from Nefelus, Amyria’s first choice to host the meeting. But he plans to make the most of the opportunity and makes it clear at every opportunity how relevant and important Sayre is to the coming conflicts. Lord Torrance can be wooed if he firmly believes Sayre will continue to be an important player. He is opposed to any plan that deals with bringing Nefelus into the Coalition, although he won’t openly say so. He’s worried that if Nefelus brings their magical expertise and knowledge
to the Coalition, Sayre’s position as a center of knowledge will be dramatically weakened. Thankfully, this isn’t an issue that is likely to rear its head . . . yet. Quelenna Entromiel: The female eladrin Quelenna Entromiel rules over the mercantile settlement of Dornaithos, which trades both fine craftwork (including goods from the Feywild) and everyday items. She has dealings with the Elsir Consortium, a group of merchants from the Elsir Vale, and with traders in every major settlement across this corner of the mortal world. Gregarious and shrewd, Quelenna is well known for her business acumen and efficiency. It’s rumored she’s not afraid to resort to bribery if doing so will get a project or deal finished quickly. Quelenna wants Dornaithos’s fortunes to continue and thinks running the Coalition is a way to make herself more prominent and secure better deals for Dornaithos to provide war material. While the Coalition’s first order of business is not to determine a leader, she already has her sights set on the position. Inogo Dravitch: A priest of Erathis, Inogo hails from the distant city of Sherrbyr. This city lies far to the northeast, beyond Elsir Vale by at least three weeks’ travel. Inogo is the current leader of this city of temples. A theocratic city state, Sherrbyr also boasts a massive college of divinity, where worshipers of nearly any deity can openly practice their faith. As a result of its varied populace, the city’s leadership is formed of a council of priests of the most worshiped deities in the city. The council changes as the population changes. Some deities fall out of favor while others rise. But Erathis’s worshipers have been a power in the city for years, and Inogo is the most recent in a long series of Erathis-worshiping council leaders known as Deacons.
Sherrbyr is a city accustomed to nearly endless debate, thanks to efforts to accommodate every faith represented on the ruling council. As someone long schooled in this approach to government, Deacon Dravitch is well out of his league in a group that needs to make decisions quickly and decisively. He represents a powerful city, however, in terms of both its military and divine might. Sherrbyr could field a veritable army of healers, as well as a mounted corps of paladins. Inogo is mostly quiet in Coalition meetings, speaking up only when a plan of action is proposed. He is, at first, unwilling to commit any resources without first “exploring other options” or his personal favorite, “negotiating with these githyanki to help them see reason.” Odos despises Inogo immediately, and Inogo reciprocates. As Sherrbyr has yet to experience anything like the githzerai have at the hands of the invaders (in fact, Sherrbyr has been entirely spared, to this point), it’s an understandable attitude. Odos: The githzerai leader firmly believes that Telicanthus is up to no good, and while he is mostly quiet in all proceedings, when the issue of the githyanki noble inevitably surfaces, he doesn’t hesitate to make his opinion known. This is true whether or not the characters succeeded in “The Debate” skill challenge (see page 89). If the PCs failed at the skill challenge, Odos can still be persuaded here, but he calls for Telicanthus’s head at these opportunities rather than backing Amyria’s call to investigate the powerful merchant. This drives Lord Torrance to distraction, and Odos quickly finds himself on the outs with many other members of the Coalition. But Odos represents githzerai all over the mortal world and beyond, and he knows the githyanki tactics and agendas. He’s perhaps the singlemost important ally in the defense of
M a rc h 2 0 0 9
|
D u n g e o n 16 4
64
Haven of the Bitter Glass
the world, and most of the other Coalition members know this—even if they won’t admit it openly. Amyria: Not a member of the Coalition, the extremely passionate and charismatic deva paladin has rallied these leaders to meet in Sayre to discuss the invasion. While she doesn’t have a vote on a course of action, she has the right to speak freely— something she hesitates to take advantage of in this first meeting. When she does speak, Amyria almost glows with her inspiration and belief in what is right.
Tea Party
that Telicanthus buys in the Glassworks. Everything about his residence denotes taste and class.
The Guests Several other guests have been invited to partake in Telicanthus’s party, in addition to the Heroes of Elsir Vale. Lord Divian Torrance (Governor of Sayre): A brilliant half-elven politician, Torrance keeps the city safe by circumventing or misdirecting any true threat before it can even manifest. Lord Torrance is an elected official, brought to power by power-
ful merchants and scholars who don’t have political ambitions, but want to be free to conduct their business with minimal government interference. This arrangement has worked surprisingly well, as most merchants police their own organizations to prevent criminal or underhanded dealings from disturbing the peace of Sayre. The Lord suspects that Telicanthus is more than he seems, but he also suspects that Telicanthus’s presence in the city is keeping it safe from attacks. That’s not something he wants to risk without good cause. Telicanthus is too important politically
For his invitation to tea, Telicanthus will send a carriage to pick up the PCs at their inn in the early afternoon, after their meeting with the Coalition. The carriage will arrive at Telicanthus’s mansion on Prospect Hill at exactly the proper time. Telicanthus himself comes out to warmly greet his guests. If the PCs are inappropriately dressed or bear weapons, he looks a bit surprised, but is too polite to mention it. Telicanthus invites the heroes into his home and ushers them into the tea room, where he introduces them to the other guests. Telicanthus’s home is beautiful. It is tastefully decorated with the finest art that comes out of Sayre’s robust artistic community. Paintings of local nature and city scenes hang on the walls next to beautiful tapestries; his porcelain and dishware are exquisitely crafted, and his food the finest available. Superb stained glass fills many of his windows, most of which he modestly claims that he crafted himself. Exceptionally talented musicians behind screens play light background music that invariably delights guests. Even the air smells nice, scented by exotic perfumes
M a rc h 2 0 0 9
|
D u n g e o n 16 4
65
Haven of the Bitter Glass
and socially for the Lord to accuse of a crime unless he has incontrovertible proof. Of course, the characters have already met Lord Torrance at their meeting that morning, but Telicanthus is unaware of this. For his part, Divian acts ignorant of the characters, although if they bring up their meeting, he acknowledges that he knows them with a gracious nod. Telicanthus takes in the exchange without expression, regardless of how the PCs behave. Lady Catherine Torrance (Lord Torrance’s wife): Lady Catherine is human, and just as sharp as her husband. Her polite and informal banter usually hides piercing, meaningful questions. She hopes that a light laugh and a quick smile are enough to deflect any interest in her husband’s business . . . or her own. Any information she does learn she passes on to her husband, and she may be used as the intermediary if Lord Torrance wishes to pass any messages or information to the PCs. General Alvro Taramin (Commander of the city guard): Taramin is an elderly tiefling soldier who is keenly aware that he doesn’t have enough troops under his direct command to protect the city in the case of an invasion. He questions the PCs closely about the tactics that were used at Overlook and Akma’ad, so that he has some hope of countering invaders if worse comes to worst. He doesn’t know that Telicanthus has quietly encouraged Lord Torrance to reduce funding to Sayre’s military, but he would be furious with Torrance if told. Archdean Isabelle Grimaldi (Archdean of the Sayre University): The archdean of the university is a middle-aged, attractive human woman with a keen mind for magical research. She’s a bit absentminded when it comes to small talk, and she tends to turn
conversations toward subjects with which she’s more familiar. That means that any conversation with her might suddenly turn to monster dissection and alchemical theory. She’s not shy about being single, and can be somewhat forward to men she finds attractive. Unfortunately, she tends to develop crushes on war heroes. Baranor the Black: This retired human adventurer has kept his riches even as the years have weakened his combat prowess. Now in his eighties, he’s happy to regale his listeners with astonishing tales of his youth, even if they don’t always sound factual. He has a little more trouble remembering the names of his new friends. Almost completely deaf, Baranor carries a horn to aid his hearing and a cane to help with his aching knees. He also lives next door to Telicanthus, in a smaller and less elaborate home.
Telicanthus’s Mansion The mansion grounds are described below. When the PCs arrive at the party, feel free to provide them with the details of the mansion as they wander around, but also proceed to the skill challenge. Skill Challenge: SC3. Telicanthus’s Tea Party (page 105).
M1. The Hedge and Front Gate Telicanthus’s estate is mostly bordered by an 8-foottall hedge, enough to keep out the casual burglar while still appearing attractive. The front gate is guarded by two human guards, 24 hours a day. These sentries are members of the Laughing Shadows, and are tougher than any of the mercenaries hired by othe merchants or nobles. Servants and workmen enter through the rear gate (M20) instead of this one, but during the day, a
Laughing Shadow Sentry
Level 11 Soldier
Medium natural humanoid XP 600 Initiative +9 Senses Perception +13 HP 47; Bloodied 23 AC 27; Fortitude 24, Reflex 22, Will 23 Speed 5 m Halberd (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon Reach 2; +18 vs. AC; 2d10 + 4 damage, and the target is marked until the end of the sentry’s next turn. M Halberd Sweep (immediate interrupt; usable when a target the sentry has marked leaves a square within reach; at-will) ✦ Weapon Reach 2; +16 vs. Fortitude; 1d10 + 4 damage, and the target’s movement ends and it slides 2 squares. M Halberd Trip (standard; requires halberd; at-will) ✦ Weapon Reach 2; +18 vs. AC; 2d10 + 4 damage, and the target is knocked prone. R Crossbow (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon Ranged 15/30; +16 vs. AC; 2d8 + 2 damage. Alignment Unaligned Languages Common, Draconic Skills Streetwise +11 Str 18 (+9) Dex 15 (+7) Wis 16 (+8) Con 16 (+8) Int 11 (+5) Cha 13 (+6) Equipment scale armor, halberd, crossbow with 20 bolts
servant stands here with an appointment book. He consults this book when visitors arrive to determine who has a legitimate appointment to see Telicanthus and who does not. If there is a conflict or confusion about a possible appointment, he often sets up a potential appointment several hours hence and then confirm with Telicanthus before the visitors’ return.
M2. Vestibule This vestibule has a cloakroom and two lavatories. Doors are typically locked at night (Thievery DC 21) unless Telicanthus is hosting a party, but are unlocked during the day.
M3: The Great Hall This domed room is a full 90 feet across, and has a balcony circling it 20 feet off the ground. The floor
M a rc h 2 0 0 9
|
D u n g e o n 16 4
66
Haven of the Bitter Glass
is polished marble tile, and beautiful paintings and statues ring the room. This is the room used for grand balls and parties. During the day, the room usually has only a paucity of furniture in it.
M4. Porch This outside porch overlooks the gardens, and has comfortable chairs and small tables.
M5. Tea Room The area where Telicanthus takes tea looks out onto well tended gardens and features a table large enough to sit several guests. Windows line the walls, and a discreet lavatory stands at one corner of the room.
M6. Parlor The parlor is where musicians typically play during teatime. This room has formal furniture, a portrait of Telicanthus over the fireplace, and a wall of books about many different religions that have probably never been read.
M7. Portrait Gallery This portrait gallery ostensibly has portraits of several generations of Telicanthus’s family, both male and female relatives of all ages. In truth, Telicanthus commissioned one artist to paint every single portrait, taking aspects of Telicanthus’s facial features to manufacture images of realistic-looking relatives.
M8. Library The library is a comfortable room with stained glass on the upper windows. The walls are lined with bookcases. Most of the books are on either stained glass manufacture or the history of Sayre and Auger, including quite a few tomes that include rough maps of the ancient city. Other subjects include archi-
M a rc h 2 0 0 9
|
D u n g e o n 16 4
67
Haven of the Bitter Glass
tecture, mining, books about good manners, racial customs, the social registry of Sayre, and more.
M9. Reading Room This reading room has a small bar, several very comfortable chairs, and a small table.
M10. Pennel’s Office This is the office for Telicanthus’s secretary and bodyguard, Pennel. The door to the office is locked (Thievery DC 21 to open), although the PCs might have the key (see “Telicanthus’s Tea Party” on page 65). The desk is piled with paperwork detailing the various expenses and purchases that the estate makes. A DC 21 Streetwise check reveals that the estate burns through a truly impressive amount of money each month. A DC 21 Insight check reveals that Telicanthus seems to be paying for substantially more food on a daily basis than his household staff could eat, even taking into account the parties he throws. It appears to be enough for an additional 15–20 people each day. In addition, a DC 21 Perception check reveals a key to Telicanthus’s office in the top drawer of Pennel’s desk.
along with his preferred knives and any clothing he’s recently bloodied. If the characters poke around here, a DC 23 Heal check indicates the blood currently staining Pennel’s clothing—which has a peculiar tint that a DC 18 Arcana check can identify as githzerai blood—is no more than two days old. This is the date of the most recent attack on a githzerai.
M12. Telicanthus’s Bedroom Telicanthus’s bedroom is just as richly decorated as the rest of his house, but a DC 21 Insight check reveals that there are no memories of the Astral Sea or the githyanki homeland. This may seem unusual, and stems from Telicanthus’s obsession with maintaining his cover. His wealth is kept in off-site strongrooms elsewhere in the city, and Telicanthus’s bedroom is mostly filled with an extravagantly large bed and wardrobes full of fine clothing.
M13. Hidden Corridor This narrow corridor is hidden between the walls and accessible only from Telicanthus’s office. This narrow hallway is less than 5 feet wide. The stairs at its end lead down to area U1.
M11. Pennel’s Bedroom
M14. Telicanthus’s Office
This is Pennel’s bedroom. The door is unlocked. He lives very sparsely; little in this room shows any sort of personality. Compared to the rest of the house, the room seems bare. In reality, Pennel is both a bodyguard and assassin in addition to being a top-notch secretary. Telicanthus has set him to stalk and kill githzerai in his spare hours, a task that Pennel readily accepts. He keeps spare cash locked in a small chest within his wardrobe (DC 23 Thievery to pick),
This is Telicanthus’s office and sitting room, where he often sits to discuss business with associates. The door to the room is locked (Thievery DC 23 to pick the lock unless the PCs have the key from Pennel’s office). The windows are yellow stained glass that let in the sun, and his wide desk is clear of most paper. Telicanthus is careful not to keep anything incriminating here; he keeps the door locked and the papers on his desk for show. On his desk is a large journal
detailing guest lists for parties. Other papers include designs for stained glass projects. A small tray on his desk holds attractive shards of stained glass. A DC 23 Perception check reveals that this room seems slightly narrower than it should be based on the hallway, and that a secret door (leading to area M13) is hidden behind a full length mirror attached to the wall. The mirror is magical, and can be opened by touching it with a piece of stained glass. Discovering this requires a successful DC 21 Arcana or Thievery check. When activated, the mirror becomes fully permeable for 5 rounds and allows passage through to area M13. The passageway in M13 can also be entered by breaking the mirror (Strength DC 15), of course, but that leaves very visible evidence that intruders have passed by.
M15. Workshop This is Telicanthus’s workshop for making stained glass. He has raw materials, dyes, and a small furnace here. A DC 21 Perception check reveals that this workshop has not been used in some time—several weeks at least, and possibly several months. The githyanki smuggles his “work” into the city. It’s all constructed in Tu’narath to help Telicanthus keep up his front.
M16. Storage This storage area holds furniture and paraphernalia often used for parties.
M17. Kitchen This kitchen has a pantry and store-room attached to it. It is large enough to handle food preparation for more than a hundred people. The cooks on duty refuse to discuss Telicanthus’s private business. If
M a rc h 2 0 0 9
|
D u n g e o n 16 4
68
Haven of the Bitter Glass
convinced with a DC 18 Intimidate check, however, they admit that they’ve grown used to cooking more food each day than the household needs. They believe that Telicanthus quietly takes it out of the house and donates it to the poor each day, but they have no evidence to this effect. Pennel simply comes for the food and carries it away each day. In truth, this extra food goes to the githyanki workers in the excavations.
U2. False Tunnels
U6. Auglos’s Tower
These side tunnels were dug by githyanki while searching for Auglos’s tower. They are empty other than loose dirt and the remains of broken tools.
M18. Servant Quarters
U4. Sleeping Githyanki
The ground floor seems to have originally been one solid piece of stone. It shattered and fell into the basement when the tower was attached, creating a makeshift ramp that angles downward at a sharp angle. Anyone descending must make a DC 21 Acrobatics check or fall, possibly tumbling into the chasm at the bottom of the ramp. Fighting on this slope requires this Acrobatics check when struck in combat.
These houses provide shared lodging for the mansion’s staff. Between cooks, maids, and butlers, Telicanthus employs eight servants.
M19. Stable This stable holds Telicanthus’s carriages and horses.
M20. Rear Gate This rear gate is where workers, craftsmen, and deliveries come each day. It is less strictly guarded than the front gate, and the guard who is always supposed to be stationed here often takes short breaks to chat with the local help. The gate is typically locked (DC 21 Thievery to open). The guard is also a member of the Laughing Shadows.
Excavations Telicanthus has unearthed a section of the tower that holds the Bitter Glass beneath his mansion.
U1. Entrance Tunnel This downward-sloping tunnel runs relatively straight from the stairs that lead to area M13. It is carved into the dirt and reinforced with wooden crossbeams, and ends at a short ladder that leads to the actual excavations below. The ceiling height here is only 5 feet.
U3. Work Gear A pile of shovels, picks, and wheelbarrows sits here, abandoned after the tower was found and cleared.
This open, excavated cavern with an 8-foot-tall ceiling is where the githyanki excavators sleep between shifts. An additional githyanki sleeps nearby in one of the tunnels. The area has a table with four chairs, piles of food stuffs, casks of liquid, and small piles of belongings. Wooden braces hold up the ceiling. Tactical Encounter: U4. Sleeping Githyanki (page 107).
U5. Leisure Time This is the second of three teams of githyanki ritualists. They have recently finished their shift inside the Bitter Glass and are sitting around a small fire, drinking. This area is set off for githyanki who are awake but not performing the ritual, and there is little else for them to do. The area is partially occluded by piles of rubble (difficult terrain). One of these githyanki is Kle’th, the sage brought in to clean and activate the Bitter Glass. The githyanki are sitting next to the ruins of Auglos’s tower. The building is ancient and battered, broken off at the top and badly abused. The walls and floor are dirt. The small alcove at the top of the map is a makeshift privy. Tactical Encounter: U5. Leisure Time (page 108).
U7. Chasm This chasm has opened up under the tower’s basement. The narrow crack descends 30 feet downward. The bottom is filled with rubble.
U8. Stained Glass Workshop This area is Telicanthus’s workshop for creating magical stained glass, used as communication devices after being attuned within the Bitter Glass. Delicate, beautiful panes of glass are stacked here. The furnace is a magical device with an intense, smokeless flame that will gutter out if the forge is moved. Anyone moved forcibly into this space takes 4d8+6 fire damage before the flame is extinguished. While not a true craftsman, Telicanthus has enough skill to create these rudimentary pieces. From this area, faint chanting can be heard coming from the Bitter Glass.
U9. Staircases These two wooden staircases lead up from the floor of the basement to the doorways on the side of the Bitter Glass. The doorways are not locked.
M a rc h 2 0 0 9
|
D u n g e o n 16 4
69
Haven of the Bitter Glass
U10. Inside the Glass The Bitter Glass is a floating glass sphere exactly 30 feet in diameter. It’s clear that someone has recently patched and repaired an older, more beautiful, version of the device. It is made up of stained glass the color of the evening sky, and glowing lights flicker within it. The glass can be entered by two doors along its equator. A 10-foot wide, 30-long glass balcony stretches across the inside middle of the glass. A ritual circle sits in the exact center of the sphere. Tactical Encounter: U10. Inside the Glass (page 110).
Destroying the Glass The Bitter Glass will continue to function even after the ritual is stopped. While it is invulnerable to damage from the outside, the inside panes of glass are simple to break. Causing 200 points of damage to the interior of the Bitter Glass destroys it once more. Any linked communication glasses crack and shatter when this happens, but the change might not be immediately obvious to Telicanthus, since he doesn’t carry a piece of the glass with him.
Confronting Telicanthus Attacking or slaying Telicanthus without prior proof of his guilt will be looked upon very poorly by the leadership of Sayre. It’s still possible, however, and as the DM you should not go to extreme efforts to discourage the PCs should they prefer to handle him that way. Confronting him publicly in order to accuse him in front of his peers, however, offers a more satisfying conclusion. This is the solution both Lord Torrance and Amyria propose. Telicanthus is a social person, and he is likely to have at least one member of Sayre’s
M a rc h 2 0 0 9
|
D u n g e o n 16 4
70
Haven of the Bitter Glass
social elite visiting at whatever time the PCs want to find him. This scene is most effective if Telicanthus is with a great number of people at the time: hosting a masquerade party at his mansion, handling delicate business negotiations while at tea, or throwing a dinner party for his friends in the city. He laughs off any accusations, hoping that his reputation will see him through. Instead of fighting back, he initially tries to preserve his cover and flees. If the PCs offer proof that the Glass is destroyed, however, he realizes that he no longer needs to keep his cover and will attack with every weapon he possesses. His secretary and bodyguard will attack as well, fighting in and among any guests while he uses them as cover. Tactical Encounter: Z1. Exposing Telicanthus (page 112).
Concluding the Adventure With Telicanthus dead or on the run, and Lord Torrance shown the ruins of the Bitter Glass, the PCs have finished the adventure. The PCs receive a mixed response in Sayre if they killed Telicanthus. Until the word gets out that he was actually a spy, they will be treated coldly. But after a few days, when the truth is known, the locals will be more accepting. Torrance seizes ownership of Telicanthus’s mansion and everything in it for the city, and will be pleased to house the PCs there for as long as they require lodging. If the PCs turn him down, he offers use of the house to Odos and the githzerai. (He finds more suitable housing for them regardless.) He prefers to have them nearby; with Telicanthus dead or fled, he isn’t sure how long it will be before Sayre is attacked by the githyanki. He immediately increases the city guard and plans for various contingencies. In addition, with the githyanki invaders reeling from the loss of their communication web, the Coalition acts quickly and turns to their prime sources of information—Amyria and the adventurers—for input on the next course of action. Of course, Amyria has a plan that requires the active participation of the heroes . . .
M a rc h 2 0 0 9
|
D u n g e o n 16 4
71
Haven of the Bitter Glass
Meeting Tokk’it Roleplaying Encounter
Encounter Level 11
Running this Encounter Thie roleplaying encounter begins when the characters approach the Conqueror, the crashed githyanki airship. As the PCs approach the ship, read the following aloud: The warship leans to one side, and it has clearly been in a fight. Its sails are ragged, and the stern of the ship is charred from intense fire. A humanoid with greenish skin and gray robes stands by the rail, hands held open, waiting for you to approach. He speaks loudly enough for you to hear him at a distance. “My apologies for the method of my arrival. My name is Tokk’it, and I come asking for help. At this moment, my people are under attack by githyanki. I have heard that there are those in this city of Overlook who are familiar with the githyanki. I seek to stop the githyanki before they breach our fortress and exterminate my brethren. Please, can you tell me where to find those of your people who know of this danger, and if they can help me? Please.” Tokk’it’s manner is stiff and formal, as he is uncomfortable asking for help from outsiders. His first move is to ask for “those who defended this city, the Overlook, from General Zithiruun.” If the adventurers identify themselves, Tokk’it looks at them suspiciously, refusing to believe that so few could have made such an impact. A DC 16 Diplomacy check is sufficient to convince him, however.
Once the PCs have assured Tokk’it of their authenticity, in his halting manner he explains his situation and asks for immediate help to return with him. Still in some disbelief that the characters could have accomplished so much, he initially insists on more troops from Overlook. Captain Dauralis, silent until this point, leans over to the nearest PC and says that she knows the council will not approve such a move in the wake of the attack on Overlook.
What Tokk’it Knows Tokk’it can relate the following: ✦ The githzerai fortress of Akma’ad is some 140 miles southwest of Overlook, and 20 miles north of the city of Sayre. ✦ Akma’ad currently houses close to 100 githzerai trained to fight, as well as several dozen noncombatants. (He does not yet share that githzerai religious and political leaders were effectively in the middle of a war council.) ✦ He isn’t sure how many githyanki are attacking. He saw three war galleons and at least three lancers, so he guesses two to three hundred troops. ✦ Tokk’it stole a githyanki ship by waiting until all the githyanki troops had disembarked, then sneaking aboard and slaying the captain. War galleons are designed to be flown with only a one- or two-person skeleton crew, with psychic echoes of possessed githyanki sailors that actually man the sails and rudder. ✦ Tokk’it’s stolen ship was chased and attacked by githyanki lancers mounted on dragons, but he was able to outpace them before they could destroy the vessel; the ship f lies faster than the dragons.
Some elements of the attack clearly bother Tokk’it, and others just haven’t completely clicked in his mind yet. Some insight and prodding by the PCs can reveal more. Insight (DC 16): The fortress already has a defense against just this sort of siege attack, but it wasn’t triggered. The fortress is built into a cliff and has a prepared landslide arranged above it, set to crush any foes that stand before the citadel when the landslide is set off. Tokk’it doesn’t know why it wasn’t activated, but he believes that the githyanki probably killed the githzerai troops responsible for activating it. Diplomacy (DC 16): Tokk’it is happy to help fight. He admits to some combat ability, mostly as a scout. (He seems uncomfortable as he says this; Tokk’it’s role in the githzerai hierarchy is currently in question, as explained below.) Insight (DC 16): Tokk’it has no doubt that his attackers are still chasing him, and he takes several opportunities to glance over his shoulder in the direction of Akma’ad. This is the primary reason he wants to start back immediately—before Overlook realizes he’s brought more githyanki right to their doorstep. Perception (DC 16): While the galleon is damaged from the fight and the rough landing, Tokk’it believes that it will reach Akma’ad once again. Diplomacy (DC 21): If asked for payment, Tokk’it can pledge the service of githzerai troops to help guard Overlook during the coming war. He is not of high enough rank to work out the details, but is certain that they an accommodation can be reached with his Abbot once the citadel is saved. A follow-up DC 16 Insight check reveals that Tokk’it is genuinely hopeful such an agreement can be reached, but that he’s not sure if such a thing is really possible. He doesn’t have the authority to make such a guarantee.
M a rc h 2 0 0 9
|
D u n g e o n 16 4
72
Haven of the Bitter Glass
Roleplaying Tokk’it More pessimistic and morose than most githzerai, Tokk’it has never entirely fit in at Akma’ad. He is a loner at heart who has had trouble focusing his mind and purging it of chaotic emotions. He seldom commands respect, and his peers have difficulty socializing with him since he has imperfectly integrated himself into the community. Even Gallia, the githzerai woman he loves and who left him several months ago, has acknowledged his imperfection of soul. (Tokk’it does not realize that Gallia left him because she was possessed by a githyanki, and is now a spy with no hope of regaining her original personality.) Akma’ad was playing host to some of the most important political and religious leaders of the githzerai, and Tokk’it’s Abbot did not want him embarrassing the monastery with his disordered thinking. As a result, Tokk’it was on a fasting vigil outside of the fortress when the githyanki swooped in to attack. Tokk’it followed the best strategy he could conceive of: He waited until a githyanki war galleon landed and
disgorged its troops, snuck on board, and slew the pilot. He then stole the ship. Realizing too late what was happening, the githyanki attacked it as it departed, but Tokk’it had the element of surprise and a githyanki galleon that was slightly faster than the githyanki’s red dragon troops. The ship was badly damaged by the vengeful githyanki as it fled, but Tokk’it managed to outdistance them and escape. He aimed the ship toward the strongest potential ally nearby, the city of Overlook, home of combatants with experience fighting githyanki. But he did this knowing that githyanki dragon troops were certainly chasing him. Now that he has arrived, he’s wondering if he should have piloted the ship to the city of Sayre instead, even though it is farther away. Overlook has clearly been attacked recently and may not have any troops that are willing to help. He is determined to do his duty and try, however. Perhaps he will distinguish himself in this matter and find his place. Perhaps his attempt to be heroic will return Gallia to him.
If the character’s take the time to check on Captain Dauralis’s claim that Overlook will be unwilling to spare any troops, they can gain an immediate appointment with Councilor Fellstone, a male dwarf. He echoes the Captain’s words almost verbatim. Overlook’s council is unwilling to pledge troops so soon after the battle, but he does encourage the heroes to assist. Tokk’it doubts that so few people will be able to accomplish much but hides any disappointment. Any help is better than none.
Development This encounter should convince the adventurers that Tokk’it is exactly what he appears: a very concerned, tenacious, and somewhat reckless githzerai monk who desperately wants to return to his home with aid. His fear and anger are genuine, and he is tremendously grateful for any help the heroes can provide.
M a rc h 2 0 0 9
|
D u n g e o n 16 4
73
Haven of the Bitter Glass
D1: Repossession Team Encounter Level 12 (3,600 XP)
Setup 2 pact dragons (D) 2 githyanki lancers (L) Two githyanki lancers on specially bred red dragons have been dispatched to retrieve their lost githyanki war galleon. They have been ordered to come back with the stolen ship or to not come back at all. The PCs might be able to spot the approaching enemies several rounds before they come into combat range of the ship. Have any PC above decks make a Perception check. A character in the crow’s nest gets a +5 bonus on the check. A result of 27 or higher will allow the character to see the approaching foes emerge from a cloud 3 rounds before they close with the ship. For every three points lower on the Perception check, the githyanki get 1 round closer to the ship before being seen, up to only one round’s notice if the PCs only achieve DC 21. This may give the PCs a chance to gain surprise attacks using ranged weapons or the ship’s ballistas. If the PCs spot the attackers, read: Your damaged ship sails through wispy clouds. Suddenly you see movement ahead of you. Two red shapes fly out of a cloud, changing direction and speeding up as they move in your direction. You see two red dragons, each with a rider strapped on its back.
2 Adult Pact Dragons (D)
Level 13 Skirmisher
Large immortal magical beast (dragon, mount) XP 800 each Initiative +13 Senses Perception +15; darkvision HP 134; Bloodied 67; see also bloodied breath AC 27; Fortitude 26, Reflex 25, Will 25 Resist 10 fire, 10 psychic Speed 7, fly 10 (hover), overland flight 14 m Bite (standard; at-will) Reach 2; +18 vs. AC; 2d6 + 7 damage; see also skirmish. m Aggressive Charger (when mounted by a friendly rider of 13th level or higher; at-will) ✦ Mount When it charges, the pact dragon makes a bite attack in addition to its rider’s charge attack. C Breath Weapon (standard; recharge 5 6 ) ✦ Fire Close blast 5; +15 vs. Reflex; 2d12 + 12 fire damage, and the target takes ongoing 5 fire damage (save ends). C Bloodied Breath Weapon (free, when first bloodied) ✦ Fire The dragon’s breath weapon recharges, and the dragon uses it immediately. Astral Jaunt (minor; encounter; recharge 6 ) ✦ Mount, Teleportation The pact dragon disappears into the Astral Sea, teleporting 10 squares. Its rider teleports with it. Pledged Rider (when mounted by a friendly rider of 13th level or higher; at-will) ✦ Mount Any damage dealt to the pact dragon can be redirected to its rider, and vice versa. Skirmish +2d6 If, on its turn, the pact dragon ends its move at least 4 squares away from its starting point, it deals 2d6 extra damage with its melee attacks until the start of its next turn. Alignment Evil Languages Deep Speech, Draconic, telepathy 20 Skills Endurance +17, Insight +15 Str 24 (+13) Dex 20 (+11) Wis 18 (+10) Con 22 (+12) Int 15 (+8) Cha 16 (+9)
2 Githyanki Lancers (G)
Level 14 Skirmisher
Medium natural humanoid XP 1,000 each Initiative +15 Senses Perception +10 HP 134; Bloodied 67 AC 28; Fortitude 26, Reflex 26, Will 25 Saving Throws +2 against charm effects Speed 5; also see telekinetic tether m Psychic Lance (standard; at-will) ✦ Psychic Reach 2; +19 vs. AC; 2d10 + 5 psychic damage, and if the githyanki lancer charged, the target is pushed 2 squares. M Silver Longsword (standard; at-will) ✦ Psychic, Weapon +19 vs. AC; 1d8 + 5 damage plus 1d8 psychic damage, and the githyanki lancer or its mount can shift 1 square. R Mindslice (standard; at-will) ✦ Psychic Ranged 10; +17 vs. Will; 2d8 + 5 psychic damage. Telekinetic Tether (move or immediate reaction when falling; encounter) The githyanki lancer can fly up to 10 squares, fly back to its mount’s saddle, or fall to the ground without taking falling damage. Alignment Evil Languages Common, Deep Speech Skills Acrobatics +16 Str 19 (+11) Dex 18 (+11) Wis 16 (+10) Con 14 (+9) Int 15 (+9) Cha 11 (+7) Equipment scale armor, silver longsword
Tactics The pact dragons carry the githyanki lancers into battle, soaring over their enemies and charging down like thunderbolts, then teleporting upward so as to charge again in the next round. The dragons fight from the air for 3 rounds or until one of the characters drops (whichever happens first), at which point they land on the deck of the ship for 2 rounds before taking back to the air. They follow this attack routine throughout the battle. The githyanki lancers use mindslice while their mounts are maneuvering. When charging, the lancers use psychic lance to try and knock targets off the deck. They do not dismount unless the battle is definitively won.
M a rc h 2 0 0 9
|
D u n g e o n 16 4
74
Haven of the Bitter Glass
Features of the Area Illumination: This encounter takes place in bright sunlight. Masts: A character standing next to a mast can use it to gain cover. Crenellations: The Conqueror’s railings are equipped with crenellations, giving defenders on the decks of the ship cover against attacks that don’t come from higher ground. Stairs: Stairs to upper decks are difficult terrain to climbing characters, but normal terrain to descending characters. Ballistas: The squares occupied by ballistas are considered difficult terrain, and characters in those squares can use the siege weapons to gain cover. The Conqueror: See the description of the ship beginning on page 43 for details on individual areas, if necessary.
M a rc h 2 0 0 9
|
D u n g e o n 16 4
75
Haven of the Bitter Glass
A1: Draconic Champion Encounter Level 12 (3,600 XP)
Setup Xirakis, pact dragon Thaggriel, githyanki dragonknight Thaggriel is a scarred veteran of a dozen wars against the githzerai. He is impatient and overconfident; his commander is keeping him in reserve during the siege of Akma’ad, and he yearns for an actual combat that challenges him. His dragon Xirakis is even more headstrong, looking for any opportunity to attack so long as it doesn’t go against the commander’s express orders. Since they are responsible for patrolling and picking off any escaping githzerai, Thaggriel and Xirakis will be soaring over the mountain when the PCs’ ship appears. Eager for combat, the two close quickly on the ship to see who controls it. The PCs can open fire with ballistas as soon as Xirakas and Thaggriel come within range, although this causes the pair to maneuver above or below the ship in such a way that they can’t easily be attacked. Read the following aloud: The red dragon closing on your ship is larger than the two you just fought. There seems to be one githyanki riding it. Use the map of the Conqueror below for this battle.
Xirakis, Adult Pact Dragon
Level 13 Elite Skirmisher
Large immortal magical beast (dragon, mount) XP 1,600 Initiative +13 Senses Perception +15; darkvision HP 268; Bloodied 134; see also bloodied breath AC 29; Fortitude 28, Reflex 27, Will 25 Resist 10 fire, 10 psychic Saving Throws +2 Speed 7, fly 10 (hover), overland flight 14 Action Points 1 m Bite (standard; at-will) Reach 2; +18 vs. AC; 2d6 + 7 damage; see also skirmish. m Claw (standard; at-will) Reach 2; +18 vs. AC; 1d8 + 7 damage; see also skirmish. M Ripping Charger (when mounted by a friendly rider of 13th level or higher; at-will) ✦ Mount When it charges, Xirakis can make two claw attacks and one bite attack; each must be against a different foe; see also skirmish. M Wing Buffet (immediate reaction, when an enemy moves to flank Xirakis) Targets triggering enemy; +15 vs. Fortitude; 1d10 + 7 damage, target is knocked prone, and the dragon shifts 2 squares. C Breath Weapon (standard; recharge 5 6 ) ✦ Fire Close blast 5; +15 vs. Reflex; 3d12 + 12 fire damage, and the target takes ongoing 5 fire damage (save ends). C Bloodied Breath Weapon (free, when first bloodied) ✦ Fire The dragon’s breath weapon recharges, and the dragon uses it immediately. Astral Jaunt (minor; encounter; recharge 6 ) ✦ Mount, Teleportation Xirakis disappears into the Astral Sea, teleporting 10 squares. Its rider teleports with it. Pledged Rider (when mounted by a friendly rider of 13th level or higher; at-will) ✦ Mount Any damage dealt to Xirakis can be redirected to its rider, and vice versa. Skirmish +2d6 If, on its turn, Xirakis ends its move at least 4 squares away from its starting point, it deals 2d6 extra damage with its melee attacks until the start of its next turn. Alignment Evil Languages Deep Speech, Draconic, telepathy 20 Skills Endurance +17, Insight +15 Str 24 (+13) Dex 20 (+11) Wis 18 (+10) Con 22 (+12) Int 15 (+8) Cha 16 (+9)
Thaggriel, Level 14 Elite Skirmisher Githyanki Dragonknight
Medium natural humanoid XP 2,000 Initiative +16 Senses Perception +11 HP 272; Bloodied 136 AC 28; Fortitude 27, Reflex 27, Will 26 Saving Throws +2; +4 against charm effects Speed 5; see also telekinetic tether Action Points 1 m Psychic Lance (standard; at-will) ✦ Psychic Reach 2; +19 vs. AC; 2d10 + 5 psychic damage, and if the githyanki dragonknight charged, the target is pushed 2 squares. m Silver Bastard Sword (standard; at-will) ✦ Psychic, Weapon +19 vs. AC; 1d10 + 5 damage plus 1d10 psychic damage, and the dragonknight or its mount can shift 2 squares. r Mindslice (standard; at-will) ✦ Psychic Ranged 10; +17 vs. Will; 2d8 + 3 psychic damage. M Knightly Prowess (standard; at-will) The githyanki dragonknight can make two basic attacks. If the dragonknight charged and made a psychic lance attack, the dragonkight or its mount can instead shift 2 squares, then the dragonknight makes a silver longsword attack. M Hatred’s Juggernaut (standard; recharge 6) ✦ Psychic Reach 2; the githyanki dragonknight moves up to it or its mount’s speed, making a psychic lance against any enemy that comes within reach. Telekinetic Tether (move or immediate reaction when falling; encounter) The githyanki dragonknight can fly up to 12 squares, fly back to its mount’s saddle, or fall to the ground without taking falling damage. Alignment Evil Languages Common, Deep Speech Skills Athletics, Acrobatics Str 21 (+12) Dex 20 (+12) Wis 18 (+11) Con 16 (+10) Int 16 (+10) Cha 14 (+9) Equipment scale armor, silver longsword, overcoat
M a rc h 2 0 0 9
|
D u n g e o n 16 4
76
Haven of the Bitter Glass
Tactics Thaggriel and Xirakis use the sky to their advantage, moving above and below the ship to avoid exposure to the ballistas. They seldom stop moving, attacking the ship to disable the sails if they can’t easily reach and attack a PC. Xirakis tries to charge multiple enemies as often as possible to make maximum effect of ripping charger. It even provokes opportunity attacks if necessary to set up another charge. Xirakis uses its breath weapon whenever it recharges. Thaggriel uses knightly prowess as often as possible to keep Xirakis free of melee to set up another charge. The two land on the ship only if they believe all accessible foes have been disabled.
Features of the Area Illumination: This encounter takes place in bright sunlight. Masts: A character standing next to a mast can use it to gain cover. Crenellations: The Conqueror’s railings are equipped with crenellations, giving defenders on the decks of the ship cover against attacks that don’t come from higher ground. Stairs: Stairs to upper decks are difficult terrain to climbing characters, but normal terrain to descending characters. Ballistas: The squares occupied by ballistas are considered difficult terrain, and characters in those squares can use the siege weapons to gain cover. The Conqueror: See the description of the ship beginning on page 43 for details on individual areas, if necessary.
M a rc h 2 0 0 9
|
D u n g e o n 16 4
77
Haven of the Bitter Glass
A2: Boarding the Sacrifice Encounter Level 14 (4,950 XP)
Setup 10 githyanki myrmidons (Y) 2 githyanki mindslicers (M) Captain Iquel (I) Whether she comes to the PCs or the PCs come to her, Captain Iquel quickly loads some of her troops and turns her ship to face the PCs as soon as she’s aware of them. This takes several minutes, giving the PCs enough time to complete encounter A1. Iquel’s ship is identical to the Conqueror other than being less damaged. Her helmsman steers the ship while she musters the troops on deck. She attempts to impale the Conqueror with the Sacrifice’s ramming spike before ordering her troops to go swinging and jumping onto the Conqueror’s deck. Both the Sacrifice and the Conqueror have multiple ropes and lines that make it easy for sailors to swing from one vessel to another. Using a rope to swing from one deck to another requires a DC 10 Acrobatics check. Githyanki receive a +5 bonus on these checks due to their training. These ropes also provide a last-minute chance for a falling character to save themselves, granting a +5 bonus to saving throws made to avoid falling to the ground. Iquel is cautious, particularly if she has seen the PCs destroy Thaggriel and Xirakis. Her primary goal is to make sure that her troops succeed. While she wishes to keep her ship intact, she would rather sacrifice it than let the PCs swing the tide of the battle below.
Read the following aloud: A ship identical to your own is moving to intercept you. You can see troops moving on its deck. 10 Githyanki Myrmidons (Y)
Level 12 Minion
Medium natural humanoid XP 175 each Initiative +12 Senses Perception +9 HP 1; a missed attack never damages a minion AC 28; Fortitude 24, Reflex 23, Will 24 Speed 5 m Silver Short Sword (standard; at-will) ✦ Psychic, Weapon +19 vs. AC; 7 damage, plus an extra 5 psychic damage if the target is immobilized. R Telekinetic Grasp (standard; encounter) Ranged 5; Medium or smaller target; +15 vs. Fortitude; the target is immobilized (save ends). Alignment Chaotic evil Languages Common, Deep Speech Str 16 (+9) Dex 14 (+8) Wis 16 (+9) Con 12 (+7) Int 12 (+7) Cha 10 (+6) Equipment chainmail, silver short sword
2 Githyanki Mindslicers (M)
Level 13 Artillery
Medium natural humanoid XP 800 each Initiative +11 Senses Perception +12 HP 98; Bloodied 49 AC 27; Fortitude 24, Reflex 25, Will 24 Saving Throws +2 against charm effects Speed 6; see also telekinetic leap m Silver Longsword (standard; at-will) ✦ Psychic, Weapon +18 vs. AC; 1d8 + 2 damage plus 1d8 psychic damage. R Mindslice (standard; at-will) ✦ Psychic Ranged 10; +16 vs. Will; 2d8 + 3 psychic damage. R Telekinetic Leap (move; encounter) Ranged 10; the githyanki mindslicer or an ally within range can fly up to 5 squares. A Psychic Barrage (standard; recharge 6 ) ✦ Psychic Area burst 1 within 20; +16 vs. Will; 1d6 + 3 psychic damage, and ongoing 5 psychic damage (save ends), and the target can’t use daily or encounter powers (save ends). Alignment Evil Languages Common, Deep Speech Skills History +11, Insight +12 Str 14 (+8) Dex 16 (+9) Wis 12 (+7) Con 14 (+8) Int 17 (+9) Cha 11 (+6) Equipment robes, overcoat, silver longsword
Iquel, Level 13 Elite Soldier (Leader) Githyanki Captain (I)
Medium natural humanoid XP 1,600 Initiative +11 Senses Perception +10 HP 256; Bloodied 128 AC 29; Fortitude 26, Reflex 25, Will 25 Saving Throws +2, +4 against charm effects Speed 5; also see astral engagement and telekinetic leap Action Points 1 m Silver Greatsword (standard; at-will) ✦ Psychic, Weapon +18 vs. AC; 1d10 + 6 damage plus 1d10 psychic damage, plus an extra 2d10 psychic damage against an immobilized target. r Mindhook (standard; at-will) ✦ Psychic Ranged 10; +17 vs. Will; 2d8 + 3 psychic damage, and the githyanki captain or an ally of the captain’s choice marks the target (save ends). M/R Double Attack (standard; at-will) The githyanki captain makes two basic attacks. R Telekinetic Leap (move; encounter) Ranged 10; the githyanki captain or an ally within range can fly up to 8 squares. C Psychic Upheaval (standard; recharges when first bloodied) ✦ Psychic Close burst 3; targets enemies; +16 vs. Fortitude; 2d10 + 4 psychic damage, and the target is immobilized (save ends). Allies within the area gain 10 temporary hit points. Astral Engagement (move; recharge 4 5 6) ✦ Teleportation The captain teleports 6 squares to a square adjacent to an enemy, and one ally within 5 squares of the captain’s start or end point can charge the same enemy. Alignment Evil Languages Common, Deep Speech Skills: Arcana +15, History +17 Str 21 (+10) Dex 12 (+7) Wis 19 (+10) Con 16 (+9) Int 18 (+10) Cha 16 (+9) Equipment: plate armor, silver greatsword, Bitter Glass communication device
M a rc h 2 0 0 9
|
D u n g e o n 16 4
78
Haven of the Bitter Glass
Tactics Myrmidons are culled from the mass of githyanki troops—lesser warriors who are trained to surge toward enemies in battle. They work in tandem and have good communication. Half the myrmidons use telekinetic grasp on the first round of combat while the other half attacks targets immobilized by their peers. The second round of combat allows the shock troopers to switch roles, the rear lines moving forward to attack newly immobilized foes. Captain Iquel is a commander who prides herself on her organization and tactics. She is angry that several mistakes have been made during the course of the battle, and is desperate for success so that she is not punished upon her return. Once the ships are locked together, she swings across to the Conqueror at the beginning of round 3. She stands proudly with her troops, protecting the mindslicers as long as possible. She uses psychic upheaval as soon as she can catch at least two targets in the burst, and tries to focus her melee attacks against more lightly armored foes if possible. She directs her myrmidons to concentrate their attacks on single targets as much as possible.
Features of the Area
Development
Illumination: This encounter takes place in bright sunlight. Masts: A character standing next to a mast can use it to gain cover. Crenellations: The Conqueror’s railings are equipped with crenellations, giving defenders on the decks of the ship cover against attacks that don’t come from higher ground. Stairs: Stairs to upper decks are difficult terrain to climbing characters, but normal terrain to descending characters. Ballistas: The squares occupied by ballistas are considered difficult terrain, and characters in those squares can use the siege weapons to gain cover.
Regardless of the outcome of any ramming attempts, the Sacrifice takes enough damage in this fight that it is no longer airworthy, making it unsuitable if the PCs want to use it to fly to Sayre. Captain Iquel carries a communication device almost identical in size and shape to the one carried by the githzerai Gallia, although hers is dark blue, rather than green. The Conqueror: See the description of the ship beginning on page 43 for details on individual areas, if necessary.
M a rc h 2 0 0 9
|
D u n g e o n 16 4
79
Haven of the Bitter Glass
A3: Falling Rock Encounter Level 14 (4,900 XP)
Setup 4 githyanki mindslicers (M) 2 githyanki warriors (W) 2 githyanki myrmidons (Y) The sloping cliff overlooking the fortress of Akma’ad was turned into a defensive death trap by githzerai. Hundreds of tons of rock and debris were piled and balanced, held in place by heavy chains and two stout guard towers. The intent was that if an army ever threatened Akma’ad, the githzerai could release the chain and drop a massive landslide on top of the heads of the attacking army. This would have worked perfectly had the githyanki not first scouted the area. Before the main attack occurred, the githzerai in the guard towers were quietly slain and the towers were seized by a githyanki strike force. Now the force is split between the two towers, forbidden to take part in the battle below. They are bored and frustrated that they’ve been relegated to a simple guard duty, to the extent that several of them are loitering on the edge of the cliff, looking down at the fighting below. In order to release the landslide, the PCs must pull two large levers inside either guard tower. Pulling each lever is a standard action. This releases the chains and starts the lethal landslide. After the landslide has fallen, visibility on the battlefield of Akma’ad is reduced to 2 squares due to dust until the end of the encounter.
Read the following aloud: From your ship, it’s clear that two squat guard towers perch on top of this steep cliff. Chains are stretched between them, holding back what must be hundreds of tons of rock and rubble. You can see a dead githzerai on the ground, and several githyanki guarding the towers. 4 Githyanki Mindslicers (M)
Level 13 Artillery
Medium natural humanoid XP 800 each Initiative +11 Senses Perception +12 HP 98; Bloodied 49 AC 27; Fortitude 24, Reflex 25, Will 24 Saving Throws +2 against charm effects Speed 6; see also telekinetic leap m Silver Longsword (standard; at-will) ✦ Psychic, Weapon +18 vs. AC; 1d8 + 2 damage plus 1d8 psychic damage. R Mindslice (standard; at-will) ✦ Psychic Ranged 10; +16 vs. Will; 2d8 + 3 psychic damage. R Telekinetic Leap (move; encounter) Ranged 10; the githyanki mindslicer or an ally within range can fly up to 5 squares. A Psychic Barrage (standard; recharge 6 ) ✦ Psychic Area burst 1 within 20; +16 vs. Will; 1d6 + 3 psychic damage, and ongoing 5 psychic damage (save ends), and the target can’t use daily or encounter powers (save ends). Alignment Evil Languages Common, Deep Speech Skills History +11, Insight +12 Str 14 (+8) Dex 16 (+9) Wis 12 (+7) Con 14 (+8) Int 17 (+9) Cha 11 (+6) Equipment robes, overcoat, silver longsword
Tactics Once alerted, these githyanki form up into two wellorganized groups, one for each tower. If one tower is under attack, reinforcements are sent from the other tower, always leaving behind at least one githyanki. These githyanki give their lives to make sure that the landslide is not dropped. Once engaged in melee, the warriors and shock troopers concentrate on immobilized foes, while the mindslicers work in tandem to remove enemy artillery.
2 Githyanki Warriors (W)
Level 12 Soldier
2 Githyanki Myrmidons (Y)
Level 12 Minion
Medium natural humanoid XP 700 each Initiative +13 Senses Perception +12 HP 118; Bloodied 59 AC 28; Fortitude 25, Reflex 23, Will 22 Saving Throws +2 against charm effects Speed 5; see also telekinetic leap m Silver Greatsword (standard; at-will) ✦ Psychic, Weapon +17 vs. AC; 1d10 + 5 damage plus 1d6 psychic damage, plus an extra 3d6 psychic damage if the target is immobilized. R Telekinetic Grasp (standard; sustain minor; encounter) Ranged 5; Medium or smaller target; +15 vs. Fortitude; the target is immobilized (save ends). R Telekinetic Leap (move; encounter) Ranged 10; the githyanki mindslicer or an ally within range can fly up to 5 squares. Alignment Evil Languages Common, Deep Speech Skills History +9, Insight +12 Str 21 (+11) Dex 17 (+9) Wis 12 (+7) Con 14 (+8) Int 12 (+7) Cha 13 (+7) Equipment plate armor, silver greatsword
Medium natural humanoid XP 175 each Initiative +12 Senses Perception +9 HP 1; a missed attack never damages a minion AC 28; Fortitude 24, Reflex 23, Will 24 Speed 5 m Silver Short Sword (standard; at-will) ✦ Psychic, Weapon +19 vs. AC; 7 damage, plus an extra 5 psychic damage if the target is immobilized. R Telekinetic Grasp (standard; encounter) Ranged 5; Medium or smaller target; +15 vs. Fortitude; the target is immobilized (save ends). Alignment Chaotic evil Languages Common, Deep Speech Str 16 (+9) Dex 14 (+8) Wis 16 (+9) Con 12 (+7) Int 12 (+7) Cha 10 (+6) Equipment chainmail, silver short sword
M a rc h 2 0 0 9
|
D u n g e o n 16 4
80
Haven of the Bitter Glass
Features of the Area
Development
Illumination: This encounter takes place in bright sunlight. Buildings: Two low, squat towers flank the rubble. Both have had their doors broken open when the githyanki seized control of the area, and so are no longer useful for defense. Each tower is fairly barren and spare, dominated by two thick wooden levers that control the landslide winch. Rock Pile: A character can move onto the piled rocks from either tower. The boulders and rocks comprise difficult terrain.
If the characters successfully defeat the githyanki here, one character in each tower can pull the massive wooden levers to trigger the landslide. If this happens, read the following:
Triggering the landslide effectively destroys enough of the githyanki ground forces that further siege is almost impossible. Combined with the destruction of the githyanki air forces (see encounters A1 and A2) or the squads penetrating the walls (encounters A4 and A5), this almost certainly guarantees victory.
With a tremendous, deafening roar, a cascade of rock—from pebbles the size of a pea to boulders the size of a mule— tumbles down onto the githyanki army massed outside the walls of Akma’ad. At first, all you see is a blinding cloud of dust, but as the wind clears it from the field, you see that hundreds of githyanki troops have been pulverized by the rock, and the rest are scattered or fleeing outright.
M a rc h 2 0 0 9
|
D u n g e o n 16 4
81
Haven of the Bitter Glass
A4: Side Entrance Encounter Level 14 (5,000 XP)
Setup Githyanki mindslicer (M) 4 githyanki warriors (W) 8 githyanki myrmidons (Y) 3 githzerai cenobites (C) This encounter occurs whether or not the landslide from encounter A3: Falling Rock has been dropped. If it has, this group is a band of githyanki that survived the landslide trying to penetrate the fortress. If not, this is a strike force attempting to use a ritual to gain entrance. This small band of githyanki are led by a specially trained mindslicer in the midst of a Passwall ritual. If the ritual is completed, all nearby githyanki storm the opening. While the ritual is performed, the githyanki crouch in the area between a downed githyanki ship and the wall, hoping they won’t be attacked until the ritual is complete. Read the following: Over the shouts and sounds of fighting, you hear the sound of chanting. Protected from githzerai attack by the side of the crashed ship and the angle of the walls, a small group of githyanki appears to be performing some sort of ritual next to the walls. Shock troopers guard the group.
Tactics The mindslicer focuses on the ritual until attacked. She will complete the ritual within 7 rounds or unless she’s interrupted. Any successful attack that deals damage to the mindslicer disrupts the ritual. The warriors and myrmidons do their best to stop the PCs
Githyanki Mindslicer (M)
Level 13 Artillery
Medium natural humanoid XP 800 Initiative +11 Senses Perception +12 HP 98; Bloodied 49 AC 27; Fortitude 24, Reflex 25, Will 24 Saving Throws +2 against charm effects Speed 6; see also telekinetic leap m Silver Longsword (standard; at-will) ✦ Psychic, Weapon +18 vs. AC; 1d8 + 2 damage plus 1d8 psychic damage. R Mindslice (standard; at-will) ✦ Psychic Ranged 10; +16 vs. Will; 2d8 + 3 psychic damage. R Telekinetic Leap (move; encounter) Ranged 10; the githyanki mindslicer or an ally within range can fly up to 5 squares. A Psychic Barrage (standard; recharge 6 ) ✦ Psychic Area burst 1 within 20; +16 vs. Will; 1d6 + 3 psychic damage, and ongoing 5 psychic damage (save ends), and the target can’t use daily or encounter powers (save ends). Alignment Evil Languages Common, Deep Speech Skills History +11, Insight +12 Str 14 (+8) Dex 16 (+9) Wis 12 (+7) Con 14 (+8) Int 17 (+9) Cha 11 (+6) Equipment robes, overcoat, silver longsword
from interfering, leading the battle away from the mindslicer as much as possible. The githzerai cenobites only come into play if the ritual is completed. If that happens, they fight from the gap, attacking only those enemies who step within reach.
Features of the Area Illumination: This encounter takes place in bright sunlight unless the landslide from encounter A3 has been dropped. In that case, dust reduces visibility to 2 squares. Buildings: The ritual is taking pace between the walls of Akma’ad and a crashed githyanki ship. Climbing the walls requires a DC 16 Athletics check. Rubble: If the landslide from encounter A3 has been triggered, this entire area is full of rubble, making each square except those on the canted deck of the ship difficult terrain.
8 Githyanki Myrmidons (Y)
Level 12 Minion
4 Githyanki Warriors (W)
Level 12 Soldier
Medium natural humanoid XP 175 each Initiative +12 Senses Perception +9 HP 1; a missed attack never damages a minion AC 28; Fortitude 24, Reflex 23, Will 24 Speed 5 m Silver Short Sword (standard; at-will) ✦ Psychic, Weapon +19 vs. AC; 7 damage, plus an extra 5 psychic damage if the target is immobilized. R Telekinetic Grasp (standard; encounter) Ranged 5; Medium or smaller target; +15 vs. Fortitude; the target is immobilized (save ends). Alignment Chaotic evil Languages Common, Deep Speech Str 16 (+9) Dex 14 (+8) Wis 16 (+9) Con 12 (+7) Int 12 (+7) Cha 10 (+6) Equipment chainmail, silver short sword Medium natural humanoid XP 700 each Initiative +13 Senses Perception +12 HP 118; Bloodied 59 AC 28; Fortitude 25, Reflex 23, Will 22 Saving Throws +2 against charm effects Speed 5; see also telekinetic leap m Silver Greatsword (standard; at-will) ✦ Psychic, Weapon +17 vs. AC; 1d10 + 5 damage plus 1d6 psychic damage, plus an extra 3d6 psychic damage if the target is immobilized. R Telekinetic Grasp (standard; sustain minor; encounter) Ranged 5; Medium or smaller target; +15 vs. Fortitude; the target is immobilized (save ends). R Telekinetic Leap (move; encounter) Ranged 10; the githyanki mindslicer or an ally within range can fly up to 5 squares. Alignment Evil Languages Common, Deep Speech Skills History +9, Insight +12 Str 21 (+11) Dex 17 (+9) Wis 12 (+7) Con 14 (+8) Int 12 (+7) Cha 13 (+7) Equipment plate armor, silver greatsword
Crashed Ship: The crashed ship is leaning against the walls of the fortress at a fairly steep angle. Any character making a melee attack on the deck of the ship must first make a successful DC 10 Acrobatics check or take a –2 penalty to the attack roll.
M a rc h 2 0 0 9
|
D u n g e o n 16 4
82
Haven of the Bitter Glass
Githzerai Cenobite
Level 11 Soldier
Medium natural humanoid XP 600 Initiative +12 Senses Perception +13 HP 108; Bloodied 54 AC 27; Fortitude 22, Reflex 23, Will 23; see also iron mind Speed 7; see also inescapable fate m Unarmed Strike (standard; at-will) +17 vs. AC; 2d8 + 3 damage. M Stunning Strike (standard; at-will) +14 vs. Fortitude; 1d8 + 3 damage, and the target is stunned until the end of the githzerai cenobite’s next turn. Inescapable Fate (immediate reaction, when an adjacent enemy shifts away from the githzerai cenobite; at-will) The cenobite shifts to remain adjacent to the enemy. The cenobite cannot use this power if the enemy shifts using a movement mode the cenobite does not possess. Iron Mind (immediate interrupt, when the githzerai cenobite would be hit by an attack; encounter) The githzerai cenobite gains a +2 bonus to all defenses until the end of its next turn. Trace Chance (standard; recharge ⚅ ) Ranged 5; no attack roll required; the next melee attack made against the target gains a +5 power bonus to the attack roll and, if it hits, it is automatically a critical hit. Alignment Unaligned Languages Common, Deep Speech Skills Acrobatics +15, Athletics +9, Insight +13 Str 15 (+7) Dex 17 (+8) Wis 16 (+8) Con 12 (+6) Int 10 (+5) Cha 11 (+5)
M a rc h 2 0 0 9
|
D u n g e o n 16 4
83
Haven of the Bitter Glass
A5: Wall Breach Encounter Level 14 (4,550 XP)
Setup 4 githyanki warriors (W) 10 githyanki myrmidons (Y) 10 githzerai cenobites (C) The githyanki have breached the wall on the east side of the tower. Githzerai are trying to prevent their entry, but are being pushed backward and will fall unless the PCs intervene. Read the following aloud: Surviving githyanki have managed to break through a wall on the east side of the fortress. Githzerai defenders are trying to hold them back, but one falls even as you’re watching. 4 Githyanki Warriors (W)
Level 12 Soldier
Medium natural humanoid XP 700 each Initiative +13 Senses Perception +12 HP 118; Bloodied 59 AC 28; Fortitude 25, Reflex 23, Will 22 Saving Throws +2 against charm effects Speed 5; see also telekinetic leap m Silver Greatsword (standard; at-will) ✦ Psychic, Weapon +17 vs. AC; 1d10 + 5 damage plus 1d6 psychic damage, plus an extra 3d6 psychic damage if the target is immobilized. R Telekinetic Grasp (standard; sustain minor; encounter) Ranged 5; Medium or smaller target; +15 vs. Fortitude; the target is immobilized (save ends). R Telekinetic Leap (move; encounter) Ranged 10; the githyanki mindslicer or an ally within range can fly up to 5 squares. Alignment Evil Languages Common, Deep Speech Skills History +9, Insight +12 Str 21 (+11) Dex 17 (+9) Wis 12 (+7) Con 14 (+8) Int 12 (+7) Cha 13 (+7) Equipment plate armor, silver greatsword
10 Githyanki Myrmidons (Y)
Level 12 Minion
Medium natural humanoid XP 175 each Initiative +12 Senses Perception +9 HP 1; a missed attack never damages a minion AC 28; Fortitude 24, Reflex 23, Will 24 Speed 5 m Silver Short Sword (standard; at-will) ✦ Psychic, Weapon +19 vs. AC; 7 damage, plus an extra 5 psychic damage if the target is immobilized. R Telekinetic Grasp (standard; encounter) Ranged 5; Medium or smaller target; +15 vs. Fortitude; the target is immobilized (save ends). Alignment Chaotic evil Languages Common, Deep Speech Str 16 (+9) Dex 14 (+8) Wis 16 (+9) Con 12 (+7) Int 12 (+7) Cha 10 (+6) Equipment chainmail, silver short sword
has been dropped. In that case, dust reduces visibility to 2 squares. Buildings: The wall of Akma’ad rises 30 feet at this point. One of the massive doors has been destroyed. Rubble: This area is littered with dead bodies. If the landslide from encounter A3 has been triggered, it is also covered with rubble, making every square difficult terrain.
Tactics This combat should be described as a brutal backand-forth between the githzerai and the githyanki. The githyanki are trying to establish a beachhead within the fortress. To do so, they are concentrating their attacks on a handful of githzerai every round, taking them down before they move on to the next targets. If the warriors are slain, the remaining shock troopers become much less organized. Two cenobites fall each round. All the githzerai are badly injured, while the githyanki are relatively fresh thanks to their superior numbers. Similar to encounter A4, the cenobites don’t play much of a factor here. Assume that as a unit, they deal 10 points of damage to a nearby warrior at the end of each round. If you’d like them to play a more substantial role in the encounter, refer to the statistics on page 83.
Features of the Area Illumination: This encounter takes place in bright sunlight unless landslide from encounter A3
M a rc h 2 0 0 9
|
D u n g e o n 16 4
84
Haven of the Bitter Glass
Negotiating with Odos Roleplaying Encounter
Encounter Level 13
Running this Encounter The adventurers have the potential to interact with Odos and both earn his trust and gain some valuable information in the process. As stated on page 48, the githzerai leader is not especially forthcoming. Odos can reveal much about the strength of his character. You should feel free to communicate to the players that he cares a great deal about his people, and that only his tremendous inner strength is keeping him from total despair. While running this encounter, each piece of information Odos has to share is associated with a skill, a DC, and sometimes another, related condition. This encounter is not a skill challenge. Feel free to award the characters the pieces of information (or not) based solely on how they roleplay this encounter and the questions they ask. Alternatively, feel free to require the recommended skill checks, providing bonuses as indicated depending on the PCs’ behavior. The skills, DCs, and possible bonuses are simply tools to guide the encounter.
Check Modifiers The adventurers gain bonuses while speaking with Odos by mentioning their exploits against the githyanki or impressing the githzerai leader with their sincere desire to help. The following examples grant the heroes the indicated bonus on skill checks made during this roleplaying encounter with Odos.
Event
Bonus
The characters uncover and prove that Gallia is possessed by a githyanki spy The characters mention that they were responsible for the defeat of General Zithiruun The characters mention the defeat of githyanki working for Sarshan The characters make an offer to escort Odos and his survivors to Sayre
+1 +1 +1 +1
What Odos Knows Odos can tell the adventurers several pieces of important information. Feel free to reward good roleplaying without requiring a skill check if you’d like. Insight (DC 21): Odos is concerned greatly about his people and their future. He worries that Sayre is only a temporary solution, and doesn’t know if there’s anyone he or the githzerai can trust other than themselves. Odos is a good and just leader, and his taciturn nature is a reflection of the hardships his race has endured, exacerbated by the recent attacks. Diplomacy (DC 23): The githyanki attacked without warning, and they sent strike teams to the personal chambers of all the githzerai leaders, as if they knew exactly who to attack and where they were staying. He’s convinced someone fed them information on the layout of Akma’ad, as well as the names of the leaders present. He was spared only because he stepped outside for a walk and heard the team of assassins in his room on his way back. He surprised the squad of three and defeated them single-handedly. Insight (DC 18): Attacks of this sort have been happening to githzerai enclaves and monasteries all over the mortal realm. Most have fled to a refuge in Sayre, a nearby city. Odos wants to take his people there now. Perception (DC 23): One of the githyanki assassins in his room had a small device that could be held in her hand. She was speaking into this object when he surprised
the assassins in his room. It was green and looked reflective. If the characters have already revealed Gallia as a spy, Odos can identify the device she carries as identical to the one used by the githyanki who tried to assassinate him. If Gallia has not yet been identified as a spy, a character who makes a successful DC23 Insight check when Odos reveals this information notices Gallia pay special attention and attempt to feign indifference. The githyanki possessing her wants to make sure none of these devices falls into the hands of their enemies. Diplomacy (DC 21): (only available after one other success). Odos and the other githzerai had planned this meeting at Akma’ad to discuss whether or not to accept an invitation in Sayre to meet with a newly formed coalition of leaders from other regions of the world concerned with the extent of the githyanki invasion. Each comes from a homeland ravaged by the githyanki, and they’re all looking for aid and support from their regions. Odos is bitter that the “humans” (he has a tendency to call all non-githzerai and non-githyanki “humans”) sound divided over political issues when there’s so much at stake. He was against going to the meeting, but now feels that going to Sayre is the only choice for his people.
Development As a result of this interaction, the characters should want to escort the githzerai to Sayre. The adventurers should also, hopefully, view Odos as an important ally. He’s the last surviving githzerai elder on the mortal realm, and so all the githzerai of this world follow his lead in the coming negotiations and conflicts.
M a rc h 2 0 0 9
|
D u n g e o n 16 4
85
Haven of the Bitter Glass
S1: Ambush Encounter Level 12 (3,800 XP)
Setup Brann’ot, githyanki gish (B) 2 githyanki warriors (W)
Features of the Area
The githzerai camp is quiet tonight. Even the wounded seem to have found some peace in the wilderness. Suddenly, the peace is shattered as a githyanki emerges straight out of the ground at your feet, a silvery longsword poised to strike.
Illumination: Brann’ot attacks in the dim light of twilight or early dawn, when most all the exhausted travelers have fallen asleep. Rough Ground: Assume that if the PCs aren’t aboard an airship, the site of the ambush Brann’ot tries to draw the PCs into is riddled with areas of difficult terrain at inopportune places. He wants to limit the characters’ mobility while capitalizing on his own.
Tactics
This ambush can occur at any point during the trip to Sayre, but is most likely to occur at night. Brann’ot is a gish assassin who singlehandedly slew several of the githzerai leaders at the beginning of the battle. Hounded through the fortress by furious githzerai guards who eventually discovered him, he was forced to retreat from injuries before the PCs arrived. Alongside two githyanki warriors he ran across, he now shadows the retreating githzerai through the wilderness. Brann’ot is looking for his opportunity to assassinate Odos and eliminate the troublesome adventurers. 2 Githyanki Warriors (W)
Read the folliowing aloud:
Level 12 Soldier
Medium natural humanoid XP 700 each Initiative +13 Senses Perception +12 HP 118; Bloodied 59 AC 28; Fortitude 25, Reflex 23, Will 22 Saving Throws +2 against charm effects Speed 5; see also telekinetic leap m Silver Greatsword (standard; at-will) ✦ Psychic, Weapon +17 vs. AC; 1d10 + 5 damage plus 1d6 psychic damage, plus an extra 3d6 psychic damage if the target is immobilized. R Telekinetic Grasp (standard; sustain minor; encounter) Ranged 5; Medium or smaller target; +15 vs. Fortitude; the target is immobilized (save ends). R Telekinetic Leap (move; encounter) Ranged 10; the githyanki mindslicer or an ally within range can fly up to 5 squares. Alignment Evil Languages Common, Deep Speech Skills History +9, Insight +12 Str 21 (+11) Dex 17 (+9) Wis 12 (+7) Con 14 (+8) Int 12 (+7) Cha 13 (+7) Equipment plate armor, silver greatsword
Brann’ot tries to catch one or two PCs alone on one of the lower decks of the ship, if the assault happens aboard the Conqueror. If on land, Brann’ot waits until nightfall to strike, hoping to catch one or more of the PCs away from the githzerai and other allies. Brann’ot attacks and then flees a short distance, hoping to draw the PCs into an ambush set by his allies (the githyanki warriors). Brann’ot darts in and out of combat, using astral stride to move through otherwise impassable obstacles, and mixing double attacks with force bolts. The warriors use telekinetic grasp to slow the approach of the PCs in the first two rounds, taking advantage of an immobilized foe if possible with their silver greatswords. If the fight lasts for more than 5 rounds, allow Odos a DC 28 Perception check (his bonus is +20) to hear the combat. If successful, he comes running, arriving 2 rounds later at the beginning of round 7. Odos can make the same check at the beginning of each round until he hears the battle or the fight is over. Other githzerai aren’t aware of the battle. If the characters sound a general alarm, it still takes Odos until round 5 to react as he calms his people. For their part, the exhausted githzerai form up defensively around their numerous wounded, and wait for an enemy to show itself.
Brann’ot, Githyanki Gish (B)
Level 15 Elite Skirmisher
Medium natural humanoid XP 2,400 Initiative +13 Senses Perception +14 HP 226; Bloodied 113 AC 31; Fortitude 28, Reflex 29, Will 29 Saving Throws +2 (+4 vs charm effects) Speed 5; see also astral stride Action Points 1 m Silver Longsword (standard; at-will) ✦ Psychic, Weapon +20 vs. AC; 1d8 + 3 damage plus 1d8 psychic damage. M Double Attack (standard; at-will) ✦ Psychic, Weapon The githyanki gish makes two silver longsword attacks. R Force Bolt (standard; recharge 6 ) ✦ Force Ranged 10; +18 vs. Reflex; 3d6 + 4 force damage. R Storm of Stars (standard; encounter) ✦ Fire The githyanki gish makes four attacks, no more than two of them against a single target: ranged 5; +20 vs. AC; 2d8 + 4 fire damage. Astral Stride (move; at-will) ✦ Teleportation The githyanki gish teleports 6 squares and gains the insubstantial and phasing qualities until the start of its next turn. Alignment Evil Languages Common, Deep Speech, Draconic Skills Arcana +16, History +13, Insight +14 Str 16 (+10) Dex 14 (+9) Wis 14 (+9) Con 17 (+10) Int 19 (+11) Cha 17 (+10) Equipment chainmail, silver longsword
M a rc h 2 0 0 9
|
D u n g e o n 16 4
86
Haven of the Bitter Glass
Reconnecting with Amyria Roleplaying Encounter
Encounter Level 12
Encounter Details The PCs might be surprised and pleased to see Amyria, whom they haven’t seen since they parted from her in Overlook. Amyria is overjoyed to see the characters. In this encounter, establish the strength of Amyria’s character, her resolve to save the region from the githyanki attacks, and her commitment and faith in the characters. Amyria is suspicious of a great deal. She knows of the githyanki’s ability to possess people and use them as puppets and spies. But she trusts the PCs implicitly for reasons she can’t quite communicate. She is clearly eager to see them again and share her knowledge. That said, the deva is tired and worried, and seems to be carrying a great burden on her shoulders. In this encounter, the adventurers have the opportunity to reconnect with Amyria and gain some information in the process. There are no skill checks in this encounter. Amyria’s purpose in this encounter is to strengthen her bond with the adventurers and secure them as allies in the tests to come. She does not dismiss the three githzerai leaders when she speaks with the characters. If the PCs ask Aziff, Gal’ott, and Odos to leave, Amyria will ask that they be allowed to hear what she has to say. Only if the characters insist will she grudgingly ask the other NPCs to be sent away.
What Amyria Knows ✦ She has spent a great deal of time in the weeks since she parted with the adventurers traveling outside Elsir Vale, seeking out the extent of the githyanki invasion. In the process, she has established connections in most of the cities nearby. She has also learned that githyanki attacks have come at the worst times for the defenses of every region. Only Elsir Vale has been spared—at least thus far—thanks to the PCs’ actions in defeating General Zithiruun. She knows it is only a matter of time until the githyanki try again. ✦ Amyria has an agent in the household of Lord Torrance and is suspicious of his connection (as well as that of other prominent citizens) to Lord Telicanthus. The githyanki, whom she went out of her way to meet at a social event the week before, seems genuine, but a githyanki operating so openly just seems wrong to Amyria. A DC 18 Insight check also reveals that Amyria is ashamed of her feelings about Telicanthus. She wants to believe that not all githyanki are evil ravagers intent on conquest, but she is suspicious nonetheless. She is too quick to deflect questions about Telicanthus, his motives, and his possible operations. Her own self doubt gets in the way of her instincts about the githyanki, which is why she cautions the githzerai of acting too hastily. ✦ Amyria learned that two leaders in other nearby cities are seeking out allies. She feels that forming a more concrete alliance—she calls this group the Coalition—between all the besieged communities, city-states, and regions will help them all, so she has been spending a great deal of time fostering this idea. She has been marginally successful in putting together the war council, which holds its first meeting in Sayre in the morning. But Amyria herself
has little more than a voice in the proceedings. She has no home community and represents only herself and her god, Bahamut. She is being allowed in the proceedings because she organized the event and chose Sayre as the site of the meeting. She can tell the adventurers the names of the members of the Coalition (see page 63 for their descriptions). ✦ Amyria chose for the council to meet in Sayre because, like Odos, who grunts and nods when she mentions this, she suspects that the githyanki have some means of communication that surpasses any sort of magic that she is aware of. They seem able to react almost instantaneously to threats that marshal to meet them, and they strike when their enemies are at their most vulnerable. Only regions such as Elsir Vale (on a state of perpetual heightened alert), are having luck defending against the attacks. She also tells the PCs that she tried to get to the island nation of Nefelus, off the distant coast, but there’s some sort of blockade preventing any ships from sailing there. The knowledge of magic possessed by the sages of Nefelus is said to be nearly unsurpassed, but the University of Sayre is a worthy rival. She hopes to convince the war council that they should ask the scholars of the university to turn all their efforts toward uncovering the nature of the githyanki’s communication network. ✦ Finally, Amyria has one other reason for coming to Sayre. She had a dream recently that had the weight of significance behind it. She won’t use words like “prophetic,” but when she recounts the dream, her eyes grow distant and her voice soft as she relates what she saw.
M a rc h 2 0 0 9
|
D u n g e o n 16 4
87
Haven of the Bitter Glass
If the PCs ask Amyria about her dream, read the following aloud. “In my dream I was standing in the midst of raw elements. Waves crashed around me and fires flared, and I was looking down through clouds onto a dark blue night’s sky. Stretching across the sky was a giant spider’s web that was woven between planes. It was silver and sparkled with stars, and at the end of each web line was a githyanki. As each githyanki spoke, the web sparkled, and a fat spider in the middle listened to everything that anyone said. The spider was beautiful, but you could tell it was evil, just like the people talking through it. It scuttled around, fixing frayed lines and tossing out new lines to new people. Most were githyanki, but some were not. One of the lines went to a githzerai.” She looks troubled. “I looked harder at the spider, and I knew it was here in Sayre. I could see the city around it. So I came here. I think someone in Sayre is helping the githyanki, but we don’t know for sure who it is, although we have our suspicions. And we don’t have an easy answer about what to do about it.” If the three githzerai leaders are still present, Gal’ott speaks up: “Of course we do. We find your spider. We find him and kill him. We kill him and return to our homes.” To which Amyria replies: “You think that’s going to solve the problem, Gal’ott? We know of whom you speak. And he’s politically connected to everyone who could help the githzerai! Kill him and get executed as murderers and traitors. I say we need to prove what he’s up to, and then discredit him. It’s the only way to help the githzerai.”
At this point, the PCs can step in and help Amyria persuade the brash githzerai to show some restraint with a successful DC 21 Diplomacy or Intimidate check. If successful, Gal’ott bows his head and says: “I will comply with the majority. For one week. After that time, my people will take matters into their own hands.” He then stands, nods to Odos and Azitt, and leaves. Failure, however, results in Gal’ott standing suddenly, sending his chair toppling to the floor. His voice shaking, he says: “You want to help us? You aren’t even of our race! The guards here treat us as thieves, and even the beggars attack us! This is no fit place for a githzerai. We should abandon this plane and leave the humans to their fate. We’ll simply clean up when they’re done.” Allow good roleplaying to influence this interaction with Amyria and the githzerai. If one or more players are particularly eloquent or sound convincing in their promises to do what they can to aid the githzerai, you might consider foregoing skill checks entirely.
Development The rest of the githzerai excuse themselves shortly after Gal’ott leaves to speak with their people. When gone, Amyria also stands to leave and rest. She thanks the characters, but makes it clear to the PCs that there is a divide in the githzerai community, and that she has been unable to heal the rift. She asks for their continued help in convincing Odos that the githzerai should stay in Sayre long enough to solve the riddle of her dream, and that they should expose Telicanthus publicly instead of murdering him without proof. She also plans to introduce Odos as a member of her Coalition, and she asks the PCs to attend the meeting
Amyria
Level 13 Elite Soldier (Leader)
Medium immortal humanoid, deva XP 1,600 Initiative +15 Senses Perception +13 Aura of Recovery aura 2; allies that start their turn in Amyria’s aura gain a +1 bonus to all saves until the start of their next turn. HP 254; Bloodied 127 Resist necrotic 11, radiant 11 AC 29; Fortitude 23, Reflex 25, Will 28; +1 to all defenses against bloodied enemies Saving Throws +2 Speed 8 Action Points 1 m Longsword (standard; at-will) ✦ Radiant, Weapon +20 vs. AC; 1d8 + 7 damage, and the target is marked until the end of Amyria’s next turn. While so marked, if the target doesn’t attack Amyria, the target takes 7 radiant damage. M Double Attack (standard; at-will) ✦ Radiant, Weapon Amyria makes two longsword attacks. M Crusader’s Assault (standard; requires longsword; at-will) ✦ Radiant, Weapon +20 vs. AC; 1d8 + 7 damage plus 1d8 radiant damage, and one of Amyria’s allies within 10 squares can make a basic attack as a free action against the same target. R Bahamut’s Accusing Eye (standard; at-will) ✦ Cold, Radiant Ranged 10; +18 vs. Reflex; 2d8 + 7 cold and radiant damage, and ongoing 5 cold and radiant damage and the target is slowed (save ends both). Memory of a Thousand Lifetimes (free, when the Amyria makes an attack roll, a skill check, or an ability check and dislikes the result; encounter) Amyria adds 1d6 to the triggering roll. Alignment Lawful good Languages Common, Draconic, Supernal Skills Diplomacy +14, Religion +17 Str 11 (+6) Dex 13 (+7) Wis 24 (+13) Con 15 (+8) Int 19 (+10) Cha 17 (+9)
as her guests. She makes it clear to them that she will be able to speak and hopefully influence the events of the meeting, but that she will not have a vote.
M a rc h 2 0 0 9
|
D u n g e o n 16 4
88
Haven of the Bitter Glass
SC1: The Debate Encounter Level 13 (4,000 XP)
Setup Amyria, Gal’ott, Azitt, Chend, and even Gallia (if she is still around) will chime in with their opinions and their own arguments for or against what the PCs are saying. Refer to the descriptions of these NPCs and familiarize yourself with their personalities and motivations before beginning the skill challenge. The goal for the PCs here is to convince Odos to come to the Coalition meeting and to not order an assassination attempt on Telicanthus. The Debate Skill Challenge
Level 13 XP 4,000
“I see no reason why the githzerai should not just leave the mortals to their own devices, and perhaps attack the githyanki once they are weakened from your conquest. I fail to see how you can convince me otherwise, but I am willing to listen to arguments.” Complexity 3 (requires 8 successes before 3 failures). Primary Skills Bluff, Diplomacy, History, Insight, Intimidation, Religion, Streetwise Victory The party convinces Odos to investigate Telicanthus instead of just leaving the mortal plane after having him assassinated. Defeat The party is unable to convince Odos to change his opinion. He makes plans to leave, and gives instructions to his subordinates that Telicanthus should be slain whether he is guilty or not. Bluff DC 22 A successful check counts as a success on the skill challenge. The PC paints a vivid picture of the hatred toward githzerai that might occur if Telicanthus is assassinated, or how important the githzerai are to the war cause, using just the right amount of exaggeration.
Diplomacy DC 22 A successful check counts as a success on the skill challenge. The PC stresses how much stronger every realm will be if they stand united against the githyanki threat. History DC 26 A successful check counts as a success on the skill challenge. Recalling the details of past warfare between the githyanki and githzerai, the PC inflames Odos’s anger and reminds him how important it is to stop his ancient foe. History can also be used to remind Odos how laws tend to punish the guilty, and that Telicanthus will likely be publicly humiliated if exposed. Insight DC 22 A success on this check does not count as a success on the skill challenge, but does grant a +2 bonus on any other skill checks made in the same round. Failure imposes a –2 penalty on any other skill rolls in the same round. Only one insight check can be attempted per round. Noticing the listeners’ subtle reactions, the group tailors their responses to be more convincing. Intimidation DC 26 A successful check counts as a success on the skill challenge. It is difficult to intimidate Odos, but he might be impressed by the PC’s strength and commitment as he tries to convert others to the cause of the war. Religion DC 22 A successful check counts as a success on the skill challenge. The PC describes how a githyanki victory could spell doom for the githzerai’s introspective path of enlightenment, and quotes passages that mention bringing order out of chaos. Streetwise DC 22 A successful check counts as a success on the skill challenge. The PC reminds Odos that murdering a beloved figure often causes great hatred and racism against the murderers, and would paint a false image of the githzerai.
Development If the PCs succeed in convincing Odos, he quiets the fractious githzerai and unites them behind his will. He agrees to accompany the PCs to meet Amyria’s Coalition, and the PCs gain a +2 bonus to all checks that target Odos during The Coalition skill challenge (see page 100). Odos decides that Telicanthus should be investigated before taking more extreme measures. In the interim, Odos wants to know how Telicanthus is connected to this web that Amyria foresaw. He asks if any of the PCs know how to cast the ritual Consult Mystic Sages. If so, Odos asks them to perform the ritual to find out how Telicanthus is connected to Amyria’s dream. If none of the PCs currently possesses the ritual, Odos gives them a ritual scroll and asks them to use it. If none of the PCs possesses the Ritual Casting feat, Odos orders Chend to do so. The ritual results in a brief verse instead of a simple answer. Read the writing on the wall You are not far from a place where knowledge turns to greed Beneath the spice house lurks the profane And knowledge lies trapped behind the guardian Odos asks the PCs to investigate. A DC 21 Streetwise check reveals that while a number of spice merchants have shops in Sayre, only one location is nearby: a ruined warehouse that held rare spices, years ago. This is the spice house referred to in the divination. The same check can be made during a visit to any spice store in the city to reveal that the Ridolfi family used to have a warehouse near Lowbridge, in Riverdown. If the PCs fail this check, they can still learn this information the hard way in encounter P1. Ambush in the Plaza (page 90).
M a rc h 2 0 0 9
|
D u n g e o n 16 4
89
Haven of the Bitter Glass
P1: Ambush in the Plaza Encounter Level 14 (5,200 XP)
Setup 4 Laughing Shadow streetfighters (F) 10 Laughing Shadow scrabblers (S) Telicanthus has gotten word to his ally, the Filth King, that additional githzerai have come to town, and they need to be slain or harassed. A vindictive and cruel servant of Tiamat, the Filth King decides to take matters in his own hands. Telicanthus long ago recruited the services of the Filth King when he planted members of the Laughing Shadow mercenary outfit among the King’s beggars. With the arrival of Odos, Telicanthus sent word to the Filth King to step up efforts to kill the githzerai and their allies. The Filth King has taken things one step further by setting up an ambush to catch and kill the next group to emerge from Kark’din, the githzerai sanctuary. Unfortunately, he didn’t tell his troops to target only githzerai, and the PCs are inadvertent targets. As the PCs leave the githzerai sanctuary and enter the Plaza of Vision, read:
4 Laughing Shadow Streetfighters (F)
Level 13 Soldier
Medium natural humanoid, human XP 800 each Initiative +12 Senses Perception +9 HP 128; Bloodied 64 AC 29; Fortitude 26, Reflex 25, Will 24 Speed 6 m Katar (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon +20 vs. AC; 2d6 + 6 damage (crit 18 + 1d6), and the target is slowed until the end of the streetfighter’s next turn. R Shuriken (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon Ranged 6/12; +19 vs. AC; 2d4 + 4 damage. M Cheap Shot (immediate interrupt; usable when a slowed target leaves an adjacent square; requires katar; at-will) ✦ Weapon +20 vs. AC; 2d6 + 6 damage, and the target’s movement ends. C Streetfighter Flourish (standard; requires katar; recharge 5 6) Close burst 1; targets enemies; +19 vs. AC; 2d6 + 6 damage, and the target is slowed (save ends). Alignment Evil Languages Common, Draconic Skills Bluff+13, Intimidate +13, Stealth +15 Str 21 (+11) Dex 19 (+10) Wis 17 (+9) Con 16 (+9) Int 11 (+6) Cha 10 (+8) Equipment chainmail, katar, 10 shuriken, beggar’s garb
10 Laughing Shadow Scrabblers (S)
Level 13 Minion
Medium natural humanoid, human XP 200 each Initiative +12 Senses Perception +9 HP 1; a missed attack never damages a minion AC 27; Fortitude 25, Reflex 27, Will 24 Speed 6 m Short Sword (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon +18 vs. AC; 8 damage, and the scrabbler can shift 2 squares, ignoring difficult terrain. R Shuriken (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon Ranged 6/12; +18 vs. AC; 7 damage. Combat Advantage The scrabbler deals an extra 5 damage against any target it has combat advantage against. Alignment Evil Languages Common Skills Bluff+10, Stealth +15 Str 19 (+10) Dex 18 (+10) Wis 16 (+9) Con 14 (+8) Int 10 (+6) Cha 8 (+5) Equipment chainmail, short sword, 10 shuriken, beggar’s garb
Tactics The Laughing Shadows reveal themselves when the PCs are roughly in the middle of the square, closing in from every side. The scrabblers enter the plaza from alleys, as do three of the four streetfighters. The last streetfighter hides next to the dry fountain. He holds a magic gem provided by the Filth King. See “Features of the Area” for details.
As you leave the building and move into the plaza, you notice that there’s movement at the mouths of the alleys around you. Ragged beggars emerge from the shadows brandishing bright, new weapons—and wearing chainmail! The attackers appear well fed, despite the rags and dirt that cover them, and more than proficient with the weapons they’re wielding.
M a rc h 2 0 0 9
|
D u n g e o n 16 4
90
Haven of the Bitter Glass
Features of the Area Illumination: This encounter can take place during the day or night. If during the day, the area is well lit by diffuse sunlight, with shadows (dim light) in the alleys. If at night, the plaza is in shadow (dim light), and the alleys are shrouded in darkness. Rubble: The rubble in the plaza qualifies as difficult terrain. Fountain: The fountain is dry and cracked after decades of disuse. The lip of the empty water bowl rises 10 feet (2 squares) off the ground; rising from the bowl is a weathered statue of an ancient sage gazing up toward the stars. Climbing the fountain requires a DC 16 Athletics check, and it’s large enough to provide cover or superior cover depending on positioning. Alleys: There are seven alleys opening into the Plaza of Vision, each narrow and dark. Buildings: The buildings range from two to six stories (4 to 12 squares) in height. Climbing the walls requires a DC 16 Athletics check. Glowing Gem: The gem held aloft by one of the streetfighters is imbued with a temporary magical effect—a blessing of Tiamat—that lasts for the duration of the encounter. At the end of each of the characters’ turns, he or she slides 1 square closer to the square the gem is in. The Laughing Shadows are immune to this effect. Even if the streetfighter holding the gem is slain, the magic persists. Only smashing the gem (defenses 20; 20 hp) ends the slide effect.
M a rc h 2 0 0 9
|
D u n g e o n 16 4
91
Haven of the Bitter Glass
T2: The Entrance Encounter Level 12 (3,800 XP)
Setup Gluttonous cube (G) 2 Laughing Shadow streetfighters (F) 3 Laughing Shadow scrabblers (S) This encounter does not occur if the beggars have no warning that the PCs are coming. If the PCs have avoided setting off any alarms, boards criss-cross the room 10 feet above the ground, allowing characters to descend the rope ladder and reach the door safely. The five scrabblers who would be defending here are found inside encounter T5: Covet House Temple instead. The Filth King, the priest of Tiamat who leads Sayre’s beggars, has left a hidden surprise in this room for anyone who would try to invade. A stronger than normal gelatinous cube has been placed on the floor beneath the trap door in the ceiling that leads down into this room. The cube has learned to remain perfectly still beneath the rope ladder, waiting for unsuspecting creatures to descend directly into its clutches. If the alarm has been given and the beggars expect trouble, the boards criss-crossing the room 10 feet above the floor have been removed, and five beggars are hiding on rag-covered platforms that are affixed to the walls. They hold their attacks until they are discovered or the PCs are engaged with the cube. Crossing the room without the boards is challenging even if the PCs discover the cube and don’t descend to the floor. They must traverse the platforms attached to the walls with DC 10 or DC 20 Athletics checks (10 for the adjacent platform, 20 for those with a 5-foot gap between them). Failure means the
unlucky PC falls to the floor (provided the character also fails her saving throw), takes 2d10 points of damage, and lands prone. Read the following aloud if the alarm has not been sounded. Looking down from the trapdoor, you see a filthy rope ladder that dangles almost all the way to floor, stopping 10 feet above the ground. The room beneath you is otherwise mostly empty. Several platforms jut from the walls—remains of the floors of this multi-story building that appear to have been reinforced. Each platform is covered in piles of rags, the nearest of which is 5 feet below you and attached to the north wall. The remaining platforms are each 5 feet across and descend in regular intervals along the walls of the room to either side. Across the room to the south is another door, but it’s strangely 10 feet above the ground floor, above another platform attached to the south wall. If the alarm was sounded, the PCs can make Perception checks to notice the Laughing Shadows hiding in piles of rags on five of the platforms. Have the attackers make a Stealth check with a +5 bonus (for a total bonus of +20). If the PCs spot them, read the following:
Gluttonous Cube (G)
Level 13 Elite Brute
Large natural beast (blind, ooze) XP 1,600 Initiative +9 Senses Perception +10; tremorsense 10 HP 324; Bloodied 162 AC 27; Fortitude 26, Reflex 23, Will 24 Immune gaze; Resist 15 acid Saving Throws +2 Speed 4, see also engulf Action Points 1 m Slam (standard; at-will) +15 vs. Fortitude; 2d6 + 5 damage, and the target is immobilized (save ends). Engulf (standard; at-will) ✦ Acid The gluttonous cube attacks one or two Medium or smaller targets; +14 vs. Reflex (automatically hits an immobilized creature). On a hit, the target is grabbed and pulled into the cube’s space; the target is dazed and takes ongoing 15 acid damage until it escapes the grab. A creature that escapes the grab shifts to a square of its choosing adjacent to the cube. The cube can move normally while creatures are engulfed within it. Translucent A gluttonous cube is invisible until seen (Perception DC 29) or until it attacks. Creatures that fail to notice the gluttonous cube might walk into it, automatically becoming engulfed. Alignment Unaligned Languages — Skills Stealth +14 Str 18 (+10) Dex 17 (+9) Wis 18 (+10) Con 22 (+12) Int 1 (+1) Cha 1 (+1)
Skulking on some of the platforms are several more beggars like those from the plaza. Hiding in the piles of rags, they throw off their disguises and rise to attack when they realize they’ve been discovered! If undiscovered, the Laughing Shadows get a surprise round to attack the PCs.
M a rc h 2 0 0 9
|
D u n g e o n 16 4
92
Haven of the Bitter Glass
2 Laughing Shadow Streetfighters (F)
Level 13 Soldier
Medium natural humanoid, human XP 800 each Initiative +12 Senses Perception +9 HP 128; Bloodied 64 AC 29; Fortitude 26, Reflex 25, Will 24 Speed 6 m Katar (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon +20 vs. AC; 2d6 + 6 damage (crit 18 + 1d6), and the target is slowed until the end of the streetfighter’s next turn. R Shuriken (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon Ranged 6/12; +19 vs. AC; 2d4 + 4 damage. M Cheap Shot (immediate interrupt; usable when a slowed target leaves an adjacent square; requires katar; at-will) ✦ Weapon +20 vs. AC; 2d6 + 6 damage, and the target’s movement ends. C Streetfighter Flourish (standard; requires katar; recharge 5 6) Close burst 1; targets enemies; +19 vs. AC; 2d6 + 6 damage, and the target is slowed (save ends). Alignment Evil Languages Common, Draconic Skills Bluff+13, Intimidate +13, Stealth +15 Str 21 (+11) Dex 19 (+10) Wis 17 (+9) Con 16 (+9) Int 11 (+6) Cha 10 (+8) Equipment chainmail, katar, 10 shuriken, beggar’s garb
3 Laughing Shadow Scrabblers (S) Level 13 Minion
Medium natural humanoid, human XP 200 each Initiative +12 Senses Perception +9 HP 1; a missed attack never damages a minion AC 27; Fortitude 25, Reflex 27, Will 24 Speed 6 m Short Sword (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon +18 vs. AC; 8 damage, and the scrabbler can shift 2 squares, ignoring difficult terrain. R Shuriken (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon Ranged 6/12; +18 vs. AC; 7 damage. Combat Advantage The scrabbler deals an extra 5 damage against any target it has combat advantage against. Alignment Evil Languages Common Skills Bluff+10, Stealth +15 Str 19 (+10) Dex 18 (+10) Wis 16 (+9) Con 14 (+8) Int 10 (+6) Cha 8 (+5) Equipment chainmail, short sword, 10 shuriken, beggar’s garb
Tactics In the event that the alarm was sounded, the Laughing Shadows’ plan is simple: Wait for the intruders to descend to the floor, and once they’re engaged with the cube, attack with their shuriken. If a PC leaps to a platform adjacent to a Laughing Shadow, the mercenary attempts an Athletics check (+11 for streetfighters, +10 for scabblers) to leap to that platform and bull rush (+11 for streetfighters, +10 for scrabblers) the character off to the floor below. A successful Athletics check but a failed bull rush attempt by a Laughing Shadow or PC means the attacker is pushed back onto his platform. Running jumps are not possible in this room. The cube waits until a creature has descended to the floor, one way or the other, before attacking. If no one is on the floor, the cube positions itself directly beneath a battle, hoping someone will fall on top of it. Any creature that falls onto the cube—whether adventurer or Laughing Shadow—is automatically engulfed. The cube doesn’t distinguish between PCs or Laughing Shadows, and attacks the most convenient target each round. Unknown to them, the Laughing Shadows have no easy way to escape, as the Filth King has locked the door behind them. They might discover this the hard way (see Development).
Walls: Climbing the walls requires a DC 20 Athletics check. This is the only way to get off the floor and to the lowest platform 10 feet up, just in front of the door to area T3.
Development If all but one of the Laughing Shadows is killed, the survivor tries to flee to the door. There, he discovers that the door is locked and turns to fight to the death, cursing the Filth King all the while. The Laughing Shadows pride themselves on their discipline, and will not willingly surrender.
Features of the Area Illumination: Dim light is provided by a lantern on a platform attached to the south wall if the alarm has not been sounded. Otherwise, the room is dark. Exit Door: The Filth King has locked this wooden door behind the scrabblers in this room. It requires a DC 23 Thievery check to open. It leads to the underground street (area T3).
M a rc h 2 0 0 9
|
D u n g e o n 16 4
93
Haven of the Bitter Glass
T5: Covet House Temple Encounter Level 14 or 15 (5,600 XP)
Setup The Filth King (K) Laughing Shadow groveler (G) 2 Laughing Shadow streetfighters (F) 6 Laughing Shadow scrabblers (S) The Filth King is the nominal leader of the beggars in Sayre. More of a spiritual leader than a temporal one, he works to keep his flock safe and regularly cuts deals with locals to avoid their property or harass their competition. The Filth King was hired by Telicanthus some time ago to harass the githzerai population of the city. Telicanthus doesn’t know that the Filth King recognized him (see Development below). The githyanki also supplemented the Filth King’s beggars with members of the Laughing Shadows mercenaries.
Read the following if the beggars are not yet aware of the PCs: You open the doors into an old temple. You can tell it was once sacred to Ioun, but those days are long past. The pews are filled with beggars, all with their backs to you, and a filthy and bedraggled priest across the room stands before an altar. Read the following if the beggars expect the PCs: You open the doors into an old temple. You can tell it was once sacred to Ioun, but those days are long past. The pews are filled with beggars, all facing you, and a filthy and bedraggled priest across the room stands before an altar. “Get them!” he hisses. 6 Laughing Shadow Scrabblers (S) Level 13 Minion
Medium natural humanoid, human XP 200 each Initiative +12 Senses Perception +9 HP 1; a missed attack never damages a minion AC 27; Fortitude 25, Reflex 27, Will 24 Speed 6 m Short Sword (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon +18 vs. AC; 8 damage, and the scrabbler can shift 2 squares, ignoring difficult terrain. R Shuriken (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon Ranged 6/12; +18 vs. AC; 7 damage. Combat Advantage The scrabbler deals an extra 5 damage against any target it has combat advantage against. Alignment Evil Languages Common Skills Bluff+10, Stealth +15 Str 19 (+10) Dex 18 (+10) Wis 16 (+9) Con 14 (+8) Int 10 (+6) Cha 8 (+5) Equipment chainmail, short sword, 10 shuriken, beggar’s garb
Tactics The Filth King stays to the rear as much as possible. His devotion to Tiamat has been repaid over the years with several unique abilities, which he uses in devout service to his queen. He begins a battle with vitrioloic spray, spewing acid over as many PCs as possible. He’s willing to allow himself to be f lanked if doing so puts him in good position, relying on the Laughing Shadows and f lanker strike. He also tries to spread his melee attacks out early in the fight, hoping to poison as many foes as possible. If the remaining Laughing Shadows are all slain, or if the Filth King is bloodied, he attempts to surrender. He’s made lots of money off Telicanthus, but his loyalty is not so deep that it’s worth his life. If the PCs refuse to offer quarter, he continues to fight, relying on vengeful return to keep him safe. The Laughing Shadows all fight to the death.
Development If captured alive or his corpse is subjected to ritual magic such as Speak with Dead, the Filth King can shed some light on recent activity in the city. A few weeks back, the Filth King was approached by a stranger in a cloak. While he didn’t see the man’s face, the stranger offered to pay substantially if the beggars would harass the githzerai at every opportunity. He even offered the services of mercenaries in his employ—the Laughing Shadows—and a bounty on dead githzerai. The Filth King gladly accepted. If asked and able to lie, he denies that this was Telicanthus (an Insight check opposed by the Filth King’s Bluff check indicates that he is lying), and adds that Telicanthus is publicly known for supporting the presence of the githzerai in the city. The Filth King recognized Telicanthus’s voice, though, even though
M a rc h 2 0 0 9
|
D u n g e o n 16 4
94
Haven of the Bitter Glass
Filth King (K)
Level 14 Elite Controller
Medium natural humanoid, human XP 2000 Initiative +9 Senses Perception +15 HP 278; Bloodied 139 AC 28; Fortitude 25, Reflex 26, Will 27 Saving Throws +2 Speed 6 Action Points 1 m Festering Scratch (standard; at-will) ✦ Poison +19 vs. AC; 1d4 + 2 damage, and ongoing 10 poison damage (save ends). r Awaken Greed (standard; at-will) ✦ Implement, Psychic Ranged 10; +18 vs. Will; 2d8 + 6 psychic damage, and the target slides 4 squares and is slowed until the end of the Beggar King’s next turn. M Driving Sickness ✦ Poison The Beggar King makes two festering scratch attacks. If both hit the same target, on its next turn, the target must move away from the Beggar King or the ongoing damage increases by 5 points (maximum 15). M Flanker Strike (immediate reaction; usable when an enemy flanks the Beggar King; at-will) ✦ Poison The Beggar King makes a festering scratch attack against the triggering enemy. C Vitriolic Spray (standard; encounter) ✦ Acid, Implement Close blast 3; +16 vs. Fortitude; 1d10 + 4 acid damage, and target is blinded until the end of the Beggar King’s next turn. Vengeful Return (when the Filth King is reduced to 0 hp; daily) For 5 minutes, the Beggar King appears dead and gains all the effects of the unconscious condition, but he cannot die. He can still see and hear. After 5 minutes, his body is restored, and he regains 20 hit points. Alignment Evil Languages Common, Draconic Skills Bluff +18, Intimidate +18, Stealth +14, Thievery +14 Str 10 (+7) Dex 15 (+9) Wis 17 (+10) Con 19 (+11) Int 20 (+12) Cha 23 (+13) Equipment hide armor, holy symbol of Tiamat, beggar’s garb
2 Laughing Shadow Streetfighters (F)
Level 13 Soldier
Medium natural humanoid, human XP 800 Initiative +12 Senses Perception +9 HP 128; Bloodied 64 AC 29; Fortitude 26, Reflex 25, Will 24 Speed 6 m Katar (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon +20 vs. AC; 2d6 + 6 damage (crit 18 + 1d6), and the target is slowed until the end of the streetfighter’s next turn. R Shuriken (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon Ranged 6/12; +19 vs. AC; 2d4 + 4 damage. M Cheap Shot (immediate interrupt; usable when a slowed target leaves an adjacent square; requires katar; at-will) ✦ Weapon +20 vs. AC; 2d6 + 6 damage, and the target’s movement ends. C Streetfighter Flourish (standard; requires katar; recharge 5 6) Close burst 1; targets enemies; +19 vs. AC; 2d6 + 6 damage, and the target is slowed (save ends). Alignment Evil Languages Common, Draconic Skills Bluff+13, Intimidate +13, Stealth +15 Str 21 (+11) Dex 19 (+10) Wis 17 (+9) Con 16 (+9) Int 11 (+6) Cha 10 (+8) Equipment chainmail, katar, 10 shuriken, beggar’s garb
Laughing Shadow Groveler (G)
Level 13 Lurker
Medium natural humanoid, human XP 800 Initiative +14 Senses Perception +9 HP 103; Bloodied 51 AC 27; Fortitude 24, Reflex 26, Will 25; +2 to all defenses against marked enemies Speed 7 m Katar (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon +18 vs. AC; 2d6 + 6 damage (crit 18 + 2d6). R Shuriken (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon Ranged 6/12; +18 vs. AC; 2d6 + 6 damage. M/R Covert Attack (immediate reaction; when an ally attacks an enemy the ally has marked because of cringe; requires katar or shuriken; at-will) ✦ Weapon Targets the enemy the triggering ally attacked; the groveler makes a katar attack against an adjacent enemy or a shuriken attack against a nonadjacent enemy. Hit: 4d6 + 6 damage (with katar, crit 30 damage + 2d6). Cringe (standard; requires an ally in the area; at-will) Close burst 10; the groveler chooses up to one ally in the area per enemy in the area. The enemy is considered to be marked by the chosen ally until the end of the groveler’s next turn. Each ally can mark only one enemy in this way. The groveler gains +2 to all defenses against marked enemies. Alignment Evil Languages Common, Draconic Skills Bluff+16, Stealth +15 Str 12 (+7) Dex 22 (+10) Wis 17 (+9) Con 19 (+10) Int 12 (+6) Cha 20 (+11) Equipment leather armor, katar, 10 shuriken, beggar’s garb
M a rc h 2 0 0 9
|
D u n g e o n 16 4
95
Haven of the Bitter Glass
the githyanki was doing an excellent job concealing his accent. The greedy Filth King has been sitting on this information, waiting for an opportunity to use it to extort the powerful and wealthy githyanki merchant. He’s unwilling to part with his knowledge, thinking of it as his retirement fund, unless the PCs catch him at his lie. If the PCs drop the Filth King, his vengeful return ability activates. If the characters are still present in the area 5 minutes after his “death,” he remains completely motionless. A Heal check made by a character who examines his body can be opposed by the Filth King’s Bluff check. Success reveals he is alive. Otherwise, he waits until all the PCs move to the other side of the pit before making a stealthy escape. If the PCs engage the treasure golem (see “The Guardian of Greed” on page 97), the Filth King likewise attempts to escape, even if not all the characters move to the other side of the pit. If combat begins with the treasure golem, the king gains a +5 bonus on a Stealth check to escape in the middle of the fight.
Features of the Area Illumination: The room is filled with bright light from torches along the walls. Pews: A pew can be used to gain cover. Pit: A 20-foot deep, 10-foot wide pit separates the main temple from a vast pile of wealth that sits before a statue of Tiamat. This wealth forms the accumulated offerings of the city’s beggars to Tiamat over the past several generations. Any interaction with this treasure triggers its guardian (see tactical encounter T6 for details). The bottom of the pit is littered with the skeletal remains of would-be thieves, making the bottom of the pit difficult terrain.
M a rc h 2 0 0 9
|
D u n g e o n 16 4
96
Haven of the Bitter Glass
T6: The Guardian of Greed Encounter Level 14 (5,000 XP)
Setup Treasure golem (G) The vast mound of treasure on the far side of the pit is actually a treasure golem created to serve Tiamat, an animated guardian made from the treasure it guards. It is the embodiment of greed, and it blindly attacks thieves. It formd instantly if even one of its coins is picked up. The golem’s weakness to be pacified by tribute is not obvious. A DC 23 Religion check indicated that ancient historical texts often pictured worshipers throwing vast quantities of coins to an enraged coin golem. When a PC touches the pile of treasure, read the following: The coins begin to slide and clink, moving by themselves as they surge upward. In seconds, a five-headed dragon made entirely out of treasure stands before you. Its hiss is the sound of coins rubbing together, and its heads snap forward to attack.
Tactics Once formed, the treasure golem attacks as long as anyone remains standing on its side of the pit, although it uses gleamshard to attack enemies that target it from the other side of the pit. It will not pursue enemies that retreat to the far side of the pit unless those enemies continue to attack it from range. It will not pursue enemies beyond the door to the temple for any reason.
Features of the Area Illumination: The room is filled with bright light from torches along the walls. Pews: A pew can be used to gain cover. Pit: A 20-foot deep, 10-foot wide pit divides the room. Bones litter the bottom of the pit, making all those squares difficult terrain. Sculpture: A rough, handmade statue of Tiamat sits behind the pile of coins. The statue has clearly been assembled by an inexpert artist, made from cast-off junk and scavenged portions of other statues. The statue sits in front of a secret door that is easily found (Perception DC 18) once the statue is moved or inspected closely. The statue can also provide cover.
Treasure Golem (G)
Level 14 Solo Brute
Large natural animate (construct) XP 5,000 Initiative +5 Senses Perception +6; darkvision, tremorsense 5 HP 700; Bloodied 350; see also berserk attack AC 26; Fortitude 30, Reflex 24, Will 23 Immune disease, poison Saving Throws +5 Speed 6; can’t shift Action Points 2 m Slam (standard; at-will) Reach 2; +18 vs. AC; 2d10 + 6 damage, and the target slides 2 squares or is knocked prone. r Gleamshard (standard; at-will) ✦ Force Ranged 20; +26 vs. AC; 3d6 + 7 force damage, and the target slides 2 squares or is knocked prone. M Double Attack (standard; at-will) The treasure golem makes two basic attacks. M Berserk Attacks (immediate reaction; usable when damaged by an attack while bloodied; at-will) The treasure golem makes two basic attacks against random targets. C Hoard Blast (standard; recharge 5 6) Close burst 3; +22 vs. Fortitude; 2d10 + 7 damage, and prone targets cannot stand until the end of the golem’s next turn. Miss: Half damage. Effect: The golem bursts into its component pieces, filling the area and gaining insubstantial until the start of its next turn, when it reappears within 5 squares of its last space. C Weight of Greed (standard; recharges when first bloodied) ✦ Psychic Close burst 3; +15 vs. Reflex; 1d10 + 7 psychic damage, and the target is dominated until the end of the golem’s next turn. Miss: Half damage. Alignment Unaligned Languages — Str 22 (+13) Dex 10 (+7) Wis 8 (+6) Con 25 (+13) Int 3 (+3) Cha 3 (+3)
Development If the PCs are wise, they might retreat from the golem and take an opportunity to replenish their abilities with an extended rest. Of course, the Filth King tries to slip away if combat begins with the treasure golem, gaining a +5 bonus on a Stealth check to do so in the middle of the fight.
M a rc h 2 0 0 9
|
D u n g e o n 16 4
97
Haven of the Bitter Glass
T8: Vault of Knowledge Encounter Level 13 (4,000 XP)
Setup 3 archivists (A) 5 bone scribes (B) The Vault of Knowledge was once a library of Ioun hidden beneath the ancient temple in Auger. When the city was destroyed, the sages were trapped inside and never rescued. They have read the same books and the same scrolls for centuries, and now crave only fresh information. They’re happy to devour it from the PCs’ brains if necessary. The Vault used to be full of tomes. Now the series of small rooms are completely empty, and every inch of wall space is covered with crisscrossing lines of text from a multitude of books, all carved into the walls. Read the following aloud: When you pry open the door, you see a large stone room. It looks like it was once a library, but any books have long since rotted away. Instead, the walls are covered with thousands of lines of carved text, filling the space. Rising from the ground around the room is a group of pale, emaciated creatures. They immediately begin to lurch your way. Their fingers are missing any flesh that might have once been there, and each fingerbone is sharpened into a point.
5 Bone Scribes (B)
Level 13 Minion
Medium natural humanoid (undead) XP 200 each Initiative +9 Senses Perception +11; darkvision HP 1; a missed attack never damages a minion. AC 27; Fortitude 25, Reflex 26, Will 24 Immune disease Speed 7 m Mind Touch (standard; at-will) ✦ Psychic +16 vs. Will; 4 psychic damage, and the target takes a –2 penalty to Will and is slowed until the end of the bone scribe’s next turn. The bone scribe can shift 1 square. Alignment Evil Languages Common Str 10 (+10) Dex 14 (+9) Wis 8 (+6) Con 20 (+11) Int 23 (+12) Cha 19 (+10)
3 Bone Archivists (A)
Level 14 Artillery
Medium natural humanoid (undead) XP 1,000 each Initiative +9 Senses Perception +19; darkvision HP 109; Bloodied 54 AC 26; Fortitude 25, Reflex 27, Will 26 Immune disease; Resist 10 psychic; Vulnerable 5 radiant Speed 6 m Mind Touch (standard; at-will) ✦ Psychic +19 vs. Will; 1d10 + 6 psychic damage, and the target takes a –2 penalty to Will and is slowed until the end of the bone archivist’s next turn. The bone archivist can shift 3 squares. r Siphon Memory (standard; at-will) ✦ Psychic Ranged 10; +19 vs. Will; 2d4 + 6 psychic damage, and the target can make only basic attacks or use at-will powers until the end of the bone archivist’s next turn. A Knowledge Barrage (standard; encounter) ✦ Psychic Area burst 2 within 10; targets enemies; +17 vs. Will; 3d6 + 6 damage, and the target is dazed (save ends). Alignment Evil Languages Common Str 12 (+8) Dex 15 (+9) Wis 10 (+7) Con 19 (+12) Int 23 (+13) Cha 20 (+12)
Tactics Eager for sustenance, the bone scribes move forward to attack while the archivists stay around the edges of the combat. The bone scribes uses their sharpened fingerbones to scrape thoughts from their targets’ head, weakening them for the attacks of the archivists. When a scribe uses mind touch or siphon memory, memories from their target etch themselves as words across the bone scribe’s papyrus-like skin. The archivists target foes struck by the scribes first.
Features of the Area Illumination: The room is completely dark, but the undead give off a soft glow. This is the equivalent of dim light.
M a rc h 2 0 0 9
|
D u n g e o n 16 4
98
Haven of the Bitter Glass
Development All the original scrolls and books have turned to dust, but the contents of the original books are transcribed on the wall of the library . . . somewhat. Many of the sentences are in no discernable order. As the librarians grew more insane and the walls began to fill up, they wrote sentences anywhere they could find room. The result can be confusing and time-consuming to comprehend. This room can be useful to PCs hoping to research some subject. A researcher gains a +1 bonus to any Arcana, History, or Religion skill check made in the room for every full hour spent researching here, up to a maximum of +5. The check is made at the end of the research time. All the text on the walls is in Common. In addition, research in this chamber reveals information specifically related to the Bitter Glass. Show the accounts from Auglos’s journal from the sidebar to the players if the characters try to look into communication devices or the destruction of Auger here. No matter what the characters research in this room, show them the information in the second sidebar. Although originally recorded in a scroll over four hundred years ago, this message from a long-ago prophet is meant for the characters’ eyes. In it, he warns against trusting Telicanthus, urges the characters to seek out the Bitter Glass in the ruins of Auglos’s tower beneath Telicanthus’s mansion, gives clues as to where the tower can be found, and warns of a great threat. He also encourages the characters to trust Amyria and follow her lead to bring together the Coalition. Allow the characters to form their own conclusions from the message, but feel free to give them some direction through roleplaying or skill checks (such as Streetwise to learn of the dwarven Scrollstone brothers of Deep Cartography; see page 54).
Writing on the Walls
Message from the Past
“A matrix of blown glass can be formed into a mathematically perfect sounding chamber, then used to amplify magical resonance. In theory, disconnected sheets of a similar substance can be attuned to the master. This would allow communication at unlimited distance. The question is: How can one handle the planar boundary? When I began this research in N efelus, I never expected that this would be a concern…”
“You’re watching me. I can see you, but you don’t know that. You’re listening to my words even though I’m long dead. No, not you! Idiot. You’re just writing down my words because you were told to by the old man with a beard and a magic glass. I’m talking to the other people, the ones reading this on the wall. They know I’m dead. Oh yes, dead, mud in my mouth, river arisen! I sing of a ship that sails the air, that brings swords and fire. You’ve fought it, too, but it’s worse for you. We’re just going to die. They’ll kill us all because of what the bearded man does, talking through the mirror. They’ll just flood the room, and that will solve their problem until he finds it again. He’s been looking for it a long time. You think he likes you but it’s a lie. There was digging, you see, and cleaning, and many false leads. He’ll use it to conquer you all, but no one will believe you. You’ll have to prove him a liar. They can talk through it, you see. They’ve managed to do it, and the armies whisper through the blue darkness in a way that no one else can hear. You’re dead if you don’t stop it. Even now they are discussing you. “Distract them,” he is told, “this is too important to ruin.” But you can. Boy! Boy, I demand a goose! Pluck it and ruin it and save yourself if you find the right spot. Look for the old tower when no one expects you. It isn’t where they think it is. Ask the dwarves if you like, the brothers who dream of maps. Because in the days to come SHE will spread herself, and none will be safe from HER reach, so you may wish to trust the speech of the Bladed Girl. Trust, trust her if no one else. If her people do not come together, they will certainly be ripped apart. Like my goose? I am so very hungry. I could use some tea. Boy!” —verbatim account from the recorded visions of Graiden Brackenhaus, oracular guest of Seer Auglos of Auger, as scribed by Brother Pinnot from the Church of Ioun.
“A problem has developed. I need some method for shunting away the psychic residue cast off during communication. This seems to be quite toxic. I believe that I can redirect it into the Astral Sea, where it should do no harm to anyone…” “The final Glass is more beautiful than I could have hoped. My apprentices have outdone themselves. A full 30 feet in diameter, it has anchored itself into the very nature of our plane, and hangs in space. Our ritual went flawlessly and it has taken on a life of its own; as thoughts travel from one external pane to another, the Glass shimmers like the night sky. It is quite beautiful. It seems to be invulnerable from the outside, as I intended, but the same protections have not transferred into the interior. This worries me.” “The interior of the Glass becomes a psychic maelstrom if the information flow is not redirected. I have succeeded in rerouting the rogue energies to the Astral Sea. So long as no one is bothered by them, I see no risk; and in such a plane, what are the chances that they will be discovered? So small as to be infinitesimal...” “I am making only a few select panes linked to the glass, but it would be just as simple to make many. I expect that selling these to far-flung allies could make me a rich man indeed. I will need to consider it.” —from the diaries of Auglos of Nefelus
M a rc h 2 0 0 9
|
D u n g e o n 16 4
99
Haven of the Bitter Glass
SC2: The Coalition Encounter Level 14 (5,000 XP)
Setup Begin by reading the following: After meeting Amyria just after dawn at your inn, you’ve accompanied her to a building on the University of Sayre’s campus. The small lecture hall you’ve entered looks like it has previously been used as a place to learn about the more esoteric elements of arcane magical theory. A long table has been placed in the middle of the room, and most of the benches that normally occupy the space pushed to the walls. Already seated at the table are six members of the Coalition. If the PCs successfully convinced Odos to attend, continue: Just as Amyria begins to look nervous at Odos’s absence, the githzerai walks smoothly into the room—navigating the furnishings despite his blindness—and takes a seat nearest the door. “Am I late?” he asks with an arched eyebrow. The goals of the PCs in this skill challenge are clear, assuming they continue to follow Amyria’s lead. On the way to the event, she outlines what she hopes will happen, and begs the PCs’ aid in bringing her plans to fruition. At this point, the PCs don’t know who they’ll be dealing with, other than Odos, and are likely to follow the deva’s lead. If the characters show resistance to some portion of Amyria’s plan, feel free to adapt to any changes to the meeting. If the PCs see fit to add to Amyria’s agenda, she’s eminently open to their ideas—she really wants their support, and respects their experience and wisdom a great deal. She does stress the importance of Coalition sanc-
tioning their activities, however. As she puts it, “No government will take you seriously without the Coalition’s backing. You’ll need their support, but that will also open doors for you, and enable you to get places and see things you wouldn’t have before.” Free-spirited adventurers still might not understand how being part of the Coalition is beneficial, but Amyria points out that all the military and financial aid represented in the room is vital to coordinating the defense of the world. She also mentions that without the Coalition, the githyanki will be able to continue picking off individual, strategically important cities and areas as they see fit, and that not every region is as fortunate as Elsir Vale to have such stalwart champions willing to protect its borders. Amyria’s goals in the meeting are as follows: ✦ Transfer control of military units under command of Coalition members to the Coalition council. ✦ Vote on a Coaltion leader. ✦ Vote on the relevance and importance of Amyria’s dream, and whether it warrants investigation. ✦ Name the Coalition. ✦ Investigate Telicanthus and find the githyanki communication hub. The last goal is Amyria’s most pressing, since it’s something immediate she can (hopefully) get the Coalition members behind. She knows that without a solid goal to pursue, the Coalition runs the risk of fracturing before it ever even fully forms.
Why the PCs? If the PCs ask why they’re included in this meeting, Amyria explains that news of their defeat of General Zithiruun has spread across the land. In addition, Amyria herself has spoken glowingly of the heroes in all her individual meetings with the Coalition members. The adventurers are considered honored guests of Sayre and of the Coalition. They have been summoned (at Amyria’s guidance) as material experts on githyanki tactics and motivations, as well as defensive strategies to employ against the attackers.
Rules of the Gathering The Coalition is an open forum, and everyone invited can speak freely. But only the seven members of the Coalition have a final vote on the body’s actions. An idea put forth for a vote must be seconded, then a vote will be taken. Simple majority rules. Amyria, as Lord Torrance points out, is not given a vote, although all the members are interested in what she has to say. In this skill challenge, the PCs can try to work toward the success of all five of Amyria’s goals. The skill challenge is only considered successful, however, if the PCs can convince the Coalition to pursue an investigation into the githyanki’s means of communication. They can do this by winning over any three members of the Coalition, other than Kalad (who is already on their side). The skill challenge is set up to run in a format that encourages the characters to plead their case to each member of the Coalition, trying to win them over one at a time. Each Coalition member responds to different proposals—some of the topics interest them greatly, others less so. So in essence, in this skill challenge, the PCs are attempting to find common ground with three of the members. Failure at this ultimate goal results in a challenge failure.
M a rc h 2 0 0 9
|
D u n g e o n 16 4
100
Haven of the Bitter Glass
As such, each Coalition member represents a miniskill challenge of complexity 1 within the larger, more complex skill challenge. Gaining 4 successes before 3 failures against a Coalition member brings that NPC to the PCs’ side. However, indivudal failures against a single Coalition member do not count as failures toward the overall skill challenge. Instead, the PCs accrue an overall failure only if they fail to win over a Coalition member by failing the mini-skill challenge targeting that member. In addition, as the characters make successes that pertain to each of Amyria’s five goals, track those successes separately from the successes needed to complete the skill challenge (both the challenge at large and the one represented by each member). Each goal requires three successes to complete, which you’ll note totals fifteen successes (three more than the PCs need to succeed at the overall skill challenge). In effect, even after the PCs have the backing of the Coalition, they might still not have pushed their complete agenda through. The PCs can continue to argue for their agendas after they’ve achieved overall success. Failing the skill challenge means the PCs are dismissed, leaving some goals potentially unresolved. Finally, failures that accrue to accomplish goals after the overall challenge is successful do not retroactively cause the skill challenge to fail. As you run the skill challenge, feel free to award bonuses to skill checks if the PCs are inventive in their arguments or roleplay especially well. In addition, if the PCs find a creative use for a skill not on the list below, feel free to allow them the check (for example, using Acrobatics or Athletics to reenact a dramatic battle against General Zithiruun).
Convincing the Coalition Skill Challenge
Level 14 5,000 XP
As you find seats on the benches along the walls, the members of the Coalition take a moment to consult notes, size each other up, and otherwise prepare themselves for the proceedings. The party attempts to convince the Coalition of the wisdom of Amyria’s goals. Complexity 5 (12 successes before 3 failures; see above) Primary Skills Arcana, Bluff, Diplomacy, History, Insight Secondary Skills Intimidate, Nature, Perception, Religion Victory The party earns the respect of the Coalition and gains their approval to act as their agents in the fight against the githyanki. Letters to this effect are hastily drawn up for each character. Any of Amyria’s goals that are successfully completed are likewise acted on. Defeat The party does not receive sanctioning to act on the Coalition’s behalf at this time. Any other of Amyria’s goals that the characters fail to accomplish (see Setup, above) are likewise not acted on by the Coalition. The group continues to squabble and jockey for power for several more days until the leaders leave for their homes. The Coalition is not dead, however—it’s start is just delayed, which proves costly (see Development, below). Each of the Coalition members is associated not only with the skills that will sway them to the PCs’ side, but also those of Amyria’s goals that interest them. When the PCs target a member of the Coalition, they should know which skills will impact the member, as well as to which of Amyria’s goals they’d like to credit any success (with the ultimate goal of 12 total successes and three successes for each smaller goal). For convenience, here are Amyria’s goals once more. ✦ Transfer Control of Military ✦ Coalition Leader ✦ Amyria’s Dream ✦ Name the Coalition ✦ Investigate Telicanthus Arcana (DC 18) ✦ Transfer Control of Military: The PC makes a compelling case for coordinating the efforts of Sayre, the githzerai, and other networks controlled by the Coalition in an
effort to thwart the magic of the githyanki. Specifically mentioning the githyanki’s flying ships or their connection to red dragons results in a +2 bonus to the check made to complete this goal. ✦ Amyria’s Dream: The PC mentions that the Coalition member being addressed must have some knowledge that can help interpret Amyria’s dream and help them all understand what it means. ✦ Investigate Telicanthus: The PC brings up the green glass device spotted by Odos in the attack at Akma’ad (and possibly the same device used by the possessed spy Gallia), positing that the master glass merchant might have information about these devices, if he’s not responsible for their creation. Bluff (DC 23) ✦ Coalition Leader: The PC flatters the Coalition member, appealing to her ego and suggesting that she could use her immense wisdom to help select the appropriate leader for the august assembly in the room. (A follow-up free DC 18 Insight check, not applicable to the challenge, reveals that Fariex sees through this attempt but is so amused by the attempt that he’s swayed in spite of himself, while Inogo’s ego is genuinely moved by this plea.) ✦ Investigate Telicanthus: The PC exaggerates the threat of having a githyanki operating openly in an area near so many attacked regions. If a character attempts this check against Lord Torrance, it is made with a –2 penalty. Diplomacy (DC 21) ✦ Transfer Control of Military: The PC makes a compelling case for coordinating the efforts of all the military groups in the room, assuaging concerns about a single individual controlling the actions of the united military efforts by reminding the Coalition that everyone will still have a vote in how the new military structure is utilized. If the coordinated efforts of the PCs and city defenders at Overlook are mentioned, Kalad speaks up and aids this check, giving the PCs a +2 bonus. ✦ Coalition Leader: In a compelling gesture, the PC congratulates all the members of the Coalition for their foresight in forming this group, while simultaneously indicating that while all in the room are clearly capable leaders, someone must have the ability to make a final say on matters of import. If the PC mentions Amyria for this position, the check is made with a –2 penalty. ✦ Name the Coalition: The PC mentions that the Coalition will gain more respect and be likely to gain more members
M a rc h 2 0 0 9
|
D u n g e o n 16 4
101
Haven of the Bitter Glass
and support with a name other than “the Coalition.” If the PC makes a suggestion for a name, the check is made with a +2 bonus. ✦ Investigate Telicanthus: The PC lays out the case against the githyanki noble in a compelling and organized fashion. If the characters interrogated the Filth King and the PC brings up the information from that interview, the check is made with a +2 bonus. History (DC 21) ✦ Transfer Control of Military: The PC references other ancient battles in which allies merged their military forces to great effect. ✦ Name the Coalition: The PC makes a compelling historical case for the power of names to inspire and engage their members. If the PC or PCs are members of an organization already and use this as an example of their own success, the check is made with a +2 bonus. Insight (DC 23) ✦ Transfer Control of Military: With this check, the PC recognizes that this goal has the members of the Coalition most uneasy, enabling them to better couch their words to assuage the members’ fears. Success on this check grants the PCs a +5 bonus on the next skill check made in the challenge. ✦ Amyria’s Dream: The PCs recognize that Inogo and Odos have a fascination with Amyria’s dream based on common ground, as both believe in signs from higher powers. This helps the characters better reconcile the differences between the two leaders, granting the PCs a +2 bonus on the next skill check made in the challenge. ✦ Investigate Telicanthus: A successful check reveals that Lord Torrance is not only nervous about the prospect of investigating one of his city’s most prominent citizens— he’s actually afraid that revealing any dirty laundry in Telicanthus’s activities will reflect poorly on his judgment as a leader and anger the githyanki, making Sayre a more prominent target. He believes that Telicanthus’s presence gives Sayre some protection against attack. If this check is successful, the PCs can soothe Lord Torrance’s fears. The next check made that targets Lord Torrance gains a +5 bonus. Intimidate (DC 23) ✦ Transfer Control of Military: The PC bullies Inogo, all but calling him a coward for not being willing to risk his city’s troops for the greater good. ✦ Name the Coalition: Shaming the indecisive Deacon, the PC calls for action on at least this “one simple task.”
✦ Coalition Leader: As with the Coalition’s name, the PC makes a point of calling out Inogo for being unwilling to even agree that a leader is necessary. Nature (DC 21) ✦ Amyria’s Dream: The PC calls on Caliandra’s wisdom and knowledge of the natural world to aid the characters in their interpretation of the dream. ✦ Name the Coalition: The PC asks if perhaps the name of the Coalition could be something that reflects the strength and tenacity of the mortal world, calling on Caliandra to use her insight to help them find a suitable title. Perception (DC 23) ✦ Coalition Leader: The PC recognizes that Kalad, Fariex, Inogo, and Odos are not interested in the position—but that the other three members are all quite interested in becoming the Coalition’s first leader. Success here means the PCs can use this knowledge to gain a +2 bonus on the next check made against Quelenna, Caliandra, or Lord Torrance. ✦ Amyria’s Dream: The PC notices that the targeted Coalition member is especially interested in a particular aspect of the dream, and that bringing it up in detail causes that individual to react more favorably to the characters on this topic. Success means the PCs can use this knowledge to gain a +2 bonus on the next check made against the Coalition member targeted with this check. ✦ Investigate Telicanthus: The PC notices that the targeted member shares pointed looks with other members of the Coalition when Telicanthus’s name is brought up. The PCs gain a +2 bonus on the next check made to accomplish this goal, if necessary. Religion (DC 18) ✦ Transfer Control of Military: The PC simultaneously praises the strength of the targeted Coalition member’s military might and strength, and asks how he could possibly let so many other good people in the world suffer by not lending his divine support to the Coalition’s cause. ✦ Amyria’s Dream: The PC asks the targeted member for insight on the dream directly, simultaneously appealing to her ego and gaining valuable knowledge in the process.
ODOS Complexity 1 (4 successes before 3 failures; see above) Arcana (DC 18) ✦ Transfer Control of Military
✦ Amyria’s Dream ✦ Investigate Telicanthus Diplomacy (DC 21) ✦ Transfer Control of Military ✦ Coalition Leader ✦ Name the Coalition ✦ Investigate Telicanthus History (DC 21) ✦ Transfer Control of Military ✦ Name the Coalition Insight (DC 23) Insight can only be used twice against Odos, once for each of the goals listed below. ✦ Transfer Control of Military ✦ Amyria’s Dream Religion (DC 18) ✦ Transfer Control of Military ✦ Amyria’s Dream
FARIEX Complexity 1 (4 successes before 3 failures; see above) Arcana (DC 18) ✦ Transfer Control of Military ✦ Amyria’s Dream ✦ Investigate Telicanthus Bluff (DC 23) ✦ Coalition Leader ✦ Investigate Telicanthus Diplomacy (DC 21) ✦ Transfer Control of Military ✦ Coalition Leader ✦ Name the Coalition ✦ Investigate Telicanthus Insight (DC 23) Insight can only be used once against Fariex for the goal listed below. ✦ Transfer Control of Military Perception (DC 23) Perception can only be used a total of three times against Fariex, once for each of the goals listed below. ✦ Coalition Leader ✦ Amyria’s Dream ✦ Investigate Telicanthus
M a rc h 2 0 0 9
|
D u n g e o n 16 4
102
Haven of the Bitter Glass
LORD TORRANCE Complexity 1 (4 successes before 3 failures; see above) Arcana (DC 18) ✦ Transfer Control of Military ✦ Amyria’s Dream ✦ Investigate Telicanthus Diplomacy (DC 21) Transfer Control of Military ✦ Coalition Leader ✦ Name the Coalition ✦ Investigate Telicanthus Insight (DC 23) Insight can only be used twice against Lord Torrance, once for each of the goals listed below. ✦ Transfer Control of Military ✦ Investigate Telicanthus
QUELENNA Complexity 1 (4 successes before 3 failures; see above) Diplomacy (DC 21) ✦ Transfer Control of Military ✦ Coalition Leader ✦ Name the Coalition ✦ Investigate Telicanthus History (DC 21) ✦ Transfer Control of Military ✦ Name the Coalition Insight (DC 23) Insight can only be used once against Quelenna for the goal listed below. ✦ Transfer Control of Military Perception (DC 23) Perception can only be used three times against Quelenna, once for each of the goals listed below. ✦ Coalition Leader ✦ Amyria’s Dream ✦ Investigate Telicanthus
CALIANDRA Complexity 1 (4 successes before 3 failures; see above) Diplomacy (DC 21)
✦ Transfer Control of Military ✦ Coalition Leader ✦ Name the Coalition ✦ Investigate Telicanthus History (DC 21) ✦ Transfer Control of Military ✦ Name the Coalition Insight (DC 23) Insight can only be used once against Caliandra for the goal listed below. ✦ Transfer Control of Military Nature (DC 21) ✦ Amyria’s Dream ✦ Name the Coalition
INOGO Complexity 1 (4 successes before 3 failures; see above) Bluff (DC 23) ✦ Coalition Leader ✦ Investigate Telicanthus Diplomacy (DC 21) ✦ Transfer Control of Military ✦ Coalition Leader ✦ Name the Coalition ✦ Investigate Telicanthus Insight (DC 23) Insight can only be used twice against Inogo, once for each of the goals listed below. ✦ Transfer Control of Military ✦ Amyria’s Dream Intimidate (DC 23) ✦ Transfer Control of Military ✦ Name the Coalition Perception (DC 23) Perception can only be used a total of three times against Inogo, once for each of the goals listed below. ✦ Coalition Leader ✦ Amyria’s Dream ✦ Investigate Telicanthus Religion (DC 18) ✦ Transfer Control of Military ✦ Amyria’s Dream
LUNCH BREAK After the PCs have been at the skill challenge for a while, have someone on the Coalition council call for a break, for lunch and to give everyone a chance for air. During this period, everyone at the meeting mills about, servants bring in refreshments, and most importantly, the PCs have a chance to do some casual lobbying on behalf of their agendas. Bluff (DC 23) Fariex breaks out a Three-Dragon Ante deck and asks if anyone is up for a quick game. The (apparently) human Fariex is a dazzling cardshark, with a range of complex shuffles and card tricks up his sleeve. But he’s also an honest gambler. A successful check means the PC manages to win the game (one way or the other), walk away with 50 gp, and a +5 bonus on the next check made to influence Fariex. Endurance (DC 21) Odos pulls forth a flask of a potent githzerai liquor called fekk. He takes a sip, grimaces quickly, and shows a flash of a rare smile. If a characters shows any curiosity about the beverage, Odos offers a sip. A successful check means the character takes the offered sip of the potent, bizarrely flavored alcohol without undue effect, gaining a +5 bonus on the next check to influence Odos. Heal (DC 18) The PC overhears Caliandra speaking about one of her grandsons, who has been suffering from a peculiar illness of the lungs. Based solely on the descriptions of the symptoms, the PC successfully diagnoses the illness, and, most importantly, convinces Caliandra she’s correct, earning a success toward winning Caliandra over and a success against any goal on Caliandra’s list (see above) of the PC’s choice. Stealth (DC 23) The PC notices Lord Torrance and Quelenna in the corner in a heated discussion, and manages to sidle close enough to eavesdrop without being noticed. The character’s knowledge from a successful check results in a +5 bonus on the next check made against either Lord Torrance or Quelenna in the skill challenge. Religion (DC 18) Inogo stands mostly alone during the break, sipping a drink and observing the rest of the room with a neutral expression. With a successful check, the PC engages Inogo in conversation about the one topic that always draws him out: Erathis. Success also earns a modicum of respect from the quiet priest, and +5 bonus on the next check made to influence him.
M a rc h 2 0 0 9
|
D u n g e o n 16 4
103
Haven of the Bitter Glass
Development This is a complex and difficult skill challenge, and it’s very likely the PCs do not accomplish all of Amyria’s goals here. But success overall does get them Coalition sanctioning for their future activities in Sayre and elsewhere, provided they’re on Coalition business at the time. Success and failure for each individual goal results in varied action by the Coalition. Transfer Control of Military: If successful, the Coalition votes 5–2 in favor of this motion, led by Kalad and seconded by Fariex. Inogo and Lord Torrance are the only two who hold out against this prospect. On Amyria’s suggestion, however, Kalad is named the Coalition’s general, which soothes Inogo a great deal. If the PCs fail, not all is lost. The Coalition votes 4–3 against the motion (Kalad, Fariex, and Quelenna are the three ayes). In one week’s time, the PCs hear of three more towns razed to the ground by githyanki invaders, totaling almost 11,000 dead. All three were towns near Sherrbyr, and Inogo changes his vote in an emergency meeting. Kalad is named the Coalition’s general. Coalition Leader: If successful, Lord Torrance immediately moves that only a sitting member of the Coalition can be considered, seconded by Quelenna. This motion is passed with a 6–1 vote, Kalad being the only dissenter as he grumbles loudly that the clear choice for leadership is Amyria. For her part, the deva shows no emotion other than pleasure that another of her goals has been met. The characters and Amyria are asked to leave the room, and after a heated, hour-long debate, the new leader of the Coalition is announced as Lord Divian Torrance. Failure means the Coalition has no central leadership, and in a remarkable move, Kalad announces immediately that he is withdrawing from the group, apologizing tearfully to Amyria. “Without a leader, we’re a headless, bickering bunch,” he says. “I’ll
see to the defense of the Vale, and you can come collect me from Overlook when you’ve pulled your heads from the sand.” Less than a week later, the city of Civiron, a sister city to Sayre, is burned to the ground, 5,000 are killed, and the Coalition elects Lord Torrance as its leader, then sends an emissary to bring Kalad back. Amyria’s Dream: Success on this goal means the Coalition votes unanimously to take Amyria’s dream, and the threat it represents, seriously. Inogo and Odos find common ground here, and unearth a grudging respect for one another. The characters can make DC 23 Religion and Insight checks to try and decipher the dream, or aid members of the Coalition in their efforts (assume their checks are made with a +10 bonus). Success indicates that the Coalition agrees to let Amyria lead the way on this issue, giving her the ability to coordinate efforts to root out the “spider” of Sayre. Even if the PCs failed at the overall skill challenge, but succeeded on this goal, Amyria’s sanctioning by the Coalition gives the PCs the ability to act on her behalf, and she immediately engages them to help her in these efforts. Failure here changes almost nothing, although it means that if Amyria and the PCs act on the dream, they do so at risk of the Coalition’s—and Lord Torrance’s—wrath. Name the Coalition: Success means the Coalition votes unanimously to give the group an actual name. Feel free to throw out as many ideas—serious and ridiculous—as you like. The PCs can participate and make DC 18 Diplomacy checks to champion their choices. If this happens, the first PC to achieve three successes convinces the Coalition to vote on his or her name choice. Amyria favors something dramatic and themed along the lines of her deity, such as the Platinum Shield Coalition or the Order of Heaven’s Fang. Failure means only that the Coalition continues with their current neutral identity, but
within a week, Caliandra leaves the group, citing her lack of faith in the group’s ability to accomplish “anything of significance.” Three days later, she is back, tearfully recounting the slaughter of five of the tribes (nearly 1,000 warriors and their families) under her leadership at the hands of githyanki strike teams. Investigate Telicanthus: If the PCs successfully convince the Coalition to investigate the githyanki merchant, Amyria is tasked with overseeing the investigation. This means, as described under Amyria’s Dream, that even if the characters fail the overall skill challenge and do not receive the Coalition’s sanction for future missions, they will be asked by Amyria to look into the githyanki’s activities. Failure at this goal also changes little. Amyria still wants to know if Telicanthus represents her spider. Personally, having asked around about the merchant, she feels he’s little more than a fop, but might be providing sanctuary to other githyanki or their agents.
What it Means to Succeed The PCs have the Coalition’s blessing, and they are each provided with papers, which they can choose to carry or not, that give the bearer the authority to act on behalf of the new organization. This, of course, carries more weight if the characters succeed in more of Amyria’s goals. At the very least, Lord Torrance’s name on the papers might give the PCs inroads in Sayre.
What it Means to Fail Failing the overall skill challenge means the Coalition might adopt one or more of Amyria’s goals, but the respective leaders leave Sayre in three days for their homes. A week later, attacks against Caliandra’s tribes, several villages near Sherrbyr, and several communities on Fariex’s trade routes are attacked by githyanki. Over 40,000 civilians are killed, and the Coalition quickly reforms with more resolve than before. M a rc h 2 0 0 9
|
D u n g e o n 16 4
104
Haven of the Bitter Glass
SC3: Telicanthus’s Tea Party Encounter Level 12 (1,400 XP)
Setup This skill challenge should be as drawn out as you feel your group would prefer. Some will want to get straight to the skill checks. Some will want to linger with the other guests and catch up on city gossip. The tea party takes place in areas M1 through M9 (see pages 66–68 for complete descriptions of these areas). All other doors are closed. These doors are not locked unless listed as such in their descriptions. When the PCs settle into the task of actually digging around, looking into Telicanthus’s contacts and his home, the skill challenge starts. Begin by reading the following: You’ve just walked into one of the most magnificent homes you’ve ever seen. Ornate stained glass fills almost every window, and expensive furnishings decorate the space. The lord of the house—the githyanki Telicanthus—is there to greet you, hands outstretched. “Welcome to my humble home! Please, feel free to enjoy the house and meet my other guests.” In this skill challenge, the already suspicious characters take the opportunity afforded by Telicanthus’s invitation to learn more about the githyanki’s activities in Sayre.
Telicanthus’s Tea Party Skill Challenge
Level 12 1,400 XP
You’ ve been invited to the home of Sayre’s most prominent— and notorious—citizen. Now that you’re in his home, you have the chance to rub shoulders with some of the city’s most sophisticated guests, and dig up some dirt on Telicanthus in the process. The party attempts to find out what, if anything, Telicanthus is up to. Complexity 2 (6 successes before 3 failures) Primary Skills Bluff, Diplomacy, Dungeoneering, Stealth Secondary Skills Heal, Insight, Thievery Victory The party learns about the excavation under Telicanthus’s home, and learns how Telicanthus accesses this portion of the Sayre undercity. Defeat The party doesn’t know anything about the excavation, but learns the next morning from Amyria about suspicious activity and the remote sounds of digging near the back of the mansion. Telicanthus learns that Amyria suspects him, and has alerted the githyanki workers in the excavation site. They post guards and cannot be caught unawares in encounters U4 or U5. Bluff DC 10 A successful check indicates the character spots General Taramin standing alone in the portrait gallery, casually examining Telicanthus’s family tree. Engaging in meaningless small talk, the character learns that General Taramin was asked, as a personal favor, to leave his watch patrols away from the mansion, since their presence was “a distraction to my work.” Diplomacy DC 21 The character happens on Lord and Lady Torrance in the Tea Room. With a successful check, the PC manages through veiled language to convince Lord Torrance that the adventurers will use discretion in their investigation. Assured of their capabilities, Lord Torrance gives a hint of a nod in the direction of Pennel, who is openly staring the character down from across the room. When Lord Torrance sees the PC notice Pennel, he gives a slight nod and moves away. A successful DC 15 Insight check indicates the PC
knows that he should investigate Pennel further, perhaps in his chambers in the mansion. Dungeoneering DC 16 The character notices that, near the back of the house on the ground floor, the floor feels extra creaky, indicating something is happening near the foundation at that back portion of the property. Stealth DC 21 With a successful Stealth check, the character is able to slip away and investigate one room not part of the normal tea party (areas M10 to M20). See pages 68–69 for descriptions of these areas and what a character can find in them. Heal DC 10 The PC comes across the nearly deaf Baranor the Black sitting alone in a chair in the Great Hall. His face is contorted in a grimace of discomfort as he rubs his left knee. A successful check allows a PC to diagnose the problem with Baranor’s knee and prescribe an effective herbal remedy. In his gratitude, he rambles on about his days as an adventurer, comparing his benefactor to his old cleric friend “Goldie.” The real information Baranor provides is when he mentions the “earthquake” he felt a few nights back, and the few nights before that. He tells the PC he’s complained to Lord Torrance, but neither he nor anyone else has felt them. The tremors were side effects of the excavations under Telicanthus’s mansion. The deaf ex-adventurer felt them because he was able to ignore the distraction of his hearing. Based on his description, the PC can learn that the origin of the tremor was behind the mansion. Insight DC 16 The PC spots Archdean Grimaldi in a conversation with Telicanthus. The Archdean is agitated and asking something about food storage in the city. A successful check reveals that Telicanthus is surreptitiously looking around to see if anyone is paying attention to the conversation, and reassuring the Archdean at the same time. The Archdean concludes the exchange by looking pointedly at Telicanthus’s kitchen and stores before walking off, seemingly pacified. Thievery DC 21 The PC spots Pennel pocket the key to his office. A successful check allows the character to snag the key out of Pennel’s pocket as he passes by on an errand.
M a rc h 2 0 0 9
|
D u n g e o n 16 4
105
Haven of the Bitter Glass
Development Success at the skill challenge means the PCs should be clearly pointed to investigate Telicanthus’s office. Slipping away isn’t a problem. Once there, they should discover area M13 and the secret stairway to the excavation. If the PCs are openly hostile to Telicanthus or question him about excavations, he lies smoothly, claiming that his “respected neighbor must be confused,” if they bring up Baranor’s comments. Lord Torrance is mortified and pulls the adventurers aside to ask them to leave. Telicanthus intercedes on their behalf, however, insisting they stay. He grandly states that he’s “used to such suspicions because of the sins of his poor, deluded fellow githyanki,” and that “he only hopes he can prove to the Heroes of Elsir Vale that he is unlike those creatures who seek to conquer and destroy.” He’s quite convincing in his denials, and short of attacking the githyanki, the PCs are left with little option other than find another way (such as by finding the Bitter Glass) to expose the powerful merchant.
M a rc h 2 0 0 9
|
D u n g e o n 16 4
106
Haven of the Bitter Glass
U4: Sleeping Githyanki Encounter Level 13 (4,000 XP)
Setup 4 githyanki warriors (W) Githyanki mindslicer (M) Telicanthus has three different groups of githyanki performing rituals inside of the Bitter Glass, as the ritual needs to occur continuously. This particular group of githyanki, unless they have a reason to expect danger (such as if the PCs failed the Telicanthus’s Tea Party skill challenge), have not bothered to post a guard and can be easily surprised by a stealthy party. The githyanki do their best to avoid being captured. Three of the githyanki warriors are sleeping when the characters arrive if they’re not expecting trouble. They’re not wearing armor (resulting in an AC of 20) and their weapons are lying near their bedrolls. The mindslicer and another warrior are awake but fatigued, lost in their own thoughts. It is possible that the PCs will not notice the mindslicer immediately. Read the following aloud: You hear the faint sounds of breathing. The narrow tunnels open up into a larger intersection ahead, and you can see several shapes in the near darkness. Allow the githyanki a Perception check to detect the approaching PCs, opposed by the characters’ Stealth checks. Give all the characters a +5 bonus on their Stealth checks unless the githyanki are on alert. If the PCs are carrying open light sources, the githyanki get a +5 bonus on Perception checks to detect them.
Githyanki Mindslicer (M) Level 13 Artillery (Leader)
Medium natural humanoid XP 800 Initiative +11 Senses Perception +12 HP 98; Bloodied 49 AC 27; Fortitude 24, Reflex 25, Will 24 Saving Throws +2 against charm effects Speed 6; see also telekinetic leap m Silver Longsword (standard; at-will) ✦ Psychic, Weapon +18 vs. AC; 1d8 + 2 damage plus 1d8 psychic damage. R Mindslice (standard; at-will) ✦ Psychic Ranged 10; +16 vs. Will; 2d8 + 3 psychic damage. R Telekinetic Leap (move; encounter) Ranged 10; the githyanki mindslicer or an ally within range can fly up to 5 squares. A Psychic Barrage (standard; recharge 6 ) ✦ Psychic Area burst 1 within 20; +16 vs. Will; 1d6 + 3 psychic damage, and ongoing 5 psychic damage (save ends), and the target can’t use daily or encounter powers (save ends). Alignment Evil Languages Common, Deep Speech Skills Arcana +14, History +11, Insight +12 Str 14 (+8) Dex 16 (+9) Wis 12 (+7) Con 14 (+8) Int 17 (+9) Cha 11 (+6) Equipment robes, silver longsword
4 Githyanki Warriors (W)
Level 12 Soldier
Medium natural humanoid XP 700 each Initiative +13 Senses Perception +12 HP 118; Bloodied 59 AC 28 (or 20 without armor); Fortitude 25, Reflex 23, Will 22 Saving Throws +2 against charm effects Speed 5; see also telekinetic leap m Silver Greatsword (standard; at-will) ✦ Psychic, Weapon +17 vs. AC; 1d10 + 5 damage plus 1d6 psychic damage, plus an extra 3d6 psychic damage if the target is immobilized. R Telekinetic Grasp (standard; sustain minor; encounter) Ranged 5; Medium or smaller target; +15 vs. Fortitude; the target is immobilized (save ends). R Telekinetic Leap (move; encounter) Ranged 10; the githyanki mindslicer or an ally within range can fly up to 5 squares. Alignment Evil Languages Common, Deep Speech Skills History +9, Insight +12 Str 21 (+11) Dex 17 (+9) Wis 12 (+7) Con 14 (+8) Int 12 (+7) Cha 13 (+7) Equipment plate armor, silver greatsword
Tactics The mindslicer leads with a psychic barrage. They githyanki fight defensively, trying to back toward area U5. If the fight goes poorly, the githyanki split into a different tunnels, hoping to separate the PCs. The warriors fight to the death, but see Development.
Features of the Area Illumination: A shuttered lantern provides a dim light in this otherwise pitch black area. Rubble: The tunnels are scattered with discarded pick axes and chunks of rubble.
Development If the PCs are routing the warriors, the mindslicer tries to alert the githyanki at area U5. Two come and help, Kle’th alerts the githyanki in area U11, and the others defend the tower entrance at area U5. If Telicanthus is still alive, he is magically alerted by Kle’th.
M a rc h 2 0 0 9
|
D u n g e o n 16 4
107
Haven of the Bitter Glass
U5: Leisure Time Encounter Level 12 (3,700 XP)
Setup 3 githyanki warriors (W) Githyanki mindslicer (M) Kle’th, githyanki mindslicer (K) These githyanki have recently completed their shift performing the ritual of the Bitter Glass. Still shaking somewhat from the psychic emanations they have successfully channeled and calmed, they are having a few drinks before they sleep. The five githyanki sit around a fire at the base of the shattered tower, discussing their boredom and Telicanthus’s plan. One of the githyanki looks considerably older than the others. This is Kle’th, the mindslicer sage who first learned of the existence of the Bitter Glass and who led the team in reconstructing it from ancient notes. He does not have the same warrior mindset that most githyanki have. He is a scholar at heart and would prefer to be in an astral library rather than a dark tunnel. If the PCs approach undetected, read the following: Firelight plays across the rough dirt and stone excavation. You hear the sound of voices ahead. Next to the remains of a shattered stone tower, you see five githyanki sitting around a fire and passing a bottle back and forth. “How many more months?” asks an older one. “Until this world is claimed,” another one answers. “It won’t be long.”
If the githyanki have been warned of the adventurers’ approach, read the following: Firelight plays across the rough dirt and stone excavation. Several alert githyanki stand staring into the tunnel, and they give a shout of alarm when they see you approach. Kle’th, Githyanki Mindslicer (K) Level 13 Artillery
Medium natural humanoid XP 800 Initiative +9 Senses Perception +12 HP 98; Bloodied 49 AC 27; Fortitude 24, Reflex 25, Will 24 Saving Throws +2 against charm effects Speed 6; see also telekinetic leap m Silver Longsword (standard; at-will) ✦ Psychic, Weapon +18 vs. AC; 1d8 + 2 damage plus 1d8 psychic damage. R Mindslice (standard; at-will) ✦ Psychic Ranged 10; +16 vs. Will; 2d8 + 3 psychic damage. R Telekinetic Leap (move; encounter) ✦ Psychic Ranged 10; Kle’th or an ally within range can fly up to 5 squares. A Unstable Balance (standard; encounter) Area burst 3 within 20; +16 vs. Will; 2d6 + 3 damage, and the target is knocked prone. A Psychic Barrage (standard; recharge 6 ) ✦ Psychic Area burst 1 within 20; +16 vs. Will; 1d6 + 3 psychic damage, and ongoing 5 psychic damage (save ends), and the target can’t use daily or encounter powers (save ends). Alignment Evil Languages Common, Deep Speech Skills Arcana +19, History +16, Insight +12 Str 14 (+8) Dex 16 (+9) Wis 12 (+7) Con 14 (+8) Int 17 (+9) Cha 11 (+6) Equipment robes, silver longsword, communication glass linked to Telicanthus
Tactics Once alerted, Kle’th tries to knock attackers prone before fleeing to warn Telicanthus and the githyanki performing the ritual inside the Bitter Glass. The other githyanki attack to the best of their ability, the mindslicer leading with psychic barrage as the warriors concentrate on one target at a time.
Githyanki Mindslicer (M)
Level 13 Artillery (Leader)
Medium natural humanoid XP 800 Initiative +11 Senses Perception +12 HP 98; Bloodied 49 AC 27; Fortitude 24, Reflex 25, Will 24 Saving Throws +2 against charm effects Speed 6; see also telekinetic leap m Silver Longsword (standard; at-will) ✦ Psychic, Weapon +18 vs. AC; 1d8 + 2 damage plus 1d8 psychic damage. R Mindslice (standard; at-will) ✦ Psychic Ranged 10; +16 vs. Will; 2d8 + 3 psychic damage. R Telekinetic Leap (move; encounter) Ranged 10; the githyanki mindslicer or an ally within range can fly up to 5 squares. A Psychic Barrage (standard; recharge 6 ) ✦ Psychic Area burst 1 within 20; +16 vs. Will; 1d6 + 3 psychic damage, and ongoing 5 psychic damage (save ends), and the target can’t use daily or encounter powers (save ends). Alignment Evil Languages Common, Deep Speech Skills Arcana +14, History +11, Insight +12 Str 14 (+8) Dex 16 (+9) Wis 12 (+7) Con 14 (+8) Int 17 (+9) Cha 11 (+6) Equipment robes, silver longsword
3 Githyanki Warriors (W)
Level 12 Soldier
Medium natural humanoid XP 700 each Initiative +13 Senses Perception +12 HP 118; Bloodied 59 AC 28; Fortitude 25, Reflex 23, Will 22 Saving Throws +2 against charm effects Speed 5; see also telekinetic leap m Silver Greatsword (standard; at-will) ✦ Psychic, Weapon +17 vs. AC; 1d10 + 5 damage plus 1d6 psychic damage, plus an extra 3d6 psychic damage if the target is immobilized. R Telekinetic Grasp (standard; sustain minor; encounter) Ranged 5; Medium or smaller target; +15 vs. Fortitude; the target is immobilized (save ends). R Telekinetic Leap (move; encounter) Ranged 10; the githyanki mindslicer or an ally within range can fly up to 5 squares. Alignment Evil Languages Common, Deep Speech Skills History +9, Insight +12 Str 21 (+11) Dex 17 (+9) Wis 12 (+7) Con 14 (+8) Int 12 (+7) Cha 13 (+7) Equipment plate armor, silver greatsword
M a rc h 2 0 0 9
|
D u n g e o n 16 4
108
Haven of the Bitter Glass
Features of the Area Illumination: A small campfire illuminates the otherwise black tunnel, providing dim light. Buildings: The remains of a wizard’s tower, blackened and broken by ancient dragonfire, dominates the cave. The tunnel ceiling arches to over 15 feet (3 squares) high in this area. Rubble: Piles of dirt and stone litter the area, creating squares of difficult terrain.
Development If these githyanki have been alerted by the fighting in the tunnels, they are not sitting quietly. Two warriors have come to aid the sleeping githyanki in area U4, the third warrior and mindslicer defend this tower entrance, and Kle’th descends to the Bitter Glass warn the other githyanki. Kle’th also notifies Telicanthus using his communication glass.
M a rc h 2 0 0 9
|
D u n g e o n 16 4
109
Haven of the Bitter Glass
U10: Inside the Glass Encounter Level 12 (3,900 XP)
Setup 3 githyanki warriors (W) Githyanki mindslicer (M) Bitter Glass The Bitter Glass is a 30-foot-diameter hollow sphere of blue stained glass. A glass bridge without railings spans the interior and provides a place to stand without touching the psionically charged walls of the sphere itself. This rebuilt version of the Bitter Glass is somewhat crude compared to the long-ago destroyed original, but Kle’th and Telicanthus have created a version that functions well enough to satisfy the githyanki’s need for instant communication. For the sphere to transmit communication, a constant ritual must be performed by creatures inside the sphere itself. Telicanthus has had teams of githyanki performing this ritual for months. The teams are both bored and exhausted, but they know that ceasing this ritual, even for a few seconds, creates a psychic backlash that can injure anyone inside the sphere (see below). They tell themselves that their actions are essential for their race’s eventual success in conquering the mortal realm, and they have resigned themselves to the tedium. A fight against intruders is a welcome respite. The Bitter Glass works as an effective communication device due to the ritual that Kle’th and his assistants have been performing in it around the clock. When the PCs attack and disrupt that ritual, it reverts to its old and imperfect functioning. Anyone near the globe is subjected to a babble of loud voices coming from all around them, echoing off the walls and disrupting concentration (see below).
When the PCs enter, read:
3 Githyanki Warriors (W)
The door fades away when you touch it, and you’re looking into a sphere full of blue light. Four githyanki stand on a narrow glass bridge, chanting as they obviously perform a ritual; their voices echoing strangely in the space. Psychic energy courses up and down the walls as they see you and their chanting halts for a second. As soon as the ritual is disrupted, the Bitter Glass attacks as well (see below). The characters can make an Arcana check as soon as the Bitter Glass has attacked once, allowing the characters to know how to circumvent the damage from the device. Arcana DC 23: The psychic effect bombarding the room is emanating from the sphere itself. It can be suppressed temporarily with another Arcana check. Githyanki Mindslicer (M)
Level 13 Artillery
Medium natural humanoid XP 800 Initiative +11 Senses Perception +12 HP 98; Bloodied 49 AC 27; Fortitude 24, Reflex 25, Will 24 (34 against the Bitter Glass) Saving Throws +2 against charm effects Speed 6; see also telekinetic leap m Silver Longsword (standard; at-will) ✦ Psychic, Weapon +18 vs. AC; 1d8 + 2 damage plus 1d8 psychic damage. R Mindslice (standard; at-will) ✦ Psychic Ranged 10; +16 vs. Will; 2d8 + 3 psychic damage. R Telekinetic Leap (move; encounter) Ranged 10; the githyanki mindslicer or an ally within range can fly up to 5 squares. A Psychic Barrage (standard; recharge 6 ) ✦ Psychic Area burst 1 within 20; +16 vs. Will; 1d6 + 3 psychic damage, and ongoing 5 psychic damage (save ends), and the target can’t use daily or encounter powers (save ends). Alignment Evil Languages Common, Deep Speech Skills Arcana +14, History +11, Insight +12 Str 14 (+8) Dex 16 (+9) Wis 12 (+7) Con 14 (+8) Int 17 (+9) Cha 11 (+6) Equipment robes, silver longsword
Level 12 Soldier
Medium natural humanoid XP 700 each Initiative +13 Senses Perception +12 HP 118; Bloodied 59 AC 28; Fortitude 25, Reflex 23, Will 22 (32 against the Bitter Glass) Saving Throws +2 against charm effects Speed 5; see also telekinetic leap m Silver Greatsword (standard; at-will) ✦ Psychic, Weapon +17 vs. AC; 1d10 + 5 damage plus 1d6 psychic damage, plus an extra 3d6 psychic damage if the target is immobilized. R Telekinetic Grasp (standard; sustain minor; encounter) Ranged 5; Medium or smaller target; +15 vs. Fortitude; the target is immobilized (save ends). R Telekinetic Leap (move; encounter) Ranged 10; the githyanki mindslicer or an ally within range can fly up to 5 squares. Alignment Evil Languages Common, Deep Speech Skills History +9, Insight +12 Str 21 (+11) Dex 17 (+9) Wis 12 (+7) Con 14 (+8) Int 12 (+7) Cha 13 (+7) Equipment robes, silver greatsword
Tactics The githyanki are unable to maintain the ritual while fighting, so they do their best to end the fight quickly. They work to bullrush PCs inside the sphere off the pathway, ganging up on one member at a time and dropping them before moving on to the next. While they fight, the psychic energy in the globe begins to take its toll on everyone in the chamber. The githyanki are somewhat resistant to the psychic backlash of the Bitter Glass. They receive a +10 bonus to their Will defense against attacks from the glass, as noted in their statistics. All four githyanki (and Kle’th if present) do not hesitate to move out of the sphere to try and keep characters outside, especially if the PCs show intentions of attacking the sphere with the goal of destroying it. Any creature who does attack the inside of the sphere, which can be done only while inside
M a rc h 2 0 0 9
|
D u n g e o n 16 4
110
Haven of the Bitter Glass
it or in one of the squares adjacent to one of the two portals into the Bitter Glass, becomes the immediate focus of the githyanki’s attacks. Bitter Glass Hazard
Level 14 Blaster 1,000 XP
As the githyanki are forced to cease their ritual, a babbling backlash of psychic energy attacks your mind, causing an immediate and intense pain. Initiative +12 Trigger As soon as one githyanki stops performing the ritual, the Bitter Glass rolls initiative. Special: A creature that touches the Bitter Glass’s walls is subject to the attack, but is that attack’s only target. Attack Standard Action Close burst 10 (centered in the center of the sphere) Targets: Each creature in burst Attack: +18 vs. Will Hit: 2d8 + 5 damage, and ongoing 5 psychic damage (save ends), and the target is dazed until the end of the Bitter Glass’s next turn. Miss: Half damage. Countermeasures ✦ Arcana DC 21 (Standard Action) The character suppresses the glass’s attack until the start of his or her next turn. However, each consecutive round this action is taken, the DC increases by 2. ✦ Dealing 200 points of damage to the inside of the Bitter Glass damages the panes of glass enough to shatter the inside of the device and render it permanently inoperable. Realizing that this is the only way to stop the psychic emanations of the glass requires a DC 23 Arcana check (a free action). The Bitter Glass’s interior has AC 28, Fortitude 26, Reflex 24, Will 26, and is vulnerable 10 thunder.
Features of the Area Illumination: Bright deep blue light, coming from the glowing stained glass sphere itself. Bitter Glass Portals: The portals leading into the Bitter Glass open automatically when a creature stands adjacent to them. Otherwise, they remain closed. They can also be mentally commanded to close (a free action) by a creature adjacent to a portal, something the githyanki make sure to do while defending the sphere. Bitter Glass Surface: The sloped sides of the sphere are rough, requiring DC 20 Athletics checks to climb. Walkway: The glass bridge through the Bitter Glass is 2 squares wide and 6 squares long, suspended 15 feet above the bottom of the sphere. It lacks a railing.
Development If Kle’th fled from area U5, he is also encountered here. He fights to the death at the Bitter Glass, unwilling to give up his life’s greatest work for anything. When the glass is destroyed, one final pulse of psychic energy surges through the chamber. The pulse doesn’t deal any damage, but each character can feel some portion of his or her thoughts carried away by the energy. A DC 23 Arcana check reveals that each PC has had some portion of his or thoughts ripped into the Astral Sea, where some creature or another might find it. Feel free to use this in a future adventure, as you see fit. After all, what are the odds some creature finds the residue of a single creature’s thoughts in the vastness of the Astral Sea?
M a rc h 2 0 0 9
|
D u n g e o n 16 4
111
Haven of the Bitter Glass
Z1: Exposing Telicanthus Encounter Level 16 (7,100 XP)
Setup Telicanthus Pennel 2 githyanki mindslicers 4 githyanki myrmidons This encounter occurs wherever the PCs decide to confront Telicanthus and his secretary Pennel. Telicanthus is an active adversary who is careful not to get in a fight anywhere where doing so would tarnish his public image. For that reason, he is more likely to retreat from a fight in public, particularly if he can later pin any property damage on the heroes to get them arrested or exiled from the city. This changes if the Bitter Glass has been destroyed. Once that happens, Telicanthus has no more reason to keep up his front, and will doubtlessly attempt to take his revenge on the characters. When Telicanthus finally decides to remove the heroes from action, he and his secretary Pennel attack. At heart, however, Telicanthus is overconfident. While he tries not to let it show, he believes that he is a superior creature, and that he does his enemies a favor by gracing them with his presence. Even while being attacked, he quietly congratulates himself for allowing the PCs to fight a foe of his caliber. This would make him insufferable if his true attitude were known, so he carefully conceals it when dealing with the people of Sayre. His ego comes through when he is angry, however, which is the case if the Bitter Glass is destroyed.
Telicanthus’s secretary Pennel is a very different sort of person. Pennel is human and appears as bland as dishwater: neat pale clothing, pale hair, pale eyes, extremely efficient, eidetic memory, and no talent for small talk. Under Telicanthus’s employment and careful psychic grooming, his natural sociopathic tendencies have been honed to a wicked edge. When the PCs decide to confront Telicanthus, it’s likely to be at his mansion. But feel free to allow them to find the githyanki anywhere in the city that they choose. With the evidence they have (the Filth King’s confession, the Bitter Glass beneath his home, and the many githyanki clearly in his employ), they do so with the blessing of Lord Torrance and the Coalition. The governor accompanies the characters to confront Telicanthus with a squad of four city militia, but they stay out of any ensuing conflict. The characters have some time before confronting Telicanthus—at least enough for an extended rest. If they wait more than 24 hours before seeking him out, however, he sends Pennel to murder several prominent citizens in the city before fleeing. In that case, the characters find nothing but a burning mansion when they seek out the githyanki with their accusations.
Telicanthus
Level 16 Elite Controller (Leader)
Medium natural humanoid, githyanki XP 2,800 Initiative +13 Senses Perception +11 Deathless Fanaticism aura 5; when a lower-level ally within the aura is reduced to 0 hit points, it dies if damaged again or at the end of its next turn—whichever comes first. HP 308; Bloodied 154 AC 30; Fortitude 27, Reflex 28, Will 30 Saving Throws +2; +4 against charm and fear effects Speed 6, fly 6 (clumsy) Action Points 1 m/r Mindhammer (standard; at-will) ✦ Psychic Reach 2 or Ranged 10; +20 vs. Will; 2d8 + 7 psychic damage, and the target is slowed until the end of Telecanthus’s next turn and pushed 2 squares. M/R Double Hammering (standard; at-will) ✦ Psychic Telicanthus makes two mindhammer attacks. M Force Switch (standard; recharge 5 6 ) ✦ Force Reach 4; targets two creatures; + 20 vs. Fortitude; 2d10 + 5 force damage, and the targets switch places. Telicanthus’s allies take no damage from this attack. M Suffering Ties (standard; encounter) ✦ Psychic +20 vs. Fortitude; 1d10 + 7 psychic damage, and until the start of Telicanthus’s next turn, attacks that hit Telicanthus deal half damage to Telicanthus and half to the target. Nondamaging effects such attacks impose affect the target instead. Any healing the target gains is halved between the target and Telicanthus. C Binding Suggestions (standard; recharge 6 after being first bloodied) ✦ Psychic Close burst 2; targets enemies; +18 vs. Will; the target is dazed (save ends). Each turn the target starts dazed, Telecanthus can make a secondary attack against that target. Secondary Attack: +20 vs. Will; the target takes 7 psychic damage and is dominated (save ends). Miss: The target takes 2d6 + 7 psychic damage. Alignment Evil Languages Common, Deep Speech Skills Bluff +23, Diplomacy +23, Insight +17 Str 12 (+9) Dex 17 (+11) Wis 18 (+12) Con 18 (+12) Int 21 (+13) Cha 24 (+15) Equipment robes
M a rc h 2 0 0 9
|
D u n g e o n 16 4
112
Haven of the Bitter Glass
Pennel
Level 14 Elite Soldier
Medium natural humanoid, human XP 2,000 Initiative +15 Senses Perception +17 HP 276; Bloodied 138 AC 30; Fortitude 25, Reflex 27, Will 26 Saving Throws +2 Speed 6 Action Points 1 m Crystal Dagger (standard; at-will) ✦ Psychic, Weapon +21 vs. AC; 3d4 + 8 psychic damage, and the target is marked until the end of Pennel’s next turn. r Crystal Strands (standard; at-will) ✦ Psychic, Weapon Ranged 10; +19 vs. Reflex; 3d4 + 7 damage, and the target is pulled 3 squares. M/R Crystal Bloom (standard; at-will) ✦ Psychic, Weapon Pennel makes two basic attacks. M/R Cut Off (immediate interrupt; usable when a target Pennel has marked leaves a square adjacent to Pennel or enters a square adjacent to Telicanthus; at-will) Pennel can make a basic attack against the target. If the attack hits, the target’s movement ends. C Crystal Shards (standard; recharges when first bloodied) ✦ Psychic Close burst 3; +18 vs. Reflex. 2d4 + 7 psychic damage, and the target is immobilized (save ends). Miss: Half damage, and the target is slowed until the end of Pennel’s next turn. Psychic Redirection (immediate interrupt; useable when an attack hits Telicanthus; at-will) Pennel redirects the triggering attack to himself. Alignment Evil Languages Common, Deep Speech Skills Acrobatics +18, Insight +17, Stealth +18, Thievery +18 Str 15 (+12) Dex 23 (+13) Wis 20 (+12) Con 18 (+11) Int 17 (+10) Cha 12 (+8) Equipment robes, crystal dagger, schedule book
2 Githyanki Mindslicers
Level 13 Artillery
Medium natural humanoid XP 800 each Initiative +11 Senses Perception +12 HP 98; Bloodied 49 AC 27; Fortitude 24, Reflex 25, Will 24 (34 against the Bitter Glass) Saving Throws +2 against charm effects Speed 6; see also telekinetic leap m Silver Longsword (standard; at-will) ✦ Psychic, Weapon +18 vs. AC; 1d8 + 2 damage plus 1d8 psychic damage. R Mindslice (standard; at-will) ✦ Psychic Ranged 10; +16 vs. Will; 2d8 + 3 psychic damage. R Telekinetic Leap (move; encounter) Ranged 10; the githyanki mindslicer or an ally within range can fly up to 5 squares. A Psychic Barrage (standard; recharge 6 ) ✦ Psychic Area burst 1 within 20; +16 vs. Will; 1d6 + 3 psychic damage, and ongoing 5 psychic damage (save ends), and the target can’t use daily or encounter powers (save ends). Alignment Evil Languages Common, Deep Speech Skills Arcana +14, History +11, Insight +12 Str 14 (+8) Dex 16 (+9) Wis 12 (+7) Con 14 (+8) Int 17 (+9) Cha 11 (+6) Equipment robes, silver longsword
4 Githyanki Myrmidons
Tactics Pennel absorbs as much damage as possible for Telicanthus until his master decides to escape; once he does, Pennel attempts to slow and delay the attackers while Telicanthus flees for his life. Pennel gladly gives his life if it means that Telicanthus is able to reach safety. Telicanthus will not fight if doing so might harm his reputation and social status. Once he joins a combat, he uses every power possible to confuse and annoy his opponents. He would much rather humiliate someone than hurt them. Once he is bloodied, he focuses on fleeing the scene and extracting vengeance at a later date. Telicanthus has no problems whatsoever with sacrificing Pennel.
Level 12 Minion
Medium natural humanoid XP 175 each Initiative +12 Senses Perception +9 HP 1; a missed attack never damages a minion AC 28; Fortitude 24, Reflex 23, Will 24 Speed 5 m Silver Short Sword (standard; at-will) ✦ Psychic, Weapon +19 vs. AC; 7 damage, plus an extra 5 psychic damage if the target is immobilized. R Telekinetic Grasp (standard; encounter) Ranged 5; Medium or smaller target; +15 vs. Fortitude; the target is immobilized (save ends). Alignment Chaotic evil Languages Common, Deep Speech Str 16 (+9) Dex 14 (+8) Wis 16 (+9) Con 12 (+7) Int 12 (+7) Cha 10 (+6) Equipment chainmail, silver short sword
M a rc h 2 0 0 9
|
D u n g e o n 16 4
113
Haven of the Bitter Glass
Appendix I: New Monsters For more on githyanki, see Monster Manual, page 128.
Githyanki Lancer Githyanki lancers are specially trained githyanki who ride war-dragons into combat. From dragon-back, they use force lance to skewer any foe who opposes them. Githyanki Lancers (G)
Level 14 Skirmisher
Medium natural humanoid XP 1,000 each Initiative +15 Senses Perception +10 HP 134; Bloodied 67 AC 28; Fortitude 26, Reflex 26, Will 25 Saving Throws +2 against charm effects Speed 5; also see telekinetic tether m Psychic Lance (standard; at-will) ✦ Psychic Reach 2; +19 vs. AC; 2d10 + 5 psychic damage, and if the githyanki lancer charged, the target is pushed 2 squares. M Silver Longsword (standard; at-will) ✦ Psychic, Weapon +19 vs. AC; 1d8 + 5 damage plus 1d8 psychic damage, and the githyanki lancer or its mount can shift 1 square. R Mindslice (standard; at-will) ✦ Psychic Ranged 10; +17 vs. Will; 2d8 + 5 psychic damage. Telekinetic Tether (move or immediate reaction when falling; encounter) The githyanki lancer can fly up to 10 squares, fly back to its mount’s saddle, or fall to the ground without taking falling damage. Alignment Evil Languages Common, Deep Speech Skills Acrobatics +16 Str 19 (+11) Dex 18 (+11) Wis 16 (+10) Con 14 (+9) Int 15 (+9) Cha 11 (+7) Equipment scale armor, silver longsword
Githyanki Lancer Tactics A githyanki lancer prefers to fly into battle on its mount, charging with psychic lance to keep foes off balance and out of retaliating range so the githyanki can more easily skirmish. The lancer does not dismount until the battle is clearly over or forced to do so. In the
latter case, telekinetic tether might keep the lancer in the saddle or at least see it safely to the ground. A githyanki lancer uses mindslice while its mount is maneuvering or its foes are otherwise out of reach.
Githyanki Captain Githyanki captains lead vast numbers of warriors and myrmidons into battle. Githyanki Captain Level 13 Elite Soldier (Leader)
Medium natural humanoid XP 1,600 Initiative +11 Senses Perception +10 HP 256; Bloodied 128 AC 29; Fortitude 26, Reflex 25, Will 25 Saving Throws +2, +4 against charm effects Speed 5; also see astral engagement and telekinetic leap Action Points 1 m Silver Greatsword (standard; at-will) ✦ Psychic, Weapon +18 vs. AC; 1d10 + 6 damage plus 1d10 psychic damage, plus an extra 2d10 psychic damage against an immobilized target. r Mindhook (standard; at-will) ✦ Psychic Ranged 10; +17 vs. Will; 2d8 + 3 psychic damage, and the githyanki captain or an ally of the captain’s choice marks the target (save ends). M/R Double Attack (standard; at-will) The githyanki captain makes two basic attacks. R Telekinetic Leap (move; encounter) Ranged 10; the githyanki captain or an ally within range can fly up to 8 squares. C Psychic Upheaval (standard; recharges when first bloodied) ✦ Psychic Close burst 3; targets enemies; +16 vs. Fortitude; 2d10 + 4 psychic damage, and the target is immobilized (save ends). Allies within the area gain 10 temporary hit points. Astral Engagement (move; recharge 4 5 6) ✦ Teleportation The captain teleports 6 squares to a square adjacent to an enemy, and one ally within 5 squares of the captain’s start or end point can charge the same enemy. Alignment Evil Languages Common, Deep Speech Skills: Arcana +15, History +17 Str 21 (+10) Dex 12 (+7) Wis 19 (+10) Con 16 (+9) Int 18 (+10) Cha 16 (+9) Equipment: plate armor, silver greatsword, Bitter Glass communication device
Githyanki Captain Tactics A githyanki captain fiercely leads from the front, entering the fray with astral engagement and pinning enemies down with psychic upheaval. The captain then cuts down immobilized foes, or designates targets with mindhook or a recharged astral engagement. When an opponent bloodies the captain, the captain prefers to attack that enemy, using astral engagement (if possible) or telekinetic leap, followed by psychic upheaval. If the enemy is immobilized, the captain the uses an action point to double attack the same adversary.
M a rc h 2 0 0 9
|
D u n g e o n 16 4
114
Haven of the Bitter Glass
Githyanki Dragonknight Githyanki dragonknights are elite warriors trained to use their pact dragons to devastate their foes. Githyanki Dragonknight Level 14 Elite Skirmisher
Medium natural humanoid XP 2,000 Initiative +16 Senses Perception +11 HP 272; Bloodied 136 AC 28; Fortitude 27, Reflex 27, Will 26 Saving Throws +2; +4 against charm effects Speed 5; see also telekinetic tether Action Points 1 m Psychic Lance (standard; at-will) ✦ Psychic Reach 2; +19 vs. AC; 2d10 + 5 psychic damage, and if the githyanki dragonknight charged, the target is pushed 2 squares. m Silver Bastard Sword (standard; at-will) ✦ Psychic, Weapon +19 vs. AC; 1d10 + 5 damage plus 1d10 psychic damage, and the dragonknight or its mount can shift 2 squares. r Mindslice (standard; at-will) ✦ Psychic Ranged 10; +17 vs. Will; 2d8 + 3 psychic damage. M Knightly Prowess (standard; at-will) The githyanki dragonknight can make two basic attacks. If the dragonknight charged and made a psychic lance attack, the dragonkight or its mount can instead shift 2 squares, then the dragonknight makes a silver longsword attack. M Hatred’s Juggernaut (standard; recharge 6) ✦ Psychic Reach 2; the githyanki dragonknight moves up to it or its mount’s speed, making a psychic lance against any enemy that comes within reach. Telekinetic Tether (move or immediate reaction when falling; encounter) The githyanki dragonknight can fly up to 12 squares, fly back to its mount’s saddle, or fall to the ground without taking falling damage. Alignment Evil Languages Common, Deep Speech Skills Athletics, Acrobatics Str 21 (+12) Dex 20 (+12) Wis 18 (+11) Con 16 (+10) Int 16 (+10) Cha 14 (+9) Equipment scale armor, silver longsword, overcoat
Githyanki Dragonknight Tactics
others focus attacks on immobilized targets. Then they switch roles.
A githyanki dragonknight flies into battle initially with hatred’s juggernaut. It goes on with savage displays of knightly prowess, mixing attacks to bring down as many foes as possible. The knight uses its action point to finish off a foe in dramatic fashion, to unleash a mount’s attack (such as a breath weapon), or to follow up the end of hatred’s juggernaut with a series of attacks on a particular enemy.
Githyanki Lore
Githyanki Myrmidons Githyanki myrmidons are selected from githyanki that were unsuited for full warrior training. They are taught to follow orders without question, surging forward against the enemy, mobbing their foes and never retreating. Githyanki Myrmidon
In addition to the information given in the Monster Manual, a character knows the following information with a successful Nature check. DC 20: Githyanki armed forces contain a number of different warriors. Lancers are specially trained githyanki who ride draconic mounts, and those who excel in this role become githyanki knights. Leading squads are captains, who use their psychic powers to tie up foes and take them apart. Lowliest among githyanki military forces are the myrmidons, who throw themselves at githyanki enemies.
Level 12 Minion
Medium natural humanoid XP 175 each Initiative +12 Senses Perception +9 HP 1; a missed attack never damages a minion AC 28; Fortitude 24, Reflex 23, Will 24 Speed 5 m Silver Short Sword (standard; at-will) ✦ Psychic, Weapon +19 vs. AC; 7 damage, plus an extra 5 psychic damage if the target is immobilized. R Telekinetic Grasp (standard; encounter) Ranged 5; Medium or smaller target; +15 vs. Fortitude; the target is immobilized (save ends). Alignment Chaotic evil Languages Common, Deep Speech Str 16 (+9) Dex 14 (+8) Wis 16 (+9) Con 12 (+7) Int 12 (+7) Cha 10 (+6) Equipment chainmail, silver short sword
Githyanki Myrmidon Tactics Myrmidons work to aid one another and their superiors. Part of the squad uses telekinetic grasp while the
M a rc h 2 0 0 9
|
D u n g e o n 16 4
115
Haven of the Bitter Glass
Laughing Shadows
The Laughing Shadows are a primarily human mercenary company always willing to hire their services to the highest bidder. They specialize in duplicitous assignments, frequently posing as something they’re not.
Laughing Shadow Groveler These members of the Laughing Shadows specialize in appearing weak and helpless, setting up their foes for attacks by the groveler’s allies. Laughing Shadow Groveler (G)
Level 13 Lurker
Medium natural humanoid, human XP 800 Initiative +14 Senses Perception +9 HP 103; Bloodied 51 AC 27; Fortitude 24, Reflex 26, Will 25; +2 to all defenses against marked enemies Speed 7 m Katar (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon +18 vs. AC; 2d6 + 6 damage (crit 18 + 2d6). R Shuriken (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon Ranged 6/12; +18 vs. AC; 2d6 + 6 damage. M/R Covert Attack (immediate reaction; when an ally attacks an enemy the ally has marked because of cringe; requires katar or shuriken; at-will) ✦ Weapon Targets the enemy the triggering ally attacked; the groveler makes a katar attack against an adjacent enemy or a shuriken attack against a nonadjacent enemy. Hit: 4d6 + 6 damage (with katar, crit 30 damage + 2d6). Cringe (standard; requires an ally in the area; at-will) Close burst 10; the groveler chooses up to one ally in the area per enemy in the area. The enemy is considered to be marked by the chosen ally until the end of the groveler’s next turn. Each ally can mark only one enemy in this way. The groveler gains +2 to all defenses against marked enemies. Alignment Evil Languages Common, Draconic Skills Bluff+16, Stealth +15 Str 12 (+7) Dex 22 (+10) Wis 17 (+9) Con 19 (+10) Int 12 (+6) Cha 20 (+11) Equipment leather armor, katar, 10 shuriken, beggar’s garb
Groveler Tactics
Streetfighter Tactics
A groveler begins combat, if possible, with cringe, setting up his enemies for attacks by his allies. Grovelers are never encountered without other Laughing Shadows or similar allies, typically streetfighters. Once enemies are marked, the groveler uses covert attack whenever possible to devastate persistent attackers.
Streetfighters train to move quickly among foes, unwary or otherwise, and tangle up the battlefield. A streetfighter starts out with the showy streetfighteer’s flourish to keep enemies close at hand. Then the streetfighter attacks and marks foes to make later use of cheap shot if those opponents move away.
Laughing Shadow Streetfighter
Laughing Shadow Scrabbler
Some members of the laughing shadows have learned the down-and-dirty, ruthless fighting style of the streets. These rough and scarred mercenaries use whatever weapon is at hand, and don’t shy away from low tactics to win.
Laughing Shadow scrabblers dart in and out of combat, seeking weakness in their foes.
Laughing Shadow Streetfighter
Level 13 Soldier
Medium natural humanoid, human XP 800 each Initiative +12 Senses Perception +9 HP 128; Bloodied 64 AC 29; Fortitude 26, Reflex 25, Will 24 Speed 6 m Katar (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon +20 vs. AC; 2d6 + 6 damage (crit 18 + 1d6), and the target is slowed until the end of the streetfighter’s next turn. R Shuriken (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon Ranged 6/12; +19 vs. AC; 2d4 + 4 damage. M Cheap Shot (immediate interrupt; usable when a slowed target leaves an adjacent square; requires katar; at-will) ✦ Weapon +20 vs. AC; 2d6 + 6 damage, and the target’s movement ends. C Streetfighter Flourish (standard; requires katar; recharge 5 6) Close burst 1; targets enemies; +19 vs. AC; 2d6 + 6 damage, and the target is slowed (save ends). Alignment Evil Languages Common, Draconic Skills Bluff+13, Intimidate +13, Stealth +15 Str 21 (+11) Dex 19 (+10) Wis 17 (+9) Con 16 (+9) Int 11 (+6) Cha 10 (+8) Equipment chainmail, katar, 10 shuriken, beggar’s garb
Laughing Shadow Scrabbler
Level 13 Minion
Medium natural humanoid, human XP 200 each Initiative +12 Senses Perception +9 HP 1; a missed attack never damages a minion AC 27; Fortitude 25, Reflex 27, Will 24 Speed 6 m Short Sword (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon +18 vs. AC; 8 damage, and the scrabbler can shift 2 squares, ignoring difficult terrain. R Shuriken (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon Ranged 6/12; +18 vs. AC; 7 damage. Combat Advantage The scrabbler deals an extra 5 damage against any target it has combat advantage against. Alignment Evil Languages Common Skills Bluff+10, Stealth +15 Str 19 (+10) Dex 18 (+10) Wis 16 (+9) Con 14 (+8) Int 10 (+6) Cha 8 (+5) Equipment chainmail, short sword, 10 shuriken, beggar’s garb
Scrabbler Tactics A scrabbler circles the combat, looking for opportunities to gain combat advantage while throwing shuriken.
M a rc h 2 0 0 9
|
D u n g e o n 16 4
116
Haven of the Bitter Glass
Laughing Shadow Sentry
Laughing Shadow Lore
These vigilant sentries are adroit at posing as less competent household guards or city militia.
A character knows the following information with a successful Nature check. DC 20: The Laughing Shadows are a large, organized mercenary company that specializes in missions in urban environments. Each member carefully learns to be able to blend in to whatever city or town in which they are assigned. They are experts at meshing seemlessly with other locals, whether as beggars or city militia.
Laughing Shadow Sentry
Level 11 Soldier
Medium natural humanoid XP 600 Initiative +9 Senses Perception +13 HP 47; Bloodied 23 AC 27; Fortitude 24, Reflex 22, Will 23 Speed 5 m Halberd (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon Reach 2; +18 vs. AC; 2d10 + 4 damage, and the target is marked until the end of the sentry’s next turn. M Halberd Sweep (immediate interrupt; usable when a target the sentry has marked leaves a square within reach; at-will) ✦ Weapon Reach 2; +16 vs. Fortitude; 1d10 + 4 damage, and the target’s movement ends and it slides 2 squares. M Halberd Trip (standard; requires halberd; at-will) ✦ Weapon Reach 2; +18 vs. AC; 2d10 + 4 damage, and the target is knocked prone. R Crossbow (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon Ranged 15/30; +16 vs. AC; 2d8 + 2 damage. Alignment Unaligned Languages Common, Draconic Skills Streetwise +11 Str 18 (+9) Dex 15 (+7) Wis 16 (+8) Con 16 (+8) Int 11 (+5) Cha 13 (+6) Equipment scale armor, halberd, crossbow with 20 bolts
Sentry Tactics Laughing Shadow sentries work together like a welloiled machine. A sentry will attempt to stay at reach, using halberd trip to keep a foe prone and setting up an attack from an ally who will gain combat advantage against the now-prone target.
Treasure Golem This golem is a treasure guardian, made up of that which it guards—shifting baubles, items, and coins.
Treasure Golem (G)
Level 14 Solo Brute
Large natural animate (construct) XP 5,000 Initiative +5 Senses Perception +6; darkvision, tremorsense 5 HP 700; Bloodied 350; see also berserk attack AC 26; Fortitude 30, Reflex 24, Will 23 Immune disease, poison Saving Throws +5 Speed 6; can’t shift Action Points 2 m Slam (standard; at-will) Reach 2; +18 vs. AC; 2d10 + 6 damage, and the target slides 2 squares or is knocked prone. r Gleamshard (standard; at-will) ✦ Force Ranged 20; +26 vs. AC; 3d6 + 7 force damage, and the target slides 2 squares or is knocked prone. M Double Attack (standard; at-will) The treasure golem makes two basic attacks. M Berserk Attacks (immediate reaction; usable when damaged by an attack while bloodied; at-will) The treasure golem makes two basic attacks against random targets. C Hoard Blast (standard; recharge 5 6) Close burst 3; +22 vs. Fortitude; 2d10 + 7 damage, and prone targets cannot stand until the end of the golem’s next turn. Miss: Half damage. Effect: The golem bursts into its component pieces, filling the area and gaining insubstantial until the start of its next turn, when it reappears within 5 squares of its last space. C Weight of Greed (standard; recharges when first bloodied) ✦ Psychic Close burst 3; +15 vs. Reflex; 1d10 + 7 psychic damage, and the target is dominated until the end of the golem’s next turn. Miss: Half damage. Alignment Unaligned Languages — Str 22 (+13) Dex 10 (+7) Wis 8 (+6) Con 25 (+13) Int 3 (+3) Cha 3 (+3)
Treasure Golem Tactics A treasure golem unleashes weight of greed on its enemies, then uses an action point to attack and knock a couple foes prone. On its next turn, it uses hoard blast. It then resorts to double attack until hoard blast or weight of greed recharges. It moves as it needs
M a rc h 2 0 0 9
|
D u n g e o n 16 4
117
Haven of the Bitter Glass
to, w ithout regard for opportunity attacks, focusing on targets that damaged it most recently or those who have damaged it most. When bloodied, it becomes less careful, not more.
Treasure Golem Lore A character knows the following information on a successful Arcana or Religion check. DC 20: The secrets to creating a treasure golem are occasionally granted to those who worship the Tiamat or Avandra. Wizards and other arcanists have also devised similar techniques, based on the religious techniques. Proper rites make a hoard of treasure into its own guardian. The magic also makes the treasure useless for spending until the monster it comprises is slain.
Bone Sage Bone sages are remnants of evil academics and scribes, lingering in their thirst for knowledge. Bone Scribe
Level 13 Minion
Medium natural humanoid (undead) XP 200 each Initiative +9 Senses Perception +11; darkvision HP 1; a missed attack never damages a minion. AC 27; Fortitude 25, Reflex 26, Will 24 Immune disease Speed 7 m Mind Touch (standard; at-will) ✦ Psychic +16 vs. Will; 4 psychic damage, and the target takes a –2 penalty to Will and is slowed until the end of the bone scribe’s next turn. The bone scribe can shift 1 square. Alignment Evil Languages Common Str 10 (+10) Dex 14 (+9) Wis 8 (+6) Con 20 (+11) Int 23 (+12) Cha 19 (+10)
Bone Archivists
Level 14 Artillery
Medium natural humanoid (undead) XP 1,000 each Initiative +9 Senses Perception +19; darkvision HP 109; Bloodied 54 AC 26; Fortitude 25, Reflex 27, Will 26 Immune disease; Resist 10 psychic; Vulnerable 5 radiant Speed 6 m Mind Touch (standard; at-will) ✦ Psychic +19 vs. Will; 1d10 + 6 psychic damage, and the target takes a –2 penalty to Will and is slowed until the end of the bone archivist’s next turn. The bone archivist can shift 3 squares. r Siphon Memory (standard; at-will) ✦ Psychic Ranged 10; +19 vs. Will; 2d4 + 6 psychic damage, and the target can make only basic attacks or use at-will powers until the end of the bone archivist’s next turn. A Knowledge Barrage (standard; encounter) ✦ Psychic Area burst 2 within 10; targets enemies; +17 vs. Will; 3d6 + 6 damage, and the target is dazed (save ends). Alignment Evil Languages Common Str 12 (+8) Dex 15 (+9) Wis 10 (+7) Con 19 (+12) Int 23 (+13) Cha 20 (+12)
Bone Scribe Lore A character knows the following information on a successful Religion check. DC 20: Bone scribes are undead who hunger for information. They attempt to rip it directly from their victims heads, before recording it elsewhere for posterity. These undead seldom stop until they have extracted every bit of information available, killing the target.
About the Author
In addition to helping run the D&D® fan site EN World (www.enworld.org), Kevin Kulp is a Boston-based writer and computer game designer.
Bone Sage Tactics Eager for knowledge, the bone scribes move forward to attack while an archivist stays near the back of a combat. Bone scribes use their finger bones to scrape thoughts from the target’s head. The archivist uses its knowledge barrage power first, to slow any retreat and knock strong foes off kilter. It then uses to siphon memory, until melee attackers force it to use mind touch. When the bone sages succeed on their attacks, memories from the target appear as words, etching themselves across the creature’s papery skin.
M a rc h 2 0 0 9
|
D u n g e o n 16 4
118
Alliance at Nefelus By Chris Tulach An adventure for 14th-level characters illustrations by Jason A. Engle, Ralph Horsley, William O’Connor, Steve Prescott, Wayne Reynolds, Lars Grant West and Eva Widermann cartography by Mike Schley TM & © 2009 Wizards of the Coast LLC All rights reserved.
“Long have we strove to remain detached from the affairs of the mainland. But this threat taxes us to the limits of our power, and so we reach out to those who have proven themselves time and time again. Perhaps, if you aid us, we will consider assisting your cause as a means of g ratitude.” —Bejam, member of the Thraxinium of Nefelus
April 20 09
|
D u n g e o n 16 5
4
Alliance at Nefelus
“Alliance at Nefelus” is an adventure for 14th-level characters. At the end of the adventure, the PCs should be midway through 15th level. Although this adventure is part of the Scales of War adventure path, it takes the plot in a different direction as new friends and foes are discovered. It also makes a good standalone adventure or is inserted easily into your own ongoing campaign. In this adventure, the PCs are again joined by their friend Amyria, the deva last seen in “Haven of the Bitter Glass,” the previous adventure. She musters the PCs to respond to a call for aid from the island nation of Nefelus, an isolationist magocracy that is under an environmental threat. If the PCs can help put an end to Nefelus’s troubles, Nefelus might be willing to lend their extensive arcane knowledge and naval might to the Coalition.
Background The island nation of Nefelus, a lush tropical realm that has long kept itself isolated from the dealings of the rest of the world, has recently found its tranquil peace disturbed by a threat that even its deva-led mage council (known as the Thraxinium) cannot squelch. Several weeks ago, a mysterious ice floe appeared a few miles off the coast of the island, and within a few days, the warm and pleasant climate of Nefelus began to grow colder, threatening the natural order. Nefelus took action as soon as it was apparent that the conditions were getting more severe. Endowed with a formidable navy to protect themselves from pirates and foreign interlopers, the Thraxinium dispatched vessels to the ice floe to investigate, and if necessary, fight any present threat. However, unusual arctic sahuagin attacked the ships—some speculate
that an unknown force apparently transformed and bolstered them. Only one vessel made it to the ice floe, and no reports came back from its crew. Several days passed, and the Thraxinium debated their next course of action as they did research to combat the threat of the climate change. While they were preparing their next moves, the magical cold emanating from the ice f loe intensified and over the course of one night, it formed an icy ring that cut off any ships bound in or out of the ports. The nation of Nefelus was under siege, and the weather was getting worse. The ice threatens to continue to spread, and possibly engulf the entire island. A few days ago, several members of the Thraxinium reported that they were enacting a ritual that would stave off any further climatic change as long as the forces behind the unnatural cold did not greatly intensify. Although that bought a little time, it still meant that many members of the Thraxinium had to spend considerable resources maintaining the ritual just to keep the island from being overwhelmed, and the icy ring still separated Nefelus from any help by sea. Despite being isolationist, several Thraxi (members of the Thraxinium) still maintained contact with the outside world. Bejam, a deva on the Thraxinium, formed a friendship with a deva named Amyria. She had been working to convince the Thraxinium to join an allied Coalition of the mortal realm intent on defeating a githyanki invasion. But Nefelus had seen nothing of the githyanki save for a single, strange burglary attempt years before, and they’d heard even less. Reluctant to get involved, the Thraxi, through Bejam, politely refused all Amyria’s requests. When the Thraxinium ran out of options to deal with the threat of the ice blockade, however, Bejam turned to Amyria for aid.
What is an Adventure Path? Scales of War is the fourth Adventure Path to appear in the pages of Dungeon® Magazine. But what, you ask, is an Adventure Path? Quite simply, it is a series of related adventures intended to form a complete D&D campaign that takes your players from 1st level all the way to, in the case of Scales of War, 30th level. Previous Adventure Paths, presented with the 3rd Edition D&D® rules, took characters from 1st to 20th level. But with all three tiers in the new edition ripe and ready to explore, we’re pushing the limit with Scales of War. Each tier takes roughly six adventures to traverse, which means we’ll finish off this Adventure Path in about eighteen issues. Each adventure advances characters from between one and a half to two levels of experience. We recognize that not everyone will meet every encounter or complete every quest, however, so periodically, we’ll point you to a supplemental Side Trek or short adventure to keep your PCs on pace. Plus, roughly every few months, Dragon® will feature new support content for Scales of War. Finally, this Adventure Path is intended to function as a complete D&D campaign. That means we’ll be making assumptions about the history of the world as we move along, just as you would in any campaign you run. We’ll be borrowing heavily from the D&D mythology of 4th Edition, as well as all the great ideas that have cropped up in other products over the years—including the pages of past issues of Dungeon! Enjoy your stay in Scales of War, and keep an eye out for next month’s installment.
April 20 09
|
D u n g e o n 16 5
5
Alliance at Nefelus
Bejam’s message found its way to Amyria just before the Coalition’s first meeting in Sayre. Once the events of “Haven of the Bitter Glass” ended, freeing Nefelus became Amyria’s top priority. She approached the Coalition and told them of Nefelus’s problems, and their need for assistance. The Coalition agreed to send Amyria as an envoy to Nefelus in the hopes that aid to Nefelus might bring them out of seclusion and into the battle against the githyanki. They did so despite the protests of the Coalition’s leader, Lord Torrance, who secretly still fears that adding Nefelus to the group will diminish Sayre’s importance. Amyria knew that she’d need assistance in case battle was necessary, and turned to the PCs to accompany her to Nefelus. Chartering a ship called Brindol’s Pride, the adventure begins on board the ship as the characters near the icy ring surrounding Nefelus. The events of “Alliance at Nefelus” take place a few weeks after “Haven of the Bitter Glass” ended.
Adventure Synopsis The characters begin the adventure aboard Brindol’s Pride, a warship f lying under the colors of the Coalition. There, they are briefed by Amyria, a longtime and staunch ally of the characters. Recently she was named special envoy to Nefelus, the island nation magocracy led by a council of devas. On board the ship, they are briefed of the mission ahead—Nefelus is blockaded by an unknown antagonist, who has conjured a massive ice f loe around the island and is assaulting the tropical land with the bitter cold of a northern winter. The first task ahead of the PCs is to enter Nefelus. The ship is equipped with a specially designed ramming bow and a reinforced hull to break through
The Quests In “Alliance at Nefelus,” the PCs attempt to put an end to the drastic climatic changes being put forth from the massive iceberg lair called Icehome, just off the coast of the island of Nefelus. As a result of these actions, Nefelus will aid the Coalition, and the PCs can also attempt to convince one of their important magisters to join the Coalition. In addition, they retrieve an artifact known as the Seed of Winter from Icehome and can bring it back to Nefelus for research, and they can attempt to retrieve one of the members of the last expedition to the iceberg—a githzerai named Uarion. Major Quest—Save Nefelus Nefelus’s tropical climate is threatened by a massive ice floe just off its shore. A ring of ice has formed around the island, and the PCs must find a way to stop the encroaching cold from destroying the island’s environment. Reward: 5,000 XP (and 275 pp—the equivalent of three 15th- and one 14th-level treasure parcels—plus the elemental prism as promised by the Thraxinium).
the ice. The fog coming off the ice mixing with the hot tropical weather makes it particularly difficult to see the ice ring until the PCs are right on it, at which point they notice that they have company—a frost giant contingent patrolling the ice to ensure that none break through from either side. After dealing with the frost giants and breaking through the ice, the ship continues on to Nefelus. Once the PCs arrive in Nefelus, they are taken to quarters to rest while Amyria meets with the T hraxinium. After a short while, Amyria asks the
Major Quest—Persuade Bejam to Join the Coalition Although succeeding in saving Nefelus endears the Nefelese to the PCs, it would be an even greater boon to have one of the Thraxi seated on the Coalition. Reward: 5,000 XP. Minor Quest—Recover the Seed of Winter Although the Nefelese don’t know who is responsible for directing the attack on their island, they do know that the tool being used against them is a legendary artifact known as the Seed of Winter, long since thought to have been in the Feywild. Reward: 1,000 XP. Minor Quest—Retrieve Uarion The only survivor of the previous mission to the iceberg, the githzerai Uarion might still be alive. He is an accomplished mentalist and someone of importance to the Thraxinium. Reward: 1,000 XP.
characters to accompany her to be introduced to Bejam, a member of the Thraxinium. Bejam explains what they know about the icy ring, the climate changes, the Seed of Winter, and the sightings of unusual sahuagin creatures. The characters are asked to journey to the ice floe and put a stop to the punishing cold and blockade that imperils Nefelus. In exchange, the Thraxinium rewards the PCs for their efforts and considers aiding the Coalition. However, time is r unning short for Nefelus; the cold assault is growing and the containment ritual will end soon.
April 20 09
|
D u n g e o n 16 5
6
Alliance at Nefelus
The PCs need to head back through the icy ring, but to arrive at Icehome with little chance of detection, they can travel underwater. They are given three apparatuses of Kwalish to use to make it to the ice floe. Amyria stays behind to negotiate an alliance with Nefelus. The characters attempt to dodge sahuagin patrols and make their way to the ice floe, discovering either the underground entrance to Icehome or the last remaining intact sailing ship of the previous expedition on the surface of the ice. Either way, they run into arctic sahuagin and must fight their way farther into Icehome. Inside Icehome, the characters find a network of caverns occupied by creatures that are apparently subservient to or allied with Chillreaver, a doubleheaded white dragon that they might have glimpsed on their way into Icehome. In addition, they have the opportunity to learn information from a githzerai now allied with Chillreaver that journeyed with the last landing party from Nefelus. As they ascend to the upper levels of Icehome, they must deal with Chillreaver’s personal guards and, finally, the white dragon himself. He is engaged in a ritual to bring the full power of the Seed of Winter to bear on Nefelus, attempting to shatter the containment ritual the Nefelese have in place. The characters must fight Chillreaver and stop the Seed of Winter from generating the unnatural cold. Once the ritual is broken and Chillreaver defeated, Icehome begins to collapse and the characters must flee before they are crushed in the crumbling ice floe.
If they successfully return to Nefelus after defeating Chillreaver and retrieving the Seed of Winter, they can attempt to help Amyria convince Bejam to join the Coalition and fight alongside the forces of good against the githyanki invaders.
Preparing for Adventure “Alliance at Nefelus” has the PCs beginning with a blockade run to enter Nefelus, where they quickly turn around to leave for Icehome, the lair of Chillreaver and source of the Nefelese problem. This adventure is relatively straightforward to start, but you should at least read the introductory material and the information on Chillreaver so you have an idea of what the group’s up against. Most of the combat encounters inside Icehome are easy enough to run with limited prep time, although the first encounter (“H1. Blockade Run”) and first skill challenge (“Approaching Icehome”) should be allocated reading time.
What You Need to Play This adventure includes the encounters the PCs face as they explore and adventure in the area. It also provides tactical maps and more for the adventure. If you and your players haven’t read through the Dungeons & Dragons® 4th Edition rules yet, that is your first best step so that you make certain you understand the rules. Also as mentioned above, read through at least the first of the adventure’s “chapters” before starting. This review enables you to become familiar with the material and the style of presentation. You might also want to take a look at the sections below regarding the adventure format.
Adapting the Adventure “Alliance at Nefelus” is designed with five players in mind. You can adapt the adventure for larger groups easily by adding more treasure and inserting a few extra monsters using the guidelines presented in the Dungeon Master’s Guide®. When adapting the adventure for larger groups, keep it simple. Where possible, just add one monster whose level equals the encounter level for each additional PC. Otherwise, look for appropriate monsters from this adventure (see the Appendix, in particular) and the Monster Manual® or Monster Manual 2 to help stiffen up the resistance. Monster Manual 2 contains a great deal of new monsters appropriate for paragon tier play. This adventure is also designed for 14th-level characters. As written, a slightly larger group of 13thlevel characters can play through the adventure, but be sure to give the characters plenty of chances to take extended rests so that they can have a fair shot at surviving the expedition. For higher-level groups, adapting the adventure takes a bit more work. You need to add monsters and increase the treasure rewards to amounts appropriate for the characters. In all, adjusting the adventure is not too arduous, and with a little work, you can run this scenario for groups of three to eight players, and for characters of 13th through 16th level.
April 20 09
|
D u n g e o n 16 5
7
Alliance at Nefelus
Treasure Preparation As with previous installments of the Scales of War campaign, “Alliance at Nefelus” makes use of the parcel system of treasure rewards as described in the Dungeon Master’s Guide. The characters should accumulate fifteen parcels by the end of the adventure. Of these, they should gain the reward for completing the quests (four parcels for 27,500 gp or 275 pp and the elemental prism), and then whatever treasures they find along the way (the remaining ten). You can
Treasure Parcels Parcel 6 Parcel A: _____________________ I2 Behir Lair. Parcel B: _____________________ I2 Behir Lair. Parcel C: _______________________ I3 Xurg elmek ’s Chamber. Parcel D: _____________________ I4 Uarion’s Fate (on Uarion’s person). Parcel E: _____________________ I5 Icy Sappers (in the crevasse). Parcel 9 Parcel F: ________________________ I 6 Fr o s t G i a n t Enclave. Parcel G: ___________________ I6 Frost Giant Enclave (on the person of Nara of the Waste). Parcel H: ____________________ Chillreaver’s Treasure Chamber. Parcel I: ____________________ Chillreaver’s Treasure Chamber. Parcel J: ____________________ Chillreaver’s Treasure Chamber. Based on the guidelines in the Dungeon Master’s Guide, the following parcels can go in the spaces above. Rely on the wish lists your players gave you for the first eight parcels.
supply these treasures in whatever way you wish, but the Treasure Parcels sidebar presents the most likely rooms to have treasure. During your preparation, assign parcels from those that follow to the rooms in the spaces provided. Use the players’ wish lists to come up with magic items for the first five parcels. (Consider saving at least one or two of the highest level magic items for later in the adventure, after the PCs have acheived 15th level.)
Parcel 1: Magic item, level 18. Parcel 2: Magic item, level 17. Parcel 3: Magic item, level 17. Parcel 4: Magic item, level 16. Parcel 5: Magic item, level 15. Parcel 6: A small wooden box with an elixir of invisibility* and 2 pieces of amber carved into stars (100 gp each). Parcel 7: A sparkling blue diamond worth 5,000 gp and two potions of vitality. Parcel 8: A velvet pouch with four ivory statuettes—a monkey, a snake, an elephant, and a panther (6,000 gp total for the set); and 1,000 gp. Parcel 9: A large sack of gold coins (10,000 gp) minted in a northern land beyond the Winterbole Forest. Parcel 10: A platinum ring with Bahamut’s symbol worth 2,500 gp and an ornate ruby–encrusted silver letter opener worth 1,500 gp. *Found in Adventurer’s Vault™.
Starting the Adventure This adventure begins several weeks after the events in the last Scales of War adventure, “Haven of the Bitter Glass.” The PCs have had a chance to rest and recover, and if they’re a little short on XP before tackling this adventure, you can run them through a side trek to get them to 14th level. Once the adventure begins, there is little time for the PCs to engage in any sort of activities outside the scope of the adventure.
Amyria, Envoy to Nefelus A deva scion of Bahamut and force for good, Amyria is responsible for spearheading the efforts to bring together the Coalition against the githyanki incursion. Amyria has been tasked to become the special envoy to the isolationist island nation of Nefelus, due in part to her heritage (the rulers of Nefelus are all devas) and also because she has shown that she is a capable diplomat. She is passionate, caring, and charismatic. The PCs are her favorites when it comes to getting a job done, and thus she has taken them along to help with Nefelus’s problem. Amyria’s statistics are in the tactical encounter “H1. Blockade Run.”
April 20 09
|
D u n g e o n 16 5
8
Alliance at Nefelus
Striking an Accord
When the players are ready to begin, read the following:
The adventure begins with the PCs aboard the Brindol’s Pride, a specially outfitted caravel that is designed specifically to break through the ice ring that is cutting off the island nation of Nefelus from the rest of the world. Joining the PCs aboard is Amyria, the scion of Bahamut and recently appointed envoy to Nefelus. If the characters have participated in “Den of the Destroyer” or “Haven of the Bitter Glass,” they’re sure to know Amyria.
About a week ago, you left the city of Sayre at the behest of your friend and staunch ally Amyria, a deva scion devoted to Bahamut’s cause and the opposition of evil in the world. She asked you to accompany her on a mission to the isolationist island nation of Nefelus. When she mentioned to you that you should dress for cold weather even though Nefelus’s a tropical island, the questions started flying. She gave you a full briefing as you prepared to depart aboard Brindol’s Pride, an odd-looking caravel with a reinforced hull and a sharpened steel bow.
What the PCs Know The PCs were provided with the following information from Amyria at the outset of the mission. Amyria mentions that more information should be forthcoming once they arrive in Nefelus. The tropical island nation of Nefelus is under assault by a sort of unnaturally cold weather. It is obvious to the Nefelese that this environmental change is being directed by a malign intelligence. Nefelus is an isolationist nation run by a council of deva mages called the Thraxinium. They are known to be among the most knowledgeable arcanists in the world, and their storehouses of information contain secrets lost to the other civilized races. In addition, their navy is incredibly strong and bolstered by their ancient magic. With these two assets, Nefelus has remained fiercely independent until their recent call for aid to Amyria. The chilling weather has become so intense that a ring of ice has formed around the island, trapping their ships and cutting off any travel to or from the
island. Although the Thraxinium is maintaining a ritual to keep the worst of the cold from assaulting the island proper, they cannot maintain it for much longer. Amyria and the Coalition have decided to come to Nefelus’s aid with the hopes that Nefelus will join the Coalition if they are successful. The captain of the caravel Brindol’s Pride volunteered to have his ship fitted with the appropriate equipment to break through ice, and Amyria assembled a team (the PCs) to accompany her to the island. DC 22 Insight: Amyria is keeping something from the characters, which is uncharacteristic of her. If pressed, she admits that she is uneasy about meeting other devas, especially some as ancient as members of the Thraxinium. She is also concerned that if she fails in this task, the Coalition forces will lack a key ally—one that can provide substantial military and magical support.
April 20 09
|
D u n g e o n 16 5
9
Alliance at Nefelus
When the PCs have been briefed, read the following: Your journey to Nefelus is now almost complete. A massive bank of fog looms directly ahead, and the air becomes chilly. A cry comes out of the crow’s nest from the lookout. “Iceberg to starboard!” Looking to the right, you can see a gigantic, shadowed mass far off in the fog, and it stands at least 100 feet tall. You continue on, the waves licking at the hull of the ship, and then finally, after a few more cold hours, the fog begins to lift and you see a thick ring of ice floating up ahead. Smaller chunks of ice, some the size of large wagons, bob up and down in the water near the ship. Just as you see a clear picture of the ice ring and the captain is preparing to ram, you notice that several large forms become visible through the mist. Tactical Encounter: H1. Blockade Run (page 18).
Welcome to Nefelus After their run-in with the frost giant patrol, the ship continues on to the port of Nefelus. You sail on through the cold and fog for another mile or so. Abruptly, the fog lifts, the sun shines, and you are awash in the steamy heat of a tropical paradise. As the ice rapidly melts off the ship’s bow, you see a city rise before you, clinging to the massive cliffs of an inlet. All around you in the bay, fishing boats and naval vessels meander about, clinging close to the shores. Many more are docked along the cliff shores. Switchback stairs, walkways, and small wooden buildings dot the lush cliffsides. At the far top of the cliffs, hundreds of feet in the air, larger wooden structures are packed tightly together, huddled close to the cliff’s edge and away from the dense rainforest that surrounds the city. At the horizon, a great domed structure rises above all to dominate the skyline; from this distance, it looks like a temple or perhaps a university.
Amyria explains to the PCs that the Nefelese don’t have many visitors from the mainland, and it is both an honor and a privilege to be allowed to enter as guests. She also explains that Nefelus is both the name of their capital and nation, and that few other settlements are on the island. She can also provide most of the information in the sidebar on Nefelus if asked (except for the names of the taverns and supply shops), since she has been briefed by the Coalition upon being appointed special envoy.
Nefelus’s History A character knows the following information with a successful History check. DC 11: Nefelus is an island nation ruled by a council of deva mages called the Thraxinium. Nefelus has one of the largest known contingents of devas in the world; some say that almost the entire island is sacred ground and most devas reincarnate here. All citizens of prominence are devas. The Nefelese have remained isolationist for at least the last two centuries, having little contact with the mainland.
April 20 09
|
D u n g e o n 16 5
10
Alliance at Nefelus
DC 18: The Nefelese believe that knowledge and magical prowess are the two greatest attributes an individual can possess. Their ancient and massive Great Library, which also serves as their governmental seat, university, and temple to Corellon and Ioun, is said to contain secrets long lost to the rest of the world.
NEFELUS Capital and only city of the tropical island nation bearing the same name, Nefelus is built among the vegetation on either side of the high cliffs of an inlet. Population: 32,500; few live more than a mile from the cliffside shores, since the rainforest beyond is dense. Most of the residents are devas; there is a minority population of eladrin, elves, gnomes, half-elves, and humans here. The rest of the races are unknown to Nefelus, although some say that dwarves, dragonborn, and goliaths live in the mountains in the interior of the island. Government: Nefelus is a magocracy, ruled by a council of seven deva mages called the Thraxinium. The council is elected once every ten years by devas that possess the ability to cast rituals. No other Nefelese citizens are allowed to vote for the Thraxinium. The government sits in the Great Library, a massive domed structure that rises above all other buildings and is also the university, library, and main temple complex to Corellon and Ioun. In foreign affairs, Nefelus is isolationist, conducting only limited trade and relations with the outside world.
DC 23: The Nefelese have lived on this island for as long as anyone can remember, and in times past, they used to trade and relate to the other nations of the world. However, a threat from the Elemental Chaos more than two centuries ago almost destroyed their idyllic culture. They blamed the other civilizations for their ignorance, and after ensnaring the threat and locking it away in the world, withdrew almost all ties to the mainland.
Defense: Nefelus is without a standard army or militia, having rebuked any external threats with their magic or naval might. Rather, they have the Nefallum, an organized military force consisting of approximately 100 deva mages, answerable to the Thraxinium. They also have a 200-ship navy known as the Sea Sentinels, consisting of about 2,500 officers, sailors, and marines. Their naval vessels are often powered by magic and are considered some of the finest crafted in the world. Inns: Due to its isolationist nature, there is little profit to be had for an innkeep. Those that seek boarding can arrange such with a boarding house. Taverns: Navah’s House of Spirits, Gertie’s Brown Bottle, The Green Parrot. Supplies: Gamal’s Gear, Nefelus Outfitters. Temples: The Great Library (Corellon and Ioun), The Valorous Spire (Bahamut), Brighthall (Pelor); Melora is worshiped at small shrines in most homes and by sailors.
Meeting Bejam Meeting the deva Thraxi is an important event. The PCs have the chance to make a good impression on the leadership of Nefelus. Roleplaying Encounter: Meeting Bejam (page 21). Once the PCs have agreed to help Nefelus out, Bejam escorts them out of the sitting room into the entry hall where the PCs meet up with Amyria. He asks the PCs if he can provide any mundane provisions for the PCs, and he offers up spiked ice shoes if the PCs want them. With Amyria in tow, Bejam escorts you down one of those mysterious hallways that leads farther into the Great Library. At the end of the hall, a spiral staircase leads down into the darkness. As you descend down, softly glowing orbs affixed to the walls light your way. The stairs continue for hundreds of feet. Eventually, you come to a door with a strange series of sigils on its face. Bejam softly intones some words and the sigils flash. He opens the door, revealing a workshop with all sorts of tools and arcane objects lying about on various tables. Beyond the workshop, the cavernous room is what looks to be a dock, but no tunnel leads out into a waterway. Floating in the pool are three curious objects; they look like giant silvery lobsters with glass windows where their eyes should be. You can see seats and a number of levers through the windows; these appear to be a sort of vehicle. Bejam explains that those three vehicles are known as apparatuses of Kwalish, named after the wizard that invented them. He then continues to brief the PCs on their mission in a conversational manner. ✦ When we realized that the first ships were attacked and the ice ring blockaded us, we prepared these vehicles for use. They are submersible craft.
April 20 09
|
D u n g e o n 16 5
11
Alliance at Nefelus
✦ The PCs are to pilot the apparatuses of Kwalish to the iceberg so they arrive without much notice. The previous attempts at traveling by ship and the presence of the ice ring make conventional means of getting there riskier. ✦ Each apparatus can carry two people. One of the two needs to be piloting at all times; the other should keep lookout and can operate the claws if needed. The vehicles are equipped on the lever console with a homing arrow that has been attuned to the iceberg such that the arrow always points toward the iceberg. ✦ It should take approximately 3 hours to reach the iceberg from here. The vehicles are easy enough to pilot. You need to surface the vessels after you arrive so that the air can be replenished; there’s only enough air in one of these to take you there. (Bejam gives the PCs a quick course in piloting the apparatus.) After your piloting instructions, Bejam assembles you all at the dock. “I have two more items for you to take with you. I am certain that they will be of aid to you on the mission.” He produces a small flickering prism and a scroll tube from his robe. “This object is called an elemental prism. We know that the Seed of Winter grants creatures under its influence resistance to cold attacks, and the prism allows the user to circumvent such defenses while providing the user with protection.” “The ritual inked on this scroll is called Solace Bole. It will transport you to a small secluded place in a pocket plane where you can rest and regroup. Time will pass normally there, but when you return, only an hour will have gone by. With the short amount of time we have before our defenses are shattered, you might find this necessary.”
Statistics for the apparatus of Kwalish can be found in Adventurer’s Vault (page 17), and statistics for the elemental prism and the Solace Bole ritual are located in Appendix II (see page 50). The elemental prism is considered a treasure parcel for the party, since they keep it at the conclusion of the adventure. Bejam can also obtain any other mundane provisions the PCs think that they might need for the journey, including spiked ice shoes that might provide them with better grip on areas of slick ice, at the cost of speed (see “Using Ice Shoes” on page 13). Bejam wishes the PCs good luck on their mission and helps the PCs enter the vehicles if needed. As the PCs are ready to depart in the submersibles, read: Amyria asks one of you to reopen the hatch. She leans in and says quietly, “One last thing before you leave. I think that it might be possible to convince Bejam to join the Coalition as a representative of Nefelus. I will stay here and attempt to work toward that goal, but ultimately it will depend on the success of your mission. May the platinum dragon bring justice to our enemies.”
Approaching Icehome Once inside the apparatuses, the PCs must travel through the depths of the sea to Icehome. Skill Challenge: SC1. Traveling to Icehome (page 23).
Icehome Constructed from Chillreaver’s will and the power of the Seed of Winter, Icehome is the epicenter of the climate changes and the white dragon’s lair. It is still continuing to grow, and a floating ice bridge miles long connects it to the ice ring off the coast of Nefelus. Only two entrances lead into Icehome; either through the mountainous calderalike opening at the top of the iceberg (which the dragon, ice gargoyles, and frost giants use), or the undersea entrance that the arctic sahuagin use. Icehome was formed only recently, and the bottom levels of the iceberg lair are still in a rough state. Chillreaver has concentrated most of his recent energy on creating the ice ring blockade that surrounds Nefelus and hasn’t had the opportunity yet to refine the under-dwellings. Icehome consists of three levels. On the lowest level, the arctic sahuagin baron Xurgelmek and an eye of frost beholder maintain order among the other arctic sahuagin and their pets. This level is also just below the surface of the sea, and the entrance to Icehome is underwater. This level is connected to the second level by a shaft that the beholder commonly uses to give reports on the sahuagin to the frost giants. Frost giants rule the second level of Icehome; in particular, a frost giant ice shaper named Nara of the Wastes heads up the forces. In addition, Chillreaver has designated this level as the place to keep prisoners, since the frost giants are better organized and less prone to outright savagery than the sahuagin. An ice bridge leads directly up to the third level. The top level is Chillreaver’s lair and is the most refined of the three levels. Chillreaver has begun the process of shaping the ice into a grand fortress for
April 20 09
|
D u n g e o n 16 5
12
Alliance at Nefelus
himself, and his ice gargoyle creations wait patiently for his instructions in the entry hall. The dragon’s main chamber is where he keeps the Seed of Winter, and he attends to it regularly, guiding its power with his will. In Chillreaver’s treasure room, a shaft leads out the top of Icehome, through the caldera.
Features of Icehome The following features are common in Icehome. Illumination: The inside of Icehome is illuminated by a strange soft glow emanating from the walls of the chambers. Unless otherwise noted, all areas are brightly lit. Underwater areas are dimly lit.
Walls and Floors: Since Icehome is constructed completely of ice, it stands to reason that traversing the ground might be a little hazardous. Thankfully, the lower two levels are spotted with snow and are easier to traverse. On these two levels, unless otherwise noted, the terrain is treated as normal terrain. The top level is slick, however, and creatures without ice walk (or another means of travel such as flying or teleporting) treat the terrain as difficult terrain and are moved 1 extra square when subjected to forced movement. Using Ice Shoes: If a PC is wearing ice shoes (either given to them by Bejam or found in Icehome), it gives them –1 speed, but they are considered to have ice walk. Stalagmites: Many stalagmites are on the two lower levels of Icehome; these are treated as blocking terrain, but creatures can cut the corners while moving around them. Frigid Cold: Icehome’s interior and exterior is considered an area of cold weather. Every 8 hours a PC is in Icehome without resistance to cold, the PC must succeed on a DC 22 Endurance check or lose a healing surge. If the PC has no healing surges left when the check is failed, the PC loses hit points equal to the character’s level. See the Dungeon Master’s Guide, pages 158–159 for more information.
Extended Rests Taking extended rests at the wrong place in Icehome is difficult. In addition, should Chillreaver’s forces go on alert, the situation becomes dicey for the PCs. Also, the PCs need to consider an element of time— they have less than 24 hours to stop Chillreaver before Nefelus’s magical defenses fall and the island is assaulted by the climate change.
Investigating Icehome’s Exterior If the PCs decide to investigate the surface of Icehome instead of going inside the undersea entrance, they find an intact Nefelese sailing vessel pulled partially ashore. If they go aboard, it is clear that the ship has been ransacked of all valuables, and there appears to have been a bloody battle, although no crew remains. The ship is otherwise in sailing condition, and with a crew of four, can be readied quickly to depart. A DC 23 Perception check outside the ship reveals webbed tracks leading back to the sea and drag marks spotted here and there with blood. Uarion’s tracks up the side of the iceberg have long since been concealed by the wind and snow. If the PCs tarry too long here, they might encounter a frost giant patrol consisting of three frost giant scouts and a frost giant (a level 14 encounter worth 4,600 XP).
However, the PCs do have a few options. First, the Solace Bole ritual should allow the PCs to disappear from the area, rest up, and return with only 1 hour passed. This can be absolutely critical when used at the right time, since it gives the party an extended rest on demand. The other option to resolve a more mundane, 6-hour extended rest is to clear a level of Icehome and then camp in the cleared level. Most of the creatures don’t journey into the levels below where they normally live, so the party should be relatively safe if the denizens of Icehome aren’t actively looking for the PCs.
April 20 09
|
D u n g e o n 16 5
13
Alliance at Nefelus
If the PCs are careful enough, they could have two extended rests within the 24-hour time frame, thanks to the ritual. This should be sufficient for groups that manage their resources effectively.
1. Entrance Cavern This area is where the arctic sahuagin guards and raiders congregate. The undersea entrance opens up here onto the icy cavern floor. To the southeast, a water-filled tunnel flows into Xurgelmek’s chamber. Tactical Encounter: I1. Entrance Cavern (page 24).
2. Behir Lair Natural stairs ascend up into this expansive cavern. The floor here is dotted with stalagmites, as with other areas of this level. Two ledges, one to the east and the other to the south, connect with Xurgelmek’s chamber and rise 10 feet from the floor. The sahuagin keep an icetouched behir that frost giants brought recently. The icetouched behir has been affected by the Seed of Winter, and it has been kept happy by a steady diet of Nefelese from their last failed attempt to investigate Icehome, but it grows hungry again. Tactical Encounter: I2. Behir Lair (page 26).
3. Xurgelmek’s Chamber The leader of the arctic sahuagin, a baron named Xurgelmek, dwells in the western half of this chamber. A 20-foot high ledge splits the chamber in half, and a beholder eye of frost dwells in the other half of the chamber, keeping guard on the shaft leading up to the second level and where the frost giants dwell. Tactical Encounter: I3. Xurgelmek’s Chamber (page 28).
4. Elemental Farm An eerie glow bounces off the stalagmites in this room. To the west, a pair of ledges rises up to give a commanding view of the room. Chillreaver enjoys projects, and several of the stalagmites in this room are cocoons for servitor elementals that are waiting to be activated. Uarion, the missing githzerai mindmage, has also fallen under the sway of Chillreaver and the Seed, and they are here, as well. Uarian has oversight of the elementals. The chamber exits in a tunnel to the north. Tactical Encounter: I4. Uarion’s Fate (page 31).
5. Umber Hulk Lair The defining feature of this chamber is the crevasse splitting the ice in the center of the room. More stalagmites dot the floor, and a newly excavated tunnel in the southeast region of the chamber leads to the frost giant enclave. Another tunnel leads to the north, but it is partially blocked by a massive stalagmite. Tactical Encounter: I5. Icy Sappers (page 34).
6. Frost Giant Enclave This massive chamber is the home of the frost giants. A slippery ice bridge rises to the grand hall on the next level, and a cold stream pools up near a natural staircase on the far side of the ice platform, nearly cutting the room in two. Unlike the other chambers on this level, the whole of the floor is devoid of stalagmites. Nara of the Wastes keeps her retinue here, and they use their linked portal to travel back to their northern home when necessary. Tactical Encounter: I6. Frost Giant Enclave (page 35). April 20 09
|
D u n g e o n 16 5
14
Alliance at Nefelus
7. Grand Hall
9. Treasure Chamber
Chillreaver’s refinements start to show in this room, since it appears to be constructed with precision rather than crudely or naturally shaped. The room contains six ice pillars that lead into the main chamber, where a number of ice gargoyles stay motionless and await the commands of their master or unauthorized visitors. A secret door to the south leads to the treasure chamber, and to the east an illusory sliding ice wall provides access to Chillreaver’s main chamber. Tactical Encounter: I7. Gargoyles in the Hall (page 38).
Accessible only through secret entrances to the north and west, this chamber has a platform 30 feet above the floor that cuts the room in two. Icy pillars mark the boundary of the platform and the floor below. On the platform is Chillreaver’s treasure hoard, as well as an exit shaft leading out of Icehome to the top of the iceberg. Illumination: This area is brightly lit. Ceiling: The ceiling is 60 feet from the lower floor. Floor: The floor here is treated as difficult terrain for anyone moving on it without ice walk. In addition, creatures without ice walk standing on the floor are moved 1 additional square when subjected to forced movement. Platform: Roughly half of the room is 30 feet above the lower floor. On this platform are the interesting baubles and spoils of Chillreaver’s conquests (his treasure parcels are found here). Exit Shaft: This smooth ice shaft is 15 feet in diameter and heads out the top of Icehome (see “Escape from Icehome” for more information). It requires a DC 30 Athletics check to climb up it. After 40 feet, the terrain becomes a bit easier to climb since it gradually slopes upward for another 40 feet (DC 10 Athletics check to climb) before again becoming a 50-foot sheer climb to the top of the rim (DC 25 Athletics check to climb).
8. Chillreaver’s Chamber This impressive chamber is dominated by a pedestal that rises 50 feet from the floor. On top of the pedestal is the Seed of Winter, glowing with the cold beams of the ten silver mirrors set into alcoves along the north and south sides of the top level walkway. Along the eastern wall is a massive dais inscribed with runes of power that Chillreaver uses to augment the effects of the Seed of Winter. To the south, a secret door allows access to the treasure chamber. Tactical Encounter: I8. Chillreaver’s Seed (page 40).
April 20 09
|
D u n g e o n 16 5
15
Alliance at Nefelus
Escape from Icehome Upon significantly reducing the Seed of Winter’s power, the magic energy sustaining Icehome begins to unravel and the structure starts to collapse. The PCs must move away from the iceberg before it completely collapses! When the PCs disable the Seed of Winter trap, read: The Seed of Winter is knocked free of its position on the pedestal. A crackling blast of white frost resonates out from the Seed, through the room, and beyond. After 5 more combat rounds (if necessary), read: The floor begins to vibrate as a rumbling sound is getting increasingly louder. That noise is soon overtaken by a deafening “Crack!” You soon come to the conclusion that the iceberg is crumbling apart! The PCs must now participate in a skill challenge to escape from Icehome before it becomes their tomb. It doesn’t matter which way they go—down to the undersea entrance to take off in the apparatuses of Kwalish or up to the top of the iceberg to make their way back down to the shore and the last Nefelese vessel out (see “Investigating Icehome’s Exterior” on page 13 for more information about the Nefelese ship). If the PCs are still engaged in combat with Chillreaver, it might make for an exciting finale to weave the skill challenge as the characters escape the crumbling iceberg in with the battle. Skill Challenge: SC2. Escape from Icehome (page 43).
Return to Nefelus After the PCs escape from the destruction of Icehome, they can return back to Nefelus to report the details of their mission to Amyria and Bejam, and then they can attempt to convince the Thraxus to become part of the Coalition. With the defeat of Chillreaver and the destruction of his iceberg lair, the weather begins to warm. As you approach the island nation, the icy ring has already begun to crack and break into swiftly melting floes of ice. After the PCs dock their vessel, they are taken back to the Great Library to meet once again with Amyria and Bejam. The PCs can relay what has occurred on the iceberg. If the PCs brought back the githzerai mindmage Uarion, Bejam is thankful for his return, and promises to have their best priests tend to him. If the PCs return with the Seed of Winter, Bejam asks to have the Thraxinium study it before handing it back to them. If the PCs mention the silver mirrors used to augment the power of the Seed of Winter: Bejam looks concerned at this news. “Ten, you say? We are still missing a few more, and if their magic can be perverted to power a fell artifact, who knows for what else the mirrors have been appropriated.” When the PCs are finished telling their story, read: “Our gratitude runs deep for what you’ve done today. We will reward you handsomely for your efforts, and you can be sure that Nefelus will provide aid to your cause on the mainland. Would there be anything else you’d ask of us?” You catch Amyria’s eye as Bejam awaits your answer.
April 20 09
|
D u n g e o n 16 5
16
Alliance at Nefelus
If the PCs decide to take Amyria’s cue, they might ask Bejam to personally join the Coalition on behalf of his nation. Skill Challenge: SC3. Convincing Bejam (page 44).
Concluding the Adventure The PCs have defeated Chillreaver and saved the island nation of Nefelus from a great disaster. In so doing, the Nefelese have decided to end their isolation and are sending both magical and naval aid to the Coalition. If they were convincing enough, the PCs might have persuaded Bejam, one of the Thraxinium of Nefelus, to personally join the Coalition to give his people a voice in the fight against the githyanki threat. After a few days of rest in the tropical island weather, Amyria and Bejam are ready to return to the mainland and to the Coalition. Amyria speaks little of her recently discovered past with the Nefelese. As promised, the Seed of Winter is returned to the PCs, who are told that it is vitally important that one of them hold on to it until its true purpose becomes known. They can relate the story of the Seed of Winter from their research (see Appendix 2 for more information). Uarion is nursed back to health, since the changes wrought by Chillreaver and the Seed fade within hours of his return to Nefelus.
What Have the PCs Learned? At the conclusion of “Alliance at Nefelus,” the PCs should learn the following information. ✦ The isolationist island of Nefelus, known for its vast stores of ancient knowledge and formidable navy, has decided to aid the Coalition. ✦ Bejam, a deva spellcaster and member of the magocracy that governs Nefelus, has (most likely) decided to accept a seat on the Coalition. ✦ The PCs have recovered an artifact known as the Seed of Winter from a two-headed white dragon known as Chillreaver. The artifact was given to Chillreaver by a fomorian king from the Feywild named Cachlain. ✦ Many silver mirrors that were placed all around the world and used as communication devices by the Nefelese have gone missing. Some turned up in Chillreaver’s lair, having been repurposed for augmenting the Seed. Many more are still missing. ✦ Members of the Coalition have been attacked and possibly slain, and the council is falling into chaos. The Coalition is looking for a new leader.
Read the following at the conclusion of the adventure, which leads the PCs into the next installment of the Scales of War adventure path, “Throne of the Stone-Skinned King.” As you assemble at the dock in Nefelus, Bejam gives his regards to his assembled family and friends. While Bejam is distracted with his goodbyes, Amyria leans in to speak with you in a troubled tone. “I have just received a message from Fariex. He is brief, since he communicated by using a Sending ritual. The Coalition has suffered great losses. They are in chaos and in dire need of new leadership. We must return immediately.”
April 20 09
|
D u n g e o n 16 5
17
Alliance at Nefelus
H1: Blockade Run Encounter Level 18 (10,800 XP)
Setup 1 Amyria, Envoy to Nefelus (A) 5 frost giant scouts (S) 3 frost giants (F) As the ship Brindol’s Pride closes in on the icy ring to break through the frozen blockade, a frost giant patrol attacks the PCs and possibly the ship. As Brindol’s Pride approaches the ice ring, read: Several frost giants take form out of the freezing fog. Some wield enormous frozen greataxes and others draw back frosty bows with ice arrows. They are positioned on the ice ring, where they are preparing to attack, while the ship continues to move toward the ice at ramming speed! The PCs are on the deck of the ship when combat begins, along with Amyria. Make sure to roll initiative for Amyria along with the PCs, since she leaps into the fray to fight the giants as well. You might wish to make a copy of Amyria’s stat block and hand it to one of the more experienced players to control her for this fight, or if a PC falls unconscious, allow that player to play her until his or her character is back in the action.
Development
On each subsequent turn, the ship breaks through part of the ice ring. Move the ship forward 1 square. Once it is completely free of the ice ring (no ship squares are in the squares that were occupied by the ice ring), it continues forward at a speed of 6 squares. The PCs might need to head back on the ship at that point if they have disembarked to fight.
Tactics Unless played by another player, Amyria readies an action to jump off the ship and charge the nearest giant when the ship contacts the ice ring. She attempts to rally the PCs close enough to her to affect them with crusader’s assault and the aura of recovery. The frost giant scouts attempt to keep the PCs at range, and they open up with their chillshards if they can affect multiple PCs on the ship. They continue to move and shoot with icy arrows, and they even consider jumping onto an ice floe if it gives them a tactical advantage. When the last of the scouts becomes bloodied, he attempts to flee the combat, running along the ice ring back toward Icehome (which is about 2 miles from this area). The frost giants attack any PCs that come close enough to them; if they have no real options, they start attacking the ship with their greataxes. They use their handaxes only if there’s no other option that presents itself. Unlike the scouts, the frost giants fight to the finish.
Amyria (A)
Level 14 Elite Soldier (Leader)
Medium immortal humanoid XP 2,000 Initiative +16 Senses Perception +12 Aura of Recovery aura 3; allies that start their turn in Amyria’s aura gain a +2 bonus to all saves until the start of their next turn. HP 252; Bloodied 126 AC 30; Fortitude 24, Reflex 27, Will 28 Resist 10 radiant Saving Throws +2 Speed 8 Action Points 1 m Longsword (standard; at-will) ✦ Radiant, Weapon +21 vs. AC; 1d8 + 7 damage, and the target is marked until the end of Amyria’s next turn. While so marked, if the target doesn’t attack Amyria, the target takes 7 radiant damage. M Double Attack (standard; at-will) ✦ Radiant, Weapon Amyria makes two longsword attacks. M Crusader’s Assault (standard; requires longsword; at-will) ✦ Radiant, Weapon +21 vs. AC; 1d8 + 7 damage plus 1d8 radiant damage, and one of Amyria’s allies within 10 squares can make a basic attack as a free action against the same target. R Bahamut’s Accusing Eye (standard; at-will) ✦ Cold, Radiant Ranged 10; +18 vs. Reflex; 2d8 + 7 cold and radiant damage, and ongoing 5 cold and radiant damage and the target is slowed (save ends both). Memory of a Thousand Lifetimes (free, when the Amyria makes an attack roll, a skill check, or an ability check and dislikes the result; encounter) Amyria adds 1d6 to the triggering roll. Alignment Lawful good Languages Common, Draconic, Supernal Skills Diplomacy +15, Religion +17 Str 10 (+7) Dex 12 (+8) Wis 21 (+12) Con 12 (+8) Int 18 (+11) Cha 16 (+10) Equipment plate armor, longsword
Roll initiative for the ship and add a +2 modifier. When it comes to the ship’s initiative, the ship moves straight forward until it reaches the ice ring, and then slams into the ice. Make an attack at +18 vs. Fortitude against all characters standing on the deck of the ship when it rams the ice ring. On a hit, the target is knocked prone.
April 20 09
|
D u n g e o n 16 5
18
Alliance at Nefelus
Features of the Area Illumination: The fog provides concealment to targets 10 squares or farther away. Ice Ring: The ring has enough snow on top to provide traction, and it is treated as normal terrain. Ice Floes: A number of ice floes are present in the water near the ship and the ice ring. These are all a bit slippery and are treated as difficult terrain. A creature subject to forced movement while on an ice floe is moved an additional square. Creatures with ice walk ignore the difficult terrain and additional forced movement. Brindol’s Pride: The ship has a crew of 12 besides Amyria and the PCs, 300 hit points, a swim speed of 6 squares, AC and Reflex defenses of 2, and a Fortitude defense of 30. If the ship drops to 0 hit points, its hull is breached and it starts to sink. Its movement is reduced to 0, and it sinks into the sea in 3 rounds. The PCs might need to think quickly to save the crew and they have to swim one mile in freezing cold water (see the Dungeon Master’s Guide, page 159, to see how characters are affected by frigid cold) to the port of Nefelus before they are rescued.
Aftermath Keep in mind to divide the XP share by an extra participant due to Amyria’s assistance in the combat. So, if you have five PCs, you should award each PC onesixth of a share instead of one-fifth. When the encounter is finished and the ship has broken through the ice ring, go to “Welcome to Nefelus” on page10.
April 20 09
|
D u n g e o n 16 5
19
Alliance at Nefelus
5 Frost Giant Scouts (S)
Level 15 Artillery
Large elemental humanoid (cold, giant) XP 1,200 each Initiative +13 Senses Perception +17 HP 115; Bloodied 57 AC 28; Fortitude 26, Reflex 28, Will 27 Resist 15 cold Speed 9 (ice walk) m Icy Spear (standard; at-will) ✦ Cold, Weapon Reach 2; +20 vs. AC; 1d10 + 6 cold damage. r Icy Arrow (standard; requires longbow; at-will) ✦ Cold, Weapon Ranged 20/40; +22 vs. AC; 1d12 + 8 cold damage, and the target is slowed until the end of the frost giant scout’s next turn. A Chillshards (standard; recharge ⚄ ⚅) ✦ Cold, Weapon Area burst 1 within 20; +20 vs. Fortitude; 1d12 + 8 cold damage, and the target is slowed and cannot take immediate or opportunity actions until the end of the frost giant scout’s next turn. Aftereffect: The target is slowed until the end of the frost giant scout’s next turn. Tundra Hunter (standard; recharges when first bloodied) The frost giant makes a melee or ranged attack. If the attack hits, the target gains vulnerable 10 cold (save ends). Aftereffect: The target gains vulnerable 5 cold (save ends). Quick Release The frost giant scout does not provoke opportunity attacks when it makes ranged or area attacks. Icebound Footing When an effect pulls, pushes, or slides a frost giant, the giant moves 2 squares less than the effect specifies. Also, a frost giant can make a saving throw to avoid being knocked prone. Alignment Evil Languages Giant Skills Athletics +16, Stealth +18 Str 19 (+11) Dex 23 (+13) Wis 20 (+12) Con 19 (+11) Int 10 (+7) Cha 10 (+7) Equipment hide armor, spear, longbow, 40 arrows
3 Frost Giants (F)
Level 17 Brute
Large elemental humanoid (cold, giant) XP 1,600 each Initiative +11 Senses Perception +13 HP 201; Bloodied 100; see also dying swipe AC 29; Fortitude 32, Reflex 27, Will 28 Resist 15 cold Speed 8 (ice walk) m Icy Greataxe (standard; at-will) ✦ Cold, Weapon Reach 2; +20 vs. AC; 4d6 + 7 (crit 8d6 + 31) cold damage. M Dying Swipe (when the frost giant drops to 0 hit points) The frost giant makes an icy greataxe attack. M Chilling Strike (standard; recharge ⚄ ⚅) ✦ Cold, Weapon Reach 2; +20 vs. AC; 2d6 + 7 cold damage, and the target gains vulnerable 10 cold (save ends). R Icy Handaxe (standard; at-will) ✦ Cold, Weapon Ranged 5/10; +20 vs. AC; 2d8 + 7 cold damage. Icebound Footing When an effect pulls, pushes, or slides a frost giant, the giant moves 2 squares less than the effect specifies. Also, a frost giant can make a saving throw to avoid being knocked prone. Alignment Evil Languages Giant Skills Athletics +19 Str 23 (+14) Dex 16 (+11) Wis 20 (+13) Con 21 (+13) Int 10 (+8) Cha 12 (+9) Equipment hide armor, greataxe, 3 handaxes
April 20 09
|
D u n g e o n 16 5
20
Alliance at Nefelus
Meeting Bejam Roleplaying Encounter Encounter Level 14
Running this Encounter The PCs disembark at the port, and they are led up the cliffside walkways and through the crowded city streets to the Great Library, where they are given the opportunity to rest and then meet with Bejam, a member of the Thraxinium. Play up the sights of Nefelus. This is a city unlike others the PCs have likely visited. The Nefelese are powerful mages and use their knowledge to enhance their city in many ways. The closest comparison is Sayre, in the PCs’ experience, but even that city of sages and artists pales in comparison to Nefelus. Once the ship is docked, you leave the mundane tasks to the crew and depart with Amyria into the wondrous city of Nefelus. Scaling up the sides of a verdant cliff dotted with buildings that smell like fish and the salty spray of the sea, you reach the top and are nearly lost in the crowded, busied masses of people moving about. Even in the midday sun, the crowds move rapidly this way and that, but they always appear to be aware of your presence and never bump or brush up against you. You continue to make your way through the wooded streets, rife with the sounds of conversation, the chatter of tropical birds, and the constant whispering of the breeze through the exotic trees. After navigating through this urban maze for well over two hours, the entrance to the Great Library is before you. All you need do now is climb the hundreds of stairs to the domed complex’s yawning gate.
Amyria looks to you and says, “Here we are. We’re to meet one of their council in the entry hall. His name’s Bejam. Let’s go upstairs and see if we can ask around for him.” When the PCs head up the stairs and go inside the Great Library, read: A great entry hall stretches on for what seems like hundreds of feet. Each direction is dotted with multiple hallways and doors leading farther into the complex. Above, you can see the beautiful blue sky streaming through the glass dome, but you’re certain that from the outside, the dome looked like it was crafted out of wood. In the center of the hall, a hundred-foot-high orrery depicting the planes and the world gleams in the sun. The surfaces in the orrery’s universe shift and move, as though alive with activity. Just as you come to the realization that the stifling, humid air has abated, a male deva dressed in a shimmering blue-violet robe with small platinum wings adorning his back approaches you. He smiles at your retinue and says, “Welcome to Nefelus, our most honored guests. I am Bejam, Sixth Thraxus and Keeper of the Mirrors. It is good to see that you arrived without much delay. Amyria, I will take you before the Thraxinium to discuss the specifics of our situation. As for your retinue, I will have an attendant escort them to a waiting room where they can rest. I am certain we will have need of their expertise soon enough.”
What Bejam Knows The PCs do not get to meet with Bejam immediately. Following protocol, he wants a meeting with Amyria first. After his initial introduction, Bejam motions to another deva in the chamber, and exits with Amyria, leaving the PCs to be escorted to a well-appointed sitting room where they can rest. They are told by the attendant that it will be some time, and they should
rest if they can (the PCs can take an extended rest here if they so desire). If the PCs try to discuss matters with Bejam before he has had a chance to bring Amyria to the council, he tells them that they might ask their questions after they return from their meeting. Bejam and Amyria return after 6 hours. After a long wait and numerous inquiries as to your food and beverage preferences by the attendant, Amyria and Bejam arrive in your sitting room. Amyria speaks. “After long discourse and debate, I have talked on behalf of the Coalition and we’ve entered an arrangement with the Thraxinium. If you assist Nefelus in shedding its problem, they have agreed to at least support the Coalition with material and knowledge. My friends, I must ask you to once again imperil yourselves for the good of our cause. I will let Bejam give you the details that have recently become known to me.” Amyria nods at Bejam and exits the room as the Thraxus begins to brief you. Bejam does not spend time rehashing what the characters already know about the situation. He imparts the following information to the PCs. Impart this information conversationally so the players feel like they’re asking the right questions to receive these answers. Through the Thraxinium’s research, the heart of this problem appears to bear the mark of an artifact known as the Seed of Winter. When properly harnessed by a creature attuned to it, the artifact can cause drastic localized climate changes and can even alter creatures that come in contact with it or are near it. However, we think what’s happening to Nefelus goes beyond the normal power of the artifact; someone or something must be augmenting it in some way. The Seed of Winter was thought lost to the Feywild centuries ago, but it has apparently made its way back into the world.
April 20 09
|
D u n g e o n 16 5
21
Alliance at Nefelus
The Thraxinium knows through divinations and other more mundane observations that the iceberg that appeared out in the sea is the source of the emanations. Just before the ice ring completely blockaded our ships, we sent out three ships to investigate the iceberg and attempt to deal with the problem. We monitored their progress, and two of the three ships were attacked and destroyed by sahuagin with ice-blue skin. They appeared tougher than normal sahuagin and had an affinity for the cold. The last ship limped to the shore of the iceberg and was under assault by frost giants there; we saw only one survivor make it away from the vessel—a githzerai mentalist named Uarion. We have not heard from him since. Uarion has been with us for several decades; he is the only githzerai in the city, but he proves his worth to Nefelus time and time again through his mastery of the powers of the mind. He soaks up knowledge like a sponge, and he is probably the most accomplished nondeva ritualist in Nefelus. It would be a shame if he was lost to the power of the Seed. (Bejam gives the PCs a description of Uarion.)
If the PCs ask him about his title as the Keeper of Mirrors:
Once the PCs have finished asking Bejam questions, read:
I am the caretaker of our network of our silver mirrors, which are communication devices that we have planted throughout the world to keep informed of what’s happening on the mainland. We currently set the communication to receive only images and speech, so our observations remain unnoticed. To the untrained eye, a silver mirror can appear as a large mundane item, so its presence is easy enough to conceal. Over the past few months, however, we have noticed that many of our silver mirrors out in the world have gone missing, and until this crisis reared its head, it was my primary concern.
After having finished your briefing, Bejam concludes his talk with you and says, “We need your assistance to stop the climate change from overwhelming our island and to break the blockade. From the estimates made by the Thraxinium, we have about a day before our ritualists can no longer sustain the magic holding back the freezing weather. Once the ritual gives way, the island’s climate will be forever altered and many creatures here will die. Nefelus will suffer a corruption the likes of which we have not been threatened with for hundreds of years. I implore you to journey to the iceberg and end this assault on our way of life. If you can bring back the Seed of Winter for study and find out the fate of Uarion, all the better. Amyria says she has not met any more accomplished at dangerous tasks than you. Will you assist us?”
The PCs might also ask Bejam about glass or mirrored communication devices based on their experiences in “Haven of the Bitter Glass.” Bejam can confirm that some githyanki “burglars,” as he calls them, a mere six months prior. The Thraxi, however, isn’t willing to hastily assume those githyanki were tied to the invaders, although pointing out the timing of the attack gets Bejam thinking, and gives the PCs a benefit in the skill challenge to convince the deva to join the Coalition (see page 44).
April 20 09
|
D u n g e o n 16 5
22
Alliance at Nefelus
SC1: Traveling to Icehome Encounter Level 14 (3,000 XP)
Setup Once the PCs begin the journey to Icehome, it takes about 3 hours, and if the characters aren’t careful, they might encounter arctic sahuagin along the way. Traveling to Icehome Skill Challenge
Level 14 XP 3,000
You must use the strange craft provided by the Nefelese to traverse the depths to the iceberg, all the while attempting to avoid detection.
The PCs leave the safety of Nefelus, journey under the surface of the sea, navigate under the ice ring blockade, avoid sahuagin patrols, and find the undersea entrance to Icehome. Complexity 3 (requires 8 successes before 3 failures). Primary Skills Arcana, History, Nature, Perception Victory The PCs make their way to the undersea entrance of Icehome and encounter I1 Entrance Cavern (see page 24). Defeat The PCs make it there, but not without strain on the apparatuses. The systems malfunction on the vehicles, and they lose environmental control inside. Each PC loses 1 healing surge and the devices are rendered useless for returning to Nefelus. They will need to find another way back. Special There are three apparatuses, so take turns by craft. If two characters are in the craft, let the crew decide to roll one, one with an assist, or two skill checks before going back to the craft again. Only crew of the same craft can assist each other’s skill checks.
Arcana DC 18 If the PC succeeds by 10 or more, he or she fully understands the mechanisms for operating the claws and receives a +2 bonus to attack rolls when using rending claws. The PC effectively operates the vehicle’s levers and coaxes better performance out of the craft. History DC 23 The next Arcana check made in this craft receives a +2 bonus. The PC recalls hearing tales of Kwalish’s devices and remembers a common quirk present in all of them that makes them easier to operate. Nature DC 18 If the PC succeeds by 10 or more, and the overall skill challenge result is victory, he or she finds a swifter route to Icehome that all the craft take, shaving an hour off of their time. This allows the PCs to preserve enough air in the craft for a return journey and means they can leave the apparatuses sealed. The PC navigates around the ice ring and uses the current to the vehicle’s advantage. Perception DC 11 Every failure on this check means the PCs have an encounter with three arctic sahuagin guards while in the submersibles (see Appendix 1 for statistics). After 3 rounds of combat, any remaining guards flee the area to return to Icehome and warn the other sahuagin of their approach. The PC keeps a sharp eye out for arctic sahuagin, avoiding them where possible.
April 20 09
|
D u n g e o n 16 5
23
Alliance at Nefelus
I1: Entrance Cavern Encounter Level 12 (3,950 XP)
Setup 5 arctic sahuagin guards (G) 4 arctic sahuagin raiders (R) 1 arctic sahuagin priest (P) Unless the characters take their apparatuses to the surface and explore the exterior, they end up spotting the undersea entrance to Icehome, and they have to fight their way past the arctic sahuagin that guard this area. Once the PCs complete the “Traveling to Icehome” skill challenge, read: You propel your craft through the depths, and a massive shadow starts to take form in the water ahead. You see the underbelly of a massive iceberg—you’ve just about reached your destination. Upon nearing the iceberg, you see a hole in it that indicates an underwater tunnel. As you maneuver your craft through the narrow passage in a single file, the tunnel starts to climb. Eventually, a pale blue light surrounds you, and you realize that you’re just about to surface. Chunks of ice bob near your craft as you bring them up for air. Have the players place three 2-by-2 markers down in any open water spaces on the map to represent where the apparatuses of Kwalish surface. As you bring the craft to the surface, you see that you’re in an ice cavern dotted with stalactites and snow. A number of blue-skinned sahuagin appear more than happy to greet you in the traditional customs of their people as they threaten you with their weapons.
Development The PCs are still inside the apparatuses when combat begins. It takes a minor action from one PC to open the hatch for the vehicle. The PCs can stay inside the craft and use its rending claws to attack the sahuagin, but the sahuagin quickly figure out this tactic and attempt to stay out of reach. If the sahuagin were warned of the PCs’ approach (possibly by accumulating failures in the skill challenge), they are ready for them and gain combat advantage during the first round of combat. Otherwise, determine initiative normally.
Tactics The arctic sahuagin guards throw their ice tridents once the battle is joined. They have a stash of ice tridents in the northwest corner of the room, and they can retrieve another one if necessary. Once they’ve thrown one trident and retrieved another, they gang up on one PC and engage in melee. The arctic sahuagin raiders double-team a PC if possible, even going out into the water to meet them where their craft is located. They prefer to attack softer targets first, such as ranged attackers and controllers. They take directions from the priest and do not withdraw unless ordered to do so. The arctic sahuagin priest begins the battle by targeting a defender or other tough-looking melee character with freezing bolt, especially if the target is still away from the shore, in an attempt to slow the advance. Once a suitable striker-type target is available, the priest uses arctic jaws on the PC and orders the guards to gang up on that target.
The priest calls for a retreat to the behir lair only when he becomes bloodied, and it does not head to Xurgelmek for fear of reprisal. 4 Arctic Sahuagin Raiders (R)
Level 11 Soldier
Medium natural humanoid (aquatic) XP 600 each Initiative +11 Senses Perception +8; low-light vision HP 112; Bloodied 56 AC 27; Fortitude 24, Reflex 23, Will 22 Resist 10 cold Speed 5 (7 on a charge, ice walk), swim 5 (7 on a charge) m Trident (standard; at-will) ✦ Cold, Weapon +18 (+19 against a bloodied target) vs. AC; 1d8 + 5 (1d8 + 7 to a bloodied target) damage plus 1d8 cold damage, and the target is marked until the end of the arctic sahuagin raider’s next turn. R Trident (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon Ranged 10/20; +18 (+19 against a bloodied target) vs. AC; 2d6 + 5 (2d6 + 7 to a bloodied target) damage. M Opportunistic Strike (immediate reaction, when a flanked enemy shifts; at-will) ✦ Cold, Weapon The arctic sahuagin raider makes a melee basic attack against the enemy. M Sliding Strike (immediate interrupt, when a marked enemy makes an attack that doesn’t include the arctic sahuagin raider; at-will) ✦ Cold, Weapon The arctic sahuagin raider shifts 7 squares adjacent to the triggering enemy, and makes a melee basic attack against that enemy. Blood Frenzy The arctic sahuagin raider gains a +1 bonus to attack rolls and a +2 bonus to damage rolls against bloodied enemies. Alignment Chaotic evil Languages Abyssal Str 20 (+10) Dex 14 (+7) Wis 12 (+6) Con 14 (+7) Int 10 (+5) Cha 10 (+5) Equipment 2 tridents
April 20 09
|
D u n g e o n 16 5
24
Alliance at Nefelus
Arctic Sahuagin Priest (P)
Level 13 Artillery
Medium natural humanoid (aquatic) XP 800 Initiative +11 Senses Perception +12; low-light vision HP 101; Bloodied 50 AC 25; Fortitude 24, Reflex 25, Will 26 Resist 10 cold Speed 5 (7 during a double move, ice walk), swim 5 (7 during a double move) m Longspear (standard; at-will) ✦ Cold, Weapon Reach 2; +17 (+18 against a bloodied target) vs. AC; 1d10 + 4 (1d10 + 6 to a bloodied target) damage plus 1d8 cold damage, and the target slides 1 square. R Freezing Bolt (standard; at-will) ✦ Cold Ranged 10; +18 (+19 against a bloodied target) vs. Fortitude; 2d6 + 6 (2d6 + 8 to a bloodied target) cold damage, and the target is slowed until the end of the arctic sahuagin priest’s next turn. R Arctic Jaws (standard; recharges when no target is affected by this power) ✦ Cold Ranged 20; icy shark jaws appear and bite the target; +18 (+19 against a bloodied target) vs. Will; 2d6 + 6 (2d6 + 8 to a bloodied target) cold damage, and target gains vulnerable 5 cold and is slowed (save ends both). Blood Frenzy The arctic sahuagin priest gains a +1 bonus to attack rolls and a +2 bonus to damage rolls against bloodied enemies. Alignment Chaotic evil Languages Abyssal, Common Skills Intimidate +15 Str 16 (+9) Dex 18 (+10) Wis 20 (+11) Con 16 (+9) Int 12 (+7) Cha 16 (+9) Equipment trident, holy symbol, frozen kelp robe
5 Arctic Sahuagin Guards (G)
Level 11 Minion
Medium natural humanoid (aquatic) XP 150 each Initiative +10 Senses Perception +7; low-light vision HP 1; a missed attack never damages a minion. AC 27; Fortitude 24, Reflex 23, Will 22 Immune cold Speed 5 (7 on a charge, ice walk), swim 5 (7 on a charge) m Trident (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon +18 (+19 against a bloodied target) vs. AC; 7 damage (9 damage to a bloodied target), and the target is marked until the end of the arctic sahuagin guard’s next turn. R Javelin (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon Ranged 10/20; +18 (+19 against a bloodied target) vs. AC; 7 damage (9 damage to a bloodied target). Blood Frenzy The arctic sahuagin gains a +1 bonus to attack rolls and a +2 bonus to damage rolls against bloodied enemies. Alignment Chaotic evil Languages Abyssal Str 16 (+8) Dex 14 (+7) Wis 12 (+6) Con 14 (+7) Int 10 (+5) Cha 10 (+5) Equipment trident, 3 javelins
April 20 09
|
D u n g e o n 16 5
25
Alliance at Nefelus
I2: Behir Lair Encounter Level 14 (5,000 XP)
Setup 1 icetouched behir (B) Once the PCs come ashore in the ice cavern and fight their way through the first group of arctic sahuagin, they can proceed up the natural stairs into a large chamber that houses a pet of the sahuagin—an icetouched behir that they’ve been keeping well-fed with the recently dead sailors from the Nefelese vessels. When the PCs enter this area, read: Ascending the natural stairs in the cave complex, you enter a large cavern dotted with stalagmites here and there. A ledge, about 10 feet off the ground, is ahead of you. The climb looks a bit slick. Farther past that ledge to the extreme south of the cavern, another ledge offers a similar climb. A tunnel heads farther south. Perception Check DC 16: You can see that there’s something moving behind one of the stalagmites near you . . . something big. The icetouched behir is resting behind one of the stalagmites, having recently finished off the last of the Nefelese sailors. PCs who succeed on the Perception check gain surprise against the creature (although unless they have a particularly good vantage point, the behir has cover).
Tactics The icetouched behir attempts to devour a creature as soon as it can. In subsequent rounds, it attempts to use its lightning breath when enough targets present themselves to it. Otherwise, it alternates between its bite attack and thunderleg stomp. When it can, it uses its ability to climb to its advantage, scrambling up the side of one of the two ledges in the cavern. The behir taunts its foes with stories of how it will enjoy picking them apart bone by bone like the sailors that it feasted on before. If it is about to die, it attempts to flee to Xurgelmek’s chamber and up the ice shaft to the second level.
Development If the PCs approach this encounter by heading up the southern stairs instead of the northern ones, they automatically see the icetouched behir and gain surprise against it. However, Xurgelmek and the arctic sahuagin raiders notice the characters after 1 round of combat and come to the behir’s aid. The beholder does not leave its position in its chamber, since it guards the ice shaft to the second level. Otherwise, after a few rounds of combat (whenever you think it appropriate), have one of the arctic sahuagin raiders move into the area to investigate the disturbance and join the battle. The other sahuagin stays in the area unless the raider calls for reinforcements (at your discretion).
Icetouched Behir (B)
Level 14 Solo Soldier
Huge natural magical beast XP 5,000 Initiative +14 Senses Perception +12; tremorsense 10 HP 705; Bloodied 352 AC 32; Fortitude 29, Reflex 28, Will 28 Resist 10 cold, 10 lightning Saving Throws +5 Speed 7 (ice walk), climb 5 Action Points 2 m Claw (standard; at-will) Reach 3; +21 vs. AC; 2d8 + 6 damage. M Bite (standard; at-will) ✦ Lightning Reach 3; +21 vs. AC; 1d8 + 6 damage plus 1d8 lightning damage, and any creature within 3 squares of the target takes 1d8 lightning damage. M Devour (standard; recharges when no creature is affected by this power) Reach 3; +19 vs. Reflex; 2d8 + 6 damage, and the target is swallowed. While swallowed, the target is grabbed and restrained. A swallowed creature has line of sight and line of effect only to the icetouched behir, and no creature has line of sight or line of effect to it. A creature that escapes the grab is no longer swallowed and appears in a space adjacent to the icetouched behir. An icetouched behir can move normally while it has a target grabbed in this way. When the icetouched behir dies, the target is no longer swallowed and can escape as a move action, appearing in the icetouched behir’s former space. Sustain Minor: The icetouched behir sustains the grab, and the target takes 15 damage. C Lightning Breath (standard; recharge y z ) ✦ Lightning Close burst 1; +17 vs. Reflex; 3d10 + 6 lightning damage. Miss: Half damage. Effect: The icetouched behir makes a secondary attack. Secondary Attack: This attack does not provoke opportunity attacks, and the area of effect must not include the area of the primary attack: area burst 1 within 10; +17 vs. Reflex; 3d10 + 6 lightning damage. Miss: Half damage. C Thunderleg Stomp (standard; at-will) Close burst 3; +17 vs. Fortitude; 1d8 + 6 damage, and the target is knocked prone. Alignment Unaligned Languages Common, Draconic Str 23 (+13) Dex 20 (+12) Wis 21 (+12) Con 21 (+12) Int 7 (+5) Cha 13 (+8)
April 20 09
|
D u n g e o n 16 5
26
Alliance at Nefelus
Features of the Area Illumination: This area is brightly lit. Ceiling: The ceiling is 30 feet from the floor. Stalagmites: These are blocking terrain and provide cover. A creature can move around the corner of a stalagmite square normally. Ledges: Two ledges are 10 feet above the floor of the area. They require a DC 20 Athletics check to climb. The ledge in the eastern end of the room contains the sailors’ remaining gear, including several sets of spiked ice shoes that help traverse slippery terrain (see “Using Ice Shoes” on page 13).
April 20 09
|
D u n g e o n 16 5
27
Alliance at Nefelus
I3: Xurgelmek’s Chamber Encounter Level 14 (5,600 XP)
Setup Xurgelmek, arctic sahuagin baron (X) 2 arctic sahuagin raiders (R) 1 beholder eye of frost (B) Xurgelmek, the arctic sahuagin baron and leader of the first level’s enclave, dwells here with a special guardian to watch over the entrance to the second level—a beholder eye of frost that frost giants brought back. It agreed to perform duties here in exchange for having first crack at enslaving some of the Nefelese when the land was conquered by Chillreaver. Xurgelmek was the first creature changed by the Seed of Winter after Chillreaver arrived here, and he brought his sahuagin clan before the dragon to undergo the same transformation. As such, he believes that they are Chillreaver’s most favored ones, since the dragon didn’t bless the frost giants with the gift of the Seed’s power. Xurgelmek keeps the sahuagin here in line by fear, and to report failure to him is death. Since the other arctic sahuagin have not found much to do since becoming changed by the Seed, most of them spend time away from the ice caverns to hunt and raid the nearby lands.
When the PCs enter this area, read: This room is divided in two by a ledge that rises 20 feet from the cavern floor. The lower elevation of the room sports more spearlike stalagmites and a pool of deep blue water at the room’s southern edge. Up on the higher elevation, a massive stalagmite partially obstructs a smooth shaft in the ceiling that is about 10 feet in diameter.
Tactics Xurgelmek orders his raiders to engage the intruders at once, and follows right behind them, using the raiders as a buffer between himself and the PCs. He tries to engage a melee character to bring down the PCs’ first line of defense. The baron uses his bloodchill claw against targets when possible, but if they show resistance to cold damage, he relies on his trident. He doesn’t throw his trident unless it’s absolutely necessary to do so. The raiders harry a front-line character as well, possibly teaming up with the baron to bring down a defender quickly. They position themselves effectively to take advantage of opportunistic strike when possible.
Tell Us What You Know! The beholder might be willing to strike an accord with the PCs in exchange for its own life, if the PCs succeed on a DC 34 Intimidate check while it is bloodied. The beholder can provide the PCs with its purpose for being here, information on where the githzerai Uarion is located (although it doesn’t know his fate), and knowledge of the frost giant enclave in the level above. It can also reveal the malevolence behind the Seed of Winter—the double-headed white dragon Chillreaver.
The beholder stays up on the ledge area, but floats over to the northern passage of the ledge as well as toward the center of the room to find a better vantage point with which to launch its attacks. If possible, it tries to stay close to the stalagmites to gain cover unless it cannot attack any targets from that position. It targets ranged strikers with its central eye attack, and uses its eye rays where it sees a tactical advantage. If it is badly injured (less than 20 hit points left), it attempts to hide up in the shaft and target enemies directly below.
April 20 09
|
D u n g e o n 16 5
28
Alliance at Nefelus
Xurgelmek, Level 15 Elite Brute (Leader) Arctic Sahuagin Baron (X)
Large natural humanoid (cold, aquatic) XP 2,400 Initiative +11 Senses Perception +8; low-light vision Blood Healing (Healing) aura 10; any ally within the aura that starts its turn adjacent to a bloodied enemy regains 5 hit points. HP 360; Bloodied 180 AC 27; Fortitude 38, Reflex 26, Will 27 Resist 10 cold Saving Throws +2 Speed 5 (7 on a charge; ice walk), swim 7 (9 on a charge) Action Points 1 m Trident (standard; at-will) ✦ Cold, Weapon Reach 2; +18 (+20 against a bloodied target) vs. AC; 1d10 + 7 (1d10 + 12 against a bloodied target) damage plus 1d10 cold damage; see also blood hunger. m Bloodchill Claw (standard; at-will) ✦ Cold Reach 2; +18 (+20 against a bloodied target) vs. AC; 1d6 + 7 (1d6 + 12 against a bloodied target) damage, and ongoing 5 cold damage and the target is slowed (save ends both). r Javelin (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon Ranged 10/20; +18 (+20 against a bloodied target) vs. AC; 2d8 + 7 (2d8 + 12 against a bloodied target) damage. M Baron’s Fury (standard; at-will) ✦ Cold, Weapon The arctic sahuagin baron makes a trident attack and two claw attacks. Blood Hunger The arctic sahuagin baron gains a +2 bonus to attack rolls and a +5 bonus to damage rolls against bloodied enemies. Alignment Chaotic evil Languages Abyssal, Common Skills Intimidate +15 Str 22 (+13) Dex 18 (+11) Wis 12 (+8) Con 18 (+11) Int 12 (+8) Cha 16 (+10) Equipment trident, 3 javelins, headdress
2 Arctic Sahuagin Raiders (R)
Level 11 Soldier
Medium natural humanoid (aquatic) XP 600 each Initiative +11 Senses Perception +8; low-light vision HP 112; Bloodied 56 AC 27; Fortitude 24, Reflex 23, Will 22 Resist 10 cold Speed 5 (7 on a charge, ice walk), swim 5 (7 on a charge) m Trident (standard; at-will) ✦ Cold, Weapon +18 (+19 against a bloodied target) vs. AC; 1d8 + 5 (1d8 + 7 to a bloodied target) damage plus 1d8 cold damage, and the target is marked until the end of the arctic sahuagin raider’s next turn. R Trident (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon Ranged 10/20; +18 (+19 against a bloodied target) vs. AC; 2d6 + 5 (2d6 + 7 to a bloodied target) damage. M Opportunistic Strike (immediate reaction, when a flanked enemy shifts; at-will) ✦ Cold, Weapon The arctic sahuagin raider makes a melee basic attack against the enemy. M Sliding Strike (immediate interrupt, when a marked enemy makes an attack that doesn’t include the arctic sahuagin raider; at-will) ✦ Cold, Weapon The arctic sahuagin raider shifts 7 squares adjacent to the triggering enemy, and makes a melee basic attack against that enemy. Blood Frenzy The arctic sahuagin raider gains a +1 bonus to attack rolls and a +2 bonus to damage rolls against bloodied enemies. Alignment Chaotic evil Languages Abyssal Str 20 (+10) Dex 14 (+7) Wis 12 (+6) Con 14 (+7) Int 10 (+5) Cha 10 (+5) Equipment 2 tridents
Beholder Eye of Frost (B)
Level 14 Elite Artillery
Large aberrant magical beast XP 2,000 Initiative +12 Senses Perception +16; all-around vision, darkvision HP 222; Bloodied 111; see also ice armor AC 28 (30 with ice armor); Fortitude 28 (30 with ice armor), Reflex 28, Will 29 Resist 15 cold Saving Throws +2 Speed fly 4 (hover) Action Points 1 m Bite (standard; at-will) +21 vs. AC; 2d6 damage. r Central Eye (minor 1/round; at-will) Ranged 8; +20 vs. Reflex; the target is weakened (save ends). If the target takes cold damage while weakened by this power, it is immobilized until no longer weakened. R Eyes of the Beholder (free, when an enemy starts its turn within 5 squares of the beholder eye of frost; at-will) The eye of frost uses eye ray against the triggering enemy. R Eye Rays (standard; at-will) ✦ see text The beholder eye of frost uses one eye ray power chosen from the list below. Using eye rays does not provoke opportunity attacks. 1—Freeze Ray (Cold): Ranged 10; +19 vs. Reflex; 2d8 + 7 cold damage. 2—Telekinesis Ray: Ranged 10; +19 vs. Fortitude; the eye of frost slides the target 6 squares. 3—Ice Ray (Cold): Ranged 10; +19 vs. Reflex; 1d8 + 6 cold damage, and the target takes ongoing 5 cold damage and is immobilized (save ends both). Ice Armor (when first bloodied; encounter) The beholder eye of frost’s AC and Fortitude increase by 2 until the end of the encounter, and any creature within its eyes of the beholder aura gains vulnerable 5 cold. Alignment Evil Languages Deep Speech Str 13 (+8) Dex 21 (+12) Wis 18 (+11) Con 21 (+12) Int 12 (+8) Cha 23 (+13)
April 20 09
|
D u n g e o n 16 5
29
Alliance at Nefelus
Features of the Area Illumination: This area is brightly lit. Ceiling: The ceiling is 40 feet from the lower elevation’s floor. Stalagmites: These are blocking terrain and provide cover. A creature can move around the corner of a stalagmite square normally. Ledge: There is a 20-foot high ledge that effectively cuts this room in two. It requires a DC 20 Athletics check to climb. Water Tunnel: Canny PCs might think to take the apparatuses of Kwalish through the water tunnel into this area, or attempt to swim it. If they do so, they gain surprise on Xurgelmek and the others present here. Ice Shaft: This smooth shaft is 10 feet in diameter and leads up 30 feet to the second level of Icehome. It requires a DC 30 Athletics check to climb.
April 20 09
|
D u n g e o n 16 5
30
Alliance at Nefelus
I4: Uarion’s Fate Encounter Level 14 (5,000 XP)
Setup Uarion, icetouched githzerai mindmage (U) 2 chillfire destroyers (C) 5 windstrikers (W) When the arctic sahuagin attacked the Nefelese ships bound for Icehome, one vessel limped its way to the shore of the iceberg. There, the crew met an unfortunate end at the hands of frost giants, but one escaped—a githzerai mentalist named Uarion, an agent of the Thraxinium. Evading capture by the frost giants, Uarion scaled the iceberg and entered through the caldera at the top. He then encountered Chillreaver, who defeated him in combat and subjugated him to the power of the Seed of Winter, transforming him into an icetouched creature and shattering his formidable will. With such an unexpected resource, Chillreaver allowed the mentalist to participate in his next servitor experiment, given the githzerai’s affinity for the elements. Uarion was installed in the elemental farm that Chillreaver had set up on the second level near the frost giants. There Chillreaver’s captured elementals have been placed in icy stasis in preparation for the dragon’s attack on Nefelus. Uarion was provided with the means to awaken them from their slumber should Chillreaver’s icy lair need them.
When the PCs ascend from the icy shaft on the lower level, read: An eerie rippling glow bounces off the numerous stalagmites in this cavern, illuminating the area like light shining off the water. At the far end, a pair of ledges rises up close to the ceiling. There is a tunnel passageway to the north. Perception Check DC 18: You think you detect movement in several of the stalagmites, like something is trapped inside. DC 23: A humanoid form stands in the shadows on the far ledge. If the PCs attempt to call out or parley with Uarion, read: The voice from the shadows calls out in a metered, cool tone. “You have come to threaten the will of my master. The Seed must be protected at all costs. Approach no farther and leave the way you arrived, and I shall spare you the agony of the change.” A DC 23 Insight check reveals that the githzerai’s voice, though cool and calm, has conflicted underpinnings, and an external force is supplanting his will. One the PCs approach, Uarion attacks the PCs.
Development The elemental creatures are encased in the ice stalagmites at the start of the combat, and they can be freed only by Uarion. Each round on his turn, Uarion can use a minor action to shatter one of the stalagmites containing an elemental (destroying the cover and making the square difficult terrain), or use a move action to shatter two stalagmites. He cannot spend both a minor action and a move action on the same
turn. Uarion frees the chillfire destroyers first, and then the windstrikers. He cannot shatter stalagmites that do not contain an elemental. It should become apparent after the first round of combat that the PCs are fighting a frost-skinned version of Uarion, the missing githzerai from Nefelus.
Tactics Uarion stays at range from the PCs, using his less accessible position to his advantage. He leads off with mindstrike and continues to use it until the PCs move to within range of his other powers. He saves his elemental bolts and concussion orb until he has multiple targets within range. His accurate mind allows him to fire on targets without concern for the cover granted by the stalagmites. He engages in melee only as a last resort, but he does not flee the area under any circumstances. The chillfire destroyers use their trample to flatten defenders and other front-line targets and then attack lighter armored foes. If a PC proves resistant to its cold attacks, it switches to a new target. The windstrikers use searching wind to designate targets as their quarry, and then each quickly moves up on its next turn to deliver a lethal windstrike. They use their flight to avoid getting stuck next to defenders. All the elementals are completely subservient to Chillreaver’s, and by extension, Uarion’s will and fight until they are destroyed.
April 20 09
|
D u n g e o n 16 5
31
Alliance at Nefelus
Uarion, Level 14 Artillery Icetouched Githzerai Mindmage (U)
Medium natural humanoid XP 1,000 Initiative +13 Senses Perception +16 HP 105; Bloodied 52 AC 28; Fortitude 24, Reflex 26, Will 26; see also iron mind Resist 10 cold Speed 7 (ice walk) m Unarmed Strike (standard; at-will) +19 vs. AC; 2d8 + 4 damage. R Mindstrike (standard; at-will) ✦ Psychic Ranged 20; +17 vs. Reflex; 2d8 + 4 psychic damage, and the target is dazed (save ends); see also accurate mind. R Elemental Bolts (standard; daily) ✦ see text Ranged 10; Uarion makes 3 attacks, each against a different target; +17 vs. Reflex; 4d8 acid, cold, fire, or lightning damage (Uarion chooses the damage type for each attack); see also accurate mind. A Concussion Orb (standard; encounter) Area burst 2 within 10; +17 vs. Fortitude; 1d10 + 4 damage, and the target is knocked prone. Accurate Mind The Uarion’s ranged attacks ignore cover and concealment (but not superior cover or total concealment). Iron Mind (immediate interrupt, when Uarion would be hit by an attack; encounter) Uarion gains a +2 bonus to all defenses until the end of its next turn. Alignment Unaligned Languages Common, Deep Speech Skills Acrobatics +18, Arcana +13, Athletics +10, Insight +16 Str 13 (+8) Dex 19 (+11) Wis 19 (+11) Con 15 (+9) Int 13 (+8) Cha 10 (+7)
2 Chillfire Destroyers (C)
Level 14 Brute
Large elemental magical beast (cold, fire) XP 1,000 each Initiative +12 Senses Perception +12 Leaking Firecore (Fire) aura 2; while the chillfire destroyer is bloodied, each creature that starts its turn within the aura takes 10 fire damage. HP 173; Bloodied 86; see also firecore breach AC 26; Fortitude 26, Reflex 25, Will 25 Immune disease, poison; Resist 10 cold, 10 fire Speed 5 m Freezing Slam (standard; at-will) ✦ Cold Reach 2; +17 vs. AC; 1d12 + 6 damage plus 1d12 cold damage. M Trample (standard; at-will) ✦ Cold The chillfire destroyer moves its speed and can move through enemies’ spaces. The destroyer makes an attack: +15 vs. Reflex; 1d10 + 6 damage plus 1d10 cold damage, and the target is knocked prone. C Firecore Breach (when the chillfire destroyer drops to 0 hit points) ✦ Fire The destroyer does not die until the start of its next turn. Until then, the destroyer can take no actions. At the start of the destroyer’s next turn, it makes an attack: close burst 3; +15 vs. Reflex; 4d10 + 6 fire damage. Alignment Unaligned Languages Primordial Str 16 (+10) Dex 20 (+12) Wis 20 (+12) Con 23 (+13) Int 5 (+4) Cha 12 (+8)
5 Windstrikers (W)
Level 9 Lurker
Medium elemental magical beast (air) XP 400 each Initiative +11 Senses Perception +9 HP 56; Bloodied 28 AC 21; Fortitude 22, Reflex 20, Will 20 Immune disease, poison; Resist insubstantial Speed 0, fly 8 (hover) m Windstrike (standard; at-will) ✦ Cold, Thunder Reach 2; +14 vs. AC; 2d6 + 5 cold and thunder damage. M Lethal Windstrike (standard; at-will) ✦ Cold, Thunder Reach 2; targets the windstriker’s quarry (see searching wind); +14 vs. AC; 2d8 + 5 cold and thunder damage. Effect: The target is no longer designated as the windstriker’s quarry. R Searching Wind (standard; recharges when the windstriker hits with lethal windstrike) ✦ Cold, Thunder Ranged 10; +12 vs. Will; 2d6 + 5 cold and thunder damage, and the target is knocked prone. Effect: The target is designated as the windstriker’s quarry. Shifting Wind (immediate reaction, when the windstriker takes damage; at-will) Until the end of its next turn, the windstriker does not provoke opportunity attacks and can move through enemies’ spaces. Alignment Unaligned Languages Primordial Str 14 (+6) Dex 17 (+7) Wis 10 (+4) Con 20 (+9) Int 5 (+1) Cha 17 (+7)
April 20 09
|
D u n g e o n 16 5
32
Alliance at Nefelus
Features of the Area Illumination: The strange eerie glow in this room provides only dim light. Ceiling: The ceiling is 30 feet from the lowest elevation’s floor. Stalagmites: These are blocking terrain and provide cover. A creature can move around the corner of a stalagmite square normally. When Uarion shatters a stalagmite, it is destroyed and replaced with difficult terrain in the square it occupied. Ledge: There is a 10-foot and 20-foot ledge at the far western end of the room. Climbing either ledge requires a DC 20 Athletics check. Ice Shaft: This smooth shaft is 10 feet in diameter and leads down 30 feet to the first level of Icehome. It requires a DC 30 Athletics check to climb.
Aftermath Assuming the PCs render Uarion unconscious instead of killing him, they likely have questions for him. However, until the characters remove the Seed of Winter from Chillreaver’s clutches, Uarion is intractable and can be viewed only as a threat. This might pose a problem for the PCs, since they have to decide what to do with the githzerai. They might decide to leave him here, take him to their submersibles (if they have space for him), or carry him along while they continue exploring.
April 20 09
|
D u n g e o n 16 5
33
Alliance at Nefelus
I5: Icy Sappers Encounter Level 14 (5,600 XP)
Setup 4 icetouched umber hulks (U) In this chamber, four icetouched umber hulks, retrieved by the frost giants some time ago, dwell here under the control of Chillreaver. Through the influence of the Seed’s transformative power, their wills have become pliable to the dragon’s commands, and they patiently await the opportunity to once again burrow through the earth. Chillreaver plans to use them as sappers against Nefelus if needed. In their boredom, they have begun to tunnel around in their area. However, the dragon recently put a stop to this, worried that they might cause undue structural damage to Icehome. When the PCs enter this area, read: A rugged crevasse splits the ice in the middle of this cavern. A gently sloping tunnel, looking as though it was recently excavated, is present in the southeast end. To the north, another tunnel exit is visible, although it is partially blocked by a massive stalagmite. Perception Check DC 18: You can hear something moving about inside the crevasse.
Tactics The icetouched umber hulks are down in the bottom of the crevasse, 20 feet from the cavern floor. Once a PC gets within 5 squares of their starting positions, they roll initiative and move up to investigate (and attack).
The umber hulks use their confusing gaze each round, attempting to slide targets into the crevasse. If they hit a target with their grabbing double attack, they try to pull the grabbed PC into the crevasse to be devoured. They leave the crevasse initially only to attack the PCs and then only if they have no PCs to attack in the crevasse. 4 Icetouched Umber Hulks (U)
Crevasse: The crevasse is 20 feet deep and requires a DC 20 Athletics check to climb. Ice Tunnel: The tunnel to the southeast goes under and out into the frost giant enclave, severely sloping upward 10 feet. Exiting the tunnel on the frost giant enclave side requires ice walk, a burrow speed, or a DC 15 Athletics check.
Level 12 Elite Soldier
Large natural magical beast XP 1,400 each Initiative +11 Senses Perception +13; darkvision, tremorsense 5 HP 248; Bloodied 124 AC 30; Fortitude 33, Reflex 28, Will 27 Resist 10 cold Saving Throws +2 Speed 5 (ice walk), burrow 2 (tunneling) Action Points 1 m Claw (standard; at-will) Reach 2; +18 vs. AC; 2d6 + 8 damage. M Grabbing Double Attack (standard; at-will) The icetouched umber hulk makes two claw attacks. If both claw attacks hit the same target, the target is grabbed. A grabbed target takes ongoing 10 damage from the icetouched umber hulk’s mandibles until it escapes. The icetouched umber hulk cannot make any other attacks while grabbing a creature. C Confusing Gaze (minor 1/round; at-will) ✦ Gaze, Psychic Close blast 5; targets enemies; +16 vs. Will; the target slides 5 squares and is dazed (save ends). Alignment Unaligned Languages — Str 26 (+14) Dex 16 (+9) Wis 14 (+8) Con 20 (+11) Int 5 (+3) Cha 11 (+6)
Features of the Area Illumination: This area is brightly lit, except inside the crevasse, where it is dimly lit. Ceiling: The ceiling is 30 feet from the floor. Stalagmites: These are blocking terrain and provide cover. A creature can move around the corner of a stalagmite square normally.
April 20 09
|
D u n g e o n 16 5
34
Alliance at Nefelus
I6: Frost Giant Enclave Encounter Level 17 (8,000 XP)
Setup Nara of the Wastes, frost giant ice shaper (N) 3 frost giant scouts (S) 2 winter wolves (W) The temporary home of the frost giant clan that has allied with Chillreaver, the frost giants here are led by Nara of the Wastes, a sacred ice shaper second in power only to the jarl of her tribe. Chillreaver has long been an ally of these frost giants when they both lived in the frozen lands north of the Winterbole Forest, beyond Nentir Vale. Chillreaver initially came to the frost giant jarl after receiving the Seed of Winter and in the early stages of his plans to destroy Nefelus. After some negotiation over land rights once Nefelus’s climate had been adjusted to the frost giants’ liking, the jarl agreed to send a contingent with the dragon once Icehome was formed well enough to sustain occupants. Nara was chosen to lead the frost giants in Icehome, and she has created a portal back to their realm should they have need of supplies, servitors, or additional warriors. Indeed, Chillreaver has requested Nara send back hunters periodically to bring back creatures he thought important to subject to the influences of the Seed of Winter for use in the coming assault on Nefelus.
Now, Nara commands about fifteen frost giants in Icehome. Most are out on patrols around the recently created ice ring blockade, keeping the Nefelese from attempting any type of escape, but a few remain here as her personal retinue. When the PCs enter this area, read: This massive cavern is far larger than any you have yet seen in this iceberg complex. A slick, steep-sloping ice bridge hangs over a fast-moving stream; the stream’s banks are thick with a white mist. To the west, a platform rises up 30 feet from the floor and is connected to the ice bridge. Unlike in the other caverns, no stalagmites are here. Furs, animal skins, tools, and large weapons are piled in various places near the walls. The winter wolves begin lying down (prone), in the positions shown on the map. Unless the PCs enter from the umber hulk tunnel, they spot the PCs and engage in combat. The scouts are on watch here, and at least one notices the PCs from any approach they use (unless they are attempting to sneak in). Nara is standing at the top of the stairs leading up to the ice bridge.
Tactics The winter wolves wait to see if the PCs attempt to cross the water to meet them; otherwise, they use the natural staircase to access the platform and leap down in a takedown charge on any PCs close enough to it (or attack PCs already on the platform). They are Nara’s personal companions, and they defend her if she looks like she’s in trouble. If they knock a target prone on the platform, they drag it off the edge if possible.
The scouts start in their indicated positions, but quickly pull back to the ice bridge where they have the advantage of maneuverability. They target defenders and other melee characters with their chillshards to keep them from accessing the platform. Nara uses her wall of frost to separate the PCs, allowing the scouts to concentrate fire on a smaller group of characters. She uses her freezing bolt to slow the advance of melee characters, and uses ice slide to move PCs off the platform if they access it. She grants ice armor to her winter wolves, if possible. Nara orders the scouts to stand their ground no matter what the cost, but if she is at half of her bloodied total or lower, she attempts to flee up the ice bridge to make her last stand with the ice gargoyles in the hall above.
What Nara Knows Nara of the Wastes is not above selling information for her life. If she is captured and coerced into talking in exchange for her freedom, she tells the PCs about Chillreaver, his relationship with the frost giants, and what she knows of his plans (see the Setup in this encounter). She also mentions that Chillreaver has greatly amplified the power of an artifact known as the Seed of Winter, which was given to him by a fomorian king from the Feywild named Cachlain.
April 20 09
|
D u n g e o n 16 5
35
Alliance at Nefelus
Features of the Area Illumination: This area is brightly lit. Ceiling: The ceiling is 60 feet from the floor. Crevasse: The crevasse is 20 feet deep and requires a DC 20 Athletics check to climb. Platform: A platform connects to an ice bridge and dominates the middle of the room, with a 30-foot ledge that requires a DC 20 Athletics check to climb. The platform is accessible by a natural ice stairway. Ascending these stairs counts as difficult terrain; descending them is treated as normal terrain. Ice Bridge: The ice bridge slopes upward and is slick; it is treated as a slide by creatures without ice walk. The ice bridge is difficult terrain, and a creature that enters one of the ice bridge’s squares must make a DC 20 Acrobatics check; failure indicates that the creature moves to the end of the bridge (on the platform side), falls prone, and ends its move. Stream and Pool: The water here is 10 feet deep, and it can be crossed by swimming or jumping over it. However, choke frost rises up from the water, hindering the movement of any creature passing through it. Choke Frost: The squares containing the stream and pool, as well as all squares adjacent to them, are filled with choke frost, which is a light, white mist that congeals into thick ice as creatures move through it. Creatures entering a square of choke frost take a –1 penalty to speed for each square of choke frost through which they move. As a move action, a creature can negate this penalty. The frost giants (and other creatures with the cold keyword) are immune to this effect. The winter wolves are not immune, and they stay on their side of the water unless they traverse up the platform.
Ice Tunnel: The tunnel to the southeast goes under and out into the frost giant enclave, then severely slopes upward 10 feet. Exiting the tunnel on the frost giant enclave side requires ice walk, a burrow speed, or a DC 15 Athletics check.
April 20 09
|
D u n g e o n 16 5
36
Alliance at Nefelus
Nara of the Wastes, Level 19 Controller (Leader) Frost Giant Ice Shaper (N)
Large elemental humanoid (cold, giant) XP 2,400 Initiative +12 Senses Perception +16 HP 182; Bloodied 91 AC 32; Fortitude 32, Reflex 29, Will 33 Resist 15 cold Speed 8 (ice walk) m Freezing Flail (standard; at-will) ✦ Cold, Weapon Reach 2; +24 vs. AC; 2d12 + 4 cold damage. R Freezing Bolt (standard; at-will) ✦ Cold Ranged 20; +22 vs. Reflex; 2d12 + 4 cold damage, and the target is immobilized (save ends). R Ice Slide (minor 1/round; at-will) Ranged 10; +22 vs. Fortitude; the frost giant ice shaper slides the target 3 squares. A Wall of Frost (standard; recharge ⚅) ✦ Cold, Conjuration Area wall 12 within 10; the frost giant ice shaper conjures a wall of swirling snow that lasts until the end of the ice shaper’s next turn. The wall is 6 squares high and blocks line of sight. The wall’s space is lightly obscured and is difficult terrain. A creature that starts its turn adjacent to the wall takes 5 cold damage, and a creature that enters a square of the wall or starts its turn there takes 15 cold damage. Sustain Minor: The wall persists. Ice Armor (standard; recharge ⚄ ⚅) One ally within 10 squares of the frost giant ice shaper gains resist 10 to all damage until the end of the ice shaper’s next turn. Icebound Footing When an effect pulls, pushes, or slides a frost giant ice shaper, the ice shaper moves 2 squares less than the effect specifies. Also, an ice shaper can make a saving throw to avoid being knocked prone. Alignment Evil Languages Giant, Primordial Skills Arcana +14, Heal +21, Intimidate +20 Str 21 (+14) Dex 16 (+12) Wis 25 (+16) Con 22 (+15) Int 10 (+9) Cha 22 (+15) Equipment chainmail, flail
3 Frost Giant Scouts (S)
Level 15 Artillery
Large elemental humanoid (cold, giant) XP 1,200 each Initiative +13 Senses Perception +17 HP 115; Bloodied 57 AC 28; Fortitude 26, Reflex 28, Will 27 Resist 15 cold Speed 9 (ice walk) m Icy Spear (standard; at-will) ✦ Cold, Weapon Reach 2; +20 vs. AC; 1d10 + 6 cold damage. r Icy Arrow (standard; requires longbow; at-will) ✦ Cold, Weapon Ranged 20/40; +22 vs. AC; 1d12 + 8 cold damage, and the target is slowed until the end of the frost giant scout’s next turn. A Chillshards (standard; recharge ⚄ ⚅) ✦ Cold, Weapon Area burst 1 within 20; +20 vs. Fortitude; 1d12 + 8 cold damage, and the target is slowed and cannot take immediate or opportunity actions until the end of the frost giant scout’s next turn. Aftereffect: The target is slowed until the end of the frost giant scout’s next turn. Tundra Hunter (standard; recharges when first bloodied) The frost giant makes a melee or ranged attack. If the attack hits, the target gains vulnerable 10 cold (save ends). Aftereffect: The target gains vulnerable 5 cold (save ends). Quick Release The frost giant scout does not provoke opportunity attacks when it makes ranged or area attacks. Icebound Footing When an effect pulls, pushes, or slides a frost giant, the giant moves 2 squares less than the effect specifies. Also, a frost giant can make a saving throw to avoid being knocked prone. Alignment Evil Languages Giant Skills Athletics +16, Stealth +18 Str 19 (+11) Dex 23 (+13) Wis 20 (+12) Con 19 (+11) Int 10 (+7) Cha 10 (+7) Equipment hide armor, spear, longbow, 40 arrows
2 Winter Wolves (W)
Level 14 Skirmisher
Large natural magical beast XP 1,000 each Initiative +14 Senses Perception +10; low-light vision HP 141; Bloodied 70 AC 28; Fortitude 27, Reflex 26, Will 24 Resist 20 cold Speed 8 (ice walk) m Bite (standard; at-will) ✦ Cold +19 vs. AC; 1d10 + 6 damage plus 1d6 cold damage, or 2d10 + 6 damage plus 1d6 cold damage against a prone target. M Takedown (standard; usable only when charging; at-will) ✦ Cold +19 vs. AC; 2d10 + 6 damage plus 1d6 cold damage, and the target is knocked prone. C Freezing Breath (standard; recharge ⚄ ⚅) ✦ Cold Close blast 5; +17 vs. Reflex; 2d6 + 6 cold damage. Miss: Half damage. Drag (minor; usable only while adjacent to a prone enemy; at-will) The winter wolf shifts 1 square, and pulls a prone target that is adjacent to it 1 square. Alignment Evil Languages Common, Giant Str 23 (+13) Dex 21 (+12) Wis 17 (+10) Con 21 (+12) Int 9 (+6) Cha 10 (+7)
April 20 09
|
D u n g e o n 16 5
37
Alliance at Nefelus
I7: Gargoyles in the Hall Encounter Level 16 (6,800 XP)
The ice gargoyles begin in their ice form. If a PC moves past the last set of pillars leading into the center of the room, the ice gargoyles revert to their normal forms and attack. They also do the same if a PC moves adjacent to the illusory sliding wall to the east.
Setup
Tactics
4 ice gargoyles (G) 2 ice gargoyle reavers (R) This hall was fashioned by Chillreaver as his grand receiving chamber, and he one day hopes to take his conquered foes here for the purpose of subjugating them. For now, it serves as the home for the first of his creations born from the bosom of Icehome— his ice gargoyles. The ice gargoyles serve Chillreaver as messengers, scouts, and guards for the nearly completed upper level of his palace. Even more so than the other creatures of Icehome, they are completely subservient to his whims—effectively an extension of his will—and Chillreaver views them as his children. When the PCs arrive here from the ice bridge, read: This room sits in stark contrast to everything you’ve seen before in the iceberg complex. Here, it appears that the room has been intricately carved from the ice; no snow, rough patches, or uneven grades mar the smooth walls, floors, and ceiling of this chamber. Perfectly round ice columns frame a large-based platform at the far end. On top of the platform are two massive ice gargoyle statues. To either side of this platform sit smaller ones with smaller ice gargoyles. There is no visible exit from this room except where you entered.
The ice gargoyle reavers stay close to their enemies, keeping as many PCs as possible within their freezing gaze. Targets that are weakened by the gaze are then subjected to their bloodchill bite. The gargoyles fight until they are destroyed.
When the ice gargoyles revert to their normal forms, they use f lying grab to harry their foes, using the ample ceiling to maneuver out of range of melee and short ranged attacks.
2 Ice Gargoyle Reavers (R)
Level 15 Lurker
Large elemental humanoid (cold) XP 1,200 each Initiative +17 Senses Perception +17; darkvision Freezing Gaze (Cold) aura 2; requires the ice gargoyle reaver to be in its ice prison; an enemy that enters or starts its turn within the aura is weakened until the start of its next turn and takes 5 cold damage. HP 116; Bloodied 58 AC 29; Fortitude 28, Reflex 27, Will 26 Immune slow; Resist 15 cold Vulnerable fire (the ice gargoyle reaver grants combat advantage until the end of the attacker’s next turn) Speed 6, fly 8; see also flying grab m Claw (standard; at-will) ✦ Cold Reach 2; +20 vs. AC; 1d8 + 6 damage, and ongoing 5 cold damage (save ends). M Bloodchill Bite (standard; recharge y z ) ✦ Cold, Healing +20 vs. AC; 2d6 + 5 cold damage (3d6 + 5 cold damage against a weakened target), the target gains vulnerable 5 cold (save ends), and the ice gargoyle reaver regains 5 hit points. M Flying Grab (standard; recharges after using ice prison) The ice gargoyle reaver flies 8 squares and makes a melee basic attack at the end of that movement. If the attack hits, the target is grabbed. The ice gargoyle reaver can try to move the grabbed target as part of its next move action. If it succeeds, it can move or fly at full speed, pulling the target with it.
Ice Prison (standard; at-will) The ice gargoyle reaver encases itself and anyone it is grabbing in ice. In this form, the ice gargoyle reaver and any target it is grabbing gain resist 20 all, except against the cold damage dealt by this power. Both can still see their surroundings, but they cannot use other normal senses. A target the ice gargoyle reaver is grabbing is stunned, restrained, and takes ongoing 20 cold damage (save ends all, ending the grab and ice prison). Aftereffect: The target is slowed and weakened until the end of the ice gargoyle reaver’s next turn. Each time a target the ice gargoyle reaver is grabbing takes the ongoing cold damage, the ice gargoyle reaver regains 5 hit points. The ice gargoyle reaver can take no actions in the ice prison, other than to end the effect (a minor action). If the gargoyle takes damage in this form, the ice prison is broken, freeing the grabbed target as if it saved and ending the grab. Alignment Evil Languages Primordial Skills Stealth +19 Str 25 (+14) Dex 24 (+14) Wis 17 (+10) Con 22 (+13) Int 5 (+4) Cha 20 (+12)
April 20 09
|
D u n g e o n 16 5
38
Alliance at Nefelus
4 Ice Gargoyles (G)
Level 12 Lurker
Medium elemental humanoid (cold) XP 700 each Initiative +14 Senses Perception +15; darkvision HP 96; Bloodied 48 AC 26; Fortitude 25, Reflex 23, Will 23 Immune slow; Resist 15 cold Vulnerable fire (the ice gargoyle is dazed until the end of the attacker’s next turn) Speed 6, fly 8; see also flyby grab m Claw (standard; at-will) ✦ Cold +17 vs. AC; 1d6 + 5 damage plus 1d6 + 4 cold damage. M Flyby Grab (standard; recharges after using ice prison) The ice gargoyle flies 8 squares and makes a melee basic attack at the end of that movement. If the attack hits, the target is grabbed. The ice gargoyle can try to move the grabbed target as part of its next move action. If it succeeds, it can move or fly at full speed, pulling the target with it. Ice Prison (standard; at-will) The ice gargoyle encases itself and anyone it is grabbing in ice. In this form, the ice gargoyle and any target it is grabbing gain resist 15 all, except against the cold damage dealt by this power. Both can still see their surroundings, but they cannot use other normal senses. A target the ice gargoyle is grabbing is stunned, restrained, and takes ongoing 20 cold damage (save ends all, ending the grab and the ice prison). Aftereffect: The target is slowed until the end of the ice gargoyle’s next turn. Each time a target the ice gargoyle is grabbing takes the ongoing cold damage, the ice gargoyle regains 5 hit points. The ice gargoyle can take no actions in the ice prison, other than to end the effect (a minor action). If the gargoyle takes damage in this form, the ice prison is broken, freeing the grabbed target and ending the grab. Alignment Evil Languages Primordial Skills Stealth +18 Str 24 (+14) Dex 23 (+13) Wis 10 (+12) Con 20 (+13) Int 5 (+4) Cha 17 (+10)
Features of the Area Illumination: This area is brightly lit. Ceiling: The ceiling is 60 feet from the floor. Floor: The floor here is treated as difficult terrain for anyone moving on it without ice walk. In addition, creatures without ice walk standing on the floor are moved one additional square when subjected to forced movement. Secret Door: There is a secret door to the south that leads into Chillreaver’s treasure chamber. It can be discovered with a DC 25 Perception check, and a DC 20 Arcana check or DC 25 Thievery check opens it. Illusory Sliding Wall: To the east, a wall has been masked by an illusion. A character adjacent to the wall who succeeds on a DC 15 passive Perception check notices that something is unusual about the wall. Another DC 25 Perception check or DC 25 Arcana check pierces the illusion and reveals an intricate inscription in Draconic upon the wall. The inscription reads, “Pass through this portal and enter the presence of Chillreaver, master of Icehome, greatest among the Dark Queen’s frozen children. Prepare for supplication in the proper manner, and you can enter his fearsome domain and receive his cold gift.” A character who kneels in a square adjacent to the wall causes the wall to slide away into the Chillreaver’s chamber. This can also be accomplished with a DC 20 Thievery check in one of the adjacent squares.
A DC 13 Perception check reveals a torn scrap of a note stuck between the talons of one of the defeated gargoyles. The note reads: “…new dwarf emissary has arrived at the court. He seems shrewd and capable, and his family connections will help us at the stone king’s court in light of the events in Sayre. I have faith that Her Majesty’s will should prevail, but Ironfell’s presence will only help...” The rest is blurred or torn, except for a fragment of a signature, which reads “Zetc...”
April 20 09
|
D u n g e o n 16 5
39
Alliance at Nefelus
I8: Chillreaver’s Seed Encounter Level 18 (10,000 XP)
Setup Chillreaver (C) Seed of Winter (S) Of late, Chillreaver has spent almost all his time here, coaxing every possible thread of power from the Seed of Winter. As he gets closer and closer to finishing off the island nation of Nefelus, his abilities with the artifact have gone far beyond the reach of mortal users. He has constructed this chamber to house the artifact, channel its power, and provide a sanctum sanctorum for himself to draw even more secrets from the Seed. More information on Chillreaver’s plans and his motives can be found in Appendix 2 (page 49). When the PCs enter the chamber, read: Inside is an impressive and terrifying sight. The room is bathed in blue-white light, with beams focused on a small white object floating atop a pedestal high above your heads. The beams originate from ten silvery mirrors positioned along the east and west sides of the walkway you stand upon. Down below, you can see the base of the pedestal where the beams are focused; the pedestal’s length make it appear almost like an ice obelisk. An energy hangs about the room, and the air is colder than you’ve felt anywhere else in the complex. Briefly, you feel an invasive presence in your mind, as if it is searching for something . . . and then it is gone.
You then fix your eyes upon the terrible form that sits upon a rune-inscribed icy dais at the far end of the room. A gigantic, two-headed white dragon meets your gaze, its eyes black as the soulless depths and its mouths smoking with its icy breath. It speaks, both voices echoing off the icy walls in unison, “The mages must be desperate to save their people. They send outsiders here to do their work. How weak! How pathetic! Soon the storm comes to them, and nothing will escape my wrath!”
Tactics Chillreaver is not at all pleased that the PCs have arrived at this late hour. Furious, he launches his assault on the characters by flying across the room and using his breath weapon against the largest PC concentration possible. He stays up in the air, hovering near the Seed to protect it from the characters’ meddling. In subsequent rounds, Chillreaver keeps out of melee range as long as possible, attacking with icy tomb against targets that are effective at range, and using his frightful presence when all (or almost all) the PCs can be affected. He uses his action points as soon as he can (provided he can take two attack actions in a round in which he spends an action point). Chillreaver is no coward, and he does not abandon the Seed of Winter under any circumstances. If one or more characters start shattering the silver mirrors or attempt to wrest the Seed from its pedestal, Chillreaver assaults them with great fury, choosing his most damaging attacks. If it looks likely that the PCs will destroy all the silver mirrors, Chillreaver attempts to snatch up the Seed of Winter and exit Icehome through the treasure room and out the top of the iceberg. There, he can mount a final stand against the PCs.
April 20 09
|
D u n g e o n 16 5
40
Alliance at Nefelus
Features of the Area Illumination: This area is brightly lit. Ceiling: The ceiling is 60 feet from the floor. Floor: The floor here is treated as difficult terrain for anyone moving on it without ice walk. In addition, creatures without ice walk standing on the floor are moved 1 additional square when subjected to forced movement. Walkway: A walkway frames the room in a “U”-shape. The walkway is 30 feet up from the floor where the dais and pedestal base are found, and it’s another 20 feet up in the room’s center to the Seed of Winter. The silver mirrors are at the walkway level, pointed up at the Seed. Secret Door: A secret door to the south leads into Chillreaver’s treasure chamber. PCs discover it with a DC 20 Perception check, and it can be opened with a DC 20 Arcana check or DC 25 Thievery check. Chillreaver might use this way out to flee with the Seed of Winter if he’s able. Runed Dais: The semicircular dais on the eastern side of the room bears a number of deep blue or purple rejuvenation runes carved into the ice. Any creature on or adjacent to the dais who makes a DC 20 Arcana check can spend a healing surge as a minor action. Chillreaver can also take advantage of this twice during the combat. Silver Mirrors: Ten silver mirrors focus the energy of the Seed of Winter, allowing Chillreaver to tap into an incredible amount of ancient power. These silver mirrors are big—about 6 feet tall by 4 feet wide—and were stolen from various places in the world by Chillreaver’s agents. A DC 23 Arcana check reveals these are some of the silver mirrors that the Nefelese once used as communication devices, and their magic
has now been appropriated to power and focus the a rtifact. Although they are extremely bulky and heavy to carry out (they each weigh about 60 pounds), they are easy enough to shatter and render completely useless for good or ill. They have AC 29, other defenses 26; hp 1. A DC 21 Dungeoneering check reveals that shattering all the silver mirrors will cause the Seed of Winter to fall to the floor.
Chillreaver, Exarch of Tiamat (C) Level 17 Solo Soldier
Huge natural magical beast (dragon) XP 8,000 Initiative +13 Senses Perception +17; darkvision Chillwrath Aura (Cold) aura 2; each square within the aura costs enemies 1 extra square of movement to enter. HP 845; Bloodied 422; see also bloodied breath AC 33; Fortitude 31, Reflex 29, Will 29 Resist 25 cold, 10 poison Saving Throws +5; see two-headed Speed 8 (ice walk), fly 8 (hover), overland flight 12 Action Points 2 m Bite (standard; at-will) ✦ Cold Reach 3; +23 vs. AC; 2d6 + 7 plus 2d6 cold damage, plus 2d6 cold damage on an opportunity attack or against an immobilized target. m Claw (standard; at-will) Reach 3; +23 vs. AC; 2d4 + 7 damage, and the target is pulled 2 squares. M Chillreaver’s Fury (standard; at-will) Chillreaver makes a bite attack and a claw attack. R Deep Freeze (standard; recharge ⚅) ✦ Cold Ranged 10; +22 vs. Fortitude; 2d6 + 7 cold damage, ongoing 10 cold damage, and the target is immobilized and dazed (save ends all). Aftereffect: The target is slowed until the end of Chillreaver’s next turn.
Seed of Winter: While placed on the pedestal and acting as the focus for Chillreaver’s weather manipulation, the Seed actively attempts to defend itself from the interloping PCs. It is treated like a trap (see the entry below), and works in conjunction with Chillreaver when possible. The Seed cannot be destroyed, but it can be handled without harm. Once the Seed is removed from the pedestal, it can no longer sustain its current magic while in an unfocused state. The entirety of Icehome begins to crumble away. C Breath Weapon (standard; recharge ⚅) ✦ Cold Close blast 5; +21 vs. Reflex; 6d6 + 7 cold damage, and the target is immobilized and dazed (save ends both). Aftereffect: The target is slowed until the end of Chillreaver’s next turn. C Bloodied Breath (free, when first bloodied; encounter) ✦ Cold Chillreaver’s breath weapon recharges, and he uses it immediately. C Frightful Presence (standard; encounter) ✦ Fear Close burst 10; targets enemies; +21 vs. Will; the target is stunned until the end of Chillreaver’s next turn. Aftereffect: The target takes a –2 penalty to attack rolls (save ends). Threatening Reach Chillreaver can make opportunity attacks against all enemies within his reach (3 squares). Two-Headed Chillreaver rolls initiative twice, and receives two full turns during a round. He rolls for recharge on each of his turns. Each time Chillreaver becomes dazed or stunned, or suffers from an effect that has the charm keyword, that effect ends at the end of his next turn. Alignment Evil Languages Common, Draconic Skills Arcana +15, Athletics +24 Str 22 (+14) Dex 16 (+11) Wis 17 (+11) Con 26 (+16) Int 14 (+10) Cha 14 (+10)
April 20 09
|
D u n g e o n 16 5
41
Alliance at Nefelus
Aftermath Once the Seed of Winter is unseated from its position on the pedestal, a blast of energy crackles through the room. Five rounds later, a great rumbling sound is followed by deafening cracks. The magic which sustained Icehome is becoming undone, and the whole structure will soon crumble into the sea. The characters need to escape. Go to “Escape from Icehome” on page 16. Seed of Winter (S) Trap
Level 18 Blaster XP 2,000
A large shimmering white acorn floats on a pedestal high above. Cold blue-white beams travel from 10 silver mirrors positioned throughout the chamber to converge on the seed. Trap: The Seed of Winter attacks the nearest creature without the cold keyword within range on its turn. Perception Characters can’t use Perception to detect this trap. Additional Skill: Arcana ✦ DC 25: The character recognizes that the silver mirrors are focusing the Seed of Winter’s power. ✦ DC 30: The Seed of Winter is an artifact and is indestructible by any conventional means. Initiative +8 Trigger Once on its turn, the trap attacks the nearest creature to it within range without the cold keyword. Attack Standard Action Ranged 10 Target: One creature Attack: +24 vs. Will Hit: The target is dominated (save ends) and is under the control of Chillreaver. Aftereffect: The target takes 2d10 + 5 cold damage and is immobilized (save ends). Countermeasures ✦ An adjacent character can remove the Seed of Winter from its pedestal with a DC 35 Thievery or Strength check. This disables the trap. The character gains a +2 bonus to this check for each silver mirror that has been destroyed. The Seed of Winter falls to the floor if all the silver mirrors have been destroyed. ✦ A character can attack any of the 10 silver mirrors (AC 29, other defenses 26; hp 1 each). Destroying all the silver mirrors disables the trap and the Seed of Winter falls to the floor. April 20 09
|
D u n g e o n 16 5
42
Alliance at Nefelus
SC2: Escape from Icehome Encounter Level 16 (7,000 XP)
Setup Start running the skill challenge, and have the action move from one scene to another with the dragon fighting all along the way. Run a few rounds of combat, have the PCs make a round of skill checks, move the scene, and start over again until you reach a climactic conclusion! If the fight against Chillreaver (see the encounter beginning on page 40) spills outside through the hole in the roof, the PCs find themselves atop the steep, treacherous summit of Icehome. Away from the 15-foot wide pit that leads back down to area 9, the ground slopes steeply away. The summit is covered with difficult terrain, and the steep slope means that any round a character makes an attack, he or she must also succeed on a DC 20 Acrobatics check or fall prone after making the attack. A character wearing spiked ice shoes receives a +5 bonus on this check. Chillreavers size and weight mean that the dragon does not need to make Acrobatics checks if he lands to face the characters.
Escape from Icehome Skill Challenge
Level 16 XP 7,000
The iceberg is beginning to break up and crumble into the sea, and you have to escape before you’re taken down with it! The PCs must find a way to escape from Icehome before the whole iceberg completely collapses. Complexity 5 (requires 12 successes before 3 failures). Primary Skills Acrobatics, Athletics, Dungeoneering, Endurance, Perception Other Skills Arcana, Thievery Victory The PCs escape crumbling Icehome just before it falls into the sea, and they arrive back in Nefelus safely. Defeat The PCs are crushed in the collapse of the iceberg. Each PC loses all remaining healing surges and must make three DC 20 Endurance checks to attempt to swim to shore wounded in frigid cold water. If all three checks fail, the PC is dead and the body is later recovered by the surviving PCs. Special: Grabbing Treasure A PC can attempt to grab an as-yet unclaimed treasure parcel on the way out. This is declared when a primary skill check for the skill challenge is made; the check has a –5 penalty applied. (Also see Thievery, below.) Special: Ice Walk PCs with ice walk receive a +2 bonus to Acrobatics and Athletics checks for the duration of the skill challenge. Special: Overland Flight PCs with overland flight earn one automatic success for the group. Special: Recovering Bodies A PC can attempt to recover a body left elsewhere in the cavern on the way out, provided that the PC is heading in the general direction of the location of the body. This is declared when a primary skill check for the skill challenge is made; the check has a –5 penalty applied. Acrobatics DC 13 A successful check counts as a success on the skill challenge. The PC dodges out of the way of incoming ice boulders, falling debris, and floor hazards. Alternatively, the PC can wriggle through spaces that got a little too tight when the collapse began.
Arcana DC 20 A success or failure on this check does not count as a success or failure on the skill challenge. The PC has heard of similar magical energy imploding when the power source was drastically diminished. They also learn that the creatures affected by the Seed of Winter have begun to revert back to their normal form. The PC receives a +2 bonus to the next check in the skill challenge. Athletics DC 13 A successful check counts as a success on the skill challenge. The PC jumps, climbs, and runs to safety, using raw physical power to negotiate the hazards. Dungeoneering DC 13 A successful check counts as a success on the skill challenge. The PC knows the ins and outs of ice caves, and how to successfully avoid hazards while negotiating a collapsing structure. Endurance DC 13 A successful check counts as a success on the skill challenge. Slow and steady wins the race, and the PC endures the cold water, icy tunnels, and windy slopes to find escape. Perception DC 13 A successful check counts as a success on the skill challenge. The PC looks for cracks and splits in the ice, falling debris, and shortcuts on the way out. Thievery DC 20 A success or failure on this check does not count as a success or failure on the skill challenge. The PC can make a Thievery check to grab an as-yet unclaimed treasure parcel. If the check is successful, the PC does not take a penalty to the primary skill check.
April 20 09
|
D u n g e o n 16 5
43
Alliance at Nefelus
SC3: Convincing Bejam Encounter Level 15 (1,200 XP)
Setup Bejam is willing to entertain the notion, but he is not convinced that he can do the most good away from his people and the Thraxinium. The PCs need to convince him to leave his ancestral home to represent the island nation in the Coalition. Convincing Bejam Skill Challenge
Level 15 XP 1,200
You have made a proposal to Bejam to have him represent the Nefelese among the Coalition against the githyanki threat. Although he seems reasonably receptive to the idea, he still has doubts that he can do his people the greatest good by leaving his official duties in Nefelus.
Arcana DC 18 A successful check counts as a success on the skill challenge. The PC explains that Nefelus’s magical strengths might be exploited without proper representation on the Coalition. Bluff DC 18 A successful check counts as a success on the skill challenge. The PC flatters Bejam with talk of his accepting nature and the ability to have an open discourse, even with strangers from the mainland. Diplomacy DC 11 A successful check counts as a success on the skill challenge. The PC explains the merits of having a voice on the Coalition, allowing Nefelese interests to be fully articulated to the other members.
Insight DC 11 A successful check counts as a success on the skill challenge. The PC senses that Bejam is struggling with this decision and wants to do what’s best for his people, but sees the greater good in personally representing Nefelus.
The PCs attempt to convince Bejam that he should join the Coalition, so that Nefelus has a voice among the group. Complexity 1 (requires 4 successes before 3 failures). Primary Skills Arcana, Bluff, Diplomacy, Insight Victory The PCs convince Bejam to join the Coalition. He agrees to leave with Amyria once he has informed the Thraxinium of his decision. Defeat Bejam is unsure that leaving his people is the right thing to do in these dangerous times. He promises Nefelese assistance to the Coalition, but does not seek a seat among the group. Special All PCs receive a +1 bonus to checks in the skill challenge if they returned Uarion or brought back the apparatuses of Kwalish. If they did both, all PCs receive a +2 bonus instead.
April 20 09
|
D u n g e o n 16 5
44
Alliance at Nefelus
Appendix 1: New Monsters Several new monsters are introduced in the adventure and are also described below.
Frost Giant Scout Frost giant scouts provide long-range support for their fellow frost giants with their cold-based attacks. Frost Giant Scout
Level 15 Artillery
Frost Giant Scout Tactics A frost giant scout stays at the longest distance away from its targets as possible while maintaining effective use of its icy arrow and chillshards.
Icetouched Creature The influences of Chillreaver’s manipulation of the Seed of Winter have resulted in several creatures becoming partially transformed both in body and mind. Physically, these creatures appear as normal,
except that they have a blue-white frostlike tinge to their skin or hide, and they have deep blue eyes. Mentally, their wills have become more pliable, and they are completely subservient to Chillreaver. An icetouched creature is treated just like a normal version of the base creature, except for the following changes. Icetouched Creature Resist 10 cold Speed Gains ice walk
Large elemental humanoid (cold, giant) XP 1,200 Initiative +13 Senses Perception +17 HP 115; Bloodied 57 AC 28; Fortitude 26, Reflex 28, Will 27 Resist 15 cold Speed 9 (ice walk) m Icy Spear (standard; at-will) ✦ Cold, Weapon Reach 2; +20 vs. AC; 1d10 + 6 cold damage. r Icy Arrow (standard; requires longbow; at-will) ✦ Cold, Weapon Ranged 20/40; +22 vs. AC; 1d12 + 8 cold damage, and the target is slowed until the end of the frost giant scout’s next turn. A Chillshards (standard; recharge ⚄ ⚅) ✦ Cold, Weapon Area burst 1 within 20; +20 vs. Fortitude; 1d12 + 8 cold damage, and the target is slowed and cannot take immediate or opportunity actions until the end of the frost giant scout’s next turn. Aftereffect: The target is slowed until the end of the frost giant scout’s next turn. Tundra Hunter (standard; recharges when first bloodied) The frost giant makes a melee or ranged attack. If the attack hits, the target gains vulnerable 10 cold (save ends). Aftereffect: The target gains vulnerable 5 cold (save ends). Quick Release The frost giant scout does not provoke opportunity attacks when it makes ranged or area attacks. Icebound Footing When an effect pulls, pushes, or slides a frost giant scout, the giant moves 2 squares fewer than the effect specifies. Alignment Evil Languages Giant Skills Athletics +16, Stealth +18 Str 19 (+11) Dex 23 (+13) Wis 20 (+12) Con 19 (+11) Int 10 (+7) Cha 10 (+7) Equipment hide armor, spear, longbow, 40 arrows April 20 09
|
D u n g e o n 16 5
45
Alliance at Nefelus
Ice Gargoyle
Chillreaver called these creatures from the Elemental Chaos, using the power of the Seed of Winter. He uses the ice gargoyles to guard the upper reaches of Icehome. Occasionally, they fly around the area near the ice floe and act as Chillreaver’s eyes when the dragon is busy directing the power of the Seed of Winter. Ice gargoyles are native to the Elemental Chaos, and they inhabit the bitterly cold places of the world and other planes. When encountered, they most commonly appear to be vague forms encased in steaming ice. Telltale signs of an ice gargoyle lair are various creatures trapped in ice with shocked looks of horror on their faces.
Ice Gargoyle Tactics An ice gargoyle begins combat within its ice prison. When prey comes near, it reverts to its normal form and makes a flying grab. It then returns to its ice prison to feed on the creature it grabbed. If it is damaged by fire, it concentrates its attacks on the enemy that dealt it fire damage.
Ice Gargoyle Reaver Tactics The ice gargoyle reaver fights like its smaller kin, but it has the added tactic of entering its ice prison and then using bloodchill bite on a foe its aura has weakened.
Ice Gargoyle
Level 12 Lurker
Medium elemental humanoid (cold) XP 700 Initiative +14 Senses Perception +15; darkvision HP 96; Bloodied 48 AC 26; Fortitude 25, Reflex 23, Will 23 Immune slow; Resist 15 cold Vulnerable fire (the ice gargoyle is dazed until the end of the attacker’s next turn) Speed 6, fly 8; see also flyby grab m Claw (standard; at-will) ✦ Cold +17 vs. AC; 1d6 + 5 damage plus 1d6 + 4 cold damage. M Flyby Grab (standard; recharges after using ice prison) The ice gargoyle flies 8 squares and makes a melee basic attack at the end of that movement. If the attack hits, the target is grabbed. The ice gargoyle can try to move the grabbed target as part of its next move action. If it succeeds, it can move or fly at full speed, pulling the target with it. Ice Prison (standard; at-will) The ice gargoyle encases itself and anyone it is grabbing in ice. In this form, the ice gargoyle and any target it is grabbing gain resist 15 all, except against the cold damage dealt by this power. Both can still see their surroundings, but they cannot use other normal senses. A target the ice gargoyle is grabbing is stunned, restrained, and takes ongoing 20 cold damage (save ends all, ending the grab and the ice prison). Aftereffect: The target is slowed until the end of the ice gargoyle’s next turn. Each time a target the ice gargoyle is grabbing takes the ongoing cold damage, the ice gargoyle regains 5 hit points. The ice gargoyle can take no actions in the ice prison, other than to end the effect (a minor action). If the gargoyle takes damage in this form, the ice prison is broken, freeing the grabbed target and ending the grab. Alignment Evil Languages Primordial Skills Stealth +18 Str 24 (+14) Dex 23 (+13) Wis 10 (+12) Con 20 (+13) Int 5 (+4) Cha 17 (+10)
April 20 09
|
D u n g e o n 16 5
46
Alliance at Nefelus
Ice Gargoyle Reaver
Level 15 Lurker
Large elemental humanoid (cold) XP 1,200 Initiative +17 Senses Perception +17; darkvision Freezing Gaze (Cold) aura 2; requires the ice gargoyle reaver to be in its ice prison; an enemy that enters or starts its turn within the aura is weakened until the start of its next turn and takes 5 cold damage. HP 116; Bloodied 58 AC 29; Fortitude 28, Reflex 27, Will 26 Immune slow; Resist 15 cold Vulnerable fire (the ice gargoyle reaver grants combat advantage until the end of the attacker’s next turn) Speed 6, fly 8; see also flying grab m Claw (standard; at-will) ✦ Cold Reach 2; +20 vs. AC; 1d8 + 6 damage, and ongoing 5 cold damage (save ends). M Bloodchill Bite (standard; recharge ⚄ ⚅) ✦ Cold, Healing +20 vs. AC; 2d6 + 5 cold damage (3d6 + 5 cold damage against a weakened target), and the target gains vulnerable 5 cold (save ends). M Flying Grab (standard; recharges after using ice prison) The ice gargoyle reaver flies 8 squares and makes a melee basic attack at the end of that movement. If the attack hits, the target is grabbed. The ice gargoyle reaver can try to move the grabbed target as part of its next move action. If it succeeds, it can move or fly at full speed, pulling the target with it. Ice Prison (standard; at-will) The ice gargoyle reaver encases itself and anyone it is grabbing in ice. In this form, the ice gargoyle reaver and any target it is grabbing gain resist 20 all, except against the cold damage dealt by this power. Both can still see their surroundings, but they cannot use other normal senses. A target the ice gargoyle reaver is grabbing is stunned, restrained, and takes ongoing 20 cold damage (save ends all, ending the grab and ice prison). Aftereffect: The target is slowed and weakened until the end of the ice gargoyle reaver’s next turn. Each time a target the ice gargoyle reaver is grabbing takes the ongoing cold damage, the ice gargoyle reaver regains 5 hit points. The ice gargoyle reaver can take no actions in the ice prison, other than to end the effect (a minor action). If the gargoyle takes damage in this form, the ice prison is broken, freeing the grabbed target as if it saved and ending the grab. Alignment Evil Languages Primordial Skills Stealth +19 Str 25 (+14) Dex 24 (+14) Wis 17 (+10) Con 22 (+13) Int 5 (+4) Cha 20 (+12)
Arctic Sahuagin
The sahuagin were the first to be affected by the Seed of Winter’s transformative influence. In the past, they harried the island of Nefelus, but now they pose an even greater threat. Contact with the Seed’s emanations has quickly turned these creatures into tougher versions of their more mundane counterparts. In addition, some of the sahuagin are starting to find ways to alter their powers in their new forms, evolving beyond what they once were. Reveling in their newfound power, these arctic sahuagin were the first of Chillreaver’s allies, attempting to maintain his favor in exchange for more power. One day soon, they hope to wreak havoc on the Nefalese in revenge for years of frustration at the magocracy’s hands. Some arctic sahuagin ride dire sharks that have also been changed by the Seed of Winter. Arctic Sahuagin Guard
Level 11 Minions
Medium natural humanoid (aquatic) XP 150 Initiative +10 Senses Perception +7; low-light vision HP 1; a missed attack never damages a minion. AC 27; Fortitude 24, Reflex 23, Will 22 Immune cold Speed 5 (7 on a charge, ice walk), swim 5 (7 on a charge) m Trident (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon +18 (+19 against a bloodied target) vs. AC; 7 damage (9 damage to a bloodied target), and the target is marked until the end of the arctic sahuagin guard’s next turn. R Javelin (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon Ranged 10/20; +18 (+19 against a bloodied target) vs. AC; 7 damage (9 damage to a bloodied target). Blood Frenzy The arctic sahuagin gains a +1 bonus to attack rolls and a +2 bonus to damage rolls against bloodied enemies. Alignment Chaotic evil Languages Abyssal Str 16 (+8) Dex 14 (+7) Wis 12 (+6) Con 14 (+7) Int 10 (+5) Cha 10 (+5) Equipment trident, 3 javelins
April 20 09
|
D u n g e o n 16 5
47
Alliance at Nefelus
Arctic Sahuagin Raider
Level 11 Soldier
Medium natural humanoid (aquatic) XP 600 Initiative +11 Senses Perception +8; low-light vision HP 112; Bloodied 56 AC 27; Fortitude 24, Reflex 23, Will 22 Resist 10 cold Speed 5 (7 on a charge, ice walk), swim 5 (7 on a charge) m Trident (standard; at-will) ✦ Cold, Weapon +18 (+19 against a bloodied target) vs. AC; 1d8 + 5 (1d8 + 7 to a bloodied target) damage plus 1d8 cold damage, and the target is marked until the end of the arctic sahuagin raider’s next turn. R Trident (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon Ranged 10/20; +18 (+19 against a bloodied target) vs. AC; 2d6 + 5 (2d6 + 7 to a bloodied target) damage. M Opportunistic Strike (immediate reaction, when a flanked enemy shifts; at-will) ✦ Cold, Weapon The arctic sahuagin raider makes a melee basic attack against the enemy. M Sliding Strike (immediate interrupt, when a marked enemy makes an attack that doesn’t include the arctic sahuagin raider; at-will) ✦ Cold, Weapon The arctic sahuagin raider shifts 7 squares adjacent to the triggering enemy, and makes a melee basic attack against that enemy. Blood Frenzy The arctic sahuagin raider gains a +1 bonus to attack rolls and a +2 bonus to damage rolls against bloodied enemies. Alignment Chaotic evil Languages Abyssal Str 20 (+10) Dex 14 (+7) Wis 12 (+6) Con 14 (+7) Int 10 (+5) Cha 10 (+5) Equipment 2 tridents
Arctic Sahuagin Priest
Level 13 Artillery
Medium natural humanoid (aquatic) XP 800 Initiative +11 Senses Perception +12; low-light vision HP 101; Bloodied 50 AC 25; Fortitude 24, Reflex 25, Will 26 Resist 10 cold Speed 5 (7 on a charge, ice walk), swim 5 (7 on a charge) m Longspear (standard; at-will) ✦ Cold, Weapon Reach 2; +17 (+18 against a bloodied target) vs. AC; 1d10 + 4 (1d10 + 6 to a bloodied target) damage plus 1d8 cold damage, and the target slides 1 square. R Freezing Bolt (standard; at-will) ✦ Cold Ranged 10; +18 (+19 against a bloodied target) vs. Fortitude; 2d6 + 6 (2d6 + 8 to a bloodied target) cold damage, and the target is slowed until the end of the arctic sahuagin priest’s next turn. R Arctic Jaws (standard; recharges when no target is affected by this power) ✦ Cold Ranged 20; icy shark jaws appear and bite the target; +18 (+19 against a bloodied target) vs. Will; 2d6 + 6 (2d6 + 8 to a bloodied target) cold damage, and target gains vulnerable 5 cold and is slowed (save ends both). Blood Frenzy The arctic sahuagin priest gains a +1 bonus to attack rolls and a +2 bonus to damage rolls against bloodied enemies. Alignment Chaotic evil Languages Abyssal, Common Skills Intimidate +15 Str 16 (+9) Dex 18 (+10) Wis 20 (+11) Con 16 (+9) Int 12 (+7) Cha 16 (+9) Equipment trident, holy symbol, frozen kelp robe
Arctic Sahuagin Baron Level 15 Elite Brute (Leader)
Large natural humanoid (cold, aquatic) XP 2,400 Initiative +11 Senses Perception +8; low-light vision Blood Healing (Healing) aura 10; any ally within the aura that starts its turn adjacent to a bloodied enemy regains 5 hit points. HP 360; Bloodied 180 AC 27; Fortitude 38, Reflex 26, Will 27 Resist 10 cold Saving Throws +2 Speed 5 (7 on a charge; ice walk), swim 7 (9 on a charge) Action Points 1 m Trident (standard; at-will) ✦ Cold, Weapon Reach 2; +18 (+20 against a bloodied target) vs. AC; 1d10 + 7 (1d10 + 12 against a bloodied target) damage plus 1d10 cold damage; see also blood hunger. m Bloodchill Claw (standard; at-will) ✦ Cold Reach 2; +18 (+20 against a bloodied target) vs. AC; 1d6 + 7 (1d6 + 12 against a bloodied target) damage, and ongoing 5 cold damage and the target is slowed (save ends both). r Javelin (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon Ranged 10/20; +18 (+20 against a bloodied target) vs. AC; 2d8 + 7 (2d8 + 12 against a bloodied target) damage. M Baron’s Fury (standard; at-will) ✦ Cold, Weapon The arctic sahuagin baron makes a trident attack and two claw attacks. Blood Hunger The arctic sahuagin baron gains a +2 bonus to attack rolls and a +5 bonus to damage rolls against bloodied enemies. Alignment Chaotic evil Languages Abyssal, Common Skills Intimidate +15 Str 22 (+13) Dex 18 (+11) Wis 12 (+8) Con 18 (+11) Int 12 (+8) Cha 16 (+10) Equipment trident, 3 javelins, headdress
April 20 09
|
D u n g e o n 16 5
48
Alliance at Nefelus
Arctic Dire Shark
Level 14 Skirmisher
Huge natural beast (aquatic, mount) XP 1,000 Initiative +16 Senses Perception +9 HP 139; Bloodied 69 AC 28; Fortitude 26, Reflex 28, Will 23 Resist 10 cold Speed swim 10 (12 on a charge) m Bite (standard; at-will) +17 (+19 against creatures without a swim speed) vs. AC; 3d6 + 5 damage. Deft Swimmer (while mounted by a friendly rider of 14th level or higher; at-will) ✦ Mount The dire shark’s rider gains a +2 bonus to AC against opportunity attacks. While in water, the rider also gains a +2 bonus to attack rolls against creatures without a swim speed. Waterborn While in water, the dire shark gains a +2 bonus to attack rolls against creatures without a swim speed. Alignment Unaligned Languages — Str 21 (+12) Dex 24 (+14) Wis 14 (+9) Con 19 (+11) Int 2 (+3) Cha 9 (+6)
Chillreaver Chillreaver is a mighty two-headed white dragon and exarch of Tiamat that originally laired in the lands north of the Winterbole Forest. There, he made the berserker barbarian tribes run in fear and fought the frost giant jarl to claim control over their clans. Under the command of his Dark Queen, he set his four eyes on Nefelus, where he was tasked with bringing woe to the prosperous island nation. He soon acquired a means to allow him to accomplish his ruinous plans from the fomorian king Cachlain—an artifact known as the Seed of Winter. He is determined to make the most of his time with the artifact, and if he can, find a way to keep the Seed in service to his queen. He has unlocked power in the Seed that none other can claim; his essence is in perfect concordance with the Seed’s wishes, and it fuels his desire for conquest and
ruin upon those who seek warmth and comfort. Crippling Nefelus and bringing the chill of winter will allow the dragon to mount an attack on the island itself.
Personality Chillreaver has a vicious, brutal mind. Above all, he revels in the suffering of others at his command. He aspires to lay waste to lands and turn them into arctic deserts, to kill the warmth of the summer, and to turn joy into grief and loss. Chillreaver is, in many ways, the dark parts of winter personified. The two-headed dragon also loves to subjugate others and would want nothing more than to rule over a continent of sentient creatures that he could endlessly and mercilessly exploit for his own cruel whims. He hopes to begin that dream with Nefelus. Chillreaver, Exarch of Tiamat Level 17 Solo Soldier
Huge natural magical beast (dragon) XP 8,000 Initiative +13 Senses Perception +17; darkvision Chillwrath Aura (Cold) aura 2; each square within the aura costs enemies 1 extra square of movement to enter. HP 845; Bloodied 422; see also bloodied breath AC 33; Fortitude 31, Reflex 29, Will 29 Resist 25 cold, 10 poison Saving Throws +5; see two-headed Speed 8 (ice walk), fly 8 (hover), overland flight 12 Action Points 2 m Bite (standard; at-will) ✦ Cold Reach 3; +23 vs. AC; 2d6 + 7 plus 2d6 cold damage, plus 2d6 cold damage on an opportunity attack or against an immobilized target. m Claw (standard; at-will) Reach 3; +23 vs. AC; 2d4 + 7 damage, and the target is pulled 2 squares. M Chillreaver’s Fury (standard; at-will) Chillreaver makes a bite attack and a claw attack. R Deep Freeze (standard; recharge ⚅) ✦ Cold Ranged 10; +22 vs. Fortitude; 2d6 + 7 cold damage, ongoing 10 cold damage, and the target is immobilized and dazed (save ends all). Aftereffect: The target is slowed until the end of Chillreaver’s next turn.
For all his aspirations, Chillreaver is not without a practical side. He has assembled a number of allies to his cause, promising to those he cannot directly control a small claim to his soon-to-be massive resource gain. He values strong, unwavering loyalty to him and his “Dark Queen’s” cause, and he reluctantly acknowledges those that aid his efforts. Of course, he’ll ultimately be thinking about the long-term prospects of claiming his allies’ resources even as he prepares to support them in battle.
Lore Arcana or Religion DC 25: Chillreaver is a powerful, two-headed white dragon legendary in the north. He is also particularly blessed by Tiamat, who gave him his second head, and serves as one of her exarchs. C Breath Weapon (standard; recharge ⚅) ✦ Cold Close blast 5; +21 vs. Reflex; 6d6 + 7 cold damage, and the target is immobilized and dazed (save ends both). Aftereffect: The target is slowed until the end of Chillreaver’s next turn. C Bloodied Breath (free, when first bloodied; encounter) ✦ Cold Chillreaver’s breath weapon recharges, and he uses it immediately. C Frightful Presence (standard; encounter) ✦ Fear Close burst 10; targets enemies; +21 vs. Will; the target is stunned until the end of Chillreaver’s next turn. Aftereffect: The target takes a –2 penalty to attack rolls (save ends). Threatening Reach Chillreaver can make opportunity attacks against all enemies within his reach (3 squares). Two-Headed Chillreaver rolls initiative twice, and receives two full turns during a round. He rolls for recharge on each of his turns. Each time Chillreaver becomes dazed or stunned, or suffers from an effect that has the charm keyword, that effect ends at the end of his next turn. Alignment Evil Languages Common, Draconic Skills Arcana +15, Athletics +24 Str 22 (+14) Dex 16 (+11) Wis 17 (+11) Con 26 (+16) Int 14 (+10) Cha 14 (+10) April 20 09
|
D u n g e o n 16 5
49
Alliance at Nefelus
Appendix 2: New Magic Items and Rituals
Elemental Prism One of the many secrets of Nefelus, an elemental prism allows its user to convert one element to another.
Elemental Prism Level 16 This flickering prism focuses elemental power and converts it to a different element, bathing you in a protective glow. Wondrous Item 45,000 gp Power (Encounter): Free Action. Use this power when you make an attack that deals acid, cold, fire, lightning, poison, or thunder damage. Change all your attack’s damage to a different type of your choice among those above. You gain resist 15 to your attack’s original damage type until the end of your next turn.
Solace Bole You transport yourself and your companions to the hollow of an enormous tree trunk in the Feywild. While you’re there, time passes slowly in the place you once were. Level: 12 Category: Travel Time: 10 minutes (see below) Duration: 1 hour (see below)
Component Cost: 500 gp Market Price: 2,600 gp Key Skill: Arcana (no check)
You and up to five other creatures you designate within 10 squares of you are transported to a sealed hollow the size of a comfortable room within a magical tree in the Feywild. The hollow has a glowing light you can control and is filled with sweet air. You can remain within the bole for up to 12 hours. Thereafter, or when you will it to be so, you and all the creatures the ritual took to the hollow return to the exact place they left. Only 1 hour of time has passed in the world. If you took an extended rest
within the bole, you must wait 12 hours after your return to the world to take another one. If you have assistance when performing this ritual, divide the casting time by the number of participants. The assistants all chant in a fey harmony while you perform the ritual. Anyone you want to assist you in this way can learn the proper harmony during an extended rest.
The Seed of Winter The Seed of Winter is appropriate for paragon-level characters.
Seed of Winter Paragon Level This outsized, pearlescent acorn is one of the fabled artifacts of the Winter Court of the Feywild. It is a potent reminder of the power the fey can hold over the environment. The Seed of Winter is a +3 implement that acts as either a wand or a totem, and possesses the following properties. Enhancement: Attack rolls and damage rolls Critical: +3d6 cold damage, or +3d10 cold damage against creatures with the fire keyword Property: You gain a +2 item bonus to Endurance checks and Intimidate checks. Property: You gain ice walk. Property: Enemies take a –2 penalty to saving throws against your powers that have the charm or fear keyword. Power (At-Will ✦ Arcane, Cold, Implement): Standard Action. You can use ray of frost (wizard 1). You can use Intelligence, Wisdom, or Charisma for the attack roll. Power (Encounter ✦ Arcane, Cold, Implement): Standard Action. You can use winter’s wrath (wizard 7). You can use Intelligence, Wisdom, or Charisma for the attack roll. Power (Daily ✦ Cold, Implement, Primal, Reliable): Standard Action. You can use devouring ice (druid 15). You can use Intelligence, Wisdom, or Charisma for the attack roll.
Goals of the Seed of Winter ✦ Bring the touch of winter to even the most sweltering climes. ✦ Oppose the agents of the Summer Fey and elemental fire. ✦ Demand obedience from the weak and frail. ✦ Be reunited with the Winter Court.
Roleplaying the Seed of Winter The Seed of Winter communicates in a harsh female voice, which leaves an echo reminiscent of tinkling glass. It issues demands to its owner, and screams with rage when it is not obeyed. The more the user obeys the seed, the more he or she becomes aloof, cold, and authoritarian, willing to resort to harsh means to accomplish any task. Some say that the Seed of Winter contains the resonance of an archfey who once lived in the Winter Court.
Concordance Starting Score
5
Owner gains a level
+1d10
Owner is a creature with the cold keyword Owner has at least one power with the cold keyword Owner kills a creature with the fire keyword (1/day) Owner dominates or intimidates a creature (1/day) Owner refuses the Seed (2/day) Owner or an ally kills a creature with the cold keyword (1/day) Owner frees a creature from mental control (1/day)
April 20 09
|
+2 +1 +1 +1 –1 –2 –2
D u n g e o n 16 5
50
Alliance at Nefelus
Pleased (16–20)
Unsatisfied (1–4)
“The Seed and I shall bring forth the icy grip of obedience to those who try to deny us.” Harsh, dominating, and cold, the wielder and the Seed are one with each other.
“The Seed chides me at every turn, wearing on my will. Nothing I do ever pleases it.” The wielder is being forgiving to others or refrains from bringing winter to the warm. The Seed is in a perpetual state of negative emotion, constantly judging the wielder or screaming in rage.
The Seed’s enhancement bonus increases to +4. Critical: +4d6 cold damage, or +4d10 cold damage against creatures with the fire keyword Property: You gain resist 10 cold. Power (Daily ✦ Charm): Minor Action. An enemy within 5 squares of you makes a melee basic attack against an adjacent target of your choice.
Satisfied (12–15) “The Seed and I prepare the weak for the bitter times ahead.” The wielder has proven worthy to possess the Seed, which grows more sated with each cold victory. Property: You gain resist 5 cold. Power (Encounter): Free Action. You can use this power when you hit an enemy with a power that slows the target. That enemy is immobilized instead.
Property: You take a –2 penalty to your Will. Special: You gain vulnerable 5 fire.
About the Author
Originally thought to have been raised from a humble Midwestern family, Chris Tulach actually fell to Earth in a meteorite-shaped capsule flung from a planet far outside our galaxy. While under the yellow rays of Sol, Chris’s nerdity far surpasses that of any normal human. Using this precious gift only for good, he has become the D&D® Organized Play Content Developer, responsible for the development and deployment of Dungeons & Dragons® organized play programs. He is also the co-author of E2 Kingdom of the Ghouls™.
Angered (0 or lower) “No! Leave me be! I have only cold sorrow now.” Howling with fury, the Seed crushes the wearer’s spirit and demands to be passed on to someone with a stronger will. The Seed’s enhancement bonus drops to +2. Critical: +2d6 cold damage, or +2d10 cold damage against creatures with the fire keyword Property: You take a –4 penalty to your Will. Special: You gain vulnerable 10 fire. Special: Whenever you would be slowed, you are immobilized instead.
Normal (5–11)
Moving On
“The Seed asks only for my loyalty and to follow its wisdom.” The Seed makes only occasional demands of its wielder, but if such demands are not followed, it is prone to outbursts of anger.
“The wintry reaches of the Feywild call again to the Seed.” The Seed of Winter eventually tires of the mortal world and its “civilized” ways, and returns to the possession of a creature of the Feywild to renew its ancient energy. If the Seed is at least satisfied, it leaves behind an implement of cold of the user’s choice.
April 20 09
|
D u n g e o n 16 5
51
“In this war, we face not only mortal danger, but a more sinister attack—an assault against our hearts and minds. The githyanki threaten to drive us to defeat through neglect and treachery. Neglect as we refuse to take the bold steps we must to survive, and treachery as our enemies lead astray those who could be our allies, and mobilize them against us.” —Amyria, appealing to the Coalition
Throne ofthe Stone-Skinned King By Logan Bonner
illustrations by John Stanko ✦ cartography by Sean MacDonald
TM & © 2009 Wizards of the Coast LLC All rights reserved.
May 20 09
|
D u n g e o n 16 6
4
Throne of the Stone-Skinned King
Background The githyanki built a network of allies across many planes before beginning their attacks, and one of these is Cachlain, a powerful fomorian known as the Stone-Skinned King. From his secluded lair, he provides transport for the forces of evil. Like the Elsir Vale, though to a lesser extent, Cachlain’s realm contains portals to different planes and locations. Though the githyanki possess many means of transport, the Stone-Skinned King’s portals are especially worrisome, since they connect to lands near several cities of the Coalition. The fomorian has established total control over the portals, using rituals that took decades to take effect; no one passes through one of the portals without Cachlain’s seal. Cachlain, the fomorian king, rules a subterranean complex of caverns, much of it chipped from great crystals and shaped by cyclops slaves into immaculate, enormous corridors and rooms. Cachlain is particularly fond of beautiful magical craft, and his citadel is filled with arcane torches and doorways that open on command. Constructs are his favorite marvel, and he has many throughout his realm. Once, when the king was in an especially mad mood, he had a stone golem pried apart, and its stone armor affixed to his skin. This gave him his name. Cachlain’s assistance came only recently, after a human named Sovacles replaced the king’s former advisor. Sovacles urged cooperation with the githyanki, and he holds great influence over Cachlain’s decisionmaking. No one is certain where Sovacles came from, or how he ended up in the fomorian’s court. The Coalition’s war council found out about the troop transports, but it doesn’t know how many troops are moving through, or what Cachlain is gaining for
his assistance. They also know that Cachlain provided the Seed of Winter to the invaders in “Alliance at Nefelus.” Rumors have spread that he wants the Seed of Winter back. Furthermore, he has been using a portal that connects the Feywild to a region near where the Elsir River flows from the mountains. His underlings have been taking slaves from the Elsir Vale recently, then transporting them through the portal into a grove that lies on the outskirts of Cachlain’s realm. Meanwhile, the war council has been thrown into an uproar in the PCs’ absence. Enemy forces have killed two members, Lord Torrance of Sayre and Kalad of Overlook. The war council needs a new leader, and it has two empty seats.
Adventure Synopsis The PCs return to Sayre from Nefelus, bearing the Seed of Winter. The members seek a leader to head a new war council that will oversee all the armies involved in the war. The PCs engage in a skill challenge, where they nominate their preferred candidate (most likely Amyria). Then, the council discusses the fomorian king Cachlain. For some time, the evil forces’ troops have been traveling through the Feywild and to the world using the natural gates within his dark domain, and spies have discovered that the Seed of Winter was given to Nefelus’s enemies by the fomorian. The PCs are sent to the court to find out what he’s getting for his help and to try to make him to leave the conflict, or even switch sides. They carry the Seed of Winter as a bargaining chip. After following Cachlain’s slavers to find a portal to the Feywild, and obtaining the fomorian’s seal from those slavers, the PCs enter the Feywild. They’re soon attacked by firbolgs, who want to return the PCs and
The Quests As the PCs pursue the central goals of “Throne of the Stone-Skinned King,” they have several opportunities for picking up minor tasks from potential allies. Major Quest—End Cachlain’s Interference Enemies of the PCs have allied with Cachlain, the Stone-Skinned King, so they can use the magical portals of his Feywild kingdom as a staging area for raids. The PCs travel to the fomorian king’s realm, where they must convince him (through diplomacy or force) to stop allowing githyanki troops to travel through his domain. Reward: 8,000 XP. Minor Quest—Assist the Eladrin A group of eladrin seeks to end their enmity with Cachlain and form an alliance. After the PCs meet these eladrin, they can help them achieve this goal. Reward: 1,600 XP. Minor Quest—Turn Bram Ironfell The PCs meet Bram Ironfell of House Karak once more, now serving as an ambassador for the githyanki. If the PCs can turn him to the side of good, he could be a valuable ally in the future. Reward: 1,400 XP. Minor Quest—Speak to Talyrin Sovacles, Cachlain’s new advisor, turned the king against his cyclops advisor Talyrin when he took over. She’s imprisoned somewhere near Cachlain’s throne room, and if the PCs find her prison, they can gain her as an ally against Sovacles. Reward: 1,400 XP.
May 20 09
|
D u n g e o n 16 6
5
Throne of the Stone-Skinned King
the Seed of Winter to followers of Inzira, the Daughter of Frostwhite Forest, who claims to be the proper owner of the artifact. The eladrin general seeks an alliance with Cachlain, fearing the machinations of Sangwyr—a fomorian upstart and their mutual enemy. The general allows the PCs to borrow the Seed of Winter and go to Cachlain’s court, hoping they can form an alliance one way or another. When they reach Cachlain’s realm, they meet with the king and his advisor Sovacles, and they discover that Sovacles nearly controls the king. Rebuffed for the time being, the PCs must await another audience with the king. As they explore the court, they discover the sheer number of troops traveling through the domain, and that the forces of evil have promised to spy on Cachlain’s enemies in exchange for his help. Bram Ironfell, from “The Lost Mines of Karak” (Dungeon® 159), reappears as an ambassador to the court from the githyanki. The PCs can also meet a cyclops oracle who formerly advised Cachlain, but now lies imprisoned in a hidden jail. Cachlain’s rival sends assassins to slaughter the PCs. The assassination attempt foreshadows an assault that happens soon after, as the fomorian rival attempts to seize Cachlain’s domain. As the PCs help fight them off, Bram Ironfell’s moment of truth approaches, and the PCs’ actions determine whether he becomes a foe or ally. The PCs learn that Sovacles had something to do with the invasion, and they confront the advisor. However, the advisor still has Cachlain under control and has convinced him that the PCs were responsible for the attacks. As the PCs battle Sovacles and Cachlain, the advisor reveals that he works for Tiamat. Enraged at this news, Cachlain drops the PCs and Sovacles into a gladiatorial arena below the
throne room. Sovacles reveals his true form as a powerful shapeshifter and exarch of Tiamat. If the PCs succeed, they convince Cachlain to form an unlikely alliance with the eladrin, who receive the Seed of Winter as a token of the agreement. The PCs also find hints that the githyanki’s efforts on their world have suffered serious setbacks in recent weeks, and their forces are preparing to consolidate at their largest stronghold.
Preparing for Adventure “Throne of the Stone-Skinned King” takes the PCs into the dark places of the Feywild and involves them in political intrigue. They go through several skill challenges as the PCs try to find solutions to the difficult, uncertain situations caused by the war.
What You Need to Play Descriptions of the different segments of the adventure follow, and tactical encounter complete with stat blocks and maps give you everything you need to run each encounter. If you aren’t sure how to use the tactical encounter format, see a previous Scales of War adventure, such as “Alliance at Nefelus.”
Treasure Preparation “Throne of the Stone-Skinned King” uses the treasure parcel system described in the Dungeon Master’s Guide. The PCs should gain a total of fifteen treasure parcels. The Treasure Parcels sidebar lists the most likely places to find parcels, so you can fill in the blanks with the parcel numbers noted below. The magic items should come from the players’ wish lists,
Treasure Parcels Parcel A: ____________, SC1. The Coalition’s Leader. Parcel B: ____________, A1. Slay the Slavers. Parcel C: ____________, A1. Slay the Slavers. Parcel D: ____________, A4. Battle Camp Raid. Parcel 7 Parcel E: ____________, B3. Assassination Attempt. Parcel F: ____________, B3. Assassination Attempt. Parcel G: ____________, B1. Disrupted Banquet. Parcel 2 Parcel H: ____________, B4. Caged Animals. Parcel I: ____________, B6. Arena of Blood. Parcel J: ____________, B6. Arena of Blood. Based on the guidelines in the Dungeon Master’s Guide, the following parcels can go in the spaces above. Rely on the wish lists your players gave you for the first six parcels. Parcel 1: Magic item, level 20. Parcel 2: Magic weapon, level 19. Parcel 3: Magic item, level 19. Parcel 4: Magic item, level 18. Parcel 5: Magic item, level 18. Parcel 6: Magic item, level 17. Parcel 7: Four platinum bars minted in Tu’narath, each worth 9,000 gp (36,000 gp total). Parcel 8: An emerald faceted by cyclops experts (15,000 gp) and 170 pp. Parcel 9: Bag of precious gems worth a total of 16,500 gp and 10,000 gp. Parcel 10: 300 pp.
with most of the higher-level items appearing in parcels found later in the adventure, and the 20th-level magic item found on Virizan’s body.
May 20 09
|
D u n g e o n 16 6
6
Throne of the Stone-Skinned King
Vital Information This adventure reveals Scales of War’s true villain: Tiamat, the god of greed, wealth, and envy. If you’re running the adventure path, make sure the players find out the following plot points. ✦ Kalad and Lord Torrance of the Coalition were killed while the PCs were in Nefelus. Thrown into chaos, the Coalition requires new leadership. With Kalad gone, the Coalition also lost its best general. ✦ Cachlain, the fomorian king, has grown more aggressive. He takes slaves from areas that are under attack, and transports githyanki troops through his realm. ✦ The githyanki leave nothing when they invade, and they bring about the total destruction of any lands they conquer. Vlaakith, the Lich Queen, no longer leads the githyanki. (Bram Ironfell reveals these facts.) ✦ The fomorian named Sangwyr seeks to conquer Cachlain’s realm, and only an alliance between Cachlain and Inzira, a noble eladrin, can keep him at bay. He would be a strong ally of the githyanki (and Tiamat). ✦ Sovacles is Virizan, one of Tiamat’s exarchs, and Chillreaver (from “Alliance at Nefelus”) was as well. Tiamat is helping the githyanki and is behind the githyanki attacks. ✦ The githyanki have outposts all across the world, but their largest is a fortress called Garaitha’s Anvil, from which the githyanki launched their entire invasion from their home on the Astral Sea.
Starting the Adventure As soon as the PCs return from Nefelus, they’re summoned to meet with the leaders of the Coalition. The skill challenge (The Coalition’s Leader) takes place over days or weeks, so the PCs have time to catch up with their allies amid the chaos of choosing a leader for the Coalition.
Return to the Coalition When the PCs return, they find that the Coalition has been shaken up by several events. While the PCs and Amyria were absent, the politically savvy Lord Divian Torrance maneuvered to become the head of the council. The dwarf Kalad, one of the PCs most outspoken allies, had become an effective general for the coalition’s armies, and had earned the enmity of the githyanki. While preparing for a battle near Sherrbyr, he was assassinated by the githyanki, and without his leadership the battle ended in defeat for the Coalition. Shortly before the PCs finished their battles to save Nefelus, Torrance went missing. Githyanki from Garaitha’s Anvil claimed he came to them as a representative of the council, seeking a diplomatic compromise to prevent further bloodshed. Seeing this as an affront and a threat, they killed Torrance for his arrogance. Now, the Elsir Vale and Sayre seats on the Coalition are open, and the council lacks a leader. The head of Brindol’s council, Eoffram Troyas, seeks both spots. Many people, both citizens of the Elsir Vale and influential people in other regions now ruled by the Coalition, have suggested Amyria as a replacement
Adventure Pacing Both the skill challenge early in the adventure and the time the PCs spend in Cachlain’s court can take whatever amount of time you feel is appropriate, and their durations are left vague. If your players are antsy, or worry that the githyanki danger can grow while the PCs spend time away from the world, bring on encounters or events in a more rapid succession. for either seat, and for a position as leader. The PCs take part in a skill challenge as they put forth a candidate they’d like to see on the council and run a brief campaign to put that person in power. Skill Challenge: SC1: The Coalition’s Leader (page 17).
News of the Stone-Skinned King Regardless of who leads the Coalition’s council, they have a task they want the PCs to undertake. The fomorian Cachlain, known as the Stone-Skinned King, allied with the githyanki. They have been funneling troops through his domain in the Underdark of the Feywild, taking advantage of the numerous portals to other lands that lie within it. Githyanki have moved more rapidly due to this, but no one is sure how severe the problem is. Caliandra has been tracking the situation in the Feywild and knows that Cachlain wants the Seed of Winter. The fomorian once believed it belonged to him, and Caliandra believes he lent it to aid those who attacked Nefelus. The coalition wants to decipher Cachlain’s motives and prevent him from helping the githyanki if possible. They believe the PCs are the only ones strong enough to safely travel to the king’s domain and deal with him.
May 20 09
|
D u n g e o n 16 6
7
Throne of the Stone-Skinned King
Enter the Feywild Taking advantage of the chaos caused by the githyanki attacks, Cachlain has been sending underlings to the world to collect slaves for his court. By comparing the locations of a few raids in the Elsir Vale, the Coalition has guessed that the slavers have been traveling out of Rhest, a ruined city that was once the capitol of the kingdom of Rhestilor. Some explorers were trying to excavate the ruins, but no one’s heard from them in a long time. If the PCs go to the ruins, they find the cyclops slavers didn’t take much care to cover their tracks. They hold slaves in a small room, preparing to take them back to Cachlain’s court. By defeating the cyclopses, the PCs find the special ritual scroll given to the cyclopses to let them access a portal back to the Feywild. The slaves are all citizens from nearby towns in the Elsir Vale. If the PCs kill the slavers and set the slaves free, neither group will be missed—they’re small potatoes to the fomorian king. He’s more interested in the Seed of Winter. Tactical Encounter: A1. Slay the Slavers (page 20).
May 20 09
|
D u n g e o n 16 6
8
Throne of the Stone-Skinned King
Firbolg Hunters Once the PCs arrive in the Feywild, they find themselves inside a large circle surrounded by standing stones. This is the fey demesne of the Sky Shaper, an archfey who can control the course of the moon and sun within his small realm. Cyclops slavers were using it as a base, but the Sky Shaper was pleased when the firbolgs recently arrived and killed the cyclopses in a glorious battle. These firbolg hunters, working to gain favors from the eladrin of the Frostwhite Forest, have staked out this grove. The eladrin have detected the path of the Seed of Winter and helped set up the firbolg ambush. The firbolgs want to capture the PCs. The first group doesn’t speak. They fight for the sake of fighting, wishing to test the PCs’ mettle. In the second battle, if the firbolgs find out the PCs are willing to meet with the eladrin peacefully, they volunteer to lead them, but still ask if they can fight until one side submits. Tactical Encounter: A2. Sky Shaper’s Grove (page 22). Tactical Encounter: A3. Firbolg Cave (page 24).
Pyradan A dusk harrier named Pyradan leads this small group of firbolgs and their beast allies. He’s comfortable in battle, but gruff and tactless when interacting with others. He works for the eladrins only because they have the foresight to find powerful opponents who can give the firbolgs a good fight. He uses the missions they give as training, and he asks only that he be allowed to take trophies of his victory.
May 20 09
|
D u n g e o n 16 6
9
Throne of the Stone-Skinned King
Eladrin Encampment After the battle, the firbolgs lead (or carry, if the PCs lost) the PCs to a battle camp of eladrin ruled by Inzira, Daughter of Frostwhite Forest. The firbolgs depart soon after, tired of the companionship of other humanoids. In the battle camp, the PCs meet one of Inzira’s lesser generals, Druemmeth Goldtemple. He is a tall, muscular eladrin with long, dark brown hair and, true to his name, streaks of gold in the hair above his ears. Adorned in mithral chainmail and wearing a longsword, he’s clearly prepared for battle. Druemmeth questions the PCs. He has heard tales about the war against the githyanki, so he knows the PCs by reputation and is friendly to them as long as they aren’t aggressive. In fact, he apologizes for sending the firbolgs after them, claiming that he would have approached them more diplomatically had he known who they were. However, Druemmeth hasn’t received word about the events in Nefelus, and he wants to know how the PCs attained the Seed of Winter. If they’re forthcoming and appear honest, he believes them easily. Otherwise, his attitude is no longer friendly, and his interrogation grows more threatening. Whether he finds out what he wants to know with little effort or is unable to pry any information from the PCs, he asks the PCs to leave his tent while he converses with Inzira, his ruler. When he brings the PCs back in, he has prepared a means for the PCs to converse with Inzira.
Read the following: The general says, “Inzira seeks a temporary alliance with the Stone-Skinned King. It’s best if she speaks with you.” He then removes a mithral medal from his chest and pins it to the wall of the tent. Ice spreads from it, crystallizing across a large surface, and forming the image of a female eladrin’s face. With long white hair and piercing, icy blue eyes, her presence is cold and unfeeling. Her eyes study you as she speaks. “The Seed of Winter belongs to me, not to you and certainly not to the Stone-Skinned King. It was a gift from Koliada to me when I was a mere child, and I have no intention of parting with it. However, I see that the fomorian and I must work together to foil the plots of Sangwyr. Use the Seed of Winter for the time being, as a tool to make a way into the King’s court. I’ll be expecting you to return it when you’re finished. “It’s convenient that our interests align, so you’ll be my messengers. Tell the fomorian I do not like him, and I know he does not like me. However, Sangwyr utterly hates both of us, and we must stop his stupid uprising.” Druemmeth offers to guide the PCs to a place near the Stone-Skinned King’s palace, where they can easily find some of the king’s guards. The general is proper and respectful, though it’s clear he resents that the PCs were sent as Inzira’s emissaries rather than himself. He also mentions that emissaries were sent before, but haven’t been heard from again. He asks that the PCs attempt to find them and have them released—if they’re alive.
Sangwyr’s Cronies Before the PCs and Druemmeth can leave the battle camp, raiders affiliated with the upstart fomorian Sangwyr make a bold strike against them. While the other eladrin soldiers fight off lesser members of the horde, a few monsters break through to attack the tents around Druemmeth. After the assault, if Druemmeth still lives, he urges the PCs to make their way to Cachlain’s court even sooner. Tactical Encounter: A4. Battle Camp Raid (page 26).
The Seed of Winter Over the course of most of this adventure, the PCs still carry the Seed of Winter they gained during “Alliance at Nefelus.” The Seed isn’t pleased about being used as a bargaining chip, and it makes its wishes known. When it realizes it has the chance to return to Inzira’s possession, it decides that’s what it truly wants. The Seed is impatient and vocal about its wishes, but Inzira can calm it for the immediate future. The Seed proves useful when fighting the inferno bats in “Invasion Tunnel” and the winter wolves in “B4. Caged Animals.”
May 20 09
|
D u n g e o n 16 6
10
Throne of the Stone-Skinned King
Cachlain’s Court After their first audience with Cachlain and Sovacles, the PCs have some time before Sangwyr attacks. They have a chance to explore a few areas of the court, and meet some old and new allies. Most of the encounters in this section are attacks by Sangwyr’s followers, or they occur toward the end of the adventure—when the PCs face Sovacles and Cachlain.
The Court A vast network of subterranean tunnels, both natural and constructed, the domain of the Stone-Skinned King is labyrinthine. Dozens of exits to the surface dot the landscape, and Cachlain’s troops patrol that territory aboveground, which the king considers a part of his domain. The PCs can approach the guards to be taken to the king, and they reach the area with little trouble. Infiltration is possible, if they can move into one of the exits. However, navigating the winding, twisting tunnels of the Feydark palace is nearly impossible, not to mention dangerous. Some of the tunnels don’t even appear to lead back to the central complex, and connecting tunnels can be found only through secret doors. If the PCs decide to enter this way, create a complexity 2 or 3 skill challenge.
the halls, and you begin to see a wider variety of fey as you move closer to the heart of Cachlain’s holdings. The map and descriptions here describe only a small segment of the fomorian’s massive underground palace. Numerous passages, living quarters for servants, and workshops used by cyclops artisans sprawl out for miles surrounding the main complex of the court.
Features of the Court Most of the rooms and halls of Cachlain’s court share some common features Illumination: Bright light. Magic torches line the walls, emitting yellow and blue light. Doors: In most areas, unlocked double doors are large enough for Huge creatures to fit through, or no doors exist there at all. Walls: Most walls are hewn from purple crystal and supported in some places with beautifully forged iron plates.
When the PCs enter the tunnels, read: As you descend into the tunnels of Cachlain’s domain, the air becomes cold and stagnant. The purple crystal that forms the walls around you glows faintly. Strange, vibrantly colored mosses and fungi carpet the floors and walls, though living quarters and common areas you pass through are scoured clean. Slaves and their cyclops overseers walk
May 20 09
|
D u n g e o n 16 6
11
Throne of the Stone-Skinned King
1. Foyer The only room connecting public passageways and Cachlain’s throne room, this room also contains a secret door that leads to a set of stairs connected to a hidden prison (area 6). Perception Check When PCs are in this room, compare their passive Perception checks to the DC below. DC 25: You catch a faint light shining through the deep purple crystal of the eastern wall of this room. It outlines what is almost certainly a secret door.
2. Throne Room This room is where Cachlain spends most of his time, watching the gladiatorial matches through the enormous window in the floor of the room. It’s also where he speaks to important visitors. A warding ritual protects the door between this room and the hallway, and only a command from Cachlain or Sovacles can open the door. The PCs have a skill challenge here when they first arrive to meet with the king. Skill Challenge: SC2. Audience with the King (page 28). The PCs later engage in battle with Cachlain and Sovacles in this room. See the “Confrontation” section.
3. Cachlain’s Bedchamber The fomorian king’s sleeping quarters are spacious and ornately decorated, with iron filigree along the walls. It’s unlikely the PCs end up in this room, and there’s no chance Cachlain invites them there for any reason. Inside the room is an enormous bed with blankets made of luxurious animal hides.
The only interesting information that can be found in this room is in the fomorian king’s diary. It has a brief description of each day, with few facts and a lot of paranoid rambling and screeds against the king’s rivals. Interestingly, the king hasn’t made an entry for several months—not since Sovacles became his new advisor.
4. Banquet Hall An enormous table fills the center of this room. It’s made from an enormous, ancient tree split in half, and a few twigs still grow from it. The table is ringed with chairs, some sized for Large creatures and others for Medium creatures. Cachlain doesn’t join in at banquets, instead allowing his closest cyclops followers to entertain his guests.
May 20 09
|
D u n g e o n 16 6
12
Throne of the Stone-Skinned King
Encounters in the Court The middle encounters in Cachlain’s court don’t occur in any particular order. Once the PCs arrive, they meet with the king, but they’ll have some time to kill before they see the king again. They later are called back to the throne room for the “Throne Room Showdown” encounter. Between those bookends, they explore. Use encounters based on where the PCs go or what secrets they try to uncover. If you know PCs intend to go to one place repeatedly, consider triggering the encounter on a later visit. Sangwyr and his githyanki allies (who plan to betray Cachlain) engineered all the attacks, but the assaults don’t necessarily occur in sequence or in close proximity. Put whatever amount of time feels best between the fights. Assassination Attempt (Area 6): The PCs might explore the secret prison after seeing the secret door. Instead, they might hear rumors about Cachlain’s former advisor, and receive a hint that she’s in a hidden prison. Disrupted Banquet (Area 4): Bram invites the PCs to the banquet as a token of respect. If they refuse, Cachlain’s relative, Droeth might request their attendance (and it’s a bad idea to refuse the king’s kin). Invasion Tunnel (Area 5): This battle might occur when the PCs return to rest, or right after the “Disrupted Banquet” or “Caged Animals” encounters. In either case, this invasion raises an alarm that gets the PCs’ attention. Caged Animals (Area 8): The PCs might be in the arena to watch a bout, hear rumors about a plot to cause mischief, or respond to an alarm.
The Ambassadors’ Banquet The PCs are invited to a banquet at one point, where they meet the ambassadors from other courts. Among their number are the following. Droeth: This laconic cyclops speaks for Uluhcouram, a fomorian monarch and close relative of Cachlain. He doesn’t appear to have any pressing business, and he has been in Cachlain’s domain for a while, just wasting time. Though he appears to be a lazy, uninteresting toady, he’s an oni spiritmaster in disguise. He dispatched Droeth some time ago and
plans to take the ambassadors hostage and steal the Seed of Winter. Andrinna Baelsblood: A haughty tiefling, Andrinna claims to be a direct descendant of the rulers of Bael Turath. She runs numerous slave trading operations in the world and has come to propose sharing resources with Cachlain. Troke: Dissatisfied with his treatment here, this satyr came to resolve a territory dispute with the king, and he hasn’t had an audience for nearly a month. He represents the Circle of Crownstone, a collective of fey who live in lands that border Cachlain’s domain. Bram Ironfell: This former ally now represents the githyanki interests in Cachlain’s court. The PCs have a chance to talk to him during the banquet. He
Bram Ironfell, Githyanki Ambassador Since the PCs met him in “The Lost Mines of Karak” (Dungeon #159), the dwarf Bram Ironfell has gone from being a secret agent of Sarshan to serving as an ambassador on behalf of the githyanki. When they meet him in Cachlain’s palace, the PCs realize that the dwarf has made a power grab among the githyanki forces and has been rewarded for treachery against the people of his homeland. The more the PCs talk to him, the more they realize that he has some regrets about his decision. He acts harried and fearful. The PCs have a chance to talk with him at length during the banquet. He is surrounded by githyanki bodyguards at all times. One is Arzoa, who attempts to assassinate the PCs if they venture into the secret prison (see the “Assassination Attempt” encounter).
May 20 09
|
D u n g e o n 16 6
13
Throne of the Stone-Skinned King
isn’t willing to talk about what he has done to achieve his place in the githyanki hierarchy, nor the ways he betrayed the people of the Elsir Vale (more out of shame than secrecy). However, he doesn’t mind talking about the githyanki and what he has learned about them. The following are some of the bits of information the PCs can pry out of him. ✦ Bram deserted the people of the Elsir Vale because he was certain they were going to lose the war, and it was better to survive by joining the enemy than to die with the others. He’s surprised at the PCs’ success fighting off the githyanki and their allies. ✦ Vlaakith, the Lich Queen, who once led the githyanki, has been slain. They’re now lead by Emperor Zetch’r’r, who seeks to bring war and conquest across the planes. ✦ The githyanki are merciless and destructive, and they leave nothing behind in realms they conquer. After sacking the entire land and destroying everything they find, they leave nothing but a barren wasteland. During the banquet, some of Sangwyr’s agents attempt to take hostages. The agents also placed sedatives in the meal, so keep track of which PCs partake in food and drink at the banquet. Refer to “B1. Disrupted Banquet” to run the sleeping elixir. Tactical Encounter: B1. Disrupted Banquet (page 31).
5. Ambassadors’ Quarters Visitors to the court stay in these modest rooms. Two are meant to house Medium creatures, and the northeast room is larger—fit for a Large or Huge visitor. The doors to the chambers lock and require a DC 20 Thievery check to open. The middle room is for the PCs, and Cachlain’s servants bring cots if there are more than four PCs. It’s not particularly comfortable, but the beds are high quality, and the room is quiet. The room to the west houses Bram Ironfell and his two guards. See the sidebar about Bram Ironfell. He also makes an appearance in the “Disrupted Banquet” encounter. Sangwyr’s agents tunnel into these rooms and begin marauding through the halls. Tactical Encounter: B2. Invasion Tunnel (page 34).
6. Hidden Prison Located below the other rooms on this level of the court, this prison is down a flight of stairs concealed behind a secret door. The prison contains three cells, each of which is occupied. Talyrin: A former advisor to Cachlain, this cyclops is a wealth of information (see below). Eladrin Ambassadors: In one cell sit two eladrin followers of Inzira named Elletraius (male) and Serennel (female). Sovacles and the king jailed them shortly after they arrived two weeks ago, seeking an audience so they could propose an alliance. Sigils covering the walls, floors, and iron bars prevent them from teleporting out of their cell. They have little new information and are curious as to what has been happening outside. They’ve been talking with Talyrin
from time to time, though they don’t trust her any more than she trusts them. “Legbreaker” Kimdal: This gnome might be the only prisoner who unequivocally deserves to be here. Known only for larceny and violence, this vicious thief awaits his execution. He’s gruff and off-putting, and all his practical advice is about various ways to murder fey creatures and which ones have the best loot (arguably useful information for PCs).
Talyrin This cyclops was once the king’s advisor, but was imprisoned once Sovacles took over her spot. She has been in this prison for months and is eager to help anyone who can help release her. Though she’s by no means a friend of good or of the eladrin, she’s the lesser of two evils compared to Sovacles. Despite her situation, she’s still fiercely loyal to Cachlain. If the PCs talk to her, they can learn the following information. ✦ Sovacles arrived about three months ago and quickly ingratiated himself with Cachlain. Soon after that, Talyrin was imprisoned in the middle of the night. She was imprisoned by Cachlain’s order, and no evidence or even accusation is needed for the king to imprison someone. Synch this up with the amount of time that has passed in your campaign. Sovacles arrived at least one month before the PCs encountered the fey in “The Temple Between” (Dungeon 161). ✦ Talyrin believes Sovacles has supernatural power that lets him control Cachlain. This is the first of the Stone-Skinned King’s advisors to wield magic openly. Fearing its power, Cachlain was unwilling to choose anyone but sages and powerful warriors as advisors in the past.
May 20 09
|
D u n g e o n 16 6
14
Throne of the Stone-Skinned King
✦ A rival of Cachlain named Sangwyr has long coveted the Stone-Skinned King’s caverns. For decades now, the upstart has fought both Cachlain and the eladrin of Frostwhite Forest. Talyrin hears that Sangwyr’s forces are growing, bolstered by allies from another plane. (She doesn’t know they’re githyanki.) ✦ Under Sovacles’s guidance, conditions have gotten worse in Cachlain’s realm. The troops moving through secret complexes deep below ground take food and resources that would go to those who live in the court. The cyclopses collect more and more slaves, and Sovacles sends them to assist the githyanki soldiers. ✦ After the eladrins in another cell told her that Inzira seeks an alliance, Talyrin came to believe it’s a good plan—if Sangwyr is truly becoming dangerous. She fears the rumors of his power might be lies spread by the eladrin to trick Cachlain, and she hasn’t seen evidence that an attack is imminent. Tactical Encounter: B3. Assassination Attempt (page 36).
7. Gladiatorial Arena Within a massive cavern, surrounded by a 10-foot wide chasm, is a vast, flat pillar of bloodstained purple crystal. In this room, gladiatorial battles are held continuously for the pleasure of the fomorian king watching through the window at the apex of the cave. All the walls here are littered with tunnel openings, creating dozens of platforms where audience members can watch the matches. Betting is lively, as are calls for blood. All sorts of humanoids and fey beasts are brought in to battle here, and Cachlain considers this the jewel of his palace. The climactic encounter of this adventure takes place in this arena. See the “Confrontation” section.
8. Animal Pens Beasts used for gladiatorial matches are kept here, as are a rack of weapons and some chariots. Cyclops animal handlers, who are also trained guards, guard this area. A tunnel leads from this room to the slave pens and the quarters of free gladiators who fight for fame and wealth. When Sangwyr’s raiders attack, they attempt to set animals free from these pens. Tactical Encounter: B4. Caged Animals (page 39).
Confrontation After a string of attacks by Sangwyr’s followers, Cachlain invites the PCs back to his chamber to talk about the attacks. As soon as they arrive, read: Sovacles commands the doors to the throne room, and they slam closed behind you. The advisor, clearly angered, yells, “The gracious king invited you into his palace, and you use trickery and deceit to compromise the security of his domain. You aid his great enemy, Sangwyr, and you plot against our brave, wise king! At every opportunity, you’ve allowed them into the king’s domain and led them in their assault! Now, submit to imprisonment and the king might spare your lives.” If the PCs try to reason with the king and his advisor, they quickly find that logic won’t work, and that Cachlain follows the irrational hatred Sovacles demonstrates for the PCs. Once the PCs become aggressive or anger Sovacles with their persistence, the advisor leads Cachlain in an attack against the PCs. Tactical Encounter: B5. Throne Room Showdown (page 41). This encounter leads into the climactic fight of the adventure, as the PCs and Sovacles drop into the gladiatorial arena below and face off. Tactical Encounter: B6. Arena of Blood (page 43).
May 20 09
|
D u n g e o n 16 6
15
Throne of the Stone-Skinned King
Concluding the Adventure If the PCs knocked Virizan out instead of killing him, Cachlain demands a quick execution, believing the exarch is too dangerous to be allowed to live. He absolutely refuses to let the creature leave his domain. If he has his way, the Stone-Skinned King has Virizan executed, and his remains torn apart by animals from the pens. If the PCs convince Cachlain to let them interrogate Virizan, they find the exarch is extremely disciplined and obstinate. He would rather die than reveal any of his queen’s secrets. However, he also boasts, and the PCs might learn the following about Tiamat’s plans: ✦ No one who opposes Tiamat will be left alive when her plans come to fruition. ✦ She has three other (living) exarchs. Virizan is cryptic, but the PCs can figure out a few things. Tiamat usually keeps one exarch to represent each of her heads, and the PCs have now defeated both her white and green exarchs. Three more remain, each certainly involved in the war against their world.
Cachlain’s Choice After they revealed his advisor’s true motives and protected his palace, the PCs have influence over Cachlain. He comes as close to trusting them as a fomorian can. With his autonomy restored, he releases Talyrin from her prison and reinstates her as his main advisor. She vouches for the PCs, too. Cachlain agrees that Sangwyr is a true danger. He’ll ally with Inzira and her eladrin for now, and even—though it pains him to do so—allows her to take the Seed of Winter as a token of this alliance. The Seed wants to go back to Inzira (for now), and anyone else who keeps it takes the –1 concordance hit for refusing the Seed every day. The king refuses to help the githyanki again, but doesn’t intend to take up arms against them. Sangwyr presents a big enough threat to him that Cachlain will be preoccupied with the upstart’s destruction for some time. However, the king does have information about the githyanki strongholds, since they’ve been using his portals. He gives the PCs some information on a githyanki outpost in the mountains north of Elsir Vale, including a fairly detailed map on how to reach it.
Inzira and the Frostwhite Eladrin To settle the specifics of the alliance, Druemmeth Goldtemple is invited to Cachlain’s court. He thanks the PCs, and states that Inzira sympathizes with their alliance. If the PCs speak with her, they can persuade her to join the Coalition. She appoints Druemmeth to the council, effective once he finishes dealing with Cachlain.
Back to the Coalition Their task complete, the PCs can return to Sayre to deliver the news to the Coalition. Cachlain allows them to exit through one of his portals (and they arrive near the portal they first took to reach the Feywild). If they succeeded on either the Audience with the King skill challenge or the Release Cachlain’s Mind skill challenge (in the “Throne Room Showdown” encounter), he gives them the sigil sequence so they can use Linked Portal or similar rituals to travel to his court.
May 20 09
|
D u n g e o n 16 6
16
Throne of the Stone-Skinned King
SC1: The Coalition’s Leader
support is probably enough to carry the candidate to victory, since the two are otherwise evenly matched.
Encounter Level 15 (6,000 XP)
A member of the Brindol council, the male halfelf Eoffram Troyas is outspoken and rash, and has become even more so as he hears more news of war. When speaking, he is somber, methodical, and humorless. Debate bores him, and he’d prefer to make quick, unilateral decisions than let issues get bogged down in endless chatter. If you’re playing Scales of War, Eoffram was the NPC who recruited the PCs in “Rescue at Rivenroar.” Represents: Brindol. Motive: Though he truly seeks to do good, Eoffram believes his ideas are the only ones that matter. He’s willing to sacrifice whatever he needs to if it helps end the war. A quick, decisive victory is what he believes he needs to establish his leadership and immortalize his name. Eoffram wasn’t chosen to advise the Coalition, and still harbors resentment that he wasn’t included. Platform: Eoffram wants to be aggressive—to take the fight to the enemies of the Coalition. A show of force can, in his opinion, cause the enemy troops to scatter and retreat. He favors a combat crash course for citizens of all the Coalition’s communities, along with recruiting mercenaries, followed by a rapid assault against the evil forces.
Setup After the deaths of two of its members, the Coalition’s council lacks a strong leader and needs representatives for the Elsir Vale and Sayre. The PCs can nominate a candidate. Most likely, this would be Amyria. The members of the council make it clear that the PCs will not be accepted onto the council, since they are vital to combat efforts and are needed elsewhere. The candidate is selected by all the members of the council who aren’t running for the seat, but the council members also listen to those they represent, so convincing the people of various regions is as important as convincing the council members themselves.
Rival Candidates Two major players oppose the PCs’ candidate. Each time the PCs have a failure in the skill challenge, assign it as a success for one of these candidates, based on who you think would do best at the activity described. Describe how these successes benefit the rivals, to let the PCs know how their adversaries fare and where the PCs need to step up. For example, if the PCs try to speak to the people of Overlook and fail at the Diplomacy check, you might decide that many of them have jobs in Quelenna’s trade organization, and give their support (and a success) to her instead. If the PCs choose to support Eoffram or Quelenna instead of a third candidate, skip the skill challenge or do a simple (complexity 1) challenge. The PCs’
Eoffram Troyas
Quelenna Entromiel Since the council’s inception, Quelenna has occupied a seat. Ruler of the settlement called Dornaithos, she has influence over trade in several lands, and she can easily access raw materials needed for the war effort. Traders in every major settlement know her name.
Factions and Council Members If the PCs try to sway specific settlements or members of the council to their side, special rules apply. Each faction’s effect applies only for one success; after a faction has sided with them, the PCs need to find additional allies. Brindol: Eoffram Troyas made both friends and enemies on his council. If the PCs recruit this faction, they undermine his base. Eoffram loses one success if he has any. Overlook: The people of Overlook respect the PCs because of their previous assistance and because Kalad allied with them. PCs receive a +2 bonus to attempts to recruit this faction. Bejam: If the PCs convinced him to join the council, this deva from Nefelus is eager to support them and gives an automatic success. Fariex: Fariex enjoys political squabbles and especially clever ripostes. If the PCs have succeeded at any political gambits, they receive a +2 bonus to checks to recruit him. Caliandra: The elf barbarian queen respects strength of arms. If the PCs succeed at the “Blockade” political gambit, they receive a +2 bonus to checks to recruit her. If they fail at that gambit, they take a –2 penalty instead. Inogo: If the PCs use Religion to recruit Inogo, they gain a +2 bonus to the skill check. Odos: The githzerai leader isn’t interested in these political games and wants the selection process to be over with. If the PCs are far ahead when they attempt to recruit Odos, they receive a +2 bonus to the checks.
May 20 09
|
D u n g e o n 16 6
17
Throne of the Stone-Skinned King
She’s an expert at arranging deals, especially when time is tight, and some say she’ll even use bribes if it will help her. Represents: Dornaithos, a major trade city. Motive: Quelenna want Dornaithos’s fortunes to continue, and she thinks running the war council is a way to make herself more prominent and secure better deals for Dornaithos to provide war materiel. Platform: Two words encapsulate Quelenna’s proposal: caution and commerce. Quelenna believes— and makes this belief widely known—that the war won’t last long, and that the free cities can weather the storm once the githyanki assault runs out of steam. She encourages a defensive posture and argues that building up the defenses of the cities is best for now and for the future. Of course, Dornaithos is happy to provide the materials and expertise to build these fortifications.
The Coalition’s Leader Skill Challenge
Level 15 XP 6,000
Your actions determine whether your candidate becomes the leader of the Coalition.
The PCs argue for their candidate, try to gather support, rebut the arguments of the other candidates, and train their candidate to be a better leader. Most checks in this challenge take one or more days to resolve, so the challenge takes up a bit of time. Complexity 5 (requires 12 successes before 3 failures). Special: When the PCs gain a failure, assign it as a success to one of the rival candidates (whichever is most likely to benefit from the PCs’ failure on that specific task). The PCs lose the challenge only if a single rival gains 3 successes. Consequently, they can have more than 3 total failures. Primary Skills Diplomacy, History, Religion, Streetwise. Other Skills Bluff, Streetwise. Victory The NPC nominated by the PCs is chosen to lead the war council. Defeat When a rival achieves three successes (in other words, three of the PCs’ failures are assigned to that rival), that rival is chosen as the leader of the war council. Special If the PCs have developed especially favorable relations with members of the council, or leaders in regions of the coalition, give them one automatic success (total, not per person/region) to represent the support of those individuals. Bluff DC 18 (no successes) By misrepresenting the number of influential people supporting their candidate, the PCs sow doubt in the competition. The next political gambit (see below) has its DC reduced by 5. Diplomacy DC 18 (1 success, no maximum successes) The PC speaks to common people, convincing them to urge their leaders to support the PCs’ candidate. Diplomacy DC 23 (1 success, maximum 1 success) Eoffram Troyas seeks both the Elsir Vale seat and the leadership. If the PCs’ candidate seeks only the Sayre seat and leadership,
Eoffram fights less ardently since the Elsir Vale seat will likely go to him. A PC attempting this check gains a bonus equal to the number of successes the PCs have. History DC 18 (1 success, maximum 2 successes) The PCs use their knowledge of historical warfare to coach their candidate on lessons to be learned from past battles, so the candidate can look more knowledgeable about the art of war. Insight DC 18 (1 success, maximum 2 successes—one per rival) The PC watches one of the rival candidates speak and figures out some of that candidate’s true motives. This also gives a +2 bonus to all checks during the next event (see below) triggered by that rival. Religion DC 18 (1 success, maximum 1 success) By encouraging their candidate to show religious devotion, the PCs gain the backing of many religious leaders in various regions. Streetwise DC 23 (1 success, maximum 1 success) The PC finds out that Quelenna Entromiel has been bribing officials to secure their support. Exposing her also removes 1 success from her tally, if she has any. Streetwise DC 11 (no successes) By gathering or spreading rumors, the PC find ways to undermine a rival’s support base. The next ally who makes a skill check in this challenge gains a +5 bonus.
May 20 09
|
D u n g e o n 16 6
18
Throne of the Stone-Skinned King
Political Gambits The PCs’ rivals aren’t passive in this challenge. The following political events can happen during the course of the challenge, and give Eoffram and Quelenna opportunities to gain successes for themselves (bringing the PCs closer to defeat). Each gambit can appear after the PCs have a certain number of successes, and an entry mentions in what range it should appear. For example, “The Blockade” can occur when the PCs have 2, 3, or 4 successes, and the PCs choose whether to forgo actions when you announce that event occurs.
The Blockade Occurs when the PCs have 2–4 successes. A group of hobgoblins seize a road used by the Elsir Consortium and prevent the flow of goods. Quelenna uses this as evidence that trade is vital to the war, and she intends to make sure resources move through it. Effect: Any number of PCs can skip their next skill checks to travel out and try to break the blockade. One of the PCs makes a d20 roll, with a +5 bonus for each PC participating. The DC is 17. Victory: The PCs break the blockade, but gain no successes. Defeat: Quelenna’s mercenaries break the blockade, and she gains one success.
Raid on Brindol Occurs when the PCs have 4–7 successes. A stealth raid by hobgoblins against Brindol is easily foiled by the city’s guards. Eoffram claims this shows that the evil forces can be defeated easily, but the details of his story don’t add up.
Effect: One or two PCs can skip their next action in the skill challenge to instead investigate the evidence of this raid. Each PC makes one DC 23 Perception check and one DC 23 Streetwise check. If one PC is sent, it requires a success on both checks, if two are sent, they must succeed at a total of 3 or more. Victory: The PCs reveal that the severity of the raid was greatly exaggerated, and there’s no evidence that the hobgoblins were even associated with the githyanki. Defeat: Eoffram’s views appear more credible, and he gains 1 success.
Changing Sides
Accusation
False Commands
Occurs when the PCs have 7–9 successes. Quelenna uses her connections to find out about the PCs’ wealth, acquired from their various adventures, and uses this evidence to claim that the PCs have only their own profit in mind. Claiming the PCs are biased, she contends that the PCs want only a pawn who can send them to the lands with the most riches. Effect: Each PC has to defend his or her motives. Victory: The PCs convince all present that their efforts are noble and intended for the greater defense of the world. Their backing of Amyria carries even more weight, and one PC gains a +2 bonus on the next skill check made during the skill challenge. Defeat: If at least one PC fails, Quelenna gains a success. If more than half fail, the PCs also lose one success when someone they had already brought to their side reneges to support Quelenna instead.
Occurs when the PCs have 8 or more successes. Once the PCs are close to victory, one of the other candidates might switch sides and come to the aid of the PCs. (You might choose to have a rival switch just after his or her second political gambit fails.) Effect: If either rival has fewer successes than the other, he or she joins the PCs’ cause and says that the PCs’ candidate speaks for his or her people. This gives the PCs one success and removes a candidate from contention. The rival gains or retains a seat on the war council in any case.
Occurs when the PCs have 9–11 successes. Desperate to prove his plan’s viability, Eoffram sends out false orders to three cities, commanding them to raise civilian armies and strike back at the invaders. Effect: Up to three PCs can forgo their next skill checks to instead try to prevent the messages from being acted on. Each PC can attempt a DC 18 Endurance check to catch the messenger, or a DC 18 Diplomacy check to convince the leaders of the city to ignore the orders. The PCs fail if they commit fewer than three of their members (adjust the number if you have fewer than three players). Victory: If all PCs succeeded, they prevent Eoffram’s plan from working and likely save some lives. Defeat: Eoffram denies responsibility for the orders, claiming that the people demand this course of action. He must be given control or the war effort is doomed to failure. He gains one success.
May 20 09
|
D u n g e o n 16 6
19
Throne of the Stone-Skinned King
A1: Slay the Slavers Encounter Level 16 (7,600 XP)
Setup 2 cyclops crushers (C) 2 cyclops slavers (S) 1 stone golem (G) The PCs go down a narrow set of stairs that leads to a large room where water drains from the ruins above.
In the room sit four cyclopses, who all appear to be relaxing. Two have giant wooden clubs, and the other two have nets attached to their belts and spears slung across their backs. Near the entrance, a stone golem stands perfectly still. Surprise The PCs can try to gain surprise. The PC with the lowest bonus rolls a Stealth check opposed by the slavers’ passive Perception checks (26 is the highest). The PCs have surprise if no enemies detect them.
When they look into the room, read: Ahead is a room built with white stone brick. Deep channels built into the floor carry water out, away from the room, and you hear a steady flow of water to the south. 2 Cyclops Crushers (C)
Level 14 Brute
Large fey humanoid XP 1,000 Initiative +12 Senses Perception +16; truesight 6 HP 171; Bloodied 85 AC 26; Fortitude 27, Reflex 26, Will 25 Speed 8 m Spiked Greatclub (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon Reach 2; +17 vs. AC; 2d10 + 8 damage. R Evil Eye (minor 1/round; at-will) Ranged sight; targets a creature the cyclops crusher has hit with a melee attack during this round; the target takes a –2 penalty to attack rolls and all defenses until the end of the encounter or until the crusher uses evil eye against a different target. C Tremor Smash (standard; recharge 5 6 ) ✦ Weapon Close blast 2; +17 vs. AC; 2d12 + 8 damage, and the target is knocked prone. Alignment Unaligned Languages Elven Skills Athletics +18 Str 23 (+13) Dex 20 (+12) Wis 19 (+11) Con 21 (+12) Int 10 (+7) Cha 11 (+7) Equipment scale armor, greatclub
2 Cyclops Slavers (S)
Level 15 Controller
Large fey humanoid XP 1,200 each Initiative +14 Senses Perception +15; truesight HP 149; Bloodied 74 AC 29; Fortitude 27, Reflex 29, Will 25 Speed 7 m Spear (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon Reach 2; +20 vs. AC; 2d10 + 4 damage. r Shuriken (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon Ranged 6/12; +20 vs. AC; 2d6 + 4 damage. R Evil Eye (minor 1/round; at-will) ✦ Sleep Ranged sight; the target takes a –2 penalty to attack rolls against the cyclops slaver until the end of the encounter or until the slaver uses evil eye against a different target. C Barbed Net (standard; requires net; recharge 4 5 6) ✦ Weapon Close blast 4; +19 vs. Reflex; 1d10 + 6 damage, and the target is restrained and takes ongoing 10 damage (save ends both). A Sleep Powder Flask (standard; encounter) ✦ Sleep Area burst 1 within 10; +19 vs. Fortitude; the target is slowed (save ends). First Failed Saving Throw: The target is knocked unconscious instead of slowed (save ends). Alignment Unaligned Languages Elven Skills Stealth +19 Str 20 (+12) Dex 24 (+14) Wis 17 (+10) Con 21 (+12) Int 11 (+7) Cha 10 (+7) Equipment leather armor, spear, 3 nets, 10 shuriken, 1 sleep powder flask
Dungeoneering Check DC 18: This room looks newer than the surrounding ruins. Judging from the way water falls into the room, it appears the room was built to drain the swampy water away from the ruins, perhaps so they could be made livable once again. The construction uses dwarven methods, and the room was clearly not constructed by cyclopses or other fey. When the PCs see the people imprisoned behind the portcullis, read: An iron portcullis blocks off a dead-end tunnel. Inside are several humans, dwarves, and other residents of the Elsir Vale. When they see you, they shout at you, begging for help. Stone Golem (G)
Level 17 Elite Soldier
Large natural animate (construct) XP 3,200 Initiative +8 Senses Perception +7; darkvision HP 336; Bloodied 168; see also death burst AC 33; Fortitude 33, Reflex 24, Will 24 Immune disease, poison, sleep Saving Throws +2 Speed 6; can’t shift Action Points 1 m Slam (standard; at-will) Reach 2; +23 vs. AC; 3d6 + 7 damage, and the target is pushed 1 square and dazed (save ends). M Double Attack (standard; at-will) The stone golem makes two slam attacks. M Golem Rampage (standard; $recharge 5 6) The stone golem moves its speed plus 2 and can move through enemies’ spaces, provoking opportunity attacks as normal. When it enters a creature’s space (ally or enemy), the golem makes a slam attack against that creature. The creature remains in its space, and the golem must leave the space after it attacks. The golem must end its rampage in an unoccupied space. C Death Burst (when reduced to 0 hit points) The stone golem explodes in a burst of jagged stones. Close burst 1; +23 vs. AC; 2d6 + 7 damage, and the space it occupied is difficult terrain until cleared. Alignment Unaligned Languages — Str 24 (+15) Dex 7 (+6) Wis 8 (+7) Con 24 (+15) Int 3 (+4) Cha 3 (+4)
May 20 09
|
D u n g e o n 16 6
20
Throne of the Stone-Skinned King
Tactics
Features of the Area
The slavers’ main goal is preventing the loss of any of the slaves they’ve just collected. All the cyclopses attack anyone who moves close to the portcullis. This room has a narrow entryway, so it’s possible to let the fight stagnate if you create a bottleneck there. Give the PCs a good chance to move into the larger room. Of the enemies, only the golem is likely to move toward the entryway. Cyclops Crushers: The crushers move into position to guard the slaves’ cell, moving into the water if necessary. They use their bulk to block passage and attack with tremor smash to keep enemies from going where they want. If they act before the PCs, the crushers move into position, then ready an action to attack anyone who comes into reach. Cyclops Slavers: The slavers use shuriken and their evil eye powers to keep enemies at bay. They move in if multiple enemies are clustered together and toss barbed nets on the foes to entangle them. Each slaver has one flask filled with powder that induces sleep, and they use these expensive items sparingly. They wait until the battle is going poorly before they throw their flasks. The slavers are in command and can order allies to move away from the PCs to make it easier to throw nets over them. Stone Golem: The golem follows the slavers’ orders and tries to keep the PCs away from the slavers and the prisoners. It flanks with one of the crushers. When all the PCs have spread out, or when one of the cyclopses is reduced to 0 hit points, the golem uses golem rampage to hurt as many PCs as it can. The slavers direct the golem to use its slam attack to knock PCs into the water. Remember that the stone golem’s slam attack can’t push a creature if it’s used during golem rampage.
Illumination: Several braziers throughout the room provide bright light. Rubble: The rubble near the entrance is difficult terrain. Water: The water in constructed channels is 5 feet deep, so PCs need to swim, (DC 10 Athletics). The monsters are tall enough that they can walk through the water in the channels, but they treat it as difficult terrain. The pool near the entrance is shallow, but it counts as difficult terrain. Portcullis: Prisoners from the Elsir Vale are trapped in a small room behind a well-crafted portcullis. It requires a DC 28 Strength check to force open, and it has AC 4, Ref lex 4, Fortitude 12; hp 120. One of the cyclops slavers (of your choice) carries the key. Walls: The walls are smooth stone, requiring a DC 20 Athletics check to climb. Treasure: The PCs receive a map and a ritual scroll that let them locate and access a portal near the ruins.
May 20 09
|
D u n g e o n 16 6
21
Throne of the Stone-Skinned King
A2: Sky Shaper’s Grove Encounter Level 17 (9,800 XP)
Setup 2 firbolg ghostravens (G) 2 shadow snakes (S) As the PCs appear in this grove after traveling through the portal from the Elsir Vale, read: You are surrounded by a circle of tall, columnar stones. A ring of glowing runes encircles them, and then it dims after you arrive. You’re in a verdant grove in the Feywild, and a vibrant moon hangs in the sky above the tops of the tall, ancient trees. A bit to the west is a steep cliff. A cave mouth is directly across from you, and two enormous doors made of entwined wood and vines span the tunnel, which is just inside the cave mouth. The firbolg hunting party wants to surprise the PCs, so roll a Stealth check against the highest passive Perception of the party to determine surprise. Use the lowest bonus among the enemies (the firbolgs’ +19). The PCs can’t surprise the firbolgs, since the firbolgs know they’re coming and the portal doesn’t allow for a stealthy entry. When the PCs see their enemies, read: You see two humanoids, each about 12 feet tall. They wear headdresses crafted to look like crows and carry enormous picks with the same motifs. Near them, you can barely make out two snakes, each of which has two heads and is made of solid shadow.
2 Firbolg Ghostravens (G)
Level 16 Elite Lurker
Large fey humanoid XP 2,800 each Initiative +18 Senses Perception +18; low-light vision HP 236; Bloodied 118 Regeneration 5 AC 30; Fortitude 28, Reflex 29, Will 28 Vulnerable necrotic (if the firbolg ghostraven takes necrotic damage, its regeneration does not function on its next turn Saving Throws +2 (+4 against charm effects, immobilized, restrained, and slowed) Speed 8 Action Points 1 m Heavy War Pick (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon Reach 2; +21 vs. AC; 1d12 + 7 damage (crit 2d12 + 19). M Double Attack (standard; at-will) The firbolg ghostraven makes two heavy war pick attacks. If the ghostraven hits two targets with the attacks, one of the targets of the ghostraven’s choice is blinded (save ends). R Moonfire (minor 1/round; recharge 4 5 6) Ranged 10; +19 vs. Will; until the end of the firbolg ghostraven’s next turn, the target cannot benefit from invisibility or concealment. Ghostraven Form (minor; at-will) ✦ Polymorph Until the firbolg ghostraven attacks, it gains insubstantial and phasing and gains a fly (clumsy) speed equal to its walk speed. While in dim light or darkness, it has concealment while in this form. Ghostraven Strike When the firbolg ghostraven hits a target that couldn’t see the ghostraven at the start of the ghostraven’s turn, the attack deals 2d8 extra damage. Hunter’s Flight A firbolg ghostraven doesn’t provoke opportunity attacks while jumping or when moving at half speed while flying. Alignment Unaligned Languages Common, Elven Skills Athletics +18, Nature +18, Stealth +19 Str 20 (+13) Dex 23 (+14) Wis 21 (+13) Con 17 (+11) Int 13 (+9) Cha 15 (+10) Equipment leather armor, raven helmet, heavy war pick
2 Shadow Snakes (S)
Level 16 Skirmisher
Large shadow beast (reptile) XP 1,400 each Initiative +17 Senses Perception +13; darkvision HP 158; Bloodied 79 AC 30; Fortitude 28, Reflex 29, Will 27 Resist 10 poison Speed 7, climb 7; see also shifting shadowstrike m Bite (standard; at-will) ✦ Poison Reach 2; +21 vs. AC; 2d6 + 7 damage, and ongoing 10 poison damage (save ends). M Double Attack (standard; at-will) ✦ Poison The shadow snake makes two bite attacks and shifts 1 square before, between, or after the attacks. M Shifting Shadowstrike (standard; encounter) ✦ Poison The shadow snake shifts 7 squares and makes a bite attack against two different targets at any point during its move. Vanish into the Night (standard; encounter) The shadow snake gains the insubstantial and phasing qualities, and is invisible in dim light, until the end of its next turn. Alignment Evil Languages — Skills Stealth +20 Str 20 (+13) Dex 25 (+15) Wis 10 (+8) Con 22 (+14) Int 4 (+5) Cha 20 (+13)
Tactics Between cover from the trees and concealment from the darkness, it can be difficult to find (and hit) enemies in this fight. The hunters take advantage of the terrain and lighting. Firbolg Ghostravens: The firbolgs are silent throughout this encounter, never letting out more than a grunt of pain. They test the PCs by making a few bad moves, such as provoking opportunity attacks when they don’t need to, to see if the PCs are worthy opponents. An Insight check (DC 20) reveals that they are testing the PCs and not fighting as aggressively as they could. If a firbolg is killed, the other retreats when it is low on hit points, rather than facing an unnecessary death. By using ghostraven strike, the firbolgs use the darkness to the fullest. Though it can attack, then May 20 09
|
D u n g e o n 16 6
22
Throne of the Stone-Skinned King
Sway the Sky Shaper Skill Challenge
Level 16 XP 1,400
A rumbling voice thunders through the sky. “You fight in my domain, do you? Fine, then. Entertain me.” You quickly realize this must be the Sky Shaper, the archfey Caliandra told you about.
The PCs can try to sway the Sky Shaper to their side, causing him to make his domain sunny to disadvantage the firbolgs. As the PCs gain successes, the sky gets lighter, and it darkens again if they fail. Each PC can contribute once per round. Most attempts require a minor action, but a character who makes an Acrobatics check for a different reason can count that check for the challenge, and Arcana, History, and Insight checks are all free actions. Complexity 1 (requires 4 successes before 3 failures). Primary Skills Acrobatics, Bluff, Nature. Other Skills Arcana, History, Insight. Victory The Sky Shaper decides to side with the PCs and alters the sky in this domain: The area is filled with bright light, and each enemy takes 5 necrotic damage at the start of each of its turns. Defeat The Sky Shaper supports the firbolgs and alters the sky in this domain: The area remains in dim light, and all light sources that normally create bright light produce dim light instead. In addition, until only one enemy remains, a random enemy becomes invisible at the start of each round of combat, and remains so until the start of the next round. Inaction If a round passes without any PC attempting a check on the skill challenge, the PCs gain 1 failure. Tell the players about this effect when the encounter begins.
immediately use ghostraven strike, it leaves a window to see if the PCs capitalize on the poor tactical decision. The firbolgs fight to subdue, not to kill. A PC knocked unconscious by a firbolg doesn’t make death saving throws. Shadow Snakes: Unlike the firbolgs, snakes fight on bestial instinct and do attempt to kill PCs. Using trees and standing stones to gain cover, the snakes attempt to hide as often as they can. They are
Critical Hit (1 success, no maximum successes) A successful critical hit gives 1 success (if a PC scored the crit) or 1 failure (if an enemy scored the crit). Whenever a creature scores a critical hit, the Sky Shaper chortles with glee and rewards that creature. Fey Pacts (1 success, maximum 1 success per character) Only a creature of the fey origin (such as a gnome or eladrin) or a fey pact warlock can take this action. The PC invokes a pact the Sky Shaper made with fey races in times past. Acrobatics DC 13 (1 success, maximum 2 successes) The Sky Shaper is easily amused by acrobatic antics. Arcana DC 20 (no successes) The PC searches his or her memory for details about the Sky Shaper and reveals something about the archfey’s behavior. Reveal the Sky Shaper’s love for acrobatics and compliments. Bluff DC 13 (1 success, no maximum successes) By flattering the Sky Shaper with compliments, the PC gains his favor. History DC 20 (no successes) The PC remembers that the Sky Shaper made pacts with fey. Reveal the conditions of the “Fey Pacts” entry. Insight DC 13 (no successes) Figuring out the Sky Shaper’s tastes, the PC learns one type of action the Sky Shaper is fond of. Reveal one of the primary skills for this skill challenge. Nature DC 20 (1 success, no maximum successes) The PC recognizes how the Sky Shaper has reshaped the terrain here and displays this knowledge, impressing the archfey.
extremely aggressive, unless the Sky Shaper transforms the environment to daylight, in which case they fight while retreating into the trees away from the center of the grove.
Features of the Area Illumination: Begins in dim light. See the “Sway the Sky Shaper” skill challenge.
Trees: The small (1 square) trees provide cover to anyone who stands in their spaces. The larger trees (3 squares across) have a wider trunk, which is blocking terrain. The rest of these trees provide cover. Doors: The doors aren’t locked and can be opened easily. If this happens, combine the next encounter, “A3. Firbolg Cave” with this one. Thorn Bushes: The thorn bushes are difficult terrain, and any creature moving into them or starting its turn in them takes 5 damage. Statue: This stone statue represents a wolflike hound. A creature standing in the statue’s space gains cover. Difficult terrain: The puddle, clusters of rocks, and fallen tree are difficult terrain.
May 20 09
|
D u n g e o n 16 6
23
Throne of the Stone-Skinned King
A3: Firbolg Cave
When a PC enters the cave, read:
Encounter Level 17 (8,400 XP)
Setup
Inside this cave you see a blazing campfire surrounded by bedding. In the back of the cave, you can see a constructed wall made of large, natural stones.
1 firbolg bloodbear (B) 2 portal hounds (H) Pyradan, firbolg dusk harrier (P)
When a PC sees the cliff in the back of the cave, read:
This encounter is connected to “A2. Sky Shaper’s Grove,” and it might even be combined with that encounter if the PCs go through the door into the cave before the previous battle is over.
A 10-foot-tall cliff rises up in front of you, with a shaft of solid stone separating it into two sections. Atop the cliff, you see that a soft blue light shining from the floor illuminates the ceiling and walls above it. When Pyradan joins the fight, read: A firbolg carrying two spears, one of which has a hooked point, faces you. For the first time since you first encountered these firbolgs, one speaks. He says, “It appears you are worthy to fight. And now that we know you’re a challenge, it will bring us great glory when we capture you for the Daughter of Frostwhite Forest. Introduce yourselves so we might fight as warriors. I am Pyradan, and the fury of the Wild Hunt runs through my veins.” Arcana Check A character who sees the magic circle on top of the cliff, or sees another creature using the circle, can make this check. DC 18: This magic circle grants clairvoyance, allowing anyone inside it to see nearby areas despite any obstacles in the way.
Tactics The firbolgs and their trained hounds attempt to subdue the PCs. If one of the creatures reduces a PC to 0 hit points or fewer, it knocks the PC unconscious, and the PC doesn’t make death saving throws. Portal Hounds: These animals are well-trained hunting companions, and they take orders from Pyradan. Their main purpose is to drag creatures that remain outside the cave into the cave using their teleportation powers. Firbolg Bloodbear: With its huge damage output, the bloodbear is in charge of beating enemies to a pulp until they’ve been subdued. It singles out one target at a time, and it especially likes to attack defenders. Facing the bloodbear when it’s in its bear berserker form can be dangerous, and there’s a chance it will try to kill its opponents while it’s berserk. Pyradan: Preferring to fight in melee alongside allies, Pyradan keeps his enemies contained by sliding them with his hooked spear, trapping them in flanked positions. He taunts his enemies, but respects them if they fight bravely and competently.
Features of the Area Illumination: Dim light in most areas, but the biggest room is lit with bright light from a campfire. Campfire: Any creature that enters or starts its turn in the campfire takes 2d8 fire damage. Water: Fresh water wells up in this cave from a spring. The water is difficult terrain. Rocks: Piles of rock are difficult terrain. Cliff: The cliff that leads up to the magic circle is 10 feet tall (2 squares) and requires a DC 15 Athletics check to climb.
May 20 09
|
D u n g e o n 16 6
24
Throne of the Stone-Skinned King
Firbolg Bloodbear (B)
Level 15 Elite Brute
Large fey humanoid XP 2,400 Initiative +12 Senses Perception +18; low-light vision HP 240; Bloodied 120; see also bloodbear form Regeneration 5 (10 while in bloodbear form) AC 27; Fortitude 28, Reflex 25, Will 28 Vulnerable necrotic (if the firbolg bloodbear takes necrotic damage, its regeneration does not function on its next turn) Saving Throws +2 (+4 against charm effects, immobilized, restrained, and slowed) Speed 8 Action Points 1 m Slam (standard; at-will) Reach 2; +18 vs. AC; 2d8 + 9 damage. m Claw (standard; usable only while in bloodbear form; at-will) Reach 2; +18 vs. AC; 2d12 + 9 damage. M Double Attack (standard; at-will) The firbolg bloodbear makes two melee basic attacks. If the bloodbear hits with both attacks, it makes a secondary attack against the target. Secondary Attack: +17 vs. Fortitude; the target is grabbed. M Bloodbear Maul (standard; recharges when bloodied) Reach 2; targets a creature grabbed by the firbolg bloodbear; no attack roll; 4d10 + 9 damage, and if the bloodbear is in bloodbear form, it makes a bite attack against the target as a free action. M Bite (standard; usable only while in bloodbear form; at-will) +18 vs. AC; 3d12 + 9 damage, and if the target is granting combat advantage to the firbolg bloodbear, the target takes ongoing 10 damage (save ends). R Moonfire (minor; recharge 4 5 6 ) Ranged 10; +15 vs. Will; until the end of the firbolg bloodbear’s next turn, the target cannot benefit from invisibility or concealment. Bloodbear Form (when first bloodied; encounter) ✦ Healing, Polymorph The firbolg bloodbear takes the form of a humanoid–bear hybrid. It regains all its hit points, gains regeneration 10, and gains bite and claw attacks. When the bloodbear is bloodied a second time, it reverts to its normal form until the end of the encounter. Alignment Unaligned Languages Common, Elven Skills Athletics +19, Intimidate +13, Nature +18 Str 24 (+14) Dex 20 (+12) Wis 22 (+13) Con 20 (+12) Int 12 (+8) Cha 13 (+8) Equipment hide armor, bear helmet
Pyradan, Level 17 Elite Skirmisher Firbolg Dusk Harrier (P)
Large fey humanoid XP 3,200 Initiative +17 Senses Perception +17; low-light vision HP 322; Bloodied 161 Regeneration 5 AC 31; Fortitude 29, Reflex 30, Will 27 Vulnerable necrotic (if Pyradan takes necrotic damage, his regeneration doesn’t function on his next turn) Saving Throws +2; +4 against charm effects, immobilized, restrained, and slowed Speed 8 Action Points 1 m Spear (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon Reach 2; +22 vs. AC; 2d10 + 5 damage. r Javelin (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon Ranged 10/20; +22 vs. AC; 2d8 + 5 damage. M Double Attack (standard; at-will) Pyradan makes two spear attacks, and slides one hit target 1 square. Pyradan then shifts 3 squares. R Moonfire (minor 1/round; recharge 456 ) Ranged 10; +20 vs. Will; until the end of Pyradan’s next turn, the target cannot benefit from invisibility or concealment, and Pyradan gains combat advantage to the target. C Forest of Spears (standard; recharges when first bloodied) ✦ Weapon Close burst 2; targets enemies; +22 vs. AC; 2d10 + 5 damage, and the target is either slowed or takes ongoing 10 damage (save ends both). On a critical hit, the target takes both effects. Deadly Flanker When an ally flanks with Pyradan, that ally deals 1d8 extra damage with attacks against the flanked creature. Harrier’s Flank (immediate reaction, when an ally moves adjacent to a creature within 2 squares of Pyradan; at-will) Pyradan shifts 2 squares. He must end this shift in a flanking position with the ally who triggered this power. Alignment Unaligned Languages Common, Elven Skills Acrobatics +19, Athletics +20, Intimidate +15, Nature +17 Str 22 (+14) Dex 25 (+15) Wis 18 (+12) Con 17 (+11) Int 13 (+9) Cha 15 (+10) Equipment hide armor, 2 spears, 4 javelins
2 Portal Hounds (H)
Level 16 Controller
Medium fey beast XP 1,400 each Initiative +15 Senses Perception +21; low-light vision Portal Aura (Teleportation) aura 2; when an enemy starts its turn within the aura, the portal hound can teleport that creature to a different square within the aura. HP 150; Bloodied 75 AC 30; Fortitude 26, Reflex 30, Will 28 Speed 7, teleport 7 m Bite (standard; at-will) +21 vs. AC; 2d8 + 7 damage. M Dimensional Jaws (standard; at-will) ✦ Teleportation +21 vs. AC; 2d8 + 7 damage, and the portal hound makes a secondary attack against the same target. Secondary Attack: +22 vs. Will; the target is teleported 10 squares. C Portal Walk (move; encounter) ✦ Teleportation The portal hound attacks, then teleports itself to a square within 10 of it; close burst 1; +21 vs. Will; the target is teleported into a square adjacent to the portal hound, after the hound teleports. Alignment Unaligned Languages — Str 16 (+11) Dex 24 (+15) Wis 21 (+13) Con 14 (+10) Int 5 (+5) Cha 19 (+12)
Magic Circle: A creature inside the circle can see the domain around the firbolgs. That creature has line of sight to all other squares in the cave and outside as far as the hound statue (see “A2. Sky Shaper’s Grove” above). This does not give line of effect, but it does allow the creature to ignore concealment, and to see any creatures, including hidden creatures, in the area. Doors: The doors aren’t locked and can be opened easily. Most likely, they’re already open when this encounter begins.
May 20 09
|
D u n g e o n 16 6
25
Throne of the Stone-Skinned King
A4: Battle Camp Raid Encounter Level 15 (6,600 XP)
Setup 2 night hags (H) 3 rakshasa archers (R) 1 troll vinespeaker (T) While the PCs are finalizing their agreement with Druemmeth Goldtemple, the sound of clashing blades and shouts of alarm echo from a distant part of the camp. All the monsters are attempting to hide, so make Stealth checks for each group. The monsters, NPCs, and PCs roll initiative. When a PC looks outside, read: Though the sounds of battle come from far across the camp, you see a few eladrin bodies much closer. The bodies are peppered with arrows or flayed with hundreds of tiny cuts. If a PC’s passive Perception check beat a monster’s Stealth check, point out the location where the PC sees movement in the trees. When a PC sees the troll vinespeaker, read: You see a troll with thorny vines wrapped around its arms and chest. It chants as it lashes out with magical rays formed of razor-sharp brambles.
Silhouetted Targets At the start of the fight, a glowing silver sigil illuminates Druemmeth’s tent, casting silhouettes. This allows the rakshasa archers outside to shoot at the
3 Rakshasa Archers (R)
Level 15 Artillery
Medium natural humanoid XP 1,200 each Initiative +13 Senses Perception +16; low-light vision HP 110; Bloodied 55 AC 28; Fortitude 24, Reflex 26, Will 25 Speed 6 m Claw (standard; at-will) +19 vs. AC; 1d8 + 3 damage. r Longbow (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon Ranged 20/40; +20 vs. AC; 1d10 + 5 damage. R Double Attack (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon The rakshasa archer makes two longbow attacks against a single target or against two targets within 3 squares of one another. R Ghost Arrow (standard; $recharge 56 ) ✦ Necrotic, Weapon Requires longbow; ranged 20/40; +20 vs. Reflex; 1d10 + 5 necrotic damage, and the target cannot spend healing surges (save ends). Deceptive Veil (minor; at-will) ✦ Illusion The rakshasa archer can disguise itself to appear as any Medium humanoid. A successful Insight check (opposed by the rakshasa’s Bluff check) pierces the disguise. Alignment Evil Languages Common Skills Bluff +14, Intimidate +14 Str 17 (+10) Dex 20 (+12) Wis 18 (+11) Con 14 (+9) Int 12 (+8) Cha 14 (+9) Equipment longbow, quiver of 30 arrows
PCs and NPCs through the tent (which does provide cover). With his first minor action, Druemmeth dims the sigil, ending this effect.
Tactics The monsters start off by going after Druemmeth, but focus on the PCs once they become more dangerous. They also attack anyone who gets in their way, so the eladrin winter blades and PCs can soak up some attacks to keep Druemmeth from dropping. The hags and rakshasas are in their natural forms. Troll Vinespeaker: The troll is the leader of this band. It waits until multiple allies are bloodied before using chant of power.
2 Night Hags (H)
Level 14 Lurker
Medium fey humanoid XP 1,000 each Initiative +15 Senses Perception +10; darkvision Shroud of Night aura 5; bright light within the aura is reduced to dim light, and dim light becomes darkness. HP 109; Bloodied 54 AC 27; Fortitude 28, Reflex 26, Will 26 Speed 8 m Claw (standard; at-will) +19 vs. AC; 1d6 + 6 damage. If the night hag has combat advantage against the target, the target is also stunned (save ends). M Dream Haunting (standard; at-will) ✦ Psychic The night hag moves into a stunned or unconscious creature’s space and makes an attack against it; +18 vs. Will; 3d6 + 4 psychic damage, and the night hag disappears into the target’s mind. While in this state, the night hag is removed from play and does nothing on subsequent turns except deal 3d6 + 4 psychic damage to the target (no attack roll required). As long as the target remains stunned or unconscious, the night hag can’t be attacked. When the target is no longer stunned or unconscious, or when the target dies, the hag reappears adjacent to the target and is insubstantial until the start of its next turn. C Wave of Sleep (standard; recharge 6 ) ✦ Psychic, Sleep Close blast 5; +17 vs. Will; 1d8 + 3 psychic damage, and the target is dazed (save ends). First Failed Saving Throw: The target falls unconscious (no save). Change Shape (minor; at-will) ✦ Polymorph A night hag can alter its physical form to appear as an old crone of any Medium humanoid race (see Change Shape, Monster Manual, page 280). Alignment Evil Languages Common, Elven Skills Arcana +14, Bluff +16, Intimidate +16, Stealth +16 Str 22 (+13) Dex 18 (+11) Wis 17 (+10) Con 19 (+11) Int 14 (+9) Cha 18 (+11)
Night Hags: The hags try to drop Druemmeth, and they take turns using claw attacks and wave of sleep. They intend to set up Druemmeth for dream haunting. Rakshasa Archers: After each attack, the rakshasas try to hide if they can. They spread out their attacks, and save ghost arrow attacks for PCs.
May 20 09
|
D u n g e o n 16 6
26
Throne of the Stone-Skinned King
Troll Vinespeaker (T)
Level 14 Controller
Large natural humanoid XP 1,000 Initiative +10 Senses Perception +13 HP 142; Bloodied 71; see also troll healing Regeneration 10 AC 28; Fortitude 26, Reflex 23, Will 21 Vulnerable acid or fire (if the troll vinespeaker takes acid or fire damage, its regeneration does not function until the end of its next turn) Speed 8 m Claw (standard; at-will) Reach 2; +19 vs. AC; 2d6 + 7 damage. M Frenzied Strike (free, when the troll vinespeaker’s attack bloodies an enemy; at-will) The vinespeaker makes a claw attack. R Ray of Thorns (standard; at-will) ✦ Implement Ranged 10; +18 vs. Reflex; 2d8 + 6 damage. C Chant of Power (standard; encounter) ✦ Healing, Implement Close burst 5; targets allies; the target gains 10 temporary hit points and a +4 bonus to damage rolls while it has the temporary hit points. A Thorny Burst (standard; at-will) ✦ Implement, Zone Area burst 1 within 10; +18 vs. Reflex; 1d10 + 6 damage, and the target is immobilized (save ends). The burst creates a zone of thorns and brambles that lasts until the end of the encounter. The zone is difficult terrain, and each creature that enters the zone or starts its turn there takes 1d8 damage. Troll Healing ✦ Healing If the troll vinespeaker is reduced to 0 hit points by an attack that does not deal acid or fire damage, it falls prone and remains at 0 hit points until the start of its next turn, when it regains 10 hit points. If an attack deals acid or fire damage to the vinespeaker while it is at 0 hit points, it is destroyed. Alignment Chaotic evil Languages Common, Giant Skills Athletics +16, Endurance +15 Str 18 (+11) Dex 16 (+10) Wis 12 (+8) Con 22 (+13) Int 16 (+10) Cha 10 (+7) Equipment mantle of thorny vines, gnarled staff
Druemmeth Goldtemple
Level 15 Skirmisher (Leader)
Medium fey humanoid, eladrin XP 1,200 Initiative +16 Senses Perception +9; low-light vision Fey Quickness aura 10; an eladrin ally within the aura can use fey step as a minor action. HP 144; Bloodied 72 AC 29; Fortitude 27, Reflex 29, Will 25 Saving Throws +5 against charm effects Speed 6 m Longsword (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon +20 vs. AC; 2d8 + 6 damage, and the target grants combat advantage until the end of its next turn. Nimbus of Battle (immediate reaction, when an ally within 10 damages an enemy; at-will) ✦ Healing The triggering ally regains 1d10 hit points. Fey Step (move; encounter) ✦ Teleportation Druemmeth Goldtemple teleports 5 squares. Alignment Unaligned Languages Common, Elven Skills Diplomacy +15, History +17, Insight +14 Str 21 (+12) Dex 24 (+14) Wis 14 (+9) Con 16 (+10) Int 20 (+12) Cha 17 (+10) Equipment chainmail, longsword
2 Eladrin Winter Blades Level 14 Soldier Minion
Medium fey humanoid, eladrin XP 250 each Initiative +15 Senses Perception +8; low-light vision HP 1; a missed attack never damages a minion AC 30; Fortitude 26, Reflex 27, Will 24 Saving Throws +5 against charm effects Speed 6 m Winter Longsword (standard; at-will) ✦ Cold, Weapon +21 vs. AC; 8 cold damage. Fey Step (move; encounter) ✦ Teleportation The eladrin winter blade teleports 5 squares. Alignment Unaligned Languages Elven Str 20 (+12) Dex 23 (+13) Wis 12 (+8) Con 14 (+9) Int 15 (+9) Cha 16 (+10) Equipment leather, longsword
Allies: Druemmeth Goldtemple leads the eladrin soldiers and any eladrin in the party with his aura. He uses the PCs as human shields, preferring to help them rather than venture out into melee and leave himself exposed.
Features of the Area Illumination: Dim light. Squares within 4 of the campfire are bright light. Rocks: Difficult terrain. Bushes: A creature in a bush gains cover. Bushes are difficult terrain. Trees: The tree trunks are blocking terrain. A creature standing in the tree’s branches gains cover. Tents: Walls of tents block line of sight and provide cover (though the large tent has an open entrance).
May 20 09
|
D u n g e o n 16 6
27
Throne of the Stone-Skinned King
Audience with the King Encounter Level 13 (4,200 XP)
Setup The PCs are taken before the king, in the company of several cyclops bodyguards, when they first arrive. Cachlain is accompanied by his advisor, Sovacles, and they begin to question the PCs about why they’ve come and how they attained the Seed of Winter. Read up on Cachlain and Sovacles before running the adventure, so you can take their personalities and motivations into account during the skill challenge.
Show the players the illustration below. Arcana or Nature Check DC 13: You can tell that the plates in Cachlain’s skin are fragments of a stone golem, and they still retain some of the golem’s magical essence.
Cachlain, the Stone‑Skinned King Gruff and easily distracted, Cachlain is a difficult person with whom to converse. He lets his advisor
lead the discussion and interjects only when he’s annoyed with the proceedings. He rarely asks questions, and when he does they’re either insulting or inspired by his deep, unrelenting paranoia. Cachlain ascended to the throne after he killed his father, and his realm has been steadily growing in size until it stagnated in recent years. He blames this on Sangwyr and Inzira’s followers equally. The Seed of Winter was one of his most prized possessions, and he lent it to the forces invading Nefelus only under great duress. Sovacles has forced Cachlain to do things he’d
When the PCs enter the throne room, read: A massive throne of purple crystal stands on the far side of this room. Cachlain sits there, looking you over with his grotesque eyes. Like other fomorians, his body is deformed, and his skin purple and covered in warts. Plates of stone are bonded to his flesh. They look almost like armor and are carved with elaborate designs. Next to the throne is a smaller seat, and when you enter, a human rises from it. He’s a slight, bald man, and carries a staff of office. His eyes dart among you as he prepares to speak. The unique feature of this room is the floor. Giant panes of glass—or maybe smooth crystal—form a window that looks down on an arena far below. Gladiators battle there, and you catch the king sneaking glances at the fight.
May 20 09
|
D u n g e o n 16 6
28
Throne of the Stone-Skinned King
rather not have, and any crack in the advisor’s control would let the Stone-Skinned King come to his senses, such as they are. Though paranoid and cruel, Cachlain is less reprehensible than other fomorian rulers. Cachlain captures slaves to work in his halls or fight in the arena, but isn’t as cruel to them as other fomorians. He has even set slaves free in the past, though he stopped that practice after other fomorians saw it as a sign of weakness. An avid fan of gladiatorial combat, Cachlain spends days in his throne room watching the games; he even takes his meals there and slumbers on his throne. The king keeps strange hours and requires the arena to be active all day and night. The plates in Cachlain’s skin were once a stone golem crafted by cyclopses to fight in the arena. It destroyed all who battled it, and when the king tired of seeing the same result in every fight, he had the golem destroyed. Its “reward” was becoming a part of the king. Its consciousness still exists in a latent form, and it feels constant pain from the process that bound it to the king.
Sovacles, Human Advisor A cold, secretive man, Sovacles speaks for the king. Compromise and compassion aren’t in his vocabulary, and he’s dismissive of anyone whose goals don’t align with his. Though he’s arrogant, he’s not stupid. He can tell the PCs are dangerous and won’t risk confronting them directly the first time he encounters them. Once they’ve been worn down by Sangwyr’s attacks, he thinks he can defeat them. Appearances are deceiving in Sovacles’s case. In truth, he was a snaketongue cultist, given serpentine traits by the yuan-ti. Later, unsatisfied with the power he’d been given, he sought out followers of Tiamat. His ambition paid off, and he received the blessings of the god of greed. He became a shapeshifter, able to take on five different forms. These forms mix human, snake, and dragon traits. In time, his service gained him the title of exarch to Tiamat. He is commonly known by the name Virizan. “Sovacles” is an alias. The alliance Cachlain made with the githyanki was Sovacles’s plan, and the details of it aren’t in Cachlain’s best interest. In fact, the githyanki are closely allied with Tiamat, and Sovacles serves only her interests. Now, Sovacles thinks Cachlain is too difficult to deal with, and he seeks a more pliable ally. The fomorian Sangwyr seeks Cachlain’s throne, and Sovacles forged a secret pact with Sangwyr to depose the king, take over, and embark on aggressive attacks against the enemies of Tiamat and the githyanki.
May 20 09
|
D u n g e o n 16 6
29
Throne of the Stone-Skinned King
Running the Challenge This skill challenge will end in failure as far as the PCs know. Later in the adventure, influencing Cachlain here matters. Keep the number of successes and failures the PCs have accrued a secret—play this challenge close to the vest. Eventually, Sovacles will show the PCs the door. The more success the PCs have, the more suddenly—and angrily—Sovacles sends them away. Dealing with Cachlain is like talking to an uninterested child, and Sovacles would just as soon be done with the PCs. It’s a race against the clock, as the PCs try to make some headway before they’re dismissed.
Audience with the King Skill Challenge
Level 16 XP 4,200
The Stone-Skinned king sits upon his tall throne, looking down on you with disdain. His advisor, Sovacles, steps forward and asks you, “Why do you come here, and what makes you think the great king cares what you have to say?”
Though the PCs are supposed to be here negotiating with the king, it’s a certainty that they won’t succeed. This is because Sovacles has the king under mental control. The real goals of the challenge are to figure out what Sovacles is doing and to plant the thought in Cachlain’s mind that the PCs might be powerful, and that Sangwyr is a true danger. Complexity 3 (requires 8 successes before 3 failures) Distraction The gladiatorial battle in the area below distracts the king. At the start of each round of the skill challenge, roll a d6. On a 5 or 6, the king isn’t paying attention that round, and the DC for primary skills is increased by 5. Primary Skills Acrobatics, Athletics, Bluff, Diplomacy, History, Intimidate. Other Skills Arcana, Insight. Victory The PCs are asked to leave for now, but they’re given a room among the ambassadors’ quarters. Sovacles tells them they’ll be granted another audience in a few days, after the king has had time to ponder their words. Defeat Sovacles says the king has had enough of the PCs’ chatter and tells them to leave the court. However, as they leave they see Bram Ironfell, who requests they be allowed to stay for a time so he can talk to them. Special (1 success, maximum 1 success) By presenting the Seed of Winter, the PCs gain an automatic success.
Acrobatics or Athletics DC 13 (1 success, maximum 1 success per PC) By performing a feat of strength or agility, the PC appeals to the fomorian’s love of gladiatorial skill. If Cachlain was distracted (see “Distraction” above), restore the DCs to normal for this round of the skill challenge. The king is impressed and takes those he perceives as powerful warriors more seriously. Arcana DC 13 (no successes) The PC discovers that Cachlain is affected by a type of magic that affects the mind. Arcana or History DC 20 (1 success, maximum 1 success per skill) By reciting some of the history or magical traits of the Seed of Winter, the PC inflames Cachlain’s hunger to possess the item, and makes him more eager to make a deal with them. Bluff DC 20 (1 success, maximum 3 successes) The PC worries Cachlain by lying about how much danger the king is in, or suggesting that his githyanki allies or advisor are treacherous. Bluffing successfully requires making the king feel he’s in danger, not just describing the actual state of things. Diplomacy DC 25 (1 success, maximum 3 successes) Attempting to sway Cachlain to help the Coalition and/or Inzira, the PC overcomes the king’s mental block—to at least a small degree—and makes him see reason. Insight DC 13 (no successes) The PC tells by Cachlain’s behavior that he doesn’t have his wits about him, or sees that when Sovacles makes a suggestion Cachlain is quick to adopt the same line of thinking. Intimidate DC 20 (1 success, maximum 3 successes) Sovacles claims that threats won’t work against the mighty king, but Cachlain himself is clearly shaken. His paranoia makes him more susceptible to intimidation.
May 20 09
|
D u n g e o n 16 6
30
Throne of the Stone-Skinned King
B1: Disrupted Banquet Encounter Level 14 (5,600 XP) Encounter Level 15 (6,300 XP) if Bram Ironfell joins the oni and rakshasas
Setup Andrinna Baelsblood (A) Bram Ironfell (B) 1 oni spiritmaster (O) 3 rakshasa warriors (R) Troke (T) At the start of this encounter, the rakshasas and oni are still disguised and are posing as dinner guests. The oni is in the form of Droeth, the fomorian. The three rakshasas have replaced the githyanki in Bram Ironfell’s entourage. The agents have also tainted the food at the banquet with a solution that causes sleep. Compare the DC below to the PCs’ passive Perception checks. Perception Check DC 25: You detect an odd, sweet scent in the food and wine.
The elixir works slowly, so give the PCs time to interact with the other guests (especially Bram Ironfell) before anyone falls asleep. When the elixir takes effect, make an attack against Bram Ironfell and any PC who ingested the food or drink. The other NPCs (Andrinna Baelsblood and Troke) eat or drink (assuming the PCs didn’t warn them against doing so), and are automatically hit. The attack is +22 vs. Fortitude, and any creature hit is unconscious until awoken by being attacked or shaken awake (a standard action). After being woken up, the creature is slowed (save ends). If anyone is still conscious after the elixir takes effect, the monsters transform to their true forms and attack whoever’s left. Otherwise, they abscond with the bodies, take them to the ambassadors’ quarters, and restrain them with manacles. In that case, the battle occurs in that area instead (once the PCs escape).
Tactics The monsters have two goals: to eliminate witnesses by killing anyone still conscious, and to kidnap the ambassadors to hold for ransom. The oni, disguised as Droeth, secured the largest of the ambassadors’ suites, and they plan to take the hostages there to transport them out of Cachlain’s palace. (See “B2. Invasion Tunnel” to see how they plan to transport them out.) Oni Spiritmaster: As soon as it acts, the oni moves out into the closest hallway (using spirit form if it needs to move without taking too much damage from opportunity attacks). It then brings out its howling spirits, making them into a line to block the hallway off. It counts on the rakshasas to mark enemies, and it relies on all its allies to keep it safe so it can use ranged attacks from a safe position. The oni uses devour spirit when it’s cornered and needs to use spirit form or howling blast again. Rakshasa Warriors: The rakshasas try to block off the exits, and they mark PCs to try to prevent them from attacking the oni or howling spirits. When a rakshasa isn’t in a dangerous position, it grabs one of the unconscious ambassadors and drags him or her toward the hall to the north.
A PC who succeeds on the Perception check (or is told about the strange scent) can make a Nature or Thievery check. DC 20: On closer inspection, you can tell the scent is typical of alchemical elixirs that cause sleep.
May 20 09
|
D u n g e o n 16 6
31
Throne of the Stone-Skinned King
Bram Ironfell (B)
Level 12 Skirmisher (Leader)
Medium natural humanoid, dwarf XP 700 Initiative +9 Senses Perception +10; low-light vision HP 123; Bloodied 61 AC 26; Fortitude 24, Reflex 23, Will 26 Saving Throws +5 against poison effects Speed 5 m Dagger (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon +17 vs. AC; 2d4 + 5 damage. M Coward’s Slice (standard; at-will) Bram makes a dagger attack, then shifts half his speed. If the attack hits, the target is marked by one of Bram’s allies within 5 squares of the target. The mark lasts until the end of Bram’s next turn. C Ambassador’s Sanction (standard; at-will) Close burst 10; targets one ally in burst; the target can move half its speed and make a melee basic attack. The target receives a +2 bonus to the attack roll if it attacks a creature marked by the target. Stand Your Ground When an effect forces Bram Ironfell to move—through a pull, a push, or a slide—he moves 1 square less than the effect specifies. When an attack would knock Bram prone, he can roll a saving throw to avoid falling prone. Alignment Unaligned Languages Common, Deep Speech, Dwarven, Elven Skills Bluff +17, Diplomacy +17, Dungeoneering +15, History +14 Str 14 (+8) Dex 12 (+7) Wis 18 (+10) Con 19 (+10) Int 16 (+9) Cha 22 (+12) Equipment dagger
Oni Spiritmaster (O)
Level 14 Elite Artillery
Large natural humanoid XP 2,000 Initiative +12 Senses Perception +14; darkvision HP 142; Bloodied 71 AC 26; Fortitude 27, Reflex 26, Will 26 Saving Throw +2 Speed 7; fly 8 (clumsy); see also spirit form Action Points 1 m Claw (standard; at-will) +21 vs. AC; 2d8 + 4 damage. R Dread Fear (standard; at-will) ✦ Fear, Necrotic Ranged 20; +19 vs. Will; 3d6 + 5 necrotic damage, and the target takes a –2 penalty to attack rolls against the oni spiritmaster and undead creatures (save ends). R Harassing Spirits (standard; encounter; see also devour spirit) ✦ Necrotic, Psychic Ranged 20; +19 vs. Reflex; 3d10 + 5 necrotic damage, and the target is dazed and takes ongoing 10 psychic damage (save ends both). C Howling Blast (standard; encounter; see also devour spirit) ✦ Fear, Psychic Close blast 5; targets enemies; +17 vs. Will; 2d8 + 6 psychic damage, and the target is knocked prone. Deceptive Veil (minor; at-will) ✦ Illusion An oni spiritmaster can appear as a Medium or Large humanoid. A successful insight check (opposed by the oni’s Bluff check) pierces the illusion (see “Change Shape,” MM 280). Devour Spirit (minor 1/round; at-will) The oni spirit master devours one howling spirit within sight, killing it and recharging harassing spirits, howling blast, or spirit form. Spirit Form (standard; sustain standard; encounter; see also devour spirit) ✦ Polymorph The oni spiritmaster becomes insubstantial, gains phasing, and gains fly (hover) 8 until the end of its next turn. Spirit Retinue An oni spiritmaster starts combat with four howling spirits. These four spirits are part of the oni spiritmaster’s XP value. An oni spiritmaster can have twelve howling spirits as part of its retinue, with each howling spirit beyond the first four counting toward the encounter’s XP value. Alignment Evil Languages Common, Giant Skills Bluff +17, Religion +14, Insight +14 Str 18 (+11) Dex 20 (+12) Wis 14 (+9) Con 22 (+13) Int 19 (+11) Cha 21 (+12)
Howling Spirit
Level 14 Minion
3 Rakshasa Warriors (R)
Level 15 Soldier
Medium shadow humanoid (undead), oni XP 250 each* Initiative +14 Senses Perception +14; darkvision Choir of Madness aura 1; any enemy within the aura that takes damage from a power that has the fear or psychic keyword takes 5 extra psychic damage. HP 1; a missed attack never damages a minion. Immune disease, poison; Resist 10 necrotic, insubstantial AC 30; Fortitude 26, Reflex 30, Will 28 Speed fl y 8 (hover); phasing; see also spectral strafe m Spectral Strafe (standard; at-will) ✦ Necrotic The howling spirit shifts 1 square before or after the attack; +17 vs. Reflex; 7 necrotic damage. Alignment Evil Languages Common, Giant Str 6 (+5) Dex 24 (+14) Wis 14 (+9) Con 12 (+8) Int 6 (+5) Cha 21 (+12) * XP is included in the oni spiritmaster’s XP value.
Medium natural humanoid XP 1,200 each Initiative +13 Senses Perception +16; low-light vision HP 142; Bloodied 71 AC 31; Fortitude 29, Reflex 28, Will 28 Speed 6 m Longsword (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon The rakshasa warrior makes two attack rolls and keeps the better result; +21 vs. AC; 1d8 + 5 damage, and the target is marked until the end of the rakshasa’s next turn. m Claw (standard; at-will) +21 vs. AC; 1d8 + 5 damage. M Tiger Pounce (immediate reaction, when a marked enemy within 5 squares of the rakshasa warrior shifts; at-will) ✦ Weapon The rakshasa shifts to the nearest square adjacent to the enemy and makes a basic attack against it. Deceptive Veil (minor; at-will) ✦ Illusion The rakshasa warrior can disguise itself to appear as any Medium humanoid. A successful Insight check (opposed by the rakshasa’s Bluff check) pierces the disguise. Alignment Evil Languages Common Skills Athletics +15, Bluff +14, Intimidate +14 Str 20 (+12) Dex 18 (+11) Wis 18 (+11) Con 14 (+9) Int 12 (+8) Cha 14 (+9) Equipment scale armor, heavy shield, longsword
May 20 09
|
D u n g e o n 16 6
32
Throne of the Stone-Skinned King
Development Bram’s Fate After the fight, the PCs need to decide what happens to Bram (if they didn’t already kill him). The githyanki are finished with his services, the Coalition won’t welcome him back, and Cachlain doesn’t want him around if he’s not a useful diplomat. If he’s set loose on his own, the githyanki probably kill him, and if he’s taken back to the world, the Coalition might execute him for treason. The future’s not bright for Bram Ironfell.
Bram’s moment of truth comes during this encounter, as he decides to continue fighting for his githyanki masters or to assist the PCs. Bram didn’t know his guards were rakshasas in disguise, so he’s taken aback by their actions. Bram chooses sides based on how friendly and persuasive the PCs were when speaking to him. He wants to side with the winners, and he’s not above cowering indecisively for a round or two until he can guess the victor, or trying to switch sides in the middle of the fight. The monsters’ githyanki masters don’t plan to keep Bram around, so the oni and rakshasas don’t bother protecting him even if he joins their side.
Features of the Area Illumination: One magical sconce fills the prison with dim light. The hallway to the west is dark. Cells: The prisoners’ cells are locked. Opening the lock requires a DC 30 Thievery check. The bars can be bent or destroyed (break DC 28; AC 4, Fortitude 12, hp 120). Doors: The double doors leading into the prison are open at the start of the battle, though a monster or PC might close them to limit the battle’s area. The doors can’t be locked.
May 20 09
|
D u n g e o n 16 6
33
Throne of the Stone-Skinned King
B2: Invasion Tunnel
When the PCs see the drider fanglord, read:
Encounter Level 16 (7,050 XP)
A drider wielding a serrated greatsword moves toward you, climbing along the walls.
Setup 1 drider fanglord (D) 1 scarred bulette (B) 2 inferno bats (S) 5 drow underlings (U) A bulette, warped by Sangwyr’s torturers, digs a path into Cachlain’s palace. Drow underlings follow the creature, carefully reinforcing the tunnels it creates while burrowing to allow them to travel through it. A drider fanglord leads the group and also brings along two trained inferno bats. These invaders could arrive to take away the hostages collected in the “Disrupted Banquet” encounter or be another isolated attack to cause havoc in the court. The tactical map assumes the PCs arrive after the creatures have breached the wall. If you want the monsters to arrive and enter the palace while the PCs are there, have the bulette come through the wall first, followed by the other monsters. The noise the bulette makes while burrowing makes a stealthy entrance impossible for the monsters. When the PCs see the monsters, read: A rampaging bulette, covered in thousands of scars, thrashes through the hall. Behind it, you see several weaklooking drow carrying short swords and daggers. In the air above these creatures float two bats made entirely of fire.
Drider Fanglord (D)
Level 14 Brute
Large fey humanoid (spider) XP 1,000 Initiative +12 Senses Perception +15; darkvision HP 172; Bloodied 86 AC 26; Fortitude 27, Reflex 25, Will 23 Speed 8, climb 8 (spider climb) m Greatsword (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon +19 vs. AC; 1d12 + 7 damage. M Quick Bite (minor; at-will) ✦ Poison Requires combat advantage; +16 vs. Fortitude; 1d4 damage, and ongoing 10 poison damage (save ends). R Darkfire (minor; encounter) Ranged 10; +16 vs. Reflex; until the end of the drider’s next turn, the target grants combat advantage to all attackers, and the target cannot benefi t from invisibility or concealment. R Web (standard; $recharge ⚃ ⚄ ⚅ ) Ranged 5; +15 vs. Reflex; the target is restrained. Escaping from the web requires a successful DC 25 Acrobatics check or DC 27 Athletics check. Alignment Evil Languages Elven Skills Dungeoneering +15, Stealth +17 Str 24 (+14) Dex 21 (+12) Wis 16 (+10) Con 22 (+13) Int 13 (+8) Cha 9 (+6) Equipment leather armor, greatsword
Scarred Bulette (B)
Level 15 Elite Skirmisher
Large natural beast XP 2,400 Initiative +14 Senses Perception +10; darkvision, tremorsense 20 HP 304; Bloodied 152 AC 29; Fortitude 28, Reflex 25, Will 23 Vulnerable charm (a tortured bulette hit by a charm attack is immobilized until the end of its next turn) Saving Throws +2 Speed 6, burrow 6 Action Points 1 m Bite (standard; at-will) Before it bites, the bulette can make a standing long jump (as a free action) without provoking opportunity attacks; +20 vs. AC; 2d8 + 6 damage, or 4d8 + 6 damage against a prone target. M Earth Furrow (move; at-will) The scarred bulette moves its burrow speed just below the surface of the ground, avoiding opportunity attacks as it passes underneath other creatures’ spaces. As it burrows beneath the space of a Medium or smaller creature on the ground, the bulette makes an attack against the creature; +14 vs. Fortitude; the target is knocked prone. C Rising Burst (standard; the bulette must have emerged from the ground after burrowing this turn; at-will) Close burst 2; the bulette sprays rocks and dirt into the air when it rises out of the ground; +19 vs. AC; 1d10 + 6 damage. Spray of Tainted Blood (when an adjacent creature hits the scarred bulette with a melee attack) The attacker takes a –2 penalty to Fortitude until the end of the scarred bulette’s next turn. Habituated to Torture While the scarred bulette is bloodied, it gains a +2 bonus to all defenses and to speed. Alignment Unaligned Languages — Skills Athletics +20, Endurance +19 Str 27 (+15) Dex 21 (+12) Wis 16 (+10) Con 24 (+14) Int 2 (+3) Cha 11 (+7)
May 20 09
|
D u n g e o n 16 6
34
Throne of the Stone-Skinned King
2 Inferno Bats (S)
Level 15 Skirmisher
Medium elemental beast (fire) XP 1,200 each Initiative +17 Senses Perception +13 HP 144; Bloodied 72 AC 29; Fortitude 25, Reflex 29, Will 23 Resist 20 fire Speed 2 (clumsy), fly 8; see also fiery swoop m Inferno Touch (standard; at-will) ✦ Fire +20 vs. Reflex; 2d6 + 5 fire damage, and ongoing 10 fire damage (save ends). Failed Saving Throw: Each ally of the target, within 2 squares of the target, takes 10 fire damage. M Fiery Swoop (standard; at-will) ✦ Fire The inferno bat shifts 4 squares and can move through occupied squares as it moves. It makes a melee basic attack against any creature whose space it enters. The inferno bat cannot attack a target more than once in this fashion, and it must end its movement in an unoccupied square. Heatseeker (immediate reaction, when the inferno bat is damaged by an enemy’s ranged attack; at-will) The inferno bat shifts 2 squares toward the triggering enemy. Alignment Unaligned Languages — Str 8 (+6) Dex 27 (+15) Wis 12 (+8) Con 16 (+10) Int 2 (+3) Cha 9 (+6)
5 Drow Underlings (U) Level 14 Minion Skirmisher
Medium fey humanoid XP 250 each Initiative +15 Senses Perception +9; darkvision HP 1; a missed attack never damages a minion. AC 28; Fortitude 24, Reflex 27, Will 26 Speed 6 m Short Sword (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon +19 vs. AC; 6 damage. r Thrown Dagger (standard; at-will) ✦ Poison, Weapon Ranged 5/10; +19 vs. AC; 6 poison damage. Darkfire Sacrifice (when the drow underling is reduced to 0 hit points) An ally within 5 squares of the drow underling gains combat advantage and ignores concealment on its next attack. Alignment Evil Languages Common, Elven Str 16 (+10) Dex 23 (+13) Wis 14 (+9) Con 13 (+8) Int 13 (+8) Cha 20 (+12) Equipment leather armor, short sword
Drow Underlings: These poorly trained warriors are fiercely loyal and are willing to give their lives for their commanding drider.
Features of the Area
Tactics Sangwyr’s agents attack anyone who approaches, and they fight to the death. Scarred Bulette: In the relatively confined area of this encounter, the bulette burrows from room to room to move itself out of harm’s way or to chase down enemies who are difficult for the bulette’s allies to approach. The bulette doesn’t worry about its allies, and it doesn’t care if it hits them with earth furrow or rising burst. The bulette can’t burrow into the throne room, because it’s protected by hundreds of warding rituals put in place by the paranoid fomorian king. Drider Fanglord: The drider’s tactics complement the bulette’s. To avoid the bulette’s earth furrow power, the drider climbs on the walls or ceiling. It uses web to set up targets for the bulette’s rising burst attack, and it uses quick bite against creatures that have a penalty to Fortitude from the bulette’s spray of tainted blood. The drider leads the group and has a rapport with the animalistic inferno bats and bulette. Inferno Bats: These creatures follow the drider’s orders. They use fiery swoop to pass over creatures and give them ongoing damage, then flank them with the drider or some of the drow.
Illumination: Bright light. Walls: The hewn crystal walls require a DC 15 Athletics check to climb. Doors: The smaller rooms’ doors are locked, but the doors to the larger room have already been opened by the monsters. A creature inside a room can lock them (with an additional minor action). Locked doors require a DC 18 Thievery check to open. Furniture: Most of the furniture requires an extra square of movement to move onto. The enormous table in the larger room is high enough for Medium or smaller creatures to stand under. A creature under the table gains cover against Large or larger creatures.
May 20 09
|
D u n g e o n 16 6
35
Throne of the Stone-Skinned King
B3: Assassination Attempt Encounter Level 16 (7,200 XP) Encounter Level 17 (9,200 XP) with optional skill challenge
Setup Arzoa, githyanki assassin (A) 2 purplespawn nightmares (P) As the PCs explore the hidden prison, mysterious assassins attack them. Make Stealth checks for each monster and compare the results to the PCs’ passive Perception checks. If the PCs don’t detect any of the enemies, the assassins have a surprise round. If a PC’s passive Perception is higher than a monster’s Stealth check, read: You suddenly hear soft footfalls coming from the hall. What ever’s approaching is clearly trying to conceal its presence. When a PC sees Arzoa, read: A githyanki clad in heavy, red robes glares determinedly and brandishes two silver longswords. You catch a glimpse of chainmail during her rapid, graceful movements. When a PC sees a purplespawn nightmare, read:
Arzoa, Level 18 Elite Controller Githyanki Assassin (A)
Medium immortal humanoid XP 4,000 Initiative +16 Senses Perception +15 HP 344; Bloodied 172 AC 32; Fortitude 29, Reflex 31, Will 30 Saving Throws +2 Speed 6 Action Points 1 m Silver Longsword (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon +23 vs. AC; 2d8 + 7 damage, and the target grants combat advantage until the end of its next turn. M Double Attack (standard; at-will) Arzoa makes a silver longsword or mind grip attack, shifts half her speed, then makes another silver longsword or mind grip attack. R Mind Grip (standard; at-will) ✦ Psychic Ranged 10; +22 vs. Will; 1d10 + 7 psychic damage, and the target slides 5 squares. C Mind Assassination (minor; $recharge ⚄ ⚅ ) ✦ Psychic Close burst 5; targets enemies; +22 vs. Will; 1d10 + 7 psychic damage, and the target takes ongoing 10 psychic damage (save ends). C Tide of Woe (immediate reaction, when an enemy within 10 squares of Arzoa takes psychic damage; usable while bloodied; at-will) ✦ Fear Close burst 10; targets the triggering enemy. Effect: The target is knocked prone. Telekinetic Leap (move; encounter) Ranged 10; targets Arzoa or one ally; the target can fly 5 squares. Mental Block ✦ Psychic If a creature taking ongoing psychic damage hits Arzoa, that creature takes 2d8 psychic damage. Alignment Evil Languages Common, Deep Speech Skills Acrobatics +21, Arcana +20, Bluff +18, Stealth +21 Str 17 (+12) Dex 25 (+16) Wis 22 (+15) Con 20 (+14) Int 23 (+15) Cha 18 (+13) Equipment chainmail, silver longsword
2 Purplespawn Nightmares (P)
Level 17 Lurker
Medium natural humanoid (reptile) XP 1,600 each Initiative +17 Senses Perception +8; darkvision HP 128; Bloodied 64 Regeneration 10 (if the purplespawn nightmare takes radiant damage, regeneration does not function until the end of its next turn) AC 30; Fortitude 29, Reflex 30, Will 28; see also psychic edge Resist 10 psychic Speed 6, climb 6 (spider climb) m Longsword (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon +22 vs. AC; 2d8 + 4 damage. M Tail (standard; at-will) ✦ Sleep Reach 2; +22 vs. AC; 3d6 + 8 damage, and the target is dazed (save ends). First Failed Saving Throw: The target is dazed and slowed (save ends both). Second Failed Saving Throw: The target falls unconscious (save ends). Nightmare Form (standard; at-will) ✦ Polymorph The purplespawn nightmare can alter its physical form to appear as an enemy of its choice. While the nightmare is adjacent to that enemy, roll 1d20 whenever a melee or ranged attack targets the nightmare. On a roll of 10 or higher, the attack instead targets the copied enemy. The copied enemy’s attacks are not subject to this effect. Nightmarish Torment ✦ Psychic If the purplespawn nightmare’s melee attack hits an enemy it is copying with nightmare form or a sleeping target, that target takes ongoing 10 psychic damage in addition to the attack’s other effect (save ends). Psychic Edge A purplespawn nightmare gains a +4 bonus to all defenses against attacks from enemies that are taking ongoing psychic damage. Alignment Evil Languages Common, Deep Speech, Draconic Skills Acrobatics +18, Bluff +18, Stealth +18, Thievery +18 Str 19 (+12) Dex 20 (+13) Wis 11 (+8) Con 20 (+13) Int 13 (+9) Cha 20 (+13) Equipment longsword
Skulking through the shadows comes a creature with a vaguely humanoid shape. Purple scales cover its body, and its long tail, tipped with spikes, lashes in the air. It has humanoid arms and carries a longsword.
May 20 09
|
D u n g e o n 16 6
36
Throne of the Stone-Skinned King
Arzoa’s Secrets Skill Challenge
Level 18 XP 2,000
As you attempt to interrogate Arzoa, you catch a flash of psychic power. She whispers, “You’ ll get nothing from me. My mind slips away even as I speak. Failure is unacceptable.”
Tactics The assassins pile up ongoing psychic damage to increase their effectiveness. Arzoa: The leader of the assassins, Arzoa is aggressive and smart. She hits the PCs with mind assassination as soon as she can to set up her mental block and give the nightmares a bonus to all defenses. If she’s almost bloodied when mind assassination recharges, she saves it so she can use tide of woe against PCs when they take damage from it. She tries to keep a PC in melee combat and repeatedly uses double attack to make two longsword attacks against that PC. Arzoa knows that healers are dangerous and tries to beat down leaders quickly. Purplespawn Nightmares: If the monsters have a surprise round, a nightmare readies nightmare form to use against any PC that comes adjacent to it. These creatures are willing to let their leader take the brunt of the attacks. They fight cautiously, aiming to survive until Arzoa becomes bloodied and can use tide of woe. Bright light frightens and aggravates the nightmares. If one takes radiant damage, it shifts away from the source. Talyrin: If the PCs have talked to Talyrin, and she believes they have similar goals, she helps them survive the assassination attempt. She can use a standard
The PCs have only a short time to interrogate Arzoa before her mind is gone. If they can act quickly, the PCs have a better chance of getting information from her as she loses her sense of secrecy. Complexity 1 (requires 4 successes before 3 failures) Mind Degeneration After every two skill checks the PCs attempt, Arzoa’s mental faculties deteriorate, giving the PCs an automatic failure. After the first failure, she’s still somewhat lucid. After the second, she has the mind of a child, and with the third she regresses to animal instinct, then dies. Primary Skills Diplomacy, Intimidate. Other Skills Heal, Insight. Victory The PCs learn one piece of information per success. Choose one based on what the PC asked or demanded.
action to give a PC resist psychic 5 until the end of that PC’s turn. She has also studied purplespawn nightmares and can tell the PCs about their capabilities. Eladrin Ambassadors: The eladrin can’t offer much help. They encourage the PCs and are certain that the assassins must be minions of Sangwyr, but they don’t do anything useful. “Legbreaker” Kimdal: Once the battle starts, this gnome thief rattles his bars and yells that he can help the PCs if they’ll just let him out. If they do, he immediately makes a run for the exit. The monsters make opportunity attacks against him if he runs past, but they don’t chase him down.
Development Arzoa, though she’s part of Bram’s entourage, acts on behalf of Sangwyr and the githyanki leaders. They’ve
✦ “You fight well. Chillreaver . . . perhaps not such a failure.” ✦ “Bram is not strong. Not strong like githyanki.” ✦ “Cachlain will fall. Too much resistance . . .” ✦ “I follow githyanki ways . . . now the dragons’ ways.” Defeat The PCs don’t find out all the secrets Arzoa knows. Diplomacy DC 20 (1 success, no maximum successes) The PC learns one of the four facts above. Give a PC making a Diplomacy check a –2 penalty per failure the PCs have, as Arzoa becomes more difficult to reason with. Insight DC 13 (no successes) The PC realizes that Diplomacy works best early in the challenge, and Intimidate gets better later on. Heal DC 20 (no successes) By slowing the degradation of Arzoa’s mind, the PC buys more time. The PCs don’t gain an automatic failure this round. This skill works only once during the challenge. Intimidate DC 20 (1 success, no maximum successes) The PC learns one of the four facts above. Give a PC making an Intimidate check a +2 bonus per failure the PCs have, as Arzoa becomes less stubborn and more pliable.
decided to cut Bram out of the loop, since he hasn’t been ruthless enough. Though Arzoa knows this, she refuses to divulge any of it. As a part of her training, she mastered a technique to eradicate her own mind in case of failure. If the PCs interrogate her, she uses this ability, and the PCs can enter a skill challenge.
Features of the Area Illumination: One magical sconce fills the prison with dim light. The hallway to the west is dark. Cells: The prisoners’ cells are locked. Opening the lock requires a DC 30 Thievery check. The bars can be bent or destroyed (break DC 28; AC 4, Fortitude 12; hp 120). Doors: The double doors leading into the prison are open at the start of the battle. The doors can’t be locked. May 20 09
|
D u n g e o n 16 6
37
Throne of the Stone-Skinned King
B4: Caged Animals Encounter Level 17 (8,600 XP)
Setup 1 chimera (C) 2 quickling zephyrs (Q) 1 thunderfury boar (B) 3 winter wolves (W) In the animal pens right next to the gladiatorial arena, Sangwyr’s quickling minions set the animals loose to run unchecked through the halls of Cachlain’s court. The PCs probably arrive from the tunnel on the north side of the room, but there’s a chance they’ll come through the arena itself. If you choose, Bram Ironfell and two of his guards might be in their room (the small room with three beds), or Bram might be there alone if his guards were already exposed as rakshasas (in the “Disrupted Banquet” encounter). When the PCs arrive, read: Along the walls of this room, well-crafted iron cages stand, filled with various animals trained for gladiatorial combat. Corpses of cyclops animal handlers and guards slump in the corners of the room, their blood splattered across the walls behind them. Two small humanoids with gray skin and powerful legs swiftly move near the cages. They flip open the latches to release the animals. Roll initiative after you read the text above.
Chimera (C)
Level 15 Elite Brute
Large natural magical beast XP 2,400 Initiative +10 Senses Perception +14; all-around vision, darkvision HP 366; Bloodied 183; see also bloodied breath AC 27; Fortitude 29, Reflex 23, Will 24 Resist 10 fire Saving Throws +2 Speed 6, fl y 10 (clumsy), overland flight 15 Action Points 1 m Lion’s Bite (standard; at-will) +18 vs. AC; 2d8 + 7 damage. M Ram’s Charge (standard; at-will) The chimera makes a charge attack; +19 vs. AC; 1d10 + 11 damage, and the target is pushed 1 square or knocked prone. M Triple Threat (standard; at-will) The chimera makes the following three melee attacks, each one against a different target: Lion’s Bite +18 vs. AC; 2d8 + 7 damage. Dragon’s Bite +18 vs. AC; 3d6 + 7 damage. Ram’s Gore +18 vs. AC; 1d10 + 7 damage, and the target is knocked prone. C Dragon Breath (standard; encounter) ✦ Fire Close blast 5; +16 vs. Reflex; 2d6 + 3 damage, and ongoing 10 fire damage (save ends). C Bloodied Breath (free, when first bloodied; encounter) The chimera recharges and uses dragon breath. Alignment Unaligned Languages Common, Draconic Str 24 (+14) Dex 17 (+10) Wis 14 (+9) Con 23 (+13) Int 5 (+4) Cha 17 (+10)
2 Quickling Zephyrs (Q)
Level 14 Lurker
Small fey humanoid XP 1,000 each Initiative +20 Senses Perception +10; low-light vision HP 82; Bloodied 41 AC 30; Fortitude 26, Reflex 29, Will 23 Speed 12, climb 6; see also blinding speed and unstoppable m Short Sword (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon +19 vs. AC; 1d6 + 9 damage. Blinding Speed (move; recharge ⚃ ⚄ ⚅ ) ✦ Illusion The quickling zephyr moves 12 squares and becomes invisible until it attacks or until the end of its next turn. Combat Advantage If the quickling zephyr has combat advantage against its target, it deals 2d6 extra damage and dazes the target on a successful melee attack (save ends). Unstoppable The quickling zephyr ignores difficult terrain and can move across any solid or liquid surface. Alignment Evil Languages Elven Skills Acrobatics +26, Bluff +13, Stealth +21 Str 12 (+8) Dex 28 (+16) Wis 17 (+10) Con 22 (+13) Int 16 (+10) Cha 12 (+8) Equipment short sword
Thunderfury Boar (B)
Level 15 Brute
Large fey beast XP 1,200 Initiative +9 Senses Perception +8 HP 182; Bloodied 91 AC 27; Fortitude 29, Reflex 20, Will 20 Speed 8 m Gore (standard; at-will) +18 vs. AC; 2d8 + 7 damage, or 3d8 + 7 damage while the thunderfury boar is bloodied. M Death Strike (when reduced to 0 hit points) The thunderfury boar makes a gore attack. C Thunderfury (standard; recharge ⚄ ⚅ ) ✦ Thunder Close burst 2; +17 vs. Fortitude; 2d8 + 6 thunder damage, and the target is knocked prone. Miss: Half damage, and the target is not knocked prone. Thunderous Charge ✦ Thunder The thunderfury boar deals 10 extra thunder damage when it charges. Alignment Unaligned Languages — Str 24 (+14) Dex 15 (+9) Wis 12 (+8) Con 22 (+13) Int 5 (+4) Cha 9 (+6)
May 20 09
|
D u n g e o n 16 6
38
Throne of the Stone-Skinned King
3 Winter Wolves (W)
Level 14 Skirmisher
Medium natural magical beast XP 1,000 each Initiative +14 Senses Perception +10; low-light vision HP 141; Bloodied 70 AC 28; Fortitude 27, Reflex 26, Will 24 Resist 20 cold Speed 8 (ice walk) m Bite (standard; at-will) ✦ Cold +19 vs. AC; 1d10 + 6 damage plus 1d6 cold damage, or 2d10 + 6 damage plus 1d6 cold damage against a prone target. M Takedown (standard; usable only when charging; at-will) ✦ Cold +19 vs. AC; 2d10 + 6 damage plus 1d6 cold damage, and the target is knocked prone. C Freezing Breath (standard; recharge ⚄ ⚅) ✦ Cold Close blast 5; +17 vs. Reflex; 2d6 + 6 cold damage. Miss: Half damage. Drag (minor; usable only while adjacent to a prone enemy; at-will) The winter wolf shifts 1 square and pulls a prone target that is adjacent to it 1 square. Alignment Evil Languages Common, Giant Str 23 (+13) Dex 21 (+12) Wis 17 (+10) Con 21 (+12) Int 9 (+6) Cha 10 (+7)
Tactics
the animals between themselves and the PCs. Once they’re bloodied, the quicklings retreat using the safest path possible. Winter Wolves: Using pack tactics, the wolves gang up on single foes or small groups. If a winter wolf knocks an enemy prone, it uses drag to pull that enemy closer to the other wolves. They also go after creatures knocked prone by the thunderfury boar’s thunderfury. Chimera: If multiple enemies are clustered near the pit, the chimera flies across the pit, lands on the other side, and uses dragon breath against them. If it doesn’t have three PCs in reach for its triple threat attack, it uses one of those attacks against a quickling or other humanoid. The PCs might parlay with the chimera, but it has been penned up for a long time, and it’s not receptive to reason (and it definitely doesn’t want to remain in slavery). Thunderfury Boar: In tight quarters, the boar has some trouble charging. It sometimes chooses to provoke opportunity attacks just so it can charge.
Features of the Area Illumination: Bright light. Pens: The locks on the pens are easy to open for humanoid creatures. The bars can be bent or destroyed (break DC 28; AC 4, Fortitude 12, hp 120). Pit: The crevasse that forms the southern border of the room is 4 squares (20 feet) deep. A creature that falls in takes 2d10 damage from the fall. The sides require a DC 20 Athletics check to climb. Water Basin: It costs 1 extra square of movement to move into the water basin. A Small creature in the basin gains cover. The basin is full of water, but it’s not deep enough to do more than make a creature wet. Treasure: The weapons rack could contain a magic weapon a PC can steal. You can include one of the treasure parcels here (and possibly allow the PC to pick up the weapon during the encounter).
By the time the PCs and monsters roll initiative, the quicklings have opened two cages. By default, they first open the cages containing the chimera and two of the winter wolves. The first time the zephyrs’ initiative comes up, they release the other monsters. All the animals have been trained for the arena, so they’re more tactically savvy than most beasts. However, they don’t have a designated target. While most of their attacks target PCs, they sometimes hit the quicklings, especially with multitarget attacks or when the quicklings are bloodied. Quickling Zephyrs: As often as possible, the quicklings move away from their targets after attacking (using blinding speed if possible). They try to keep
May 20 09
|
D u n g e o n 16 6
39
Throne of the Stone-Skinned King
B5: Throne Room Showdown Encounter Level 17 (9,600 XP)
Setup Cachlain, the Stone-Skinned King (C) Sovacles, Cachlain’s Advisor (S) This encounter begins after Sovacles calls the PCs back to his throne room and accuses them of allying with Sangwyr and compromising the king’s palace.
Cachlain, Level 20 Elite Soldier the Stone-Skinned King (C)
Huge fey humanoid XP 5,600 Initiative +13 Senses Perception +18; truesight 6 HP 388; Bloodied 194; see also cracked stone AC 36; Fortitude 34, Reflex 30, Will 32 Saving Throws +2 Speed 8, fly 2 (hover) Action Points 1 m Slam (standard; at-will) Reach 3; +27 vs. AC; 2d10 + 7 damage, and the target is pushed 2 squares. R Evil Eye (minor 1/round; at will) ✦ Charm Ranged 10; +25 vs. Will; slide the target 3 squares, and the target makes a melee basic attack against a target of Cachlain’s choice. C Stone Swat (standard; recharge 56 ) Close blast 3; +27 vs. AC; 3d10 + 7 damage, and the target is pushed 2d4 squares and knocked prone. Cracked Stone While bloodied, Cachlain has a –2 penalty to defenses and his attacks deal 1d10 extra damage. Stone Defense (immediate reaction, when hit and damaged by an attack; recharge 456 ) Cachlain gains resist 5 to all damage until the end of his next turn. Alignment Evil Languages Common, Elven Skills Bluff +21, Endurance +23, Intimidate +23 Str 22 (+16) Dex 12 (+11) Wis 17 (+13) Con 26 (+18) Int 19 (+14) Cha 23 (+16) Equipment robes, crown
Sovacles, Cachlain’s Advisor (S)
Level 18 Elite Controller
Medium natural humanoid (shapechanger) XP 4,000 Initiative +14 Senses Perception +18 HP 340; Bloodied 170 AC 32; Fortitude 29, Reflex 30, Will 31 Resist poison 10 Saving Throws +2 Speed 6 Action Points 1 m Staff (standard; at-will) ✦ Necrotic, Weapon +23 vs. AC; 2d8 + 7 necrotic damage. R Ensnaring Coil (standard; at-will) ✦ Necrotic Ranged 15; +22 vs. Reflex; 1d6 + 5 necrotic damage and slide the target 4 squares. A Bane Quills (standard; at-will) ✦ Poison Area burst 1 within 10; +22 vs. Fortitude; 2d6 + 5 poison damage, and the target takes a –2 penalty to attack rolls and skill checks until the end of Sovacles’s next turn. R/A Coils and Quills (standard; at-will) Sovacles makes an ensnaring coil attack and a bane quills attack. A Poison Darkness (standard; encounter) ✦ Poison Area burst 1 within 20; +22 vs. Fortitude; 3d6 + 7 poison damage. Effect: The burst becomes a zone of darkness until the end of Sovacles’s next turn. Any creature that starts its turn within the zone takes 5 poison damage and is blinded (save ends). Sovacles can see through the darkness. Sustain Minor: The zone persists. Serpent’s Trickery (immediate interrupt, when targeted by an attack while an ally is adjacent; at-will) Sovacles redirects the attack to an adjacent ally and shifts 1 square. Alignment Evil Languages Common, Deep Speech, Draconic, Elven Skills Arcana +20, Bluff +21, Diplomacy +21, History +20, Insight +18, Religion +20 Str 13 (+10) Dex 20 (+14) Wis 19 (+13) Con 18 (+13) Int 22 (+15) Cha 25 (+16) Equipment fine clothing, staff of office
May 20 09
|
D u n g e o n 16 6
40
Throne of the Stone-Skinned King
Tactics The PCs aren’t meant to finish this fight by defeating both enemies. See “Development” and the “Release Cachlain’s Mind” skill challenge. Cachlain: Struggling against the control of Sovacles, the Stone-Skinned King becomes more reluctant to fight as the PCs gain successes in the skill challenge. He doesn’t stop attacking, but he makes poor decisions. For instance, he might use his evil eye on a creature with a poor melee basic attack. Sovacles: The advisor remains close to the king, using serpent’s trickery to redirect attacks to the fomorian. He uses the attacks he redirects as evidence that the PCs are trying to kill the king. Ensnaring coils lets him move enemies into position to be hit by bane quills or Cachlain’s attacks.
Development Sovacles reveals his true motives after he becomes bloodied, or when the PCs succeed on the skill challenge and he realizes he has lost control over the king. Sovacles should be standing on the window in the floor when he makes his pronouncement. When this happens, read: Sovacles, wounded and angry, snarls, “You have no idea who you’re dealing with! My queen has given me the power to destroy you easily! Tiamat will have all that you possess and more, and your blood is my gift to her! And I’m sure Cachlain’s replacement will be more amenable to our commands.”
Then, the plates of glass flutter away, opening a hole that drops the PCs and Sovacles to the gladiatorial arena below. The fall is 40 feet (4d10 falling damage). Remember that a character trained in Acrobatics can make a check as a free action to reduce the damage by half the result of the check.
Features of the Area Illumination: Bright light. Fireplace: This fireplace is tall enough to contain Medium creatures. A creature that enters or starts its turn in the fireplace takes 5 fire damage. Magic Circle: The arcane sigils carved into the floor here are used for scrying rituals by Sovacles, but they don’t have any use during combat. Throne: Cachlain’s throne is blocking terrain for Medium creatures. A creature can climb onto it with a DC 13 Athletics check. The base of the throne is solid crystal, so it’s not possible to walk under it. Floor: The window floor is perfectly safe to walk on. Until Cachlain commands the floor to open, the floor’s durability and magical protection keep it intact. Doors: The southern door is locked by magic, and only Cachlain or Sovacles can command it to open. The door leading to Cachlain’s bedchamber is unlocked and can be opened easily. Ceiling: The ceiling is 5 squares (25 feet) high.
Moving Into the Arena If the combatants jump over to the arena floor, they enter the middle of a gladiatorial bout. You can grab a couple of eladrin Feydark gladiators from the “Arena of Blood” encounter, or pick whatever monsters you want for the battle on which the PCs and monsters intrude. You could instead use a handful of minions in the arena the unleashed animals can cut down, making the fight feel more chaotic.
Cachlain responds quickly, shouting out that he’ll never let the god of greed steal what belongs to him. He gestures at the floor and his evil eye flashes green.
May 20 09
|
D u n g e o n 16 6
41
Throne of the Stone-Skinned King
B6: Arena of Blood
After the PCs land in the arena, read:
Encounter Level 20 (14,800 XP) Encounter Level 21 (20,400 XP) if the gladiators fight for Virizan
In the gladiatorial arena below you, a handful of eladrin gladiators fight an undead treant bound in place with massive cold iron chains. A crowd massed in dozens of cave mouths along the towering walls takes in the bout. You see Sovacles plummet down and hear his body snap as he hits the purple crystal of the arena floor. The crowd cheers! Just when it appears that the advisor’s threat is ended, his body evaporates and forms into a wispy green cloud with smoky wings.
Setup 1 blackroot treant (T) 4 eladrin Feydark gladiators (G) Virizan, Exarch of Tiamat (S) This encounter begins immediately after “B5. Throne Room Showdown.” Virizan begins the encounter in his venom wisp form. Release Cachlain’s Mind Skill Challenge
Level 18 XP 6,000
The fomorian king is fighting against Sovacles’s control, even while attacking you. He squints his eyes and shakes his head as though he were trying to banish unwanted visions. While they fight the Stone-Skinned King and Sovacles, the PCs can attempt to free the monarch from his advisor’s control. Each PC can attempt a skill check as a minor action once per round to contribute to this challenge. Complexity 2 (requires 6 successes before 3 failures). Primary Skills Arcana, Diplomacy, Insight, Intimidate. Other Skills Heal. Victory Sovacles reveals his true intentions, and Cachlain changes the fight. See “Development.” Defeat The PCs realize they can’t end the enchantment through their efforts. (They need to wait until they drop Sovacles below his bloodied value before the events of “Development” occur.) Special (1 success, maximum 1 success) If the PCs succeeded on the skill challenge in “Audience with the King,” they gain an automatic success.
Special (1 success, no maximum successes) The PC makes one of Sovacles’s attacks hit Cachlain, either by redirecting the attack, dominating Sovacles, or by luring Sovacles to use a multitarget attack that hits the fomorian. Special (2 successes, no maximum successes) If the PC uses dispel magic on the king, it can’t totally overpower the enchantment, but it severely weakens Sovacles’s control. Arcana DC 25 (1 success, no maximum successes) Fighting power with power, the PC recites countermagic to reverse Sovacles’s enchantment. Diplomacy DC 20 (1 success, no maximum successes) The PC reasons with Cachlain, convincing him the PCs aren’t his enemies. Increase the DC to 25 if the PC has attacked Cachlain during this encounter. Heal DC 13 (no successes) By healing Cachlain’s wounds, the PC gains a +5 bonus to his or her next check in the skill challenge, and Cachlain won’t attack that PC (save ends). Insight DC 20 (1 success, maximum 2 successes) The PC points out that Sovacles is becoming more blatant and is flaunting his control over the king. Intimidate DC 25 (1 success, maximum 2 successes) The PC berates Cachlain for letting Sovacles order him around.
The PCs keep the same initiative, and Virizan goes at the same time Sovacles did. Roll initiative for the treant and gladiators. Throughout the fight, Virizan reveals the following information: ✦ “You have destroyed my human guise! Still, I have four more forms that can defeat you easily! Now you know you face Virizan, exarch of Her Dark Majesty Tiamat! All in this room will take my secret to their graves!” ✦ “Cachlain won’t last long! Sangwyr marches, and the fomorian weakling’s forces can’t stop him alone. Tiamat covets this domain and it will be hers, and Sangwyr will be a perfect puppet upon the throne.” ✦ “Do not think I ever underestimated you. You defeated Chillreaver, so you’re clearly skilled. None of Tiamat’s exarchs falls easily!” ✦ “I have no illusions that I am the strongest of Tiamat’s exarchs. Even if you defeat me, you can’t stop us all!” The venom wisp form is described in the readaloud text above, and the other three forms are described below.
May 20 09
|
D u n g e o n 16 6
42
Throne of the Stone-Skinned King
To describe the naga form, read: Virizan transforms into an enormous, coiled serpent with a humanoid face. A row of green quills run down his spine, and longer spines jut out from the tip of his muscular tail. Peals of thunder sound at his command. To describe the snake swarm form, read: The exarch’s body rips into pieces, which become writhing snakes as they fall to the ground. A swarm of the creatures crawls across the ground, baring fangs that drip with venom. To describe the snaketongue form, read: Virizan assumes the guise of a human creature with scaled skin. He produces his staff of office, now twisted and warped into the image of a hooded serpent.
Blackroot Treant (T)
Level 19 Elite Soldier
Huge fey magical beast (plant, undead) XP 4,800 Initiative +13 Senses Perception +13; low-light vision Blackroot Aura (Healing, Necrotic) aura 2; each enemy that starts its turn within the aura takes 10 necrotic damage, while an undead ally that starts its turn within the aura regains 10 hit points. HP 368; Bloodied 184 AC 36; Fortitude 34, Reflex 29, Will 32 Vulnerable fire (a blackroot treant takes ongoing 5 fire damage [save ends] when damaged by fire). Saving Throws +2 Speed 6 (forest walk) Action Points 1 m Slam (standard; at-will) ✦ Necrotic Reach 3; +25 vs. AC; 1d12 + 8 damage, and ongoing 5 necrotic damage (save ends). M Entangling Roots (minor; at-will) Reach 4; +23 vs. Reflex; the target is knocked prone and restrained (save ends). If the blackroot treant moves, slides, or is pushed more than 4 squares from the target, the target is no longer restrained. Alignment Unaligned Languages Elven Skills Nature +18, Stealth +16 Str 27 (+17) Dex 14 (+11) Wis 18 (+13) Con 24 (+16) Int 16 (+12) Cha 22 (+15)
4 Eladrin Feydark Gladiators (G) Level 16 Soldier
Medium fey humanoid XP 1,400 each Initiative +17 Senses Perception +9; low-light vision HP 154; Bloodied 77 AC 32; Fortitude 28, Reflex 30, Will 26 Saving Throws +5 against charm effects Speed 6 m Spear (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon +23 vs. AC; 2d8 + 7 damage, and the target is marked until the end of the gladiator’s next turn. M Bloodletting Stab (standard; encounter) ✦ Weapon +23 vs. AC; 3d8 + 7 damage. If the gladiator has combat advantage against the target, the target takes ongoing 10 damage (save ends). Gladiator’s Cage An enemy flanked by the gladiator takes a –5 penalty to attack rolls. Fey Step (move; encounter) ✦ Teleportation The eladrin Feydark gladiator teleports 5 squares. Alignment Unaligned Languages Common, Elven Str 21 (+13) Dex 24 (+15) Wis 13 (+9) Con 18 (+12) Int 15 (+10) Cha 16 (+11) Equipment scale armor, spear
Tactics The fight between the PCs is the heart of this encounter, and the gladiators and treant introduce chaos into the battle. Eladrin Feydark Gladiators: Neutral parties, the gladiators fight for whichever side the crowd is behind. Though fickle, the crowd supports the PCs. They can also fight the PCs after being hit with Virizan’s overwhelm mind power. Blackroot Treant: Driven mad with rage, the treant lashes out indiscriminately. See the sidebar. Virizan: No longer hidden in human form, this exarch of Tiamat can shapechange constantly. He uses mind spike each turn, and overwhelm mind when possible. Virizan chooses his form based on the abilities he needs.
May 20 09
|
D u n g e o n 16 6
43
Throne of the Stone-Skinned King
Virizan, Exarch of Tiamat (S) Level 18 Solo Controller
Medium natural humanoid (shapechanger) XP 10,000 Initiative +14 Senses Perception +18 Shifting Body Track hit points separately for each of Virizan’s forms. He is bloodied once two forms have dropped to 0 hit points, and he is defeated when all forms have dropped to 0 hit points. See also death change. AC 32; Fortitude 29, Reflex 30, Will 31 Resist determined by current shape Saving Throws +5 Speed determined by current shape Action Points 2 C Mindspike (minor 1/round; at-will) ✦ Psychic Close burst 10; targets one creature in burst; +22 vs. Will; 3d6 psychic damage, and ongoing 5 psychic (save ends). R Overwhelm Mind (standard; recharge 5 6 ) ✦ Charm Ranged 20; targets a creature taking ongoing psychic damage; +22 vs. Will; the target is dominated (save ends). Exarch’s Shape (minor 1/round; at-will) ✦ Polymorph Virizan changes to one of the forms below. The form must have more than 0 hit points. Death Change (when current form is reduced to 0 hit points) Virizan uses exarch’s shape, and the new form takes damage equal to half the damage of the effect that reduced the previous form to 0 hit points. Alignment Evil Languages Common, Deep Speech, Draconic, Elven Skills Arcana +20, Bluff +21, Diplomacy +21, History +20, Insight +18, Religion +20 Str 13 (+10) Dex 20 (+14) Wis 19 (+13) Con 18 (+13) Int 22 (+15) Cha 25 (+16) Equipment fine clothing, staff of office
Naga Form Only
Large natural magical beast (reptile, shapechanger) HP 170 Speed 6 m Tail Slap (standard; at-will) Reach 2; +23 vs. AC; 2d8 + 7 damage, and the target is pushed 2 squares. A Exarch’s Thunder (standard; at-will) ✦ Thunder Area burst 10 within 20; +22 vs. Fortitude; 1d10 + 7 thunder damage. Miss: Half damage.
Snake Swarm Form Only
Medium natural magical beast (reptile, shapechanger, swarm) Swarm Attack aura 1; each enemy that starts its turn within the aura takes 7 damage. HP 170 Resist half damage from melee and ranged attacks; Vulnerable 10 against close and area attacks Speed 6; ignores difficult terrain m Swarm of Fangs (standard; at-will) ✦ Poison +23 vs. AC; 1d10 + 6 damage, and ongoing 5 poison (save ends).
Snaketongue Form Only
Medium natural humanoid (shapechanger) HP 170 Resist 10 poison Speed 6 m Serpent Staff (standard; at-will) ✦ Poison +23 vs. AC; 1d10 + 7 poison damage. R Emerald Coils (standard; at-will) ✦ Poison Ranged 20; two targets; +22 vs. Reflex; 2d6 + 7 poison damage, and slide the target 3 squares.
Artillery: When enemies can’t reach him, the exarch chooses naga form to make artillery-style area attacks. He also uses it when he needs to push foes away. Control: To move enemies around (to push them into the pit or within the treant’s reach), Virizan uses snaketongue form. Melee: When he wants to enter melee combat or is surrounded, Virizan chooses his snake swarm form. Defense and Mobility: To cover a lot of ground, or to reduce the damage he’s taking, the exarch changes to venom wisp form to gain flying and insubstantial.
Venom Wisp Form Only
Medium natural magical beast (shapechanger) HP 120 Immune poison; Resist insubstantial Speed 0, fly 8 (altitude limit 3, hover) m Venomous Claws (standard; at-will) ✦ Poison +23 vs. AC; 2d8 + 7 poison damage. C Caustic Breath (standard; at-will) ✦ Poison Virizan shifts his speed and makes an attack at any point during that movement; close blast 3; +22 vs. Fortitude; 1d10 + 7 poison damage. Miss: Half damage.
Tough Fight If the PCs are low on resources, and you don’t want the fight to turn into an endless series of at-will attacks, use the following variant rule: Each time a PC saves against overwhelm mind, that creature regains an encounter attack power.
May 20 09
|
D u n g e o n 16 6
44
Throne of the Stone-Skinned King
The Treant Is Terrain In this battle, the blackroot is treated more like a hazard than a monster. The treant doesn’t give experience points by default, though you can give out full or partial XP if the PCs end up fighting and defeating the treant for some reason. ✦ Cold iron chains bind the treant. It is immobilized and can’t be forced to move by a push, pull, or slide. The chains have AC 4; other defenses 12; break DC 30; hp 120. ✦ The treant treats everyone as an enemy, including the PCs, Virizan, and the gladiators. ✦ It makes opportunity attacks against anyone it can. ✦ On its turn, it uses entangling roots and its slam attack against random targets within reach.
Features of the Area Illumination: Bright light. Pit: The crevasse that surrounds the arena floor is 4 squares (20 feet) deep. A creature that falls in takes 2d10 damage from the fall. The sides require a DC 20 Athletics check to climb. Ledges: The towering walls are honeycombed with cave mouths that serve as viewing areas for a diverse audience of fey creatures. The lowest ledges (shown on the map) are 2 squares (10 feet) higher than the floor of the arena, and the walls around them require a DC 20 Athletics check to climb.
Audience Participation Audience members pack the viewing ledges. They cheer for exciting attacks and might help the PCs if they’ve been fighting well. This could include distracting Virizan, drawing the treant away from PCs, or dropping ropes to help a PC out of the pit.
May 20 09
|
D u n g e o n 16 6
45
Throne of the Stone-Skinned King
Appendix: New Monsters
Cyclops Slaver Tasked with procuring slaves for their fomorian masters, cyclops slavers craft the specialized tools they use to capture their targets. Cyclops Slaver
Level 15 Controller
Large fey humanoid XP 1,200 Initiative +14 Senses Perception +15; truesight HP 149; Bloodied 74 AC 29; Fortitude 27, Reflex 29, Will 25 Speed 7 m Spear (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon Reach 2; +20 vs. AC; 2d10 + 4 damage. r Shuriken (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon Ranged 6/12; +20 vs. AC; 2d6 + 4 damage. R Evil Eye (minor 1/round; at-will) ✦ Sleep Ranged sight; the target takes a –2 penalty to attack rolls against the cyclops slaver until the end of the encounter or until the slaver uses evil eye against a different target. C Barbed Net (standard; requires net; recharge 4 5 6 ) ✦ Weapon Close blast 4; +19 vs. Reflex; 1d10 + 6 damage, and the target is restrained and takes ongoing 10 damage (save ends both). A Sleep Powder Flask (standard; encounter) ✦ Sleep Area burst 1 within 10; +19 vs. Fortitude; the target is slowed (save ends). First Failed Saving Throw: The target is knocked unconscious instead of slowed (save ends). Alignment Unaligned Languages Elven Skills Stealth +19 Str 20 (+12) Dex 24 (+14) Wis 17 (+10) Con 21 (+12) Int 11 (+7) Cha 10 (+7) Equipment leather armor, spear, 3 nets, 10 shuriken, 1 sleep powder flask
Cyclops Slaver Lore
Eladrin
Arcana DC 18: Fomorians seek more slaves to do their work for them. The misshapen giants trust the work of collecting slaves to their cyclops followers. The slave masters create barbed nets and alchemical sleep powder, and set out to distant lands in search of new creatures to enslave.
In the world, eladrin are exceptional. In the Feywild, though, they’re more common, and many serve as rank and file or find odd paths of employment.
Cyclops Slaver Tactics After using barbed net to restrain as many targets as it can, a slaver moves back and lets its allies beat on the enemies. Slavers use evil eye on strikers or other characters with primarily single-target attacks. The slavers’ alchemical sleeping powder is difficult to create and requires rare substances, so they throw their flasks only when desperate. Slaves aren’t much good when they’re dead, so a slaver can throw its barbed net inside-out, and the target doesn’t take ongoing damage.
Eladrin Winter Blade
Level 14 Soldier Minion
Medium fey humanoid, eladrin XP 250 Initiative +15 Senses Perception +8; low-light vision HP 1; a missed attack never damages a minion AC 30; Fortitude 26, Reflex 27, Will 24 Saving Throws +5 against charm effects Speed 6 m Winter Longsword (standard; at-will) ✦ Cold, Weapon +21 vs. AC; 8 cold damage. Fey Step (move; encounter) ✦ Teleportation The eladrin winter blade teleports 5 squares. Alignment Unaligned Languages Elven Str 20 (+12) Dex 23 (+13) Wis 12 (+8) Con 14 (+9) Int 15 (+9) Cha 16 (+10) Equipment leather, longsword
Eladrin Winter Blade Lore Arcana DC 11: The rank and file of armies mustered by the Winter Court, eladrin winter blades don’t have much combat training. Most aren’t soldiers by trade, and they rely on the small amount of longsword training all eladrin receive. They carry blades that develop frost when carried by eladrin from the Winter Court.
Eladrin Winter Blade Tactics When fighting with mostly other eladrin, winter blades follow orders, and they take the brunt of assaults. If they’re grouped with other creatures who are better suited to fighting on the front lines, the eladrin teleport to surprise the enemies behind the first rank.
May 20 09
|
D u n g e o n 16 6
46
Throne of the Stone-Skinned King
Eladrin Feydark Gladiator
Level 16 Soldier
Medium fey humanoid XP 1,400 Initiative +17 Senses Perception +9; low-light vision HP 154; Bloodied 77 AC 32; Fortitude 28, Reflex 30, Will 26 Saving Throws +5 against charm effects Speed 6 m Spear (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon +23 vs. AC; 2d8 + 7 damage, and the target is marked until the end of the gladiator’s next turn. M Bloodletting Stab (standard; encounter) ✦ Weapon +23 vs. AC; 3d8 + 7 damage. If the gladiator has combat advantage against the target, the target takes ongoing 10 damage (save ends). Gladiator’s Cage An enemy flanked by the gladiator takes a –5 penalty to attack rolls. Fey Step (move; encounter) ✦ Teleportation The eladrin Feydark gladiator teleports 5 squares. Alignment Unaligned Languages Common, Elven Str 21 (+13) Dex 24 (+15) Wis 13 (+9) Con 18 (+12) Int 15 (+10) Cha 16 (+11) Equipment scale armor, spear
Eladrin Feydark Gladiator Lore Arcana DC 20: Many fomorian kings love gladiatorial combat, and they seek all sorts of warriors and creatures to fight in their arenas. They especially prize eladrin slaves, because the fomorians love gloating over an eladrin’s pain.
Eladrin Feydark Gladiator Tactics Experts in arena combat, eladrin Feydark gladiators prefer to fight in pairs (gaining the benefit of gladiator’s cage). If they need to move into battle, they do so carefully instead of rushing in, and they save fey step in case they need to escape from the heat of battle.
Firbolg Dusk Harrier
Firbolg Dusk Harrier Lore
In the Wild Hunt, dusk harriers flush out prey and assist other firbolgs as they chase down their quarry.
Arcana DC 11: Among the Wild Hunt, firbolg dusk harriers occupy a support role, and they set up their prey to be slaughtered. They hunt both beasts and people, adapting their skills to both situations. Masters of a fighting style that uses two spears (one with a hooked point), dusk harriers can attack rapidly, and they drag their foes into the middle of the hunting party. Arcana DC 18: Other firbolg hunters judge dusk harriers harshly, and a dusk harrier is shunned if he or she fails to be fully effective in combat. A dusk harrier expelled from a hunting party might become a hermit or run with a pack of wild beasts. A few, however, become enforcers or commanders for fomorians or archfey. Still, they refuse to teach firbolg secrets— especially the dusk harriers’ two-spear fighting style.
Firbolg Dusk Harrier
Level 13 Elite Skirmisher
Large fey humanoid XP 1,600 Initiative +17 Senses Perception +17; low-light vision HP 322; Bloodied 161 Regeneration 5 AC 31; Fortitude 29, Reflex 30, Will 27 Vulnerable necrotic (if Pyradan takes necrotic damage, his regeneration doesn’t function on his next turn) Saving Throws +2; +4 against charm effects, immobilized, restrained, and slowed Speed 8 Action Points 1 m Spear (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon Reach 2; +22 vs. AC; 2d10 + 5 damage. r Javelin (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon Ranged 10/20; +22 vs. AC; 2d8 + 5 damage. M Double Attack (standard; at-will) Pyradan makes two spear attacks, and slides one hit target 1 square. Pyradan then shifts 3 squares. R Moonfire (minor 1/round; recharge 456 ) Ranged 10; +20 vs. Will; until the end of Pyradan’s next turn, the target cannot benefit from invisibility or concealment, and Pyradan gains combat advantage against the target. C Forest of Spears (standard; recharges when first bloodied) ✦ Weapon Close burst 2; targets enemies; +22 vs. AC; 2d10 + 5 damage, and the target is either slowed (save ends) or takes ongoing 10 damage (save ends). On a critical hit, the target takes both effects. Deadly Flanker When an ally flanks with Pyradan, that ally deals 1d8 extra damage with attacks against the flanked creature. Harrier’s Flank (immediate reaction, when an ally moves adjacent to a creature within 2 squares of Pyradan; at-will) Pyradan shifts 2 squares. He must end this shift in a flanking position with the ally who triggered this power. Alignment Unaligned Languages Common, Elven Skills Acrobatics +19, Athletics +20, Intimidate +15, Nature +17 Str 22 (+14) Dex 25 (+15) Wis 18 (+12) Con 17 (+11) Int 13 (+9) Cha 15 (+10) Equipment hide armor, 2 spears, 4 javelins
Firbolg Dusk Harrier Tactics Rarely found without other melee warriors to fight alongside, firbolg dusk harriers use their mobility and harrier’s flank to help their allies. When encountering intelligent prey, they use psychological warfare, taunting their enemies. When fighting an adventuring party or other group, a dusk harrier repeatedly attacks the weakest target if doing so provokes desperate actions from others within the group. For instance, a dusk harrier might repeatedly strike at a wizard if that causes defenders and leaders to disengage from other foes to protect the wizard.
May 20 09
|
D u n g e o n 16 6
47
Throne of the Stone-Skinned King
Portal Hound Part physical flesh and part magical energy, a portal hound can teleport itself and other creatures easily. Portal Hound
Level 16 Controller
Medium fey beast XP 1,400 Initiative +15 Senses Perception +21; low-light vision Portal Aura (Teleportation) aura 2; when an enemy starts its turn within the aura, the portal hound can teleport that creature to a different square within the aura. HP 150; Bloodied 75 AC 30; Fortitude 26, Reflex 30, Will 28 Speed 7, teleport 7 m Bite (standard; at-will) +21 vs. AC; 2d8 + 7 damage. M Dimensional Jaws (standard; at-will) ✦ Teleportation +21 vs. AC; 2d8 + 7 damage, and the portal hound makes a secondary attack against the same target. Secondary Attack: +22 vs. Will; the target is teleported 10 squares. C Portal Walk (move; encounter) ✦ Teleportation The portal hound attacks, then teleports itself to a square within 10 of it; close burst 1; +21 vs. Will; the target is teleported into a square adjacent to the portal hound, after the hound teleports. Alignment Unaligned Languages — Str 16 (+11) Dex 24 (+15) Wis 21 (+13) Con 14 (+10) Int 5 (+5) Cha 19 (+12)
teleportation abilities to trap prey on isolated or dangerous terrain. They then try to push or frighten the prey into dangerous places (into brambles, off precipices, or into rushing water, for example) to weaken or kill it.
Portal Hound Tactics The versatile allotment of teleportation powers portal hounds possess are useful in any situation. When trained by firbolgs, portal hounds use precise teleportation to trap foes. Wild portal hounds, on the other hand, target weak foes (especially bloodied and lightly armored enemies), teleporting their prey and themselves away from other combatants to go one-on-one. Portal hounds are especially skilled at using terrain to their advantage. Include thorns, wildfires, or
other hazardous terrain into which the portal hound can teleport PCs.
Encounter Groups Although portal hounds are often trained by firbolgs, feral members of the breed form packs with fey animals. Level 15 Encounter (XP 6,800) ✦ 1 displacer beast packlord (level 13 elite skirmisher, Monster Manual page 70) ✦ 2 portal hounds (level 16 controller) ✦ 2 thunderfury boars (level 15 brute, Monster Manual page 35)
Portal Hound Lore Arcana DC 13: These hounds of the Feywild seethe with magical power, which causes them to manifest extraordinary abilities of teleportation. Even their jaws warp and shift, allowing them to transport their quarry with a simple bite. Though wild portal hounds are cunning predators, the creatures are even more dangerous when trained by firbolgs, who use them to corner their enemies. Arcana DC 20: Because of their unique abilities, portal hounds live and stalk prey in unusual terrain. In marshy areas, around cliffs, among dangerous vegetation, and near rushing water, portal hounds use their
May 20 09
|
D u n g e o n 16 6
48
Throne of the Stone-Skinned King
Scarred Bulette
Scarred Bulette Lore
Tortured by servants of fomorians, these bulettes have been inculcated into blind obedience to their misshapen masters.
Nature DC 18: Though bulettes live primarily in the world, a few are found living in the Feywild or are taken there to serve as pets or beasts of burden for powerful fey. Fomorians who capture bulettes have them tortured for years, until the beasts’ wills are broken. These obedient bulettes are covered in scars, and their blood has become tainted by magical toxins.
Scarred Bulette
Level 15 Elite Skirmisher
Large natural beast XP 2,400 Initiative +14 Senses Perception +10; darkvision, tremorsense 20 HP 304; Bloodied 152 AC 29; Fortitude 28, Reflex 25, Will 23 Vulnerable charm (a tortured bulette hit by a charm attack is immobilized until the end of its next turn) Saving Throws +2 Speed 6, burrow 6 Action Points 1 m Bite (standard; at-will) Before it bites, the bulette can make a standing long jump (as a free action) without provoking opportunity attacks; +20 vs. AC; 2d8 + 6 damage, or 4d8 + 6 damage against a prone target. M Earth Furrow (move; at-will) The scarred bulette moves its burrow speed just below the surface of the ground, avoiding opportunity attacks as it passes underneath other creatures’ spaces. As it burrows beneath the space of a Medium or smaller creature on the ground, the bulette makes an attack against the creature; +14 vs. Fortitude; the target is knocked prone. C Rising Burst (standard; the bulette must have emerged from the ground after burrowing this turn; at-will) Close burst 2; the bulette sprays rocks and dirt into the air when it rises out of the ground; +19 vs. AC; 1d10 + 6 damage. Spray of Tainted Blood (when an adjacent creature hits the scarred bulette with a melee attack) The attacker takes a –2 penalty to Fortitude until the end of the scarred bulette’s next turn. Habituated to Torture While the scarred bulette is bloodied, it gains a +2 bonus to all defenses and to speed. Alignment Unaligned Languages — Skills Athletics +20, Endurance +19 Str 27 (+15) Dex 21 (+12) Wis 16 (+10) Con 24 (+14) Int 2 (+3) Cha 11 (+7)
About the Author
Logan Bonner has worked on D&D Miniatures™, Forgotten Realms® Player’s Guide, Adventurer’s Vault™, Player’s Handbook® 2, and Arcane Power™ in his time as a designer at Wizards of the Coast. He has designed both familiars and alchemy, encouraging people to be both social and anti-social.
Scarred Bulette Tactics In most ways, a scarred bulette fights like any other bulette, burrowing beneath opponents to knock them over and using rising burst when it emerges from the ground. However, since it doesn’t have second wind, a scarred bulette is more likely to keep fighting after being wounded. After a creature hits the bulette and triggers its spray of tainted blood, the bulette uses earth furrow to move beneath that creature and take advantage of its weakened Fortitude. Scarred bulettes are rarely encountered without masters. It takes great effort and years to turn a bulette into this monstrosity, and no one who possesses a scarred bulette wants its efforts to be wasted.
May 20 09
|
D u n g e o n 16 6
49
Garaitha’s Anvil By Scott Fitzgerald Gray An adventure for 17th-level characters illustrations by William O’Connor, and Empty Room Studio artists–Vince Chui, David Hammond, Jeffrey Koch, Adam Paquette, Wayne Reynolds, James Ryoun, and Frank Wall cartography by Mike Schley TM & © 2009 Wizards of the Coast LLC All rights reserved.
“The path of this war and the destruction of all hangs by the thinnest thread, but by the favor of fate and the gods, a light comes to us in our darkest hour. With the power of the Well of Worlds lost to them, the githyanki’s assault upon the world will shatter like glass, but we must act now if we hope to prevail. There is no time for caution—no time for fear. Struck with all the force that this Coalition can muster against it, Garaitha’s Anvil must fall.”
June 20 09
|
D u n g e o n 16 7
35
Garaitha’s Anvil
“Garaitha’s Anvil” is an adventure for five 17th-level characters. By the end of the adventure, the PCs should have attained 19th level. This adventure is the sequel to “Throne of the Stone-Skinned King” in the Scales of War adventure path, or it can be adapted for use in your own ongoing campaign. In “Garaitha’s Anvil,” the PCs take on the role of a strike team fighting for the Coalition of peoples standing against the githyanki invasion. However, what appears at first to be a routine mission against a remote outpost reveals how close the githyanki are to completely overwhelming the Coalition’s worldly defenses—and shows up a critical weakness in the invaders’ plans. By undertaking the dangerous infiltration of a githyanki planar nexus, the PCs have a chance to take the fight to the invaders on their own turf—and to potentially turn the tide of war.
Background In the aftermath of the previous installment of the adventure path (“Throne of the Stone-Skinned King”), the PCs discovered that Tiamat was secretly behind the githyanki invasion, and that the githyanki controlled a number of outposts previously unknown to the Coalition. One of those outposts becomes the starting point of this adventure when the Coalition receives word of githyanki troops seen in a remote mountain pass. However, when the PCs investigate, they find not a military outpost but an ancient temple built around an ancient portal called the World Gate. At the fane of Chaniir, they discover that a schism is growing within the githyanki. The majority forces loyal to Emperor Zetch’r’r are under attack by insurgents who oppose the githyanki’s invasion of the world, and who know that Tiamat’s dark goals underlie Zetch’r’r’s ambition.
The Quests In “Garaitha’s Anvil,” the PCs take on a strike team role against three different githyanki targets. In the final battle, while the heroes of the Coalition lead a full assault against a planar shipyard, the PCs must capture a githyanki admiral who holds the key to turning the tide of war. Each section of the adventure offers the characters a chance to earn quest XP. Minor Quest—Free the Faithful of Chanhiir In a remote githyanki temple known as the Fane of Chanhiir, the PCs discover a faction of githyanki opposed to the invasion and the aspirations of the Emperor Zetch’r’r. By taking out the Zetch’r’r loyalists that have invaded the temple and slaughtered the faithful of Chanhiir, the PCs gain access to the World Portal, which leads to a secret githyanki site known as the Well of Worlds. Reward: 1,600 XP.
The githyanki’s mastery of planar travel and teleportation grants them a deadly edge in their invasion of the world, but the full extent of their planar power remains as yet unknown to the Coalition or its heroes. Harnessing power drawn off from the world, the Feywild, and the Shadowfell, the githyanki portal network is powered by a planar nexus called the Well of Worlds. Within the Well, a teleportation circle known as the Sovereign Gate can teleport creatures to any location in the world or the planes, with or without a permanent teleportation circle at their destination.
Minor Quest—Capture the Well of Worlds Arcane secrets gained in Chanhiir give the PCs access to the githyanki planar nexus known as the Well of Worlds. By defeating its guardians and aiding the enslaved eldritch giant who watches over the site, the PCs discover that the githyanki seek to extend the power of the Well of Worlds—granting them limitless access to the world by way of the massive portal network through which the invasion is being waged. Reward: 2,000 XP. Major Quest—Capture Admiral Kada’ne and Garaitha’s Anvil To control the Well of Worlds, the PCs need to obtain one of three eldritch keys held by the highest githyanki leadership. One such leader—Admiral Kada’ne—is currently at the githyanki planar shipyard known as Garaitha’s Anvil. As the heroes of the Coalition launch a full assault against the site, the PCs attempt to capture Kada’ne and give the Coalition the power to shut down the githyanki invasion. Reward: 12,000 XP.
An ultimately powerful version of a true portal (as created by the ritual of the same name), the Well of Worlds is the site from which elite githyanki scouts and strike teams launch their incursions into the world, and it accounts to a large degree for the githyanki’s previous success in the invasion. However, Zetch’r’r has an even bolder plan in hand. With eldritch craft bestowed by Tiamat and stolen from the giants, the githyanki seek to have the power of the Sovereign Gate extended throughout their entire portal network. From anywhere in their empire, the githyanki can send troops by the June 20 09
|
D u n g e o n 16 7
36
Garaitha’s Anvil
thousands to any location in the world. As their assaults bypass whatever defenses the Coalition can mount, the destruction promises to be absolute. If the githyanki succeed in their plans, no force in the mortal realm can stand against them.
Adventure Synopsis The invasion of the world is in full swing, but the PCs’ actions in previous adventures have earned the Coalition critical information regarding the githyanki, their plans, and their allies. As this adventure begins, the Coalition has received word of githyanki troops seen in a remote mountain pass north of Elsir Vale— close to one of the githyanki outposts whose existence was only learned of in the course of “Throne of the Stone-Skinned King.” The PCs (along with the Freeriders) investigate, fearful that this outpost might be the vanguard of a larger assault. Instead, however, the heroes discover a hidden githyanki temple called the Fane of Chanhiir—a monastery whose faithful have rejected the leadership of Zetch’r’r, and who have paid a terrible price for their refusal to bend to the emperor’s will. After routing the invading githyanki and their fomorian servants, the PCs treat with the faithful of Chanhiir, uncovering more of the githyanki’s secrets. From the insurgents, the characters hear more of Tiamat’s role in the githyanki invasion— and of plots that extend to the ancient war between Tiamat and Bahamut. Additionally, the PCs discover that Chanhiir’s central hall is built around a unique portal that feeds planar energy to a githyanki site called the Well of Worlds. The Well of Worlds is a planar nexus warded by powerful magic that normally allows only githyanki to enter it. However, with the aid and knowledge
of their Nefelus allies—particularly the deva mage Bejam—the PCs can adopt a powerful eldritch sigil seen on the githyanki’s fomorian allies. The whitefire mark grants the party access to the Well of Worlds, where they undertake a stealth strike-team mission to investigate and neutralize the site. By freeing the eldritch giant Haryssus—an unwilling servant of the githyanki whose knowledge of planar magic is unsurpassed—the PCs discover that the power of the Well of Worlds fuels the vast network of githyanki portals through which the invasion of the world is being waged. At the center of that network is the Sovereign Gate—a permanent true portal that can send creatures to any location in the Astral Sea, the world, or the planes. However, more devastating to the Coalition are Zetch’r’r’s plans to extend the capability of the Sovereign Gate throughout the entire githyanki portal network. If successful, the githyanki can send troops by the thousands to any location in the world, and the Coalition will be powerless to stop them. Control of the Well of Worlds is maintained by a set of eldritch keys held by the highest-ranking githyanki war leaders. The githyanki have no fear of these keys falling into the wrong hands, knowing that they can be used only by full-blooded githyanki who themselves have been attuned to the keys with unique rituals. However, with the aid and knowledge of Haryssus, Bejam of Nefelus believes that he can reconfigure a key, potentially giving the Coalition the ability to control the githyanki portal network. One of the keys is held by Admiral Kada’ne, leader of the githyanki’s airship and astral-craft navy. From information gleaned from the rout of the Well of Worlds, the PCs know Kada’ne’s current location: the githyanki shipyards known as Garaitha’s Anvil. One of Zetch’r’r’s most important military sites, the shipyard
is a planar mote within which the githyanki and their giant servants craft and repair airships and astral craft in preparation for the final assault on the world. The PCs determine the location of Kada’ne’s flagship, the astral man-of-war Cev’ren, but time is of the essence. If the githyanki become aware that the Well of Worlds has been taken, they will launch a counteroffensive that will overwhelm the Coalition’s forces. However, when a Coalition war council refuses to authorize the decisive strike against Garaitha’s Anvil, it is left to the PCs to take charge. The Coalition must capture Kada’ne and deliver a knockout punch against Garaitha’s Anvil all at once. Under the PCs’ leadership, the forces of the Coalition are arrayed in the form of the Hundred—five score of the greatest heroes of the mortal world assembled at the Fane of Chanhiir, and set to undertake a desperate assault at the heart of the githyanki war machine. The assault is launched—a hundred heroes throwing themselves against a githyanki force ten times their number. However, the PCs have an even more important mission—breaking into one of the shipyard’s many repair docks where Kada’ne’s flagship Cev’ren is moored. The PCs fight their way through the guards and wards of the dock before cutting their way through Kada’ne’s defenders. However, when the cowardly admiral takes to the air in Cev’ren, the party must follow in a commandeered githyanki strike ship. In the sky above the shipyard, an immense astral gate flares—the portal through which githyanki ships are launched against the world. Against that storm of white light, a pitched ship-to-ship battle ensues, and the PCs can pursue Cev’ren above the hundred fighting for control of the shipyard below. In the end, both ships lock together, out of control and spinning toward the astral gate as the PCs and Kada’ne’s forces face off in a final showdown. June 20 09
|
D u n g e o n 16 7
37
Garaitha’s Anvil
Setting “Garaitha’s Anvil” is written in three parts, each tied to a specific location. In Part One, the PCs and the Freeriders infiltrate the remote githyanki temple known as the Fane of Chanhiir, discovering the secret portal that grants them access to the Well of Worlds. Part Two of the adventure is an assault against the Well of Worlds—a planar nexus that generates the power driving the githyanki’s portal network in the world and the Astral Sea. In Part Three, the PCs lead the assault against the shipyard of Garaitha’s Anvil—a planar site from which the githyanki fleets are built and launched. Its capture—and that of the githyanki leader Admiral Kada’ne—promises to turn the tide of war.
Preparing for Adventure “Garaitha’s Anvil” involves a number of important revelations regarding the unfolding plot of the Scales of War adventure path. Even as they take the fight to the githyanki, the PCs face off against githyankiallied giants and meet a faction of githyanki rebels who have a significant part to play in upcoming adventures. Additionally, this adventure provides the opportunity for the PCs to take an active role in establishing the goals of the sometimes-fractious Coalition. Although the members of this body are united in their desire to defend the world from the githyanki invasion, infighting and uncertainty runs rampant among its members. As a result, the Coalition often opts for careful measures instead of decisive action.
The adventure can begin in the downtime immediately after the PCs’ previous adventure. Go to “Part One: The Fane of Chanhiir” (page 39) when you are ready to begin.
What You Need to Play This adventure contains everything you need to play, including background information, setup, encounters, and maps. You might wish to review any appropriate Dungeons & Dragons® 4th Edition rules before play begins. You need to read only the opening sections of the adventure—the introduction and encounters for the Fane of Chanhiir—to begin play. The PCs’ incursion into the remote githyanki temple is a four-encounter arc perfect for a single session’s play. You can then familiarize yourself with the full importance of the fane and its value to the Coalition, and then with the information the PCs uncover as they interact with the githyanki priest Talanee and her followers.
Using Tactical Encounters Each encounter includes several common elements, as described below.
Encounter Level Each tactical encounter assumes a group of five player characters. An encounter of average difficulty is one where the encounter level is equal to the level of the party. Encounters that are 1 or 2 levels lower than the party are easy encounters, while encounters that are 2 or more levels higher than the party are difficult encounters. For overcoming an encounter, a group earns the XP value noted beside the encounter level. This amount should be divided by the number of group members, with an equal amount awarded to each character.
Setup This section of a tactical encounter provides you with the basic parameters of the encounter. It gives you a key to the monsters in the encounter so you can locate them on the tactical map, then provides context or background information. The map of each encounter area indicates where the monsters are located when the encounter begins. The setup section also describes what monsters are doing and how they react when the PCs arrive. Some encounters include monsters that are hidden or that do not appear until later in combat. Do not place those monsters on the map unless at least one PC has succeeded on the Perception check to notice them, or when they enter combat.
Read-Aloud Text Read-aloud text provides information about what the characters can see and are aware of. You do not have to read it word for word. Especially where read-aloud text is provided in a question-and-answer format, feel free to paraphrase and use your own words when describing the information presented. Use readaloud text wisely. It is written for the most common approach to a particular situation, but the PCs’ actions might require you to alter the information in any number of ways.
Monster Statistics Encounters include statistics blocks for each monster type present in the encounter. If more than one monster of a particular kind is present, the statistics block indicates how many creatures can be found.
June 20 09
|
D u n g e o n 16 7
38
Garaitha’s Anvil
What is an Adventure Path? An adventure path is a connected series of adventures that comprises an entire D&D® campaign, from the heroes’ humble beginnings at 1st level to their epic triumphs at the pinnacle of level 30. These adventures cover all three tiers of play: heroic, paragon, and epic. Each tier is covered by roughly six adventures, meaning that the entire adventure path consist of eighteen adventures. Each adventure covers between one and three levels, but you can also have the PCs undertake side quests to help supplement XP. This assures that the PCs are the correct level to tackle each adventure. “Garaitha’s Anvil” is the penultimate adventure in the paragon tier, and it continues to bring the PCs firmly into a leadership role in the Coalition fighting the githyanki invasion. Play up the degree to which the members of the Coalition—including the deva Amyria and the Freeriders—are now looking to the PCs for leadership, especially in the section between Part Two and Part Three of the adventure. In the face of uncertainty and bickering by the Coalition, the PCs must step up and demonstrate the bold leadership necessary to turn the tide of war. This adventure path is meant to be a complete D&D campaign. That means we’re making some assumptions about the history and mythology of the world as the adventures progress, such as Queen Vlaakith’s death (an event we’ve adopted from the adventure “The Lich Queen’s Beloved” in Dungeon® 100). As the adventure path moves into the epic tier, you can look forward to the appearance of some classic heroes and villains from D&D history, as well as great ideas from past issues of Dungeon and other sources.
Adapting the Adventure “Garaitha’s Anvil” is designed with five PCs in mind. You can adapt the adventure for larger groups easily by adding additional treasure parcels and monsters using the guidelines presented in the Dungeon Master’s Guide®. When adapting the scenario for larger groups, bear in mind that the three sections of the adventure are built around specific conflicts. Adding more githyanki or their giant allies makes better sense in most encounters than randomly dropping in new monsters of different types. In encounters with only one or two creatures, simply increase the level of those creatures using the guidelines on page 174 of the Dungeon Master’s Guide. This adventure is designed for characters starting at 17th level, but a larger group of lower-level characters should have no problem with the challenges herein. However, the nature of the PCs’ strike-team mission limits the party’s opportunities to take an extended rest—especially in the final stage of the adventure: the assault on Garaitha’s Anvil. Lower-level parties should definitely take advantage of the magic of the pool in Encounter W2 (page 72). In addition, you can give the PCs additional potions created from the waters of the pool in W2, placing them on the githyanki astraan and the githyanki reavers in encounter G1. Alternatively, considering adding a short side trek before this adventure or between Part One and Part Two so that the PCs will have attained 18th level before taking on Part Three—the final assault against Garaitha’s Anvil. If the PC party consists of fewer than five characters, you can adjust the level of the monsters and encounters accordingly. Alternatively, have an NPC ally join the PCs on their initial mission and the subsequent parts of the adventure.
Tactics This entry describes special actions the monsters take to defeat the adventurers. Sometimes this means the monsters take advantage of special features of the area or make use of special powers or equipment.
Map Each encounter includes a map keyed with the initial locations of each monster. The map also indicates the location of any special features of the area.
Features of the Area This section describes special features noted on the map. If the location has items or areas of interest with which the characters can interact, those features are described here. Look here to see if a door is out of the ordinary, if an altar has a secret compartment, and the like.
Part One: The Fane of Chanhiir The githyanki invasion has seen the PCs undertake a series of increasingly important missions, taking the fight to the invaders even as they try to uncover the secret plots fueling the ambition of the githyanki Emperor Zetch’r’r. Githyanki forces are sweeping across the world, and the situation grows more desperate each day. In the course of their adventures in “Throne of the Stone-Skinned King,” the PCs learned of a number of heretofore unknown githyanki outposts within Coalition lands. During their downtime in the aftermath of the previous adventure, activity at one of these sites becomes the catalyst for a new mission.
June 20 09
|
D u n g e o n 16 7
39
Garaitha’s Anvil
Treasure As with previous installments of the Scales of War campaign, “Garaitha’s Anvil” makes use of the parcel system of treasure rewards as described in the Dungeon Master’s Guide. The characters should accumulate twenty treasure parcels by the end of the adventure. You can supply these treasures in whatever way you wish, but the following sidebar presents the most likely encounters to bear treasure. During your preparation, assign parcels from those that follow to the encounters in the spaces provided. Use the players’ wish lists to come up with magic items for the first eight parcels. Consider saving at least one or two of the highest-level magic items for the end of the adventure, which can represent the gear the PCs capture with Admiral Kada’ne. Parcel A: ____________________, C1 (carried by the githyanki reavers). Parcel B: __________________, C2 (in the room behind the secret door). Parcel C: _____________________, C3 (carried by the fomorians). Parcel D: _____________________, C3 (carried by the fomorians). Parcel E: ______________________, C4 (carried by the githyanki warmongers and githyanki reavers). Parcel F: _____________________, C4 (carried by the githyanki warmongers and githyanki reavers). Parcel G: _____________________, W2 (carried by the githyanki strike team).
Parcel H: __________________, W2 (carried by the githyanki strike team). Parcel I: ___________________, W3 (carried by the eldritch giants). Parcel J: ___________________, W3 (carried by the eldritch giants). Parcel K: __________________, G2 (carried by the eldritch giants) Parcel L: ___________________, G3 (carried by the fire giant forgecallers). Parcel M: ___________________, G5 (carried by the githyanki gish warmasters). Parcel N: ___________________, G8 (stored on board Iliyoru or Cev’ren). Parcel O: __________________, G8 (stored on board Iliyoru or Cev’ren). Parcel P: __________________, G8 (carried by Admiral Kada’ne). Parcel Q: __________________, G8 (carried by Admiral Kada’ne). Based on the guidelines in the Dungeon Master’s Guide, the following parcels can go in the areas above. Consult the wish lists your players gave you for the first eight parcels, making the items appear to be of githyanki manufacture where appropriate. Parcel 1: Magic item, level 18. Parcel 2: Magic item, level 19. Parcel 3: Magic item, level 19. Parcel 4: Magic item, level 20.
Parcel 5: Magic item, level 20. Parcel 6: Magic item, level 21. Parcel 7: Magic item, level 21. Parcel 8: Magic item, level 22. Parcel 9: 360 pp. Parcel 10: Four mithral amulets (7,500 gp each) and three 1,000 gp gems. Parcel 11: 220 pp. Parcel 12: Two astral diamonds and two potions of vitality. Parcel 13: 1,500 gp, one githyanki icon (7,500 gp), and two potions of vitality. Parcel 14: Four githyanki ceremonial daggers (1,500 gp each). Parcel 15: 480 pp. Parcel 16: 2,000 gp, two gem-studded platinum statuettes (15,000 gp each), and two 5,000 gp gems. Parcel 17: 290 pp. Parcel 18: 3,500 gp, a crystal globe set with adamantine filigree (15,000 gp), a jeweled mithral-mesh dagger scabbard (7,500 gp), and three potions of vitality. Parcel 19: Two crystal and mithral cameos bearing the likeness of Emperor Zetch’r’r (7,500 gp each). Parcel 20: One 5,000 gp gem, and two potions of vitality.
June 20 09
|
D u n g e o n 16 7
40
Garaitha’s Anvil
Trouble in the Mountains While resting up or taking care of personal business, the PCs receive a message from Amyria or another member of the Coalition they have close ties to. The PCs are most likely in the city of Sayre at the time, but any location in Coalition lands will do. The message reads as follows: “Word of githyanki activity comes in from across all frontiers, but we have had one report that demands quick investigation. The watchtower at Thiradith marks the northernmost frontier of our settled lands and is within striking distance of one of the outposts we learned of from your work in the fomorian Cachlain’s court. Three days ago, riders there reported seeing githyanki along the mountain passes. Their numbers were small and they’ve shown no sign of wanting to engage the outpost, but that has created even more worry in the watch commander. As is the case in every corner of the frontier, rumors of ancient ruins in the mountains have him convinced that the githyanki seek some weapon or relic to give them even more advantage in this war. “I do not share his fear, but githyanki scouts in the northlands are reason enough for worry. There are precious few resources for us to lose in those wild lands, but this unknown outpost might too easily become a staging ground for the githyanki’s next assault. The guards at Thiradith are raw recruits and veterans whose injuries keep them from the front lines. They can bolster the barricades well enough, but they are ill-suited to hunting githyanki in hostile terrain. As such, they have sent a plea for aid to all the agents of the Coalition. It might well be that you meet up with others when you get there, so share the assignment as you see fit. We must find out what kind of presence the githyanki have in the northlands.”
The PCs can finish up whatever business they have at their present location before heading north. The party is instructed to send word by way of Sending when they have discovered (and hopefully thwarted) the githyanki’s plots. (The message came with ritual scrolls if none of the PCs has mastered Sending.)
Thiradith The watchtower of Thiradith is a rebuilt ruin of Nerath, and it has watched over the empty northern frontier for a generation. The three-day journey to Thiradith is uneventful. These remote badlands are uninhabited and far removed from the front lines of the invasion. Wolves and crows are the only company on the road, but these give you a wide berth as you make your way north. Just before sunset, you see the watchtower in the distance. An upthrust embankment of sheer stone wall atop a white bluff, the site commands a sweeping view of the rocky scrubland that spreads to all sides. A gate and drawbridge allow access across a steep-sided ravine that protects the site on all sides. Sun-faded flags fly high above the ramparts, and the bridge is already down as you approach. The watchtower is a small outpost with a permanent population of forty human and half-elf members of the border militia. Birkeni, a veteran half-elf fighter, is captain here. He meets the PCs at the gate, making no effort to hide his relief at seeing them. There are no stores or services here, but Birkeni offers free use of the outpost’s amenities (weaponsmith, armorer, and so on) and semiprivate accommodation in the barracks hall.
However, upon their arrival in the hall, the characters discover that they are not the first to respond to the watchtower’s summons. Megan Swiftblade and the Freeriders are already here, having arrived from a recent mission to the west that morning. Though Megan has lost none of the pride she has demonstrated in her previous meetings with the PCs (in “Siege of Bordrin’s Watch,” “The Temple Between,” and “Beyond the Mottled Tower”), her dedication to the Coalition has tempered that pride with purpose. However, the party’s reaction to the presence of the Freeriders (and the NPCs’ reaction to the PCs) likely depends on what transpired between both groups in their previous meetings. Roleplay the interaction as you see fit, but if things threaten to turn ugly, Birkeni pulls rank to remind all the characters that there are more pressing matters at hand.
Old Friends? This section of the adventure assumes that the PCs and the Freeriders have at least a neutral attitude toward each other. However, this might not be the case insofar as events played out in your own campaign. Depending on the relationship between the two groups, paraphrase or rework the read-aloud text and the setup to the adventure as necessary. The Freeriders need to be part of the assault on the temple with the PCs. However, in a worst-case scenario in which both groups are openly antagonistic toward each other, have them journey separately to the site. Then let the PCs find only the one entrance, not knowing that the Freeriders are also in the temple until they meet up again in Encounter C4.
June 20 09
|
D u n g e o n 16 7
41
Garaitha’s Anvil
You and the Freeriders are honored guests at that night’s mess, but the mood is more somber than celebratory. Over a meal of military rations, heavy bread, and ale, Birkeni speaks. “I told your compatriots this morning all that I can report beyond what was sent in our missive. A week ago, one of our patrols found three dead githyanki within a hundred strides of each other on one of the foothill tracks. The mudskins had been in some sort of fight by the look of them, but as the scouts came back to report, they were shadowed by a half-dozen more githyanki, very much alive. Followed them to within sight of the watchtower, then fell back into the hills again.” This is the first githyanki sighting in this area. In the intervening week, the watchtower has seen no further sign of the githyanki, though no patrol has ventured into the foothills again for fear of ambush. Birkeni has no idea what killed the githyanki that the first patrol found, and no bandits or monsters are in the region. The PCs might immediately speculate that these were two groups of githyanki fighting each other, but this only feeds the captain’s belief that the githyanki seek some mythical relic hidden within the mountains. Birkeni is dead wrong as regards the githyanki’s motivation for being here—but in the end, the PCs can discover that the hidden outpost holds an even greater treasure. Unless the PCs have business to conduct in the fortress or with the Freeriders, Birkeni hopes they intend to set out the next morning.
a marker Birkeni spoke of—a great arch of rust-colored stone, beyond which the wall of the mountain begins to rise. It doesn’t take long to locate the site where the githyanki were found—three patches of blood-stained rock on the trail winding roughly up. Of the bodies, there is no sign. The githyanki that fell here were the faithful of Chanhiir, fleeing from the temple when they were cut down by a force of invading githyanki. A DC 25 Perception check made to search the area shows signs that the bodies were picked up and moved. The githyanki’s week-old tracks are undetectable in the rubble and scree of the foothills, but finding the track leading to the temple takes only a DC 20 Perception check or a few hours’ searching. By Birkeni’s description, you are already well past any of the watchtower’s patrol routes when you happen across a faint trail cut into the rocky ground. A set of rough steps have been carved into a wall of crumbling shale, leading to a narrow track twisting off into the shadows of the adjacent cliffs. Ahead, a bluff of black stone rises like a broad spike in the cloudy gloom.
Approaching the Fane
Into the Hills
Let the PCs take whatever precautions they wish, but they and the Freeriders are in no danger of being spotted as they approach. Flush with recent victories in their invasion and confident in the security of the fane’s remote location, the invading githyanki have established a watch only at the two entrances to the temple.
The patrol trail from the watchtower to the foothills is easily followed, winding through thin stands of jack pine and patches of scrub grass that slowly disappear as the rocky ground begins to climb. The day is overcast as you reach
If the githyanki who dwell at this remote location are vanguard scouts, they show very little aptitude for it. With no patrols in sight, you have clear run of the trails that wrap
around the black stone bluff on both sides, easily spotting two caverns that might be entrances into some sort of complex within. These lie on opposite sides of the bluff, out of sight and sound of each other. However, the echoes of the surrounding cliffs give you warning of the guards stationed at both locations even before you see them—githyanki voices, arguing and laughing in Deep Speech. Whatever the origin of this force, its members seem to have no interest in hiding their presence here. With no patrols around the area of the fane, the PCs and the Freeriders can easily split up to approach both entrances separately, preventing flight or a potential ambush from behind if the entire group goes in the same entrance. Give the players a chance to devise this divide-and-conquer strategy, but Megan Swiftblade can suggest it if no one else does. The Freeriders salute as you take your leave of each other, heading along the low track that will bring you separately within sight of both entrances. The approach to the fane is detailed in Encounter C1 on page 59.
Fane of Chanhiir Encounters The PCs’ infiltration of the temple is a quick-strike assault undertaken in conjunction with the Freeriders, with both groups fighting their way in from opposite entrances before meeting in the middle. Areas that are not part of tactical encounters (including the areas in the Freeriders’ side of the incursion) have been left for your development. Use the following table to generate area contents or ideas of your own.
June 20 09
|
D u n g e o n 16 7
42
Garaitha’s Anvil
1d6 Details of the Fane 1 Former living quarters, ransacked (bedrolls, prayer mats, robes) 2 Mess hall (tables, benches, trenchers, mugs) 3 Stores (foodstuffs, water barrels, cloth, rope, wool, whetstones) 4 Prayer room, ransacked (benches, prayer mats, icons or symbols of Queen Vlaakith) 5 Library, ransacked (githyanki religious texts and histories) 6 Formerly empty, now filled with the rotting bodies of the faithful of Chanhiir (ninety corpses in total)
C2: Hall of Heroes
C3: Training Ground
This mausoleum has been the resting place of the honored dead of Chanhiir for generations. When they invaded, Zetch’r’r’s githyanki pulled down a dozen statues that once lined the walls here. However, in doing so, they have drawn down the wrath of vengeful spirits that now haunt this place. The secret room is empty, but it can be used as the location for any treasure placed here (see page 40). Tactical Encounter: C2. The Watch of the Dead (page 61).
This chamber was once a training ground for the githyanki of the temple. The only survivors of the assault on Chanhiir—ten ranking githyanki leaders and priests—are due to be taken to the githyanki capital of Tu’narath for trial and execution. However, the invaders cannot leave until the Chanhiiri reveal how to reverse the wards locking down the World Gate in area C4.
Unless the PCs tarry too long outside the encounter areas (including any attempt to take an extended rest), no random encounters occur in the fane. If the PCs spend more than 1 hour in any area, a patrol consisting of a githyanki mindlasher and three githyanki warmongers finds them. Use the statistics blocks from Encounter C2.
C1: Cavern Entrance The twisting mountain paths that wind around the bluff lead to the temple’s two cavern entrances. The Fane of Chanhiir has no north-south orientation given so that the map has no bearing on the PCs’ choice of which entrance to take. Whichever entrance the party chooses is automatically the one at lower right on the map, with the Freeriders taking the opposite entrance. Tactical Encounter: C1. Githyanki Watch (page 59).
June 20 09
|
D u n g e o n 16 7
43
Garaitha’s Anvil
The Chanhiiri’s warders are two fomorians whose presence here reflects the alliances the PCs learned of in “Throne of the Stone-Skinned King.” In the aftermath of this encounter, the PCs learn some of the secrets of the fane and hear of factions within the githyanki empire fighting against Zetch’r’r’s rule. Tactical Encounter: C3. Prisoners of Chanhiir (page 63).
C4: Portal Hall The center of the temple is a terraced chamber built around the World Gate—a unique teleportation circle that funnels planar energy to the Well of Worlds. As the PCs meet the Freeriders fighting their way in from the other side, both groups fight alongside the Chanhiiri in a climactic showdown that routs the githyanki invaders. Afterward, the PCs learn more about the Well of Worlds as they hear hints of the plots underlying the githyanki invasion—plots that expand on the knowledge of Tiamat’s involvement in the events of the adventure path, and that hint at an epic struggle between Tiamat and Bahamut. Tactical Encounter: C4. Portal Hall (page 66).
Enemies and Allies Two groups of githyanki are presently in the temple—the faithful of Chanhiir, the last of which are prisoners in area C2; and the invading forces loyal to Emperor Zetch’r’r that attacked the fane and slaughtered the Chanhiiri that dwelt here. The invaders’ motivations are explained after the PCs have successfully treated with the priests that are all that remain of Chanhiir’s faithful. See “Secrets of the Fane” for more information.
The githyanki and fomorians who have occupied the temple speak Deep Speech among themselves and to their prisoners, and there are several points at which the PCs can overhear their conversations. If none of the party know Deep Speech, paraphrase those sections of read-aloud text as necessary, then make sure that the Freeriders or the githyanki priest Talanee fill in the information the PCs miss. Much of any treasure you place in these encounters is the wealth of the Chanhiiri, captured by the invading githyanki. However, Talanee and her followers are set to abandon the fane, and they are content to let the PCs keep their former riches. See “The Chanhiiri’s Fate,” page 45, for more information.
Secrets of the Fane With the githyanki invaders routed, the Fane of Chanhiir is safe from further incursion. However, the discovery of this secret site and the knowledge of its priests prove to be an unexpected boon in the war against the githyanki. The PCs might investigate the strange sigils on the wrists of the fomorians in area C3, or they might leave that investigation to Bejam and the mages of the Coalition in the next section. If they mention the marks to the Freeriders, they are told that the dead on the other side of the fane include three more fomorians, all bearing the same sigil. See “The Whitefire Mark” sidebar (page 45) for more information. In the aftermath of the previous encounter, the PCs can take the opportunity to further explore the fane and to learn more of the history and purpose of this site from Talanee and her followers.
(If the Chanhiiri did not survive a confrontation with the party in Encounter C3, or if the PCs allowed them to march alone to their deaths in Encounter C4, the information in this section can be uncovered by a careful search of the portal hall and the prayer chambers and libraries scattered about the temple; see “Details of the Fane” on page 43. If you wish to impress upon the players the usefulness of not killing potential allies, make them undertake an improvised skill challenge or face an elite trap or hazard before gaining all the information presented here.) Talanee is grateful to both the PCs and the Free riders for their aid in defending the fane. After filling the PCs in on any information they missed in Encounter C3, she provides more information on the fane and the World Gate. What was behind the fomorians’ threats? What did the invaders need from you? “The Chanhiiri’s task is to keep watch over the World Gate for the githyanki, but in making our opposition known to the plots of the false emperor Zetch’r’r, we were first shunned, then assaulted. However, our craft allowed us to seal the gate in ways that Zetch’r’r’s thralls could not overcome.” What is the World Gate? “The World Gates are the prime portals through which the githyanki first mastered the connections between planes. This World Gate is set within the mortal realm, with others in the Feywild and the Shadowfell. More distant gates in nameless planes are whispered of, but they are beyond my knowledge.”
June 20 09
|
D u n g e o n 16 7
44
Garaitha’s Anvil
What are the World Gates? How are they different from other permanent teleportation circles? “The World Gate functions as a portal in the same manner as any teleportation circle. However, the ancient magic of the World Gates sees them also act as anchors that connect their realms to the Astral Sea. They are siphons for planar energy, feeding it back to the Well of Worlds.” What is the Well of Worlds? What is its importance to the githyanki invasion? “The Well of Worlds is a site of powerful planar magic, built by Chanhiir in the lost age of our race and open only to those of githyanki blood. It is a planar mote existing in no world—fueled by the energy of the Astral Sea but not set within it. The Well of Worlds is the center of the portal network that is the lifeblood of the githyanki empire. It is the site through which elite githyanki strike teams travel the planes, including the force charged with seizing the fane. It is a place that touches all other places—all planes of existence, all sites in those planes. From the Well of Worlds, the githyanki have access to anywhere in all of creation.” In game terms, the Well of Worlds is a permanent and freely used true portal, as created by the ritual of the same name. See “The Sovereign Gate” sidebar, page 51, for more information.
The Chanhiiri’s Fate With the invaders overthrown, the surviving faithful of Chanhiir attend to their dead. With the bodies badly decomposed and too numerous to easily move, the githyanki consecrate the empty chambers into which the invaders piled the corpses, then seal those areas up behind walls of loose rock. (The PCs’ assistance in this effort is welcomed but not asked for.)
The Whitefire Mark The whitefire mark is a mystical sigil implanted only in the most trusted servants of the githyanki—those granted access to the Well of Worlds. The sigils are a permanent magical brand that burns with a white flame powered by the bearer’s own life force. A mark goes black when its possessor dies, but its magic remains potent for up to 24 hours. (This is what allows Bejam to recreate the whitefire mark for the PCs; see the next section.) A creature raised from the dead within that time retains its mark. Talanee knows what the whitefire marks are and how they function. PCs who have established an alliance with the Chanhiiri are told the above information in this part of the adventure. For others, a DC 20 Arcana check made on an active mark or the mark of a creature dead less than 24 hours identifies the sigil as an arcane token allowing a creature to make use of a powerful magic relic or effect that would otherwise be warded against it. A DC 25 Arcana check reveals the full nature of a whitefire mark. Alternatively, Bejam can reveal the information in the next section.
This extended burial takes a day. When it is done (but only after the PCs have gleaned all possible information from Talanee), the githyanki announce their intention to leave the fane. “This holy place has lost its sanctity, debased as it is by the blood of Zetch’r’r’s traitors. Our fate lies elsewhere now.” Though the PCs do not know it, Talanee and her followers have a larger part to play in the adventure path. The surviving Chanhiiri are loyalists to the lich Queen Vlaakith, who returns in the next
installment. However, this information is not something that Talanee shares with the PCs under any circumstances. The Chanhiiri plan to leave this place by way of the World Gate in area C4. Doing so means shutting down the force field, allowing the PCs to make use of the portal but leaving the fane vulnerable to another githyanki incursion. The need to defend the fane and to avoid attracting the githyanki’s attention underlies the next two sections of the adventure. Before she and her followers depart (or in response to specific questions if the PCs have them), Talanee shares important information regarding a discovery made in the previous installment of the adventure path—the fact that Tiamat is behind the githyanki invasion of the world. “Zetch’r’r is a dog leading dogs, but those who lash themselves to his leash see not the chains he wears. The false emperor talks of rebuilding the glory of the githyanki, but he is a pawn of forces he has not the mind to understand or the will to stand against. “In the long eons since the gods and primordials fought for control of all creation, Bahamut and Tiamat have undergone a never-ending sibling war. Driven apart yet drawn constantly together by their dichotomous natures, the two gods fight endless battles, both face to face and through their proxies in all the many worlds. Among all races, long ages of peace follow epochs of tyranny as each deity ekes out a temporary victory over the other, but in the end, always, the battle continues. Until now. “In this age, a new war looms between these two ancient adversaries. On both sides, armies amass across worlds in preparation for brutal conflict, but Tiamat means to see that this battle with Bahamut is the last. The dragon queen seeks to slay the platinum lord, and Zetch’r’r has sworn himself and the githyanki to the service of this dark goal.”
June 20 09
|
D u n g e o n 16 7
45
Garaitha’s Anvil
Tanalee is not yet certain what role the githyanki play in Tiamat’s plan, but the intelligence she shares has been gathered by other githyanki insurgents, often at the cost of their lives. Though she stands steadfastly by her claims, she does not reveal the source of her information, stating only that many githyanki are united in their hatred of Zetch’r’r. See the “Truth and Consequences” sidebar for more information. Talanee’s information has hopefully earned the Chanhiiri enough trust that the PCs let them go. If not, the githyanki fight (most likely in vain) to earn their freedom. See “Shoot First, Ask Questions Later” (page 65).
Part Two: The Well of Worlds The Well of Worlds is a planar nexus at the center of the githyanki’s extensive network of portals across the Astral Sea, the world, and the planes. The Well is the site of the Sovereign Gate—an ancient and powerful teleportation circle that serves as a transit point for elite githyanki strike teams and scouts at the vanguard of the ongoing invasion. More importantly, the Well of Worlds is the center of a bold arcane experiment being undertaken on the orders of the githyanki Emperor Zetch’r’r—an experiment whose success will spell doom for the free peoples of the world. The Well of Worlds and the Sovereign Gate are located in a planar nonspace, and they are protected by magical wards that prevent any but full-blooded githyanki and their most trusted servants from accessing them. These wards make the Well of Worlds unassailable—or so the githyanki think.
Truth and Consequences The information that Tanalee presents builds on what the PCs learned of Tiamat’s involvement in the githyanki invasion in “Throne of the Stone-Skinned King.” However, Vlaakith’s githyanki agents do not yet understand the full scope of Tiamat’s plans. As a result, the priest’s tale contains a significant bit of misinformation. In truth, Tiamat’s plot to kill Bahamut does not rely on the githyanki under Emperor Zetch’r’r. The githyanki invasion of the world is merely a subterfuge—a deadly feint with which Tiamat hopes to distract the attention of Bahamut and his faithful while she pursues the ritual that will allow her to summon the Platinum Dragon in mortal form. If asked, Tanalee knows nothing about the other information the PCs discovered in “Throne of the Stone-Skinned King”—in particular, the existence of the exarchs of Tiamat. This should tell the PCs that Tiamat’s plots are more convoluted than they might have previously suspected, and that unraveling those plots will take on prime importance in the future. If the PCs are suspicious of Talanee, they find orders on one of the githyanki warmongers from Encounter C4 corroborating what they learn here regarding the World Gates and the Well of Worlds. However, they find no information supporting what she tells them regarding the war between Tiamat and Bahamut, nor of the githyanki’s place in that struggle.
The World Gate A unique ritual dispels the force field around the World Gate. With its wards deactivated, the World Gate functions as a permanent teleportation circle with a sigil sequence the PCs can read easily. In addition, the World Gate features a permanent link to the Sovereign Gate in the Well of Worlds and can act as the focus for any scrying ritual. Both these features prove useful to the PCs later in the adventure. Any Arcana check reveals that the portal has additional epic-level powers. However, that same check tells the PCs that unlocking or controlling those powers is beyond their skill. One of the characters will likely make the obvious suggestion to seek assistance from the deva Bejam and the powerful mages of Nefelus. However, one of the Freeriders can raise the idea if need be. With the force field down, the Chanhiiri step into the portal and are gone. The location the githyanki teleport to is beyond the scope of this adventure. If the PCs attempt to note the sigil sequence of the Chanhiiri’s destination, it is coded and made unreadable by the power of the World Gate.
June 20 09
|
D u n g e o n 16 7
46
Garaitha’s Anvil
Word to the Coalition Before or after the Chanhiiri depart the fane, the PCs can use Sending to report to their contact in the Coalition (likely Amyria). Assuming they report everything Tanalee has told them, the PCs receive the following in return: Secure the fane as best you can. Get word to Thiradith. Make another Sending to me with the portal sigils. Wait for our arrival. An hour after the PCs make the Sending with the World Gate’s sigil sequence, Amyria and a dozen heroes loyal to the Coalition step through the World Gate. With them is Bejam, the deva mage the PCs befriended on Nefelus in Dungeon 165. Depending on whether Bejam accepted a position on the Coalition in that adventure, this might be the first time the PCs have seen him since then. In any case, Amyria has asked him to accompany her, believing that his advanced arcane knowledge will be of great benefit. The PCs are left in charge of establishing defenses and organizing a watch over the fane. The Freeriders and the newly arrived heroes look to the PCs for direction in establishing patrols, scouting the best lookout locations, and keeping a force on alert in the portal hall in case any githyanki come through the World Gate. The githyanki do not make a return appearance at the fane in this adventure, but don’t let the PCs know that. Use this opportunity to give the characters a sense of the respect their previous escapades have earned in the eyes of the growing number of heroes loyal to the Coalition. This relationship becomes an important aspect of the third part of the adventure. While the PCs set up the security arrangements for the fane, Bejam gets to work investigating the
World Gate and poring over the lore in the fane’s libraries. The PCs have time to take an extended rest and look after any remaining business in the fane or at the watchtower. Afterward, Bejam summons them and Amyria for a troubled council.
What Lies Beyond Bejam calls the PCs to one of the empty library chambers in the fane, explaining that he does not want the things he has learned to become common knowledge yet. He has developed some understanding of the operation of the World Gate and the existence of the Well of Worlds, but what he has learned has put him on edge. “The githyanki priest spoke truth regarding the World Gates. The circle here siphons the planar energy of the mortal realm, drawing it to a site beyond. This Well of Worlds is spoken of in the lore here, but the fact that the githyanki have kept the site secret even from Nefelus demonstrates its importance. Indeed, the existence of the Well and its power goes some way toward explaining the advantage the githyanki have gained in this war.” If any of the information meant to be revealed by Talanee remains unknown to the PCs (most likely because they slew the Chanhiiri before they could hear it), Bejam can fill it in here. “If the Well of Worlds was merely as this Talanee described it—a portal for moving the githyanki’s elite forces—I would wish to know more of it. However, the brief period of my study here has shown that the World Gate is drawing off planar energy greatly in excess of its normal operation, according to the githyanki’s lore. From what the Chanhiiri said, Zetch’r’r had specific purpose in seizing the fane, and I am fearful as to what that purpose might be.”
Let the PCs suggest that a mission through the World Gate to the Well of Worlds is in order. However, as important as it is to see what the githyanki are up to, the Coalition cannot afford to have the githyanki discover that their secrets have been compromised. As such, sending in a small group is the best strategy. If the PCs are not inspired to volunteer for this mission, Bejam actively recruits them. However, the PCs heard from Talanee that only full-blooded githyanki can access the Well of Worlds. Thankfully, Bejam has discovered another of the githyanki’s secrets. “The whitefire marks borne by the fomorians are crafted by potent ritual magic the like of which I have never seen before. By this magic, those who bear the marks carry the essence of the githyanki within them. If the fomorians you fought traveled here by way of the Well of Worlds, the whitefire marks were their passage. The githyanki no doubt feel secure that the secret of the sigils is protected from those who might seek to subvert it. However, they have not reckoned with the craft of Nefelus.” From the lingering power in the fomorians’ sigils, the whitefire mark can be recreated. Those who bear the mark can make the journey to the Well of Worlds. However, time is of the essence. “I do not know how long the githyanki will await the return of their forces from the fane, but if they discover us here, their retribution will be swift. We must send word to the Coalition for reinforcements to hold the fane in the event of another githyanki assault. For my part, I will convince Nefelus to send more aid of its own. If the worst comes to pass, we can hopefully hold the fane long enough for you to discover what the Well of Worlds is—and what kind of threat it represents.”
June 20 09
|
D u n g e o n 16 7
47
Garaitha’s Anvil
Megan Swiftblade and the Freeriders take charge of the watch in the PCs’ absence, even as more defenders travel by way of the World Portal to the fane. See Part Three of the adventure for more information on these heroes of the Coalition.
The ritual by which the whitefire mark is bonded to a living creature seems simple enough, but the exertion that shows in Nefelus when he is done shows the potency of the magic that has been imbued in you. As the ritual is completed, the sigil flares to life on your wrist, its outline of white flame writhing around the stark lines of a githyanki blade. Though the mark can be covered by sleeve or armor easily enough, you feel its flame still flaring—pulsing in time with the beating of your heart. While the ritual is completed, a pair of Nefelus mages recently arrived at the fane have been studying the shadowy destination beyond the World Gate. As the PCs prepare to embark, the mages brief them. “Beyond the World Gate lies a portal the likes of which we have not seen before. It has no sigil sequence. Rather, its location is fixed by psychic energy and the flow of planar power through it. A force of githyanki a half-dozen strong arrived there only an hour ago, but we have seen no other traffic before or since.” When the PCs are ready to step through the World Gate, go to Encounter W1 on the next page.
Well of Worlds Encounters The githyanki’s belief that the Well of Worlds is unassailable means that it has no permanent defenses, though the PCs face numerous challenges as they fight their way through the site.
The Well of Worlds exists in a planar nonspace that gives the site a nonlinear layout. Areas W2, W3, and W4 are a continuum, with doorways at one side of an area leading to the other side of the area adjacent, as noted by the “A” and “B” keys on the tactical map. A character who looks out of the area W2 doorway on the left side of the map is looking into area W3 from the right. Likewise, a character going through the southwest door in area W3 enters area W4 from the east.
W1. Sovereign Gate The sole portal within the Well of Worlds is a permanent true portal through which elite githyanki strike teams and scouts have access to any point in the Astral Sea, the world, and the planes beyond. Even though the PCs possess whitefire marks that allow them to enter the Well of Worlds, their presence here does not go unnoticed. Tactical Encounter: W1. Sovereign Gate (page 69).
June 20 09
|
D u n g e o n 16 7
48
Garaitha’s Anvil
W2. Githyanki Bivouac The githyanki troops that move through the Well of Worlds rest and recuperate here, making use of potent healing magic to quickly get themselves back into the fray. The strike team that recently passed through the portal is here, and its members do not take kindly to the PCs’ intrusion. Tactical Encounter: W2. Githyanki Bivouac (page 71).
W3. Hall of Shards The planar energy siphoned off through the World Gates is collected and amplified in this arcane nexus. Two eldritch giants work here, manipulating the flow of planar energy as part of the githyanki’s plans to extend the power of the Well of Worlds throughout their entire portal network. Tactical Encounter: W3. Hall of Shards (page 73).
W4. The Stair Gate This area grants access to the heart of the Well of Worlds, but the PCs’ way is blocked by a magically warded gate that requires a skill challenge to open. However, the party’s presence here attracts the attention of summoned planar guardians. Tactical Encounter: W4. The Stair Gate (page 75).
W5. Astral Vortex A churning astral vortex drives the githyanki’s portal network, and is the source of the power that will soon allow that network to touch every part of the world. An eldritch giant ritualist labors here on behalf of the githyanki, but a summoned githyanki guardian shade and the raging vortex itself are the deadlier threats. Tactical Encounter: W5. Astral Vortex (page 77).
Admiral Kada’ne The name of Admiral Kada’ne is heard at various points in the adventure, allowing a PC to recall the following information with a DC 27 History check. If none of the characters has any prior knowledge of Kada’ne, they can consult with others in the Coalition (particularly Amyria) to gain the following knowledge. Admiral Kada’ne was a mid-rank captain of the githyanki astral fleet who threw his lot in with Zetch’r’r when the new emperor claimed power in the aftermath of Vlaakith’s fall. The githyanki fleet is strong under Kada’ne’s captains, but the admiral is a weak leader. Though a brilliant tactician, he prefers to direct his troops from the deck of a fast ship as far as possible from the real fighting.
Dark Tidings With the Well of Worlds temporarily secured, the PCs can return to the Fane of Chanhiir by way of the Sovereign Gate in area W1. Whether they determine the operation of the Sovereign Gate first or simply use it as the starting point of a Linked Portal ritual (see the “Sovereign Gate” sidebar), they discover that Bejam has been hard at work in their absence. He, the Nefelus mages, and the Freeriders and other heroes of the coalition have all been bonded with the whitefire mark, allowing them to transit to the Well of Worlds. At the same time, the other Nefelus mages have been working nonstop to keep the Chanhiir gate open as a destination portal for transits from across the world.
Additional members of the Coalition have been joined by more than forty heroes of a dozen lands at the fane, with still more coming by the sound of it. The defenses you set up around the temple have been redoubled. The approaches through the mountains are secure, watchers atop the highest bluffs scan the skies for airships, and the World Portal is quickly cleared of new arrivals and carefully watched for any sign of githyanki activity. So far, however, your presence in the fane appears to have gone unnoticed.
The Mages’ Council After debriefing the PCs, Bejam and a security force cross over to the Well of Worlds. The deva mage is anxious to speak to Haryssus and undertake a full assessment of the site’s power. Let the PCs take an extended rest, before or after which they can fine-tune the defenses of the fane as they wish. Whether they remain in the temple or return to the Well of Worlds, Bejam soon calls them to council in Haryssus’s library. The heroes of the Coalition have the Well of Worlds locked down, including an ambush line set up to catch any githyanki passing through the Sovereign Gate. In the bivouac, you spot the Freerider dwarf Ragnum Dourstone, who offers a grim nod by way of greeting. Behind him, more than a dozen dead githyanki are piled high. Ragnum reports to the PCs that the heroes of the Coalition have been lucky so far in getting the drop on githyanki transiting into the Well of Worlds. “They’re coming through the white portal steady—scouts and strike teams looking to rest up. No sign yet that they know we’re here, but we questioned one moving alone, said he was from Utargarth, Utargarath, something like that. Someone named Kada’ne sent him to the fane to see what’s up with the team supposed to be holding it. It’s a safe bet there’ll be more like him coming through soon enough.”
June 20 09
|
D u n g e o n 16 7
49
Garaitha’s Anvil
A PC that makes a DC 27 History or Arcana check recognizes the name Ragnum heard as “Utargaraith,” and knows what it means. (If no PCs make a successful check, they can ask Haryssus or Bejam.)
Vlaakith’s captains slain when the new emperor came to power. Kada’ne, admiral of the githyanki fleet, holds one. Do’kan, general and master of the githyanki ground forces, holds the third.”
‘Utargaraith’ is the name of the interplanar shipyards where the githyanki build and repair their fleets of astral craft and airships—Garaitha’s Anvil, as it is most commonly translated. Garaitha was a corsair and military captain whose legendary exploits have inspired generations of githyanki.
What are the githyanki’s plans for the Well of Worlds? “The githyanki have made great advances in portal magic in recent years—some of it stolen; some gifted by allies we can only guess at. Great numbers of eldritch giants have become beholden to the githyanki, and many of those unwilling to serve have been forced to servitude. For the last two years, githyanki and giant mages have worked to carefully reshape the power that flows through the Well of Worlds, hoping to see that power flow through the whole of the githyanki portal network. Should they succeed, the power of the Sovereign Gate will be extended, one node at a time, across all the githyanki portals of the Astral Sea and the planes beyond.”
The PCs learn more about Garaitha’s Anvil in the next section. However, if they question Bejam or Haryssus about the site in this meeting, see “First Strike” on page 53 and the beginning of Part Three (page 54).
The Githyanki’s Secret Beyond the astral vortex, the exhausted Bejam stands with Haryssus, the works of the eldritch giant’s library spread across the tables. “We have gained a valuable ally in our fight against the githyanki,” Bejam says, nodding to the giant. “I have learned much of the operation of this place, but I fear that it spells our doom all the same.” Rather than simply having Bejam and Haryssus recite the following information, try to play it out as a give-and-take as the PCs and the mages share and compare what they know. What are the keyholes on the plinth over the stair gate? “Four crystal keys once granted control of the Well of Worlds to the highest-ranking of the githyanki. Queen Vlaakith held one, but her key was said to be lost when she was destroyed. Zetch’r’r holds one, taken from one of
realize with certainty that you have taken this place, they will attack with numbers beyond reckoning. You few, brave as you are, cannot stand against them.” From the connection between Kada’ne and the githyanki that invaded the fane, the players should hopefully suggest finding the admiral as a means to locating one of the crystal keys. Even if they don’t, however, Bejam announces that it is time to take what they know to the Coalition as a whole.
How can the githyanki’s plans be stopped? “The power of the Well of Worlds is crafted and shaped by unique rituals—some older than time, and many now lost. To establish even minimal mastery of the Well would require one of the crystal keys and the rituals of control uniquely bound to those who bear them.” When the PCs have digested the above information, Haryssus ends the discussion on a note of finality. “My knowledge and your mages’ power combined can ward the Well of Worlds against assault for a time, but we cannot hope to control it. Already in the scant hours since you have come here, a score of githyanki have passed through the Sovereign Gate, and more will come when those your friends have slain are missed. When the githyanki
June 20 09
|
D u n g e o n 16 7
50
Garaitha’s Anvil
The Sovereign Gate It takes 1 hour and three DC 30 Arcana checks to understand the workings of the Sovereign Gate in area W1 of the Well of Worlds. Whether the PCs undertake this effort themselves or leave it to Bejam and the other Coalition mages determines when this information is revealed. As impossible as it might have seemed, Talanee’s description of the Sovereign Gate’s function holds true. Its power is built on that of the epic True Portal ritual—magic that creates a teleportation circle capable of carrying creatures to any destination. However, the power of the Sovereign Gate is permanent and even more far-reaching. The pulsing haze of white light that fills this chamber is a weave of planar energy and arcane power that taps into the mind of any creature standing within it. Any place you can name or describe, any location you have ever visited or seen, any site you can remember and summon to mind—the Sovereign Gate will take you there. The Sovereign Gate has no sigil sequence to mark its planar location. Rather, the flow of planar energy coursing through the Well of Worlds is indelibly marked upon the mind and spirit of each creature that passes through it. Only those who have first been taken through the Sovereign Gate by another creature or who have reached the site through one of the World Gates can transit there. Moreover, the portal holds a permanent record of every location it has ever been used to access—the coordinates of uncountable locations across the planes locked within the pulsing white of its walls.
The Sovereign Gate is a more powerful version of the portal created by the True Portal ritual. It functions only for full-blooded githyanki or creatures bearing the whitefire mark. Using the Sovereign Gate as the source or destination for any portal ritual negates the need for reagents and grants the user a +10 bonus to the Arcana check for the ritual. Using the Sovereign Gate to transit to a location not marked by a teleportation circle requires a DC 25 Arcana check. A character can make this check only once per hour. The check result determines the portal’s duration. Arcana Check Result
Portal Duration
20–29
1 round
30–39
3 rounds
40 or higher
5 rounds
The Sovereign Gate sets its destination according to the will of a single character who steps within it and makes the Arcana check. If two or more characters attempt to control the portal at the same time, all make opposed Arcana checks. The character with the highest check controls the portal (assuming the check result was 20 or higher), and all creatures within the teleportation circle go to that character’s chosen destination. A nonportal destination can be seen within the Sovereign Gate as a hazy image, just as with a normal portal ritual. However, creatures at the destination cannot see the Sovereign Gate. Creatures stepping through the Sovereign Gate simply appear as if from nowhere at their destination.
War Council If the details the PCs have learned of the githyanki shipyard and Admiral Kada’ne have not already done so, the title of this adventure should hopefully suggest that an assault on Garaitha’s Anvil is the intended endgame. However, the party’s previous experience with the fractious Coalition will likely also suggest that establishing a consensus for action will be difficult. During the PCs’ assault on the Well of Worlds, Bejam sent word to the Coalition leadership, requesting that they come to the fane for a war council that can decide the Coalition’s course of action. However, not all members of the Coalition leadership have made the journey. In particular, Eoffram Troyas has remained behind in Brindol to help deal with a hobgoblin uprising (a real threat this time, in contrast to the exaggerated attack that played a part in the leadership debate in “Throne of the Stone-Skinned King”). Amyria is here, as are other Coalition members known to the PCs (choose the roster based on those characters the PCs have the strongest relationship with, good or bad). However, the cautious Quelenna Entromiel is here as well, potentially undercutting any hope the PCs have of inspiring the coalition into a quick response to the githyanki threat. If Quelenna was not successful in her bid for leadership of the Coalition in “Throne of the StoneSkinned King,” she is taking advantage of this crisis to clandestinely push her agenda of cautious defense. (See “Throne of the Stone-Skinned King” for more information on Eoffram, Quelenna, and their goals.) The war council takes place in an abandoned library in the fane. Megan Swiftblade and a dozen other heroes of the Coalition are on guard, but the
June 20 09
|
D u n g e o n 16 7
51
Garaitha’s Anvil
bulk of those who have come to defend the fane are outside, in area C4, or in the Well of Worlds, keeping watch against a githyanki attack. The PCs are present to once again recount their story for those who have not heard it. Bejam likewise summarizes the danger presented by the Well of Worlds and the githyanki’s plots. “The power of the Well of Worlds transcends any magic known to the mortal races. If it can be extended to their wider network of permanent teleportation circles, the githyanki can open portals at will into any location, from any location, and not with vanguard strike teams and scouts but with whole armies. Their assaults will instantly reach behind the strongest walls and beyond the most well-defended roads and passes. The destruction will be absolute. If the githyanki succeed at their plans, no force in the mortal realm will stand against them.” The PCs can add to Bejam’s assessment if they wish. However, especially if the characters discuss the need for military action, the Coalition’s response leaves them cold. Quelenna Entromiel takes the lead, building on the uncertainty and fear felt by a number of the other Coalition members present. “We are far from our homes and families—the places and people we are bound to defend. This place, these planar sites you speak of are meaningless targets. A majority of our many lands’ heroes are here now to defend these places, and for what? This is a fight we cannot win, and as such, it is a fight we cannot consider. Waiting here for eventual attack or, worse, seeking out the githyanki stretches our already over-extended resources past the breaking point. Instead, we must ask what we might do to hinder the githyanki. Slow down their plots to give us time to plan a proper defense of our homelands.”
Let the PCs take the lead in pointing out the futility of defending against an enemy that can move troops from any permanent or temporary teleportation circle to any location in the world in the blink of an eye. However, even martial-minded leaders such as the barbarian elf queen Caliandra are swayed by Quelenna’s focus on defending the Coalition’s homelands. Amyria agrees with the PCs, but even if she captured the leadership of the Coalition in the previous adventure, her voice cannot overcome the dissent that Quelenna inspires. Moreover, any attempt on Amyria’s part to take the party’s side is met with bureaucratic resistance.
Most of these points follow naturally from the information previously revealed. For example, because the PCs know that Kada’ne is at Garaitha’s Anvil, it makes sense that they would seek to scry the admiral’s location. However, these broad points are not meant to be absolutes. Let the players’ decisions set out the groundwork and the plan for the assault, using NPCs to establish direction only if the PCs seem stuck or request their aid. If the players come up with alternative approaches to some of the points below, adjust and improvise as necessary—even to the point of forgoing a stealth mission in favor of a straight-up strike (see the “Direct Assault” sidebar in the next section).
“Neither you nor these adventurers have the authority to direct the Coalition as a whole according to your whim. I move that this war council be dissolved at once, and that we return to Sayre for a full debate.”
A Time for Heroes
To the PCs, it should be clear that this war council is destined to fail.
Fortune Favors the Bold This section of the adventure features no combat, no traps, and no skill challenges. However, it is nonetheless intended to represent a turning point for the campaign. This is strictly a roleplaying scenario, and it gives the PCs a chance to step up as de facto leaders of the Coalition—a role they have slowly established for themselves at every previous stage of the paragon tier. It is up to the PCs to lead the heroes of the Coalition in a preemptive assault against Garaitha’s Anvil—an attack designed both to cripple the githyanki war machine, and to deliver to the Coalition the power to control the Well of Worlds. To do so, the players need to undertake a number of steps, as indicated below.
The PCs must win the favor of the other heroes of the Coalition if the attack on Garaitha’s Anvil has any hope of succeeding. However, this initial task is perhaps the easiest part of their plan. At the first sign that the PCs intend to act against the orders of the Coalition, Megan Swiftblade and the other Free riders immediately back them up in the war council. (Assuming you have played through “Beyond the Mottled Tower,” Megan owes the PCs a life-debt that has earned her allegiance even if the relationship between the two groups has remained strained.) “The Coalition’s so-called leaders don’t know what they’re saying. Bankers and merchant lords, the lot of them. If you say we need to strike this Garaitha’s Anvil, the Freeriders are with you. But there’s nearly a hundred of us here all told, come together to show our strength. With you leading, I promise the rest will follow.”
June 20 09
|
D u n g e o n 16 7
52
Garaitha’s Anvil
If the scene suggests it, one of the Freeriders might tear a token of office from one of the reluctant Coalition leaders, handing it to the PCs in an overtly symbolic gesture. This is the party’s moment, and it should feel memorable. Outside the fane, the PCs can then take their case to the Hundred—the assembled heroes of the Coalition, ready to give their lives to defend their world.
In a worst-case scenario in which the PCs decide to acquiesce to the whims of the Coalition, Amyria can take a more direct role in suggesting that bold action is necessary to turn the tide of war. However, she has not the reputation or the experience to lead the Hundred. Only the PCs can do this.
First Strike Announcing the intent to attack Garaitha’s Anvil in force is one thing. Figuring out how to get the heroes of the Coalition to the shipyard without alerting the githyanki to the impending assault is something else. Characters trained in Arcana or History can study the lore of the Well of Worlds (that found with the eldritch giants in Encounter W3 and in Haryssus’s library) to find out everything they need to know about Garaitha’s Anvil. Paraphrase the information given at the beginning of “Part Three: Garaitha’s Anvil” on page 54. The Garaitha docks are set with two score permanent portals whose sigil sequences are one of the most closely guarded secrets of the githyanki empire. However, the unique nature of the Sovereign Gate allows the sigil sequences of the Garaitha portals to be extracted carefully. If the PCs want to undertake this task themselves, make it a series of DC 27 Arcana checks or an impromptu skill challenge. Alternatively, the eldritch giant Haryssus can obtain the sequences (or, if necessary, suggest this course of action). The Nefelus mages can set up teleportation circles to take the PCs and the Hundred from the fane to Garaitha’s Anvil. Once the attackers have transited to the shipyard, the mages then attempt to block access to the shipyard’s portals using the power of the Well of Worlds. This should prevent a githyanki counterattack, at least for a short time.
June 20 09
|
D u n g e o n 16 7
53
Garaitha’s Anvil
Kada’ne’s Key The PCs know that Kada’ne is at Garaitha’s Anvil, and that control of the Well of Worlds might be possible with the crystal key the githyanki admiral is said to hold. The githyanki have no fear of these keys falling into the wrong hands, knowing that they can be used only by full-blooded githyanki who themselves have been attuned to the keys with unique rituals. Bejam and Haryssus believe that they can overcome these protections, but finding and capturing Kada’ne can be a challenge even for the most capable heroes. With their skills and experience, the PCs are the most logical choice to undertake the strike-team assault to locate Cev’ren and Kada’ne. Although the assault on Garaitha’s Anvil is not merely a diversion, it allows the PCs to focus on the specific goal of finding the admiral while the other heroes of the Coalition keep the githyanki on the ropes.
Target Acquired Garaitha’s Anvil is a vast place, and the PCs have little hope of finding Kada’ne by mere chance. However, the unique nature of the Well of Worlds means that a character can use scrying rituals to search for the admiral or his flagship even in the astral nonspace in which the shipyard exists. The entire shipyard is under the effect of a Forbiddance ritual for the purpose of scrying effects, but the Well of Worlds can overcome that.
Whether alone or with Bejam’s aid, the PCs can obtain the location of the specific repair dock where Cev’ren is moored. More importantly, they can work out the closest portal to arrive at and can see enough of the area around the portal to note the exterior dock entrance, its defenses, and the under-construction extension that offers the easiest way into the area. Paraphrase the information given under “Garaitha’s Anvil Encounters” in the next section as the PCs plan their assault.
The Moment of Truth With the Hundred soundly behind them, the PCs have set in motion a plan that might conceivably turn the tide of war. When they are ready to lead the assault, go to the next section.
Part Three: Garaitha’s Anvil The shipyard of Garaitha’s Anvil is a planar mote suspended at the boundary between the world, the Feywild, the Shadowfell, and the Astral Sea. From its surface, the shipyard appears to be the interior of a vast sphere, its ground curving up to all sides. At its center, directly above any viewer standing on its surface, a great astral gate acts as a transit point for the ships that are built and repaired here. Forty permanent teleportation circles across the shipyard connect Garaitha’s Anvil to the Astral Sea, as well as to the world, the Feywild, and the Shadowfell, all of which provide the raw materials and labor that fuel the construction of the githyanki war fleet.
Garaitha’s Anvil Encounters The attack against the shipyard catches the githyanki entirely by surprise. However, though the heroes of the Hundred have followed the party’s lead to take the war to the githyanki, a victory here will be for naught if the PCs cannot capture Admiral Kada’ne and the key to the Well of Worlds. The Garaitha’s Anvil encounters represent only a small part of this repair dock complex, which itself is one of dozens of similar dock facilities spread across the surface of the planar mote. Any exits from the repair dock lead to similar chambers in adjoining docks—the warehouses, forges, mills, and arcane laboratories dedicated to supporting the githyanki war machine. The docks where airships and astral ships (including Cev’ren) are moored are sealed off under moveable domes. A vast astral gate sits at the center of the inverse sphere of the shipyard. Ships can rise to and descend from the gate under their own power (the githyanki’s astral craft normally function only in the Astral Sea), but the unstable flow of energy within the gate makes it difficult to properly navigate astral craft above the surface of Garaitha’s Anvil. This is an advantage to the heroes assaulting the shipyard (since it prevents the numerous ships present from taking part in the githyanki’s defense of the site), but raises the stakes for the PCs in the ship-to-ship battle in encounter G7. Garaitha’s Anvil is populated with workers from the githyanki’s servant-races, particularly fomorians and other giants. As low-rank laborers, these creatures do not bear the whitefire mark. All creatures within the shipyard converse in Deep Speech.
June 20 09
|
D u n g e o n 16 7
54
Garaitha’s Anvil
G3: Fire and Forge A cadre of fire giants operates a smithy that turns out steel- and brass-work for the githyanki’s astral craft and airships. With the alarm sounded, the PCs find these servants of the githyanki forging deadly weapons to be taken to the battle in the shipyard outside. Tactical Encounter: G3. Fire and Forge (page 83).
G4: Warehouse This dark space is a testament to the advanced state of the githyanki invasion. Its crates contain weapons, armor, field rations, and other supplies for a long military campaign. Just as disconcerting are signs that many more crates have recently been moved out from this area as the githyanki invasion is stepped up across the world.
G5: Dock Gate
G1: Construction Site
G2: Loading Zone
Breaking from the main battle, the PCs fight their way through a force of githyanki defenders to gain access to the repair dock complex where Admiral Kada’ne’s flagship Cev’ren is moored. An open storage space leads to a locked door and the repair dock beyond. The door can be opened with a DC 27 Thievery check or smashed in with a DC 20 Strength check. If the door is broken open, the creatures in areas G2 and G3 do not hear it. Tactical Encounter: G1. Dock Siege (page 79).
Within the repair dock complex, a planar loading zone has become an embarkation point for giant reinforcements summoned to the battle. Tactical Encounter: G2. Loading Zone (page 81).
At the center of the repair dock complex, access to the ships is guarded by a force of githyanki and fomorians. The docks are sealed off from the laborers’ areas and warehouses by magical wards that the PCs must first shut down, then reactivate to prevent new defenders from joining the fight against them. Tactical Encounter: G5. Dock Gate (page 85).
G6: Boarding Party Kada’ne’s flagship can be seen in the distance, but another force of githyanki guards stands between the PCs and their target. When the cowardly Kada’ne takes to the air, the characters must commandeer the githyanki astral strike ship Iliyoru, taking to the air after the fleeing Cev’ren. Tactical Encounter: G6. Boarding Party (page 88).
June 20 09
|
D u n g e o n 16 7
55
Garaitha’s Anvil
G7: Iliyoru’s Flight A ship-to-ship battle ensues as the PCs attempt to catch up to the fleeing Kada’ne, using the power of the strike ship to attack Cev’ren even as they ward off an aerial assault by githyanki warriors on flying mounts. Tactical Encounter: G7. Iliyoru’s Flight (page 91).
G8: Kada’ne’s Stand In the end, both ships lock together and spin out of control toward the vast astral gate above. On the decks of Cev’ren and Iliyoru, the PCs face off against Kada’ne’s troops and the admiral himself—a quartermile above the bloody battle below. Tactical Encounter: G8. Kada’ne’s Stand (page 95).
Striking the Anvil As the PCs prepare to lead the Hundred into battle, Bejam and his mages set up the teleportation circles that will take them to Garaitha’s Anvil. Across the bluffs and trails surrounding the fane, the mages of the Coalition are scribing dozens of planar portals, causing the fading twilight to blaze with eldritch light. Spread out before them, the greatest heroes of the mortal realm stand in expectation of the battle to come. Most are on foot, a score or more mounted on steeds still skittish from having made the transit through portals from their own lands. One force of rangers from the desert lands south of Elsir Vale make a last check of the tack on a flight of griffons. No one speaks.
Direct Assault If the PCs are dead-set against taking the easy way in to the repair dock complex, simply create a main entrance that passes through mostly empty warehouse space similar to area G4, then connects to area G5 by way of the door at the top of the overview map. The repair dock complex features no windows or other entrances aboveground, so the main entrance or the under-construction extension are the only ways in. However, a frontal assault is by far the tougher of the two approaches. The ground-level main doors of each repair dock complex are guarded by two fomorian warriors and two fomorian painbringers (a level 21 encounter; see Encounter C3 and the Monster Manual® for statistics blocks). The fomorians quickly fall back from the ongoing battle when they see any PC approach the doors. Additionally, starting in the fourth round of the fight, six githyanki minions join the fray each round—either
At your signal, Bejam and his mages activate the planar portals, and a flare of white light cuts through the darkness. Within that light, hazy images of the shipyard flare to life—windowless stone buildings, the open spaces between them thronging with githyanki and giants. Around you, the Hundred are ready, waiting to move at your word. The attack on Garaitha’s Anvil is a broad assault through a dozen portals simultaneously, and the heroes of the Hundred hit the githyanki hard. Alongside the assault, the PCs undertake one last strike team mission—breaking for the repair facility where Kada’ne and his flagship wait.
blademasters (Encounter C1), gish crusaders (G1), or psychic archers (G5). See those encounters for statistics blocks. The doors into all the repair dock complexes are warded by the same magic that protects the doorways into area G5. See encounter G5 for details of the skill challenge necessary to disable the doors’ magical wards. Once those wards are disabled, an exterior door into the repair dock complex requires a DC 27 Strength check to open or close. Any fomorians and githyanki that survive the fight pursue the PCs into the repair dock. PCs who make their way through the main doors go straight to Encounter G5. However, the sound of combat at the main entrance puts the creatures in that area on alert. Additionally, all eight of the fomorian guards from Encounter G2 and four fire giant serfs from Encounter G3 come to G5 to enter the fray, arriving at a rate of two giants per round.
When the PCs step into the portal prepared for them, the Hundred follow. The portals through which you emerge in Garaitha’s Anvil go dark almost as soon as you step through them. Bejam and Haryssus made good on their pledge to seal planar access into the shipyard. However, high above, a blazing circle of white light hangs—the massive astral gate around which the shipyard has been built. Even as you watch, a half-dozen astral strike ships rise toward the gate, caught up in its flow of energy then swallowed with an immense flash as they are shunted away.
June 20 09
|
D u n g e o n 16 7
56
Garaitha’s Anvil
To the right and high above you along the curve of the shipyard floor, the banner of the Freeriders waves at the front of an assault against an emplacement of githyanki guards scrambling to get into defensive positions. To your left, a force of dwarf warriors chant a death dirge for the fallen Kalad as they cut their way through a squad of giants—howling fomorian guards and laborers towering above their githyanki masters. Behind you, cavalry forces that have come through their portals on horseback crash over githyanki ground troops like a living wave. Overhead, ranger archers on griffons wing their way above the battlefield, a force of githyanki flying forth to meet them on reptilian fliers, shrieking as they strike. Screaming oaths of vengeance, the hundred greatest heroes of the mortal world throw themselves against waves of defenders that must total ten times that number. The battle for Garaitha’s Anvil has begun.
The casualties on the Coalition’s side are thankfully few. While the PCs bask in the well-deserved glow of victory, the surviving githyanki can be held within the docks while arrangements are made for them to be moved. Having scried the battle, Bejam and Amyria arrive by portal to debrief the PCs and take
possession of Kada’ne’s crystal key and the admiral himself (assuming he or his corpse survived the final fight). Bejam then returns to the Well of Worlds, where he and Haryssus are successful in bringing the site under Coalition control.
Turning the Tide If the party had a relatively easy time with the previous encounters, feel free to add a denouement combat challenge taking out the last pockets of githyanki resistance. Otherwise, as the PCs descend in Iliyoru, they can see that the heroes of the Hundred have won the day on the ground below. The forces of Garaitha’s Anvil have been routed—the heroes of the world victorious. The bodies of githyanki and giants are spread across the shipyard by the hundreds, as are the throngs of prisoners being held under tight watch by the Freeriders and others. The damaged Iliyoru lands noisily in an open space close to the dock where it was originally moored, all eyes on you as you disembark. And as one, the heroes of the Hundred salute, five-score weapons raised to the white sky as a shout of triumph echoes from the gray stones.
June 20 09
|
D u n g e o n 16 7
57
Garaitha’s Anvil
Spoils of War Any warriors captured in the battle for Garaitha’s Anvil are mid-level leaders at best, who know nothing more about the githyanki’s plots than the PCs have already learned. In particular, the rank-and-file githyanki know nothing of Tiamat’s involvement with Zetch’r’r’s plots. However, Kada’ne is one of the githyanki’s highest-ranking leaders, and he could prove instrumental to the PCs’ goals in the next installment of the adventure path. In addition to crippling the githyanki’s ability to wage war through their portal network, the capture of the Well of Worlds grants the Coalition additional resources. In Haryssus’s lore, one of the PCs discovers a ritual that can undo the effect of the githyanki possession seen in previous adventures.
Any captured githyanki spies can be freed of this foul possession, restoring their minds and driving the possessing spirits out.
The Future The Coalition’s rout of Garaitha’s Anvil deals a major blow to the githyanki war effort, effectively scuttling a significant portion of their astral fleet and putting large numbers of astral craft and airships under Coalition control. While the fear of a githyanki reprisal might loom large, the PCs’ victory allows Bejam and Haryssus to establish full control over the Well of Worlds for the Coalition. The same wards that once prevented access to the planar mote by any but the githyanki can now be reworked to prevent the githyanki from making use
of the Sovereign Gate. More importantly, by shutting down the flow of power from the World Gates, the Coalition can cripple the githyanki portal network, making a counterattack against Garaitha’s Anvil impossible and significantly limiting the githyanki’s ability to wage war against the world. A decisive blow has been dealt against the githyanki. The tide of war has turned, though the PCs’ fight is far from over.
The True Plan Although Tiamat makes use of the githyanki, her plot to kill Bahamut does not rely on Emperor Zethch’r’s githyanki. As mentioned earlier, the githyanki invasion of the world is merely a ploy to weaken the forces of good and distract Bahamut and his faithful while she pursues a plan to summon the Platinum Dragon in mortal form. She intends to destroy him at that point, thus ending a conflict that has recurred since Io was split. If the PCs continue to follow the path they are on, they will have an opportunity in the near future to learn this information.
June 20 09
|
D u n g e o n 16 7
58
Garaitha’s Anvil
C1: Githyanki Watch Encounter Level 17 (8,800 XP)
Setup 8 githyanki blademasters (B) 2 githyanki reavers (R) The path the PCs follow leads to one of two cavern entrances to the temple. The invading githyanki expect no trouble here, and they are distracted. The PCs can follow the path directly to the cavern easily enough. However, unless they do so invisibly, the githyanki have a group passive Perception check (+10) to spot them when they are 50 feet from the cavern entrance (the edge of the trail on the map). Even distracted, the guards automatically see any PCs who approach closer than 25 feet from the cavern. Characters can leave the path and attempt to climb the rough walls above the entrance (DC 20 Athletics), but making noise on the shadowy slopes is a bigger concern than staying hidden. With a DC 20 Stealth check, a PC stays hidden but dislodges a fall of rubble and scree that puts the githyanki below on alert. A DC 25 Stealth check allows a character to approach unheard and unseen.
If the githyanki are alerted by the party’s approach, they pull back to the inner cavern where they can be seen only with a DC 20 Perception check. Adjust their positions on the tactical map accordingly. Characters approaching by air from above can automatically stay hidden until they attack. They gain surprise unless the githyanki are otherwise alerted to their presence. When the PCs can see the cavern entrance, read: The twisting path leads to a cliff, atop which a broad shelf of stone is lit by the pulsing white light of magic lamps. The cavern beyond falls quickly into shadow, but it appears to narrow down to a passageway leading farther into the mountain. Perception Check DC 20: Even the shadows can’t hide the patches of the cavern floor that have enormous X’s scrawled in charcoal upon them. If the githyanki are not alerted to the PCs’ presence, read: Nearly a dozen githyanki stand or crouch along the stone shelf and within the shelter of the cavern. Their armor and livery mark them as guards watching over this entrance, though they appear profoundly disinterested in the task. In addition to the guards, an astral wave trap wards this approach to the fane. This defense was set up by the githyanki of the temple, and although the invaders are aware of its existence, they cannot disable it. The X’s marked on the floor indicate the trigger points the guards are aware of, but there are others as shown on the tactical map.
8 Githyanki (B) Blademasters
Level 17 Minion Skirmisher
Medium natural humanoid XP 400 each Initiative +15 Senses Perception +9 HP 1; a missed attack never damages a minion. AC 28; Fortitude 25, Reflex 23, Will 22 Saving Throws +2 against charm effects Speed 5; see also telekinetic jump m Silver Longsword (standard; at-will) ✦ Psychic, Weapon +22 vs. AC; 8 psychic damage. M Twin Longsword Strike (standard; requires combat advantage against the target; at-will) ✦ Psychic, Weapon +22 vs. AC; 12 psychic damage Telekinetic Jump (move; encounter) The githyanki blademaster flies 5 squares. Alignment Evil Languages Common, Deep Speech Str 24 (+15) Dex 21 (+13) Wis 12 (+9) Con 15 (+10) Int 13 (+9) Cha 21 (+13) Equipment plate armor, 2 silver longswords
2 Githyanki Reavers (R)
Level 17 Brute
Medium natural humanoid XP 1,600 each Initiative +13 Senses Perception +10 HP 197; Bloodied 98 AC 29; Fortitude 30, Reflex 28, Will 28 Saving Throws +2 against charm effects Speed 5; see also telekinetic leap m Silver Fullblade (standard; at-will) ✦ Psychic, Weapon +20 vs. AC; 2d12 + 4 (crit 2d12 + 28) plus 1d6 psychic damage, plus an extra 3d6 psychic damage if the target is immobilized. M Reaving Strike (standard; encounter) ✦ Psychic, Reliable, Weapon +18 vs. Fortitude; 3d12 + 4 damage plus 1d6 psychic damage, and the target is immobilized (save ends). R Telekinetic Leap (move; encounter) Ranged 10; the githyanki reaver or an ally within range can fly 5 squares. Alignment Evil Languages Common, Deep Speech Str 24 (+15) Dex 21 (+13) Wis 14 (+10) Con 17 (+11) Int 15 (+10) Cha 21 (+13) Equipment plate armor, silver fullblade
June 20 09
|
D u n g e o n 16 7
59
Garaitha’s Anvil
Astral Vents Trap
Level 19 Blaster XP 2,400
The floor of the cavern suddenly ripples as a wave of unearthly power lifts you off your feet. Trap: When a creature steps onto a trigger point, a pulse of astral energy disrupts the space around it, blasting it skyward. Perception PCs who intuit that the X’s on the cavern floor mark the trigger points of the trap can choose to avoid those locations. However, characters cannot use Perception to detect the unmarked trigger points of this trap. Trigger When a creature enters or begins its turn in a trigger square, the trap attacks that creature. Attack Opportunity Action Melee Target: The creature that triggered the trap. Attack: +22 vs. Reflex Hit: 3d8 + 4 damage, and the target is lifted 10 feet into the air. Unless the target has the means to stay aloft, it then falls to the ground in a random adjacent square, taking 1d10 damage and being knocked prone as normal for falling. Countermeasures ✦ A creature can jump the squares to avoid triggering them. ✦ A creature that triggers the trap can attempt a DC 27 Acrobatics check. With a successful check, the creature takes no damage but is pushed 1 square in a random direction. ✦ A creature blown into the air by a trap can, as normal, make an Acrobatics check to reduce falling damage. ✦ A creature adjacent to a trigger square can disable that square for the rest of the encounter with a DC 27 Arcana check.
Tactics The githyanki reavers fight close together, each targeting a lightly armored foe as it flanks with a blademaster. A reaver switches targets freely in an attempt to sow maximum disruption in melee, reserving its reaving strike for a defender or striker that deals it damage. If either reaver immobilizes a foe, both focus their next silver fullblade attacks on that creature. Two blademasters flank with the reavers, while the others swarm heavily armored PCs in groups of two or three, flanking for combat advantage and making twin longsword strikes. The githyanki avoid the marked triggers of the astral vents, but they can be affected by the unmarked triggers. These githyanki are confident in their ability to take care of any threat, and they hurl insults at the PCs throughout the fight. They raise no alarm and fight to the death.
Cliff: The steep slope below the shelf and to both sides of the path drops off 40 feet. Scaling a cliff requires a DC 20 Athletics check. A creature that drops down from above takes 4d10 falling damage. Stairs: The rough stone stairs are difficult terrain. Rubble: These areas of loose scree are difficult terrain. A creature that runs, charges, or makes a double move through rubble must make a DC 20 Acrobatics check or fall prone.
Features of the Area Illumination: The narrow canyon walls cut any daylight to dim light along the path. At night, the path is dark. Magic lamps shed bright light within the mouth of the cavern and across the stone shelf day and night, fading to dim light in the cavern. Ceiling: The ceiling of the cavern is 20 feet high. Astral Vent: The githyanki have marked five of the trigger points to the astral vent trap in charcoal on the rock shelf. The three trigger points shown in red on the tactical map are not visible to the PCs or the githyanki.
June 20 09
|
D u n g e o n 16 7
60
Garaitha’s Anvil
C2: The Watch of the Dead Encounter Level 18 (11,000 XP)
Setup Githyanki mindlasher 3 githyanki shades (S) 3 githyanki warmongers The resting place of the honored dead of Chanhiir was the sight of a last stand by the temple’s faithful. When the invaders pulled down this place in the aftermath, they drew forth the vengeful spirits of the githyanki warriors interred here. The invading githyanki now shun this area, not even having claimed their dead. They avoid attack by running through here when they go to and from area C1. Perception Check (within 30 feet of the doorway) DC 13: No sound comes from the darkness ahead, but the foul stench of death rises on the air. When the PCs can see into this area, read: Huge statues of githyanki warriors once lined the walls of this chamber, but these now lie shattered and strewn across the floor. The rotting corpses of a half-dozen githyanki lie alongside them, all well-armored warriors. At the center of the room, the floor opens up to create a balcony set with a stone railing. Light and raised voices come up from below. Perception Check DC 13: The voices converse in Deep Speech and in the dialect of the githyanki. However, the words cannot be made out from this distance. DC 20: The shattered statues and their rubble flare and pulse with a faint glow.
As long as they do not have a light source in hand, the PCs can cross to the balcony railing without attracting the attention of the githyanki below. \The chamber below appears to be a temporary camp with three dozen bedrolls set around a pair of smoldering fire pits. Three githyanki are here—warriors by their look, and all of them angry. One mutters that the human outpost waits to be taken, cursing the orders that keep the githyanki in the temple while “the astraan mages chant their useless rituals over the shielded circle.” A second growls agreement as he curses someone he calls “the coward Kada’ne, safe on Cev’ren while we hide like dogs for the sake of his fear.” A character can make a DC 27 History check to recall the name of the githyanki Admiral Kada’ne (see the sidebar on page 49). If the PCs are not successful now, they have the opportunity to learn who Kada’ne is later in the adventure. In the round or two that it takes a PC to listen at the railing (or if the party attempts to bypass the balcony on their way to the stairs), the spectral githyanki shades guarding this place rise from the rubble.
Tactics The githyanki shades take on lightly armored foes with their ghost swords, making spirit rake attacks against heavily armored combatants or those staying at the edge of the fray. Once they slow an enemy with bladed wrath, they use soul strike to devastate it, and follow that with spirit rake. The warmongers target strikers and defenders with telekinetic crush and silver greatsword attacks. A warmonger reserves soulsword burst until two or more PCs are adjacent to it, but it catches the githyanki shades in the burst if it can. The githyanki mindlasher stays at the edge of the fray, targeting well-armored PCs with psychic slam and mind crush attacks. It maintains cover behind the fallen statues, entering melee only if pressed. The githyanki shades focus their attacks on the PCs as the creatures that drew them into combat. However, a shade that finds a githyanki between it and a PC target attacks the closer target fifty percent of the time. If the PCs move down to the lower chamber, the githyanki follow but the shades do not.
From the rubble, three shapes rise across the chamber—their forms that of armored githyanki warriors, but strangely translucent in the gloom. Without word or warning, they attack. Any sound of fighting reaches the githyanki below (the mindlasher and warmongers), who assume that their allies at area C1 have come under attack while returning from duty. They come up the stairs and enter combat in the third round.
June 20 09
|
D u n g e o n 16 7
61
Garaitha’s Anvil
3 Githyanki Shades (S)
Level 16 Lurker
Medium elemental humanoid (undead) XP 1,400 each Initiative +19; Senses Perception +16; darkvision HP 84; Bloodied 42 AC 30; Fortitude 26, Reflex 29, Will 28 Immune disease, poison; Resist insubstantial Speed 8, fly 8 m Ghost Sword (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon +21 vs. AC; 2d10 + 5 damage. r Spirit Rake (standard; at-will) ✦ Fear, Psychic Ranged 5; +19 vs. Will; 2d8 + 7 psychic damage, and the target takes a –2 penalty to all defenses (save ends). C Bladed Wrath (standard; at-will) ✦ Psychic, Weapon Burst 1; +21 vs. AC; 1d10 + 5 damage, and the target takes a –2 penalty to all defenses and is slowed (save ends both). M Soul Strike (standard; recharge ⚃ ⚄ ⚅) ✦ Radiant, Weapon Slowed targets only; +19 vs. Will; 4d10 + 5 radiant damage, and the target gains vulnerable 10 psychic until the end of its next turn. Alignment Unaligned Languages — (understands Common, Deep Speech) Str 21 (+13) Dex 24 (+15) Wis 16 (+11) Con 18 (+12) Int 19 (+12) Cha 21 (+13)
Features of the Area Illumination: Bright light in the lower camp; dim light in the upper statue chamber. Ceiling: 30 feet high. Balcony: The statue chamber opens up at its center 30 feet above the floor below. A stone railing around the balcony is 4 feet high. Characters who fall from the balcony take 3d10 damage. Statues and Rubble: The shattered remains of the oversized githyanki statues provide cover. The statues and their rubble are difficult terrain. It takes a DC 13 Athletics or Acrobatics check to move over a statue. Psychic energy flares unchecked within the fallen statues and their rubble. A creature that ends its turn on or adjacent to a statue or in a square of rubble takes 2d10 psychic damage and grants
Githyanki Mindlasher
Level 18 Artillery
Medium natural humanoid XP 2,000 Initiative +16 Senses Perception +20 HP 132; Bloodied 66 AC 30; Fortitude 29, Reflex 33, Will 29 Saving Throws +2 against charm effects Speed 8; see also telekinetic leap m Silver Longsword (standard; at-will) ✦ Psychic, Weapon +25 vs. AC; 2d8 + 4 psychic damage. R Telekinetic Leap (move; encounter) Ranged 10; the githyanki mindlasher or an ally within range can fly 5 squares. A Mind Crush (standard; recharge ⚄ ⚅ ) ✦ Psychic Area burst 2 within 20; +23 vs. Will; 1d10 damage, and ongoing 5 psychic damage (save ends). Aftereffect: The target gains vulnerable 10 psychic and can make only basic attacks (save ends). A Psychic Slam (standard; at-will) ✦ Psychic Area burst 2 within 10; +23 vs. Will; 2d8 psychic damage, and the target is knocked prone. Alignment Evil Languages Common, Deep Speech Skills History +11, Insight +12 Str 22 (+15) Dex 25 (+16) Wis 22 (+15) Con 18 (+13) Int 20 (+14) Cha 14 (+11) Equipment silver longsword
combat advantage to all adjacent creatures until the beginning of its next turn. The githyanki shades are immune to this effect. Stairs: The steep stairs descending to the level below are difficult terrain. Bodies: The bodies of dead githyanki strewn throughout the statue chamber are difficult terrain. Bedrolls: Bedrolls spread throughout the camp in the lower chamber are difficult terrain. Fire Pits: These are difficult terrain. Any creature that enters a fire pit takes 1d8 + 5 fire damage. Secret Door: This hidden door requires a DC 20 Perception check to spot and a DC 25 Thievery or Strength check to open.
3 Githyanki Warmongers
Level 17 Soldier
Medium natural humanoid XP 1,600 each Initiative +15 Senses Perception +11 HP 162; Bloodied 81 AC 33; Fortitude 29, Reflex 31, Will 29 Saving Throws +2 against charm effects Speed 6; see also telekinetic leap m Silver Greatsword (standard; at-will) ✦ Psychic, Weapon +24 vs. AC; 2d10 damage plus 1d10 psychic damage, plus 3d8 extra psychic damage if the target is immobilized or stunned. R Telekinetic Crush (standard; recharge ⚄ ⚅) Ranged 5; Medium or smaller target; +22 vs. Fortitude; 1d10 damage, and the target is immobilized (save ends). R Telekinetic Leap (move; encounter) Ranged 10; the githyanki warrior or an ally within range can fly 5 squares. C Soulsword Burst (standard; requires silver greatsword; encounter) ✦ Psychic, Weapon Close burst 1; +22 vs. Will; 3d10 damage, and the target takes ongoing 5 psychic damage and is stunned (save ends both). Alignment Evil Languages Common, Deep Speech Str 24 (+15) Dex 21 (+13) Wis 17 (+11) Con 18 (+12) Int 16 (+11) Cha 21 (+13) Equipment plate armor, silver greatsword
June 20 09
|
D u n g e o n 16 7
62
Garaitha’s Anvil
C3: Prisoners of Chanhiir
Perception Check DC 20: Both fomorians wear glowing sigils on their wrists—a sword wrapped in an outline of white flame.
Encounter Level 17 (9,600 XP)
Insight Check DC 20: The fomorians keep an uneasy eye on the shifting yellow pillars as they threaten the githyanki, but the prisoners show no fear.
Setup 2 fomorian painbringers (P) 10 githyanki prisoners (G) What was once a training ground for the hundred githyanki who made Chanhiir their home is now a holding area for the survivors of the assault. The githyanki’s fomorian servants stand guard. As the PCs approach this area, read: The stench of filth becomes stronger as you move along the corridor. The dull and intermittent pounding of steel on stone rises ahead, along with a harsh voice shouting. “You like that, small ones? You keep your silence, you all meet the same fate!” When the PCs can see into this area, read: A ruined martial training hall is lined with shattered weapon racks and filled with what appear to be pillars of yellow-white light extending floor to ceiling. These shift slowly, drifting across the chamber as they flare and fade. In the haze of light, ten githyanki in tattered robes are roped together hand and foot and huddled along one wall. Two hulking fomorians pace before them, one clubbing the sodden remains of a githyanki corpse with its flail.
The fomorians have been charged with convincing the githyanki to reveal the secret of disabling the wards on the World Gate (see the next section). The giants are distracted, and the PCs have a chance to attack with surprise. 2 Fomorian (P) Painbringers
Level 19 Elite Controller
Huge fey humanoid (giant) XP 4,800 each Initiative +8 Senses Perception +16; truesight 6 HP 362; Bloodied 181 AC 35; Fortitude 35, Reflex 29, Will 33 Saving Throws +2 Speed 8 Action Points 1 m Flail (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon Reach 3; +24 vs. AC; 2d6 + 7 damage; see also studied foe. R Evil Eye (minor; at-will) Ranged 5; +22 vs. Will; the target takes 3d6 + 5 damage whenever it damages the fomorian painbringer. If the painbringer uses this power against a new target, the previous target is no longer affected. R Funnel Pain (standard; at-will) Ranged 8; +22 vs. Will; 4d6 + 5 damage; see also studied foe. C Painful Visions (minor; encounter) Close burst 4; +22 vs. Will; the target is dazed (save ends); see also studied foe. Studied Foe The fomorian painbringer gains a +2 bonus to attack rolls against a creature affected by its evil eye power. Alignment Evil Languages Elven, Deep Speech Skills Intimidate +19 Str 24 (+16) Dex 9 (+8) Wis 14 (+11) Con 21 (+14) Int 12 (+10) Cha 21 (+14) Equipment chainmail, flail June 20 09
|
D u n g e o n 16 7
63
Garaitha’s Anvil
Tactics The prisoners flatten against the nearest wall, avoiding the PCs, the fomorians, and the pillars of light. They attempt to free themselves as they warily watch the fray. If the PCs engage the githyanki, see the sidebar on page 65. The fomorian painbringers avoid being flanked, keeping the pillars of light between them and the PCs. A painbringer uses its evil eye against creatures that attack it, making funnel pain attacks against heavily armored PCs and using painful visions if hemmed in by two or more foes.
Development The burning sigils on the fomorians are a thing the PCs have never seen before. See “The Whitefire Mark” (page 45) for more information. When the fight here is done, speaking with the prisoners and securing the doors out of this area are likely to be the PCs’ first priorities. See “The Waiting Game,” below, and “The Chanhiiri” also below.
The Waiting Game The stone doors leading out of this area open easily, as do the identical doors at the end of the connecting passageway. A wide gap where the second doors close allows the PCs to see into area C4 without having to open them. (The creatures there are not as shown on the Encounter C4 tactical map. Likewise, the bodies on the map are not present yet. See the next encounter for more information.)
The chamber beyond the doors has the look of an auditorium or shrine, with wide terraces that might be some sort of amphitheater seating stepping down from the walls. Scattered across the terraces, a number of wide altars blaze with a searing white flame. At the center of the floor, a raised dais holds a permanent teleportation circle. However, this is sealed in behind a sphere of shimmering magical force that sends tendrils of white light pulsing into the room. The sphere of light is the focus of the githyanki that fill this area, who are milling around the dais and arguing among themselves. Perception Check DC 13: The githyanki are spaced out warily around the pulsing sphere, as if they fear getting too close. DC 20: The githyanki are arguing over their inability to overcome the ward protecting the teleportation circle. One talks of giving the fomorians time to work a harsher interrogation, but other githyanki fear Kada’ne’s wrath if the high priests aren’t returned to the anvil in good time.
space occupied by a pillar of light takes 2d10 radiant damage, slides 4 squares in a random direction away from the pillar, and is knocked prone. If a pillar slides a creature into the area of another pillar, the original slide ends and the creature suffers the effect of the new pillar. Rubble: These areas of loose scree are difficult terrain. Shattered Weapon Racks: The githyanki invaders destroyed the temple’s armaments, making these areas difficult terrain. Additionally, a character knocked prone in the area of a shattered weapon rack must make a DC 20 Acrobatics check or take 1d8 damage from shards, spikes, and shattered blades. Doors: These stone double doors are closed, preventing the sound of combat in this area from reaching area C4.
The PCs learn the meaning of “the anvil” later in the adventure.
Features of the Area Illumination: The pillars of light shed bright light throughout the area. Ceiling: 40 feet high. Pillars of Light: Astral energy has been summoned and bound to this place by githyanki priests, creating a challenging combat ground. After the turn of the last creature in the initiative order, each pillar of light shifts 1d4 squares in a random direction. A creature that begins its turn adjacent to a pillar of light takes 1d10 radiant damage and slides 2 squares in a random direction away from the pillar. A creature that moves through or begins its turn in the
June 20 09
|
D u n g e o n 16 7
64
Garaitha’s Anvil
The Chanhiiri Assuming the PCs did not engage them, the githyanki prisoners have freed themselves from their bonds by the time combat ends. However, if they are approached and spoken to in Common or Deep Speech, only their leader Talanee responds. The githyanki prisoners show signs of having been repeatedly beaten. An elderly female steps forward with a pronounced limp. “I am Talanee,” she says. “You have our thanks for your aid, but you must leave this place. The injury done to our temple must be addressed, but this battle is not yours.” The PCs are likely to be suspicious of Talanee and her followers, but the githyanki are equally wary. However, they answer a few basic questions in gratitude for having been freed. Who are you? “We are the Chanhiiri, the faithful of the Fane of Chanhiir.” Who are the other githyanki? “They are the forces of Zetch’r’r the False. They have claimed this fane and bestowed on the Chanhiiri the sentence of death.” How do you plan to defeat the invaders? “The destiny of our people is struggle, and we will die free as we lived if that is our fate.” The insular Chanhiiri do not give up more information easily. Each item below requires a DC 25 Diplomacy check. Each PC can make only one check, and the PCs cannot aid each other. With each successful check, read the most appropriate piece of information for the PC’s line of questioning. Any further questioning must wait until “Secrets of the Fane,” page 44. (Even with a successful check, there
are things Talanee does not speak of—specifically, the Chanhiiri’s loyalty to Vlaakith and the connection between the fane and the Well of Worlds.) What happened here? Why are you fighting the other githyanki? “The usurper Zetch’r’r reshapes the will and destiny of the githyanki in the name of his own ambition. We reject that ambition, for which our people name us traitors.” What is the Fane of Chanhiir? “This temple is an ancient site—old as the githyanki empire. Chanhiir, a legendary githyanki mage, was its first high priest and founder. His faithful numbered nearly a hundred before Zetch’r’r’s force despoiled this place.” Why were you left alive? “We will be returned to Tu’narath, where our execution will act as a warning to all those who oppose Zetch’r’r’s rule.” Why are the invaders still here? Why were the fomorians threatening you? “There is power here that Zetch’r’r’s curs yearn to control, but its secrets are ours. Neither threat nor death will take our knowledge from us.”
Reluctant Allies The Chanhiiri’s immediate goal is to avenge their dead by taking on the invaders in area C4. Outnumbered as they are, they have no hope of winning that battle, but these stoics do not fear the death that awaits them. However, they are not suicidal, and they are willing to accept assistance if the PCs offer it. However, if the party tarries here for more than 5 minutes, Talanee and the others head immediately for the portal hall. If the PCs try to stop them, see the “Shoot First, Ask Questions Later” sidebar. The PCs can take a short rest while they speak to Talanee. The githyanki in area C4 are preoccupied
with their work there, and they do not enter this chamber during that time. The PCs’ movement into the next encounter triggers the appearance of the Freeriders in the same area. When the PCs are ready to move (or if the Chanhiiri force their hand), go to the next page.
Shoot First, Ask Questions Later This section of the adventure assumes that the PCs establish a detente (however tenuous) with the Chanhiiri. However, if the party isn’t diplomatically inclined, don’t labor the point. If Talanee and the other surviving priests are attacked or cornered, they fight back. Talanee is a githyanki astraan (use the statistics block from Encounter W2), while her followers include five githyanki warmongers (Encounter C2) and four githyanki blademasters (Encounter C4). Nonminions have half their normal hit points to reflect the harsh treatment they have received. The Chanhiiri take a –2 penalty to all defenses for their lack of armor and poor physical condition. In the first round of combat, a Chanhiiri githyanki deals 1d6 + 2 damage with melee attacks as it fights unarmed. In subsequent rounds, the githyanki fall back to the destroyed weapon racks and grab damaged versions of their normal weapons that deal half damage. Once they have weapons in hand, the Chanhiiri fight their way through to area C4, then take on the githyanki there. The party can make a single DC 27 Diplomacy check to cease hostilities with the Chanhiiri. Up to two PCs can aid the character making the check.
June 20 09
|
D u n g e o n 16 7
65
Garaitha’s Anvil
C4: Portal Hall
When the PCs can see into the chamber, read:
Encounter Level 18 (11,200 XP)
Before the stairs on the far side of the hall, Megan Swiftblade stands with the severed head of a githyanki captain clutched by the hair. The Freeriders are bloodied but defiant behind her, the githyanki in the chamber spreading out in preparation for attack.
Cross-Fire As the PCs have worked their way through Chanhiir, Megan Swiftblade and the Freeriders have cut their own path through the githyanki invaders from the opposite cavern entrance. Whether the PCs wait to enter this area or come through immediately from Encounter C3, the Freeriders are there to meet them. If the PCs haven’t already investigated the connecting passage and the doors between areas C3 and C4, incorporate the read-aloud text from the previous encounter as appropriate. If the PCs have allied themselves with the Chanhiiri, Talanee and the others follow the party’s lead as regards entering this area. However, if the previous encounter ended in a confrontation with the priests, this encounter likely begins with the Chanhiiri bursting through the doors at the same time the Freeriders attack from the other direction. Rework the readaloud text in this section accordingly.
Despite Megan’s bravado, the Freeriders are vastly outnumbered and have depleted most of their resources to make it this far. If the PCs opened the doors, the githyanki in this area are aware of their presence. If they looked through the gap in the doors, they can surprise the distracted githyanki.
As the PCs or the Chanhiiri prepare to enter this area, read: From beyond the second set of double doors comes a sudden shout of alarm and the sounds of combat. Over the clash of swords and the shrieks of dying githyanki, the familiar voice of Megan Swiftblade rings out. “You laid claim to Elsir Vale, but our lands still stand free! Our people will not kneel to you, mudskin, nor will the wider world you covet! We will not fall!”
June 20 09
|
D u n g e o n 16 7
66
Garaitha’s Anvil
Setup 5 Freeriders (F) 12 githyanki blademasters (B) 2 githyanki reavers (R) 2 githyanki warmongers (W) With the githyanki invaders hemmed in by the Free riders, the PCs, and the Chanhiiri, the portal hall around the World Gate becomes a final battleground.
Tactics The githyanki warmongers make telekinetic crush attacks against the closest PCs, then focus silver greatsword attacks against immobilized foes. They repeat that tactic as often as telekinetic crush recharges, saving soulsword burst until they can affect three or more foes. The githyanki reavers focus on lightly armored PCs in the hope of a quick kill. Each holds its reaving strike until it is flanking with a blademaster for combat advantage. The githyanki blademasters flank with each other, the warmongers, or the reavers for combat advantage. All the githyanki know to stay away from the force sphere, but they do their best to immobilize or stun PCs within its aura (see “Features of the Area”). They reserve their flying powers until they are forced into the sphere, allowing them to flee it without provoking opportunity attacks.
12 Githyanki (B) Blademasters
Level 17 Minion Skirmisher
Medium natural humanoid XP 400 each Initiative +15 Senses Perception +9 HP 1; a missed attack never damages a minion. AC 28; Fortitude 25, Reflex 23, Will 22 Saving Throws +2 against charm effects Speed 5; see also telekinetic jump m Silver Longsword (standard; at-will) ✦ Psychic, Weapon +22 vs. AC; 8 psychic damage. M Twin Longsword Strike (standard; requires combat advantage against the target; at-will) ✦ Psychic, Weapon +22 vs. AC; 12 psychic damage Telekinetic Jump (move; encounter) The githyanki blademaster flies 5 squares. Alignment Evil Languages Common, Deep Speech Str 24 (+15) Dex 21 (+13) Wis 12 (+9) Con 15 (+10) Int 13 (+9) Cha 21 (+13) Equipment plate armor, 2 silver longswords
2 Githyanki Reavers (R)
Level 17 Brute
Medium natural humanoid XP 1,600 each Initiative +13 Senses Perception +10 HP 197; Bloodied 98 AC 29; Fortitude 30, Reflex 28, Will 28 Saving Throws +2 against charm effects Speed 5; see also telekinetic leap m Silver Fullblade (standard; at-will) ✦ Psychic, Weapon +20 vs. AC; 2d12 + 4 (crit 2d12 + 28) plus 1d6 psychic damage, plus an extra 3d6 psychic damage if the target is immobilized. M Reaving Strike (standard; encounter) ✦ Psychic, Reliable, Weapon +18 vs. Fortitude; 3d12 + 4 damage plus 1d6 psychic damage, and the target is immobilized (save ends). R Telekinetic Leap (move; encounter) Ranged 10; the githyanki reaver or an ally within range can fly 5 squares. Alignment Evil Languages Common, Deep Speech Str 24 (+15) Dex 21 (+13) Wis 14 (+10) Con 17 (+11) Int 15 (+10) Cha 21 (+13) Equipment plate armor, silver fullblade
Allied Forces Given the time and complexity involved in doing so, it is not intended that you play out the attacks of the Freeriders and the Chanhiiri in this encounter. Instead, assume that the Freeriders and the Chanhiiri focus on the githyanki minions in the portal hall while the PCs take on the more potent threats of the warmongers and the reavers. Roll initiative for the Freeriders and the Chanhiiri as separate groups. Each round on its initiative, a group takes out 1d4 – 1 githyanki blademaster minions. On the invaders’ initiative, the githyanki fighting Talanee and her followers take out 1d3 – 1 Chanhiiri minions. For the purpose of this combat, assume that Talanee, her nonminion followers, and the Freeriders all survive as long as the PCs do. (See the sidebar on page 65 for information on Talanee and her followers.) If the combat goes on long enough that the Freeriders and the Chanhiiri run out of minions to kill, have reinforcements arrive through the door the Freeriders entered through—a mix of blademasters and githyanki psychic archers (see Encounter G6). These are additional githyanki that the Freeriders bypassed in one of the closed chambers in the other part of the temple. When the fight is done, award the PCs full experience for all creatures noted in the setup for the encounter, even those defeated by the Freeriders and the Chanhiiri.
June 20 09
|
D u n g e o n 16 7
67
Garaitha’s Anvil
2 Githyanki Warmongers (W)
Level 17 Soldier
Medium natural humanoid XP 1,600 each Initiative +15 Senses Perception +11 HP 162; Bloodied 81 AC 33; Fortitude 29, Reflex 31, Will 29 Saving Throws +2 against charm effects Speed 6; see also telekinetic leap m Silver Greatsword (standard; at-will) ✦ Psychic, Weapon +24 vs. AC; 2d10 damage plus 1d10 psychic damage, plus 3d8 extra psychic damage if the target is immobilized or stunned. R Telekinetic Crush (standard; recharge ⚄ ⚅) Ranged 5; Medium or smaller target; +22 vs. Fortitude; 1d10 damage, and the target is immobilized (save ends). R Telekinetic Leap (move; encounter) Ranged 10; the githyanki warrior or an ally within range can fly 5 squares. C Soulsword Burst (standard; requires silver greatsword; encounter) ✦ Psychic, Weapon Close burst 1; +22 vs. Will; 3d10 damage, and the target takes ongoing 5 psychic damage and is stunned (save ends both). Alignment Evil Languages Common, Deep Speech Str 24 (+15) Dex 21 (+13) Wis 17 (+11) Con 18 (+12) Int 16 (+11) Cha 21 (+13) Equipment plate armor, silver greatsword
Features of the Area Illumination: The burning altars fill the chamber with bright light. Ceiling: 40 feet high from the floor of the chamber; 30 feet from the highest terrace along the wall. Terraces: The chamber is cut into wide tiers of amphitheater seating. These 3-foot-high oversized steps can be descended at full speed, but moving up a tier requires either 1 additional square of movement or a DC 10 Athletics check. Stairs: The stairs leading down through the tiers are normal terrain. Dais: The dais at the center of the chamber is 3 feet high. It costs 1 extra square of movement to hop up on the dais.
Bodies: The bodies of dead githyanki killed by the Freeriders are difficult terrain. Altars: These wide stone altars burn with magical fire fueled by the essence of the Astral Sea. The 3-foot-high altars require a DC 13 Athletics check to jump or climb across. However, a creature that begins its turn adjacent to or passes over an altar takes 1d10 fire and radiant damage. A creature that begins its turn on an altar takes 2d10 fire and radiant damage and is dazed until the end of its turn. Force Sphere: Like the astral vents in Encounter C1, the force sphere protecting the teleportation circle is a defensive ward of the temple that the invading githyanki cannot shut down. The tendrils of energy that lash out into the room act as an aura 4 centered on the sphere (marked by a dotted line on the tactical map). A creature that starts and ends its turn within the aura is struck by a tendril of energy that deals 1d8 psychic damage and gives it vulnerable 5 psychic (save ends). A creature that attempts to move into the sphere takes 2d8 psychic damage and is pushed 3 squares and knocked prone. Treasure: If you place treasure parcels in this area, double the amount of treasure found and award half to the Freeriders, allowing the PCs to retain the correct amount. The Freeriders have claimed their own treasure as they fought their way into the temple and need no share of anything the PCs found in earlier encounters.
June 20 09
|
D u n g e o n 16 7
68
Garaitha’s Anvil
W1: Sovereign Gate Encounter Level 17 (8,000 XP)
Setup Astral shade The domed chamber into which the PCs step by way of the World Gate is infused with a haze of white light—astral essence coalescing around the Sovereign Gate.
When the PCs step through the World Gate in the fane of Chanhiir, read: The domed chamber into which you are transported is a haze of white light beyond which the walls are a faint blur. The brightness here drives into your eyes like knives, a current of arcane power twisting through you. The portal platform extends to a closed doorway directly ahead, an astral haze shimmering to either side like a wide pool of gently rippling water. See “Features of the Area” for information on the effect of the white light and the astral haze that surrounds the platform. Perception Check DC 25: The haze of white light ripples on the platform ahead as a shapeless creature slowly materializing there. The astral shade is a wraithlike apparition of astral essence, featureless and silent. Although the PCs’ whitefire marks grant them access to the Well of Worlds, this guardian creature attacks any nongithyanki not in the company of a githyanki escort. If the PCs do not detect it, the astral shade attacks with surprise when the first character moves more than halfway toward the doors. In addition to this threat, the PCs are hindered by a flare-up of astral energy that infects their whitefire marks. See the “Tested by Fire” sidebar for information.
Tactics The astral shade targets the closest PCs with astral chains and uses radiant ray to engage other PCs and slide them into the astral haze. It invokes astral shockwave early, in case the power is recharged by a PC who discovers its vulnerability.
Astral Shade
Level 17 Solo Lurker
Large immortal humanoid XP 8,000 Initiative +19 Senses Perception +11; blindsight 10, darkvision HP 448; Bloodied 224 AC 29; Fortitude 28, Reflex 30, Will 28 Immune disease, poison; Resist insubstantial; Vulnerable force (the next attack against the astral shade ignores its insubstantial) Saving Throws +5 Speed fly 10 (hover), teleport 6; phasing Action Points 2 m Astral Slam (standard; at-will) ✦ Radiant +20 vs. Fortitude; 3d8 + 4 radiant damage and the target gains vulnerable 10 to radiant damage until the end of the astral shade’s next turn. If the astral shade is bloodied, the target is also restrained (save ends). r Radiant Ray (minor; at-will) ✦ Radiant One or two targets; +22 vs. Reflex; 3d8 radiant damage, and the target slides 1 square. If the astral shade is bloodied, the attack instead deals 3d8 + 5 radiant damage and slides the target 2 squares. M Wrathful Strike (immediate reaction; when damaged by an attack; at-will) The astral shade teleports 4 squares and makes an astral slam attack or a radiant ray attack. C Astral Shockwave (standard; recharges when the astral shade takes force damage) ✦ Force Close burst 3; +20 vs. Reflex; 3d8 + 5 force damage and the target is pushed 5 squares. C Radiant Chains (standard; recharge ⚄ ⚅) ✦ Radiant Close burst 3; +20 vs. Fortitude; 3d8 + 5 radiant damage and the target is immobilized (save ends). Alignment Unaligned Languages Common Skills Stealth +20 Str 21 (+13) Dex 24 (+15) Wis 16 (+11) Con 16 (+11) Int 18 (+12) Cha 21 (+13)
If it does not have to move, the astral shade takes two minor actions per round to make four radiant ray attacks in addition to its melee or close attack. It spends its action points only on rounds in which it does not move, making four radiant ray attacks and two radiant chains or astral shockwave attacks.
June 20 09
|
D u n g e o n 16 7
69
Garaitha’s Anvil
Development
Features of the Area
The astral shade pursues the PCs into any part of the Well of Worlds. The githyanki in area W2 cannot hear the sounds of combat in this area, but they immediately notice any fight that spills past the doors. They grab up weapons and join the fray alongside the astral shade 3 rounds later, making for a memorable (and possibly lethal) combined encounter.
Illumination: Astral energy infusing this area fills the chamber with bright light. However, the intensity of that light has a debilitating effect on creatures that linger here. A creature can ignore the effect of the light for a number of rounds equal to its Constitution modifier (minimum 1 round). Thereafter, creatures with normal vision or low-light vision treat all other creatures in the area as if they had concealment. Creatures with darkvision treat all creatures in the area as if they had total concealment. Creatures closing or covering their eyes gain no respite from the light. Blindsight, tremorsense, and powers or other effects that allow a creature to ignore concealment or total concealment work normally to counteract this effect.
Tested by Fire The whitefire marks that allow servants of the githyanki to access the Well of Worlds exact a cost that the PCs are heretofore unaware of. Starting in the third round after the party arrives here, the planar energy coursing through the Well of Worlds causes each PC’s sigil to flare up in a blaze of astral fire. At the beginning of each of his or her turns, a PC has a chance to overcome this effect with a DC 25 Arcana or Endurance check. On a failed check, the PC takes 2d8 damage and is dazed until the end of his or her turn. Once the PC makes a successful check, he or she is no longer affected, although the sigils continue to burn brighter while the party remains in the Well of Worlds. This effect occurs throughout the Well of Worlds, so that a PC must continue to make checks even after this encounter is over until he or she overcomes the affect.
Ceiling: The dome of the ceiling rises to a height of 30 feet in the center of the chamber. Platform: A platform of white stone suspended in the center of the dome runs from the teleport circle to the door. The platform has no edge or railing. Creatures knocked off the platform do not fall, but are suspended in the haze of astral energy that fills the chamber. Teleportation Circle: The Sovereign Gate is a permanent teleportation circle and true portal that functions only for full-blooded githyanki or creatures that possess a whitefire mark. See “The Sovereign Gate” on page 51 for more information. Astral Haze: The haze of astral energy filling the chamber is hazardous to any creatures within it, including those knocked off the platform and those that fly more than 10 feet above or away from the platform. A creature that begins its turn in the astral haze must make a DC 20 Endurance check. With a successful check, a creature takes 1d10 radiant damage. On a failed check, the creature takes 2d10 radiant damage and is dazed until the beginning of its next turn. The astral shade is immune to these effects. Though creatures do not fall within it, the astral haze is empty space that offers no resistance necessary for movement. Creatures with a fly speed can move through the astral haze normally. Other characters knocked into the astral haze must be pulled back to the platform.
June 20 09
|
D u n g e o n 16 7
70
Garaitha’s Anvil
W2: Githyanki Bivouac Encounter Level 18 (11,000 XP)
Setup Githyanki astraan (A) 2 githyanki mindlashers (M) 3 githyanki warmongers (W) Elite githyanki warriors (including those leading the assault on the world) use this bivouac to draw on the energy of the Well of Worlds, replenishing their resources before heading back into the fray. When the PCs first see into this area, read: The curved wall of this huge chamber slowly reveals what appears to be some sort of camp. Well-used leather couches are spread across the stone floor between glowing crystal pillars. From ahead comes the sound of gently falling water. Perception Check DC 20: Over the sound of water, faint voices rise. A PC who understands Deep Speech recognizes the voices of githyanki, but they are too far away to be understood. When the PCs can see the pool at the far side of this area, read: At the head of the chamber, the camp opens up around a wide pool. Water pours into it from an ornate fountainhead. A half-dozen githyanki sit around its edge, talking quietly.
This githyanki strike team is currently engaged in an operation in one of the more remote Coalition regions. They have no reason to fear an attack, and they are distracted as the party approaches.
Tactics Only the astraan has a weapon at hand when combat begins. In the first round, the warmongers forego attacks to rush to their gear and seize their silver greatswords. The mindlashers rely on their nonweapon attacks. The astraan stays out of melee, relying on telekinetic blast and astral fire attacks to take care of foes attempting to close. If possible, the astraan uses telekinetic blast to target a PC adjacent to the pool, dropping the target into the water. The mindlashers double-team the same targets in the hope of a quick kill, making mind crush attacks, then switching to psychic slam to maximize psychic damage dealt. After retrieving weapons, the warmongers take on the strongest-looking melee combatants, spacing out their soulsword burst attacks and ganging up on stunned foes. (The warmongers’ statistics block has been updated to reflect their lack of armor.) If the PCs flee this area, half the surviving githyanki pursue while the other half take the opposite route into Encounter W3. The githyanki surround the PCs as they join their eldritch giant allies in that fight.
Githyanki Astraan (A)
Level 16 Controller
Medium natural humanoid XP 1,400 Initiative +13 Senses Perception +17 HP 155; Bloodied 77; see also astral ward AC 30; Fortitude 27, Reflex 30, Will 28; see also astral ward Speed 8 m Silver Dagger (standard; at-will) ✦ Psychic, Weapon +21 vs. AC; 2d4 + 4 psychic damage, and the target is stunned (save ends). r Telekinetic Strike (standard; at-will) ✦ Force Ranged 20; +20 vs. Reflex; 2d10 + 6 force damage and slide the target 1 square. R Telekinetic Blast (standard; recharge ⚃ ⚄ ⚅ ) Ranged sight; one or two targets; +20 vs. Fortitude; the target is wrenched from the ground and hurled up to 20 feet into the air. A target that strikes a ceiling or other solid object takes 1d10 damage. The target then falls back to the ground into an unoccupied space within 1 square of its original space (the astraan’s choice), taking falling damage as normal. R Telekinetic Leap (move; encounter) Ranged 10; the githyanki astraan or an ally within range can fly 5 squares. A Astral Fire (standard; at-will) ✦ Cold, Fire Area burst 2 within 10; +20 vs. Reflex; 2d6 + 5 cold and fire damage, and the area of the attack becomes difficult terrain until the end of the encounter. Astral Ward (immediate interrupt, when the githyanki astraan would be hit by a melee attack while bloodied; encounter) The githyanki astraan makes a silver dagger attack against the triggering attacker and gains a +2 bonus to all defenses until the end of its next turn. Alignment Evil Languages Common, Deep Speech Skills Arcana +20, Insight +17 Str 18 (+12) Dex 20 (+13) Wis 19 (+12) Con 19 (+12) Int 24 (+15) Cha 21 (+13) Equipment silver dagger
Perception Check DC 13: At the couches beyond where the githyanki sit, weapons, armor, and combat gear are piled high. While these are clearly combat troops, they look ill-prepared for a fight at present.
June 20 09
|
D u n g e o n 16 7
71
Garaitha’s Anvil
2 Githyanki Mindlashers (M)
Level 18 Artillery
Medium natural humanoid XP 2,400 each Initiative +16 Senses Perception +20 HP 132; Bloodied 66 AC 30; Fortitude 29, Reflex 33, Will 29 Saving Throws +2 against charm effects Speed 8; see also telekinetic leap m Silver Longsword (standard; at-will) ✦ Psychic, Weapon +25 vs. AC; 2d8 + 4 psychic damage. R Telekinetic Leap (move; encounter) Ranged 10; the githyanki mindlasher or an ally within range can fly 5 squares. A Mind Crush (standard; recharge ⚄ ⚅ ) ✦ Psychic Area burst 2 within 20; +23 vs. Will; 1d10 damage, and ongoing 5 psychic damage (save ends). Aftereffect: The target gains vulnerable 10 psychic and can make only basic attacks (save ends). A Psychic Slam (standard; at-will) ✦ Psychic Area burst 2 within 10; +23 vs. Will; 2d8 psychic damage, and the target is knocked prone. Alignment Evil Languages Common, Deep Speech Skills History +11, Insight +12 Str 22 (+15) Dex 25 (+16) Wis 22 (+15) Con 18 (+13) Int 20 (+14) Cha 14 (+11) Equipment silver longsword
Features of the Area Illumination: The glowing crystal pillars fill the area with bright light. Ceiling: 20 feet high. Pool: This crystal-clear pool is imbued with powerful healing magic made use of by githyanki passing through the Well of Worlds. Creatures who drink from the pool while taking a short rest gain the benefit of an extended rest instead. The pool is attuned to the githyanki, who can make repeated use of it. Other creatures (even those possessing a whitefire mark) disrupt the pool’s magic. Up to five such creatures can make use of the pool, after which it takes 24 hours to recharge. (Adjust this number based on the number of characters in the party if necessary.)
3 Githyanki Warmongers (W)
Level 17 Soldier
Medium natural humanoid XP 1,600 each Initiative +15 Senses Perception +11 HP 162; Bloodied 81 AC 28; Fortitude 29, Reflex 33, Will 29 Saving Throws +2 against charm effects Speed 8; see also telekinetic leap m Silver Greatsword (standard; at-will) ✦ Psychic, Weapon +24 vs. AC; 2d10 damage plus 1d10 psychic damage, plus 3d8 extra psychic damage if the target is immobilized or stunned. R Telekinetic Crush (standard; recharge ⚄ ⚅) Ranged 5; Medium or smaller target; +22 vs. Fortitude; 1d10 damage, and the target is immobilized (save ends). R Telekinetic Leap (move; encounter) Ranged 10; the githyanki warrior or an ally within range can fly 5 squares. C Soulsword Burst (standard; requires silver greatsword; encounter) ✦ Psychic, Weapon Close burst 1; +22 vs. Will; 3d10 damage, and the target takes ongoing 5 psychic damage and is stunned (save ends both). Alignment Evil Languages Common, Deep Speech Str 24 (+15) Dex 21 (+13) Wis 17 (+11) Con 18 (+12) Int 16 (+11) Cha 21 (+13) Equipment plate armor, silver greatsword
One for the Road With a DC 30 Arcana check, a character can bottle one dose of the pool’s water in a way that retains its magical essence for 24 hours. These unique potions can be used by the PCs during Part Three of the adventure, when they will be unable to take an extended rest. Further use of the pool in this way remains entirely at your discretion. If access to this magic seems likely to be unbalancing, simply say that shutting down the work the githyanki have done to expand the effect of the Well of Worlds has diminished the pool’s power.
Despite its healing properties, the energy of the pool is too potent for prolonged exposure. A creature that begins its turn in the pool takes 2d10 damage and loses 1 healing surge. Crystal Pillars: These pillars run from floor to ceiling and provide cover. Couches: Leather couches spread throughout the chamber are used by githyanki troops passing through the Well of Worlds. A couch provides cover. It costs 1 additional square of movement to hop up on a couch. A character can make a DC 10 Strength check to tip over a couch, which then grants superior cover.
June 20 09
|
D u n g e o n 16 7
72
Garaitha’s Anvil
W3: Hall of Shards Encounter Level 16 (7,200 XP)
Setup 2 eldritch giants (G) This wide chamber is the nexus point through which planar energy is funneled to fuel the astral vortex at the heart of the Well of Worlds. The eldritch giants here are servants of the githyanki, and they bear the same whitefire mark as the fomorians in the temple. Both are ritualists engaged in channeling the power of the Well of Words into the wider githyanki portal network. When the PCs can see into this area, read: White light ahead marks the boundary of a circular chamber whose floor and ceiling are composed of huge crystal shards. Pure planar energy surges within the shards, which focus and hone it like lenses into twin pulsing spheres of white light at the bottom and top of the chamber. Twin platforms run along the outer walls of this hall of shards, carved of the same white stone as the wider bridge running between sealed doors at the chamber’s center. On the bridge, two giants sit cross-legged as if in meditation. Both have their backs turned to you as they pore over what appear to be open ritual books. Violet-skinned and hairless, these creatures are unarmed and unarmored, their bare flesh covered with runic tattoos glowing red and black. Perception Check DC 20: Hidden within the pulsing gleam of their dark tattoos, the whitefire mark burns at both giants’ wrists.
2 Eldritch Giants (G) Level 18 Skirmisher
Large fey humanoid (giant) XP 2,000 each Initiative +12 Senses Perception +20; low-light vision HP 171; Bloodied 85 AC 32; Fortitude 29, Reflex 31, Will 33 Resist 10 force Saving Throws +5 against charm effects Speed 8, teleport 6 m Eldritch Blade (standard; at-will) ✦ Force, Weapon Reach 2; +21 vs. Reflex; 3d6 + 7 force damage. r Force Missile (standard; at-will) ✦ Force Ranged 20; +21 vs. Reflex; 2d6 + 7 force damage. C Sweeping Sword (standard; encounter) ✦ Force, Weapon Close blast 2; +21 vs. AC; 3d6 + 7 force damage, and the target is knocked prone. Special: When charging, the eldritch giant can use this power in place of a melee basic attack. Consume Magic (minor 1/round; at-will) Targets an adjacent conjuration or zone created by an enemy; +21 vs. the Will of the creator of the conjuration or zone; the conjuration or zone is destroyed, and its effects end. The eldritch giant’s attacks deal 3d6 extra force damage until the end of its next turn. Eldritch Field (minor; recharge ⚄ ⚅) ✦ Zone Close blast 5; the blast creates a zone of rippling magic that lasts until the end of the encounter or until the eldritch giant uses this power again. The zone is difficult terrain, and the giant’s attacks deal 1d6 extra force damage against creatures within the zone. Alignment Evil Languages Elven, Giant Skills Arcana +21, Insight +20 Str 21 (+14) Dex 12 (+10) Wis 22 (+15) Con 19 (+13) Int 24 (+16) Cha 13 (+10)
Astral Nexus Level 17 Elite Blaster Hazard XP 3,200 Tendrils of white light begin to peel off where the crystal shards focus planar energy into spheres of pure astral essence. Hazard: The flood of planar energy flares in unexpected and dangerous ways as it is focused and distilled here to pure astral essence. Perception ✦ No Perception check is necessary to notice the energy of the astral nexus. Additional Skill: Arcana ✦ DC 20: The character recognizes the nature of the astral nexus and its uncontrolled energy, gaining a +2 bonus to Arcana checks made to avoid the hazard’s effects (see “Countermeasures,” below). Trigger The first time a creature uses an arcane power in the area, the astral nexus becomes dangerously unstable and the hazard rolls initiative. Attack Standard Action Melee Target: One creature within the area Attack: +20 vs. Fortitude Hit: 2d6 + 6 damage, ongoing 5 radiant damage (save ends), and the trap makes a secondary attack. Secondary Attack: Close burst 2 centered on the primary target; +24 vs. Reflex Target: Each creature in the burst other than the primary target Hit: 1d10 + 3 damage, and the target is dazed (save ends). Countermeasures ✦ A character can make a DC 27 Arcana check as a standard action to calm the local arcane energies. If successful, the character’s space and each square adjacent to the character are considered outside the trap’s area until the end of the character’s next turn. Special ✦ The confluence of energy here plays havoc with arcane powers. Each time a creature uses an arcane power, roll 1d4 and add the result as a bonus to all attack rolls made with that use of the power. However, at the end of the attacking creature’s turn, it must make a saving throw or take 2d10 damage. Treat all an eldritch giant’s powers except its eldritch blade as arcane powers for the purpose of this effect.
June 20 09
|
D u n g e o n 16 7
73
Garaitha’s Anvil
Tactics
Features of the Area
The eldritch giants face off against the strongest-looking melee combatants with eldritch blade or sweeping sword attacks, using force missile only if all PCs attempt to stay at range. Both giants use eldritch field to pin PCs down in areas of difficult terrain, focusing their attacks on any characters stuck in the zone. Once the eldritch giants are aware of the PCs’ presence in the Well of Worlds, they pursue the party into any part of the site.
Illumination: The power of the astral nexus floods this area with white light. Ceiling: The ceiling stands 20 feet above the platforms and bridge; 40 feet above the shard floor. The ceiling is composed of the same immense crystal shards as the floor, and it has its own astral nexus at its center. Platforms and Bridge: Twin platforms run along the outer walls of the chamber while a wider bridge crosses it, all 20 feet above the shard floor. Characters who fall from a platform or a bridge take 2d10 falling damage and 1d10 damage from the razor-sharp shards. Walls: The smooth walls of the chamber extend above and below the platforms and the bridge. The walls can be climbed with a DC 20 Athletics check. Shard Floor: The immense crystal shards that make up the chamber floor are not meant to be walked upon. A creature must make a DC 13 Athletics check to balance while moving up to half speed on the shard floor; a DC 20 Athletics check while moving up to full speed. If the check fails by 5 or more, the creature falls prone at the end of its move and takes 1d10 damage.
Development In the aftermath of combat, the PCs can investigate this place. With a DC 20 Arcana check and 5 minutes study of the ritual books here, a PC recognizes that planar energy is being focused and distilled to pure astral essence by the crystal shards here. With a DC 25 Arcana check, a PC understands that the Well of Worlds powers the Sovereign Gate as some sort of master gate, with connections to githyanki portals across the Astral Sea and the planes. However, a full detailing of this site’s power is beyond the PCs’ present resources. See “The Githyanki’s Secret,” page 50, for details.
Astral Nexus: The twin spheres of astral energy at the center of the shard floor and ceiling create a hazard and play havoc with arcane powers. See the statistics block. A creature that is forced into or attempts to enter the astral nexus takes 2d10 radiant damage and is pushed 2 squares. The creature is knocked prone, takes 1d10 damage from the razor-sharp shards of the floor, and is dazed until the beginning of its next turn.
June 20 09
|
D u n g e o n 16 7
74
Garaitha’s Anvil
W4: The Stair Gate Encounter Level 17 (8,800 XP)
Setup 4 marauder planestalkers The twisting flight of stairs leading down to the heart of the Well of Worlds is blocked by a magically barred floor. In addition, four planar guardians attack any creatures except githyanki that venture here. When the PCs can see into this area, read: The doorway from the hall of shards opens upon a round chamber of pale gray stone. The air here flares with swirling currents of white light—four circular mirrors are set along the walls, their surfaces rippling like quicksilver. In the center of the chamber, the stone floor disappears to be replaced by an uneven grid of black steel bars. A stone plinth stands at the center of the barred floor, its sides set with glowing keyholes. Beneath the bars, steep ivory stairs twist down into a haze of white light. Arcana Check DC 25: The ambient astral energy here is harmless, but a stronger pulse of arcane power surges in the four mirrors. Something lurks within their silvered surfaces, waiting to be called forth. The marauder planestalkers appear one per round starting the third round after a PC enters this area. If the PCs do not note the threat with an Arcana check, the first planestalker attacks with surprise.
4 Marauder Planestalkers
Level 17 Lurker
Large aberrant magical beast XP 1,600 each Initiative +19 Senses Perception +13; low-light vision HP 129; Bloodied 64 AC 31; Fortitude 28, Reflex 29, Will 28 Resist see planephase form; Vulnerable psychic; a marauder planestalker that takes psychic damage immediately ends planephase form. Speed 7; teleport 5; see also planar evasion, planephase form m Bite (standard; at-will) Reach 2; +22 vs. AC; 3d6 + 6 damage. M Body Snatch (standard; usable only in planephase form; encounter) ✦ Teleportation +21 vs. Fortitude; 4d6 + 6 damage, and both the target and the marauder planestalker are teleported to an extradimensional space that completely encloses both creatures. The space is 2 squares high and 4 squares wide on each side. Other creatures do not have line of effect or line of sight to the target or the planestalker, and the target and planestalker do not have line of sight or line of effect to other creatures. If the planestalker takes 25 damage, if it is killed, or if the target is killed, the target and the planestalker return to the spaces they occupied before being teleported, or to the nearest available spaces. C Dimensional Disjunction (standard; encounter) Close blast 3; +19 vs. Will; 2d6 + 3 damage, and the target takes 10 extra damage from melee attacks (save ends). Planar Evasion (immediate reaction, when the marauder planestalker is hit by a melee attack; recharge ⚃ ⚄ ⚅ ) ✦ Teleportation The marauder planestalker teleports 3 squares. Planephase Form (standard; sustain minor; at-will) The marauder planestalker partially phases into another plane, gaining the insubstantial and phasing qualities until the end of its next turn or until it attacks. Sustain Minor: The effect persists. Alignment Unaligned Languages Deep Speech Skills Bluff +14, Insight +18, Stealth +20 Str 16 (+11) Dex 24 (+15) Wis 21 (+13) Con 21 (+13) Int 7 (+6) Cha 13 (+9)
Tactics The marauder planestalkers split up to take on single PCs, going into planephase form, then attempting to use their body snatch power to prevent the characters from aiding each other in combat. If caught out of planephase form, they target as many PCs as possible with dimensional disjunction, then make bite attacks for increased damage. The marauder planestalkers do not pursue PCs who flee back to area W3. However, see the skill challenge for information on pursuit into area W5.
June 20 09
|
D u n g e o n 16 7
75
Garaitha’s Anvil
Features of the Area Illumination: This area is suffused with bright light. Ceiling: 20 feet high. Stair Gate: Access to the ivory stairs is blocked by a floor of uneven black steel bars, set across the chamber on a 1-foot grid. A Small character can squeeze through the narrow bars with a DC 27 Acrobatics check, granting access to the stairs and area W5. This creates no advantage in the skill challenge. If the check fails by 5 or more, the character takes 2d10 radiant damage from a feedback surge of astral energy through the bars. A creature must make a DC 13 Athletics check to balance while moving across the uneven bars of the stair gate. On a failed check, the creature falls prone at the end of its move. The Acrobatics check to move across the grid is in addition to the Acrobatics check a character can make in the skill challenge. Plinth: The black onyx plinth at the center of the stair gate features four keyholes attuned to the crystal keys that control the Well of Worlds (see “The Githyanki’s Secret” on page 50). Picking the magical locks is not enough to open the stair gate; its wards can be overcome only by the skill challenge. When the stair gate vanishes, the plinth remains behind, floating in midair. Ivory Stairs: These steep curved stairs are difficult terrain. The ivory stairs begin below the stair gate, descending more than 300 feet to area W5.
Stair Gate Skill Challenge
Level 19 XP 2,400
A flight of worn stone steps descends into the astral vortex at the heart of the Well of Worlds. However, unlocking the stair gate requires a powerful effort of will and perseverance. To pass through to the astral vortex, the PCs must break through the powerful magic wards of the gate that blocks the stairs leading down. Complexity 5 (requires 12 successes before 3 failures). Primary Skills Arcana, Athletics, Thievery. Other Skills Acrobatics, Perception. Victory The wards of the stair gate are shut down, causing the grid of black bars to flare brilliant white, then vanish. Each creature in the area not capable of flight must make a DC 13 Acrobatics or Athletics check to jump to the safety, either catching the edge of the floor or hanging onto the stone plinth that stays suspended in midair. On a failed check, a creature falls to the stairs and takes 2d10 falling damage before coming to a halt. With the stairs open, the PCs can descend to the astral vortex below. Any surviving marauder planestalkers do not follow PCs who choose to flee down the stairs. Defeat The PCs overload the wards of the ivory stairs, destroying the bars of the stair gate in a blast of arcane energy that deals 2d10 force damage to all creatures in the chamber. In addition, a creature in the area of the bars not capable of flight falls to the stairs and takes 2d10 falling damage before coming to a halt. The PCs can descend to the astral vortex. However, if any marauder planestalkers survive, they pursue the PCs down the stairs to join the githyanki guardian shade in Encounter W5. Special In addition to weakening the gate stairs with brute force by using an Athletics check, a PC can target the gate with a weapon attack or a nonweapon power that deals force damage. The gate has AC 33, Fortitude/Reflex 31, 120 hit points, and resist 5 to all damage. Every 10 points of damage dealt to the gate earns the party 1 success in the skill challenge. Any attack that deals no damage after the
gate’s resistance is taken into account earns the party 1 failure in the skill challenge. If the gate is destroyed, the party earns an automatic victory in the skill challenge. Acrobatics DC 14 (no successes or failures) With a successful check (a minor action), a character gains a +2 bonus to his or her next primary skill check in the challenge. Affecting the wards of the gate is easiest from directly atop it, but the uneven grid requires careful balance. Arcana DC 22 (1 success or failure, maximum 3 successes) With a successful check, the PC exploits that interference to destabilize the wards. The astral energy surging around the stairs interferes with the arcane wards of the gate. Athletics DC 27 (1 success or failure) By damaging the gate with brute force, the PC weakens the wards. See also “Special,” below. The arcane wards of the gate are inextricably bound to its physical strength. Perception DC 22 (0 successes or failures) With a successful check (a minor action), a character gains a +2 bonus to his or her next primary skill check in the challenge. The ever-shifting astral energy within the chamber ebbs and flows in a pattern that can be discerned. Thievery DC 22 (1 success or failure, maximum 3 successes) With a successful Thievery check, the PC weakens the gate and the wards. The strength of the gate wards is tied to its ancient construction.
June 20 09
|
D u n g e o n 16 7
76
Garaitha’s Anvil
W5: Astral Vortex Encounter Level 20 (14,000 XP)
Setup Eldritch giant (G) Githyanki guardian shade At the heart of the Well of Worlds, a vast astral vortex powers the githyanki’s system of permanent teleportation circles in the world and beyond. As the PCs descend the stairs into this area, read: White light seethes in a corrosive whirlpool filling a vast chamber below. The air is hazy above a stone platform extending from the bottom of the stairs across the seething vortex. Pillars of glowing stone rise above the maelstrom, their surfaces crawling with an ever-shifting flow of arcane runes. The far side of the chamber is taken up with what appears to be an oversized arcanist’s study. Tall shelves and wide tables are covered with well-worn tomes and tattered scrolls. A violet-skinned eldritch giant glances up in surprise at your approach, the whitefire mark burning at his wrist as he holds up a hand in warning. “I am Haryssus. It has been long years since any but the masters of this place breached the stair gate, but those who did so lived no longer than will you. I have no quarrel with you. Flee while you can.” Perception Check DC 22: At the giant’s hands and feet, a faint blur of eldritch energy takes the form of all-but-invisible restraints binding this creature to its workplace. Insight Check DC 22: Despite the giant’s dismissive demeanor, his voice carries an undertone of weariness, not of anger. His words are no threat, but a warning of imminent danger.
The presence of intruders in the well chamber sends ripples into the astral vortex, from which the githyanki guardian shade is summoned in 1 round. Unless the PCs discern the giant’s warning with a successful Insight check, the guardian shade materializes next to as many PCs as possible and attacks with surprise. When the githyanki guardian shade appears, read: A sudden flare of yellow-white light heralds the appearance of a ghostly githyanki. Larger than the shades you fought in the fane, this creature wields twin bastard swords, a white light burning in its eyes as it attacks.
Tactics Each round, the githyanki guardian shade attacks as many PCs as possible with bladed wrath, then targets another with spirit rake after teleporting away. It uses soul strike as frequently as possible, but especially on foes that demonstrate resistance to psychic damage, and it targets creatures hit with soul strike with multiple spirit rakes. Haryssus avoids entering the fight at first, knowing that he will be tortured by the githyanki if the PCs are defeated. However, once the guardian shade is bloodied, the eldritch giant cautiously aids the PCs with force missile attacks each round. (At your option, Haryssus can enter the fight earlier if the PCs are in danger of being soundly defeated.) Haryssus cannot leave the platform to which he is bound, but if the PCs attack him at any point, he defends himself vigorously (use the statistics block and tactics from Encounter W3). Once the giant enters combat against the PCs, it takes two DC 27 Diplomacy checks (each a minor action) to get him to stand down during combat. See also “Development,” below.
Githyanki Guardian Shade (G) Level 20 Solo Lurker
Medium elemental humanoid (undead) XP 14,000 Initiative +20 Senses Perception +21; darkvision Guardian Presence (Psychic) aura 1; while the githyanki guardian shade is bloodied, each creature that starts its turn adjacent to it takes 5 psychic damage. HP 756; Bloodied 378 AC 34; Fortitude 30, Reflex 32, Will 28 Immune disease, poison Saving Throws +5 Speed 8, fly 8 Action Points 2 m Ghost Sword (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon +25 vs. AC; 2d10 + 7 damage and the target takes a –2 penalty to all defenses and is slowed (save ends both). r Spirit Rake (minor; at-will) ✦ Fear, Psychic Ranged 5; +23 vs. Will; 1d8 + 5 psychic damage, and the target takes a –2 penalty to all defenses (save ends). C Bladed Wrath (standard; at-will) ✦ Psychic, Weapon Burst 3; targets enemies; the githyanki guardian shade pulls the target 2 squares, then makes a ghost sword attack against each adjacent enemy. Effect: The githyanki guardian shade teleports up to 8 squares. C Guardian Fury (immediate reaction; at-will) ✦ Force Burst 2; +23 vs. Fortitude; 2d8 + 4 force damage and the target is pushed 3 squares. M Soul Strike (standard; recharge ⚄ ⚅ , recharge ⚃ ⚄ ⚅ while bloodied) ✦ Radiant, Weapon Slowed targets only; +23 vs. Will; 4d10 + 10 radiant damage, and the target gains vulnerable 15 psychic until the end of its next turn. R Soul Bolt (standard; encounter, recharges when first bloodied) ✦ Psychic Ranged 10; +23 vs. Will; 2d8 + 5 psychic damage, and the target is stunned until the end of the githyanki guardian shade’s next turn. Miss: Half damage, and the target is dazed until the end of the githyanki guardian shade’s next turn. Astral Soul (immediate reaction, when the githyanki guardian shade takes damage; encounter) The githyanki guardian shade becomes insubstantial and gains phasing until the end of its next turn. Alignment Unaligned Languages — (understands Common, Deep Speech) Str 25 (+17) Dex 23 (+23) Wis 21 (+15) Con 21 (+21) Int 19 (+19) Cha 26 (+18)
June 20 09
|
D u n g e o n 16 7
77
Garaitha’s Anvil
Development Even if the PCs attacked Haryssus, he stands down automatically once the githyanki guardian shade is destroyed. The eldritch giant’s bonds can be undone with a simple Break Enchantment ritual, but the arcane wards that hold him here prevent Haryssus from performing the ritual himself. Once freed, the eldritch giant becomes a staunch ally of the PCs and an invaluable source of information regarding the Well of Worlds. The PCs can attempt to talk to him, but the advanced planar magic of the Well of Worlds is beyond the understanding of any but the most knowledgeable mages. The PCs should be inspired to have Haryssus talk to Bejam, but respond to any questions here by paraphrasing the information given in “The Githyanki’s Secret” (page 50).
Features of the Area Illumination: This area is suffused with bright light. Ceiling: The ceiling rises 40 feet above the astral vortex; 30 feet above the platform bridge and the library floor. Ivory Stairs: These steep curved stairs are difficult terrain. The ivory stairs run up to the stair gate, ascending more than 300 feet to area W4. Shelves: These bookshelves are stacked high with scholarly tomes focusing on planar and portal magic. These works provide essential information regarding the Well of Worlds (see “The Githyanki’s Secret,” page 50). Tables: These giant-sized tables are tall enough that a Medium or smaller creature can move under one and gain cover. It costs 2 squares of movement for a Large or larger creature to hop up onto a table.
A Medium or smaller creature can climb or swing up to the top of a table with a DC 14 Athletics or Acrobatics check (a move action). A character can make a DC 20 Strength check to tip over a table, which then grants superior cover. Chair: The giant-sized chair provides cover. Pillars: Pillars of glowing white stone rise above the astral vortex to the height indicated on the tactical map. Each pillar glows with a shifting sequence of arcane runes. A creature can jump from the platform to a pillar, or from pillar to pillar, with an Athletics check as normal. Platform: A slick stone platform runs from the stairs to the giant’s study, passing 10 feet above the astral vortex. The platform can be moved along normally, but a Medium or smaller creature that makes a melee attack while in a square on the edge of the platform must make a DC 14 Acrobatics check or stumble and fall over the edge. A creature that falls from the platform takes 1d10 falling damage and is caught up in the astral vortex. Astral Vortex: This vast whirlpool of astral essence seethes and boils at the heart of the Well of Worlds. A creature that begins its turn adjacent to the vortex (either along the platform or in the library) or atop one of the pillars takes 2d8 radiant damage.
A creature that falls into the astral vortex is swept up in its flow, circling the pool at one revolution per round. A creature in the vortex takes 3d10 radiant damage per round and is dazed until the end of its next turn. A creature in the vortex can make a DC 27 Athletics or Acrobatics check as a free action to grab a pillar. It then takes a DC 15 Athletics check (a move action) to climb to the top of the pillar. (Because the creature circles the pool, it can choose which pillar it grabs onto.) A creature that escapes the vortex is still dazed until the end of its next turn. The speed of the vortex makes it difficult to coordinate attempts to reach creatures trapped within it. It takes a DC 22 Acrobatics check to throw a rope in front of a creature in the vortex. The creature must then make a DC 14 Acrobatics or Athletics check to grab it. A creature that grabs a rope can be pulled out of the vortex as a standard action.
June 20 09
|
D u n g e o n 16 7
78
Garaitha’s Anvil
G1: Dock Siege Encounter Level 18 (11,000 XP)
Setup Githyanki astraan (A) 12 githyanki gish crusaders (C) 3 githyanki reavers (R) As the battle for Garaitha’s anvil gets underway, the PCs use the shock of the assault to move for the repair dock where Cev’ren is moored. When the PCs break for the construction zone, read: The battle rages ahead of you, an offensive wedge pushing the frenzied githyanki back. Lost in the chaos of the clash of forces, your movement away from the brunt of the fight and toward the gantries of the construction zone goes all but unnoticed. A single force of a dozen githyanki catches sight of you, spreading out into an attack formation at your approach.
Tactics The gish crusaders fight in groups of two or three, flanking for combat advantage. They make silver longsword attacks against lightly armored foes, but use astral bolt against heavily armored foes. The githyanki astraan stays at range if possible, hitting PC strikers and controllers with telekinetic blast and astral fire. The githyanki reavers focus silver fullblade and reaving strike attacks against lightly armored PCs. The githyanki fight the party on the ground until two or more PCs make a move for the catwalks. On the astraan’s orders, the crusaders use astral stride to fall back to the catwalk platforms. The astraan uses telekinetic leap to fly to the closest catwalk, while the
reavers continue to throw themselves at PCs on the ground. This encounter remains part of the larger battle raging around the PCs. In the fourth round and every second round thereafter, another 1d6 minions enter the fray—either githyanki gish crusaders, githyanki psychic archers, or githyanki corsair cutters (see Encounter G6 for additional statistics blocks). Githyanki Astraan (A) Level 16 Controller
Medium natural humanoid XP 1,400 Initiative +13 Senses Perception +17 HP 155; Bloodied 77; see also astral ward AC 30; Fortitude 27, Reflex 30, Will 28; see also astral ward Speed 8 m Silver Dagger (standard; at-will) ✦ Psychic, Weapon +21 vs. AC; 2d4 + 4 psychic damage, and the target is stunned (save ends). r Telekinetic Strike (standard; at-will) ✦ Force Ranged 20; +20 vs. Reflex; 2d10 + 6 force damage and slide the target 1 square. R Telekinetic Blast (standard; recharge ⚃ ⚄ ⚅ ) Ranged sight; one or two targets; +20 vs. Fortitude; the target is wrenched from the ground and hurled up to 20 feet into the air. A target that strikes a ceiling or other solid object takes 1d10 damage. The target then falls back to the ground into an unoccupied space within 1 square of its original space (the astraan’s choice), taking falling damage as normal. R Telekinetic Leap (move; encounter) Ranged 10; the githyanki astraan or an ally within range can fly 5 squares. A Astral Fire (standard; at-will) ✦ Cold, Fire Area burst 2 within 10; +20 vs. Reflex; 2d6 + 5 cold and fire damage, and the area of the attack becomes difficult terrain until the end of the encounter. Astral Ward (immediate interrupt, when the githyanki astraan would be hit by a melee attack while bloodied; encounter) The githyanki astraan makes a silver dagger attack against the triggering attacker and gains a +2 bonus to all defenses until the end of its next turn. Alignment Evil Languages Common, Deep Speech Skills Arcana +20, Insight +17 Str 18 (+12) Dex 20 (+13) Wis 19 (+12) Con 19 (+12) Int 24 (+15) Cha 21 (+13) Equipment silver dagger
12 Githyanki (C) Level 17 Minion Skirmisher Gish Crusaders
Medium natural humanoid XP 400 each Initiative +14 Senses Perception +15 HP 1; a missed attack never damages a minion. AC 30; Fortitude 29, Reflex 28, Will 28 Saving Throws +2 against charm effects Speed 5; see also astral stride m Silver Longsword (standard; at-will) ✦ Psychic, Weapon +21 vs. AC; 10 psychic damage. r Astral Bolt (standard; at-will) ✦ Psychic Ranged 10; +20 vs. Reflex; 10 psychic damage. Astral Stride (move; encounter) ✦ Teleportation The githyanki gish crusader teleports 6 squares and gains the insubstantial and phasing qualities until the start of its next turn. Alignment Evil Languages Common, Deep Speech Str 20 (+13) Dex 18 (+12) Wis 14 (+10) Con 17 (+11) Int 14 (+10) Cha 18 (+12) Equipment chainmail, silver longsword
3 Githyanki Reavers (R)
Level 17 Brute
Medium natural humanoid XP 1,600 each Initiative +13 Senses Perception +10 HP 197; Bloodied 98 AC 29; Fortitude 30, Reflex 28, Will 28 Saving Throws +2 against charm effects Speed 5; see also telekinetic leap m Silver Fullblade (standard; at-will) ✦ Psychic, Weapon +20 vs. AC; 2d12 + 4 (crit 2d12 + 28) plus 1d6 psychic damage, plus an extra 3d6 psychic damage if the target is immobilized. M Reaving Strike (standard; encounter) ✦ Psychic, Reliable, Weapon +18 vs. Fortitude; 3d12 + 4 damage plus 1d6 psychic damage, and the target is immobilized (save ends). R Telekinetic Leap (move; encounter) Ranged 10; the githyanki reaver or an ally within range can fly 5 squares. Alignment Evil Languages Common, Deep Speech Str 24 (+15) Dex 21 (+13) Wis 14 (+10) Con 17 (+11) Int 15 (+10) Cha 21 (+13) Equipment plate armor, silver fullblade
June 20 09
|
D u n g e o n 16 7
79
Garaitha’s Anvil
Development Once the defenders here have been overcome, the distraction of the surrounding battle allows the PCs to enter the repair dock unseen. When the PCs open the door leading to areas G2, G3, and G4, read: A dark corridor opens up on both sides of the door. To the left stands a vast open space whose floor cannot be seen, and booming voices within shout out the words of a ritual. To the right, firelight flares, ringing out with the heavy echo of steel on steel. A third leg of the corridor leads off into shadow ahead. The PCs can approach area G2 unhindered, but any movement toward G3 or G4 is interrupted. See the G3 tactical encounter.
Features of the Area Illumination: The exterior shipyard is infused with bright light. The warehouse space and the corridor beyond the door are dark. Catwalks: These shaky catwalks rise alongside the under-construction walls of the repair dock expansion. A catwalk can be moved along normally, but a Medium or smaller creature that makes a melee attack while in a square on the edge of the catwalk must make a DC 14 Acrobatics check or stumble and fall over the edge. See the tactical map for the heights of different catwalks relative to the ground. Ladders: These rough mesh ladders connect the catwalks. It takes a move action and a DC 15 Athletics check to climb 10 feet up a ladder.
Gantry: Each of these gantry towers rises 20 feet above the adjoining catwalk, and each features a crane sling arm for raising cargo from below. A gantry tower provides cover and can be climbed with a DC 10 Athletics check. A creature engaged in combat on the top of a tower must make a DC 22 Acrobatics check or fall in a square adjacent to the tower’s base, chosen randomly. The sling arm cable hanging from the end of a gantry arm can be jumped to from a nearby catwalk with an Athletics check as normal. (A sling arm that has been moved over a catwalk can be grabbed.) A character who makes the jump snags the cable with a DC 14 Acrobatics check. On a failed check, the character falls. A creature that grabs a cable pulls the gantry arm 45 degrees in the direction of the creature’s movement, and can swing out on the cable in the same direction. The creature can then jump from the cable to any nearby catwalk by making an Acrobatics check. Use the DC for an Athletics check to jump the distance from the gantry to the catwalk, but treat the creature as if it has a running start.
Exterior Walls: The under-construction walls of the dock are rough wood and stone. They can be climbed with a DC 15 Athletics check. Debris: Loose piles of wood, steel, and detritus are difficult terrain. Crates: These stacks of construction supplies stand 5 feet high and provide cover. It takes a DC 10 Athletics check to move across a stack of crates. Opening: The interior of this repair dock is accessed by an open doorway 10 feet above the closest catwalk.
June 20 09
|
D u n g e o n 16 7
80
Garaitha’s Anvil
G2: Loading Zone Encounter Level 19 (12,800 XP; see the hazard statistics block)
Setup 2 eldritch giants (E) 8 fomorian guards (G) Inside the repair dock, two eldritch giants attempt to reactivate the dead planar magic of the shipyard to bring in reinforcements from the Feywild. When the PCs can see into this area, read: Sand covers the floor of this massive chamber, its walls piled high with huge ingots of iron and brass, densewood logs of great length and heft, and bundled heaps of deadfall. Two eldritch giants are shouting out the words of a ritual as a teleportation circle flares erratically to life in midair between them. Within the portal stands a hazy landscape of fallen trees and black smoke, and a shower of logs and deadfall spills through it to the sandy floor. At the same time, eight armed fomorians leap through the gate even as it fades away. One of the fomorians howls “Keep those gates open, mage! There’s troops waiting to cross and blood to be spilled!” The magic with which Bejam and Haryssus have inhibited the portals of the shipyard is holding, but these eldritch giants are pushing the limits of those wards. Normally used to transport raw materials from other planes, these floating teleportation circles have been commandeered to bring reinforcements from the Feywild.
If the PCs have already taken on the fire giants in Encounter G3, the creatures here mistook that noise for the ever-present din of the foundry. The eldritch giants and fomorians are distracted and expect no attack. Unless the PCs draw attention to themselves, they can easily gain surprise before the fomorians begin to scale the catwalk on their way to area G5.
Tactics The fomorian guards flank for combat advantage as they make evil eye and halberd attacks. Any nearby fomorian targets an immobilized PC for the extra damage granted by skullcracker. The fomorians are tall enough that they can reach the catwalk from the floor. Treat their halberds as reach 1 weapons for such attacks. The eldritch giants initially fall back to let the fomorians take on melee combatants, making force missile attacks in conjunction with eldritch field as they teleport away from any challengers. When the fomorians have fallen, the giants create their eldritch blades and enter melee. Each round, one of the eldritch giants uses a minor action to trigger the portal fall hazard after teleporting safely out of range.
Development
2 Eldritch Giants (E) Level 18 Skirmisher
Large fey humanoid (giant) XP 2,000 each Initiative +12 Senses Perception +20; low-light vision HP 171; Bloodied 85 AC 32; Fortitude 29, Reflex 31, Will 33 Resist 10 force Saving Throws +5 against charm effects Speed 8, teleport 6 m Eldritch Blade (standard; at-will) ✦ Force, Weapon Reach 2; +21 vs. Reflex; 3d6 + 7 force damage. r Force Missile (standard; at-will) ✦ Force Ranged 20; +21 vs. Reflex; 2d6 + 7 force damage. C Sweeping Sword (standard; encounter) ✦ Force, Weapon Close blast 2; +21 vs. AC; 3d6 + 7 force damage, and the target is knocked prone. Special: When charging, the eldritch giant can use this power in place of a melee basic attack. Consume Magic (minor 1/round; at-will) Targets an adjacent conjuration or zone created by an enemy; +21 vs. the Will of the creator of the conjuration or zone; the conjuration or zone is destroyed, and its effects end. The eldritch giant’s attacks deal 3d6 extra force damage until the end of its next turn. Eldritch Field (minor; recharge ⚄ ⚅) ✦ Zone Close blast 5; the blast creates a zone of rippling magic that lasts until the end of the encounter or until the eldritch giant uses this power again. The zone is difficult terrain, and the giant’s attacks deal 1d6 extra force damage against creatures within the zone. Alignment Evil Languages Elven, Giant Skills Arcana +21, Insight +20 Str 21 (+14) Dex 12 (+10) Wis 22 (+15) Con 19 (+13) Int 24 (+16) Cha 13 (+10)
If the PCs bypass this encounter to go directly to the repair dock, the creatures here come to the aid of the githyanki in Encounter G4. See the “Reinforcements” sidebar in that encounter for more information.
June 20 09
|
D u n g e o n 16 7
81
Garaitha’s Anvil
Portal Fall Level 20 Elite Lurker Hazard XP 5,600 An eldritch giant activates a dormant portal hanging in midair, and a deadly avalanche of wood spills from a matching portal in the Feywild and drops toward you. Hazard: Logs and deadfall tumble down to a target square and make a burst 3 attack. Perception Characters can’t use Perception to detect this hazard. Initiative +21 Trigger Each eldritch giant can, as a minor action once per turn, trigger the trap’s attack. Special: Though the giants cannot keep the portals open for long, additional fomorians have a chance to cross over from the Feywild the longer the fight goes on. Starting in the fourth round and every round thereafter, each activation of the hazard brings 1d4 – 1 more fomorian guards into the fray. Award the PCs additional experience for any reinforcements they kill. Attack Minor Action 1/turn Close burst 1 centered on one enemy Targets: Creatures in burst Attack: +23 vs. Reflex Hit: 3d8 + 5 damage Effect: The area becomes difficult terrain. Countermeasures ✦ A character who makes an Arcana check at DC 27 as a standard action briefly forces the hidden portals away from his or her area, and the hazard cannot target any creature within a close burst 2 of the character. ✦ A character who makes an Arcana check at DC 27 as a minor action briefly forces the hidden portals away from him or her, and the hazard cannot target him or her. ✦ When an eldritch giant is killed, the hazard becomes less dangerous, and when both are dead, it ceases to function.
8 Fomorian Guards (G) Level 17 Minion Soldier
Huge fey humanoid (giant) XP 400 each Initiative +16 Senses Perception +13; truesight 6 HP 1; a missed attack never damages a minion. AC 33; Fortitude 30, Reflex 29, Will 28 Speed 8 m Halberd (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon Reach 4; +22 vs. AC; 8 damage (13 damage against immobilized targets) and the target is marked until the end of the fomorian guard’s next turn. R Evil Eye (minor 1/round; at-will) Ranged 5; +20 vs. Will; the target is immobilized until the end of the fomorian guard’s turn. Alignment Evil Languages Deep Speech, Elven Str 24 (+15) Dex 22 (+14) Wis 20 (+13) Con 20 (+13) Int 11 (+8) Cha 15 (+10) Equipment chainmail, halberd
Features of the Area
Ingot Piles: Piles of 2-foot-long iron or brass ingots rise 15 feet high. These areas provide cover and are difficult terrain. A Large or smaller creature must make a DC 14 Athletics check to move across an ingot pile. Log Piles: Densewood logs and deadfall are piled to a height of 20 feet. These areas provide cover and are difficult terrain. A Large or smaller creature must make a DC 22 Athletics check to move over a log pile. A Large or larger creature moving across a log pile must make a DC 14 Acrobatics check or unleash an avalanche of logs in a burst 2, dealing 2d10 damage to itself and any Large or smaller creature in the area. The area filled by fallen logs becomes difficult terrain for Large or smaller creatures.
Illumination: Smoky torches along the walls fill this area with dim light. Ceiling: 60 feet high. Floor: The soft sand floor of the loading zone is difficult terrain for any Medium or smaller creatures. Catwalk: This shaky catwalk connects to the adjacent passageway and overlooks the floor 30 feet below. The catwalk has no ladders; the giants who work in this area simply climb it. A catwalk can be moved along normally, but a Medium or smaller creature that makes a melee attack while in a square on the edge of a catwalk must make a DC 14 Acrobatics check or stumble and fall over the edge. The soft sand floor means that a creature that falls takes only 2d10 damage unless it hits an area of logs dropped by the portal fall hazard.
June 20 09
|
D u n g e o n 16 7
82
Garaitha’s Anvil
G3: Fire and Forge Encounter Level 19 (12,400 XP)
right, around the corner from the door. Do not place their miniatures (noted by ghosted tags on the tactical map) unless they are spotted or until they attack.
Setup
When the PCs can see into this area, read:
2 fire giant forgecallers (F) 3 fire giant ironmongers (I) 12 fire giant serfs (S)
Iron and brass ingots are piled high across this chamber, with piles of deadfall and kiln-fired charcoal standing close by the feeder doors of a half-dozen massive forges. The heat of this foundry is crippling even from a distance, but the workers here seem not to notice—some dozen fire giants work furiously at massive anvils. The ship castings they work with are being systematically destroyed—cut to chunks and hot-hammered into the spheres you saw the others carrying. These appear to be some sort of weapon destined for the fight outside.
The githyanki docks are built around numerous foundries where the steel frames of astral warships are forged, welded, and repaired. Whenever the PCs make their first foray toward this area (whether initially from area G1 or after Encounter G2), they are interrupted by a pair of giants running for the dock gate (area G5). When the PCs first approach this area, read: A shout from the chamber beyond precedes pounding footsteps as two fire giants suddenly appear in the passageway. In their arms, each carries a pile of what look like smoldering steel spheres. Two fire giant serfs are carrying slag missiles (thin spheres of iron holding a core of molten slag) to the battle outside. Unless the PCs draw attention to themselves, they can easily pull back into area C1 or C2 as the giants turn up the third leg of the passageway and disappear from sight. Go to Encounter C5 (the “Following the Giants” sidebar) if the PCs decide to pursue. If the PCs took on the giants in Encounter G2 before entering this area, the fire giants here had a 50 percent chance to notice the fight over the noise of the foundry. If no noise was heard, the giants are all hard at work and distracted in the positions indicated on the tactical map. If the giants heard combat, the forgecallers and ironmongers have moved out of sight to the
Perception Check, if the forgecallers and ironmongers are in hiding. DC 22: Although twelve fire giants labor hard within the foundry, three central anvils and a forge are conspicuously untended. If the PCs fail the Perception check or otherwise blunder into the chamber, any giants in hiding gain surprise. 12 Fire Giant Serfs (S) Level 16 Soldier Minion
Large elemental humanoid (giant) XP 350 each Initiative +11 Senses Perception +9 HP 1; a missed attack never damages a minion. AC 30; Fortitude 32, Reflex 27, Will 27 Resist 15 fire Speed 7 m Fiery Forge Hammer (standard; at-will) ✦ Fire Reach 2; +21 vs. AC; 3 damage plus 3 fire damage, and the target is dazed until the end of the fire giant’s next turn. Alignment Evil Languages Deep Speech, Giant Skills Endurance +19 Str 23 (+15) Dex 11 (+9) Wis 10 (+9) Con 22 (+15) Int 10 (+9) Cha 11 (+9) Equipment forge hammer
June 20 09
|
D u n g e o n 16 7
83
Garaitha’s Anvil
2 Fire Giant Forgecallers (F) Level 18 Artillery
Large elemental humanoid (giant) XP 2,000 each Initiative +11 Senses Perception +17 HP 136; Bloodied 68 AC 32; Fortitude 33, Reflex 29, Will 30 Resist 15 fire Speed 8 m Smoldering Mace (standard; at-will) ✦ Fire, Weapon Reach 2; +21 vs. AC; 1d10 + 6 damage plus 1d10 fire damage. R Fire Pillar (standard; at-will) ✦ Fire Ranged 20; +21 vs. Reflex; 3d8 + 3 fire damage. A Flame Burst (standard; recharge 6 ) ✦ Fire Area burst 2 within 10; +21 vs. Reflex; 2d8 + 3 fire damage, and ongoing 10 fire damage (save ends). Alignment Evil Languages Giant Skills Intimidate +14 Str 23 (+15) Dex 15 (+11) Wis 16 (+12) Con 22 (+15) Int 10 (+9) Cha 11 (+9) Equipment dragonhide armor, mace
3 Fire Giant Ironmongers (I)
Level 16 Soldier
Large elemental humanoid (giant) XP 1,400 each Initiative +11 Senses Perception +9 HP 156; Bloodied 78 AC 30; Fortitude 32, Reflex 27, Will 27 Resist 15 fire Speed 7 m Searing Forge Hammer (standard; at-will) ✦ Fire, Weapon Reach 2; +21 vs. AC; 1d12 + 5 damage plus 2d8 fire damage, and the target is marked until the end of the fire giant’s next turn. r Slag Missile (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon Ranged 10; +21 vs. AC; 2d10 + 5 fire damage, and ongoing 5 fire damage (save ends). C Hammer Blast (standard; requires forge hammer; encounter) ✦ Fire, Weapon Close blast 2; +21 vs. AC; 1d12 + 5 damage plus 2d8 fire damage, and the target is dazed until the end of the fire giant’s next turn. Alignment Evil Languages Deep Speech, Giant Skills Endurance +19 Str 23 (+15) Dex 11 (+9) Wis 10 (+9) Con 22 (+15) Int 10 (+9) Cha 11 (+9) Equipment forge hammer, forge apron
Tactics The forgecallers focus smoldering mace attacks on defenders or strikers, using their reach to stay out of harm’s way. If no melee target presents itself, a forgecaller creates a fire pillar or f lameburst to strike distant foes. The ironmongers open combat with a hammer blast, then focus searing forge hammer attacks on dazed foes. If the PCs fall back, the giants fill steel spheres with molten metal to launch slag missile attacks. The fire giant serfs wade into combat with their fiery forge hammers, flanking for combat advantage and focusing on dazed targets.
Development If the PCs bypass this encounter to go directly to the repair dock, the creatures here come to the aid of the githyanki in Encounter G4. See the “Reinforcements” sidebar in that encounter for more information.
Features of the Area Illumination: The fires of the forges fill this area with bright light. Ceiling: 40 feet high. Heat Hazard: The blistering air of the foundry is breathable by the PCs. However, a creature that begins its turn adjacent to a forge takes 1d10 fire damage. A creature that comes into contact with a forge takes 2d10 fire damage. Anvils: These enormous steel anvils stand 10 feet high and provide cover. A creature can climb to the top of an anvil with a DC 13 Athletics check.
Burning Slag: Pools of molten slag overflowing from the forges are difficult terrain. Any creature that enters or begins its turn in an area of burning slag takes 2d10 fire damage. Ingot Piles: Piles of 2-foot-long iron or brass ingots rise 15 feet high. These areas provide cover and are difficult terrain. A Large or smaller creature must make a DC 14 Athletics check to move across an ingot pile. Wood and Charcoal: Deadfall and kiln-fired charcoal are piled to a height of 15 feet. These areas provide cover and are difficult terrain. It takes a DC 14 Athletics check to move over a pile of wood and charcoal.
June 20 09
|
D u n g e o n 16 7
84
Garaitha’s Anvil
G5: Dock Gate Encounter Level 19 (12,600 XP; see the “Reinforcements” sidebar)
Setup 4 fomorian guards (G) 8 githyanki gish crusaders (C) 2 githyanki gish warmasters (W) Beyond the foundry and the loading zone, the central repair docks are sealed off behind secure magical wards. After breaking into this area and facing off against githyanki guards and their giant allies, the PCs must seal the dock again to prevent reinforcements from arriving. As the PCs approach through the empty warehouse, read: Ahead, a massive doorway opens up, and a faint shimmering marks the field of a magical force ward. From beyond, a harsh voice shouts out. Perception Check, for a PC who understands Deep Speech DC 22: A githyanki screams in anger: “Keep formation! Space yourselves out, you misshapen lumps, or you can join your worthless kin in the fight outside!” A PC can safely peer around the corner to see what lies beyond the doorways. When the PCs look into this area, read: Close to you, a glowing panel set into the stone wall pulses in time with the force field set within the doorway ahead. This magical gate is one of three sets of warded doorways adjacent at one end of a huge hangar. Four fomorians
stand watch near the four corners of the hangar, and a pack of githyanki circles around them as they watch the doors. In a circular open dock at the opposite end, five astral craft hang suspended in a nest of steel cables. However, these are all smaller strike ships, not the flagship you seek. The placement of the githyanki guards on the tactical map represents their position when the PCs first look in. Each round that the PCs spend watching, the warmasters and the gish crusaders move 6 squares counterclockwise. Swayed by the overheard threats of one of the warmasters, the fomorians stand alert where indicated.
Following the Giants When the PCs see the fire giants move for this area (see Encounter G1), they might elect to follow, attempting to make their entrance when the gate is opened. Alternatively, as long as the giants in area G2 or G3 remain unaware of the PCs’ presence in the dock, four more giants (either fire giant serfs or fomorian guards) exit the complex every 2d6 rounds. The distracted giants are not likely to notice the PCs if they hide within the warehouse. When the warded door is opened, the PCs have 2 rounds to pass through before it is closed again. The giants going through the door join the combat in this area, in addition to the troops noted in the “Reinforcements” sidebar.
Getting In As long as the PCs do not step fully into the open or approach with a light source, they need not make Stealth checks to avoid being seen by the guards while outside this area. Moving adjacent to the magic control panel for either of the area G4 doors puts a PC in view of the guards unless he or she is invisible. However, by timing his or her attempts to disable the gate with the guards’ movement, the PC has a chance to avoid detection. It takes three DC 22 Thievery or Arcana checks (each a standard action) to disable the wards, simultaneously opening all three gates. However, the character making the check must also make a DC 22 Stealth check as a minor action each time or be seen by those within the hanger. The guards here immediately spot any PCs openly approaching the gate. If alerted by the PCs’ attempts to unlock the gate, the fomorians move in to flank both gates before they can be opened, while the githyanki pull back behind the cover of scrap piles and crates. 4 Fomorian Guards (G) Level 17 Minion Soldier
Huge fey humanoid (giant) XP 400 each Initiative +16 Senses Perception +13; truesight 6 HP 1; a missed attack never damages a minion. AC 33; Fortitude 30, Reflex 29, Will 28 Speed 8 m Halberd (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon Reach 4; +22 vs. AC; 8 damage (13 damage against immobilized targets), and the target is marked until the end of the fomorian guard’s next turn. R Evil Eye (minor 1/round; at-will) Ranged 5; +20 vs. Will; the target is immobilized until the end of the fomorian guard’s turn. Alignment Evil Languages Deep Speech, Elven Str 24 (+15) Dex 22 (+14) Wis 20 (+13) Con 20 (+13) Int 11 (+8) Cha 15 (+10) Equipment chainmail, halberd
June 20 09
|
D u n g e o n 16 7
85
Garaitha’s Anvil
8 Githyanki (C) Level 17 Minion Skirmisher Gish Crusaders
Medium natural humanoid XP 400 each Initiative +14 Senses Perception +15 HP 1; a missed attack never damages a minion. AC 30; Fortitude 29, Reflex 28, Will 28 Saving Throws +2 against charm effects Speed 5; see also astral stride m Silver Longsword (standard; at-will) ✦ Psychic, Weapon +21 vs. AC; 10 psychic damage. r Astral Bolt (standard; at-will) ✦ Psychic Ranged 10; +20 vs. Reflex; 10 psychic damage. Astral Stride (move; encounter) ✦ Teleportation The githyanki gish crusader teleports 6 squares and gains the insubstantial and phasing qualities until the start of its next turn. Alignment Evil Languages Common, Deep Speech Str 20 (+13) Dex 18 (+12) Wis 14 (+10) Con 17 (+11) Int 14 (+10) Cha 18 (+12) Equipment chainmail, silver longsword
Tactics The fomorian guards wade into melee, using evil eye against the most heavily armored PCs and focusing halberd attacks on immobilized opponents. They use their reach to stay out of danger. These guards do not fight in isolation, and they raise the alarm as soon as the threat posed by the PCs becomes clear. See the “Reinforcements” sidebar. The gish crusaders fight in pairs, flanking for combat advantage with silver longsword attacks, or making astral bolt attacks against PCs staying out of melee. Each gish warmaster stays back in the first round to strike with astral storm, then wades in against defenders and strikers with double attack. Against two or more PCs adjacent to each other, a warmaster uses astral lightning, spending its action point to keep up its double attack the first time.
2 Githyanki (W) Level 17 Elite Skirmisher Gish Warmasters
Medium natural humanoid XP 3,200 each Initiative +14 Senses Perception +17 HP 330; Bloodied 165 AC 33; Fortitude 28, Reflex 32, Will 30 Saving Throws +2 (+4 against charm effects) Speed 5; see also astral stride Action Points 1 m Silver Longsword (standard; at-will) ✦ Psychic, Weapon +22 vs. AC; 2d8 + 3 damage plus 1d8 psychic damage. r Astral Strike (standard; at-will) ✦ Radiant Ranged 5; +20 vs. Fortitude; 2d8 + 6 radiant damage. M Double Attack (standard; at-will) ✦ Psychic, Weapon The githyanki gish warmaster makes two silver longsword attacks. If it hits two different targets, each target takes an additional 1d8 psychic damage. R Astral Storm (standard; encounter) ✦ Psychic, Radiant The githyanki gish warmaster makes four attacks, no more than two of them against a single target: ranged 5; +20 vs. Fortitude; 3d8 + 6 psychic and radiant damage. A Astral Lightning (standard; recharge ⚅ ) ✦ Lightning Area burst 1 within 10; +20 vs. Reflex; 4d8 + 6 lightning damage. Astral Stride (move; at-will) ✦ Teleportation The githyanki gish warmaster teleports 6 squares and gains the insubstantial and phasing qualities until the start of its next turn. Alignment Evil Languages Common, Deep Speech, Draconic Skills Arcana +17 Str 19 (+12) Dex 18 (+12) Wis 18 (+12) Con 21 (+13) Int 24 (+15) Cha 21 (+13) Equipment chainmail, silver longsword
Dock Gate Level 16 Skill Challenge XP 1,400 Entering the repair dock required you to open all three gates into the area. Now you must seal them again, and quickly.
The three dock gates feature control panels on the inside of the hanger similar to those seen on the outside. As long as the gates remain open, the PCs find themselves under renewed assault. Each skill check in this challenge requires a standard action. Complexity 1 (requires 4 successes before 3 failures).
Primary Skills Arcana, Athletics, Thievery Victory The PCs successfully override the magical gate controls, sealing all three gates and preventing them from being opened again. Defeat The PCs damage the gates’ arcane mechanism enough to permanently shut them, but a blast of arcane power causes all creatures within 5 squares of any doorway to lose a healing surge. In addition, a last wave of eight gish crusaders comes through before the gates are sealed (see the “Reinforcements” sidebar). Special If the PCs choose to ignore this skill challenge and simply move for the next encounter, this adventure quickly takes a turn for the worse. Githyanki reinforcements responding to the alarm inside the complex arrive in the hundreds within 5 rounds, pursuing the PCs into area G6 and following in strike ships if they take to the air. This is a fight the party cannot possibly win, but the githyanki are savvy enough to want to keep at least some of these powerful PCs alive for questioning. This turn of events grants the Coalition forces outside an easier victory as troops are drawn off to pursue the party. The PCs’ allies in the Coalition will eventually come to their rescue, but the ultimate resolution of the adventure will be up to you. Arcana DC 25 (1 success or failure, maximum 2 successes) The PC taps into the magic within one of the gates, gaining control of its flow. Athletics DC 20 (1 success or failure, maximum 1 success) With brute force, the PC unlocks the inhibitors that control the flow of arcane power to the gates. Thievery DC 25 (1 success or failure, maximum 2 successes) Working at the control panel, the PC is able to override part of the mechanism controlling the gates.
June 20 09
|
D u n g e o n 16 7
86
Garaitha’s Anvil
Development Reinforcements The skill challenge to seal the doors is essential to the PCs’ success in this part of the adventure. However, the longer they take to do so, the greater the threat from the shipyard’s defenders. In round 3, the githyanki realize the seriousness of the threat posed by the PCs. In response to screaming orders from a gish warmaster, a gish crusader forgoes its attack for 1 round to move for one of the gate control panels, using it to sound a shrill alarm. Starting in round 5 and every other round thereafter, new defenders appear at the doorway at the top of the map—four githyanki corsair cutters (see Encounter G6), one githyanki reaver (Encounter G1), or four fomorian guards. Choose the reinforcements or roll randomly. These new defenders focus their attacks on the closest foes—most likely those PCs working at the doors as part of the skill challenge. If the PCs bypassed either Encounter G2 or G3, this encounter gets significantly more deadly. In addition to the reinforcements noted above, the nonminion fire giants from G3 enter the fray here in round 7 in response to the alarm. The eldritch giants from Encounter G2 enter this encounter in round 9. Award the PCs additional experience for any reinforcements they kill. Once the skill challenge is completed, no further reinforcements arrive (aside from those noted under “Defeat”). The PCs see more githyanki and giants racing up to the gates, but with the wards reactivated and under the party’s control, these additional reinforcements can find no way in.
Even if the PCs dispense with this encounter quickly, the fight does not go unnoticed. When the PCs have time to regroup after the fight, or if a character can see in the direction of area G6, read: The echo of footsteps rings out along the landing that rises adjacent to the hanger. Thirty feet above, a dozen githyanki warriors watch you coldly. These githyanki are Kada’ne’s personal guard. Knowing that the alarm has been raised, they hold back to watch over Cev’ren, waiting for the PCs to come to them.
Features of the Area Illumination: This area is infused with bright light. Warded Door: The open doorways are filled with a shimmering force field when the door wards are active. No creature, object, or power can pass through a warded door in either direction.
Crates: These squares are difficult terrain. These piles of mesh steel crates stand 15 feet high and provide cover. They can be climbed with a DC 10 Athletics check. The steel mesh sides of these empty crates provide convenient handholds. A creature with two hands free can push one of the 3-foot-high crates in front of it at normal speed (though it cannot run). This provides cover while moving, but the creature must then draw its weapons or retrieve stowed items when it stops moving. Scrap: These areas of cast-off steel fragments, cables, and other detritus are difficult terrain. A creature that runs, charges, or makes a double move through an area of scrap must make a DC 20 Acrobatics check or fall prone. Scrap Piles: A 5-foot-high scrap pile provides cover and is difficult terrain. It takes a DC 10 Athletics check to move over a scrap pile.
June 20 09
|
D u n g e o n 16 7
87
Garaitha’s Anvil
G6: Boarding Party Encounter Level 18 (11,600 XP)
Setup 8 githyanki corsair cutters (C) 1 githyanki corsair shipmaster (S) 1 githyanki gish warmaster (W) 8 githyanki psychic archers (P) The PCs will likely take a stealthy approach when ascending the high catwalk, but the githyanki have already fallen back to more defensible positions. When the PCs can see the upper landing, read: The approach to the upper landing is undefended, and it yields up the sight of another repair dock and the first glimpse of your goal. The sleek flagship Cev’ren sits within a taut lattice of mooring lines, pulsing white light bathing it where the roof dome above the dock has been drawn back to reveal open air and the astral gate above. A dozen githyanki are in motion across the decks of the man-of-war, but the force between you and them is the more immediate concern—the githyanki you saw before have fallen back behind makeshift barricades. Perception Check DC 13: The figures on the flagship are led by a hulking githyanki in golden plate armor, his voice a dark howl as he shouts orders. Insight or Perception Check DC 20: The githyanki swarming over the Cev’ren are a mix of guards and flight crew. Though still obviously under repair, the astral man-of-war is preparing to launch.
Tactics The githyanki are set to defend Cev’ren against attack, and they take advantage of their defensive cover for as long as possible. The psychic archers fire their psychic shots as soon as the PCs appear on the landing (or attempt to go over it). The corsair shipmaster moves to fight any PC attempting to push through the barricade. The corsair cutters attack between gaps in the barricade, targeting PCs dazed by the psychic archers’ attacks for extra damage from combat advantage. The warmaster makes astral storm and astral lightning attacks against heavily armored PCs. When the PCs are at or over the barricade, the githyanki’s tactics change. The warmaster enters the fray, making double attacks against a single target in the front ranks. It uses its action point when a foe is first bloodied, making two double attacks in the hope of dropping it. 8 Githyanki (C) Level 17 Minion Skirmisher Corsair Cutters
Medium natural humanoid XP 400 each Initiative +16 Senses Perception +13 HP 1; a missed attack never damages a minion. AC 31; Fortitude 28, Reflex 29, Will 28 Saving Throws +2 against charm effects Speed 5; see also telekinetic jump m Silver Longsword (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon +22 vs. AC; 10 damage. Telekinetic Jump (move; encounter) The githyanki corsair cutter flies 5 squares. Combat Advantage A githyanki corsair cutter deals 3 extra damage on melee attacks against any target that is granting combat advantage to it. Alignment Evil Languages Common, Deep Speech Str 21 (+13) Dex 23 (+14) Wis 21 (+13) Con 16 (+11) Int 17 (+11) Cha 16 (+11) Equipment: leather armor, light shield, silver longsword
The psychic archers fall back to continue firing, targeting PCs moving for the ships. The corsair shipmaster and the corsair cutters use telekinetic leap and telekinetic jump to fly over the advancing PCs and attack from behind. The shipmaster uses blade dance against a lightly armored PC, then shifts to flank with a corsair cutter for combat advantage. The cutters flank in groups of two, constantly regrouping as they are cut down. Githyanki Corsair (S) Level 19 Skirmisher Shipmaster
Medium natural humanoid XP 2,400 Initiative +18 Senses Perception +15 HP 179; Bloodied 89 AC 33; Fortitude 31, Reflex 32, Will 31 Saving Throws +2 against charm effects Speed 6; see also telekinetic leap m Silver Longsword (standard; at-will) ✦ Psychic, Weapon +24 vs. AC; 2d8 + 5 damage plus 1d6 psychic damage, and if the githyanki corsair shipmaster has combat advantage against the target, it can shift 3 squares. M Blade Dance (standard; encounter) ✦ Psychic, Weapon +24 vs. AC; 3d8 + 6 damage plus 1d8 psychic damage, and the target is dazed until the end of the githyanki corsair shipmaster’s next turn. Effect: The shipmaster can shift up to 3 squares before or after making this attack. R Telekinetic Leap (move; encounter) Ranged 10; the githyanki corsair shipmaster or an ally within range can fly 5 squares. Combat Advantage A githyanki corsair shipmaster deals 1d6 extra damage on melee attacks against any target that is granting combat advantage to it. Alignment Evil Languages Common, Deep Speech Skills Acrobatics +21, Insight +20 Str 22 (+15) Dex 25 (+16) Wis 22 (+15) Con 19 (+13) Int 21 (+14) Cha 17 (+12) Equipment: leather armor, light shield, silver longsword
June 20 09
|
D u n g e o n 16 7
88
Garaitha’s Anvil
Githyanki (W) Level 17 Elite Skirmisher Gish Warmaster
Medium natural humanoid XP 3,200 Initiative +14 Senses Perception +17 HP 330; Bloodied 165 AC 33; Fortitude 28, Reflex 32, Will 30 Saving Throws +2 (+4 against charm effects) Speed 5; see also astral stride Action Points 1 m Silver Longsword (standard; at-will) ✦ Psychic, Weapon +22 vs. AC; 2d8 + 3 damage plus 1d8 psychic damage. r Astral Strike (standard; at-will) ✦ Radiant Ranged 5; +20 vs. Fortitude; 2d8 + 6 radiant damage. M Double Attack (standard; at-will) ✦ Psychic, Weapon The githyanki gish warmaster makes two silver longsword attacks. If it hits two different targets, each target takes an additional 1d8 psychic damage. R Astral Storm (standard; encounter) ✦ Psychic, Radiant The githyanki gish warmaster makes four attacks, no more than two of them against a single target: ranged 5; +20 vs. Fortitude; 3d8 + 6 psychic and radiant damage. A Astral Lightning (standard; recharge ⚅ ) ✦ Lightning Area burst 1 within 10; +20 vs. Reflex; 4d8 + 6 lightning damage. Astral Stride (move; at-will) ✦ Teleportation The githyanki gish warmaster teleports 6 squares and gains the insubstantial and phasing qualities until the start of its next turn. Alignment Evil Languages Common, Deep Speech, Draconic Skills Arcana +17 Str 19 (+12) Dex 18 (+12) Wis 18 (+12) Con 21 (+13) Int 24 (+15) Cha 21 (+13) Equipment chainmail, silver longsword
Cev’ren’s Escape The guards here fight to the death to prevent the PCs from reaching Cev’ren. When six or fewer githyanki remain standing, or if the PCs decide to simply bypass these defenders to get to the dock, the flagship breaks its moorings and takes to the air. With a shriek of rending steel, the astral man-of-war lurches up within its nest of mooring lines. As the githyanki on the decks hack through the last of these, the ship is swept up as if lifted by a mighty wave. The last of the githyanki crew pull themselves on as Cev’ren lifts slowly to the pulsing white sky. Astral craft function only in the mystical medium of the Astral Sea, but the presence of the astral gate automatically lifts Cev’ren and the smaller strike ships from their moorings. 8 Githyanki (P) Level 16 Minion Artillery Psychic Archers
Medium natural humanoid XP 350 each Initiative +12 Senses Perception +11 HP 1; a missed attack never damages a minion. AC 28; Fortitude 27, Reflex 29, Will 27 Saving Throws +2 against charm effects Speed 6; see also telekinetic jump m Silver Dagger (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon +23 vs. AC; 6 damage. R Psychic Shot (standard; requires longbow; at-will) ✦ Psychic, Weapon Ranged 15/30; +21 vs. Will; 8 psychic damage and the target is dazed until the end of its next turn. Telekinetic Jump (move; encounter) The githyanki psychic archer flies 5 squares. Alignment Evil Languages Common, Deep Speech Str 18 (+12) Dex 18 (+12) Wis 17 (+11) Con 21 (+13) Int 24 (+15) Cha 21 (+13) Equipment leather armor, silver dagger, longbow, quiver with 20 arrows
The PCs are welcome to attack Cev’ren if they wish. See Encounter G7 for information on attacking the astral man-of-war, and keep track of how much damage the PCs deal, since it counts toward success in the skill challenge in that encounter. Whether the fight is finished or not, a PC that gets closer to the second repair dock sees the astral strike ship left behind. Bobbing in the astral man-of-war’s magical wake, a smaller armored strike ship strains at its mooring lines. The name “Iliyoru” is emblazoned across the strike ship’s hull. A PC who understands Deep Speech translates the name as “White Blade.” A PC who saw Cev’ren depart knows that cutting the strike ship’s lines is enough to start its ascent. With a DC 22 Arcana check, a PC knows that the smaller strike ship is faster than the man-of-war if it can be properly controlled. When the PCs are ready to board Iliyoru, read: The strike ship is undefended, and whatever crew might have been here was either commandeered by Kada’ne or mustered for the battle outside the repair dock. Iliyoru tugs at the lines that hold her fast, drawn by the swirling essence of the astral gate high above. Cutting the ship free of its moorings takes only 1 round. Iliyoru immediately begins to climb, but the PCs must master the astral craft’s complex controls to mount an effective pursuit of the fleeing Cev’ren. Go to Encounter G7 on the next page.
June 20 09
|
D u n g e o n 16 7
89
Garaitha’s Anvil
Ships of the Line Iliyoru is an astral strike ship, similar in design to an astral skiff (Manual of the Planes™ page 159) but larger and built for war. Cev’ren is a massive astral man-ofwar and the flagship of the githyanki fleet—a planar warship on the scale of a seafaring war galleon. Both ships feature hulls reinforced with protective magic and open decks that can be sealed behind protective plates for long-distance travel across the Astral Sea. Both craft possess spell turrets and force ballistas for use in ship-to-ship combat. See Encounter G7 for more information.
Features of the Area Illumination: This area is infused with bright light. Catwalk: This shaky catwalk rises alongside the landing of the dock. The catwalk can be moved along normally, but a Medium or smaller creature that makes a melee attack while in a square on the edge of the catwalk must make a DC 14 Acrobatics check or stumble and fall over the edge. Ladders: These rough mesh ladders connect the lower level with the landing. It takes a move action and a DC 15 Athletics check to climb 10 feet up a ladder.
Gantry: Each of these gantry towers rises 20 feet above the catwalk or the landing, and features a crane sling arm for raising cargo from below. A gantry tower provides cover and can be climbed with a DC 10 Athletics check. A creature engaged in combat on the top of a tower must make a DC 22 Acrobatics check or fall. The sling arm cable hanging from the end of a gantry arm can be jumped to from a nearby catwalk with an Athletics check as normal. (A sling arm that has been moved over a catwalk can be grabbed.) A character who makes the jump snags the cable with a DC 14 Acrobatics check. On a failed check, the character falls. A creature that grabs a cable pulls the gantry arm 45 degrees in the direction of the creature’s movement, and can swing out on the cable in the same direction. The creature can then jump from the cable to any nearby catwalk by making an Acrobatics check. Use the DC for an Athletics check to jump the distance from the gantry to the catwalk, but treat the creature as if it has a running start. Makeshift Barricade: The githyanki have assembled the mesh steel crates littering this area into barricades 6 feet high. The barricades are difficult terrain and provide superior cover. An unstable barricade can be climbed over with a DC 15 Athletics check, vaulted over with a DC 15 Acrobatics check, or pushed through with a DC 20 Athletics check. Pushing a barricade slides its crates and any creature behind those crates 2 squares. Crates: These squares are difficult terrain. These piles of mesh steel crates stand 15 feet high and provide cover. They can be climbed with a DC 10 Athletics check.
The steel mesh sides of these empty crates provide convenient handholds. A creature with two hands free can push one of the 3-foot-high crates in front of it at normal speed (though it cannot run). This provides cover while moving, but the creature must then draw its weapons or retrieve stowed items when it stops moving. Scrap: These areas of cast-off steel fragments, cables, and other detritus are difficult terrain. A creature that runs, charges, or makes a double move through an area of scrap must make a DC 20 Acrobatics check or fall prone. Scrap Pile: A 5-foot-high scrap pile provides cover and is difficult terrain. It takes a DC 10 Athletics check to move over a scrap pile.
June 20 09
|
D u n g e o n 16 7
90
Garaitha’s Anvil
G7: Iliyoru’s Flight Encounter Level 18 (11,200 XP) Admiral Kada’ne is on board the flagship Cev’ren as it lifts off toward the astral gate at the core of Garaitha’s Anvil. The PCs have seized the astral strike ship Iliyoru and are giving chase. This encounter is not a straightforward combat challenge. Rather, the PCs must take control of Iliyoru even as they utilize her armaments and their own powers to bring Cev’ren to a halt. However, as they do so, the PCs come under attack from the man-of-war and from githyanki forces battling their Coalition allies. Explain the controls of Iliyoru to the players (see the “Fight in the Skies” sidebar) as the PCs settle in on the strike ship. Then give the players an overview of the skill challenge and let the chase begin. Iliyoru’s Flight Level 18 Skill Challenge XP 8,000 Cev’ren is rising quickly above Iliyoru, bound for the astral gate and a chance to flee the conflagration below. Cutting Iliyoru free of its moorings causes it to automatically rise up toward the astral gate high above the Garaitha docks. However, only by gaining control of the ship do the PCs have a chance to catch up to Kada’ne’s flagship. Complexity 4 (requires 10 successes before 3 failures). Primary Skills Acrobatics, Arcana, Athletics, Thievery. Other Skills Acrobatics, Perception. Special PCs not crewing the ship or making checks in the skill challenge can make attacks against Cev’ren in an attempt to cripple the flagship. Damage dealt to Cev’ren counts toward success in the skill challenge. Damage dealt to Iliyoru does not count toward failure in the skill challenge, but can hinder the ship’s speed. See the “Fight in the Skies” and “Roll Out the Guns” sidebars for more information.
If the PCs close the distance between Iliyoru and Cev’ren to 0 squares, or if Cev’ren’s speed is reduced to 0 by damage, they gain an automatic victory in the skill challenge. If Iliyoru’s speed is reduced to 0 by damage, the PCs gain an automatic defeat in the challenge. Victory The PCs earn a victory in this skill challenge in two stages. When they achieve 5 successes, they gain full control of Iliyoru. This allows the strike ship to travel at its maximum speed of 12 squares (until brought under control, Iliyoru travels at a speed of 10 squares). Subsequent checks in the challenge focus on safely bringing the smaller ship to within boarding range of Cev’ren. With an overall victory in the challenge (whether attained by successful skill checks or by attacks against Cev’ren), the PCs can successfully fire the grappling lines that lock the man-of-war and the strike ship together. Defeat Whether or not they gain initial control of Iliyoru, the PCs cannot successfully lock to Cev’ren. Instead, the smaller Iliyoru goes into an out-of-control spiral that brings it within range of the flagship’s grapples. (If the PCs fail the skill challenge while Cev’ren is still well out of range, Kada’ne sees them scuttle their ship and descends to seize it.) Each PC on the strike ship takes 2d10 damage and loses 1 healing surge. Acrobatics DC 13 (0 successes or failures) With a successful check (a free action), the PC gains a +2 circumstance bonus to his or her next primary skill check in the challenge or a +2 circumstance bonus to damage on his or her next attack made against Cev’ren (see the “Fight in the Skies” and “Roll Out the Guns” sidebars). On a failed check, the PC takes a –2 penalty to his or her next primary check or damage roll. Taking control of Iliyoru is made more difficult by the ship’s chaotic movement as the PCs try to avoid attack while climbing toward the astral gate. Acrobatics DC 20 (1 success or failure, maximum 3 successes) Only the PC piloting Iliyoru can make this check. In addition to earning a success in the skill challenge, a successful check grants Iliyoru a +10 bonus to AC and Reflex until the beginning of the pilot’s next turn. By constantly changing up the smaller strike ship’s course as it climbs, the PC makes Iliyoru a more difficult target for the whitewings and the gunners on Cev’ren.
Arcana DC 25 (1 success or failure, maximum 3 successes) Drawing on his or her understanding of magic devices, the PC works out the complex operation of the strike ship’s controls. Athletics DC 20 (1 success or failure, maximum 3 successes) Getting control of Iliyoru relies on traditional sailing skill as much as magical aptitude. With a successful check, the PC properly sets the strike ship’s rigging to help control its erratic course upward. Perception DC 13 (0 successes or failures) With a successful Perception check (a free action), the PC gains a +2 circumstance bonus to his or her next check in the challenge or a +2 circumstance bonus to damage on his or her next attack made against Cev’ren (see the “Fight in the Skies” and “Roll Out the Guns” sidebars). On a failed check, the PC takes a –2 penalty to his or her next primary check or damage roll. The shifting maelstrom of the astral gate flares wildly overhead as Iliyoru and Cev’ren arc around each other, making it hard to accurately judge distance and direction as the ships close. Thievery DC 25 (1 success or failure, maximum 3 successes) The complex controls of Iliyoru can be subtly coerced into responding to the PC’s direction.
After the PCs have made their first success or failure in the skill challenge, read: Iliyoru pitches as you try to bring her under control, swinging wide over the shipyard below. The githyanki and the Coalition forces are still locked in combat, neither side giving ground in the ongoing assault. Then suddenly, a group of white shapes peel away from a skirmish with the Coalition’s griffon riders. Eight white reptilian creatures wing their way up and toward Iliyoru with a shriek, their githyanki riders spurring them on.
June 20 09
|
D u n g e o n 16 7
91
Garaitha’s Anvil
Setup 8 githyanki corsair cutters on astral whitewings The whitewings and their riders approach from below Iliyoru, but these creatures have speed enough to easily catch up to the strike ship with double moves. This encounter has no tactical map, but use the plan of Iliyoru from Encounter G8 to map the whitewings’ movement around the ship. The whitewings and their riders start out spaced around one side of the strike ship. As the fight progresses, keep track of Iliyoru’s speed as compared to the whitewings’. A whitewing uses most of its move to keep up with Iliyoru (either 10 or 12 squares), with its additional movement used to adjust its position relative to the ship. (The proximity of the astral gate grants the whitewing the increased fly speed for its astral wings power.)
New Creature: Astral Whitewing These highly intelligent reptilian flyers are native to the Astral Sea, and are raised and trained by the githyanki as flying mounts. A whitewing seats one rider in a specially made saddle, and it can be controlled by reins or voice command. These creatures have a wingspan of nearly 30 feet, and they are equally at home in the skies of the planes as the Astral Sea. Native wild whitewings are found only in the Astral Sea, and they are known for their predatory pack attacks on travelers in that realm. Whitewings trained as mounts by the githyanki are sometimes lost on scout missions, and they can be found wandering wild in the remote mountainous regions of the world and the Feywild.
Fight in the Skies When it leaves the dock, Iliyoru starts out 40 squares beneath the climbing Cev’ren. The strike ship initially travels at a speed of 10 squares. When brought under control (5 successes in the skill challenge), it travels at a speed of 12 squares. The flagship Cev’ren has a speed of 8 squares. Because of the turbulence created by the astral gate, neither craft can make a double move in this encounter. The lift granted by the astral gate means that it takes only three PCs to control Iliyoru—one pilot and two crew. (A ship of this size normally requires a crew of three or more.) For each missing crew member, the ship’s speed is reduced by 2 squares. The PC who pilots the strike ship must do so with a standard action and a move action each round. The PCs crewing Iliyoru must use a standard action each round to do so. Because those three PCs are actively working the strike ship’s controls, they can make primary skill checks in the skill challenge as minor actions. All other characters make primary skill checks in the challenge as standard actions. Initially, three PCs need to fly the ship and make checks in the skill challenge, with other PCs either undertaking the skill challenge or attacking Cev’ren
Tactics The whitewings swarm Iliyoru, using their astral jaunt or flyby attack to get into position for tail slam attacks against the strike ship. The githyanki corsair cutters do not attack, since they know they cannot deal any damage against Iliyoru’s magically enhanced defenses. As the whitewings and their riders move around the strike ship, they do so at different altitudes relative
in an attempt to slow it down (see the “Run Out the Guns” sidebar). However, a PC can forgo crewing the ship to join in the attack as long as Iliyoru’s reduced speed matches Cev’ren’s, preventing the flagship from getting out of range. Keep track of the distance between the two ships from round to round, and of the change in speed of either craft as it takes damage. For every 50 damage either astral craft takes, its speed is reduced by 2 squares. At fly speed 0, a ship floats out of control toward the astral gate, allowing the other ship to catch it. (The PCs can continue to attack Cev’ren even after its speed has been reduced to 0. However, a ship at 0 hit points is not destroyed, but simply disabled.) Each warship is equipped with grappling lines that can be fired by the pilot. Iliyoru engages its grapples when the PCs have achieved a victory in the skill challenge. If the party suffers a defeat in the challenge, Cev’ren instead fires its grapples against the strike ship. The vehicle rules above have been adapted from Adventurer’s Vault™. You can use that supplement if you want to play out a more complex chase between Iliyoru and Cev’ren.
to each other. However, because diagonals on the battle grid are equivalent to horizontal or vertical distances, two githyanki four squares apart on the battle grid remain 4 squares apart at different heights for the purpose of targeting them both with an area attack. See the “Fight in the Skies” and “Run Out the Guns” sidebars for more information on the combat with the whitewings and their riders.
June 20 09
|
D u n g e o n 16 7
92
Garaitha’s Anvil
8 Astral Whitewings Level 15 Skirmisher
Large immortal beast (reptile) XP 1,200* each Initiative +17 Senses Perception +18; low-light vision HP 146; Bloodied 73 AC 30; Fortitude 27, Reflex 28, Will 26 Speed 4, fly 8 (hover); see also astral wings m Tail Slam (standard; at-will) Reach 2; +21 vs. AC; 2d8 + 7 damage. M Flyby Attack (standard; at-will) The astral whitewing moves its fly speed and makes one tail slam attack at any point during that movement. The whitewing does not provoke opportunity attacks when moving away from the target of the attack. R Stunning Shriek (standard; at-will) Ranged 5; the target is stunned until the end of its next turn. Astral Jaunt (move action; must be mounted by a friendly githyanki rider; recharge ⚄ ⚅ ) ✦ Mount, Teleportation The astral whitewing and its rider teleport a distance equal to the whitewing’s fly speed. Astral Wings While in the Astral Sea, the whitewing’s fly speed increases to 12 squares. Alignment Unaligned Languages — Str 22 (+13) Dex 24 (+14) Wis 20 (+12) Con 18 (+11) Int 8 (+6) Cha 16 (+10) * A whitewing in this encounter flees if its corsair cutter rider is killed, earning XP only for the minion.
Run Out the Guns Four of the six turrets on Iliyoru are designed to allow spellcasters to channel magical attacks against other ships and airborne combatants. A character in a spell turret can use the turret to direct any nonweapon ranged or area arcane or divine attack power. A character directing a power through a spell turret uses his or her own attack modifier and deals damage as normal. However, a power directed through a spell turret cannot be used with an implement. The magic of a spell turret doubles the range of arcane and divine powers, and allows powers to target inanimate objects even if they normally cannot do so. Characters attacking airborne creatures through a spell turret can make use of any of a power’s effects. Powers that create effects in addition to hit point damage can be used against a ship, but the ship ignores such effects (including ongoing damage). Attacks that deal damage throughout an area (typically attacks that target all creatures in a burst) strike more than 1 square when used against a ship, dealing additional damage as follows: burst 1 or 2, 2 damage; burst 3 or 4, 3 damage; burst 5 or larger, 5 damage. Attacks that can target multiple characters function only as a single attack when directed through a spell turret.
Characters who do not have arcane or divine powers can make use of two force ballista turrets on the strike ship. Force Ballista: +15 vs. AC; ranged 40; 3d10 force damage. Each force ballista has 10 bolts and is operated by a single character. Firing is a standard action. Activating the magical bolt loader is a minor action. Each round that the astral ships are in the air, the crew of Cev’ren launch four force ballista attacks against the pursuing Iliyoru, using the attack and damage modifiers above. (Kada’ne is the only githyanki on Cev’ren with arcane powers, but he is too busy giving orders to make use of the flagship’s spell turrets.) Attacks made with the spell turrets and force ballistas of either ship target only the other craft or creatures in the air. These attacks cannot target a character on a ship. Cev’ren: HP 800; AC 8; Fortitude 20, Reflex 12; resist 10 all damage; speed 8. Iliyoru: HP 500; AC 6; Fortitude 17, Reflex 15; resist 10 all damage; speed 10 (at the beginning of the skill challenge) or 12 (after 5 victories in the challenge). The vehicle rules above have been adapted from Adventurer’s Vault. You can use that supplement if you want to play out a more complex chase between Iliyoru and Cev’ren.
June 20 09
|
D u n g e o n 16 7
93
Garaitha’s Anvil
8 Githyanki Corsair Level 17 Minion Skirmisher Cutters
Medium natural humanoid XP 400 each Initiative +16 Senses Perception +12 HP 1; a missed attack never damages a minion. AC 31; Fortitude 28, Reflex 29, Will 28 Saving Throws +2 against charm effects Speed 5; see also telekinetic jump m Silver Longsword (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon +22 vs. AC; 10 damage. Telekinetic Jump (move; encounter) The githyanki corsair cutter flies 5 squares. Combat Advantage A githyanki corsair cutter deals 3 extra damage on melee attacks against any target that is granting combat advantage to it. Alignment Evil Languages Common, Deep Speech Str 21 (+13) Dex 23 (+14) Wis 21 (+13) Con 16 (+11) Int 17 (+11) Cha 16 (+11) Equipment: leather armor, light shield, silver longsword
Experience The astral whitewings are a much more potent threat than their minion masters in terms of their hit points and attacks. However, if its rider is slain, a whitewing in this encounter immediately flees the battle. Because this encounter treats the whitewings and their riders as a single creature with minion hit points, XP is awarded only for the corsair cutters. On the off chance that the PCs kill one of the whitewings while targeting its rider, award them additional experience as appropriate.
Development At the completion of the skill challenge, Cev’ren is locked to Iliyoru and ready to be boarded. If the PCs suffered a defeat in the skill challenge and were seized by Cev’ren, paraphrase the following accordingly. The grappling controls are set and punched, and with a shriek of steel, a dozen silver cables lance out from Iliyoru to sink into Cev’ren’s hull. Like raptors caught in a death spiral, the two ships are pulled toward each other even as their now-connected momentum causes them to spin out of control. The lightning-streaked maelstrom of the astral gate looms above you. The PCs have no chance for a short rest. Go to the next page for the final encounter and the showdown with Kada’ne’s forces.
June 20 09
|
D u n g e o n 16 7
94
Garaitha’s Anvil
G8: Kada’ne’s Stand Encounter Level 21 (19,600 XP)
Setup Admiral Kada’ne, githyanki gish overlord (O) 6 githyanki blademasters (B) 6 githyanki corsair cutters (C) 8 githyanki psychic archers (P) On board the githyanki flagship Cev’ren, the PCs face off against Admiral Kada’ne and his forces in a final showdown.
As Cev’ren and Iliyoru come together, read: Even as Iliyoru and the larger Cev’ren come together with a shuddering crash, you hear the shouts of githyanki troops as the deck doors of the flagship split and unfurl like an insect’s shell. Spread out along the rail, around twenty githyanki howl in defiance. Behind them stands the hulking figure in golden armor, his voice booming over the bloodlust of his troops and the shrieking storm of the astral gate looming above you. “The hearts of these mortal dogs are mine! Kill them all!”
This final battle is a free-for-all on the decks of both astral craft as they spiral out of control beneath the looming maelstrom of the astral gate. The PCs can choose to take up defensive positions in Iliyoru, or they can move across to take the fight to the main deck of the more wide-open Cev’ren. Describe the ever-present threat of the astral gate looming above, threatening to swallow both ships as they spin closer each round. The scope of this battle is limited only by your imagination and the PCs’ willingness to throw themselves into the fight.
Development The retrieval of Kada’ne’s crystal key is the PCs’ primary mission here, but what they do with the admiral himself is up to them. Whether Kada’ne is killed or captured, any surviving githyanki on Cev’ren surrender at once. The PCs are victorious, but the out-of-control ships are still heading for the astral gate above. In the aftermath of the battle, the PCs can free Iliyoru from Cev’ren and descend back to the shipyard. If the strike ship was disabled by Cev’ren in Encounter G6, the PCs can seize the man-of-war instead. The grappling cables are quickly jettisoned as Iliyoru responds while you pull her away from the crippled flagship. The pressure of the astral gate is severe, and the strike ship bucks as you set course for the ground. Behind you, caught up in the white storm, Cev’ren is quickly swept away, trailing cables and shattered rigging as it disappears into the maelstrom.
June 20 09
|
D u n g e o n 16 7
95
Garaitha’s Anvil
side Trip Intentionally traveling through the astral gate is a poor course of action for the PCs, since they have no idea where it leads. (This knowledge is beyond even Bejam and Haryssus.) However, if the party takes that route, the other side of the astral gate is a remote portal in the Astral Sea where a number of other githyanki astral warships are circling. Their angry captains are wondering why they cannot cross over to Garaitha’s Anvil (the astral gate is closed from this side by Bejam and Haryssus’s magic), and they take a great interest in the appearance of a ship from the other side. The PCs have no way to return to the shipyard, but their Coalition allies will commandeer strike ships and come after them eventually. How the PCs fare until then is up to you. Alternatively, if you feel like an even bigger finish to the adventure, you can improvise a skill challenge based on the challenge in Encounter G6. Let the PCs race against time as they attempt to disengage Iliyoru from Cev’ren before both astral craft are swept up into the gate above. When they regain control of the ship, they can return safely to the shipyard below.
Features ofthe Area Illumination: The astral gate sheds bright light across the decks of both ships. Boarding Zone: A shifting 10-foot gap of empty space splits the two ships where grappling cables have lashed them together. Creatures that cannot fly or teleport can jump from one ship to the other with a DC 10 Athletics check (DC 20 without a running start), by climbing along an exposed grappling cable (a DC 15
Athletics check; see below), or by swinging across on one of the many loose rigging lines hanging between the ships (a DC 15 Acrobatics check; see below). While none of these checks are difficult, the penalty for failure can be extreme. A creature that falls while jumping, climbing, or swinging across the gap can attempt a saving throw to grab onto the deck of the ship it is moving to. On a failed saving throw, the creature falls into empty air but can catch itself on a rigging line with a DC 27 Acrobatics or Athletics check. If that check fails, the creature falls to the shipyard below. (Unless you want to keep track of distance, assume that Iliyoru and Cev’ren climb 500 feet during the skill challenge and the subsequent battle. A fall from that height deals 250 damage.) Deck: The decks of both astral craft buck and shudder as the ships spiral out of control. Each round at the beginning of its turn, a creature standing on the deck of either ship must make a DC 14 Acrobatics check or slide 1 square in a random direction. If a creature slides off the deck, see above for its chances of holding on. Raised Deck: Raised areas are marked on the decks of both ships. These are 5 feet high and provide cover. It costs 1 extra square of movement to swing up onto a raised deck. Rigging Lines: Damage dealt to both ships in the previous encounter has left rigging lines hanging in the empty air between them. A rigging line is stout rope (AC 10, Reflex 10, Fortitude 5; 15 hit points). A creature can grab a rigging line and swing from one ship to the other with a running start of at least 2 squares and a DC 15 Acrobatics check. Grappling Cables: These thick cables are a tough weave of steel and adamantine (AC 5, Reflex 5, Fortitude 10; 100 hit points). Pulling a grappling cable out
of the ship it is sunk into requires a DC 33 Strength check. Cables cannot be forcibly detached from the ship they are shot from, but the controls on a ship can disconnect its own cables as a minor action. Climbing from one ship to another by way of a grappling cable requires a double move and a DC 15 Athletics check.
June 20 09
|
D u n g e o n 16 7
96
Garaitha’s Anvil
Tactics Kada’ne fears for his life, and the cowardly admiral is not eager to engage the PCs. He stays at the back of the fray for as long as possible, using his minions as cover while he targets PCs adjacent to each other with astral whirlwind. PCs who get within 5 squares are hit with soulstorm strike before Kada’ne uses astral stride to teleport to safety. The corsair cutters and the githyanki blademasters fight in pairs, flanking for combat advantage. The githyanki psychic archers target PCs engaging the corsair cutters and the blademasters, dazing targets to grant the melee attackers additional advantage. Only when half of Kada’ne’s minions have been killed does the gish overlord take the fight to the PCs. He makes a soulstorm strike against any characters in range before using astral whirlwind to attempt to stun whichever character has been most effective in combat. He then uses blade fury against that foe twice by spending an action point. Kada’ne repeats this tactic immediately with his second action point, then stays at the center of the fray making soulstorm strike and blade fury attacks each round against every PC he can target.
Admiral Kada’ne
Admiral Kada’ne, (O) Level 19 Solo Skirmisher Githyanki Gish Overlord
Medium natural humanoid XP 12,000 Initiative +17 Senses Perception +18 HP 724; Bloodied 362 AC 33; Fortitude 33, Reflex 31, Will 29 Saving Throws +5 (+7 against charm effects) Speed 5, teleport 6 Action Points 2 m Silver Greatsword (standard; at-will) ✦ Psychic, Weapon +24 vs. AC; 1d10 + 6 damage plus 1d8 psychic damage. M Blade Fury (standard; at-will) ✦ Psychic, Weapon Kada’ne makes four silver greatsword attacks and can shift up to 2 squares after each. Effect: Kada’ne teleports 3 squares and gains a bonus to his next attack roll equal to the number of creatures he hit with this attack. C Soulstorm Strike (standard; at-will) ✦ Lightning, Radiant Close blast 5; +22 vs. Reflex; 2d8 + 4 lightning and radiant damage and ongoing 10 lightning and radiant damage. A Astral Whirlwind (minor; recharge ⚄ ⚅ ) ✦ Psychic, Radiant Area burst 1 within 10; +22 vs. Fortitude; the target is stunned until the end of its next turn. R Telekinetic Leap (move; encounter) Ranged 10; Kada’ne or an ally within range can fly 5 squares. R Rescuing Banishment (immediate interrupt, when an ally in range is hit by an enemy attack; at-will) ✦ Teleportation Ranged 10; targets the hit ally; the target is banished to a demiplane and suffers no effect of the triggering attack. It returns to a square within 10 squares of Kada’ne at the start of Kada’ne’s next turn. Silver Banishment (free, when Kada’ne hits a target with a weapon attack; recharges when first bloodied) ✦ Teleportation The target is banished to a demiplane (save ends). It disappears from sight, cannot take actions, and cannot be targeted. On a save, the target reappears in the space it last occupied. If that space is occupied, the target returns to the nearest unoccupied space of its choosing. Alignment Evil Languages Common, Deep Speech, Draconic Skills Insight +18, Intimidate +20 Str 26 (+17) Dex 22 (+15) Wis 18 (+13) Con 21 (+14) Int 19 (+13) Cha 22 (+15) Equipment plate armor, silver greatsword, crystal key
June 20 09
|
D u n g e o n 16 7
97
Garaitha’s Anvil
8 Githyanki (P) Level 16 Minion Artillery Psychic Archers
Medium natural humanoid XP 350 each Initiative +12 Senses Perception +11 HP 1; a missed attack never damages a minion. AC 28; Fortitude 27, Reflex 29, Will 27 Saving Throws +2 against charm effects Speed 6; see also telekinetic jump m Silver Dagger (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon +23 vs. AC; 6 damage. R Psychic Shot (standard; requires longbow; at-will) ✦ Psychic, Weapon Ranged 15/30; +21 vs. Will; 8 psychic damage and the target is dazed until the end of its next turn. Telekinetic Jump (move; encounter) The githyanki psychic archer flies 5 squares. Alignment Evil Languages Common, Deep Speech Str 18 (+12) Dex 18 (+12) Wis 17 (+11) Con 21 (+13) Int 24 (+15) Cha 21 (+13) Equipment leather armor, silver dagger, longbow, quiver with 20 arrows
6 Githyanki (C) Level 17 Minion Skirmisher Corsair Cutters
Medium natural humanoid XP 400 each Initiative +16 Senses Perception +12 HP 1; a missed attack never damages a minion. AC 31; Fortitude 28, Reflex 29, Will 28 Saving Throws +2 against charm effects Speed 5; see also telekinetic jump m Silver Longsword (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon +22 vs. AC; 10 damage. Telekinetic Jump (move; encounter) The githyanki corsair cutter flies 5 squares. Combat Advantage A githyanki corsair cutter deals 3 extra damage on melee attacks against any target that is granting combat advantage to it. Alignment Evil Languages Common, Deep Speech Str 21 (+13) Dex 23 (+14) Wis 21 (+13) Con 16 (+11) Int 17 (+11) Cha 16 (+11) Equipment: leather armor, light shield, silver longsword
6 Githyanki (B) Level 17 Minion Skirmisher Blademasters
Medium natural humanoid XP 400 each Initiative +15 Senses Perception +9 HP 1; a missed attack never damages a minion. AC 28; Fortitude 25, Reflex 23, Will 22 Saving Throws +2 against charm effects Speed 5; see also telekinetic jump m Silver Longsword (standard; at-will) ✦ Psychic, Weapon +22 vs. AC; 8 psychic damage. M Twin Longsword Strike (standard; requires combat advantage against the target; at-will) ✦ Psychic, Weapon +22 vs. AC; 12 psychic damage Telekinetic Jump (move; encounter) The githyanki blademaster flies 5 squares. Alignment Evil Languages Common, Deep Speech Str 24 (+15) Dex 21 (+13) Wis 12 (+9) Con 15 (+10) Int 13 (+9) Cha 21 (+13) Equipment plate armor, 2 silver longswords
About the Author Scott Fitzgerald Gray (9th-level layabout, vindictive neutral) started gaming in high school and has worked as a writer and editor much of the time since then. After belatedly realizing he could combine both vocations in 2004, he’s been making up for lost time as a freelance RPG editor and designer, primarily for Wizards of the Coast. He lives in the Canadian hinterland with a schoolteacher, two daughters, and a large number of animal companions.
June 20 09
|
D u n g e o n 16 7
98
A Tyranny of Souls By Robert J. Schwalb An adventure for 19th-level characters illustrations by William O’Connor and Kekai Kotaki cartography by Robert Lazzaretti & Mike Schley TM & © 2009 Wizards of the Coast LLC All rights reserved.
Listen!
The darkest hour is upon us, but we have no need to fear and no reason for anguish. It has been foretold that our hero will return. Her blade will shine like a thousand stars, and our enemies will cower in its brilliant light. Her voice will ring with the shouts of a thousand warriors, and our enemies will wail and gnash their teeth with fear. And her anger will burn like a thousand suns, and our enemies will be as cinders before her intolerable wrath. It has been foretold that she who broke our chains will come forth once again and lead us to glory and conquest, and in her name we will build an empire to span all worlds, giving no shelter, no succor, and no mercy to those who oppose us. It has been foretold and the time is near. Take heart warriorGith has returned, and our ultimate victory is at hand!
July 20 09
|
D u n g e o n 1 58
24
A Tyranny of Souls
Tiamat seized the githyanki city and bleeds it dry to supply her armies with arms, soldiers, and other resources. In doing so, she broke the ancient pact between the githyanki and red dragons, and she inadvertently loosed Gith’s soul from the Nine Hells to return to her people once more. Masquerading as Vlaakith reborn, Gith seeks out the Coalition to forge a temporary alliance and hopes to join forces to remove Tiamat from Tu’narath and withdraw the githyanki from the war.
The Quests In “A Tyranny of Souls,” the PCs journey to Citadel Mercane only to discover their contacts dead. From there, the adventurers push on to Tu’narath, where they must rescue the Separatists’ leader, negotiate an alliance, and defeat Emperor Zetch’r’r to force Tiamat out of the ancient githyanki city. Minor QuestContact the Separatists The adventurers are sent to Citadel Mercane to meet with the Separatists’ representatives. Finding the representatives murdered, the characters must discover another way to make contact with these rebel githyanki even if this means traveling to Tu’narath. Reward: 2,400 XP. Minor QuestInfiltrate Tu’narath The githyanki guard their infamous city’s location, so travelers seeking out this bastion must find a route to the city and, once there, find a way through the cordon. Reward: 2,400 XP. Minor QuestRescue Vlaakith When the characters make contact with the githyanki
rebels, they learn the movement is in shambles since the emperor’s soldiers captured their leader. The characters must rescue Vlaakith if the Separatists would have a chance to retake the city from Tiamat. Reward: 2,400 XP. Minor QuestDefeat the Emperor For the Separatists to take command of the city, the emperor must lose control over the dragons. The only way this can happen is if he is defeated and the scepter of Ephelomonthe pact’s physical representationis given to Vlaakith. Reward: 2,800 XP. Major QuestThe Githyanki Withdraw from the War The PCs can negotiate with the Separatists to get them to withdraw from the war and in doing so deliver a terrible setback to Tiamat’s plans. Reward: 14,000 XP. Bonus: +2,400 XP if the characters secure a 1,000year reprieve. Bonus: +2,800 XP if the characters secure an alliance.
“A Tyranny of Souls” is an adventure for five 19thlevel characters. By its end, the player characters should be 21st level. With some adaptation, however, you can run this adventure as a stand-alone scenario or as part of your own campaign.
Background Tiamat casts a dark shadow across the ancient githyanki city of Tu’narath, but the city is no stranger to evil’s machinations. Having endured the LichQueen’s thousand-year reign, the city has witnessed astonishing wickedness. All was to have changed with Vlaakith’s assassination, but the vacuum she created plunged the city into turmoil, with military commanders and pretenders all vying for her throne. When a leader emerged to right its course, though, it would lead the githyanki into greater darkness in Tiamat’s thrall. The githyanki have never knelt to a god, but desperate times demand desperate actions. The LichQueen’s death threatened to tear Tu’narath apart, and the githyanki were no closer to correcting their course. Zetch’r’r had a strong claim to the throne, but his radical views and his involvement in Vlaakith’s death made him unpopular with the conservative factions. While he argued and fought, less worthy ascendants each put forward their own claims. Zetch’r’r lacked sufficient strength to take the city by force, but each day he delayed, the damage and violence escalated. Like Gith so long ago, Zetch’r’r turned to Tiamat for aid. The dark goddess, with plans of her own, proved a willing ally. She had long coveted greater influence over the githyanki, but she saw the ancient pact as an obstacle. She offered
July 20 09
|
D u n g e o n 16 8
25
A Tyranny of Souls
to help, promising to give Zetch’r’r full control over the dragons in the city in exchange for his unswerving loyalty and fealty. Zetch’r’r knelt, and his rise to power was assured. Bolstered by red dragons, dragonspawn, and devil mercenaries, Zetch’r’r dashed his enemies and crushed all opposition in a single week. Amid the ruins of Vlaakith’s old palace, Tiamat’s dark priests crowned Zetch’r’r emperor and the new tyrant declared his bold plans for his people, including a renewed commitment to the crusade against the mind flayers and a new peace with their estranged kin, the githzerai. His promises amounted to little, for Tiamat had other plans. The Dark Lady needed soldiers for her armies, weapons for her troops, and a base to launch new attacks against her enemies. Tu’narath provided all these things. Zetch’r’r’s goals stood in Tiamat’s way, and so, by her decree, the githyanki would abandon their campaign against the mind flayers and refocus their efforts to combat Tiamat’s foes. Zetch’r’r had no choice but to accept his mistress’s commands, and thus was Tu’narath’s new course set. What neither Tiamat nor Zetch’r’r realized was that by abandoning the Eternal Crusade, they rendered the ancient compact between the githyanki and the red dragons void. Without the pact, Gith, who’s soul long-languished in Dispater’s cells in the Nine Hells, was free to find the oblivion long-owed her in the Shadowfell, but this ancient hero was not finished yet.
Adventure Synopsis A few days before the adventure begins, a githyanki envoy representing the Separatists presented himself before the Coalition to gauge their interests in forming a short-term alliance. The representative explained that not all githyanki are so eager to die for Tiamat, and many see their service to the dark goddess as slavery. The envoy invites the Coalition to send representatives to Citadel Mercane, where they can bargain on neutral ground, free from Tiamat’s ever-present eyes. Although the Coalition suspects a trap, the opportunity to weaken Tiamat’s armies is too good to pass up. The adventurers, who have proved capable allies, are chosen to serve as ambassadors and negotiate the terms on the Coalition’s behalf. The heroes make the journey to Citadel Mercane, but they soon discover their contacts are missing or dead. Meeting up with a possible ally, a disguised raavasta (see Manual of the Planes™, page 136), to help navigate the trade center, the PCs learn the Separatists are active in Tu’narath and that they must travel there and contact them if they would get them to withdraw from the war. In the githyanki city, the PCs learn the emperor is wise to their intent and has moved to capture and kill many Separatist leaders, plus he has traps in place for the adventurers. They eventually encounter a Separatist agent who informs them that Vlaakith, their leader, was taken prisoner and is held at the Fortress of Three Sorrows. By freeing her, the PCs can demonstrate their goodwill and also give the rebel faction renewed hope and drive to fight against Tiamat’s agents. The characters travel to the floating fortress, battle through its defenses, and fight their way to Vlaakith’s “cell.” There, they learn from the aspect of Dispater, who has come to steal back the soul inhabiting her
body, that the legendary warrior Gith possesses the young githyanki woman. Once the characters free her and restore Vlaakith to the Separatists, they can engage in the negotiations for which they were sent. The Separatists agree to withdraw the githyanki from Tiamat’s war, but admit their promises are worthless as long as Zetch’r’r is in power. The githyanki ask the PCs to infiltrate his palace, defeat the usurper, and recover the scepter of Ephelomon. Meanwhile, the Separatists will attack Tiamat’s garrisons and retake the city. The adventure concludes in a deadly battle against the emperor and his red dragon cohort in his personal chambers, while battles rage in the skies above and in the city streets. If the PCs succeed, Tu’narath becomes free from Tiamat and the githyanki can once more follow their own destinies. If they fail, there will be no stopping Tiamat’s wrath.
Managing the Adventure Although “A Tyranny of Souls” has a straightforward plot, the players have several choices and options for completing the various parts, allowing the adventure to unfold in an organic fashion. Giving meaningful choices means the PCs might skip over some encounters, and in doing so, they might lag behind in XP or miss out on important treasure. Many encounters provided adaptation entries to help you repurpose them for later use in the adventure. Alternatively, you can use the smaller sample encounters to offer additional challenges. Just move the treasure the characters missed to these improvised combats. Shifting encounters helps you create the illusion of success from cleverness without diminishing the XP and treasure the characters ought to earn.
July 20 09
|
D u n g e o n 16 8
26
A Tyranny of Souls
Preparing for Adventure “A Tyranny of Souls” takes the adventurers into the Astral Sea. The characters begin by exploring Citadel Mercane, an ancient trade center built within the heart of a crimson mountain, where they hope to meet with the Separatists’ agents. From the citadel, the characters travel across the Astral Sea to Tu’narath. Once there, the PCs might explore the Merchant District, attack a floating fortress, and ultimately assault the Chromatic Bastion, seat of Zetch’r’r’s power.
What You Need to Play Aside from the core rulebooks, “A Tyranny of Souls” references information from three other sources. “Tu’narath, City of Death” in Dragon® Magazine #377 provides a comprehensive history and overview of the githyanki and their city. The Manual of the Planes provides extensive information on the Astral Sea and its inhabitants and should prove a useful resource for adding more detail than given in this adventure. Finally, a few tactical encounters feature vehicles. While the key information you need to use vehicles is included in an appendix, Adventurer’s Vault™ provides the complete rules. Several tactical encounters involve challenging environments, mounts, and three-dimensional combat. Be sure to review “Movement in Three Dimensions, Mounted Combat, and Flying” in the Dungeon Master’s Guide® (pages 45−48) before running this adventure.
Using Tactical Encounters
Read-Aloud Text
Each encounter includes several common elements, as described below.
Read-aloud text provides information about what the characters can see and are aware of. You do not have to read it word for word. Especially where read-aloud text is provided in a question-and-answer format, feel free to paraphrase and use your own words when describing the information presented. Use readaloud text wisely. It is written for the most common approach to a particular situation, but the PCs’ actions might require you to alter the information in any number of ways.
Encounter Level Each tactical encounter assumes a group of five player characters. An encounter of average difficulty is one where the encounter level is equal to the level of the party. Encounters that are 1 or 2 levels lower than the party are easy encounters, while encounters that are 2 or more levels higher than the party are difficult encounters. For overcoming an encounter, a group earns the XP value noted beside the encounter level. This amount should be divided by the number of group members, with an equal amount awarded to each character.
Setup This section of a tactical encounter provides you with the basic parameters of the encounter. It gives you a key to the monsters in the encounter so you can locate them on the tactical map, then provides context or background information. The map of each encounter area indicates where the monsters are located when the encounter begins. The setup section also describes what monsters are doing and how they react when the PCs arrive. Some encounters include monsters that are hidden or that do not appear until later in combat. Do not place those monsters on the map unless at least one PC has succeeded on the Perception check to notice them, or when they enter combat.
Adapting the Adventure As written, “A Tyranny of Souls” is for five characters at 19th level. If the characters are of slightly higher level, you might cut an encounter or two, and you might also cut treasure parcels if the PCs have already attained them during a previous adventure. If the characters are below 19th level, you can use the additional encounters provided in the text to catch up the adventurers as needed. Parties with four or fewer player characters need more opportunities to take extended rests, so you might make some combats easier or spread them out. You might also reduce the complexities of skill challenges since there are fewer participants. For larger parties, simply add additional creatures or hazards to combats using the guidelines presented in the Dungeon Master’s Guide. Larger parties might need fewer extended rests and so you can tighten the plot to move the characters from one scene to the next. As well, skill challenges will become easier for larger groups, so consider increasing the complexities by 1 or more depending on the party’s size.
July 20 09
|
D u n g e o n 16 8
27
A Tyranny of Souls
Monster Statistics Encounters include statistics blocks for each monster type present in the encounter. If more than one monster of a particular kind is present, the statistics block indicates how many creatures can be found.
What is an Adventure Path? An adventure path is a connected series of adventures that comprises an entire D&D® campaign, from the heroes’ humble beginnings at 1st level to their epic triumphs at the pinnacle of level 30. These adventures cover all three tiers of play: heroic, paragon, and epic. Each tier is covered by roughly six adventures, meaning that the entire adventure path consist of eighteen adventures. Each adventure covers between one and three levels, but you can also have the PCs undertake side quests to help supplement XP. This assures that the PCs are the correct level to tackle each adventure. This adventure path is meant to be a complete D&D campaign. That means we’re making some assumptions about the history and mythology of the world as the adventures progress, such as Queen Vlaakith’s death (an event we’ve adopted from the adventure “The Lich Queen’s Beloved” in Dungeon Magazine #100). As the adventure path moves into the epic tier, you can look forward to the appearance of some classic heroes and villains from D&D history, as well as great ideas from past issues of Dungeon Magazine and other sources.
Treasure The adventure uses the “parcel” technique of treasure distribution as described in the Dungeon Master’s Guide. Use the following 20 treasure parcels. When determining which magic items are present, consult your players’ wish lists. If an item is appropriate for a monster to use in an encounter, feel free to let it, noting the item’s features and making changes to the stat-block as needed. Parcel 1: _______________, Magic item, level 23. Parcel 2: _______________, Magic item, level 22. Parcel 3: _______________, Magic item, level 21. Parcel 4: _______________, Magic item, level 20. Parcel 5: _______________, 6 astral diamonds. Parcel 6: _______________, 2 gems of valor (Adventurer’s Vault 191), 3 potions of vigor (level 19, Adventurer’s Vault 189), talisman of good fortune (Adventurer’s Vault 168), and 4,400 gp worth of residuum. Parcel 7: _______________, 3 astral diamonds, 50 pp. Parcel 8: _______________, 300 pp and 5 potions of vitality.
Parcel 9: _______________, Ritual scroll of Planar Portal and 1,000 gp of residuum. Parcel 10: _______________, Trethrix’s palanquin (page 60), fine clothing worth 1,200 gp, and a pouch containing 70 pp. Parcel 11: _______________, Magic item, level 24. Parcel 12: _______________, Magic item, level 23. Parcel 13: _______________, Magic item, level 22. Parcel 14: _______________, Magic item, level 21. Parcel 15: _______________, 600 pp and two diamonds worth 5,000 gp each. Parcel 16: _______________, 16,000 gp; a silvery cloak spun from astral thread, a mithral mirror, and golden idol of Tiamat, each valued at 15,000 gp. Parcel 17: _______________, 400 pp and 2 frozen potions of vitality (can’t be used until 5 minutes after being removed from the chamber). Parcel 18: _______________, 8 gems worth 5,000 gp each and two fire opals worth 1,000 gp each. Parcel 19: _______________, 21,000 gp. Parcel 20: _______________, astral skiff and 1,000 gp.
Tactics
Features of the Area
This entry describes special actions the monsters take to defeat the adventurers. Sometimes this means the monsters take advantage of special features of the area or make use of special powers or equipment.
This section describes special features noted on the map. If the location has items or areas of interest with which the characters can interact, those features are described here. Look here to see if a door is out of the ordinary, if an altar has a secret compartment, and the like.
Map Each encounter includes a map keyed with the initial locations of each monster. The map also indicates the location of any special features of the area.
July 20 09
|
D u n g e o n 16 8
28
A Tyranny of Souls
Starting the Adventure The adventure begins not long after the adventurers complete “Garaitha’s Anvil,” long enough for them to recover, but before the characters have a chance to spend their gold and resupply. The initial meeting with the githyanki envoy happens off-stage (though it doesn’t have to), and once the Coalition comes to a decision about how to respond to the invitation, Amyria turns to her friends and allies: the adventurers. The following encounter occurs wherever the PCs are resting between adventures. Read the following aloud, and break it up as needed if the players wish to interject a comment or question. Amyria appears in a flash of light. Two human mages in gray robes and carrying staffs accompany her. She looks around to gain her bearings, and then toward you. She smiles, but there’s no joy in it and her eyes are hard, fierce, and filled with worry. “Friends, I apologize for dropping in unexpected, but events force my hand. Again, I’m afraid, the Coalition needs your aid. You know the threat the githyanki pose: They are integral to the Dark Lady’s plans. We have an opportunity to change this and deliver a terrible blow to the Chromatic Dragon if you are willing. “A few days ago, a githyanki envoy came before the Coalition with an offer. He represented the Separatists, a rebel faction within Tu’narath, the githyanki’s greatest city. What he described was troubling: Tiamat rules through a puppet emperor named Zetch’r’r and he uses the city poorly, draining it of resources to supply Tiamat’s war machine.
“He admitted his people have no love for us, but he also explained this war was not of their making and has proved too costly to continue. “Friends, they want an alliance! Yes, it seems suspect, a trap perhaps, but can we afford to turn away new allies in our time of need?” “We discussed the matter and we have agreed to send envoys of our own to meet with their representatives. With the recent troubles, and your incomparable successes, we turn to you for aid. We want you to negotiate an alliance with these rebels and get the githyanki out of this war. If we can achieve this, our victory might very well be at hand.” Amyria stops here and lets the PCs ask questions, argue, and say whatever they want. She knows this is a risky venture, but she believes the adventurers are up to the task, given their record. Assuming they agree, she explains what the PCs need to do. “The githyanki want to meet on neutral ground. Their representatives will not meet here, and we’re not willing to step into the viper’s nest of Tu’narath. We agreed to meet at the Citadel Mercane, a trade depot in the Astral Sea. There, you will negotiate for an alliance. Your aim is to get the githyanki to withdraw from the war. We have faith in you and your wisdom, so you can bargain with the Coalition’s full authority. If their offer is genuine, failure is no option. Should the negotiations unravel, I don’t know that we can win this.” Amyria knows little else, although the PCs are to ask for Rel’thrik at the Dreaming Spire in the citadel. She has learned that Citadel Mercane was raised by planar merchants centuries ago, but inner strife and upheavals have seen the power shift to the Society of Seven Diamonds, a cabal of ruthless merchants
and traders. The Citadel has a cosmopolitan environment, so the adventurers should have little trouble blending in and picking up whatever supplies they need. Amyria warns the characters that Tiamat has operatives everywhere and the adventurers should be watchful for spies and assassins. When the characters are ready, the two mages begin the ritual’s performance. It takes 10 minutes, and when they complete it, a shimmering opening appears in the middle of the circle they inscribed on the floor. When all the characters step through, proceed to Blood Mountain.
Alternate Hooks Even if you are not running “A Tyranny of Souls” as part of the Scales of War adventure path, you can still use the adventure as a stand-alone scenario. Consider any of the following adventure hooks.
Ancient Evil Kastya Zurityh-Movya, a githyanki lich and expatriate hiding in the Shadowfell, has long harbored a grudge against his people and hungers for revenge against Vlaakith. With the recent troubles bubbling up from Tiamat’s influence in the city, Kastya senses an opportunity. Sending his lieutenant Iliss GithomVaas to recruit the PCs residing in Gloomwrought, he asks them to negotiate an alliance with the new Vlaakith to see to his return to the city and secure a place in her new regime. The PCs might agree given that a change in power would ultimately weaken the githyanki threat, but they might also secure a thousand-year reprieve from the githyanki in which these planar raiders would not attack their world for a specified time.
July 20 09
|
D u n g e o n 16 8
29
A Tyranny of Souls
Chaos Reigns While taking some well-deserved downtime in Sigil (or elsewhere), the heroes are approached by a coalition of githzerai and Xaositectsa faction devoted to Chaos. The coalition has learned that Gith has escaped the Nine Hells and now leads a Separatist faction within Tu’narath. The githzerai believe Gith’s return could fracture and weaken the githyanki, while the Xaositects simply want to spread unrest. To these ends, the coalition recruits the PCs to negotiate an alliance with the Separatists and foment a bloody civil war.
The One in the Void When Vlaakith CLVII worked to steal the divine spark residing within the One in the Void (see “The Lich Queen’s Beloved” in Dungeon Magazine #100), she inadvertently stirred the corpse’s consciousness. The dead god now dreams, and in its visions it sees a disturbing future, one in which the Far Realm spills into the mortal world and unravels the cosmos. Believing the githyanki are vital to combating the impending mind flayer empire that will begin the invasion, the dead god scours the natural world for heroes to restore the githyanki to their proper purpose and release them from Tiamat’s clutches. Plagued with disturbing visions and dreams, the PCs travel to Tu’narath and in doing so learn of Tiamat’s plot and the Separatist movement to oust her puppet from the githyanki throne. If the PCs help the Separatists, they can secure an alliance with the githyanki to attend to the mind flayer threat growing in the natural world.
Part One: Blood Mountain The mages’ portal opens onto the mountain slopes just outside the entrance to Citadel Mercane. The portal transports you to a blood-red shelf overlooking a jagged slope that eventually gives way to loose bits of rock and debris hanging in the Astral Sea. Above, the scarlet mountain rises toward a distant peak, obscured by petrified trees, jutting protrusions, and roiling mist. A path winds up the mountain to a massive cleft from which sulfurous smoke streams. A strange vessel emerges from the plume, sleek and fitted with sails, spheres crackling with lightning, and other spars, and then it vanishes in a flash of light. Blood Mountain has a sinister reputation and for good reason. According to legend, the mountain is an ancient battlefield where god and primordial fought and died. Their spilled blood turned the mountain its crimson color. The place is by no means safe, because in the ruins clinging to its surface and beneath the petrified trees foresting its rugged slopes lurk astral stalkers, blood fiends, and worse.
Help or Hindrance? The Separatists truly intended to meet the council’s envoys at Citadel Mercane, but Tiamat’s operatives dashed these plans, murdering them before the PCs arrive. Among the retinue and the only one to survive was a raavasta spy named Mayhem. The fiend infiltrated the githyanki long ago and accompanied the group hoping to muck it up. When Tiamat’s agents attacked, they upset his plans and now he’s quite upset with the goddess.
When the adventurers head toward the smoking cleft, they encounter Mayhem disguised as a strange humanoid creature, but before they have a chance to speak, the mountain’s denizens attack. Tactical Encounter: Mayhem’s Plight (page 53).
Consequences Defeating the blood fiends and saving Mayhem can give the PCs an edge later when they enter the githyanki city. If Mayhem is unharmed in the fight, the characters gain one future victory toward finding the githyanki city (page 55). If Mayhem flees or is killed, the PCs suffer one defeat instead.
Aftermath Once the blood fiends are destroyed or driven off, Mayhem approaches the adventurers (if he didn’t run away). The odd fellow approaches and says, “Many thanks my friends. Had not you interceded on this humble servant’s behalf, poor Mayhem would have found the Raven Queen’s unwelcome embrace, but not before enduring the equally unpleasant teeth and claws of those terrible brutes. In exchange for your heroic intervention to save this unworthy life, I am duty-bound to return the favor if you will allow me. But first, introductions are undoubtedly in order. As my errant words may have indicated already, I am Mayhem, your humbled and indebted servant. Citadel Mercane is very much my home away from home; perhaps I can be of some service? Mayhem might be a useful ally to the adventurers in spite of his evil alignment and dubious morals. The raavasta knows a great deal about the planes and can provide assistance as shown in later sections. The fiend’s willingness to help stems from his newfound
July 20 09
|
D u n g e o n 16 8
30
A Tyranny of Souls
hatred for Tiamat combined with the hope for a new and terrible war in the Astral Sea, which he believes will result when and if the Separatists come to power in Tu’narath. The raavasta knows the route to Tu’narath, and he also knows what happened to the Separatists’ envoys, but he doesn’t share this information right away or explain how he witnessed his companions’ death. Instead, he waits and watches, gauging the characters’ worthiness and planning to manipulate events from behind the scenes to ensure Vlaakith eventually comes to power. Mayhem never participates in combat, and he disappears while the fighting rages only to reappear once it’s done. He follows the PCs, giving advice when requested, but never volunteering anything. If the PCs dismiss him, he continues to monitor them, but from afar, and might assume different identities to ingratiate himself with the adventurers.
Additional Encounters If the PCs don’t head for the cleft and to Citadel Mercane beyond right away, they can explore the mountain. It’s a desolate peak, haunted by wreckage from the ancient war and littered with bones. While exploring, the PCs are bound to come across the mountain’s inhabitants, and none are friendly.
Agents of Mephistopheles Level 19 Encounter (XP 12,950) 2 ice devils (Monster Manual®, page 63) 4 legion devil legionnaires (Monster Manual, page 64) 1 war devil (Monster Manual, page 67)
criminals, and other planar scum. The founders have long since vanished, ceding power to the marut mercenaries who were hired to guard the settlement and to a new cabal known as the Seven Diamonds Society. The characters must pass through the cleft and travel nearly a half-mile into the mountain to reach the outpost.
When Gith escaped the Iron Tower in the Nine Hells, Dispater sent his aspect to chase her down. All this activity has not gone unnoticed by the archdevil’s rivals, and Mephistopheles has sent agents of his own to discover what Dispater is after and to thwart him if possible. These agents followed Tiamat’s forces from Tu’narath and witnessed the destruction of the githyanki envoys. The devils lurk in a petrified forest, where they argue about what they should do next.
Crimson Hunters Level 21 Encounter (XP 16,600) 2 astral stalkers (Monster Manual, page 10) Blood Mountain is home to astral stalker tribes, and their numbers are so great, few travelers risk exploring the mountain’s ruins. The astral stalkers prowl the slopes invisibly, watching for intruders and slaughtering any they find for trophies.
Citadel Mercane Deep in the mountain, reached only by an enormous fissure, stands Citadel Mercane. Built centuries ago by a race of planar merchants to serve as a trade hub for their enterprise, the citadel still serves in this capacity, but also as a refuge for exiles,
July 20 09
|
D u n g e o n 16 8
31
A Tyranny of Souls
The mists thin and give way to an enormous chamber, easily a mile in diameter. Red crystals as long as towers encrust the walls. Suspended in the chamber’s center is a spheroid architectural mass of minarets, walls, stairs, and bridges. Steel struts emerge from the fortress and extend to the walls to keep it in place. Piers bristle from these supports, looking like hairs from afar, but you can see an astounding assortment of vessels, ranging from tiny skiffs to astral hulks crewed by hundreds. Traffic moves through yawning gates constructed to resemble toothy mouths. You can see a half-dozen facing your direction. No bridges grant access to the Citadel, but the Astral Sea’s nature allows even non-flying individuals to fly. It’s about a quarter-mile through the air to reach the fortress, and so it takes about five minutes to cross the distance.
Maneuvering in the Astral Sea A creature can stand on any surface equal to or larger than its base. It gains the ability to fly at one-half its normal speed if not under the effect of gravity. It can hover, but it is a clumsy flier. A creature with the ability to fly can use its innate flying speed instead. It gains hover. Tu’narath and Subjective Gravity: Anyone within 200 feet of a surface in Tu’narath is subject to normal gravity. (See “Tu’narath, City of Death” in Dragon #377 for more information about the city.)
Citadel Mercane A trade compound in the heart of a mountain, Citadel Mercane sees traffic from all sorts of planar peoples. Population: 9,000. The Citadel boasts a diverse population consisting of just about every kind of civilized creature imaginable, from angels to devils, from humans to maruts. Githyanki are numerous since they often duck into the Citadel to trade plunder for supplies. Government: The Society of Seven Diamonds rules Citadel Mercane with the permission of the marut mercenary companies who enforce the law here. The Society is made up of seven raavasta, each of whom conceals its true appearance behind a mask. The high cabalist is Tordaka, a raavasta who appears in public as a humanoid with golden skin and sporting overlarge feathery wings. His greatest rival is a corrupt and decadent fiend named Trethrix, who prefers the disguise of a svelte young woman. Defense: The maruts protect the stronghold from attacks. Three mercenary companies billet here, and the Iron Sons are the oldest and have the most influence. Commerce: A bustling black market thrives in the Citadel, and any goods can be had for a price. Drugs, poisons, cursed items, terrible rituals, astral vessels, magic items, slaves, and anything one could want are all for sale. Most trading takes place in the open-air market that sprawls just inside the outer wall and surrounds the inner fortress. The best inn and tavern is the Dreaming Spire, boasting thirty rooms and a menu with cuisines hailing from no less than a dozen worlds and a hundred civilizations. Organizations: Temples of any sort are not permitted in the Citadel, but priests of every god, living and dead, are free to move about the city. Many planar factions including the Xaositects, the Fated, the Mercykillers, and even the Doomguard have offices here.
The Bazaar Just inside the outer wall is the floating bazaar, an insane collection of floating platforms and free-floating structures filled with planar travelers. Even before you pass through the gate, you get a sense of the chaos and wonder of the Bazaar. It is a maze of floating earthmotes, each crowded with merchants hawking their wares. Visitors float from stall to stall, swapping platinum coins for all manner of goods. You spy larger structures too, some sideways towers, others spherical buildings, while others still could pass for ordinary in your native world if not for the fact that they float about, drifting through the marketplace. Astonishingly, there are no collisions even though everything is in motion. Beyond, or perhaps beneath, is an interior wall, hundreds of feet away, and it sports more gates and tall statues of strange humanoids that look up at commerce’s dance above. Merchants use stalls situated on small earthmotes ranging from 2-by-2 platforms to more sizeable structures containing bits of architecture, fossilized bones, and other oddities. The free-floating maze is in constant motion, so mapping the place is both unnecessary and impossible. To help navigate the Bazaar, tiny mechanical servantsguidesflit through the crowds, offering aid to any traveler who appears lost. These creations are artfully crafted, each unique and strange. Examples included tiny dragons, cherubic babies, metal skulls with glowing eyes, shimmering balls of light, and so on. Each guide is a construct with AC 27, other defenses 22; 1 hp. They cannot attack, and they explode in a shower of harmless sparks if destroyed.
July 20 09
|
D u n g e o n 16 8
32
A Tyranny of Souls
Using a guide or not, the PCs can find just about anything they could want here. Let the PCs sell off equipment, make purchases, and make any other preparations they need before proceeding with the adventure.
Inner Sphere Below the Bazaar is the Inner Sphere, a sealed orb of stone and iron pierced by a half dozen gates protected by adamantine doors that have powerful wards placed upon them. No one outside of the Society of the Seven Diamonds and the marut bodyguards are permitted within the sphere. Standing all across its surface are twenty-foot tall statues depicting the Citadel’s founders. Some say the statues are in fact the founders, now forever trapped in stone. Rumors hold the Inner Sphere contains vast wealth and plenty. It is a paradise of which one can only dream. Outsiders clamber to catch a glimpse of what goes on beyond its walls, but none have seen anything but shifting mists. The rumors are wrong. The Inner Sphere holds a hideous wound in the Astral Seaa permanent rent allowing passage to the Abyss. The raavasta, who hail from the Elemental Chaos, use this portal to move between planes.
Word on the Street Characters might make Streetwise checks in the Bazaar to learn general information about the place. Mayhem grants the PCs gain a +2 bonus to their Streetwise checks.
DC Information 20 Citadel Mercane has stood for a thousand years and is a popular trade center for the merchants across the Astral Sea. 25 The Citadel is open to all, provided visitors respect its laws. The most important commandment is “Harm no one.” The watch does not tolerate violence in the city, and those who break this law are either cast out or executed. There are exceptions, though. Why just the other day, a group of githyanki from Tu’narath was slaughtered outside the Dreaming Spire. The maruts did nothing and no one knows why. 35 Merchants run this city. They rarely emerge from the Sphere (the inner compound), but when they do, there is much fanfare and celebration. 40 There are whispers that the ruling cabal murdered and replaced the rightful lords of the Citadel. A century ago, the original rulers just up and vanished, and the new cabal moved in right after.
Buying and Selling The characters can purchase any magic item, ritual, or alchemical formula of their level or lower without any trouble. A specific item above their level requires a DC 27 Streetwise check to locate. Finding an astral vessel or a sigil address requires a bit more work, as described in the following entries. Characters can also find buyers in the city. Items of the characters’ level or less sell for the standard resell price. Selling items above the characters’ levels can bring a slightly higher price with negotiation. A character can accept the flat price or engage in a complexity 1 skill challenge (4 successes before 3 failures) involving DC 22 Bluff, Diplomacy, and Insight checks. A success sees the character receive one-quarter of the item’s price, while failure results in one-sixth of its value. The character must accept these terms.
Loosed Demons At some point while the adventurers explore the Bazaar, they discover just how dangerous Citadel Mercane can be. Tactical Encounter: Demons Among Us (page 56). Consequences: Defeating the goristro demons gives the PCs an edge when trying to enter the city. Destroying them counts as one victory.
The Dreaming Spire There are no shortages for places to stay, but characters looking for accommodations find the Dreaming Spire is their best choice (especially since they were to meet the envoys here). A strange structure, it looks almost like a tree rising from the middle of the market. Both the top and bottom are taverns called Night and Day respectively, and the main walled areathe trunkholds thirty rooms. Guests can arrange for rooms and meals in either tavern. When the PCs ask after Rel’thrik, they learn he was killed in the streets by a huge blue dragonspawn and dark angels. The human bartender looks closely at the PCs, sighs, and then hands them a small metal box. He says, “He said people’d come looking for him and left it for them. Guess those people would be you, huh?” The metal box is bronze and featureless except for a thumb-sized groove on the bottom. Placing a digit in the groove causes the box to float upward and unfold. Appearing in the center is a shimmering illusion of the githyanki they were to meet. It speaks at once, “My mission has failed. The Dark Lady’s agents infest this place, and our efforts have proved insufficient to evade them. If you truly wish to make an alliance, come to Tu’narath and we will find you.” The illusion flickers and dies. Moments later, the box evaporates as if it had never been. July 20 09
|
D u n g e o n 16 8
33
A Tyranny of Souls
Githyanki Questions
Running Afoul of the Law
Dealing with the Devil
The characters might ask around for general information on Tu’narath and the githyanki to get a better sense of what they are about to get into. Characters can make Streetwise checks in place of Nature checks for Githyanki Lore (Monster Manual, page 129). In addition, a successful DC 40 check reveals, “A little over twenty years ago, the Lich-Queen fell victim to a coup, murdered in her palace during a dread ritual that would have catapulted her to divinity. The city fell into bloody civil war until a warrior named Zetch’r’r claimed her throne. Some say he managed this only because he made a deal with Tiamat.”
Level 21 Encounter (XP 16,000)
A failed Bluff check made as part of the “Finding Tu’narath” skill challenge (page 55) or inquiries made in the Citadel’s dark underbelly (a DC 28 Streetwise check) turns up a name: Scaramandar. A crime lord, information-broker, and cambion, Scaramandar has extensive contacts throughout the Astral Sea, with eyes and ears from the natural world to Sigil and most places in between. He’s a useful sort to befriend, if you can afford his steep prices. The cambion knows all about the adventurers and their past exploits. He also knows what they are after, what happened to their contacts, and, best of all, how to get to Tu’narath. Scaramandar possesses a sigil address to a little-used teleportation circle hidden within Tu’narath’s Merchant District. He also can fabricate the proper documentation to get the characters into the city and through the cordon. All of this is available at no charge, if, and only if, the PCs agree to do him a favor. Scaramandar wants a seat on the Society of Seven Diamonds. Trethrix, a particularly corrupt and decadent member, blocks his ascent. The cambion is certain, thanks to promises from other members, that her removal will open the path to his ascent. Scaramandar isn’t about to get his hands dirty, and the PCs represent an excellent way to get rid of his rival and remove the killers by sending them to what he believes is certain death in the githyanki city. When the PCs start asking around about Scaramandar, the cambion sends two agents to arrange a meeting at a place Scaramandar controls. The servants are a pair of rakshasa nobles (Monster Manual, page 217) disguised to be appealing to the adventurers. The rakshasas invite the PCs to meet with their master at Night (the tavern at the Dreaming Spire) for
5 marut blademasters (Monster Manual, page 185) If the characters are on their best behavior, they aren’t likely to find too much trouble. However, their investigations might take them into danger and, by extension, combat. Since rule zero in the Citadel is “harm no one,” a fight could cause the PCs problems. Once the characters get into a fight, they have a 10% chance each day they spend in the city of encountering the Citadel’s watch. Combats after the first increase the chance by 20%, so 30% per day for two fights, 50% for three, and so on. A typical combat with the watch features the creatures here. If the PCs defeat the watch, they must move quickly lest the full weight of the Citadel’s wrath comes crashing upon them (featuring whatever epic-level monsters you feel are appropriate).
To the Githyanki City With the githyanki contacts dead, the adventurers can either return home or push on to Tu’narath. Getting there is a challenge since the githyanki guard the routes to their city and also keep secret any shortcuts that might allow swift passage. Though the information they seek is secret and often guarded, the PCs can uncover ways to reach the city with a little effort. Skill Challenge: Finding Tu’narath (page 55).
July 20 09
|
D u n g e o n 16 8
34
A Tyranny of Souls
a meal and a profitable conversation. If the characters agree, they can meet at whatever time they wish. Seated in a large chair at a table crowded with a dozen handsome mortals representing several different races is an overlarge humanoid with an infernal mien. He has crimson skin, curling black horns emerging from his forehead, and long, oiled black hair, all of which suggests some devilish ancestry. He smiles and stands, revealing brilliant robes of uncertain hues embroidered with obscene images. He spreads his arms wide in a gesture of welcome. His playthings scatter. “Greetings friends. It comes to my attention you have need of information. Perhaps I can help.” Scaramandar starts by describing what happened to the githyanki operatives, revealing that a bluespawn godslayer leading a force of angels ambushed the envoys and murdered them all. The maruts didn’t respond because Tiamat’s forces had made arrangements with a “Diamond” named Trethrixshe paid off the merchant princess in exchange for no reprisals. The cambion then steers the conversation to the adventurers’ mission, but, if the characters seem worried, he says, “You have nothing to fear from me friends. I think your task is worthy, though I fear the obstacles placed in your path might be too great without friendly assistance.” Scaramandar then lays out his offera ritual scroll of Planar Portal, a sigil address to Tu’narath, and trade exemptions for all. In exchange, he asks the characters to assassinate Trethrix: “Kill her, and you’ll be in the githyanki city before her blood dries.” Scaramandar honors the bargain, and any Insight check reveals this fact.
Scaramandar is not worried the PCs will betray him. He knows quite a bit about their activities, and his information would be of extensive interest to Zetch’r’r. He might share what he knows with Tiamat’s operatives (as you decide). Scaramandar fights back if the PCs attack him, and four rakshasa nobles hidden in the crowd come to his aid straightaway. A battle here draws the maruts’ attention too. Five marut blademasters show up at the start of the third round, coming to Scaramandar’s aid and making the entire battle very one-sided against the adventurers. The cambion supplies additional information if the PCs agree to his proposal. “Excellent friends, excellent. Trethrix and her retinue are due to make their appearance in 12 hours. She is at her most vulnerable once she returns to the inner sphere. Opening and closing those portals takes about 5 minutes, so when she arrives she must wait for the gate to open. Strike then and strike quick, lest the Iron Sons appear and foil the attempt. When you finish, bring her head to me just beyond the cleft. There, all I have promised you will be yours. I warn you, if the maruts catch you, I can do nothing to help you. Agreed?” With their mission in hand, the PCs are free to make any needed arrangements before they attack. Tactical Encounter: The Devil’s Bargain (page 58). Adaptation: Rather than have this encounter take place in Citadel Mercane, you could run it in Tu’narath. Characters seeking access to the Fortress of Three Sorrows could turn to the cambion for assistance. Trethrix is a rival merchant who is blackmailing him, and he would see her removed.
Scaramandar
Level 20 Elite Controller
Medium immortal humanoid (devil) XP 5,600 Initiative +13 Senses Perception +19; darkvision HP 382; Bloodied 191 AC 33; Fortitude 35, Reflex 31, Will 34 Immune charm; Resist 15 fire Saving Throws +2 Speed 6, fly 8 (clumsy) Action Points 1 m Greatsword (standard; at-will) F Fire, Weapon +25 vs. AC; 1d10 + 7 damage, and ongoing 5 fire damage (save ends). M Double Attack (standard; at-will) Scaramandar makes two greatsword attacks. If both attacks hit the same target, the ongoing 5 damage becomes ongoing 10 fire damage (save ends). r Hellfire Doom (standard; at-will) F Fear, Fire Ranged 10; targets one or two creatures; +24 vs. Reflex; 2d10 + 7 fire damage, and the target takes a −2 penalty to attack rolls (save ends). R Shackles of Phlegethos (minor 1/round; at-will) F Fire Ranged 10; +24 vs. Reflex; 2d6 + 7 fire damage, and if the target moves more than 1 square on its turn it takes 10 fire damage, and if the target makes an attack on its turn it takes 10 fire damage (save ends both). A Hellfire Storm (standard; recharge 4 5 6) F Fear, Fire, Zone Area burst 2 within 10; +24 vs. Reflex; 2d6 + 7 fire damage, and the target takes a −2 penalty to attack rolls and ongoing 5 fire damage (save ends both). The burst creates a zone that lasts until the end of Scaramandar’s next turn. Each enemy that starts its turn within the zone cannot make saving throws until the end of its next turn. As a move action, Scaramandar can move the zone up to 4 squares. Sustain Minor: The zone persists. C Brimstone Jaunt (move; encounter) F Fire, Teleportation Close burst 1; +24 vs. Fortitude; the target is blinded (save ends). Effect: Scaramandar teleports 20 squares. Alignment Evil Languages Common, Supernal Skills Bluff +21, Diplomacy +21, Insight +19, Intimidate +21, Streetwise +21 Str 25 (+17) Dex 17 (+13) Wis 18 (+14) Con 23 (+16) Int 19 (+14) Cha 22 (+16) Equipment fine robes, greatsword
July 20 09
|
D u n g e o n 16 8
35
A Tyranny of Souls
In exchange for her murder, Scaramandar gives the PCs a ritual scroll, ingredients, and sigil address to a permanent teleportation circle in room 1 of the Floating Fortress. In this scenario, the raavasta target does not get marut reinforcements; she’s on her own.
The Merciless The characters might think to steal an astral skiff on their own or get a hint to do so from a failed Endurance check during the “Finding Tu’narath” skill challenge. Plenty of vessels are docked at the piers outside the Citadel, and a group could hijack a vessel without too much trouble. Characters snooping around the docks find a lone ship at the end of a pier. A Streetwise check can turn up useful information about the ship. DC Information 14 The Merciless hails from Tu’narath and is captained by a cruel and murderous githyanki warrior named Ri’s’an. It’s currently docked at the end of Pier Nine. 22 The ship took heavy damage during a raid on Hestavar and could not return to the githyanki city. The Merciless has been docked here for a few weeks, undergoing repairs. The repairs are all but complete, but the crew took heavy casualties during the raid 27 The crew has made few friends here, and if something bad were to happen, it’s not likely they would get any help.
The characters can attack the ship without fear of attracting attention. The other captains detest these githyanki and turn a blind eye to any violence toward Ri’s’an and his crew. Tactical Encounter: Stolen Mercy (see 61).
Adapting the Encounter: You can run this encounter while the PCs are in Tu’narath. If the PCs need a way to reach the Fortress of Three Sorrows, the Merciless could get them there if they eliminate the captain and crew. Consequences: A bold move to be sure, but one with far-reaching consequences. The ship is identified by the dragonknights, costing the PCs 2 defeats when trying to enter the city.
Shortcuts through the Void The githyanki are vigilant in protecting Tu’narath and thus monitor all traffic coming into and out of the city, boarding vessels, inspecting containers, and subjecting craft to divinatory magic. So tight is this net that few smugglers have made much headway moving illicit goods into the city, and the githyanki make terrible examples of those who fail. One smuggler, Taikus, knows a way and uses it to move slaves out of Tu’narath and to bring weapons and supplies into the city for the Separatists. If the adventurers are tipped off about his enterprise, it means his system has been compromised and the noose is ready to close about his neck. The PCs likely come across Taikus by accident. If they choose to contact the smuggler, they find him at a warehouse on Pier 6, just outside the Citadel. The building stands between two empty docks. However, Tiamat’s agents close in to kill the smuggler. Tactical Encounter: Secret Way (see 63). Adapting the Encounter: The adventurers might come across Taikus and his operation while in Tu’narath. Instead of granting access to a permanent portal, Taikus might arrange a meeting with the Separatists.
Consequences: Disrupting the smugglers’ assistance to the Separatists is a major setback for the movement in Tu’narath. The PCs suffer 1 defeat when trying to enter Tu’narath.
The Sympathizer Characters who successfully attain a victory on the “Finding Tu’narath” skill challenge (page 55) can have a meeting with Captain J’ladimir, the githyanki captain of Gith’s Memory, a powerful astral carrack. J’ladimir was once a githyanki knight, but he resigned when Vlaakith was murdered by adventurers. He left his city to become a merchant, and he has sailed the Astral Sea these past two decades. Citadel Mercane is one his favorite ports. J’ladimir is tall, thin, with angular features and a short, stubby nose. He has bright blue eyes and mottled skin. He wears chainmail armor and carries a distinctive silver longsword. Two decades as a merchant have done nothing to soften his disposition toward nongithyanki. He harbors a deep hatred for adventurers, blaming them, in part, for his queen’s death. The only thing he hates more than nongithyanki is Zetch’r’r, for J’ladimir knows the blackguard was behind his lady’s assassination. J’ladimir hasn’t officially joined the Separatists, but he’s close. He resents Tiamat’s surging influence, and his hate for the tyrant endures. Now that the Separatists claim to have Vlaakith CLVIII on their side, he’s willing to help them. In spite of his misgivings, he needs little convincing to help the PCs reach Tu’narath. The characters need only mention the Separatists, and he volunteers to ferry them to the city. If Mayhem is present, the characters don’t even need to mention their mission. J’ladimir also supplies the adventurers with the
July 20 09
|
D u n g e o n 16 8
36
A Tyranny of Souls
proper documentation to enter the Merchant District. This is the extent to which J’ladimir will help. He offers nothing about the city, about the political developments, or anything elsesuch is his disdain for the adventurers. Passage on his ship is simple and uncomfortable, but it’s passage all the same. His ship leaves the day after the PCs meet with him, so the characters still have time to make purchases, perform rituals, and do anything else they need while at the Citadel.
If All Else Fails It’s unlikely but possible for the adventurers to utterly fail in finding a way to Tu’narath. If they exhaust every option and still haven’t secured passage, let the PCs purchase an astral skiff for 13,000 gp. Mayhem can lead the characters to the city. Otherwise, the PCs will have to follow another shipperhaps the Merciless. This should get the characters there, but it doesn’t quite get them into the city. Mayhem can provide the characters with trade exemptions for the modest sum of 1 pp per character.
Sailing the Astral Sea
Infernal Envoys
Adventurers who do everything right at Citadel Mercane gain passage on Gith’s Memory and need only wait for the ship to arrive at Tu’narath. If the characters followed up the other leads and participated in those encounters, the trip to the githyanki city should be uneventful. However, skipping one or more of these side-treks puts the adventurers a little behind on experience points. You can catch the characters up by repurposing skipped encounters while the PCs are in Tu’narath, or you might run one or more of the following optional encounters.
2 ice devils (Monster Manual, page 63) 7 legion devil veterans (Monster Manual, page 64) 1 war devil (Monster Manual, page 67)
Githyanki Raiders
Level 19 Encounter (12,152 XP)
Level 19 Encounter (12,000 XP) 5 githyanki dragonknights (page 68) 5 pact dragons (page 69) A wing of dragonknights riding pact dragons patrol the Astral Sea to intercept explorers and plunder merchants not bearing trade exemptions.
Level 19 Encounter (12,200 XP)
A war devil in service to Glasya (archdevil and lord of the sixth layer of Nine Hells) crosses the Astral Sea bound for Tytherion, where it intends to meet with Tiamat to negotiate for another legion of abishai thralls. If the adventurers missed out on any treasure parcels, they can recover them from this entourage.
Malachi’s Refugees 2 gibbering abominations (Monster Manual, page 126) 4 grimlock followers (Monster Manual, page 148) 1 mind f layer mastermind (Monster Manual, page 188) Fleeing the upheaval in the natural world when the alienist Malachi (“Brink of Madness,” Dungeon Magazine #163) failed to create a stable portal to the Far Realm, this mind flayer mastermind and its followers ride on a makeshift chariot made from a massive statue’s head pulled by two gibbering abominations.
July 20 09
|
D u n g e o n 16 8
37
A Tyranny of Souls
Part Two: Tu’narath Having crossed the Astral Sea’s expanse by portal or by vessel, the adventurers find Tu’narath, the ancient githyanki city, lying before them. Never a welcoming place, Tu’narath is made even more uninviting by Tiamat’s occupying force and its crushing, totalitarian regime. How the adventurers find the city depends on the methods used to reach it.
By Ship Characters approaching Tu’narath must contend with the sentinels if they want to reach the city intact. If the adventurers reach the city by way of a planar vessel, read: Your vessel breaks through the shimmering astral essence and there, amid the sea of sparkling lights, floats Tu’narath. Citadels drift around the city, each a cluster of spurs, towers, and chains connecting these floating fortresses to smaller roosts. Dragons with riders soar through the firmament as massive astral warships perform training maneuvers over the city. Beyond the traffic, and beyond the strongholds’ net, is the city. Although bristling with towers and strongholds, wormed with roads, and spewing black plumes of smoke, its foundation is clear. The city grows like tumors all over a dead creature’s petrified remains. What’s clearly a head stands at one end. From its shoulders stretch six arms, each ending at steel docking towers crowded with ships. Structures armor the being’s torso, extending down to what would have been its abdomen but is now a crumbling region dimpled with dark caverns and littered with debris.
The Cordon The githyanki are not about to let a band of adventurers enter the city. Not long after Tu’narath comes into view, a wing of dragonknights surrounds the vessel to inspect the cargo and ensure the ship has the trade exemption needed to dock at the stations. (Use the “Githyanki Raiders” encounter on page 37.) Characters on board Gith’s Memory have nothing to fear. Captain J’ladimir has documentation and presents it to the dragonknight when she comes aboard. J’ladimir is feared and respected enough that the githyanki don’t search the vessel and, in fact, escort it the rest of the way to the docking stations. Without J’ladimir, the PCs must fend for themselves. What sort of welcome the adventurers face depends on how they acquitted themselves in Citadel Mercane. Total the number of victories and defeats from any encounters as described under the “Consequences” entries. Characters receive no experience points for any of the skill challenges related to entering the city. One or More Victories: The githyanki dragonknights are secret members of the Separatists. They make a great show of searching the ship and interrogating the adventurers, but ultimately, they allow the heroes to make the rest of the way to the Docking Stations without trouble. If Mayhem is not present, the githyanki also suggest the characters go to the Morningstar Inn to find “proper accommodations.” No Victories, No Defeats: The characters’ ship is searched by two githyanki dragonknights, while the others position themselves around the PCs’ vessel. If the characters picked up trade exemptions at Citadel Mercane, their ship is searched, but the PCs are eventually permitted into the city. If the characters didn’t, they must succeed on a complexity 1 skill challenge
(4 successes before 3 failures) involving Bluff and Diplomacy skill checks against DC 22, or Intimidate checks against DC 27. A victory earns the PCs a trade exemption and passage into the city. Defeat sees the PCs taken to the Fortress of Three Sorrows (page 43) where they are to be incarcerated and eventually executed. The adventurers might resist capture as they like, but if they lose or go along with the githyanki, they are interred at the Fortress of Three Sorrows (page 43) where they should have a chance to escape, recover their gear, and rescue Vlaakith. Mayhem could prove a useful ally in the event that this happens. If the characters defeat the dragonknights, the city will mobilize a response (use creatures from “Assaulting the Fortress” on page 68). The PCs might retreat, and might even return to Citadel Mercane to find another way into the city. A loss against the githyanki results in incarceration at the Fortress of Three Sorrows, as described above. In any event, don’t forget the PCs need to get into the city, so poor decisions should make it harder, but not impossible. One Defeat: As above, but the skill challenge DCs increase by 5. Two or More Defeats: The characters are automatically escorted to the Fortress of Three Sorrows as described above.
Docking Stations Past the cordon, the PCs can disembark from their vessel at the docking stations rising up from the “arm” accessing the city’s Merchant District. The docking stations are metal piers stabbing out from the arm. Each pier can hold up to eight ships. Here, the adventurers can see the city’s diversity: Plenty of githyanki
July 20 09
|
D u n g e o n 16 8
38
A Tyranny of Souls
live and work here, but devils, maruts, dragonborn mercenaries, and all sorts of other creatures do so as well. The PCs are safe at the docking stations and can proceed into the Merchant District without trouble.
By Portal If the adventurers came up with another way to enter the city, they can bypass all the trouble with the cordon and arrive in a dim alley tucked between two tall towers in the Merchant District. If the adventurers reach the city by portal, read:
ters linger this long, proceed with the following tactical encounter. Tactical Encounter: Kill Squad (page 65). Adaptation: If the kill squad doesn’t arrive in time, or the PCs don’t come to the city by way of portal, you can use this encounter at any point after the PCs arrive, but before Part Five.
City Overview Tu’narath is a sprawling metropolis built atop the petrified remains of a dead god known only as the One
in the Void. Much of Tu’narath remains as it always has, but it has not emerged from the tumultuous last decades unscathed. Vlaakith’s mad rituals sent shockwaves through the city, destroying Susurrus, the Palace of Whispers, and reducing the necropolis and the statue of Gith to rubble. Damage from this event can still be seen in adjoining military districts and the city has worked to rebuild. The Merchant District, however, is more or less intact. Although overrun by Tiamat’s agents and soldiers, the githyanki still do not allow nongithyanki
The portal deposits you in a refuse-littered alley drenched in shadows. Ahead of you, the alley opens onto a crowded street filled with merchants and travelers alike. Behind you, the rough stone side street disappears as it makes its way deeper into the buildings scraping the shimmering sky. The permanent teleportation circle on the alley’s ground is hidden behind a permanent illusion masking the alley’s entrance. Smugglers use the alley to move in and out of the city without attracting attention. The illusion masking the alley is identifiable as such with a successful DC 20 Arcana check. A few githyanki are aware of it, but they find it useful, so they have not yet destroyed it. This said, they monitor the portal, and the adventurers’ sudden appearance sees a githyanki kill team descend on the alley after 5 rounds. If the charac-
July 20 09
|
D u n g e o n 16 8
39
A Tyranny of Souls
who have no affiliation with the war effort to venture farther than the commercial quarter, and those who push into the neighboring districts find themselves beset by overwhelming numbers. Luckily, the Separatists operate in the Merchant District, blending in with the other merchants.
Exploring the City The characters are free to explore the Merchant District, but their purpose here is to contact the Separatists.
Rumors in Tu’narath The characters can learn more about current events in the city by making Streetwise checks. DC Information 28 Emperor Zetch’r’r rules the city, and the githyanki of Tu’narath fight on Tiamat’s behalf. 30 Zetch’r’r came to power after foreigners assassinated the Lich-Queen Vlaakith, and he has ruled for 25 years. 35 Many believe Zetch’r’r had a hand in Vlaakith’s death and point to his close ties to Tiamat as further proof of his treachery. Not all are so willing to fight for Tiamat. 40 Vlaakith has returned and is allied with the Separatists. However, the emperor’s warriors captured her and hold her someplace out of the city. If she were freed, she could rally the githyanki against Zetch’r’r’s tyranny.
Shopping The Merchant District has a robust market, and characters can purchase mundane and magic equipment up to their level. If the PCs didn’t spend time properly outfitting themselves at Citadel Mercane, let them do so here.
Tu’narath Under Tiamat’s heel, the former center of githyanki culture has now become a bastion of the Dark Lady’s strength. Population: 120,000; Githyanki are still the dominant people in Tu’narath, but they now share the city with Tiamat’s legions. Unprecedented numbers of devils, dragonborn, dragonspawn, and other creatures have free rein to go where they please. Outside of these forces, visitors are still confined to the Merchant District, where a diverse population thrives. Government: After foreigners assassinated Vlaakith CLVII, Emperor Zetch’r’r came to power. He rules by Tiamat’s consent and is little more than a puppet. If he displeases Tiamat, his reign would come to an abrupt end. Defenses: Most githyanki serve in the military with allegiance to a society found in the military districts. Military societies raise armies consisting of warriors, gish, and warlocks. Foremost of these warriors are the githyanki knights who ride dragons into battle. Numerous floating fortresses are arranged around the city, and each has a full company and two to four pact dragons to intercept foreign vessels coming too close to the city.
In addition, Tiamat keeps four legions in the city to ensure her continued control. These mercenary forces are made up of dragonborn, humans, devils, abishai, and other creatures loyal to the Dark Lady. As powerful as they are, Tiamat knows they are only as strong as the dragons supporting them, and if the dragons quit the city, Tiamat’s forces would surely follow. Inns: The Morningstar Inn; Iron House; The Dragon’s Den; others. The Morningstar Inn is the most expensive but most popular establishment in the Merchant District. Taverns: The Winesink; Filthy Dredges; Nectar House; others. Supplies: The Merchant District is the commercial center in the city and one can find just about anything they could want. Merchants sell from established shops, open-air markets, or carts along the streets. Businesses cluster together along streets set aside for trade. Kyndl Street, for example, offers alchemical supplies, poisons, and ritual ingredients. Temples: For as long as Tu’narath has stood, it has never housed an official temple. With Zetch’r’r’s reign, the city now has a grotesque temple dedicated to Tiamat that also serves as the emperor’s palace.
Enemies on All Sides
Contact, Finally
Although the Separatists took precautions when making contact with the Coalition, their efforts did not go undetected. Tiamat has spies everywhere, and her agents intercepted the message when they destroyed the githyanki waiting in Citadel Mercane. Still fearing an upset to her plans, Tiamat dispatched a favored servant to watch for the adventurers and intercept them before they make contact with the rebels. After the PCs enter the Merchant District, Tiamat’s agents locate the PCs and attack. Tactical Encounter: Blue Thunder (page 67).
The recent setbacks to the Separatists’ efforts have forced them into hiding, but when the PCs destroy the bluespawn godslayer in “Blue Thunder,” word spreads and agents set out to find the PCs. Mayhem knows exactly where the rebels hide and can lead the PCs to them if he is still in the party’s company and if he’s asked. Otherwise, just have a Separatist agent contact the PCs.
July 20 09
|
D u n g e o n 16 8
40
A Tyranny of Souls
The crowds fill the streets in a seething mass. Finding the Separatists here is tantamount to finding courage in a kobold tribe. Yet even as this realization sinks in, you spy a hooded githyanki moving through the crowds, scanning for something. His eyes fall on you, linger for a moment, and then he moves away. It seems he wants you to follow.
Tu'narath Susurrus (Palace of Whispers)
The Will of Gith (Commissar's Stronghold) Military District
K'radystar (Citadel of the Void's Eye)
Docking Towers
Military District Naval Docking Towers
Military District
Kran'i'toc (Citadel of War)
Merchant District Mlar (Artisan) District
The adventurers can trace the githyanki’s route through the streets to a building not far from the docking towers.
Naval Docking Towers
Astral Shipyards
G'lathk (Farmer) District
Military District
Military District
Military District
Red Dragon Caves
= Flying Fortress 0
1,300 feet
The githyanki ducks into a two-story building constructed from stone, encrusted with leering gargoyles, and supported by flying buttresses. No sign hangs above the door, but the raucous laughter and clinking glass sounding from within indicate it’s an inn or tavern or both. The building is the Morningstar Inn, an infamous tavern with rooms to rent upstairs. It has the look of a gothic cathedral, so it blends in with the other buildings. Tall windows covered by rich curtains offer access into guest rooms on both floors. Double doors on one side lead into the common room, while another set offers discrete access to the private rooms. The latter doors are locked (DC 30 Thievery or DC 35 Strength to open) and fooling around with the doors causes Gharvag (the githyanki Separatist agent) to come around to bring the PCs inside to the common room. The bawdy sounds you heard on the street are absent inside the large common room. An octagonal bar, painted black, commands the view and behind it stands an attractive tiefling in a revealing red dress. She smiles. The tables around the bar are empty except for one. There, you spot the githyanki you spied on the streets. He invites you to sit with a gesture. July 20 09
|
D u n g e o n 16 8
41
A Tyranny of Souls
The tiefling is Rhapsody, the owner and member of the Separatists. In the years since Zetch’r’r came to power, Rhapsody opened her doors to the rebels to serve as a base and haven. The place still operates as a tavern, but only Separatists come here. The githyanki is Gharvag, a Separatist agent and contact for the adventurers. He has information useful to the PCs, but also plenty of bad news about what needs to be done before they have a chance to get the negotiations underway.
Plans Foiled? Although he never expected to see the adventurers here, their appearance confirms suspicions that the envoys the Separatists sent are now dead. Gharvag is Vlaakith’s right-hand man, but he has little authority. Like his mistress, he wants an alliance, but the emperor’s secret police and oppressive tactics have driven the organization into hiding. Gharvag can supply the PCs with missing information, and he answers the following questions.
While Vlaakith lies in chains, there can be no alliance. Should she become free, however . . . Why do you need her? Our leader is critical to our success, for she is none other than Vlaakith. She wants the gith peoples reunited and has little use for the treacherous goddess and her draconic legions. Wasn’t Vlaakith killed? Yes, Vlaakith CLVII was destroyed around 25 years ago. I might not agree with the methods used to remove her from power, but she was mad. Had she succeeded in her designs, it would have meant the end for all of us. Our Vlaakith is different. Gone are the deific ambitions, and in their place is a renewed commitment to our glorious crusade against the mind flayers. If we get her out, can we get this alliance hammered out?
What do you think happened to the envoys? The emperor’s agents must have intercepted our communications. Zetch’r’r’s secret police have been rounding up sympathizers all over the city, forcing the leaders to lay low. We’ve been waiting for word from the envoys, and this explains the silence. We’re here. Let’s talk. I’m afraid you’ve come a long way for nothing. Our leader has been captured and is held at a flying fortress outside of the city. We haven’t mounted a rescue mission since it would expose more of us to Zetch’r’r’s reprisals.
I am certain Vlaakith’s freedom will bring the rebels out from hiding, but even if you reach an agreement, I can’t see how we can follow through on any promises. Zetch’r’r has the dragons on his side. As long as he carries the scepter of Ephelomon, the dragons will do as he says. Even with all our numbers, I’m not sure we can stand against such powerful enemies.
Rhapsody If the characters blow it with Gharvag, Rhapsody can step in to calm the githyanki down and get the PCs back on track. She tells Gharvag that the PCs are their best hope at getting Vlaakith back and saying to him, “If you want them out of the war, you’d best get over your prejudices and see the allies standing in front of you.”
Conclusions No negotiations are going to happen while Vlaakith is imprisoned. Since Gharvag and the rest of the Separatists are unable or unwilling to free her, it falls to the adventurers to free her. Assuming the PCs suggest this course of action, Gharvag tells the characters she’s in the Fortress of Three Sorrows, the stronghold in sight of the Chromatic Bastion, the seat of Zetch’r’r’s power. If the characters go this route, proceed with Part Three. Depending on how the conversation goes, the adventurers might gain a little insight into what lays ahead. Even if Vlaakith is freed, she probably will not follow through on any negotiations while the emperor sits on the throne. With this in mind, the PCs might get it into their heads to strike at Zetch’r’r first. This is fine. With Zetch’r’r dead, the githyanki won’t rally behind anyone until Vlaakith presents herself and reveals she is in fact Gith reborn. This along with the destruction of the scepter of Ephelomon wrests the city from Tiamat’s clutches. Go to Part Five if the characters are gunning for the emperor. Regardless of which way the PCs go, if the PCs help, Gharvag gives them treasure parcel 7. Rhapsody hands the characters parcel 4 and says, “I think you can use this more than I can right now.”
July 20 09
|
D u n g e o n 16 8
42
A Tyranny of Souls
Part Three: Fortress of Three Sorrows With the negotiations stalled and the PCs stuck behind enemy lines, their best shot at completing the mission is to rescue Vlaakith from her captors at the Fortress of Three Sorrows. The PCs might learn about her captivity from Gharvag or might stumble across her when they themselves are captured by the githyanki on a botched attempt to enter the city. To most githyanki, attacking a floating fortress is a suicide mission. Each fortress boasts dragons and a full company of warriors. Worse, it’s not like the fortress is somehow out of sight from the city, so there are bound to be reinforcements waiting to jump in and destroy the attackers. The sheer improbability of success and the brazenness required are what makes this entire foray possible. The adventurers have two key advantages. One is time. A sudden strike at a fortress should let the PCs punch through the githyanki’s defenses in 5 rounds or so. That’s about 30 seconds. The other fortresses can’t mobilize this quickly, so the characters can land and get inside before others can intercept them. Second, the adventurers have unseen allies. The commander in charge of the floating fortress closest to the Three Sorrows is actually a Separatist member, and so any response from his citadel is slow to come if it happens at all. How the PCs get to the fortress is up to them. Options include using an astral skiff, stowing away on a supply ship, using a ritual to bypass the defenses, and so on. Whatever they decide, they reach the for-
tress without too much trouble, aside from a likely skirmish with the fortress’s defenders and the dangers posed by snatching a prisoner from the fortress. Once the PCs free Vlaakith from her prison, she can speed the PCs back to the Morningstar Innthere’s a permanent teleportation circle in a locked room on the second floorby using a Linked Portal ritual, provided she gets the ritual components.
Dungeon Features The following features are generally true of all locations in the fortress. Entrances: There are two ways into the fortress. The first is through the statue’s mouth, where the garrison’s pact dragons lair and where the githyanki store their astral interceptors (see page 46). The second is through a hatch on the central tower.
July 20 09
|
D u n g e o n 16 8
43
A Tyranny of Souls
Ceilings: Except where indicated otherwise, ceilings are 20 feet tall. Doors: Except for the cells, no doors are locked in the complex. Doors open into rooms unless noted otherwise. A door that joins two rooms opens into the larger room Illumination: Everburning torches fill all rooms with bright light. Stairs: Stairs are made from stone, and squares containing stairs count as difficult terrain while climbing them.
Fortress of Three Sorrows Overview Like most other floating fortresses, the Fortress of Three Sorrows is a brooding structure to which there are tethered three smaller towers raised atop astral detritus. The fortress sits on top of a massive statue’s head, tilted at a forty-five-degree angle, as if it was a tumor growing out from the statue’s ear. The statue’s features are that of a screaming human wearing an open-faced helm.
A. Satellite Towers Tethered by chains forged from astral driftmetal to the fortress are three satellite towers perched atop rocky bergs. The bergs float on the astral horizon, and the towers rise 20 feet above them.
B. Main Tower The central tower grants access to the fortress’s interior. When under attack, the githyanki captain commands its forces from this location.
C. Ballista Platforms The Main Tower sports four exposed staircases that each descend to a ballista platform. There, crews man these powerful siege engines and hurl death at enemies as they approach.
D. Statue’s Head The Fortress of Three Sorrows stands atop an ancient statue’s decapitated head. The head floats on the astral horizon, and three chains spill from its tear duct to the satellite towers, giving the fortress its appropriate name.
E. Maw The githyanki excavated the statue’s mouth to serve as a hangar for two astral interceptors (see page 46) and two pact dragons.
0. Assault on the Fortress Unless the PCs devise some way to sneak into the Fortress of Three Sorrows, they face stiff resistance when they descend on the stronghold. Tactical Encounter: Assaulting the Fortress (page 68). Adapting the Encounter: If the PCs sneak into the stronghold and thus bypass its defenses, consider denying Vlaakith the ability to perform the Linked Portal ritual. The adventurers have to escape the fortress by some other means. The “Into the Maw” tactical encounter on page 74 covers slipping out of the fortress by stealing an astral interceptor (see page 46).
1. Prison Level The trapdoor on the rooftop opens onto an iron ladder that descends 30 feet to the floor below. The guardroom at the center is where the githyanki captain
and soldiers meet with visitors and attend to general business. A narrow corridor rings the guardroom and grants access to several cells and also the barracks. One can descend to the armory below by way of a cramped spiral staircase in the center of the guardroom. Tactical Encounter: Desperate Defenders (page 70).
2. Armory Level This level takes its name, obviously, from the armories and storerooms that hold weapons, armor, and foodstuffs. As well, this level holds a training facility where githyanki warriors can spar and hone their techniques. Currently, the training room is where the githyanki hold Vlaakith, keeping her distanced from other warriors lest she corrupt them with her “lies.” The staircase descends from the prison level and continues to the hangar in the statue’s maw. When Gith escaped the Nine Hells, Dispater was none too pleased. The archdevil dispatched his aspect and bodyguards to Tu’narath to see what had happened and there discovered what was unfolding in the city. The aspect knew Gith would not give up her people, so Dispater has spent several weeks searching for her. The appearance of another Vlaakith was too obvious given that her predecessor had no heirs, so the aspect has traveled to the Fortress of Three Sorrows to “interview” the prisoner and confirm his suspicions. Tactical Encounter: Jailbreak (page 72). Armory: This room contains shelves loaded with mundane crossbow bolts, armor, and silvered weaponry. Storerooms: Two storerooms hold foodstuffs, water, and other mundane supplies.
July 20 09
|
D u n g e o n 16 8
44
A Tyranny of Souls
Vlaakith CLVIII Defeating the aspect and the other creatures in this room lets the PCs focus on freeing Vlaakith from her prison. She can talk, but she cannot move. She doesn’t say anything right off since she’s not entirely sure who the PCs are and what they intend. She answers any questions the PCs put to her. What follows are likely questions and typical answers. Vlaakith doesn’t have time to waste telling lies, so she answers to the best of her knowledge and truthfully, only shading where absolutely necessary.
Who does he think you are? Gith. Gith?
So, who are you?
Gith led the uprising that toppled the illithid empire and freed her peoples from a thousand years spent in chains. Gith vanished soon after her people settled in the Astral Sea, and many believe she traded her soul to forge the pact between the scions of Ephelomon and the githyanki. According to legend, she was held in the Nine Hells, bound to an archdevil’s will.
I am Vlaakith, the one hundred fifty-eighth of the name, and Tu’narath’s rightful queen.
So if that was Dispater and he’s looking for Gith, doesn’t this mean Gith has escaped?
What are you doing here?
It would seem so.
The so-called emperor’s cronies attacked my quarters in the city and killed my guards. I fought, but they overpowered me. Who the devil was that fellow you were talking to? Dispater. Actually, it was his shadow, an aspect. What was he doing here?
If Gith has escaped, that means the pact is broken, right? Again, you seem to have the right of it. So, are you Gith? Would it change matters if I was? You want the githyanki out of the war. I can make this happen, but only if you release me.
He believes I am not who I say I am.
July 20 09
|
D u n g e o n 16 8
45
A Tyranny of Souls
Vlaakith will not negotiate while she’s a prisoner. Gith has been around for a while and is not about to be intimidated into making a bargain. Furthermore, it’s not Gith the PCs have to convince: the supreme commanders who make up the Separatists need to be convinced to break with Tiamat for good f before the githyanki will end hostilities. Pitfalls: The adventure expects the PCs to free Vlaakith, but the players might have other ideas. Abandoning Vlaakith to whatever fate is in store for her does not in fact contain Gith. She can abandon the flesh at any time and find a new host elsewhere. The only reason she hasn’t yet is because she’s established her new identity, and starting over again would be an annoying setback. As a consequence, the characters will never get the chance to negotiate with the Separatists to extract them from Tiamat’s war. Destroying Zetch’r’r and revealing the broken pact will more or less remove the githyanki as a threat, but when the githyanki reorganize, the PCs’ world is certain to be their first target. The worst thing the characters can do is to attack Vlaakith. She might not yet be at full strength, but her power rivals that of an archdevil, and she should prove a deadly enemy, far stronger than what the PCs could hope to face at their level. Vlaakith isn’t interested in slaughtering the party, and so she takes them all alive to use later against Zetch’r’r.
3. Hangar The spiral stairs end at the hangar. The githyanki keep their pact dragon steeds, the two astral interceptors, replacement parts, and food for the mounts here.
Astral Interceptor
Gargantuan vehicle (astral skiff) HP 250 Space 2 squares by 4 squares Cost 13,000 gp AC 4; Fortitude 20, Reflex 2 Speed fly 12 (hover), overland flight 15 Pilot The pilot must stand at a control wheel, typically at the rear of the astral interceptor. Crew In addition to the pilot, an astral interceptor requires a crew of three, all of whom use a standard action each round to control the skiff. Reduce the skiff’s fly speed by 4 squares for each missing crewmember. At fly speed 0, the astral interceptor sails out of control. Load Ten Medium creatures; one ton of cargo Out of Control An out-of-control astral interceptor moves forward at half speed (not including any modifiers for its astral sails). Astral Attunement The astral interceptor functions only in the Astral Sea. Fragile Propulsion For every 25 damage the astral interceptor takes, its speed is reduced by 2 squares. At fly speed 0, the ship comes to a stop.
The following tactical encounter occurs only if the PCs skipped “Assaulting the Fortress.” Tactical Encounter: Into the Maw (page 74.
Vlaakith CLVIII/Gith
Level 25 Solo Soldier
Medium natural humanoid, githyanki XP 35,000 Initiative +21 Senses Perception +23 Forceful Presence aura 2; a bloodied enemy that starts its turn within the aura is pushed 5 squares. HP 912; Bloodied 456 AC 39; Fortitude 37, Reflex 41, Will 42 Immune fear; Resist 30 psychic Saving Throws +5 (+7 against charm effects) Speed 6; see also mind over matter Action Points 2 m Unarmed Strike (standard; at-will) +30 vs. AC; 2d10 + 9 damage, and the target is dazed until the end of Vlaakith’s next turn, see Gith’s judgment. M Ancient Wrath (standard; at-will) Vlaakith makes an unarmed strike attack against up to three targets, and can use time to die as a free action before each attack. While bloodied, she can attack up to four targets. M Shattering Strike (free, when Vlaakith hits a creature with a melee attack; recharges when first bloodied) The target takes a –2 penalty to defenses until the end of the encounter. M Stunning Impact (free, when Vlaakith hits a creature with a melee attack; recharge 5 6) The target is stunned until the end of its next turn. R Time to Die (minor; at-will) Ranged 5; +27 (+32 against immobilized targets) vs. Fortitude; the target is pulled 5 squares. This action does not provoke opportunity attacks. C Telekinetic Bind (minor; recharges when no creatures are immobilized by this power) Close burst 5; targets enemies; +28 vs. Fortitude; the target is immobilized (save ends). Gith’s Judgment Vlaakith deals 3d6 extra damage to immobilized targets. Mind over Matter (move; at-will) Vlaakith flies 6 squares. Alignment Evil Languages Common, Deep Speech, Supernal Skills Acrobatics +26, Athletics +21, Diplomacy +24, Dungeoneering +23, History +25, Insight +23, Intimidate +24 Str 18 (+16) Dex 28 (+21) Wis 22 (+18) Con 20 (+17) Int 23 (+18) Cha 25 (+19) Equipment simple clothing
July 20 09
|
D u n g e o n 16 8
46
A Tyranny of Souls
Escaping the Fortress After rescuing the prisoner, the PCs can escape by way of the Linked Portal ritual, fly out in a stolen astral vessel, or by some other means. With Vlaakith in tow, the adventurers need to return to the city and get things rolling, so let just about any plan work. If the PCs are stumped, have an NPC ally pick them up and ferry them back. Once back in the city, the characters can lay low at the Morningstar Inn. Rhapsody has enough hideyholes to allow the entire party to disappear for as long as they need. There’s not much time, however, for the attack did not go unnoticed and the emperor’s wrath unleashes a storm like Tu’narath has never before seen.
Part Four: Negotiations The emperor responds to Vlaakith’s escape by closing off the city. Those floating fortress commanders who failed to stop the adventurers and didn’t have the good sense to flee are summarily executed, and he installs new commanders loyal to himself and Tiamat in their place, many of which are not even githyanki. Military societies loyal to his throne mobilize and lay siege to those of uncertain reliability, while a full legion with red dragon support sweeps through the Merchant District searching for Vlaakith and her liberators. As casualties mount, confidence in the emperor falters. Division and unrest spread across the city. Yet for all the dissatisfaction, none seem willing to rise up against Zetch’r’r as long as he has Tiamat’s support. If they could remove Zetch’r’r and break his pact
with the red dragons, the people would rise up and wrest the city free from Tiamat’s grip. The adventurers have proved their courage, their competence, and their ambition. In Vlaakith’s eyes, they are the ones the movement needs to spark the revolution. Shortly after the characters return to the city (after they’ve had a chance to take an extended rest), Vlaakith calls the Separatists’ leaders to a meeting. The PCs, representing the Coalition, can bargain with the leadership to forge an alliance and convince them to withdraw from Tiamat’s unholy war. Skill Challenge: A Turning Point (page 76).
Mayhem’s Exit After the negotiation, Mayhem decides Tu’narath is too dangerous a place to linger and chooses this time to make his exit. He bids the characters farewell and ducks out, vanishing into the city. Mayhem is unlikely to return, but if the characters ever find themselves in Citadel Mercane, they might have an ally or an enemy there depending on how they treated him.
Part Five: War for Tu’narath Upon securing the agreement with the githyanki separatists under Vlaakith’s command, the only thing left for the adventurers to do is to defeat Emperor Zetch’r’r. The emperor’s forces are spread across the city, searching for Vlaakith, so the PCs need only deal with those left guarding Zetch’r’r’s throne. While the PCs attack the emperor’s palace, the Separatist leaders under Vlaakith’s command spark the uprising, leading strikes against Tiamat’s command centers and destroying those who have betrayed them. The
Separatists are strong enough to fight for a time, but they need to rouse the rest of the city to their cause, something that can be achieved only by destroying the emperor. The chaos and infighting wracking the city covers the PCs’ approach to the bastion, so aside from a few incidental encounters (with combats of your design if the adventurers are not yet 20th level), they enter the shattered remnants of the Queen’s District. When the PCs enter, read: A crumbling, mazelike necropolis of tombs and shattered statues spreads out in all directions. Paths wind through the wreckage and lead up to a towering cathedral wrought from black stone and fitted with windows set with multicolored glass. Before it stands the remains of an obsidian statue. Only two glossy black legs remain.
The Chromatic Bastion Zetch’r’r rules Tu’narath from the Chromatic Bastion, an obscene cathedral built to honor Tiamat’s role in his victory over his rivals. Built atop the ruins of the Lich Queen’s palace, it symbolizes the end of Vlaakith’s corruption and the githyanki’s strengthened bonds to the Dark Lady of Avarice. It is a macabre place, filled with shadowy horrors and protected by githyanki, dragons, and a menagerie of terrible monsters.
Features of the Chromatic Bastion The following features are common throughout the bastion unless otherwise mentioned in the text. Illumination: Rooms are bright, lit by everburning torches set in iron sconces every 5 squares or so.
July 20 09
|
D u n g e o n 16 8
47
A Tyranny of Souls
Few adventuring parties have the resources and wherewithal to endure eight encounters in a row, so the Chromatic Bastion provides one location to help the PCs regain healing surges and daily powers without breaking the suspension of disbelief with a full-blown extended rest. If the PCs attempt an extended rest anyway, feel free to hit them with improvised encounters featuring githyanki minions to make the rest difficult.
0. The Necropolis The adventurers must pass through the Necropolis to reach the Chromatic Bastion. Fallen heroes and notable githyanki were accorded the special honor of being interred in vaults within sight of the Palace of Whispers. Few, though, rested easy in their tombs, and those cursed with unlife wander the necropolis still. Tactical Encounter: Stillness Broken (page 77).
1. Shattered Gith
Doors: Iron doors are unlocked. Doors open into rooms unless noted otherwise. A door that joins two rooms opens into the larger room. Combat: Don’t feel confined by the maps presented in the tactical encounters. Combats can and should spill over into adjoining rooms. Avoid letting battles trigger additional encounters by having enemies push the PCs back the way they came.
Extended Rests The Chromatic Bastion offers few opportunities for the adventurers to take extended rests. The PCs simply don’t have 6 hours to spend recouping while their allies fight for the city’s future on the streets beyond. Not only do the PCs give Zetch’r’r the time he needs to crush the uprising but also an extended rest gives the emperor a chance to recall his troops and stiffen his defenses.
Gith’s statue, standing at the highest point in the Queen’s District, has long stood as a reminder of the legendary hero’s sacrifice and as an inspiration to continue to fight in her name. Vlaakith CLVII’s aborted attempt to seize the divine spark within the One in the Void caused shockwaves to wash across the district, toppling Gith’s intimidating statue and the Old Palace of Whispers on which the Chromatic Bastion now stands.
July 20 09
|
D u n g e o n 16 8
48
A Tyranny of Souls
The brooding cathedral looms before you, an ugly thing that is squat and unadorned aside from the rainbow glass plates set around the ornately carved iron doors. Before the structure stand the remains of a once-impressive statue carved from solid obsidian. Only the legs, part of the waist, and sword blade remain, but you can tell it depicted a female warrior. Black dust and broken statuary litter the ground all around the statue, and rubble from an older structure covers the cathedral’s grounds.
2. Antechamber Adventurers destroyed Vlaakith CLVII and sundered her phylactery, but Zetch’r’r’ preserved the LichQueen’s essence in her spine and bound her to his service with terrible oaths. To show his scorn for his predecessor, he reduced her to a common sentinel. Tactical Encounter: Evil’s Backbone (page 79).
3. Gallery of Flame
6. Hall of Skulls
The gallery of flame honors Tiamat in her red dragon aspect, and those who seek the fires of her greed might experience unspeakable desires in this fiery chamber. Tactical Encounter: Red Sentinels (page 81).
This chamber houses the mind flayer skulls recovered from the old Palace of Whispers. Since Zetch’r’r came to power, precious few skulls have been added.
4. Vestry Zetch’r’r and his attendant priests use this chamber to don their priestly vestments when worshiping at one of the two altars. Shelves cover the walls in this chamber, and each is laden with heavy ceremonial robes woven from brass thread. An iron door stands closed on the opposite wall. Ice rimes its surface.
5. Gallery of Ice The door to this room is frozen shut and requires a DC 22 Strength check to open. Although built to honor the Chromatic Dragon in her white dragon aspect, the emperor uses this chamber to store dragon carcasses for later use in Tiamat’s war. Attending the remains are devils suited for the gallery’s chilly environs. Tactical Encounter: The Freezer (page 82).
Skulls, arranged in stacks that reach the ceiling, extend along the walls to the chamber’s end. Most are damaged in some way or another, and all are of an alien shape. A character that succeeds on a DC 22 Dungeoneering check recognizes the skulls as belonging to mind flayers.
7. Shrine of Queens Although Zetch’r’r has nothing but scorn for the Lich-Queen, he has not fallen so far as to forget his heritage. This room honors the long line of queens who preceded the emperor. Against the far wall stands a short porphyry altar holding a statuette of a proud githyanki woman wearing a crown. Statues of stern githyanki warriors stand in each corner, all eyes on the altar. Something about this room fills you with ease, making your mission and fears seem no longer pressing. The sensations the PCs feel come from the ghosts of Vlaakith that haunt this chamber. They approve of the adventurers’ mission. Not enough of them remain to manifest themselves in any way more than just a feeling. Characters can safely take an extended rest in this room. Altar: Inspecting the altar and succeeding on a DC 27 Perception check reveals a hidden panel. Inside is a magnificently carved wooden box. Opening the box reveals a pulsing black heart. The box is
July 20 09
|
D u n g e o n 16 8
49
A Tyranny of Souls
Vlaakith CLVII’s phylactery, and if the characters defeated her in “Evil’s Backbone,” she reforms in this room after the requisite time has passed. Destroying the box (AC 10, Fortitude 5, Reflex 10; 5 hp) prevents Vlaakith from reforming and destroys her for good. A DC 27 Religion check identifies the box as being a phylactery. If the characters take the box with them, Vlaakith reappears in a space adjacent to the box’s carrier after the requisite number of days has passed and attacks at once.
8. Gallery of Decay Zetch’r’r built this chamber to honor Tiamat in her black dragon aspect. Currently, though, the emperor sets aside this chamber to hold curiosities recovered during the war. Since these “items of interest” are in fact dangerous creatures, the emperor set mercenaries to guard them. Tactical Encounter: Curiosities (page 84).
9. Gallery of Death This chamber honors Tiamat in her green dragon aspect and sports a beautiful idol of the goddess in emerald. Since this chamber grants access to Zetch’r’r’s private quarters, he places tough guards to ensure he is not disturbed. Tactical Encounter: Emerald Statue (page 86).
10. Guard Post Although Zetch’r’r commits his forces to crushing the Separatists, he keeps a small force of githyanki here as insurance. Guards positioned here listen for sounds of combat with the dragons in room 3 and alert their cohorts in room 11 to make ready for a fight. Tactical Encounter: Those Who Are About to Die (page 88).
11. Barracks
15. The Emperor’s Redoubt
Off-duty githyanki spend their time in these chambers. Each room consists of two or more bunk beds and a small table with a basin and water. The central rooms are residences for the gish’saraths (githyanki swordmasters). Tactical Encounter: Those Who Are About to Die (page 88).
The emperor claims the tower at the cathedral’s rear. The tower has three levels, all of which are open so the emperor can see all levels at once. The tower is open at the top, and the emperor frequently comes and goes by this way. Tactical Encounter: The Emperor’s Redoubt (page 91).
12. Hall of Heroes To promote loyalty among his warriors, the emperor had this room covered in bas-relief carvings depicting githwarriors battling githzerai, mind flayers, and slaads. When the Chromatic Temple comes under attack, the githyanki move to make a stand in this chamber. Tactical Encounter: Those Who Are About to Die (page 88).
13. Training Facilities The githyanki use this bare room to spar and perform weapon maneuvers. The walls hold weapon racks, and the floor is broken up into fighting rings. Githwarriors are on guard here should the Chromatic Bastion come under attack. Tactical Encounter: Those Who Are About to Die (page 88).
14. Gallery of Tempests This room celebrates Tiamat in her blue dragon aspect. This room is also where the emperor passes judgment on those who disappoint him. He executes the disloyal and inept and discards their corpses in a charnel pit below. Tactical Encounter: Vicious Storm (page 89).
Concluding the Adventure When the characters defeat Zetch’r’r and his allies, an astral skiff descends through the roof and settles on the second floor. Vlaakith and several githyanki knights exit through the hatch. Vlaakith congratulates the adventurers on their victory and then starts looking for the scepter of Ephelomon. If the scepter was destroyed, she gathers the pieces. Otherwise, she asks the PCs for it. She then makes ready to leave, saying, “It’s time to finish this.” She then boards the astral skiff again. The characters can join her if they wish. Vlaakith and her retinue head for the dragon caves at the opposite side of the city. Through the windows, the characters can see Tu’narath in flames, and fighting still rages in pockets. Not long after, the skiff descends and lands on a large floating rock amid the debris held by the red dragons. There, Vlaakith steps out and waits. Moments later, an elder red dragon emerges from a cave followed by four more dragons of similar size. Before they have a chance to breathe, Vlaakith raises her hands to show them the scepter. She says the following:
July 20 09
|
D u n g e o n 16 8
50
A Tyranny of Souls
“Children of Ephelomon, the pact is ended and your worthy service is no longer required.” If not already broken, she shatters the relic with a telekinetic attack. Otherwise, she drops the pieces to the ground. The elder red dragon’s eyes narrow for a moment and then it says, “You have been suitable partners these long years. It would be a waste to see you destroyed. We shall leave, but know this: When we next meet, it shall be as enemies.” The elder dragon roars and lifts off, and the other dragons follow its lead. All across the shattered expanse, more dragons leave their caves, some carrying blackened eggs, others spitting fire, piercing the air with their screams. As dragons abandon the city in scores, the few remaining dragons fighting the Separatists take note and drop their riders to the city streets below before following their kin. Within minutes, the dragons vanish into the shimmering void, and the city is once more under githyanki control. Vlaakith honors whatever agreements she made with the adventurers and stakes no claim to any treasures they extracted from the Chromatic Bastion. The characters are free to stay in the city for as long as they wish, but they will likely wish to return to the Coalition to report their success, and Vlaakith gladly has her servants open a portal to the natural world to facilitate the adventurers’ return.
If the characters forged a short-term alliance, two githyanki generals accompany them to the natural world to work with the Coalition leaders to lend their service in the coming fight against Tiamat’s armies. Otherwise, Vlaakith takes command of Tu’narath. She has the Chromatic Bastion razed, and she builds a new structure amid the red dragon caves as a sign of githyanki independence. Her first order of business after securing the city is to extend a hand of peace to the githzerai cousins. It has been too long, and old grudges have weakened her people. Those githzerai who accept the proffered peace eventually make the journey from the Elemental Chaos to find new lives amid their age-old enemies. A reunited people, they surrender their old identities of githyanki or githzerai and embrace a new culture as the gith. Will Vlaakith restart the Eternal Crusade? Will she become a new threat against the mortal world, or will she leave it be as she scours other worlds for the hated illithid infestation? Or does she have some other design? The gith’s fate is in your hands.
Appendix: Vehicles Summary Vehicles are objects with special statistics, some of which are similar to those possessed by creatures. Unless otherwise mentioned, use the rules governing objects as described in the Dungeon Master’s Guide. The following guidelines include information that applies to vehicles used in this adventure. For the full rules, see Adventurer’s Vault, pages 14–17. Size: Vehicles have sizes just like creatures. Hit Points: A vehicle reduced to 0 hit points is destroyed, and creatures on board are knocked prone in their squares. The vehicle’s wreckage occupies its space and counts as difficult terrain. Space: Vehicles occupy all the space within its listed dimensions. Vehicles cannot squeeze. Defenses: Like all objects, vehicles have an Armor Class, a Fortitude defense, and a Reflex defense. They do not have a Will defense. Speed: A vehicle’s speed determines how far it travels when a driver or pilot uses a move action. Using 2 move actions allows the vehicle to move twice its speed. Pilot and Crew: Vehicles require a character to control it and a crew to help. Pilots usually operate the vehicle from the rear so when placing the vehicle on the map, decide which is the front and which is the rear.
July 20 09
|
D u n g e o n 16 8
51
A Tyranny of Souls
A vehicle needs a pilot. Without one, the vehicle goes out of control and the statistics block describes what happens. Only one character can control a vehicle during a round, though any number of characters can attempt to take control until one is successful. A character can yield control to another character as a free action, but the character assuming control of the vehicle (also a free action) can take no other action with the vehicle during that turn. If a character does not move into the pilot position and assume control when it’s yielded, the vehicle might go out of control unless some other character takes control. Initiative: A vehicle never rolls for initiative and acts on the turn of the creature controlling it. If the vehicle is out-of-control, the vehicle’s effective initiative check result is 1 lower than the last creature in the initiative order. For multiple out-of-control vehicles, the vehicles act in order of which has been out of control the longest. Opportunity Attacks: A vehicle’s movement does not provoke opportunity attacks against the vehicle or creature(s) occupying it. Creatures moving within still provoke opportunity attacks from other creatures in the same vehicle, as normal. General Conditions: Vehicles can be attacked just like other objects. Some conditions have special rules (see below). If an effect allows a saving throw to end a condition, a vehicle makes one at the end of its controller’s turn (or at the end of the vehicle’s turn if out of control). A pilot can use a move action to allow a vehicle to make an additional saving throw during his or her turn. Immobilized: An immobilized vehicle cannot move except by a pull, a push, or a slide.
Prone: A vehicle that would be knocked prone instead takes 1d10 damage and is slowed (see below) until the end of the next round. Restrained: A restrained vehicle is immobilized and cannot be forced to move by a pull, a push, or a slide effect. If the restrained condition is ended by the escape action, the vehicle uses the pilot’s relevant skill modifier. Slowed: The vehicle’s speed is reduced to 2, as normal. Out of Control: A pilot must use specific actions to steer, move, or stop a vehicle. In any round in which no character uses actions to control the vehicle, a vehicle is out of control (see statistics block). Crashing and Ramming: If a vehicle tries to move into a space occupied by an object, a creature, or another vehicle, it crashes. The vehicle and whatever hits it take 1d10 damage per square the vehicle moved in its previous turn. Creatures on board (and those on board the object it hits) take half damage. If the target of the crash is more than one size category smaller than the out-of-control vehicle, the vehicle continues to move regardless of how much damage it dealt during the crash. The space the target occupies is treated as difficult terrain for the vehicle’s movement. Against targets of equal or greater size, the vehicle continues to move only if the target is destroyed. If not destroyed, the vehicle’s move ends immediately. Turning and Heading: Every vehicle has a headingthe direction it currently moves. To track a vehicle’s heading, place a token along the front edge of the vehicle’s space on the battle grid. When a vehicle moves, uses the marker to count off squares in the direction the vehicle is moving, and then move the vehicle counter or miniature to catch up.
Drive: Move Action. Move the vehicle a distance up to its speed. When you move the vehicle, it must move in the direction of its heading marker. The vehicle can move directly forward or it can move along either forward diagonal adjacent to its heading marker. It cannot move in other directions without making a turn. A vehicle’s movement does not provoke opportunity attacks against the vehicle or the creatures on it. Terrain affects a vehicle in the same way that it affects creatures. Turn: Move Action. Move the vehicle a distance equal to half its speed. When you move the vehicle, it must move in the direction of its heading marker. The vehicle can move directly forward or it can move along either forward diagonal adjacent to its heading marker. At any point during the vehicle’s movement, move its heading marker from its current position to either side of the vehicle. Reorient the vehicle’s counter or miniature accordingly at the end of the move. Otherwise, this action follows the rules for the drive action (above). Stop: Move Action. Move the vehicle forward a number of squares equal to the distance it moved in the previous round. At the end of the move, the vehicle is motionless. A vehicle begins moving again when the pilot uses the drive action. A stopped vehicle does not go out of control while motionless unless otherwise noted in its description. The vehicles’ heading marker remains in place. If and when the vehicle moves again, it must initially move in this direction.
July 20 09
|
D u n g e o n 16 8
52
A Tyranny of Souls
Mayhem’s Plight Encounter Level 18 (10,200 XP)
Setup 2 blood fiends (B) Mayhem (M) Mayhem is confronted by two ravenous blood fiends. The abominations happily engage anyone that interferes. The path emerges from the petrified forest and climbs to a smoking cleft in the mountainside. Standing on the road, and looking quite terrified, is a tall blue-skinned humanoid dressed in fine robes. Two muscular four-armed humanoids with blood red skin and long claws and fangs threaten the traveler from mountain ledges.
2 Blood Fiends (B)
Level 23 Soldier
Medium elemental humanoid XP 5,100 each Initiative +21 Senses Perception +23; darkvision HP 220; Bloodied 110 AC 41; Fortitude 36, Reflex 34, Will 32 Immune fear Speed 8, fly 10 m Claws (standard; at-will) +28 vs. AC; 2d8 + 10 damage. m Bloodthirsty Bite (standard; at-will) F Healing Requires combat advantage; +28 vs. AC; 1d8 + 10 damage, and the target is grabbed and takes ongoing 10 damage. Also, the blood fiend regains 10 hit points. C Terror Gaze (minor; at-will) F Fear Close blast 3; +24 vs. Will; the target is immobilized (save ends). Combat Advantage The blood fiend gains combat advantage against any living, bloodied enemy. Alignment Chaotic evil Languages Primordial Skills Intimidate +24 Str 30 (+21) Dex 26 (+19) Wis 24 (+18) Con 28 (+20) Int 22 (+17) Cha 27 (+19)
Mayhem the Raavasta (M)
Level 19 Lurker
Medium elemental humanoid (shapechanger) XP 2,400 Initiative +19 Senses Perception +18; truesight 6 HP 136; Bloodied 68 AC 32; Fortitude 29, Reflex 32, Will 33 Resist 10 psychic, 10 variable (3/encounter; see “Resist,” Monster Manual, page 282) Speed 8 m Claws of Blindness (standard; at-will) +23 vs. AC; 1d6 + 6 damage, and the target is blinded (save ends). R Mind Scramble (standard; recharges when first bloodied or when Mayhem scores a critical hit with claws of blindness) F Psychic Ranged 10; +22 vs. Will; 1d10 + 7 psychic damage, and the target is dazed and takes a −2 penalty to attack rolls (save ends both). Change Shape (minor; at-will) F Polymorph Mayhem can alter its physical form to take on the appearance of any Medium humanoid, including a unique individual. Cloak and Claw Mayhem’s attacks deal 2d6 extra damage against a target against which it has total concealment. Vanish (immediate reaction, when an enemy hits Mayhem; recharge 5 6) F Illusion Mayhem shifts 3 squares and is invisible until the end of its next turn or until it makes an attack. Alignment Evil Languages All Skills Bluff +21, Stealth +20 Str 15 (+11) Dex 22 (+15) Wis 18 (+13) Con 16 (+12) Int 19 (+13) Cha 24 (+16) Equipment fine clothing
July 20 09
|
D u n g e o n 16 8
53
A Tyranny of Souls
Tactics
Features of the Area
The blood fiends focus their attacks on Mayhem until the PCs join the combat. One closes to use terror gaze, while the second moves in to make an attack with its claws, leaping from a ledge to put itself between the PCs and their prey. If the characters attack, both blood fiends abandon Mayhem and use terror gaze to pin down their enemies and then close to savage them with their claws. Once they bloody an enemy, they go for the kill, using their bloodthirsty bite attacks. Mayhem plays the part of the hapless victim for 1 round. If the PCs have yet to help him by the start of the second round, the next time he’s hit by an attack, he uses vanish to cover his retreat. If prevented, he uses mind scramble against a blood fiend and tries to withdraw to the cleft. He flees if he’s bloodied.
Cliffs: Climbing up or down the rock faces requires a DC 14 Athletics check. A fall from the cliff below the path causes the character to roll down the mountain side, moving 1d20 squares and taking 1d10 damage for every 2 squares moved before coming to a stop. Vents: Fissures in the mountain near the cleft (marked V1, V2, V3, and V4 on the map) occasionally burst hot, poisonous steam. On initiative count 10, roll 1d4 to determine which vent attacks. c Vented Steam F Fire, Poison Close blast 3; +21 vs. Reflex; 1d10 + 6 fire damage, and the target takes ongoing 10 fire and poison damage (save ends).
Sulfurous Smoke: All spaces adjacent to the cleft are lightly obscured, while spaces in the cloud or in the cleft are heavily obscured.
July 20 09
|
D u n g e o n 16 8
54
A Tyranny of Souls
Finding Tu’narath Encounter Level 19 (12,000 XP)
Setup To secure a route to the githyanki city, the PCs must negotiate Citadel Mercane for leads. You should run this skill challenge as the adventurers explore and investigate the Bazaar. This skill challenge is unusual in that even failed checks can reveal routes to Tu’narath. These options are more dangerous and risk much, but they are as viable as geting a victory with the skill challenge. Many failures, as shown below, include links to side-treks. If characters follow-up on these, turn to the indicated page for details on what happens. Finding Tu’narath Skill Challenge
Level 19 XP 12,000
The air hums with conversation, and in the crowds you see any number of useful types who might aid you in your mission. The PCs listen and interact with locals to discover possible routes to Tu’narath. This skill challenge takes at least 6 hours. Complexity 5 (12 successes before 3 failures). Primary Skills Bluff, Diplomacy, Endurance, History, Insight, Intimidate. Other Skills Streetwise. Victory The characters arrange a meeting with Captain J’ladimir, a Separatist sympathizer. He stands as the best and most certain route to Tu’narath. Proceed to “The Sympathizer” on page 36. Defeat If the characters haven’t yet found a way to reach Tu’narath by one of the challenge’s failures, they must begin the skill challenge again.
Special If the PCs rescued and befriended Mayhem, they gain a +2 bonus to all skill checks related to the skill challenge. Bluff DC 22 The PCs adopt cover stories and use them to find a way to the githyanki city. Requires a successful Streetwise check. The first failure turns up a name for someone who might help: Scaramandar. The failed check opens up the advanced Streetwise 1 option. The PCs cannot make any more Bluff checks until they succeed on another Streetwise check. Diplomacy DC 22 The adventurers negotiate for passage, hinting at their mission and seeking sympathizers. The PCs cannot make any more Diplomacy checks until they get another success with Streetwise. Endurance DC 22 (4 successes maximum; see below) The PCs spend time carousing in the hopes loose lips might reveal a clue. On a failed check, a nearby barfly suggests the characters should just steal a ship. The failed check opens up the advanced Streetwise 2 check. History DC 27 The PCs recall and mention a particularly bloodthirsty githyanki raid so that they can attempt to weaken bonds of loyalty or foment feelings of vengeance in people around them. A successful check can negate one failure instead of granting a success. Intimidate DC 22 The PCs use threats to pressure locals to cough up a way to the city. If failed, in addition to counting as a failure, the first failed check reveals a name of someone who might help. Taikus, a githzerai black marketer, sometimes smuggles goods into Tu’narath. This failure opens up advanced Streetwise 3. The PCs cannot make any more Intimidate checks until they succeed on another Streetwise check. Streetwise DC 22 The PCs explore the Citadel, listening to rumors, asking questions, and generally feeling the pulse of the city. Characters can cooperate to aid a lead character using this skill. In addition to counting as a success, a successful check opens up the Bluff, Diplomacy, and Intimidate skills.
Advanced Streetwise 1 DC 27 (0 successes or failures) The PCs ask around about Scaramandar and learn he is a fixer and problem-solver. He has a dubious reputation and is a known double-crosser, but he might aid them in reaching Tu’narath. If the characters follow this lead, they get an audience. Go to “Dealing with the Devil” on page 34. Characters can cooperate to aid a lead character using this skill. Advanced Streetwise 2 DC 22 (0 successes or failures) A little investigation into suitable vehicles to steal comes up with the name Merciless. If the characters follow this lead, they find the vessel with little trouble. See “Merciless” on page 36. Characters can cooperate to aid a lead character using this skill. Advanced Streetwise 3 DC 22 (0 successes or failures) The PCs learn Taikus is still in the city and he might be willing to help. If the characters follow this lead, they find directions to his warehouse. Proceed with “Shortcuts through the Void” on page 36. Characters can cooperate to aid a lead character using this skill.
July 20 09
|
D u n g e o n 16 8
55
A Tyranny of Souls
Demons Among Us Encounter Level 20 (14,400 XP)
Setup 3 goristro slaves (G) Three hulking goristro demons escaped their handlers by killing them. Free, they vent their rage at innocent bystanders and will not stop until destroyed. While the PCs explore the market, read: Screams pierce the Bazaar’s steady hum, presaging a mad rush. Through the fleeing people, you see a massive demon leap from one ruined stall to land on another. It whips its chain about, decapitating three too-slow patrons. Two more demons bound into the scene, roaring and screeching in rage.
3 Goristro Slaves (G)
Level 19 Elite Brute
Huge elemental humanoid (demon) XP 4,800 each Initiative +10 Senses Perception +17; darkvision HP 450; Bloodied 225; see also raging frenzy AC 31; Fortitude 33, Reflex 28, Will 29 Resist 20 variable (2/encounter; see “Resist,” Monster Manual, 282) Saving Throws +2 Speed 8 Action Points 1 m Slam (standard; at-will) Reach 3; +22 vs. AC; 2d10 + 8 damage. M Double Attack (standard; at-will) The goristro makes two slam attacks. M Goristro Stomp (immediate reaction, when a nonadjacent enemy moves adjacent to the goristro; recharge 4 5 6) The goristro attacks the triggering enemy: +22 vs. AC; 4d8 + 6 damage, and the target is pushed 2 squares and knocked prone. M Raging Frenzy (immediate reaction, when attacked by an adjacent enemy while bloodied; at-will) Targets triggering enemy: +22 vs. AC; 2d8 + 6 damage. R Lashing Chains (standard; at-will) Ranged 5; +22 vs. AC; 3d10 + 8 damage, and the target is grabbed. Effect: One other creature grabbed by the goristro slides to a space adjacent to the target of the attack, takes 15 damage, and is no longer grabbed. Alignment Chaotic evil Languages Abyssal Str 27 (+17) Dex 12 (+10) Wis 17 (+12) Con 25 (+16) Int 6 (+7) Cha 12 (+10) Equipment chains
Tactics The demons are enraged and attack anything that comes too close. A demon uses lashing chains against the first enemy to come in its range, and then uses the attack again against a different target by spending an action point. If a PC closes on the demon, it uses goristro stomp or, if waiting for the power to recharge, it hammers its foe with double attack. The demons fight until destroyed.
July 20 09
|
D u n g e o n 16 8
56
A Tyranny of Souls
Features of the Area
Development
Crowds: During the first round, the characters have cover from the patrons in the Bazaar, but each square a character moves closer to the demons counts as difficult terrain due to the press of fleeing people. During the second round, this environmental effect ends and the PCs are free to move about normally. Floating Stands: The battlefield consists of several floating stands. Because the PCs are on the Astral Sea, they can fly up to half their speed and hover in place. Since they are clumsy fliers, such characters take a −4 penalty to attack rolls and defenses while flying. A character can choose not to fly and instead jump, making an Athletics check as normal to cross the gaps (Player’s Handbook, page 182). Tents: Many floating stands contain tents. A character inside a tent has total concealment. Walls: Some floating stands contain walls. Characters behind them gain cover.
Starting on the fifth round and every 2 rounds thereafter until the end of the encounter, three marut blademasters (Monster Manual, page 185) join the fight to help contain the demons. These combatants do not attack the PCs unless the PCs attack them. If a fight breaks out between the PCs and the maruts, see the “Running Afoul of the Law” sidebar on page 57 for further developments.
Conclusion Once the last demon falls, the Bazaar’s commerce resumes as if nothing had happened. The dead drift away and are eventually picked up by locals for rendering into candles and food, but not before they are picked clean of valuables. As the characters recover, Trethrix of the Seven Diamonds appears at their side. A beautiful woman, svelte and appealing, she smiles and thanks the adventurers for their selfless service. As a reward, she gifts them with treasure parcel 5. After she honors the characters, she returns to her palanquin to continue her shopping.
July 20 09
|
D u n g e o n 16 8
57
A Tyranny of Souls
The Devil’s Bargain Encounter Level 19+ (12,600 XP)
Setup 4 marut escorts (M) Trethrix (T) Periodically one of the Seven Diamonds travels the Bazaar to assert that they are the true masters and to encourage commerce. The most recent Diamond to explore the Bazaar is Trethrix. A raavasta, she is thoroughly evil, but she has no special complaint against the adventurers and thus is not prepared for an attack against her. This encounter occurs only if the adventurers move to assassinate the merchant to gain access to Tu’narath. The best time to strike is when she awaits the portal to open to the Inner Sphere. The adventurers should have plenty of time to scout the area and set up their ambush. When the PCs can see this scene, read: A beautiful woman reclines on a palanquin. Standing at each corner is a gray-skinned humanoid wielding a greatsword. The group waits before a shuddering gate ringed with bright glyphs set on the Inner Sphere’s surface.
4 Marut Escorts (M)
Level 19 Minion Soldier
Medium immortal humanoid XP 600 each Initiative +14 Senses Perception +20; truesight 10 HP 1; a minion never takes damage from a miss. AC 34; Fortitude 36, Reflex 31, Will 32 Immune sleep; Resist 10 thunder Speed 8, fly 4 (hover), teleport 4 m Greatsword (standard; at-will) F Thunder, Weapon +26 vs. AC; 12 damage plus 3 thunder damage, and the target is pushed 1 square. Hardy Minion (when the marut escort is hit by an attack; at-will) Roll 1d6. On a 5 or 6, the marut takes no damage from the attack. Alignment Unaligned Languages Supernal Str 30 (+19) Dex 21 (+14) Wis 23 (+15) Con 23 (+15) Int 12 (+10) Cha 13 (+10) Equipment greatsword
Trethrix (T)
Level 23 Elite Controller
Medium elemental humanoid XP 10,200 (shapechanger), raavasta Initiative +16 Senses Perception +22; truesight 6 HP 428; Bloodied 214 AC 40; Fortitude 35, Reflex 38, Will 36 Resist 15 psychic, 15 variable (2/encounter; see “Resist,” Monster Manual, page 282) Saving Throws +2 Speed 6 Action Points 1 m Beguiling Claws (standard; at-will) F Charm +26 vs. AC; 1d6 + 5 damage, and the target is blinded (save ends). R Bind (minor; recharges when enforce contract is used) F Charm, Psychic Ranged sight; no attack roll required; the target chooses to take ongoing 20 psychic damage (save ends) or be dominated (save ends); see also enforce contract. C Mind Stab (standard; encounter) F Fear, Psychic Close burst 5; targets enemies; +28 vs. Will; 5d6 + 9 psychic damage, and the target moves its speed away from Trethrix. Change Shape (minor; at-will) F Polymorph Trethrix can alter its physical form to take on the appearance of any Medium humanoid, including a unique individual (see “Change Shape,” Monster Manual, page 280). Enforce Contract (immediate reaction, when an enemy’s melee or ranged attack targets Trethrix; recharges when bind is used) F Charm The attack targets the creature affected by Trethrix’s bind power instead of Trethrix. Using this power ends the bind effect on that creature. Vanish (immediate reaction, when an enemy hits Trethrix; recharge 5 6) F Illusion Trethrix shifts 3 squares and is invisible until the end of its next turn or until it attacks. Alignment Evil Languages All Skills Bluff +23, Diplomacy +23, Insight +22 Str 14 (+13) Dex 20 (+16) Wis 23 (+17) Con 22 (+17) Int 28 (+20) Cha 25 (+18) Equipment fine clothing
July 20 09
|
D u n g e o n 16 8
58
A Tyranny of Souls
Tactics The marut escorts form a defensive perimeter around the raavasta to block attempts by enemies to reach their charge. When a foe closes, the maruts use their greatswords to throw back the attacker. They follow Trethrix as she moves about to avoid the PCs’ attacks. While her minions move to protect her, Trethrix uses bind against a tough defender. If the target opts to become dominated, she compels it to make basic attacks against its allies. If she comes under attack, she safeguards herself by using enforce contract, at which point she chooses a different target to bind. If two or more PCs close on her, she uses mind stab to drive them off and spends an action point to hit a target she misses with her beguiling claws. If she drops to 100 hit points or fewer, she uses vanish to make an escape if possible. The marut blademasters that come through the portal (see “Development” on the next page) close on the closest enemy, fighting their way to the raavasta’s side using teleport if necessary. Once there, they take up the roles her escorts performed and fight to the death defending the fiend.
Inner Sphere Gate
Features of the Area Inner Sphere Gate: A massive gate leads to Citadel Mercane’s interior. It takes 5 minutes to open or close the gate fully due to its great weight. The gate is made from adamantine and has an AC 2, other defenses 20; resist 20 all; hp 1,000. Breaching the gate allows access to the Inner Sphere (page 33). Statues: Eight 20-foot-tall statues in two rows of four stand to either side of the portal. The statue has
an AC 2, Fortitude 20, Reflex 2, hp 400. If a statue takes 50 or more damage, blue blood sprays in a continuous close blast 3 in the direction from the attack. The blood is harmless, but it grants concealment to creatures standing in the blast. Lightning Ward: To protect the inner sphere, the Society of Seven Diamonds placed powerful wards around their gates. The lightning ward attacks when any natural creature enters a space adjacent to the ward.
July 20 09
|
D u n g e o n 16 8
59
A Tyranny of Souls
c Lightning Ward F Lightning Melee 1; +22 vs. Reflex; 1d8 + 7 lightning damage, and the target is pushed 1d4 squares and is dazed until the end of its next turn.
Palanquin: Trethrix rides on a levitating palanquin. Trethrix’s Palanquin
Medium vehicle HP 30 Space 1 square Cost 1,800 gp AC 5; Fortitude 10, Reflex 5 Speed fly 4 (hover) Pilot The pilot must maintain concentration (minor action) or the palanquin goes out of control. Load One Medium creature; 100 pounds of gear. Out of Control An out-of-control palanquin comes to a stop at the beginning of its turn. Compact An adjacent creature can fold up an unoccupied palanquin as a standard action into a tiny object.
Treasure: Trethrix carries treasure parcel 10 on her person.
Development
Conclusion
After the third round, the gate is wide enough for one marut blademaster to join the fight. Every other round thereafter, another two join the battle. This continues until five blademasters emerge.
After killing the raavasta, the PCs can move to the appointed place. A rakshasa proxy working for Scaramandar gives them a ritual scroll, the sigil address, and residuum enough to perform the ritual. Depending on how the PCs’ mission went, they might need to retreat farther up into the mountain to escape vengeance-seeking maruts. They could, while there, face additional encounters as described on page 31. Completing the ritual, though, transports the adventurers to Tu’narath as the cambion promised.
Marut Blademaster
Level 21 Soldier
Medium immortal humanoid XP 3,200 Initiative +18 Senses Perception +22; truesight 10 HP 201; Bloodied 100 AC 37; Fortitude 37, Reflex 32, Will 33 Immune sleep; Resist 10 thunder Speed 8, fly 4 (hover), teleport 4 m Greatsword (standard; at-will) F Thunder, Weapon +27 vs. AC; 1d10 + 11 damage plus 1d6 thunder damage, the target is pushed 1 square, and the target is marked until the end of the marut blademaster’s next turn. M Double Attack (standard; at-will) F Thunder, Weapon The marut blademaster makes two greatsword attacks. Alignment Unaligned Languages Supernal Skills Endurance +22, Intimidate +17 Str 32 (+21) Dex 23 (+16) Wis 25 (+17) Con 25 (+17) Int 14 (+12) Cha 15 (+12) Equipment greatsword
Characters who fail to kill Trethrix and flee into the Bazaar are hunted for the remainder of their stay here. See “Running Afoul of the Law” on page 34 for further developments.
July 20 09
|
D u n g e o n 16 8
60
A Tyranny of Souls
Stolen Mercy
When the PCs enter Pier Nine, read:
Encounter Level 19 (12,000 XP)
Docks stretch out all along the metal pier, many of which hold astral vessels in all sorts of shapes and sizes. As you near the end, the ships thin out until there are none for the final 100 or so feet. At the very end, you spy the Merciless, a sleek ship with an enclosed deck equipped with patched sails and long navigation rods sprouting from the hull. Hatches grant access to its interior and crystalline portals might provide a glimpse into its interior. An observation deck towers over the ship, with metal rungs ascending to a hatch at the deck’s bottom.
Setup 2 githyanki mates (M) 4 githyanki pirates (P) Ri’s’an (R) The Merciless is an astral skiff docked at the end of Pier Nine. Having taken substantial damage during an illadvised raid into Hestavar, the ship limped to Citadel Mercane for repairs. The vessel is inviting to thieves because of its isolation and the lack of goodwill earned by the ship’s crew. In fact, should the ship and its crew come under attack, no one comes to their aid. 4 Githyanki Pirates (P)
Level 19 Minion Soldier
Medium natural humanoid XP 600 each Initiative +15 Senses Perception +13 HP 1; a missed attack never damages a minion. AC 34; Fortitude 33, Reflex 31, Will 30 Saving Throws +2 against charm effects Speed 5; see also telekinetic jump m Silver Longsword (standard; at-will) F Psychic, Weapon +26 vs. AC; 16 psychic damage, and the target is marked until the end of the githyanki’s next turn. r Crossbow (standard; recharges when the githyanki spends a minor action to reload the weapon) F Weapon Ranged 15/30; +26 vs. AC; 16 damage. Telekinetic Jump (move; encounter) The githyanki flies 5 squares. Alignment Evil Languages Common, Deep Speech Str 25 (+16) Dex 22 (+15) Wis 19 (+13) Con 14 (+11) Int 15 (+11) Cha 14 (+11) Equipment chainmail, light shield, silver longsword, crossbow with 10 bolts
2 Githyanki Mates (M)
Level 19 Skirmisher
Medium natural humanoid XP 2,400 each Initiative +18 Senses Perception +13 HP 177; Bloodied 88 AC 33; Fortitude 31, Reflex 33, Will 30 Saving Throws +2 against charm effects Speed 5; see also astral stride m Silver Longsword (standard; at-will) F Psychic, Weapon +24 vs. AC; 1d8 + 8 damage plus 1d8 psychic damage, and the githyanki mate shifts 1 square. r Astral Dagger (standard; at-will) F Force, Psychic Ranged 10; +24 vs. AC; 1d6 + 8 force damage plus 1d6 psychic damage. M Merciless Cut (standard; requires silver longsword; at-will) F Psychic, Weapon Targets a dazed or stunned creature; +24 vs. AC; 2d8 + 7 damage plus 2d8 psychic damage, and a dazed target is stunned instead of dazed (save ends). C Psychic Assault (standard; recharge 4 5 6) F Psychic Close blast 3; +22 vs. Will; 1d6 + 7 psychic damage, and the target is dazed (save ends). Astral Stride (move; encounter) F Teleportation The githyanki pirate teleports 6 squares and gains the insubstantial and phasing qualities until the start of its next turn. Alignment Evil Languages Common, Deep Speech Str 22 (+15) Dex 25 (+16) Wis 19 (+13) Con 17 (+12) Int 20 (+14) Cha 14 (+11) Equipment chainmail, silver longsword
Ri’s’an and the two pirates recline on the observation deck, while the surviving pirates make the final preparations for departure. The githyanki don’t expect an attack and so they are not watching from the deck. The pirates work inside the vessel, so it takes a DC 13 Stealth check to approach the ship unnoticed. Ri’s’an (R)
Level 19 Elite Artillery (Leader)
Medium natural humanoid, githyanki XP 4,800 Initiative +15 Senses Perception +19 HP 270; Bloodied 135 AC 31; Fortitude 29, Reflex 31, Will 34 Saving Throws +2 (+4 against charm effects) Speed 6; see also astral stride Action Points 1 m Psychic Blade (standard; at-will) F Force, Psychic +24 vs. AC; 1d6 + 7 force damage plus 1d6 psychic damage. r Hurled Blade (standard; at-will) F Force, Psychic Ranged 15; +26 vs. AC; 1d8 + 8 force damage plus 1d8 psychic damage. R Double Attack (standard; at-will) Ri’s’an makes two hurled blade attacks, or one psychic blade attack, shifts, and makes a hurled blade attack. R Githyanki Tactics (move; at-will) Ranged 5; targets one githyanki Ri’s’an can see; the target slides 5 squares. R Psychic Spear (standard; recharge 4 5 6) F Force, Psychic Ranged 20; +26 vs. AC; 2d8 + 5 force damage plus 2d8 psychic damage, and the target is immobilized (save ends). C Psychic Scream (immediate reaction, when first bloodied; encounter) F Psychic Close burst 5; targets enemies; +22 vs. Will; 4d6 + 7 psychic damage, and the target is dazed (save ends). Miss: Half damage, and the target is not dazed. Astral Stride (move; encounter) F Teleportation Ri’s’an teleports 6 squares and gains the insubstantial and phasing qualities until the start of its next turn. Alignment Evil Languages Common, Deep Speech Skills Arcana +17, History +14, Insight +19, Intimidate +21 Str 19 (+13) Dex 22 (+15) Wis 20 (+14) Con 15 (+11) Int 17 (+12) Cha 25 (+16) Equipment chainmail
July 20 09
|
D u n g e o n 16 8
61
A Tyranny of Souls
Tactics The githyanki pirates shout for Captain Ri’s’an if an adventurer opens a hatch, thus raising the alarm. Otherwise, the pirates are oblivious to combat outside the skiff until the start of round 3 when one finally comes out from the craft and sees the fight. Once alerted, three of the githyanki pirates take their stations, while the fourth spends a move action to move the ship 3 squares and turn it broadside to bring the pier into its firing arc. The pirates fire at the PCs using their crossbows. The githyanki mates lead the attack, either using astral stride to engage the PCs on the pier below or fighting PCs who engage them at the platform. They use psychic assault first followed by merciless cut. Ri’s’an fights from the observation deck, using his double attack to support his mates and psychic spear to pin down enemy defenders. Ri’s’an doesn’t engage the PCs in melee unless he is the only thing between them and his ship, at which point he closes the distance with astral stride and directs his psychic blade attacks at controllers and leaders first.
Features of the Area Observation Deck: The observation deck stands 30 feet above the pier and has an open top. With subjective gravity, PCs can fly to the top using the normal rules for navigating the Astral Sea (page 57). Or, a character can climb the ladder up to the hatch with a DC 0 Athletics check. The Merciless: The vessel is an astral skiff.
Merciless
Gargantuan vehicle (astral skiff ) HP 250 Space 2 squares by 6 squares Cost 13,000 gp AC 4; Fortitude 20, Reflex 2 Speed fly 12 (hover), overland flight 15 Pilot The pilot must stand at a control wheel, typically at the rear of the astral skiff. Crew In addition to the pilot, an astral skiff requires a crew of three, all of whom use a standard action each round to control the skiff. Reduce the skiff’s fly speed by 4 squares for each missing crewmember. At fly speed 0, the Merciless sails out of control. Load Ten Medium creatures; one ton of cargo Out of Control An out-of-control astral skiff moves forward at half speed (not including any modifiers for its astral sails). Astral Attunement The astral skiff functions only in the Astral Sea. Fragile Propulsion For every 25 damage the Merciless takes, its speed is reduced by 2 squares. At fly speed 0, the ship comes to a stop.
The ship provides superior cover to creatures inside. Two portals on each side allow occupants to make attacks against enemies outside the vessel. Treasure: The characters gain treasure parcel 20, which includes the Merciless. In addition, planar charts reveal a quick route to Tu’narath through a nearby color veil.
July 20 09
|
D u n g e o n 16 8
62
A Tyranny of Souls
Secret Way Encounter Level 19 (12,000 XP)
Setup Negotiated Passage (Skill Challenge) 2 angels of Tiamat’s vengeance Taikus (T) Along the way to the warehouse, two angels of Tiamat’s vengeance, who have been watching the characters, follow them to the site. About 5 minutes before the characters arrive, both angelsfrom as far away as you liketarget two PCs with sign of vengeance. Since this sign is invisible and harmless, the character doesn’t notice it. However, a DC 29 Arcana check reveals its general presence and nature. A DC 25 Religion check identifies its source. When the PCs enter the warehouse, read: Wooden crates stand in piles forming three rows extending to the warehouse’s far wall. Aside from these goods and dust floating through the air, the place seems empty. Taikus has a permanent portal linking Tu’narath to Citadel Mercane inside an extradimensional space hidden at the back of the warehouse. When the characters enter the building, Taikus is inside the extradimensional space. He emerges 2 rounds later. Characters searching the warehouse can find the extradimensional space with a DC 29 Arcana check or a DC 27 Perception check. If the characters find the space while the githzerai is still inside, the PCs take a −2 penalty to all Diplomacy checks made as part of the “Negotiated Passage” skill challenge.
Negotiated Passage Skill Challenge
Level 19 XP 2,400
The githzerai watches you with suspicion, uncertain of your motives. The adventurers must convince Taikus that they aim to help the Separatists. This skill challenge takes a few minutes. Complexity 1 (4 successes before 3 failures). Primary Skills Bluff, Diplomacy, Insight. Other Skills History, Intimidate. Victory Taikus leads the PCs to the extradimensional space, but before the PCs reach it, the angels of Tiamat’s vengeance attack. Defeat Taikus denies the PCs access to the portal. Before the characters have a chance to react, the angels of Tiamat’s vengeance attack, further damning the PCs in the githzerai’s eyes. Bluff (DC 22) The PC gives a false reason for wanting to reach Tu’narath. A failed check here results in two failures. Diplomacy (DC 22) The characters explain their mission and ask for aid. The first success makes available the History check. History (DC 22; Requires a successful Diplomacy check) A PC recalls some of the worst raids and excesses by the githyanki, relating these tales to his or her mission and how the group intends to stop future attacks. Insight (DC 22) A PC senses the githzerai is nervous and catches him throwing a glance to an innocuous stack of crates (he’s looking at the entrance to the extradimensional space). This check also reveals that Intimidate does not work on Taikus. Intimidate (DC 30)
Taikus is not easily moved by threats. Each failed Intimidate check applies a –5 penalty to all future checks made as part of this skill challenge.
When Taikus appears, read: Stepping out from around a stack is a rail-thin githzerai wearing a tattered cloak. He looks at you with a raised eyebrow, “Can I help you?”
July 20 09
|
D u n g e o n 16 8
63
A Tyranny of Souls
2 Angels of Tiamat’s Vengeance
Level 19 Elite Brute
Large immortal humanoid (angel) XP 4,800 each Initiative +13 Senses Perception +16 HP 446; Bloodied 223 AC 34; Fortitude 33, Reflex 29, Will 33; see also chromatic cloak Immune disease, fear; Resist 15 radiant; 15 variable (3/ encounter, acid, cold, fire, lightning, or poison only; see “Resist,” Monster Manual, page 282), see also coldfire pillar Saving Throws +2 Speed 8, fly 12 (hover); see also sign of vengeance Action Points 1 m Longsword (standard; at-will) F Acid, Cold, Fire, Lightning, Poison, Weapon Reach 2; +25 vs. AC; 1d10 + 9 damage plus 1d8 acid, cold, fire, lightning, or poison damage plus 1d8 acid, cold, fire, lightning, or poison damage. M Double Attack (standard; at-will) The angel of vengeance makes two longsword attacks. R Sign of Vengeance (minor; encounter) F Teleportation Ranged sight; the angel of vengeance places an invisible sign upon the target. Until the end of the encounter, as a move action, the angel can teleport adjacent to the target. C Chromatic Pillar (when first bloodied; encounter) F Acid, Cold, Fire Lightning, Poison, Polymorph The angel transforms into a 30-foot-high pillar of draconic energies. Close burst 2; +23 vs. Reflex; 1d8 + 9 acid, cold, fire, lightning, or poison damage plus 1d8 + 9 acid, cold, fire, lightning, or poison damage. The angel of Tiamat’s vengeance is immune to all damage until the start of its next turn. Chromatic Cloak (until bloodied) F Acid, Cold, Fire, Lightning, Poison Attacks against the angel of vengeance take a −2 penalty until the angel is bloodied. While cloak of vengeance is in effect, a creature that makes a successful melee attack against the angel takes 1d8 acid or cold damage and 1d8 fire, lightning, or poison damage. Alignment Evil Languages Supernal Skills Insight +21, Intimidate +22 Str 27 (+17) Dex 18 (+13) Wis 25 (+16) Con 23 (+15) Int 19 (+13) Cha 26 (+17) Equipment plate armor, 2 longswords
Taikus (T)
Level 15 Elite Controller
Medium natural humanoid, githzerai XP 2,400 Initiative +13 Senses Perception +18 HP 282; Bloodied 141 AC 31; Fortitude 28, Reflex 30, Will 30; see also iron mind Saving Throws +2 Speed 7 Action Points 1 m Unarmed Strike (standard; at-will) +20 vs. AC; 2d8 + 6 damage. R Inner Spark (standard; at-will) F Lightning, Teleportation Ranged 5; +18 vs. Reflex; 1d8 + 4 lightning damage, and the target teleports 5 squares to an unoccupied space of Taikus’s choosing. R Reorder Chaos (standard; recharge 5 6) F Teleportation Ranged sight; up to 4 Medium or smaller targets; +19 vs. Fortitude; the targets teleport to swap spaces as Taikus chooses. R Trace Chance (standard; recharge 5 6) Ranged 5; no attack roll required; the next melee attack made against the target gains a +5 power bonus to the attack roll, and, if it hits, it is automatically a critical hit. C Psychic Fists (standard; encounter) F Psychic Close burst 5; targets enemies; +19 vs. Will; 1d8 + 4 psychic damage. Avenging Wind (immediate interrupt, when targeted by a ranged attack; encounter) F Teleportation The attack targets another creature within 5 squares of Taikus, and Taikus teleports 10 squares into a square adjacent to the attacker. Iron Mind (immediate interrupt, when Taikus would be hit by an attack; encounter) Taikus gains a +2 bonus to all defenses until end of his next turn. Alignment Unaligned Languages Common, Deep Speech Skills Acrobatics +20, Athletics +18, Insight +18 Str 19 (+11) Dex 23 (+13) Wis 23 (+13) Con 13 (+8) Int 15 (+9) Cha 14 (+9)
Tactics The angels teleport into spaces adjacent to the adventurers whom they targeted with sign of vengeance and then make double attacks each round. Taikus uses trace chance at the earliest opportunity and spends his action point on the first round to use inner spark. He then uses psychic fists when he can catch the greatest number enemies in one shot or reorder chaos to better arrange the battlefield. Taikus enters the extradimensional space when bloodiedand uses the portal to warn the Separatists in Tu’narath.
Features of the Area Illumination: Everburning torches set on the walls fill the entire warehouse with bright light. Ceiling: The ceiling is 30 feet high. Crates: Boxes and crates are arranged in four rows, each 10 feet tall. An adjacent character can make a DC 22 Strength check to knock the stack over. The toppled stack fills all squares in a line up to the next stack. Creatures in the path are entitled to a saving throw to shift into an adjacent square. A failed saving throw results in the character taking 4d6 damage and being knocked prone and restrained (save ends both). Until cleared, the toppled stack counts as difficult terrain. Extradimensional Space: The portal opens onto a small room with a permanent portal contained by a hermetic circle in the corner. The portal is opaque. Characters entering it appear in Tu’narath (page 38).
July 20 09
|
D u n g e o n 16 8
64
A Tyranny of Souls
Kill Squad
When the kill squad appears, read:
Encounter Level 19 (13,600 XP)
You have company. Rounding a corner, flanked by two hulking dragonborn, is a slim githyanki warrior encased in baroque armor and wielding a silver greatsword. Behind you, a hideous githyanki mage missing its lower body hovers above the ground, black lightning crackling from its withered hands. Two more dragonborn stand to the undead mage’s sides.
Setup 1 githyanki blackweaver (B) 1 githyanki dread knight (K) 4 Tiamat-sworn reavers (T) Moving through the portal alerts servants loyal to Zetch’r’r, and the emperor dispatches a kill squad to deal with the intruders. This encounter can occur in the alley where the PCs first appear or later if the PCs move quickly. Githyanki Blackweaver (B)
Level 20 Artillery
Medium natural humanoid (undead) XP 2,800 Initiative +16 Senses Perception +14; darkvision HP 146; Bloodied 73 AC 32; Fortitude 31, Reflex 32, Will 34 Immune disease, poison; Resist 20 necrotic; Vulnerable 10 radiant Saving Throws +2 against charm effects Speed fly 4 (hover) m Corrosive Touch (standard; at-will) F Lightning, Necrotic +25 vs. AC; 2d6 + 5 lightning and necrotic damage, and the target is pushed 1 square. R Black Lightning (standard; at-will) F Lightning, Necrotic Ranged 10; +25 vs. Reflex; 2d6 + 7 lightning damage, and ongoing 5 necrotic damage (save ends). C Consuming Shadows (immediate reaction, when an enemy enters a space adjacent to the blackweaver; encounter) F Necrotic, Teleportation Close burst 1; targets enemies; +23 vs. Fortitude; 1d8 + 7 necrotic damage, and the target is blinded (save ends). Effect: The blackweaver teleports 5 squares. Lich-Queen’s Legacy The githyanki blackweaver’s melee and ranged attacks deal 2d6 extra necrotic damage to targets suffering ongoing necrotic damage. Alignment Evil Languages Common, Deep Speech Skills Arcana +19, History +21 Str 15 (+12) Dex 23 (+16) Wis 19 (+14) Con 20 (+15) Int 18 (+14) Cha 24 (+17) Equipment robes
Githyanki Dread Knight (K)
Level 20 Soldier
Medium natural humanoid XP 2,800 Initiative +18 Senses Perception +12 Final Authority aura 1; enemies in the aura take a −2 penalty to attack rolls on attacks that do not include the githyanki dread knight. HP 190; Bloodied 95 AC 35; Fortitude 33, Reflex 32, Will 31 Saving Throws +2 against charm effects Speed 5 m Silver Greatsword (standard; at-will) F Psychic, Weapon +27 vs. AC; 1d10 + 7 damage plus 1d6 psychic damage, and the target is marked until the end of the dread knight’s next turn. M Severing Strike (immediate interrupt, when an enemy the dread knight has marked shifts or makes an attack that does not include the dread knight; at-will) F Psychic, Weapon +27 vs. AC; 1d10 + 7 damage plus 3d6 psychic damage, and the target is dazed (save ends). R Telekinetic Leap (move; encounter) Ranged 10; the dread knight or an ally within range can fly up to 5 squares. C Forceful Lure (standard; encounter) Close burst 3; targets enemies; +23 vs. Fortitude; the target is pulled 2 squares, and the dread knight makes a melee basic attack against the target. Alignment Evil Languages Common, Deep Speech, Draconic Skills History +20, Insight +17 Str 25 (+17) Dex 22 (+16) Wis 14 (+12) Con 22 (+16) Int 17 (+13) Cha 19 (+14) Equipment plate armor, silver greatsword
4 Tiamat-Sworn Reavers (T) Level 18 Skirmisher
Medium natural humanoid, dragonborn XP 2,000 each Initiative +13 Senses Perception +12 HP 176; Bloodied 88; see also dragonborn fury and springing assault Regeneration 10 (only while bloodied). AC 33; Fortitude 31, Reflex 27, Will 29 Speed 5; see also springing assault m Triple-headed Flail (standard; at-will) F Weapon +23 vs. AC (+24 while bloodied); 1d10 + 5 damage. M Rending Strike (standard; requires triple-headed flail; at-will) F Weapon The Tiamat-sworn reaver attacks up to three targets with its triple-headed flail. If it hits one target, it can push the next target 1 square on a hit, and if it hits two targets, the third takes ongoing 5 damage on a hit (save ends). Dragonborn Fury (while bloodied) The reaver gains a +1 racial bonus to attack rolls. Skirmish +2d6 If, on its turn, the Tiamat-sworn reaver ends its move at least 3 squares away from where it began its turn, its melee attacks deal 2d6 extra damage until the start of its next turn. Springing Assault (free, when the reaver hits with a melee attack during its turn; recharges when first bloodied) The reaver shifts 3 squares. Alignment Evil Languages Common, Draconic Skills History +12, Intimidate +13 Str 21 (+14) Dex 14 (+11) Wis 17 (+12) Con 24 (+16) Int 13 (+10) Cha 14 (+11) Equipment scale armor, heavy shield, triple-headed flail
Tactics The githyanki dread knight leads the attack, springing into action using telekinetic leap to land in the party’s midst. There, he slashes about him using his silver greatsword, focusing his attacks on soft enemies. If an enemy he marks tries to slip away, he delivers a punishing severing strike. If only one character is near him, he resorts to forceful lure to yank them back.
July 20 09
|
D u n g e o n 16 8
65
A Tyranny of Souls
The blackweaver avoids melee combat, blasting characters with black lightning and targeting them again to benefit from Lich-Queen’s legacy. If cornered, the blackweaver uses consuming shadows to make a getaway. The Tiamat-sworn weavers have no particular loyalty to the emperor or the githyanki, and they fight only as long as they have the upper hand. Each reaver targets a different enemy, using rending strike to destroy their enemies. Once they make their attack, they shift and charge, even if it means taking an opportunity attack. These skirmishers maneuver as best as they can in the tight confines, but if they find it too restrictive, they retreat to the street beyond to conclude the battle.
Taking Prisoners If the characters take any prisoners, they might learn useful information. The blackweaver and the dread knight prove unhelpful and volunteer nothing, but the dragonborn can be convinced to talk with a complexity 1 skill challenge (4 successes before 3 failure) involving DC 22 checks with the Bluff, Diplomacy, and Intimidate skills. A victory reveals that the emperor dispatched them. The prisoner knows that Tiamat watches the emperor closely, and many suspect she might remove him altogether if it wasn’t for the scepter of Ephelomon. Zetch’r’r, evidently, fears that the adventurers might connect with the rebels and form an alliance against him. If the characters have no failures from the skill challenge, the prisoner also reveals that the emperor has many more kill squads out in the city, hunting for Separatist leaders. They have had some success and have even captured their leader, “some waif who who has taken Vlaakith’s name. She’s pretty important since the emperor didn’t just kill her outright. In fact, he spirited her away to one of the floating fortresses.”
Features of the Area Illumination: Shadows cast by the buildings reduce the lighting in the alley to dim. Permanent Portal: The PCs emerge into the alley through this portal. The PCs can move through the portal freely provided it remains open, which is only likely if the characters used Taikus’s portal, Refer back to the map on page 63 in case the adventurers retreat here. Rubbish: Boxes, crates, and general filth clutter the alley. Squares containing rubbish count as difficult terrain. Illusory Wall: Spanning the alley’s mouth is an illusory wall. Characters can see through it out to the street beyond, but people on the street can’t see through it into the alley. Thus, the wall blocks line of sight for characters on the street. Street: The combat might spill out onto the street beyond. People clear the area quickly, not wanting to be involved in the fight.
July 20 09
|
D u n g e o n 16 8
66
A Tyranny of Souls
Blue Thunder Encounter Level 19 (13,900 XP)
Setup 7 angels of Tiamat (A) 1 bluespawn godslayer (B) The kill squad’s failure prompts Zetch’r’r to send another band to intercept the adventurers before they meet with the Separatists. They choose a walled square to make their attack. At some point before the PCs find the Morningstar Inn, read: The crowds thin until you are alone in a walled square. Two empty bridges crisscross overhead, and an impressive statue depicting a githyanki warrior riding a red dragon dominates the square’s center. The eerie stillness is broken when a hulking humanoid, some strange cross between giant and blue dragon, enters the square. Joining it are several winged angels whose torsos give way to wispy nothingness.
Tactics The bluespawn godslayer charges into combat, smashing a character with its greatsword. It attacks any dragonborn or devas first, targeting defenders next. On its next turn, it makes another greatsword attack followed by awesome blow with an action point. The godslayer tries to push its enemy onto a spike and then focus on that opponent until it dies. The angels work in teams of three, surrounding their opponents and slashing with their greatswords until their enemy falls. The angels fight until destroyed.
Features of the Area Bridges: Two bridges span the square. The first is 15 feet above the squares and the second is 30 feet above. Spike: Three corners contain bristling spikes. Any creature forcibly moved into a space containing a spike is subject to an attack. c Spike Melee 0; +23 vs. Reflex; 10 damage, and the target is immobilized (save ends). Aftereffect: The target takes 5 damage.
Statue: It takes a DC 22 Athletics check to enter the statue’s space. A character in its space gains cover against all attacks. 7 Angels of Tiamat (A)
Level 21 Minion
Bluespawn Godslayer
Level 22 Elite Brute
Medium immortal humanoid (angel) XP 800 each Initiative +14 Senses Perception +12 HP 1; a missed attack never damages a minion AC 35; Fortitude 35, Reflex 31, Will 30 Immune fear; Resist 10 fire, 10 radiant Speed 6, fly 9 (hover) m Greatsword (standard; at-will) F Fire, Weapon +26 vs. AC; 18 fire damage. Alignment Evil Languages Supernal Str 26 (+18) Dex 18 (+14) Wis 14 (+12) Con 18 (+14) Int 12 (+11) Cha 16 (+13) Equipment chainmail, greatsword
Huge natural humanoid (reptile) XP 8,300 Initiative +15 Senses Perception +17; low-light vision HP 510; Bloodied 255 AC 36; Fortitude 36, Reflex 31, Will 33 Resist 30 lightning, 30 thunder Saving Throws +2 Speed 8 Action Points 1 m Greatsword (standard; at-will) F Lightning, Weapon Reach 3; +26 vs. AC; 4d6 + 9 damage plus 2d8 lightning damage; see also slayer. M Awesome Blow (standard; at-will) F Lightning, Weapon The godslayer makes a greatsword attack. If the attack hits, it makes a secondary attack against the same target. Secondary Attack: +26 vs. Fortitude; the target is pushed 3 squares and knocked prone. M Bite (standard; at-will) F Lightning Reach 2; +24 vs. AC; 1d10 + 7 damage plus 2d8 lightning damage; see also slayer. Slayer The bluespawn godslayer deals +10 damage against dragons, dragonborn, and immortals. Alignment Evil Languages Draconic Str 28 (+20) Dex 19 (+15) Wis 22 (+17) Con 25 (+18) Int 10 (+11) Cha 16 (+14) Equipment heavy shield, greatsword
July 20 09
|
D u n g e o n 16 8
67
A Tyranny of Souls
Assaulting the Fortress
7 Ballista Platforms (B) Hazard
Encounter Level 20 (15,300 XP)
Hazard: Seven ballista platforms arranged around the battlefield fire at enemies. Perception No check is necessary to notice the ballista platforms. Trigger When the PCs move into line of sight to a platform, a platform’s crew rolls initiative and attack on their turn. A ballista requires a standard action to reload. Initiative A ballista platform acts on the initiative of its crew. Attack Standard Action Ranged 30 Target: One creature Attack: +24 vs. Reflex Hit: 4d8 + 7 damage. Countermeasure F A character can attack a crewmember (a githwarrior). If the PCs kill two crewmembers, that ballista can fire only every other round. If the PCs kill all three crewmembers, that platform is effectively disabled, although they could fire the ballista themselves. F A character can attack the ballista (AC 5, Fortitude 10, Reflex 5; hp 60). Destroying the ballista disables the platform.
Setup 7 ballista platforms 26 githwarriors (G) 2 githyanki dragonknights riding pact dragon steeds (P) 1 githyanki terrth (T) As the adventurers near the Fortress of Three Sorrows, the githyanki within mobilize to meet the threat. Five githwarriors accompany the githyanki terrth (fortress commander), and three githwarriors operate each of the seven ballista platforms. When the PCs see the fortress, read: The fortress hovers on the astral horizon, a statue’s decapitated head tilted on its side with a squat tower rising up from where its ear should be. Silver chains tether three smaller towers, each floating on tiny islands. Two red dragons with riders emerge from its maw.
Tactics The first time the githyanki terrth hits an enemy with his silver longsword, he uses instructive slash. On subsequent turns, he follows up his longsword attacks with slaughter the weak. Meanwhile, the pact dragons and their riders attack any lone adventurers, or if there aren’t any, their vehicle.
Level 19 Blaster XP 2,400
A massive crossbow manned by three crewmen, these platforms hurl spear-size bolts at foes.
26 Githwarriors (G)
Level 16 Minion Skirmisher
Medium natural humanoid, githyanki XP 350 each Initiative +13 Senses Perception +10 HP 1; a missed attack never damages a minion. AC 30; Fortitude 30, Reflex 28, Will 26 Saving Throws +2 against charm Speed 6; see also telekinetic stride m Greatsword (standard; at-will) F Weapon +21 vs. AC; 12 damage. R Crossbow (standard; at-will) F Weapon Ranged 15/30; +21 vs. AC; 12 damage. Telekinetic Jump (move; encounter) The githwarrior flies 5 squares. Alignment Evil Languages Common, Deep Speech Str 25 (+15) Dex 20 (+13) Wis 15 (+10) Con 15 (+10) Int 12 (+9) Cha 14 (+10) Equipment scale mail, greatsword, crossbow with 10 bolts
2 Githyanki Dragonknights (P)
Level 17 Soldier
Medium natural humanoid XP 1,600 each Initiative +15 Senses Perception +16 HP 165; Bloodied 82 AC 33; Fortitude 31, Reflex 26, Will 28 Saving Throws +2 against charm effects Speed 5 m Silver Bastard Sword (standard; at-will) F Psychic, Weapon +24 vs. AC; 1d10 + 7 damage plus 1d6 psychic damage, plus 3d6 extra psychic damage against an immobilized target. m Lance (standard; must be mounted; at-will) F Weapon Reach 2; +24 vs. AC; 1d8 + 9 damage (2d8 + 9 damage when charging). M Impaling Charge (standard; encounter) F Weapon Requires lance and mount; the githyanki dragonknight makes a charge attack; reach 2; +25 vs. AC; 3d8 + 7 damage, and the target is immobilized (save ends). Effect: The githyanki dragonknight cannot make lance attacks until the end of the encounter. R Telekinetic Fist (standard; recharge 6) Ranged 5; Medium or small target; +22 vs. Fortitude; 1d6 + 7 damage, and the target slides 2 squares and is immobilized (save ends). R Telekinetic Leap (move; encounter) Ranged 10; the githyanki dragonknight or an ally within range can fly 5 squares. Alignment Evil Languages Common, Deep Speech Skills History +11, Insight +16 Str 25 (+15) Dex 21 (+13) Wis 17 (+11) Con 21 (+13) Int 13 (+9) Cha 18 (+12) Equipment plate armor, heavy shield, lance, silver bastard sword
Features of the Area Driftmetal Chains: Characters can attack the chains (AC 15, Fortitude 12, Reflex 4; hp 200). Destroying a chain sends the satellite tower adrift. The tower moves 4 squares each round, crashing into Tu’narath after 10 rounds. Main Tower: The main tower has a crenellated wall providing cover to creatures standing behind it. A trap door on the center of the roof leads down to room 1. July 20 09
|
D u n g e o n 16 8
68
A Tyranny of Souls
2 Pact Dragons (P)
Level 13 Skirmisher
Large immortal magical beast (dragon, mount) XP 800 each Initiative +13 Senses Perception +15; darkvision HP 134; Bloodied 67; see also bloodied breath AC 27; Fortitude 26, Reflex 25, Will 25 Resist 10 fire, 10 psychic Speed 7, fly 10 (hover), overland flight 14 m Bite (standard; at-will) Reach 2; +18 vs. AC; 2d6 + 7 damage; see also skirmish. M Aggressive Charger (while mounted by a friendly rider of 13th level or higher; at-will) F Mount When charging, the pact dragon makes a bite attack in addition to the rider’s charge attack. C Breath Weapon (standard; recharge 5 6) F Fire Close blast 5; +15 vs. Reflex; 2d12 + 12 fire damage, and ongoing 5 fire damage (save ends). C Bloodied Breath (free, when first bloodied; encounter) F Fire The dragon’s breath weapon recharges and the dragon uses it immediately. Astral Jaunt (minor; recharge 6) F Mount, Teleportation The pact dragon and its rider disappear into the Astral Sea, teleporting 10 squares. Pledged Rider (while mounted by a friendly rider of 13th level or higher; at-will) F Mount Any damage dealt to the pact dragon can be redirected to the rider, and vice versa. Skirmish +2d6 If, on its turn, the pact dragon ends its move at least 4 squares away from its starting point, it deals 2d6 extra damage on all melee attacks it makes until the start of its next turn. Alignment Evil Languages Deep Speech, Draconic, telepathy 20 Skills Endurance +17, Insight +15 Str 24 (+13) Dex 20 (+11) Wis 18 (+10) Con 22 (+12) Int 15 (+8) Cha 16 (+9)
Githyanki Terrth (S)
Level 16 Soldier (Leader)
Medium natural humanoid XP 1,400 Initiative +14 Senses Perception +15 Unwavering Discipline aura 3; any ally within the aura gains a +2 bonus to defenses. HP 154; Bloodied 77 AC 31; Fortitude 30, Reflex 27, Will 27 Saving Throws +2 against charm effects Speed 5 m Silver Longsword (free, after the githyanki terrth hits an enemy with a silver longsword attack; at-will) F Psychic, Weapon +23 vs. AC; 2d8 + 4 damage, and the target is dazed until the end of the githyanki terrth’s next turn. M Slaughter the Weak (standard; at-will) One ally adjacent to the githyanki terrth makes a melee basic attack against the same enemy. If the enemy is dazed or stunned, the attack deals 2d8 extra psychic damage.
M Instructive Slash (standard; encounter) F Psychic, Weapon Targets a dazed creature; +23 vs. AC; 1d8 + 7 damage plus 2d8 psychic damage. R Heavy Crossbow (standard; recharges when the githyanki spends a minor action to reload the weapon) F Weapon Ranged 15/30; +21 vs. AC; 2d6 + 5 damage. R Telekinetic Leap (move; encounter) Ranged 5; targets the githyanki terrth or one ally; the target can fly up to 5 squares. C Telekinetic Command (move; encounter) Close burst 5; one ally in the burst slides up to 5 squares. Alignment Evil Languages Common, Deep Speech Skills History +12, Insight +15 Str 24 (+15) Dex 19 (+12) Wis 14 (+10) Con 18 (+12) Int 14 (+10) Cha 16 (+11) Equipment plate armor, heavy shield, silver longsword, heavy crossbow, 20 bolt
July 20 09
|
D u n g e o n 16 8
69
A Tyranny of Souls
Desperate Defenders Encounter Level 20 (14,350 XP)
Setup 2 gish’sarath (S) 8 githwarriors (G) 1 githyanki kith’rak (K) 1 redspawn immolator (R) While the battle rages outside, the githyanki scramble to defend the fortress to ensure Vlaakith doesn’t escape. The kith’rak (captain) and support troops are the first line of defense inside the fortress, with reinforcements coming on the round following. When the PCs can see into the central room, read: A shuddering red-scaled beast crowned with fire growls at you while a githyanki dressed in black-enameled plate and wielding a fullblade shouts orders to attack. Two githyanki underlings in scale armor ready themselves for battle. The ladder drops from the roof trapdoor and ends at a 30-foot diameter chamber with an iron door set in the wall to either side. A spiral staircase burrows deeper into the tower.
2 Gish’sarath (S)
Level 16 Elite Skirmisher
Medium natural humanoid, githyanki XP 2,800 each Initiative +12 Senses Perception +15 HP 306; Bloodied 153 AC 30; Fortitude 27, Reflex 28, Will 29 Saving Throws +2 (+4 against charm effects) Speed 5; see also astral stride Action Points 1 m Silver Longsword (standard; at-will) F Psychic, Weapon +21 vs. AC; 1d8 + 6 plus 1d8 psychic damage. M Double Attack (standard; at-will) F Psychic, Weapon The gish’sarath makes two silver longsword attacks. R Force Bolt (standard; at-will) F Force Ranged 10; +19 vs. Reflex; 3d6 + 4 force damage. R Storm of Stars (standard; encounter) F Fire The gish’sarath makes four attacks, no more than two of these against a single target; ranged 5; +21 vs. AC; 2d8 + 5 fire damage. Astral Stride (move; encounter) F Teleportation The gish’sarath teleports 6 squares and gains the insubstantial and phasing qualities until the start of its next turn. Alignment Evil Languages Common, Deep Speech, Draconic Skills Arcana +17, History +14, Insight +15 Str 16 (+11) Dex 14 (+10) Wis 14 (+10) Con 17 (+11) Int 19 (+12) Cha 17 (+11) Equipment chainmail, silver longsword
8 Githwarriors (G)
Level 16 Minion Skirmisher
Githyanki Kith’rak (K)
Level 20 Soldier (Leader)
Medium natural humanoid XP 2,800 Initiative +18 Senses Perception +18 HP 190; Bloodied 95 AC 36; Fortitude 34, Reflex 32, Will 31 Saving Throws +2 against charm effects Speed 5 m Silver Fullblade (standard; at-will) F Psychic, Weapon +27 vs. AC; 1d12 + 6 damage plus 1d8 psychic (crit 2d12 + 18 + 8 psychic), and the next time the target takes damage before the start of the kith’rak’s next turn, it takes 1d8 extra psychic damage. R Telekinetic Leap (move; encounter) Ranged 10; the githyanki kith’rak or an ally within range can fly up to 5 squares. R Telekinetic Snare (standard; encounter) Ranged 5; +25 vs. Fortitude; the target slides 2 squares and is immobilized (save ends). C Devastating Arc (standard; recharge 6) F Psychic, Weapon Close burst 1; the githyanki kith’rak makes a silver fullblade attack against each enemy in the burst. C Emperor’s Voice (standard; encounter) F Healing Close burst 5; each ally in burst regains 20 hit points. Alignment Evil Languages Common, Deep Speech, Draconic Skills History +14, Insight +18 Str 26 (+18) Dex 23 (+16) Wis 16 (+13) Con 22 (+16) Int 15 (+12) Cha 18 (+14) Equipment plate armor, silver fullblade, keys to all the cells on this level and the level below
Medium natural humanoid, githyanki XP 350 each Initiative +13 Senses Perception +10 HP 1; a missed attack never damages a minion. AC 30; Fortitude 30, Reflex 28, Will 26 Saving Throws +2 against charm Speed 6; see also telekinetic stride m Greatsword (standard; at-will) F Weapon +21 vs. AC; 12 damage. R Crossbow (standard; at-will) F Weapon Ranged 15/30; +21 vs. AC; 12 damage. Telekinetic Jump (move; encounter) The githwarrior flies 5 squares. Alignment Evil Languages Common, Deep Speech Str 25 (+15) Dex 20 (+13) Wis 15 (+10) Con 15 (+10) Int 12 (+9) Cha 14 (+10) Equipment scale mail, greatsword, crossbow with 10 bolts
July 20 09
|
D u n g e o n 16 8
70
A Tyranny of Souls
Redspawn Immolator (R)
Level 20 Brute
Large natural beast (reptile) XP 2,800 Initiative +16 Senses Perception +11; darkvision Inner Flame (Fire) aura 3; any ally within the aura gains resist 10 fire. While the immolator is bloodied, each enemy that ends its turn in the aura takes 10 fire damage. HP 234; Bloodied 117; see also inner flame and redspawn frenzy AC 32; Fortitude 34, Reflex 32, Will 29 Resist 20 fire Speed 6 m Bite (standard; at-will) F Fire Reach 2; +23 vs. AC; 2d6 + 8 damage, and ongoing 5 fire damage (save ends). M Claws (standard; at-will) Reach 2; +23 vs. AC; 2d10 + 6 damage. C Fiery Expulsion (when first bloodied; encounter) F Fire Close blast 3; +21 vs. Reflex; 1d12 + 7 fire damage, and ongoing 5 fire damage (save ends). Redspawn Frenzy (while at 58 or fewer hit points) The redspawn immolator’s melee attacks deal 2d6 extra damage, and the immolator treats allies as enemies for the purposes of opportunity attacks and makes all opportunity attacks provoked from it. Alignment Evil Languages Draconic Str 27 (+18) Dex 22 (+16) Wis 12 (+11) Con 24 (+17) Int 8 (+9) Cha 17 (+13)
Tactics The githyanki’s tactics depend on whether the adventurers descend into the central room. If they linger at the top, the githwarriors use their crossbows and the gish’sarath uses force bolt. The redspawn immolator climbs the ladder, sped up by the kith’rak, who uses telekinetic leap to place the monster near the top. The githyanki focus fire on the first character to come down the ladder, and then engage in melee combat when more characters join their companion. The dragonspawn makes a charge attack against the closest enemy and then uses its claws, fighting until destroyed.
The kith’rak uses telekinetic snare to move an enemy closer to the redspawn immolator and uses his silver fullblade to dispatch the character. The kith’rak reserves devastating arc for when it faces three or more enemies at once, and uses emperor’s voice when the dragonspawn’s redspawn fury activates. The gish’sarath supports the githwarriors using force bolt and storm of stars, only reverting to melee attacks when he exhausts his ranged attacks. Reinforcements in the hall outside the main chamber arrive at the start of the second round, while those in the barracks join the fight at the start of the fourth round.
Features of the Area Ceiling: The ceiling is 30 feet high. Iron Ladder: The ladder descends from the hatch to the bottom of the room. Climbing the ladder requires a DC 0 Athletics check. Doors: Iron bars can be dropped over the doors to prevent reinforcements from arriving (DC 27 Strength check). The bars themselves count as unattended objects weighing less than 20 pounds. Cells: Prison cells make up a third of this floor. Each door is locked (DC 22 Thievery or DC 27 Strength to open). The cells contain a mix of political prisoners or nothing (as you decide). None of these prisoners are useful for this foray (treat as minions; all defenses 22), but they might prove helpful later. Barracks: Opposite the cells are the barracks. This big room features many bunk beds, a few tables surrounded by chairs, and a kitchen. Treasure: Characters searching the barracks find treasure parcel 8 amid mundane clothing and personal effects.
July 20 09
|
D u n g e o n 16 8
71
A Tyranny of Souls
Jail Break Encounter Level 21 (16,000 XP)
Setup 1 angel of Tiamat’s Vengeance (A) 1 aspect of Dispater (D) 2 barbed devil veterans (B) The aspect of Dispater interrogates the prisoner while his attendants watch. When the PCs can see Vlaakith, read: Suspended within a column of fire is a young githyanki woman. Her body doesn’t move, but her eyes flick toward you. To the side, and turning your direction, is a towering angel whose astral essence crackles with lightning, flares with flames, and drips poison. Opposite the guardian stands a slim, horned humanoid dressed in scarlet robes and gripping a gnarled staff in his hands. Just inside the doorway, two menacing humanoids covered in gleaming barbs fix you with fiery eyes.
Aspect of Dispater (D)
Level 20 Elite Controller (Leader)
Medium immortal humanoid (devil) XP 5,600 Initiative +14 Senses Perception +15; darkvision HP 382; Bloodied 191 AC 37; Fortitude 33, Reflex 35, Will 34 Resist 20 fire Saving Throws +2 Speed 6, teleport 10 Action Points 1 m Smiting Rod (standard; at-will) F Weapon +25 vs. AC; 2d8 + 6 damage, and the target is pushed 2 squares and dazed until the end of the aspect of Dispater’s next turn. M Lesser Blasphemous Reply (immediate reaction, when hit by a melee attack; recharges when first bloodied) F Thunder Targets the attacker; +24 vs. Will; 3d8 + 7 thunder damage, and the target is pushed 1 square. R Lesser Inveigle (standard; recharge 5 6) F Charm, Psychic Ranged 10; +24 vs. Will; 2d6 + 7 psychic damage, and the target slides 2 squares and is dominated until the end of the aspect of Dispater’s next turn. A Lesser Gate of Dis (minor; recharge 5 6) F Conjuration, Fire Area wall 5 within 20 squares. The aspect of Dispater conjures a lattice of scalding iron that lasts until the start of his next turn. The wall blocks movement and line of effect, but it does not block line of sight. Creatures that end their turn adjacent to the wall or are pulled, pushed, or slid adjacent to the wall take 10 fire damage. The wall is 4 squares high and cannot be destroyed. Lesser Diabolic Awe (free 1/round, when an enemy within 5 squares becomes bloodied or takes a critical hit; at-will) F Fear, Healing The enemy is pushed 3 squares away from the aspect of Dispater and is dazed until the end of the aspect’s next turn. Creatures with the devil keyword within 5 squares of the aspect of Dispater regain 10 hit points. Alignment Evil Languages Supernal Skills Arcana +23, Bluff +22, History +23, Insight +20, Religion +23 Str 18 (+14) Dex 19 (+14) Wis 20 (+15) Con 23 (+16) Int 26 (+18) Cha 25 (+17) Equipment scarlet robe, smiting rod
Angel of Tiamat’s Vengeance (A)
Level 19 Elite Brute
Large immortal humanoid (angel) XP 4,800 Initiative +13 Senses Perception +16 HP 446; Bloodied 223 AC 34; Fortitude 33, Reflex 29, Will 33; see also chromatic cloak Immune disease, fear; Resist 15 radiant, 15 variable (3/ encounter, acid, cold, fire, lightning, or poison only; see “Resist,” Monster Manual, page 282); see also coldfire pillar Saving Throws +2 Speed 8, fly 12 (hover); see also sign of vengeance Action Points 1 m Longsword (standard; at-will) F Acid, Cold, Fire, Lightning, Poison, Weapon Reach 2; +25 vs. AC; 1d10 + 9 damage plus 1d8 acid, cold, fire, lightning, or poison damage plus 1d8 acid, cold, fire, lightning, or poison damage. M Double Attack (standard; at-will) The angel of vengeance makes two longsword attacks. R Sign of Vengeance (minor; encounter) F Teleportation Ranged sight; the angel of vengeance places an invisible sign upon the target. Until the end of the encounter, as a move action, the angel can teleport adjacent to the target. C Chromatic Pillar (when first bloodied; encounter) F Acid, Cold, Fire Lightning, Poison, Polymorph The angel transforms into a 30-foot-high pillar of draconic energies. Close burst 2; +23 vs. Reflex; 1d8 + 9 acid, cold, fire, lightning, or poison damage plus 1d8 + 9 acid, cold, fire, lightning, or poison damage. The angel of Tiamat’s vengeance is immune to all damage until the start of its next turn. Chromatic Cloak (until bloodied) F Acid, Cold, Fire, Lightning, Poison Attacks against the angel of vengeance take a −2 penalty until the angel is bloodied. While cloak of vengeance is in effect, a creature that makes a successful melee attack against the angel takes 1d8 acid or cold damage and 1d8 fire, lightning, or poison damage. Alignment Evil Languages Supernal Skills Insight +21, Intimidate +22 Str 27 (+17) Dex 18 (+13) Wis 25 (+16) Con 23 (+15) Int 19 (+13) Cha 26 (+17) Equipment plate armor, 2 longswords
July 20 09
|
D u n g e o n 16 8
72
A Tyranny of Souls
2 Barbed Devil Veterans (B)
Level 20 Soldier
Large immortal humanoid (devil) XP 2,800 each Initiative +18 Senses Perception +13; darkvision Grasping Barbs aura 1; an enemy that enters or leaves the aura takes 5 damage and is marked until the end of its next turn. HP 191; Bloodied 95 AC 37; Fortitude 33, Reflex 31, Will 31 Resist 20 fire Speed 7, teleport 7 m Claw (standard; at-will) +27 vs. AC; 1d8 + 8 damage, and the target is pushed 1 square. M Double Attack (standard; at-will) The barbed devil veteran makes two claw attacks. If both attacks hit the same target, the barbed devil veteran tries to impale the target on its barbs as a secondary attack. Secondary Attack: +24 vs. Reflex; 5 damage. R Hurl Flame (standard; recharge 5 6) F Fire Ranged 5; +22 vs. Reflex; 1d10 + 8 fire damage, and the target takes ongoing 5 fire damage and is dazed (save ends both). Alignment Evil Languages Supernal Skills Athletics +23, Intimidate +21 Str 27 (+18) Dex 22 (+16) Wis 16 (+13) Con 23 (+16) Int 13 (+11) Cha 22 (+16)
Tactics The angel uses sign of vengeance and then closes on the lead enemy, using double attack each round until bloodied, at which point it transforms into a chromatic pillar. The aspect uses lesser inveigle to draw a character into the room and then spends an action point to raise his lesser gate of Dis. The aspect focuses on the unlucky character with its smiting rod, while waiting for his powers to recharge. The barbed devils back away from the entrance to pull the adventurers into the room. They use hurl flame on the first round, and then use double attack against those PCs who enter.
Dispater tries to f lee if reduced to 95 or fewer hit points, surrendering only if he’s the last one in the room. When the PCs first bloody the aspect, it shouts, “Release her and you will bring about the doom of all things!”
Features of the Area Doors: All doors here are locked. The kith’rak in “Desperate Defenders” (page 70) has the keys. Otherwise, opening a locked door requires a DC 25 Strength or Thievery check. Treasure: A character searching the armory who succeeds on a DC 22 Perception check locates treasure parcels 2 and 3. A character searching the storerooms who succeeds on a DC 22 Perception check discovers treasure parcel 6 spread across both rooms. Fighting Ring: The fighting ring a roped-off platform standing two feet high. Getting into the fighting ring costs an extra square of movement unless a DC 14 Acrobatics check is made. Training Dummies: Three dummies equipped with sharp blades stand at the ready to engage wouldbe trainees. The dummy makes an attack against any creature that enters a square adjacent to it unless the triggering creature succeeds on a DC 14 Acrobatics check. m Training Dummy Slash Melee 1; +26 vs. AC; 10 damage, and the target is pushed 1 square.
C Energy Field Pulse F Fire Close burst 1; all creatures in burst; +25 vs. Reflex; 2d8 + 7 fire damage, and the target takes ongoing 10 fire damage (save ends).
Hermetic Circle: The circle creates a dangerous field that extends from floor to ceiling. Creatures inside the field are immune to all damage, and the field blocks line of effect. An adjacent character can dismantle the field by engaging in a complexity 1 skill challenge (4 successes before 3 failures) involving Arcana and Thievery checks against DC 22. A failed check or touching the field triggers an attack. July 20 09
|
D u n g e o n 16 8
73
A Tyranny of Souls
Into the Maw Encounter Level 18 (10,400 XP)
Setup 2 githyanki dragonknights (D) 2 pack dragons (P) 16 githwarriors (G) The adventurers automatically gain surprise if they catch the githyanki while still in the hangar. When the PCs first approach this area, read: The stairs end in a large hangar. Two wide alcoves hold red dragons, and attending them are githyanki warriors in plate armor. More githyanki work on the astral skiffs or sort through supplies.
2 Githyanki Dragonknights (P)
Level 17 Soldier
Medium natural humanoid XP 1,600 each Initiative +15 Senses Perception +16 HP 165; Bloodied 82 AC 33; Fortitude 31, Reflex 26, Will 28 Saving Throws +2 against charm effects Speed 5 m Silver Bastard Sword (standard; at-will) F Psychic, Weapon +24 vs. AC; 1d10 + 7 damage plus 1d6 psychic damage, plus 3d6 extra psychic damage against an immobilized target. m Lance (standard; must be mounted; at-will) F Weapon Reach 2; +24 vs. AC; 1d8 + 9 damage (2d8 + 9 damage when charging). M Impaling Charge (standard; encounter) F Weapon Requires lance and mount; the githyanki dragonknight makes a charge attack; reach 2; +25 vs. AC; 3d8 + 7 damage, and the target is immobilized (save ends). Effect: The githyanki dragonknight cannot make lance attacks until the end of the encounter. R Telekinetic Fist (standard; recharge 6) Ranged 5; Medium or small target; +22 vs. Fortitude; 1d6 + 7 damage, and the target slides 2 squares and is immobilized (save ends). R Telekinetic Leap (move; encounter) Ranged 10; the githyanki dragonknight or an ally within range can fly 5 squares. Alignment Evil Languages Common, Deep Speech Skills History +11, Insight +16 Str 25 (+15) Dex 21 (+13) Wis 17 (+11) Con 21 (+13) Int 13 (+9) Cha 18 (+12) Equipment plate armor, heavy shield, lance, silver bastard sword
2 Pact Dragons (P)
Level 13 Skirmisher
Large immortal magical beast (dragon, mount) XP 800 each Initiative +13 Senses Perception +15; darkvision HP 134; Bloodied 67; see also bloodied breath AC 27; Fortitude 26, Reflex 25, Will 25 Resist 10 fire, 10 psychic Speed 7, fly 10 (hover), overland flight 14 m Bite (standard; at-will) Reach 2; +18 vs. AC; 2d6 + 7 damage; see also skirmish. M Aggressive Charger (while mounted by a friendly rider of 13th level or higher; at-will) F Mount When charging, the pact dragon makes a bite attack in addition to the rider’s charge attack. C Breath Weapon (standard; recharge 5 6) F Fire Close blast 5; +15 vs. Reflex; 2d12 + 12 fire damage, and ongoing 5 fire damage (save ends). C Bloodied Breath (free, when first bloodied; encounter) F Fire The dragon’s breath weapon recharges and the dragon uses it immediately. Astral Jaunt (minor; recharge 6) F Mount, Teleportation The pact dragon and its rider disappear into the Astral Sea, teleporting 10 squares. Pledged Rider (while mounted by a friendly rider of 13th level or higher; at-will) F Mount Any damage dealt to the pact dragon can be redirected to the rider, and vice versa. Skirmish +2d6 If, on its turn, the pact dragon ends its move at least 4 squares away from its starting point, it deals 2d6 extra damage on all melee attacks it makes until the start of its next turn. Alignment Evil Languages Deep Speech, Draconic, telepathy 20 Skills Endurance +17, Insight +15 Str 24 (+13) Dex 20 (+11) Wis 18 (+10) Con 22 (+12) Int 15 (+8) Cha 16 (+9)
July 20 09
|
D u n g e o n 16 8
74
A Tyranny of Souls
16 Githwarriors (G)
Level 16 Minion Skirmisher
Medium natural humanoid, githyanki XP 350 each Initiative +13 Senses Perception +10 HP 1; a missed attack never damages a minion. AC 30; Fortitude 30, Reflex 28, Will 26 Saving Throws +2 against charm Speed 6; see also telekinetic stride m Greatsword (standard; at-will) F Weapon +21 vs. AC; 12 damage. R Crossbow (standard; at-will) F Weapon Ranged 15/30; +21 vs. AC; 12 damage. Telekinetic Jump (move; encounter) The githwarrior flies 5 squares. Alignment Evil Languages Common, Deep Speech Str 25 (+15) Dex 20 (+13) Wis 15 (+10) Con 15 (+10) Int 12 (+9) Cha 14 (+10) Equipment scale mail, greatsword, crossbow with 10 bolts
Tactics When the githyanki are no longer surprised, the dragonknights mount their dragons and attack the PCs, even though they have little room to maneuver. Using Deep Speech, one dragonknight orders a crew onto an astral interceptor to get help. Four githwarriors converge on the vessel to take off and get help, ramming PCs if necessary.
Development The heroes must stop the fleeing astral interceptor before it escapes and brings reinforcements. This could be a thrilling chase over Tu’narath or a vicious battle in the Astral Sea. If the ship gets away, use creatures presented in this adventure to build a level 22 encounter. These reinforcements arrive 5 minutes after the ship escapes.
Features of the Area Astral Interceptor: Two astral vessels stand at the ready. They have enclosed hulls, so creatures inside cannot be targeted by attacks. See page 46 for statistics. Supplies: Squares containing these items count as difficult terrain, and a creature knocked prone here takes 5 damage from the jagged bits and pointy things.
July 20 09
|
D u n g e o n 16 8
75
A Tyranny of Souls
A Turning Point Encounter Level 21 (16,000 XP)
Setup The moment for which the adventures have long fought is at hand. Vlaakith and her lieutenants are open to discussion about withdrawing the githyanki from the war and might be convinced to give their aid in the ongoing struggle. A Turning Point Skill Challenge
Level 21 XP 16,000
The room hums as the gathered assembly awaits your words. In their cold faces, you see everything from blank stares, to suspicion, to open hatred. Vlaakith stands and the room quiets. “These visitors have come a long way and have endured many hardships. Let us hear their words to seek an accord between our peoples.” Although the githyanki want nothing to do with Tiamat’s war, they are not allies yet. To get the githyanki to withdraw fully from the war, the characters must make a bargain all can live with. Complexity 5 (12 successes before 3 failures). Primary Skills Diplomacy, History, Insight, Intimidate, Religion, Streetwise. Other Skills Bluff. Victory Vlaakith agrees to withdraw the githyanki from the war provided the characters successfully defeat Zetch’r’r. Vlaakith also grants the PCs’ world a reprieve from githyanki attacks for a thousand years (though this applies only to those githyanki under Vlaakith’s command; she doesn’t mention this). Finally, if the characters acquire no failures in the course of the skill challenge, Vlaakith agrees to a short-term alliance between her people and those of the adventurers. Such an alliance proves beneficial to the PCs in a future Scales of War adventure. Defeat Vlaakith agrees to withdraw the githyanki from the war but only with the following conditions. The adventurers must kill Zetch’r’r, and they must find and destroy the remains of Vlaakith CLVII.
Special If Mayhem is present for the negotiations, he can speak on the characters behalf, assuming the characters have performed and treated him well. At any point during the negotiation, the PCs can convert one failed check into a successful check. If the PCs rescued Vlaakith and freed her without question, the characters gain a +2 bonus to all Diplomacy checks. This bonus increases to +4 if the PCs saved her after dealing with the Emperor. Bluff (DC 27) The PCs make promises or offers they cannot actually follow through on or have no intention to uphold. Characters can cooperate to aid a lead character using this skill. Diplomacy 1 (DC 22; 2 successes) The PCs describe their predicament, what they know of Tiamat’s intent, and what will result if she is victorious. Characters can cooperate to aid a lead character using this skill. Achieving 2 successes opens up Diplomacy 2. Diplomacy 2 (DC 22; 2 successes maximum; requires Diplomacy 1 to unlock) The PCs explain that through their alliance with Tiamat, the githyanki have become embroiled in a divine war not of their making and they are taking a hand in the fate of the gods. Achieving 2 successes opens up Diplomacy 3. Diplomacy 3 (DC 27; 2 successes maximum; requires Diplomacy 2 or Streetwise to unlock) The PCs announce that Tiamat has violated the ancient pact and thus the githyanki are no longer bound by its terms. One githyanki asks that if this is true, where is Gith? Characters can cooperate to aid a lead character using this skill. The first success here opens up Insight. The second success opens up Diplomacy 4. Diplomacy 4 (DC 22; 4 successes maximum; requires Diplomacy 3 to unlock) The PCs ask for an alliance. Characters can cooperate to aid a lead character using this skill. On the first success, Vlaakith says that even if they agreed, their alliance would be worthless while Zetch’r’r is still in power. This opens up Diplomacy 5. On a failed check, the characters cannot make this check again until they succeed on another check related to the skill challenge. Diplomacy 5 The PCs volunteer to destroy Zetch’r’r and end his reign. Characters can cooperate to aid a lead character using this skill.
History (DC 14; 1 success maximum; requires Diplomacy 4 to unlock) A character recalls the terms of the ancient pact, remembering that Gith demanded the githyanki be free to rule their own destiny. DC 27 (1 success, 2 maximum) Insight (DC 22; 1 success maximum; requires Diplomacy 3 to unlock) The PCs notice Vlaakith flinches when they mention the pact has been violated. Characters can cooperate to aid a lead character using this skill. A success here also opens up Intimidate. Intimidate (DC 27) The PCs paint a pretty bleak picture about what is in store for the githyanki if they don’t withdraw from the war, suggesting that they will be destroyed if they lose or become subservient to Tiamat if they win. Characters can cooperate to aid a lead character using this skill. Religion 1 (DC 22 (1 success maximum)) A character describes Tiamat’s notoriety and her long history of betrayals by citing key moments where she has acted in the world. This bleak portrait calls into question the strength of the githyanki alliance with the Dark Lady. Success opens up Religion 2. Religion 2 (DC 22; 1 success maximum; requires Religion 1 or Streetwise to unlock) A PC reminds the githyanki that no god has ever ruled the githyanki peoples. Streetwise (DC 14; 2 successes maximum) A character cites an example of how Tiamat actually controls the city, and also how Zetch’r’r serves Tiamat directly. The first success also opens up the Religion 2 check. The second success opens up Diplomacy 3.
Failure A defeat on this skill challenge doesn’t mean the adventure is over; it results in an even greater challenge and no guarantees that the githyanki won’t become a problem at some future point.
July 20 09
|
D u n g e o n 16 8
76
A Tyranny of Souls
Stillness Broken Encounter Level 19 (12,400 XP)
Setup 3 slaughter wights (S) 1 tormenting ghost (T) 2 wrath spirits (W) The undead hunger for souls and attack when the characters draw near. When the PCs are about halfway to the Chromatic Bastion, read: The path travels through a damaged area, with a yawning fissure to one side and crumbling tombs and rubble to the other. Black fire gutters up in columns on either side of the road.
3 Slaughter Wights
Level 18 Brute
Medium natural humanoid (undead) XP 2,000 each Initiative +14 Senses Perception +13; darkvision HP 182; Bloodied 91; see also death wail AC 30; Fortitude 30, Reflex 27, Will 26 Immune disease, poison; Resist 20 necrotic; Vulnerable 10 radiant Speed 7 m Claw (standard; at-will) F Healing, Necrotic +21 vs. AC; 3d6 + 8 necrotic damage, the target loses a healing surge and is weakened (save ends), and the slaughter wight regains 15 hit points. C Death Wail (when reduced to 0 hit points) F Necrotic Close burst 5; targets enemies; +21 vs. Fortitude; 2d6 + 4 necrotic damage. Undead allies in the burst can make a basic attack as a free action. Alignment Chaotic evil Languages Common Str 26 (+17) Dex 20 (+14) Wis 9 (+8) Con 22 (+15) Int 12 (+10) Cha 18 (+13)
Tormenting Ghost (T)
Level 21 Controller
Medium shadow humanoid (undead) XP 3,200 Initiative +19 Senses Perception +17; darkvision HP 152; Bloodied 76 AC 32; Fortitude 30, Reflex 34, Will 32 Immune disease, poison; Resist insubstantial Speed fly 6 (hover); phasing m Spirit Touch (standard; at-will) F Necrotic +24 vs. Reflex; 2d8 + 9 necrotic damage. M Ghostly Possession (standard; recharge 5 6) F Charm Target must be a living humanoid; +24 vs. Will; the tormenting ghost enters the target’s space and is removed from play, and the target is dominated (save ends). The tormenting ghost can use the power against only one creature at a time. When the target is no longer dominated, or when the tormenting ghost chooses to end its ghostly possession (a free action), the ghost reappears in a square adjacent to the target. C Burst of Terror (standard; recharge 5 6) F Fear, Necrotic Close burst 5; targets enemies; +24 vs. Will; 1d8 + 9 necrotic damage, the target is pushed 5 squares; and the target is dazed and immobilized (save ends both). A Ghostly Terrain (standard; at-will) F Zone Area burst 1 within 10; the area is suddenly filled with ghostly lights, wisps of necrotic mist, and the faint whispers of the dead. The zone is difficult terrain and lightly obscured. Any creature that enters or ends its turn in the zone is immobilized (save ends). The zone lasts until the end of the encounter of for 5 minutes. Spectral Shift (immediate reaction, when missed by a melee attack; at-will) The tormenting ghost shifts 3 squares. Alignment Evil Languages Common Skills Stealth +24 Str 11 (+10) Dex 28 (+19) Wis 14 (+12) Con 20 (+15) Int 12 (+11) Cha 25 (+17)
July 20 09
|
D u n g e o n 16 8
77
A Tyranny of Souls
2 Wrath Spirits (W)
Features of the Area
Level 17 Soldier
Medium shadow humanoid (undead) XP 1,600 each Initiative +11 Senses Perception +12; darkvision HP 111; Bloodied 55 AC 33; Fortitude 27, Reflex 29, Will 30 Immune disease, poison; Resist insubstantial Speed fly 6 (hover); phasing m Keening Sword (standard; at-will) F Psychic +24 vs. AC; 2d8 + 7 psychic damage, and the target is marked until the end of the wrath spirit’s next turn. A Exploding Head (standard; recharge 5 6) F Fear, Necrotic The wrath spirit materializes a flame semblance of its missing head and hurls it: area burst 2 within 10; +21 vs. Fortitude; 3d10 + 7 necrotic damage, and the target is immobilized and marked (save ends both). Miss: Half damage, and the target is marked but not immobilized. Burning Challenge (immediate reaction, when an enemy marked by the wrath spirit makes an attack that does not include the wrath spirit; at-will) F Psychic The triggering enemy takes ongoing 10 psychic damage and is dazed (save ends both). Alignment Evil Languages Common Str 16 (+11) Dex 17 (+11) Wis 18 (+12) Con 15 (+10) Int 22 (+14) Cha 24 (+15)
Rubble: Squares containing rubble count as difficult terrain. Chasms: The small chasm is about 30 feet deep (dealing 3d10 damage to those who fall in), while the larger one is about 90 feet deep (9d10 damage). Climbing out of a chasm requires DC 14 Athletics checks. Sealed Vaults: A vault grants cover and has AC 5, Fortitude 10, Reflex 5; hp 40. Mausoleums: A locked door (DC 27 Thievery or DC 32 Strength) bars access. Each tomb holds a stone sarcophagus and he rotting remains within it. The tormenting ghost and wrath spirits use phasing to move through the mausoleums’ walls unimpeded. Pillars of Necrotic Flame: Black fire gutters from wounds in the dead god. Necrotic attacks made from spaces adjacent to either pillar gain a +10 bonus to damage rolls. Creatures entering or starting their turns in a space containing the necrotic flame take 10 fire and necrotic damage. Treasure: One shattered mausoleum contains parcel 1.
Tactics The slaughter wights shriek to alert their allies in the tombs, charge, and then make a fighting retreat to the pillars of necrotic flame to boost their attacks. The wrath spirits fly around behind the PCs to herd them forward, while the tormenting ghost finds a melee striker and attacks using burst of terror.
July 20 09
|
D u n g e o n 16 8
78
A Tyranny of Souls
Evil’s Backbone Encounter Level 21 (18,000 XP)
Setup Spine of Vlaakith (V) 2 sword wraith attendants (S) When Zetch’r’r came to power, the githyanki believed the Lich-Queen was well and truly dead. However, the new emperor discovered that a piece of her remained: her spine. Through dread magic, Zetch’r’r bound her spirit to the spine and extracted oaths of service from it, transforming the dead Lich-Queen into a form of demilich. As long as Zetch’r’r lives, Vlaakith would serve. When the PCs enter the room, read: A blackened spine hovers before an iron door across the room. Pale blue light from the flickering torches glint off six bright amethysts set into each bone ring. The spine casts a queer shadow on the white tile floor, suggesting that of a tall, thin female humanoid.
Spine of Vlaakith (V)
Level 20 Solo Artillery
Tiny natural animate (undead) XP 14,000 Initiative +13 Senses Perception +18; darkvision Intruding Terror (Fear) aura 2; enemies within the aura take a −2 penalty to attack rolls. HP 600; Bloodied 300; see also consume soul and indestructible Regeneration 20 (if the spine of Vlaakith takes radiant damage, regeneration doesn’t function until the end of its next turn) AC 32; Fortitude 32, Reflex 28, Will 33 Immune disease, poison, sleep; Resist 10 necrotic, 10 psychic Saving Throws +5 Speed fly 12 (hover) Action Points 2 r Shadow Ray (standard; at-will) F Necrotic Ranged 20; +27 vs. AC; 3d6 + 8 necrotic damage. r Immobilizing Ray (standard; at-will) F Necrotic Ranged 20; +25 vs. Fortitude; 1d6 + 8 necrotic damage, and the target is immobilized (save ends). R Drain Soul (standard; at-will) Ranged 5; does not provoke opportunity attacks; +25 vs. Fortitude; the target is dazed and restrained (save ends both). First Failed Saving Throw: The target is instead stunned and restrained (save ends both). Second Failed Saving Throw: The target dies, and its soul is trapped in one of the spine’s soul gems until the spine is destroyed; see also consume soul and “Fate of Drained Souls” sidebar. R Wither (minor; at-will) F Necrotic Ranged 20; +25 vs. Fortitude; the target takes ongoing 10 necrotic damage (save ends).
R Twin Rays (standard; at-will) F Necrotic The spine of Vlaakith makes a shadow ray attack and a immobilizing ray attack. C Soul Shriveling Pulse (immediate reaction, when a creature fails a saving throw against drain soul; at-will) F Fear, Necrotic Close burst 5; +25 vs. Fortitude; 3d6 + 5 necrotic damage, and the target takes a −2 penalty to saving throws (save ends). Consume Soul (minor; expends a trapped soul; recharge ⚅) F Healing The spine of Vlaakith regains 200 hit points. Soul Gems The spine of Vlaakith’s six soul gems can each hold the soul of one if its victims. At the beginning of an encounter, the soul gems contain two souls. Crushing a gem after the spine is defeated releases the soul back to the Shadowfell. Indestructible When the spine of Vlaakith is reduced to 0 hit points or fewer, its spine (but not the soul gems) crumbles into dust, but it is not destroyed. It reappears 1d10 days later within 1 square of its phylactery (in room 15), unless the phylactery is also found and destroyed. Alignment Chaotic evil Languages Common, Supernal Skills Arcana +17, Insight +18, Intimidate +23, Religion +18 Str 16 (+13) Dex 16 (+13) Wis 17 (+13) Con 24 (+17) Int 15 (+12) Cha 27 (+18)
Perception Check DC 31 Shadows in the room’s corners seem to move independent of the light source, coalescing into vague humanoid figures.
July 20 09
|
D u n g e o n 16 8
79
A Tyranny of Souls
2 Sword Wraith Attendants (S)
Level 18 Lurker
Medium shadow humanoid (undead) XP 2,000 each Initiative +20 Senses Perception +15; darkvision HP 95; Bloodied 47; see also death strike Regeneration 10 AC 31; Fortitude 30, Reflex 31, Will 33 Immune disease, poison; Resist 20 necrotic, insubstantial; Vulnerable 10 radiant (if the sword wraith attendant takes radiant damage, its regeneration does not function until the end of the its next turn) Speed fly 8 (hover); phasing; see also shadow glide m Shadow Sword (standard; at-will) F Necrotic +21 vs. Reflex; 2d8 + 7 necrotic damage, and the target is weakened (save ends). M Death Strike (when reduced to 0 hit points) F Necrotic The sword wraith shifts 4 squares and makes a melee basic attack, dealing 2d8 extra necrotic damage on a hit. Combat Advantage F Necrotic The sword wraith attendant deals 2d6 extra necrotic damage against any target granting combat advantage to it. Shadow Glide (move; encounter) The sword wraith attendant shifts 6 squares. Spawn Wraith Any humanoid killed by a sword wraith rises as a freewilled sword wraith at the start of its creator’s next turn, appearing in the space where it died (or in the nearest unoccupied space). Raising the slain creature (using the Raise Dead ritual) does not destroy the spawned wraith. Alignment Chaotic evil Languages Common Skills Stealth +21 Str 14 (+11) Dex 24 (+16) Wis 12 (+10) Con 18 (+13) Int 11 (+9) Cha 24 (+16)
Tactics Vlaakith would gladly let the PCs pass to destroy the emperor, but Zetch’r’r’s magic impels her to attack. She waits for the characters to attack first or to move past the first pair of columns, at which point she attacks using twin rays. She then uses her drain soul attack by spending action point if the target is within 5 squares. She uses this tactics against any opponent who draws too close, using her immobilizing ray to keep fleeing enemies in place.
The sword wraith attendants harry PCs who don’t close on the spine, using phasing to move through the floor and come up behind their opponents. They work together to ensure they get flanking. If they find themselves close to a dazed enemy, they don’t pass up the chance to strike the afflicted enemy with their shadow swords in the hopes of spawning a new sword wraith.
Features of the Area
Stained-Glass Windows: The stained glass windows are not made of glass at all. They are instead congealed hatred. Any creature that starts its turn in a square adjacent to the window makes a melee basic attack or a charge attack against the closest creature and treats allies as enemies for the purpose of opportunity attacks until the start of the creature’s next turn. Each window has AC 5 Fortitude 10, Reflex 5; hp 5. A destroyed window loses this effect.
Illumination: Two everburning torches in sconces to either side of the door to room 3 fill the room with bright light. Ceiling: The ceiling is 30 feet high. Columns: Four columns, each 3 feet wide, support the ceiling overhead. The columns provide cover.
Fate of Drained Souls When a victim of the drain soul attack fails its second saving throw, the victim’s soul is trapped in one of Vlaakith’s spine gems. The soul’s former body crumbles into dust at the end of the creature’s next turn. If the spine is destroyed, each creature trapped in a gem is targeted by an attack: +25 vs. Will; the soul is destroyed. On a miss, the soul remains intact but is trapped in a gem. If a target’s soul remains intact within a gem, then the gem glows with faint inner light and reveals an image of a tiny figure inside. This gem can be used as part of the Raise Dead ritual, reducing the component cost by half. The Raise Dead ritual can still bring back a target whose soul is destroyed.
July 20 09
|
D u n g e o n 16 8
80
A Tyranny of Souls
Red Sentinels Encounter Level 19 (12,000 XP)
Setup 2 adult red dragons (R) The emperor uses these dragons to protect the deeper chambers. These dragons are descendants of Zetch’r’r’s own red dragon steed. When the PCs enter this room, read: Heat blasts you from this blazing chamber. Through the heat mirage created by two fiery pools, you make out the hulking forms of two red dragons.
2 Adult Red Dragons (R)
Level 17 Solo Soldier
Large natural magical beast (dragon) XP 8,000 each Initiative +13 Senses Perception +15; darkvision HP 750; Bloodied 375; see also bloodied breath AC 33; Fortitude 33, Reflex 30, Will 29 Resist 20 fire Saving Throws +5 Speed 6, fly 8 (hover), overland flight 12 Action Points 2 m Bite (standard; at-will) ✦ Fire Reach 2; +22 vs. AC; 2d8 + 7 damage plus 3d6 fire damage. m Claw (standard; at-will) Reach 2; +22 vs. AC; 2d8 + 7 damage. M Double Attack (standard; at-will) The dragon makes two claw attacks. M Tail Strike (immediate reaction, when an enemy moves to a position where it flanks the red dragon; at-will) The dragon attacks the enemy with its tail: reach 2; +20 vs. Reflex; 2d10 + 7 damage, and the target is pushed 1 square. C Breath Weapon (standard; recharge 5 6 ) F Fire Close blast 5; +20 vs. Reflex; 2d12 + 6 fire damage. Miss: Half damage. C Bloodied Breath (free, when first bloodied; encounter) F Fire The dragon’s breath weapon recharges, and the dragon uses it immediately. C Frightful Presence (standard; encounter) F Fear Close burst 5; targets enemies; +20 vs. Will; the target is stunned until the end of the dragon’s next turn. Aftereffect: The target takes a –2 penalty to attack rolls (save ends). Alignment Evil Languages Common, Draconic Skills Bluff +14, Insight +15, Intimidate +19 Str 25 (+14) Dex 19 (+11) Wis 16 (+10) Con 22 (+13) Int 13 (+8) Cha 14 (+9)
Tactics The two dragons are accustomed to working with each other. When the PCs enter, they take to the air, flying 20 feet above the floor, and close to deliver their breath weapon attacks against the largest group of characters. They then spend an action point each to charge a character they hit with their breath weapons.
After, both dragons maneuver to position themselves on opposite sides of the PCs. The first dragon uses frightful presence to send the PCs fleeing while the other dragon bites any character that moves past it. On the round following, they do the same thing, but in reverse. The dragons save their second action points for when they are bloodied, using them to combine bite attacks with their breath weapons, or, failing that, combine a bite with double attack.
Features of the Area Illumination: The pools of fire fill this room with bright light. Ceiling: The ceiling in this room is 50 feet high. Dais: A dais stands on the opposite side of the room, flanked by the dragons. The steps up are steep and count as difficult terrain. Iron Doors: The iron doors are not locked, but they are super-hot. Characters opening them by hand take 10 fire damage. Fiery Pools: Two pools of naphtha burn. A creature that enters or starts its turn adjacent to a pool takes 5 fire damage, while a creature that enters or starts its turn in a pool takes 10 fire damage and ongoing 10 fire damage (save ends). The fires are so intense that a creature standing in or behind them is lightly obscured. Heat: Heat from the burning pools imposes a −2 penalty to all attack rolls to all creatures that do not have resist fire of 10 or more. Treasure: The dragons’ hoard consists of treasure parcels 14, 18, and 19, all of which sit in a pile on the dais.
July 20 09
|
D u n g e o n 16 8
81
A Tyranny of Souls
The Freezer Encounter Level 20 (14,000 XP)
Setup 3 ice devils (I) 1 winterdeath dracolich (W) This foul chamber holds dragon carcasses for later animation. The dracolich lairing here (a red dragon in life) has endured terrible torments from the ice devils, hence its lesser state. When the PCs enter this room, read: A blast of cold greets you when you enter this large chamber. Several ice-blue insectoid humanoids turn to look at you, their longspears raised in challenge, but the hulking red dragon skeleton rimed with ice rising from the frozen floor commands your attention. Red dragon carcasses hang by their tails from the ceiling.
3 Ice Devils (I)
Level 20 Soldier
Large immortal humanoid (devil) XP 2,800 each Initiative +18 Senses Perception +13; darkvision Cold Aura (Cold) aura 5; enemies in the aura take a −2 penalty to all attack rolls. HP 195; Bloodied 97 AC 36; Fortitude 33, Reflex 31, Will 29 Immune cold; Resist 20 fire Speed 8 m Icy Longspear (standard; at-will) F Cold, Weapon Reach 3; +27 vs. AC; 1d12 + 7 cold damage, and the target is slowed (save ends). M Claw (standard; at-will) Reach 2; +25 vs. AC; 1d6 + 7 damage. C Chilling Command (minor; recharge 5 6) F Cold Close burst 5; +23 vs. Will; the target takes ongoing 5 cold damage and is immobilized (save ends both). C Freezing Breath (standard; recharge 3 4 5 6) F Cold Close blast 5; +23 vs. Fortitude; 2d6 + 7 cold damage, and the target is slowed (save ends). Alignment Evil Languages Supernal Skills Endurance +23 Str 25 (+17) Dex 22 (+16) Wis 17 (+13) Con 27 (+18) Int 15 (+12) Cha 19 (+14) Equipment longspear
Winterdeath Dracolich (W)
Level 20 Elite Controller
Huge natural magical beast (dragon, undead) XP 5,600 Initiative +16 Senses Perception +19; darkvision HP 384; Bloodied 192; see also bloodied breath AC 34; Fortitude 33, Reflex 32, Will 30 Immune disease, fear, poison; Resist 30 cold, 30 necrotic; Vulnerable 10 radiant Saving Throws +2 Speed 8, fly 10 (clumsy) Action Points 1 m Bite (standard; at-will) F Cold, Necrotic Reach 3; +25 vs. AC; 3d6 + 8 damage. Against an immobilized target, this attack deals 3d6 extra cold and necrotic damage. C Bloodied Breath (free, when first bloodied; encounter) F Cold, Necrotic The winterdeath dracolich’s breath weapon recharges and it uses it immediately. C Breath Weapon (standard; recharge 5 6) F Cold, Necrotic The winterdeath dracolich breathes a blast of icy black necrotic energy: close blast 5; +23 vs. Fortitude; 2d8 + 7 cold and necrotic damage, and the target is immobilized until the end of the dracolich’s next turn. Miss: Half damage. Effect: The target loses any cold or necrotic resistance it has (save ends). C Unnerving Presence (standard; encounter) F Fear Close burst 5; +23 vs. Will; the target moves up to its speed away from the winterdeath dracolich by the safest possible route and takes a −2 penalty to all attack rolls until the end of the dracolich’s next turn. C Winterdeath Corona (standard; recharge 6) F Cold, Necrotic Close burst 3; +23 vs. Fortitude; 2d8 + 7 necrotic damage, and ongoing 10 cold damage (save ends). Alignment Evil Languages Draconic Skills Arcana +18, Endurance +22, History +18, Insight +19, Intimidate +18, Religion +18 Str 25 (+17) Dex 22 (+16) Wis 19 (+14) Con 24 (+17) Int 16 (+13) Cha 17 (+13)
July 20 09
|
D u n g e o n 16 8
82
A Tyranny of Souls
Tactics
Features of the Area
The dracolich uses its breath weapon and spends its action point to attack with unnerving presence. It then alternates between winterdeath corona and bite attacks while waiting for its breath weapon to recharge. The ice devils position themselves to hit their enemies with freezing breath followed by chilling command, stabbing their enemies with longspears while waiting for their powers to recharge.
Illumination: This room is dark. Ceiling: The ceiling is 30 feet high. Dragon Corpse: Large dead red dragons hang by their tails from hooks set in the ceiling. A character can climb a corpse with a DC 14 Athletics check. An adjacent character can swing the corpse as an attack: level + 4 vs. Reflex; the target is pushed 1 square and knocked prone. Uttercold: Two areas of the floor are covered with uttercold (elemental ice). The squares count as difficult terrain and any creature entering a square containing uttercold takes 10 cold damage. If a square of uttercold is included in a fire burst or blast attack, it erupts in scalding steam. C Scalding Steam F Fire, Zone Burst 1 centered on triggering square; all creatures in burst; +23 vs. Reflex; 2d6 + 7 fire damage. The burst creates a zone of steam that lasts until the end of the triggering attacker’s next turn. All squares in the zone count as being lightly obscured. If multiple squares are affected, overlapping areas count as being heavily obscured.
Treasure: The dracolich has a modest hoard consisting of treasure parcels 13 and 17.
July 20 09
|
D u n g e o n 16 8
83
A Tyranny of Souls
Curiosities Encounter Level 21 (16,300 XP)
Setup 1 astral stalker (A) 1 gibbering abomination (G) 2 marut sentinels (M) 1 breath of Tiamat (B) To expand his forces, Zetch’r’r scours the Astral Sea for potential creatures to add to his stables. He hopes to either replace the draconic servants (if he ever wriggles out from under Tiamat’s claw) or use them against the rebels that endanger his rule. He posts two marut sentinels in this room to ensure the captives do not escape. The gibbering abomination is clearly visible through the transparent walls of its prison; the astral stalker is invisible, making its prison appear empty. When the PCs enter this room and can see the cages, read: Two squat humanoids with steel skin and wielding greatswords stand guard in this chamber. Two shimmering cubes stand to either side. Only one cube is occupied, and inside is a floating mass of flesh, eyes, and tentacles. Perception Check DC 22 You see a control panel on the wall.
Astral Stalker (A)
Level 22 Elite Lurker
Medium immortal humanoid XP 8,300 Initiative +23 Senses Perception +18; blindsight 10 HP 314; Bloodied 157 AC 38; Fortitude 32, Reflex 38, Will 32 Saving Throws +2 Speed 10, climb 6 Action Points 1 m Claw (standard; at-will) +27 vs. AC; 2d6 + 8 damage, and the astral stalker can choose to designate the target as its quarry (see stalker’s quarry). r Throat Dart (standard; at-will) F Poison Ranged 5/10; +29 vs. AC; 1d10 + 8 damage, and the target takes ongoing 5 poison damage and is slowed (save ends both). First Failed Saving Throw: The target is immobilized instead of slowed (save ends). Second Failed Saving Throw: The target is stunned instead of immobilized (save ends). M Quick Claws (standard; at-will) Against a slowed or immobilized target, the astral stalker makes two claw attacks. Combat Advantage The astral stalker’s melee attacks deal 2d6 extra damage against any target granting combat advantage to it. Invisibility (standard; at-will) F Illusion The astral stalker is invisible until it attacks. Stalker’s Quarry (minor; at-will) The astral stalker knows the exact location of a creature it has designated as its quarry. The astral stalker can have only one quarry at a time, but the power works across any distance and even crosses planar boundaries. Alignment Evil Languages Supernal Skills Stealth +24 Str 22 (+17) Dex 26 (+19) Wis 15 (+13) Con 19 (+15) Int 8 (+10) Cha 10 (+11)
Tactics The marut sentinels do not attack right away, but they try to block access into the room. They respond to attempts at conversation with silence. They know what will happen if either they or the adventurers make an attack in this room, so they are prepared to get out from the trap’s blast.
Gibbering Abomination (G)
Level 18 Controller
Medium aberrant magical beast XP 2,000 Initiative +13 Senses Perception +13; all-around vision, darkvision Unnatural Utterances aura 5; any enemy that starts its turn within the aura takes a −2 penalty to attack rolls. HP 168; Bloodied 84 AC 32; Fortitude 31, Reflex 30, Will 30 Speed 6, fly 4 (hover; maximum altitude 1) m Tentacle (standard; at-will) F Psychic Reach 2; +22 vs. AC; 2d6 + 5 damage, and ongoing 5 psychic damage (save ends). C Gibbering (free, once on the gibbering abomination’s turn before it takes other actions; at-will) F Psychic Close burst 5; deafened creatures are immune; +20 vs. Will; the target is dazed until the end of the gibbering abomination’s next turn. R Eye of Despair (standard; recharge 4 5 6) F Psychic Ranged 10; +20 vs. Will; 3d8 + 4 psychic damage, and the target is immobilized (save ends). Combat Advantage The gibbering abomination deals 2d6 extra psychic damage on melee and ranged attacks against any target granting combat advantage to it. Alignment Unaligned Languages Str 20 (+14) Dex 18 (+13) Wis 19 (+13) Con 16 (+12) Int 11 (+9) Cha 12 (+10)
Once a character makes an attack, the maruts fight back, laying into their enemies with double attack, while the trap randomly disgorges acid into the room. If an enterprising character uses the control panel to disable the trap, the force cages vanish, loosing the creatures they contain. Neither the gibbering abomination nor the astral stalker see the maruts as allies, but they treat each other as allies for the purpose of their powers and opportunity attacks. The gibbering abomination begins gibbering on its turn and uses eye of despair against ranged attackers. While waiting for this power to recharge, it hits foes in its reach with its tentacles, moving to get combat advantage with the astral stalker when possible.
July 20 09
|
D u n g e o n 16 8
84
A Tyranny of Souls
The astral stalker is invisible until it makes an attack. It moves to where it can get a clear shot at nondefender if possible, using stalker’s quarry first and then throat dart. It then spends an action point to charge its quarry. It attacks using quick claws until its quarry succeeds on a saving throw, at which point the astral stalker uses invisibility to skulk away and set up its next attack. Breath of Tiamat Trap
Level 18 Blaster XP 2,000
Trap: When any creature makes an attack in this room, random pillars burst up through the floor and spray the area with acid. Perception F DC 20: A character notices discolored tiles in the trapped squares. Trigger When a creature makes an attack in this room, the trap activates and rolls initiative. Initiative +8 Floor Burst Free Action Melee 1 Trigger: A creature stands in the trap’s square when it first makes its attack. Target: The triggering creature Effect: The creature is pushed 1 square and is knocked prone. Acid Spray F Acid Standard Action Close blast 5 Special: Roll 1d4. The square matching the number erupts when a steel column mounted with a sprayer bursts through the floor (see below). The blast originates from this square. Target: Each creature in blast Attack: +21 vs. Reflex Hit: 3d8 + 5 acid damage, and ongoing 15 acid damage (save ends). Countermeasures F Turning a dial in the center of the control panel deactivates the trap and also negates the cages containing the astral stalker and the gibbering abomination.
2 Marut Sentinels (M)
Level 18 Soldier
Medium immortal humanoid XP 2,000 Initiative +16 Senses Perception +20; truesight 10 HP 175; Bloodied 87 Regeneration 10 AC 35; Fortitude 35, Reflex 29, Will 30 Immune sleep; Resist 10 thunder Speed 8, fly 4 (hover), teleport 4 m Greatsword (standard; at-will) F Thunder, Weapon +24 vs. AC; 1d10 + 8 damage plus 1d6 thunder damage, the target is pushed 1 square, and the target is marked until the end of the marut sentinel’s next turn. M Double Attack (standard; recharge 5 6) The marut sentinel makes two greatsword attacks. Alignment Unaligned Languages Supernal Skills Endurance +20, Intimidate +15 Str 30 (+19) Dex 21 (+14) Wis 23 (+15) Con 23 (+15) Int 12 (+10) Cha 13 (+10) Equipment greatsword
Features of the Area Illumination: Everburning torches fill the room with bright light. Ceiling: The ceiling is 20 feet tall. Stairs: The stairs count as difficult terrain while ascending them and normal terrain while descending them. Force Cages: Two cages are positioned on either side of the room. The cages’ wall of force do not block line of sight, but they do block line of effect. Each cage has AC 4, Fortitude 12, Reflex 4, hp 200. A dispel magic spell automatically destroys a cage. The only way to lift the cages is by turning the dial on the control panel to deactivate the trap. Sound cannot pass through the cages while they are active.
July 20 09
|
D u n g e o n 16 8
85
A Tyranny of Souls
Emerald Statue Encounter Level 20 (14,000 XP)
Setup 1 githyanki knight (G) 1 kryizoth fire mage (K) 2 tlaikith forlorn (T) Emperor Zetch’r’r placed his most loyal guards in this chamber to safeguard the passage to his personal quarters. The githyanki are alerted if combat occurs in any adjacent chamber and ready actions to attack whenever an enemy enters the room. The githyanki knight readies telekinetic fist, the fire mage readies immolation, and the forlorn ready their silver swords. Although this combat begins in this room, it can easily spill back into adjacent rooms as the guardians work to keep the adventurers away from their master. When the PCs enter this room, read: An enormous idol of Tiamat dominates this otherwise bare chamber. Two githyanki stand guard before it. One wears antiquated plate armor and wields a silvery blade. The other is dressed in scorched robes and is obviously undead. Also in this room are two ghostly githyanki knights, echoes of the living warrior opposite them. They turn as one, ready for the attack.
Githyanki Knight (G)
Level 21 Elite Controller
Medium natural humanoid XP 6,400 Initiative +15 Senses Perception +22; darkvision HP 396; Bloodied 198 AC 35; Fortitude 34, Reflex 31, Will 33 Immune fear; Resist 5 psychic, 5 radiant Saving Throws +2 (+4 against charm effects) Speed 5 Action Points 1 m True Silver Sword (standard; at-will) F Psychic, Weapon +26 vs. AC; 1d12 + 8 damage plus 1d8 psychic damage (crit 3d12 + 20 + 8 psychic). M Dark Smite (standard; recharges when first bloodied) F Psychic, Weapon Targets an immobilized creature; +25 vs. Fortitude; 2d12 + 8 damage plus 1d12 psychic damage, and the target is pushed 5 squares and knocked prone. M Double Attack (standard; at-will) F Psychic, Weapon The githyanki knight makes two true silver sword attacks. R Reactive Grab (immediate reaction, when an enemy enters a square adjacent to the githyanki knight; encounter) The githyanki knight makes a telekinetic fist attack against the triggering enemy. This attack doesn’t provoke opportunity attacks. R Telekinetic Fist (standard; at-will) Ranged 5; +25 vs. Fortitude; the target is immobilized (save ends). Each Failed Saving Throw: The githyanki knight slides the target 5 squares. M Dimensional Exile (free, when the githyanki knight hits with a melee attack; encounter) F Teleportation The target is sent to a pocket dimension (save ends). The target is removed from play and cannot take actions. When the target ends the effect, it returns to the space it last occupied or the closest unoccupied space. Alignment Evil Languages Common, Deep Speech Str 27 (+18) Dex 21 (+15) Wis 24 (+17) Con 22 (+16) Int 16 (+13) Cha 20 (+15) Equipment plate armor, true silver sword
Kryizoth Fire Mage (K)
Level 20 Controller
Medium natural humanoid (undead), githyanki XP 2,800 Initiative +15 Senses Perception +19; darkvision Black Flame Shroud (Fire, Necrotic) aura 1; any enemy that enters or starts its turn within the aura takes 10 fire and necrotic damage. HP 190; Bloodied 95 AC 34; Fortitude 30, Reflex 33, Will 33 Immune disease, poison; Resist 20 fire, 20 necrotic; Vulnerable 10 radiant Speed 6; see also dimension step m Blackflame Touch (standard; at-will) F Fire, Necrotic +24 vs. Reflex; 1d6 + 7 fire and necrotic damage, and the target loses 1 healing surge. r Rotting Missile (standard; at-will) F Necrotic Ranged 20; +24 vs. Reflex; 2d8 + 7 necrotic damage, and the target is slowed and takes a –2 penalty to AC (save ends both). R Immolation (standard; recharge 5 6) F Fire Ranged 10; +24 vs. Reflex; 3d6 + 7 fire damage, and ongoing 10 fire damage (save ends). Miss: Half damage. Each Failed Saving Throw: Each enemy adjacent to the target takes 10 fire damage. R Telekinetic Leap (move; encounter) Ranged 10; the kryizoth fire mage or one ally within range can fly up to 5 squares. Heat Mirage (immediate interrupt, when hit by a melee or ranged attack; encounter) F Illusion The kryizoth fire mage gains a +2 bonus to all defenses until the end of its next turn. Dimension Step (minor; recharge 4 5 6) F Teleportation The kryizoth fire mage teleports 5 squares. Alignment Evil Languages Common, Deep Speech Skills Arcana+22, History +19 Str 17 (+13) Dex 20 (+15) Wis 19 (+14) Con 22 (+16) Int 25 (+17) Cha 14 (+12) Equipment robes, staff
July 20 09
|
D u n g e o n 16 8
86
A Tyranny of Souls
2 Tlaikith Forlorn (T)
Level 19 Soldier
Medium natural humanoid (undead), githyanki XP 2,400 each Initiative +15 Senses Perception +12; darkvision Dimensional Bar aura 1; creatures in the aura cannot teleport, and creatures cannot teleport into the aura. HP 125; Bloodied 62 AC 33; Fortitude 32, Reflex 29, Will 30 Immune disease, poison; Resist 20 necrotic; insubstantial; Vulnerable 10 radiant Speed 5, fly 5 (hover) m Silver Sword (standard; at-will) F Psychic, Weapon +24 vs. Reflex; 1d10 + 7 damage, and the target is marked until the end of the tlaikith forlorn’s next turn. M Soul Strike (standard; encounter) F Weapon +24 vs. Reflex; 2d10 + 7 damage, and the target is stunned (save ends). R Telekinetic Leap (move; encounter) Ranged 10; the tlaikith forlorn or one ally within range can fly up to 5 squares. R Telekinetic Pull (minor; encounter) Ranged 5; +24 vs. Fortitude; the target is pulled 5 squares. C Silver Arc (standard; encounter) F Psychic, Weapon Close burst 1; +24 vs. Reflex; 2d10 + 7 damage, and the target is dazed (save ends). Alignment Evil Languages Common, Deep Speech, telepathy 10 Str 24 (+16) Dex 18 (+13) Wis 16 (+12) Con 19 (+13) Int 13 (+10) Cha 21 (+14) Equipment plate armor, silver sword
The forlorn use telekinetic pull to drag soft enemies into their reach and then hit them with soul strike. They then move out of the room and pull their targets with them to lure the PCs to the emerald statue.
Features of the Area Illumination: The emerald idol glows with inner luminance, filling the room with bright light. Ceiling: The ceiling here is 20 feet tall. Emerald Idol: The idol looms over the chamber and is filled with Tiamat’s malice. Nongithyanki starting their turns in spaces adjacent to the idol are subject to an attack. m Tiamat’s Judgment F Poison Melee 1; +25 vs. Fortitude; 10 poison damage, and the target is pushed 1 square.
The statue has AC 3, Fortitude 15, Reflex 3, hp 200. Characters can enter a statue’s space by spending 3 squares of movement. Searching the statue and succeeding on a DC 25 Perception check reveals the entire thing pivots to expose the chamber beyond.
Tactics The githyanki knight uses telekinetic fist to pin down a defender, and then closes on a ranged attacker for melee. If the target of its telekinetic fist fails its save to end the immobilized effect, the knight slides it to an adjacent space and attacks using dark smite and then pins the target once more. The fire mage keeps her distance from the forlorn so she can use dimension step if needed. She leads with her immolation power. She helps maneuver her allies into the best position using telekinetic leap and then punishes ranged attackers with her rotting missile.
July 20 09
|
D u n g e o n 16 8
87
A Tyranny of Souls
Those Who Are About to Die Encounter Level 19 (12,800 XP)
Setup 2 chosen gish’sarath (S) 8 chosen githwarriors (G) No matter the direction from which the adventurers approach, the githyanki here react quickly to the arrival of intruders. 2 Chosen Gish’sarath (S) Level 18 Elite Skirmisher
Medium natural humanoid, githyanki XP 4,000 each Initiative +13 Senses Perception +16 HP 342; Bloodied 171 AC 32; Fortitude 29, Reflex 30, Will 31 Saving Throws +2 (+4 against charm effects) Speed 5; see also astral stride Action Points 1 m Silver Longsword (standard; at-will) F Psychic, Weapon +23 vs. AC; 1d8 + 7 damage, plus 1d8 psychic damage. M Double Attack (standard; at-will) F Psychic, Weapon The gish’sarath makes two silver longsword attacks. R Force Bolt (standard; at-will) F Force Ranged 10; +21 vs. Reflex; 3d6 + 5 force damage and the gish’sarath pushes the target 1 square. R Storm of Stars (standard; encounter) F Fire The gish’sarath makes four attacks, no more than two of these against a single target; ranged 5; +23 vs. AC; 2d8 + 6 fire damage. Astral Stride (move; encounter) F Teleportation The gish’sarath teleports 6 squares and gains the insubstantial and phasing qualities until the start of its next turn. Alignment Evil Languages Common, Deep Speech, Draconic Skills Arcana +19, History +16, Insight +16 Str 17 (+12) Dex 15 (+11) Wis 15 (+11) Con 19 (+13) Int 21 (+14) Cha 19 (+13) Equipment chainmail, silver longsword
8 Githwarriors (G)
Level 16 Minion Skirmisher
Medium natural humanoid, githyanki XP 350 each Initiative +13 Senses Perception +10 HP 1; a missed attack never damages a minion. AC 30; Fortitude 30, Reflex 28, Will 26 Saving Throws +2 against charm Speed 6; see also telekinetic stride m Greatsword (standard; at-will) F Weapon +21 vs. AC; 12 damage. R Crossbow (standard; at-will) F Weapon Ranged 15/30; +21 vs. AC; 12 damage. Telekinetic Jump (move; encounter) The githwarrior flies 5 squares. Alignment Evil Languages Common, Deep Speech Str 25 (+15) Dex 20 (+13) Wis 15 (+10) Con 15 (+10) Int 12 (+9) Cha 14 (+10) Equipment scale mail, greatsword, crossbow with 10 bolts
Tactics The githyanki use the cramped quarters to their best advantage, and use telekinetic leap to fly over their allies’ heads and hit the enemies from behind.
Features of the Area Illumination: Everburning torches in iron sconces every 15 feet fill the area with bright light. Ceiling: The ceiling in room 10 is 30 feet tall. The ceiling in the hall and barracks (room 11) beyond is 50 feet tall. The ceiling in room 13 is just 20 feet tall. Stairs: The stairs descending from room 10 to the hall beyond are steep and cost 3 squares of movement to ascend or descend. The stairs leading up to room 13 are difficult terrain while ascending them and normal terrain while descending them.
July 20 09
|
D u n g e o n 16 8
88
A Tyranny of Souls
Vicious Storm Encounter Level 21 (17,800 XP)
Setup 1 caller in darkness (C) 1 primal storm (P) 2 storm devils (S) The devils and the primal storm await their master’s pleasure in this room. When the PCs enter, place only the primal storm and the storm devils. The caller in darkness doesn’t join the fight until one of three things happen: either storm devils are slain, the primal storm is slain, or a creature falls into the pit. Neither the primal storm nor the storm devils are aware of the caller in darkness. The undead creature formed from the terrified githyanki executed in this awful room. While powerful, it fears the storm devils and will not ascend from the pit unless forced. The cramped quarters make maneuvering in this room difficult, and so the encounter might spill into adjoining rooms. When the PCs can see in this room, read: An appalling reek greets you when you enter this chambera stench transcending ordinary decay. Two ledges flank a deep pit occupying the room’s center. Statues depicting rearing blue dragons stand in the corners on the ledges. Just as you make out two winged humanoids wielding tridents, a crackling orb of lightning comes to life, slashing the air with energy.
Caller in Darkness (C)
Level 19 Elite Soldier
Large shadow animate (undead) XP 4,800 Initiative +13 Senses Perception +16; darkvision HP 253; Bloodied 126 AC 33; Fortitude 33, Reflex 28, Will 33 Immune disease, poison; Resist insubstantial Saving Throws +2 Speed fly 8 (hover); phasing Action Points 1 m Spirit Bite (standard; at-will) F Necrotic, Psychic Reach 2; +23 vs. AC; 1d10 + 7 necrotic damage, and ongoing 10 psychic damage (save ends). M Double Bite (standard; at-will) F Necrotic, Psychic The caller in darkness makes two spirit bite attacks. M Steal Essence (standard; at-will) F Necrotic, Psychic Reach 2; targets a creature marked by the caller in darkness; +22 vs. Fortitude; 1d10 + 9 necrotic damage, and ongoing 5 psychic damage (save ends). First Failed Saving Throw: The target takes ongoing 5 psychic damage and is weakened (save ends both). Second Failed Saving Throw: The target takes ongoing 10 psychic damage and is stunned instead of weakened (save ends both). C Advantage of Fear (minor 1/round; at-will) F Fear Close burst 10; targets one creature; the target is marked and grants combat advantage to the caller in darkness (save ends both); see also steal essence. C Soulstorm (free, when first bloodied; encounter) F Necrotic, Psychic Close burst 2; +22 vs. Reflex; 1d10 + 9 psychic damage plus 1d10 + 9 necrotic damage. In addition, a target that grants combat advantage to the caller in darkness takes ongoing 5 psychic damage and ongoing 5 necrotic damage (save ends both). Alignment Chaotic evil Languages Common Str 24 (+16) Dex 18 (+13) Wis 24 (+16) Con 21 (+14) Int 10 (+9) Cha 25 (+16)
Primal Storm, Blue Dragon (P) Level 20 Artillery
Large natural animate (construct) XP 2,800 Initiative +18 Senses Perception +14; tremorsense 5 HP 146; Bloodied 73 AC 32; Fortitude 30, Reflex 32, Will 30 Immune poison; Resist 30 lightning Speed 10, fly 4 m Slam (standard; at-will) F Lightning Reach 2; +26 vs. AC; 2d8 + 8 lightning damage. R Storm Bolt (standard; at-will) F Lightning The primal storm targets up to three creatures; the first target must be within 20 squares of the primal storm, the second must be within 10 squares of the first, and the third target within 10 squares of the second; +25 vs. Reflex; 2d6 + 8 lightning damage, and the target is dazed until the end of its next turn. Miss: Half damage, and the target is not dazed. C Lightning Step (standard; recharge ⚅) F Lightning, Teleportation Close burst 2; +21 vs. Reflex; 2d6 + 8 lightning damage, and the target is dazed until the end of its next turn. Miss: Half damage, and the target is not dazed. Effect: The primal storm teleports 8 squares after making this attack. Alignment Unaligned Languages Str 17 (+13) Dex 26 (+18) Wis 19 (+14) Con 20 (+15) Int 7 (+8) Cha 7 (+8)
July 20 09
|
D u n g e o n 16 8
89
A Tyranny of Souls
2 Storm Devils (S)
Level 23 Artillery
Medium immortal humanoid (devil) XP 5,100 each Initiative +18 Senses Perception +17; darkvision HP 169; Bloodied 84 AC 37; Fortitude 35, Reflex 34, Will 33 Resist 20 fire, 20 lightning, 20 thunder Speed 7, fly 7 (clumsy) m Trident (standard; at-will) F Lightning, Weapon +26 vs. Reflex; 2d6 + 8 damage, and ongoing 10 lightning damage, and the target is dazed (save ends both). r Lightning Fork (standard; at-will) F Lightning Requires trident; ranged 20; +28 vs. Reflex; 3d6 + 8 lightning damage. A Infernal Thunderclap (standard; recharge 5 6) ✦ Lightning, Thunder Area burst 2 within 20; +26 vs. Fortitude; 2d10 + 6 lightning and thunder damage, and the target is pushed 3 squares from the origin square and dazed until the end of its next turn. Cyclone (free, when first bloodied; encounter) The storm devil shifts 3 squares, and any Medium or smaller enemy adjacent to the storm devil at the start of the move is knocked prone. Alignment Evil Languages Supernal Skills Stealth +23 Str 20 (+16) Dex 25 (+18) Wis 22 (+17) Con 25 (+18) Int 16 (+14) Cha 17 (+14) Equipment trident
Tactics The primal storm—living lightning formed from a blue dragon’s breath—loiters near the ceiling, flying about and raging with contempt for the intruders. It opens with storm bolt, targeting three creatures it can see with this deadly attack, and flies 2 squares so it can maintain its altitude. The primal storm stays near the ceiling, blasting the characters each round until a creature engages it. If it is confronted by two or more enemies in melee, it uses lightning step to slip away. The primal storm pursues enemies that flee from this room.
While the primal storm dances across the ceiling, the storm devils use infernal thunderclap to push the characters into the pit. They avoid melee when possible, attacking with lightning fork until their infernal thunderclap recharges. Each round, they move across their ledges to get the best shot possible. When the caller in darkness joins the combat, it flies to just above the pit and hovers there. If the storm devils are present, it treats them as enemies just as it does the PCs. Each round, it starts by using advantage of fear against an enemy it can see, giving preference to the adventurers first, specifically divine characters. It moves so it can reach a creature it has marked and attacks using steal essence, and then spends its action point to use double bite. Thereafter, the caller in darkness marks another enemy and uses steal essence or double bite until destroyed.
Statues: Four statues depicting blue dragons stand in the room’s four corners. A statue has AC 5, Fortitude 10, Reflex 5, hp 40.
Features of the Area Illumination: This room is dark. Ceiling: The ceiling here is 20 feet high, or 10 feet above the ledges. Ledges: Ledges on either side of the room stand 10 feet above the floor. Climbing a ledge requires a DC 14 Athletics check. Stairs: The stairs are treated as difficult terrain while ascending them and normal terrain while descending them. Pit: A 40-foot pit yawns wide in the center of the room. The pit is actually 50 feet deep, but heaps of githyanki corpses fill the bottom 10 feet and reduce the falling distance. A character that falls into the pit activates the caller in darkness in addition to taking 4d10 damage from the fall. A character can climb out of the pit with a DC 25 Athletics check.
July 20 09
|
D u n g e o n 16 8
90
A Tyranny of Souls
The Emperor’s Redoubt Encounter Level 23 (28,600 XP)
Setup Emperor Zetch’r’r (Z) 4 Handmaidens (H) Vraxanault, the Red Terror (V) The growing unrest troubles Tiamat, and to ensure Zetch’r’r is getting his house in order, she has sent Vraxanault, her red dragon exarch, to gauge Tu’narath’s troubles. The Separatists choose this time to strike, coordinating their efforts with the PCs. So when the adventurers enter this room, the dragon interrogates the emperor even as astral skiffs battle knights on pact dragons in the starry sky overhead. When the PCs enter through the secret door, read: The door opens onto a lavish chamber. Soft pillows cover the floor near the stairs that trace the interior wall and lead up to the level above. A heavy brocade curtain conceals the side of the room opposite from where you enter. A disk inset into the floor shines with blue light. From above, you hear voices. Both are likely male, with the first voice, cultured and patient, nearly drowned out by the louder booming voice. From what you can make out, the two discuss Tu’narath’s troubles.
Characters looking up through the hole in the ceiling can make out a gargantuan red dragon. When it speaks, fire puffs from its toothy maw. The characters can ascend the stairs as they wish, but call for DC 34 Stealth checks. If a character fails, the massive dragon thunders, “It seems you have other guests. Attend to them. Your house does not seem to be in order, and our queen will be displeased.” The red dragon exarch wings its way out through the roof, right into the raging battle overhead. If the PCs make it past the dragon and reach the third floor (such as by using the teleporter), the exarch growls, “deal with them” and then flies away as above. The characters don’t need to fight the exarch now, but if they wish to, use the statistics presented on the next page. When the PCs reach the second f loor, read: An immense red dragon reclines on the floor here. Behind, lying in piles, is its hoard. More stairs lead up to the level above. When the PCs can see the third f loor, read: Banners cover the walls of this wide room. An iron throne flanked by burning braziers stands at one side, while banners cover the walls all around. Overhead, there is no ceiling affording a good look at the raging battle above. Astral skiffs maneuver, launching volleys at pact dragons and their riders. The githyanki are tearing themselves apart.
When the PCs first see Zetch’r’r, read: The githyanki before you can only be Zetch’r’r. He has the bearing of a veteran warrior and is not slowed by the black plate armor covering his body. A crude iron crown rests on his brow, a ruby-encrusted scepter hangs from his weapon belt, and a silver sword rests easy in his hand. He glowers at you with his one good eyethe other is gone and in its place is a fat onyx stone. “You are a troublesome company. I credit you for your persistence, but now . . . now, it is time for you to die.” Attending Zetch’r’r are four handmaidens, fanatical githyanki warriors with intricate tattoos covering their bodies. They wield long, serpentine daggers. 4 Handmaidens (H)
Level 17 Minion Skirmisher
Medium natural humanoid, githyanki XP 400 each Initiative +15 Senses Perception +9 HP 1; a missed attack never damages a minion. AC 31; Fortitude 28, Reflex 29, Will 32 Saving Throws +2 against charm effects Speed 6 m Poisoned Dagger (standard; at-will) F Poison, Weapon +22 vs. AC; 8 damage plus 5 poison damage. C Scream of Vengeance (when reduced to 0 hit points) Close burst 10; each ally in the burst gains a +2 bonus to attack rolls until the end of its next turn. Telekinetic Jump (move; encounter) The handmaiden flies up to 5 squares. Alignment Evil Languages Common, Deep Speech Str 11 (+8) Dex 21 (+13) Wis 13 (+9) Con 18 (+12) Int 10 (+8) Cha 24 (+15) Equipment robes, poisoned dagger
July 20 09
|
D u n g e o n 16 8
91
A Tyranny of Souls
Emperor Zetch’r’r (Z) Level 23 Elite Soldier (Leader)
Medium natural humanoid, githyanki XP 10,200 Initiative +15 Senses Perception +18 Despair (Fear) aura 1; any enemy within the aura takes a −2 penalty to all defenses and saving throws. HP 428; Bloodied 214 AC 39; Fortitude 36, Reflex 32, Will 36 Saving Throws +2 Speed 6 Action Points 1 m Silver Sword (standard; at-will) F Psychic, Weapon +30 vs. AC; 2d6 + 6 damage plus 2d6 psychic damage, and the target is marked until the end of Zetch’r’r’s next turn. Against an immobilized target, this attack deals 4d6 extra damage and slides the target 2 squares. M Double Attack (standard; at-will) F Poison, Psychic, Weapon Zetch’r’r makes a silver sword attack against two different targets. M Parrying Maneuver (standard; requires silver sword; at-will) F Psychic, Weapon Zetch’r’r makes a silver sword attack; on a hit, the target also grants combat advantage to Zetch’r’r until the end of his next turn. R Folded Space (move; encounter) F Teleportation Ranged 5; no attack roll; Zetch’r’r and the target swap spaces. R Telekinetic Vise (standard; recharges when first bloodied) Ranged 5; +28 vs. Fortitude; 2d10 + 8 damage, and the target is immobilized (save ends). C Telekinetic Thrust (standard; recharge 4 5 6) Close burst 1; targets enemies; +28 vs. Fortitude; the target is pushed 1 square and is immobilized (save ends). Miss: The target is pushed 1 square. Combat Advantage Emperor Zetch’r’r’s melee attacks deal 4d6 extra damage against any target granting combat advantage to him. Alignment Evil Languages Common, Deep Speech, Draconic Skills Diplomacy +23, History +18, Insight +18, Intimidate +23 Str 27 (+19) Dex 15 (+13) Wis 14 (+13) Con 22 (+17) Int 21 (+16) Cha 24 (+18) Equipment full plate, two silver swords, scepter of Ephelomon (see sidebar)
Vraxanault, the Red Terror Level 21 Solo Soldier Elder Red Dragon (V)
Huge natural magical beast (dragon) XP 16,000 Initiative +18 Senses Perception +18; darkvision HP 808; Bloodied 404; see also bloodied breath AC 35; Fortitude 36, Reflex 33, Will 30 Resist 25 fire Saving Throws +5 Speed 8, fly 10 (hover), overland flight 15 Action Points 2 m Bite (standard; at-will) F Fire Reach 3; +26 vs. AC; 2d10 + 9 plus 4d6 fire damage. m Claw (standard; at-will) Reach 3; +26 vs. AC; 2d10 + 9 damage. M Double Attack (standard; at-will) The dragon makes two claw attacks. R Immolate Foe (standard; recharge 5 6) F Fire Ranged 20; +26 vs. Reflex; 3d8 + 7 fire damage, and ongoing 10 fire damage (save ends). C Breath Weapon (standard; recharge 5 6) F Fire Close blast 5; +24 vs. Reflex; 3d10 + 7 fire damage. Miss: Half damage. C Bloodied Breath (free, when first bloodied; encounter) F Fire The dragon’s breath weapon recharges automatically, and the dragon uses it immediately. C Frightful Presence (standard; encounter) F Fear Close burst 10; targets enemies; +25 vs. Will; the target is stunned until the end of the dragon’s next turn. Aftereffect: The target takes a −2 penalty to attack rolls (save ends). C Shock Wave (minor; recharge 5 6) Close burst 5; +24 vs. Fortitude; the target is pushed 5 squares, is knocked prone, and is dazed (save ends). Aftereffect: The target is slowed (save ends). Alignment Evil Languages Common, Draconic Skills Bluff +17, Insight +18, Intimidate +22 Str 27 (+18) Dex 21 (+15) Wis 16 (+13) Con 26 (+18) Int 15 (+12) Cha 15 (+12)
Tactics The handmaidens rush any adventurers on their floor or use the teleporter to reach characters who fight on the main floor. Their scream of vengeance power can reach allies on other levels. Vraxanault is loyal to Zetch’r’r as long as he possesses the scepter of Ephelomon. The dragon uses frightful presence and spends an action point to employ his breath weapon. If the dragon is faced with two or more attackers at once, it resorts to shock wave followed by immolate foe or breath weapon depending on what it has available. Zetch’r’r engages the closest enemy from the start, using telekinetic vice to lock an enemy down and then strike. He attacks this enemy, closing the distance using folded space if necessary, hammering away using his weapons. Zetch’r’r makes good use of the terrain to slide foes off the upper level to fall to the bottom floor. He rips through his opponents with his weapons until all his enemies lay dead or he is destroyed.
July 20 09
|
D u n g e o n 16 8
92
A Tyranny of Souls
Features of the Area Scepter of Ephelomon This ruby-encrusted golden scepter represents an ancient pact between the githyanki and the red dragons sworn to Tiamat. Ephelomon, Tiamat’s former red dragon exarch, entrusted it to Gith (savior of the githyanki people) millennia ago. A powerful relic and potent symbol, the scepter of Ephelomon has been part of the ruler’s regalia since the days when the first Vlaakith ascended the throne. When Zetch’r’r came to power, though, he quickly discovered the scepter had no power. At first he thought he had been given a false item, but rituals revealed the item’s vast magical strength had vanished. What this signaled was that the pact had been broken. Zetch’r’r has hidden this fact since taking power, but he knows if the truth about the pact became known that the dragons would leave and his reign would end, with or without Tiamat’s support. The scepter hangs on Zetch’r’r’s belt. During the combat, any character that makes a DC 24 Arcana check (a free action) recognizes the scepter for what it is. A second check against a DC 29 (a standard action) reveals it is powerless. A character can steal the scepter from Zetch’r’r’s belt by making a DC 31 Thievery check (with a −10 penalty for the attempt in combat). Once in hand, the scepter can be destroyed: AC 10, Fortitude 5, Reflex 10, Fortitude 5, hp 15. If the characters destroy the scepter in Vraxanault’s line of sight, the dragon roars with rage and abandons the emperor to whatever fate the PCs have in store for him.
Illumination: Everburning torches in iron sconces along the walls fill the entire tower with bright light. Ceiling: The ceilings in the first and second floors are 30 feet tall. The third floor has no ceiling, providing a view of the shimmering Astral Sea. Stairs: Stairs emerge from the wall and wind up and around to the top floor. Spaces containing stairs count as difficult terrain. Openings: A fall from the top deals 3d10 damage if the creature falls to the second floor or 6d10 if the creature falls all the way to the bottom. A fall from the second floor deals 3d10 damage. Blood Rock: Where indicated on the tactical map, the floor is made from blood rock. A creature standing in one of these squares can score a critical hit on a natural die roll of 19 or 20. Teleporters: Two magical gates connect the first floor to the third floor. A creature entering the teleporter’s space immediately moves adjacent to the other teleporter’s destination square. Curtain: A thick curtain on the first floor provides Zetch’r’r with privacy. The curtain blocks line of sight, and moving through the curtain costs an extra square of movement. Furniture: Cushions, bed, and dresser on the first floor, and Zetch’r’r’s throne on the third all count as difficult terrain. Treasure: The dragon’s horde consists of treasure parcels 11, 12, and 16, while Zetch’r’r has a small coffer in his bedchamber. It holds treasure parcel 15.
About the Author Robert J. Schwalb is a freelance game designer with over one hundred design and development credits to his name. Robert lives in Tennessee with his wife Stacee and his legion of feisty varmints. “Perkins, this one is for you.”
July 20 09
|
D u n g e o n 16 8
93
Betrayal at
Monadhan By David Noonan An adventure for 21st-level characters illustrations by Chad King, Empty Room Studio, Jason A. Engle, and Mclean Kendree, cartography by Mike Schley Sean Macdonald TM & © 2009 Wizards of the Coast LLC All rights reserved.
“Betrayal is the only truth that sticks.” —Arthur Miller
“Betrayal at Monadhan” is an adventure for five 21st-level characters. By the end of the adventure, the PCs should be midway through 22nd level. This adventure is the sequel to “Tyranny of Souls” in the Scales of War adventure path, and it leads directly to the next adventure: “Grasp of the Mantled Citadel.” It also plays well as a standalone and can be adapted for use in your ongoing campaign. In “Betrayal at Monadhan,” the PCs travel to Monadhan, a domain where those who’ve betrayed their family, friends, god, or nation suffer supernatural imprisonment. While seeking a portal to an even darker realm, the PCs must contend with a griefmad, undead dragon, its cambion and death giant allies, and the best-known betrayer of all: Kas, whose sword cut off the hand of his god.
September 20 09
|
D u n g e o n 170
4
Betrayal at Monadhan
Background
Adventure Synopsis
Tiamat’s black exarch, Mornujhar, has hidden away a ritualist of immense knowledge. The ritualist is in a dark realm, working on a ritual that will bring about Bahamut’s doom. The only way to reach the exarch and the ritualist is to travel to Monadhan, the Domain of Betrayal, and pass through a portal there.
The PCs begin the adventure under the Coalition’s protection in Sayre, where they meet an angel of secrets who calls herself Rachaela. Rachaela tells them the tale of Mornujhar and impresses upon them the importance of finding out what the ritualist is up to and stopping it. Rachaela pays the PCs to travel to Monadhan, use the portal leading to the shadowed demiplane of Vaerothim, and confront the ritualist once and for all. The PCs’ trip to Monadhan is complicated by the difficulty of willingly leaving Monadhan, a supernatural prison for traitors and betrayers. To use the portal, the PCs must find Monadhan’s key: whatever object in the realm is the most potent symbol of betrayal. They must also defeat Arantor, the dark lord of Monadhan—an undead dragon which guards the portal itself.
Not only does a dark lord— an undead dragon named Arantor—guard the portal, but the denizens of Monadhan cannot leave voluntarily unless they possess the key. The key would allow passage either back to the world or to Mornujhar’s demesne, and it is always the object of greatest betrayal in Monadhan. Right now, the key and object of great betrayal is the Sword of Kas, which is also part of Arantor’s hoard. Kas himself has come to Monadhan in search of it, gathering around him a crew of ritually enhanced vampires. Into this volatile mix step the PCs, who are trying to keep both Kas and Arantor at bay while they journey through Monadhan and use the Sword of Kas to get to Mornujhar. In more than one way, the price of success may be high. The PCs may be forced into betrayals of their own to escape Monadhan, and such betrayals might play into the hands of Vecna himself, who pulls the puppet strings in very subtle ways.
The Quests The climax of the PCs’ major quest, Defeating Irfelujhar, occurs in the next adventure, “Grasp of the Mantled Citadel.” But a minor quest in this adventure is the first step to completing that one. Minor Quest—Betray the Betrayer The PCs double-cross Kas the Betrayer, accepting his aid but then using the Sword of Kas themselves rather than letting it fall into Kas’s hands. Reward: 3,200 XP.
Once in Monadhan, the PCs travel through the jungle and reach the shantytown where most of Monadhan’s denizens—a sorry mix of betrayers from all realms and times—live their lives in squalor. The PCs speak to a seer named Sarissa, who reveals that the current key to Monadhan is the Sword of Kas, the artifact that cut off the hand of the god Vecna. The PCs’ inquiries put them into conflict with vampires skulking around the shantytown. After several battles, the PCs learn that the vampires are working for Kas himself. Kas confronts the PCs and offers them a bargain: he will tell the PCs how to defeat the dark lord that guards the portal if the PCs recover the Sword of Kas and turn it over to him. The PCs realize that Kas doesn’t know that the sword is also the ticket out of the domain of Monadhan. Kas keeps his part of the bargain and tells the PCs how Arantor’s grief and shame over his own horrible crime—the slaughter of a village and the murder of his daughter centuries ago—takes tangible form in the lower cavern of Arantor’s lair. Making Arantor’s victims come to life will distract and weaken the dark lord enough that the PCs can win the day, recover the sword, and use the portal. After fighting their way through magical caverns that rearrange themselves, the heroes reach a final showdown with Arantor. They’ll need to use their tactical acumen, the power they’ve acquired thus far, and Kas’s advice to defeat the dark lord. Then they must decide whether to betray Kas and keep the sword for themselves so they can use the portal to reach the demiplane of Vaerothim.
September 20 09
|
D u n g e o n 170
5
Betrayal at Monadhan
The PCs don’t know it (yet), but their success is mitigated by the fact that “Rachaela” is actually Niuria, an angel of secrets who serves Vecna. The God of Secrets will be pleased beyond measure if the PCs can betray Kas, giving him a taste of his own medicine and keeping the sword out of his grasp.
Setting Other than an introductory skill challenge, this adventure takes place entirely within the Shadowrealm of Monadhan, the Domain of Betrayal. Arantor, the dark lord of Monadhan, inadvertently created the domain centuries ago when, during a war, he slaughtered an entire town of civilians, then murdered his own daughter in an effort to keep his crime a secret. Since Arantor’s first betrayal, Monadhan’s population has slowly grown as traitors, turncoats, and double-crossers of all stripes have found themselves surrounded by an inexorable mist, then deposited in Monadhan with little chance for escape. Monadhan appears as a dismal, twisted ref lection of the jungle valley where Arantor’s original crime took place. Impenetrable mist surrounds the valley on all sides at a distance of a few miles from the valley’s edges (impenetrable unless you possess the key of Monadhan, of course). Near the center of the valley is a small rise with a ruined keep atop it and a shantytown at its base. Underneath that keep are the magical caverns where the PCs will ultimately go— caverns that are home to Arantor, the Sword of Kas, and the portal to Vaerothim.
Treasure As with previous installments of the Scales of War campaign, “Betrayal at Monadhan” makes use of the parcel system of treasure rewards as described in the Dungeon Master’s Guide. The characters should accumulate thirteen treasure parcels by the end of the adventure. You can supply these treasures in whatever way you wish, but the following list presents the most likely encounters to bear treasure. During your preparation, assign parcels from those that follow to the encounters in the spaces provided. Use the players’ wish lists to come up with magic items for the first six parcels. Consider saving at least one or two of the highest-level magic items for the end of the adventure, Arantor’s dragon hoard. If any PC has fallen behind gear-wise, you can correct that disparity by putting an item or even two items from that wish list in parcels A, B, and C. Based on the guidelines in the Dungeon Master’s Guide, the following parcels can go in the areas above. Consult Parcel A: _______________, S1 (payment advance from the wish lists your players gave you for the first eight “Rachaela” ). parcels, making the items appear to be of githyanki Parcel B: _______________, S1 (payment advance from manufacture where appropriate. “Rachaela”). Parcel 1: Magic item, level 25. Parcel C: _______________, S1 (payment advance from Parcel 2: Magic item, level 25. “Rachaela”). Parcel 3: Magic item, level 24. Parcel D: _______________, T1 (within the seer’s hut). Parcel 4: Magic item, level 23. Parcel E: _______________, T4 (in the unearthed coffin). Parcel 5: Magic item, level 23. Parcel F: _______________, T4 (in the unearthed coffin). Parcel 6: Magic item, level 22. Parcel G: Two masks of familiar betrayal worth 65,000 Parcel 7: 1,000 pp and four articulated dragon models gp each, C5 (hanging next to the rack). with sapphire scales (worth 15,000 gp each) Parcel H: _______________, C5 (carried by the huecuva). Parcel 8: 1,100 pp. Parcel I: tapestries collectively worth 125,000 gp, C6 Parcel 9: 700 pp and a pouch with 5,000 gp worth of (on the walls). residuum. Parcel J: _______________, C8 (carried by Bahlik Gur). Parcel 10: 500 pp and a potion of recovery. Parcel K: _______________, C8 (carried by Bahlik Gur). Parcel 11: Three golden monkey statuettes (worth Parcel L: _______________, C9 (Arantor’s lair). 10,000 gp each), one 5,000 gp ruby, and three potions Parcel M: _______________, C9 (Arantor’s lair). of vitality. Parcel N: _______________, C9 (Arantor’s lair). Parcel 12: Seven 5,000 gp jacinths. Parcel O: _______________, C9 (Arantor’s lair). Parcel 13: Three platinum rings with inset diamonds (worth 7,500 gp each) and 2,500 gp.
September 20 09
|
D u n g e o n 170
6
Betrayal at Monadhan
Preparing for Adventure This may be your D&D group’s first foray into epictier play. For you, the shift from 20th to 21st level should be a smooth one. You’ll find that the monsters are no more complex than the ones you’re accustomed to. You’ll do a little more mental arithmetic simply because the numbers are bigger, but otherwise, the transition to epic tier doesn’t change what’s going on behind your DM screen very much. While it’s a small step for you, it’s more of a leap for your players, who have new powers and a whole new epic destiny to deal with. At first, they may need help from the arbiter at the table and an expert at D&D: you. (Yes, if you’re running this adventure, you can call yourself a D&D expert. Congratulations!) Take a look at the PCs’ new powers and abilities so you can adjudicate them efficiently and quickly at the table. Because you see everything that’s going on, you often have a good vantage point to spot those “teachable moments.” You have an ulterior motive for checking out those new abilities, of course: All that new complexity the players get at epic tier is eventually going to get focused on the monsters and machinations you set up for the rest of Scales of War, and perhaps beyond. Knowing what the heroes are capable of with their rituals, magic items, powers, and abilities prepares you to keep them challenged and to keep the action moving. (Challenging the characters is different from thwarting them, of course.)
The most important thing you can do before each session is to spend a few minutes reviewing each encounter that the players are likely to reach during that session. What You Need to Play This adventure contains everything you need to play, including background information, setup, encounters and maps. You might wish to review any appropriate Dungeons & Dragons 4th Edition rules before play begins. The most important thing you can do before each session is to spend a few minutes reviewing each encounter that the players are likely to reach during that session. That should re-familiarize you with monster abilities and tactics and a sense of what other rules (typically those related to skills or terrain) will come into play. Don’t try to commit the monsters to memory in the minutes leading up to the session’s start. You’re just planting the seed in your brain so that when you see the encounter later, you say to yourself, “I remember these guys.”
What is an Adventure Path? An adventure path is a connected series of adventures that comprises an entire D&D campaign, from the heroes’ humble beginnings at 1st level to their epic triumphs at the pinnacle of level 30. These adventures cover all three tiers of play: heroic, paragon, and epic. Each tier is covered by roughly six adventures, meaning that the entire adventure path consists of eighteen adventures. Each adventure covers from one to three levels, but you can also have the PCs undertake side quests to supplement their XP. This assures that the PCs are the correct level to tackle each adventure. “Betrayal at Monadhan” is the first adventure in the epic tier, so it starts revealing to the PCs the enormity of Tiamat’s evil. The heroes will spend this adventure and its sequel, “Grasp of the Mantled Citadel,” beyond the Coalition’s call. That 30th-level climax is looming closer and closer. A classic villain from D&D history, Kas the Betrayer, makes an appearance here, and the PCs may very well finish this adventure with a full-fledged artifact, the Sword of Kas, within their (literal) grasp.
September 20 09
|
D u n g e o n 170
7
Betrayal at Monadhan
Adapting the Adventure
Mask of Familiar Betrayal
“Betrayal at Monadhan” is designed with five PCs in mind. You can adapt the adventure for larger groups by adding additional treasure parcels and monsters using the guidelines presented in the Dungeon Master’s Guide. When adapting the scenario for larger groups, bear in mind that the second half of the adventure takes place in caverns—expansive caverns, but caverns nonetheless. Make sure any monsters you add will fit inside the caverns while giving PCs and monsters alike enough room to move around. You don’t need to increase the number of monsters. You can instead increase the levels of those creatures using the guidelines on page 174 of the Dungeon Master’s Guide. Because the upper caverns rearrange themselves anyway, you can certainly make the caverns larger without worrying that they’ll encroach on other chambers. This adventure is designed for characters starting at 21st level, but a larger group of lower-level characters should have no problem with these challenges. The party can tackle the challenges of Monadhan at their own pace. Your only concern should be that the heroes are unlikely to want to fight Kas after encounter T4 (which follows on the heels of at least two and maybe as many as four tough encounters), and that the PCs aren’t running on fumes when they reach the climax at encounter C9. If you’re worried about the level disparity, Monadhan has plenty of opportunities for leveling up. The wilderness trek to the shantytown can have more than two encounters (and who knows what ancient mysteries are in that jungle, cast into the Shadowfell by Arantor’s great betrayal?)
Exquisitly crafted from nearly paper-thin marble and bound in delicate golden frames, these masks are minor magic items that have almost no game effect. When worn, the wearer can choose an adjacent creature. Until the wearer ends the effect or moves away from the creature, he or she can choose to appear as an exact likeness of the target creature’s great love or a close family member. Because the mask works only when adjacent to the target and only for that target, the mask of familiar betrayal has limited use for espionage and other subterfuge. The mask is commonly employed by torturers to break the spirit of their victims by making it seem as if someone they love is hurting them, by prostitutes offering the simulation of a lost love, or by bored nobles with money to burn who seek entertainment in the deception of their fellows. The masks have little value as magic items for an adventurer, but they are also always made of incredible and expensive materials. A typical mask (including the masks found in this adventure) is worth 65,000 gp.
September 20 09
|
D u n g e o n 170
8
Betrayal at Monadhan
Part 1: Onward from Sayre Part 1 of this adventure is a short skill challenge to provide some exposition and set the PCs in motion. It also introduces an NPC that will appear in later installments in the Scales of War adventure path
Onward from Sayre Encounters Before the PCs do anything else, make sure that they’re rested, they’ve done any shopping, and that they’re in a state of general readiness. They’ll have opportunities to engage in commerce, research, and rituals at other points in the adventure, but there’s no point in setting up the adventure, then having the players respond with, “OK, but let’s go shopping first.”
S1: On the Side of the Angels This encounter starts with a Coalition man-atarms approaching the PCs and inviting them to a conference chamber “at their earliest convenience.” If pressed, every other word out of the man-at-arms’s mouth is that he’s only the messenger, etc., but that there’s a Rachaela—”some sort of diplomat, I think, and an angel”—that wants to speak to them. Skill Challenge: On the Side of the Angels (page 18).
Monadhan Monadhan, once a simple jungle valley whose location in the world is lost to history, is now the name of the Domain of Betrayal within the Shadowfell. The sigil sequence to travel there with Planar Portal is esoteric (Arcana DC 30) to discover through research, but it’s not secret per se. It’s that no one goes there via Planar Portal and similar rituals because they can’t bring you back out again. More information on Monadhan can be found in the “Domains of Dread: Monadhan” article from Dragon #378. The vast majority of Monadhan’s residents didn’t use any ritual to get there. They betrayed someone—perhaps a spouse, parent, superior officer, priest, or liege. Some got away with their betrayals, and some didn’t. But afterward (sometimes days or weeks afterward), the betrayer wound up ensnared in fog that seemed to arise from nowhere. The fog grew thicker and thicker, then a warm breeze blew it away…leaving the betrayer on the edge of Monadhan with impenetrable fog behind and a teeming jungle in front. The unearthly fog, impenetrable to the eye, suddenly parts, and you find yourself standing atop a fog-capped hill. Similar hills surround a jungle valley that stretches before you. To the north, a massive waterfall feeds a river winding a serpentine path across the valley floor. In the middle of the valley is a low rise, more a barren hump than an actual hill. You can just make out the straight edges of defensive walls near the top. Tendrils of smoke rise from what must be chimneys or campfires nearby.
September 20 09
|
D u n g e o n 170
9
Betrayal at Monadhan
Closer to you, what looks like a thin, tenuous footpath winds its way along the low ridge, just inside the fog line. A wider path heads downhill, into the jungle and in the approximate direction of that hump near the center of the valley. The characters’ first thought may be to just turn around and walk back through the fog to wherever they came from. Unless they have the Sword of Kas, this won’t work. Instead, they stumble through the fog for several minutes, then emerge at another random spot on the rim of the Monadhan foothills, almost indistinguishable from where they first arrived.
Monadhan’s Properties With no day or night to speak of, time takes on an indeterminate quality in Monadhan, and no one seems to age. That doesn’t necessarily mean that the domain somehow suspends the aging process. Few Monadhan residents would grow to a ripe old age in a community where everyone has already betrayed someone and is suffering supernatural punishment for it. Occasionally a Monadhan resident will die suddenly during exertion or even sleep—”it was as if his own heart betrayed him,” the old ladies cluck as they rifle through the corpse’s pockets. Monadhan’s other properties are better understood by residents of the domain. Because hardly
anyone ever escapes Monadhan, academic records on the following phenomena are scant (Arcana DC 35 to know either, and even then the documentation is fragmentary). The Sting of Betrayal: Because the domain of Monadhan is suffused with betrayal, the domain itself rewards those willing to hurt their friends. If a creature makes an attack that damages an ally—a friendly fire incident, in other words—two things immediately happen. First, the ally takes ongoing 10 damage (save ends) in addition to whatever damage the attack itself dealt. Second, the creature who made the attack gets its choice of either regeneration 5 or a +1 bonus on attacks. Either effect lasts until the ally makes its saving throw. A creature can benefit from the sting of betrayal only once per round, so an area attack that damages multiple allies earns the attacker only one regeneration 5 or one +1 bonus on attacks. For the sting of betrayal to function, the creature making the attack and the ally must begin the battle as allies by any reasonable definition, not merely neutral parties who find common cause against a foe or other allies of convenience. The Blurted Confession: Monadhan’s longerterm residents are traitors who have spent years scrabbling for their very existence in an environment full of other desperate traitors. Accordingly, many have internalized their betrayals and buried them deep within their psyches. At the moment of death or great trauma, many blurt out a final confession—often admitting the betrayal that consigned them to their fate in Monadhan.
September 20 09
|
D u n g e o n 170
10
Betrayal at Monadhan
When a monster dies during this adventure, have it deliver a sentence or two of confession referencing some act of betrayal. Such a confession might be: ✦ Military: “I left Olaf to die;” “We burned our tunics, then joined the refugees;” “We told the prisoners we’d guard them, but then we got so hungry…” ✦ Political: “I poisoned the Count so I could marry the Countess;” “I swore that Morrin was pilfering from the treasury alone, but really it was both of us…” ✦ Religious: “I swore I’d bury him near the chapel, but they wanted too much recompense;” “When they asked if I’d convert, of course I said yes…” ✦ Familial: “Jorrek isn’t really the father;” “Uncle was going to split the farmland, but then Laria leaned too far over the well…” ✦ Romantic: “Of course I told her I loved her;” “No one knew about the maiden in the tower…” ✦ Innocuous: “It was I who took the master’s monocle;” “I sometimes caught seven fish, rather than the six we were allowed…” ✦ Cryptic: “I told her to go first;” “There were three torches after all;” “The fingernails are underneath the rug…”
If you have some committed actors at your table, encourage them to blurt out a confession of some sort if they’re knocked unconscious, stunned, or take a lot of damage from a single attack. The blurted confession can be a good way for a player to get across a character’s shady past, old regrets, or other aspects of a personal backstory that otherwise wouldn’t have the opportunity to surface.
The Jungle It takes two days of walking through winding jungle paths to reach Monadhan’s shantytown and the second part of the adventure. If the PCs want to use overland flight or other means to short-circuit the journey, let them. They’re missing out on two basic combat encounters and the chance to take their epic powers on a test run, but there aren’t any major plot implications for doing so.
W1: The Eight of Us Say Welcome A hydra arises from the shallow pool where it’s been sleeping to menace the PCs. Tactical Encounter: The Eight of Us Say Welcome (page 20).
W2: The Death Giant’s Pet The PCs find a more direct path to the Monadhan shantytown, only to meet a death giant and his pet chuul patrolling it. It’s possible that the PCs will try to capture the death giant rather than killing him outright. If they succeed, you have two choices: run an impromptu skill challenge to cover the interrogation, or have the death giant “betray” the PCs and tell them all he knows only to switch back to Arantor’s side when it’s most inconvenient for the PCs or dramatic for the story. From a captured death giant, the PCs can learn that Arantor lives in the lowermost of “magic caves” beneath the ruined keep, and he never leaves his lair. He’s served by many death giants along with some cambions and a few rakshasas. The death giant is in the dark about Arantor’s history, his weaknesses, or his ultimate aims. Even among the death giants, this particular fellow is ill-informed because he’s always out in the jungle with his pet chuul, not in the caves or the shantytown with the other death giants. Tactical Encounter: The Death Giant’s Pet (page 21).
September 20 09
|
D u n g e o n 170
11
Betrayal at Monadhan
Part 2: Shantytown The PCs reach the shantytown at the center of Monadhan without too much trouble. Once there, they must interact with the Shantytown residents in an effort to learn where the portal onward is. This part of the adventure is intentionally freeform. Some D&D groups will relish the opportunity to investigate a community where everyone has a darkly fascinating, betrayal-laden past. Others will want to make a quick Streetwise check or two and keep all that conversation abstract. Either approach is
fine; it’s just a matter of knowing the preference of the players at your table. The simplest way to proceed is for PCs to make DC 22 Streetwise checks. The first success reveals the Sarissa clue below, and the second success reveals the Rolain clue below. If you want to expand the investigation, here are some factors to consider: ✦ The PCs are epic tier, and the vast majority of the shantytown residents aren’t. Other than Kas’s crew (described in encounters T1-T3) and the death giant patrols that occasionally
come through the shantytown (use the giants in encounter C7 if you like), no one is capable of even scratching the characters’ armor, much less offering an actual challenge in battle. ✦ No one gets to Monadhan without first committing a betrayal so cruel that it garnered supernatural imprisonment as a response. Most of the shantytown’s residents are damaged goods: insane, depressed, paranoid, or habitually blaming everyone but themselves for their fate. Some are wracked with guilt while others deny that they did anything to deserve their fate. Either way, few are pleasant to be around. Whether you play out a detailed investigation or not, all this effort should get the PCs two valuable pieces of information: ✦ Sarissa the seer knows about the portal. She lives in a hut on the edge of the shantytown. ✦ A mysterious figure named Rolain can supposedly go into Arantor’s lair and emerge alive. (It’s actually Kas, not Rolain, that can do this, but the denizens of the shantytown don’t know that.) Rolain can be found at midnight at the shantytown’s graveyard. With these two clues in hand, it’s likely that the PCs will visit Sarissa first, because they can do so at any time (Rolain appears at only midnight). While the PCs are learning all of this, Kas’s crew of vampires is learning about them, which leads into the encounters that follow.
September 20 09
|
D u n g e o n 170
12
Betrayal at Monadhan
T1: Seer’s Hut Compared to most of the shantytown’s residents, Sarissa is relatively pleasant. She says that she’ll answer questions for a hundred gold coins each, an amount that should be a pittance for the heroes at this point but is a fortune for her. Sarissa explains that Arantor, the dark lord who rules Monadhan, hasn’t been seen in years. She doesn’t know how to reach his lair. She knows that Arantor guards a dark portal that leads onward from Monadhan, but she doesn’t know where it goes. She volunteers that whether the PCs want to depart Monadhan through the mists or through the portal, they’ll need the key of Monadhan: whatever object within the domain is most representative of betrayal. Those who depart take the key with them, so the exact nature of the key changes. After staring into her fire for a moment, Sarissa says that the current key to Monadhan is the Sword of Kas. If the PCs have never heard of Kas, Sarissa can provide some basic exposition: Kas was once a trusted lieutenant of Vecna’s, but Kas betrayed Vecna and cut off Vecna’s hand, then escaped. Both Vecna’s dismembered hand and the Sword of Kas are now artifacts, and Vecna is still chasing after Kas, eager for revenge. As soon as Sarissa tells the PCs about the key to Monadhan, the vampires attack. Tactical Encounter: Seer’s Hut (page 23).
T2: Shantytown A figure that flees from the seer’s hut at the end of that fight draws the characters back into the heart of the shantytown. (The callophage vampire is the best choice, but a spy minion of Kas will do just as
well.) There they meet more of Kas’s crew, including Gwenth, a powerful vampire. Tactical Encounter: T2: Shantytown (page 25).
T3: Graveyard The PCs seek out the mysterious Rolain, only to learn (probably as they’re fighting him) that he too works for Kas. Tactical Encounter: Graveyard (page 27).
T4: Desecrated Graveyard When the PCs defeat Rolain, the graveyard itself comes alive and attacks. Sometimes the PCs never get an even break. Tactical Encounter: Desecrated Graveyard (page 29).
Talking to Kas Kas himself arrives at the graveyard after encounter T4. He doesn’t want to fight; he’s looking to make a deal. Kas’s offer is simple: He will reveal the dragon lord’s weakness if the adventurers retrieve his sword and return it to him. Kas might—might—be able to beat Arantor, but he can’t fight while dealing with the magic of the lower cavern (the skill challenge, in other words). The PCs, on the other hand, can do both simultaneously. The characters are probably in no condition to fight Kas immediately after their encounters with Rolain and the denizens of the graveyard. If they do, he’ll happily trade blows with them; his stat block is on page 55. But Kas is not interested in killing them, at least not yet, and he’s still amenable to a deal when the PCs realize that a level 26 solo soldier is a tough nut to crack.
Once the PCs agree to Kas’s offer, or at least engage in sincere negotiation, Kas tells an abbreviated version of Arantor’s story: Arantor was a silver dragon who fought bravely in the war between the dragonborn and the tieflings, many centuries ago. He attacked the town of Monadhan, not realizing it was full of civilians. Mad with grief and shame, he tried to cover up his crime, but his own daughter confronted him. Arantor murdered his daughter to protect his guilt, and thus the Domain of Betrayal was born. Now Arantor spends all his time in the lowest depths of the caves beneath the shantytown. His betrayal was so heinous that parts of his past come to life periodically in the lair…just to torment Arantor, I think. If you find a way to insinuate yourself into those illusions of the past, Arantor’s grief and shame will weaken him. Use the word “Imrissa”— that was the name of Arantor’s daughter. But beware! Death giants and undead guardians stand watch in the upper chambers. Simply becoming lost down there is a constant danger. The walls themselves can betray you… What Kas doesn’t know (but the PCs should) is that the sword itself is the key, making it the only way anyone can get out of Monadhan. At this point, the seed of betrayal has been planted. For the PCs to complete their mission, they must break their deal and betray Kas the Betrayer.
September 20 09
|
D u n g e o n 170
13
Betrayal at Monadhan
Part 3: Caverns Now the PCs have reached the meat of the adventure: a series of linked caves with the dark lord Arantor at the bottom. They’ll fight through the death giants, cambions, and other followers of Arantor as they descend further and further. The shifting nature of the caves makes retreat more difficult, and unlike the vampires in the shantytown, these monsters have had years to hone their tactics against intruders. Eventually, the PCs reach the lowest cavern, where Arantor himself makes his lair. If they can slay the undead dragon—a task involving a simultaneous skill challenge and a to-the-death combat—they can win the sword of Kas for themselves and earn their ticket out of Monadhan and onward to Vaerothim.
The Shifting Caves The six chambers that comprise the upper part of the chamber are near the heart of Arantor’s domain, and thus they express betrayal in an unusual way: The winding passages that connect the six chambers change every few hours. In other words, the map itself will betray the characters after a few encounters. At first, the six chambers are arranged in layout A, with winding, 20-foot-wide tunnels connecting them. The tunnels curve and descend enough that PCs can never see more than 20 squares in front or behind them. Each tunnel is about a quarter mile long. Each X in the layout is a dead end—a 10-square by 10-square chamber devoid of monsters or treasure. Whenever the PCs take an extended rest or reach a dead end, the layout of the caves shifts to one of the three alternatives. Either roll randomly or choose the layout that delivers the best drama. The PCs don’t notice the shift when it happens, but a DC 25 Dungeoneering check should tell them that any tunnel they’ve recently walked down is subtly different now. PCs can identify the direction of the Chamber of Rivers (C1) from any adjacent chamber with a DC 30 Perception check to hear the running water.
September 20 09
|
D u n g e o n 170
14
Betrayal at Monadhan
finding the tunnel that leads to the lower cavern, and after they’ve visited a few rooms, they know which layout they’re dealing with.
Resting in the Caves It’s likely that PCs will need to take an extended rest during their exploration of the upper caves, and the shifting caves may make them reluctant to ascend all the way to the surface. They can camp in the dead ends or in a chamber they’ve already cleared. If they do, a death giant patrol (first C7, then C8) arrives 1d4 hours after they start resting.
C1: Cavern of Rivers This chamber—always the one closest to the surface— is where the PCs think they’re fighting a dark naga and some cambions. Then they are surprised by a fell troll that surfaces from underneath the waterfall. Tactical Encounter: Cavern of Rivers (page 31).
C2: Cavern of Cliffs The shifting caves aren’t intended to be a headscratching puzzle. There are only four possible configurations after all, and nobody at the table is having fun if the PCs wander through empty cave after empty cave. You want to use the shifting configuration of the caves for two reasons. First, you want it to shake the PCs up a bit and remind them that in Monadhan, they can’t take anything for granted. Second, it’s an opportunity to make sure that PCs experience most if not all of the upper caverns while still giving them the freedom of choice that they so cherish. At the point where the shifting caves become an impediment to gameplay, dispense with the shifting and get the PCs down to the lower cavern.
The shifting caves also contribute to the likelihood that the PCs will occasionally backtrack. When they do, spring encounter C7, then C8 on them. You can delay those encounters according to your sense of pacing, but make sure that the PCs have had both death giant encounters by the time they reach the lower cavern. The denizens of the caves have to deal with their shifting nature as well (everyone but Arantor does), but they’re used to it by now—”Of course the walls betray us … doesn’t everything?” they say. As a practical matter, few of them leave their chambers. The death giants trying to visit Arantor just accept that they’ll have to wander around for a while before
Flight is at a premium when PCs contend with flying devils in a room with many plateaus—and lots of sheer cliffs to push one’s foes from. The devils were caught in a double-cross between archdevils and found themselves in Monadhan for their betrayal. They believe that their sentence will be over soon and that they’ll somehow be restored back to the Nine Hells. In the meantime, they’ve sold their services to Arantor in a feudal arrangement—protection in exchange for service. Tactical Encounter: Cavern of Cliffs (page 34).
C3: Cavern of Sulfur This encounter features undead that Arantor ritually created shortly after awaking in Monadhan.
September 20 09
|
D u n g e o n 170
15
Betrayal at Monadhan
The rest of Arantor’s undead minions call this chamber, full of floating rock platforms, their home. Like encounter C2, it rewards PCs who can fly and punishes those who aren’t quick enough to get from platform to platform before they break apart. Tactical Encounter: Cavern of Air (page 39).
castellan of the exchequer who appropriated his lord’s funds to his lord’s rivals. Macaebus is a “last chance exposition” NPC. If the PCs have somehow missed key information (like the basics of Arantor’s history or the fact that you need an object of great betrayal to leave Monadhan), Macaebus can provide it. He’s a noncombatant, but that doesn’t mean he doesn’t possess useful information. And if your table favors a number of social encounters, you can make the information exchange with Macaebus into a full-blown skill challenge. Tactical Encounter: Cavern of Truth (page 42).
C5: Cavern of Truth
C6: Cavern of Statues
Rakshasa mercenaries with a history of double-crossing their employers live in this chamber and torture the “informants” that the death giants occasionally drag down from the shantytown. Arantor pays them well, and they’re a little reluctant to double-cross him—yet. If you need to introduce a new PC to the adventure (either because you have a new player or because a PC died and wasn’t raised), the jail cells in this chamber are a good place to do so. The existing heroes can “rescue” the new PC, and the new PC should quickly realize that the other PCs are the best way out of Monadhan. Have the new character figure out what betrayal resulted in a one-way trip to Monadhan. If the player is reluctant to play someone known for betrayal, you can posit some arcane experiment gone awry to explain the new PCs’ presence—or suggest an NPC that, when viewed through the players’ eyes, deserved betrayal. This cavern also has an NPC, Macaebus, whom the PCs can rescue. Macaebus is just a frightened resident of the shantytown now, and he was once a
This chamber is the only one of the upper chambers that Arantor regularly visits—and he comes here only once every few months. More cambions stand guard here, and the PCs may find some clues of use in the next adventure: “Grasp of the Mantled Citadel.” Tactical Encounter: Cavern of Statues (page 45).
The undead are oblivious to the chamber’s greatest danger: toxic fumes that erupt from geysers in the floor and poison the living. Tactical Encounter: Cavern of Sulfur (page 37).
C4: Cavern of Air
C7: Death Giant Reinforcements This encounter isn’t tied to a specific location—it’s a patrol of the death giants that Arantor trusts to handle the day-to-day rulership of the shantytown and the jungles of Monadhan. The encounter doesn’t depend on the specific terrain in the chamber—though the giants know the caverns well enough to use whatever advantage they can get—so you can spring this on the PCs whenever you like. Tactical Encounter: Death Giant Reinforcements (page 48).
the heroes have roused the ire of the death giant boss, Bahlik Gur, and his retinue. Like the previous death giant encounter, this one isn’t tied to any specific location—use it whenever the PCs think they’re going someplace safe, such as an already-cleared chamber or a dead end. Tactical Encounter: Death Giant Boss (page 50).
C9: Lower Cavern This encounter, the climax of “Betrayal at Monadhan,” pits the PCs against Arantor himself. Arantor is a level 25 solo, but if the PCs can somehow simultaneously fight Arantor and perform a skill challenge to get the ghosts of Arantor’s past to haunt him anew, the fight becomes easier. You can deliver a satisfying conclusion to the adventure if you apply enough pressure that the players feel like they’re being stretched thin—not quite enough characters for the fight and not quite enough for the skill challenge. When this encounter is over, the PCs will negotiate with Kas as described in the Aftermath section (page 17), or possibly fight him, if they provoke him enough, before heading through the portal to Vaerothim. Tactical Encounter: Lower Cavern (page 52).
Aftermath Once Arantor falls and the PCs obtain the Sword of Kas, it’s time for them to head through the portal and on to the next adventure: “Grasp of the Mantled Citadel.” First, though, they’ll “betray” Kas the Betrayer himself.
C8: Death Giant Boss
Confrontation with Kas
Once the PCs rest or backtrack again after dealing with encounter C7, you can use this encounter. Now
As mentioned in encounter C9, Kas appears at the entrance to the lower cavern shortly after one of the
September 20 09
|
D u n g e o n 170
16
Betrayal at Monadhan
PCs takes the Sword of Kas from Arantor’s hoard. Time Kas’s appearance so that the PCs are closer to the portal than Kas is. It’s not entirely fair to put a level 26 solo between the PCs and safety—especially after they just fought a level 25 solo. Kas isn’t exactly a creature of subtlety. He wants his sword, he wants it now, and no wet-behind-theears mortal interlopers are going to keep it from him.
Make sure that the PCs have ample time to gather Arantor’s treasure and any fallen comrades. If they move toward the portal, that’s good—Kas certainly makes no move to stop them. He’s focused totally on obtaining the sword and doesn’t realize that he’s practically goading the characters to abscond with it. Only when the first PC disappears through the portal will Kas realize what’s happened.
“We have our bargain, mortals!” Kas says. “Surrender my sword to me now, and I may … may … let you ascend to the surface.”
“No! You cannot leave with my sword! The betrayer cannot be betrayed! Come back, you fools!”
In the likely event the PCs don’t immediately hand over the sword, Kas gets angrier. His desire to be reunited with his sword is clouding his judgment, so he’s being neither diplomatic nor particularly clever in his handling of the situation.
The most likely course of events is that the PCs banter a bit with Kas, then head through the portal and on to the next adventure. But players are delightfully unpredictable—and that’s a good thing. The PCs Fight Kas: If this looks inevitable, roll initiative and get on with it. The PCs have had a short rest, but a battle with Kas comes on the heels of the battle with Arantor. Maneuver Kas so that the PCs can change their minds and flee through the portal if they’re overmatched, but otherwise don’t pull punches with Kas. He’s a soldier, so he’s durable but less likely to deal high spikes of damage. If the PCs win, they can go through the portal at their leisure. If they’re losing, they’ll probably retreat through the portal. If they’re being particularly clueless (it happens to every table once in a while), you can have a shadowy figure on the other side of the portal beckon toward them. If things go off the rails and the PCs get wiped out by Kas, they deserve what they get … which is a new unlife as Kas’s vampires. But even then, the adventure path isn’t over. Kas isn’t part of the Bahamut/Tiamat struggle, but he becomes intensely curious about it and sends vampire versions
“Fools! You are mere worms; I could take that sword from you, then bathe it in your blood. You cannot betray me! That’s .. unthinkable folly!” Then Kas jumps down from the ledge and starts walking toward the PCs, but he does so slowly. All the while, he talks about the dark things he and his sword will accomplish if reunited. Improvise here, but watch that Kas doesn’t slip into Gollumesque “my precious” parody.
“Give me my sword, for I have dark designs that extend beyond this dreary prison. All that you’ve seen so far is prologue. Give it to me, and I’ll let you live long enough to see my triumph!”
If Things Go Off Track
of the PCs to Vaerothim to find out what’s going on. The game is still afoot, but the PCs have a new wrinkle in that they need a cure for vampirism and a way to break free of Kas in addition to everything else on their plates. The PCs Give Kas the Sword: It’s possible that particularly hidebound PCs will honor a bargain with a guy whose sobriquet is “the betrayer.” Right before they do so, have Kas lay it on thick: “Ah, think of the wondrous terrors my sword and I will bring into being!” If they really, truly give Kas the sword, then he either fights the PCs (if you think the PCs have any fight left in them) or insults them as he heads through the portal. Now Monadhan essentially resets itself. The PCs see faint stirrings near Arantor’s corpse. He returns to unlife in 24 hours. And there’s a new object of great betrayal somewhere in Monadhan. The PCs can visit the seer (if alive) or use ritual means to discover what it is. Then they must attain it (probably after a short adventure you create) and then face Arantor once more.
September 20 09
|
D u n g e o n 170
17
Betrayal at Monadhan
S1: On the Side of the Angels Encounter Level 21 (16,000 XP)
Setup Angel of secrets (A) This is a negotiation, pure and simple. The PCs will strike a deal with Rachaela and learn more about what to expect in Monadhan. When the PCs enter the chamber, read: You enter the room to find an angel with a stern countenance floating at the far end of a long table. She wears a white tabard with a red gauntlet design along the edge. The angel bows and motions for you to sit. Wine goblets appear out of nowhere at each seat. “I am Rachaela, and I bear news of your wider efforts,” she says. “Despite your recent successes and the Coalition’s victories, Tiamat’s plotting continues unabated. Even as we speak, one of her exarchs is guarding a ritualist of unparalleled potency. We do not know exactly what ritual they are working on, but if Tiamat is placing such importance on the ritual, we cannot afford to let it come to fruition. We want you to stop the exarch, Mornujhar, and capture or kill the ritualist. “But it won’t be easy. You’ll need to pass through part of the Shadowfell known as Monadhan, the Domain of Betrayal, just to reach a portal that connects to Mornujhar’s fortress. Will you aid us one more time?”
On the Side of Angels Skill Challenge
Level 21 XP 3,200
Complexity: 1 (requires 4 successes before 3 failures). Primary Skills: Diplomacy, Insight, Religion. Diplomacy (DC 22, standard action) The character impresses Rachaela with his forthright demeanor and ability. This earns the heroes one success. It’s also a chance for Rachaela to provide additional detail in her reply. “Once you get to Monadhan, you won’t be able to simply use a teleportation ritual to get back here. You must find a portal— probably guarded by Arantor, the dark lord of the domain—and use it to move onward toward the black exarch.” Insight (DC 27, standard action) A successful Insight check not only earns the characters a success, but it suggests that Rachaela is holding something back. If pressed, she’ll say she’s hiding who her superiors are. ” There is some risk you’ ll be captured, and I am sending you to the Domain of Betrayal, after all. I trust you, but I worry about the supernatural power of betrayal in such a place. Best to be circumspect.” Religion (DC 14, standard action) You can garner only one success with this skill. In addition to earning a success, the PC learns that the red gauntlet motif on Rachaela’s tabard resembles iconography used by priests of Kord several centuries ago. If asked about Kord directly, Rachaela smiles and says, “Suffice it to say that I admire Kord’s strength.”
Secondary Skills: Intimidate, Religion. Intimidate (DC 27, standard action) Having a tough demeanor, if skillfully done, can impress Rachaela. This doesn’t earn any successes directly but provides a +2 bonus on the next check made by a primary skill. Religion (DC 25/30/25, standard action) A PC can make a monster knowledge check during the skill challenge. This doesn’t earn any successes, but it does give the PCs some idea of what they’re dealing with. A 25 or higher on the Religion check reveals that Rachaela is an angel of secrets, an immortal humanoid with the angel subtype (obviously). A 30 or higher also reveals the basics of its memory blade, mind lash, roaring revelation, and foresight powers. A 35 or higher reveals it has resist 10 radiant and is immune to disease and fear. Success: Rachaela agrees to give the PCs treasure parcels A, B, and C before they leave for Monadhan, and the extra rewards mentioned in “Grasp of the Mantled Citadel” when they return victorious. She will perform the Planar Portal ritual to send the PCs to Monadhan or provide the sigil sequence so the PCs can do so themselves. Failure: Rachaela gives the PCs their choice of treasure parcels A, B, or C (but not all three) and just the normal award at the end of the next adventure. She’ll perform the Planar Portal ritual for the PCs.
September 20 09
|
D u n g e o n 170
18
Betrayal at Monadhan
This angel has a genuine mission for the PCs, and she truly wants them to succeed. But she also has a few secrets of her own: her real name is Niuria, and she serves Vecna. She won’t reveal this under any circumstances and carefully chose her clothing to suggest that she serves Kord. Begin the skill challenge once Rachaela has laid out the mission in broad terms—something along the lines of the readaloud text above. This is more than an ordinary skill challenge, because the negotiations with Rachaela serve two purposes. First, they are indeed a challenge for the PCs. Second, it’s a chance for you to provide key exposition that sets up the rest of the adventure, whether or not the characters overcome this challenge.
Angel of Secrets (A)
Level 22 Elite Controller
Large immortal humanoid (angel) XP 8,300 Initiative +20 Senses Perception +23; darkvision Angelic Presence Attacks against the angel of secrets take a -2 penalty until the angel is bloodied; once bloodied, the penalty increases to -4. HP 408; Bloodied 204 AC 36; Fortitude 34, Reflex 34, Will 36 Immune disease, fear; Resist 10 radiant Saving Throws +2 Speed 6, fly 8 (hover) Action Points 1 m Memory Blade (Standard, at-will) ✦ Psychic Reach 2; +27 vs. AC; 3d6 + 8 psychic damage, and the target can’t use encounter powers or daily powers until the end of the angel’s next turn. R Mind Lash (Standard, at-will) ✦ Psychic Ranged 10; +25 vs. Will; 2d10 + 8 psychic damage, and the target is dazed until the end of the angel’s next turn. C Roaring Revelation (Standard, encounter and when reduced to 0 hit points) ✦ Psychic, Thunder Close burst 5; targets enemies; +23 vs. Fortitude; 2d10 + 8 psychic and thunder damage, and the target is stunned until the end of the angel’s next turn. Foresight (Immediate Interrupt, when attacked, recharge 5 6) ✦ Teleportation The angel of secrets teleports 4 squares and makes a memory blade attack. Alignment Unaligned Languages All Skills Arcana +22, History +22, Stealth +20 Str 22 (+17) Dex 18 (+15) Wis 23 (+17) Con 20 (+16) Int 23 (+17) Cha 27 (+19) Equipment memory sword, cloak of angels, chainmail.
September 20 09
|
D u n g e o n 170
19
Betrayal at Monadhan
W1: The Eight of Us Say Welcome Encounter Level 20 (14,000 XP)
Setup 1 heroslayer hydra (H) The PCs’ first task is to get to the Shantytown, Monadhan’s sole settlement. To do so, they have a lot of jungle to cross, and along the way, they’ll encounter a hydra. When the adventurers get within about 10 squares of the pool, read: You’ve been working your way away from the mists and into the forest, and now you’ve reached a clearing with a pool of murky water in the center of it. Before you even have a chance to approach, a five-headed reptile erupts from underwater. It bellows as, one by one, each head turns to regard you. Then it lurches forward, five jaws opening wide.
Tactics This is a straightforward battle, a sort of “shakedown cruise” for players still getting used to their epic-level abilities. The hydra doesn’t have any connection to the ongoing plot; sometimes a monster is just a monster. Your goal in this battle isn’t to play the monster optimally. You’ll have plenty of time for that later. Instead, try to give the players a warm-up fight that lets them flex their epic muscles before the more difficult encounters ahead. From the players’ perspective, the hydra is a very well-behaved beast. Because it wants to take advantage of its heroslayer bonus, it almost always accedes to the marked condition and attacks the party defender. Watch for critical hits from the PCs—they recharge
the rampage attack. When not rampaging, have the hydra concentrate its attacks on the defender, because doing so gets you a certain +2 attack and +5 damage, plus the possibility of another 10 damage if you hit with two bite attacks. Don’t be shy about moving, even if it provokes opportunity attacks. The hydra has almost 800 hit points, after all, and damage just makes it grow more heads. You want as many PCs as possible nearby, both for the rampage and more importantly for threatening reach. Because the hydra is huge, it can move through PC squares as long as it doesn’t end its turn on top of a PC. (PCs can also move through the hydra’s squares, provoking opportunity attacks as usual.)
Features of the Area: Illumination: Monadhan never gets brighter than an overcast day, but its skies never go completely dark, either. Water: Near the center of the encounter area, mark a 4 x 4 square as deep water, then surround that with roughly three squares of shallow water, making an asymmetrical pond. The hydra starts submerged in the deep water. The squares marked as shallow water are difficult terrain. The deep water is about 10 feet deep. That’s difficult terrain for the hydra, and large or smaller creatures trying to fight in deep water suffer the penalties and restrictions of aquatic combat (described on page 45 of the Dungeon Master’s Guide). Vegetation: The exact location of bushes and trees doesn’t matter. Just scatter contiguous squares of vegetation as you see fit. The vegetation is obscuring terrain that provides concealment and is difficult terrain. Tree Trunks: In the middle of some vegetation squares, leave a square (or even a 2 x 2 space) as blocking terrain—the trunk of the banyanlike trees
that make up much of Monadhan’s jungle. Climbing a tree requires a DC 15 Athletics check. Ascending 20 feet grants concealment from obscuring leaves. The top of the jungle canopy is 50 feet above ground. Heroslayer Hydra (H)
Level 20 Solo Brute
Huge natural beast (reptile) XP 14,000 Initiative +14 Senses Perception +19; all-around vision HP 776; Bloodied 388 AC 32; Fortitude 34, Reflex 30, Will 30 Saving Throws +5 Speed 6 Action Points 2 m Bite (Standard, at-will) Reach 3; +23 vs. AC; 1d10 + 8 damage. M Hydra Fury (Standard, at-will) The heroslayer hydra makes five bite attacks, plus an additional attack for each head it has grown (see regenerating heads). A target hit by more than one bite attack in a round takes 10 extra damage. M Rampage (Standard, recharges when a critical hit is scored against the heroslayer hydra) The hydra makes one bite attack against each enemy within reach. On a hit, the target takes ongoing 10 damage (save ends). Heroslayer While a heroslayer hydra is marked, it gains a +2 bonus to attack rolls and a +5 bonus to damage rolls against the creature that marked it. Many-Headed Each time a heroslayer hydra would become dazed or stunned, it instead loses one attack while using hydra fury during its next turn. The hydra can be dazed or stunned multiple times. Regenerating Heads When a heroslayer hydra first reaches 582, 388, and 194 hit points, a head is destroyed. At the start of the hydra’s next turn after a head is destroyed, two heads grow in the lost head’s place, and the hydra gains an additional bite attack with hydra fury. Threatening Reach A heroslayer hydra can make opportunity attacks against all enemies within its reach (3 squares). Alignment Chaotic evil Languages — Str 23 (+16) Dex 19 (+14) Wis 18 (+14) Con 26 (+18) Int 2 (+6) Cha 9 (+9)
September 20 09
|
D u n g e o n 170
20
Betrayal at Monadhan
W2: The Death Giant’s Pet Encounter Level 21 (14,350 XP)
Setup 1 chuul juggernaut (C) 1 death giant soulcatcher (D) Most of the death giants in Arantor’s employ use steel predators as guardians and pets. This giant is experimenting with an alternative. After much trial and error, he’s trained one of the chuuls that inhabit Monadhan’s jungles. The chuul fears the caves, however, so the death giant is stuck patrolling far from base with its pet. As the characters work their way through the jungle, read: You’re making faster progress now, because you’ve found a relatively straight path through the jungle. It looks as if someone—or someones, more likely—cut their way through the vegetation with a machete. Perception Check DC 10: Whatever made this path was dragging something massive—maybe its own tail. DC 20: A large creature wearing boots accompanied the dragging creature.
Chuul Juggernaut (C)
Level 23 Elite Soldier
Huge aberrant magical beast (aquatic) XP 10,200 Initiative +17 Senses Perception +17; darkvision Psychic Moan (Psychic) aura 1; a chuul juggernaut exudes a constant hum of psychic energy. Enemies in the aura take a -2 penalty to Will defense and gain vulnerable 5 psychic. HP 434; Bloodied 217 AC 39; Fortitude 37, Reflex 31, Will 33 Saving Throws +2 Speed 7, swim 7 Action Points 1 m Claw (Standard, at-will) Reach 3; +30 vs. AC; 2d8 + 8 damage, or 5d8 + 8 damage against an immobilized creature. M Double Attack (Standard, at-will) ✦ Poison The chuul juggernaut makes two claw attacks. If both claw attacks hit a single target, the chuul juggernaut makes a secondary attack against the same target with its tentacles. Secondary Attack +28 vs. Fortitude; the target is immobilized (save ends). R Psychic Lure (Standard, at-will) ✦ Psychic Ranged 10; +29 vs. Will; 2d10 + 3 psychic damage, and the target is pulled 5 squares. Tentacle Net ✦ Poison A creature hit by a chuul juggernaut’s opportunity attack is immobilized until the end of the juggernaut’s next turn. Alignment Unaligned Languages Deep Speech Str 27 (+19) Dex 19 (+15) Wis 22 (+17) Con 25 (+18) Int 4 (+8) Cha 16 (+14)
The encounter is a meeting engagement; the death giant and chuul are using their trail from yesterday’s patrol to start today’s patrol, so they’re heading away from the shantytown just as the PCs are heading toward it.
Death Giant Soulcatcher (D)
Level 22 Controller
Large shadow humanoid (giant) XP 4,150 Initiative +16 Senses Perception +19; darkvision Soulsnatcher aura 10; a creature that dies within the aura bestows one soul shard to the soulcatcher (see soul shroud). HP 209; Bloodied 104 AC 36; Fortitude 35, Reflex 32, Will 35 Resist 15 necrotic Speed 8 m Soul Dagger (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon Reach 2; + 27 vs. AC; 2d6 + 8 damage and the target is immobilized until the end of the soulcatcher’s next turn. R Soul Shrive (standard; at-will) ✦ Necrotic Ranged 10; + 26 vs. Fortitude; the target is stunned and loses 1 healing surge at the start of its turn (save ends both). A target without healing surges takes damage equal to one quarter its total hit points. Each time the target loses a healing surge or takes damage from soul shrive, the soulcatcher gains a soul shard. A Soulfury Detonation (standard; must expend 3 soul shards; at-will) ✦ Necrotic Burst 2 within 10; +26 vs. Fortitude; 2d12 + 6 necrotic damage, and the target is dazed (save ends). Consume Soul Shard (minor; at-will) ✦ Healing The soulcatcher expends one soul shard and regains 20 hit points. Soul Shroud The soul shroud contains soul shards that swirl around the soulcatcher to protect and empower it. At the beginning of an encounter, the soul shroud contains four soul shards. While the soul shroud is depleted of soul shards, the soulcatcher takes a –2 penalty to attack rolls. Alignment Evil Languages Giant Skills Intimidate + 18 Str 28 (+20) Dex 20 (+16) Wis 22 (+17) Con 25 (+18) Int 12 (+12) Cha 15 (+13) Equipment leather armor, dagger
Nature Check DC 30: The cut-back vegetation bears the mark of something with pincers or mandibles—perhaps a chuul or umber hulk.
September 20 09
|
D u n g e o n 170
21
Betrayal at Monadhan
Tactics This is the first contact the PCs have with someone actually loyal to Arantor; a lone death giant scout that patrols the jungle. Chuul: The chuul juggernaut makes a double attack whenever it can, hoping to also make the immobilizing secondary attack. If it can’t reach the PCs with a single move, it uses psychic lure to bring a PC closer. Remember that because the chuul is huge, it can move through PCs’ squares as long as it doesn’t end its movement there (and the PCs can do likewise).
Death Giant Soulcatcher: The soulcatcher stays a square or two behind the chuul and uses soul shrive until it’s built up four soul shards: enough for a soulfury detonation with a soul shard left over to avoid the –2 attack penalty. Remind players hit by soul shrive that they’ve lost their healing surges only temporarily. They’ll get the healing surges back when they make the saving throw. The chuul juggernaut fights until slain, but the death giant will try to flee if reduced below 30 hit points. Such a retreat is unlikely to be successful if the PCs are still in fighting trim.
Features of the Area: Illumination: Monadhan never gets brighter than an overcast day, but its skies never go completely dark, either. Vegetation: The exact location of the bushes and trees doesn’t matter. Just scatter contiguous squares of vegetation as you see fit. The vegetation is obscuring terrain that provides concealment and is difficult terrain. Tree Trunks: In the middle of some vegetation squares, leave a square (or even a 2 x 2 space) as blocking terrain—the trunk of the banyanlike trees that make up much of Monadhan’s jungle. Climbing a tree requires a DC 15 Athletics check. Ascending 20 feet grants concealment from obscuring leaves. The top of the jungle canopy is 50 feet above ground.
September 20 09
|
D u n g e o n 170
22
Betrayal at Monadhan
T1: Seer’s Hut Encounter Level 22 (17,900 XP)
Setup 1 cambion soulthief (S) 1 callophage vampire (C) 3 disfigured vampires (N) The PCs’ investigation leads them to Monadhan’s seer, but she’s not alone. Kas’s agents try to capture or kill the PCs before they can learn more about the nature of the domain they’re in. When the PCs reach a suitably dramatic point in their discussion with the Seer of Monadhan, read: A woman in tattered robes calls out from the street, “Sarissa! Oh, seer! I trust I’m not interrupting anything. Ah, I see you have guests. . . .” Perception Check DC 25: The woman on the street is standing at the edge of a puddle in the road, but you don’t see her reflection in the puddle. The “woman” is a callophage vampire created by a ritual known to her master, Kas the Betrayer. Kas is in Monadhan seeking his sword, so he’s told his agents here to be on the lookout for powerful visitors. When strangers come to Monadhan, Kas’s agents are under orders to kill or capture them. As long as at least one newcomer survives, Kas figures he can learn what he needs to know through interrogation. If all the newcomers happen to die, there’s always the Speak with Dead ritual.
Tactics Kas’s crew is out to kill the PCs, but they’re also trying to learn why the PCs have come to the Shantytown in the first place. During the battle, they’ll converse with the PCs and try to get information from them. They aren’t interested in negotiation or parley, however; they’ll fight fiercely throughout any conversation. Cambion Soulthief: The soulthief is circling overhead invisibly at the start of the fight but lands with a move action during its first turn and makes a longsword attack or a double lunge, dealing the extra damage from combat advantage. It tries to shift away and use soul grasp in the following round. Ideally, it makes a soul grasp attack, then turns invisible and teleports with soul fuel (if the soul grasp hits) or flies to a spot with cover or concealment (if the soul grasp misses). Disfigured Vampire: The disfigured vampires come out of the shanties at the start of their turn and engage the nearest PCs in melee. They’re straightforward combatants, resorting to blood drain only if they need hit points and are flanking a PC or are within range of a PC in the callophage’s clutches. Don’t forget to use their gaze attacks twice: when bloodied and when they die. Callophage Vampire: The callophage vampire wades into the middle of the PCs immediately, trying to hit as many as possible with its alluring visage. Then it claws a PC, following with a disfiguring bite. Once the callophage has disfigured an enemy, it makes a stolen beauty attack against a character who’s trying to stay out of the fray, such as a wizard or other ranged controller. The soulthiefs and disfigured vampires fight until slain, but if the callophage vampire is below 50 hit points and it looks as if the monsters are losing, she’ll
polymorph into mist form and flee into the heart of the Monadhan shantytown. Whether the PCs give chase right away or after a short rest, they are led into encounter T2. Sarissa: Sarissa is a noncombatant. She doesn’t need to survive this encounter. One of Kas’s crew can slay her with a single attack. Cambion Soulthief (S)
Level 22 Lurker
Medium immortal humanoid (devil) XP 4,150 Initiative +22 Senses Perception +18; darkvision HP 156; Bloodied 78 AC 36; Fortitude 33, Reflex 35, Will 30 Resist 15 fire Speed 10, Fly 8 (clumsy) m Longsword (standard, at-will) ✦ Weapon +27 vs. AC; 2d6 + 8 damage. r Soul Grasp (standard; recharges when no enemy is affected by this power) ✦ Necrotic Ranged 10; +27 vs. Will; 1d10 + 8 necrotic damage, and the target takes ongoing 5 necrotic damage and is slowed (save ends both). First Failed Save: The target is immobilized instead of slowed (save ends). Second Failed Save: The target is stunned instead of immobilized (save ends). M Double Lunge (standard; must be invisible; at-will) ✦ Weapon The cambion soulthief makes a longsword attack against two targets. Combat Advantage The cambion soulthief deals 1d6 extra damage on melee attacks against any target granting combat advantage to it. Invisibility (standard, at-will) ✦ Illusion The cambion soulthief becomes invisible until it attacks. Soul Fuel (minor; a creature must be immobilized or stunned by this soulthief’s soul grasp; at-will) The cambion soulthief turns invisible until it attacks and teleports 10. The creature affected by soul grasp loses a healing surge and automatically saves against the effect of soul grasp. Alignment Evil Languages Common, Supernal Skills Stealth +23 Str 23 (+17) Dex 25 (+18) Wis 14 (+13) Con 18 (+15) Int 13 (+12) Cha 17 (+14) Equipment longsword, iron gauntlet
September 20 09
|
D u n g e o n 170
23
Betrayal at Monadhan
Callophage Vampire (C)
Level 22 Controller
Medium natural humanoid (undead) XP 4,150 Initiative +16 Senses Perception +19; darkvision HP 203; Bloodied 101 Regeneration 10 (regeneration does not function while the callophage vampire is exposed to direct sunlight) AC 36; Fortitude 33, Reflex 34, Will 35 Immune disease, poison; Resist 15 necrotic; Vulnerable 10 radiant Speed 6 m Claw (Standard; at-will) ✦ Necrotic +28 vs. AC; 2d8 + 6 damage, and the target is grabbed. M Blood Drain (Standard; must have combat advantage; recharges when an adjacent creature becomes bloodied) ✦ Healing +24 vs. Fortitude; 2d12 + 15 damage, and the target is weakened (save ends), and the callophage vampire regains 50 hit points. M Disfiguring Bite (Standard; at-will) ✦ Psychic Targets a creature grabbed by the callophage vampire; +26 vs.Fortitude; 3d8 + 5 damage, and the target takes ongoing 10 psychic damage and is dazed (save ends both). R Stolen Beauty (Standard; cannot be used until a disfiguring bite hits; recharges after each successful disfiguring bite) ✦ Charm, Psychic Ranged 10; +26 vs. Will; 3d10 + 3 psychic damage, and the target cannot use encounter attack powers, daily attack powers, or utility powers (save ends). Aftereffect: The target cannot willingly move closer to the callophage vampire (save ends). A Alluring Visage (standard; recharges when bloodied) ✦ Charm Close burst 10; +26 vs.Will; the target is pulled 3 squares and immobilized (save ends). Sustain Minor: Each creature that has not yet saved against the effect is pulled 3 squares and immobilized (save ends). Mist Form (standard; encounter) ✦ Polymorph The callophage vampire becomes insubstantial and gains a fly speed of 12, but cannot make attacks. The callophage vampire can remain in mist form for up to 1 hour or end the effect as a minor action. Alignment Evil Languages Common Skills Diplomacy +21, Streetwise +21 Str 18 (+15) Dex 20 (+16) Wis 17 (+14) Con 19 (+15) Int 20 (+16) Cha 21 (+16)
3 Disfigured Vampires (N)
Level 21 Brute
Medium natural humanoid (undead) XP 3,200 Initiative +12 Senses Perception +16; darkvision HP 245; Bloodied 122 Regeneration 10 (regeneration does not function while the disfigured vampire is exposed to direct sunlight) AC 33; Fortitude 34, Reflex 30, Will 31 Immune disease, poison; Resist 15 necrotic; Vulnerable 15 radiant Speed 6 m Vampiric Claw (Standard, at-will) ✦ Necrotic +24 vs. AC; 2d6 + 6 damage, and 10 ongoing necrotic damage (save ends). C Gaze Upon My Hideous Ruin (immediate reaction, when first bloodied and again when reduced to 0 hit points; at-will) ✦ Fear, Psychic Close burst 2; +22 vs. Will; 2d8 + 7 psychic damage, and the disfigured vampire pushes the target 5 squares. M Blood Drain (Standard; requires combat advantage; recharges when an adjacent creature becomes bloodied) ✦ Healing +23 vs. Fortitude; 2d12 + 13 damage, and the target is weakened (save ends), and the disfigured vampire regains 61 hit points. Alignment Evil Languages Common Str 23 (+16) Dex 15 (+12) Wis 13 (+11) Con 25 (+17) Int 7 (+8) Cha 17 (+13)
Features of the Area: Illumination: What passes for ambient light in Monadhan is the sources of light here. The vampires’ regeneration functions normally. Walls: The shanty walls provide cover, but they’re flimsy. Any attack that hits a wall, even an unarmed attack from a weak PC, creates a hole roughly 1 foot in diameter. Once there’s a hole, a creature can attack creatures on the other side of the wall and gain the benefit of superior cover (incoming attacks suffer a –5 penalty). A second hit in the same section of shanty wall makes the hole big enough to function as a doorway. Wrecked Shanty: The debris from collapsed shanty walls is difficult terrain. Vegetation: The thick bushes and vine-festooned trees offer concealment and are difficult terrain.
Fence: Jumping or vaulting across the fence at full speed requires a DC 20 Athletics or Acrobatics check. Those who fail the check get over the fence but end their movement in the square just beyond it. Creatures can also put holes in the fences the same as in the shanty walls. Sarissa’s Hut: Among Sarissa’s scant personal effects is treasure parcel D. If she survives the battle, she gives the treasure to the PCs in gratitude (but she keeps the gold they paid her). If Sarissa dies, the PCs find the treasure parcel near her corpse.
September 20 09
|
D u n g e o n 170
24
Betrayal at Monadhan
T2: Shantytown Encounter Level 22 (17,550 XP)
Setup Gwenth (G) 1 callophage vampire (C) 1 disfigured vampire (N) The PCs chase the mysterious figure fleeing from the battle at the seer’s hut only to find more of Kas’s agents ready to ambush them. When the characters approach the pool in the middle of the map, read: You see a pale woman in leather armor glide gracefully over the footbridge, drawing two short swords as she does so. Another vampire in tattered robes stands atop the wreckage of a shanty to the east. Perception Check DC 22: Something big is rustling on the other side of the porous shanty walls to the west. Another disfigured vampire is hiding in the shanty just west of the PCs, plus the callophage to the east and Gwenth coming from the north.
Tactics Kas’s crew makes its first serious effort to kill or capture the PCs at this point. The vampire Gwenth is one of Kas’s most trusted lieutenants, and she’s eager to curry favor with Kas (and make Rolain look less effective by comparison).
Gwenth, Vampire (G)
Level 23 Elite Skirmisher
Medium shadow humanoid (undead) XP 10,200 Initiative + 21 Senses Perception +20; darkvision HP 434; Bloodied 217 Regeneration 15 (regeneration does not function while Gwenth is exposed to direct sunlight) AC 37; Fortitude 35, Reflex 36, Will 34 Immune disease, poison; Resist 15 necrotic; Vulnerable 10 radiant (if Gwenth is exposed to direct sunlight, her regeneration does not function on her next turn) Saving Throws +2 Speed 8, climb 4 (spider climb) Action Points 1 m Bloodletter (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon +28 vs. AC; 2d6 + 3 damage, and ongoing 10 damage (save ends). M Slashing Roll (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon Gwenth shifts 4 squares and makes two bloodletter attacks at any point in the movement. M Blood Drain (standard; must have combat advantage; recharge when an adjacent creature becomes bloodied) ✦ Healing +26 vs. Fortitude; 2d12 + 6 damage, and the target is weakened (save ends), and Gwenth heals 108 hit points. M Eviscerate (standard; recharge 5 6) ✦ Weapon +28 vs. AC; one or two targets; 5d6 + 8 damage, and the target is dazed (save ends). A Betraying Gaze (standard; encounter) ✦ Charm, Gaze Area burst 3 within 10; +26 vs. Will; the target makes an at-will attack against a target of Gwenth’s choice and is immobilized (save ends). Combat Advantage Gwenth deals an extra 4d6 damage with her attacks against any target she has combat advantage against. Mist Step (move; encounter) ✦ Teleport Gwenth teleports up to 6 squares and becomes insubstantial until the end of her next turn. Alignment Evil Languages Common Skills Bluff +22, Insight +20, Stealth +24 Str 24 (+18) Dex 27 (+19) Wis 18 (+15) Con 25 (+18) Int 16 (+14) Cha 22 (+17) Equipment leather armor, 2 short swords
Callophage Vampire (C)
Level 22 Controller
Medium natural humanoid (undead) XP 4,150 Initiative +16 Senses Perception +19; darkvision HP 203; Bloodied 101 Regeneration 10 (regeneration does not function while the callophage vampire is exposed to direct sunlight) AC 36; Fortitude 33, Reflex 34, Will 35 Immune disease, poison; Resist 15 necrotic; Vulnerable 10 radiant Speed 6 m Claw (Standard; at-will) ✦ Necrotic +28 vs. AC; 2d8 + 6 damage, and the target is grabbed. M Blood Drain (Standard; must have combat advantage; recharges when an adjacent creature becomes bloodied) ✦ Healing +24 vs. Fortitude; 2d12 + 15 damage, and the target is weakened (save ends), and the callophage vampire regains 50 hit points. M Disfiguring Bite (Standard; at-will) ✦ Psychic Targets a creature grabbed by the callophage vampire; +26 vs.Fortitude; 3d8 + 5 damage, and the target takes ongoing 10 psychic damage and is dazed (save ends both). R Stolen Beauty (Standard; cannot be used until a disfiguring bite hits; recharges after each successful disfiguring bite) ✦ Charm, Psychic Ranged 10; +26 vs. Will; 3d10 + 3 psychic damage, and the target cannot use encounter attack powers, daily attack powers, or utility powers (save ends). Aftereffect: The target cannot willingly move closer to the callophage vampire (save ends). A Alluring Visage (standard; recharges when bloodied) ✦ Charm Close burst 10; +26 vs.Will; the target is pulled 3 squares and immobilized (save ends). Sustain Minor: Each creature that has not yet saved against the effect is pulled 3 squares and immobilized (save ends). Mist Form (standard; encounter) ✦ Polymorph The callophage vampire becomes insubstantial and gains a fly speed of 12, but cannot make attacks. The callophage vampire can remain in mist form for up to 1 hour or end the effect as a minor action. Alignment Evil Languages Common Skills Diplomacy +21, Streetwise +21 Str 18 (+15) Dex 20 (+16) Wis 17 (+14) Con 19 (+15) Int 20 (+16) Cha 21 (+16)
September 20 09
|
D u n g e o n 170
25
Betrayal at Monadhan
Disfigured Vampire (N)
Level 21 Brute
Medium natural humanoid (undead) XP 3,200 Initiative +12 Senses Perception +16; darkvision HP 245; Bloodied 122 Regeneration 10 (regeneration does not function while the disfigured vampire is exposed to direct sunlight) AC 33; Fortitude 34, Reflex 30, Will 31 Immune disease, poison; Resist 15 necrotic; Vulnerable 15 radiant Speed 6 m Vampiric Claw (Standard, at-will) ✦ Necrotic +24 vs. AC; 2d6 + 6 damage, and 10 ongoing necrotic damage (save ends). C Gaze Upon My Hideous Ruin (immediate reaction, when first bloodied and again when reduced to 0 hit points; at-will) ✦ Fear, Psychic Close burst 2; +22 vs. Will; 2d8 + 7 psychic damage, and the disfigured vampire pushes the target 5 squares. M Blood Drain (Standard; requires combat advantage; recharges when an adjacent creature becomes bloodied) ✦ Healing +23 vs. Fortitude; 2d12 + 13 damage, and the target is weakened (save ends), and the disfigured vampire regains 61 hit points. Alignment Evil Languages Common Str 23 (+16) Dex 15 (+12) Wis 13 (+11) Con 25 (+17) Int 7 (+8) Cha 17 (+13)
Disfigured Vampire: The disfigured bursts through the shanty wall and attacks whichever PC is standing nearest to it at the time. It uses blood drain only when Gwenth or the callophage vampire daze a PC (and thus grant it combat advantage). Callophage Vampire: The callophage crosses the water at the southern footbridge, then uses the same tactics as the callophage in encounter T1: alluring visage, then a claw attack to set up disfiguring bite, then stolen beauty used against a PC who could be badly hampered if limited to at-will powers. Gwenth: Gwenth uses betraying gaze in the first round if possible. Note that this is likely to result in a friendly fire incident. Then she uses slashing roll to lure the PCs into the maze of shanties in the western
part of the map. With elite hit points, regeneration, and an attack that deals ongoing damage, she can afford to be patient. As soon as she’s down 100 hit points, she’ll use eviscerate, then blood drain to heal herself and weaken a PC. Thereafter, she’ll use eviscerate whenever it’s recharged, because she deals more damage when attacking a dazed enemy. The disfigured and callophage fight until slain, but Gwenth will flee (probably via mist step) if reduced below 50 hit points. If she escapes, she returns to Kas’s cave, where she remains until the end of the adventure(unless returning her to the fray at some point would be suitably dramatic).
Features of the Area Illumination: The bonfires marked on the map, plus Monadhan’s ambient light, are the sources of light here. Even in the middle of the day, it’s not considered direct sunlight that would suppress the vampires’ regeneration. Walls: The shanty walls provide cover, but they’re flimsy. Any attack that hits a wall, even an unarmed attack from a weak PC, creates a hole roughly 1 foot in diameter. Once there’s a hole, a creature can attack creatures on the other side of the wall and gain the benefit of superior cover (incoming attacks suffer a –5 penalty). A second hit in the same section of shanty wall makes the hole big enough to function as a doorway. Wrecked Shanty: The debris from collapsed shanty walls is difficult terrain. Low Wall: The low wall provides cover. A DC 20 Athletics or Acrobatics check is needed to jump or vault it at full speed. Those who fail the check get over the wall but end their movement in the square
just beyond it. Creatures can also put holes in the low walls as if they were shanty walls. Shallow Water: The squares marked as shallow water are difficult terrain. Bonfire: The bonfires, which are used by the shantytown denizens to stave off a little of the domain’s pervasive gloom, deal 10 fire damage and 5 ongoing fire damage (save ends) to any creature that starts its turn in the same square as the bonfire.
September 20 09
|
D u n g e o n 170
26
Betrayal at Monadhan
T3: Graveyard Encounter Level 22 (17,550 XP)
Setup Rolain (R) 1 callophage vampire (C) 1 disfigured vampire (N) The PCs meet the mysterious “Rolain” they’ve heard about and learn that Rolain is in league with Kas. When the PCs follow their quarry into the graveyard, read: You’ve been walking along a path that winds through the graveyard, seeing stone mausoleums interspersed among headstones and graveyard statuary. A cloaked figure wearing a longsword and shield steps from behind one of the tombs ahead of you, arms folded across his chest. “I am Rolain,” he says. Perception Check DC 22: Besides Rolain, you glimpse a bulky outline on the far side of the mausoleum to the east. DC 26: A third, slim figure hides behind a statue in the second row of graves to the west. Rolain is under orders to learn all he can about the PCs, so he’ll talk to them and say nearly anything as long as he can keep them talking. When the characters stop sharing anything useful or the conversation turns into nothing but threats, Rolain’s sword comes out. Once Rolain decides that the time for talking has passed, the PCs cannot convince him otherwise. He figures he’ll get the rest of the story from a captured PC or a ritually compelled corpse.
Tactics Rolain and the other vampires fight until the PCs or the vampires are dead. Rolain: Rolain is a tough nut to crack, with elite soldier defenses, more than 400 hit points, and regeneration. He can afford to be patient. He uses his mark chiefly to inconvenience enemies (with the attack penalty that accompanies the condition) rather than to trigger lethal guard; he doesn’t mind moving the mark from character to character. He uses dominating gaze and irrefutable challenge every chance he gets. Dominating gaze sets up the possibility of a friendly fire incident, and even after the dominated PC saves, it sets up Rolain’s blood drain because the aftereffect is dazed. Irrefutable challenge keeps plenty of PCs within stabbing range Disfigured Vampire: The disfigured fights like the disfigureds in encounters T1 and T2, except that it will do everything it can to push one or more enemies into a pit with its gaze attack. Because this maneuver is a triggered immediate action, some anticipation and planning on your part are needed to pull it off. The payoff, both in drama and tactical effectiveness, makes the effort worthwhile. Callophage Vampire: The callophage’s alluring visage is another good way to pull the PCs into a pit. Because it’s sustained, the callophage can continue to tug at a PC who made the saving throw for hindering terrain (and thus may be prone at the pit’s edge). This callophage is more cautious than her previous counterparts. Once she’s charged up her stolen beauty attack, she’ll retreat a bit and take cover behind a headstone before unleashing it.
Rolain, Vampire (R)
Level 23 Elite Soldier
Medium shadow humanoid (undead) XP 10,200 Initiative + 20 Senses Perception +20; darkvision HP 434; Bloodied 217 Regeneration 15 (regeneration does not function while Rolain is exposed to direct sunlight) AC 41; Fortitude 38, Reflex 37, Will 36 Immune disease, poison; Resist 15 necrotic; Vulnerable 10 radiant (if Rolain is exposed to direct sunlight, his regeneration does not function on his next turn) Saving Throws +2 Speed 7, climb 3 (spider climb) Action Points 1 m Longsword (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon + 30 vs. AC; 2d8 + 7 damage, and the target is marked until the end of Rolain’s next turn. M Lethal Guard (opportunity, when an adjacent creature marked by Rolain makes an attack that does not include him or shifts; at-will) Rolain makes a longsword attack against the triggering creature. M Blood Drain (standard, encounter; recharges when an adjacent creature becomes bloodied) ✦ Healing Requires combat advantage. +28 vs. Fortitude; 2d12 + 6 damage, and the target is weakened (save ends), and Rolain heals 108 hit points. M Shield Slam (minor; recharge 5 6) ✦ Weapon +28 vs. Fortitude; the target is stunned until the end of Rolain’s next turn. R Dominating Gaze (minor; recharge 6) ✦ Charm, Gaze Ranged 5; + 27 vs. Will; the target is dominated (save ends, with a -2 penalty on the saving throw). Aftereffect: The target is dazed (save ends). Rolain can dominate only one creature at a time. C Irrefutable Challenge (standard; recharge 4 5 6) ✦ Weapon Close burst 4; targets enemies; no attack roll; pull the target within the burst 3 squares to a square adjacent to Rolain. A target that cannot end adjacent does not move. Then Rolain makes a longsword attack against each adjacent enemy. Mist Step (move; encounter) ✦ Teleport Rolain teleports up to 6 squares and becomes insubstantial until the end of his next turn. Alignment Evil Languages Common Skills Insight +20, Intimidate +19 Str 27 (+19) Dex 24 (+18) Wis 18 (+15) Con 25 (+18) Int 16 (+14) Cha 22 (+17) Equipment leather armor, longsword, heavy shield
September 20 09
|
D u n g e o n 170
27
Betrayal at Monadhan
Callophage Vampire (C)
Level 22 Controller
Medium natural humanoid (undead) XP 4,150 Initiative +16 Senses Perception +19; darkvision HP 203; Bloodied 101 Regeneration 10 (regeneration does not function while the callophage vampire is exposed to direct sunlight) AC 36; Fortitude 33, Reflex 34, Will 35 Immune disease, poison; Resist 15 necrotic; Vulnerable 10 radiant Speed 6 m Claw (Standard; at-will) ✦ Necrotic +28 vs. AC; 2d8 + 6 damage, and the target is grabbed. M Blood Drain (Standard; must have combat advantage; recharges when an adjacent creature becomes bloodied) ✦ Healing +24 vs. Fortitude; 2d12 + 15 damage, and the target is weakened (save ends), and the callophage vampire regains 50 hit points. M Disfiguring Bite (Standard; at-will) ✦ Psychic Targets a creature grabbed by the callophage vampire; +26 vs.Fortitude; 3d8 + 5 damage, and the target takes ongoing 10 psychic damage and is dazed (save ends both). R Stolen Beauty (Standard; cannot be used until a disfiguring bite hits; recharges after each successful disfiguring bite) ✦ Charm, Psychic Ranged 10; +26 vs. Will; 3d10 + 3 psychic damage, and the target cannot use encounter attack powers, daily attack powers, or utility powers (save ends). Aftereffect: The target cannot willingly move closer to the callophage vampire (save ends). A Alluring Visage (standard; recharges when bloodied) ✦ Charm Close burst 10; +26 vs.Will; the target is pulled 3 squares and immobilized (save ends). Sustain Minor: Each creature that has not yet saved against the effect is pulled 3 squares and immobilized (save ends). Mist Form (standard; encounter) ✦ Polymorph The callophage vampire becomes insubstantial and gains a fly speed of 12, but cannot make attacks. The callophage vampire can remain in mist form for up to 1 hour or end the effect as a minor action. Alignment Evil Languages Common Skills Diplomacy +21, Streetwise +21 Str 18 (+15) Dex 20 (+16) Wis 17 (+14) Con 19 (+15) Int 20 (+16) Cha 21 (+16)
Disfigured Vampire (N)
Level 21 Brute
Medium natural humanoid (undead) XP 3,200 Initiative +12 Senses Perception +16; darkvision HP 245; Bloodied 122 Regeneration 10 (regeneration does not function while the disfigured vampire is exposed to direct sunlight) AC 33; Fortitude 34, Reflex 30, Will 31 Immune disease, poison; Resist 15 necrotic; Vulnerable 15 radiant Speed 6 m Vampiric Claw (Standard, at-will) ✦ Necrotic +24 vs. AC; 2d6 + 6 damage, and 10 ongoing necrotic damage (save ends). C Gaze Upon My Hideous Ruin (immediate reaction, when first bloodied and again when reduced to 0 hit points; at-will) ✦ Fear, Psychic Close burst 2; +22 vs. Will; 2d8 + 7 psychic damage, and the disfigured vampire pushes the target 5 squares. M Blood Drain (Standard; requires combat advantage; recharges when an adjacent creature becomes bloodied) ✦ Healing +23 vs. Fortitude; 2d12 + 13 damage, and the target is weakened (save ends), and the disfigured vampire regains 61 hit points. Alignment Evil Languages Common Str 23 (+16) Dex 15 (+12) Wis 13 (+11) Con 25 (+17) Int 7 (+8) Cha 17 (+13)
Features of the Area: Illumination: The ambient light of Monadhan’s sky provides somewhat gloomy illumination. The vampires regenerate normally. Iron Fence: Unlike the fences in encounter T1, these wrought iron fences block movement but don’t provide cover. A DC 10 Climb check is needed to scale the fence, which is 10 feet high. Headstones: Creatures in the same square as a headstone gain cover. Stone Tombs: These small mausoleums are blocking terrain. Most have been broken into and looted. Those few that remain undisturbed have been entirely sealed with mortar.
Statues: Most of these statues resemble elaborate versions of the headstones. They are difficult terrain and provide cover. Pit: The pits are 15 feet deep, so falling into one presents little danger to any of the combatants. The walls, however, are mucky, slick, and unstable (DC 30 Athletics check to climb). They tend to collapse when a climber puts weight on a hand- or foothold, so that any failure on the Athletics check results in the climber sliding back to the bottom. The mud and debris at the bottom of each pit is difficult terrain.
September 20 09
|
D u n g e o n 170
28
Betrayal at Monadhan
T4: Desecrated Graveyard Encounter Level 23 (25,500 XP)
Setup 1 desecration (D) The battle with Rolain attracted the attention of a desecration—the animate force behind a graveyard full of traitors, turncoats, and other betrayers. It could not resist being drawn to the violence from the previous encounter. When the PCs have had a short rest after encounter T3, read: The ground starts to rumble. And in the gloom in front of you, the grave-earth and headstones start to take on an immense—and moving—shape. Like the wilderness encounters, this encounter doesn’t have much impact on the larger story. The desecration doesn’t care about the PCs, Kas, Arantor, or the struggle between Tiamat and Bahamut. It was roused by violence and wants only to spread more of the same. This as an opportunity to demonstrate that not everything revolves around the campaign’s central plot. Sometimes, bad things just happen.
Tactics The desecration fights in straightforward fashion. It prefers to make mouth of darkness attacks, then move over a pit and drop the grabbed character into one. (Because the desecration is gargantuan, it treats the pits as difficult terrain.) If a PC is marking it, it will preferentially make unholy smite attacks if that PC isn’t already taking ongoing necrotic damage. Remember that because it’s gargantuan, the desecration can move through squares occupied by the characters and they can move through its squares, too. The desecration fights until slain, but it won’t leave the graveyard; if the adventurers choose to flee, it won’t pursue them. When the battle is over, Kas appears and tries to talk to the PCs (as described in the Shantytown section, page 13).
Pit: The pits are 15 feet deep, so falling into one presents little danger to any of the combatants. The walls, however, are mucky, slick, and unstable (DC 30 Athletics check to climb). They tend to collapse when a climber puts weight on a hand- or foothold, so that any failure on the Athletics check results in the climber sliding back to the bottom. The mud and debris at the bottom of each pit is difficult terrain. Newly Discovered Grave: If the heroes defeat the desecration, they notice that the turmoil churned a particularly old coffin to the surface. It’s neither locked nor trapped. If the characters search it, they find a moldering skeleton and treasure parcels E, F, and G inside.
Features of the Area: Illumination: The ambient light of Monadhan’s sky provides somewhat gloomy illumination. Iron Fence: Unlike the fences in encounter T1, these wrought iron fences block movement but don’t provide cover. A DC 10 Climb check is needed to scale the fence, which is 10 feet high. Headstones: Creatures in the same square as a headstone gain cover. Stone Tombs: These small mausoleums are blocking terrain. Most have been broken into and looted. Those few that remain undisturbed have been entirely sealed with mortar. Statues: Most of these statues resemble elaborate versions of the headstones. They are difficult terrain and provide cover.
September 20 09
|
D u n g e o n 170
29
Betrayal at Monadhan
Desecration (D)
Level 23 Solo Controller
Gargantuan natural animate (earth, undead) XP 25,500 Initiative +14 Senses Perception +14; darkvision Aura of Malevolence (Fear) aura 10; any enemy within the aura that attacks with a radiant power takes a -2 penalty to the attack roll. HP 1,075; Bloodied 537 AC 39; Fortitude 38, Reflex 33, Will 37 Immune disease, poison; Resist 10 necrotic; Vulnerable 10 radiant Saving Throws +5 Speed 8 Action Points 2 m Unholy Smite (Standard, at-will) ✦ Necrotic Reach 4; +28 vs. AC; 3d6 + 15 necrotic damage, and ongoing 15 necrotic damage (save ends). M Double Attack (Standard, at-will) ✦ Necrotic The desecration makes two unholy smite attacks; +27 vs. AC; 3d6 + 8 damage. M Mouth of Darkness (Standard, at-will) ✦ Necrotic Reach 4; +26 vs. Reflex; 2d12 + 15 necrotic damage, and the target is grabbed. C Dark Plague (when first bloodied and again when the desecration is reduced to 0 hit points) ✦ Necrotic Close burst 20; targets enemies; +24 vs. Fortitude; the target is weakened (save ends). In addition, the target loses a healing surge. Miss: Half damage, and the target is weakened until the end of its next turn. The target does not lose a healing surge. Rejuvenation A desecration rises at full hit points one day after it has been destroyed. Only a quest destroys the creature completely, preventing it from using the rejuvenation power. Second Wind (Standard, encounter) ✦ Healing The desecration spends a healing surge and regains 269 hit points. The desecration gains a +2 bonus to all defenses until the start of its next turn. Alignment Chaotic evil Languages — Str 26 (+19) Dex 16 (+14) Wis 16 (+14) Con 23 (+17) Int 10 (+11) Cha 24 (+18)
September 20 09
|
D u n g e o n 170
30
Betrayal at Monadhan
C1: Cavern of Rivers Encounter Level 22 (16,800 XP)
Setup 1 fell troll (F) 1 dark naga (D) 2 cambion impalers (I) No matter what the configuration of caverns (see the Shifting Caverns section), the Cavern of Rivers always lies closest to the surface and the keep. The cavern is home to a dark naga, some of Arantor’s cambion guards, and a fell troll that the naga has trained. When the PCs reach the northern entrance, read: To your left, almost around a corner, is a waterfall cascading into a dark pool that runs through the center of the room. The foam from the waterfall is moving rapidly southward—there’s a fast current running through the water. Smaller rivulets of water run down the sides of the cavern, splashing across the cavern floor to join the water in the center. Both the waterfall and the smaller streams of water pulse at irregular intervals; occasionally the roar of water falling on stone almost disappears for a second. Tiny droplets of water cover the smooth rock at your feet, making it quite slippery.
The water flows toward the southern wall, which is carved flat and covered with a black-on-white mosaic. Perhaps it’s supposed to be veins or tree branches—many stones are missing, so it’s hard to tell. Some water flows into passages in the southeast and southwest corners of the room. The southwest corner has some exposed rock as far as you can see, but the southeast passage is covered in water. It could be only a foot of water, or it could be quite deep indeed. The water is so murky that it’s impossible to judge depth by sight. A massive snake with a human woman’s head stirs from its coils on a rock outcropping to the southeast. Peering around a corner to the southwest is a humanoid head and an arm holding an iron spear. Perception Check DC 24: The bubbles coming from the waterfall seem to be swerving around something in the middle of the water, just south of the waterfall. Either the water is shallower there, or there’s some sort of mass just underwater.
Dark Naga (D)
Level 21 Elite Controller
Large immortal magical beast (reptile) XP 6,400 Initiative +14 Senses Perception +21; darkvision HP 404; Bloodied 202 AC 36; Fortitude 34, Reflex 33, Will 36 Saving Throws +2 Speed 8 Action Points 1 m Tail Sting (Standard, at-will) ✦ Poison Reach 2; +24 vs. AC; 2d6 + 8 poison damage (3d6 + 8 damage against a dazed target), and the target is slowed (save ends). C Lure (Minor, at-will) ✦ Charm Close burst 5; targets enemies; +25 vs. Will; the target is pulled 1 square and dazed (save ends). C Psychic Miasma (Standard, recharge 5 6) ✦ Psychic Close burst 3; +26 vs. Will; 3d6 + 10 psychic damage, and the target is dazed (save ends). First Failed Save: The target is stunned (save ends). Alignment Evil Languages Common, Draconic, Supernal Skills History +22, Insight +21, Stealth +19 Str 26 (+18) Dex 18 (+14) Wis 22 (+16 Con 26 (+18) Int 24 (+17) Cha 30 (+20)
That “mass” under the water is the fell troll, which will emerge in the second or third round of the battle.
September 20 09
|
D u n g e o n 170
31
Betrayal at Monadhan
2 Cambion Impalers (I)
Level 19 Skirmisher
Medium immortal humanoid (devil) XP 2,400 Initiative +18 Senses Perception +24; darkvision HP 179; Bloodied 89 AC 33; Fortitude 31, Reflex 32, Will 30 Resist 10 fire Speed 6, fly 10 (clumsy) m Spear (Standard, at-will) ✦ Weapon +24 vs. AC; 3d6+8 damage. M Swooping Charge (Standard, encounter) ✦ Weapon The cambion impaler charges and makes the following attack in place of a melee basic attack: +25 vs. AC; 3d6 + 8 damage, and either slide the target 3 squares and immobilize the target until the end of the impaler’s next turn or deal 10 ongoing damage. The impaler is not considered a clumsy flyer when making this attack. A Soulscorch (Standard, recharge z ) ✦ Fire Area burst 1 within 10; +20 vs. Reflex; 2d8 + 4 fire damage, and ongoing 10 fire damage. Alignment Evil Languages Common, Supernal Skills Athletics +20, Bluff +19, Diplomacy +19 Str 22 (+15) Dex 25 (+16) Wis 20 (+14 Con 19 (+13) Int 17 (+12) Cha 21 (+14) Equipment robes, spear
Fell Troll (F)
Level 20 Elite Brute
Huge natural humanoid XP 5,600 Initiative +10 Senses Perception +16 HP 360; Bloodied 180 Regeneration 15 (if the fell troll takes acid or fire damage, regeneration does not function until the end of its next turn) AC 32; Fortitude 38, Reflex 30, Will 31 Saving Throws +2 Speed 10 Action Points 1 m Claw (Standard, at-will) Reach 3; +23 vs. AC; 2d10 + 7 damage. M Backhand Slam (Standard, at-will) Reach 3; +21 vs. Reflex; 2d6 + 7 damage, and the target is pushed 4 squares and knocked prone. Blood Frenzy The fell troll gains a +1 bonus to attack rolls and a +2 bonus to damage rolls against bloodied enemies. Troll Healing ✦ Healing If the fell troll is reduced to 0 hit points or fewer by an attack that does not deal acid or fire damage, it rises on its next turn (as a move action) with 20 hit points. Alignment Chaotic evil Languages Giant Skills Athletics +22, Endurance +23 Str 24 (+17) Dex 10 (+10) Wis 13 (+11 Con 27 (+18) Int 5 (+7) Cha 7 (+8)
Tactics At first, this seems like a straightforward fight against some guards, but you’re setting up the players for an “Aha!” moment when the fell troll rises out of the water. Let your own sense of timing and dramatic flair determine when the troll springs forth on your table. You also want the PCs to struggle a bit with the slippery floors and the water, so try to draw the PCs into the middle of the room, even if that means leaving a monster or two isolated and vulnerable. Dark Naga: Maneuver the naga so it’s at the heart of the battle and close to as many PCs as possible. It can slow, daze, and stun nearby PCs, and you want it to sow as much frustration as possible. If the PCs are slowed, dazed, and stunned in the current, so much the better. Don’t be shy about moving the dark naga into the south-central part of the pool and daring the PCs to “come and get it.” The dark naga can take some punishment and makes good bait. Cambion Impalers: If the impalers can attack a PC right away by flying in for a melee attack, they will. If possible, save a swooping charge attack to give a three-square slide to a PC who is (wisely) refusing to get near the dark naga. If some or all of the PCs hang back and avoid melee completely, one or both of the impalers can counter with a soulscorch attack. The impalers will use soulscorch even if the fell troll is in the burst (which, if it hits, will knock out the troll’s regeneration for a round and count as a “friendly fire” incident as described under The Sting of Betrayal on page 10.
September 20 09
|
D u n g e o n 170
32
Betrayal at Monadhan
The cambion impalers don’t worry much about the difficult and challenging terrain, but they aren’t completely immune to it because they’re clumsy fliers — while airborne, they must move at least 2 squares per turn or crash (as described on p. 48 of the Dungeon Master’s Guide). Furthermore, they suffer a –4 penalty to attacks and damage while flying (except for their swooping charge), so they prefer to fly to an advantageous square and then land before attacking. Fell Troll: The fell troll is a simple but effective monster. Don’t forget to regenerate at the start of every turn unless it took fire or acid damage last turn. Use backhand slam if the attack will push the target close enough to the dark naga for its psychic miasma and lure attacks to work.
Features of the Area: Illumination: This cavern has only the illumination the PCs bring with them. Ceiling: The ceiling of the cavern is 20 feet high. Slippery Rock: The squares marked as slippery are challenging terrain, requiring a DC 14 Acrobatics check to negotiate. Characters who fail the Acrobatics check fall prone and end their move action in the first slippery square they enter. The dark naga and the cambion impalers are acrobatic enough that they automatically succeed on the Acrobatics check, but the fell troll might slip if it’s unlucky. Shallow Water: The squares marked as shallow water are difficult terrain.
Deep Water: This water is between 5 and 6 feet deep. It’s considered difficult terrain, and creatures trying to fight in a deep water square suffer the penalties and restrictions of aquatic combat (described on p. 45 of the Dungeon Master’s Guide). Characters who can keep their heads above water (all but dwarves, halflings, and similar creatures) can walk on the bottom of the pool rather than swimming with the Athletics skill, if they wish. Current: The map squares marked with arrows have a strong current, as described on p. 45 of the Dungeon Master’s Guide. At the start of each player’s turn, the current slides the character 2 squares in the direction of the arrow. A creature can choose to fight the current by spending two squares of movement (to slide only 1 square) or four squares of movement (to negate the slide). A creature need not take a move action right away, but when it takes a move action later in its turn, it moves either 2 or 4 squares less. A creature that wants to travel in the current’s direction need do nothing, of course—the slide 2 at the beginning of the turn is essentially free movement.
September 20 09
|
D u n g e o n 170
33
Betrayal at Monadhan
C2: Cavern of Cliffs Encounter Level 21 (15,250 XP)
Setup 1 war devil (W) 1 storm devil (S) 3 barbed devils (B) The Cavern of Cliffs is home to devils betrayed into long-term servitude to Arantor. They order around the cambions when something needs to be done on the surface, but mostly they remain in this chamber and bemoan the treachery of fate. When the PCs can see clearly into the chamber, read: This room has a high, vaulted ceiling, and luminous lichen in the upper reaches illuminate crystalline stalactites, some more than five feet in diameter, hanging from the ceiling. The stalactites seem to catch and hold the light, glowing from within. Before you and to the left is a cliff that rises about 30 feet along the left wall and 60 feet straight ahead of you, To the right is the lip of a clifftop. From your vantage point at the entrance, you can’t see how far down it goes. Perception Check DC 25: You see the head of a barbed devil peeking over the edge of the center cliff, some 60 feet above you. It darts back beyond the edge after a moment.
Dungeoneering Check DC 24: The stalactites are incredibly rare locracite crystal formations, renowned both for their beauty and their fragility. Their grip on the ceiling is far more tenuous than a standard stalactite. When the barbed devils spot the heroes, they motion to the war devil and storm devil, who creep closer to the edge and prepare for battle.
Tactics Because they can all fly or teleport, the devils have the advantage in this terrain. Yet because the war devil and storm devil are clumsy flyers (thus taking a –4 penalty on attacks and damage while airborne), it’s not as big of an advantage as it seems. Storm Devil: The storm devil has little reason to engage in melee—not when it can use lightning fork and infernal thunderclap from a safe distance. The push from infernal thunderclap can send a PC over a cliff edge. A character who succeeds at a saving throw doesn’t go over the cliff and instead is prone at the cliff edge. Barbed Devils: The barbed devils are a little overmatched compared to the PCs statistically, but they’re versatile combatants. Make sure they’re doing what the PCs don’t want them to. In general, they should be in melee, where they can use their barbed aura and their minor-action shift 3. If the PCs prefer to trade attacks from a distance, the barbed devils can reply with hurl f lame (subject to recharge, of course). Don’t forget that the barbed devils can teleport around the chamber and once per fight deal damage when they do so.
War Devil: The ideal position for the war devil is at the edge of a cliff, because then it can send PCs plummeting off the edge (subject to a saving throw) with each trident attack. That leaves the war devil vulnerable in return to push and slide attacks from the PCs, but that’s good drama at the table, and the war devil can rejoin the fray after a fall without too much trouble. At the start of each war devil turn, consider what you’ll do with your minor action: use besiege foe to mark a PC (preferably one far away and beset by barbed devils) or fiendish tactics if it’s recharged (to grant extra attacks to other devils). Also, ask yourself whether there’s a tricky way that the war devil can use devilish transposition, such as if the PCs have the storm devil or one of the barbed devils surrounded. Powers like this give the monsters an “action advantage:” they use only one action to accomplish two things (in this case, moving the war devil into a targetrich environment while rescuing a more vulnerable monster). Don’t forget to make recharge rolls. All three monsters have recharging powers, and the war devil has two.
September 20 09
|
D u n g e o n 170
34
Betrayal at Monadhan
Storm Devil (S)
Level 23 Artillery
Medium immortal humanoid (devil) XP 5,100 Initiative +18 Senses Perception +17; darkvision HP 169; Bloodied 84 AC 37; Fortitude 35, Reflex 34, Will 33 Resist 20 fire, 20 lightning, 20 thunder Speed 7, fly 7 (clumsy) m Trident (Standard, at-will) ✦ Lightning, Weapon +26 vs. Reflex; 2d6 + 8 damage, and ongoing 10 lightning damage, and the target is dazed (save ends both). R Lightning Fork (Standard, at-will) ✦ Lightning Requires trident; ranged 20; +28 vs. Reflex; 3d6 + 8 lightning damage. A Infernal Thunderclap (Standard, recharge 5 6) ✦ Lightning Area burst 2 within 20; +26 vs. Fortitude; 2d10 + 6 lightning and thunder damage, and the target is pushed 3 squares from the origin square and dazed until the end of its next turn. Cyclone (Free, when first bloodied, encounter) The storm devil shifts 3 squares, and any Medium or smaller enemy adjacent to the storm devil at the start of the move is knocked prone. Alignment Evil Languages Supernal Skills Stealth +23 Str 20 (+16) Dex 25 (+18) Wis 22 (+17) Con 25 (+18) Int 16 (+14) Cha 17 (+14) Equipment trident
3 Barbed Devils (B)
Level 18 Skirmisher
Medium immortal humanoid (devil) XP 2,000 each Initiative +17 Senses Perception +11; darkvision Threatening Barbs aura 1; any creature in the aura that makes a melee attack or a close attack with the weapon keyword against the barbed devil takes 5 damage. HP 170; Bloodied 85 AC 33; Fortitude 31, Reflex 30, Will 29 Resist 20 fire Speed 7, teleport 7 m Claw (Standard, at-will) +23 vs. AC; 1d8 + 7 damage. M Double Attack (Standard, at-will) The barbed devil makes two claw attacks. R Hurl Flame (Standard, recharge 5 6) ✦ Fire Ranged 5; +21 vs. Reflex; 1d10 + 6 fire damage, and ongoing 5 fire damage, and the target is dazed (save ends both). C Barbed Teleport (Standard, encounter) ✦ Teleportation Close burst 1; +23 vs. AC; 1d8 + 7 damage, and the barbed devil teleports 7 squares. Infernal Bound (Minor, at-will) The barbed devil shifts 3 squares. Alignment Evil Languages Supernal Skills Athletics +21, Intimidate +19 Str 25 (+16) Dex 23 (+15) Wis 15 (+11) Con 18 (+13) Int 12 (+10) Cha 20 (+14)
War Devil (Malebranche) (W) Level 22 Brute (Leader)
Large immortal humanoid (devil) XP 4150 Initiative +17 Senses Perception +15 HP 255; Bloodied 127 AC 35; Fortitude 34, Reflex 32, Will 30 Resist 30 fire Speed 8, fly 8 (clumsy) m Claw (Standard, at-will) +26 vs. AC; 1d6 + 8 damage. M Trident (Standard, recharge 4 5 6) ✦ Weapon Reach 2; +26 vs. AC; 4d8 + 8 damage and ongoing 5 damage (save ends), and the target slides into any square adjacent to the war devil and is knocked prone. R Besieged Foe (Minor, at-will) Ranged sight; the war devil marks an enemy; allies of the war devil gain a +2 bonus to attack rolls made against the target until the encounter ends or the war devil marks a new target. R Devilish Transposition (Move, at-will) ✦ Teleportation Ranged 20; the war devil and an allied devil within range swap positions. R Fiendish Tactics (Minor, recharge 5 6) Ranged 10; affects up to 2 allied devils of the war devil’s level or lower; each target can take a move action or make a basic attack. Alignment Evil Languages Supernal Skills Intimidate +20 Str 27 (+19) Dex 23 (+17) Wis 19 (+15) Con 25 (+18) Int 15 (+13) Cha 18 (+15) Equipment trident
September 20 09
|
D u n g e o n 170
35
Betrayal at Monadhan
Features of the Area: Illumination: If the PCs bring any light source into the room, the entire chamber is brightly lit. The locracite stalactites transmit the light throughout the chamber and even seem to magnify its intensity. Ceiling: The ceiling of the cavern is 90 feet above the ledge where the PCs start, which means it’s 30 feet from the highest elevation in the chamber. Cliffs: It takes a DC 15 Athletics check to ascend these cliffs at half speed, granting combat advantage during the climb, as described on p. 182 of the Player’s Handbook. Creatures that take damage while climbing must immediately make a DC 15 Athletics check (DC 20 if the damage made the climber bloodied) or fall. Creatures about to fall—usually because they failed an Athletics check—can, as an immediate action, attempt a DC 20 Athletics check (with an additional +1 DC per point of damage) to make a last-ditch grab at the cliff face. Failing this second Athletics check sends the character tumbling down the cliff.
Stalactites: The locracite formations on the ceiling catch and magnify the light, but they’re dangerous as well as beautiful. Any attack with the thunder keyword that deals at least 10 damage causes some of the stalactites to burst. Everyone in the chamber immediately hears the crystalline stalactites shattering like glass. At the start of the next round, jagged shards rain down on everyone in the chamber, making a +28 attack against Reflex that deals 2d10 + 10 damage. This may count as a “friendly fire” incident as described under The Sting of Betrayal on page 10. Any intentional attack (such as someone aiming an arrow at a stalactite) automatically hits. If the attack deals at least 10 damage, then shards rain down at the start of the next round. There are enough locracite formations on the ceiling to sustain four such attacks.
September 20 09
|
D u n g e o n 170
36
Betrayal at Monadhan
C3: Cavern of Sulfur Encounter Level 22 (18,600 XP)
Setup 1 abhorrent reaper (A) 2 betrayer wights (B) Sulfur trap This chamber is home to some of Arantor’s loyal (for this place, anyway) undead. They claim this chamber as their own because the toxic fumes make it uninhabitable for anyone not immune to poison. When the PCs reach the entrance to the chamber, read: You’ve been smelling something foul and rotten as you approached this chamber, and now you have some idea why. There’s a cone-shaped formation—like a volcano, only about 5 feet tall—in the center of a pool in this cavern. Scattered around the periphery are smaller volcano-like cones, each only 2 or 3 feet high and surrounded by chunks of rock. Along the right wall are two clawed undead, their eyes glowing with hate as they shamble toward you. To the left near the back of the cavern is a black-cloaked figure wielding a scythe and floating several feet off the cavern floor. Perception Check DC 29: The room smells strongly of sulfur. DC 33: You can make out a light haze near one of the nearer cones.
Dungeoneering Check DC 29: Concentrations of sulfur are frequently poisonous, but the poison dissipates rather quickly in a large cavern like this. At the start of every turn, the geyser cone in the middle of the room spouts scalding water. But the real danger in the room—other than the undead, of course—are the poison-spewing sulfur cones.
Tactics Beyond dealing with the sulfur cones, the PCs must deal with a cohesive trio of monsters that have every reason to stick together and focus their efforts. Ideally, this battle resolves into a slugfest right next to one of the sulfur cones. If that’s the case, the monsters can exact a grim toll from the PCs for passage through this chamber. Betrayer Wights: These are simple brutes, but it’s worth paying close attention to the weakened condition on the claw attack—that’s where this monster gets its oomph. Track which PCs are weakened, and remember to give the betrayer wight 15 more hit points if the PC decides to get rid of the weakened condition by spending a healing surge. Spending a healing surge is an expensive way to purge a condition that you’re likely to reapply the next round anyway. A party can quickly deplete its resources if it’s not willing to spend at least some time weakened during this battle. Don’t forget the death wail. It gives the other monsters an extra basic attack, which might impose the weakened condition. Before each betrayer wight attack, check whether the abhorrent reaper is within 5 squares, because if it is, the attack deals an extra 1d6 necrotic damage.
Abhorrent Reaper: The abhorrent reaper also gets extra basic attacks with its bloodthirst power, and thus more chances to weaken the PCs and consume their healing surges. The reaper is quite mobile—it’s fast, flies well, and has a decent charge attack—but the best place for it is right between the two betrayer wights. Umbral phantasm is an important (and frustrating) part of the reaper’s damage mitigation, so use it whenever you can and remember to check for its recharge at the start of every turn.
Features of the Area Illumination: This cavern has only the illumination the PCs bring with them. Ceiling: The ceiling of the cavern is 60 feet high and covered in cracks—vents that allow the sulfur in this room to percolate up to the surface, so diffused that it’s barely noticeable when it reaches open air. Geyser Cone: At the start of every turn, the geyser cone spews steam and scalding droplets of water. Make an area burst attack (+28 vs. Fortitude) against each creature in a 3-square burst from the cone; any creature hit takes 2d10 fire damage. Squares adjacent to the geyser cone are lightly obscured (as described on p. 61 of the Dungeon Master’s Guide) because of the steam. Sulfur Cone: Every round, two of the six sulfur cones will erupt, spewing poison within 2 squares (see the trap description below). The abhorrent reaper and betrayer wights are immune to poison and blithely ignore the sulfur, but they’re smart enough to lure the PCs close to a sulfur cone if they can. Debris: The debris around each sulfur cone is difficult terrain. Shallow Water: The water is difficult terrain. It’s uncomfortably hot but not actually damaging.
September 20 09
|
D u n g e o n 170
37
Betrayal at Monadhan
It’s also poisonous; a creature that drinks the water takes 2d10 + 5 poison damage and ongoing 10 poison damage (save ends, probably when the incautious PC retches the water back up). Abhorrent Reaper (A) Level 23 Elite Soldier (Leader)
Large shadow humanoid (undead) XP 10,200 Initiative +18 Senses Perception +14; darkvision Aura of Ruin aura 5; any ally within the aura deals 1d6 extra necrotic damage with melee attacks. HP 424; Bloodied 212 AC 40; Fortitude 37, Reflex 34, Will 36 Immune disease, fear, poison; Resist 10 necrotic; Vulnerable 10 radiant Saving Throws +2 Speed 8, fly 12 (hover) Action Points 1 m Abhorrent Sickle (Standard, at-will) ✦ Necrotic, Weapon Reach 2; +30 vs. AC; 3d6 + 8 necrotic damage. M Hateful Charge (Standard; usable only when charging, at-will) ✦ Necrotic, Weapon Requires sickle; +30 vs. AC; 3d6 + 8 necrotic damage, and the target is knocked prone and is immobilized until the end of the abhorrent reaper’s next turn. C Hate’s Cleave (Standard, at-will) ✦ Necrotic, Weapon Requires sickle; +28 vs. AC; 6d6 + 8 necrotic damage. Bloodthirst When an abhorrent reaper bloodies an enemy, one of the abhorrent reaper’s allies can make a melee basic attack against the bloodied creature as a free action. Umbral Phantasm (Immediate Interrupt, when the abhorrent reaper would take damage, recharge 5 6 ) The abhorrent reaper becomes insubstantial until it attacks or until the end of its next turn. Alignment Evil Languages Common Skills Intimidate +23 Str 27 (+19) Dex 21 (+16) Wis 16 (+14) Con 20 (+16) Int 18 (+15) Cha 24 (+18) Equipment robes, sickle
2 Betrayer Wights (B)
Level 21 Brute
Medium shadow humanoid (undead) XP 3,200 each Initiative +16 Senses Perception +5; darkvision HP 244; Bloodied 122 AC 33; Fortitude 36, Reflex 33, Will 32 Immune disease, poison; Resist 20 necrotic; Vulnerable 10 radiant Speed 7 m Claw (Standard, at-will) ✦ Healing, Necrotic +24 vs. AC; 2d8 + 9 necrotic damage, and the target is weakened. To end the weakened condition, the target must spend a healing surge (a free action). If the target does so, the wight regains 15 hit points. C Death Wail (when reduced to 0 hit points) ✦ Necrotic Close burst 5; targets enemies; +21 vs. Fortitude; 2d6 + 7 necrotic damage. Undead allies in the burst can make a basic attack as a free action. Alignment Chaotic evil Languages Common Str 28 (+19) Dex 22 (+16) Wis 6 (+8) Con 24 (+17) Int 8 (+9) Cha 20 (+15)
Sulfur Spewers Hazard
Level 18 Blaster XP 2,000
Hazard: This cavern is close to a sulfur vent deep underground, and the cinder cones marked on the map periodically emit poisonous clouds of sulfur Perception: ✦ DC 29: The room smells strongly of sulfur. ✦ DC 33: A lingering haze near the cinder cones marks where the sulfur is strongest. Additional Skill: Dungeoneering ✦ DC 29: Concentrations of sulfur are frequently poisonous, but the poison dissipates rather quickly in a large cavern such as this. Trigger: At the start of each turn, roll 1d6 twice. The indicated cinder cones emit a cloud of poisonous sulfur. Attack Standard Action Close burst 2 Target: All living creatures within the area Attack: +21 vs. Fortitude Hit: 2d10 + 5 poison damage and ongoing 10 poison (save ends) Miss: Half damage.
September 20 09
|
D u n g e o n 170
38
Betrayal at Monadhan
C4: Cavern of Air Encounter Level 22 (18,400 XP)
Setup 1 void lich (V) 2 callers in darkness (C) 1 tormenting ghost (T) This chamber is another chance for the PCs to employ their flying and Athletics skills as they battle a quartet of undead on floating platforms of stone. When the PCs reach the cavern entrance, read: Safe passage through this cavern ends almost as soon as you set foot inside, for the passageway opens into a cavern from high on one of the cavern walls. You can see another platform about 50 feet southeast of you on the far wall with two passages exiting the cavern. Between you and that other platform is empty, dark space. Floating like islands in that dark space are rock platforms, each several feet thick. As you watch, the islands creep from side to side, slowly enough that you can jump from one to another but rapidly enough that in a few minutes, the platforms will be thoroughly shuffled. A ghost in tattered finery hovers directly above one of the larger islands, beckoning you closer. Characters can see at least 100 feet from their own light source: Automatic: The rocky stone floor is about 100 feet below you.
Perception Check DC 23: There are two dark clouds hovering near the ceiling, one over each of the largest islands. The dark clouds are callers in darkness. A void lich waits around the corner. It will appear the round after it hears sounds of battle.
Tactics The beckoning on the part of the tormenting ghost is just a ruse to draw the PCs onto the floating islands, where the terrain is more advantageous to the monsters (and more interesting for the DM). Tormenting Ghost: Use the burst of terror attack to force PCs off the islands and ghostly possession against PCs with effective ranged attacks. Use spectral shift whenever an adventurer misses with an attack. Ghostly terrain, while effective, probably distracts from the fun of this encounter, so use it only when you see a truly great opportunity. Callers In Darkness: Use advantage of fear and steal essence as often as possible, resorting to spirit bites only when you can’t reach the marked character. Keep track of which caller has which character marked, and make sure you apply the conditions for failed saving throws. Void Lich: The void lich arrives in the second round of the fight, alights on an unoccupied island, then attacks with void tendrils every round. Eventually this will attract a hero’s attention. If engaged in melee, the void lich uses frightful gaze (especially if its enemy isn’t flying and might get pushed off the island) or hideous laughter. Fade to dusk and phase step should be sufficient to get the void lich out of harm’s way.
Tormenting Ghost (T)
Level 21 Controller
Medium shadow humanoid (undead) XP 3,200 Initiative +19 Senses Perception +17; darkvision HP 152; Bloodied 76 AC 32; Fortitude 30, Reflex 34, Will 32 Immune disease, poison; Resist insubstantial Speed fly 6 (hover); phasing m Spirit Touch (Standard, at-will) ✦ Necrotic +24 vs. Reflex; 2d8 + 9 necrotic damage. M Ghostly Possession (Standard, recharge 5 6) ✦ Charm Target must be a living humanoid; +24 vs. Will; the tormenting ghost enters the target’s space and is removed from play, and the target is dominated (save ends). The tormenting ghost can use this power against only one creature at a time. When the target is no longer dominated, or when the tormenting ghost chooses to end its ghostly possession (a free action), the ghost reappears in a square adjacent to the target. C Burst of Terror (Standard, recharge 5 6) ✦ Fear, Necrotic Close burst 5; targets enemies; +24 vs. Will; 1d8 + 9 necrotic damage, the target is pushed 5 squares, and the target is dazed and immobilized (save ends both). A Ghostly Terrain (Standard, at-will) ✦ Necrotic Area burst 1 within 10; the area is suddenly filled with ghostly lights, wisps of necrotic mist, and the faint whispers of the dead. The area becomes difficult terrain and lightly obscured. Any creature that enters or ends its turn in the area is immobilized (save ends). The ghostly terrain remains in place for 5 minutes before fading away. Spectral Shift (immediate reaction, when missed by a melee attack, at-will) The tormenting ghost shifts 3 squares. Alignment Evil Languages Common Skills Stealth +24 Str 11 (+10) Dex 28 (+19) Wis 14 (+12) Con 20 (+15) Int 12 (+11) Cha 25 (+17)
September 20 09
|
D u n g e o n 170
39
Betrayal at Monadhan
Void Lich (V)
Level 20 Elite Lurker
Medium aberrant humanoid (undead) XP 5,600 Initiative +13 Senses Perception +18; darkvision Shroud of Night aura 5; bright light within the aura is reduced to dim light, and dim light within the aura is reduced to darkness (if the void lich takes radiant damage, the aura is negated until the end of the void lich’s next turn). HP 296; Bloodied 148 AC 34; Fortitude 31, Reflex 32, Will 34 Immune disease, poison, fear; Resist 10 necrotic Saving Throws +2 Speed 4, fly 8 (hover) Action Points 1 m Life Trap (Standard, at-will) ✦ Healing Necrotic +23 vs. Fortitude; 2d6 + 7 necrotic damage, and the void lich regains 15 hit points. R Void Tendrils (Standard, at-will) ✦ Necrotic Ranged 10; +23 vs. Will; 2d6 + 7 necrotic damage, and the target is knocked prone and dazed (save ends). C Frightful Gaze (Minor, at-will) ✦ Fear, Gaze Close blast 3; +21 vs. Will; the target is pushed 5 squares and takes a -2 penalty to attack rolls (save ends). First Failed Saving Throw: The target is dazed, immobilized, and takes a -2 penalty to attack rolls (save ends all). C Hideous Laughter (Minor, recharges when the void lich bloodies an enemy) ✦ Fear, Psychic Close blast 3; +21 vs. Will; 2d8 + 7 psychic damage, and the target takes a -5 penalty to all defenses until the end of the void lich’s next turn. Fade to Dusk (Minor, recharge 5 6) The void lich becomes insubstantial and invisible until it attacks or until the end of its next turn. Phase Step (Minor, at-will) The void lich teleports up to 2 squares. Indestructible When a void lich is reduced to 0 hit points, its body and possessions dissipate into wisps of darkness, but it is not destroyed. It reappears (along with its possessions) in 1d10 days within 1 square of its phylactery, unless the phylactery is also found and destroyed. Alignment Evil Languages Common, Deep Speech, telepathy 10 Skills Arcana +22, Intimidate +20 Str 16 (+13) Dex 17 (+13) Wis 26 (+18) Con 22 (+16) Int 24 (+17) Cha 20 (+15)
2 Callers in Darkness (C)
Level 19 Elite Soldier
Large shadow animate (undead) XP 4,800 each Initiative +13 Senses Perception +16; darkvision HP 253; Bloodied 126 AC 33; Fortitude 33, Reflex 28, Will 33 Immune disease, poison; Resist insubstantial Saving Throws +2 Speed fly 8 (hover); phasing Action Points 1 m Spirit Bite (Standard, at-will) ✦ Necrotic, Psychic Reach 2; +23 vs. AC; 1d10 + 7 necrotic damage, and ongoing 10 psychic damage (save ends). M Double Bite (Standard, at-will) ✦ Necrotic, Psychic The caller in darkness makes two spirit bite attacks. M Steal Essence (Standard, at-will) ✦ Necrotic, Psychic Reach 2; targets a creature marked by the caller in darkness; +22 vs. Fortitude; 1d10 + 9 necrotic damage, and ongoing 5 psychic damage (save ends). First Failed Saving Throw: The target takes ongoing 5 psychic damage and is weakened (save ends both). Second Failed Saving Throw: The target takes ongoing 10 psychic damage and is stunned instead of weakened (save ends both). C Advantage of Fear (Minor 1/round, at-will) ✦ Fear Close burst 10; targets one creature; the target is marked and grants combat advantage to the caller in darkness (save ends both); see also steal essence. C Soulstorm (Free, when first bloodied, encounter) ✦ Necrotic, Psychic Close burst 2; +22 vs. Reflex; 1d10 + 9 psychic damage plus 1d10 + 9 necrotic damage. In addition, a target that grants combat advantage to the caller in darkness takes ongoing 5 psychic damage and ongoing 5 necrotic damage (save ends both). Alignment Chaotic evil Languages Common Str 24 (+16) Dex 18 (+13) Wis 24 (+16) Con 21 (+14) Int 10 (+9) Cha 25 (+16)
Features of the Area: Illumination: The chamber’s upper reaches, where most of the action takes place, are unlit. Phosphorescent lichen near the cavern floor makes it obvious to the characters that it’s a long way down. Within 5 squares of the void lich, bright light becomes dim light and dim light becomes darkness. Ceiling: The ceiling of the cavern is 150 feet high (20 feet higher than the floating islands). Floating Islands: The islands marked on the map float laterally at the start of each turn. Roll 1d8 for each island; 1 means it drifts 1 square north, 2 means 1 square northeast, 3 is east, and so on. The islands don’t change altitude. Besides drifting, the islands are fragile. Sufficient force (a powerful attack or a collision with another island) is enough to break them apart. If two islands bump together (occupy adjacent squares), a few pebbles fall ominously to the cavern f loor. If a f loating island rolls movement that would make any part of it overlap with another island, then it breaks into two pieces. Let your sense of creative verve decide where the break happens, either splitting up combatants or keeping them together as you see fit. Roll 1d8 a second time for movement for one of the two “daughter” islands—it doesn’t matter which—to get some separation between the two daughters (continue rolling until a result causes the second piece to move away from the first). Likewise, if a close or area attack deals at least 20 damage and covers at least half of an island, break the island apart. Judge
September 20 09
|
D u n g e o n 170
40
Betrayal at Monadhan
for yourself whether a particular attack is unlikely to damage the stones: a close attack with thrown daggers, for example, probably could be ignored in this case. Collisions with the cavern walls usually don’t make the islands break apart, but if nothing has cracked in half for several turns or you’re really itching to stir things up, then either assign a chance for a wall collision to damage a platform or just declare that one breaks. Cavern Floor: From the floating islands to the cavern floor is a fall of 130 feet onto a pile of rubble— chunks of rock that abraded off the floating islands in the past. The floor is difficult terrain throughout. The only feature of interest down there is the bound island (described below). Bound Island: Floating a few feet above the cavern floor is a 3-square by 3-square island, moored to the ground with a rope. A creature with no other way to rejoin the fray can untie the rope, and the island will rise at the start of the next turn into any available space at the same altitude as the other islands. The players are unlikely to learn this, but over time, the rubble on the cavern floor coheres into new floating islands that ascend to take the place of those that have been ground apart through collisions. It’s a natural (though rare) process in this domain, but Noorikhan the void lich has been experimenting with it. The bound island is one of his trials.
September 20 09
|
D u n g e o n 170
41
Betrayal at Monadhan
C5: Cavern of Truth Encounter Level 22 (19,200 XP)
Setup 1 rakshasa noble huecava (H) 3 rakshasa destroyers (D) 1 gray render (G) This cavern exists to punish those who’ve angered Arantor, coerce betrayal from pawns in Arantor’s schemes, and to provide a measure of cruel amusement during Arantor’s long periods of melancholy. When the PCs reach the cavern entrance, read: The purpose of this cavern is clear: imprisonment, torture, and execution. Along the side walls are prison cages fashioned from unnaturally smooth stalagmites. Three are empty, and the fourth one, in the southeastern corner, has a grayish giant within it. A guillotine stands in the center of the room with its blade raised, iron maidens are immediately to your left and right, and wooden stretching racks are arrayed on the far end of the chamber. Two passages exit the far end of the room. A groove has been cut in the floor, connecting the iron maidens, the guillotine, and the center of the southern wall, which bears a fresco of eladrin lords and ladies gazing out upon a pastoral lake. Two bipedal tiger-creatures are fiddling with the guillotine mechanism. A third such creature stands near the rack in the southwest part of the room.
Perception Check DC 25: The floor of the room is slightly sloped. The iron maidens are at the higher end and the fresco on the south wall is lower. DC 30: It looks as if there’s someone on the southwest rack. It could be human but it’s hard to tell at this distance. There is indeed a human on the rack, a denizen of the shantytown named Macaebus. The creature “imprisoned” in the southeast cage is a gray render that the rakshasas captured from the surrounding jungle and domesticated through pitiless torture.
Tactics This battle will be more fun for everyone involved if it spreads out a bit. That will let the PCs feel the frustration of being marked (for a change) and give the gray render room to work. Rakshasa Noble Huecuva: The huecuva hangs back and uses its three potent ranged attacks (mind twist, phantom lure, and frightful phantom) to either damage the PCs directly or act as a puppet master, spreading the PCs out and moving them into disadvantageous positions. If confronted in melee, the huecuva uses unholy claw and then phantom image. Unholy claw deals damage to all adjacent living creatures, possibly including the rakshasa destroyers and the gray render. The huecuva won’t hesitate to use unholy claw anyway, which may trigger a friendly fire incident as described in The Sting of Betrayal (page 10).
Rakshasa Noble Huecuva (H) Level 19 Elite Controller
Medium natural humanoid XP 4,800 Initiative +14 Senses Perception +19; low-light vision HP 356; Bloodied 178 Regeneration 5 (damage from silver weapons negates regeneration until the end of the rakshasa noble huecuva’s next turn) AC 33; Fortitude 31, Reflex 33, Will 34 Saving Throws +2 Speed 7
Action Points 1 m Unholy Claw (Standard, at-will) +24 vs. AC; 1d6 + 3 damage, and the target takes ongoing 10 necrotic damage (save ends). When the target takes ongoing necrotic damage from this power, all adjacent living creatures take 5 necrotic damage. R Mind Twist (Standard, at-will) ✦ Psychic Ranged 20; +23 vs. Will; 3d6 + 7 psychic damage, and the target is dazed (save ends). R Phantom Lure (Standard, at-will) ✦ Charm Ranged 10; +22 vs. Will; the target slides 5 squares. R Frightful Phantom (Standard, recharge 5 6) ✦ Fear Ranged 5; +23 vs. Will; 4d8 + 7 psychic damage, the target is pushed 5 squares, and the target is stunned (save ends). Deceptive Veil (Minor, at-will) ✦ Illusion The rakshasa noble huecuva can disguise itself to appear as any Medium humanoid. A successful Insight check (opposed by the rakshasa’s Bluff check) pierces the disguise. Phantom Image (Minor, recharge 5 6) ✦ Illusion Until the end of the rakshasa noble huecuva’s next turn, any creature that attacks the rakshasa’s AC or Reflex defense must roll twice and use the lower attack roll result. If either result is a critical hit, use that result instead. Alignment Evil Languages Common Skills Arcana +20, Athletics +17, Bluff +21, Diplomacy +21, History +20, Insight +19, Intimidate +21 Str 16 (+12) Dex 20 (+14) Wis 20 (+14) Con 18 (+13) Int 22 (+15) Cha 24 (+16)
September 20 09
|
D u n g e o n 170
42
Betrayal at Monadhan
Rakshasa Destroyers: At the start of the fight, one of the destroyers moves to the stalagmite cage holding the gray render, then uses a minor action to pull the lever and cause the stalagmites to drop into the floor. The destroyers make triple attacks as often as they can (with longsword, that means six attack rolls). They mark different opponents and try to draw them apart. Use knight’s move occasionally to make a marked PC chase the destroyer around the battlefield. Gray Render: The gray render joins the battle the round after one of the rakshasas releases it from its cage. It makes claw attacks, trying to always have a character grabbed. While it has a PC grabbed, it uses body swap whenever possible and dismembering bite on its own turn. If the gray render is bloodied and opponents are proving adept at escaping its grab, it switches tactics to doing double attacks every round, knocking PCs prone and dealing ongoing damage each time.
3 Rakshasa Destroyers (D)
Level 21 Soldier
Medium natural humanoid XP 3,200 each Initiative +16 Senses Perception +20; low-light vision HP 196; Bloodied 98 AC 37; Fortitude 37, Reflex 34, Will 35 Speed 6 m Longsword (Standard, at-will) ✦ Weapon The rakshasa destroyer makes two attack rolls and keeps the better result; +26 vs. AC; 1d8 + 6 damage, and the target is marked until the end of the rakshasa’s next turn. m Claw (Standard, at-will) +26 vs. AC; 1d8 + 6 damage. M Triple Attack (Standard, at-will) ✦ Weapon The rakshasa destroyer makes three melee basic attacks. If two or more attacks hit the same target, that target is dazed (save ends). Deceptive Veil (Minor, at-will) ✦ Illusion The rakshasa destroyer can disguise itself to appear as any Medium humanoid. A successful Insight check (opposed by the rakshasa’s Bluff check) pierces the disguise. Knight’s Move (Move, recharge 5 6) The rakshasa destroyer can fly up to 6 squares. It must land at the end of this move or else it crashes. Alignment Evil Languages Common Skills Athletics +22, Bluff +19, Insight +20, Intimidate +19 Str 25 (+17) Dex 19 (+14) Wis 21 (+15) Con 20 (+15) Int 15 (+12) Cha 18 (+14) Equipment heavy shield, longsword, scale armor
Gray Render (G)
Level 19 Elite Brute
Large natural humanoid XP 4,800 Initiative +10 Senses Perception +15; blindsight 10 HP 452; Bloodied 226 AC 31; Fortitude 34, Reflex 27, Will 28 Saving Throws +2 Speed 8 Action Points 1 m Claw (Standard, at-will) Reach 2; +22 vs. AC; 1d12 + 8 damage, and the target is grabbed. M Double Attack (Standard, at-will) The gray render makes two claw attacks. If both attacks hit the same target, the target takes ongoing 10 damage (save ends). M Body Swap (Immediate Reaction, when the gray render is hit by an enemy’s melee attack while the gray render has a creature grabbed; requires a grabbed creature, at-will) ✦ Weapon The gray render uses the grabbed creature as a weapon; targets the triggering enemy; +20 vs. Reflex; 2d12 + 8 damage, and the gray render pushes the target 4 squares. The grabbed creature takes half the damage dealt by this attack. M Dismembering Bite (Standard, encounter) Targets a creature grabbed by the gray render; +20 vs. Fortitude; 3d12 + 8 damage, and the target is dazed (save ends). Rampage (while bloodied) The gray render’s claw attack also knocks a target prone. Alignment Chaotic evil Languages — Skills Athletics +23 Str 27 (+17) Dex 13 (+10) Wis 15 (+11) Con 26 (+17) Int 2 (+5) Cha 10 (+9)
September 20 09
|
D u n g e o n 170
43
Betrayal at Monadhan
Features of the Area: Illumination: Everburning torches in wall sconces provide bright illumination throughout this room. Ceiling: The ceiling of the cavern is 20 feet high. Stalagmite Cages: These “cages” are formed from obviously unnatural stalagmites that rise nearly to the ceiling. The gaps between them are small: an inch or two near the bottom, approximately a foot near the ceiling. Just outside the ring forming the cage is a foot-tall stalagmite that functions as a lever. When someone pulls the lever, the other stalagmites retract into the cave floor. Three of the stalagmite cages are unoccupied. The southeastern one has a trained gray render in it. Iron Maidens: These are typical torture equipment. Guillotine: The guillotine is in the “up” position and held by a thin cord. Of course, it will fall if someone moves (or is slid, pulled, or pushed) through the guillotine opening (+28 vs. Reflex; 8d8 + 20 damage). Winching the guillotine blade back into the “up” position takes eight turns, so hit or miss, this trick is likely to work only once. Rack: The rack is typical medieval torture fare, but it’s notable for two reasons. First, it’s occupied by a villager named Macaebus (described on page 16). Second, two Masks of the Beloved (described in the treasure section) hang on pegs on the rack’s frame.
Blood Channels: The channels cut into the floor are designed to keep the floor of this torture chamber clean—and they do their job almost too well. Each time a creature on or adjacent to a blood channel takes damage from an attack that draws blood (most weapon attacks, for example), everyone in the chamber will see the blood flow into the channel of its own volition. Once blood is in the channel, it spreads along the channel toward the south wall at the rate of 1 square per turn (at initiative count 1). Use tokens to mark which squares have blood in them. Creatures adjacent to a token at the start of their turn take 5 damage but score critical hits on 19-20 (unless their critical chance is already better than that) until the start of their next turn. South Wall Mosaic: If blood in the channel reaches the south wall, the eladrins in the picture transform into tieflings and the landscape in the mosaic transforms into a charred wasteland with a magma lake. Note that if blood has flowed into the channel then it will reach the wall before long unless characters specifically take action to stop it. Macaebus: See page 16.
September 20 09
|
D u n g e o n 170
44
Betrayal at Monadhan
C6: Cavern of Statues Encounter Level 22 (16,300 XP)
Setup 1 cambion soul conf lagrant (C) 2 cambion legionnaires (L) 2 nothic mindblights (N) One of only two upper chambers that Arantor regularly visits (the Cavern of Truth is the other), the Cavern of Statues is a gallery containing certain antiquities that remind Arantor of life before coming to Monadhan. Although most of Arantor’s hoard lies in the lower cavern, some of the items here are bulky but valuable indeed. When the PCs reach the cavern entrance, read: This room is home to seven large statues, all larger than life. Between them hang tattered tapestries that show maps in sable, snow-cotton, and golden wool. A brazier near the center statue—that of a dragon in a rampant pose—casts everything in a reddish light. Standing near the dragon statue are three cambions, one with an iron-shod quarterstaff and two with short swords and shields. Two passages exit the room at the northeast corner.
The silver dragon statue depicts Arantor as he existed in life, and the other statues are figures important to him (some of whom will figure in later Scales of War adventures). The map tapestries likewise have information useful in the PCs’ future endeavors.
Tactics Unlike battles that spread the PCs out (such as C4 and C5), this encounter should develop into a big, confusing scrum because of the short ranges and dominated PCs. This is also the battle most likely to have friendly fire incidents which trigger Monadhan’s blessing. Cambion Soul Conf lagrant: The leader of the cambions that serve Arantor, the soul congflagrant wants nothing to do with melee. Instead, it hangs back as far as it can. Each round it uses one of its three ranged attacks, in order of priority: purge the soul, soulscorch, hellfire ray. Soulscorch might hurt the other cambions (who have resist fire 15); if it does, the soul conflagrant gains the benefits of a “friendly fire” incident, as described in The Sting of Betrayal on page 10. Like most cambions, the soul conflagrant is a clumsy flyer and would rather land each turn than suffer the –4 penalty to attacks and damage for attacking while airborne.
Cambion Soul Conflagrant (C)
Level 23 Artillery
Medium immortal humanoid (devil) XP 5,100 Initiative +16 Senses Perception +15; darkvision HP 166; Bloodied 83 AC 35 (38 against ranged attacks); Fortitude 34, Reflex 34 (38 against ranged attacks), Will 36 Resist 15 fire Speed 6, fly 8 (clumsy) m Staff (Standard, at-will) ✦ Weapon +28 vs. AC; 2d8 + 6 damage. R Hellfire Ray (Standard, at-will) ✦ Fire Ranged 20; +28 vs. Reflex; 3d6 + 8 fire damage, and the target is knocked prone. R Purge the Soul (Standard, recharges when any enemy within sight is reduced to 0 hit points or fewer) ✦ Necrotic Ranged 20; +28 vs. Reflex; 4d6 + 8 necrotic damage, and the target is weakened (save ends). A Soulscorch (Standard, recharge 5 6) ✦ Fire Area burst 1 within 10; +28 vs. Reflex; 2d6 + 8 fire damage, and ongoing 10 fire damage. Soul Mantle A mantle of soul energy protects the cambion soul conflagrant, giving it a +4 bonus to AC and Reflex defense against ranged attacks (already included in its statistics). Alignment Evil Languages Common, Supernal Skills Arcana +22, Bluff +24, Diplomacy +24 Str 14 (+13) Dex 20 (+16) Wis 19 (+15) Con 22 (+17) Int 22 (+17) Cha 27 (+19) Equipment robes, quarterstaff
Perception Check DC 29: You hear flapping footsteps—not boots, but skin on stone—coming from one of the northern passageways.
September 20 09
|
D u n g e o n 170
45
Betrayal at Monadhan
Cambion Legionnaire: The two legionnaires stay close to each other (to benefit from the legion’s mantle power) and try to establish a front line that keeps enemy melee combatants away from the cambion soul conflagrant. They prefer to make gladius attacks; keep track of how many hit, because those hits charge up the push function of the shield rush. The legionnaires save their immolate attacks for moments when they can get at least two and preferably three figures within the area. Cambions have only resist 15 to fire, so it’s possible that the legionnaires will damage each other with their immolate attacks. That constitutes a “friendly fire” incident, as described in The Sting of Betrayal section on page 10. Nothic Mindblights: The nothics hop into the fray, appearing at one of the northern passages at the start of round 2. They use their eye of insanity attacks until they have a PC dominated, then use necrotic eye or mesmerizing visage until the character shakes off the domination. That recharges the eye of insanity, so the nothic starts the sequence all over again. Because it’s a save-ends effect that includes a saving throw penalty, you’ll need to keep close track of how each character is responding to mesmerizing visage. Like the other monsters in this encounter, the mindblights have an attack (necrotic eye) that might cause a “friendly fire” incident.
2 Cambion Legionnaires (L)
Level 21 Soldier
Medium immortal humanoid (devil) XP 3,200 each Initiative +18 Senses Perception +20; darkvision HP 198; Bloodied 99 AC 37; Fortitude 34, Reflex 31, Will 31 (35 if another cambion is within 3 squares) Resist 15 fire Speed 6, fly 8 (clumsy) m Gladius (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon +28 vs. AC; 3d6 + 8 damage. Effect: The target is marked until the end of the legionnaire’s next turn. M Shield Bash (minor; at-will) ✦ Weapon +28 vs. AC; the cambion legionnaire pushes the target 1 square and can shift into the square the target vacates. C Immolate (standard; recharge z ) ✦ Fire Close burst 2; +28 vs. Reflex; 2d8 + 5 fire damage, and ongoing 10 fire damage. Legion’s Mantle While the legionnaire is within 3 squares of another cambion, it gains a +4 bonus to Will defense (already included in its statistics) and a +2 bonus on saving throws. Alignment Evil Languages Common, Supernal Skills Arcana +22, Bluff +24, Diplomacy +24 Str 14 (+13) Dex 20 (+16) Wis 19 (+15) Con 22 (+17) Int 22 (+17) Cha 27 (+19) Equipment short sword, light shield
2 Nothic Mindblights (N)
Level 19 Controller
Medium aberrant humanoid XP 2,400 each Initiative +14 Senses Perception +11; darkvision, truesight 10 HP 180; Bloodied 90 AC 32; Fortitude 32, Reflex 32, Will 29 Speed 6 m Claw (Standard, at-will) ✦ Necrotic +24 vs. AC; 2d6 + 3 damage, and ongoing 5 necrotic damage (save ends). R Eye of Insanity (Standard, recharges when no creature is dominated by the nothic mindblight) ✦ Fear Ranged 5; +23 vs. Will; the target is dominated (save ends). Aftereffect: The target is dazed until the end of its next turn. C Necrotic Eye (Standard, at-will) ✦ Necrotic Close blast 5; +23 vs. Fortitude; the target takes ongoing 10 necrotic damage (save ends). A Mesmerizing Visage (Standard, recharge 5 6) ✦ Charm, Psychic Area burst 2 within 10; targets enemies; +23 vs. Will; 2d8 + 6 psychic damage, and the target takes a -1 penalty to saving throws (save ends). First Failed Saving Throw: The target takes a -3 penalty to saving throws instead of -1 (save ends). Alignment Unaligned Languages Deep Speech Skills Stealth +19 Str 21 (+14) Dex 20 (+14) Wis 15 (+11) Con 20 (+14) Int 10 (+9) Cha 12 (+10)
September 20 09
|
D u n g e o n 170
46
Betrayal at Monadhan
Features of the Area: Illumination: The brazier provides bright, reddish light throughout the chamber. Ceiling: The ceiling of the cavern is 20 feet high. Center Statue: This statue depicts Arantor as he once was: a proud silver dragon, ferocious in battle. Treasure parcels G and H are at the base of the statue. Northeast Statue: This statue depicts a skeleton wearing finely embroidered robes and gaudy jewelry. The word “Irfelujhar” is carved into the base. Southeast Statue: This statue depicts a dragonborn wearing heavy armor and wielding a falchion. The word “Mornujhar” is carved into the base. South Statue: This is a statue of a sleek black dragon. The word “Mornujhar” is also carved into the base. This is likely to be confusing to the PCs, or make them think that when they finally meet Mornujhar (in “Grasp of the Mantled Citadel”), that he will be a black dragon in disguise. This statue is merely meant to give him honor as Tiamat’s black exarch. Southwest Statue: This statue of an old woman has crumbled into several pieces and is lying in a heap atop the pedestal. The word “Sarissa” is carved into the base. PCs who make even a token effort to put the pieces back together realize that this statue is a perfect likeness of the seer Sarissa, whom they met in Encounter T1, Seer’s Hut.
West Statue: This statue depicts a female angel of secrets—one that bears a striking resemblance to the angel the heroes met in Encounter S1. The word “Niuria” is carved into the base (not Rachaela, which is the name she gave previously). North Tapestry: This tapestry is a map of an ancient empire, with roads connecting cities, major coastlines, mountain ranges, etc. A DC 24 History check reveals that the map, while more artistic and less cartographically accurate, is of the ancient empire of Arkhosia shortly before its war with Bael Turath. The tapestries collectively constitute treasure parcel I. Even rolled up, each tapestry is a very bulky 100 pounds. Northeast Tapestry: This tapestry map requires a DC 29 History check; it’s an artistic representation of the ancient eladrin Realm of the Twin Queens. Eastern Tapestries: This tapestry seems to be an illustrative depiction of a strange and disturbing forest. According to the caption woven into the bottom of the tapestry, it is the Forest of Twisted Souls. South Tapestry: Another tapestry map; a DC 24 History check reveals that it represents Bael Turath. Western Tapestry: This tapestry map requires a DC 24 History check; it’s an artistic representation of the ancient human empire of Nerath.
September 20 09
|
D u n g e o n 170
47
Betrayal at Monadhan
C7: Death Giant Reinforcements Encounter Level 23 (22,200 XP)
Setup 2 death giant dreadguards 2 death giant soulcatchers 1 steel predator This is the first encounter to use when the PCs backtrack through a chamber they’ve already cleared or when they camp for an extended rest. Accordingly, it’s not tied to a specific location. You can run this battle using the map for any of encounters C1–C6 or at the empty chambers at each dead end in the ever-shifting upper caverns. When the PCs see the death giants, read: Four dark-skinned giants are running toward you, their armor jingling and rattling as they unsheathe their weapons. Two of them have plate armor, mace, and shield, while two others are in leathers and wielding massive quarterstaffs. Behind them lopes a metallic creature shaped like a leopard but bigger than a horse. Perception Check DC 26: Four flickering, crystalline shards orbit each of the giants at a distance of a few feet.
Tactics Three of the five monsters in this fight are able to mark the PCs. This is a prime opportunity to split the adventurers into several small groups that have a hard time supporting one another. Strive to create at least one mismatch in the monsters’ advantage so that a few of the characters need rescuing while under fire before disaster falls. Death Giant Dreadguard: The dreadguards stay close to each other and mark different PCs. Use positioning to lure the marked PCs into attacking the “wrong” dreadguard (and thus triggering death guardian); the death giants’ reach 2 should help. They use soul shield whenever it can make the difference between an attack hitting or missing. Keep careful track of each dreadguard’s supply of soul shards. Add a soul shard whenever a creature (including another death giant) dies within 5 squares, and subtract a shard whenever the dreadguard uses its soul shield power or heals 20 hit points. Don’t spend the last soul shard until the dreadguard is likely to die in the next round anyway, because a dreadguard with no soul shards suffers a –2 attack penalty. Death Giant Soulcatchers: The soulcatchers stay behind the dreadguards and use soul shrive as often as they can. Each soulcatcher’s aim is to accumulate seven soul shards, which will let it use soulfury detonation twice in a row and still have one soul shard left over (to avoid the –2 attack penalty). Soulcatchers preferentially target lightly armored PCs in the belief that they tend to have lower Fortitude defenses. Soulfury detonation is likely to damage any dreadguards caught in its area, which constitutes a friendly fire incident as described in The Sting of Betrayal on page 10.
The soulcatchers have two ways to earn soul shards, but they tend to spend them fast. Remind players hit with soul shrive that they’ve lost their healing surges only temporarily—they’ll get the healing surges back when they make the saving throw. Steel Predator: Like the dreadguards, the steel predator can mark PCs. As a fast elite, it can make a vicious pounce to the enemy’s back ranks, then make a bite attack in the next round to mark a PC who’s ill-suited for melee (such as a wizard or invoker), even if that means taking some opportunity attacks on the way. Thereafter, use resonating roar if it’s available and can hit at least three targets. Otherwise, make a bite attack if only one PC is adjacent or snap jaw if there are two. When making a snap jaw attack, decide which PC to mark for next turn and attack that character first. This makes it more likely that the character will be right in front of the steel predator again next round, ready to be bitten. If the steel predator focuses on PCs who are averse to melee, it’s likely that they’ll try to shift away during their turn. Remember that the steel predator can use shifting steel to keep them running around the battlefield.
September 20 09
|
D u n g e o n 170
48
Betrayal at Monadhan
2 Death Giant Dreadguards (D)
Level 22 Soldier
Large shadow humanoid (giant) XP 4,150 each Initiative +18 Senses Perception +19; darkvision Soulcatcher aura 5; a creature that dies within the aura bestows one soul shard to the dreadguard (see soul shroud). HP 209; Bloodied 104 AC 38; Fortitude 37, Reflex 33, Will 31 Resist 15 necrotic Speed 7 m Mace (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon Reach 2; +29 vs. AC; 2d8 + 6 damage and the target is marked until the end of the dreadguard’s next turn. Death Guardian (immediate interrupt, when an enemy marked by the dreadguard makes an attack that does not include the dreadguard; at-will) The dreadguard makes a mace attack against the triggering enemy. Soul Shield (free, when an ally within 5 squares is hit by an attack; at-will) The dreadguard expends one soul shard and the ally gains a +4 bonus to defenses against the attack. Consume Soul Shard (minor; at-will) ✦ Healing The dreadguard expends one soul shard and regains 20 hit points. Soul Shroud The soul shroud contains soul shards that swirl around the dreadguard to protect and empower it. At the beginning of an encounter, the soul shroud contains four soul shards. While the soul shroud is depleted of soul shards, the dreadguard takes a –2 penalty to attack rolls. Alignment Evil Languages Giant Skills Intimidate + 18 Str 28 (+20) Dex 20 (+16) Wis 16 (+14) Con 25 (+18) Int 12 (+12) Cha 15 (+13) Equipment plate armor, heavy shield, mace
2 Death Giant Soulcatchers (S) Level 22 Controller
Large shadow humanoid (giant) XP 4,150 each Initiative +16 Senses Perception +19; darkvision Soulsnatcher aura 10; a creature that dies within the aura bestows one soul shard to the soulcatcher (see soul shroud). HP 209; Bloodied 104 AC 36; Fortitude 35, Reflex 32, Will 35 Resist 15 necrotic Speed 8 m Soul Dagger (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon Reach 2; + 27 vs. AC; 2d6 + 8 damage and the target is immobilized until the end of the soulcatcher’s next turn. R Soul Shrive (standard; at-will) ✦ Necrotic Ranged 10; + 26 vs. Fortitude; the target is stunned and loses 1 healing surge at the start of its turn (save ends both). A target without healing surges takes damage equal to one quarter its total hit points. Each time the target loses a healing surge or takes damage from soul shrive, the soulcatcher gains a soul shard. A Soulfury Detonation (standard; must expend 3 soul shards; at-will) ✦ Necrotic Burst 2 within 10; +26 vs. Fortitude; 2d12 + 6 necrotic damage, and the target is dazed (save ends). Consume Soul Shard (minor; at-will) ✦ Healing The soulcatcher expends one soul shard and regains 20 hit points. Soul Shroud The soul shroud contains soul shards that swirl around the soulcatcher to protect and empower it. At the beginning of an encounter, the soul shroud contains four soul shards. While the soul shroud is depleted of soul shards, the soulcatcher takes a –2 penalty to attack rolls. Alignment Evil Languages Giant Skills Intimidate + 18 Str 28 (+20) Dex 20 (+16) Wis 22 (+17) Con 25 (+18) Int 12 (+12 Cha 15 (+13) Equipment leather armor, dagger
Steel Predator (P)
Level 20 Elite Soldier
Large immortal animate (living construct) XP 5,600 Initiative +18 Senses Perception +16; darkvision HP 388; Bloodied 194 AC 36; Fortitude 34, Reflex 32, Will 30 Saving Throws +2 (+4 against ongoing damage) Speed 8 Action Points 1 m Bite (Standard, at-will) Reach 2; +27 vs. AC; 4d6 + 4 damage, and the target is marked until the end of the steel predator’s next turn. M Snap Jaw (Standard, at-will) The steel predator makes a bite attack. On a hit, the target is also knocked prone, and the predator makes another bite attack against a different target. M Vicious Pounce (Standard, at-will) The steel predator charges and makes the following attack in place of a bite attack; +25 vs. Fortitude; 2d12 + 5 damage, and the target is pushed 1 square and knocked prone. The predator moves into the space vacated by the target. C Resonating Roar (Standard, recharge 5 6 or when the steel predator takes thunder or lightning damage) ✦ Thunder Close burst 3; +25 vs. Fortitude; 4d8 + 7 thunder damage, and the target is deafened and dazed (save ends both). Shifting Steel (immediate reaction, when a creature adjacent to the steel predator shifts, at-will) The predator shifts into the space vacated by the triggering creature. Alignment Evil Languages Supernal Skills Acrobatics +21, Athletics +21, Endurance +23, Stealth +21 Str 22 (+16) Dex 23 (+16) Wis 23 (+16) Con 26 (+18) Int 15 (+12) Cha 12 (+11)
September 20 09
|
D u n g e o n 170
49
Betrayal at Monadhan
C8: Death Giant Boss Encounter Level 23 (24,100 XP)
Setup Bahlik Gur 2 death giant dreadguards 1 steel predator This is the second encounter that can occur in a previously cleared room or as a wandering monster encounter at a dead end or in any corridor. This encounter features Bahlik Gur, Arantor’s secondin-command. Bahlik Gur handles the day-to-day affairs of the upper caverns and assists with Arantor’s limited interactions with the rest of the Monadhan domain. Run it only after encounter C7. When the PCs see the death giants, read: “Death to the interlopers!” shouts the lead giant as three of the dark-skinned brutes lumber toward you. Next to them is another of the metallic panther creatures you faced when you last fought these giants. Perception Check DC 26: Four flickering, crystalline shards orbit each of the giants at a distance of a few feet.
Tactics These monsters use similar tactics to the death giants in C7: mark different PCs and lure the party into separating its force. All four of the monsters can mark: use that to their advantage. The death giant dreadguards and the steel predator behave as they did in encounter C7. Bahlik Gur makes double attacks as often as he can (which doubles his chances of marking a PC) and will use press the attack rather than moving himself. He would much rather spend his four shards on soul shield than consume a shard for 20 hit points, which is less than 5 percent of his total. Bahlik Gur is more aware of Monadhan’s blessing than most monsters. If either of the dreadguards are almost dead, Bahlik Gur tries to deliver the killing blow himself. If he succeeds in killing the dreadguard, he gains a soul shard and the blessing of Monadhan from a friendly fire incident.
Bahlik Gur (B)
Level 23 Elite Soldier
Large shadow humanoid (giant) XP 10,200 Initiative +18 Senses Perception +19; darkvision Soulcatcher aura 5; a creature that dies within the aura bestows one soul shard to bahlik gur (see soul shroud). HP 434; Bloodied 217 AC 42; Fortitude 39, Reflex 33, Will 33 Resist 20 necrotic Saving Throws + 2 Speed 7 Action Points 1 m Mace (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon Reach 2; +29 vs. AC; 2d8 + 6 damage, and the target is marked. M Double Attack (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon Bahlik Gur makes two mace attacks. If he hits two targets with them, he gains a +2 bonus to his next attack roll. C Press the Attack (move; at-will) Close burst 10; targets 1 ally; the target can take a move action as a free action. Battle Fervor Bahlik Gur scores critical hits on attack rolls of 19 or 20. Death Guardian (immediate interrupt, when an enemy marked by Bahlik Gur makes an attack that does not include Bahlik Gur) Bahlik Gur makes a mace attack against the enemy. Soul Shield (free, when an ally within 5 squares is targeted by an attack) Bahlik Gur expends one soul shard and the ally gains a +4 bonus to all defenses against the attack. Consume Soul Shard (minor; at-will) ✦ Healing Bahlik Gur expends one soul shard and regains 20 hit points. Soul Shroud The soul shroud contains soul shards that swirl around Bahlik Gur to protect and empower it. At the beginning of an encounter, the soul shroud contains four soul shards. While the soul shroud is depleted of soul shards, Bahlik Gur takes a –2 penalty to attack rolls. Alignment Evil Languages Giant Skills Intimidate + 18 Str 28 (+20) Dex 20 (+16) Wis 16 (+14) Con 25 (+18) Int 12 (+12) Cha 15 (+13) Equipment plate armor, heavy shield, mace, treasure parcels J and K
September 20 09
|
D u n g e o n 170
50
Betrayal at Monadhan
2 Death Giant Dreadguards (D)
Level 22 Soldier
Large shadow humanoid (giant) XP 4,150 each Initiative +18 Senses Perception +19; darkvision Soulcatcher aura 5; a creature that dies within the aura bestows one soul shard to the dreadguard (see soul shroud). HP 209; Bloodied 104 AC 38; Fortitude 37, Reflex 33, Will 31 Resist 15 necrotic Speed 7 m Mace (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon Reach 2; +29 vs. AC; 2d8 + 6 damage and the target is marked until the end of the dreadguard’s next turn. Death Guardian (immediate interrupt, when an enemy marked by the dreadguard makes an attack that does not include the dreadguard; at-will) The dreadguard makes a mace attack against the triggering enemy. Soul Shield (free, when an ally within 5 squares is hit by an attack; at-will) The dreadguard expends one soul shard and the ally gains a +4 bonus to defenses against the attack. Consume Soul Shard (minor; at-will) ✦ Healing The dreadguard expends one soul shard and regains 20 hit points. Soul Shroud The soul shroud contains soul shards that swirl around the dreadguard to protect and empower it. At the beginning of an encounter, the soul shroud contains four soul shards. While the soul shroud is depleted of soul shards, the dreadguard takes a –2 penalty to attack rolls. Alignment Evil Languages Giant Skills Intimidate + 18 Str 28 (+20) Dex 20 (+16) Wis 16 (+14) Con 25 (+18) Int 12 (+12) Cha 15 (+13) Equipment plate armor, heavy shield, mace
Steel Predator (P)
Level 20 Elite Soldier
Large immortal animate (living construct) XP 5,600 Initiative +18 Senses Perception +16; darkvision HP 388; Bloodied 194 AC 36; Fortitude 34, Reflex 32, Will 30 Saving Throws +2 (+4 against ongoing damage) Speed 8 Action Points 1 m Bite (Standard, at-will) Reach 2; +27 vs. AC; 4d6 + 4 damage, and the target is marked until the end of the steel predator’s next turn. M Snap Jaw (Standard, at-will) The steel predator makes a bite attack. On a hit, the target is also knocked prone, and the predator makes another bite attack against a different target. M Vicious Pounce (Standard, at-will) The steel predator charges and makes the following attack in place of a bite attack; +25 vs. Fortitude; 2d12 + 5 damage, and the target is pushed 1 square and knocked prone. The predator moves into the space vacated by the target. C Resonating Roar (Standard, recharge 5 6 or when the steel predator takes thunder or lightning damage) ✦ Thunder Close burst 3; +25 vs. Fortitude; 4d8 + 7 thunder damage, and the target is deafened and dazed (save ends both). Shifting Steel (immediate reaction, when a creature adjacent to the steel predator shifts, at-will) The predator shifts into the space vacated by the triggering creature. Alignment Evil Languages Supernal Skills Acrobatics +21, Athletics +21, Endurance +23, Stealth +21 Str 22 (+16) Dex 23 (+16) Wis 23 (+16) Con 26 (+18) Int 15 (+12) Cha 12 (+11)
September 20 09
|
D u n g e o n 170
51
Betrayal at Monadhan
C9: Lower Cavern Encounter Level 25 (35,000 XP)
Setup Arantor (A) This encounter is the climax of the adventure. The PCs must simultaneously manage a skill challenge and a fight with a dual-acting solo dragon, all while Kas waits in the wings. When the PCs reach the precipice that affords a view of the lower cavern, read: Below you paces a huge skeletal dragon, shaking its head from side to side and muttering “Oh, no…oh, no…” The dragon is within a chamber more than a hundred feet long, with alcoves and crevices along the periphery. Stalagmites and stone pillars dot the landscape, and gray mist coheres in low spots on the cavern floor. Along the western wall is a circular portal limned with lightning. You can see shimmering movement within the dark circle, but from this vantage point, you can’t make out what lies beyond. Arcana or Religion Check DC 26: The areas of strange mist scattered around the cavern are laden with memories tied to the dark lord, Arantor. Perhaps what is contained within them could prove useful in vanquishing him. Dungeoneering Check DC 23: The hero notices that the subterranean stream has weakened the rock in the marked squares to the point where a sudden blow might shatter it.
Tactics This encounter works best when some players are working on the skill challenge while others are fighting Arantor directly. A dual-acting, 25th-level solo dragon helps to enforce that split. Be ruthless if the PCs all rush headlong into battle and equally ruthless if they spread out and head into the mist. After a few rounds, the battle will settle into a rhythm, and the players will be constantly assessing whether their characters are more useful in the actual battle or in the skill challenge. Two simple things will help to give the skill challenge its moment in the sun. First, whenever the characters achieve a success, be explicit about the exact penalty that Arantor is suffering because of that success. Such details make the player feel good about the decision to forego combat for a skill check and emphasize the importance of the skill challenge. Second, the success or failure of each skill check is a chance for both you and your players to ham it up a bit and really act like victims/perpetrators of the ancient massacre at Monadhan. Arantor will react with histrionics whenever confronted with evidence of his crime. Watch the interest level around the rest of the table, of course, and don’t engage in long soliloquies. Give each skill challenge a bit of dialogue and a dollop of drama, then proceed with the action. In general, Arantor will fight those PCs who fight him. If a specific PC succeeds twice in a row on the skill challenge, consider sending Arantor after that PC specifically. On an instinctive level, Arantor knows how crippling multiple successes can be, especially if they’re easy for the character to accomplish. Sending an adventurer who’s been dominated with inf luential whispers after one of his or her allies who’s
doing well at the skill challenge is another way to counter successful skill checks. As dragons go, Arantor is more capable making melee attacks than fighting from a distance. He gets to use his breath weapon only twice: once before being bloodied and once at the moment he’s bloodied. Make those attacks count. Watch Arantor’s hit point total once it drops below 500. He needs to be in perfect position when he becomes bloodied. You will know when that’s about to happen, but the players won’t. Imrissa’s choices are straightforward but no less potent. Influential whispers might be the best attack Arantor/Imrissa has, because dominated is the second-best condition a monster can impose on a PC (second only to the “dead” condition). Keep the dominated figure near one of its allies so the domination can “ jump” to another charaacter with the aftereffect. Use betraying breath when it can hit three or more figures; it doesn’t do much damage, but it eats up the characters’ actions twice: first through the dazed condition, and then with an attack that’s (probably) aimed at another PC and not at Arantor. The dragon is a powerful tool in robbing players of actions, which are the fundamental currency of the game. Always consider whether more PC actions will be lost with influential whispers or with betraying breath. And don’t forget to teleport—there’s nothing wrong with free movement.
September 20 09
|
D u n g e o n 170
52
Betrayal at Monadhan
Features of the Area Illumination: The cavern is dimly illuminated by phosphorescent fungus, glimmering insects, and the flickering balefire emanating from Arantor. Stalagmites and Pillars: The large stalagmites and pillars are blocking terrain, while the areas of smaller stalagmites are difficult terrain and provide cover to those behind them. Shadowed Crevices: The crevices marked (C) seem to extend farther than they should and rapidly fill with strange mist and shadows. A character that enters one of these crevices must spend one entire turn navigating the oddly shadowed passage before emerging, at the start of their second turn after entering, from a different, randomly determined crevice. A DC 26 Arcana or Dungeoneering check made during the turn spent in transit allows the player to randomly select two crevices as possible emergence points and then choose the one they prefer. Subterranean River: An underground stream runs just beneath the surface of the cavern in the indicated squares. It flows to the southeast at a rate of 4 squares per turn; move anything in the water 4 squares in the direction of the flow at the start of its turn. A series of stalactites plunge into the river as it exits the cavern; any character not actively attempting to dive below them is automatically stopped from continuing downstream. Crawling out of the stream and onto an adjacent square of rock counts as moving through difficult terrain but is otherwise unimpeded. Thin Stone: The stone over the subterranean stream is quite thin, barely capable of sustaining the weight of creatures standing upon it. Any melee or ranged attack can target a square of the thin stone instead of a creature. Bursts and blasts automatically target all the squares in their area, treating them as a
single target. The stone has AC and Fortitude defense of 20, with other defenses at 15. An attack that deals more than 15 damage destroys the stone square(s) it targeted. Anyone standing entirely on destroyed squares of flooring drops into the stream automatically. Anyone standing partially on destroyed squares of flooring is allowed a saving throw to avoid falling into the stream. Mists: Anyone standing in the mist-filled squares can access the skill challenge. See SC1 below. Ceiling: The ceiling of the cavern is 50 feet above the floor. Western Wall: Along the western wall is a vertical circle with short forks of lightning emerging
from the circumference. This is the portal to the lich’s stronghold and “Grasp of the Mantled Citadel.” Creatures within 5 squares of the portal can see a shimmering image of the Forest of Twisted Souls in Vaerothim (PCs who saw the tapestry in the Cavern of Statues can make a DC 25 Perception check to make the connection ), but the portal doesn’t work without the key of betrayal, which is the Sword of Kas. Southern Alcove: This disused alcove appears to hold no more than rocky debris, but when Imrissa dies, an illusion fades away and Arantor’s hoard is revealed. Treasure parcels L, M, N, and O are here, along with the Sword of Kas (described below). When the illusion drops, Kas appears near the cavern
September 20 09
|
D u n g e o n 170
53
Betrayal at Monadhan
entrance. The characters are closer to the sword and closer to the portal, but Kas certainly has words for his erstwhile partners. Give the players a moment to check out the treasure, then describe Kas’s arrival and deal with the adventure’s final resolution in the Aftermath section on page 17.
Arantor (A)
Huge natural magical beast (dragon, undead) Initiative +19; see also two souls Senses Perception +19; darkvision HP 819; Bloodied 409; see also bloodied breath and shattered prison AC 38; Fortitude 39, Reflex 36, Will 36 Immune disease, poison; Resist 25 cold, 15 necrotic; Vulnerable 15 radiant Saving Throws +5 Speed 8, fly 8 (hover) Action Points 2 m Bite (standard; at-will) F Necrotic Reach 2; +30 vs. AC; 2d8 + 6 damage plus 2d8 necrotic damage. m Claw (standard; at-will) Reach 2; +30 vs. AC; 2d8 + 8 damage. M Furious Onslaught (standard; must be Arantor’s turn; at-will) Arantor makes a claw attack against each enemy in reach, and one bite attack. C Remnant Breath (standard; must be Arantor’s turn; encounter) F Cold, Necrotic Close blast 5; +28 vs. Reflex; 3d10 + 5 necrotic damage, and the target takes 15 ongoing cold damage (save ends). C Bloodied Breath (when Arantor first becomes bloodied; encounter) F Cold, Necrotic Arantor recharges remnant breath and uses it immediately. C Betraying Breath (standard action; must be Imrissa’s turn; recharge y z ) F Charm, Psychic Close blast 5; targets enemies; +28 vs. Will; 2d10 + 4 psychic damage and the target is dazed until it damages one of its allies.
The Weight of Remorse Skill Challenge
Level 23 XP 0*
Arantor’s past is a bloody one, full of carnage and slaughtered innocents. Taking the faces of his victims and calling on his remorse, you seek to distract, disable, or even turn his rage against himself. The PCs hope to call upon Arantor’s conscience and sense of remorse to help them defeat the dark lord and the Imrissa. Complexity 3 (requires 8 successes before 3 failures). Primary Skills Bluff, Diplomacy, History, Insight. Bluff (DC 22 standard action)
Level 25 Solo Brute
XP 35,000
R Influential Whispers (standard; must be Imrissa’s turn; at-will) F Charm, Psychic Ranged 10; +28 vs. Will; 2d10 + 4 psychic damage, and the target is dominated (save ends). Aftereffect: The nearest ally within 3 squares of the target is dominated (save ends). This attack does not provoke opportunity attacks. Dead Dragon’s Stride (move; must be Imrissa’s turn; at-will) F Teleportation Arantor teleports 10 squares. Two Souls Arantor acts twice each round, once on initiative result 30 and once on initiative result 20. The first is Arantor’s turn, and the second is Imrissa’s turn, which determines which powers Arantor can use on each turn. On Imrissa’s turn, Arantor can only move by using dead dragon’s stride. Shattered Prison (when Arantor drops to 0 or fewer hit points) Arantor’s corpse cracks open and releases Imrissa, who continues to fight. She is large instead of huge, has 234 hit points, does not benefit from two souls, can move normally, and only uses powers that can be used on Imrissa’s turn. Alignment Chaotic evil Languages Common, Draconic Skills Athletics +27, Insight +19 Str 31 (+22) Dex 25 (+19) Wis 14 (+14) Con 26 (+20) Int 14 (+14) Cha 23 (+18)
The PC spins stories about the lives of Arantor’s victims, playing up their innocence and the tragedy of their undeserved slaughter. Diplomacy (DC 22 standard action) The PC begs and pleads with Arantor for mercy while playing the role of the victim he or she resembles or attempts to call upon Arantor’s decency and honor. History (DC 27 standard action) The PC recites a litany of the places and peoples ravaged by Arantor in his time, allowing his or her allies to better tailor their stories. A successful History check also grants a +2 bonus to the next Bluff or Diplomacy check. Insight (DC 22 standard action) The PC appeals to Arantor’s conscience and feelings of remorse, slowly homing in on the correct path to take. A successful check also reveals that a failed Intimidate check enrages Arantor. A check result of 27 or higher grants a +2 bonus to the next check in the skill challenge. Secondary Skills Arcana or Religion, Intimidate. Arcana or Religion (DC 14 0 successes, minor action) The PC uses their extensive knowledge of the flow of magic or the undead to discern the effects each check has had and steer their allies accordingly. Using these skills doesn’t count as a success or failure for the challenge. Instead, the result grants a +2 bonus or –2 penalty to the next character’s check. Intimidate (DC 22 1 success, standard action) The PC uses their assumed faces to threaten Arantor with divine judgment or to demand to know why they were attacked. A failed check enrages Arantor, providing him with a +2 bonus to attack rolls and a +6 bonus to damage rolls until the end of the PC’s next turn. Special A character who has discovered Imrissa’s name and uses it during this skill challenge gains a +2 bonus to all checks. If Imrissa’s spirit is present, all PCs gain a +5 bonus to their checks. These bonuses do not stack. Success Arantor guards himself against the influence of the Imrissa and does not act on Imrissa’s turn until he uses shattered prison. Each success has additional consequences as follows: 1st Success: The character deals 4d10 psychic damage to Arantor. 2nd: Arantor takes a –1 penalty to attack rolls and all defenses until the end of the encounter.
September 20 09
|
D u n g e o n 170
54
Betrayal at Monadhan
3rd: The character deals 4d10 psychic damage to Arantor. 4th: Arantor takes a –1 penalty to attack rolls and all defenses until the end of the encounter, and betraying breath recharges only on a 6 until Arantor uses shattered prison. 5th: The character deals 4d10 psychic damage to Arantor. 6th: Arantor takes a –1 penalty to attack rolls and all defenses until the end of the encounter. 7th: The character deals 4d10 psychic damage to Arantor. 8th: Arantor takes a –1 penalty to attack rolls and all defenses until the end of the encounter, and Arantor does not act on Imrissa’s turn until he uses shattered prison. Failure Imrissa retains some of its hold on Arantor despite the appeals to his conscience. The effects already accrued remain, but the skill challenge can no longer be accessed during this encounter. *Note that PCs receive no experience for completing the skill challenge; they receive the relevant experience by defeating Arantor (which is now easier).
Sword of Kas* Epic Level The Sword of Kas was created by Vecna for his lieutenant. Kas rewarded his former master by using it to cut off Vecna’s hand and gouge out his eye. The Sword offers great power to any who grasp it, but wielders end up betraying what they love most. The Sword of Kas is a +5 vicious short sword with the following properties and powers. Weapon: short sword Enhancement: +5 attack rolls and damage rolls Critical: +5d12 damage. Property: The Sword of Kas deals 2d10 extra damage against allies and former allies. Property: Whenever an attack with the Sword of Kas reduces a target to 0 hit points or fewer, you gain concealment until the end of your next turn. Property: If you attack Vecna, a servant of Vecna, a cultist of Vecna, or any other creature working directly to serve Vecna’s ends, you deal 5 extra damage on a hit. Property: When you take the total defense action or use your second wind, you gain a +5 item bonus to all defenses until the start of your next turn.
Kas of Monadhan
Level 26 Solo Soldier
Medium natural humanoid (undead) Initiative +20 Senses Perception +22; darkvision HP 952; Bloodied 476 Regeneration 20 (regeneration doesn’t function while Kas is exposed to direct sunlight) AC 40; Fortitude 41, Reflex 39, Will 41 Immune disease, poison; Resist 15 fire, 15 necrotic; Vulnerable 10 radiant Saving Throws +5 Speed 7, climb 3 (spider climb) Action Points 2 m Bastard Sword (Standard, at-will) ✦ Weapon +31 vs. AC; 2d10 + 10 damage. M Blood Drain (standard; requires combat advantage against the target; encounter) ✦ Healing +29 vs. Fortitude; 2d12 + 14 damage, and the target is weakened (save ends), and Kas regains 59 hit points. M Betrayer’s Whirlwind (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon Targets up to three creatures; +31 vs. AC; 2d10 + 10 damage, and Kas slides the target 3 squares. R Dominating Gaze (minor, recharge 4 5 6) ✦ Charm, Gaze Ranged 5; +29 vs. Will; the target is dominated (save ends). Aftereffect: The target is dazed (save ends). Property: The Sword of Kas is initially invisible to everyone but the creature possessing it. You gain combat advantage against melee targets when using it until you successfully hit, at which point the weapon becomes visible to everyone. The Sword of Kas turns invisible again after being sheathed for a short rest (or for 5 minutes). Power (Encounter): Free Action. When you would pull or push a target, you slide the target the same distance instead. Power (Daily • Poison, Radiant): Free Action. When you hit with the Sword of Kas, the target takes ongoing 15 poison damage (save ends). If the attack is made against an undead creature, it instead takes ongoing 15 radiant damage (save ends). Saving throws made to end this effect take a -2 penalty. *The Sword of Kas is fully described in Open Grave, page 44.
XP 45,000
R Kas’s Challenge (Minor 1/round; at-will) ✦ Necrotic Close burst 5; targets one enemy; no attack roll; the target is marked until the end of Kas’s next turn. If the target makes an attack that doesn’t include Kas as a target while marked by this power, it takes ongoing 10 necrotic damage (save ends). Kas’s Recovery (when Kas becomes bloodied) All adverse effects affecting Kas end, then Kas takes a standard action after the triggering action is resolved. Mist Form (standard; encounter) ✦ Polymorph Kas becomes insubstantial and gains fly (hover) 12 until the end of his next turn. Kas cannot attack while in this form and can sustain this form for up to 1 hour. Misty Assault (immediate reaction, when hit by an attack; at-will) ✦ Necrotic Kas flies 6 squares and is insubstantial while he flies. He can make a bastard sword attack before or after he flies. Alignment Evil Languages Common Skills Arcana +25, Insight +22, Intimidate +27, Religion +25, Stealth +21 Str 26 (+21) Dex 20 (+18) Wis 19 (+17) Con 22 (+19) Int 24 (+20) Cha 28 (+22) Equipment plate armor, bastard sword
About the Author
David Noonan has an extensive list of RPG credits, including Martial Power™, Scepter Tower of Spellgard™, and contributions to the 4th Edition core rules. He lives in Washington state with his wife and two children.
September 20 09
|
D u n g e o n 170
55
Betrayal at Monadhan
New Monsters Cambion Impaler
Level 19 Skirmisher
Medium immortal humanoid (devil) XP 2,400 Initiative +18 Senses Perception +24; darkvision HP 179; Bloodied 89 AC 33; Fortitude 31, Reflex 32, Will 30 Resist 10 fire Speed 6, fly 10 (clumsy) m Spear (Standard, at-will) ✦ Weapon +24 vs. AC; 3d6+8 damage. M Swooping Charge (Standard, encounter) ✦ Weapon The cambion impaler charges and makes the following attack in place of a melee basic attack: +25 vs. AC; 3d6 + 8 damage, and either slide the target 3 squares and immobilize the target until the end of the impaler’s next turn or deal 10 ongoing damage. The impaler is not considered a clumsy flyer when making this attack. A Soulscorch (Standard, recharge z ) ✦ Fire Area burst 1 within 10; +20 vs. Reflex; 2d8 + 4 fire damage, and ongoing 10 fire damage. Alignment Evil Languages Common, Supernal Skills Athletics +20, Bluff +19, Diplomacy +19 Str 22 (+15) Dex 25 (+16) Wis 20 (+14 Con 19 (+13) Int 17 (+12) Cha 21 (+14) Equipment robes, spear
Cambion Legionnaire
Medium immortal humanoid (devil)
Level 21 Soldier
XP 3,200
Initiative +18 Senses Perception +20; darkvision HP 198; Bloodied 99 AC 37; Fortitude 34, Reflex 31, Will 31 (35 if another cambion is within 3 squares) Resist 15 fire Speed 6, fly 8 (clumsy) m Gladius (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon +28 vs. AC; 3d6 + 8 damage. Effect: The target is marked until the end of the legionnaire’s next turn. M Shield Bash (minor; at-will) ✦ Weapon +28 vs. AC; the cambion legionnaire pushes the target 1 square and can shift into the square the target vacates.
C Immolate (standard; recharge z ) ✦ Fire Close burst 2; +28 vs. Reflex; 2d8 + 5 fire damage, and ongoing 10 fire damage. Legion’s Mantle While the legionnaire is within 3 squares of another cambion, it gains a +4 bonus to Will defense (already included in its statistics) and a +2 bonus on saving throws. Alignment Evil Languages Common, Supernal Skills Arcana +22, Bluff +24, Diplomacy +24 Str 14 (+13) Dex 20 (+16) Wis 19 (+15) Con 22 (+17) Int 22 (+17) Cha 27 (+19) Equipment short sword, light shield
September 20 09
|
D u n g e o n 170
56
Betrayal at Monadhan
Cambion Soulthief
Level 22 Lurker
Medium immortal humanoid (devil) XP 4,150 Initiative +22 Senses Perception +18; darkvision HP 156; Bloodied 78 AC 36; Fortitude 33, Reflex 35, Will 30 Resist 15 fire Speed 10, Fly 8 (clumsy) m Longsword (standard, at-will) ✦ Weapon +27 vs. AC; 2d6 + 8 damage. r Soul Grasp (standard; recharges when no enemy is affected by this power) ✦ Necrotic Ranged 10; +27 vs. Will; 1d10 + 8 necrotic damage, and the target takes ongoing 5 necrotic damage and is slowed (save ends both). First Failed Save: The target is immobilized instead of slowed (save ends). Second Failed Save: The target is stunned instead of immobilized (save ends). M Double Lunge (standard; must be invisible; at-will) ✦ Weapon The cambion soulthief makes a longsword attack against two targets. Combat Advantage The cambion soulthief deals 1d6 extra damage on melee attacks against any target granting combat advantage to it. Invisibility (standard, at-will) ✦ Illusion The cambion soulthief becomes invisible until it attacks. Soul Fuel (minor; a creature must be immobilized or stunned by this soulthief’s soul grasp; at-will) The cambion soulthief turns invisible until it attacks and teleports 10. The creature affected by soul grasp loses a healing surge and automatically saves against the effect of soul grasp. Alignment Evil Languages Common, Supernal Skills Stealth +23 Str 23 (+17) Dex 25 (+18) Wis 14 (+13) Con 18 (+15) Int 13 (+12) Cha 17 (+14) Equipment longsword, iron gauntlet
Disfigured Vampire
Level 21 Brute
Medium natural humanoid (undead) XP 3,200 Initiative +12 Senses Perception +16; darkvision HP 245; Bloodied 122 Regeneration 10 (regeneration does not function while the disfigured vampire is exposed to direct sunlight) AC 33; Fortitude 34, Reflex 30, Will 31 Immune disease, poison; Resist 15 necrotic; Vulnerable 15 radiant Speed 6 m Vampiric Claw (Standard, at-will) ✦ Necrotic +24 vs. AC; 2d6 + 6 damage, and 10 ongoing necrotic damage (save ends). C Gaze Upon My Hideous Ruin (immediate reaction, when first bloodied and again when reduced to 0 hit points; at-will) ✦ Fear, Psychic Close burst 2; +22 vs. Will; 2d8 + 7 psychic damage, and the disfigured vampire pushes the target 5 squares. M Blood Drain (Standard; requires combat advantage; recharges when an adjacent creature becomes bloodied) ✦ Healing +23 vs. Fortitude; 2d12 + 13 damage, and the target is weakened (save ends), and the disfigured vampire regains 61 hit points. Alignment Evil Languages Common Str 23 (+16) Dex 15 (+12) Wis 13 (+11) Con 25 (+17) Int 7 (+8) Cha 17 (+13)
Callophage Vampire
Level 22 Controller
Medium natural humanoid (undead) XP 4,150 Initiative +16 Senses Perception +19; darkvision HP 203; Bloodied 101 Regeneration 10 (regeneration does not function while the callophage vampire is exposed to direct sunlight) AC 36; Fortitude 33, Reflex 34, Will 35 Immune disease, poison; Resist 15 necrotic; Vulnerable 10 radiant Speed 6 m Claw (Standard; at-will) ✦ Necrotic +28 vs. AC; 2d8 + 6 damage, and the target is grabbed. M Blood Drain (Standard; must have combat advantage; recharges when an adjacent creature becomes bloodied) ✦ Healing +24 vs. Fortitude; 2d12 + 15 damage, and the target is weakened (save ends), and the callophage vampire regains 50 hit points. M Disfiguring Bite (Standard; at-will) ✦ Psychic Targets a creature grabbed by the callophage vampire; +26 vs.Fortitude; 3d8 + 5 damage, and the target takes ongoing 10 psychic damage and is dazed (save ends both). R Stolen Beauty (Standard; cannot be used until a disfiguring bite hits; recharges after each successful disfiguring bite) ✦ Charm, Psychic Ranged 10; +26 vs. Will; 3d10 + 3 psychic damage, and the target cannot use encounter attack powers, daily attack powers, or utility powers (save ends). Aftereffect: The target cannot willingly move closer to the callophage vampire (save ends). A Alluring Visage (standard; recharges when bloodied) ✦ Charm Close burst 10; +26 vs.Will; the target is pulled 3 squares and immobilized (save ends). Sustain Minor: Each creature that has not yet saved against the effect is pulled 3 squares and immobilized (save ends). Mist Form (standard; encounter) ✦ Polymorph The callophage vampire becomes insubstantial and gains a fly speed of 12, but cannot make attacks. The callophage vampire can remain in mist form for up to 1 hour or end the effect as a minor action. Alignment Evil Languages Common Skills Diplomacy +21, Streetwise +21 Str 18 (+15) Dex 20 (+16) Wis 17 (+14) Con 19 (+15) Int 20 (+16) Cha 21 (+16)
September 20 09
|
D u n g e o n 170
57
Legacy of Io By Daniel Marthaler An adventure for 24th-level characters illustrations by William O’Connor cartography by Mike Schley TM & © 2009 Wizards of the Coast LLC All rights reserved.
“And thus it was that the proud god Io, forefather of dragons, went forth alone to meet that formidable primordial known as the King of Terror. The confrontation raged fierce between the divine and the base for long days as grievous wounds were wrought by both upon the form of the other. It continued in such ferocity unabated until the vile King of Terror took up his crude axe and dealt to noble Io a fearsome blow that shattered his divine form, hewing the valiant god in twain. The vicious primordial’s triumph was not to be, for no sooner had Io’s sundered remains fallen to earth than they rose up to assail the beast as the twin gods Tiamat and Bahamut. Their sudden assault saw the King of Terror torn asunder in a righteous fury, yet in their triumph, the victorious deities fell upon each other. Two imperfect forms for a single essence, the pair are ever drawn together, locked in eternal hatred as that which they are seeks unachievable consolidation.” No vember 20 09
|
D u n g e o n 17 2
4
Legacy of Io
“Legacy of Io” is an adventure for five 24th-level characters. By the end of the adventure, the PCs should be midway through 25th level. This adventure follows “Grasp of the Mantled Citadel” in the Scales of War adventure path but can be adapted for use in any campaign. In “Legacy of Io,” the characters seek out and recover an ominous artifact they hope will assist them in their struggle against the forces of the dark goddess Tiamat. Unlikely alliances are forged and the heroes find themselves in violent conflict with the good-aligned forces of the heavenly city of Hestavar as they storm through the peaceful planar metropolis in search of what might be the only way to thwart the seemingly unstoppable machinations of the Dragon Queen.
Background In the previous installment of the adventure path (“Grasp of the Mantled Citadel”), Tiamat’s sinister and far-reaching plans bore dark fruit as she summoned Bahamut in mortal form and destroyed him. He may have fallen, but Bahamut has one last gambit in play: the deva paladin Amyria has begun experiencing visions that depict the Arrow of Fate, an ancient and powerful artifact that dates from the Dawn War at creation’s beginning that could be the undoing of Tiamat’s schemes. When the primordial known as the King of Terror cut down the original dragon-god Io, the fallen god’s sundered remains rose up as the deities Tiamat and Bahamut. A shard of Io’s form had been torn off during the titanic battle and remained separate from the newly birthed gods, becoming what is now known as the Arrow of Fate. The divine
fragment-turned-artifact retains the furor of the Dawn War that raged during its creation and is a potent weapon against both the divine and primordial. Infused with the colossal energies released at the destruction of Io and birth of his successor gods, the relic is capable of exerting influence over the forces of life and death. This immensely powerful object was eventually sequestered by servants of Pelor, Erathis, and Ioun, for the trio of gods had plans for the artifact. As part of an unusual bargain with Asmodeus, the deities undertook a great ritual to lock away the artifact with four great seals.
Adventure Synopsis Amyria, driven by the visions that began shortly after Bahamut’s destruction, approaches the PCs and begs their assistance in recovering the artifact. At her urging, they travel to the astral city of Hestavar to seek out whatever knowledge of the artifact’s location they can discover. Upon arriving in the domain, however, the characters come under attack by draconic forces seemingly loyal to Bahamut. After fending off the assault, the heroes make their way to the great libraries of the Swan Tower, home to the goddess of knowledge, Ioun. At possibly the greatest collection of divine lore and scholarship that exists, they search for information on the bizarre visions tormenting Amyria. They discover that the artifact they seek is known as the Arrow of Fate and that it is hidden within Hestavar. Four mystical seals conceal the artifact; each is guarded in turn by forces loyal to the gods and dedicated to preventing anyone and anything from tampering with their ward.
The PCs have several options. The fourth and final seal is inaccessible until the first three are destroyed, but the first three can be tackled in any order. Regardless of the sequence, the characters need to open all four to gain access to the Arrow. Once they destroy the first, they come to the attention of the Bright Guard, a company of exalted responsible for policing Hestavar. The Bright Guard combs the streets for the characters, forcing them to move carefully or attract unwanted attention. To open the seal dedicated to Pelor, the heroes must fight their way through the angelic guardians of the Dawnbell Bastion to sunder the bell in which the seal has been bound and that gives the small fortification its name. The self less defenders are unaware of the nature of the bell (and would not be moved even if they knew), and they resist violently any attempts to trespass or tamper with the rightful property of their master. When the PCs make their way onto Methion, the mercantile district where Erathis’s seal is located, they are ambushed by a band of celestial dragonkin, this time augmented by forces from the Nine Hells. After dealing with the seemingly random attack, the characters head to the spacious market square where the goddess placed her seal. Before destroying it, the heroes must overcome Erathis’s faithful who patrol the square and the guardians summoned by the disturbance of the seal itself. Before the PCs can neutralize the seal dedicated to Ioun, they are forced to scour the city for the entrance to its hidden resting place. Once they gain entry to the Sealed Library, they must fight their way through the scholarly defenders and undo the seal.
No vember 20 09
|
D u n g e o n 17 2
5
Legacy of Io
The Quests In “Legacy of Io,” the characters must identify and recover the Arrow of Fate. As the adventure progresses, they have the following chances to earn quest XP. Minor Quest—Identify the Artifact The vast libraries and knowledgeable sages of the Swan Tower offer the best chance of uncovering the identity of the mysterious artifact and its history. This information is crucial to determining the PCs’ course of action and understanding the task at hand. Reward: 5,000 XP. Minor Quest—Sunder the Dawnbell Pelor bound one of the four seals into the form of a bell wrought from silver and gold. Destroying it opens the seal and must be done if the characters hope to reclaim the Arrow. Reward: 6,000 XP. Minor Quest—Destroy the Seal of Methion Erathis worked her seal into the great market square of Methion. Without its destruction, the Arrow will remain hidden. Reward: 6,000 XP. Minor Quest—Open Ioun’s Seal Ioun hid her seal where few could find it. The heroes must uncover its location and open the seal. Reward: 6,000 XP.
To open the final seal and claim the Arrow of Fate, the characters must head into the eye of the storm that rages over the rough and tumble island district know as the Salts. There they face not another servant of the gods but a powerful titan. With its destruction, the final seal is undone and the Arrow is revealed. Unfortunately for the heroes, the titan’s passing also removes the force holding the churning sea at bay and it comes crashing back to fill the void. When the PCs are washed ashore, they find themselves betrayed by an ally and forced into a desperate battle to retain possession of the prize on which so much depends.
What You Need to Play
Preparing for Adventure
“Legacy of Io” employs the treasure parcel system as described in the Dungeon Master’s Guide®. A total of fifteen treasure parcels are available to the heroes over the course of the adventure. The following sidebar lists the most likely encounters to have parcels and what each parcel might contain. The magic items should be taken from your players’ wish lists. The parcels can be awarded in whatever order you see fit, but the higher level items are best used later in the adventure.
“Legacy of Io” gives the characters an opportunity to gain a powerful artifact that might be able to hold back the seemingly unstoppable advances of Tiamat and perhaps even strike back at her. The heroes make their way to the domain that epitomizes civilization and justice only to find themselves in conflict with the heavenly denizens and working with devils. The will of three gods must be overthrown if the PCs hope to thwart that of another. The adventure can begin as soon as the characters complete their previous adventure. Go to “Trouble Sleeping” (page 7) when you are ready to begin.
Everything you need to run the adventure, including background information, setup, tactical encounters, and maps, is contained within these pages. More detailed information on how to use the tactical encounter format can be found in previous Scales of War adventures, such as “A Tyranny of Souls,” while Manual of the Planes™ and “Hestavar: the Bright City” from Dragon #371 can provide such information on the domain and city of Hestavar.
Treasure Preparation
Major Quest—Secure the Arrow Overcoming the enraged titan that guards the final seal reveals the Arrow of Fate, but the PCs must still survive Guionne’s betrayal and escape the city with the Arrow if it is to be of any use against Tiamat. Reward: 35,000 XP.
No vember 20 09
|
D u n g e o n 17 2
6
Legacy of Io
Treasure Parcel A: ____________, H1. A Warm Welcome Parcel B: ___________, D3. For Whom the Bell Tolls Parcel C: ___________, D3. For Whom the Bell Tolls Parcel D: ___________, D3. For Whom the Bell Tolls Parcel E: ____________, M1. Back Alley Ambush Parcel F: ____________, M3. Last Ditch Defense Parcel G: ____________, M3. Last Ditch Defense Parcel H: ____________, L1. Angry Librarians Parcel I: ____________, L1. Angry Librarians Parcel J: ____________, L2. Headmaster’s Charge Parcel K: ____________, L2. Headmaster’s Charge Parcel L: Parcel 15, S1. Raging Storm Parcel M: ____________, S2. Guionne’s Betrayal Parcel N: ____________, S2. Guionne’s Betrayal Parcel O: ____________, S2. Guionne’s Betrayal Based on the guidelines in the Dungeon Master’s Guide, the following parcels can go in spaces above. Magic items should be selected from your players’ wish lists. Parcel 1: Magic item, level 28 Parcel 2: Magic item, level 27 Parcel 3: Magic item, level 27 Parcel 4: Magic item, level 26
Parcel 5: Magic item, level 25 Parcel 6: 1,000 pp, one potion of recovery, 5 ad Parcel 7: six clear diamonds that glow with inner light (15,000 gp each) Parcel 8: 750 pp, mithral and celestial gold statuette of Pelor inlaid with condensed astral fire (100,000 gp) Parcel 9: 20 ad, one potion of recovery, 5 tempest whetstones (level 20, Adventurer’s Vault, page 190) Parcel 10: 120 pp, one potion of recovery, 2 potions of resistance (level 24, Adventurer’s Vault, page 188) Parcel 11: celestial oak and baatorian hardwood puzzle box inlaid with mithral (50,000 gp) containing 200,000 gp worth of residuum, gold and black enameled astrolabe adorned with points of elemental lightning, fire, and ice (50,000 gp) Parcel 12: 460 pp, ritual scroll of Planar Portal and Plane Shift Parcel 13: devil skin pouch holding 20 ad Parcel 14: 250 pp, a pair of mithral and black glass bracelets chased with shifting fire (50,000 gp each), platinum ring set with astral diamonds and frozen lightning (50,000 gp), one potion of life Parcel 15: The Arrow of Fate (see page 26)
Trouble Sleeping Once the PCs have had a chance to recuperate from their last adventure, Amyria approaches them. It is obvious that something is bothering the deva a great deal: her gray skin is drawn and has taken on a sickly cast, her eyes are feverish, and her normally distinct
white markings seem faded, almost clouded over. She avoids answering questions about her health or reason for seeking the characters out until they are in private, at which point she holds up her hands to forestall further questions.
“I understand that this is somewhat out of the ordinary, but I have need to speak to you without the others in the Coalition overhearing. “I .. have not been well. The others believe that my grief over Bahamut’s passing and the progress of the war are responsible. I have done nothing to dissuade them of their ideas, but they are incorrect. Since the fall of the Platinum Dragon, my dreams have been wracked by increasingly vivid visions. Each night I see myself pierced through with an arrow of bone wrapped with sinew and flesh and adorned with burning runes. Silver-chased blood spreads from my wounds and runs from the head of the arrow. The power of these visions is frightening and ancient beyond explanation, but I cannot describe them as evil or malicious. “With every fiber of my being I know these visions to be a gift, a last gift from Bahamut to his beleaguered children. The artifact from the visions is the key; it must somehow be able to foil Tiamat’s foul schemes. I have asked much of you before, but I cannot approach the Coalition with this. I beg of you to search out the identity of and recover this fateful artifact, without which I fear we will all be lost.” If the heroes press her with questions, she explains that this is all she knows, but she is certain of what she has revealed. Amyria is visibly relieved if the PCs agree to the search and enjoins them, for reasons she cannot quite articulate, to begin their search in the fabled libraries of the Swan Tower within the astral domain of Hestavar. She offers to arrange transport to the domain if the characters wish, explaining that she knows an astral skiff captain by the name Jin’har who would be willing to make a short detour and discretely drop off the heroes at the edge of the domain as repayment for a past favor.
No vember 20 09
|
D u n g e o n 17 2
7
Legacy of Io
PCs trained in Arcana or Religion know that the astral domain and metropolis of Hestavar is the home to Erathis, Ioun, and Pelor and is widely considered to be the ideal of just civilization. A DC 25 check with either skill reveals that the Swan Tower is the seat of Ioun and perhaps the most prestigious center of learning that exists. Should the characters attempt to use rituals to ferret out information regarding the mysterious artifact, their efforts yield only silence. It seems that something powerful is obscuring the artifact and blocking divination attempts. If the heroes mention this to Amyria, she is unperturbed and utterly certain that the answers will reveal themselves when the time is right.
Part One: The Bright City Whether the PCs accept Amyria’s offer of transport or arrange to reach Hestavar on their own, this adventure assumes they arrive with little trouble and less excitement. If the characters haven’t quite reached 24th level, the journey through the astral sea could be fraught with however much danger is necessary to get them caught up. At the end of the trip, the heroes are deposited upon a pristine white sand bank that winds its way through a peaceful lagoon sparkling in the sunlight. Beyond the beach are open, airy buildings carved from white marble and roofed with gold. Elegant ships ply the lagoon and glide through the sky, darting about within the cloud of earthmotes that rises ever higher. Manicured cobblestone streets and breathtaking buildings of every imaginable architectural style crown these floating neighborhoods. Hestavar, the Bright City, lies before them.
The Sand Bar
Hestavar
The sun-warmed sand winds toward the city ahead, the way sprinkled with rocky outcroppings and small pools. Tiny waves lap at the edges of the bar, contributing to the peaceful, calming ambiance. After encounter H1, the PCs are left with troubling questions but no answers. The attacking forces were clearly the servants of a draconic deity but seem to have been from the celestial hosts of the late Bahamut. Equally as disturbing and inexplicable is the fact that the attackers seemed to know where the characters would be. Whatever the answers to these riddles, the ambushers left few traces and fewer clues. If the heroes tarry overlong, a flight of twelve Angels of Light led by an Angel of Command (see encounter D1) arrive to investigate. Unless the PCs do something rash, such as attacking the angels, they find little evidence and offer to escort the newcomers the remainder of the way to the city. Tactical Encounter: H1. A Warm Welcome (page 14).
The remainder of the sojourn in the city is uneventful. White sand gives way to sculpted marble and manicured cobblestone as the characters make their way into the city proper. The vast majority of the city lies above them on the many earthmotes that rise to the heavens. Even at ground level, the bustle of an active, thriving metropolis envelops the characters. The open, airy streets, lined with beautiful homes and businesses of all descriptions, are thronged with exalted going about their business and troops of angels going about their gods’ business. Despite all the activity, there remains a sense of peace and contentment that no mortal city could duplicate. Getting anywhere in a massive, bustling city built on hundreds of independent and sometimes mobile floating chunks of rock is a daunting task for outsiders. Fortunately for the heroes, the natives of Hestavar take great pride in their ability to navigate the confusing three-dimensional maze and are more than willing to give aid to lost travelers. The complex nature of the
No vember 20 09
|
D u n g e o n 17 2
8
Legacy of Io
Hestavar Hestavar, the Bright City, is the pinnacle of civilization: art, innovation, trade, and justice flourish among the many floating earthmotes upon which the ideal city is built. Erathis, Ioun, and Pelor reside within the city, along with hosts of angels and exalted souls. A scattering of beings from every mortal race inhabit or are passing through the city at any time and might rub shoulders with the angelic servants of other deities, eladrin lords, or even the odd devil that comes to the city to conduct business. The domain consists of a great number of earthmotes that climb above the sparkling lagoon occupying the lower third of the domain. Hestavar sports normal gravity, but soft drops, areas that allow a character to float gently downward, connect many of the earthmotes to those higher or lower. Radiance Affinity: Creatures gain a +1 bonus to attack rolls using radiant powers. Creatures deal only half damage with attacks using necrotic damage (though ongoing necrotic damage is unaffected). Current Developments: Spurred by the recent death of Bahamut, many of the good and unaligned gods have come together to discuss Tiamat’s actions and what they might do in response. Erathis, Ioun, and Pelor have withdrawn from Hestavar to attend this council, leaving the operation of the city in the hands of its angelic bureaucracy.
city plus the fact that the natives derive much goodnatured entertainment from the bewilderment of mortal bumpkins means that their directions, while always accurate and precise, will seem insanely convoluted to foreigners. For those disinclined to navigate on foot, astral skiffs offer ferry services to the more popular destinations within the city for the reasonable price of a few platinum pieces a head. The PCs can find almost any service or item they might be looking for within the city, and it is easy to lose sight of their mission amid all the bounty the Bright City has to offer. If they get too far off track, have their path pass close by the Swan Tower or even move up and repurpose encounter M1 by ambushing them while shopping—that should get them going again. Regardless of whether they head straight to it or detour, the Swan Tower is a landmark of Hestavar. Reaching it should be simple.
Kerith-Ald, the Swan Tower Kerith-Ald occupies the entirety of its own earthmote. The majority of the many structures on the earthmote are given over to the magic academy, university, and vast library that make the tiny island of rock perhaps the greatest center of knowledge that exists. The Swan Tower for which the complex is named rises above all the others and is the private resting place and retreat of the goddess Ioun. The fabulous library of the Swan Tower is far too large to be contained within any single structure on the earthmote; it is spread among several adjoining buildings. The storied halls are overflowing with every manner of tome, scroll, and loose paper imaginable, all meticulously cataloged and filed on one of the countless shelves or in some other receptacle by a veritable army of scribes and librarians. The
knowledge contained within the library is freely available to all who seek it, but those that abuse this hospitality quickly find themselves expelled and barred from reentry by the hosts of Ioun. During their research (i.e., once they have started the skill challenge), the characters are approached by an elderly gentleman. He would be indistinguishable from the host of other scholars frequenting the library were it not for the two small horns jutting from his forehead, red irises, and hoofed feet that proclaim his devilish origins. With a flourish and bow, he introduces himself as the humble planar historian and scholar Guionne and explains that he believes he and the heroes are searching for the same artifact. He, of course, has a purely academic interest in the artifact and would be most willing to lend the PCs his expertise in uncovering it for the chance to prove that it does indeed exist and that his theories about it are correct. He warns them, though, that this vein of research earns no good will from the guardians of the library, and that he has had to step carefully and move circuitously in order to avoid being expelled. Guionne seems friendly and sincere in his offer. He will leave the characters to their own devices should they wish it, although he does occasionally stop by to add a helpful book to their pile, recommend a work by a particular author, or see if they have reconsidered his offer. Should they accept his help at any point, Guionne is delighted and bends all his expertise to assisting them in their search, tasking a pair of cherub-looking creatures to fetch critical tomes as he confers with the heroes. He is especially keen to point out potential targets for the PCs to spy upon, sheepishly blaming old habits if this is brought up. Skill Challenge: H2. Researching the Visions (page 15).
No vember 20 09
|
D u n g e o n 17 2
9
Legacy of Io
The Next Move
D1. Meditation Garden
Hestavar Alerted
With the information gained in the previous skill challenge in hand, the characters have some choices to make. They can attempt each of the first three seals in any order, but once they make their first move, the forces of Hestavar will be alerted. That makes making moving about the city a challenge. Before beginning, the heroes have time to finish business in the city and to take an extended rest if desired. When the PCs are ready to move on a seal, proceed to the appropriate section (Part Two, Three, or Four).
The angels that inhabit the bastion use this room and its sand garden to aid in their meditation. The doors are left open to enable those who have become lost to ask for assistance. Tactical Encounter: D1. Pointed Meditation
The characters’ attacks stir the Bright Guard and allied angelic forces into action. Bands of exalted take to the streets as flights of angels search from the air, forcing the heroes to tread carefully or attract the attention of the authorities. Skill Challenge: H3. Dodging the Law
Part Two: The Dawnbell Bastion The Dawnbell Bastion is a light fortification and garrison built and maintained by angels of Pelor upon three small, neighboring earthmotes. The elegant tower that rises several times the height of its sister buildings is open at the top, revealing the bastion’s primary function as home to the Dawnbell. The bell that lends the complex its name tolls but once a day, announcing the beginning of each day in a city that knows no darkness. The bastion can be reached by a soft fall that deposits travelers onto the largest of the earthmotes and can be left by a similar manner to reach motes below. The guardians are accustomed to their bastion being used in this manner and pay little heed to those arriving or leaving so long as they stray no further than the entrance to D1. The angelic defenders are not aware that the Dawnbell is one of the ancient seals, but they will brook no interference with their master’s rightful property. They have been tasked with the defense of the bastion and will not be swayed.
D2. Golden Bridge This fantastic bridge appears to be crafted from impossibly thin sheets and arches of gold and is painstakingly detailed with scenes of angels battling and emerging victorious over the forces of darkness. Tactical Encounter: D2. Defending the Bastion
Part Three: The Seal of Erathis
The first of three balconies that ring the tower has gold-flecked marble walls that are pierced with arches that provide access to the tower proper. A low wall runs around the outer edge of the balcony.
The earthmote and mercantile district known as Methion is one of the most diverse and cosmopolitan markets to be found anywhere. Only the bazaar in the City of Brass comes close, and while artisans of Hestavar might grudgingly concede that the arms traded in the bazaar are more destructive, they are quick to point out that the markets of Methion are unequaled for weapons more sophisticated than a sharpened metal stick. The earthmote is also home to the majority of the exalted houses dedicated to Erathis and involved in the Game of Making. It is here that the goddess chose to bind her seal, working it into the very ground of the main market square. Thousands of merchants and customers make their way across the seal each day, unaware of what lies beneath their feet.
D5. The Dawnbell
Methion Side Streets
The uppermost balcony of the tower is open to the air to allow the tolling of the Dawnbell to be heard throughout the city. The archangel tasked with the defense of the bell can be found within this area at all times. Tactical Encounter: D5. For Whom the Bell Tolls
The back alleys and side streets in Hestavar may be cleaner and better lit than in any mortal city, but danger lurks even in the heart of the Bright City. Once again the celestial hosts of Bahamut seem to have it in for the PCs, but this time they are accompanied by disturbing new allies. Tactical Encounter: M1. Back Alley Ambush
D3. Practice Hall The larger of the two circular buildings is used by the defenders to practice and hone their martial skills in mock combat against each other. The angels within keep a sharp eye out for threats to the bastion. Tactical Encounter: D3. Defending the Bastion
D4. Tower Base
No vember 20 09
|
D u n g e o n 17 2
10
Legacy of Io
Market Square The central market square of Methion teems with activity, barely slackening in the slightest even during the hours normally reserved for resting. Whether just passing through or browsing among the temporary stalls and carts that spring up across the square, thousands tread each day upon the massive symbol of Erathis that is emblazoned upon the flagstones. A small force of exalted soldiery moves through the crowd at all hours, keeping the peace and ensuring that thievery is all but unknown. Tactical Encounter: M2. Market Day
Erathis’s Faithful When the characters attempt to disrupt the seal, the following tactical encounter is triggered as the seal summons the faithful to defend their mistress’s property. Tactical Encounter: M3. Last Ditch Defense
Hestavar Alerted The heroes’ attacks stir the Bright Guard and allied angelic forces into action. Bands of exalted take to the streets as flights of angels search from the air, forcing the PCs to tread carefully or attract the attention of the authorities. Skill Challenge: H3. Dodging the Law
Part Four: The Sealed Library Rather than defend her seal with angelic steel as Pelor chose to do or with the weight of civilization as Erathis did, Ioun hid hers away within the Sealed Library, a marvelous construction which is itself hidden in the fabric of the domain. Within its confines, trusted scholars have long worked on sensitive projects for their lady while standing vigil over the seal.
The open and well lit interior seems at odds with its cloistered nature, but the structure of the place is designed to promote contemplation while fostering research and advancement. The vast shelves could never contain the sheer quantity of lore required by the scholars ensconced within the library. They are tied through ancient ritual to every library that welcomes Ioun’s presence. Books slip from the world and beyond to stock the shelves of the library before shifting back when no one is watching.
Searching the Streets Entrances to the Sealed Library are hidden throughout the city, allowing the scholars to move about and gather whatever they might need for their work. Dead ends to back alleys behind alchemist’s shops and spare rooms in rare book seller’s stores are the places the characters must search, all without arousing unwanted suspicion. Skill Challenge: L0. Unearthing the library
L1. The Library Travelers to the library arrive in this room after stepping through one of the many doorways in Hestavar to emerge from the portal that ties them all together. The scholars who work within the library use this room to conduct their research, meditate on obscure arcanisms, and verbally spar with one another. Tactical Encounter: L1. Angry Librarians
L2. Headmaster’s Office This well-furnished office is used by the scholar appointed by Ioun to oversee the running of the library. In addition to such duties, the headmaster also uses to the office to conduct private research and entertain guests who have been granted access to the library by the goddess. Tactical Encounter: L2. Headmaster’s Charge
Hestavar Alerted The heroes’ attacks stir the Bright Guard and allied angelic forces into action. Bands of exalted take to the streets as flights of angels search from the air, forcing the PCs to tread carefully or attract the attention of the authorities. Skill Challenge: H3. Dodging the Law
Part Five: Storm’s Fury With each seal opened, the storm that rages perpetually over the district known as the Salts grows more intense. The breaking of the third seal is heralded by shrieking winds and roaring thunder. The uninhabited islands near to the center of the gale are raked with lightning as the storm’s rage reaches heights never before seen and the waters of the lagoon begin to flow inward toward the eye of the storm. It is in the eye, where no immortal dares to tread, that the final seal was placed, bound into an all but forgotten terror from the war at creation’s beginning: Nakheten, the raging storm, a powerful storm titan lieutenant of the primordial Heur-Ket. Eons of captivity have not been kind to the storm titan, but while he is only a shadow of his former self, he remains a terrible force of insane rage and hatred.
Eye of the Storm Within a cage formed of deific magic, Nakheten rages upon the scoured lagoon bed. The storm above roars and thunders in echo of his fury as he drives the waters of the lagoon into a frothing wall of destruction in a bid to free himself and resume his master’s work. Tactical Encounter: S1. Raging Storm
No vember 20 09
|
D u n g e o n 17 2
11
Legacy of Io
Washed Up This nameless, uninhabited island lies near the heart of the storm. Its location and unique, bladelike rock formations ensure that a steady stream of waterlogged flotsam washes up with each tide. After the death of Nakheten sees the lagoon crashing back to reclaim the battlefield, the characters become just such refuse. Guionne and his devilish entourage are aware of the island’s peculiar nature and have come to see what the tide drags in. Tactical Encounter: S2. Guionne’s Betrayal
Concluding the Adventure Guionne’s defeat sees the heroes free to flee the city unopposed, a wise course of action considering the forces of Hestavar are only expanding the hunt. With the Arrow of Fate in hand, the PCs have succeeded in their quest and undoubtedly secured a powerful artifact for the war against Tiamat, but the cost of this triumph is high and the repercussions of their actions are sure to be far reaching.
Roleplaying the Arrow of Fate The Arrow of Fate does not communicate directly with its bearer, although latent emotions imprinted upon the Arrow do occasionally spill over. Normally these are confined to inf luencing preexisting feelings, nudging the bearer along rather than leading her. The only encounters that prompt the Arrow to directly inf luence its bearer are those with the servants of the primordial known as the King of Terror (toward which the bearer feels and unreasoning hatred); plots to resurrect that primordial; or stumbling across some long-forgotten method of reuniting Io’s sundered halves.
The Arrow of Fate Arrow of Fate Epic Level An ancient shard of the fallen dragon god Io’s physical form, the Arrow of Fate is a powerful weapon against the primordials and their servants. As a fragment of a greater god, the artifact is equally effective against the divine, for what better to harm a god with than a piece of another? The Arrow, created from the essence of the one that gave rise to them, also holds great power over the children of Io. The Arrow of Fate can function as a rod, staff, or wand, as any weapon of the spear group, or as ammunition for a crossbow, longbow, or shortbow (in which case it overrides any enchantment the bow or crossbow may carry). Whatever its form, it is a +6 weapon of that type. Enhancement: Attack rolls and damage rolls Critical: +6d8 damage, or +6d12 damage against dragons and creatures with the elemental or immortal origin Property: Attacks using the Arrow of Fate ignore the first 5 points of resistance a dragon or creature with the elemental or immortal origin has, if any, to the damage. Power (At-will): Minor Action: The Arrow of Fate transforms from its current form into one of the other implements, weapons, or ammunitions listed above. Power (Daily F Fire, Radiant): Standard Action. You breathe forth a blast of fire charged with the energy of the astral sea: Close blast 3; Constitution + 6 vs. Reflex; 4d12 + 8 fire and radiant damage. Miss: Half damage.
Goals of the Arrow of Fate F Destroy the primordials and their servants F Protect the world for which Io fought and was destroyed F Prevent the twin halves of Io, the gods Tiamat and Bahamut, from resolving their eternal conflict by permanently destroying their opposite
Concordance Starting score
5
Owner gains a level
+1d10
Owner slays a primordial Owner kills a servant of a primordial (max 1/day) Owner completes a quest to restore balance between Tiamat and Bahamut Owner flees from combat with a primordial or servants of one Owner knowingly aids a primordial or its servants
+2 +1 +1 –1 –1
Pleased (16-20) “The essence of the sundered god and I are as one.” The Arrow of Fate has found a worthy bearer to entrust with its power. Property: Attacks using the Arrow of Fate ignore the first 15 points of resistance a dragon or creature with the elemental or immortal origin has against the damage. Property: Once per day, the Arrow of Fate can be used to perform the Raise Dead ritual without the need for components or its bearer having the ritual caster feat. Power (Encounter F Fire, Radiant): Standard Action. You breathe forth a blast of fire charged with the energy of the astral sea: Close blast 5; Constitution + 6 vs. Reflex; 4d12 + 8 fire and radiant damage. Miss: Half damage. This supersedes the normal close blast attack granted by the artifact.
No vember 20 09
|
D u n g e o n 17 2
12
Legacy of Io
Satisfied (12-15)
Unsatisfied (1-4)
Moving On
“I have routed the enemies of creation. With the Arrow’s help, I will drive them before me.” The Arrow of Fate senses great promise in its bearer, granting increased powers to enable the bearer to achieve it.
“Flight is unbefitting when the world is at stake.” The Arrow begins to find its bearer lacking and to withdraw its blessings.
“The Arrow has given me what aid it can. It is time to stand on my own.” The Arrow of Fate believes it has accomplished what it can with its current bearer and that its goals would be better served elsewhere. When the bearer next gains a level, the Arrow of Fate disappears, continuing its eternal struggle elsewhere. If its concordance was at least 5, it leaves behind a +6 elementalbane version of its current or most used form. If this form is an implement, the daily power deals 2d10 rather than 2[W] damage and uses the owner’s primary casting stat in place of Strength. Until it moves on, the Arrow of Fate retains all the powers and properties appropriate for its current concordance.
Property: Attacks using the Arrow of Fate ignore the first 10 points of resistance a dragon or creature with the elemental or immortal origin has against the damage. Power (Daily F Fire, Radiant): Standard Action. You breathe forth a blast of fire charged with the energy of the astral sea: Close blast 5; Constitution + 6 vs. Reflex; 4d12 + 8 fire and radiant damage. Miss: Half damage. This supersedes the normal close blast attack granted by the artifact. Power (Daily F Fear): Standard Action. An aura of majestic terror washes over your enemies: Close burst 10; targets enemies; Constitution +6 or Charisma +6 vs. Will; the target is stunned until the end of your next turn. Aftereffect: The target takes a –2 penalty to attack rolls (save ends).
Normal (5-11) “The threats to creation are endless. Another warrior is always welcomed.” Anyone willing to safeguard the world or oppose the primordials earns at least a passing chance from the Arrow of Fate.
Special: You take a –2 penalty to attack rolls and damage rolls against creatures other than servants of a primordial or those with the elemental origin. This penalty applies whether you are using or merely carrying the Arrow.
Displeased (0 or Lower) “Cowardice in the face of or allying with the forces that seek to undo creation is unforgivable.” The Arrow is disgusted with its bearer. Only a sudden or dramatic turn of events will prevent it from abandoning the failed bearer in short order. Special: You take a –5 penalty to attack rolls and damage rolls against creatures other than servants of a primordial or those with the elemental origin. This penalty applies whether you are using or merely carrying the Arrow. Special: Whenever you move away from an enemy without ending closer to another or making an attack that round, the Arrow makes the following attack against you as an immediate interrupt: Constitution +6 vs. Will; the target is slowed until the start of its next turn.
No vember 20 09
|
D u n g e o n 17 2
13
Legacy of Io
H1. A Warm Welcome Encounter Level 25 (39,500 XP)
Setup 2 silver dragons errant (D) 12 angels of light (Off top and right edges of map) A strike force, seemingly from the celestial hosts of Bahamut, lies in wait for the characters to begin crossing the open sandbar. Once their prey is exposed, the dragons lead their angelic minions in a glorious charge. When the dragons begin their attack, read: A shining pair of silver dragons plummets toward you with a thunderous roar, their eagerness obviously getting the better of their tactical sense. A dozen brilliant angelic figures follow silently and purposefully behind, their burning glaives held at the ready. 12 Angels of Light
Level 23 Minion Skirmisher
Medium immortal humanoid (angel) XP 1,275 each Initiative +19 Senses Perception +19 HP 1; a missed attack never damages a minion; see also death burst. AC 37; Fortitude 34, Reflex 34, Will 36 Immune fear; Resist 15 radiant Speed 8, fly 12 (hover) m Angelic Glaive (standard; at-will) F Weapon Reach 2; +28 vs. AC; 15 damage. C Death Burst (when the angel of light drops to 0 hit points) FRadiant The angel of light explodes in a burst of radiant light: close burst 10; targets enemies; +26 vs. Fortitude; the target is blinded until the end of its next turn. Effect: Angels in the burst gain 10 temporary hit points. Alignment Unaligned Languages Supernal Str 18 (+15) Dex 23 (+17) Wis 27 (+19) Con 23 (+17) Int 15 (+13) Cha 23 (+17) Equipment glaive.
Tactics The dragons brashly rush into combat and lead off with their most powerful attacks. They use breath weapon whenever it recharges, laying about themselves with tail smash or errant’s fury when their more impressive abilities are unavailable. The angels are more methodical, setting up flanks and ganging up 2 Silver Dragons Errant (D)
Level 24 Elite Brute
Huge natural magical beast (dragon) XP 12,100 each Initiative +19 Senses Perception +19; darkvision HP 564; Bloodied 282; see also bloodied breath AC 36; Fortitude 38, Reflex 35, Will 34 Resist 30 cold Saving Throws +2 Speed 10, fly 10 (hover), overland flight 15 Action Points 1 m Bite (standard; at-will) Reach 2; +27 vs. AC; 4d6 + 8 damage. m Claw (standard; at-will) Reach 2; +27 vs. AC; 2d8 + 8 damage. C Tail Smash (standard; at-will) Close blast 3; one, two, or three enemies in blast; +25 vs. AC; 4d6 + 8 damage, and the target is dazed (save ends). M Errant’s Fury (standard; at-will) The silver dragon errant makes two claw attacks and one bite attack. C Breath Weapon (standard; recharge ⚃ ⚄ ⚅) F Cold Close blast 5; +23 vs. Reflex; 3d8 + 8 cold damage, and the target gains vulnerable 10 to all damage (save ends). Miss: Half damage. C Bloodied Breath (free, when first bloodied; encounter) F Cold Breath weapon recharges, and the silver dragon errant uses it. C Frightful Presence (standard; encounter) F Fear Close burst 10; targets enemies; +23 vs. Will; the target is stunned until the end of the silver dragon errant’s next turn. Aftereffect: The target takes a -2 penalty to attack rolls (save ends). Unstoppable A silver dragon errant makes saving throws against ongoing damage at the start of its turn as well as at the end of its turn. Alignment Unaligned Languages Common, Draconic Skills Athletics +27, Insight +19 Str 31 (+21) Dex 24 (+19) Wis 14 (+14) Con 26 (+20) Int 14 (+14) Cha 22 (+18)
to take down a single target rather than randomly charging into the fray. The angels fight to the end, but a dragon pulls back to the edges of the combat to launch breath weapon attacks when seriously injured. Should both dragons be in danger of dying, they flee, leaving the angels to their fate.
Features of the Area Illumination: Bright light. Rock Outcroppings: These rocky outcroppings are 10 feet tall. They can be climbed with a DC 24 Athletics check. The central outcropping is pierced by an arch large enough for medium creatures to operate in freely. Creatures under the arch gain cover from attacks originating above them. Water: Both the small pool and the lagoon are relatively shallow and can be moved through but count as difficult terrain.
No vember 20 09
|
D u n g e o n 17 2
14
Legacy of Io
H2. Researching the Visions Encounter Level 24 (30,250 XP)
Setup The Swan Tower is home to quite possibly the finest university, magic academy, and library to be found among the planes. If the information the heroes seek on Amyria’s strange visions and the artifact depicted within can be uncovered anywhere, the prestigious halls of the Swan Tower will hold the answers. Researching the Visions Skill Challenge
Level 24 XP 30,250
The halls of Kerith-Ald are steeped in lore long forgotten elsewhere. Somewhere within the Swan Tower, an ancient tome or equally ancient scholar must hold the answers. Complexity 5 (requires 12 successes before 3 failures). Primary Skills Arcana, Bluff, History, Religion, Stealth Secondary Skills Diplomacy, Insight, Streetwise Victory The PCs manage to uncover the information contained within the sidebar on page 16. Defeat The characters not only fail to uncover the information they need, but their antics and the fact that they were delving into sensitive areas get them barred from returning to the library for a year and a day. Arcana (DC 29, 1 success, no maximum) The hero delves through the countless works of obscure arcana searching for anything relevant or draws out useful information by engaging in discourse with another scholar versed in the subject.
Bluff (DC 29, 1 success, no maximum) Posing as a visiting devotee of ancient divine lore or promising to credit a scholar in the groundbreaking paper the PC is this close to finishing, the character gleans useful information from the inhabitants of the Swan Tower. Diplomacy (DC 29 or 33, 0 successes) A success on this check does not count as a success for the challenge but does grant a +2 bonus to the next skill check. Likewise, failure does not count as a failure for the challenge but instead imposes a –2 penalty to the next skill check. Alternatively, a character can use this skill to remove one failure caused by the use of Intimidate, with success on a DC 33 check. Success removes the failure but grants no other bonus, while failure still imposes a –2 penalty to the next skill check. The character smoothes the way with their considerate approach, removing problems before they occur and ensuring everyone remains happy. History (DC 29, 1 success, no maximum) The hero finds links to other historical events. By working backward from those, she uncovers information the party seeks. Insight (DC 29, 0 successes) A success on this check does not count as a success for the challenge but does grant a +2 bonus to the next skill check. Likewise, failure does not count as a failure for the challenge but instead imposes a –2 penalty to the next skill check. The PC scouts out scholars that seem to have the knowledge necessary, setting them up for other characters, or uses their skills to keep the rest of the party motivated and focused. Intimidate Attempts to use Intimidate result in an automatic failure. The inhabitants of the Swan Tower are either immovable extensions of divine will or break down and babble incoherently when confronted, yielding no useful information either way. Such strongarm tactics do, however, draw the attention of the tower’s angelic guardians. Religion (DC 29, 1 success, no maximum) Sifting through the archives on the ancient history of the divine, guided by the character’s knowledge of the players involved, or engaging in theological debate earns the hero a vital bit of lore. Stealth (DC 29, 1 success, no maximum) The PC manages to slip quietly into a portion of the library where he or she wouldn’t normally be allowed and overhears a juicy bit of information regarding the artifact.
Streetwise (DC 29, 0 successes) A success on this check does not count as a success for the challenge but does grant a +2 bonus to the next skill check. Likewise, failure does not count as a failure for the challenge but instead imposes a –2 penalty to the next skill check. Even in the cloistered libraries of the Kerith-Ald there are things people are willing to trade favors for. Credit, time with rare tomes, access to a rival’s notes; the character facilitates these things, turning favors earned to the advantage of the party.
Once the heroes begin the skill challenge, Guionne (who keeps a close eye on the goings-on at the library) approaches them and offers his services. Should they accept his offer of assistance, his insights provide a +2 bonus to all checks made from that point on. Even if the characters refuse his first offer of help, he leaves them with a tip that proves accurate and provides a +2 bonus to the next check made (alternatively, the DM may reveal an approach to this skill challenge that the players haven’t thought of, such as the use of Streetwise). Guionne approaches a second time after that check, hoping his beneficial aid changed the characters’ minds. He can approach the group as a whole or single out one or two characters whom he deems the most likely to welcome his help.
Development Success in the challenge reveals the enormity of the task ahead of the heroes, what might be at stake, and the far-reaching repercussions of removing the Arrow of Fate from Hestavar. If the PCs accepted Guionne’s help during their research, he hovers nearby while the characters discuss their options and next move. If not, than he eavesdrops on the discussion anyway. At an appropriate time, he interjects himself into the conversation, claiming to feel solidarity with the heroes and offering his assistance once more. He is quite sure the servants of the three gods that call
No vember 20 09
|
D u n g e o n 17 2
15
Legacy of Io
The Arrow of Fate During their research into the strange visions plaguing Amyria, the characters uncover the following information. The flesh-wrapped bone arrow described by Amyria appears to be the artifact known as the Arrow of Fate, a relic from the terrible Dawn War, when gods fought primordials for control of the world. The original dragon god Io was cut down during that struggle by the primordial known as the King of Terror. When the sundered halves of the deity fell to the ground, they sprang up as the twin gods Tiamat and Bahamut. A single fragment of Io’s physical form remained separated from the newly birthed gods, and it was this tiny shard of divinity that became the Arrow. The Arrow of Fate is a potent weapon against both the primordial and the divine, forged as it was during the upheaval of the Dawn War. As time wore on, claims arose that it was capable of exerting a powerful influence over the forces of life and death. Eventually the artifact became an issue of contention between the archdevil Asmodeus and the trio of gods Erathis, Ioun, and Pelor. Asmodeus sought access to Hestavar’s knowledge for his devils and followers. In a show of cooperation characteristic of an earlier age, the three gods granted this, but only with guarantees that Asmodeus and his adherents would treat Hestavar, its
environs, and the souls of its inhabitants as strictly offlimits for their usual deviltry. Asmodeus agreed, and to cement this bargain, the Arrow of Fate was locked away in Hestavar on condition that the pact would stand for as long as the Arrow remained within the city. Sealing away the Arrow was Asmodeus’s suggestion, but it suited the interests of all parties. To safeguard the Arrow and ensure that the accord would last, Erathis, Ioun, and Pelor wove a great ritual in four parts, one for each of the deities and a fourth representing their collaboration. Each of the gods warded their seal in their own way. Pelor forged his into the form of a great bell that would announce the coming of dawn and set a garrison of angels to watch over the bastion constructed to hold it. Erathis bound her seal into the very flagstones of the largest market square upon the mercantile earthmote and neighborhood of Methion. Ioun secreted hers away within the Sealed Library, a cloistered haven hidden within the fabric of the domain, where a trusted few researched sensitive projects for their lady. The fourth seal, protected by the first three, rests under the constant storm that marks the Salts district. It is accessible only should each of the others be undone. Even so, the gods set a terrible foe from the Dawn War to guard the Arrow from any who would disturb it.
Hestavar home will not be understanding of the PCs’ quest and will react badly to any attempts to open the seals. Guionne cannot aid in the coming battles that he sees as inevitable, both because he has no skill for such things and because of the pact between Asmodeus and Hestavar. He can offer the characters the use of two houses in the city. Guionne is certain that no one could trace them to back to him, and they could be invaluable to the characters as safe havens. Whether or not the heroes accept his offer of sanctuary, Guionne gives them the addresses before departing quietly to avoid attracting undue attention. Failure leaves the heroes in a difficult position. Not only are they still in the dark about the nature of the Arrow of Fate, but they are barred from further research in the library. Fortunately for them, Guionne is not considered part of their cabal and is not expelled from the library. He offers to share his research with the characters, claiming that with their insights, he’ll be able to uncover the truth in just a few days. Should they agree, he returns with the information in two days, at which point he suggests the heroes make use of his two safe houses, as above. If the PCs adamantly refuse to have anything to do with Guionne and fail the challenge, they return to where they are staying to find a courier has dropped off an anonymous packet of concise information regarding the seals, complete with warnings about the authorities’ reactions and the locations of two safe houses. This, of course, came from Guionne.
No vember 20 09
|
D u n g e o n 17 2
16
Legacy of Io
H3. Dodging the Law Encounter Level 24 (12,100 XP)
Setup After the characters launch an attack upon or open one of the first three seals, the peacekeeping forces of Hestavar scramble to apprehend the “violent criminals.” Once alerted, exalted patrols begin sweeping the streets as flights of angels search from the skies. This makes moving about the city a difficult prospect if the heroes wish to avoid confrontation with the authorities. These patrols continue for the duration of this adventure, meaning that the PCs will engage in this skill challenge three times, once after breaking each seal. Dodging the Law Skill Challenge
Level 24 XP 12,100
Exalted and angelic patrols are out in force, combing the streets for the characters. The party must tread lightly or draw unwanted attention. Complexity 2 (requires 6 successes before 3 failures). Primary Skills Insight, Stealth, Streetwise Secondary Skills Intimidate, Perception Victory The heroes manage to evade the forces of justice. Defeat The PCs are discovered and set upon by a patrol; see Development. Insight (DC 29, 1 success, no maximum) After observing the patterns of the patrols, the characters recognize a safe time to leave the area.
Intimidate (DC 29, 0 successes) A success on this check does not count as a success for the challenge but does grant a +2 bonus to the next skill check. Likewise, failure does not count as a failure for the challenge but instead imposes a –2 penalty to the next skill check. The hero pressures those that have seen the party to remain quiet or suffer unpleasant consequences. The risk, of course, is that they will run to the authorities all the faster once the PC moves on. Perception (DC 29, 0 successes) A success on this check does not count as a success for the challenge but does grant a +2 bonus to the next skill check. Likewise, failure does not count as a failure for the challenge but instead imposes a –2 penalty to the next skill check. The characters notice a sheltered back alley or unorthodox path across the earthmotes that seems lightly traveled and might therefore be lightly patrolled. Stealth (DC 28, 1 success, no maximum) Attempts to use this skill suffer a –2 penalty for each party member that is not trained in Stealth. The character coaches the rest of the party on the art of stealth, attempting to slip the group past the patrols unnoticed. Streetwise (DC 29, 1 success, no maximum) The maze of streets and alleys is a second home to the PC, her keen understanding of the urban jungle enabling her to guide the party down paths the law would never think to check.
Development Success lets the characters avoid the patrols searching for them as they move about the city. Failure means the heroes are spotted by a patrol that consists of either one Angel of Command and five Angels of Light (see D1 for stats) or one Exalted Captain and four Exalted Patrollers (see M2 for their stats). After fleeing the scene or dealing with the patrol, the PCs are able to make it to their destination.
No vember 20 09
|
D u n g e o n 17 2
17
Legacy of Io
D1. Pointed Meditation
If this is the first seal the characters attempt to open, the nearest angel turns from its meditation when the heroes enter the room and addresses them:
Encounter Level 25 (35,050 XP)
“Welcome to the Dawnbell Bastion, citizens. There is no shame in seeking guidance in the Bright City, for none are truly lost who seek the path. Where is it that you desire to go?”
Setup 2 angels of command (C) 2 angels of authority (A) 10 angels of light (L) Gleaming doors seemingly crafted from solid gold and covered with bas-reliefs of angels triumphing over the forces of darkness are thrown open, revealing a scene of intense serenity. An immaculately manicured sand garden lies surrounded by reflecting pools in the center of a circular room. A number of angelic figures in deep contemplation are spread about the area or perched on the balcony that runs the circumference of the room. 10 Angels of Light (L)
Level 23 Minion Skirmisher
Medium immortal humanoid (angel) XP 1,275 each Initiative +19 Senses Perception +19 HP 1; a missed attack never damages a minion; see also death burst. AC 37; Fortitude 34, Reflex 34, Will 36 Immune fear; Resist 15 radiant Speed 8, fly 12 (hover) m Angelic Glaive (standard; at-will) F Weapon Reach 2; +28 vs. AC; 15 damage. C Death Burst (when the angel of light drops to 0 hit points) F Radiant The angel of light explodes in a burst of radiant light: close burst 10; targets enemies; +26 vs. Fortitude; the target is blinded until the end of its next turn. Effect: Angels in the burst gain 10 temporary hit points. Alignment Unaligned Languages Supernal Str 18 (+15) Dex 23 (+17) Wis 27 (+19) Con 23 (+17) Int 15 (+13) Cha 23 (+17) Equipment glaive
Should the PCs name a destination, the angel provides detailed and precise directions. If the characters attempt to move past the angel or respond that they wish to proceed farther into the bastion, angels move to block off the stairs and the original angel states: “None may trespass within the bastion by the will of the lord Pelor. It is time for you to leave.” The angels will not make the first move, but it is obvious that they will not be swayed in their duty. Violence or attempts to forcibly push past an angel to gain the stairs, along with any other means of moving further into the bastion, cause the angels to attack. If this is not the first seal the heroes have visited, the angels recognize them and attack once the characters are in the room.
Tactics The angels of command lead the charge, one attempting to catch as many PCs as possible with its edict of honor while the other uses honor strike to immobilize the most dangerous-looking foe. They attempt to keep as many characters as possible marked in order to gain the benefits of lead the faithful and to protect their allies, employing from one, many at the first opportunity.
The angels of authority hang back, preferably on the second level, to blast at the party. They fly forward to unleash majestic rally when it is available. The angels of light swarm the foe, setting up flanks for themselves and the angels of command and focusing their attacks on critical targets. A few might hang back to prevent loose PCs from moving up the stairs to attack the angels of authority. The angels fight intelligently and methodically to the end. 2 Angels of Authority (A)
Level 22 Controller (Leader)
Large immortal humanoid (angel) XP 4,150 each Initiative +17 Senses Perception +18 HP 203; Bloodied 101 AC 36; Fortitude 32, Reflex 34, Will 35 Immune fear; Resist 15 radiant Speed 8, fly 12 (hover) m Quarterstaff (standard; at-will) F Radiant, Weapon Reach 2; +27 vs. AC; 1d10 + 8 damage plus 1d10 radiant damage. R Lightning Bolt (standard; at-will) F Lightning Ranged 10; +26 vs. Fortitude; 2d10 + 8 lightning damage, and the target is dazed until the end of the angel of authority’s next turn. C Majestic Rally (standard; recharge ⚄ ⚅) F Radiant, Thunder Close burst 5; targets enemies; +26 vs. Will; 1d10 + 8 radiant damage plus 1d10 thunder damage, and the target is weakened (save ends). Miss: Half damage. Effect: Any angel within the burst gains a +2 bonus to attack rolls until the end of the angel of authority’s next turn. Angelic Presence (while not bloodied) Any attack against the angel of authority takes a –2 penalty to the attack roll. Alignment Unaligned Languages Supernal Skills Insight +23, Religion +23 Str 20(+16) Dex 22(+17) Wis 25 (+18) Con 19(+15) Int 24(+18) Cha 27(+19) Equipment plate armor, quarterstaff
No vember 20 09
|
D u n g e o n 17 2
18
Legacy of Io
2 Angels of Command (C)
Level 25 Soldier (Leader)
Large immortal humanoid (angel) XP 7,000 each Initiative +19 Senses Perception +18 HP 234; Bloodied 117 AC 41; Fortitude 39, Reflex 37, Will 36 Immune fear; Resist 15 radiant Speed 8, fly 12 (hover) m Longsword (standard; at-will) F Weapon Reach 2; +32 vs. AC; 3d8 + 9 damage, and the target is marked until the end of the angel of command’s next turn. M Honor Strike (standard; recharge ⚄ ⚅) F Radiant, Weapon Reach 2; +32 vs. AC; 3d8 + 9 damage and the target is marked, immobilized, and takes ongoing 15 radiant damage (save ends all). C Edict of Honor (standard; recharges when first bloodied) F Thunder Close burst 3; +28 vs. Will; 3d8 + 9 thunder damage, and the target is marked until the end of the angel of command’s next turn, and the angel of command pulls the target 2 squares. Lead the Faithful Allies deal 5 extra radiant damage when they hit a creature marked by an angel of command. From One, Many (immediate reaction when an angel minion ally within 5 squares is reduced to 0 or fewer hit points; encounter) Four angel minions of the same type rise from the remains of the triggering angelic minion. These minions appear in the square in which the triggering minion fell, or the nearest unoccupied square. The new minions act on the same initiative count as the triggering minion. Angelic Presence (while not bloodied) Any attack against the angel of command takes a –2 penalty to the attack roll. Alignment Unaligned Languages Supernal Skills Athletics +27, Insight +19 Str 29 (+21) Dex 21 (+17) Wis 22 (+18) Con 26 (+20) Int 25 (+19) Cha 22 (+18) Equipment full plate, heavy shield, longsword
Features of the Area Illumination: Bright light streams through the many arrow slits in the second story. Ref lecting Pools: The pools are knee deep and are difficult terrain. Sand Garden: The sand garden can be moved through freely, although this destroys the carefully tended designs. Clambering onto one of the large rocks takes an extra square of movement. Stairs: Squares containing stairs are difficult terrain. Second Story: The second story is open over the center of the room and has no railing. Characters that fall from the second story take 2d10 damage.
No vember 20 09
|
D u n g e o n 17 2
19
Legacy of Io
D3. Defending the Bastion Encounter Level 24 (34,075 XP)
Setup 1 angel of command (C) 1 angel of supremacy (S) 2 angels of thunder (T) 7 angels of light (L) Where this encounter occurs depends on the characters. If they attack into area D3, they catch the angels unawares. The characters earn a surprise round, and the encounter begins with the angels in the positions marked. If the heroes strike out across the bridge (area D2) that leads to area D4 of the tower, the angels of thunder automatically see them as they move onto the bridge and the encounter will be fought primarily on the bridge and in area D4 of the tower. 7 Angels of Light (L)
Level 23 Minion Skirmisher
Medium immortal humanoid (angel) XP 1,275 each Initiative +19 Senses Perception +19 HP 1; a missed attack never damages a minion; see also death burst. AC 37; Fortitude 34, Reflex 34, Will 36 Immune fear; Resist 15 radiant Speed 8, fly 12 (hover) m Angelic Glaive (standard; at-will) F Weapon Reach 2; +28 vs. AC; 15 damage. C Death Burst (when the angel of light drops to 0 hit points) F Radiant The angel of light explodes in a burst of radiant light: close burst 10; targets enemies; +26 vs. Fortitude; the target is blinded until the end of its next turn. Effect: Angels in the burst gain 10 temporary hit points. Alignment Unaligned Languages Supernal Str 18 (+16) Dex 23 (+18) Wis 27 (+20) Con 23 (+18) Int 15 (+14) Cha 23 (+18) Equipment glaive
Angel of Supremacy (S)
Level 24 Soldier
Large immortal humanoid (angel) XP 6,050 Initiative +19 Senses Perception +18 HP 226; Bloodied 113 AC 40; Fortitude 38, Reflex 36, Will 35 Immune fear; Resist 15 radiant Speed 8, fly 12 (hover) m Spear (standard; at-will) F Thunder, Weapon Reach 3; +31 vs. AC; 1d10 + 9 damage plus 1d10 thunder damage. R Light of Justice (standard; encounter) F Radiant Ranged 10; +29 vs. Fortitude; 2d10 + 9 radiant damage. Effect: The target is marked until the end of the encounter. Summons to Justice (minor 1/round; at-will) Ranged sight; targets creatures marked by the angel of supremacy; no attack roll; the angel of supremacy pulls the target 1 square. Astral Brilliance (standard; encounter) F Radiant, Zone Close burst 3; +29 vs. Reflex; 2d10 + 9 radiant damage. Effect The burst creates a zone of radiance that lasts until the end of the encounter. The angel of supremacy’s spear attack deals 1d10 extra radiant damage while the angel is within the zone. Angelic Presence (while not bloodied) Any attack against the angel of supremacy takes a –2 penalty to the attack roll. Threatening Reach An angel of supremacy can make opportunity attacks against all enemies in reach. Alignment Unaligned Languages Supernal Skills Intimidate +21 Str 29 (+21) Dex 21 (+17) Wis 22 (+18) Con 26(+20) Int 25 (+19) Cha 19(+16) Equipment plate armor, heavy shield, spear
Tactics If the encounter takes place in area D3, the angels are surprised by the heroes. The angel of command and angel of supremacy, who were sparring, fly up to engage the PCs and keep them from reaching the angels of thunder. The angels of light swarm forward, ganging up on characters to bring them down. The two angels of thunder hang back and fire into the heroes from the safest spot they can find, using thunder wing to escape melee.
If the PCs move onto the bridge (area D2), an angel of thunder spots them immediately. The angels of light fly out to engage the characters as they cross the bridge while the two angels of thunder blast away at the party. The angel of command and the angel of supremacy move out the following round and position themselves to prevent the heroes from crossing the bridge. If the PCs withdraw to maximum range or if the combat drags on for more than five rounds, then the angels of thunder abandon their defensive positions and attempt to hurl the characters off the bridge with their thunder wing power. The angels fight to the death.
2 Angels of Thunder (T)
Level 24 Artillery
Large immortal humanoid (angel) XP 6,050 each Initiative +18 Senses Perception +20 HP 173; Bloodied 86 AC 36; Fortitude 34, Reflex 36, Will 37 Immune fear; Resist 15 radiant Speed 10, fly 12 (hover) m Quarterstaff (standard; at-will) F Thunder, Weapon Reach 2; +31 vs. AC; 1d6 + 8 damage plus 1d10 thunder damage. R Thunder Crack (standard; at-will) F Thunder Ranged 20; +29 vs. Fortitude; 2d12 + 8 thunder damage, and the target is knocked prone. C Thunder Wing (standard; at-will) F Thunder Close burst 3; targets enemies; +29 vs. Fortitude; 2d6 + 8 thunder damage, and the angel of thunder pushes the target 2 squares. Effect: The angel of thunder shifts 2 squares. R Dancing Lightning (standard; recharge ⚄ ⚅) F Lightning Ranged 20; targets one, two, or three enemies in range; +29 vs. Reflex; 3d12 + 8 lightning damage. Angelic Presence (while not bloodied) Any attack against the angel of authority takes a –2 penalty to the attack roll. Alignment Unaligned Languages Supernal Skills Insight +23, Religion +23 Str 20(+16) Dex 22(+17) Wis 25 (+18) Con 19(+15) Int 24(+18) Cha 27(+19) Equipment quarterstaff
No vember 20 09
|
D u n g e o n 17 2
20
Legacy of Io
Angel of Command (C)
Level 25 Soldier (Leader)
Large immortal humanoid (angel) XP 7,000 Initiative +19 Senses Perception +18 HP 234; Bloodied 117 AC 41; Fortitude 39, Reflex 37, Will 36 Immune fear; Resist 15 radiant Speed 8, fly 12 (hover) m Longsword (standard; at-will) F Weapon Reach 2; +32 vs. AC; 3d8 + 9 damage, and the target is marked until the end of the angel of command’s next turn. M Honor Strike (standard; recharge ⚄ ⚅) F Radiant, Weapon Reach 2; +32 vs. AC; 3d8 + 9 damage and the target is marked, immobilized, and takes ongoing 15 radiant damage (save ends all). C Edict of Honor (standard; recharges when first bloodied) F Thunder Close burst 3; +28 vs. Will; 3d8 + 9 thunder damage, and the target is marked until the end of the angel of command’s next turn, and the angel of command pulls the target 2 squares. Lead the Faithful Allies deal 5 extra radiant damage when they hit a creature marked by an angel of command. From One, Many (immediate reaction when an angel minion ally within 5 squares is reduced to zero or fewer hit points; encounter) Four angel minions of the same type rise from the remains of the triggering angelic minion. These minions appear in the square in which the triggering minion fell, or the nearest unoccupied square. The new minions act on the same initiative count as the triggering minion. Angelic Presence (while not bloodied) Any attack against the angel of command takes a –2 penalty to the attack roll. Alignment Unaligned Languages Supernal Skills Athletics +27, Insight +19 Str 29 (+21) Dex 21 (+17) Wis 22 (+18) Con 26 (+20) Int 25 (+19) Cha 22 (+18) Equipment full plate, heavy shield, longsword
Features of the Area Illumination: Bright light illuminates all the possible combat arenas. Stairs: Squares containing stairs are difficult terrain. Doors: The golden doors to area D3 and D4 are not barred and can be opened easily. Golden Bridge: The bridge (area D2), despite the airy feeling of its construction, is stable and movement across the bridge incurs no penalties. The bridge is open to the air, and any creature forced off faces a long drop to the nearest earthmote below. The low railing allows a creature a saving throw to avoid the fall, with those successful falling prone in the nearest square on the bridge. Those that fail fall 100 feet, take 10d10 falling damage, and are going to have a hard time returning to the fight before it’s over. Creatures capable of flying fall eight squares before managing to halt themselves, take no falling damage, and are free to fly back into the combat on their turn. Second Story: The second story of area D3 is open over the center of the room and has no railing.
Combat Matting: The ground floor of area D3 is covered with thick mats to prevent injuries occurring while the angels spar. Falling from the second story incurs no damage as the padding absorbs the force, but does still knock one prone. Arrow Slits: The arrow slits on the second story of D3 give the occupants cover but do not restrict their ability to attack out. Tower Balcony: The balcony of area D4 is enclosed behind a low wall which grants cover to medium-sized creatures behind it. A series of arches provide access to the tower’s interior. Large creatures must squeeze to fit onto the balcony but can pass through the arches unhindered.
No vember 20 09
|
D u n g e o n 17 2
21
Legacy of Io
D5. For Whom the Bell Tolls
“The charge to defend the Dawnbell was laid upon me by the lord Pelor, master of the Radiant Host, the Dawn Bringer. You shall not stand against his will.”
Encounter Level 26 (50,200 XP)
Memar, Level 27 Elite Soldier Archangel of Protection (M)
Setup Memar (M) Dawnbell 8 angels of light (L) Memar stands where indicated. The angels of light are not present at the beginning of the encounter. When the heroes enter the area, read: A massive figure radiating a palpable aura of righteousness and power awaits you at the top of the tower. Its armor, crafted from gold and mithral, bears impossibly detailed scenes of angelic forces waging war against all manner of dire foes, as does the titanic greatsword it holds before itself. Turning its featureless face to you, a voice like echoing thunder intones:
8 Angels of Light Level 23 Minion Skirmisher
Medium immortal humanoid (angel) XP 1,275 each Initiative +19 Senses Perception +19 HP 1; a missed attack never damages a minion; see also death burst. AC 37; Fortitude 34, Reflex 34, Will 36 Immune fear; Resist 15 radiant Speed 8, fly 12 (hover) m Angelic Glaive (standard; at-will) F Weapon Reach 2; +28 vs. AC; 15 damage. C Death Burst (when the angel of light drops to 0 hit points) F Radiant The angel of light explodes in a burst of radiant light: close burst 10; targets enemies; +26 vs. Fortitude; the target is blinded until the end of its next turn. Effect: Angels in the burst gain 10 temporary hit points. Alignment Unaligned Languages Supernal Str 18 (+15) Dex 23 (+17) Wis 27 (+19) Con 23 (+17) Int 15 (+13) Cha 23 (+17) Equipment glaive
Large immortal humanoid (angel) XP 22,000 Initiative +20 Senses Perception +21 Blazing Radiance aura 5; enemies treat the area within the aura as difficult terrain and take a –2 penalty to attack rolls as long as Memar is not bloodied. HP 560; Bloodied 280 AC 45; Fortitude 42, Reflex 39, Will 44 Immune fear; Resist 15 Radiant Saving Throws +2 Speed 8, fly 12 (hover) Action Points 1 m Greatsword (standard; at-will) F Weapon Reach 2; +32 vs. AC; 3d8 + 9 damage. M Warding Strike (standard; at-will) F Radiant, Weapon Reach 2; +32 vs. AC; 3d8 + 9 damage, and the first time the target makes an attack before the end of its next turn it takes 3d8 + 9 radiant damage. C Overwhelming Presence (standard; encounter) F Radiant Close burst 5; targets enemies; +31 vs. Will; 1d8 + 9 radiant damage, and the target is stunned until the end of Memar’s next turn. Dawnbell Warden When Memar is within 5 squares of the Dawnbell, the Dawnbell takes only half damage from melee and ranged attacks; Memar takes the rest. While Memar is adjacent to the Dawnbell, the Dawnbell gains a +2 bonus to its defenses. Retribution (while not bloodied) F Radiant A creature that makes a successful melee attack against Memar takes 3d8 radiant damage. Alignment Unaligned Languages Supernal Skills Athletics +27, Insight +19 Str 29 (+22) Dex 21 (+18) Wis 25 (+21) Con 28 (+22) Int 20 (+18) Cha 22 (+19) Equipment full plate, greatsword
No vember 20 09
|
D u n g e o n 17 2
22
Legacy of Io
Dawnbell Trap
Level 26 Elite Blaster XP 18,000
The great silver bell before you begins to toll with a terrible power, crushing the resolve and bodies of those who would trespass against Pelor. Trap: When a creature attacks an angel of Pelor within 5 squares of the bell or the bell itself, it begins to toll. Perception No check is required to see the Dawnbell. Additional Skills: Arcana or Religion DC 36: The character recognizes the power contained within the bell. Initiative +13 Trigger When a creature attacks an angel of Pelor within 5 squares or the bell itself, the trap activates and rolls for initiative. Attack When the Dawnbell attacks, roll a d4 to determine which attack it uses. Standard Action Close burst 5 Target: All creatures in burst (angels are immune) 1 Attack: +28 vs. Fortitude Hit: 4d10 + 9 thunder and force damage and the target is pushed 3 squares and deafened (save ends). 2 Attack: +28 vs. Will Hit: 4d10 + 9 thunder and radiant damage and the target is weakened (save ends). 3 Attack: +28 vs. Fortitude Hit: 4d10 + 9 thunder and necrotic damage and ongoing 15 necrotic (save ends). 4 Attack: +28 vs. Will Hit: 4d10 + 9 thunder and psychic damage, and the target is knocked prone and takes a –2 penalty to attack rolls and all defenses (save ends) and provokes an opportunity attack from adjacent angels. Countermeasures An adjacent character can prevent the trap from attacking for a round with a DC 36 Thievery check. Failure causes the Dawnbell to attack as an immediate reaction. A character can attack the Dawnbell itself (AC 39, other defenses 36; hp 180), but doing so causes it to attack as an immediate reaction. Destroying the Dawnbell disables the trap.
Tactics Memar waits for the PCs to make the first move, preparing a warding strike against the first character to move within range if it wins initiative. Memar attempts to remain adjacent to the Dawnbell if possible, but will move if doing so is advantageous. The archangel is confident in dawnbell warden’s ability to protect the Dawnbell and leaves the bell’s inherent properties to protect it from direct attack. If the bell takes more than 100 damage, Memar moves to prevent further attacks. The first four angels of light appear during the third round of combat, flying in on their initiative count, while the rest show up the round after Memar is bloodied. They move to set up flanking positions and focus attacks on ranged or supporting heroes not engaged in melee. The angels fight to the end.
The Seal
Open Balcony: This level is open to the heavens, and any creature forced off faces a long drop to the earthmote below. A low wall running around the exterior allows a creature a saving throw to avoid the fall, with those successful falling prone in the nearest square of the tower. Those that fail fall 50 feet to the second balcony, where they make a second saving throw. If the second save succeeds, the character catches the second balcony and stops there but takes 5d10 damage from the fall. If the second save fails, the character falls another 50 feet to hit the earthmote at the level of the first balcony and take 10d10 damage. Returning to the combat requires a great deal of stair climbing: 10 squares of difficult terrain if they landed on the second balcony, or 20 squares of difficult terrain if they fell to the ground. Creatures capable of flying fall eight squares before managing to halt themselves, take no falling damage, and are free to fly back into the combat on their turn.
Destroying the Dawnbell breaks the seal. If Memar and all of the angels of light are killed, the Dawnbell continues to toll for that round before tearing apart the first time it is attacked the next round.
Features of the Area Illumination: Bright light. Dawnbell: The Dawnbell fills the squares it occupies, preventing movement through them. Pillars: The white marble pillars are wound about with silver and gold. They do not hinder movement but provide cover against melee attacks as normal. Stairs: Squares containing stairs are difficult terrain.
No vember 20 09
|
D u n g e o n 17 2
23
Legacy of Io
M1. Back Alley Ambush Encounter Level 25 (41,100 XP)
Setup 2 mithral dragonkin (M) 1 war devil lieutenant (W) 2 assassin devils (A) 10 legion devil legionnaires (L) The bizarre attacks by the celestial hosts of Bahamut continue, but this time the Platinum Dragon’s servants have joined forces with devils from the Nine Hells. The uncommon allies wait to ambush the PCs as they pass through the crowded streets of Methion. The characters are set up in the small square in the center of the map. When the heroes enter the area, read: A modicum of silence descends as you enter a rare pocket of calm amidst the constant commotion of Methion. Streetwise Check DC 36: The Bright City never sleeps, especially the district of Methion, which hums with activity even during the latest hour. Something about this sudden calm doesn’t sit right. Perception Check DC 36: A glint of silver catches your eye as something crouches low to avoid being seen on a nearby rooftop, and the faint rasping of steel being drawn echoes from an alley. Ambush!
2 Mithral Dragonkin (M) Level 25 Skirmisher
Medium natural humanoid XP 7,000 each Initiative +19 Senses Perception +18; see also dragonborn fury HP 234; Bloodied 117 AC 39; Fortitude 39, Reflex 37, Will 36 Resist 20 radiant Speed 8, fly 12 (hover), teleport 10 m Longspear (standard; at-will) F Radiant, Weapon Reach 2; +30 vs. AC; 2d8 + 9 damage and ongoing 10 radiant damage (save ends). M Dimensional Strike (standard; at-will) F Teleportation The mithral dragonkin teleports 5 squares, makes a longspear attack, teleports 5 squares, and makes a longspear attack against a different target. C Dragon Breath (standard; encounter) F Radiant Close blast 3; +28 vs. Reflex; 3d8 + 9 radiant damage, and the target is blinded (save ends). Prescient Defense (immediate interrupt, when the mithral dragonkin is hit by an attack; recharge ⚅) The mithral dragonkin gains a +4 bonus to all defenses against the triggering attack. If the attack misses, the mithral dragonkin teleports 5 squares. Dragonborn Fury (while bloodied) The mithral dragonkin gains a +1 racial bonus to attack rolls. Alignment Unaligned Languages Common, Draconic Skills Athletics +27, Insight +19 Str 29 (+21) Dex 21 (+17) Wis 22 (+18) Con 26 (+20) Int 25 (+19) Cha 22 (+18) Equipment full plate, longspear
10 Legion Devil Legionnaires (L)
War Devil Lieutenant (W)
Level 25 Brute (Leader)
Large immortal humanoid (devil) XP 6,050 Initiative +19 Senses Perception +17; darkvision HP 286; Bloodied 143 AC 38; Fortitude 37, Reflex 35, Will 33 Resist 30 fire Speed 8, fly 8 (clumsy) m Claw (standard; at-will) +29 vs. AC; 3d6 + 8 damage. m Trident (standard; recharge ⚃ ⚄ ⚅ ) F Weapon Reach 2; +29 vs. AC; 4d4 + 9 damage and ongoing 5 damage (save ends), and the target slides into any square adjacent to the war devil lieutenant and is knocked prone. R Besieged Foe (minor action; at-will) Ranged sight; automatic hit; the target is marked, and allies of the war devil lieutenant gain a +2 bonus to attack rolls made against the target until the encounter ends or the war devil lieutenant marks a new target. R Devilish Transposition (move; at-will) F Teleportation Ranged 20; the war devil lieutenant and an allied devil within range swap positions. R Fiendish Tactics (minor; recharge ⚄ ⚅) Ranged 10; affects up to 2 allied devils of the war devil lieutenant’s level or lower; each target can take a move action or make a basic attack. Alignment Evil Languages Supernal Skills Intimidate +20 Str 28 (+21) Dex 24 (+19) Wis 20 (+17) Con 26 (+20) Int 15 (+14) Cha 19 (+16) Equipment trident
Level 21 Minion
Medium immortal humanoid (devil) XP 800 each Initiative +11 Senses Perception +11; darkvision HP 1; a missed attack never damages a minion. AC 37; Fortitude 33, Reflex 32, Will 32; see also squad defense Resist 15 fire Speed 7, teleport 3 m Longsword (standard; at-will) F Weapon +26 vs. AC; 8 damage. Squad Defense The legion devil legionnaire gains a +2 bonus to its defenses when adjacent to at least one other legion devil. Alignment Evil Languages Supernal Str 14 (+12) Dex 12 (+11) Wis 12 (+11) Con 14 (+12) Int 10 (+10) Cha 12 (+11) Equipment plate armor, heavy shield, longsword
No vember 20 09
|
D u n g e o n 17 2
24
Legacy of Io
2 Assassin Devils (A)
Level 24 Lurker
Medium immortal humanoid (devil) XP 6,050 each Initiative +25 Senses Perception +23; darkvision HP 167; Bloodied 83 AC 38; Fortitude 34, Reflex 38, Will 36 Resist 25 fire Speed 12 m Shadow Sword (standard; at-will) F Necrotic, Weapon +27 vs. Fortitude; 3d6 + 5 necrotic damage, and ongoing 5 damage (save ends). R Shadow Net (standard; recharges when the assassin devil uses shadow cloak) F Necrotic Area burst 2 within 10; +26 vs. Reflex; the target is restrained, is weakened, and takes ongoing 10 necrotic damage (save ends all). While a target is affected by shadow net, the assassin devil cannot use its shadow cloak power. Dangerous Shadows An assassin devil’s shadow sword attack deals 4d6 extra necrotic damage against any target granting combat advantage to it. Shadow Cloak (standard; recharges when no creatures are affected by shadow net) F Illusion The assassin devil is invisible until it hits or misses with an attack. Traitor’s Pact The assassin devil’s necrotic damage is unaffected by Hestavar’s radiant affinity. Alignment Evil Languages Common, Supernal Skills Stealth +27 Str 21 (+17) Dex 28 (+21) Wis 25 (+19) Con 17 (+15) Int 17 (+15) Cha 13 (+13) Equipment leather armor, sword
Tactics If any of the PCs move to alert their party members, the ambush is sprung. A character that succeeded on either the Streetwise or Perception check can act in the surprise round; others are caught off guard. The assassin devils use the surprise round to use shadow net on a group of the heroes. If one manages to hit a significant number of them, the second instead attacks a vulnerable-looking PC. The two spend the
encounter attacking targets they have combat advantage against, throwing their shadow net and retreating while invisible to wait for a good opening. The mithral dragonkin tear into the characters, using their teleportation powers and taking advantage of the differing heights of the buildings to stay clear of reprisals. The war devil lieutenant directs the combat, marking priority targets with besieged foe, moving itself or allies into tactically advantageous positions with devilish transposition, and pressing the attack with fiendish tactics. It is especially fond of lining up flanks or using its trident to knock foes prone and slide them into the perfect position before using fiendish tactics to give the assassin devils extra attacks that benefit from their dangerous shadows ability.
Features of the Area Illumination: Bright light. Barrels and Crates: The larger piles of stacked barrels and crates are difficult terrain and provide cover to those hiding behind them. Buildings: The buildings are of varying heights, as indicated on the map, and can be scaled with DC 30 Athletics checks. Falling from one of the buildings deals normal damage (1d10 for every 10 feet). The entrances are all locked or barred, and it takes a DC 36 Thievery check to open one. Wagon: The wagon provides cover to those that clamber into it by spending an additional square of movement. Squeezing under it provides superior cover against attacks originating from above. The wagon is heavy but can be moved at half a hero’s speed with a DC 28 Strength check.
No vember 20 09
|
D u n g e o n 17 2
25
Legacy of Io
M2. Market Day Encounter Level 24 (34,230 XP)
Setup 1 exalted captain (C) 2 exalted watchmen (W) 10 exalted patrollers (P) The vast market square teems with activity. Dozens of stalls and carts cater to the tide of citizens browsing or just passing through. A force of Erathis’s exalted soldiery patrols the square at all hours, keeping the peace and ensuring thievery remains remarkably uncommon. The captain, watchmen, and five of the patrollers are currently keeping an eye on things in the square. The other five patrollers are in the vicinity, but they enter the combat at a later time and should not be placed on the map. There are around three dozen civilians in the square as well, but it is not necessary to mark their exact location; once fighting breaks out, they flee as fast as possible. If the PCs are prepared to recklessly open the fight with area attacks or wish to make the opportunity attacks provoked by fleeing civilians, then place as many as you see fit. Treat the civilians as minions with 22 for all their defenses. If this is the first seal the characters attack or attempt to open, the exalted soldiers pay them little heed. The heroes are free to engage in conversation and the exalted are friendly enough as long as the seal is not mentioned. Once the PCs reveal their purpose or attempt to break the seal, the exalted soldiers move to block them, but they try to talk the characters down before resorting to violence. The soldiers are not going
to let the heroes deface the symbol of their goddess in the heart of her domain, no matter what the PCs might say. If the argument drags on and the characters hesitate in acting, the two exalted watchmen take down two heroes by surprise, triggering the encounter. If the PCs have attacked or attempted to open any of the other seals, the soldiers shout an alarm and move to intercept as soon as they spot the characters entering the square.
Exalted Captain (C) Level 25 Soldier (Leader)
Medium immortal humanoid (exalted), human XP 7,000 Initiative +19 Senses Perception +17 HP 174; Bloodied 87 AC 41; Fortitude 39, Reflex 37, Will 36 Resist 10 fire, 10 radiant Speed 6 m Longsword (standard; at-will) F Weapon +32 vs. AC; 3d8 + 9 damage, and the target is marked until the end of the exalted captain’s next turn. M Bolstering Sword (standard; at-will) F Weapon +32 vs. AC; 3d8 + 9 damage, and the target is marked until the end of the exalted captain’s next turn and the exalted captain or one ally within 10 squares gains 15 temporary hit points. C Edifying Shout (minor; recharge ⚄ ⚅) Close burst 5; +28 vs. Will; 1d8 + 6 damage, and the target is marked until the end of the exalted captain’s next turn. Effect: Allies in the burst gain 10 temporary hit points. Battlefield Command Allies gain a +2 bonus to attack rolls against creatures marked by the exalted captain. Divine Light (minor, only while bloodied; encounter) F Healing The exalted captain regains 60 hit points, and the exalted captain and all allies within 5 squares gain a +2 bonus to all defenses until the end of the exalted captain’s next turn. Alignment Unaligned Languages Common, Supernal Skills Athletics +27, Insight +17 Str 29 (+21) Dex 21 (+17) Wis 20 (+17) Con 26 (+20) Int 25 (+19) Cha 22 (+18) Equipment full plate, heavy shield, longsword
2 Exalted Watchmen (W) Level 24 Controller
Medium immortal humanoid (exalted), human XP 4,150 each Initiative +18 Senses Perception +19 HP 226; Bloodied 113 AC 38; Fortitude 37, Reflex 34, Will 37 Resist 10 fire, 10 radiant Speed 6 m Truncheon (standard; at-will) F Weapon +29 vs. AC; 2d10 + 8 damage. M Head Crack (standard; at-will) F Weapon +28 vs. Fortitude; 2d10 + 8 damage, and the target is dazed until the end of the exalted watchman’s next turn. M Take Down (standard; at-will) F Weapon +28 vs. Reflex; 2d10 + 8 damage, and the target is knocked prone, and is grabbed and restrained (until escape). Attempts to escape the grab take a –5 penalty. Symbol of Peace Ranged 10; +28 vs. Will; The target cannot make attacks (save ends). Alignment Unaligned Languages Common, Supernal Skills Insight +23, Religion +23 Str 20(+17) Dex 22(+18) Wis 25 (+19) Con 26(+20) Int 19(+16) Cha 27(+20) Equipment leather armor, truncheon
10 Exalted Patrollers (P)
Level 24 Minion Soldier
Medium immortal humanoid (exalted), human XP 1,513 each Initiative +18 Senses Perception +19 HP 1; a missed attack never damages a minion AC 40; Fortitude 35, Reflex 35, Will 37 Resist 10 fire, 10 radiant Speed 6 m Longsword (standard; at-will) F Weapon +29 vs. AC; 15 damage. Riot Control If an exalted patroller hits a target that is adjacent to at least one other exalted patroller, the target is knocked prone. Alignment Unaligned Languages Common, Supernal Str 20 (+17) Dex 23 (+18) Wis 25 (+19) Con 23 (+18) Int 15 (+14) Cha 18 (+16) Equipment plate armor, heavy shield, longsword
No vember 20 09
|
D u n g e o n 17 2
26
Legacy of Io
Tactics The exalted captain leads from the front, bolstering allies with his various abilities that grant temporary hit points or other bonuses. He uses edifying shout to enhance the survivability of the minions if there are several in range, even if he might not be able to affect many heroes. The watchmen move around the edges of the fight, neutralizing dangerous PCs with symbol of peace or employing take down on mobile characters. They are fond of using head crack on enemies they have grabbed, forcing the enemy to choose between attacking and attempting to escape. The patrollers gang up on heroes to take advantage of riot control and to set up flanks. The exalted are dedicated warriors and fight to the end, confident in their ability to be reborn, to protect their goddess’s property, and to stop the “murderous” PCs.
Special Make a note of whether the characters kill any civilians, because it affects encounter M3.
Features of the Area Illumination: Bright light. Carts and Stalls: The carts and stalls found throughout the square count as difficult terrain and provide cover to those standing behind them. Buildings: The buildings surrounding the square are locked and barred from the inside once violence breaks out.
Symbol of Erathis: The symbol is worked into the flagstones of the square. The soldiers prevent the heroes from doing more than casually inspecting it, so they have no chance to cause much harm to it before the encounter starts.
No vember 20 09
|
D u n g e o n 17 2
27
Legacy of Io
M3. Last Ditch Defense Encounter Level 26 (52,256 XP)
Setup Goran Steelgate (G) 2 Methion guildmasters 12+ Methion citizens When the PCs attempt to destroy the seal, whether or not they take a short rest after M2, the encounter begins. Only Goran is placed on the map to begin with. When the characters attempt to open or damage the seal, read: The massive symbol of Erathis pulses with a brilliant blue light. When it recedes, an elderly dwarf wearing finely-manufactured plate armor and carrying an equally well-crafted hammer can be seen. His eyes pass over the carnage wrought by the previous battle, growing heavy as they take in the destruction. He turns to you with a grim expression: “I hope it’s worth the cost, lads. Now’s the time to see it through.”
12+ Methion Citizens
Level 24 Minion
Medium immortal humanoid (exalted), human XP 1,513 each Initiative +18 Senses Perception +19 HP 1; a missed attack never damages a minion AC 38; Fortitude 36, Reflex 36, Will 38 Resist 10 fire, 10 radiant Speed 6 m Improvised Weapon (standard; at-will) F Weapon +29 vs. AC; 15 damage. For Methion! (when reduced to 0 hp) The Methion citizen makes an improvised weapon attack as a free action. Alignment Unaligned Languages Common, Supernal Str 20 (+17) Dex 23 (+18) Wis 25 (+19) Con 23 (+18) Int 15 (+14) Cha 18 (+16) Equipment improvised weapon
Tactics Goran fights intelligently but ruthlessly, stacking conditions to cripple priority targets and kicking PCs while they’re down. The Methion guildmasters and citizens fight as an unorganized mob, ganging up on targets of opportunity. When within Goran’s aura, however, they act cooperatively, setting up flanks and shifting to reach advantageous positions. Goran fights to the bitter end. The civilians only break and run if Goran is slain and the quake caused by breaking the seal occurs (see below).
The Seal Until the cost has been paid in full, the seal remains inviolate. Once Goran Steelgate and 20 Methion citizens (Methion guildmasters count as four citizens for this purpose) have been slain, the seal destroys itself, causing a minor earthquake that can be felt across the earthmote.
On the second round of the combat, one of the guildmasters and six of the citizens enter from the edges of the map. Two rounds later, the second guildmaster and six more citizens enter the fray. Every second round thereafter, 1d6 Methion citizens move in from off the map.
Special If the heroes killed any of the civilians in encounter M2, then Goran, the guildmasters, and all of the citizens are enraged and gain a +2 bonus to attack rolls.
No vember 20 09
|
D u n g e o n 17 2
28
Legacy of Io
Goran Steelgate (G)
Level 27 Elite Soldier (Leader)
Medium immortal humanoid (exalted), dwarf XP 22,000 Initiative +21 Senses Perception +21 Cooperative Tactics aura 5; allies within the aura deal 10 extra damage when attacking a target they are flanking and gain a +2 bonus to all defenses when adjacent to another ally. HP 572; Bloodied 236 AC 45; Fortitude 45, Reflex 39, Will 43 Resist 10 fire, 10 radiant Saving Throws +2 Speed 6 Action Points 1 m Warhammer (standard; at-will) F Weapon +34 vs. AC; 3d8 + 9 damage, and the target is marked until the end of Goran’s next turn. M Shield Bash (standard; at-will) F Weapon +32 vs. Fortitude; 2d6 +9 damage, and the target is knocked prone and dazed (save ends). M Hammer and Anvil (standard; at-will) F Weapon Goran makes a warhammer attack and a shield bash attack. M Crucible of Forging (standard; recharge ⚄ ⚅) F Fire, Weapon +32 vs. Reflex; 4d10 +9 fire damage, and the target takes ongoing 15 fire damage and takes a –5 penalty to AC (save ends both). C Judgment of Thunder (standard; recharges when first bloodied) F Fear, Thunder Close burst 5; targets enemies; +32 vs. Fortitude; 4d10 + 9 thunder damage, and the target takes a -2 penalty to attack rolls (save ends). Second Wind (minor; encounter) F Healing Goran regains 118 hit points and gains a +2 bonus to all defenses until the end of his next turn. Alignment Good Languages Common, Supernal Skills Athletics +27, Insight +17 Str 27 (+21) Dex 22 (+19) Wis 26 (+21) Con 31 (+23) Int 23 (+19) Cha 21 (+18) Equipment full plate, heavy shield, warhammer
2 Methion Guildmasters Level 24 Controller
Medium immortal humanoid (exalted), human XP 4,150 each Initiative +18 Senses Perception +19 HP 226; Bloodied 113 AC 38; Fortitude 37, Reflex 34, Will 37 Resist 10 fire, 10 radiant Speed 6 m Forge Hammer (standard; at-will) F Fire, Weapon +29 vs. AC; 2d10 + 8 damage, and the target takes ongoing 10 fire damage (save ends). M Rune of Brittleness (minor; recharges when no targets are suffering the effects) +28 vs. Reflex; the target takes a –5 penalty to AC, attack rolls, and damage rolls (save ends all). Only one rune power may be attempted a turn.
M Rune of Weakness (minor; recharges when no targets are suffering the effects) +28 vs. Fortitude; the target is weakened (save ends). Only one rune power may be attempted a turn. Rune of Reinforcement (minor; at-will) The Methion guildmaster or an adjacent ally gains a +2 bonus to AC and Fortitude defenses for the remainder of the encounter or until the Methion guildmaster uses the power again. Only one rune power may be attempted a turn. Alignment Unaligned Languages Common, Supernal Skills Insight +23, Religion +23 Str 20(+17) Dex 22(+18) Wis 25 (+19) Con 26(+20) Int 19(+16) Cha 27(+20) Equipment plate armor, forge hammer.
Features of the Area Illumination: Bright light. Carts and Stalls: The carts and stalls found throughout the square count as difficult terrain and provide cover to those standing behind them. Buildings: The buildings surrounding the square are locked and barred from the inside. Symbol of Erathis: The symbol is worked into the flagstones of the square and has no impact on the tactical encounter.
No vember 20 09
|
D u n g e o n 17 2
29
Legacy of Io
L0. Unearthing the Library Encounter Level 24 (12,100 XP)
Setup Ioun secreted her seal away within the Sealed Library, a structure itself hidden within the fabric of the domain. Trusted scholars and devotees of the goddess that are tasked with conducting sensitive research on their lady’s behalf are granted access to the sanctum to pursue their work. A number of doorways lead to and from the library, enabling the scholars within to move about the city and collect whatever materials they might need. Occasionally, creatures devoted to the pursuit of knowledge are shown these secret ways, but only those that have earned the full confidence of Ioun and can be trusted not to reveal what they know. It is one of these hidden doorways that the characters must seek out if they are to breach the library and open the seal within. Unearthing the Library Skill Challenge
Level 24 XP 30,250
Unearthing one of the hidden paths that leads to the Sealed Library is no easy task when it could be anywhere in the massive, bustling, planar metropolis. Complexity 5 (requires 12 successes before 3 failures). Primary Skills Arcana, Bluff, Intimidate, Perception, Stealth, Streetwise Secondary Skills Insight Victory The heroes manage to discover one of the secret ways into the Sealed Library.
Defeat The secrecy of the Sealed Library defeats the PCs; they fail to find a way in. They can try again. Arcana (DC 29, 1 success, no maximum) By working out what manner of rare, arcane materials the scholars of the library would need and where they might find them, the character narrows the search. Bluff (DC 29, 1 success, no maximum) Through a combination of innocent-seeming questions, enquiring about “special” orders of rare ritualistic ingredients, and posing as one of the cloistered scholars, the hero deduces areas that the scholars might frequent. Insight (DC 29, 0 successes) A success on this check does not count as a success for the challenge but does grant a +2 bonus to the next skill check. Likewise, failure does not count as a failure for the challenge but instead imposes a –2 penalty to the next skill check. A success reveals that successful Intimidate checks also generate a failure. By sounding out people encountered in the city, the PC is able to guide his fellows along the most productive paths. Intimidate (DC 29, 1 success, 1 failure, no maximum) Requires a successful Arcana, Bluff, or Streetwise check to unlock. A success on this check counts toward the skill challenge but also generates a failure. A failure on the check generates only a single failure. Leaning on those that might have had contact with the scholars might yield significant clues, but such strongarm tactics earn no friends. Perception (DC 29, 1 success, no maximum) The character searches likely areas, looking for tracks that lead to or from dead ends, rooms with no outlets, and other places that might indicate the presence of a portal. Stealth (DC 29, 1 success, no maximum) Slipping into backrooms of book sellers or watching possible locations from the shadows, the hero eliminates some possibilities while finding supporting evidence for others. Streetwise (DC 29, 1 success, no maximum) A few cheap ales and a bit of discrete eavesdropping net the PC some interesting stories about secretive mages showing up from nowhere. A few might even be true.
Development Success allows the characters to uncover one of the hidden doorways leading to the Sealed Library. Should they fail, their attempts attract the notice of the authorities, and a double strength patrol of exalted soldiery moves in on the heroes. To evade the patrol, the PCs engage in skill challenge H3 (page 17), but they need to achieve 12 successes before 3 failures. This skill challenge is worth 30,250 XP. If the characters fail skill challenge H3, the patrol brings the heroes to battle. The patrol consists of one exalted captain, two exalted watchmen, and eight exalted patrollers (see encounter M2 on page 26 for statistics).
No vember 20 09
|
D u n g e o n 17 2
30
Legacy of Io
L2. Angry Librarians Encounter Level 25 (52,256 XP)
Setup 3 library researchers (R) 2 library academics (A) The scholars working within the Sealed Library don’t expect anyone to barge through their hidden doorways, least of all a band of heavily armed adventurers. Two of the researchers, the ones adjacent to the ladders, are high on the sliding ladders searching the shelves for materials. The researcher nearest to the portal is six squares off the ground, the farther one is eight. The intellectuals who inhabit the library are some of the brightest minds to be found anywhere. While they might be surprised to find the PCs in their sanctum, they have worked out what it is the characters seek and do not hesitate in using force to stop them, especially now that they are so close. When the heroes enter the library, read: With a flash of light, you find yourself in what appears to be a well lit and appointed library. Solid tables and plush chairs are scattered about the room, which is dominated by a mirror-still reflecting pool and massive shelves that sweep around the entirety of the room and reach to the ceiling some 40 feet up. Five scholarly-looking individuals, two high in the air upon ladders, look up in surprise as you enter. As the shock wears off, a look of recognition passes over them and they grab for implements kept near at hand. Perception Check DC 28: The ladders seem to be attached to a track near the ceiling.
3 Library Researchers (R)
Level 25 Artillery
Medium immortal humanoid (exalted), human X P 7,000 each Initiative +15 Senses Perception +20 HP 175; Bloodied 87 AC 37; Fortitude 33, Reflex 39, Will 37 Resist 10 fire, 10 radiant Speed 6 m Knock Back (standard; at-will) F Implement +30 vs. Fortitude; 2d8 + 10 damage, and the library researcher pushes the target 3 squares. R Force Barrage (standard; at-will) F Force, Implement Ranged 20; three attacks, each targeting the same or different creatures; +28 vs. Reflex; 2d6 +9 force damage. If a target is hit by two or more of the attacks, the target is knocked prone. A Prism Bomb (standard; recharge ⚅) F Fear, Implement, Lightning, Poison Area burst 2 within 20; each target in the burst is subject to the following attacks: +28 vs. Fortitude; 2d10 + 9 poison damage. +28 vs. Reflex; 2d10 + 9 lightning damage. +28 vs. Will; The target is stunned (save ends). A Cinder Cloud (standard; encounter) F Fire, Implement, Zone Area burst 1 within 10; the library researcher conjures a zone of burning hot cinders. Any creature within the zone when it is conjured, which starts its turn within the zone, or moves into the zone is subject to the following attack: +28 vs. Reflex; 3d10 +9 fire damage, and the target takes ongoing 10 fire damage (save ends). Sustain Minor: The zone persists. Alignment Unaligned Languages Common, Supernal Skills Arcana +25 Str 14 (+14) Dex 16 (+15) Wis 26 (+20) Con 19 (+16) Int 30 (+22) Cha 21 (+17) Equipment robes, wand
Tactics The library researchers blast away at the PCs while avoiding melee. They make use of the sliding ladders to keep out of reach of slow-moving combat characters while raining long-range spells upon their foes. The library academics move about to keep heroes suffering from ongoing damage or other conditions within
their litany of sustaining aura, teleporting to gain favorable positioning or to avoid dangerous situations. The academics and researchers are aware of each other’s abilities and plan accordingly, so the academics will attempt to position themselves out of the blast of prism bomb and slide targets into a cinder cloud or group them up for area attacks. Secure in the knowledge that they will be revived within Kerith-Ald, the exalted fight to the death.
2 Library Academics (A) Level 25 Controller
Medium immortal humanoid (exalted), eladrin XP 7,000 each Initiative +18 Senses Perception +19 Litany of Sustaining aura 5; enemies within the aura take a –2 penalty to saves to end ongoing damage or conditions. HP 233; Bloodied 116 AC 39; Fortitude 37, Reflex 38, Will 38 Resist 10 fire, 10 radiant Speed 6 m Soporific Touch (standard; at-will) F Implement, Psychic +29 vs. Will; 2d10 + 8 psychic damage, and the target is stunned until the end of the library academic’s next turn. R Word of Stumbling (standard; at-will) F Implement +29 vs. Reflex; 3d8 + 9 damage, and the library academic slides the target 3 squares. R Word of Flaying (standard; recharge 6) F Implement +29 vs. Fortitude; 4d10 + 9 damage, and ongoing 15 damage and the target takes a –2 penalty to attack rolls and all defenses (save ends all). Fey Step Mastery (minor; at-will) F Teleportation The library academic teleports 3 squares. Alignment Unaligned Languages Common, Elven, Supernal Skills Insight +23, Religion +23 Str 14(+14) Dex 22(+18) Wis 25 (+19) Con 24(+19) Int 30(+22) Cha 19(+16) Equipment robes, rod
No vember 20 09
|
D u n g e o n 17 2
31
Legacy of Io
Features of the Area Illumination: Bright light. Tables: The heavy wooden tables can be leapt upon by sacrificing a square of movement. Overturning a table requires a DC 28 Strength check, and it then provides cover against attacks originating from the other side. Plush Chairs: The chairs are large and sturdy, capable of providing cover to creatures sharing their square. Ref lecting Pool: This decorative pool appears to be about 6 feet deep, but that is a trick of perspective. In fact, it is just 6 inches deep and has no effect on movement or combat. Shelves: The shelves that wrap around the room and reach to the ceiling are crammed with books of all descriptions. Climbing around on the shelves requires a DC 28 Athletics check and allows the climber to move at half speed. Sliding Ladders: Three ladders are set into a series of enchanted tracks that run along the entire outer edge of the library. Climbing up a ladder is treated as difficult terrain, but moving up or down a stationary ladder requires no check. A creature on a ladder can move it up to 8 squares to the left or right with a move action. Clinging to a moving ladder requires a DC 32 Acrobatics or Athletics check to avoid falling from the speeding contraption. Attacking, being attacked, moving vertically on the ladder, or anything else more involved than simply holding on imposes a –5 penalty to such checks until the end of the distracted creature’s next turn. The ladders safely slow and stop moving before impacting with one another unless the moving ladder has moved at least 4 squares and the controlling party wishes it, then the two forcibly slam into each other, moving
the rest of the distance desired and forcing the occupants of both ladders to make Acrobatics or Athletics checks to avoid falling. The occupants of the library, having extensive experience, are treated as having a +32 modifier for checks relating to the ladder system.
No vember 20 09
|
D u n g e o n 17 2
32
Legacy of Io
L3. Headmaster’s Charge Encounter Level 27 (56,104 XP)
Setup Headmaster Burage (B) Granosos (G) 8 spell shards
Behind the supremely thick doors of his study, Headmaster Burage is in conversation with the sphinx Granosos. The spell shards are not on the map at the beginning of the encounter. When the PCs open the doors, read: A distinguished-looking, elderly man is conversing with a large, feline creature sporting the wings of an eagle. The bizarre but somehow unmistakably female creature turns to face you with timeless eyes that shimmer with the depth of ages. It regards you with a sad but accepting expression. The elderly exalted’s expression reflects more rage than acceptance. On the far wall, flanked by two statues depicting hooded women, is the seal. Every second round, two spell shards appear in advantageous positions within the library. Perception Check (Before Opening the Doors) DC 28 The massive wooden doors prevent any noise from crossing the threshold.
Seal The seal remains unharmed by attempts to damage it until Headmaster Burage has been slain and Granosos has either also been killed or has quit the battlefield, at which point the seal splits down the center with a thunderous crack.
Headmaster Burage (B)
Level 27 Elite Controller
Medium immortal humanoid (exalted), human XP 22,000 Initiative +16 Senses Perception +21 HP 518; Bloodied 259 AC 44; Fortitude 39, Reflex 42, Will 42 Resist 10 fire, 10 radiant Saving Throws +2 Speed 6, teleport 5 Action Points 1 m Caning (standard; at-will) F Implement +32 vs. AC; 2d8 + 9 damage, and the target is dazed and takes a –2 to attack rolls (saves ends both). r Chastisement (standard; at-will) F Fear, Implement Ranged 10; +31 vs. Will; 3d8 + 9 damage, and the target is immobilized (save ends). Headmaster’s Wrath (standard; at-will) Headmaster Burage makes two basic attacks. C Telekinetic Hurl (standard; recharges when Headmaster Burage hits with a basic attack) Close burst 5; targets one creature in burst; +31 vs. Reflex; 2d10 + 9 damage, and Headmaster Burage slides the target 5 squares and the target is knocked prone. R Leaping Polymorph (standard; recharge ⚄ ⚅) F Polymorph Ranged 10; +31 vs. Fortitude; the target becomes a Tiny animal (save ends). While in this form, the target cannot use powers or make attacks. Aftereffect: One of the target’s allies within 10 squares suffers the following attack: +31 vs. Fortitude; the target becomes a Tiny animal (save ends). While in this form the target cannot use powers or make attacks. Startling Displacement (immediate interrupt, when Headmaster Burage is hit with an attack; recharges when first bloodied) F Teleportation Headmaster Burage swaps places with one creature within 5 squares. The triggering attack hits this creature instead. Alignment Unaligned Languages Common, Supernal Skills Arcana +25 Str 15 (+15) Dex 16 (+16) Wis 27 (+21) Con 25 (+20) Int 32 (+24) Cha 21 (+18) Equipment robes, rod
No vember 20 09
|
D u n g e o n 17 2
33
Legacy of Io
Granosos (G)
Level 27 Elite Brute
Large immortal magical beast, sphinx XP 22,000 Initiative +21 Senses Perception +29; low-light vision HP 672; Bloodied 336 AC 40; Fortitude 39, Reflex 40, Will 42 Saving Throws +2 Speed 6, fly 6 (hover) Action Points 1 m Ancient Claws (standard; at-will) +30 vs. AC; 4d10 + 8 damage. m Bite of Ages (standard; at-will) +30 vs. AC; 2d10 + 8 damage, and the target is knocked prone and immobilized (save ends). Fury of Ages (standard; at-will) Granosos makes an ancient claws and a bite of ages attack. If both hit the same target, the target is weakened (save ends). r Primordial Riddle (minor; at-will) F Psychic Ranged 10; Granosos compels the target to contemplate a riddle. The target is dazed until the end of the encounter or until it answers the riddle. To determine the answer, a creature must spend a minor action and succeed at a DC 28 History check. A target that does not attempt to answer the riddle during its turn takes 3d8 psychic damage at the end of its turn. An ally can provide the answer and end the effect. If an ally ends the effect, the target takes 3d8 psychic damage. Sands of Time (immediate interrupt, when Granosos is hit with an attack; recharges when a creature takes damage from primordial riddle) Granosos gains a +4 bonus to all defenses against the triggering attack. If the triggering attack still hits, Granosos takes only half damage. C Great Roar (standard; recharge ⚅) F Thunder Close blast 5; +26 vs. Fortitude; 5d10 + 10 thunder damage, and the target is pushed 5 squares and is knocked prone. Alignment Unaligned Languages Common, Dwarven, Elven, Primordial, Supernal Skills Insight +30 Str 29 (+22) Dex 27 (+21) Wis 32 (+24) Con 28 (+22) Int 31 (+23) Cha 32 (+24)
Spell Shard
Level 24 Minion Artillery
Medium immortal animate XP 1,513 each Initiative +18 Senses Perception +20 HP 1; a missed attack never damages a minion; see also energy release. AC 36; Fortitude 35, Reflex 35, Will 37 Speed 2, fly 12 (hover) r/a Origin Spell (standard; at-will) F Fire, Force, Lightning, or Thunder When created, the spell shard knows one of the following attacks, determined randomly: 1—Ranged 10; +29 vs. Reflex: ongoing 10 fire damage (save ends). 2—Ranged 10; +29 vs. Reflex; 15 force damage. 3—Two attacks; ranged 10; +29 vs. Reflex; 10 lightning damage. 4—Area burst 1 within 10; +29 vs. Reflex; 10 thunder damage. Energy Release (when the spell shard drops to 0 hit points) The spell shard makes an origin spell attack as a free action. Alignment Unaligned Languages Supernal Str 12 (+13) Dex 23 (+18) Wis 27 (+20) Con 23 (+18) Int 12 (+13) Cha 23 (+18)
Tactics Headmaster Burage teleports around the battlefield, alternating between smashing characters into each other with telekinetic hurl and lashing out with headmaster’s fury. He is inordinately fond of leaping polymorph and normally uses it against the heroes with the highest damage output. He saves startling displacement for dangerous-looking attacks or those that attach debilitating conditions. Granosos fights very calmly and methodically, shifting about the battle to bring her fury of ages to bear where it will do the most good. She normally focuses both attacks on a single PC, but will split them if it is advantageous or avoids reprisals. She uses primordial riddle against as many characters as possible, both to hinder her enemies and to recharge sands of time. She will swap move actions for primordial riddle if
moving isn’t to her advantage. Granosos unleashes her great roar when several enemies are in its blast. The spell shards hurl their origin spell at the heroes, targeting whichever spell they know to the maximum effect. Given the choice between not casting and risking destruction, they choose to continue casting; their energy release guarantees something gets off even if they fall. The battle may spill into area L1; Burage is likely to teleport between the areas at least a few times during the fight to gain a better position for his attacks, and Granosos fights wherever she gains the best advantage. She slowly works her way toward the portal in L1 if the battle begins turning against her. Neither combatant is inclined to use the sliding ladders, but Burage might if he sees an advantage. The PCs could always decide to have fun with them. Refer back to the features of area L1 if it comes up. Headmaster Burage and the spell shards all fight to the death. Granosos is less vested in the struggle and will cede the battlefield and retreat if Burage is slain and she is bloodied.
No vember 20 09
|
D u n g e o n 17 2
34
Legacy of Io
Features of the Area Illumination: Bright light. Table: The heavy wooden table can be leapt upon by sacrificing a square of movement. Overturning it requires a DC 28 Strength check, and it then provides cover against attacks originating from the other side. Plush Chairs: The chairs are large and sturdy, capable of providing cover to creatures sharing their square. Shelves: The shelves that wrap around the room and reach to the ceiling are crammed with books of all descriptions. Climbing around on the shelves requires a DC 28 Athletics check and allows the climber to move at half speed. Headmaster’s Desk: This solid desk can be mounted at the cost of a square of movement. It provides cover to those sheltering behind it. Statues: The two statues flanking the seal depict Ioun. They are normal statues. Seal: The stone seal carved into the wall has no effect on the tactical encounter. Attempts to attack it directly fail to cause any damage until the proper conditions are met (see above).
No vember 20 09
|
D u n g e o n 17 2
35
Legacy of Io
S1. Raging Storm Encounter Level 28 (65,000 XP)
Setup Nakheten (N) Place Nakheten where indicated. The characters should be scattered about the opposite side of the encounter area, near the swirling wall of water. Regardless of whether the heroes flew through the storm or travelled on the water, they are tossed by the violent conditions into the heaving lagoon before being spat out into the encounter. If the PCs manage to arrive in some other fashion, adjust the following accordingly: When the characters arrive, read: The churning water of the lagoon roars as waves rise into a wall of crushing, swirling water, hurling you like rag dolls into an area of the lagoon bed somehow devoid of water. The thundering wall of water rotates around the dry bed with crushing force as the insane rage of the storm plays out above. A titanic creature roars in concert with the storm, its rumbling bellows drowning out even the thunder. Its form seems roughly hewn from shale; brilliant, crackling bluewhite lights shine forth from cracks and joints in its body and a billowing cloud of steam and lightning streams from its crown. As it turns to regard you, unending, ageless rage burns deeply in eye-like voids and a thundering howl of fury bursts from blazing, blue-white furnace of its mouth. The final seal, a flat disk of dull metal inscribed with the combined symbols of Erathis, Ioun, and Pelor, is sunk deep into the rocky flesh of its chest.
Nakheten, the Raging Storm (N)
Level 28 Solo Brute
Huge elemental humanoid (aquatic, giant) XP 65,000 Initiative +21 Senses Perception +29; low-light vision Tempest Fury (Lightning, Thunder) aura 10; any creature that enters or begins its turn in the aura takes 15 lightning and thunder damage; creatures other than Nakheten treat the area within the aura as difficult terrain and cannot fly. HP 1,310; Bloodied 655 AC 41; Fortitude 44, Reflex 39, Will 40 Resist 30 lightning, 30 thunder Saving Throws +5 Speed 8, fly 10 (hover), swim 8 Action Points 2 m Slam (standard; at-will) Reach 2; +31 vs. AC; 2d12 + 11 damage. C Call Lightning (standard; at-will) Close burst 10; one target in burst; +29 vs. Reflex; 3d12 + 11 lightning damage. Titanic Fury (standard; at-will) Nakheten makes a slam attack against each enemy within reach. It also makes one call lightning attack. C Lightning Storm (standard; recharges when first bloodied) F Lightning Close burst 10; + 27 vs. Reflex; 5d10 + 11 lightning damage. If the attack hits only a single target, that target takes an additional 5d10 lightning damage and is dazed (save ends). M Storm Blood (immediate interrupt, when an enemy hits Nakheten with a melee attack; at-will) F Lightning, Thunder Reach 3; targets the triggering enemy; +29 vs. Reflex; 2d12 + 11 lightning and thunder damage. C Howling Winds (standard; recharge ⚃ ⚄ ⚅) F Thunder Close burst 5; +27 vs. Fortitude; 5d10 + 11 thunder damage, and the target is pushed 5 squares and is knocked prone. Alignment Unaligned Languages Common, Dwarven, Elven, Primordial, Supernal Skills Insight +30 Str 34 (+26) Dex 23 (+21) Wis 20 (+19) Con 30 (+24) Int 15 (+16) Cha 23 (+20)
Tactics Nakheten is not a subtle combatant. Its rage at its eons-long confinement is boundless, and it seizes the chance to vent its fury upon the characters. Nakheten charges headlong into combat, smashing about itself with titanic fury. The titan does not normally reserve powers, preferring to unleash its limited or rechargeable abilities as soon as possible. Nakheten’s rage is endless; the titan fights to the death.
Seal When Nakheten falls, the seal embedded in its chest crumbles into dark ash before being blown away on the faltering winds of the dying storm. As it does so, the Arrow of Fate, long hidden within, becomes visible. An almost tangible release of power pulses from the collapsing seal as the ancient rituals bound to it begin to unravel, washing over the heroes, refreshing and empowering them just as a short rest would. The PCs have just enough time to grab the Arrow before the whirling water of the lagoon crashes down to reclaim its bed.
Acrobatics Check Each hero; DC 32: PCs that succeed are placed on the map normally. Those that fail begin the battle prone.
No vember 20 09
|
D u n g e o n 17 2
36
Legacy of Io
Features of the Area Illumination: While the dense, black clouds of the raging storm block out the sunlight that blankets Hestavar, the near constant flashes of lightning provide a harsh, flickering equivalent to Bright light. Wall of Water: The roaring wall of water churns about Nekheten’s prison, driven by the titan’s fury. Nekheten, contained by the power of the seal, cannot pass or be forced to pass the standing stones and enter the water. Characters that enter the churning wall for any reason take 3d10 damage, are slid 6 squares clockwise around the edge of the wall, and are knocked prone in a square adjacent to the wall. Standing Stones: Each of these riblike spurs of stone bears an engraved symbol of Erathis, Ioun, or Pelor upon its surface. Seal: The dull metal seal embedded in Nekheten’s chest is impervious to damage while the titan lives (see above).
No vember 20 09
|
D u n g e o n 17 2
37
Legacy of Io
S2. Guionne’s Betrayal
When the characters enter the area, read:
Encounter Level 26 (51,150 XP)
Setup Guionne (G) 2 cherubium (C) 1 war devil lieutenant (W) 1 assassin devil (A) 2 shocktroop devil line breakers (S) 10 legion devil legionnaires (L) Guionne and the devils are in the positions indicated. The assassin devil is invisible and concealing itself with Stealth; do not place it on the map until the heroes notice it or it attacks. The PCs are set up along the shore. 10 Legion Devil Legionnaires (L)
Level 21 Minion
Medium immortal humanoid (devil) XP 800 each Initiative +11 Senses Perception +11; darkvision HP 1; a missed attack never damages a minion. AC 37; Fortitude 33, Reflex 32, Will 32; see also squad defense Resist 15 fire Speed 7, teleport 3 m Longsword (standard; at-will) F Weapon +26 vs. AC; 8 damage. Squad Defense The legion devil legionnaire gains a +2 bonus to its defenses when adjacent to at least one other legion devil. Alignment Evil Languages Supernal Str 14 (+12) Dex 12 (+11) Wis 12 (+11) Con 14 (+12) Int 10 (+10) Cha 12 (+11) Equipment plate armor, heavy shield, longsword
The crashing surf deposits you like so much flotsam on the shore of a small island, your path narrowly avoiding the razor-sharp spurs of rock that dot the lagoon nearby. The familiar, cheerful voice of Guionne calls out: “Ah, my friends! I am so delighted that you were as good as your word and managed to retrieve the arrow.” Guionne breathes deeply, savoring the feel. “Can’t you feel it in the air? The city is already feeling so much more hospitable, and we have you to thank for it. Now … I need the artifact.”
Guionne (G)
Level 26 Elite Controller
Medium immortal humanoid (devil) XP 18,000 Initiative +19 Senses Perception +18 HP 502; Bloodied 251 AC 43; Fortitude 38, Reflex 41, Will 41 Resist 25 fire Saving Throws +2 Speed 6, teleport 6 Action Points 1 m Backhand (standard; at-will) F Weapon +31 vs. AC; 2d8 + 9 damage, and the target is pushed 2 squares and dazed (saves ends). R Acid Bolt (standard; at-will) F Acid, Implement Ranged 10; +30 vs. Reflex; 3d8 + 9 acid damage, and the target takes a –2 penalty to attack rolls until the end of Guionne’s next turn. C Molten Wave (standard; recharge ⚃ ⚄ ⚅) F Fire, Implement Close blast 5; +28 vs. Reflex; 3d8 + 9 fire damage, and ongoing 15 fire damage (save ends). A Wall of Burning Iron (standard; recharges when first bloodied) F Conjuration, Fire, Implement Area wall 10 within 10 squares. Guionne conjures a wall of red-hot iron covered in wicked barbs. The wall blocks movement, line of sight, and line of effect. Creatures that end their turn adjacent to the wall take 10 fire damage. Creatures that touch the wall or are pulled, pushed, or slid into the wall take 10 damage and 10 fire damage.
Guionne is perfectly willing to let the heroes go if they give him the Arrow. He allows the PCs to pick themselves up and brush off the sand, but if the characters make a threatening move or delay too long, he orders the devils to attack. Perception Check DC 37: A faint rustling, the sound of something moving stealthily, catches your attention, seeming to originate from the empty air. Perhaps the air isn’t as empty as you thought.
The wall is 3 squares high, can be climbed with a DC 29 Athletics check (creatures climbing or standing on the wall take 10 damage and 10 fire damage for touching it), and cannot be destroyed. Sustain Minor: The wall persists. R Iron Spike (standard; recharge ⚄ ⚅) F Fire, Implement Range 5; Target must be within 2 squares of the wall conjured with wall of burning iron; +31 vs. AC; 4d10 + 9 damage, and ongoing 15 fire damage and the target is immobilized (save ends both). Cherubium Conduit Guionne can channel any of his powers with the implement keyword through one of his cherubium that is within 20 squares, treating the cherubium’s square as his own for purposes of the ability (line of sight, line of effect, range, origin squares, and so on). Guionne does not need line of sight or line of effect to the cherubium. Spawn Cherubium (minor, at-will) Guionne takes 15 damage and creates a cherubium in an adjacent square. The cherubium enters the initiative count immediately after Guionne and can act normally the turn it is created. Guionne cannot control more than two cherubium at a time; creating a new cherubium while he has two active destroys one of the preexisting cherubium. Alignment Evil Languages Common, Supernal Skills Arcana +25 Str 21 (+18) Dex 22 (+19) Wis 21 (+18) Con 25 (+20) Int 28 (+22) Cha 27 (+21) Equipment rod
No vember 20 09
|
D u n g e o n 17 2
38
Legacy of Io
Tactics The devils fight a coordinated battle, led by Guionne and the war devil lieutenant. Guionne uses wall of burning iron to order the field in favor of the devils, isolating or redirecting melee heroes while trapping ranged or support characters in unfavorable melees. He attacks through his cherubium, preferring to remain well clear of any possible danger to his person. The war devil lieutenant guides the flow of the combat with his abilities, focusing his fiendish tactics on shocktrooper devil line breakers, if they are at full hit points and have multiple targets for their shocktroop attack, and the assassin devil, if it has combat advantage against a target. The shocktrooper devil line breakers and legion devil legionnaires charge forward to prevent the PCs from targeting their less-well-defended allies and from assisting other characters. The shocktrooper devil line breakers actively seek to engage multiple targets at the
2 Cherubium (C)
Level 26 Minion
Medium immortal animate (devil) XP 2,250 each Initiative +19 Senses Perception +19 HP 1; a missed attack never damages a minion; see also death burst. AC 39; Fortitude 34, Reflex 36, Will 36 Resist 25 fire Speed 2, fly 12 (hover) m Needling Teeth (standard; at-will) +30 vs. AC; 15 damage. R Sweet Disposition (immediate interrupt, when a creature targets the cherubium with an attack; at-will) Range sight; targets the triggering creature; +28 vs. Will; the target cannot attack the cherubium until the start of its next turn. The target is free to target a different creature with the attack. This power does not provoke opportunity attacks. Alignment Evil Languages Common, Supernal Str 8 (+12) Dex 26 (+21) Wis 21 (+18) Con 22 (+19) Int 15 (+15) Cha 27 (+21)
opening of the encounter. The assassin devil moves about the rear of the engagement, targeting back rank characters and avoiding defenders. The devils have no way of fleeing Hestavar and fight ferociously if the fight turns against them. Guionne, on the other hand, can quit the city and will run if the majority of the devils are down and he is severely injured.
Assassin Devil (A)
Level 24 Lurker
Medium immortal humanoid (devil) XP 6,050 Initiative +25 Senses Perception +23; darkvision HP 167; Bloodied 83 AC 38; Fortitude 34, Reflex 38, Will 36 Resist 25 fire Speed 12 m Shadow Sword (standard; at-will) F Necrotic, Weapon +27 vs. Fortitude; 3d6 + 5 necrotic damage, and ongoing 5 damage (save ends). R Shadow Net (standard; recharges when the assassin devil uses shadow cloak) F Necrotic Area burst 2 within 10; +26 vs. Reflex; the target is restrained, is weakened, and takes ongoing 10 necrotic damage (save ends all). While a target is affected by shadow net, the assassin devil cannot use its shadow cloak power. Dangerous Shadows An assassin devil’s shadow sword attack deals 4d6 extra necrotic damage against any target granting combat advantage to it. Shadow Cloak (standard; recharges when no creatures are affected by shadow net) F Illusion The assassin devil is invisible until it hits or misses with an attack. Traitor’s Pact The assassin devil’s necrotic damage is unaffected by Hestavar’s radiant affinity. Alignment Evil Languages Common, Supernal Skills Stealth +27 Str 21 (+17) Dex 28 (+21) Wis 25 (+19) Con 17 (+15) Int 17 (+15) Cha 13 (+13) Equipment leather armor, sword
War Devil Lieutenant (W)
Level 25 Brute (Leader)
Large immortal humanoid (devil) XP 7,000 Initiative +19 Senses Perception +17; darkvision HP 286; Bloodied 143 AC 38; Fortitude 37, Reflex 35, Will 33 Resist 30 fire Speed 8, fly 8 (clumsy) m Claw (standard; at-will) +29 vs. AC; 3d6 + 8 damage. m Trident (standard; recharge ⚃ ⚄ ⚅ ) F Weapon Reach 2; +29 vs. AC; 4d4 + 9 damage and ongoing 5 damage (save ends), and the target slides into any square adjacent to the war devil lieutenant and is knocked prone. R Besieged Foe (minor action; at-will) Ranged sight; automatic hit; the target is marked, and allies of the war devil lieutenant gain a +2 bonus to attack rolls made against the target until the encounter ends or the war devil lieutenant marks a new target. R Devilish Transposition (move; at-will) F Teleportation Ranged 20; the war devil lieutenant and an allied devil within range swap positions. R Fiendish Tactics (minor; recharge ⚄ ⚅) Ranged 10; affects up to 2 allied devils of the war devil lieutenant’s level or lower; each target can take a move action or make a basic attack. Alignment Evil Languages Supernal Skills Intimidate +20 Str 28 (+21) Dex 24 (+19) Wis 20 (+17) Con 26 (+20) Int 15 (+14) Cha 19 (+16) Equipment trident
No vember 20 09
|
D u n g e o n 17 2
39
Legacy of Io
2 Shocktroop Devil Line Breakers (S)
Level 24 Soldier
Large immortal humanoid (devil) XP 6,050 each Initiative +15 Senses Perception +9; darkvision HP 219; Bloodied 109 AC 41; Fortitude 35, Reflex 34, Will 34; see also Asmodeus’s shield Resist 15 fire Speed 6, fly 8 m Sword and Shield (standard; at-will) F Weapon Reach 2; +31 vs. AC; 3d6 + 8 damage, and the shocktroop devil line breaker makes a secondary attack. Secondary Attack: Reach 2; +28 vs. Fortitude; the target is pushed 2 squares and dazed until the end of the shocktroop devil line breaker’s next turn. M Shocktroop Attack (standard; recharges when the shocktroop devil line breaker has full hit points) The devil makes three sword and shield attacks, each against a different target. Asmodeus’s Shield While a shocktroop devil line breaker is not bloodied, it gains a +2 bonus to all defenses against divine attack powers. While bloodied, it takes a –2 penalty to all defenses against divine attack powers. Alignment Evil Languages Common, Supernal Str 24 (+20) Dex 24 (+19) Wis 17 (+15) Con 23 (+18) lnt 14 (+14) Cha 24 (+19) Equipment plate armor, heavy shield, longsword
Features of the Area Illumination: Bright light. Rocky Cliffs: The majority of the small island consists of a jagged stone outcropping that juts from the sea and surrounds the small area of open sand. Climbing around on the sharp rocks requires a DC 36 Athletics check and is done at one-quarter normal speed. Water: The lagoon water is relatively shallow here but does count as difficult terrain. Razor-Edged Rocks: The rock pillars sticking out of the lagoon are dangerously sharp. A creature pulled, pushed, or slid into or through a rock pillar square takes 15 damage. Such squares are difficult terrain and provide cover as normal pillars. Storm Surge: Powerful waves, driven by the faltering storm, regularly crash into the small island. At the start of each turn, roll a d6; on a 5 or 6, a particularly energetic wave hits. Creatures within d6 squares of the lagoon’s edge are subject to the following attack: + 26 vs. Reflex; the target is knocked prone and slides 1d6 squares straight into the lagoon.
No vember 20 09
|
D u n g e o n 17 2
40
Those Once Loyal By Robert J. Schwalb An adventure for 25th-level characters illustrations by William O’Connor cartography by Mike Schley TM & © 2009 Wizards of the Coast LLC All rights reserved.
“All that happens now has happened before and shall happen again unless we choose otherwise. Since the hated struggle against the elemental host in that storied event recalled as the Dawn War, we have seen the divided god wage endless war as it seeks to reconcile its sundered existence. Over the eons, the platinum wrestles with the chromatic, using and discarding us as they will to slake their thirst for vengeance. Our late patron defeated the enemy, and the enemy has defeated our patron. Time and again they fight, but to what end? One triumphs only to fall as the other gains ascendancy. I have peered through time’s mists, apprehended the distant future, and can see no end to this struggle. My despair at the eternal war impels me to beseech your esteemed council, to urge you to let the Platinum Dragon’s death be the last and to help me put an end to this age-old cycle for all time. Fellow dragons, the time to decide is now.”
December 20 09
| D u n g e o n
17 3
29
Those Once Loyal
“Those Once Loyal” is an adventure for five 25th-level characters. By the end, the characters should be midway through 27th level. This adventure builds on the events described in the Scales of War adventure path, but you can adapt it for use in your own campaign or as a one-shot adventure for epic level adventurers.
Background Bahamut is mostly dead . . . but not entirely so. A remnant lives on, hidden away and kept safe by a servant created for just this purpose. In Bahamut’s unfathomable wisdom, he anticipated the end Tiamat intended for him, extracted a portion of his divine essence, and bequeathed it to an unwitting vessel. That vessel is Amyria. Should the unthinkable happen (as it has), the essence would guide Amyria to her ultimate purpose. At least, that’s the plan. Keeping the plan a secret was central to Bahamut’s agenda. Although Amyria is capable, as are her companions, Tiamat would destroy her in a moment if she knew what the deva carried within her. No plan is safe when there are those who can peer into the future and trace fate’s threads to their possible outcomes. One such being to identify Bahamut’s intent was the mithral dragon Dakranad, a historian and philosopher who dwelled in Bahamut’s palace. Any who are close to the Platinum Dragon are aware that the struggle between Bahamut and Tiamat is no new thing. It has raged for countless millennia, all the way back to the Dawn War when Bahamut and Tiamat were born from Io’s sundered form. Dakranad knew that Bahamut’s death, while tragic, would bring an end to the war and spare the lives of generations to come. This fact comforted Dakranad. He was shaken
when he received a vision of Bahamut’s rebirth, because he knew that if his master returned, the wars would continue forever. The only solution was to claim Bahamut’s mantle and assume his place. For all his intellect and foresight, Dakranad failed to recognize his hubris when he approached the seven gold dragons who advised their master. Dakranad gave an impassioned speech, explaining the histories and their consequences and the dangers yet to come should Bahamut be permitted to continue his struggle. He beseeched the dragons to elevate him so he could take the Platinum Dragon’s place and bring the costly war to an end. His audience was both delighted that Bahamut would return and horrified by the dragon’s offer. They were so offended that they tossed the mithral dragon out from Celestia and unknowingly placed him in the clutches of an insidious enemy who wanted vengeance for himself. Enter Dispater. Bahamut and Tiamat caused the archdevil endless trouble with their squabbling. Dispater lost his prized prisoner (Gith), had his aspect murdered, and saw any chance at claiming the gith yanki dashed for the foreseeable future. The only way for Dispater to salvage his situation was to claim the god’s essence for himself and either keep it tucked away in his iron citadel or use it to remove Asmodeus and elevate himself to master of the Nine Hells. Dakranad was skeptical about an alliance with the archdevil, knowing enough to realize the peril in dealing with such a fiend. Yet Dakranad’s desperation undid his reservations and allowed him to be swayed by the archdevil’s honeyed words. Dispater assured the dragon that they would attain a bloodless victory, and with his support they could seize Amyria when she entered Celestia and prevent her from becoming Bahamut with little trouble at all.
Backed by a legion of devils, Dakranad and Dispater slipped into Celestia, moved to the Shining Bastion, Bahamut’s palace, and seized the stronghold by force. The gold dragons would not kneel before them, even when faced by a devil and his army. The gold dragons fought; Dakranad and his allies won; Bahamut’s palace was theirs. It wasn’t until the last gold dragon lay dying on the f loor that Dakranad realized his crime’s enormity. His intent was never power but to save lives. The dead dragons’ glassy eyes ref lected his corruption, but instead of retreating from his wickedness, he resolved to see his plan to its conclusion and right his wrongs. He would lead Celestia into a bright future, free from conf lict and strife, and free from Io’s legacy for all time.
Adventure Synopsis The arrow of fate recovered in “Legacy of Io” points to Celestia as the place to restore Bahamut to life. The visions assailing Amyria are beginning to weaken her, however, and if not stopped, may very well kill her. Using her spelljammer, the adventurers travel to Empyron to seek clues about how they might resurrect the fallen god and also to cure the deva. Once there, Dakranad’s agents strike the city of healing. While battling the dragons and angels, infernal assassins slip behind the characters to kidnap Amyria and bring her back to their master. Whether or not the devils succeed, the characters learn Amyria is in fact the vessel and key to Bahamut’s recovery. An old ally, Kalad, whose soul was spared and transformed into an exalted, points to Torzak-Belgirn to find answers to their questions. If the devils did succeed, the dragon attack points to Dakranad, and the characters can easily discover
December 20 09
| D u n g e o n
17 3
30
Those Once Loyal
The Quests In “Those Once Loyal,” the characters must escort Amyria to her destiny to claim the birthright bestowed upon her by Bahamut. As the adventure unfolds, the characters have chances to earn quest XP. Minor Quest—Discover Amyria’s Destiny Empyron, city of healing, is the best chance to discover what force works against Amyria. The healers there reveal the truth about her condition, explaining she carries within her a god’s essence. This information establishes her as one critical part in restoring Bahamut to life. Reward: 7,000 XP. Minor Quest—Save Amyria from Dakranad The mithral dragon covets Amyria’s power and seeks to use it so he can assume Bahamut’s place. His agents attempt a kidnapping at Empyron. If the characters would resurrect Bahamut, they must thwart the kidnapping attempt or later rescue her. Reward: 9,000 XP. Minor Quest—Thwart Dispater Angered over losing Gith from his iron fortress in the Nine Hells, Dispater hopes to claim Bahamut’s essence for himself, which he sees as an even greater prize than the githyanki matriarch. By defeating Dispater, the adventurers clear another obstruction to restoring the Platinum Dragon. Reward: 9,000 XP.
that the mithral dragon has decreed himself heir to Bahamut’s throne and most likely lairs there.
Minor Quest—Defeat the Mithral Dragon The greatest obstacle to Bahamut’s rebirth is not Tiamat but rather one of his own children, the mithral dragon named Dakranad. The dragon will stop at nothing to ensure Bahamut remains dead and claim his place. The characters must defeat the dragon in order to complete their quest. Reward: 11,000 XP. Minor Quest—Recover the Creation Spark Amyria is not enough to see Bahamut restored: the adventurers must secure a creation spark from Moradin’s Forge. Placing the spark in Amyria’s hands allows Bahamut’s essence to fully awaken and return to the world as he was. Reward: 11,000 XP. Major Quest—Restore Bahamut to Life To complete the rebirth, the adventurers usher Amyria across the Bridge of al-Sihal. To do that, they must convince the archangel guardian of their cause’s worthiness. Once Amyria crosses into the light at the end, the transformation begins and Bahamut is reborn. Reward: 110,000 XP.
The characters have two choices. They can go to the Platinum Dragon’s redoubt where, if Amyria
was captured, she most likely waits for them; or they can push on to Moradin’s Forge via Torzak-Belgirn. Whichever path they choose, they will need to go back and deal with the other. At Bahamut’s Palace, the characters find the stronghold empty and the Halls of Reflection overrun by devils. Battling through the defenders, the characters learn more of Dakranad’s plot, Dispater’s agenda, and how Bahamut planned for his death all along. If Amyria is kidnapped, the characters don’t find her here, but they do learn the mithral dragon carried her to Moradin’s Forge to acquire the creation spark for himself, the catalyst necessary to restore the god. Turning to Moradin’s Forge, the heroes find only enemies. With the god’s forces arrayed against them, the adventurers must push their way through the defenders to reach the godforge, where they hope to find Amyria, secure a creation spark, or both. The aspect of Moradin awaits them there, and the characters learn the divine avatar was turned against them by their enemy. The characters must defeat the aspect or convince him of their righteous purpose. In either event, victorious characters may secure the creation spark, but if Amyria is missing, they learn the mithral dragon is a step ahead of them again and racing to the Bridge of al-Sihal to complete his own apotheosis. The adventure concludes with a race across Celestia, the heroes working to cut off the dragon before he can cross into the golden radiance at the bridge’s end and claim Bahamut’s power for himself. The final scene sees the adventures embroiled in a three-way fight against Dakranad and the archangel guardian who protects the holy bridge. Should the characters succeed, Amyria, who has known the truth all along, finds the courage to carry the creation spark into the light and assume the mantle thrust upon her.
December 20 09
| D u n g e o n
17 3
31
Those Once Loyal
Preparing for Adventure “Those Once Loyal” gives the player characters a chance to undue Tiamat’s plotting and deliver a terrible blow to the goddess, a setback that could unravel all her plans and mark the final turning point in the war. The characters travel to a plane of light and unsullied goodness only to find its sanctity compromised by misguided intent and fathomless greed. The adventurers must face off against powerful foes, stir a god’s heart, and send a friend to certain death in the hope of saving all creation from Tiamat’s tyranny. The adventure should begin just after the characters retrieve the arrow of fate as described in “Legacy of Io.” When you are ready to begin, go to “Grim Reunion” on page 33.
What You Need to Play You’ll find everything you need to run the adventure contained in the following pages, including the background information presented above, setup, and tactical encounters that include statistics blocks and maps for each combat encounter. If you need more information on how to use the tactical encounter format, see a previous Scales of War adventure, such as “Garaitha’s Anvil.” Also, Manual of the Planes and Plane Above provide additional information on Celestia, while Draconomicon 2 gives added insight into mithral dragons.
Treasure Preparation “Those Once Loyal” uses the treasure parcel system described in the Dungeon Master’s Guide. The characters should gain a total of eighteen treasure parcels. The Treasure Parcels sidebar lists the most likely places to find parcels. You can fill in the blanks with the parcel numbers noted. Magic items ought to come from the players’ wish lists, with most of the higher-level items appearing in parcels found later in the adventure.
Treasure Parcels
Parcel A: ____________, D. Covered Retreat Parcel B: ____________, D. Covered Retreat Parcel C: ____________, G. Bahamut’s Throne Parcel D: ____________, G. Bahamut’s Throne Parcel E: ____________, G. Bahamut’s Throne Parcel F: ____________, I. Accidental Prisoners Parcel G: ____________, I. Accidental Prisoners Parcel H: ____________, I. Accidental Prisoners Parcel I: ____________, L. A Thousand Teeth Parcel J: ____________, N. Forgeworks Parcel K: ____________, N. Forgeworks Parcel L: ____________, N. Forgeworks Parcel M: ____________, P. Moradin’s Forge Parcel N: ____________, P. Moradin’s Forge Parcel O: ____________, P. Moradin’s Forge Parcel P: ____________, P. Moradin’s Forge Parcel Q: ____________, Q. War for Heaven Parcel R: ____________, Q. War for Heaven
Based on the guidelines in the Dungeon Master’s Guide, the following parcels can go in spaces above. Pick items from your players’ wish list to populate magic items. Parcel 1: Magic item, level 30 Parcel 2: Magic item, level 30 Parcel 3: Magic item, level 29 Parcel 4: Magic item, level 28 Parcel 5: Magic item, level 28
Parcel 6: Magic item, level 27 Parcel 7: Magic item, level 26 Parcel 8: ritual scroll of Imprisonment (Arcane Power, page 156) and Voice of Fate, 3 potions of recovery Parcel 9: pouch with 70 pp and 20 diamonds (5,000 gp each), ritual scroll containing Ease Spirit (Divine Power, page 157) and True Portal, phial containing 50,000 gp of residuum Parcel 10: 100 platinum ingots (worth 5,000 gp each), gold statue depicting Moradin at the forge (60,000 gp) Parcel 11: 1,250 pp, 2 caustic whetstones (level 30, Adventurer’s Vault, page 190) Parcel 12: 1,750 pp, 50,000 gp of residuum contained in a Celestian steel box (worth 50,000 gp), miscellaneous godforged components (worth 100,000 gp total) Parcel 13: 300 pp, platinum tiara set with sapphires (50,000 gp), gown woven from inert astral fire and studded with fire rubies (100,000 gp), mithral scepter studded with astral diamonds (100,000 gp), 2 potions of resistance (level 24, Adventurer’s Vault, page 188) Parcel 14: 25 ad, 1 potion of recovery Parcel 15: 200 pp, 9 gold dragon statuettes (20,000 gp each) Parcel 16: 9 ad, 50 pp, a mithral statuette depicting Bahamut (50,000 gp), augmenting whetstone (level 26, Adventurer’s Vault, page 190) Parcel 17: 1 potion of life Parcel 18: 6 diamonds (5,000 gp each)
December 20 09
| D u n g e o n
17 3
32
Those Once Loyal
Vital Information
Starting the Adventure
This adventure reveals the methods required to restore Bahamut to life. While running the adventure, be sure to keep the following points in mind and make sure the players understand them by the adventure’s conclusion. ✦ Long ago, Bahamut enshrined his essence in a simple platinum sword and hid the relic in the natural world as insurance against the time when Tiamat would resume their age-old struggle. ✦ Not long after Tiamat sparked the war, Bahamut awoke the platinum sword. The weapon assumed the form of a deva who took the name Amyria. To protect Bahamut’s essence, the deva knew nothing of who she was or what role she would play in the event of Bahamut’s death. ✦ Once Bahamut was slain, the essence stirred within the vessel, impelling her to restore the god to his true form. The Platinum Dragon never intended the vessel to acquire a personality, and thus the divine nature, as it fights to become free, is inadvertently killing her. ✦ Amyria is nothing more than a means to an end. Her annihilation is regrettable, but there is no other way to restore Bahamut. ✦ Amyria is not enough. She must carry a creation spark into the golden radiance at the end of the Bridge of al-Sihal. By entering the light, Amyria can merge with the creation spark and begin her transformation into Bahamut. ✦ A powerful angel guards the way into the Bastion of Souls and permits no creature to cross the Bridge without divine decree. The arrow of fate is the arrow that slew Bahamut once long ago and remains a mighty weapon. Using it against the archangel will permit Amyria to pass without harm.
The amount of time between this adventure and the last is up to you. During the characters’ efforts to recover the arrow of fate, Amyria was looking into the intense visions troubling her since Bahamut’s death. Should the adventurers need time to create or purchase magic items, follow up on other leads, or need an extra encounter or two to bring them to 25th level, stall this adventure’s start.
A Grim Reunion Amyria finds the adventurers. During her travels, she acquired a spelljammer named Mercy’s Blessing and searched the planes for answers to her visions as well as information on how to use the arrow of fate. Amyria is exhausted by her efforts, and the visions have only grown worse. When she rejoins the adventurers, it’s clear she’s sick. It’s clear that if something is not done soon, this unknown plague might kill her. Amyria changes the subject should the characters ask after her, turning their attention to the item they recovered. When the characters produce the item, it swivels in their hand and points toward the deva. No matter where the character moves, the arrow shifts its position so it maintains it direction. When offered, Amyria takes the arrow of fate, and her eyes open wide, her mouth falls open, and she collapses. A moment later she recovers. Amyria blinks and gasps and shudders. She pulls herself to her feet and looks at you. A moment passes before she says, “The visions are correct. Bahamut lives. Celestia. We . . . must . . . answers there.” She collapses once again.
Amyria still lives, but she doesn’t respond to efforts to help her. Any character trained in Heal sees she’s in a coma and her condition worsens. Characters seeking more concrete answers have a few options. Characters trained in Arcana or Religion know Celestia is an astral dominion and is home to Kord, Moradin, and Bahamut when he lived. It is a holy place where virtue and courage are celebrated and where great heroes may become exalted and lend their power to the dominion’s defense. A DC 26 Religion check recalls Celestia is also home to Empyron, the City of Healing, where ailments have no hold. Alternatively, the adventurers might use rituals to ferret out the answers to their questions. Consult Oracle: Characters using this ritual receive one-word answers to their questions. Use Vital Information on this page to guide your answers. Consult Mystic Sages: Information gained from this ritual also draws from Vital Information presented on this page. Divine Sight (Forgotten Realms Player’s Guide): A character benefiting from this ritual recognizes that the arrow of fate serves Bahamut and also identifies Bahamut’s essence roiling inside Amyria. History Revealed (Arcane Power): Any character who performs this ritual witnesses key scenes from the campaign involving Amyria, but the most important scene is the recovery of the platinum sword in “Rescue at Rivenroar” (Dungeon 156). Loremaster’s Bargain: This ritual provides the surest information the adventurers need to gather information described under Vital Information. The entity called forth protects Bahamut’s secret, however, and so urges the characters to transport Amyria to Celestia, where she will be at least one step closer to realizing her purpose.
December 20 09
| D u n g e o n
17 3
33
Those Once Loyal
Reaching Celestia Traveling to an astral dominion is simple work for epic level characters, but Amyria’s spelljammer can bridge the distance provided they have the Plane Shift ritual (Manual of the Planes, page 150). Amyria knows the ritual, but she’s in no condition to perform it herself. If the characters themselves lack the ritual, they might find a ritual scroll (be sure to deduct 17,000 gp from a monetary treasure parcel) in Amyria’s quarters. Alternatively, acquiring the ritual might prove an interesting side-trek if the characters aren’t quite to 25th level. Mercy’s Blessing
Gargantuan vehicle HP 500 Space 4 squares by 8 squares AC 3; Fortitude 20, Reflex 2 Speed fly 12 (hover), overland flight 15 Pilot The pilot must sit at the spelljammer helm, at the vessel’s rear. Crew In addition to the pilot, the vehicle requires a crew of five, all of whom use a standard action each round to help control the vessel. Reduce the vehicle’s fly speed by 4 squares for each missing crewmember. At fly speed 0, the vehicle is unable to travel and flies out of control. Load Thirty Medium creatures; forty tons of cargo. Out of Control When out-of-control, the vehicle moves forward at half speed (not including any modifiers for its sails). Each round, it has a 75% chance of descending. It descends 5 squares for the first 10 rounds it’s out of control. After 10 rounds, it descends 10 squares per round. If the vehicle hits the ground while out-of-control after descending more than 20 squares, it is destroyed. Sails The vehicle takes a penalty or bonus to its fly speed from –4 to +4 depending on the strength and direction of the wind. Spelljammer Helm (Navigation Focus) This vehicle is equipped with a spelljamming helm which is the navigation focus for the Plane Shift ritual.
The trouble with the Plane Shift ritual is that it requires the characters to name a specific location they have visited once before or name a plane. Completing the ritual deposits the characters some distance away from the named destination or at a random location on the plane. Assuming the characters have never visited Empyron before and perform the rituals, the adventurers appear in the air floating above Bahamut’s Palace (proceed to Part Three). If the characters have been to Empyron before and get a 30 or higher on their Arcana check, they’re close enough to Empyron to close the distance in short order (proceed to Part One). Failing this, the characters wind up at the Palace as above. On the off chance that no character has the Ritual Caster feat, they will need to find someone to perform the ritual on their behalf. Use any suitable NPC to whom the characters have grown close to do the job, but the characters will still need to supply the residuum. In the end, allow the characters to reach Celestia with little effort.
Celestia Celestia, the Radiant Throne, is a wholesome and virtuous plane, a realm of seven magnificent mountains whose peaks shine with inner light. This plane is home to Bahamut, Kord, and Moradin, and the three deities combine their power to combat evil. Moradin is the first of equals and both Bahamut and Kord accede to his wishes. The plane consists of a range of seven peaks, about 120 miles long and wide. Each mount climbs some 10 miles up to blue skies above. The plane exerts normal gravity, and the deities can control their environs. Radiance Affinity: Creatures gain a +1 bonus to attack rolls using radiant powers. Creatures deal only half damage with attacks using necrotic damage (though ongoing necrotic damage is unaffected). Current Developments: Bahamut’s death drew Kord and Moradin from their respective realms to respond to Tiamat’s machinations. Both gods left their dominion and council with other gods to determine how they should respond to deicide. Kord’s halls are beyond this adventure’s scope, but Moradin left an aspect to oversee his forge behind Rainf ather’s Beard.
December 20 09
| D u n g e o n
17 3
34
Those Once Loyal
Part One: The City of Healing
white robes and a silver mask, concealing gender and features. As one, they turn to the deva and converge to attend to her hurts.
The gentlest peak of the Seven Mounting Heavens is Jusor. Travelers can ascend to its high vales by way of the wide slopes, whose pitches are intended not to tax the traveler too greatly but rather to invite them onward to Empyron far above. Not long after a traveler makes the ascent, the City of Healing’s alabaster towers come into view, graceful spires with f luted columns and wide, arcing bridges spanning the distance between them. The white walls bounding the city bear the merciful visages and snapping gold banners declaring the city’s devotion to life and living. Through the open gates one finds broad avenues sheltered by the spreading boughs of massive oaks to dampen the sun’s brilliance. From any point in the city, one can just make out the still black waters on whose shores the city stands. No ripple mars its glassy surface and unseen stars ref lect their light off its still waters. The City of Healing welcomes all, offering succor to those in need. Within its walls, curses melt, injuries heal, and diseases flee. Characters suffering any injuries, curses, diseases, or other persistent ailments find them lifted upon entering the city, yet Amyria does not stir from her sleep. Whether the characters entered the city on foot or landed the spelljammer in a clearing, the city’s healers find them:
The attendants are exalted, chosen by the gods to give comfort to the suffering. Their sole purpose is to heal the sick and, despite their strange, silent behavior, they mean Amyria no harm. They try to take Amyria and bring her inside the tower, where they can assess whatever assails her. If any character moves against the attendants or stops them from taking Amyria, they as one retreat to the doors, cocking their heads in confusion, watching and waiting to see what the characters do next. A character who attacks an attendant causes all six to disappear and shutters to them every door and every window in Empyron, barring all access to any chambers, thus denying their aid for as long as you deem sufficient.
A nearby tower’s massive doors swing on silent hinges to reveal a brightly lit and airy hall. Six attendants emerge, carrying crystalline goblets, cool cloths, and platters bearing succulent fruit. Each attendant wears diaphanous
December 20 09
| D u n g e o n
17 3
35
Those Once Loyal
An Old Friend Whether or not the characters allow the attendants to spirit Amyria away, a short, stocky attendant joins the rest. Like the others, he wears white robes, but he lacks a mask. Characters who knew Kalad in life recognize him immediately. When Kalad perished in “Throne of the StoneSkinned King” (Dungeon 166), Moradin took pity on this dedicated servant and called his spirit from the Shadowfell to serve in the afterlife as he did in life. Kalad lends his aid to Empyron, learning the ancient healing arts passed down for millennia. He remembers little from his life, but he recalls familiar faces. His face splits into a grin as he welcomes the heroes to the City of Healing. After a few friendly exchanges, the characters can question the dwarf as they like. Typical answers follow typical questions below. What are you doing here? I thought you were dead! Indeed I was, friend, but Moradin still had need for this old dwarf. I’ve come to learn the healing arts and lend my aid in what feeble ways I can. Who are these others in the city? Ah. They are exalted like myself. They intend no harm; their purpose is to help and nothing more. Can we trust them with Amyria? Of course, you came here didn’t you? All are safe in the City of Healing. Have you heard about Bahamut’s death? Who hasn’t? Things have been difficult since he died. Celestia readies for war. What do you mean, difficult? Bahamut’s passing is grievous to be sure, but not all share this sentiment. Vultures have emerged to claim his mantle. But Bahamut still lives! Does he now? That’s interesting . . . Where is he? Is this some sort of plot against Tiamat?
Couldn’t some essence of Bahamut have survived? Hmm. If Bahamut’s essence lingers still, he is in grave danger, for Dakranad will not permit his return. Who is Darkranad? Bahamut’s heir-apparent, an arrogant mithral dragon who claims to have visions or some such nonsense. He’s the one causing all the trouble. What sort of trouble? There has been trouble at Bahamut’s palace. It seems the dragon has made foul alliances and driven out the proper custodians. Devils in Bahamut’s hall, can you imagine? If we can restore Bahamut, he’ll certainly toss him out, won’t he? Most likely, but only if you succeed. Have you located his essence? (If yes) Amyria? Never guessed that one, though she was always a bit funny, I suppose. Well, it’s just a matter of extracting the essence then. This isn’t something healers can do here. You’d do best to sort this out with Moradin himself. If anyone would know how to put a god back together again, it’d be him. (If no) Well, once we see what’s wrong with Amyria, we can patch her up and maybe she’ll have answers for us. Where would we find Moradin? That’s a question for sure. From what I hear, he’s already left Celestia with Kord to convene with the other gods about fighting Tiamat. Moradin would never leave his forge unguarded. I imagine he left behind his aspect to continue his work. I would check at Torzak-Belgirn to find him.
Event 1: Sanctity Violated If the attendants carried Amyria into the great hall and the characters followed them inside, they find comfortable beds lining both sides for as far as they can see, suggesting the place is far larger inside than out. Whitewood arched doors lead off on all sides while glowing motes fill the room with cheery light. There are no other patients here. If they ask Kalad about this, the dwarf explains that there are others, but they are elsewhere in the city. The gods built the City of Healing during the Dawn War to attend to their soldiers. Such was the war’s scope that at one time, no bed lacked an injured hero and no hall stood empty. While the attendants inspect Amyria, Dakranad’s servants strike the city. Tactical Encounter: A. Dragon Strike (see page 45).
Event 2: Kidnapping While the dragons and angels strike from overhead, Dispater’s servants enter the hall from one of the side passages and abduct Amyria. Run this encounter only if one or more characters refuse to leave the deva’s side while the battle rages. Tactical Encounter: B. Fiery Abduction (see page 48). Adapting the Encounter: It’s likely the player characters will be busy fighting the silver dragons and thus unable to stop or confront the devils in this encounter. You can repurpose this encounter at any point later in the adventure. The devils might cause trouble for the characters in the Halls of Reflection or the characters might face them while snooping around at Torzak-Belgirn.
December 20 09
| D u n g e o n
17 3
36
Those Once Loyal
Where is the Mithral Dragon? The mithral dragon’s prescience allows it to stay ahead of the characters until the end. If the devils kidnap Amyria, they deliver her to the dragon at the palace. Dakranad then moves to Torzak-Belgirn where he deceives the aspect of Moradin and convinces him that he plans to restore Bahamut and that the characters aim to stop him and save Amyria’s life. Characters going first to Bahamut’s Palace just miss the dragon as he teleports to Moradin’s Forge. Should the characters explore the Forge first, assume that Dakranad has already turned the aspect and gained the creation spark but lingers at the Palace to argue with Dispater for a bit before pushing on to the Bridge.
Event 3: Hot on the Heels This event occurs only if the characters give chase to the kidnappers or head into the Healing Hall to see where the would-be abductors came from. Deep within the Healing Hall are more fiends waiting to cover their allies’ retreat. Skill Challenge: C. Tracking the Devils (see page 49).
Event 5: Diagnosis and Revelations Empyron attendants learned key information about Amyria, but the characters can learn this only if at least one attendant survived tactical encounter B or if the characters thwarted the kidnapping attempt and have other attendants inspect her. The characters can learn the following information from the attendants. ✦ Amyria does not have long to live. ✦ A powerful presence is using Amyria’s body as fuel to sustain itself. If left alone, the spark will destroy itself and Amyria. ✦ The healers could extract the essence, but doing so would destroy it. If the essence is Bahamut, then doing so would prevent the god’s return. ✦ If the characters piece this information together with the information gained from Kalad and suggest to the healers that the essence is in fact Bahamut, the healers declare that they cannot trigger the transformation. Only Moradin possesses the knowledge and means to reconstitute a dead god and he has withdrawn to Torzak-Belgirn, the forge city, where he musters his armies for war against Tiamat.
What Next? With the information learned from the healers, the characters have a few options. They might press ahead to Moradin’s Forge (see Part Three) and seek an audience with the god, or they might head for Bahamut’s Palace to rescue Amyria, figure out how the devils are involved, and perhaps defeat the mithral dragon (see Part Two). The characters have time to take an extended rest before heading off in either direction.
Event 4: Devil in the Details The kidnappers left a surprise for the adventurers. A pit fiend and a small force await the characters when they track the fleeing devils to the portal. Tactical Encounter: D. Covered Retreat (see page 51).
December 20 09
| D u n g e o n
17 3
37
Those Once Loyal
Part Two: The Platinum Dragon’s Fastness The characters have several reasons to explore Bahamut’s Palace. The characters may venture here to rescue Amyria, they might come to the palace to learn more about Bahamut’s plans, or they might visit the stronghold to defeat the mithral dragon and its allies. The characters can explore this location at any point during the adventure, but it should be before chasing down the dragon as described in Part Four. Characters can reach the site easily. The portal in Part One takes the characters to area 1 at the palace. Otherwise, the characters can learn the castle’s location from anyone at Empyron. It stands on a high spur on the mountain called Mertion. The characters can then use Amyria’s spelljammer to reach the castle, a ritual (assume someone in Empyron has the sigil address for the castle’s teleportation circle), or make an overland journey (the slowest and least likely, given the characters’ levels). Characters walking and climbing to the stronghold must devote at least a week for travel and likely face additional encounters, at your discretion. Aside from confronting the corrupted mithral dragon, the Halls of Reflection above the castle hold the secret to Bahamut’s reconstitution and also the revelation that this struggle has happened before. Regardless of when the characters tackle the site, neither the mithral dragon nor the council of seven gold dragons who once advised Bahamut are here. Instead, the characters find devils aplenty waiting for them. The mithral dragon made a bargain with a devil to gain support to claim Bahamut’s place.
The Halls of Reflection
Features of the Halls
The Platinum Dragon’s palace stands on a spur not far below Mertion’s peak. The stronghold is far larger than the area the characters will explore. The section concerning the adventurers is Bahamut’s Halls of Reflection where, in life, the Platinum Dragon could meditate, monitor his mortal servants, and plan ways to counter Tiamat’s plotting. Bahamut stored his most precious treasures in a vault hidden deep within the complex.
Dispater’s devils and a few angels loyal to the mithral dragon guard the Halls. Their master plumbs Bahamut’s most private chambers in search of treasure. Most areas share common features. Illumination: Bright light. Angelic radiance fills each chamber with soft white light. Doors: Unless otherwise mentioned, doors are unlocked. Outcropping: The Halls spread across several stone plinths above the castle itself. A fall from this area deposits a character in a courtyard 110 feet below and deals 11d10 damage. Stairs: Squares containing stairs are difficult terrain. Walls: Most walls are made from smooth alabaster, but beneath the glossy veneer, one can see draconic forms captured in the stone. Climbing the walls requires a DC 31 Athletics check.
If the characters approach Bahamut’s Palace by any means other than the portal, read: A mighty fortress rises from an outcropping jutting out from the snowy mountain. Its gleaming walls catch and reflect the sun’s brilliance. Wide towers thrust up, competing with the mountain itself for height, while dizzying ramparts festooned with draconic imagery promise no easy entry to would-be assailants. Your eye is drawn to a shimmering red light glowing from a small cluster of buildings above the fortress proper. The light seems out of place or wrong somehow. The light the characters spot is the open portal to the Healing Hall of Part One. Characters are free to explore the rest of the palace as they like, and they find courtyards and halls, cavernous passages, and endless rooms, all scaled for gargantuan dragons. No one stirs in the castle proper and nothing has disturbed the furnishings or doors. The only exception is the Chamber of the Seven Dragons, a massive auditorium where seven gold dragons convened to advise Bahamut. In this sumptuous and wondrous room, the adventurers find seven dragon carcasses, butchered by devils.
December 20 09
| D u n g e o n
17 3
38
Those Once Loyal
Keyed Locations The following locations correspond with those on the Halls of Reflection map.
1. Portal Landing Adventurers traveling by portal emerge here. Parties arriving by other means automatically see the portal’s light. This area grants a breathtaking view of the mountains to all sides, but its openness leaves arrivals exposed. Tactical Encounter: E. Hell’s Fury (see page 54).
2. Air Bridge A wide bridge formed from force leads from the portal landing to the Hall of Reflection. The bridge is transparent, allowing those crossing it to see the courtyard over one hundred below their feet. Tactical Encounter: E. Hell’s Fury (see page 54).
3. Canary Courtyard Bahamut and his attendants welcomed visitors through the doors or from overtop to this modest open-aired courtyard. A balcony rings the area and the upper doors lead to the Aerie, where Bahamut’s guards await their master’s next command. Tactical Encounter: F. Devoted Guardians (see page 65).
4. Angelic Aerie Angels need never sleep, but they do spend time in meditation to clear their minds of personality and individual will. Bahamut’s angels use the privacy afforded by this chamber for just this purpose. Tactical Encounter: F. Devoted Guardians (see page 65).
5. Audience Chamber When Bahamut spent time in the Halls of Reflection, he would meet petitioners in this massive domed chamber. Tactical Encounter: G. Bahamut’s Throne (see page 57).
6. Rear Gate Double doors behind the domed tower allow access to the interior and bypass the Canary Courtyard. The
doors open onto an empty hall with two more doors to either side. These doors allow passage into empty turrets. Platinum seals block further passage into the complex unless the characters already defeated the godforged colossus in tactical encounter G, in which case the seals are open. If the characters have not yet defeated the colossus, the seal attacks as described on page 57.
December 20 09
| D u n g e o n
17 3
39
Those Once Loyal
7. Sky Walk
11. Bahamut’s Vault
A wide bridge connects the Halls of Reflection to the mountain on which it stands. The bridge is 70 feet long and ends at a dark cavern, where a spiral staircase leads down to the fortress below. Characters needing to take an extended rest may do so here.
Bahamut stored many treasures here, including magic items, relics, and other miscellaneous items of value only to the deity. Dakranad plundered much of the vault, but he left a few things here, including items that lured Dispater into his present predicament. Tactical Encounter: I. Accidental Prisoners (see page 60).
8. Hall of Champions To reach his vault, Bahamut moved through this hall as a reminder of all the greatest mortal champions to sacrifice their lives in his name. The statues depict humans, dragonborn, elves, and other races. The statues change form, cycling through countless mortals who died in Bahamut’s service. Anyone who spends time examining the statues can witness their transformation. If any player characters were lost during the Scales of War campaign, consider adding their likenesses to the statues here.
What Next? If the characters explored the Halls of Reflection first, it should be clear the dragon is headed for Moradin’s Forge to acquire the creation spark, so a trip to Torzak-Belgirn is likely their next stop (see Part Three). If the characters have already acquired the creation spark, then they should learn from Dispater that the dragon flies to the Bridge of al-Sihal to complete his own apotheosis (see Part Four).
9. Sighing Passage Upon entering this hallway, the characters hear moaning and sighing echoing throughout the hall. Following the noise to their origin reveals different sized holes drilled into the far wall. Tactical Encounter: H. No Sanctuary (see page 59).
10. Chamber of the Seal A deadly trap guards Bahamut’s Retreat. Should any intruder draw too close, the trap unleashes destruction. Tactical Encounter: H. No Sanctuary (see page 59).
December 20 09
| D u n g e o n
17 3
40
Those Once Loyal
Part Three: Rainfather Solania may not be the tallest mountain in Celestia, but it is a forebidding peak all the same. The mountain reveals its severe character where the rocky slopes break from the evergreen forest blanketing its lower slopes. Sheer cliffs, jagged spurs, and treacherous ravines promise a difficult time to climbers, and the ascent is made worse by the unexpected plumes venting from the mountain’s interior. Steam clouds lift to join the everpresent mists concealing the mountain’s zenith, yet no matter how dense, light flashes through the murky haze, hinting at the wonders created at Moradin’s forge. Solania, called Rainfather for the storms the dense clouds produce as well as the waterfalls spilling into rich mountain vales from the mountain’s dizzying heights, houses the god Moradin and his servants. Corridors and chambers riddle the mountain’s interior, some little more than crude caverns and others sumptuous halls built in the dwarven fashion. One could spend ten lifetimes exploring these chambers and never see them all, but what astonishing discoveries one might find in these endless passages pale compared to the innovation displayed in Torzak-Belgirn. Torzak-Belgirn is a city built near Rainfather’s peak. Spread across metal platforms by the score, the greatest artisans the planes have ever seen labor over hot forges to produce fine arms and armor, wondrous machines, innovative vehicles, and constructs from tiny insects to giant-sized centurions. The work performed here is not required and its workers are not slaves. Those who toil here do so for the love of their labor and also to honor the god who gave to them the intellect and desire to create.
The city atop the mountain is interesting enough to lure adventurers just to see its creations, but the player characters likely have other reasons to search out Rainfather. Based on information acquired thus far, the characters likely come to the mountain to seek out the creation spark to serve as a catalyst for Amyria’s transformation.
Torzak-Belgirn The characters should have no trouble finding Rainfather or the metallic city at its peak. Amyria’s spelljammer can descend from Mertion, where they found Empyron, or Solania, where they braved Bahamut’s Halls of Reflection, and reach the lower mountain in short order. Characters traveling without the vessel should still have means to reach the city, but have Kalad or Empyron attendants supply stumped characters with the sigil address for a teleportation circle in the city if needed. The characters aren’t in Torzak-Belgirn long enough to make an extensive exploration of the city, but they can purchase supplies of their character level or less, rest if they haven’t done so already, and determine how they might get an audience with Moradin or his representative. Such information is not easily acquired, and thus the characters must engage in a skill challenge if they would find Moradin’s proxy. Skill Challenge: J. Finding the Soulforge (see page 62).
Rainfather’s Beard A mighty waterfall named Rainfather’s Beard conceals the entrance to the Soulforge. The rushing water, however, is not the only guardian. During the Dawn War, Moradin defeated but spared a mighty storm titan. In exchange for its life, it agreed to serve
the god for ten thousand years. The storm titan dwells in the pool and emerges to deny access to the Soulforge to anyone it deems unworthy. Tactical Encounter: K. The Rainfather’s Thrall (see page 65).
The Soulforge The Soulforge is one of several sites in Celestia that connect to the Crucible of Light, an ancient fount from which all things are possible. Here Moradin fashions new creations, drawing energy from the roiling fires at his forge and imbuing them into the constructs he and his devoted servants create. The aspect of Moradin continues the god’s work.
1. Entrance The Rainfather’s Beard conceals the entrance to the Soulforge. When the characters move through the waterfall, read: A wide cavern extends into the mountain, then curves slightly to open into a much larger chamber. The fiery glow from red veins worming through the stone offers faint light. Perception Check DC 29: An enormous shadow moves across the wall.
2. Dank Caverns These caverns house Morgol the Undying, a vicious hyrdra raised by Moradin to dissuade accidental guests from disturbing his work. Tactical Encounter: L. A Thousand Teeth (see page 67).
December 20 09
| D u n g e o n
17 3
41
Those Once Loyal
3. Hall of Grudges This chamber recalls every creature and every power to have ever wronged Moradin. When the characters enter this chamber, read: Four grim statues carved to resemble dwarven warriors rest stony hands on axe handles, their weapons head down in front of their feet. Helmets cover their faces and long beards cover their chests. The walls between them move and writhe as faces and images swim up from swirling mists to stare with menace only to fade once more. Beatific faces compete
with monstrous visages, dragons and giants, demons and devils. It is a strange image parade with no apparent end. Should the party need to take an extended rest, they can do so here.
4. Hall of the Godforged Three sets of steel double doors block access to this chamber. It is here where Moradin keeps his prized creations. Tactical Encounter: M. Godsworn Warriors (see page 68).
5. Forgeworks Moradin’s servants use this chamber to melt down damaged components. Although not intended as a weapon, the forgeworks can prove a dangerous obstacle. Tactical Encounter: N. Forgeworks (see page 70).
6. Pit of Forgotten Creations Moradin discards those components he cannot use into this deep pit. A bridge spans the gap, connecting to the forge beyond. Angels sworn to the god have gathered to protect the aspect from the player characters. Tactical Encounter: O. Angelic Defenders (see page 71).
7. Moradin’s Forge Moradin uses this chamber as a forge and entrusts the room to his aspect to protect. Under normal circumstances, the aspect of Moradin might be amenable to conversation, but the mithral dragon poisoned him against the characters so that he now believes that the adventures intend to stop Bahamut’s rebirth. Tactical Encounter: P. Moradin’s Forge (see page 72).
What Next? If the characters came to Moradin’s Forge first, clues should point them to the Halls of Reflection above Bahamut’s Palace (see Part Two), where they might catch the mithral dragon before he moves on to the Bridge of al-Sihal. If the characters have already dealt with Dispater at the Halls of Reflection, the characters know that the mithral dragon is making for the Bridge and their only hope of stopping him is to catch him before he can cross it.
December 20 09
| D u n g e o n
17 3
42
Those Once Loyal
Part Four: The Bridge of al-Sihal By now, the adventurers know who’s behind the plot, what they must do to restore Bahamut, and where the final showdown will take place. The Bridge can be reached only by following the blinding path starting at the mithral gate in Asiryet, the Heavenly City, situated atop Chronias, the highest and mightiest mountain in the dominion. Dispater or the aspect of Moradin points the way for the characters, depending on the order in which the characters tackled the adventure sites. Assuming the characters still have the spelljammer, they can make the final journey without trouble. Otherwise, the characters must use rituals or physically climb the mountains. Whatever means the characters use, let them reach the shining city before it’s too late. When the characters reach Asiryet, read: A simple path winds around the magnificent mountain, climbing ever higher to the shining city surrounding its summit. A golden halo wreathes the city, underscoring its purity and holiness. A shining ornate gate forged from mithral grants access to a white stone bridge that extends from the mountain’s peak into a shimmering curtain of golden light.
Amyria is Present Amyria awakens from her coma when the characters draw near the bridge. After a few moments, she says, “You have shouldered my burden for so long, but I must ask you to bear it further still.” She points to the bridge. “There is my destiny. Do you have it?” She’s talking about the creation spark. Assuming the characters do, she asks for it now, but this time in a deep, sonorous voice, the voice of Bahamut. “You have done very well. Help me to the bridge. There I believe this vessel will carry me across.” If the characters don’t have the spark, Bahamut says, “There can be no return without Moradin’s aid. Seek the creation spark from his forge behind Rainfather’s Beard.” With that, Amyria lapses back into unconsciousness once more. Tactical Encounter: Q. War for Heaven (see page 76).
The Dragon Has Amyria Just as the characters close on the bridge, they see Dakranad making his way across, racing for the golden curtain at the far side. Tactical Encounter: Q. War for Heaven (see page 76).
What happens next depends on the adventurers’ circumstances.
December 20 09
| D u n g e o n
17 3
43
Those Once Loyal
Concluding the Adventure The adventure ends with Dakranad’s defeat and Amyria’s passage through the golden curtain. How this comes about depends on the final encounter’s outcome.
Dakranad Wins If the mithral dragon carries Amyria and the creation spark through the golden curtain, he inadvertently achieves what the characters have been after all along: Bahamut’s rebirth. Bahamut’s essence uses Dakranad’s body for fuel and does not need to destroy Amyria in the process. Moments after Dakranad disappears into the curtain, Amyria returns to the bridge, but she has little recollection of who she is or what she is doing there. It is as if she were reincarnated. Amyria doesn’t figure into future adventures in the Scales of War campaign, but you can incorporate her if you wish or simply let her go her own way.
Amyria Dies If Amyria dies during the fight on the bridge, Bahamut’s essence escapes her body and hovers in the air for a few minutes before dispersing. If the characters would see Bahamut restored, someone must shepherd the essence through the golden curtain with the creation spark. A character can do so by moving into the essence’s space and breathing in the vapors. The character then feels compelled to enter the light. Stepping through destroys the valiant hero. Such a sacrifice is worthy of epics, and you should reward such a selfless act by granting the player’s next character an extra 30th level magic item or a boon from Bahamut (see Dungeon Master’s Guide 2 for ideas).
Bahamut’s Return? Regardless of who steps through, provided the conditions are met, Bahamut will return as described in the next installment of the Scales of War adventure path.
Amyria Steps Through Alone The deva struggles to her feet, groaning in pain, her body twisting and popping as Bahamut’s essence struggles to break free. She takes the creation spark from the characters and turns toward the golden curtain. She pauses for a moment, looking back to the characters, tears spilling from her eyes. “My friends, there is nothing I can say or do to thank you for what you have done for Him. This is not the end. I shall return as I have many times before. Farewell for now and thank you.” With that Amyria steps through the golden curtain.
December 20 09
| D u n g e o n
17 3
44
Those Once Loyal
A. Dragon Strike Encounter Level 27 (55,000 XP)
Setup
2 silver dragon scourgers (S) 4 angels of radiance (A) 6 Empyron attendants (T) Kalad (K)
Dakranad dispatched two loyal silver dragons and four angels sworn to him in his capacity as Bahamut’s steward to strike what he declared were imposters and threats to Celestia. The dragons roar and screech, hoping to lure the adventurers outside. When the characters look outside, read: Two mighty dragons descend from the blue skies, their silver scales glittering in the brilliant sun. They roar with rage as their long, sinuous tails sweep the air behind them. Perception Check DC 30: Perched atop a domed roof across the tree-lined road are four wispy warriors, each wielding a mighty greatsword. Featureless faces pick you out and the angelic warriors spring into the air.
Tactics The dragons work together and time their attacks for greatest effect. One dragon leads with frightful presence and the second hits the stunned targets with its breath weapon. On the following round, one uses smashing tail while the other strikes with scourger’s fury. Hiding in the building isn’t much help. A dragon hunts fleeing adventurers, flying up to the roofs and smashing through them by triggering the collapsing
roof terrain power. Triggering the power lets the dragon look inside the building and blast the characters with its breath weapon or descend to maul them with its melee attacks. The angels are more reluctant to enter combat, but if the characters emerge from Amyria’s building, they engage the closest character.
December 20 09
| D u n g e o n
17 3
45
Those Once Loyal
Features of the Area Illumination: Bright light. Massive Trees: The trees grant cover to any creature standing in spaces adjacent to their trunks. Creatures standing under their canopies gain concealment from attacks originating overhead. Other Buildings: The other buildings are empty, with no beds or patients inside. Doors to these buildings are unlocked unless the characters offended the attendants (see page 35), in which case they are sealed and require a DC 31 Strength check to open. See the tactical map for building heights. Amyria’s Building: This building looks like a tower, but the interior extends for many hundreds of feet. Beds line both walls and squares containing beds count as difficult terrain. If the characters hide inside this building, the dragons rip chunks out of the roof, triggering the collapsing roof terrain power. Collapsing Roof
Single Use Terrain
Damage to the roof causes stones and timbers to fall inside and smash the interior where they land. Single Use ✦ Zone Standard Action Area burst 3 Check: Athletics check, DC 31 Effect: A burst 3 section of the ceiling falls and lands on the floor below the triggering creature. Target: Each creature in the burst Attack: +30 vs. Reflex Hit: 2d10 + 9 damage, the target is knocked prone, and immobilized and can’t stand (save ends). Creatures immobilized by this attack gain superior cover until they save. Miss: Half damage, and slide the target to the closest square outside the burst’s edge. Effect: The burst creates a zone of difficult terrain that lasts until cleared.
Statues and Pillars: Squares containing statues or pillars count as difficult terrain but grant cover to any creature in their spaces. Amyria: The deva is unconscious where indicated on the map. Temple Attendants: Six attendants other than Kalad position themselves around Amyria to protect her from harm. The attendants do not make attacks, but they give their lives to protect the deva.
2 Silver Dragon Scourgers (S) Level 27 Elite Brute
Huge natural magical beast (dragon) XP 22,000 each Initiative +20 Senses Perception +20; darkvision HP 612; Bloodied 306; see also bloodied breath AC 39; Fortitude 41, Reflex 38, Will 37 Resist 30 cold Saving Throws +2 Speed 10, fly 10 (hover), overland flight 15 Action Points 1 m Bite (standard; at-will) Reach 2; +30 vs. AC; 4d8 + 9 damage. m Claw (standard; at-will) Reach 2; +30 vs. AC; 2d8 + 9 damage. C Smashing Tail (standard; at-will) Close blast 3; one, two, or three enemies in blast; +28 vs. AC; 4d10 + 5 damage, and the target is dazed (save ends). M Scourger’s Fury (standard; at-will) The silver dragon scourger makes two claw attacks and one bite attack. C Breath Weapon (standard; recharge 4 5 6 ) ✦ Cold Close blast 5; +26 vs. Reflex; 4d10 + 9 cold damage, and the target gains vulnerable 10 to all damage (save ends). Miss: Half damage. C Bloodied Breath (free, when first bloodied; encounter) ✦ Cold Breath weapon recharges, and the silver dragon scourger uses it. C Frightful Presence (standard; encounter) ✦ Fear Close burst 10; targets enemies; +26 vs. Will; the target is stunned until the end of the silver dragon scourger’s next turn. Aftereffect: The target takes a 2 penalty to attack rolls (save ends). Unstoppable A silver dragon scourger makes saving throws against ongoing damage at the start of its turn as well as at the end of its turn. Alignment Unaligned Languages Common, Draconic Skills Athletics +28, Insight +20 Str 31 (+23) Dex 25 (+20) Wis 14 (+15) Con 26 (+21) Int 14 (+15) Cha 23 (+19)
December 20 09
| D u n g e o n
17 3
46
Those Once Loyal
4 Angels of Radiance (A) Level 27 Minion Skirmisher
Medium immortal humanoid (angel) XP 2,750 each Initiative +22 Senses Perception +23 HP 1; a missed attack never damages a minion; see also radiant martyr AC 41; Fortitude 39, Reflex 39, Will 39 Immune fear; Resist 20 radiant Speed 8, fly 12 (hover) m Greatsword (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon +32 vs. AC; 14 damage. C Radiant Martyr (when the angel of radiance drops to 0 hit points) ✦ Radiant The angel of radiance explodes in a burst of brilliant light; close burst 10; targets enemies; +28 vs. Fortitude; the target is blinded until the end of its next turn. Effect: Angels in the burst gain 10 temporary hit points. Alignment Unaligned Languages Supernal Str 20 (+18) Dex 25 (+20) Wis 30 (+23) Con 25 (+20) Int 15 (+15) Cha 25 (+20) Equipment plate armor, greatsword
6 Empyron Attendants
Level 27 Minion (Leader)
Medium immortal humanoid XP 2,750 each Initiative +21 Senses Perception +21 Healing Presence (Healing) aura 1; allies in the aura regain 9 extra hit points whenever they regain hit points. HP 1; a missed attack never damages a minion. AC 41; Fortitude 39, Reflex 39, Will 39 Immune radiant Speed 6 C Martyr’s Shield (when reduced to 0 hit points) Close burst 3; allies in the burst gain a +2 bonus to all defenses until the end of their next turns. Alignment Lawful good Languages Supernal Skills Heal +26 Str 11 (+13) Dex 26 (+21) Wis 27 (+21) Con 26 (+21) Int 10 (+13) Cha 11 (+13) Equipment robes, mask
Kalad: Kalad joins the adventurers in fighting the dragons. Kalad
Level 24 Soldier
Medium natural humanoid, dwarf XP — Initiative +13 Senses Perception +14; low-light vision HP 168; Bloodied 84; Healing Surges 11 AC 41; Fortitude 39, Reflex 35, Will 37 Immune fear Saving Throws +5 against poison Speed 5 m Warhammer (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon +30 vs. AC; 2d10 + 10 damage, and the target is marked until the end of Kalad’s next turn. M Valiant Strike (standard; at-will) ✦ Divine, Weapon +30 vs. AC, +1 per enemy adjacent to Kalad; 2d10 + 10 damage. M Martyr’s Smite (standard; encounter) ✦ Divine, Weapon +30 vs. AC; 4d10 + 15 damage. Until the end of Kalad’s next turn, any time the target deals damage, Kalad can choose to take that damage. The target’s intended victim takes no damage but is subject to any effects of the attack. R Angelic Rescue (standard; daily) ✦ Divine, Teleportation Ranged 20; targets one willing ally; the target teleports from any square Kalad can see to a square within 5 squares of Kalad that is nearer to Kalad than the target’s original square. Stand Your Ground When an effect forces Kalad to move—through a pull, a push, or a slide—Kalad moves 1 square less than the effect specifies. When an attack would knock Kalad prone, he can roll a saving throw to avoid falling prone. Alignment Lawful good Languages Common, Dwarven, Supernal Skills Athletics +20, Dungeoneering +16, Endurance +16, Religion +17 Str 16 (+15) Dex 13 (+13) Wis 14 (+14) Con 15 (+14) Int 10 (+12) Cha 13 (+13) Equipment robes, warhammer
December 20 09
| D u n g e o n
17 3
47
Those Once Loyal
B. Fiery Abduction Encounter Level 28 (66,000 XP)
Setup
2 assassin devil abductors 4 brazen devil guards
Conclusion If the devils capture Amyria, they flee down the passage through which they entered to reach the open portal, which takes them to Bahamut’s Palace (see Part Two). The devils automatically escape if the characters take a short rest after tactical encounter A or B. 2 Assassin Devil Abductors
Dispater’s servants come to steal Amyria away starting on round 4 of tactical encounter A. If any characters have line of sight to Amyria when the devils appear, read: The lights gutter out inside the healing hall and sounds of splintering wood and cracking stone echo from the darkness within.
Tactics The brazen devils attack the temple attendants and any characters who remain inside, while the assassin devils uses shadow net to ensnare and snatch Amyria. The assassin devils flee with Amyria while the brazen devils guard their retreat.
Features of the Area Illumination: The hall’s interior is now dark. If the dragons damaged the roof, bright light shines through any holes. Ceiling: The ceiling rises 50 feet above the floor. Beds: Squares with beds count as difficult terrain. Fountain: Characters in squares adjacent to the fountain gain resist 3 to all damage. Any character drinking from the fountain regains the use of second wind. A character can benefit from the fountain in this way just once per day.
4 Brazen Devil Guards
Level 27 Lurker
Medium immortal humanoid (devil) XP 11,000 each Initiative +27 Senses Perception +26; darkvision HP 186; Bloodied 93 AC 41; Fortitude 37, Reflex 41, Will 39 Resist 25 fire Speed 12 m Shadow Sword (standard; at-will) ✦ Necrotic, Weapon +30 vs. Fortitude; 2d8 + 6 necrotic damage, and ongoing 5 damage (save ends). A Shadow Net (standard; recharges when the assassin devil uses shadow cloak) ✦ Necrotic Area burst 2 within 10; +29 vs. Reflex; the target is restrained, is weakened, and takes ongoing 10 necrotic damage (save ends all). While a target is affected by shadow net, the assassin devil cannot use its shadow cloak power. R Spirit Away (standard; encounter) ✦ Teleportation Ranged 10; one target restrained by shadow cloak; +29 vs. Will; the target teleports 10 squares. Dangerous Shadows An assassin devil’s shadow sword attack deals 4d6 extra necrotic damage against any target granting combat advantage to it. Shadow Cloak (standard; recharges when no creatures are affected by shadow net) ✦ Illusion The assassin devil abductor is invisible until it hits or misses with an attack. Alignment Evil Languages Common, Supernal Skills Stealth +28 Str 22 (+19) Dex 30 (+23) Wis 27 (+21) Con 18 (+17) Int 18 (+17) Cha 14 (+15) Equipment leather armor, longsword
Level 27 Soldier
Large immortal humanoid (devil) XP 11,000 each Initiative +19 Senses Perception +25; darkvision Cloying Hellfire (Fire) aura 2; a creature that starts its turn in the aura takes 10 fire damage. A creature without the devil keyword cannot use powers with the teleportation keyword while in the aura. HP 249; Bloodied 124 AC 43; Fortitude 40, Reflex 37, Will 38 Resist 30 fire Speed 7, fly 7 (clumsy) m Trident (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon Reach 2; +34 vs. AC; 2d12 + 8 damage, and the target slides 1 square. C Disgorge Hellfire (standard; recharges when first bloodied) ✦ Fire Close blast 5; +32 vs. Reflex; 2d10 + 10 fire damage, and the target loses all resistances until the end of the brazen guard’s next turn. M Furious Assault (standard; encounter) ✦ Teleportation, Weapon Reach 2; +32 vs. Fortitude; 2d12 + 8 damage, the target is pushed 3 squares, and the brazen devil guard teleports to a space adjacent to the target at the end of the push. M Fiendish Opportunist (immediate reaction, when an enemy is pushed, pulled, or slid into a square adjacent to the brazen devil; at-will) ✦ Weapon +32 vs. Fortitude; 2d12 + 5 damage, and the target is knocked prone. Infernal Assault (move; encounter) ✦ Teleportation The brazen devil guard teleports 20 squares and gains a +2 bonus to attack rolls until the start of its next turn. The brazen devil guard can teleport into occupied squares, sliding any creatures occupying those squares into the nearest unoccupied squares. Alignment Evil Languages Supernal Skills Intimidate +24 Str 28 (+22) Dex 18 (+17) Wis 25 (+20) Con 25 (+20) Int 23 (+19) Cha 22 (+19) Equipment hellforged plate armor (destroyed if brazen devil is reduced to 0 hit points), trident
December 20 09
| D u n g e o n
17 3
48
Those Once Loyal
C. Tracking the Devils Encounter Level 16 (7,000 XP) What seems like a simple tower from the outside is in fact a much larger, sprawling maze of rooms, stairs, and passages. Without a guide, one can become lost among the hospital beds and sterile rooms as there are few landmarks or signposts to orient an explorer. The fleeing devils left signs to help navigate their way back to the portal through which they emerged from the Platinum Dragon’s stronghold. Alert and careful adventurers can reach the portal before the devils escape and gain an edge against the infernal trap waiting for them. Level: 25 (XP 7,000) Complexity: 1 (requires 4 successes before 3 failures). Primary Skills: This is a staged skill challenge. Each stage sees the characters moving through different parts of the Healing Hall and using different primary skills to move on to the next part.
Entire Challenge
Stage 2: Chamber of Doors
These skills can be used at any point during the challenge. Secondary Skills: Insight, Perception, special. Insight (DC 31): A character can make an Insight check at any point during the skill challenge to remove 1 failure. This skill provides no successes. Perception (DC 31): During each stage, a character can make a Perception check to locate signs left by the fleeing devils. A success grants a +2 bonus to skill checks made during that stage. This skill provides no successes. Special: If an Empyron attendant survived and accompanies the adventurers, the player characters gain a +2 bonus to all checks related to this skill challenge.
Beyond the passages, the adventurers come to a massive chamber with one hundred doors scattered across the walls, floor, and ceiling. Inspecting any door reveals each door is locked. Primary Skills: Arcana, Thievery Arcana (DC 22): The character discerns Arcane Lock wards in the middle of the room, on the floor, or on each door except the one the characters enter. This skill can earn a maximum of 1 success.
Stage 1: Passages Twisting and turning passages create a challenging maze. Primary Skill: Dungeoneering Dungeoneering (DC 26): The first successful check earns the characters 1 success as the adventurers navigate the passages and pick up the devils’ trail. A failed check counts as a failure as the characters become lost. A second Dungeoneering or Perception check earns no additional success or failure but is necessary to allow the characters to proceed to Stage 2. This skill can provide a maximum of 1 success.
December 20 09
| D u n g e o n
17 3
49
Those Once Loyal
Thievery (DC 31): The character picks the lock on a door. A successful or failed Thievery checks counts as a failure for the challenge. Eventually, the characters will locate the open door.
Stage 3: Mounting Stairs Beyond the unlocked door is a steep, winding staircase. If the characters would catch the devils, they must rush up the stairs. Primary Skills: Athletics Athletics (DC 17): The party must make a group Athletics check. If the party gets three or more successful checks, they earn one success and reach the top of the stairs. If the party doesn’t get at least three successes, the “out of shape” adventurers slow the party down, but the group still reaches the top of the stairs. This skill can earn a maximum of 1 success.
Stage 4: Shadowy Passage The stairs open onto a shadowy passage, corrupted by the devils’ presence. A pit fiend and its cronies prepare an ambush for the characters, but the characters can sneak up on them and ruin the ambush. Primary Skills: Stealth Stealth (DC 33): The party must make a group Stealth check. If the party gets three of more successful checks, they earn one success and foil the devils’ ambush. If the party doesn’t get at least three successes, the may still foil the devils’ ambush, but they may also face stiffer opposition. This skill can earn a maximum of 1 success.
Ending the Challenge Success: The characters find the portal and are not surprised by the ambush. If the characters received no failures during the skill challenge, they gain surprise against the enemies in tactical encounter D. Failure: Each time the characters get a failure on a skill check, add two more legion devil militants to tactical encounter D. If the characters fail the skill challenge overall, they still find the portal but they are surprised by the devils in tactical encounter D and the devils have reinforcements as noted above.
December 20 09
| D u n g e o n
17 3
50
Those Once Loyal
D. Covered Retreat Encounter Level 26 (46,100 XP)
Setup
1 pit fiend (P) 1 war devil mauler (W) 2 cambion hell thralls (C) 4 legion devil militants (L)
If the characters won a victory in tactical encounter C, the devils do not have surprise. Be sure to add
reinforcements based on how the characters acquitted themselves during the Tracking the Devils skill challenge. When the characters enter the room, read: A veritable infernal army defends the strange platform commanding the chamber’s far side. Sinister red light wells up from a pit in the center illuminating a devil with scaly hide and a pair of cambions. Before the platform stands a hulking horned devil and armored, human-like devils armed with longswords. White tiles cover the floor, walls, and ceiling throughout the chamber.
Pit Fiend (P)
Level 26 Elite Soldier (Leader)
Large immortal humanoid (devil) XP 18,000 Initiative +22 Senses Perception +23; darkvision Aura of Fear (Fear) aura 5; enemies in the aura take a –2 penalty to attack rolls. Aura of Fire (Fire) aura 5; enemies that enter or start their turns in the aura take 15 fire damage. HP 486; Bloodied 243 AC 44; Fortitude 42, Reflex 38, Will 40 Resist 30 fire, 15 poison Saving Throws +2 Speed 12, fly 12 (clumsy), teleport 10 Action Points 1 m Flametouched Mace (standard; at-will) ✦ Fire, Weapon Reach 2; +33 vs. AC; 2d10 + 11 fire damage, and ongoing 5 fire damage (save ends). M Tail Sting (standard; at-will) ✦ Poison Reach 2; +33 vs. AC; 1d6 + 11 damage, and the pit fiend makes a secondary attack against the same target. Secondary Attack: +29 vs. Fortitude; the target takes ongoing 15 poison damage and is weakened (save ends both). M Pit Fiend Frenzy (standard; at-will) The pit fiend makes a flametouched mace attack and a tail sting attack. R Point of Terror (minor; at-will) ✦ Fear Ranged 5; +30 vs. Will; the target takes a –5 penalty to all defenses until the end of the pit fiend’s next turn.
If the characters did not take a short rest after encounters A or B, read: A bronze-armored devil carries Amyria down the stairs into the shining depression, as one shadowy fiend casts a smile and a look your way before they both vanish into the light.
Tactics The devils’ aim is to prevent the characters from moving through the portal. Pit Fiend: The pit fiend begins by using infernal summons to add reinforcements to the legion devils, and spends its remaining actions using point of terror and irresistible command. The pit fiend orchestrates the battle, staying back and blowing up his minions R Irresistible Command (minor 1/round; at-will) ✦ Charm, Fire Ranged 10; targets one devil of a lower level than the pit fiend; the target slides 5 squares and explodes, dealing 2d10 + 5 fire damage to all creatures in a close burst 2. The exploding devil is destroyed. Infernal Summons (standard; encounter) The pit fiend summons a group of devil allies. Summoned devils roll initiative to determine when they act in the initiative order and gain a +4 bonus to attack rolls as long as the pit fiend is alive. They remain until killed, dismissed by the pit fiend (free action), or the encounter ends. Characters do not earn experience points for killing these summoned creatures. The pit fiend chooses to summon one of the following groups of devils: ✦ 8 legion devil legionnaires (level 21), or ✦ 2 war devils (level 22), or ✦ 1 war devil (level 22) and 4 legion devil legionnaires (level 21) Tactical Teleport (standard; recharge 4 5 6) ✦ Teleportation The pit fiend can teleport up to 2 allies within 10 squares of it. The targets appear in any unoccupied squares within 10 squares of the pit fiend. Alignment Evil Languages Supernal Skills Bluff +27, Insight +23, Intimidate +27, Religion +24 Str 32 (+24) Dex 24 (+20) Wis 20 (+18) Con 27 (+21) Int 22 (+19) Cha 28 (+22) Equipment flametouched mace, noble signet ring
December 20 09
| D u n g e o n
17 3
51
Those Once Loyal
to wipe out the adventurers, teleporting allies where they can be of the most use, and shredding the characters’ defenses until he’s engaged, at which point he responds with melee attacks. War Devil Mauler: The war devil uses fiendish pursuit to land in the characters’ midst and keep them tied down while the legion devils move into position, using claw and hurl to scatter defenders and crackling trident to destroy strikers. Cambion Hell Thralls: The cambions avoid melee and remain on the platform as long as possible. One leads with plague of hellfire while the other uses soulburn. Once the characters have saved against plague of hellfire, the other cambion repeats the attack. Legion Devil Militants: These devils work in teams to keep their defenses high, while worrying anyone they can reach with their attacks.
Features of the Area Illumination: The portal sheds dim light in an 8 square radius. Ceiling: The ceiling here is 30 feet high. Platform: A 15-foot tall platform commands the far side of the room. The floor sinks to a depression at the platform’s center, first to a landing 15 feet below the top of the platform, which makes it even with the rest of the floor, and then to another landing 15 feet below the last. A character can climb the platform with a DC 17 Athletics check. Stairs: All squares containing stairs are difficult terrain. Portal: A shimmering red portal, this gateway connects to area 1 in Bahamut’s Palace (see page 39). Treasure: The pit fiend has treasure parcels A and B.
War Devil Mauler (W)
Level 25 Soldier
Large immortal humanoid (devil) XP 7,000 Initiative +21 Senses Perception +17; darkvision HP 235; Bloodied 117 AC 42; Fortitude 39, Reflex 37, Will 35 Resist fire 30 Speed 8, fly 8 (clumsy) m Claw (standard; at-will) Reach 2; +30 vs. Reflex; 3d8 + 9 damage, and the target is grabbed. m Crackling Trident (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon Reach 2; +32 vs. AC; 4d6 + 4 damage plus ongoing 5 lightning damage. R Hurl (minor; at-will) The war devil mauler throws a Medium or smaller target it is grabbing: the grab ends and the war devil mauler slides the target 8 squares. The war devil makes an attack against the slid target and one creature adjacent to the target at the end of the slide: +30 vs. Reflex; 1d8 + 9 damage, and the target is knocked prone. Fiendish Pursuit (move; recharges when the war devil mauler uses hurl) The war devil mauler flies 8 squares and lands at the end of this movement. All creatures adjacent to the war devil mauler are marked until the end of its next turn. Alignment Evil Languages Supernal Skills Intimidate +22 Str 29 (+21) Dex 25 (+19) Wis 21 (+17) Con 27 (+20) Int 17 (+15) Cha 20 (+17) Equipment trident
2 Cambion Hell Thralls (C)
Level 24 Controller
Medium immortal humanoid (devil) XP 6,050 Initiative +18 Senses Perception +17; darkvision HP 220; Bloodied 110; see also plague of hellfire AC 38; Fortitude 34, Reflex 36, Will 38 Resist 20 fire Speed 6, fly 8 (clumsy) m Hellfire Blade (standard; at-will) ✦ Fire, Weapon +26 vs. AC; 4d6 + 3 damage, and the target gains vulnerability 5 fire until the end of the cambion’s next turn. R Soulburn (standard; at-will) ✦ Fire, Psychic Ranged 20; +28 vs. Reflex; 1d6 + 9 fire and psychic damage, and ongoing 10 fire and psychic damage (save ends). R Tortured Soul (immediate reaction, when a target fails a saving throw to end the ongoing damage from soulburn; at-will) ✦ Psychic Ranged 20; +28 vs. Will; the target is dazed until the end of the cambion’s next turn. Effect: The target slides 3 squares. A Plague of Hellfire (standard; recharges when the cambion is first bloodied) ✦ Fire, Psychic Area burst 1 within 10; targets enemies; +28 vs. Reflex; 4d8 + 8 fire and psychic damage, the target takes ongoing 10 fire damage and the target is held immobilized 6 squares (30 feet) above the battlefield (save ends both). Aftereffect: The target falls and takes normal falling damage. Alignment Evil Languages Common, Supernal Skills Arcana +24, Bluff +26 Str 17 (+15) Dex 22 (+18) Wis 21 (+17) Con 20 (+17) Int 24 (+19) Cha 29 (+21) Equipment robes, dagger
December 20 09
| D u n g e o n
17 3
52
Those Once Loyal
4 Legion Devil Militants (L) Level 26 Minion Soldier
Medium immortal humanoid (devil) XP 2,250 Initiative +16 Senses Perception +14; darkvision HP 1; a missed attack never damages a minion. AC 42; Fortitude 38, Reflex 37, Will 37 Resist 20 fire Speed 7, teleport 3 m Longsword (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon +34 vs. AC; 14 damage. Squad Defense The legion devil militant gains a +2 bonus to all defenses when adjacent to at least one other legion devil. Alignment Evil Languages Supernal Str 14 (+15) Dex 12 (+14) Wis 12 (+14) Con 14 (+15) Int 10 (+13) Cha 12 (+14) Equipment plate armor, heavy shield, longsword
Summoned Legion Devil Legionnaire
Level 21 Minion
Medium immortal humanoid (devil) XP — Initiative +11 Senses Perception +11; darkvision HP 1; a missed attack never damages a minion. AC 37; Fortitude 33, Reflex 32, Will 32; see also squad defense Resist 15 fire Speed 7, teleport 3 m Longsword (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon +30 vs. AC (+26 vs. AC if pit fiend is killed); 8 damage. Squad Defense The legion devil legionnaire gains a +2 bonus to its defenses when adjacent to at least one other legion devil. Alignment Evil Languages Supernal Str 14 (+12) Dex 12 (+11) Wis 12 (+11) Con 14 (+12) Int 10 (+10) Cha 12 (+11) Equipment plate armor, heavy shield, longsword
Summoned War Devil
Level 22 Brute (Leader)
Large immortal humanoid (devil) XP — Initiative +17 Senses Perception +15; darkvision HP 255; Bloodied 127 AC 35; Fortitude 34, Reflex 32, Will 30 Resist 30 fire Speed 8, fly 8 (clumsy) m Claw (standard; at-will) +30 vs. AC (+26 vs. AC if pit fiend is killed); 1d6 + 8 damage. m Trident (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon Reach 2; +30 vs. AC (+26 vs. AC if pit fiend is killed); 4d4 + 8 damage, ongoing 5 damage (save ends), and the target slides into any square adjacent to the war devil and is knocked prone. R Besieged Foe (minor; at-will) Ranged sight; automatic hit; the target is marked, and allies of the war devil gain a +2 bonus to attack rolls made against the target until the encounter ends or the war devil marks a new target. R Devilish Transposition (move; at-will) ✦ Teleportation Ranged 20; the war devil and an allied devil within range swap positions. R Fiendish Tactics (minor; recharge 5 6) Ranged 10; affects up to 2 allied devils of the war devil’s level or lower; each target can take a move action or make a basic attack. Alignment Evil Languages Supernal Skills Intimidate +20 Str 27 (+19) Dex 23 (+17) Wis 19 (+15) Con 25 (+18) Int 15 (+13) Cha 18 (+15) Equipment trident
December 20 09
| D u n g e o n
17 3
53
Those Once Loyal
E. Hell’s Fury Encounter Level 25 (35,000 XP)
Setup
5 Hell’s furies (H)
Dispater set his consorts with an important task. These beautiful and terrible devils are to watch over the portal to ensure no unwelcome visitors arrive to disturb Dispater’s searching. The furies have watched the portal since the kidnappers arrived and now perch on the roofs, monitoring as commanded. The furies do not like one another and hurl vicious insults at each other to pass the time. The tactical map assumes the characters enter through the portal. If the characters arrive by some other means, expand the map as necessary. The furies
may be charged with watching the shining gate, but they also recognize the danger posed by an approaching spelljammer. The howling winds cover any sounds of combat. When the characters step through the portal, read: The portal deposits you on a platform suspended in the sky. Behind you, tall buildings constructed from white stone glitter in the bright light. Double doors some thirty feet away across an empty gulf grant access to the larger building. When the characters see a fury, read: Black-feathered angelic wings hold a pale, beautiful woman in the air. The wind whips her long black hair about her face, but even through the unruly strands you can see her gleaming red eyes and curling smile. She raises a longbow and nocks an arrow, causing it to ignite with unruly fire. Perception Check DC 31: Light bends around a 15-foot wide area extending out from the platform on which you stand.
Tactics The Hell’s furies avoid melee, staying back far enough that they can pepper the characters with longbow attacks. During the first round, each fury targets a different character with iron thorn. Once they pin down their enemies, they use strafing shot to keep moving and out of their enemies’ reach.
Features of the Area Force Bridge: An invisible bridge (area 2) made from force spans the gap. The bridge is impervious to damage. Portal: The portal connects to the Hall of Healing described in Part One (page 35). The portal provides concealment against ranged attacks.
Gusting Wind: Brutal winds scream and shriek as they blow across the outcropping. Each round, roll 1d6. On a 6, a gust of wind makes an attack. A Gusting Wind The moaning winds gather strength as they howl around you. Standard Action Area burst battlefield Target: Each creature in the burst Attack: +28 vs. Fortitude, +2 against flying creatures Hit: The target is pushed 1d6 squares toward area 3.
5 Hell’s Furies
Level 25 Artillery
Medium immortal humanoid (devil) XP 7,000 each Initiative +21 Senses Perception +20; darkvision HP 176; Bloodied 88 AC 39 (41 while flying); Fortitude 37, Reflex 39 (41 while flying), Will 36; see also deft flier Resist 20 fire Speed 6, fly 8 (hover); see also feathery escape m Longsword (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon +20 vs. AC; 3d8 + 7 damage. r Longbow (standard; at-will) ✦ Fire, Weapon Ranged 20/40; +32 vs. AC; 2d10 + 9 damage, and ongoing 10 fire damage (save ends). If this attack hits a creature already suffering from ongoing fire damage, this attack instead deals 1d10 extra fire damage. R Strafing Shot (standard; recharges when the Hell’s fury misses with a longbow attack) ✦ Fire, Weapon The Hell’s fury flies its fly speed and makes two longbow attacks against two different targets at any point during this movement. R Iron Thorn (standard; encounter) Ranged 5; +30 vs. Reflex; 3d10 + 9 damage, and an iron thorn appears in an unoccupied space adjacent to the target. The target cannot move more than 3 squares from the iron thorn and grants combat advantage to all attackers (save ends). C Feathery Escape (immediate reaction, when bloodied by an attack; encounter) ✦ Fire, Teleportation The Hell’s fury disappears in a cloud of fiery feathers: close burst 1; +28 vs. Reflex; 4d10+8 fire damage. Effect: The Hell’s fury teleports 10 squares. Alignment Evil Languages Supernal Str 25 (+19) Dex 28 (+21) Wis 17 (+15) Con 20 (+17) Int 14 (+14) Cha 22 (+18) Equipment leather armor, longsword, longbow, quiver of 30 arrows
December 20 09
| D u n g e o n
17 3
54
Those Once Loyal
F. Devoted Guardians Encounter Level 26 (46,500 XP)
Setup
Quoriel (Q) 2 guardian wyverns (W) 4 angels of warding (A)
Quoriel is charged with guarding the entrance to the Halls of Reflection and has served the Platinum Dragon for a thousand years. During this time, the angel’s loyalty was without question. Bahamut’s death shook Quoriel’s resolve and made it possible for Dispater to twist him to his service. Quoriel is confused
and paranoid; he despises Tiamat as much as ever, but now sees Tiamat’s servants in anyone who comes to call, including the player characters. The angels of warding, sequestered in their meditation chambers, follow Quoriel’s lead. When the characters enter the Canary Courtyard, read: An open courtyard stretches before you. A twelve-foot-tall angelic being stands before the door, gripping a blackened quarterstaff in his hands. White sand covers the floor, and unsettling images appear drawn in the dust: pentagrams, queer beasts, and worse. A promenade encircles the courtyard above, held aloft by wooden pillars with canaries carved in their surfaces. The angel’s ghostly features darken as its white eyes blaze and it challenges the intruders: “Despoilers, you dare enter Bahamut’s sacred halls?” When the characters see the guardian wyverns, read: A winged, dragonlike creature drops from the balcony. Its long tail, equipped with a stinger, slashes the air around it. Perception Check DC 19: You hear a creaking noise coming from the balcony above.
Tactics The angel is not up for conversation and attacks immediately. When Quoriel attacks, the guardian wyverns above join in during the first round, followed by the angels of warding at the start of round three. Quoriel: The archangel leads with overwhelming presence and then spends an action point to use lightning bolt against one enemy he stunned. Quoriel then flies up 5 squares and hovers. Each round thereafter,
Quoriel hammers the characters with lightning bolt and majestic rally when the angels of warding join the fight. Guardian Wyverns: The wyverns take to the air as well, flying to get above the adventurers and then blast them with purifying breath. While waiting for their attack to recharge, they use flyby attack unless bothered by a mobile character, at which point the wyvern descends to nail the troublesome enemy with a virulent sting. Angels of Warding: When the angels of warding show up, they burst through the double doors above and leap down from the balcony (making Acrobatics checks) to take the fight to the characters. Each angel squares off against a different enemy, using hewing slash if it is blinded, but otherwise relying on fullblades to get the job done.
Features of the Area Balcony: The balcony is 20 feet above the floor. No stairs or ladder grants access, though a character could climb a supporting pillar (DC 17 Athletics check). The balcony blocks line of sight for characters underneath it. Doors: The doors at the map’s top along with the doors to the bottom are made from iron and are accessed from the floor. They bear Bahamut’s likeness carved in bas-relief on their surfaces. The carvings clutch the rings to open the doors in their hands. The double doors on the left side can be accessed only by the balcony. They are made from ash wood and bear carvings similar to those on the iron doors below. Draconic Carving: In area 4, a carving captures Bahamut’s likeness in the wood. Evil and chaotic evil creatures take 15 radiant damage upon entering the carving’s squares.
December 20 09
| D u n g e o n
17 3
55
Those Once Loyal
Quoriel
Level 24 Elite Controller (Leader)
Large immortal humanoid (angel) XP 12,100 Initiative +18 Senses Perception +19 HP 438; Bloodied 219 AC 40 (38 when bloodied); Fortitude 34, Reflex 36, Will 38 Immune fear; Resist 15 radiant Saving Throws +2 Speed 8, fly 12 (hover) Action Point 1 m Quarterstaff (standard; at-will) ✦ Radiant, Weapon Reach 2; +29 vs. AC; 2d8 + 11 damage. R Lightning Bolt (standard; at-will) ✦ Lightning Ranged 10; +28 vs. Fortitude; 2d10 + 9 lightning damage, and the target is dazed until the end of Quoriel’s next turn. M Avenging Strike (when an ally within 5 squares of Quoriel is reduced to 0 hit points; at-will) Quoriel shifts 2 squares and makes a melee basic attack as a free action. C Majestic Rally (standard; recharge 5 6 ) ✦ Radiant, Thunder Close burst 5; targets enemies; +28 vs. Will; 2d10 + 8 radiant damage plus 2d10 thunder damage, and the target is weakened (save ends). Miss: Half damage. Effect: Any angel within the burst gains a +2 bonus to attack rolls until the end of Quoriel’s next turn. C Overwhelming Presence (standard; encounter) ✦ Radiant Close burst 5; targets enemies; +28 vs. Will; 5d8 + 8 radiant damage, and the target is stunned until the end of Quoriel’s next turn. Alignment Evil Languages Supernal Skills Insight +24, Religion +24 Str 21 (+17) Dex 22 (+18) Wis 25 (+19) Con 19 (+16) Int 25 (+19) Cha 28 (+21) Equipment plate armor, quarterstaff
2 Guardian Wyverns (W)
Level 25 Skirmisher
Large immortal beast (reptile) XP 7,000 each Initiative +21 Senses Perception +22; low-light vision HP 234; Bloodied 117 AC 39; Fortitude 39, Reflex 37, Will 35 Resist 15 radiant Speed 8, fly 12 (hover); see also flyby attack m Bite (standard; at-will) Reach 2; +30 vs. AC; 2d12 + 7 damage. m Claws (standard; at-will) The guardian wyvern can attack with its claws only while flying; +30 vs. AC; 2d10 + 9 damage, and the target is knocked prone. M Virulent Sting (standard; at-will) ✦ Poison, Psychic Reach 2; +30 vs. AC; 2d10 + 9 damage, and the guardian wyvern makes a secondary attack against the same target. Secondary Attack: +28 vs. Fortitude; the target is immobilized and weakened (save ends both). M Flyby Attack (standard; at-will) The guardian wyvern flies up to 12 squares and makes one melee basic attack at any point during that movement. The guardian wyvern doesn’t provoke opportunity attacks when moving away from the target of the attack. C Purifying Breath (standard; recharge 5 6 ) ✦ Fire, Radiant Close blast 5; +27 vs. Reflex; 2d8 + 9 fire and radiant damage, and the target is blinded and takes ongoing 10 fire damage (save ends both). Alignment Unaligned Languages — Str 28 (+21) Dex 25 (+19) Wis 20 (+17) Con 26 (+20) Int 2 (+8) Cha 8 (+11)
4 Angels of Warding (A)
Level 23 Soldier
Medium immortal humanoid (angel) XP 5,100 each Initiative +18 Senses Perception +17 HP 210; Bloodied 105 AC 38; Fortitude 35, Reflex 34, Will 35 Immune fear; Resist 15 radiant Speed 6 m Fullblade (standard; at-will) ✦ Radiant, Weapon +30 vs. AC; 2d12 + 7 damage (crit 6d12 + 31), and the target is marked until the end of the angel of warding’s next turn. M Holy Ban (minor; recharges when the angel of warding hits with a fullblade attack) Targets a creature the angel of warding has marked; the target can only spend move actions to move, and not shift, away from the angel of warding (save ends). C Hewing Slash (standard; requires fullblade; at-will) ✦ Weapon Close burst 1; one creature; +30 vs. AC; 2d12 + 7 damage, and the angel of warding can repeat the attack against another creature in the burst. M Righteous Retaliation (immediate reaction, when an enemy the angel of warding has marked ends its turn in a square not adjacent to an angel of warding; recharges when first bloodied) ✦ Teleportation, Weapon The angel of warding teleports to a square adjacent to the triggering enemy, makes a basic attack, and teleports to the square it vacated. Angelic Presence (while not bloodied) Any attack against an angel of warding takes a –2 penalty to the attack roll. Alignment Unaligned Languages Supernal Skills Acrobatics +21, Insight +22, Intimidate +19 Str 23 (+17) Dex 20 (+16) Wis 22 (+17) Con 18 (+15) Int 11 (+11) Cha 16 (+14) Equipment plate armor, fullblade
December 20 09
| D u n g e o n
17 3
56
Those Once Loyal
G. Bahamut’s Throne
Godforged Colossus (G)
Encounter Level 26 (45,000 XP)
Setup
1 godforged colossus (G) 1 platinum seal (P) 4 angels of great valor (A)
A powerful guardian blocks further passage into the Halls of Reflection. When the characters enter this room, read: A massive throne on the side opposite the entrance holds a twenty-foot-tall alabaster statue of a powerful dragonborn warrior. Its stony hand rests on the sword lying across its lap. At the throne’s base, between the statue’s legs, is a platinum disk engraved with a dragon’s likeness. Light shining through windows piercing the dome illuminates four flying angels. The construct remains inert until the characters attack any angel or they come within 5 squares of the platinum seal. When the characters meet either condition, the construct animates and attacks.
Tactics The angels distract the characters and sweep down from above to attack with greatswords. The colossus uses voice of the demiurge and then force missiles against characters reluctant to close. It uses force weapon against those who do close.
Features of the Area Ceiling: The ceiling is 30 feet high. Treasure: Piled on the throne’s arms are parcels C, D, and E.
Level 29 Elite Brute
Huge immortal animate (construct) XP 30,000 Initiative +19 Senses Perception +26 Reverberating Presence (Psychic) aura 5; an enemy that starts its turn in the aura takes 20 psychic damage. HP 662; Bloodied 331 AC 43; Fortitude 48, Reflex 40, Will 45 Immune disease, fear, poison, sleep; Resist 30 force, 30 psychic Saving Throws +2 Speed 10 Action Points 1 m Force Weapon (standard; at-will) ✦ Force, Psychic, Weapon Reach 3; +32 vs. AC; 4d12 + 5 force damage, and the colossus makes a secondary attack against the same target. Secondary Attack: +25 vs. Will; 3d6 psychic damage, and the target is stunned until the end of the godforged colossus’s next turn. M Defensive Strike (immediate reaction, when an enemy moves adjacent to the godforged colossus; recharge 5 6) ✦ Psychic +32 vs. AC; 4d12 + 15 damage plus 3d6 psychic damage, and the colossus makes a secondary attack against the same target. Secondary Attack: +30 vs. Fortitude; the target is pushed 5 squares, knocked prone, and dazed (save ends). R Force Missile (standard; at-will) ✦ Force Ranged 20; +30 vs. Reflex; 3d10 + 3 force damage, and the target is pushed 5 squares. C Voice of the Demiurge (standard; encounter) ✦ Psychic Close burst 10; targets enemies; +26 vs. Will; 3d8 + 11 psychic damage, and the target is stunned until the end of the godforged colossus’s next turn. Alignment Unaligned Languages — Str 40 (+29) Dex 21 (+19) Wis 34 (+26) Con 31 (+24) Int 4 (+11) Cha 17 (+17)
December 20 09
| D u n g e o n
17 3
57
Those Once Loyal
Platinum Seal (P) Trap
Level 25 Warder XP 7,000
A shining platinum disk, ten feet in diameter, stands in the center of a marble surface. Trap: A massive platinum disk bars passage through the portal in the mighty throne’s base. Perception No check is necessary to notice the platinum seal. Additional Skill: Arcana, Religion ✦ DC 26: The character identifies the platinum seal’s dangers. ✦ DC 31: The character gains a +2 bonus to checks made to disable the trap. Trigger When a creature enters or starts its turn in a square within 5 squares of the platinum seal, the trap attacks. Attack ✦ Psychic, Radiant Opportunity Action Close burst 5 Target: The triggering creature Attack: +28 vs. Fortitude Hit: 2d6 + 9 psychic and radiant damage, and the target teleports to a space adjacent to the godforged colossus. Miss: Half damage. Countermeasures ✦ Destroying the godforged colossus also disables the trap. ✦ A character adjacent to the platinum seal can engage in a skill challenge to disable the trap and unlock the door. DC 26 Arcana or Religion, or DC 31 Thievery. Complexity 1 (4 successes before 3 failures). Success disables the trap. Failure cause the platinum seal to make an attack against each creature in a close burst 5: +28 vs. Fortitude; 4d8 + 9 psychic and radiant damage, and the target is stunned until the end of its next turn.
4 Angels of Great Valor (A) Level 25 Minion Skirmisher Medium immortal humanoid (angel) XP 1,750 each Initiative +18 Senses Perception +14 HP 1; a missed attack never damages a minion AC 39; Fortitude 39, Reflex 34, Will 33 Immune fear; Resist 15 fire, 15 radiant Speed 6, fly 9 (hover) m Greatsword (standard; at-will) ✦ Fire, Weapon +30 vs. AC; 14 fire damage. Alignment Unaligned Languages Supernal Str 28 (+21) Dex 18 (+16) Wis 14 (+14) Con 18 (+16) Int 12 (+13) Cha 16 (+15) Equipment chainmail, greatsword
December 20 09
| D u n g e o n
17 3
58
Those Once Loyal
H. No Sanctuary Encounter Level 26 (45,000 XP)
Setup
Eye of Bahamut (E)
Bahamut’s most private sanctum stands below a dangerous trap. An enormous statue made from solid platinum comes to life when anyone other than an individual permitted by Bahamut comes too close. Dispater used his servants to lure the statue into the hall and once past, he and his cronies slipped behind it to enter Bahamut’s sanctum. After the statue dispatched Dispater’s servants, it moved back to its normal position, thus trapping the archdevil and his servants inside the now impregnable vault. When the characters can see into room 10, read: A platinum dragon, or at least a statue, stands on a pedestal in a cramped room’s center. It stands nearly twenty-five feet tall, wings outstretched and eyes glittering in the soft white light. Perception Check DC 26: A burned and severed hand lies on the floor near the statue’s base.
Tactics The trap is mindless and responds as it was designed. Once triggered, the trap blasts the characters but doesn’t move from its position unless there are no creatures it can hit with the blast. Should this happen, the trap advances on the characters, thus freeing Dispater and his allies from area 11. Dispater doesn’t emerge right away, but instead sends up his legion
devil militants (one of whom is missing a hand) to clear the passage.
Features of the Area Ceiling: The ceiling in area 10 is 40 feet high, while the ceilings in areas 6, 8, and 9 are 30 feet high. Hidden Entrance: Once the trap moves off the pedestal, it reveals a yawning black hole that drops 50 feet to area 11. Luring the trap off its base also triggers tactical encounter I (following page).
Eye of Bahamut (E) Trap
Level 26 Solo Blaster XP 45,000
A strange, many-faceted gem in the center of the chamber suddenly emits blasts of blinding light. Trap: A glittering diamond set in a Huge stone statue flashes with light. When a creature draws too close, the light intensifies to scorch the infidel. Perception ✦ DC 26: The character notices the shining jewel. Additional Skill: Arcana ✦ DC 31: The character recognizes the eye of Bahamut for what it is. Initiative +13 Trigger When a creature enters a square within 5 squares of the Huge statue, the statue animates, rolls initiative, and makes an attack on its turn to include the triggering creature in the blast. For a move action, the statue shifts 2 squares. Attack ✦ Radiant Standard Action Close blast 5 Effect: The trap makes an attack to catch the most creatures it can in the blast. Target: Each creature in blast Attack: +29 vs. Fortitude Hit: 4d10 + 5 radiant damage, and ongoing 5 radiant damage and the target is stunned (save ends both). Aftereffect: The target is dazed (save ends). Countermeasures ✦ An adjacent character can climb onto the statue by succeeding on a DC 26 Athletics check. A character on the statue moves with the statue when it moves. Such a character can engage in a skill challenge to detach the eye of Bahamut from the statue and thus disable the trap. DC 31 Thievery. Complexity 1 (4 successes before 3 failures). Success detaches the gem (see treasure, below) and disables the trap. Failure causes the eye of Bahamut to explode: close burst 8; targets all creatures in burst; 4d10 + 5 radiant damage, and ongoing 30 radiant damage (save ends). ✦ A character can attack the gem (AC 38; Fortitude 38, Reflex 38; hp 540 hit points). When reduced to 0 hit points, the eye of Bahamut explodes as described above.
December 20 09
| D u n g e o n
17 3
59
Those Once Loyal
I. Accidental Prisoners Encounter Level 29 (76,250 XP)
Setup
Dispater (D) 1 infernal ironguard (I) 2 legion devil militants (L)
Dispater and his allies found themselves trapped inside the vault when the Eye of Bahamut returned to its seat on the pedestal (encounter H). Dispater would eventually blast his way free or use a ritual to escape, but the items in the room have captured his attention. When the characters trigger the trap in the room above, he seizes the chance to escape. When the characters can see into room 11, read: The hole in the floor opens onto a dais some thirty feet below. There, steps lead down into a large gallery with more daises throughout the room, each containing oddities and treasures alike. Creatures in this room include a hulking warrior clad in plate armor and smaller, nervous-looking devils. The figure capturing your attention is a tall, slender man with a smooth head. He might pass for human if not for his cloven hooves, tail, and horns jutting from his brow. Dispater is powerful, but he’s not willing to risk his life in a needless fight against the characters. Dispater is amenable to discussion if it means his escape. However, he can see through most ruses and if it seems the characters intend to destroy him, he fights his way free.
Questions and Answers
Tactics
The Lord of Dis sells out Dakranad with little remorse. The archdevil wants Amyria for himself, but the dragon has given him precious few opportunities to claim her. Dispater fears his chance at divinity may have passed and worries that Dakranad may succeed where he has failed. Thus, Dispater gives the characters what they need to know without a fight.
Dispater fights to destroy the characters, fleeing only if reduced to 300 hit points or less. Dispater: Dispater uses gates of Dis to arrange the battlefield to his liking. He uses the walls to keep the characters from engaging him. Once so protected, he uses inveigle to dominate strikers and turn their attacks against their allies. While waiting for inveigle to recharge, he strikes using scathing rod. Infernal Ironguard: The ironguard moves back to take a position next to Dispater, where he uses stab and smash against any enemy that comes too close. Legion Devil Militants: The legion devils rush the characters, putting themselves between their enemies and their master. If a character slips past them, they teleport to maintain their blocking positions.
Provided the characters give Dispater a chance, he says: “Ah, we meet again. It appears you have me at a disadvantage, but don’t let my discourtesy hamper our reunion. I imagine you are looking for the vessel. Amyria was her name, correct? I’m afraid we are all too late. The dragon has her, and he plans to take Bahamut’s mantle for himself. If the characters have not already traveled to Torzak-Belgirn, read: Where did he go? A place called the Soulforge. He’s chasing after a creation spark, the essence of divinity. Where is this place? I can’t tell you, because I simply don’t know. It sounds dwarven, so the Rainfather might be the natural place to look. Now, if you don’t mind, I have pressing business of my own, and I must be on my way.”
Features of the Area Ceiling: The ceiling is 50 feet above the daises and 60 feet above the floor elsewhere. Dais: Wards protect the daises.
If the characters have already traveled to TorzakBelgirn, read: I’m sure Dakranad has the creation spark by now. But don’t worry, my friends. The Platinum Dragon will return, even if not in the form you hoped for. Where is he headed? The Bridge of al-Sihal, I’d imagine. Now, if you don’t mind, I have pressing business of my own, and I must be on my way.”
December 20 09
| D u n g e o n
17 3
60
Those Once Loyal
m Warded Dais
Violet lightning crackles around the dais, throwing you backward with agonizing force. At-Will ✦ Force, Lightning Opportunity Action Melee Trigger: A non-dragon creature enters a dais square. Target: The triggering creature Attack: +32 vs. Fortitude Hit: 3d8 + 10 force and lightning damage, and the target is pushed 2 squares. Miss: Half damage, and the target is pushed 2 squares.
Treasure: Dispater managed to destroy one ward. The safe dais holds treasure parcels F, G, and H. Characters who defeat Dispater also gain the rod of Dispater.
Rod of Dispater Level 28 A symbol of Dispater’s authority, this adamantine rod is shaped like two serpents entwined together. It grants the power to scour foes with acid. Implement (Rod) 2,125,000 gp Enhancement: Attack rolls and damage rolls Critical: +6d8 per plus Property: The rod functions as a +6 mace as well as an implement. Power (At-Will): Free Action. Trigger: You hit with a melee attack using the rod. Effect: The target is pushed 2 squares and dazed (save ends). Power (At-Will ✦ Acid, Implement): Standard Action. Effect: Make a ranged 20 attack; Intelligence vs. Reflex; 2d8 + Intelligence modifier acid damage, and the target takes a –2 penalty to attack rolls until the end of your next turn.
Dispater
Level 28 Solo Controller (Leader)
Medium immortal humanoid (devil) XP 65,000 Initiative +20 Senses Perception +21; darkvision HP 1,295; Bloodied 647 AC 45; Fortitude 41, Reflex 43, Will 42 Resist 30 fire Saving Throws +5 Speed 6, teleport 10 Action Points 2 m Smiting Rod (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon Requires rod of Dispater; +34 vs. AC; 2d8 + 10 damage (crit 8d8 + 10), and the target is pushed 2 squares and dazed (save ends). M Blasphemous Reply (immediate reaction, when hit by a melee attack; at-will) ✦ Thunder Targets the attacker; +32 vs. Will; 3d8 + 10 thunder damage, and the target is pushed 1 square. R Scathing Rod (standard; at-will) ✦ Acid, Implement Requires rod of Dispater; ranged 20; +32 vs. Reflex; 2d8 + 10 acid damage, and the target takes a –2 penalty to attack rolls until the end of Dispater’s next turn. R Inveigle (standard; recharge 4 5 6) ✦ Charm, Psychic Ranged 20; +32 vs. Will; 2d8 + 10 psychic damage, and the target slides 3 squares and is dominated (save ends). Aftereffect: The target is dazed until the end of its next turn. A Gates of Dis (minor; at-will) ✦ Conjuration, Fire Area wall 10 within 20 squares. Dispater conjures a lattice of scalding iron that lasts until the start of his next turn. The wall blocks movement and line of effect, but it does not block line of sight. Creatures that end their turns adjacent to the wall take 10 fire damage. Creatures pulled, pushed, or slid adjacent to the wall take 20 fire damage. The wall is 4 squares high and cannot be destroyed. Diabolic Awe (free 1/round, when an enemy within 10 squares becomes bloodied or takes a critical hit; at-will) ✦ Fear, Healing The enemy is pushed 3 squares away from Dispater and is dazed until the end of Dispater’s next turn. Creatures with the devil keyword within 10 squares of Dispater regain 20 hit points. Alignment Evil Languages Supernal Skills Arcana +29, Bluff +28, History +29, Insight +26, Religion +29 Str 22 (+20) Dex 23 (+20) Wis 24 (+21) Con 27 (+22) Int 30 (+24) Cha 29 (+23) Equipment scarlet robe, rod of Dispater
Infernal Ironguard
Level 25 Soldier
Large immortal humanoid (devil) XP 7,000 Initiative +21 Senses Perception +21; darkvision Guarding Presence aura 1; allies with the devil keyword that are in the aura gain a +2 bonus to AC and Reflex defense. HP 234; Bloodied 117; see also Dis shield AC 41; Fortitude 39, Reflex 37, Will 37 Speed 6, fly 8 m Stab and Smash (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon Reach 2; +32 vs. AC; 2d12 + 9 damage, and the target is pushed 5 squares and is knocked prone. M Protect at any Cost (immediate interrupt, when an adjacent ally is the target of an attack that does not include the infernal ironguard; at-will) +30 vs. Reflex; 1d4 + 9 damage, and the target is pushed 5 squares, and is knocked prone. Dis Shield While not bloodied, an infernal ironguard gains a +2 bonus to all defenses against divine attack powers. While bloodied, it takes a –2 penalty to all defenses against divine attack powers. Alignment Evil Languages Supernal Str 28 (+21) Dex 24 (+19) Wis 19 (+16) Con 26 (+20) Int 10 (+12) Cha 24 (+19) Equipment plate armor, heavy shield, bastard sword
2 Legion Devil Militants (L) Level 26 Minion Soldier
Medium immortal humanoid (devil) XP 2,250 Initiative +16 Senses Perception +14; darkvision HP 1; a missed attack never damages a minion. AC 42; Fortitude 38, Reflex 37, Will 37 Resist 20 fire Speed 7, teleport 3 m Longsword (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon +34 vs. AC; 14 damage. Squad Defense The legion devil militant gains a +2 bonus to all defenses when adjacent to at least one other legion devil. Alignment Evil Languages Supernal Str 14 (+15) Dex 12 (+14) Wis 12 (+14) Con 14 (+15) Int 10 (+13) Cha 12 (+14) Equipment plate armor, heavy shield, longsword
December 20 09
| D u n g e o n
17 3
61
Those Once Loyal
J. Finding the Soulforge Encounter Level 25 (35,000 XP)
Setup Having done some initial information gathering from either Kalad or from the exalted working in TorzakBelgirn, the characters discover that Moradin’s proxy works in a hidden place called the Soulforge. So sacred is this site that its location remains a secret even from Moradin’s most trusted colleagues. Many smiths and workers, however, know rumors and legends that might point the way. When the characters first arrive at TorzakBelgirn, read: A fabulous city crowns the mountain. Smoke and steam rise from forges and workshops scattered across dozens of metal platforms. Staircases and bridges connect the different areas, granting access to the many factories as well as the homes, inns, and shops crowding this strange community. If Moradin is to be found, surely these people would know where. Religion Check DC 24: Torzak-Belgirn is also known as Moradin’s Forge, and it is where his most devoted followers honor the god through the ingenious works they create. Moradin has a forge here, though there are rumors of another hidden somewhere in the mountain.
Finding the Soulforge The answers you seek are here, somewhere, and persistence and courage will show the way. This skill challenge unfolds in three stages. The first stage sees the characters exploring Torzak-Belgirn, looking for someone who might know the Soulforge’s location. The second stage begins when the characters win an audience with Ghoren, a mighty smith and ancient champion who rules the city in Moradin’s name. The characters must persuade the mayor to reveal the Soulforge’s secret location. The final stage sees the characters descending the mountainside to reach the Rainfather’s Beard, the legendary entrance to the mythical forge. Level: 25 (XP 35,000) Complexity: 5 (requires 12 success before 3 failures) Once the characters accumulate four successes, they move to the next stage.
Stage One: Exploring Torzak-Belgirn Somewhere in this city, you will find the Soulforge or at least the way to it. Primary Skills: Diplomacy, Perception, Streetwise Secondary Skills: Bluff, Religion Bluff (DC 31): This check provides no successes. If the characters fail a Stealth check, one character may make a Bluff check to cancel the failure. Up to two characters can aid on this check. Diplomacy (DC 26): The characters persuade the functionaries who restrict access to the lord that they have legitimate business and to let them past. A successful check earns 2 successes. A failed check, in addition to counting as a failure, increases future Diplomacy DCs by 2 for the duration of the skill challenge. Up to four characters can aid on this check. This skill can yield up to 4 successes (from two skill checks). Perception (DC 17): The character spots a massive forge situated higher than all others. Strange constructs patrol its perimeter. In addition to counting as a success, a successful check opens up the Stealth skill. This skill can provide a maximum of 1 success. Religion (DC 17): The character recalls TorzakBelgirn is where those chosen by Moradin are invited to spend their time in the afterlife. A success by 5 or more reveals that Moradin can sometimes be found here, but he is often away at a hidden forge somewhere in the mountain. A success by 10 or more reveals that Moradin’s personal forge is known simply as the Soulforge. A success by 15 or more reveals Lord Ghoren to be the proxy ruler here; if anyone would know where the Soulforge might be found, it
December 20 09
| D u n g e o n
17 3
62
Those Once Loyal
would be him. This skill can provide a maximum of 1 success. Stealth (DC 26): The characters must make successful Perception and Streetwise checks before they can attempt this skill. With this check, the characters try to infiltrate Lord Ghoren’s keep. This is a group check requiring each participating character to make a Stealth check. If half or more succeed, the characters earn 2 successes toward the challenge. A second successful attempt earns the characters 1 more success as they sneak past the guards and into Lord Ghoren’s chambers. This check can earn a maximum of 3 successes. Failure on either attempt earns 3 failures for the group, but these can be removed with immediate Bluff checks (see above). If an immediate Bluff check fails, the skill challenge fails. Streetwise (DC 17): The characters ask around about the Soulforge. A successful check turns up nothing definitive, but the characters do learn that Lord Ghoren would know the answer and where this lord might be found. A character who succeeds by 5 or more learns the name of an unhappy functionary who lets anyone meet the lord as a petty vengeance for some past slight, thereby granting the characters 1 extra success. A success by 10 or more also reveals that those who complement Lord Ghoren on his craftsmanship can go far with him. Up to four characters can aid on this check. This skill can earn a maximum of 2 successes.
Stage Two: Audience with Lord Ghoren An angry dwarf with a long gray beard that gathers in a pile beneath his feet leans forward on his throne, his exquisite armor creaking. Primary Skills: Bluff, Diplomacy, Insight Secondary Skills: Intimidate, Perception, Religion, special Special: Characters who are worshippers of Moradin gain a +2 bonus on skill checks made during this stage. Characters who complement Lord Ghoren on his fine armor gain a +2 bonus on Diplomacy checks made during this stage. Bluff (DC 26): The character tries to conceal the party’s true purpose for seeking out the Soulforge. Up to four characters can aid on this check. This skill can provide a maximum of 4 successes. Once a character uses Bluff, all characters have a –2 on Diplomacy checks. Diplomacy (DC 26): The characters ask for aid in their mission, using honesty and their mission’s seriousness to sway the lord to their side. Up to four characters can aid on this check. This skill can earn a maximum of 4 successes. Once a character uses Diplomacy, all characters have a –2 on Bluff checks. Insight (DC 26): You see into the lord’s heart and realize that the dwarf wants only to serve Moradin to the best of his ability. The first success with this skill reveals that Ghoren takes pride in his armor, while the second success reveals Intimidate’s futility. This skill can earn a maximum of 2 successes. Intimidate: Lord Ghoren’s duty outweighs any threats that the characters can put against him. Each Intimidate check counts as 1 failure.
Perception (DC 17): The character notices that Lord Ghoren wears exceptionally fine armor. This skill earns no successes. Religion (DC 17): The character recalls Moradin’s character and exploits, citing examples about Moradin’s virtue to help show that the characters have common cause with the god. The characters must have earned at least 1 success with Diplomacy before using Religion will count as a success. This skill can earn a maximum of 1 success.
December 20 09
| D u n g e o n
17 3
63
Those Once Loyal
Stage Three: To Rainfather’s Beard The entrance to the Soulforge lies beyond Rainfather’s Beard, a waterfall near the mountain’s base. Options: Characters can reach the Rainfather’s Beard by one of two ways. They can use the spelljammer if they have it and simply fly down, or they might just climb down the mountain. Primary Skills: Arcana, Athletics, Religion, Streetwise, special Secondary Skills: Acrobatics, Endurance Acrobatics: A character can substitute an Acrobatics check for an Arcana check when flying down to Rainfather’s Beard. Arcana (DC 26): Characters flying to Rainfather’s Beard must succeed on two Arcana checks to pilot the spelljammer through dangerous terrain. A failed Arcana check deals 50 damage to the spelljammer in addition to counting as a failure. One character can aid on this check. This skill can earn a maximum of 2 successes. Athletics (DC 31): Parties climbing down the mountain must make a group Athletics check. In order to count as a success, at least half the party must succeed. Failure of the group check earns 1 failure on the challenge and also results in everyone losing 1 healing surge. This skill can earn a maximum of 2 successes. Religion (DC 31): The character recalls a legend about the Rainfather’s Beard being near Moradin’s Hands. A success here opens up use of the Streetwise skill. This skill can earn a maximum of 1 success. Streetwise (DC 26): Asking after Moradin’s Hands and Rainfather’s Beard reveals a probable location. A success by 10 or more grants a much more accurate location and an extra success. Up to four characters
can aid on this check. Streetwise skill can be used only after a successful Religion skill check. This skill can earn a maximum of 2 successes. Success: The adventurers reach the Rainfather’s Beard, where they must face the elemental guardian charged with protecting the entrance. Failure: What happens when the characters fail at the skill challenge depends on where they acquire the last failure. Stage One: The characters get an audience with Ghoren. Remove all failed checks and move forward to the next stage. Ghoren learns of the characters’ efforts to locate the Soulforge and warns the aspect. Add two slaughterstone hammerers to tactical encounter N, The Forgeworks (page 70). Stage Two: The characters fail to impress Ghoren and earn his enmity. Five slaughterstone hammerers attack the characters in his throne room. If the characters defeat the constructs, Ghoren grudgingly reveals the location of the Soulforge. Proceed with stage three. Stage Three: The characters reveal themselves during their descent. Add two storm gorgons to tactical encounter K (The Rainfather’s Thrall, next page) and the characters are automatically surprised.
December 20 09
| D u n g e o n
17 3
64
Those Once Loyal
K. The Rainfather’s Thrall Encounter Level 27 (58,000 XP)
Setup
1 storm titan (T) 4 storm gorgons (G)
The storm titan lairs in the pool formed by the cupped hands while storm gorgons crop at the nearby grass. When the characters arrive at this site, the storm titan rises from its watery lair. When the characters arrive at this area, read: Rainfather’s Beard tumbles down the cliff’s face into a frothing pool formed by two enormous, stone hands. Four gray bulls crackling with lightning stand on the nearby green. A titanic humanoid rises from the center of the pool, sending waves to spill over the hands. It has midnight blue skin and long green hair. It draws a massive blade from the pool as it roars in anger.
Tactics The storm titan hovers above the pool, using howling winds and hurl thunderbolt to knock the characters from the cliff. It uses roaring greatsword against any character who comes within reach. The storm gorgons fly outside the storm fury aura to trample and gore the adventurers. All creatures here fight until destroyed.
Features of the Area Cupped Hands: An enormous carving depicts cupped hands that catch the waterfall as it continues down the mountainside. Squares on the hands are slippery and count as difficult terrain. The water inside the cupped hands is 30 feet deep near the center. Runoff: Water spills from the cupped hands and flows toward the cliff. Runoff squares count as difficult terrain, and any creature that starts its turn in a runoff square must make a DC 17 Athletics check as a free action or slide 2 squares toward the cliff. Cliff: The cliff overlooks another waterfall that crashes 120 feet to another pool. A creature that falls takes 12d10 damage on landing. Waterfall: Snowmelt and rain supply the water of this thundering fall. Squares adjacent to the waterfall are lightly obscured. m Thundering Waterfall
Frothing water tumbles down from misty heights to crash amid the cupped hands. At-Will Opportunity Action Melee Trigger: A character enters or starts its turn in a square containing the waterfall. Target: The triggering creature Attack: +30 vs. Fortitude Hit: The target is knocked prone and slides into the closest unoccupied square in cupped hands. Miss: The target gains concealment and cover while in this square.
December 20 09
| D u n g e o n
17 3
65
Those Once Loyal
Storm Titan (T)
Level 27 Elite Controller
Huge elemental humanoid (aquatic, giant) XP 22,000 Initiative +19 Senses Perception +22 Storm Fury (Lightning, Thunder) aura 4; any creature that enters or begins its turn in the aura takes 10 lightning and thunder damage; creatures other than storm giants and storm titans treat the area within the aura as difficult terrain and cannot fly. HP 506; Bloodied 253 AC 43; Fortitude 43, Reflex 38, Will 38 Resist 30 lightning, 30 thunder Saving Throws +2 Speed 8, fly 10 (hover), swim 8 Action Points 1 m Roaring Greatsword (standard; at-will) ✦ Lightning, Thunder Reach 3; +32 vs. AC; 2d6 + 11 damage plus 2d8 lightning and thunder damage. M Double Attack (standard; at-will) ✦ Lightning, Thunder, Weapon The storm titan makes two roaring greatsword attacks. R Hurl Thunderbolt (standard; at-will) ✦ Lightning, Thunder Ranged 10; +30 vs. Reflex; 3d6 + 6 lightning and thunder damage, and the target is pushed 3 squares and dazed (save ends). C Howling Winds (standard; recharge 4 5 6) ✦ Thunder Close burst 4; +30 vs. Fortitude; 2d12 + 6 thunder damage, and the target is pushed 4 squares and knocked prone. Miss: Half damage, and the target is pushed 1 square. Alignment Evil Languages Giant, Primordial Skills Diplomacy +24, Intimidate +24 Str 33 (+24) Dex 22 (+19) Wis 19 (+17) Con 29 (+22) Int 14 (+15) Cha 22 (+19) Equipment greatsword
4 Storm Gorgons (G)
Level 26 Skirmisher
Large elemental beast XP 9,000 each Initiative +21 Senses Perception +19; truesight 6 Tempest’s Fury (Lightning) aura 5; any creature that enters or starts its turn in the aura takes 20 lightning damage. HP 248; Bloodied 124 AC 42; Fortitude 40, Reflex 35, Will 35 Immune knocked prone, pull/push/slide; Resist 20 lightning, 20 thunder Speed 8, fly 10 (hover); see also mobile melee attack m Gore (standard; at-will) ✦ Thunder +31 vs. AC; 1d10 + 12 damage plus 2d8 thunder damage, and the target is pushed 2 squares and knocked prone. M Mobile Melee Attack (standard; at-will) The storm gorgon can move up to half its speed and make one melee basic attack at any point during that movement. The storm gorgon doesn’t provoke opportunity attacks when moving away from the target of its attack. M Trample (standard; at-will) The storm gorgon can move up to its speed and enter enemies’ spaces. This movement provokes opportunity attacks, and the gorgon must end its move in an unoccupied space. When it enters an enemy’s space, the gorgon makes a trample attack: +29 vs. Reflex; 1d10 + 10 damage, and the target is knocked prone. C Storming Breath (standard; recharge 6) ✦ Lightning, Thunder Close blast 5; +29 vs. Fortitude; 2d10 + 20 lightning and thunder damage. Alignment Unaligned Languages — Str 30 (+23) Dex 22 (+19) Wis 23 (+19) Con 32 (+24) Int 2 (+9) Cha 8 (+12)
December 20 09
| D u n g e o n
17 3
66
Those Once Loyal
L. A Thousand Teeth Encounter Level 26 (45,000 XP)
Setup
Morgol the Undying (M)
An ancient hydra lairs here and protects the Soulforge from unwanted visitors. When the characters can see the hydra, read: A great serpent with five heads roars in outrage and lumbers forward, jaws snapping, red eyes gleaming. Perception DC 17: There are no stalagmites on the floor, but stalactites hang from the ceiling by the score.
Tactics Morgol the Undying is too to big maneuver through these tunnels easily, so the hydra holds its position, relying on its reach to bite the characters. Should
characters hang back and pepper it with ranged attacks, it squeezes into the adjacent chamber where it can best catch the characters with its hydra fury attack. Morgol the Undying fights to the death.
Features of the Area Illumination: Dim light. Fiery veins in the walls shed dim illumination throughout these caverns. Ceiling: The ceilings throughout these caves are 50 feet high. Steps: Granite shelves serve as steps that descend or ascend to other caves. Squares containing steps count as difficult terrain. Stalactites: Sharp stalactites hang throughout these caves, though no stalagmites emerge from the floor (the hydra cleared these). Each ceiling square in a natural cavern contains one stalactite. A creature can break off a stalactite by using the following terrain power. r Falling Stalactite
Single Use Terrain
The stalactite ends at a sharp point. With the right pressure, you might break it free to send it down and impale any creature below it. Single-Use (per square) Standard Action Ranged Check: Strength check, DC 31 Effect: The stalactite falls and makes an attack. Target: One creature below the stalactite Attack: +29 vs. Reflex Hit: 1d8 + 9 damage, and the target is immobilized. Miss: The square is filled with rubble and counts as difficult terrain until cleared.
Morgol the Undying
Level 26 Solo Brute
Gargantuan immortal beast (reptile), hydra XP 45,000 Initiative +19 Senses Perception +23; all-around vision HP 980; Bloodied 490; see also regenerating heads AC 38; Fortitude 40, Reflex 36, Will 36 Saving Throws +5 Speed 6 Action Points 2 m Bite (standard; at-will) Radiant Reach 4; + 31 vs. AC; 2d8 + 10 damage plus 1d8 radiant damage. M Hydra Fury (standard; at-will) Morgol makes five bite attacks, plus an additional attack for each head it has grown (see regenerating heads). A target hit by more than one bite attack in a round takes 10 extra damage. M Rampage (standard; recharges when a critical hit is scored against Morgol) Morgol makes one bite attack against each enemy within its reach. On a hit, the target also takes ongoing 10 damage (save ends). Heroslayer While Morgol is marked, it gains a +2 bonus to attack rolls and a +10 bonus to damage rolls against the creature that marked it. Many-Headed Each time Morgol would become dazed or stunned, it instead loses one attack while using hydra fury during its next turn. Morgol can be dazed or stunned multiple times. Regenerating Heads When Morgol first reaches 735, 490, and 245 hit points, a head is destroyed. At the start of Morgol’s next turn after a head is destroyed, two heads grow in the lost head’s place, and Morgol gains an additional bite attack with hydra fury. Threatening Reach Morgol can make opportunity attacks against all enemies within its reach (4 squares). Alignment Unaligned Languages — Str 26 (+21) Dex 22 (+19) Wis 21 (+18) Con 29 (+22) Int 2 (+9) Cha 10 (+13)
Treasure: In one side chamber, the characters find the hydra’s hoard, which consists of parcel I.
December 20 09
| D u n g e o n
17 3
67
Those Once Loyal
M. Godsworn Warriors
Iron Golem Juggernaut (J)
Encounter Level 27 (57,000 XP)
Setup
1 iron golem juggernaut (J) 1 godforged bolter (B) 2 godforged slashers (S)
Moradin depleted his barracks when he left to meet with the other gods. The servants he left behind represent but a token force, but they savagely attack anyone who intrudes. When the characters open any door to this room, read: A large room, easily sixty feet across with a tall ceiling, holds a looming iron statue armed with a cruel blade and two humanoid constructs bristling with blades and saws. Three platforms fill three corners. Atop two are stone statues depicting dwarves. The third holds a stumpy construct whose upper body is an overlarge crossbow. A roaring fire fills the room’s center.
Tactics The constructs are under orders to attack unauthorized intruders. Upon opening any door, the creatures animate and attack. Iron Golem Juggernaut: The construct opens with its breath weapon to catch as many characters at it can. It then closes on any leading intruders, spending an action point to cleave. The iron golem must squeeze to leave this room, but it risks it to pursue the characters into adjoining chambers.
Godforged Bolter: This construct remains on the ledge, using impaling bolt to pin down characters in the iron golem’s reach. It reloads and repeats this attack each round. Should any characters close on it, it uses missile defense and then slams the enemy off the platform. The godforged bolter remains where it is unless the characters flee, at which point it descends to give chase. Godforged Slashers: The slashers work with the iron golem, taking positions opposite the golem if possible. The slashers use f lensing blades only when presented with two or more targets. Otherwise they use their slashing blades. Note that these constructs spawn shattered progeny when damaged. These constructs stay close to their creators so they can be reincorporated into the godforged slasher if need be. Like the others, the slashers and their progeny pursue fleeing characters.
Level 26 Elite Soldier
Huge natural animate (construct) XP 18,000 Initiative +19 Senses Perception +15; darkvision Noxious Fumes aura 3; while the iron golem juggernaut is bloodied, any creature that enters or starts its turn in the aura takes 10 poison damage. HP 488; Bloodied 244; see also toxic death AC 42; Fortitude 43, Reflex 38, Will 36 Immune disease, poison, sleep Saving Throws +2 Speed 6 (cannot shift) Action Points 1 m Iron Blade (standard; at-will) Reach 3; +33 vs. AC; 3d10 + 5 damage, and the target is marked (save ends). M Cleave (standard; at-will) The iron golem juggernaut makes two iron blade attacks, each against a different target. M Dazing Fist (immediate interrupt, when a creature marked by the iron golem juggernaut and within its reach moves or shifts; at-will) Reach 3; targets the triggering creature; +31 vs. Fortitude; the target is dazed (save ends). C Breath Weapon (standard; recharge 5 6) ✦ Poison Close blast 5; +31 vs. Fortitude; 4d8 + 9 damage, and ongoing 5 poison damage (save ends). C Toxic Death (when first bloodied and again when the iron golem juggernaut drops to 0 hit points) ✦ Poison Close burst 5; +31 vs. Fortitude; 3d10 + 6 poison damage, and ongoing 10 poison damage (save ends). Alignment Unaligned Languages — Str 30 (+23) Dex 18 (+17) Wis 14 (+15) Con 28 (+22) Int 3 (+9) Cha 3 (+9) Equipment longsword
December 20 09
| D u n g e o n
17 3
68
Those Once Loyal
2 Godforged Slashers (S)
Level 29 Brute
Large immortal animate (construct) XP 15,000 each Initiative +22 Senses Perception +21; darkvision Spinning Blades aura 1; each creature that starts its turn in the aura takes 20 damage. HP 328; Bloodied 164 AC 41; Fortitude 43, Reflex 41, Will 40 Immune disease, poison, sleep Speed 6 (cannot shift) m Slashing Blades (standard; at-will) Reach 2; +32 vs. AC; 4d8 + 10 damage. C Flensing Blades (standard; recharges when first bloodied) Close burst 2; targets enemies; +32 vs. AC; 2d8 + 6 damage, and ongoing 15 damage (save ends). M Hasty Repair (minor; at-will) Healing Reach 2; targets one shattered progeny; the shattered progeny is destroyed and the godforged slasher regains 40 hit points. Shattered Progeny (free, when reduced to 246, 164, 82, and 0 hit points) Place a shattered progeny token in an unoccupied space adjacent to the godforged smasher, and reduce the godforge slasher’s spinning blades damage by 5. Alignment Unaligned Languages — Str 30 (+24) Dex 27 (+22) Wis 24 (+21) Con 28 (+23) Int 2 (+10) Cha 8 (+13)
Shattered Progeny
Level 29 Minion Brute
Small immortal animate (construct) XP — Initiative as creator Senses Perception +21; darkvision HP 1; a missed attack never damages a minion AC 41; Fortitude 43, Reflex 41, Will 40 Immune disease, poison, sleep Speed 4 m Spinning Blades (standard; at-will) +32 vs. AC; 18 damage. C Exploding Construct (when reduced to 0 hit points) Fire, Radiant Close burst 1; +30 vs. Reflex; 18 fire and radiant damage. Alignment Unaligned Languages — Str 30 (+24) Dex 27 (+22) Wis 24 (+21) Con 28 (+23) Int 2 (+10) Cha 8 (+13)
Godforged Bolter (B)
Level 26 Artillery
Medium immortal animate (construct) XP 9,000 Initiative +23 Senses Perception +18; darkvision HP 185; Bloodied 92 AC 41; Fortitude 38, Reflex 41, Will 36 Immune disease, poison, sleep Speed 4 (cannot shift) m Slam (standard; at-will) +31 vs. AC; 2d8 + 7 damage, and the target is pushed 2 squares. R Impaling Bolt (standard; at-will) Weapon Ranged 10; +31 vs. Reflex; 2d6 + 10 damage, the target is immobilized (save ends), and the godforged bolter pushes the target 1 square. Aftereffect: The target takes 10 damage. C Missile Defense (immediate reaction, when hit by a melee attack; recharges when first bloodied) Close burst 10; +28 vs. Reflex; 4d10 + 8 damage. Alignment Unaligned Languages — Str 25 (+20) Dex 30 (+23) Wis 20 (+18) Con 23 (+19) Int 2 (+9) Cha 8 (+12)
Features of the Area Illumination: Bright light. A fiery pool in the chamber’s center illuminates the room. Doors: The steel doors are closed but not locked. They feel warm to the touch. Ceiling: The ceiling is 70 feet overhead. Platforms: Three platforms rise 30 feet above the floor in three corners. Rungs set in their faces grant access to their surfaces. A fall from a platform deals 3d10 damage. Statues: Two statues atop platforms resemble towering dwarven warriors armed with greataxes and clad in plate armor. A statue has AC/Reflex 5, Fortitude 10, and 40 hit points.
m Warding Statues
The statue comes to life to shove you from the platform. Opportunity Action Trigger: A creature starts its turn or enters a square adjacent to the statue Target: The triggering creature Attack: +30 vs. Fortitude Hit: 2d8 + 9 damage, and the target is pushed 2 squares.
Fire Pit: Roiling flames burn in a stone basin at the room’s center. Living creatures adjacent to the fire pit take a –2 penalty to attack rolls. m Fire Pit
Heat from the raging fires leaches your strength and resolve. Opportunity Action Trigger: A creature starts its turn or enters a fire pit square. Target: The triggering creature Attack: +30 vs. Fortitude Hit: 2d6 + 9 fire damage, and ongoing 10 fire damage (save end). If the creature already has ongoing fire damage, it instead takes an extra 4d6 fire damage. Miss: Half damage.
Ceiling Hooks: Row upon row of hooks line the ceiling. Dormant constructs once hung from the hooks like toys. Now all the hooks are empty.
December 20 09
| D u n g e o n
17 3
69
Those Once Loyal
N. Forgeworks
Tactics The slaughterstone hammerers try to prevent characters from escaping the room. They give preference to characters on the conveyor belt.
Encounter Level 26 (49,000 XP)
Setup
Features of the Area
Forgeworks (N for Nozzles, C for Claw) 5 slaughterstone hammerers (H)
This chamber contains a wicked trap designed to take raw ore and turn it into liquid metal. The slaughterstone hammerers ensure unwilling objects make it into the crucible. When the characters enter this room, read: A raised pathway with a moving surface fills the room with noise. Hulking humanoid constructs equipped with hammer arms turn as one to note your presence. 5 Slaughterstone Hammerers (H) Level 25 Soldier
Large natural animate (construct) XP 7,000 Initiative +14 Senses Perception +12; darkvision Thunder Step aura 2; each creature that starts its turn within the aura is slowed until the start of its next turn. HP 233; Bloodied 116 AC 41; Fortitude 40, Reflex 35, Will 35 Immune disease, poison, sleep Speed 6 m Slam (standard; at-will) Reach 2; +32 vs. AC; 2d8 + 10 damage, and the target is knocked prone. M Hammerstrike (standard; at-will) Reach 2; +28 vs. Fortitude; 2d8 + 10 damage, and the target is dazed (save ends). Tunnel Fighting A slaughterstone hammerer takes no penalty to attack rolls while squeezing and does not grant combat advantage while squeezing. Alignment Unaligned Languages — Str 28 (+21) Dex 11 (+12) Wis 10 (+12) Con 25 (+19) Int 1 (+7) Cha 3 (+8)
Perception Check DC 26: A control panel stands against the far wall near the room’s exit. Forgeworks Trap
Level 25 Elite Blaster XP 14,000
The room is alive with industry, with bright sparks, streams of liquid fire, and choking clouds of smoke. Trap: The trap consists of several components linked by the conveyor belt running through the room. A clawed hand snatches creatures and places them on the conveyor belt. Where indicated on the map, nozzles fire jets of superheated steam, and the conveyor belt deposits anything on it into the crucible at its end. Perception ✦ DC 31: A character spots the control panel on the opposite side of the room. Additional Skill: Dungeoneering ✦ DC 28: The character identifies the nozzle locations. Trigger The trap makes the following attacks on the indicated turns. Attack (Initiative 20, 10, 0) No Action Melee Target: Each creature on the conveyor belt Effect: The creature slides 2 squares in the direction indicated on the map. Attack (Initiative 15, 5) Minor Action Melee Target: One random non-construct creature not on a conveyor belt square
Illumination: Dim light. Fiery veins and the crucible offer scant illumination. Ceiling: The ceiling is 40 feet high. Conveyor Belt: A 5-foot-wide conveyor belt runs through the room. Squares containing the conveyor belt count as difficult terrain. Treasure: Leavings from melted-down items litters the floor. Sifting through it reveals parcels J, K, and L. Attack: +28 vs. Reflex Hit: 2d8 + 9 damage, and the target slides to the closest square containing the conveyor belt. Miss: Half damage Attack (Initiative 25) ✦ Fire Standard Action Close blast 2 Target: Each creature in the blast for each nozzle Attack: +26 vs. Reflex Hit: 2d8 + 9 fire damage, and the target is dazed and immobilized until the end of its next turn. Attack ✦ Fire Opportunity Action Melee Trigger: A creature enters or starts its turn in the crucible Target: The triggering creature Effect: The creature takes 4d10 fire damage, and ongoing 10 fire damage (save ends). A creature cannot make saving throws to end the ongoing damage until it exits the crucible (DC 26 Athletics check). Countermeasures ✦ A character adjacent to the control panel can shut off the device and disable the trap by engaging in a skill challenge. DC 31 Thievery. Complexity 2 (6 successes before 3 failures). Success shuts off the conveyor belt and the forgeworks can only make the opportunity action attack. Failure causes the control panel to explode: close blast 7; +28 vs. Reflex; 3d12 + 9 damage, and the target is knocked prone and dazed (save ends). The trap is disabled if the control panel explodes.
December 20 09
| D u n g e o n
17 3
70
Those Once Loyal
O. Angelic Defenders Encounter Level 25 (35,400 XP)
Setup
4 angels of supremacy (S) 14 angel of valor legionnaires (V)
The angels position themselves between the characters and Moradin’s aspect in the room beyond. The angels do not attack unless the characters try to cross the bridge. When the characters enter this room, read: Shimmering humanoid figures hang like stars in the sky, each a glowing light hovering over a yawning darkness. A white stone bridge crosses the chasm, but the angels seem ready to block any progress.
Tactics The angels are here to protect Moradin’s aspect by denying passage to the chamber beyond. Angels of Supremacy: These angels hover 5 feet above their positions. When a character engages an angel, it uses astral brilliance and makes its stand 14 Angel of Valor Legionnaires
Level 21 Minion
Medium immortal humanoid (angel) XP 800 each Initiative +14 Senses Perception +12 HP 1; a missed attack never damages a minion. AC 35; Fortitude 35, Reflex 31, Will 30 Immune fear; Resist 10 fire, 10 radiant Speed 6, fly 9 (hover) m Greatsword (standard; at-will) ✦ Fire, Weapon +26 vs. AC; 9 fire damage. Alignment Unaligned Languages Supernal Str 26 (+18) Dex 18 (+14) Wis 14 (+12) Con 18 (+14) Int 12 (+11) Cha 16 (+13) Equipment chainmail, greatsword
4 Angels of Supremacy
Level 24 Soldier
Large immortal humanoid (angel) XP 6,050 each Initiative +19 Senses Perception +18 HP 226; Bloodied 113 AC 40; Fortitude 38, Reflex 36, Will 35 Immune fear; Resist 15 radiant Speed 8, fly 12 (hover) m Spear (standard; at-will) ✦ Thunder, Weapon Reach 3; +31 vs. AC; 1d10 + 9 damage plus 1d10 thunder damage. R Light of Justice (standard; encounter) ✦ Radiant Ranged 10; +29 vs. Fortitude; 2d10 + 9 radiant damage. Effect: The target is marked until the end of the encounter. R Summons to Justice (minor 1/round; at-will) Ranged sight; targets creatures marked by the angel of supremacy; no attack roll; the angel of supremacy pulls the target 1 square. C Astral Brilliance (standard; encounter) ✦ Radiant, Zone Close burst 3; +29 vs. Reflex; 2d10 + 9 radiant damage. Effect: The burst creates a zone of radiance that lasts until the end of the encounter. The angel of supremacy’s spear attack deals 1d10 extra radiant damage while the angel is within the zone. Angelic Presence (while not bloodied) Any attack against the angel of supremacy takes a –2 penalty to the attack roll. Threatening Reach An angel of supremacy can make opportunity attacks against all enemies in reach. Alignment Unaligned Languages Supernal Skills Intimidate +21 Str 29 (+21) Dex 21 (+17) Wis 22 (+18) Con 26 (+20) Int 25 (+19) Cha 19 (+16) Equipment plate armor, heavy shield, spear
inside the zone it creates. These angels use summons to justice to pull fleeing enemies back into their zones or light of justice to destroy any characters who slip past. The angels of supremacy fight to the death, but pursue only if characters move into room 7. Angels of Valor: These angels support their larger kin, swooping down to make attacks using their greatswords. They bolster any allies engaged in combat.
Features of the Area Illumination: Dim light. The angels’ glow combined with the ever-present light shining from the fiery veins in the walls illuminate this chamber. Ceiling: The ceiling rises 100 feet overhead. Bridge: The bridge is made from stone. Struts beneath anchor it to the walls. Chasm: A deep chasm yawns below the bridge, dropping 200 feet to a mound of shattered metal, springs, cogs, and other detritus. A character who falls can make a saving throw to catch him- or herself on the struts below the bridge. From the struts, it requires a move action and a DC 17 Athletics check to return to the bridge. Otherwise, the character takes 20d10 damage upon landing at the chasm’s bottom. The struts make it easy to climb out of the chasm (DC 17 Athletics).
December 20 09
| D u n g e o n
17 3
71
Those Once Loyal
P. Moradin’s Forge
They ignore your presence as their hammers rise and fall in perfect unison.
Encounter Level 28 (65,000 XP)
Setup
Aspect of Moradin (A) 1 forgespirit (F) 2 godforged blade bearers (G) 8+ forgesworn dwarves (D)
The adventurers are again too late. By anticipating their movements, Dakranad arrived at the forge ahead of the heroes. There, with the aid of dark magic, he persuaded the aspect of Moradin to give him a creation spark by explaining that Amyria housed Bahamut’s essence and that he needed the spark to release the essence and thus restore the Platinum Dragon to life. Thinking that this is exactly what Moradin would want (and encouraged by Dakranad’s sorcery), the aspect gave the creation spark to the dragon. Before Dakranad left, he warned the aspect that the characters would be following soon after and suggested that they want to prevent Bahamut’s rebirth because they want to save Amyria’s life. Thus, when the characters find the aspect, they see he is both sympathetic but resolved to stop them at any cost. When the characters enter this room, read: Brilliant flames roil and flare at the room’s far end. Before them stands a mighty anvil on which you see hammers, tongs, and other tools. A muscled, idealized dwarf dressed in full plate armor and gripping an enormous hammer in his fist turns from the anvil. The dwarf smoothes his singed beard and regards you with sad eyes while two hulking constructs step forward, brandishing spinning saw blades. Eight more dwarves stand before smaller anvils and forges.
If the characters don’t attack right away, read: The dwarf speaks, his voice the sound of mountains shifting on their foundations. “Your purpose is noble but selfish. Friendship demands loyalty, yet there are times when you must set aside your misgivings for the good of the world. Although you have violated my sanctum, I am willing to forgive your trespass if you return whence you came and give up this foolish mission.” The aspect answers questions as long as the characters make no aggressive moves. What follows are answers to likely questions. What are you talking about? You have come to save the deva’s life, but you will not find her here. Dakranad has taken her to find her destiny. Her destiny? She houses Bahamut’s essence. The mithral dragon intends to unleash this essence so the Platinum Dragon can be reborn. Give us the creation spark! I have it no longer. I gave it to Dakranad. Even if I wanted to, I could not give it to you. The Crucible bestows this blessing but once each century. Where is Dakranad now? I cannot tell you, lest you interfere in his mission. To gain more information about where Dakranad is heading, the characters must engage in a skill challenge to persuade the aspect that they too want to see Bahamut restored. If the characters threaten the aspect or make any aggressive move, the aspect attacks. The characters can still try to persuade the aspect of their intentions during the combat, but the DCs are 2 higher than those listed below.
Common Cause The aspect grieves for your troubles, but his own loyalty to Bahamut blinds him to your true purpose. Level: 28 (XP 26,000) Complexity: 1 (requires 4 successes before 3 failures). Primary Skills: Bluff, Diplomacy, Religion, special Secondary Skill: Insight Special: If the characters defeated Dispater and show his head or his rod as proof of the dragon’s corruption, the characters automatically earn 2 successes. (2 successes, maximum 2 successes) Arcana (DC 31): The character tries to unravel the enchantment beguiling the aspect. This skill cannot be used unless a successful Insight check has ben made (see below). Up to four characters can aid on this check. This skill can earn a maximum of 2 successes. Bluff (DC 30): The character fabricates evidence against Dakranad. In addition to counting as two failures, a failed check counts as two failures, closes off future Bluff checks, and each new attempt results in 1 more automatic failure. This skill can earn a maximum of 4 successes. Diplomacy (DC 26): The character cites truthful evidence about Dakranad’s corruption or recounts the party’s past alliance with the Platinum Dragon. This skill can earn a maximum of 4 successes. Insight (DC 31): The character identifies that the aspect of Moradin has been ensorcelled by the mithral dragon. A successful check counts as 0 successes but opens up use of the Arcana skill. Religion (DC 17): The character recalls Moradin’s character and shows how the aspect’s actions are
December 20 09
| D u n g e o n
17 3
72
Those Once Loyal
at odds with the god’s nature. This skill can earn a maximum of 1 success. Success: The characters break the enchantment and the aspect of Moradin realizes that the mithral dragon tricked him. Enraged by this, he urges the characters to venture to Bahamut’s Palace (if the characters haven’t yet been there) or to the Bridge of al-Sihal (if the characters have already been to Bahamut’s Palace). Alternatively, if Amyria is still with the characters, the aspect gives them the creation spark and advises them to seek the Bridge of al-Sihal to witness Bahamut’s imminent return. Failure: The aspect of Moradin believes the characters are trying to trick him. He commands his servants to attack.
Tactics Aspect of Moradin: The aspect uses mountainfall charge first, hoping to drive the characters back onto the bridge and into the chasm beyond. The aspect then uses rippling earth to keep driving back the adventurers. After, the aspect presses the attack using whirling hammer. He fights until destroyed and gives no quarter; he will even pause to dispatch dying characters. Such an affront as a fight in this sacred chamber allows for no mercy. Forgespirit: Starting on the second round, the forgespirit, the very essence of creation, emerges from the Crucible of Light to aid the aspect. It moves to where forge burst can be most effective and then uses that power. While sustaining it, it uses unearthly bellows to send enemies through the flames it created. Godforged Blade Bearers: These constructs hit prone enemies with their swift blade attacks. They move constantly, striking at every creature in their reach.
Forgesworn Dwarf: The minions avoid combat until at least one godforged blade bearer is reduced to 0 hit points. The minions then attack en masse and gang up on one enemy at a time using their warhammers.
Statues: Two statues atop platforms resemble towering dwarven warriors armed with greataxes and clad in plate armor. A statue has AC/Reflex 5, Fortitude 10, and 40 hit points.
Features of the Area Illumination: Bright light. The Crucible of Light fills the room with bright light. Ceiling: The ceiling is 100 feet overhead. God Anvil: The mighty anvil stands at the end of the room. Immortal creatures within 5 squares of the anvil gain a +1 bonus to attack rolls and deal 5 extra radiant damage on all melee attacks. Ledge: A ledge stands 10 feet above the floor. Stairs: A staircase grants access to the ledge. Squares containing stairs count as difficult terrain.
December 20 09
| D u n g e o n
17 3
73
Those Once Loyal
Aspect of Moradin (A) Level 26 Elite Soldier (Leader)
Medium immortal humanoid XP 18,000 Initiative +20 Senses Perception +20; low-light vision, truesight 10 Victorious Song aura 5; allies in the aura that can hear the aspect of Moradin gain a +2 power bonus to attack rolls. HP 482; Bloodied 241 AC 42; Fortitude 41, Reflex 36, Will 38 Immune poison Saving Throws +2 Speed 5; teleport 5 Action Points 1 m Crushing Hammer (standard; at-will) Weapon +33 vs. AC; 2d10 + 10 damage, and the target is dazed until the end of its next turn. M Grudge Strike (immediate reaction, when an enemy hits the aspect of Moradin with a melee attack; at-will) Weapon The aspect of Moradin makes a crushing hammer attack against the triggering enemy. M Bonecrusher Strike (immediate interrupt, when an adjacent enemy uses the stand up action; at-will) Weapon +31 vs. Fortitude; 2d10 + 10 damage, the target is knocked prone, and cannot stand (save ends). M Mountainfall Charge (standard; recharges when first bloodied) ✦ Thunder, Weapon The aspect of Moradin shifts 5 squares ignoring difficult terrain and makes an attack at the end of this movement: +34 vs. AC; 2d10 + 10 damage, the target is stunned (save ends), and all enemies adjacent to the target take 10 thunder damage and are pushed 5 squares. m Warding Statues
The statue comes to life to shove you from the platform. Opportunity Action Trigger: A creature starts its turn or enters a square adjacent to the statue Target: The triggering creature Attack: +30 vs. Fortitude Hit: 2d8 + 9 damage, and the target is pushed 2 squares.
Crucible of Light: Beyond the God Anvil is the Crucible of Light. Once every century, Moradin can extract a creation spark from its fires. These sparks are pure possibility. Left on their own, they might
C Rippling Earth (standard; recharge y z ) Weapon Close burst 5; +31 vs. Fortitude; 2d10 + 10 damage, the target is pushed to the edge of the burst and knocked prone. C Whirling Hammer (standard; at-will) Weapon Close burst 1; one or two targets; +31 vs. AC; 2d10 + 10 damage, and the target is dazed until the end of its next turn. Effect: If one or both attacks miss, the aspect of Moradin makes a secondary attack that does not provoke opportunity attacks: Ranged 10; targets one enemy not targeted by whirling hammer; +35 vs. AC; 2d10 + 10 damage, and the target is pushed 5 squares and knocked prone. Rooted in Stone The aspect of Moradin can only be forcibly moved—by a push, a pull, or a slide—if he chooses to be, and then may choose the distance he is forcibly moved up to the maximum the effect specifies. The aspect of Moradin cannot be knocked prone. Alignment Lawful good Languages Common, Dwarven, Supernal Skills Athletics +28, Diplomacy +23, Dungeoneering +27, Endurance +27, History +20, Insight +25, Intimidate +23 Str 30 (+23) Dex 20 (+18) Wis 25 (+20) Con 25 (+20) Int 15 (+15) Cha 20 (+18) Equipment plate armor, heavy shield, warhammer
gives these treasures to a party that succeeds on the skill challenge, but characters who defeat the aspect may take them anyway. If the characters have Amyria in their possession and successfully negotiated with the aspect, they also receive the creation spark. A golden locket contains its power. Aside from the hammer embossed on one side and an anvil on the other, the item seems mundane. Opening the locket releases blinding light: +32 vs. Fortitude; the target is blinded (save ends).
Conclusion If the characters end this encounter without destroying the aspect of Moradin, award them experience points as if they had.
evolve into new gods, dominions, or even worlds. Nonimmortal creatures entering or starting their turns in a space adjacent to the crucible take 20 fire and radiant damage. Any character attempting to enter the Crucible of Light is automatically pushed 1d10 squares and knocked prone. Forges and Anvils: Opposite the ledge is a row of forges and anvils. Creatures entering or starting their turns in a square containing a forge take 10 fire damage. Treasure: Positioned atop the God Anvil are treasure parcels M, N, O, and P. The aspect of Moradin
December 20 09
| D u n g e o n
17 3
74
Those Once Loyal
Forgespirit (F)
Level 25 Controller
Large immortal magical beast (air, earth, fire) XP 7,000 Initiative +19 Senses Perception +17 HP 236; Bloodied 118 AC 39; Fortitude 39, Reflex 37, Will 35 Immune disease, petrification, poison; Resist 20 fire Speed 6 m Fiery Touch (standard; at-will) ✦ Fire Reach 2; +29 vs. Reflex; 1d6 + 8 fire damage, and ongoing 10 fire damage (save ends). If this attack hits a target already suffering from ongoing fire damage, the attack instead deals 10 extra fire damage. M Hammer on Anvil (standard; at-will) Reach 2; +29 vs. Fortitude; 3d8 + 8 damage, and the target is pushed 3 squares and knocked prone. C Forge Burst (standard; sustain: minor; encounter) ✦ Fire, Zone Close burst 3; +29 vs. Reflex; 3d6 + 9 fire damage. Effect: The squares along the edge of the burst become a zone of raging fire that lasts until the end of the forgespirit’s next turn (sustain minor). Any creature that starts its turn inside or enters the zone takes 20 fire damage. C Unearthly Bellows (standard; encounter) Close blast 5; +29 vs. Fortitude; 3d10 + 6 damage, and the target is pushed 3 squares, and slowed (save ends). Alignment Unaligned Languages Primordial Str 26 (+20) Dex 25 (+19) Wis 21 (+17) Con 28 (+21) Int 6 (+10) Cha 15 (+14)
2 Godforged Blade Bearers (G) Level 27 Skirmisher
Large immortal animate (construct) XP 11,000 each Initiative +24 Senses Perception +26; truesight 10 HP 245; Bloodied 122 AC 42; Fortitude 37, Reflex 40, Will 39 Immune disease, poison sleep Speed 8; see also swift blade m Swift Blade (minor; at-will) Reach 2; +32 vs. AC; 3d8 + 9 damage, and the godforged blade bearer shifts 1 square. C Sparking Damage (when reduced to 183, 122, 61, and 0 hit points) ✦ Lightning, Radiant Close burst 1; +30 vs. Reflex; 5d10 lightning and radiant damage. Murderous Intent (while marked by an enemy) The godforged blade bearer’s swift blade attacks deals 2d8 extra damage to targets that mark it. Alignment Unaligned Languages — Str 23 (+19) Dex 29 (+22) Wis 26 (+21) Con 21 (+18) Int 4 (+10) Cha 8 (+12)
8 Forgesworn Dwarf (D)
Level 26 Minion Brute
Medium immortal humanoid, dwarf XP 2,250 each Initiative +18 Senses Perception +19; low-light vision HP 1; a minion never takes damage from a miss. AC 36; Fortitude 40, Reflex 36, Will 37 Speed 5 m Warhammer (standard; at-will) ✦ Weapon +29 vs. AC; 17 damage. Stand Your Ground When an effect forces a dwarf to move—through a pull, a push, or a slide—the dwarf moves 1 square less than the effect specifies. When an attack would knock a dwarf prone, the dwarf can roll a saving throw to avoid falling prone. Eternal Returns If a forgesworn dwarf is reduced to 0 hit points while in the aspect of Moradin’s victorious song aura, two more forgesworn dwarves appear in unoccupied spaces adjacent to the aspect of Moradin at the end of his next turn. Alignment Unaligned Languages Common, Dwarven Str 26 (+21) Dex 20 (+18) Wis 23 (+19) Con 28 (+22) Int 10 (+13) Cha 10 (+13) Equipment chainmail, heavy shield, warhammer
December 20 09
| D u n g e o n
17 3
75
Those Once Loyal
Q. War for Heaven Encounter Level 32 (140,000 XP)
Setup
Dakranad (D) Zachariel (Z)
The characters chase the mithral dragon to the city, follow the path up the highest peak (Chronias, the Radiant Throne), and find the Bridge of al-Sihal. How the characters find the bridge depends on their circumstances. If Amyria is with the characters, Dakranad attacks before she can confront Zachariel. If the dragon has Amyria, it battles the archangel to win its way past. If Amyria is with the characters, read: The bridge stretches ahead, vanishing into a curtain of golden light. A magnificent figure stands before it—an angel. Its obscured features reveal little of its intent, but the flaming sword it wields suggests only worthy souls can pass. Just as you get your bearings, a dark shadow crosses you, a shadow cast by a fearsome mithral dragon. If Amyria is with the dragon, read: The bridge stretches ahead, vanishing into a curtain of golden light. Before the light, a fearsome mithral dragon battles a powerful angel. Claw crashes against fiery sword as the two clash. Around the dragon’s neck hangs a golden locket and in its claw, you see Amyria’s unconscious body, blood running from her open mouth. Arcana Check DC 18: The golden locket shines with power and it appears to contain the creation spark you seek.
Dakranad, Mithral Dragon Level 29 Solo Skirmisher
Huge immortal magical beast (dragon) XP 65,000 Initiative +27 Senses Perception +27; darkvision HP 1,052; Bloodied 526; see also bloodied breath AC 44; Fortitude 41, Reflex 43, Will 41 Resist 25 radiant Saving Throws +5 Speed 10, fly 12 (hover), overland flight 15, teleport 10 Action Points 2 m Bite (standard; at-will) ✦ Radiant Reach 3; +34 vs. AC; 2d8 + 11 damage, and ongoing radiant 15 radiant damage (save ends). m Claw (standard; at-will) Reach 3; +34 vs. AC; 3d8 + 8 damage. M Dimension Strike (minor; at-will) Teleportation The dragon teleports 5 squares, makes a claw attack, teleports 5 squares, and makes a claw attack against a different target. M Wing Buffet (minor; recharge y z ) Reach 3; +32 vs. Fortitude; 4d10 + 8 damage, and the target is pushed 3 squares. R Mithral Prescience (minor; at-will) Ranged 10; the target takes a –2 penalty to all defenses against the dragon’s attacks until the dragon uses this power against another target.
Tactics The dragon means to get through the golden curtain and the archangel isn’t having it. If the dragon has Amyria, she’s at grave risk, because Zachariel cares nothing for her. If she’s not saved, she could very well die in the fight. Of course, interfering characters put themselves in the dragon’s path. Dakranad: The dragon restricts its attacks to claw attacks against Zachariel, knowing its radiant attacks are useless. Should two or more characters close, the dragon uses frightful presence and spends an action point to use dimension strike against stunned targets. The dragon withdraws from Zachariel to concentrate his attacks against the party,
C Breath Weapon (standard; recharge 5 6 ) ✦ Radiant Close blast 5; +32 vs. Reflex; 4d10 + 6 radiant damage, and the target is blinded (save ends). Miss: Half damage. C Bloodied Breath (free, when first bloodied; encounter) Breath weapon recharges, and the dragon uses it. C Dimensional Flurry (standard; encounter) ✦ Radiant Close burst 10; targets up to four enemies; +32 vs. Reflex; 4d6 + 5 damage, and the target takes ongoing 15 radiant damage and is dazed (save ends both). Effect: The dragon teleports to a space in the burst. C Frightful Presence (standard; encounter) ✦ Fear Close burst 10; targets enemies; +32 vs. Will; the target is stunned until the end of the dragon’s next turn. Aftereffect: The target takes a X2 penalty to attack rolls (save ends). Prophetic Defense (immediate interrupt, when the dragon is hit by an attack; at-will) ✦ Teleportation The dragon gains a +4 bonus to all defenses against the triggering attack. If the attack misses, the dragon teleports 6 squares. Alignment Evil Languages Common, Draconic, Supernal Skills Diplomacy +26, History +26, Insight +27, Intimidate +26, Religion +26 Str 27 (+22) Dex 32 (+25) Wis 27 (+22) Con 23 (+20) Int 25 (+21) Cha 25 (+21)
using his breath weapon and dimensional fury to destroy the meddling adventurers. If reduced to 200 hit points or less, Dakranad grows desperate. If he still has Amyria, he abandons the characters and renews his efforts against Zachariel, striking at the characters only if they attack him or try to snatch Amyria. Zachariel: The angel’s sole purpose is to prevent unlawful passage beyond the Bridge of al-Sihal. The angel attacks only characters entering its reach, but specifically focuses on the dragon. Zachariel cares nothing for the characters unless they attack it. In this case, the angel uses excommunication to remove troublesome enemies and holy word to keep dangerous opponents at bay. The angel is not above using blazing
December 20 09
| D u n g e o n
17 3
76
Those Once Loyal
Zachariel
arc and menacing presence to push characters from the bridge. Retrieving Amyria and the Creation Spark: The characters have several options for retrieving Amyria. A character adjacent to the dragon can use the escape action against the dragon’s Fortitude or Reflex to wrench her free. Alternatively, if the characters manage to stun or bloody him, Dakranad drops Amyria at his feet. Once the dragon loses her, he works to snatch her again by using the grab action. Stealing the Creation Spark requires a DC 37 (DC 27 if the dragon is stunned) Thievery check.
Level 28 Solo Soldier
Large immortal humanoid (angel) XP 65,000 Initiative +22 Senses Perception +27 Dimensional Ward aura 3; creatures cannot use teleportation powers or effects to enter or exit squares inside the aura. HP 1,036; Bloodied 518 AC 44; Fortitude 42, Reflex 38, Will 40 Immune fear; Resist 20 fire, 30 radiant; Vulnerable see arrow of fate Saving Throws +5 Speed 8, fly 16 (hover) Action Points 2 m Blazing Sword (standard; at-will) ✦ Fire, Radiant, Weapon Reach 2; +35 vs. AC; 2d6 + 10 damage plus 2d6 fire and radiant damage, and the target is slowed and marked until the end of Zachariel’s next turn. M Brilliant Rebuke (immediate reaction, when an adjacent enemy moves or shifts; at-will) ✦ Fire, Weapon Zachariel makes a blazing sword attack against the triggering enemy. R Excommunication (standard; recharges when an enemy hits Zachariel with a melee attack) ✦ Acid, Teleportation Ranged sight; +31 vs. Will; the target disappears into Carceri and is removed from play (save ends). The target is marooned on a bleak island lashed with acid rain, taking 20 acid damage each time it fails a saving throw to end the effect. Aftereffect: The target reappears in a square on the edge of the Zachariel’s dimensional ward aura and is immobilized and knocked prone until the end of its next turn. C Astral Fury (free, when first bloodied; encounter) ✦ Radiant, Zone Close burst 5; +31 vs. Fortitude; 3d6 + 9 radiant damage, and the target is blinded (save ends). Effect: The burst creates a zone of brilliant light that lasts until the end of the encounter. Zachariel’s blazing sword attacks deal 2d6 extra radiant damage while he is within the zone.
Getting Amyria Through the Curtain: Once Amyria gets the Creation Spark, her consciousness returns. She wants to slip through the curtain, but she can’t while Zachariel blocks the way. The characters can deal with the archangel by stunning or otherwise incapacitating it or they might use the arrow of fate.
C Blazing Arc (standard; at-will) ✦ Fire, Radiant, Weapon Close burst 2; +35 vs. AC; 2d6 + 10 damage plus 2d6 fire and radiant damage, and the target is slowed and marked until the end of Zachariel’s next turn. C Holy Word (minor; recharge 5 6 ) ✦ Thunder Close blast 3; +31 vs. Fortitude; 4d8 + 13 thunder damage, and the target is stunned until the end of Zachariel’s next turn. Aftereffect: The target is dazed (save ends). C Menacing Presence (minor 1/round; at-will) ✦ Fear Close burst 3; targets creatures marked by Zachariel; +33 vs. Will; the target is pushed 3 squares and takes a –2 penalty to all attack rolls until the end of its next turn. Angelic Presence (while not bloodied) Any attack against Zachariel takes a –2 penalty to the attack roll. Threatening Reach Zachariel can make opportunity attacks against all enemies in his reach. Arrow of Fate Zachariel is particularly vulnerable to the arrow of fate. If fired from a longbow or shortbow or used as an improvised weapon, when hit Zachariel takes 250 points of damage and is stunned (save ends). Alignment Unaligned Languages Supernal Skills Arcana +24, Diplomacy +26, History +24, Insight +27, Religion +24 Str 31 (+24) Dex 23 (+20) Wis 26 (+22) Con 27 (+22) Int 21 (+19) Cha 24 (+21) Equipment plate armor, greatsword
Features of the Area Illumination: Bright light. The golden curtain and the radiant sun fill the area with bright light. Bridge: The bridge is impervious to all damage. A fall from the bridge sees the creature descend some 200 feet to land amid the lower mountain slopes. Such a fall deals 20d10 damage upon landing.
December 20 09
| D u n g e o n
17 3
77
Those Once Loyal
Golden Radiance: The golden light shining from the gateway loosens the soul’s ties to the body. Mortal creatures lingering too close are subject to an attack. A character recognizes the danger the radiance poses with a successful DC 28 Religion check. A Golden Radiance
The light bathes you, and you feel your soul struggling to be free. Opportunity Action ✦ Divine Trigger: A mortal creature starts its turn in a square containing golden radiance Target: The triggering creature Attack: +32 vs. Will Hit: The target is dazed (save ends). First Failed Saving Throw: The target is stunned (save ends) instead. Second Failed Saving Throw: The character is pulled into the light unless stopped by the angel and moves onto a higher plane of existence (the character dies).
Treasure: Upon defeating the dragon, the adventurers discover that it carries parcels Q and R.
Conclusion With the dragon dead, the creation seed in hand, and Amyria still alive, the dying deva approaches the archangel, but Zachariel denies her access. The angel refuses her because it believes she intends to subvert the proper order and consign the universe to play out the drama between gods that has happened before and shall happen again. The characters must convince the archangel that permitting Amyria to cross is the only way to avoid plunging the cosmos into a war that would rip the planes apart.
An Argument for Resurrection
Level: 28 (XP 26,000) Complexity: 2 (requires 6 successes before 3 failures) Primary Skills: Diplomacy, Heal, History, Religion, special Secondary Skills: Arcana Special: If the characters brandish the arrow of fate and Zachariel can see it, they earn 2 successes. This can earn a maximum of 2 successes. Arcana (DC 33): A character studying the arrow of fate discerns that it is particularly dangerous to Bahamut’s enemies. This check opens up the Special option. Up to four characters can aid on this check. This skill earns no successes. Diplomacy (DC 33): The character reminds Zachariel what’s at stake if Tiamat wins and argues that Bahamut is the only way to halt the Chromatic Dragon’s agenda. Up to four characters can aid on this check. This skill can earn a maximum of 4 successes. Heal (DC 28): A successful Heal check reveals Amyria will not live much longer. Sharing this with the angel reveals her personal sacrifice to restore Bahamut to life. This check can earn a maximum of 1 success. History (DC 28): The character recalls horrors performed in Tiamat’s name, hoping to drive home the import of the characters’ mission. A failed check also closes off future History checks during this skill challenge. This skill can earn a maximum of 2 successes. Religion (DC 33): The character reinforces Bahamut’s place in the cosmos, the good he has worked, and how the world will benefit by his return. This skill can earn a maximum of 4 successes. Intimidate: The angel will not be intimidated. Each attempt results in a failure.
Success: The characters convince the archangel to let Amyria pass. See Concluding the Adventure on page 44. Failure: Zachariel is unmoved by the party’s entreaties and denies passage into the light. If Amyria would pass, the heroes must defeat the angel. D
About the Author
Robert J. Schwalb works as a freelance designer for Wizards of the Coast. His recent credits include Martial Power™, Draconomicon™: Chromatic Dragons, and the Forgotten Realms® Player’s Guide. Robert lives in Tennessee with his incredibly patient wife, Stacee, and his pride of fiendish werecats, but is happiest when chained to his desk, toiling for his dark masters in Seattle.
“I deny thee passage across the Bridge of al-Sihal.”
December 20 09
| D u n g e o n
17 3
78
Test of Fire By Scott Fitzgerald Gray illustration by William O’Connor cartography by Mike Schley TM & © 2010 Wizards of the Coast LLC All rights reserved.
“You call yourselves heroes? You claim greatness? Prove it to those who survived the Dawn Wars of gods and primordials. Prove it before the lords of fire and chaos. Prove in this Crucible Court of the City of Brass that you are worthy of the allegiance of the efreets!”
J a n u a r y 2 010
|
D u n g e o n 174
16
Test of Fire
In “Test of Fire,” the heroes are tasked by the reborn Bahamut with infiltrating Tiamat’s last stronghold in the planes—the legendary City of Brass. There, the heroes must engage a formidable efreet noble in a risky alliance, then square off against the Lord of the Efreets and the blue exarch of Tiamat in a city under siege. “Test of Fire” is an adventure for five characters midway through 27th level. By the end of the adventure, the characters should have attained 29th level. This adventure is the penultimate chapter of the Scales of War adventure path, following the events of “Those Once Loyal.” This assault on the City of Brass can be adapted for use in other epic tier campaigns with a bit of effort.
Background For untold centuries, the Dragon Queen Tiamat has labored on a deadly mission—the permanent destruction of her soul-sibling and nemesis Bahamut, the Platinum Dragon. Tiamat’s plans came to light in the mortal realm by virtue of her alliances with the githyanki. In the end, even the greatest of the heroes who turned the tide of the githyanki invasion of the world were unable to prevent Tiamat’s foul plots from claiming the Platinum Dragon’s life. All was not lost, however, for Bahamut is wise and farseeing. To prevent Tiamat’s ultimate revenge, he installed a fragment of his own essence into the deva Amyria. Through this fragment and the bravery of the heroes, Bahamut has been reborn at the Bridge of al-Sihal on Celestia. Tiamat’s forces, emboldened by the Platinum Dragon’s apparent demise, are reeling from this sudden reversal of fortune. Tiamat’s plans for cosmic dominion have been shattered, but the Dragon Queen is far from helpless.
In a last-ditch effort to win its campaign against the forces of good, half of Tiamat’s remaining army has been sent to hold her final redoubt in the planes— the legendary City of Brass. By virtue of foul rituals and dark pacts undertaken with Bashumgarda, the Lord of the Efreets, the Dragon Queen has bolstered her draconic servants with elemental power that may yet turn the tide of war in her favor. Bahamut’s forces have already surrounded the city, but the combined defenses of Tiamat and the efreets will not be easily broken. The Platinum Dragon’s servants, however, have made contact with efreet factions within the city that might be turned against Bashumgarda. Even now, the other half of
Tiamat’s army attempts to enter the Elemental Chaos in order to attack Bahamut’s force. Bahamut’s magic has sealed off the City of Brass, but it cannot do so for long. Against this dark deadline, it is up to the characters to infiltrate the besieged city and negotiate an alliance with the efreet noble Estumishu. The heroes must then make their way across a city preparing for all-out war to find and kill Bashumgarda in order to win the allegiance of the efreets. Unknown to the characters is the fact that Tiamat’s blue exarch Namissi, not Bashumgarda, is the true power in the besieged City of Brass. The adventurers’ mission in the fabled city will push them to their limits.
The Quests In “Test of Fire,” the heroes must infiltrate the besieged City of Brass by way of the deadly warren of ruins known as the Keening Delve. Once inside the city, their mission from Bahamut is to negotiate an alliance with the capricious efreet noble Estumishu. In order to obtain Estumishu’s favor and open the City of Brass to Bahamut’s forces, the characters must slay Bashumgarda, the renegade Lord of Efreets. The real power in the city, however, is Tiamat’s blue exarch Namissi, who emerges for a final showdown as Bahamut’s forces attack. Major Quest—Infiltrate the City of Brass The City of Brass is sealed behind powerful magical wards laid down by Tiamat’s ritualists. Bahamut’s forces cannot attack until the seals are opened to them. The adventurers must follow the deadly paths of the Keening Delve in order to gain secret access to the city. Reward: 55,000 XP.
Major Quest—Open the Gates to Bahamut’s Forces After treating with Estumishu, the party must chart a dangerous path through the City of Brass to where Bashumgarda, Lord of Efreets, holds court. Only after Bashumgarda is put down can the characters seize control of the magical wards protecting the city as a prelude to Bahamut’s assault. Reward: 65,000 XP. Major Quest—See Tiamat’s Armies Routed As Bahamut’s forces crash against Tiamat’s defenders in the City of Brass, the heroes must do battle against the Dragon Queen’s blue exarch. Only when their leader is destroyed can Tiamat’s forces be broken and their threat ended. Reward: 65,000 XP.
J a n u a r y 2 010
|
D u n g e o n 174
22
Test of Fire
Adventure Synopsis “Test of Fire” begins in the aftermath of the events of “Those Once Loyal.” Bahamut has been restored to life by the sacrifice of Amyria, and Tiamat’s plans to break the power of the fallen god have been dealt a crippling blow. As the adventure opens, the characters have returned to Sayre to rest, recuperate, and mourn Amyria’s sacrifice. From there, they are summoned to Bahamut’s side in the Crystal Tear, an astral dominion from which Bahamut directs his reenergized forces. The Platinum Dragon lays out the scope of Tiamat’s failure and her dark hope to turn this neardefeat into victory. The City of Brass is Tiamat’s last stronghold in the planes. It is held by arrangement with Bashumgarda, Lord of Efreets. Bahamut’s force has the city surrounded but cannot break in. Tiamat’s remaining legions are attempting to return to the Elemental Chaos to attack Bahamut’s force. The full brunt of Tiamat’s armies, energized with elemental power, will be too much for Bahamut’s army to withstand. Bahamut enlists the characters to infiltrate the City of Brass by way of a secret portal hidden deep in the Keening Delve. This legendary and deadly warren of caverns and ruined chambers is set within the basalt plate on which the City of Brass is built. After entering the city, the heroes meet with Estumishu, an efreet noble who represents factions seeking to overthrow Bashumgarda because of his foul alliance with the Dragon Queen. Estumishu offers his allegiance only if the characters find and kill Bashumgarda—a deadly quest that requires the heroes to undertake a dangerous pilgrimage across a city under siege.
After slaying Bashumgarda, the adventurers must drop the magical wards which protect the city and prevent Bahamut’s forces from attacking. At the Eternal Flame Pavilion, the heroes face off against the protectors of the shrine of the Fire Lord Imix, which has been corrupted by Tiamat’s foul rituals so as to grant power to the Dragon Queen’s servants. Then the unthinkable happens. The reborn Bahamut, fighting Tiamat’s blue exarch Namissi, is struck down in a titanic battle that shatters the great Charcoal Palace. Only the heroes can stand against the blue exarch in the end.
What is an Adventure Path? An adventure path is a connected series of adventures that comprises an entire D&D campaign, from the heroes’ humble beginnings at 1st level to their epic triumphs at the pinnacle of level 30. These adventures cover all three tiers of play: heroic, paragon, and epic. Each tier is covered by roughly six adventures, meaning that the entire adventure path consists of eighteen adventures. Each adventure covers between one and three levels, but the adventurers can undertake side quests to supplement their XP. This assures that the heroes are the correct level to tackle each adventure. “Test of Fire” is the penultimate adventure in the Scales of War. It brings the characters into Bahamut’s confidence and sets up the climactic confrontation between the heroes and Tiamat which will conclude the final chapter.
Adapting the Adventure “Test of Fire” is designed for five adventurers but can be easily adapted for larger or smaller groups. Simply add or subtract treasure parcels and monsters using the guidelines presented in the Dungeon Master’s Guide. The Keening Delve is a chaotic warren haunted by ancient magic and foul creatures, and any type of elemental-themed monster or hazard can be placed there. The City of Brass is a thriving metropolis within the Elemental Chaos. The adventure is already set up with encounter groups that play a part in the characters’ attempts to move within the city (see Encounter B2, page 43). These can be used to add additional creatures to existing encounters. This adventure is designed for characters partway through 27th level. Be wary of sending lower-level parties against the challenges of the Keening Delve and the City of Brass. The Keening Delve contains plenty of space for expansion, and you are encouraged to add encounters to the delve if you need to bring a lower-level group up to speed. The heroes should be 28th level (or close to it) when they meet with Estumishu in Encounter B1.
Preparing for Adventure This adventure begins in the downtime immediately after the characters’ previous adventure, “Those Once Loyal.” Go to Part One: The Summons of Bahamut (page 15) when you are ready to begin.
J a n u a r y 2 010
|
D u n g e o n 174
23
Test of Fire
What You Need to Play This adventure contains everything you need to play, including background information, setup, encounters, and maps. You might wish to review any appropriate Dungeons & Dragons® 4th Edition rules before play begins. You need only read the opening sections of the adventure—the introduction and the encounters in the Keening Delve—to begin play. The encounters within the delve make up a good single session’s play, or they can be expanded into a larger adventure. You can then read up on the City of Brass and prepare for the two complex skill challenges that are the centerpiece of the heroes’ mission. Background information about the City of Brass from Manual of the Planes may be useful but is not required to run this adventure.
Off the Adventure Path Even if you are not running “Test of Fire” as part of the Scales of War adventure path, a stealthy infiltration and assault on a besieged City of Brass is about as epic as adventures get. If you don’t favor a draconic connection, the dark forces that Bashumgarda has allied with can be any other long-term villain or evil organization in your campaign. In such a scenario, Bashumgarda and Namissi could be reworked as creatures of other types—perhaps a pair of powerful demon lords that have claimed the City of Brass as their domain. Use one of the following hooks to bring the heroes into such an adventure.
Treasure As with previous installments of the Scales of War campaign, “Test of Fire” makes use of the parcel system of treasure rewards as described in the Dungeon Master’s Guide. The characters should accumulate fifteen treasure parcels by the end of the adventure. You can supply these treasures in whatever way you wish, but the accompanying list presents the most likely encounters to bear treasure. During your preparation, assign parcels from those that follow to the encounters in the spaces provided. Use the players’ wish lists to come up with magic items for the first six parcels. Consider saving at least one or two of the highest-level magic items for the end of the adventure, representing gear the adventurers can claim from their victories over Bashumgarda and Namissi or a reward granted by Estumishu or Bahamut for the heroes’ service to the City of Brass and the cause of good.
Treasure Parcels Parcel A: _______________, K1 (carried by the black slaad overlord). Parcel B: _______________, K3 (scattered within the rubble). Parcel C: _______________, B1 (a gift from Estumishu as a sign of trust if the heroes succeed at the skill challenge; if the adventurers fail the challenge, add to parcels L–O). Parcel D: _______________, B1 (as above). Parcel E: _______________, B2 (carried by the leader of a patrol encountered in the course of the skill challenge; if none, add to parcels L–O). Parcel F: _______________, B2 (as above). Parcel G: __________________, B3 (carried by the greenspawn defender).
Parcel H: _______________, B4 (carried by the redspawn magmastomper). Parcel I: ___________________, B5 (carried by the pyremasters). Parcel J: _______________, B5 (carried by Bashumgarda; see the tactical encounter). Parcel K: _______________, B5 (as above) Parcel L: _______________, after F2 (reward from Estumishu). Parcel M: _______________, after F2 (as above). Parcel N: _______________, after F2 (reward from Bahamut). Parcel O: _______________, after F2 (as above). Based on the guidelines in the Dungeon Master’s Guide, the following parcels can be placed in the areas above. Parcel 1: Magic item, level 30 Parcel 2: Magic item, level 30 Parcel 3: Magic item, level 30 Parcel 4: Magic item, level 30 Parcel 5: Magic item, level 30 Parcel 6: Magic item, level 29 Parcel 7: 75 ad + two potions of recovery Parcel 8: 50 ad + 500 pp Parcel 9: 50 ad + three ceremonial holy symbols of Tiamat (15,000 gp each) + 500 pp Parcel 10: two potions of life + eight elemental onyx rings (50,000 gp each) Parcel 11: 100 ad Parcel 12: 70 ad + 200 pp Parcel 13: 60 ad + one potion of life + 200 pp Parcel 14: six astral diamond signets (50,000 gp each) + two potions of recovery + 100 pp Parcel 15: 25 ad
J a n u a r y 2 010
|
D u n g e o n 174
24
Test of Fire
A Friend in Need A powerful patron or ally of the characters has strong business or family connections to the City of Brass. He comes to the heroes in a panic, having heard that the great planar metropolis has been besieged. He knows of the secret portal in the Keening Delve and offers the adventurers a powerful incentive to restore the city to normalcy.
The Curse of Namissi The heroes are on their way to the City of Brass by planar dromond or some other form of planar travel when their journey is abruptly halted. The city is sealed behind magical wards unleashed by a cursed artifact, its leaders and people driven to madness. An impromptu skill challenge allows the characters to gain information regarding the portal in the Keening Delve. The heroes’ infiltration of the city allows them to parley with its efreet leaders who’ve been driven underground to save their lives. The adventurers must then fight their way across the city in order to face the efreet sorcerer whose mind the artifact has claimed and the monstrous guardian that protects it.
Part One: The Summons of Bahamut In the immediate aftermath of the events of “Those Once Loyal,” Bahamut’s thoughts flash through the characters’ minds, bidding them return to Sayre; then the Platinum Dragon vanishes without another word. As the adventure begins, the heroes have returned to Sayre to rest. Bahamut’s return and the sacrifice of Amyria are events of world-shaking importance. Word of the Platinum Dragon’s rebirth spreads quickly through the lands and people of the Coalition.
At the same time, word is received that Bahamut’s forces have rallied around the deity’s return and that the armies of Tiamat have lost the advantage they gained from the Platinum Dragon’s death. The adventurers have ample time to attend to personal business in Sayre and to be briefed on any information they might have failed to glean in previous adventures. This adventure begins with the arrival of an emissary from Bahamut.
An Unexpected Envoy The characters awake to the clamor of warning bells sounding out across Sayre. Throngs of city folk are running in panic through the streets even as militia guards and coalition warriors race in the opposite direction toward the March. A din of voices shouts about some disaster striking at that shabby monument site, but details are lost in the panic. As you race along the rapidly emptying streets, the source of the chaos becomes obvious. In the middle of the March, a gargantuan silver dragon paces within a field of shattered arches and statuary. Its claws rend the ground as it idly scratches, and even as you push through the field of uncertain guards surrounding it at a safe distance, the dragon’s head swings slowly toward you. “You’ve come,” it growls. “Prepare for thy journey. My lord Bahamut desires to speak with thee.” The great silver dragon Xerefri is an exarch of Bahamut. It is the master of powerful planar magic and is charged with bringing the heroes to the Platinum Dragon at his temporary command center in the Astral Sea. If characters ask, witnesses describe how the creature appeared suddenly within the open ground of the March in a blast of white light and storm-force winds, with panic quickly following. Xerefri poses no threat but the dragon is entirely indifferent to the destruction his arrival has caused.
He will not apologize if asked to by the characters; the exarch has no patience for such trivial concerns. Only his mission is important. When you are ready to depart, Xerefri orders you to stand close by. The dragon creates a Planar Portal that rises from the ground to swirl around you. A blast of arcane power shatters the last of Lord Limbic’s statuary as you and the exarch disappear.
The Crystal Tear The reborn Bahamut has temporarily abandoned his castle domain in Celestia as he focuses on leading his forces against Tiamat. The Platinum Dragon’s new command center is a specially created astral realm known as the Crystal Tear. The familiar vista of Sayre melts and vanishes to be replaced with a field of shimmering, silver light. You find yourselves soaring like disembodied spirits in a bright nonspace surrounding a crystal teardrop that grows in size as you plunge toward it. With a shudder, you pass within. Suddenly you are standing on a white dais in a great translucent chamber. Crystal walls reflect the dozen great dragons surrounding you. Xerefri murmurs a greeting as he takes his place among them. “My lord, the heroes are here.” Bahamut awaited the arrival of the adventurers with his exarch war council comprised of a dozen metallic dragons of great size and age. Silver and gold, copper and iron, and all the other hues of the metallic dragon races are here, but there is no mistaking the monumental figure that all give fealty to. Bahamut towers before you once more, proud and mighty. But then the great Platinum Dragon dips his head, slightly but significantly. One by one, the other dragons follow, lowering their heads nearly to the level of yours in a majestic salute. “Friends,” Bahamut rumbles. “Champions. Welcome.”
J a n u a r y 2 010
|
D u n g e o n 174
25
Test of Fire
Fortunes of War
What happened to Amyria? Is she truly gone?
What is Tiamat doing in the City of Brass?
The heroes are made welcome to the Crystal Tear, a bounded astral dominion of sweeping crystal chambers set with pillars of platinum and other precious metals. This is the war room and council chamber from which Bahamut and his exarchs direct the battle against the armies of Tiamat. After a drawn-out process of introduction between the characters and the council, Bahamut directs the characters to private chambers, saying he will meet them shortly for further conversation. The adventurers’ quarters are in an opulent wing of marble halls whose shape and contents are divinely mutable according to the characters’ own will. Bahamut comes to the characters a few hours later, but the characters might be shocked to see the form he has taken—a venerable human male with a fringe of white hair and a snow-white beard. Though his platinum robes are a far cry from the peasant’s garb he once wore, the same seven yellow canaries perch on Bahamut’s shoulders as when the heroes met him in the lost mines of Karak (Dungeon® #159). The adventurers no doubt have countless questions, and Bahamut is happy to provide answers as he explains the purpose of his summons.
“Amyria was possessed of a splinter of my consciousness and life force, not unlike that which manifested to aid you in the Karak Lode. The creation of that fragment was a gamble against fate which would have failed countless times if not for Amyria’s bravery, and yours. Though I have not yet regained my full strength, by her sacrifice I live again. As to her ultimate fate, that is no more known to me than is the fate of any of us.”
“The Dragon Queen has entered into dark bargains with the Lord of the Efreets, the powerful and powerhungry Bashumgarda. He believes that this alliance will grant him control of the Elemental Chaos, but Tiamat’s treachery runs deep. Her ritualists have used the great knowledge of the efreets to channel the raw energy of the elements. She intends to claim the efreets’ power as her own and to infuse her armies with elemental might that could tip the tide of battle.”
Was the bird man in the Karak Lode really you? “Yes and no. That was not I in the way you see me now—the whole of my physical presence and consciousness. Rather, think of that figure as an avatar of sorts, unaware of me as I was unaware of it, but roaming the mortal realm as a fragment of my mind and will. Even then, it seems that the fates already knew our paths were intertwined.”
What is this place? “The Crystal Tear is an astral dominion forged by my will and the power of my exarchs. It is home and council chamber, a site whose edges touch all other planes and from which we can observe the war against Tiamat as it rages across those planes.” How goes the war? Haven’t Tiamat’s plans been broken by your return? “The war has turned under the pressure of a tide that the Dragon Queen could never have predicted, but it is not won. The forces of good and law hold their own, but Tiamat’s power is carved out by treachery. With each failure, the Dragon Queen need simply seek the next betrayal that will fuel her ambition. “The word of my return shattered the resolve of Tiamat’s forces and gave our own armies a much-needed chance to regroup. In the weeks since my return, we have taken the fight to them, and we are near the endgame now.” What is that endgame? What are Tiamat’s plans? “The Dragon Queen has sent nearly half her remaining force to her last redoubt in the planes—the City of Brass in the Elemental Chaos. Already, our forces lay siege against her blue exarch who stands in command there, but his power is formidable. He is an ancient wyrm named Namissi whose thirst for blood is unequalled. We must break his defense, and time is short.”
How long will the siege continue? “We might break the magical wards that protect the city and Tiamat’s army within a week … if we had that much time. We do not. Just as the arcane wards of efreet and dragon hold us at bay, our ritualists have sealed the basalt plain of the city and the Sea of Fire against Tiamat’s remaining armies which are amassing to break our siege. Using the power of the Well of Worlds, dragon ritualists have effectively blocked the Elemental Chaos to planar travel by Tiamat’s forces, but we cannot maintain those wards for long. Within a day, Tiamat’s forces will batter through our barrier and we will be caught between two armies. We must take the city, and quickly.” What do you need us to do? “The City of Brass is sealed against physical incursion, the power of teleportation, and all forms of planar travel. Bashumgarda holds the city in an iron grip, and his allegiance to Tiamat will not waver. Our spies have determined, however, that there are cracks in both of these defenses. Although Bashumgarda promised his people power, Tiamat’s forces have taken over in all but name. Many of the efreet nobles now chafe under Bashumgarda’s reign. One of those, the lord Estumishu, has sway over the nobility
J a n u a r y 2 010
|
D u n g e o n 174
26
Test of Fire
and a claim to the throne of the Charcoal Palace as strong as Bashumgarda’s. By magical communication, we have treated with him, but he will not commit to joining us. A direct appeal—a meeting within the city itself—must change his mind.” How will an envoy get into the City of Brass? “One of Estumishu’s followers has aided us there, with rumors of an ancient portal set within a shrine inside the city. Its power is primordial in origin, so it is not hindered by Tiamat’s magic. This Portal of Forgotten Fire connects to another primordial shrine lost in the legendary Keening Delve. That warren of timeless tunnels and cursed ruins sits not far from the City of Brass, but its narrow passages cannot be trod by dragons. A group of mortals must find their way through the delve and enter the city. “Estumishu negotiates from a position of both power and pride. Those who treat with him must be able to do so as his equals and to speak with Bahamut’s voice. This mission cannot fail, my friends. I trust it to no one but you.”
Preparations Once the characters agree to undertake Bahamut’s mission to the City of Brass, they are given a few hours to prepare. The party’s goals as set out by Bahamut are: F Enter the Keening Delve and locate the shrine containing the Portal of Forgotten Fire. F Gate across to the City of Brass and meet with Estumishu’s contact. F Attend a summit with the efreet noble and convince him and his followers to aid Bahamut’s cause. Bahamut does not know the specifics of what the heroes will face in the Keening Delve, but he can provide the information outlined under “The Keening
Delve,” below. He also briefs the characters regarding their contact in the City of Brass.
Test of Fire
“Estumishu’s agent is an efreet named Selerin. It is she who has been our go-between and who will take you to a secret council where you will speak. We know little of Estumishu except his hatred for Bashumgarda. He is a noteworthy noble of the efreets, but wickedness runs deep in even the best of their kind. It is said that his followers call him ‘The Smiling King,’ but I fear your reception may not be a friendly one.” Bahamut will send the adventurers to within striking distance of their destination—a particular warren of the Keening Delve where the shrine concealing the Gate of Forgotten Fire is said to be found. Bahamut does not yet know, however, that persuading Estumishu and his followers to rise up against Tiamat will require that the heroes kill Bashumgarda. The characters will discover this only in the course of their negotiations. Likewise, Bahamut is only partly correct in his assessment of Tiamat’s reasons for holding the City of Brass. The Dragon Queen’s plots to augment her forces with elemental power are already well underway (the characters will discover this in the course of the adventure—see page 27 for details). A strict 24-hour time frame for the mission is not an absolute requirement. The adventurers should, however, have a clear sense that time is of the essence. The events in the City of Brass happen at a fast pace, and the characters can take only two extended rests during this adventure—one in the aftermath of the Keening Delve, the other while in the city (see the “Through the City of Brass” skill challenge, page 38, for more information). When the heroes are ready, Bahamut leads them to the council chamber where Xerefri waits to take them to the Elemental Chaos.
As befits the home of the Efreets, the City of Brass is a settlement whose strength is built on the power of elemental fire. Hundreds of thousands of non-efreets also dwell here. Members of the mortal races find the environment within the city searingly hot but ultimately manageable. The adventurers’ mission to the City of Brass will see them exposed to the realm’s most potent hazards. If none of the characters have any way to reduce at least some damage from exposure to fire (through powers or magic items), consider having Bahamut offer each hero a potion of resistance as part of the treasure given out for this adventure. Likewise, potions of resistance can find their way into the treasure found during the adventure (including gifts bestowed by Estumishu). On the other hand, if the characters have somehow all picked up full-time fire immunity by this point in their adventuring careers, their excursion into the City of Brass might prove less challenging than you’d like. In such a case, feel free to chip away at the heroes’ immunity from time to time. The elite defenders of the City of Brass might be specially trained to overcome immunity to fire, expecting that creatures intent on attacking the city would depend on such a defense. This training could take the form of the following power which can be added to any creature:
Defender of the Flame (minor; recharge ⚃ ⚄ ⚅) This creature makes a basic attack that deals fire damage against a creature with immunity to fire. On a hit, the target takes no damage but loses its immunity to fire until the end of this creature’s next turn.
J a n u a r y 2 010
|
D u n g e o n 174
27
Test of Fire
Part Two: Forgotten Fire In order to breach the nigh-impenetrable defenses of the City of Brass, the adventurers must seek out an ancient primordial shrine in the heart of the Keening Delve—a legendary labyrinth twisting deep into the elemental rock on which the City of Brass is built.
Arriving in the Elemental Chaos A planar portal summoned by Xerefri brings the heroes to a rocky plateau above the City of Brass. Characters who have played “Beyond the Mottled Tower” (Dungeon #163) have seen the great Sea of Fire before, but the view from the vast basalt plate on which the City of Brass stands is more impressive by far. With a shudder, the council chamber and Bahamut melt away to a field of shimmering silver, then a haze of red firelight and seething smoke. The heat hits like a hammer as you find yourselves standing atop a high bluff of black stone. To one side, a field of basalt stretches as far as the eye can see. To the other, perhaps three miles away if distance is reckoned here as it is in the world, the roiling Sea of Fire blazes with an unholy light. At the sea’s edge, the walls of the great City of Brass burn with the brightness of molten gold. The light of the city is dimmed by a seething dome of magical force that surrounds it on all sides. Pressed up against this barrier, an army stands ready. Smaller figures and their camps spread around the walls of the city, but it is the dragons that dominate the field—a force perhaps five thousand strong.
Even at this distance, their battle cries ring loud over the roar of the sea and over a distant shrieking that seems to rise from the empty basalt plain behind you. Xerefri growls as he cranes his long neck toward that shrieking, away from the city. “There,” he says, indicating a great red-black rift that splits the ground a mile away. “May fate and goodness guide thee.” Then with a crack of thunder and a blast of wind, the silver exarch is gone.
The Keening Delve The vast basalt plate on which the City of Brass stands is threaded by an ageless and endless series of tunnels cut through a great mass of blood-red rock, as introduced in Manual of the Planes. The Keening Delve is a labyrinthine warren of ruined tunnels and caverns threaded by an endless shrieking wind—according to
A Lasting Coalition This penultimate episode of the Scales of War adventure path provides a good opportunity to pull together the threads and events of previous adventures, showing how Bahamut’s forces are drawn from a wide range of races and planes. If the adventurers liberated Nefelus in “Alliance at Nefelus” (Dungeon #165), that city-state’s deva mages should be front and center in Bahamut’s forces. If the heroes negotiated an alliance with Gith in “A Tyranny of Souls” (Dungeon #168), flying githyanki warships share the skies over the City of Brass with Bahamut’s dragons. Here and in the final battle (Encounters F1 and F2), the characters should see that their earlier efforts have paid off as the adventure path pushes toward Tiamat’s endgame.
legend, the echoing scream of a primordial slain in the Dawn War. In the heart of the Elemental Chaos, Haemnathuun fought against Bahamut, Bane, and Ioun, and was slain. Countless centuries later, the wind that is his dying breath has scoured his former citadel into ruin. The Keening Delve is a place of madness and mystery now inhabited by slaads, demons, elementals, and other foul creatures. Great treasures are said to be lost there, including artifacts and magic from the Dawn War. Some say that Haemnathuun’s living heart still beats at the center of this labyrinth, patiently awaiting the chance to be reborn.
Days of Future Passed The portion of the Keening Delve presented in this adventure is one small fragment of this site’s endless maze of tunnels and caverns. The full extent of the ruins is outside the scope of the adventure—and, most likely, outside the interest of the heroes at this late stage of their adventuring careers. If you like continuity in your campaigns, a new generation of heroes might return to this spot in the long aftermath of the Scales of War, and hear legends or see signs of the adventurers’ presence here as they undertake their own expedition into the Keening Delve.
J a n u a r y 2 010
|
D u n g e o n 174
28
Test of Fire
Features of the Keening Delve
Approach and Entrance
The caverns and chambers of the Keening Delve share the following common features. Illumination: Except as indicated in the encounter descriptions, there is no light in any of the caverns of the Keening Delve. Walls, Floors, and Ceilings: Passageways in the delve run from 6 to 10 feet high; caverns and chambers are typically 20 to 30 feet high. Walls, floors, and ceilings are all rough stone, even in areas that were clearly once finished chambers. There are numerous areas on the map where passageways are so narrow that Medium creatures must squeeze to gain access. Blood Rock: Areas of mottled red-black stone across the cavern floor are blood rock, infused with the energy of ancient battles fought here. These patches of stone do not stand out unless the characters make specific attempts to discern them (a DC 28 Perception or Arcana check). A creature standing in an area of blood rock scores a critical hit on a natural die roll of 19 or 20. Keening Wail: The Keening Delve rings out constantly with the shriek of a wailing wind. The ever-present din of this keening wail bestows a –10 penalty to Perception checks made in the Keening Delve and makes it impossible for creatures to communicate using speech at a distance of more than 10 squares.
The heroes can easily make their way across the basalt flats to the fissure that marks this entrance to the Keening Delve. The shrieking wind grows louder as you approach, to the point where speech becomes impossible at anything less than a shout. The red-black scar plunges deep into the basalt plain, forming a rough passageway leading down into darkness. Unless you wish to develop further sections of the Keening Delve as a preamble to the characters’ adventures in the City of Brass, the passageway runs approximately one-quarter mile before emerging in area K1 (see below).
Additional Encounters in the Keening Delve Although much of this section of the Keening Delve is uninhabited, it should inspire caution and careful exploration on the part of the adventurers. The heroes should not automatically know that these areas are empty, so as to keep them on their toes when the encounters come. You can fill some of these empty spaces with additional encounters if you desire. In particular, if the heroes are not already at least halfway through 27th level, add enough level-appropriate encounters to the Keening Delve to bring them close to 28th level by the time they reach the City of Brass. Set up additional encounters in the Keening Delve by choosing encounter groups from those listed below, or use these groups as inspiration for creating your own encounters.
J a n u a r y 2 010
|
D u n g e o n 174
29
Test of Fire
Denizens of the Delve Creatures of all sorts, from demons to elementals to mortal explorers, are drawn to the mysteries of the Keening Delve. Level 25 Encounter (XP 35,400) F 1 eladrin lich (level 24 elite controller, MM 176) F 2 mariliths (level 24 elite skirmisher, MM 57) F 2 soulspike devourers (level 20 elite soldier, MM 69)
Level 26 Encounter (XP 54,000) F 1 balor (level 27 elite brute, MM 53) F 1 beholder eye of chaos (level 25 elite artillery, MM2 25) F 1 thunderblast cyclone (level 26 elite artillery, MM 105 or encounter K2)
Level 27 Encounter (XP 60,300) F 2 abyssal rotfiends (level 26 controller, MM 52 or Encounter K3) F 1 efreet karadjin (level 28 soldier, MM 100) F 1 efreet pyresinger (level 25 controller, MM 99) F 1 glabrezu (level 23 elite brute, MM 54) F 2 great flameskulls (level 24 artillery, MM 109)
Traps and Hazards In addition to creature-based encounters, an expanded Keening Delve can feature a range of traps and hazards. Entropic Collapse: Upgrade this hazard from level 23 to level 27 with a +4 bonus to attack rolls and a +2 bonus to damage rolls (DMG 92). Haemnathuun’s Heart: A fragment of the fallen primordial’s crystalline heart creates a deadly trap at the center of an ancient shrine. Modify a soul gem (DMG 93) to deal psychic damage instead of radiant damage. Symbol of Suffering: Upgrade this hazard from level 24 to level 26 with a +2 bonus to attack rolls and a +1 bonus to damage rolls (DMG 93). Voice of Chaos: The walls of a ruined cavern echo and amplify the keening wail of the delve to a deadly hazard. Modify a far realm star trap (DMG2 74) to incorporate shimmering fields of sonic energy instead of motes (Perception DC 26 to notice). The hazard deals psychic damage instead of radiant damage.
J a n u a r y 2 010
|
D u n g e o n 174
30
Test of Fire
Keening Delve Encounters
K2: Elemental Rift
To the City of Brass
As they seek the Portal of Forgotten Fire, the characters must contend with some of the mad denizens of the Keening Delve.
Raw elemental energy pours forth from a great rift in the heart of this section of the Keening Delve.
Once the portal has been activated, the characters can step through it to be taken to the City of Brass (see below). The portal sits on the surface of the lava pool and does not confer any protection against fire to those who plunge into it. A creature using the portal takes 2d6 + 8 fire damage.
K1: Slaad Outpost A slaad war party makes use of an ancient portal to come and go from this ruined shrine. As the adventurers move in from the entrance to the Keening Delve, read: The narrow passage twists sharply as it descends, requiring a combination of squeezing and careful climbing to navigate. The keening wail of wind never lets up, even as the passage begins to straighten and level after perhaps a quarter-mile of slow movement. From ahead, the pitch-black darkness shows a sudden flare of light. The passage appears to end at a narrow stone shelf some hundred strides ahead, a dimly lit cavern beyond.
Tactical Encounter: K1. Slaad Outpost (page 29).
When the characters are within 50 feet of either entrance, read: From ahead, a distant din rises—a sound like an approaching storm, thunder echoing over the shrieking wind. The rift is a hazard that the heroes must cross, but deadlier still are the elemental creatures drawn to its power. Tactical Encounter: K2. Planar Rift (page 31).
K3: Primordial Shrine This ancient shrine is home to a group of demons that make use of its latent planar power. Even over the noise of the wind, the adventurers can gain an advance warning of what awaits them. When the characters are within 30 feet of the entrance to the shrine, read: Faintly over the shriek of the keening wail that threads the caverns, a voice can be heard, shouting. Perception Check, for a hero who understands Abyssal DC 33: The shrill tones of a demon howl in Abyssal, berating a servant from the sounds of it. The lava vent in the upper right arm of the chamber is the Portal of Forgotten Fire, which connects to an abandoned primordial temple in the City of Brass. Tactical Encounter: K3. Primordial Shrine (page 33).
Part Three: The City of Brass The adventurers’ mission for Bahamut takes them into the City of Brass—the great home of efreets and the heart of trade and commerce in the Elemental Chaos. The City of Brass is introduced in Manual of the Planes, and the information presented here is taken from that supplement. Efreet culture and society is explored in more detail in The Plane Below.
City of Brass Traits Type: Elemental realm. Size and Shape: Walled metropolis surrounded by a sea of fire; bounded. Gravity: Elemental buoyancy. Mutability: Normal. Fire Affinity: Attacks with the fire keyword gain a +1 bonus to the attack roll, and attacks with the cold keyword deal half damage (ongoing cold damage is not affected).
J a n u a r y 2 010
|
D u n g e o n 174
31
Test of Fire
Arriving in the City of Brass The Portal of Forgotten Fire takes the heroes to a secret primordial shrine in the Ashlarks ward. (See the “Through the City of Brass” skill challenge on page 38 for general information on this ward and all areas of the city.) A sudden lurch spills you to the stone floor of a chamber brightly lit by stone braziers. Ancient Primordial runes which match those seen in the Keening Delve line the walls, marking this place as another shrine. As you look around, you are distracted by movement. A young efreet female leaps to her feet where she appears to have been dozing in the corner. She nods deferentially. “I am Selerin, servant of my lord Estumishu. Please, follow me.” Though not overly friendly, Selerin is deferential to the characters. She answers any questions put to her but knows little of the party’s mission other than that they are to meet with Estumishu and that the efreet noble is waiting.
The City of Brass The City of Brass is the grand home of the efreets, the greatest settlement in the Elemental Chaos, and the most significant center of trade and commerce in all the planes. The city is detailed in Manual of the Planes, but much of the information in that book has been summarized and reworked for this adventure in Encounter B2 (starting on page 38).
The City of Brass The capital city of the efreets, the City of Brass is the marketplace of the universe, where virtually anything can be bought or sold. Population: Approximately 500,000. Efreets form the upper class of the city, with only a handful of disgraced members standing outside the noble caste. Other residents include salamanders, archons, azers, genasi, fire giants and titans, demons, and other intelligent elemental creatures, as well as a smaller number of visitors and immigrants from the natural world. Roughly two-thirds of the city’s residents are slaves. Government: Bashumgarda is the Lord of the Efreets, ruling the city from his Charcoal Palace. Defense: An entire caste of slaves are born and raised as soldiers to defend the City of Brass against incursion from the wider Elemental Chaos and the Abyss. These include archons, azers, and salamanders. A corps of fanatical efreet warriors called the Unquenchable patrol the Charcoal Palace. The city guard, housed in the Ashlarks district, consists primarily of archon and salamander soldiers. Inns and Taverns: The best place for visitors to find food or lodging is the district of Iskalat, near the city’s harbor. The inns and taverns ringing the harbor
cater to travelers from across the Elemental Chaos and other planes beyond. Guests are advised to keep a close eye on their valuables and be wary of con artists, but little risk of death or enslavement exists. Supplies: Commoner’s Market; Street of Steel in the Keffinspires; Marlgate warehouses; Pyraculum bazaar. Anything can be bought in the City of Brass. The Commoner’s Market in the district of Avencina is an ideal place to secure both ordinary and exotic goods of a nonmagical nature. The Keffinspires district is home to most of the city’s smiths, who make and sell magical and mundane items including weapons and armor. The warehouses of the Marlgate district hold goods brought from across the planes for trade in the city, and the bazaars of Pyraculum offer the greatest diversity of high-quality goods. Temples: The City of Brass is hostile to worshipers of the deities. It houses no public temples to any gods. The primordial known as the Fire Lord, Imix, has an opulent temple in the Furnace called the Eternal Flame Pavilion. Residents of the city are strongly encouraged to offer praise and gratitude to the lord of the Charcoal Palace in large shrines located in each district.
J a n u a r y 2 010
|
D u n g e o n 174
32
Test of Fire
Features of the City of Brass
City of Brass Encounters
The streets and public spaces of the City of Brass share the following common features. Illumination: The City of Brass is brightly lit at all times. The Sea of Fire, its canals, and hanging lamppots of unquenchable elemental fire all add to the fiery illumination cast off by the city’s efreet residents and the countless other fire creatures that dwell here.
The characters have come to the City of Brass expecting only to have to broker an alliance with the noble Estumishu. Winning the support of the efreets for an insurrection against Bashumgarda and Tiamat will prove to be a complicated task.
The Secret Shrine The secret shrine is set within the enclave of a lesser noble (an ally beholden to Estumishu). A false door leads out to an elevated courtyard. This residential area is empty at present on Estumishu’s orders. From the courtyard, the adventurers can catch sight of the street below and get their first glimpse of the City of Brass preparing for war. The City of Brass is well known as a center of commerce and interplanar trade, but the city you see as you follow Selerin across the courtyard bears no resemblance to the tales you’ve heard. The streets throng not with merchants and planar travelers but with armed troops. Elite efreet guard squads march along the main roads or soar above them. Packs of azers and archons, genasi and salamanders stand guard at every intersection, their slave status marked by the bracelets at their wrists. Everywhere, the servants of Tiamat show their control over the city. Dragonspawn lead squads of slave warriors or bark orders to scowling efreets. Dragons of every size perch atop buildings or soar overhead. The largest of these is a gargantuan blue beast whose terrible cry echoes across the city as he wings his way along the underside of the shimmering force dome. On the other side of that barrier, Bahamut’s forces circle in response, watching and waiting for their chance to attack.
B1: Efreet Alliance Estumishu has chosen the location of the meeting for maximum security. The heroes go unnoticed along the short journey from the shrine. At the end of the courtyard, a wide flight of stairs leads down into darkness. At the bottom, brass double doors open at a coded knock from Selerin. She nods as she falls back to let you enter. Inside, a dozen efreet guards lining both sides of a wide marble corridor watch darkly as you pass between them. Beyond the end of the corridor, a massive vaulted chamber opens up, its roof rising into shadow a hundred feet overhead. Braziers and torches along all the walls shed light against a shroud of smoke and heat haze and show that the floor rises in six great tiers around a central open court twenty paces on a side. This place is one of the many Crucible Courts of the City of Brass—great meeting halls where efreet nobles work out disputes with a combination of subtle diplomacy and brutal martial skill.
J a n u a r y 2 010
|
D u n g e o n 174
33
Test of Fire
The tiers of the room might hold three-hundred efreets packed shoulder to shoulder, but only a dozen are here now, alone at the far end of the chamber. At their center stands a hulking figure in fine jewelry and with a gem-studded scimitar at his belt to demonstrate his rank. As you approach, the figure seems to offer you an awkward smile, but that grin is overshadowed by the burning anger of his eyes. “Welcome,” the efreet noble says, but there is no hint of welcome in his voice. His great protruding teeth flash the false smile again as he appraises you, one by one. “You stand before Estumishu. Speak the will of your masters, and quickly.” Persuading Estumishu to support Bahamut’s cause and lead the angry efreet nobility in an uprising against Tiamat will be an arduous process for the adventurers. A complex skill challenge provides the framework for these unique negotiations. Skill Challenge: B1. Efreet Alliance (page 36).
Bashumgarda Must Die The characters’ success or failure sets the groundwork for their subsequent adventures in the City of Brass. Finding and killing Bashumgarda is the only way to win Estumishu’s allegiance. This new mission can be pressed upon the party in one of two ways.
Success If the heroes succeed at the skill challenge, they win Estumishu’s favor. The Smiling King’s smirk is real as he lays out his terms. “You have carried yourselves favorably. Honor to your masters and to you. Estumishu, true Lord of the Efreets and challenger to the traitor Bashumgarda, will ally as agreed with Bahamut and the forces of the Platinum Dragon on the following three conditions: all dragons and dragonkin are to quit the City of Brass, which shall be returned to the rule of the efreets; the wealth of the Dragon Queen’s armies shall
remain in the city to offset debts incurred by Bashumgarda’s treachery; and the gates of the city shall be opened to Bahamut’s forces only once Bashumgarda is slain.” Whether or not the players saw this development coming, the characters are likely to want to argue their sudden involvement in an assassination. Estumishu will not back down from this demand, because an assassination attempt by outsiders leads to a guaranteed win for him regardless of whether it succeeds or fails. If the adventurers kill Bashumgarda, Estumishu takes the throne with nothing connecting him to the killing, making it easier for him to bring Bashumgarda loyalists under his control. If the heroes fail to kill Bashumgarda, the attempt will drive Bashumgarda into a rage and draconian countermeasures that alienate even more of his followers and shift the balance of power further in Estumishu’s favor. Estumishu has no interest in further discussion. He and his entourage leave the Crucible Court immediately once his demands have been declared.
Failure If the characters fail the skill challenge, Estumishu makes no effort to hide his disdain. “You are mortal children playing at the tasks of heroes. Go back to your Bahamut with this message: Your war means nothing and your forces will fall, as will Tiamat’s armies, in one year, or ten, or one hundred. For as long as we must, the efreets shall endure, and we will not forget the treachery of dragonkind.” The efreet lord and his entourage leave the Crucible Court, taking to the air once outside. As soon as the adventurers leave, however, a voice calls to them. “My lord Estumishu is great, but his wrath is easily kindled. Forgive him, please.” From the smoke and shadow of the stairs, Selerin steps forth and bows to you. “I am not worthy
of rank to enter the Crucible Court, but I have heard its outcome. My loyalty is to my lord Estumishu but also to my city and its people. I sense you are loyal to your masters. If they would see the City of Brass join with them against the Dragon Queen, there is still a way.”
The Price of Failure The adventurers’ mission to kill Bashumgarda is challenging enough in and of itself. However, failure in this skill challenge makes the task even more daunting. Success in this challenge means that Estumishu provides the characters with enough information to guide them relatively safely on their journey across the city. In addition to the heroes receiving a general overview of the City of Brass and its wards (see “Movement Through the City” on page 43), the efreet noble’s assistance establishes the baseline DCs and the strength of encounters in the “Through the City of Brass” skill challenge (see below). A failure in this challenge means that the characters must set out with only the minimal knowledge of the city given to them by Selerin. This covers the overview of the city and its wards. The adventurers’ lack of specific knowledge forces them to start the “Through the City of Brass” skill challenge with two failures and all the penalties those failures impose. See that challenge (and specifically the “Success and Failure” section) on page 46 for more information. Estumishu will not allow any of his servants to accompany the heroes on their quest, because he cannot afford to be connected to their actions. Likewise, the young Selerin is a mid-paragon level combatant at best and cannot travel with the characters.
J a n u a r y 2 010
|
D u n g e o n 174
34
Test of Fire
Instead of Estumishu, it is Selerin who tasks the characters with killing Bashumgarda—but as a plea, not an order.
the magical wards that hold Bahamut’s forces at bay, and Bashumgarda controls the scepter. With Bashumgarda dead, those wards can be broken.”
“Lord Bashumgarda has lost the favor of more noble houses than he knows. My lord Estumishu is strongest of those, but there are others. If Bashumgarda falls, they will rally against the blue exarch, whether or not Estumishu leads them. The scepter of the city controls the gates and
Before undertaking their mission into the city, the heroes can return to the secret shrine to take an extended rest. They have only one other opportunity to take an extended rest while in the city.
B2: Through the City of Brass The adventurers learn Bashumgarda’s location from Estumishu or Selerin (depending on the outcome of the previous skill challenge). “The false Lord of the Efreets is rarely seen outside the barracks of the Ring of Fire. He claims to hold court there with his military advisors, but it is fear that keeps him within. Gain the barracks and you find him.” The heroes must make their way to the Furnace—the political heart of the City of Brass and site of the Charcoal Palace. Meeting the Lord of the Efreets in combat comes only at the end of an arduous journey. The characters begin the challenge alone in the courtyard adjoining the now-deserted Crucible Court. From there, they gain a more detailed view of the city and can strategize. Preparations for battle seem to hold the city in an iron grip. In addition to the movements of guards and troops noted earlier, wagons heaped high with arms and armor are in constant motion along the streets, which are packed with throngs of efreets and lesser city folk. Moving within the city and under the watchful eye of Tiamat’s forces will be a challenge of the highest order. The heroes’ journey from Ashlarks to the Furnace takes the form of a complex skill challenge that triggers the following three tactical encounters as well as additional encounters with wandering patrols. This travel must be undertaken on foot; teleportation has been shut down by the powerful magical wards protecting the city, and flying would drastically increase the number of encounters the adventurers will face. (Point this out if the players seem inclined to flying.) See the skill challenge for more information. Skill Challenge: B2. Through the City of Brass (page 38). J a n u a r y 2 010
|
D u n g e o n 174
35
Test of Fire
The characters have a chance to take one extended rest at some point in their journey across the City of Brass. Their choice of when to do so should depend on how well they avoid patrols and how they fare in the encounters.
B3: Canal Crossing
B5: Lord of the Efreets
Fiery canals flow in from the Sea of Fire to crisscross the city. Crossing most canals is simply a matter of avoiding guards while moving over bridges, hopping across the decks of moored barges, or simply jumping at a narrow crossing. One well-watched crossing, however, requires a full assault against the guards. Tactical Encounter: B3. Canal Crossing (page 45). The choice of where to place encounter B3 is entirely up to you. It works best as the final canal the heroes must cross on their way toward the Furnace. Be aware that characters moving from Marlgate or Keffinspires to Avencina, or from Marlgate to the Char, have only one canal to cross.
The heroes make it to the Furnace as the “Through the City of Brass” skill challenge comes to an end. Bashumgarda is at the barracks of the Ring of Fire. The characters must deal with those fanatical guards before facing off against the Lord of the Efreets. Tactical Encounter: B5. Lord of the Efreets (page 49).
B4: Gate Crashers As the adventurers approach the Furnace, they must deal with the increased defenses of that most important ward. The walls in the interior of the city have been sealed, making it necessary for the heroes to fight their way through one of two great gates. Tactical Encounter: B4. Gate Crashers (page 47). This encounter takes place either at the Phoenix Gate (accessible only from Avencina or the Char) or at the Gate of the Fallen (accessible only from the Arches or the Foundry).
The Call to Battle With Bashumgarda dead or captured, any other efreets within sight of his battle with the adventurers quickly flee. Word of the fight spreads, but the heroes’ immediate concerns will override any threat of retaliation. The ceremonial scepter Bashumgarda carries is a magic item that controls the gates and the magical wards locking down the City of Brass. If the characters have not learned this from Selerin (see page 25), any Arcana check reveals the scepter’s powers. It then takes a DC 33 Arcana check to activate the scepter, allowing the wielder to will the gates open and the city’s magical defenses to fall. The blurred haze above the city shatters like glass. A crack of thunder shakes the ground as the dome of force shreds to gray smoke and ash which is torn away quickly by the wind. In the fading echo, a moment of stunned silence hangs. Then with the collective roar of ten-thousand dragons, the battle for the City of Brass begins.
J a n u a r y 2 010
|
D u n g e o n 174
36
Test of Fire
Part Four: Bahamut’s Fall The Eternal Flame Pavilion is a shrine to the primordial Fire Lord Imix, but its power has been corrupted by Tiamat. The Dragon Queen had hoped to use the City of Brass as the center of her campaign against the reborn Bahamut, with the power of the shrine fueling dark rituals that will imbue her forces with the raw energy of the Elemental Chaos. Now, only the characters can stop her. If they have not already done so, the heroes can take a short rest in the aftermath of the previous encounter. They have no chance to take an extended rest before the final two encounters.
Battleground
The heroes are likely to need a short rest after dispatching Bashumgarda, and they have plenty of time to do so. Even as Bahamut’s forces pour into the city, however, the scepter bestows information on the adventurer who used it to drop the defensive wards. The view from the slopes of the Furnace shows that as many efreets are fighting against Tiamat’s forces as are standing with them. Estumishu has his insurrection, whether he controls it or not. Just as the powers of the scepter became known to you, so does the corruption that infests it. Like a dark shadow, the knowledge of the pacts Bashumgarda
wrought with Tiamat twists through your mind. Those pacts involved more than just fealty and false promise. The shrine of the Fire Lord Imix at the Eternal Flame Pavilion is a site of great power revered by the efreets. That power has been corrupted by Tiamat, whose foul rituals now siphon off primordial, elemental energy from the shrine to the war dragons leading the battle against Bahamut’s forces. With the breaking of the magical wards around the city, similar wards governing the flow of energy through the shrine have also been shattered. If the corruption of the shrine is not ended, the Dragon Queen’s armies will drink fully of its power, becoming unstoppable before the end.
The battle raging around the characters is epic in both scale and scope, but their focus is on the Eternal Flame Pavilion on the far side of the Furnace. While it is certainly possible to expand this final section of the adventure, doing so is not recommended. The adventurers have no chance to take an extended rest in the heat of battle, and it’s likely they’ll have already expended resources in the battle with Bashumgarda. Taking on the guardians of Imix’s shrine and Tiamat’s blue exarch might well be an impossible challenge. Once the magical wards that protect the city have been dropped, teleportation is no longer shut down within the city. Likewise, with the city’s efreets and dragons locked in combat, the heroes can fly without repercussion.
J a n u a r y 2 010
|
D u n g e o n 174
37
Test of Fire
Bahamut’s Fall Encounters
F2: Namissi’s Revenge
As the battle for the City of Brass rages around them, the characters must break Tiamat’s control of the shrine of the Fire Lord Imix, then undertake a final battle against Tiamat’s blue exarch for the fate of a wounded god.
Still weakened from his rebirth, Bahamut has fallen in battle with the blue exarch Namissi. Only the characters can save him. Tactical Encounter: F2. Namissi’s Revenge (page 55).
F1: Eternal Flame
Conclusion
As the adventurers prepare to assault the Eternal Flame Pavilion, Bahamut enters the fray above them.
With the death of Namissi and the breaking of Tiamat’s control over the shrine of Imix, the Dragon Queen’s forces are quickly routed by the remainder of Bahamut’s army and the forces of the City of Brass.
The battle above and across the city is a maelstrom of draconic fury. Storms of fire and lightning tear the sky, louder than the shrieks of the dying and the roar of the victorious. At the center of the carnage, the great blue exarch Namissi fights with the speed of a creature half his size. Bahamut’s forces fall as fast as they can throw themselves at him. The exarch and the war dragons closest to him are surrounded by a shroud of fire, the product of Tiamat’s foul magic and the energy of the shrine. Then, a white light flares to scour the city’s shroud of black smoke. Bahamut leads the charge of his exarchs through the sky, smashing into Namissi’s forces like a living wave. As Bahamut and Namissi fight, you see and hear the pain in the Platinum Dragon’s roar. The aura of primordial fire that Namissi wields can burn even a god! Smoke and flame wrap around both dragons like a shroud. This is a good place to remind players that Bahamut is still weak from his rebirth. If Bahamut and his forces are to triumph, Tiamat’s control over the shrine of Imix must be broken. Tactical Encounter: F1. Eternal Flame (page 52).
While the battle winds down, the heroes can descend to the rubble pile where Bahamut is half-buried. Thankfully, their worst fears are soon allayed. Beneath the fall of rubble, Bahamut still lives. His great sides heave as he draws ragged breaths and his bright eyes slowly open. Rubble spills like water from his scorched scales as, with labored strength, the Platinum Dragon rises. Though badly wounded, Bahamut is in no danger of dying again. His weakness endures, however, and sets up the events of the final episode in the adventure path.
Champions of Bahamut The City of Brass has been devastated by the battle, but the efreets will rebuild. With Bashamgurda and Namissi gone, Estumishu quickly establishes consensus among the efreets for his claim to the throne even as he offers his unwavering loyalty to Bahamut. (If the heroes failed the earlier skill challenge, they can take an active role in new negotiations to secure Estumishu’s fealty. Having demonstrated their full power, they should have no trouble persuading the new Lord of the Efreets to parley.) When the battle is done and the characters have taken a well-deserved rest, Bahamut summons them to the ruined courtyard of the Charcoal Palace. Amid the rubble and ruin, an honor guard of efreets and dragons flanks you on both sides. “Champions,” the Platinum Dragon says again, “your bravery has won the battle for the City of Brass. The Dragon Queen’s forces are routed, her blue exarch slain. This is a great day … but I fear it will end again in darkness before the dawn can finally be won.” The adventurers have won the day and saved Bahamut, but their battle against Tiamat is not over yet.
J a n u a r y 2 010
|
D u n g e o n 174
38
Test of Fire
Encounter K1: Slaad Outpost Encounter Level 27 (64,000 XP)
Setup 1 black slaad overlord (B) 1 red slaad reaver (R) 4 black slaad void nexus (E) If the black slaad void nexus successfully summons reinforcements, one additional red slaad reaver and four more void nexuses show up as described in Tactics. The level of ambient noise in the Keening Delve allows the heroes to move along the upper passage unnoticed. The slaads automatically see any characters who draw attention to themselves (including approaching with bright light). When the adventurers can see into the cavern below, read: The passageway ends in a steep cliff dropping 30 feet to the rubble-strewn floor of a rough cavern. Four slaads stand to either side of a slab of glowing blood-red stone. Their erratic movements and howling voices suggest that some kind of ritual is in progress. Perception Check DC 17: Another cliff and a steep rubble slope mark a second cavern beyond, faintly lit by a pulsing blue light. DC 26: Two more slaads linger in the distant shadows. A dark ritual is in progress as the party approaches. Unless they are noticed, the characters can attack with surprise.
Tactics In its first round of combat, the black slaad voidhowler closest to the teleportation circle makes a ray of entropy attack, then steps into the circle and disappears. In the third round, that entropic returns with four other entropics and a red slaad reaver, which step out of the teleportation circle to attack at once. The overlord stays in constant motion, making chaos strikes against lightly armored foes. It uses black wrath the first time it can target two or more foes. The reavers use reaving leap as often as possible, making bite or claw attacks in other rounds. 2 Red Slaad Reavers (R)
Level 27 Soldier
Large elemental humanoid XP 11,000 each Initiative +22 Senses Perception +21; low-light vision HP 249; Bloodied 124 AC 43; Fortitude 40, Reflex 38, Will 37 Immune chaos phage (MM 239) Speed 8, teleport 4 m Bite (standard; at-will) Reach 2; +33 vs. AC; 3d10 + 5 damage, and the target is marked until the end of the reaver’s next turn. m Claw (standard; at-will) F Disease Reach 2; +33 vs. AC; 1d10 + 7 damage, and the slaad makes a secondary attack against the same target. Secondary Attack: +32 vs. Fortitude; on a hit, the target contracts chaos phage (MM 239). M Reaving Leap (standard; recharge 5 6 ) The slaad shifts 4 squares and makes two claw attacks at any point during that movement. If either claw attack hits, the target is slowed until the end of the slaad’s next turn. C Horrid Croak (standard; encounter) F Fear Close blast 5; +32 vs. Fortitude; the target is immobilized until the end of the slaad’s next turn. Alignment Chaotic evil Languages Primordial Skills Athletics +27, Stealth +25 Str 29 (+22) Dex 25 (+20) Wis 26 (+21) Con 25 (+20) Int 13 (+14) Cha 18 (+17)
The entropics spread out to avoid area attacks. They use ray of entropy whenever possible, falling back on claw attacks only when pressed into melee.
Development If the heroes attempt to flee, they are pursued by any surviving entropics. The overlord and the reavers pursue only if they are not bloodied. Black Slaad Overlord (B)
Level 29 Skirmisher
Large elemental humanoid XP 15,000 Initiative +26 Senses Perception +22; low-light vision HP 267; Bloodied 133; see also zone of oblivion AC 43; Fortitude 40, Reflex 42, Will 40 Immune disease; Resist insubstantial Speed 6, teleport 3 m Claw (standard; at-will) Reach 2; +36 vs. AC; 3d8 + 5 damage, and the target is slowed until the end of its next turn. M Chaos Strike (standard; at-will) The black slaad overlord shifts 3 squares and makes two claw attacks. If both attacks hit the same target, the target loses a healing surge. R Eye of the Overlord (standard; at-will) F Teleport Ranged 20; +34 vs. Reflex; 3d10 + 6 damage, and the overlord teleports to within 5 squares of the target. A Black Wrath (standard; encounter) F Necrotic Area burst 2 within 10; +34 vs. Fortitude; ongoing 10 necrotic damage, and the target is slowed (save ends both). C Zone of Oblivion (when the overlord drops to 0 hit points) F Zone Close burst 2; +34 vs. Reflex; 4d10 damage. The burst becomes a black void until the end of the encounter. The zone blocks line of sight. Any creature that enters the zone or starts its turn there takes 3d10 + 6 damage. Alignment Chaotic evil Languages Primordial Skills Athletics +26, Stealth +29 Str 25 (+21) Dex 30 (+24) Wis 26 (+22) Con 27 (+22) Int 15 (+16) Cha 19 (+18)
J a n u a r y 2 010
|
D u n g e o n 174
39
Test of Fire
8 Black Slaad Voidhowlers (E) Level 26 Minion Brute
Large elemental humanoid XP 2,250 each Initiative +21 Senses Perception +15; low-light vision HP 1; a missed attack never damages a minion; see also entropic void. AC 38; Fortitude 39, Reflex 38, Will 37 Immune disease Speed 6, teleport 3 m Claws (standard; at-will) Reach 2; +29 vs. AC; 12 damage, and until the start of the black slaad voidhowler’s next turn, the target takes 5 extra damage whenever the target is hit by an attack. r Ray of Entropy (standard; at-will) Ranged 20; +27 vs. Reflex; 10 damage, and ongoing 7 damage (save ends). C Nexus Void (immediate interrupt; when reduced to 0 hit points) Close burst 2; +27 vs. Fortitude; 10 damage, and the target is pulled 1 square. The voidhowler (see below) gains a +1 bonus to its next attack roll. Alignment Chaotic evil Languages Common, Primordial Skills Stealth +26 Str 29 (+22) Dex 26 (+21) Wis 15 (+15) Con 25 (+20) Int 12 (+14) Cha 25 (+20)
Entropic Nexus Hazard
Level 26 Lurker XP 9,000
A cloud of shimmering black energy suddenly flares above the blood-red altar, a shrieking roar rising as it advances. Hazard: The entropic nexus is a magically created gate to the Far Realm. It devours creatures, then spits them back out as horrid abominations. The entropic nexus fills an area 3 squares on a side. Perception F Perception cannot be used to notice this hazard before it appears. Once the entropic nexus appears above the altar, no check is necessary to notice it. Additional Skill: Arcana F DC 24: A character can identify the entropic nexus once it appears. Initiative +23 Trigger The entropic nexus appears and rolls initiative when any creature except a slaad moves adjacent to the altar.
Attack Move Action Personal The entropic nexus slides 6 squares toward the nearest nonslaad each round. Standard Action Melee reach 3 Target: A living creature Primary Attack: +29 vs. Reflex Hit: 3d10 + 5 damage, and the target is grabbed and pulled into a square adjacent to the entropic nexus. On each of its subsequent turns, the entropic nexus deals 3d10 + 5 damage to targets that it has grabbed. The nexus can grab up to eight targets at a time. Make a secondary attack against each grabbed and bloodied target. Secondary Attack: +29 vs. Fortitude Hit: The target is pulled into the Far Realm and removed from play. At the end of the nexus’s next turn, the target appears in an unoccupied space adjacent to the nexus. The target returns from the Far Realm as a misshapen and horrid version of its former self. It is helpless until a Remove Affliction ritual can be performed, at which point the target is no longer helpless and reverts to its former form. Countermeasures F A character who is trained in Arcana can engage in a skill challenge to banish the nexus: Arcana DC 31; complexity 1 (4 successes before 3 failures); each check is a standard action. Success in the challenge banishes the nexus. Failure in the challenge causes it to split into two unstable nexuses that occupy adjacent spaces. Each round, each unstable nexus rolls a saving throw at the end of its turn. On a failed saving throw, an unstable nexus winks out of existence.
any nonslaad moves adjacent to the altar, an entropic nexus erupts around it. See the hazard statistics block. Steep Slope: The chamber slopes steeply upward away from the entrance. A creature ascending the slope treats it as difficult terrain. A creature descending the slope or making a melee attack while on the slope must make a DC 20 Acrobatics check or fall prone. Teleportation Circle: A teleportation circle is set into the adjoining chamber. It is imbued with a permanent Planar Portal ritual that functions only for the slaads. Any nonslaad that moves adjacent to the circle takes 2d8 psychic damage. Any nonslaad that enters or starts its turn within the circle takes 4d8 psychic damage and is stunned (save ends).
Features of the Area Ceiling: 40 feet above the cavern floor; the entrance passageway is 10 feet high. Illumination: The altar stone and the teleportation circle glow to shed dim light throughout the area. Rubble: These areas of loose scree are difficult terrain. A creature that runs, charges, or makes a double move through rubble must make a DC 20 Acrobatics check or fall prone. Altar: A 2-foot-high slab of bloodstained rock serves as an altar to some unnamed Far Realm entity. The altar provides cover and is difficult terrain. If
J a n u a r y 2 010
|
D u n g e o n 174
40
Test of Fire
Encounter K2: Planar Rift Encounter Level 28 (69,500 XP)
Setup 1 thunderblast cyclone (T) Whichever path the adventurers take to approach this cavern, the view is the same. When the characters can see into this area, read: An enormous ovoid chamber opens up ahead, its uneven floor split from side to side. This great rift surges with the power of an elemental storm. Fierce winds swirl as gouts of fire and lightning touch the ceiling. Arcana Check DC 28: Pure elemental energy surges dangerously within the rift, but its full power waits to be unleashed. 6 Shardstorm Icewinds Level 27 Minion Skirmisher
Medium elemental magical beast XP 2,750 each (air, cold, earth) Initiative +24 Senses Perception +20 Iceblast aura 1; each enemy within the aura takes a –2 penalty to all defenses. The area of the aura is difficult terrain for creatures without ice walk. HP 1; a missed attack never damages a minion. AC 41; Fortitude 39, Reflex 40, Will 38 Immune cold, disease, poison Speed 0, fly 8 (hover) m Ice-Shard Slam (standard; at-will) F Cold +30 vs. Fortitude; 15 cold damage. Vortex Step (move; at-will) The shardstorm icewind shifts 4 squares. Alignment Unaligned Languages Primordial Str 13 (+14) Dex 29 (+22) Wis 24 (+20) Con 26 (+21) Int 7 (+11) Cha 9 (+12)
Perception Check DC 33: The swirling wind is more than just a product of the elemental rift. A thunderblast cyclone lurks at the center of the chamber.
Three shardstorm icewinds appear each round on the elemental rift’s initiative count. When all six icewinds have appeared (after two rounds), the caustic slayer appears (in the third round).
The heroes have ample time to strategize their approach. The elemental rift, however, is a more potent threat than the waiting cyclone. See the hazard statistics block and “Features of the Area” for details.
Caustic Slayer
When the rift activates, read: A sudden surge of elemental energy shakes the floor and walls of the cavern as the rift flares with a blinding white light. An unearthly shriek heralds the appearance of more elementals. Their swirling forms phase into view within the storm. Thunderblast Cyclone (T)
Level 26 Elite Artillery
Huge elemental magical beast (air, water) XP 18,000 Initiative +24 Senses Perception +16 HP 382; Bloodied 191 AC 42; Fortitude 40, Reflex 42, Will 35 Immune disease, poison; Resist 30 lightning, 30 thunder Saving Throws +2 Speed fly 10 (hover) Action Points 1 m Lightning Arc (standard; at-will) F Lightning Reach 3; +29 vs. Reflex; 2d8 + 11 lightning damage. r Lightning Bolt (standard; at-will) F Lightning Ranged 10; +29 vs. Reflex; 2d8 + 11 lightning damage. C Thunderclap (standard; at-will) F Thunder Close burst 2; +28 vs. Fortitude; 2d10 + 9 thunder damage. C Charged Mist (standard; recharge 5 6 ) F Lightning Close burst 3; automatic hit; 1d10 + 9 lightning damage, and the thunderblast cyclone becomes insubstantial until the end of its next turn. A Lightning Storm (standard; begins uncharged; recharges when the thunderblast cyclone uses charged mist) F Lightning, Thunder Area burst 3 within 20; +29 vs. Reflex; 6d8 + 9 lightning and thunder damage. Miss: Half damage. Alignment Unaligned Languages Primordial Str 25 (+20) Dex 32 (+24) Wis 17 (+16) Con 29 (+22) Int 8 (+12) Cha 15 (+15)
Level 27 Elite Lurker
Huge elemental magical beast (earth) XP 22,000 Initiative +27 Senses Perception +21 HP 388; Bloodied 194 AC 41; Fortitude 38, Reflex 40, Will 38 Immune disease, poison; Resist 30 acid Saving Throws +2 Speed 7 (earth walk), climb 7; see also malleable form Action Points 1 m Slam (standard; at-will) F Acid Reach 3; +30 vs. Fortitude; 1d10 + 8 damage, and ongoing 10 acid damage (save ends). If the target cannot see the caustic slayer, it instead takes 2d10 + 8 damage, and ongoing 15 acid damage (save ends). r Eyeburn (standard; at-will) F Acid Ranged 20; +30 vs. Reflex; 2d6 + 10 acid damage, and the target is blinded until the end of the caustic slayer’s next turn. M R Slayer’s Fury (standard; at-will) The caustic slayer makes two basic attacks. C Caustic Breath (standard; recharge 5 6 ) F Acid Close blast 5; +30 vs. Fortitude; 2d10 + 8 acid damage, and the target takes ongoing 10 acid damage and is slowed (save ends both). C Sight-Burning Cloud (standard; recharge 5 6 ) F Acid, Zone Close burst 2; the burst creates a zone of corrosive grit centered on the caustic slayer that lasts until the end of its next turn. When the slayer moves, the zone moves with it, remaining centered on it. Any creature that ends its turn within the zone takes 20 acid damage and is blinded until the end of its next turn. The zone’s area is heavily obscured for all creatures except the caustic slayer, which treats it as lightly obscured. Sustain Minor: The zone persists. Malleable Form A caustic slayer can squeeze through spaces as though it were a Large creature. Alignment Unaligned Languages Primordial Skills Stealth +28 Str 24 (+20) Dex 30 (+23) Wis 26 (+21) Con 26 (+21) Int 10 (+13) Cha 9 (+12)
J a n u a r y 2 010
|
D u n g e o n 174
41
Test of Fire
Elemental Rift Hazard
Level 28 Blaster XP 13,000
The cavern is split in two by a great rift surging with pure elemental energy. Hazard: The rift surges with raw elemental power, making it dangerous to creatures that get too close (see “Features of the Area”). In addition, the presence of creatures other than elementals causes the rift to flare up, creating a deadly hazard. Initiative +24 Trigger The elemental rift is triggered and rolls initiative when any creature that does not have the elemental origin approaches within 2 squares of it. Attack Standard Action Ranged 10 Target: 1d4 random creatures that do not have the elemental origin in range. Attack: +31 vs. Reflex Hit: 2d8 + 10 cold, fire, and lightning damage, and the target is dazed (save ends). Special: Once triggered, the elemental rift floods the cavern with unnaturally bright light. Any creature with darkvision must make a DC 26 Endurance check at the start of each of its turns or be dazed. Once a creature makes a successful check, it is immune to this effect. Elemental creatures are immune to this effect. Countermeasures F With a DC 28 Arcana check (a minor action), a character gains a +2 bonus to Reflex against the elemental rift’s next attack.
Tactics The thunderblast cyclone enters combat only if attacked or when the first creature crosses the rift. It uses charged mist and lightning storm as often as possible, falling back to prevent creatures from fleeing the chamber. The shardstorm icewinds spread out against individual targets, avoiding area attacks and maximizing the difficult terrain created by their iceblast aura. The caustic slayer stays at the edge of the fray, making caustic breath and sight-burning cloud attacks as often as possible. While those powers recharge, it makes double eyeburn attacks with slayer’s fury, falling back into melee only if pressed.
Development If the characters attempt to flee, the elementals pursue.
Features of the Area Ceiling: The cavern toward the top of the tactical map is 20 feet high. The cavern toward the bottom of the map is 40 feet high at its center and 20 feet high along the walls. Illumination: When the adventurers first approach, the elemental rift fills the area with dim light. Once the rift is triggered, it fills the area with unnaturally bright light. See the hazard statistics block for more information. Rubble: These areas of loose scree are difficult terrain. A creature that runs, charges, or makes a double move through rubble must make a DC 20 Acrobatics check or fall prone. The rubble in this cavern is attuned to the elemental energy surging within the rift. If any creature that does not have the elemental origin ends its turn in a square of rubble, the rocky floor thrusts up beneath it. The creature’s space and all adjacent squares become a rubble pile (see below). Any creature in the area of the newly formed rubble pile is thrown into the air and comes down in a random square adjacent to the new rubble pile. The creature must make a DC 31 Acrobatics check or fall prone. Rubble Pile: Fallen rock and debris are piled to a height of 10 feet. A rubble pile must be climbed with a DC 15 Athletics check. Elemental Rift: The cavern is split by a rift surging with pure elemental energy. Any creature that starts its turn adjacent to the rift takes 3d8 + 10 cold, fire, and lightning damage. Any creature that flies or jumps over the rift takes 2d8 + 10 cold, fire, and lightning damage. Any creature that enters or falls into the rift is held
suspended by fierce winds, takes 4d8 + 10 cold, fire, and lightning damage, and is immobilized (save ends). Elemental creatures are immune to these effects. The rift is 10 feet across at its narrowest point. A creature that jumps the rift must take into account the 20-foot drop from the top of the tactical map to the bottom. A creature cannot jump the rift from the bottom of the map to the top. The rift is a hazard that activates when any creature that does not have the elemental origin approaches within 2 squares of it. See the statistics block for more information. A hero who flies over the rift does not trigger it only if he or she states an intent to fly as close to the ceiling as possible. If all characters cross the rift in this way, or if all adventurers teleport across the rift, it triggers in the third round of combat.
J a n u a r y 2 010
|
D u n g e o n 174
42
Test of Fire
Encounter K3: Primordial Shrine Encounter Level 29 (91,000 XP)
Setup 1 abyssal rotlord (R) 2 nycademon warmasters (N) 3 kazrith f lametongues Planar energy threads through this ancient shrine, allowing the demons that lair here to create temporary portals across the planes. The characters will make use of a forgotten permanent portal hidden here, which leads to the City of Brass. When the heroes can see into this area, read: A nycademon falls back before a foul rotfiend threatening it. Another nycademon lurks close by. The fractured walls of this chamber are etched in endless runes lit by the flaring firelight of a number of lava pits across the floor. Intelligence Check, for an adventurer who reads Primordial DC 28: The runes are an ancient Primordial script. The detail of their meaning is obscured, but this place is clearly a shrine to primordial power. Arcana Check DC 28: Planar power surges within the stones and the lava vents, the lingering essence of a great portal that once stood here. A disruption to that essence indicates that creatures frequently make use of it, most likely creating their own temporary portals to and from this site. Like all their kind, the demons here engage in a constant struggle for power and status, and the present argument has no relevance to the characters’ quest. The demons are distracted, however, and gain
only passive Perception checks to notice anyone approaching unless the heroes have a bright light source in hand or otherwise announce their presence. The abyssal rotlord and the nycademon warmasters attack as soon as the characters engage them. Starting in the third round of combat, the kazrith flametongues that lair beneath the shrine are attracted by the sound of combat. One kazrith appears per round at a location of your choice, either erupting from a lava vent or burrowing up through the floor. Each time a kazrith burrows up from or into the floor of the shrine, that square becomes a lava vent. See “Features of the Area” for more information. Abyssal Rotlord (R)
Level 29 Controller
Large elemental humanoid (demon, undead) XP 15,000 Initiative +22 Senses Perception +22; truesight 20 Abyssal Fields aura 5; each enemy within the aura cannot teleport. HP 270; Bloodied 135 AC 43; Fortitude 41, Reflex 39, Will 43 Immune fear; Resist 20 fire, 10 necrotic, 20 variable (3/encounter) Speed 6, fly 6 (hover) m Skullsplitter (standard; at-will) F Psychic Reach 2; +31 vs. Reflex; 3d8 + 9 psychic damage, or 2d8 + 9 psychic damage against a bloodied target. R Conjure Abscess (standard; at-will) F Psychic Ranged 10; +32 vs. Fortitude; 2d8 + 9 psychic damage, and if the target moves more than 2 squares on its turn, it takes 2d8 extra damage (save ends). If the abyssal rotlord is bloodied, the target takes the damage for moving 1 or more squares. A Floating Despair (standard; encounter) F Psychic, Zone Area burst 2 within 10; the burst creates a zone of dark miasma that lasts until the end of the abyssal rotlord’s next turn. Any enemy that starts its turn within the zone takes 10 psychic damage and grants combat advantage to the rotfiend until the end of its next turn. Sustain Minor: The zone persists, and the rotfiend can move it 5 squares. Alignment Chaotic evil Languages Abyssal, Common Str 27 (+22) Dex 26 (+22) Wis 26 (+22) Con 30 (+24) Int 21 (+19) Cha 33 (+25)
2 Nycademon Warmasters (N)
Level 28 Skirmisher
Large elemental humanoid XP 13,000 each Initiative +25 Senses Perception +22 HP 261; Bloodied 130 AC 41; Fortitude 41, Reflex 41, Will 38 Resist 20 variable (2/encounter)* Speed 6, fly 6 (hover) m War Flail (at-will; standard) Reach 2; +33 vs. AC; 2d8 + 7 damage, and ongoing 5 damage (save ends). M Merciless Flail (at-will; standard) The nycademon makes two war flail attacks. M Snatch (at-will; standard) Before or after the attack, the nycademon flies 6 squares. Reach 2; +31 vs. Fortitude; the target is grabbed. Strong Flyer When a nycademon moves a grabbed target, it does not need to make a Strength attack. While bloodied, a nycademon can fly at full speed instead of half speed when moving a grabbed target. Alignment Chaotic Evil Languages Abyssal, Common Skills Intimidate +26 Str 28 (+23) Dex 29 (+23) Wis 16 (+17) Con 29 (+23) Int 11 (+14) Cha 24 (+21) Equipment war flail * The warmasters have used their variable resistance to give themselves resist 20 fire before the start of the encounter.
J a n u a r y 2 010
|
D u n g e o n 174
43
Test of Fire
3 Kazrith Flametongues
Level 28 Lurker
Medium elemental XP 13,000 each magical beast (demon, water) Initiative +28 Senses Perception +21; tremorsense 20 HP 196; Bloodied 98; see also magma skin AC 42; Fortitude 40, Reflex 42, Will 38 Immune fire; Resist 20 variable (2/encounter) Speed 6, burrow 6 (tunneling), swim 8 m Bite (standard; at-will) F Fire +33 vs. AC; 2d8 + 6 damage, and ongoing 5 fire damage (save ends). C Molten Flow (standard; recharge 5 6 ) F Fire Close burst 2; +31 vs. Reflex; 2d6 + 4 damage, and ongoing 10 fire damage (save ends). Effect: The kazrith burrows its speed. Magma Skin (usable only while bloodied) F Fire The kazrith gains a +4 bonus to its burrow speed, and at the start of its turn, creatures adjacent to it take 15 fire damage. Slippery A kazrith makes saving throws against immobilized, restrained, and slowed conditions at the start of its turn as well as at the end of its turn. Alignment Chaotic evil Languages Abyssal, Primordial Skills Stealth +29 Str 27 (+22) Dex 30 (+24) Wis 25 (+21) Con 22 (+20) Int 16 (+17) Cha 15 (+16)
Tactics The abyssal rotlord opens with f loating despair, then falls back to conjure abscess on the strongest-looking melee combatants. It stays close to eladrin characters and other teleporters to take advantage of its abyssal fields aura. The nycademon warmasters throw themselves against the closest heroes, doubling up with merciless f lail attacks. If pressed, a warmaster uses warmaster strike to escape and reposition itself to attack a softer target.
As each kazrith flametongue appears, it moves toward the closest group of characters, then uses molten f low to attack and burrow to safety beneath the floor. It repeats that tactic as often as possible, making bite attacks while molten f low recharges.
Development The adventurers can attempt to slay this area’s demonic guardians before undertaking the skill challenge to activate the lava vent portal, or they can attempt the skill challenge during combat. If the heroes flee through the activated portal before the fight is over, the demons do not pursue. In addition to awarding XP for monsters killed and the skill challenge, award full XP for any monster bloodied before the characters make their exit.
The Portal of Forgotten Fire The lava vent in the upper right arm of the shrine is a portal connecting to a secret primordial temple in the City of Brass. The adventurers must activate the portal before it can be used. Level: 27 (XP 11,000). Complexity: 1 (requires 4 successes before 3 failures). Primary Skills: Arcana, Religion, Thievery. Arcana (DC 26, standard action): The hero taps into and summons up the ancient magic of the portal. A character must be within 2 squares of the appropriate lava vent to attempt this check. This skill can provide a maximum of 2 successes.
Religion (DC 31, standard action): The character recognizes the primordial energy powering this ancient portal, and can bend it to his or her will. This skill can provide a maximum of 1 success in this challenge. No character can attempt this check more than once, and this check cannot be retried if the adventurers fail to complete the skill challenge on their first try. Thievery (DC 17, standard action): By carefully clearing centuries of carbon ash from the etched stones on the wall above the vent, the character strengthens the magical energy feeding the portal. A character must be adjacent to the appropriate lava vent to attempt this check and takes damage as normal (see “Features of the Area”). This skill can provide a maximum of 2 successes. Success: If the heroes earn 4 successes, the portal activates for 1 hour. Failure: If the characters accumulate 3 failures, six shardstorm firewind elementals erupt from the lava vent and attack the closest creatures (including any surviving demons). Use the statistics block for the shardstorm icewinds (page 31), but their basic attack deals fire damage instead of cold damage and ignore the ice walk exemption to the creature’s aura. The adventurers must attempt the skill challenge again. Each additional failed challenge summons three more firewinds than the previous failure.
J a n u a r y 2 010
|
D u n g e o n 174
44
Test of Fire
Features of the Area Ceiling: 30 feet high. Illumination: The lava pools shed dim light throughout the area. Rubble: These areas of loose scree are difficult terrain. A creature that runs, charges, or makes a double move through rubble must make a DC 20 Acrobatics check or fall prone. Blood Rock: Areas of mottled red-black stone across the cavern floor are blood rock infused with the energy of ancient battles fought here. These patches of stone do not stand out unless the adventurers make specific attempts to discern them (a DC 28 Perception or Arcana check). A creature standing in an area of blood rock scores a critical hit on a natural die roll of 19 or 20. Lava Vent: The floor of the shrine has been shattered to reveal pools of blazing lava vented from the Sea of Fire. Any creature that ends its turn adjacent to a lava vent takes 2d6 + 8 fire damage. A creature that enters a lava vent or starts its turn there takes 3d8 + 10 fire damage and is slowed as long as it remains in the area of the vent. The lava vent in the upper right arm of the chamber is the one that connects to the City of Brass. It takes a DC 31 Arcana check to determine that the lava vent contains the portal, after which the characters must engage in a skill challenge to activate it. See “The Portal of Forgotten Fire,” above. Once the portal has been activated, the heroes can step through it to be taken to the City of Brass (see page 22). The portal sits on the surface of the lava pool, however, and does not confer any protection against fire to those who plunge into it. A creature using the portal takes 2d6 + 8 fire damage.
J a n u a r y 2 010
|
D u n g e o n 174
45
Test of Fire
Encounter B1: Efreet Alliance Encounter Level 29 (75,000 XP)
Setup The adventurers make a plea for Estumishu’s support of Bahamut’s fight against Tiamat. Winning the efreet noble’s favor requires more than mere diplomacy.
Estumishu’s Favor In the ritual combat of an efreet Crucible Court, the characters attempt to win Estumishu’s favor and to enlist the efreet noble’s aid in Bahamut’s attempt to rout Tiamat’s forces in the City of Brass. Level: 29 (75,000 XP). Complexity: 5 (requires 12 successes before 3 failures). Special: When efreet nobles negotiate, they do so face to face and with scimitars bared in one of the Crucible Courts of the City of Brass. The skill checks in this challenge are meant to be made during ritual combat. See the “Crucible Court” sidebar for more information. Primary Skills: Diplomacy, History, Intimidate, Perception. Diplomacy (DC 28): An adventurer undertakes the most direct course of action by attempting to convince Estumishu of Bahamut’s respect for his power and the Platinum Dragon’s backing of his claim to the throne. This check covers direct appeals to the efreet noble as well as more subtle flattery of his advisors. A Diplomacy check made directly to Estumishu earns two successes or two failures in the skill challenge. Other Diplomacy checks earn one success or failure in the challenge. This skill can provide any number of successes in the challenge.
History (DC 19): A hero can gain Estumishu’s favor by demonstrating an accurate understanding of Bashumgarda’s betrayal of efreet history and culture. Each History check made in the challenge (regardless of success or a failure) increases the DC for subsequent History checks by 5. This skill can provide any number of successes in the challenge. Intimidate (DC 33): The efreets are a warrior culture, and they respect a show of confidence and strength. However, attempting to cow Estumishu into supporting Bahamut is risky. A successful check earns the characters 4 successes in the skill challenge. A failed check earns 2 failures and imposes a –2 penalty on all further Diplomacy or Perception checks made in the challenge. The adventurers can attempt only one Intimidate check in the skill challenge. Perception (DC 28): The nobles and advisors around Estumishu uniformly despise Bashumgarda, but they have vastly different opinions on how to deal with the efreet lord. With a successful Perception check, a character manages to pick out distinct threads of conversation from the din of the Crucible Court, gaining information and helping shape the course of the negotiations for maximum effect. On a failed check, the hero’s efforts to eavesdrop are noted. This earns a failure in the skill challenge and imposes a –2 penalty on the next primary skill check made in the challenge. Once a failure has been made with Perception, no further checks can be made in the challenge using this skill. This skill can provide a maximum of 4 successes. Secondary Skills: Arcana, Bluff, Endurance, Insight. Arcana or Insight (DC 28): A successful Arcana or Insight check represents an adventurers’ knowledge of the ways of efreet culture or his or her ability to read specific efreets in the heat of negotiation. A
Communication Breakdown The characters need to keep aware of the delicate nature of their mission to the City of Brass, but the ritual combat of the Crucible Court should keep things moving for those players with more interest in the crash of battle than the language of diplomacy. If the players decide to force Estumishu’s loyalty at sword point, they have their work cut out for them. The noble’s advisors and followers are two dozen advanced efreets (see the “Crucible Court” sidebar), all of which swarm any heroes attempting violence against their master. If Estumishu is forced into combat, treat him as an elite advanced efreet karadjin (MM 100) with a +4 bonus to initiative, attack rolls, and defenses, a +2 bonus to damage rolls, a double attack with scimitar of horrendous flame, and 586 hit points. character can make an Arcana or Insight check as part of each primary check made in the challenge. With a successful check, the primary check gains a +2 bonus. On a failed check, the primary check takes a –2 penalty. A character who fails two Arcana or Insight checks made alongside checks with a single primary skill can no longer make checks with that primary skill. Bluff (DC 33): Dissent and open conflict is an essential part of efreet diplomacy. Whenever a hero fails a primary skill check in the challenge, another character can step in to berate and belittle the failure. With a successful Bluff check, the primary failure is not counted as a failure in the skill challenge. However, the adventurer who failed the primary check takes a –2 penalty to his or her next primary skill check made in the challenge. J a n u a r y 2 010
|
D u n g e o n 174
46
Test of Fire
Endurance (DC 19): The efreets have lowered the normally blistering temperature of the Crucible Court for the heroes’ benefit, but the chamber remains uncomfortably hot. A character must make an Endurance check after making a primary skill check in the challenge. On a successful check, the efreets are impressed with the character’s stamina, granting a +2 bonus to his or next skill check made in
the challenge. On a failed check, the adventurer earns the contempt of the gathered efreets and takes a –2 penalty to his or her next check in the skill challenge. Success: If the characters earn 12 successes in the challenge, Estumishu accepts their fealty and pledges the support of himself and his allies to Bahamut’s cause. The heroes’ mission is still complicated by the
efreet noble’s demands. See “Bashumgarda Must Die” on page 24. Failure: If the adventurers earn 3 failures in the skill challenge, Estumishu rejects their overtures. The characters still have a chance to win the support of the efreets of the City of Brass. See “Bashumgarda Must Die” on page 24.
The Crucible Court The advanced culture of the efreets is built around a core of savagery, with the elemental essence of these creatures manifesting in a violent and intrinsically amoral nature. However, the City of Brass has not become the mercantile capital of the planes without a certain amount of statecraft. The efreets are as open to negotiation and parley as any race. Their warlike nature lends a very specific flavor to their diplomacy. On the streets of the City of Brass, conflicts between efreets are typically settled by a fight to the death. In order to avoid constant bloodshed between their houses, efreet nobles agree to settle trade disputes, personal conflicts, and open challenges in one of the city’s many Crucible Courts—a combination bargaining session and combat grudge match. The summit at which Estumishu meets the heroes is a modified version of a traditional Crucible Court, but the principles remain the same. In order to win the loyalty of the efreet noble to Bahamut’s cause, the characters must demonstrate not only their skills at diplomacy but their strength in combat. The adventurers make checks in the skill challenge while undertaking ritual combat against Estumishu’s followers on the floor of the Crucible Court (a 20-square-by-20-square open space). These bouts are
boisterous affairs, with spectators shouting advice to favored combatants, disparaging enemies, or arguing loudly among themselves. A Crucible Court bout is run in the same manner as a normal combat encounter, with four restrictions: F One hero faces off against one efreet in a bout. Combatants cannot request or receive the assistance of allies in any way during a bout. F Combatants are limited to at-will and recharge powers only, whether from class abilities or magic items. F Combatants cannot make use of any fire resistance or fire immunity not bestowed by a racial ability. F A bout is lost by the first combatant to become bloodied or to break one of the above rules. Both combatants are given magical healing to return them to full hit points at the end of a bout. (One exception: If a character in combat makes the failed check that ends the skill challenge, he or she will not be healed by the efreets.) For each 50 points of damage an adventurer deals in a bout, he or she can make one primary skill check in the challenge. For each 50 points of damage a character takes, he or she takes a –2 cumulative penalty to his or her next primary skill check in the challenge.
Each hero must accept or decline the challenge of ritual combat, stepping up in whatever order the players decide. An adventurer cannot fight twice until all other characters have accepted or rejected a bout. A hero takes a –2 cumulative penalty to all checks made in the skill challenge for each bout he or she rejects. In each bout, a character faces off against an advanced efreet from the Monster Manual (pages 98–100), determined randomly. Adjust each efreet’s combat statistics as indicated. d4 Combatant Init/Def/Atk
Dmg
Bloodied
1 Fireblade
+6
+3
129
2
+5
+2
100
3 Flamestrider
+5
+2
129
4
+3
+1
129
Cinderlord Pyresinger
As befits his rank, Estumishu does not face off against the adventurers himself. The heroes, being outsiders to the City of Brass, have some leeway as regards their appearance in the Crucible Court. A character can make primary checks without undertaking ritual combat, either while another character is fighting or after rejecting a bout. However, each primary check made outside combat takes a –2 penalty.
J a n u a r y 2 010
|
D u n g e o n 174
47
Test of Fire
Encounter B2: Through the City of Brass Encounter Level 30 (100,000 XP)
Setup In order to face off against Bashumgarda and grant Bahamut’s forces access to Tiamat’s army in the City of Brass, the characters must make a dangerous journey across a city preparing for war.
Through the City of Brass This complex skill challenge provides a framework for combat encounters B3, B4, and B5 and charts the heroes’ progress as they make their way across the City of Brass. Level: 30 (100,000 XP). Complexity: Special.
Movement Through the City The City of Brass is divided into fourteen sectors (see “The City of Brass,” below). The adventurers begin this skill challenge in Ashlarks ward, having just left the Crucible Court of Estumishu. Bashumgarda is in the Furnace, holed up with his personal guard in the barracks of the Ring of Fire. Provide the characters with a copy of the map of the City of Brass and read or paraphrase the information on each city ward detailed below. This represents the intelligence they were given by either Estumishu or Selerin. The players should not be given the different skill DCs for each sector of the city until they begin making checks in that sector. However, expand the general information given for each sector as appropriate to
J a n u a r y 2 010
|
D u n g e o n 174
48
Test of Fire
allow players to consider the advantages and disadvantages of different routes through the city. For example, Marlgate and Iskalat (the wards with low-DC Athletics checks) might be described as having relatively open streets or contiguous roofs perfect for climbing across.
The Skill Challenge This skill challenge is built on three different types of activity the heroes can undertake: movement within a specific ward, crossing from one ward to another, or avoiding pursuit and confrontation with city guards and the forces of Tiamat. The skill challenge is built around group checks. At each stage of the challenge, all characters make a primary check using one of the skills noted for that part of the challenge. All characters make checks using the same skill, decided on by the group. In addition to making his or her primary check, a character can also choose to make a secondary skill check using a skill of his or her choice. Characters cannot aid another on any checks. If at least half the characters succeed on their primary checks, the adventurers earn a success in the challenge. If fewer than half the heroes succeed, the party earns a failure in the challenge. However, this open-ended challenge does not end with 3 failures. See “Success and Failure,” below.
Traveling Through a City Ward The City of Brass is a major cosmopolitan center with a population a half-million strong. Aside from the canals and the wall now sealed around the Furnace (see below), there are no predominantly physical impediments to the party’s movement through the city. Rather, this skill challenge represents the characters’ attempts to avoid trouble as they seek Bashumgarda.
The adventurers attempt to pass unharried through a ward with a group skill check. All characters make the same check. The ward they are moving through determines the skill check DC, as noted on the “Through the City of Brass” table. A successful group check allows the party to move within the ward. A failed group check means that the characters attract the attention of a passing patrol. See “Evading Pursuit” and “Patrols in the City of Brass,” below. Primary Skills: Athletics, Bluff, Intimidate. Secondary Skills: Insight, Streetwise.
Crossing to a New Ward The boundaries between wards are not always clearly defined in the City of Brass. The preparations for war mean that the major thoroughfares, gates, and plazas that mark off such boundaries are under the most intense scrutiny by the city’s defenders. The heroes attempt to cross between one ward and the next with a group skill check. All characters make the same check. Use the higher of the DCs for the two wards the characters are moving between, as noted on the “Through the City of Brass” table. A successful group check allows the party to move into the new ward. A failed group check means that the adventurers are unable to progress past patrols in the area. Characters who fail a check remain in the initial ward and must make subsequent checks to move through the ward again, then to cross to a new ward. Having failed to cross to a particular ward, the heroes do not need to attempt to cross to that same ward on subsequent checks. Failure to cross into a new ward does not mean that the characters are arbitrarily forced back to their original starting point. Rather, it implies that they must backtrack away from too-numerous patrols,
The High Road The party is likely to have access to flying magic at this stage of the epic tier, but they should be very wary of using it in the City of Brass. Dragons and efreets are in constant flight across the city at all times, and although there are fewer enemies in the air than on the ground, those enemies are doubly wary and the characters would be doubly exposed. Almost without exception, the humanoid slaves and residents of the city do not fly, and a party taking to the air attracts immediate attention. If all the adventurers are able to fly for 5 minutes or more, they can do so to gain an automatic success at a group skill check to travel through a ward or cross to a new ward (including automatically crossing any canals). Doing so, however, incurs an automatic encounter with two patrols. One attacks immediately; the other attacks after 6 rounds. (The first patrol will attack while the characters are in the air if possible, so select an appropriate encounter group.) The heroes cannot elect to make a group skill check to avoid either of these patrols. Characters who can manage both long-term flight and invisibility catch no breaks in this regard. The haze of smoke that fills the air of the City of Brass immediately gives away the position of invisible creatures flying within it.
move along the ward boundary to a less well-guarded location, and so on. Crossing Canals: Crossing the city’s fiery canals uses the same group check as crossing to a new ward. If the adventurers’ route from one ward to the next crosses one or more canals, crossing between those
J a n u a r y 2 010
|
D u n g e o n 174
49
Test of Fire
wards requires two group checks instead of one. (This check represents the heroes’ total efforts at getting across all canals; don’t worry about the specific number of canals between wards.) The two group checks can be made with two different skills, at the characters’ option. If either check is failed, the adventurers must remain in the initial ward. Primary Skills: Athletics, Bluff, Streetwise. If the characters are making Athletics checks to move across canals between wards, a hero who fails a check takes 3d8 fire damage in addition to adding to the group’s chance of failure. Secondary Skills: Insight, Perception.
Evading Pursuit Adventurers who find themselves attracting the attention of city guards or the servants of Tiamat with a failed group check to move through a ward have the option of fighting or fleeing. If the heroes choose to fight their way out of a confrontation, set up the encounter normally. D&D Dungeon Tiles set DU2: Streets of Shadow is a great resource for running city encounters. See “Patrols in the City of Brass” for possible encounter groups. If the characters decide to avoid trouble, they can do so with a group skill check. All characters make the same check. The ward they are in determines the skill check DC, as noted on the “Through the City of Brass” table. If the adventurers succeed on the group check, they successfully avoid the encounter. If the characters fail the check, they cannot escape pursuit and must fight. Regardless of the outcome of the combat encounter, this group check counts as a success or failure in the skill challenge. Primary Skills: Athletics, Bluff, Stealth, Streetwise. Secondary Skills: Intimidate, Perception.
Skills Use the following general descriptions as a guideline for the types of activities the heroes can attempt with each of this challenge’s primary and secondary skills. All checks in the challenge are made using an adventurer’s normal skill check bonuses, as each check represents the sum of the character’s actions over an extended period. Powers or magic items that grant a temporary bonus to a skill check or affect how a skill is used (including effects such as invisibility) cannot be used in the challenge. Primary Skills: Athletics, Bluff, Intimidate, Streetwise. Athletics: The heroes attempt to avoid trouble by moving quickly, by scaling walls or buildings to bypass patrols and guarded intersections, or by jumping roof to roof to avoid the chaos on the city’s streets. Athletics also allows characters to cross the city’s canals by hopping from barge to barge or jumping the entire breadth of a canal at a narrow point. Bluff: The adventurers try to keep a low profile amid the chaos by pretending that they are travelers to the city, conscripted to military service during the current crisis and on some errand by order of the city guard. Intimidate: Fear of the harsh laws of the efreets keeps the folk of the city in line. By making use of this universal attitude of “might makes right,” the heroes can bully their way through potential altercations with slave troops and guards. Stealth: The characters blend in with the movement of the slaves and other non-efreets in the city. Secondary Skills: Insight, Perception, Streetwise. All secondary skills in the challenge are made alongside a primary check. With a successful check, an adventurer gains a +2 bonus to the primary check. With a failed check, a character takes a –2 penalty to the primary check.
Insight: By careful assessment of guards and other officials, a character can lessen the chance for confrontation. Perception: Looking for patterns in the movements of city patrols gives the heroes a chance to avoid those patrols. Streetwise: By picking up snippets of information overheard in the chaos around them, the adventurers can adjust their route to avoid trouble.
Movement in the City The City of Brass is far too large to worry about the characters’ exact location on a street-by-street basis. Instead, plot the heroes’ movement through the city along imaginary lines connecting the legends that mark the rough center of each ward. Assume that the characters start out at the “Ashlarks” legend on the map. Moving to the “Marlgate” legend requires a successful group check to move through Ashlarks, then a successful group check to cross from Ashlarks to Marlgate. If the first check is failed, the adventurers will need to fight their way out of an encounter or make an additional group check to avoid it. If the second check is failed, the heroes cannot advance but find themselves stuck in Ashlarks. The characters can attempt to reenter Marlgate by making two more checks—one to move within Ashlarks again, the other to cross into a new ward. Alternatively, they can try another route, for example from Ashlarks to Keffinspires (two checks) or from Ashlarks to Iskalat (three checks, including crossing the canals between those wards). Adventurers can move between any two ward legends that do not have another legend between them. For example, the characters can move directly from Marlgate to Avencina, but they cannot move from Ashlarks to Avencina without passing through Keffinspires first. J a n u a r y 2 010
|
D u n g e o n 174
50
Test of Fire
Because of the augmented wall around the Furnace, that ward can only be entered by way of the Phoenix Gate (accessible only from Avencina or the Char) or at the Gate of the Fallen (accessible only from the Arches or the Foundry).
to move into the Furnace from one of the adjacent wards. A failed check means that they cannot successfully approach the gate but are pushed back into the ward. A successful check made to cross into the Furnace triggers Encounter B4 on page 47.
Triggering Tactical Encounters
Lord of the Efreets
At three points in the skill challenge, the heroes’ movement through the city triggers tactical encounters B3, B4, and B5.
In the immediate aftermath of Encounter B4, the adventurers must make a check to move through the Foundry ward. A successful check grants access to the barracks of the Ring of Fire and triggers Encounter B5. On a failed check, the characters meet an efreet patrol that they must either avoid or fight before they reach the barracks and trigger the encounter. Any penalties the heroes have accrued for failures in the challenge remain in effect for Encounter B5. When Encounter B5 is done, the skill challenge ends, along with all penalties accrued during the challenge.
Canal Crossing The adventurers will cross the city’s canals at various points as they head toward the Furnace, depending on their chosen route. At one of those crossings of your choice, go to Encounter B3 on page 45. Other canal crossings are incorporated into the check to move from ward to the next, as described above. The choice of where to place encounter B3 is entirely up to you, but it works best as the final canal the characters must cross on their way toward the Furnace. Be aware that heroes moving from Marlgate or Keffinspires to Avencina, or from Marlgate to the Char, have only one canal to cross. When you use Encounter B3, the characters need to cross the canal individually, either during or after the encounter. Do not require or allow the adventurers to make a group check to cross the canal.
Gate Crashers As the heroes move toward the Furnace, they must pass through the now-sealed ward walls at either the Phoenix Gate (accessible only from Avencina or the Char) or the Gate of the Fallen (accessible only from the Arches or the Foundry). Before they can reach the gates, the characters must first make a group check
Success and Failure The route the adventurers take through the City of Brass and how well they manage to avoid the notice of the city guard and Tiamat’s forces determines the overall number of checks in the skill challenge. The challenge ends at the end of Encounter B5, which is triggered when the characters complete the journey to the Furnace. This open-ended challenge does not end with 3 failures. Cumulative successes move the heroes across the City of Brass and accrued failures en route make the journey increasingly hazardous. Each time the characters incur a failure on a group check in the challenge, consult the “Failures in the Challenge” table. The penalties on the table are cumulative.
Failures in the Challenge Failures Penalty 1 The attention the adventurers draw to themselves by having to face off against patrols or retrace their route makes it increasingly difficult to move openly. The DC of any Athletics check made in the challenge increases by 2. 2 Rumors begin circulating about agents of Bahamut in the city. The DC of all Bluff checks in the challenge increases by 2. All creatures in patrols and tactical encounters gain a +1 bonus to attack rolls and a +1 bonus to all defenses. 3 Word spreads that city guard units are maintaining an active watch for the party. The DC of any Stealth check in the challenge increases by 2. 4 The city guard are ordered to stop and question all non-efreets at large in the city. The DC of any Intimidate check in the challenge increases by 2. All creatures in patrols and tactical encounters gain a +2 bonus to attack rolls and a +2 bonus to all defenses instead of a +1 bonus. 5 Tiamat’s agents go on heightened alert in the city. Replace one non-minion from any multiple-creature patrol with an elite dragonspawn (use the statistics blocks from Encounters B3 and B4). 6 + The heroes are actively hunted by all guard and slave units at large in the city. The DC of any check made in the skill challenge increases by 3. All creatures in patrols and tactical encounters gain a +3 bonus to attack rolls and a +3 bonus to all defenses instead of a +2 bonus.
J a n u a r y 2 010
|
D u n g e o n 174
51
Test of Fire
The City of Brass As detailed in Manual of the Planes, the City of Brass is divided into fourteen districts, each with its own specific function and local character. The skill check DCs for this challenge vary according to which ward the party is in. While the characters are unlikely to visit every sector of the city as they make their way from Ashlarks to the Furnace, there are advantages to not simply making the trip in a straight line. The city is carved up into tiers, many of which are walled. For the purpose of the adventurers’ movement across the city, however, there are enough open gates and places to cross that the locations of specific walls and gates are not important. The one exception is the entrance into the Furnace, as noted under “Gate Crashers,” above.
Through the City of Brass Athletics
Bluff Intimidate Stealth
Arches
28
28
28
28
Ashlarks
28
33
28
28
Avencina
33
28
33
28
Castings
28
28
19
28
The Char
28
33
33
28
Cindersweeps
28
19
28
28
The Foundry
28
28
33
28
The Furnace
33
33
33
33 28
Iskalat
19
19
28
Keffinspires
28
33
33
19
Marlgate
19
33
33
28 28
The Plume
33
28
19
Pyraculum
28
28
28
19
Rookery
28
33
33
28
Arches: The teeming slave markets of the City of Brass are centered here. The present siege has seen the markets all but emptied, their slaves conscripted to the city’s defense. Tiamat’s dragonspawn and dragonborn forces have turned the empty markets into ramshackle camps, and most such troops lair here when not on duty. Ashlarks: The residential sector of Ashlarks is home to minor efreet houses, powerful non-efreet residents, and Long Castle—the base for the city guard. While the guards are scattered across the city at present, private security and watch-dragons accost all nonresidents. Avencina: This lawless lower-class district is home to the Commoner’s Market, the city’s largest (and mostly black-market) bazaar. The interior of the ward remains open in the prelude to the attack by Bahamut’s forces, but its boundaries with Keffinspires and the Plume are locked down tight by the city guard and private security forces. Dragons perch along the perimeters of the ward but relatively few lurk within it. Castings: This densely populated barracks ward holds the slave army of the City of Brass. Most of that army now patrols the city, but new squads are being trained here day and night by teams of efreet and dragonspawn. The Char: Most of the numerous foundries and forges of the city are located in this smoke-shrouded industrial ward. Those forges are presently working overtime in the manufacture of weapons and armor, watched over by dragons and efreet guards. Cindersweeps: The lower-class free folk of the city congregate here, alongside the harbor garrison’s headquarters at the Keep of Fire Striking Steel. Slave troops are currently on watch against possible insur-
Lockdown As the City of Brass awaits the arrival of the rest of Tiamat’s forces, the city guard spends much of its time locking down the lower-class residential districts. While all the city’s folk are subject to emergency conscription to defend it, the efreets are worried about the lower classes taking Bahamut’s side if the Platinum Dragon’s forces break through. These lockdowns can be used to provide flavor as the characters make their way across the city, but they also have an important tactical consideration. The area between Avencina and Keffinspires on the left side of the City of Brass Map could allow the heroes to bypass the city’s canals (and Encounter B3) as they advance toward the Furnace. If the adventurers approach this area, describe open rioting in Avencina and tell the players that the route around the canal is protected by too many dragons and elite efreet guards to get past. The characters’ route through the city must involve crossing at least one canal.
rection, but they are less than focused on the task. Draconic patrols pick up the slack. The Foundry: The mansions of non-efreets and those efreet merchants and nobles not wealthy enough to dwell in the Plume or the Furnace line the streets of this exclusive residential ward. The Foundry’s streets are presently all but empty, but dragons patrol by air and its boundaries crawl with private security forces. The Furnace: The slopes of the Furnace rise as the heart of the City of Brass. The Charcoal Palace at the center of the ward is the seat of power for Bashumgarda, Lord of the Efreets. The barracks of the
J a n u a r y 2 010
|
D u n g e o n 174
52
Test of Fire
Ring of Fire house his personal guard; government offices fill the Red Pillar Halls. The Eternal Flame Pavilion is an open temple to the primordial Fire Lord Imix, its walls sheathed in beaten gold. With Bahamut’s forces massing outside the city gates, the Furnace has been sealed off. The only way to gain access to that ward is by way of the Phoenix Gate (accessible only from Avencina or the Char) or the Gate of the Fallen (accessible only from the Arches or the Foundry). Iskalat: This harbor ward contains the city’s public docks, serving planar dromonds, elemental vessels that ply the Sea of Fire, and the countless captains and sailors who come to the city with cargo and trade. Also here is the great prison known as the Octagon. The harbor is well guarded by red dragons and dragonspawn-led patrols, but much of the rest of the ward is deserted. Keffinspires: This merchant district is home to many of the city’s smiths and metalworkers. All have been conscripted in the production of armor and weapons, and slave troops and city guards move through the ward constantly. Marlgate: The warehouses of this industrial ward hold the bulk of the goods that move through the City of Brass and across the planes. Bahamut’s siege has seen this ward’s warehouses stripped for the defensive effort, and the city guard patrols heavily to ward off looters. The Plume: This exclusive residential district houses the manors and courtyards of the city’s most powerful efreet nobles. The Castle of the Sun and Moon is the training ground of the city’s elite guard units, and the ward is presently locked down by guards whose loyalty has been purchased by the nobles. Scores of dragons perch atop the district’s
spires, sending the nobility a subtle signal regarding order. Pyraculum: The City Market in this commercial sector is larger and more controlled than the Commoner’s Market in Avencina. Many of the city’s artisans make their homes here. Of all the lower-class wards, only Pyraculum has managed to stay free of lockdown. The air above the ward is thick with patrolling dragons. Rookery: This residential quarter has a reputation for lawlessness that extends beyond the city and across the planes. Gambling halls, brothels, and gladiator pits are among the least dangerous of the Rookery’s charms, and it is said that even the city guards avoid this ward if they can. At present, the city’s slave troops are supposed to have the ward locked down, but their watch is tenuous at best. Though dragons and dragonspawn patrol here, they do so less frequently than in most other wards.
Patrols in the City of Brass As the heroes make their way through the City of Brass, each failed group skill check to move through a ward incurs a possible encounter with a patrol. If the characters try to avoid the patrol, see “Evading Pursuit,” above. If they decide to fight (or if they fail in their attempt to avoid a confrontation), choose an encounter group from those listed below or use these groups as inspiration for creating your own encounters. The adventurers earn full experience for any patrols they defeat in the City of Brass. Open conflict is the norm here, and the brutal reputations of the city’s efreet guards and slave troops are well earned. Although any confrontation between the heroes and a patrol will be noted by
other residents, those residents will quickly scatter so as to not become involved. Moreover, the chaos that has consumed the City of Brass under Bahamut’s siege means that battles between the characters and wandering patrols do not attract the kind of attention they normally would. Unless the adventurers linger at the site of a skirmish, they can safely slip away without attracting further patrols and continue the skill challenge.
Resting Up The characters can take a short rest after each encounter with a patrol and after each triggered tactical encounter. However, they can take only one extended rest during the skill challenge. Just as the location and condition of specific streets plays no part in the skill challenge, you needn’t worry about the specifics of where the heroes decide to hole up for an extended rest. The city’s preparations for war mean that many shops and apartments are closed and empty, providing plenty of hiding spots. Even after reaching the Furnace, the adventurers can take an extended rest before facing Bashumgarda if they have not yet done so. Though the city guards are constantly on the move, many of the Red Pillar Halls are empty; the city’s nobles are holed up at their estates in the Foundry or the Plume.
J a n u a r y 2 010
|
D u n g e o n 174
53
Test of Fire
Slave Patrols
Draconic Disciples
The city’s slave warrior patrols fight to the death in the name of their efreet masters.
Tiamat’s servants patrol alongside efreet and slave forces, intent on ensuring that the City of Brass remains under their control.
Level 25 Encounter (35,500 XP) F 2 azer maulers (level 27 controller; page 45) F 6 genasi blackhearts (level 26 minion brute, page 46)
Level 26 Encounter (49,000 XP) F 1 salamander thrallmaster (level 28 controller, page 47) F 8 salamander fireshields (level 26 minion brute, page 48) F 8 fire archon flamebows (level 26 minion artillery, page 46)
Level 26 Encounter (53,000 XP) F 1 greenspawn defender (level 28 elite soldier, page 45) F 3 dragonborn champions (level 26 soldier, MM 87)
Level 27 Encounter (64,000 XP) F 1 redspawn magmastomper (level 27 elite brute, page 47) F 3 dragonborn death knights (level 25 elite soldier, MM 51)
Elite Patrols
Dragon Lords
Well-trained efreet guards patrol the City of Brass with unceasing vigilance.
Veteran war dragons patrol the City of Brass by air and ground in the name of the Dragon Queen.
Level 25 Encounter (43,500 XP)
Level 26 Encounter (45,000 XP)
F 1 efreet pyremaster (level 27 controller, page 50) F 1 efreet karadjin (level 28 soldier, MM 100) F 6 efreet magmacasters (level 28 minion artillery, page 50)
Level 27 Encounter (53,500 XP) F 1 advanced efreet pyresinger (level 27 controller, MM 99; +2 initiative, attacks, and defenses; +1 damage; 248 hit points) F 3 efreet karadjins (level 28 soldier, MM 100) F 9 efreet flamerunners (level 27 minion skirmisher, page 50)
F 1 ancient black dragon (level 26 solo lurker, MM 76)
Level 26 Encounter (45,000 XP) F 1 ancient iron dragon (level 26 solo lurker, MM2 85)
Level 27 Encounter (55,000 XP) F 1 ancient copper dragon (level 27 solo skirmisher, MM2 79)
Level 27 Encounter (55,000 XP) F 1 ancient green dragon (level 27 solo controller, MM 81)
J a n u a r y 2 010
|
D u n g e o n 174
54
Test of Fire
Encounter B3: Canal Crossing Encounter Level 28 (70,500 XP)
Setup 1 greenspawn defender (D) 2 azer maulers (M) 5 fire archon f lamebows (F) 5 genasi blackhearts (B) As the heroes approach this stretch of canal, read: While most of the canals you’ve seen so far have been guarded no better or worse than the streets around them, the stretch of wide channel ahead is a frustrating exception. Dragonspawn-led troops are on constant patrol to both sides of you, leaving only one access point relatively unguarded. The characters can approach the crossing behind the cover of buildings. Place their miniatures anywhere outside the tactical map. When the adventurers have moved closer, read: A hulking greenspawn paces along the near side of the canal, shouting orders at a dozen sullen defenders. Two azers lead separate squads of fire archons and genasi on either side of the canal, watching from cover for any sign of trouble. The creatures here are all on high alert. They spot the heroes as soon as they enter the area of the tactical map.
Greenspawn Defender (G)
Level 28 Elite Soldier
Huge natural humanoid (reptile) XP 26,000 Initiative +24 Senses Perception +21; low-light vision HP 514; Bloodied 257 AC 44; Fortitude 42, Reflex 40, Will 39 Resist 30 acid; see also defender Saving Throws +2 Speed 8 Action Points 1 m Greataxe (standard; at-will) F Poison, Weapon Reach 3; +35 vs. AC; 2d6 + 6 damage plus 2d8 poison damage. M Blastback Strike (standard; at-will) The defender makes a greataxe attack. If the attack hits, the defender makes a secondary attack against the same target. Secondary Attack: +33 vs. Fortitude; the target is pushed 3 squares and knocked prone. R Poison Bolt (minor 1/round; at-will) F Poison Ranged 5; +33 vs. Reflex; 1d10 + 8 damage plus 2d8 poison damage. M Shield Crush (immediate interrupt, when an adjacent ally is hit by a melee attack; at-will) Reach 3; +33 vs. Reflex; 3d6 + 6 damage, and the target is dazed until the end of its next turn. Defender A greenspawn defender has resist 10 all against damage from dragons, dragonborn, and immortals. Alignment Evil Languages Draconic Skills Athletics +29 Str 30 (+24) Dex 26 (+22) Wis 25 (+21) Con 25 (+21) Int 13 (+15) Cha 20 (+19) Equipment heavy shield, greataxe
Tactics The greenspawn defender fights front and center, laying into lightly armored characters with blastback strike while it targets a nearby foe with acid bolt. It uses its action point the first time it bloodies a foe to make a followup blastback strike against the target. The azer maulers stay in the thick of combat, maximizing the effect of their clinging f lames and azer’s wrath aura.
2 Azer Maulers (M)
Level 27 Controller (Leader)
Medium elemental humanoid (fire) XP 11,000 each Initiative +20 Senses Perception +21 Azer’s Wrath (Fire) aura 2; any enemy that enters or ends its turn within the aura takes 10 fire damage. HP 247; Bloodied 123 AC 41; Fortitude 40, Reflex 38, Will 39 Resist 30 fire Speed 5 m Maul (standard; at-will) F Fire, Weapon +32 vs. AC; 2d8 damage plus 2d6 fire damage. R Hurled Maul (standard; at-will) F Fire, Weapon Ranged 20; +31 vs, Reflex; 2d8 damage plus 2d6 fire damage. The azer’s maul reforms in its hand at the end of its turn. Clinging Flames (immediate reaction, when an enemy within 5 squares of the azer mauler takes fire damage; at-will) F Fire The triggering enemy takes ongoing 10 fire damage (save ends). Alignment Unaligned Languages Giant Str 29 (+22) Dex 25 (+20) Wis 27 (+21) Con 23 (+19) Int 20 (+18) Cha 18 (+17) Equipment scale armor, maul
The fire archon flamebows make ranged attacks from behind cover, reserving their firestorm until two or more adventurers can be targeted. The genasi blackhearts throw themselves into the fray, trusting their heart of fire to take out foes that drop them. The fire creatures here are resentful of the greenspawn’s command, and they do not fight alongside it except to flank if possible. The flamebows don’t worry about catching the greenspawn in the area of their firestorm. The archons, flamebows, and blackhearts stay on their own sides of the canal. If the characters cross to the top of the encounter map during the fight, however, then the greenspawn tries to jump the canal in pursuit (Athletics +29). The heroes cannot make a group skill check to evade this pursuit. J a n u a r y 2 010
|
D u n g e o n 174
55
Test of Fire
5 Fire Archon Flamebows (A)
Level 26 Minion Artillery
Medium elemental humanoid (fire) XP 2,250 each Initiative +22 Senses Perception +21 HP 1; a missed attack never damages a minion. AC 38; Fortitude 39, Reflex 37, Will 38 Immune disease, poison Speed 8; see also flame step r Flamebow (standard; at-will) F Fire +31 vs. Reflex; 7 fire damage, and ongoing 5 fire damage (save ends). A Firestorm (standard; encounter) F Fire Area burst 1 within 10; +31 vs. Reflex; ongoing 10 fire damage (save ends). A target already taking ongoing fire damage instead increases that ongoing damage by 5. C Deathstorm (when the flamebow drops to 0 hit points) F Fire The flamebow explodes and is destroyed: close burst 5; targets enemies taking ongoing fire damage; +31 vs. Fortitude; the target and all allies adjacent to the target take 14 fire damage. Miss: The target takes 7 fire damage. Flame Step (move; at-will) F Teleportation The flamebow can teleport to within 3 squares of any fire creature within 20 squares of it. Alignment Chaotic evil Languages Primordial Str 25 (+20) Dex 29 (+22) Wis 27 (+21) Con 23 (+19) Int 20 (+18) Cha 18 (+17) Equipment chainmail, flamebow
Development If the adventurers attempt to flee the encounter after crossing the canal, the greenspawn defender and any surviving fire creatures from the top side of the map pursue.
5 Genasi Blackhearts (G)
Level 26 Minion Brute
Medium elemental humanoid (fire) XP 2,250 each Initiative +21 Senses Perception +19 HP 1; a missed attack never damages a minion. AC 38; Fortitude 39, Reflex 38, Will 36 Immune fire Speed 6 m Falchion (standard; at-will) F Fire, Weapon +29 vs. AC; 10 damage, and ongoing 5 fire damage (save ends). M Heart of Fire (when missed by a melee attack) F Fire If the target is taking ongoing fire damage, that ongoing damage increases by 5. C Fiery Vengeance (when the blackheart drops to 0 hit points) F Fire Close burst 5; +27 vs. Reflex; 17 fire damage. Additionally, if the target is taking ongoing fire damage, that ongoing damage increases by 5. Alignment Unaligned Languages Common, Primordial Str 29 (+22) Dex 27 (+21) Wis 23 (+19) Con 25 (+20) Int 14 (+15) Cha 14 (+15) Equipment chainmail, falchion
Crates: Stacks of crates stand 10 feet high and must be climbed with a DC 20 Athletics check. Basalt Wall: A protective wall of magically strengthened basalt lines the fiery canals of the City of Brass. A basalt wall rises 5 feet above the adjacent ground, while the surface of the canal is 10 feet below the top of the wall. Canal: The fiery canals that crisscross the City of Brass are a deadly hazard. The canal in this area flows normally, generating intense heat that can be felt from 50 feet away. Any creature that ends its turn on the top of the basalt wall takes 2d6 + 8 fire damage. Any creature that enters the canal takes 3d8 + 10 fire damage and is slowed for as long as it remains in the canal.
Features of the Area Illumination: The City of Brass is brightly lit day and night. Building: Buildings adjacent to the area are of stone construction and from 30 to 50 feet high. Place doors and other openings as you desire. However, unless you wish to develop their interiors, assume that buildings have been magically sealed as part of the siege preparations and cannot be entered. Rubble: These areas of loose scree are difficult terrain. A creature that runs, charges, or makes a double move through rubble must make a DC 20 Acrobatics check or fall prone. Rubble Pile: Fallen rock and debris are piled to a height of 10 feet. A rubble pile must be climbed with a DC 15 Athletics check.
J a n u a r y 2 010
|
D u n g e o n 174
56
Test of Fire
Encounter B4: Gate Crashers Encounter Level 28 (70,500 XP)
Setup 1 redspawn magmastomper (R) 2 salamander thrallmasters (T) 10 salamander fireshields (F) This encounter takes place at one of the two gates providing the only access to the Furnace. The characters can approach the gate unnoticed behind the cover of adjacent buildings. When the heroes can see the gate, read: The wall protecting the inner tier of the Furnace stands some hundred feet tall, a great barrier of basalt and slate whose surface roils with heat and smoke. A huge flight of steps rises from an open courtyard to the gate itself—twin brass valves 50 feet high, their surface flaring with a molten glow. An enormous red dragonspawn slouches by the stairs, its black eyes watching for any sign of trouble. A half-dozen salamanders pace around it, with more walking the wall high above. Beyond the wall, the dark lines of the Charcoal Palace of the efreets is suddenly lit by a storm of lightning heralding the arrival of the gargantuan blue dragon you saw before. This must be the exarch that Bahamut named as Namissi, descending now to the roof of the palace. Millennia-old elemental stone shudders beneath him as he perches atop a parapet like a bloated crow. His long neck whips side to side, scanning the city as he roars in rage. The creatures here are all on high alert. They spot the characters as soon as they enter the area of the tactical map.
Redspawn Magmastomper (R) Level 27 Elite Brute
Huge natural beast (reptile) XP 22,000 Initiative +19 Senses Perception +20; darkvision HP 612; Bloodied 306; see also fiery wrath AC 39; Fortitude 41, Reflex 38, Will 39 Resist 20 fire Saving Throws +2 Speed 8, fly 8 (clumsy) Action Points 1 m Bite (standard; at-will) Reach 3; +30 vs. AC; 3d10 + 10 damage. M Explosive Charge (standard; encounter) F Fire The redspawn magmastomper charges an enemy; +28 vs. Reflex; 3d12 + 10 fire damage, and the target is pushed 4 squares and takes ongoing 10 fire damage (save ends). M Fling (standard; at-will) +30 vs. AC; 2d10 + 10 damage and the redspawn magmastomper makes a secondary attack against the same target. Secondary Attack: +28 vs. Fortitude; the target is pushed 6 squares and knocked prone. Fiery Wrath (only while bloodied) F Fire The magmastomper’s bite attack deals 10 extra fire damage, and on a hit the target takes also ongoing 10 fire damage (save ends). The target takes a –4 penalty to saves against this effect at the end of his or her turn if the target attacked during that turn. Threatening Reach The redspawn magmastomper can make opportunity attacks against enemies within 3 squares. Alignment Evil Languages Draconic Str 29 (+22) Dex 23 (+19) Wis 25 (+20) Con 26 (+21) Int 15 (+15) Cha 13 (+14)
Tactics The redspawn magmastomper enters the fray with explosive charge, then makes f ling attacks each round. It focuses on the most powerful melee combatants initially, hoping to become bloodied quickly. Once bloodied, it lays into lightly armored foes with bite attacks, hoping that its fiery wrath yields a quick kill. The salamander thrallmasters fight at range with their molten lash, then close with stunned foes for scourge or tail lash attacks.
2 Salamander Thrallmasters (T)
Level 28 Controller
Large elemental humanoid (fire, reptile) XP 13,000 each Initiative +22 Senses Perception +22 HP 262; Bloodied 131 AC 42; Fortitude 41, Reflex 41, Will 39 Resist 30 fire Speed 6 m Tail Lash (standard; at-will) F Fire Reach 2; +33 vs. AC; 3d10 + 6 fire damage, and the target is knocked prone. M Scourge (standard; at-will) F Fire, Weapon Reach 3; +33 vs. AC; 2d10 + 4 damage, and the target takes ongoing 5 fire damage and is slowed (save ends both). R Molten Lash (standard; recharge 4 5 6 ) F Fire Ranged 20; +32 vs. Reflex; 3d10 damage, and the target takes ongoing 10 fire damage and is stunned (save ends both). Threatening Reach The salamander thrallmaster can make opportunity attacks against enemies within 2 squares. Alignment Evil Languages Primordial Skills Intimidate +23 Str 25 (+21) Dex 27 (+22) Wis 27 (+22) Con 30 (+24) Int 20 (+19) Cha 19 (+18) Equipment scourge
The salamander fireshields on the wall attack with flaming javelins from behind cover. Those on the ground spread out to avoid area attacks, laying into lightly armored foes with fireshield bash. The salamanders are resentful of the redspawn’s command. They do not fight alongside it, even to flank.
Development If the adventurers flee the encounter (either before or after getting over the wall), the defenders on the same side of the wall pursue. The other defenders take 2 rounds to open the gate before following. The characters cannot make a group skill check to evade this pursuit.
J a n u a r y 2 010
|
D u n g e o n 174
57
Test of Fire
10 Salamander Fireshields (F)
Level 26 Minion Brute
Large elemental humanoid (fire, reptile) XP 2,250 each Initiative +20 Senses Perception +19 HP 1; a missed attack never damages a minion. AC 38; Fortitude 40, Reflex 38, Will 37 Immune fire Speed 6 m Fireshield Bash (standard; at-will) F Fire, Weapon Reach 3; +29 vs. AC; 12 damage, and ongoing 5 fire damage (save ends). R Flaming Javelin (standard; at-will) F Fire, Weapon Ranged 20; +27 vs. Reflex; 10 damage, and ongoing 5 fire damage. C Fireshield Burst (when the salamander fireshield is reduced to 0 hit points) F Fire Close burst 3; +27 vs. Reflex; ongoing 10 fire damage (save ends). Alignment Evil Languages Primordial Str 29 (+22) Dex 25 (+20) Wis 23 (+19) Con 25 (+20) Int 18 (+17) Cha 14 (+15) Equipment fireshield, 10 javelins
Standing Down Not all the natives of the City of Brass are as keen to serve Tiamat as Bashumgarda. During the fight, stress that the salamanders seem indifferent to the redspawn’s commands. An Insight check made during combat (as a free action) tells the adventurers that these guards openly loathe the dragonspawn and are fighting alongside it only under duress. If the redspawn is killed, savvy heroes can attempt to establish a temporary truce with one or both salamander thrallmasters. (The salamander fireshields cannot be parleyed with if both thrallmasters are dead.) Set up an impromptu skill challenge for the attempt: complexity 1 (4 successes before 3 failures), level 28 (XP 13,000); primary skills Diplomacy and Insight (DC 28); the characters must earn at least 1 success with Diplomacy.
If the adventurers succeed in the skill challenge, the salamanders immediately stand down. If they are told that the characters’ goal is the overthrow of Bashumgarda and Tiamat’s forces, the salamanders open the gates. If the heroes successfully parley with the salamanders, award full XP for the encounter in addition to the bonus XP for the skill challenge.
Features of the Area Illumination: The City of Brass is brightly lit day and night. Wall: The walls of the City of Brass are burning hot. Any creature that comes into contact with a wall or starts its turn adjacent to a wall takes 3d8 + 10 damage. A wall’s sheer surface can be scaled with a DC 33 Athletics check, but a creature climbing the wall takes the above damage at the start and end of each of its turns. A creature at the top of the wall has concealment against foes on the ground. The heroes are free to fly over the wall, but they draw ranged attacks and will be pursued by the ground forces here. Gates: Glowing brass gates 50 feet high and 15 feet thick block access from the outer city to the inner wards. The gates are molten hot, and any creature that comes into contact with a gate or starts its turn adjacent to a gate takes 4d8 + 10 damage. The locked gates can be forced open by two simultaneous DC 33 Athletics checks. Up to four Medium creatures can attempt Athletics checks to open the gates, but each creature must make its own check (taking damage for contacting the gate, as above). Creatures cannot use the aid another action to assist on this check.
Stairs: A great flight of stone stairs rises 50 feet to the gates set into the great wall. The steps and risers are 3 feet on a side, and are difficult terrain for Medium or smaller creatures. Elemental Vent: Vents jetting pure elemental energy dot the plaza before the gate. Any creature that ends its turn adjacent to an elemental vent takes 3d6 + 6 cold, fire, and lightning damage. A creature that enters an elemental vent or starts its turn there takes 3d10 + 10 cold, fire, and lightning damage, and is stunned (save ends). Rubble: These areas of loose scree are difficult terrain. A creature that runs, charges, or makes a double move through rubble must make a DC 20 Acrobatics check or fall prone. Building: Buildings adjacent to the area are of stone construction and from 30 to 50 feet high. Unless you wish to develop their interiors, assume that buildings are locked and cannot be entered.
J a n u a r y 2 010
|
D u n g e o n 174
58
Test of Fire
Encounter B5: Lord of the Efreets Encounter Level 29 (92,250 XP)
Setup Bashumgarda, Lord of the Efreets (B) 2 Ring of Fire pyremasters (P) 9 Ring of Fire f lamerunners (F) 6 Ring of Fire magmacasters (M) Within the barracks of the Ring of Fire, Bashumgarda prepares for the upcoming assault on the City of Brass. The barracks are surrounded by a wall of elemental stone and guarded by a dozen members of the efreet lord’s elite personal guard. Nearby buildings offer enough cover for the characters to get a glimpse of their destination. When the adventurers can see this area, read: The barracks of the elite Ring of Fire are likely well defended at the best of times, but the efreets have redoubled their efforts in preparation for siege. A wall of elemental stone has been raised around the barracks complex. Its single entrance is guarded by a dozen efreets. The guards of the Ring of Fire are on high alert. Any heroes moving in the open are spotted as soon as they move onto the tactical map. The magmacasters and one pyremaster are hovering just behind the wall. They maintain clear line of sight to approaching foes but have superior cover against attacks from the front of the wall. The guards at the wall call out an alarm as soon as combat begins. Bashumgarda and five flamerunners are inside the closest barracks building. They emerge on their initiative count 2 rounds later.
When Bashumgarda emerges, read: The great doors of the closest barracks building are suddenly flung wide and five more Ring of Fire flamerunners rush forward to join their comrades. Behind them strides the menacing figure of Bashumgarda, Lord of the Efreets. The ceremonial scepter of his reign hangs at his belt and the scimitar in his hands pulses with black flame as he shouts out, “Defilers and infidels! You will pay for treachery with your lives!”
Tactics Bashumgarda wastes no time plunging into battle to hit as many characters as possible with burning wrath as he advances. He focuses on the strongest-looking defender or leader, moving to another target each time he successfully hits with a blackf lame scimitar attack. The pyremasters each open with wall of fire, setting up a hazardous gauntlet around the adventurers that they sustain each round. They use their pyremaster’s lash against strikers and defenders, switching to spiked scimitar attacks while pyremaster’s lash recharges. If surrounded, they use fire burst before moving to a more advantageous position. The flamerunners spread out to avoid area attacks, staying in motion with blazing charge and fiery escape. The magmacasters unleash their magma bolts against ranged attackers and spellcasters, targeting characters demonstrating resistance to fire with molten wave.
Bashumgarda, Level 28 Elite Soldier (Leader) Lord of the Efreets (B)
Large elemental humanoid (fire), efreet XP 26,000 Initiative +24 Senses Perception +26 Efreet Lord’s Aura aura 2; while within the aura, allies gain a +2 bonus to attack rolls with fire attacks, and enemies gain vulnerable 5 fire. HP 520; Bloodied 260 AC 44; Fortitude 40, Reflex 39, Will 41 Immune fire Saving Throws +2 Speed 6, fly 8 (hover) Action Points 1 m Blackflame Scimitar (standard; at-will) F Fire, Necrotic, Weapon Reach 2; +35 vs. AC; 2d10 + 9 damage (crit 6d10 + 29) plus 1d10 fire and necrotic damage, and the target takes ongoing 15 fire and necrotic damage and is immobilized (save ends both). Aftereffect: Ongoing 15 fire and necrotic damage (save ends). Saving throws against this power take a –2 penalty. M Double Attack (standard; at-will) Bashumgarda makes two blackflame scimitar attacks. A Burning Wrath (standard; recharge 5 6 ) F Fire Area burst 2 within 10; targets enemies; +33 vs. Will; 3d10 + 5 fire damage, and the target is blinded (save ends). Fiery Vendetta (immediate reaction, when an enemy within 2 squares of Bashumgarda attacks one of Bashumgarda’s allies; at-will) Bashumgarda makes a melee basic attack against the triggering enemy. Alignment Evil Languages Primordial Skills Diplomacy +29, Intimidate +29 Str 26 (+22) Dex 26 (+22) Wis 25 (+21) Con 28 (+23) Int 25 (+21) Cha 31 (+24) Equipment scimitar
J a n u a r y 2 010
|
D u n g e o n 174
59
Test of Fire
No Quarter
Development
Treasure
Bashumgarda and his elite guards fight to the death, but the heroes might not be so quick to want to see the efreet lord fall. Depending on the outcome of the “Efreet Alliance” skill challenge (Encounter B1) and the party’s moral bent, Bashumgarda might be kept alive for questioning or to be delivered up to Bahamut. If subdued with any amount of care, the efreet lord rages and rails against his captors but poses no further threat.
The characters’ victory over Bashumgarda allows them to use his scepter to open the City of Brass to Bahamut’s forces. See “The Call to Battle” on page 26.
With Bashumgarda defeated, the adventurers can seize both the ceremonial scepter of his reign and his blackflame scimitar. If you choose to place this unique weapon as treasure, treat it as a +6 flaming scimitar that can deal fire damage, necrotic damage, or both. If you do not wish to use it as treasure, the blackflame scimitar is usable only by another efreet.
9 Ring of Fire Flamerunners (F)
Level 27 Minion Skirmisher
Large elemental humanoid (fire), efreet XP 2,750 each Initiative +24 Senses Perception +20 Ring of Fire aura 2; enemies within the aura takes a –5 penalty to saving throws to end ongoing fire damage. HP 1; a missed attack never damages a minion. AC 41 (43 against opportunity attacks); Fortitude 39, Reflex 41, Will 38 Immune fire Speed 6, fly 8 (hover) m Scimitar (standard; at-will) F Fire, Weapon Reach 2; +32 vs. AC; 10 damage, and ongoing 5 fire damage (save ends). If used as part of a charge, increase the ongoing damage to ongoing 10 fire damage. Fiery Escape (move; encounter) F Teleportation The flamerunner teleports 20 squares adjacent to another efreet, reappearing in a flash of fire and smoke. Alignment Evil Languages Primordial Str 26 (+21) Dex 29 (+22) Wis 24 (+20) Con 22 (+19) Int 17 (+16) Cha 20 (+18) Equipment scimitar
2 Ring of Fire Pyremasters (P) Level 27 Controller
Large elemental humanoid (fire), efreet XP 11,000 each Initiative +21 Senses Perception +17 Ring of Fire aura 2; any enemy that enters or ends its turn in the aura takes 10 fire damage. HP 250; Bloodied 125 AC 41; Fortitude 40, Reflex 38, Will 38 Immune fire Speed 6, fly 8 (hover) m Spiked Scimitar (standard; at-will) F Fire, Weapon Reach 2; +32 vs. AC; 2d10 + 9 damage (crit 6d10 + 29), and the target is slowed until the end of its next turn. R Pyremaster’s Lash (standard; recharge 4 5 6 ) F Fire Ranged 10; +31 vs. Reflex; 2d8 + 7 fire damage, and the target slides 3 squares, takes ongoing 10 fire damage, and is immobilized (save ends both). A Fire Burst (standard; at-will) F Fire Area burst 1 within 10; +32 vs. AC; 3d6 + 7 fire damage, and ongoing 5 fire damage (save ends). A Wall of Fire (standard; recharges when bloodied) F Fire Area wall 10 within 20; the pyremaster conjures a wall of searing flame that lasts until the end of the pyremaster’s next turn. The wall is 6 squares high and blocks line of sight. The wall’s space is heavily obscured and is difficult terrain. A creature that starts its turn adjacent to the wall takes 10 fire damage. A creature that enters a square of the wall or starts its turn there takes 20 fire damage. Sustain Minor: The wall persists. Alignment Evil Languages Primordial Skills Arcana +25, Insight +24, Intimidate +27 Str 29 (+22) Dex 26 (+21) Wis 19 (+17) Con 26 (+21) Int 21 (+18) Cha 26 (+21) Equipment scimitar
6 Ring of Fire Magmacasters (M)
Level 28 Minion Artillery
Large elemental humanoid (fire), efreet XP 3,250 each Initiative +24 Senses Perception +19 Ring of Fire aura 2; any enemy that ends its turn within the aura takes 5 fire damage. HP 1; a missed attack never damages a minion. AC 40; Fortitude 39, Reflex 42, Will 40 Immune fire Speed 6, fly 8 (hover) r Magma Bolt (standard; at-will) F Fire Ranged 10; +33 vs. AC; 10 fire damage, and ongoing 5 fire damage (save ends). R Molten Wave (standard; encounter) F Fire Ranged 10; +33 vs. Reflex; the target gains vulnerable 15 fire damage (save ends). Magma Spray (when reduced to 0 hp; encounter) F Fire The magmacaster’s space and all adjacent squares become difficult terrain until the end of the encounter. A creature that enters these squares takes 5 fire damage. Alignment Evil Languages Primordial Str 25 (+21) Dex 31 (+24) Wis 20 (+19) Con 22 (+20) Int 20 (+19) Cha 26 (+22)
J a n u a r y 2 010
|
D u n g e o n 174
60
Test of Fire
Features of the Area Illumination: The City of Brass is brightly lit day and night. Wall of Elemental Stone: The barracks complex of the Ring of Fire has been surrounded by a cordon of elemental stone for protection. This rough stone wall is 60 feet high, 10 feet thick, and can be climbed with a DC 19 Athletics check. Any creature that comes into contact with the wall or starts its turn there is pummeled by the wall and subject to an attack: +33 vs. Reflex; 3d8 + 10 damage, and the target falls from the wall and is knocked prone. A creature that falls from the wall takes additional falling damage as normal. The heroes are free to fly over the wall, but they draw ranged attacks and will be pursued by the ground forces here. The total flying distance from one side of the wall to the other is 130 feet (26 squares).
Rubble: These areas of loose scree are difficult terrain. A creature that runs, charges, or makes a double move through rubble must make a DC 20 Acrobatics check or fall prone. Rubble Pile: Fallen rock and debris are piled to a height of 20 feet. A rubble pile must be climbed with a DC 15 Athletics check. Elemental Vent: Vents jetting pure elemental energy dot the area before the wall. Any creature that ends its turn adjacent to an elemental vent takes 3d6 + 6 cold, fire, and lightning damage. A creature that enters an elemental vent or starts its turn there takes 3d10 + 10 cold, fire, and lightning damage, and is stunned (save ends). Each round on initiative count 0, roll a d10 for each elemental vent. On a roll of 10, the vent flares up unpredictably. Any creature adjacent to the vent takes 3d8 + 8 fire damage. Building: Buildings adjacent to the area are of stone construction and from 30 to 50 feet high. Bashumgarda and his Ring of Fire guards do not retreat into the barracks complex, but the characters are welcome to. If they do, expand the tactical map with efreet-sized stone furnishings as appropriate.
J a n u a r y 2 010
|
D u n g e o n 174
61
Test of Fire
Encounter F1: Eternal Flame Encounter Level 29 (92,500 XP)
Setup 1 white dragon firelord (W) 6 efreet scalespawn (S) Tiamat’s forces are drawing power from the shrine of the Eternal Flame Pavilion. This area is protected by powerful wards and guarded by a white dragon firelord and a half-dozen scalespawn—efreets bestowed with draconic qualities by Tiamat’s foul rituals. As the adventurers approach this area, read: Pools of elemental fire surround the Eternal Flame Pavilion, the beaten gold of its walls glowing daylight-bright. However, that light is shrouded by the haze of a protective dome of magical force that surrounds the shrine on all sides. Elemental fire pours forth from the pavilion’s main pool, hissing like a waterfall into a smaller constrained whirlpool. Pillars of black onyx jut up from the larger pool of roiling fire, the largest of these the perch of a huge dragon. The creature is an elder white by its appearance. However, its scales and eyes pulse with a blood-red glow and clouds of steam surround it as it paces. A half-dozen efreets stand before the shrine, but these are no ordinary guards. Tiamat’s rituals have reshaped them into foul draconic forms. Smoke and fire shroud them as they flex deadly scaled ridges along their backs and limbs.
White Dragon Firelord (W)
Level 28 Solo Brute
Huge natural magical beast (dragon) XP 65,000 Initiative +19 Senses Perception +19; darkvision Fire and Ice aura 5; while within the aura, enemies gain vulnerable 15 cold and vulnerable 15 fire. HP 1,048; Bloodied 524; see also bloodied breath AC 42; Fortitude 43, Reflex 40, Will 40 Resist 30 cold, fire Saving Throws +5 Speed 8 (ice walk), fly 8 (hover), overland flight 12 Action Points 2 m Bite (standard; at-will) F Cold Reach 3; +33 vs. AC; 2d12 + 6 plus 2d12 cold damage (plus an extra 2d12 cold damage on a successful opportunity attack). m Claw (standard; at-will) F Fire Reach 3; +33 vs. AC; 1d12 + 6 damage plus 1d12 fire damage. M Dragon’s Fury (standard; at-will) The dragon makes two claw attacks. If the dragon hits a single target with both claws, it makes a bite attack against the same target. R Scouring Bolt (standard; recharge 5 6 ) F Cold, Fire Ranged 10; +31 vs. Fortitude; 2d12 + 10 cold and fire damage, and the firelord slides the target 2 squares.
Tactics The efreet scalespawns race shrieking into battle, spreading out to avoid area attacks. They use their breath weapon against mobile combatants, focusing scimitar attacks on more stationary, lightly armored foes.
C Breath Weapon (standard; recharge 5 6 ) F Cold, Fire Close blast 5; +31 vs. Reflex; 5d10 + 10 cold and fire damage, and the target is knocked prone and blinded (save ends both). C Bloodied Breath (free, when first bloodied; encounter) The dragon’s breath weapon recharges, and the dragon uses it. C Frightful Presence (standard; encounter) F Fear Close burst 10; targets enemies; +31 vs. Will; the target is stunned until the end of the dragon’s next turn. Aftereffect: The target takes a –2 penalty to attack rolls (save ends). Steam Shroud (immediate interrupt, when hit by a melee attack; at-will) F Zone The dragon’s space and all adjacent squares become a zone of roiling steam that grants total concealment until the end of the dragon’s next turn. Elemental Affinity The white dragon firelord’s elemental power overcomes the fire affinity of the City of Brass. The dragon’s attacks with the cold keyword deal full damage. Alignment Evil Languages Common, Draconic Skills Athletics +28, Intimidate +27 Str 28 (+23) Dex 21 (+19) Wis 20 (+19) Con 30 (+24) Int 26 (+22) Cha 26 (+22)
The white dragon firelord stays in the thick of combat to make maximum use of its fire and ice aura. It focuses its dragon’s fury attacks on lightly armored foes and uses its breath weapon and scouring bolt as often as possible. Against a bloodied target, it spends an action point to make two dragon’s fury attacks, hoping for a quick kill.
These creatures are on high alert and are ready to meet any attackers attempting to break Tiamat’s control over Imix’s shrine. The scalespawn hold their positions until the heroes are close enough to attack. The white dragon firelord does not leave the large pillar until the first character enters the area of the larger pool.
J a n u a r y 2 010
|
D u n g e o n 174
62
Test of Fire
6 Efreet Scalespawn (S)
Level 27 Minion Soldier
Large elemental humanoid (fire) XP 2,750 each Initiative +22 Senses Perception +20 Scaled Wrath aura 1; any creature that attacks a scalespawn while adjacent to it takes 10 damage. HP 1; a missed attack never damages a minion. AC 43; Fortitude 40, Reflex 38, Will 38 Immune fire Speed 6, fly 8 (hover) m Scimitar (standard; at-will) F Weapon Reach 2; +34 vs. AC; 14 damage, and the target is marked until the end of the efreet scalespawn’s next turn. C Breath Weapon (standard; encounter) F Fire Close burst 2; +32 vs. Reflex; 14 fire damage, and the target is slowed (save ends). C Vengeful Immolation (when the scalespawn drops to 0 hit points) F Fire Close burst 5; +32 vs. Fortitude; the target is pushed 1 square and takes ongoing 10 fire damage (save ends). The scalespawn is destroyed, and its space and all adjacent squares become difficult terrain until the end of the encounter. Alignment Evil Languages Primordial Str 29 (+22) Dex 25 (+20) Wis 24 (+20) Con 27 (+21) Int 18 (+17) Cha 21 (+18) Equipment scimitar
Corrupted Shrine The Dragon Queen’s ritualists have corrupted the shrine of Imix in the Eternal Flame Pavilion, drawing off primordial power that gives strength to Tiamat’s blue exarch and his war dragons. The adventurers must break the control of the shrine in order to tip the odds to Bahamut’s side. Level: 27 (XP 11,000). Complexity: 1 (requires 4 successes before 3 failures). Primary Skills: Arcana, Athletics, Religion. Arcana (DC 26, standard action): By sensing the disruption in the primordial magic of the shrine, the character can attempt to correct it. A character must be within the area of the fire pool or the fire whirl-
pool to attempt this check. This skill can provide a maximum of 2 successes. Athletics (DC 17, standard action): The primordial power of the shrine responds to displays of sheer force. By striking one of the onyx altars hard enough, the hero weakens the control of Tiamat’s rituals. A character must be on or adjacent to an onyx pillar to attempt this check. This skill can provide a maximum of 2 successes. Religion (DC 31, standard action): The adventurer can make an offering of fealty to Imix in an attempt to overcome the corruption of Tiamat. This check can be made from outside the area of the fire pool and the fire whirlpool. This skill can provide a maximum of 2 successes. Any divine character who is successful in this check disrupts the connection to the power of his or her own faith. Such a character takes a –2 penalty to attack rolls and any subsequent skill checks in this challenge (save ends). Secondary Skill: Endurance. Endurance (DC 26, free action or minor action): The searing heat of the pools hinders the characters in their attempts to undo the corruption of the shrine. With a successful Endurance check, a hero gains a +2 bonus to his or her next primary skill check made in the challenge. On a failed Endurance check, the character takes a –2 penalty to his or her next primary check. Any adventurer undertaking the skill challenge must attempt an Endurance check as a free action before making a primary skill check. Alternatively, a character can instead make the Endurance check as a minor action before the primary check. An Endurance check made as a minor action grants the hero a +2 bonus on the check.
Success: If the characters earn 4 successes, Tiamat’s corruption of the shrine is broken. Any surviving creatures in this encounter take a –2 penalty to all defenses, as does the blue exarch in encounter F2. Failure: If the characters accumulate 3 failures, they succeed only in accelerating the rate at which power is drained from the shrine. The white dragon firelord regains 262 hit points (or returns to life with that many hit points if it has been slain). The firelord and any other surviving creatures in this encounter gain a +2 bonus to all defenses and a +2 bonus to attack rolls until the end of the encounter.
Development Partway through the adventurers’ fight here, bring the player’s attention back to the overall battle, where Bahamut and Namissi continue their bloody melee. When the white dragon firelord is first bloodied, read the following: Beyond the Eternal Flame Pavilion, the great Charcoal Palace is suddenly lit by a storm of blue-white lightning. The blue exarch Namissi is still locked in combat with Bahamut, and the Platinum Dragon’s form is burning like a reflection of the city below. Both are badly wounded as they slam into each other in midair, crashing into one of the palace’s high spires as they twist in a deadly embrace. Continue to describe the battle between Bahamut and Namissi as this encounter plays out. Stress the proximity of both combatants to the Charcoal Palace, and describe the palace taking the brunt of their attacks as they skirmish around it. Also describe Namissi appearing suddenly weakened if the characters are successful in the skill challenge.
J a n u a r y 2 010
|
D u n g e o n 174
63
Test of Fire
Aftermath As soon as this encounter ends, the heroes see Bahamut fall under the onslaught of Tiamat’s blue exarch. From the Charcoal Palace comes a sudden shuddering roar. In a blast of lightning from Namissi, the peaked roof of one great wing of the complex collapses where the blue exarch and Bahamut coil around each other. A cloud of dust and black smoke rises, eclipsing the view before being suddenly shredded by the beating of great wings. Bahamut is gone. Namissi perches at the uppermost parapet of the shattered palace, his victorious roar echoing across the City of Brass. Still weakened from his rebirth, Bahamut has fallen and the adventurers are the only ones who can save him. Go to encounter F2 on the next page.
Features of the Area Illumination: The City of Brass is brightly lit day and night. Rubble: These areas of loose scree are difficult terrain. A creature that runs, charges, or makes a double move through rubble must make a DC 20 Acrobatics check or fall prone. Fire Pool: The shrine of Imix at the heart of the Eternal Flame Pavilion is surrounded by onyx-walled pools of pure elemental fire. The largest of these pools is the center of Tiamat’s corrupt rituals and is protected by a dome of magical force. The only entrance into the fire pool is by way of the firefall that descends into the fire whirlpool (see below). The roiling elemental fire of the pool is interrupted by a series of onyx pillars (see below). Any creature that starts its turn in the air above the fire pool must make a DC 28 Endurance check (a free action) or
take 3d8 + 10 fire damage. Any creature that enters or starts its turn within the fire pool takes 4d8 + 10 fire damage. The protective dome of magical force that surrounds the fire pool blocks movement, line of effect, and magic (including teleportation effects). Creatures can enter the fire pool only by way of the smaller whirlpool and the firefall; see below. Onyx Pillar: Rough-topped pillars of magical onyx thrust up 5 feet above the roiling surface of the fire pool, including one large pillar that is the centerpiece of Tiamat’s rituals. A creature standing on an onyx pillar is partially protected from the crippling heat of the fire pool. Any creature that starts its turn on or above an onyx pillar must make a DC 28 Endurance check (a free action) or take 2d8 + 5 fire damage. Firefall: Raw elemental fire surges like a waterfall down from the fire pool. The firefall is the only access from the open whirlpool to the warded fire pool. The 20-foot-high firefall can be ascended by flying or with a DC 33 Athletics check. A creature that flies up the firefall takes 3d8 + 10 fire damage. A creature that ascends the firefall with an Athletics check takes 4d8 + 10 fire damage. Fire Whirlpool: Where the flow of fire courses down from the larger fire pool, it creates an elemental vortex. The smooth onyx walls of the whirlpool are 10 feet high and can be climbed with a DC 20 Athletics check. A creature that ends its turn on the onyx wall takes 2d6 + 8 fire damage. Any creature that enters or starts its turn in the whirlpool takes 3d8 + 10 fire damage and is dazed until the start of its next turn. A creature that moves 1 square into the whirlpool must make a DC 19 Acrobatics or Athletics check (a standard action) to grab
the edge and clamber onto the wall. A creature that fails its check or that moves more than 1 square into the whirlpool is caught up in the vortex. A creature must make a DC 28 Acrobatics or Athletics check (a standard action) to escape the vortex. One creature on the wall can aid this check. On a creature’s third failed check to escape the vortex, it is pulled down within the elemental maelstrom and irrevocably destroyed.
J a n u a r y 2 010
|
D u n g e o n 174
64
Test of Fire
Encounter F2: Namissi’s Revenge Encounter Level 32 (135,000 XP)
Setup Namissi, blue exarch of Tiamat (N) Bahamut, the Platinum Dragon (B) Immediately after their victory at the Eternal Flame Pavilion, the characters must rush to the Charcoal Palace to face off against Namissi, the blue exarch of Tiamat. Bahamut has been gravely wounded and lies in the ruins of the palace. Namissi stands triumphant, his forces about to overwhelm Bahamut’s shattered army.
Last Stand The focus of this battle is Namissi facing off against the adventurers. Bahamut’s fall threatens to tip the balance of power in favor of the blue exarch’s forces. However, Namissi knows better than to risk Tiamat’s wrath by slaying the weakened Platinum Dragon outright, expecting that the Dragon Queen will want to reserve that honor for herself. However, if you want to increase the tension of this encounter beyond the combat, you can add a skill challenge by which the characters help to keep Bahamut alive. The Platinum Dragon should not die again, but failure can mean that Bahamut’s waning life-force is channeled to Namissi to make him even more formidable in combat.
Namissi, Blue Exarch Level 32 Solo Artillery of Tiamat, Ancient Blue Dragon (N)
Gargantuan natural magical beast (dragon) XP 135,000 Initiative +23 Senses Perception +30; darkvision Exarch’s Presence (Fear) aura 5; enemies within the aura take a –2 penalty to attack rolls and saving throws HP 1,184; Bloodied 592; see also bloodied breath AC 46; Fortitude 46, Reflex 44, Will 43; if the heroes were successful in the “Corrupted Shrine” skill challenge in Encounter F1, the PCs have a +2 bonus on attacks in this encounter. Immune lightning; Resist cold 20, fire 20 Saving Throws +5 Speed 10, fly 12 (hover), overland flight 15 Action Points 2 m Gore (standard; at-will) F Lightning Reach 4; +37 vs. AC; 2d8 + 12 damage plus 2d6 lightning damage, and the target is pushed 3 squares and knocked prone. m Claw (standard; at-will) Reach 4; +37 vs. AC; 2d6 + 12 damage. M Draconic Fury (standard; at-will) Namissi makes a gore attack and two claw attacks. If all three attacks hit, Namissi recharges wingclap. M Wingclap (move; encounter) F Thunder Namissi flies up to 12 squares and attacks with his wings at the end of his move: reach 4, two targets; +36 vs. Fortitude; 3d10 + 10 thunder damage. This movement does not provoke opportunity attacks. R Bloodied Breath (free, when first bloodied; encounter) F Lightning Namissi’s breath weapon recharges, and he uses it.
As the heroes make their way from the Eternal Flame Pavilion to the Charcoal Palace, read: Dragons and efreets darken the skies above the city, but Bahamut’s forces are on the defensive now. None of the slaves or city guards scattered across the Furnace show any inclination toward approaching Namissi atop the ruins of the palace, but smoke and chaos provide cover for your approach.
C Breath Weapon (standard; recharge 5 6 ) F Lightning Close burst 10; The dragon targets up to four creatures; the first target must be within 20 squares of the dragon, and each additional target must be within 10 squares of the previous target; +36 vs. Reflex; 4d12 + 22 lightning damage, and the target is dazed (save ends). Miss: Half damage, and the target is dazed until the end of its next turn. C Thunderclap (standard; at-will) F Thunder Close burst 3; +36 vs. Fortitude; 2d10 + 10 thunder damage, and the target is stunned until the end of the blue dragon’s next turn. Critical Hit: As above, except that the target is stunned (save ends). C Tiamat’s Wrath (when Namissi drops to 0 hit points) F Lightning Close burst 5; +36 vs. Reflex; 5d6 + 10 lightning damage. Miss: Half damage. A Exarch’s Shield (immediate reaction, when hit by a ranged or area attack; encounter) F Lightning Area burst 4 within 20; must target the triggering attacker; +36 vs. Reflex; 4d6 lightning damage, and ongoing 10 lightning damage (save ends). Miss: Half damage. Faith of Tiamat (minor; usable only while bloodied; at-will) Namissi’s next successful attack that deals lightning damage instead deals acid, cold, fire, or poison damage (his choice). Alignment Evil Languages Common, Draconic Skills Athletics +32, Insight +30, Intimidate +25 Str 35 (+28) Dex 25 (+23) Wis 29 (+25) Con 32 (+27) Int 31 (+26) Cha 18 (+20)
The characters must ascend to the top of the ruined palace in order to see the wounded Bahamut, unconscious within a massive fall of rubble. As Tiamat’s exarch, Namissi knows the adventurers by reputation and has no intention of allowing them to thwart his victory. He attacks when the first hero reaches the upper levels of the palace as shown on the tactical map. With the city’s magical wards shut down and Tiamat’s efreets and dragons locked in combat with Bahamut’s forces, the characters are free to use teleportation or flying to ascend to the top of the palace. J a n u a r y 2 010
|
D u n g e o n 174
65
Test of Fire
Tactics Namissi is an unrelenting opponent, blessed with the foul power of Tiamat. He stays in motion as he alternates breath weapon with wingclap and draconic fury attacks against single targets. He reserves his thunderclap and exarch’s shield until he can target three or more adventurers, combining faith of Tiamat with breath weapon attacks against characters demonstrating a resistance to lightning.
Development The power that Namissi channels from Tiamat is shattered when the blue exarch dies. Even as Namissi falls, a keening wail rises across the City of Brass. The dragons of Tiamat’s army appear to be in sudden disarray. Bahamut’s scattered forces are regrouping as the Dragon Queen’s servants break ranks and scatter.
Whatever power the blue exarch held over the City of Brass, it has been broken with his death. More importantly, the efreets of the city have also sensed the blue exarch’s fall. Like a ripple spreading out from the Charcoal Palace, the elite guards of the City of Brass are taking to the air, working with Bahamut’s dragons to crush Tiamat’s faltering resistance. Return to page 28 for the conclusion of the adventure.
Features of the Area Illumination: The City of Brass is brightly lit day and night. Rubble: These areas of loose scree are difficult terrain. A creature that runs, charges, or makes a double move through rubble must make a DC 20 Acrobatics check or fall prone. Large or smaller creatures moving through areas of rubble on the sloping roof (see below) are slowed.
Rubble Pile: Fallen rock and debris are piled to a height of 20 feet. A rubble pile must be climbed with a DC 15 Athletics check. Sloping Roof: The roof of this section of the Charcoal Palace inside the parapets and the curtain wall slopes steeply up toward the center and the area of collapse. These areas are difficult terrain. Weakened Roof: The shattered roof has been weakened in the areas indicated on the tactical map. A creature that walks on one of these areas triggers a collapse, and must make a DC 33 Acrobatics check or plunge down in a fall of rubble. A creature that falls is buried. A buried creature can clamber out of the area of collapse with two DC 33 Athletics checks. Up to three characters adjacent to the collapse on the roof can assist this check. Namissi is too large to fall if an area of weakened roof collapses beneath him. If the blue exarch triggers a collapse, he is slowed until the start of his next turn. Collapse: The roof of this section of the Charcoal Palace has been shattered and collapsed where Namissi and Bahamut fought. The Platinum Dragon lies wounded and half-buried within the rubble. The bottom of the collapse is 50 feet below the peak of the shattered roof. A creature that cannot fly or teleport down into the rubble must climb down with a DC 28 Athletics check.
About the Author
Scott Fitzgerald Gray (9th-level layabout, vindictive neutral) started gaming in high school and has worked as a writer and editor much of the time since then. After belatedly realizing he could combine both vocations in 2004, he’s been making up for lost time as a freelance RPG editor and designer, primarily for Wizards of the Coast. He lives in the Canadian hinterland with a schoolteacher, two daughters, and a large number of animal companions.
J a n u a r y 2 010
|
D u n g e o n 174
66
Last Breath of the Dragon Queen An adventure for 30th-level characters By David Noonan
“Tiamat who formed all things, Made in addition weapons invincible; she spawned monster-serpents, Sharp of tooth, and merciless of fang; With poison, instead of blood, she filled their bodies.
illustration by Lucas Graciano & William O’Connor cartography by Sean Macdonald and Mike Schley TM & © 2010 Wizards of the Coast LLC All rights reserved.
Fierce monster-vipers she clothed with terror, With splendor she decked them, she made them of lofty stature. Whoever beheld them, terror overcame him, Their bodies reared up and none could withstand their attack.” —Enuma Elish, The Epic of Creation, L.W. King trans.
Fe b r u a r y 2 010
|
D u n g e o n 175
4
Last Breath of the Dragon Queen
“Last Breath of the Dragon Queen” is an adventure for five 30th-level characters. By the end of the adventure, the characters should have saved the universe, slain a god, and achieved their epic destinies, thus ending the campaign. This adventure is the final chapter in the Scales of War adventure path, the culmination of events that started with “Rescue at Rivenroar” thirty levels ago. The “Last Breath of the Dragon Queen” also plays well as a standalone adventure and can be adapted for the conclusion of any world-spanning campaign with Tiamat as the final foe. In “Last Breath of the Dragon Queen,” the characters travel to Tiamat’s lair in the Caverns of Fiery Splendor in Azharul, which is part of Tytherion, the Endless Night. There they face Tiamat’s most loyal guardians, then the Dragon Queen herself in all her five-headed splendor. They aren’t fighting a reflection of Tiamat, an avatar of Tiamat, an aspect of Tiamat, or anything less than the actual goddess at the zenith of her power. If the characters succeed, they will have achieved something truly epic—a fitting end to a campaign spanning more than a dozen adventures.
Background The battle for the City of Brass is over—and the good guys won. But the city is in ruins, Bahamut’s army is in disarray, and Tiamat is desperately trying to recover from her army’s appalling defeat. The Dragon Queen is finding it difficult to do so. As the goddess of greed, envy, and wealth, Tiamat used those motivators to great effect among her worshipers, soldiers, and allies. Now that she’s fallen on hard times, Tiamat is finding few allies—dragons or otherwise—willing to stand with her now that the chips are down. In short, Tiamat is discovering that her very nature doesn’t induce loyalty in uncertain
times. Furthermore, she’s discovering that encouraging competition and rivalry among her underlings is at best a double-edged sword. Many of Tiamat’s lieutenants are taking advantage of the Dragon Queen’s distraction to settle old scores and climb the pecking order on the backs of their rivals. As soon as word reached Tytherion of the defeat at the City of Brass, the great dragons, soldiers, cultists, and many of Tiamat’s most powerful agents started deserting her, carrying off much of her wealth and leaving her vulnerable. From the ancient wyrms that advised Tiamat to the lowly dragonborn guards on her ramparts, everyone took what they could and fled to some dark, quiet corner, fearful of a world with a diminished Tiamat—and fearful they’d face Tiamat’s wrath when she decides who’s to blame for recent events. If Bahamut’s army arrived to confront Tiamat in her lair right now, they would find that much of it had already been looted by Tiamat’s fleeing servants. But Bahamut can’t get his army to Tiamat’s lair in Tytherion—it’s exhausted, battered, disorganized, and still engaged in restoring some semblance of order to the City of Brass. Furthermore, the Platinum Dragon is worried that darkening Tytherion’s skies with metallic dragons and an army of paladins would be counterproductive. An invading army might galvanize Tiamat’s forces to end the infighting and unite against the enemy they were born and bred to fight. Bahamut has more than a shining army at his disposal, however: He has a small group of mortals that collectively rival the gods in power (the heroes, in other words). In all this disarray, a small group of heroes trying to infiltrate Tiamat’s lair might not attract much attention—assuming they can reach Tiamat’s lair in the first place. For obvious reasons, Bahamut has little insight into the mazelike Caverns
of Fiery Splendor, nor does he know where within those caverns Tiamat’s lair could be found. The Platinum Dragon does, however, have a lead. Centuries ago, a paladin named Berath led a crusade into the Caverns of Fiery Splendor. He’d grown weary of the endless struggle between Bahamut and Tiamat and declared that only a frontal assault against Tiamat would end her “games of deceit and death.” Bahamut counseled against Berath’s crusade, but Berath and a host of knights rode boldly into the Caverns of Fiery Splendor, determined to slay Tiamat and end the war. Although noble, such an effort was doomed to failure. Despite several victories within the caverns, no one from Berath’s crusade reached Tiamat’s lair or escaped to tell the tale. Berath himself, however, is a different story. Sustained by his desire to end the dragons’ war and buoyed by Tiamat’s weakness, he has recently rematerialized as a ghost haunting the Caverns of Fiery Splendor. Bahamut sensed the return of one of his most strident paladins and instructed Berath to scout a safe path through the caverns and to guide a smaller but more potent second crusade that will slay Tiamat once and for all. Bahamut has another agent within the Caverns as well, though he doesn’t realize it. Zehir has no love for Bahamut, but he’s been locked in a territorial struggle with Tiamat for millennia over who controls Tytherion. Zehir is thinking along the same lines as Bahamut: Sending a horde of snakes into the Caverns of Fiery Splendor would only provide common cause for Tiamat’s erstwhile allies. One of Zehir’s spies, however, has seen part of Tiamat’s lair firsthand, and it’s certainly to Zehir’s advantage if that information gets into the hands of Tiamat’s enemies, even if they are Bahamut’s friends.
Fe b r u a r y 2 010
|
D u n g e o n 175
5
Last Breath of the Dragon Queen
Adventure Synopsis At the start of the adventure, the adventurers meet Bahamut in his “Old Man with the Canaries” guise (by now they should know exactly who they’re talking to). Bahamut explains that Tiamat’s dragon allies are deserting her, driven by cowardice, fear of Tiamat’s temper, and greed for the treasures in Tiamat’s domain. While Bahamut’s army has achieved a great victory, it is in no shape to march on Tytherion itself. The characters are, Bahamut explains, capable of killing Tiamat once and for all if they can get to her lair before she has a chance to regroup and gather her allies around her. Furthermore, Bahamut gives them instructions for meeting Berath, the ghost of a paladin who once sought to slay Tiamat. And a mysterious agent of Zehir meets the characters and gives them a password that a spy near Tiamat’s lair will ask for. Bahamut gives the heroes a powerful gift—canaries that can transform into gold dragons—and transports them to Tytherion. There the characters see Tiamat’s forces fleeing, fighting among each other, and looting their own fortress. After a brief battle, they meet Berath, who guides them through the Caverns of Fiery Splendor. Just before they enter, they meet Theel, one of Zehir’s spies in the Caverns. Theel takes the characters to the Fountain Chamber, where they can see Tiamat’s shadow far above them. They learn she’s sequestered herself on the floating platform and is using scrying rituals to threaten and cajole her far-flung supporters. The characters quickly discover that a potent array of disintegrator beams and warding magic prevents intruders from simply flying or teleporting up to the Dragon Queen. Each of the five disintegrators, Theel explains, is linked to an ancient dragon in a nearby
cavern. Five caverns, five dragons—defeat them and the heroes don’t need to worry about the five disintegrators. As the characters enter the five dragons’ chambers, they learn that each of the ancient dragons is a brood mother carrying Tiamat’s eggs in a forced breeding effort that has so far failed. For all her power, Tiamat is unique among dragonkind and cannot lay eggs herself. The characters defeat each brood mother in turn, rendering the disintegrators useless. Then, it’s a battle royale with Tiamat: a noholds-barred battle with a full-fledged deity. If the characters win, Bahamut arrives and shows them the world utterly transformed by their actions: a world free from the greed and envy that Tiamat upheld. At that point, the heroes move on to their individual epic destinies, and you can set the stage for your next campaign if you wish.
The Quests In “Last Breath of the Dragon Queen”,” the PCs are at or near their final state. They’re either 30th level or will be within a few encounters. There isn’t much point in acquiring great quantities of further experience or treasure. By now the characters should be as well-equipped as they’re ever going to be. And the adventure is fundamentally simple: Go to Tiamat’s lair and defeat her, ushering in a new age and a transformed world. Thus it’s difficult to justify the same sort of quests they’ve had in the past. One possible exception is this: If one or more characters has unfinished business in regard to an epic destiny (see Epic Destinies on page 48), it might be helpful for the player if you describe the resolution of the epic destiny with a quest.
Preparing for Adventure “Last Breath of the Dragon Queen” is largely a selfcontained adventure, requiring little in terms of advance preparation. If you’ve been playing the Scales of War adventure path from the beginning, you know your players and your DMing style better than we do. We’re confident in your ability to prepare. Running a 30th-level adventure is inherently complex. Here are three tips that will save you time and effort when the dice are actually rolling. Know the Heroes: If one character employs the stealth rules nearly every round, take the time before the session to educate yourself so you can adjudicate it quickly. Look at each character sheet and ask yourself: “What tricks is this guy going to pull?” You aren’t necessarily looking for ways to counter character tactics. You’re looking for aspects of the rules you need
to brush up on, and you’re seeking ways to streamline those moments at the table. Go ahead and tell your players what you’re up to. If you explain that you’re just trying to make sure you’re up to speed with the rules, the players won’t have any lingering suspicions that you’re trying to thwart their every move. (Not all players think like this, but some do, and it’s a perfectly natural impulse.) Know Dragons: An adventure laden with dragons in all their solo-monster glory is a fitting end for a long campaign like Scales of War, so “Last Breath of the Dragon Queen” intentionally has more than its fair share of “boss fights” against dragons. If you spend 30 minutes looking at the various dragon stat blocks and thinking about key tactical considerations
Fe b r u a r y 2 010
|
D u n g e o n 175
6
Last Breath of the Dragon Queen
(how best to use a breath weapon, when to spend action points, what are the advantages and disadvantages of flying, and so on), you’ll be better prepared for the encounters you’re going to run. Dragon battles are a learning process for both you and your players, and we’ve designed “Last Breath of the Dragon Queen” so that everyone at your table will get “better” at dragons (either fighting them or fighting as them) as the adventure progresses. Your tactics will naturally evolve, and so will those of the characters. By the time the heroes face off against Tiamat, everyone at your table should be an absolute expert in dragon battles. Prepare the Flashbacks: Throughout the adventure, Tiamat is surrounded by scrying frames: massive portals (not unlike modern-day video screens) that she uses to contact her allies and worshippers across the universe and also as a focus for divination rituals. When the PCs confront Tiamat on her platform, the scrying frames show key moments where the characters previously triumphed over adversity and defeated Tiamat’s forces. (Tiamat is none too happy that the scrying frames have apparently turned on her, too.) This is a chance to remind the players—not the characters, but the players—of all they’ve been through to reach the conclusion of the adventure path. You’ll want two prepared-in-advance “highlight reel” moments for each hero plus a few key moments of general interest, such as the breaking of the siege in the City of Brass. Every round during the battle with Tiamat, describe a moment briefly: “The northwest scrying frame comes to life, showing Dendrantos delivering the final blow against Arantor (from “Betrayal at Monadhan”), then collapsing from the ongoing cold damage.” The best source for those flashback moments is the players themselves. Ask them to provide a couple of “highlight reel” moments in advance. It’s best if
you can mask your intention and surprise them a bit. If possible, use casual conversation in the days and weeks before running “Last Breath of the Dragon Queen” to gather material for those flashbacks. Get your players to reminisce about their favorite moments from previous adventures, then use those memories as the basis for flashbacks in encounter G11. Draw out reticent players with leading questions about what adventures they really enjoyed, when they knew they had a great character, and so forth. But that’s just the first step. When you need to describe the flashbacks, you’ll also be running a literal god on the table—you’re going to be a busy DM. And you don’t want to put the high drama of the Tiamat battle ‘on pause’ while you think up a good flashback. So the second step is to write those down ahead of time and have them ready to go. Then you can use all of your precious brain capacity for the in-the-moment work of being Tiamat.
What You Need (and Don’t Need) to Play This adventure contains everything you need to play, including background information, setup, encounters, and maps. You might wish to review any appropriate Dungeons & Dragons® 4th Edition rules before play begins. The most important thing you can do before each session is to give each encounter the PCs are likely to reach a two-minute read. That should give you a basic familiarity with monster abilities and tactics and a sense of what other rules (often ones related to skills or terrain) will come into play. It’s also worth noting the things you won’t need. Once characters reach 30th level, they’re done as far as character advancement goes. You don’t need to track or award experience points anymore. Just cross it off your to-do list.
Nor do you need to worry much about treasure. “Last Breath of the Dragon Queen” is a focused adventure, and the characters are under a time constraint: they must get to Tiamat before she rebuilds her network of defenders and allies. Furthermore, the campaign ends when this adventure does. Aside from that, killing the goddess of wealth, greed, and envy ushers in a world where wealth means a lot less. Combine the time constraint, the campaign’s end, and the devaluation of wealth itself, and you find yourself running an adventure where acquired treasure doesn’t mean anything. If the players receive vast wealth, they’ll never have the opportunity to spend it. Treat this unusual situation as an opportunity: Throw the treasure gates open wide! The characters will spend most of the adventure in the halls of the goddess of wealth, so it stands to reason that the place would be positively dripping with treasure. This is your chance to shower the heroes with it. If the PCs still want something specific for their characters, work it into the adventure early (the Treasure section below shows you how). Otherwise, go ahead and give them the proverbial moon. It does no harm and it will add extra resonance to the denouement, where the characters see the concept of material wealth itself taken down a peg or two. Throughout the adventure, we’ve provided monetary treasure beyond the norm. Consider that a first step. This is the lair of the scariest dragon in the world, and she happens to be the goddess of wealth, so you can literally pave the hallways with gold and encrust every door handle with gems if you like. If the goddess of wealth can’t afford such excess, who can?
Fe b r u a r y 2 010
|
D u n g e o n 175
7
Last Breath of the Dragon Queen
Using Tactical Encounters Each encounter includes several common elements, as described below.
Encounter Level Each tactical encounter assumes a group of five player characters. All the encounters are 30th level—and some would be higher, if characters higher than 30th level existed. The final battle against Tiamat, for example, would be just another room in the dungeon . . . for theoretical 35th-level characters. Until all characters reach 30th level and cease to care about experience points, a group earns the XP value noted with the encounter. This amount should be divided by the number of group members whether they’ve reached 30th level or not, with an equal amount awarded to each character. Be sure that everyone reaches 30th level by the end, however, because it would be a major disappointment to a player if everyone else’s character achieved their epic destiny while you remained behind, 5,000 XP short.
Setup This section of a tactical encounter provides you with the basic parameters of the encounter. It gives you a key to the monsters in the encounter so you can locate them on the tactical map, then provides context or background information. The map of each encounter area indicates where the monsters are located when the encounter begins. The setup section also describes what monsters are doing and how they react when the characters arrive.
Some encounters include monsters that are hidden or that do not appear until later in the fight. Do not place those monsters on the map unless at least one hero has succeeded on the Perception check to notice them, or when they enter combat.
Read-aloud Text Read-aloud text provides information about what the characters can see and are aware of. You don’t need to read it word for word. Feel free to paraphrase and use your own words, especially where read-aloud text is provided in a question-and-answer format. Use readaloud text wisely. It is written for the most common approach to a particular situation, but the PCs’ actions might require you to alter the information in any number of ways.
Monster Statistics Encounters include statistics blocks for each monster type present in the encounter. If more than one monster of a particular kind is present, the statistics block indicates how many creatures are present.
Tactics This entry describes special actions the monsters take to defeat the adventurers. Sometimes this means the monsters take advantage of special features of the area or make use of special powers or equipment. Tactics are an important part of both a monster’s ‘personality’ and what makes an encounter challenging, so try to not back away from the monsters’ tactics in order to soften the encounter.
Map Each encounter includes a map keyed with the initial locations of each monster. The map also indicates the location of any special features of the area.
Features of the Area This section describes special features of the map. If the location has items or areas of interest that the characters can interact with, those features are described. Look here to see whether a door is out of the ordinary, if an altar has a secret compartment, and the like.
Adapting the Adventure Fighting Tiamat is a big deal. It’s so big that we’ve intentionally built the entire adventure to build to that climax. While the events of “Last Breath of the Dragon Queen” are set in motion by the specifics of the Scales of War adventure path up to this point, it’s straightforward to envision other paths that might put 30th-level heroes on Tiamat’s doorstep. As long as you can set up a believable reason why Tiamat is in her lair and without multiple layers of cultists, loyal dragons, and other worshippers to defend her, “Last Breath of the Dragon Queen” works without the specifics of the City of Brass siege and Bahamut’s direct involvement. Most of the adaptation occurs in the adventure’s introduction and aftermath. The chamber-by-chamber, session-by-session flow of the adventure can remain unchanged. Because Tiamat is so vulnerable without a literal army of dragons to defend her, you can even run “Last Breath of the Dragon Queen” in worlds that use a different pantheon. Tiamat doesn’t need to be a goddess for this adventure; she could merely (merely!) be a 35th-level dragon. In this case you’ll want to scale down the adventure’s aftermath, which deals with the impact of a deity’s death, but the adventure itself can remain intact.
Fe b r u a r y 2 010
|
D u n g e o n 175
8
Last Breath of the Dragon Queen
Treasure As with previous installments of the Scales of War campaign, “The Last Breath of the Dragon Queen” makes use of the parcel system of treasure rewards as described in the Dungeon Master’s Guide. Because the campaign ends when this adventure does, all treasure is taken from remaining items on the players’ wish lists. This is their last chance to pick up those rewards, after all. Tiamat is the goddess of greed, so there is a staggering amount of material wealth in her lair . . . and in the end, it’s all just window dressing. At 30th level, the PCs are fundamentally beyond the game’s ordinary economics, and it doesn’t matter what they spend their vast treasure on after the adventure is over. If they succeed, they will have created a world without greed. Coins will still have value as a medium of exchange, but treasures won’t be coveted the way they are in the traditional world of D&D (or the real world, for that matter). Players wouldn’t be players if they didn’t want something, so the characters should accumulate ten treasure parcels by the end of the adventure. You can supply these treasures in whatever way you wish, but the following list presents the most likely encounters to bear treasure. During your preparation, assign parcels from those that follow to the encounters in the spaces provided. Use the players’ wish lists to come up with magic items for the first six parcels. Traditionally, DMs save the best treasures for the adventure’s climax. Resist
that urge; characters will never get a chance to actually use an item acquired after Tiamat’s demise. Instead, load up the early parcels A–E with the good stuff, especially if one or more characters have fallen behind the curve gearwise. Parcel A: _______________________ Death from Above (X1). Parcel B: ________________________ Death from Above (X1). Parcel C: _______________________ Hall of Vanquished Champions (G5). Parcel D: _______________________ Hall of Vanquished Champions (G5). Parcel E: _______________________ Audience chamber (G1). Parcel F: _______________________ Audience chamber (G1). Parcel G: ________________________ Green brood mother (G4). Parcel H: ________________________ Observatory (G9). Parcel I: ________________________ Blue brood mother (G10). Parcel J: ________________________ Blue brood mother (G10). At this point, we’re beyond the guidelines in the Dungeon Master’s Guide. Any item regardless of level is just fine in any of the above parcels. Go nuts!
Conversation with Bahamut The adventure starts in the City of Brass shortly after the events of “Test of Fire.” After the characters have taken care of their immediate needs and had an extended rest, a silver dragon from Bahamat’s personal retinue, Girithanian, finds them and invites them to an audience with Bahamut himself. Girithanian takes you to the ramparts near the main gate to the City of Brass. All around is a storm of activity: efreet workers repairing walls, Bahamut’s soldiers scurrying from errand to errand—and the air above you is positively thick with metallic dragons soaring and swooping. Watching it all from an intact section of wall is a kindly old man with long white hair. He wears robes that appear to be made of liquid platinum, and orbiting him like a halo are seven yellow canaries. “Hail, heroes,” Bahamut intones. “Though the cost was high, together we’ve dealt the Dragon Queen a grievous blow. Yet she lurks in Tytherion, and Tiamat will certainly rise again. Unless . . . “Unless you can perform one final deed for me, for our army, and indeed, for all those who reject evil.” Give the characters a chance to respond, make formal pledges of support, and so on. Keep in mind that despite his relatively ordinary appearance, Bahamut is a full-fledged god and always comports himself with a certain gravitas. When the heroes are ready to hear more, Bahamut favors them with a wry smile and continues.
Fe b r u a r y 2 010
|
D u n g e o n 175
9
Last Breath of the Dragon Queen
“My draconic children favor elegant turns of phrase, but I’ll be blunt: I want you to kill Tiamat. Not her aspect, not her avatar, but the deity herself. Too long has her evil spread through the universe. Too long have she and I fought each other to a standstill. “I believe I can get you to the vicinity of her lair. And there is such power within you . . . If anyone can defeat Tiamat in lethal battle, it is you.” After a pause, Bahamut continues. “As you know, I’m acutely aware of what it takes to kill a god. Among those who answered our call here in the City of Brass, no one matches your power. Look at the army you see before you. Other than you, no one here would be more than a momentary annoyance to Tiamat. “Only a small group can reach Tiamat at this crucial moment. Her forces are in disarray, fleeing the Dragon Queen’s wrath and fighting one another. She has lost control of most of her followers. But look at my army. It’s in no shape to close ranks and march on Tytherion, either. It would take a miracle for us to recover, reorganize, and reequip for another battle. “Miracles are what I do, but even if you assume that miracle, then you have a shining army marching on Tiamat’s lair. And when we march, Tiamat’s dispersed, distracted forces will have a common foe to unite against. You see where I’m leading this?” Give the players a chance to follow Bahamut’s reasoning. Then pick it up and restate the mission. “I ask you to do what my army cannot—what I myself cannot. Meet my agent in Tytherion, travel to Tiamat’s Lair, and slay her utterly. Her stronghold is being looted by her own rapacious dragons, and you should have little difficulty assailing what would otherwise be an impregnable fortress. Carve your way through what remains of Tiamat’s guards
however you must. Slay her on the spot—and let her know that the world will be better off for her demise.” The PCs will undoubtedly have questions at this point. Let the conversation flow naturally. Bahamut isn’t holding anything back—he’s clearly beyond that point now. For the first time in centuries, he genuinely believes that Tiamat’s defeat is possible. The only thing Bahamut doesn’t know is the exact disposition of Tiamat’s remaining defenders. Here are example answers to questions characters probably will ask. Tytherion: “I can send you to Tytherion to the general area of Tiamat’s Lair. I do not know details of her demesne, the Caverns of Fiery Splendor. That’s where Berath comes in.” Berath/The Agent: “Ah, Berath . . . a ghost who haunts the caverns of Tytherion and is as loyal to me beyond the grave as he was in life. He can guide you through the Caverns of Fiery Splendor and to the very gates of Tiamat’s inner lair. I’ve contacted him, and he’s expecting you to meet him at the main entrance to the Caverns of Fiery Splendor.” Berath’s History: “Centuries ago, a paladin named Berath . . . one of my most beloved servants . . . grew weary of striving against the Dragon Queen’s minions. He’d earned a little weariness after his hundredth dragon slain, I suppose. He gathered a host that almost rivaled the army we had here, and against my wishes led a crusade into the Caverns of Fiery Splendor. I wish I’d done more to stop him, but I could fault neither his ability nor his resolute purpose. Tiamat was well prepared against Berath’s crusade, and none of the paladins under his banner escaped. I mourned Berath’s loss—as did all who follow me— and relegated his crusade to a sad chapter of history.
“But recently—perhaps because of Tiamat’s current troubles—Berath’s ghost contacted me. I see the doubt on your faces, but I’m sure it’s him and he’s still loyal. There are certain bonds between faithful worshipper and god that cannot be subverted. Berath took great joy when he learned that you would be finishing the job that he started.” Other Allies: “As I said, even my most powerful dragons cannot match your power. And if they did, their presence would certainly draw every chromatic dragon from across the plane. In my divine wisdom, adding anyone else would attract attention without actually helping you kill Tiamat. With one exception . . . “As I ponder your question, something occurs to me. I’m going to do something I’ve never done before. Each of you, take one of these canaries. Just as I’m no ordinary old man, so too are these not ordinary canaries. The canaries will flitter about until you ask for their aid. Then one will transform into a gold dragon that will fight on your behalf for a minute or two—until the magic that transformed them draws them back to me.” Give each character a canary. It’s a one-use item that does the following:
Bahamut’s Golden Canary
Level 30
These harmless-seeming canaries are gold dragons in disguise. Wondrous Item priceless Power (Consumable F Summoning): Standard Action. A summoned Large gold dragon appears under your control in an unoccupied space within 20 squares. The dragon has speed 8, fly 10 (hover) and, unlike a typical summoned creature, has its own defenses and hit points (all defenses 34; hp 120).
Minor Action: +27 vs. AC; 1d12 + 10 damage.
Opportunity Attack: +27 vs. AC; 1d12 + 10 damage.
Fe b r u a r y 2 010
|
D u n g e o n 175
10
Last Breath of the Dragon Queen
Bahamut Taking Part: “Absolutely not. Suffice it to say that Tiamat and I have significant wards designed specifically for each other. For obvious reasons, I must be more careful when it comes to matters of . . . personal security, shall we say.” Tiamat’s True Death: “It’s possible that Tiamat has safeguarded against utter death much like I did, but it’s unlikely. Suffice it to say that no one knows Tiamat’s character better than I do, and such foresight isn’t her style. She’s adept—perhaps more adept than I—at coordinating multiple plans and improvising new evils on the spot. But the long play has never been her forté.” Pay: “For the death of my greatest foe . . . for the expunging of one of the world’s great evils . . . for the slaying of a god? I’ll throw open my treasure-houses to you. Take whatever and as much as you desire.” Bahamut smirks as he says this, because he knows what Tiamat’s death will mean for the very concept of wealth. If the heroes want payment in advance, use the treasure guidelines in the Introduction. If some of the PCs are undergeared, then this is a good way to make sure they’re ready for the tribulations awaiting. Go ahead and give any of the magic item treasures (taking them out of the encounters they’d otherwise appear in). As the treasure section indicates, feel free to bury the characters in material wealth such as coins and gems. Tiamat’s Defenses: “Tiamat risked much when she came here, stripping her stronghold of most of its armed might. Few of those dragons survived the battle, much less returned to Tytherion. Of the remainder, we have reliable reports—including from Berath—that Tiamat’s tendency of rule through fear and avarice doesn’t work when her lackeys doubt her power and her ability to pay. Many simply fled, waiting to see which way the proverbial wind is
blowing. Others used the crisis as an opportunity to settle old scores with one another, to advance in the ranks by killing their superiors, or simply to loot Tiamat’s treasury. Because Tiamat is the goddess of greed, I imagine it’s quite a treasury. “Undoubtedly there are those who remain loyal to Tiamat and those who cannot escape her watchful eyes. If they were numerous or powerful, we wouldn’t be seeing this sort of upheaval among Tiamat’s followers—upheaval that’s spreading across all planes.” Retreat: “If you need to make a tactical retreat, you can come back here or to a citadel of your choosing. Berath may have scouted out a temporary shelter. Do not tarry overlong before pressing onward, however. Every hour you delay is an hour Tiamat will use to marshal her remaining force and persuade her followers that she’s as powerful as ever.” Timing: “If you must take time to prepare, so be it. You are uniquely suited to this task, and I can’t call on anyone else with your potence. But know this: Each of Tiamat’s five heads is whispering, threatening, browbeating, pleading, and bargaining with her far-flung followers and allies to come to her aid. The more you delay, the stronger she grows.” Bahamut genuinely believes this, but even he has underestimated the disorder and fratricide in Tiamat’s ranks. As long as the characters don’t take a month off in the middle of the adventure (or something similarly foolish), Tiamat won’t be able to persuade allies to defend her lair (at least not allies capable of stopping 30th-level heroes.) Roleplaying Notes: Bahamut isn’t a tragic figure in the classical sense, but there’s an ironic twist here that wouldn’t be out of place in Greek tragedy. Bahamut is the only god who has recently died— fundamentally killed by mortals, and yet now he’s
enthusiastically exhorting some mortals to do the same thing to another god. Tiamat is an evil god and Bahamut’s most bitter rival, to be sure. But if you think the players at your table would appreciate it, try to portray Bahamut as somewhat conflicted, torn between his desire to expunge Tiamat’s evil in the world while chastened a bit that he’s resorting to such measures.
Preparations The PCs can make whatever last-minute purchases they want in the City of Brass before departing. Because the city suffered during the siege and subsequent battle, you’re within your rights to limit what they can purchase for their trip. But, as noted in the Treasure section of the introduction, you can have a free hand with available wealth. One other event occurs before the characters head to Tytherion: a visit from a mysterious stranger. An ordinary efreet (or someone else if you have a specific NPC you’d like to re-use) delivers a short, anonymous letter to the heroes. It states: Dear Liberators of Bahamut, Even those who do not march under Bahamut’s flag support you in your future aims. Should you meet a solitary black figure in your upcoming journey, uttering the word “Chuhirimasté” will earn you friendship and aid along the way. —An Ally of Convenience The efreet will say (and divinations will confirm) that a yuan-ti gave him the letter and a thousand gold coins, with instructions to keep the money and deliver the letter. The letter is from agents of Zehir. The “solitary black figure” mentioned is Theel, whom the characters will meet at the entrance to Tiamat’s Lair.
Fe b r u a r y 2 010
|
D u n g e o n 175
11
Last Breath of the Dragon Queen
The Old Man Level 36 Solo Soldier (Leader) with the Canaries
Medium immortal humanoid XP 0 Initiative +26 Senses Perception +32
HP 1,645; Bloodied 822; see also discorporation
AC 52; Fortitude 47, Reflex 45, Will 47
Resist 20 cold, 20 fire
Saving Throws +5; whenever an attack causes an effect on Bahamut that a save can end, he immediately makes a saving throw. Bahamut also makes saving throws at the end of his turn as normal.
Speed 8, teleport 5
Action Points 2 r Unarmed Attack (standard, at-will) F Weapon +41 vs. AC; 1d12 + 20 damage, and the target is dazed until the end of its next turn. A Gold Dragon Rescue (standard, uses one canary) Area burst 1 within 30, centered on ally; +41 vs. AC; the target is stunned (save ends). Effect: The ally in the origin square gains fly 10 until the end of its next turn. R Summon Gold Dragon (standard, uses one canary) F Summoning Ranged 20; Bahamut summons a Large gold dragon in an unoccupied space within range. The dragon has speed 8, fly 10 (hover) and, unlike a typical summoned creature, has its own defenses and hit points (all defenses 34; hp 120).
Minor Action: +27 vs. AC; 1d12 + 10 damage.
Opportunity Attack: +27 vs. AC; 1d12 + 10 damage. Bahamut’s Blessing (standard; at-will) Ranged 30; two targets; each target gains a +10 bonus to attack rolls, a +10 bonus to skill checks, and a +10 bonus to damage rolls. Bahamut’s Cleansing (minor; at-will) Ranged 30; two targets; each target can end one effect a save can end.
Bahamut’s Mercy (minor; at-will) F Healing Ranged 30; two targets; each target can spend a healing surge and regain an additional 25 hit points. Bahamut Runs Rampant (standard; encounter) F Polymorph Bahamut assumes his draconic form (see Bahamut). Seven Canaries Bahamut has seven trained canaries which he can transform into gold dragons. Some of his powers expend these canaries. All the canaries return during a short rest. Discorporation (when bloodied) When Bahamut becomes bloodied, he discorporates and is unable to take physical form for a time. Alignment Lawful Good Languages Supernal
Skills Arcana +31, Athletics +33, Diplomacy +32, Endurance +34, Heal +32, History +31, Insight +32, Intimidate +32, Religion +31
Str 31 (+28) Dex 23 (+24) Wis 28 (+27) Con 33 (+29) Int 27 (+26) Cha 29 (+27) Equipment: robe Description: When he’s not holding court in his shining castle, Bahamut walks the natural world in the most unassuming of disguises: an elderly man accompanied by seven trained canaries. This old man, variously called a sage or a hermit in folklore, travels from place to place with no apparent purpose. He’s quick to offer advice, information, or assistance to other travelers. One folk tale in particular is told with a hundred variations: The sage with the canaries shares a campfire with roadside travelers, offering mysterious advice that borders on prophecy. Still, the travelers would have regarded the old man as nothing more than a curiosity if it weren’t for the monsters that attacked the camp. Imagine their surprise when the old man started throwing around unfathomably powerful magic and turning his canaries into gold dragons.
Fe b r u a r y 2 010
|
D u n g e o n 175
12
Last Breath of the Dragon Queen
Departure
Arriving in Tytherion
When the PCs are ready, Bahamut directs Girithanian to perform a Planar Portal ritual to send them to Tytherion. Through the portal, the characters see:
Girithanian sends the heroes to a portal circle near the main entrance to Tiamat’s main fortress, one of the few artificial structures in the lowland region of Azharul. The terrain is a volcanic moonscape devoid of vegetation, with only pockmarked craters and sluggish rivers of lava scattered across its surface. The PCs arrive at twilight—because it’s always twilight in Tytherion.
Girithanian completes the ritual, and you see, shimmering through the portal, a rocky desert with red-limned volcanic peaks in the distance. You cannot make out size or color through the haze, but you can see distinctly draconic silhouettes in the sky. When the characters step through the portal, they arrive in Tytherion and trigger the “Death from Above” encounter (page 17).
Amid the rubble of this volcanic wasteland are five immense towers that stretch to the sky. They’re arranged in a ring and connected by a high ridge with one gap cut in it— clearly the intended entrance. Above the towers, dragons
are soaring. As you watch, a large red dragon claws at a blue dragon, and they tussle in midair while plummeting earthward. Looking closer at the towers, you can see crumbling edifices and other signs of recent battle. The towers are about a mile away. As the characters approach the towers, they see more evidence of chaos in Tiamat’s realm: dragons, humanoid soldiers, and other followers of Tiamat fleeing the fortress, many burdened with loot from the Dragon Queen’s treasuries. Furthermore, the volcanic plain between the characters and the towers is strewn with wrecked wagons, dragon carcasses, and other evidence of conflict and retreat.
Fe b r u a r y 2 010
|
D u n g e o n 175
13
Last Breath of the Dragon Queen
While there are many dragons and other monsters about, there’s almost no one capable of threatening the heroes. If the players seem keen to start a fight (whether to capture a prisoner for questioning or just because), feel free to handle it with a brief narration or just declare them the victors. A battle between the PCs and the high-paragon/low-epic opposition here isn’t a battle that needs to be played out in round-by-round detail. Nor do any prisoners even try to keep what secrets they know from the characters. They’re a frightened, demoralized lot. Any of the dragons or other refugees from Tiamat’s domain know that the defenses are in such disarray as to be nonexistent. As for the Dragon Queen herself, she’s holed up in her inner lair somewhere within the Caverns of Fiery Splendor, but she hasn’t emerged or communicated with them in days. The prisoners can, if coerced, draw a sketchy map of the Caverns of Fiery Splendor that bears some resemblance to reality, but none of them know where Tiamat’s lair is within it.
Bypassing Travel Once the characters are in Tytherion, they may wish to use a True Portal ritual or similar magic to teleport right to Tiamat. Let ‘em. They’ll skip the Death From Above encounter and miss meeting Berath and Theel, but Tiamat herself is protected by a 35th-level Forbiddance ritual that covers all but the 10 feet closest to the floor in the fountain chamber. The heroes arrive on the border of the forbiddance zone near the fountain, and they’ll have to deal with the dragon-eye disintegrators without Theel’s warning.
Death From Above As the PCs get within a quarter-mile or so of the five great towers, they encounter the one denizen of the area that’s actually a threat: Azharul Dominion ships.
Each ship is a conveyance crewed by dragonborn sailors, but it’s easiest to treat them as creatures in their own right. After that encounter, Berath manifests and makes his presence known to the characters.
The Five Great Towers Each tower encompasses hundreds of thousands of square feet . . . all of it thoroughly sacked. Delving into it room by room is a waste of time for everyone at your table, so quickly describe extensive armories, smithies, arsenals, and barracks within each tower. Corpses—mostly of dragons and dragonborn warriors—are strewn throughout.
Meeting Berath Once the characters have dispatched the Azharul Dominion ships, Berath appears before the heroes. There’s a momentary shimmer in the air, and the translucent form of a ghostly human in battered plate armor and a dragon-helm appears. “I am Berath,” it says, “and your coming was foretold by no less than a vision from the Platinum Dragon himself. Together, let us complete the holiest of all crusades! Onward!” The PCs will probably engage Berath in conversation at this point. He’s eager to get moving, but he’s even more eager to win the characters’ trust and maximize their chances against Tiamat. During the conversation, Berath tells the tale of his crusade and describes his soldiers whittled down by ambush after ambush within the Caverns of Fiery Splendor. At Berath’s last stand, a small side cavern was nearly covered by a collapsing wall and now would make a disguised base for the characters—especially if they inscribe a portal circle there.
Berath can take the heroes to the beginning of the tunnel that leads directly to the fountain chamber, but he’s never been inside—because he can’t go inside. In some cosmic sense, he won’t let himself do as a ghost what he could not accomplish in life. There’s little more than this that Berath can do. He cannot interact with the world other than by speaking and making himself visible; no picking objects up, attacking monsters, etc. The reverse is also true: Berath can’t be targeted by creatures and can’t be harmed by anything. He’s not undead or even a creature, really. He’s a ghost in the classic sense of the word, clinging to some vague, spiritual existence only because of the enormity of his sacrifice and his close connection to Bahamut. Berath cannot abide proximity to evil creatures, and he disappears when they’re near. Thus he can’t be present during a battle, nor can he scout ahead very well. Expanding Berath: As written, Berath is just a basic guide for the characters. He offers a safe hideout and provides directions to Tiamat’s Lair. If you think your table wants a deeper interaction with Berath, feel free to expand his role in the adventure. It might take a skill challenge (using the rules described in Dungeon Master’s Guide 2) to win Berath’s trust. As you portray Berath, emphasize the horrors he endured watching his crusade collapse within the caverns and suggest that he may no longer be entirely sane. If the players take a liking to Berath, you can even ignore the “Berath can’t go inside Tiamat’s Lair” restriction and let him commiserate with the characters and applaud their efforts throughout the adventure. Don’t let him be brought back to life, however; Berath is most effective as a tragic figure.
Fe b r u a r y 2 010
|
D u n g e o n 175
14
Last Breath of the Dragon Queen
Getting Through the Caverns of Fiery Splendor The Caverns of Fiery Splendor aren’t empty, but they’re certainly devoid of creatures that pose a challenge for 30th-level heroes. Periodically describe high-paragon and low-epic dragons and other denizens in the tunnels, and ask the players whether they intend to fight it out, ignore, or slip past the monsters. Then describe the characters succeeding at those efforts. Time at the gaming table is too precious to waste on encounters whose outcome is foregone. “Last Breath of the Dragon Queen” is all about Tiamat’s lair itself, but the Caverns of Fiery Splendor are also home to other points of interest described (in April, when the book will be published) in The Plane Above: wandering darksworn and adamantine doors that imprison the souls of chromatic dragons who had the temerity to worship other gods. The characters ultimately have more important business in this adventure, but a future campaign may bring your players (if not their existing heroes) back to the Caverns of Fiery Splendor. As described in the Bypassing Travel section above, a True Portal ritual can bypass all the travel (and the chance to meet Theel). Berath can pass through the portal the same as anyone else. If the PCs choose this route, just move ahead to the Fountain Chamber.
Finding Theel Theel, an ebony-scaled yuan-ti spy, is hiding (Stealth +29) near the entrance to the tunnel that leads to the fountain chamber. She’ll reveal herself to anyone not obviously working for Tiamat, relying on her viper strike to turn invisible and escape if necessary. If she hears the characters give the password (“Chuhirimasté”), Theel bows and says, “Let’s get you inside so you can confront the Dragon Queen.”
Theel is willing to converse with the characters, but as a spy, she has an intense dislike for being out in the open and instinctively doesn’t say more than she must. If pressed, she’ll admit that she works for Zehir. She’ll even speculate on Zehir’s motives—a wounded or dead Tiamat would let Zehir expand his territory here in Tytherion. (The Tiamat/Zehir “turf war” in Tytherion is known to any hero who succeeds at a DC 25 Religion check.) Theel hasn’t been beyond the fountain chamber, but she can warn PCs that disintegration beams emerge from the eyes of the dragon-head doorways. Furthermore, she suggests that the magic of each dragon head is tied to whatever lives beyond the doorway—and whatever that is, it isn’t Tiamat herself, because she’s on a platform floating above the fountain chamber. “The disintegtratorsssss . . . are potent indeed. They nearly ssssslew me in a flash when I tried tampering with them. But my resssssearch indicates that if you slay whatever lays beyond each dragon-mouth, it’ll disssssable the dragoneyesssss.” Theel also has an illusion-hidden cave nearby that the characters can use as a base if they wish. It has a portal circle inscribed within it. Theel won’t willingly fight at the characters’ sides, forcefully reminding them if necessary that she is a spy, not an assassin. Her orders are to provide information to the heroes, then watch the fireworks and report back to Zehir’s exarchs on what happens. Expanding Theel: Theel is as evil as they come, and your table may decide to ignore or fight her. That’s fine—they can figure out how the disintegrator beams work on their own. Theel isn’t exactly thrilled about her current assignment, which requires
Fe b r u a r y 2 010
|
D u n g e o n 175
15
Last Breath of the Dragon Queen
her to a) expose herself to danger, and b) work with her natural enemies. If you think your group would enjoy it, you can expand the interaction with Theel to encompass a skill challenge to earn her trust or otherwise extract her aid. Berath and Theel definitely do not form a mutual admiration society. As long as the players are engaged in the middle of the conversation, don’t be shy about portraying the contempt the paladin ghost and the yuan-ti spy feel for each other. Theel
Level 28 Skirmisher
Medium natural humanoid, yuan-ti (reptile) XP 13,000 Initiative +26 Senses Perception +23 HP 254; Bloodied 127 AC 42 (44); Fortitude 39 (41), Reflex 41 (43), Will 35 (37) Resist poison 20 Speed 7 (9); see also slither away m Falchion (standard, at-will) F Poison, Weapon +33 vs. AC; 2d4 + 7 damage, and ongoing 10 poison damage (save ends). r Longbow (standard, at-will) F Poison, Weapon Ranged 20/40; +33 vs. AC; 1d10 + 10 damage, and ongoing 10 poison damage (save ends). M Sudden Strike (standard, recharge ⚄ ⚅) F Weapon Theel can move up to 7 squares and attack; +33 vs. AC; 4d4 + 7 damage, and the target is dazed (save ends). M Viper Strike (standard, at-will) F Illusion, Weapon +31 vs. Will; 6d4 + 7 damage, and Theel becomes invisible and can shift 2 squares. Theel remains invisible until the start of her next turn. Miss: The target takes half damage, and Theel shifts 1 square, but does not turn invisible. Slither Away While bloodied, Theel gains +2 speed and a +2 bonus to all defenses. Alignment Evil Languages Common, Draconic Skills Bluff +21, Dungeoneering +23, Insight +23, Perception +23, Stealth +29, Thievery +29 Str 24 (+21) Dex 30 (+24) Wis 16 (+17) Con 22 (+20) Int 18 (+18) Cha 14 (+16) Equipment: arrow x20, falchion, leather armor, longbow
Fe b r u a r y 2 010
|
D u n g e o n 175
16
Last Breath of the Dragon Queen
O1: Death from Above Encounter Level 29 (78,000 XP)
Setup
3 Azharul dominion ships (D)
This encounter serves as something of a warm-up for the PCs, and it presents them with an unusual foe: flying war galleys that function like individual creatures. When the characters are a quarter-mile from the entrance to the Caverns of Fiery Splendor, read: Emerging from the twilight skies above you are three sailing ships. Lightning coruscates around their hulls. Each one has a bulbous projector of some sort on its prow, just below where its figurehead would be. They swoop toward you, and you can make out sailors—dragonborn, perhaps?—manning ballistae on the deck. Perception Check DC 25: There is no doubt that the sailors are dragonborn. Religion Check DC 30: These are Azharul dominion ships—elite guardians of Tiamat’s part of Tytherion.
This encounter is unusual in that it takes a conveyance crewed by low-level sailors and treats it as a creature for the purposes of combat. Doing so is both easier and more satisfying than slaughtering dozens of minions in cramped ship quarters. It requires a certain mental flexibility on everyone’s part to accept the abstraction that ships can be treated as creatures. The dominion ships’ collective operation and crew suppression abilities should cover most common interactions between the characters and the crew directly, but let your common sense—and your sense of fun—rule the day. Your descriptions of the battle are key to making the encounter work. As you describe each hit, consider whether it makes more sense for the “damage” to be depicted as against the crew or the ship itself. An archer launching volleys of arrows upward? You might say, “one of your arrows hits a dragonborn holding a map—perhaps a navigator—and he falls screaming to his doom.” A Black Fire attack from the wizard, on the other hand, might be described as “the hull is deeply scorched by your magic, and much of the rigging catches ablaze.”
Tactics The dominion ships’ captains are not subtle. They prefer to simply hover over their enemies and bombard them with the thunder-echo projector. If the heroes fly up and engage a dominion ship in melee, the other dominion ships move far away (at least 20 squares and maybe the full 40) and attack the melee combatants with their projectors. The ships are immune to thunder damage, so they don’t need to worry about friendly fire.
3 Azharul Dominion Ships Level 28 Elite Artillery
Gargantuan natural animate (construct) XP 26,000 each Initiative +24 Senses Perception +19 Hissing Corona (Lightning) aura 4; any creature that enters the aura or starts its turn there takes 10 lightning damage. HP 394; Bloodied 197 AC 40; Fortitude 40, Reflex 42, Will 38 Immune thunder; immune poison, disease, psychic, charm, fear (melee and ranged only; see Collective Operation below) Saving Throws +2 Speed fly 10 (hover) Action Points 1 m Dragonborn Marines on Deck (minor 1/round, at-will) F Weapon +33 vs. AC; 3d8 + 6 damage. r Thunder-Echo Projectors (standard, at-will) F Thunder Ranged 20/40; +35 vs. AC; 3d6 + 10 thunder damage. Effect: The thunder projector makes a secondary attack against every other creature within 5 squares of the primary target, originating the attack from the primary target: ranged 10; +33 vs. Reflex; 2d8 + 10 thunder damage. Collective Operation The dominion ship is operated by multiple dragonborn crew, and attacking or controlling them individually doesn’t hamper the ship. The ship is subject to close and area attacks normally, but ranged and melee attacks with the poison, disease, psychic, charm, or fear keywords don’t harm the dominion ship. Crew Suppression A creature adjacent to the dominion ship can spend a standard action to attack the visible crew members. They don’t fight back; such an “attack” automatically succeeds. It does no damage but leaves the dominion ship unable to make its melee attack (save ends). If the same creature performs the crew suppression attack three rounds in a row, the thunder-echo projectors are likewise unable to attack (save ends). Alignment Evil Languages Draconic (crew) Str 27 (+22) Dex 30 (+24) Wis 20 (+19) Con 23 (+20) Int 14 (+16) Cha 22 (+20)
Fe b r u a r y 2 010
|
D u n g e o n 175
17
Last Breath of the Dragon Queen
Crenellated Walls: Provide cover, except from dominion ships overhead and less than 5 squares away horizontally. Like the towers, the walls are vulnerable to the thunder-echo projector. Each square of wall crumbles and collapses when it takes 25 thunder damage. This doesn’t damage adjacent creatures, but it eliminates the cover and renders that square difficult terrain. Cliffs: 30 feet high; Athletics DC 25 to climb. Crater: Difficult terrain inside the crater. The craters provide cover, except from dominion ships overhead and less than 5 squares away horizontally. Dragon Carcass: Difficult terrain.
Fountain Chamber When the characters reach the entrance to Tiamat’s Lair, Berath goes no further, wishes them well with tears in his eyes, and disappears. Theel slithers forward and leads the characters about a quartermile down a wide, winding tunnel to the fountain chamber.
Features of the Area Illumination: This cavern has only the illumination the PCs bring with them. Towers: These provide superior cover, but they automatically take damage whenever someone within 5 squares gets hit with a thunder-echo projector. They collapse when they’ve taken 50 damage, dealing 5d10 damage to anyone inside them. Those squares are then filled with rubble and count as difficult terrain.
You find yourself at the bottom of a tall chamber lit by a perpetual geyser of magma that streams upward several hundred feet. At its top is a metallic platform, floating near the roof of the chamber but not touching the sides—almost as if it is buoyed and held aloft by the magma fountain. Around the chamber are five immense dragons, each as large as a barn, carved in relief along the lower perimeter of the chamber. Each has open jaws that serve as a doorway to a tunnel sloping downward. The eyes of each dragon glow, casting soft beams of light that dance across the chamber walls like searchlights in the night sky.
Perception Check DC 23: The muttering is a low female voice. You can’t make out words but it sounds angry. DC 33 (and hero speaks Draconic): You can make out bits of speech in Draconic. You hear the voice say, “You’ve crossed me for the last time, mortal . . .” A few minutes later, you hear “call it an alliance of convenience . . . ” and “ . . . think of the current disorder as an opportunity . . . ”
Arcana Check DC 23: It’s clear that a powerful Forbiddance ritual— one more powerful than mortals can accomplish—covers most of this chamber.
The Trap The dragon-eye disintegrator beams intentionally go far beyond an ordinary trap—even an ordinary trap for 30th-level characters. Its intent is simple: render any PC it hits incapable of a sustained battle afterward without significant aid, so that the characters don’t entirely bypass the rest of the adventure and tackle Tiamat straightaway. They can do so if they wish, of course, but they’ll go into battle battered and bruised. Especially if Theel or one of the brood mothers explains it, the characters will realize they need to defeat all five brood mothers to ascend to Tiamat’s platform. Nor can the disintegrators be evaded or overwhelmed. They pierce the magma fountain and strike heroes on the other side, and they shoot quickly enough to attack every character who ascends, whether it’s one or many. The disintegrator beams take magic from the brood queens, but they do so in a manner more like hydraulics than electrical circuitry. Shutting down
Fe b r u a r y 2 010
|
D u n g e o n 175
18
Last Breath of the Dragon Queen
just some of the dragon heads (by killing the relevant brood queen) doesn’t diminish the potency of the disintegrators. There’s just as much magic, even if it’s going through fewer apertures. The PCs must disable all five dragon heads to shut down the disintegrators. If the characters aren’t getting it, deal the damage from the disintegrators and let them fight Tiamat for a while on the platform. Characters might die as a result, but 30th-level characters have the means to resurrect themselves. Think of that early battle as an appetizer. Heroes who’ve been abused by the disintegrators and then Tiamat will certainly try their luck with the brood mothers at that point, and they’ll be scheming payback tactics the whole time. That’s satisfying drama for you.
The Forbiddance Ward Tiamat has cast the Forbiddance ritual (at her level, 35th) so it covers the entire chamber except for the bottom 10 feet. She wanted her followers to be able to teleport to her vicinity, after all. Any attempt to scry on Tiamat fails, and any attempt to teleport into the chamber results in the creature appearing on the chamber’s floor. Once PCs are within the forbiddance zone, they can teleport within it. Only teleporting from outside the zone is prohibited. Characters can climb the walls or f ly up 10 feet, suffer a barrage from the disintegrators, then teleport the rest of the way if they have the means.
Getting Tiamat’s Attention Tiamat is a goddess, she’s not entirely herself at the moment, and she’s desperately trying to reestablish some sort of organization among her followers. She’s so busy contacting her high priests, powerful dragons,
and other allies that she’ll ignore shouts, threats, and insults from the characters. If the heroes get clever and send some sort of message skyward, Tiamat obliterates it, cackles, and continues her rebuilding efforts. Only the actual presence of enemies on the platform gets her attention. Dragon-Eye Disintegrator Beams Level 30 Solo Blaster Hazard 95,000 XP A white spotlight-beam emerges from the eyes of each dragon, transfixing each flying creature in the room. Hazard: Every creature who moves higher than 10 feet above the floor of the fountain chamber gets hit by disintegrator beams. Perception F No check is required to see the glowing eyes on each dragon-head entrance. Arcana F DC 30: The eye-beams will disintegrate anything that flies upward toward Tiamat’s platform. F DC 35: Tampering with the eye-beams may trigger them, but they draw energy from a powerful life-force beyond the dragon-doors. Trigger When a creature moves into or starts its turn in a square more than 10 feet above the floor. Attack Opportunity Action Ranged 150 Target: Every creature in range within the forbiddance zone other than Tiamat. Attack: +40 vs. Reflex Hit: 10d10 + 100 damage and 3d6 healing surges. A creature reduced to 0 hit points by the disintegrator’s damage is destroyed; it has been reduced to a pile of fine gray dust. Countermeasures F Killing all five brood mothers disables the disintegrator beams. F Four successes at a DC 40 Arcana or Thievery check disables one dragon-head disintegrator, but each attempt, successful or not, triggers the beams against every creature in the chamber except Tiamat, including those on the ground.
Fe b r u a r y 2 010
|
D u n g e o n 175
19
Last Breath of the Dragon Queen
G1: Audience Chamber Encounter Level 30 (103,000 XP)
Setup
Quanathrik, exarch of Tiamat (Q) 1 dread wraith assassin (D) Shard of annihilation trap
Tiamat’s advisors and occasionally the Dragon Queen herself would hold formal audiences with visiting dignitaries in this chamber. It was also home to ceremonies where Tiamat would anoint a new champion, consort, or exarch. Traitors to Tiamat’s cause were often chained to the center of the mosaic, then publicly executed with the shard of annihilation. When the characters reach the entrance to the chamber, read: This richly appointed room has a mosaic done in black pearl winding a serpentine pattern across the white marble floor. To the right and left are balconies—one with pews and the other a bare platform. There are two sets of double doors at the far end of the room and a dais in the center that glitters with gold and platinum coins scattered across it. A dragonborn in finely embroidered purple robes stands at the far end of the mosaic, just at the edge of the dais. Perception Check DC 23: There has to be a small fortune in coins on that dais—thousands of coins. This encounter builds slowly. At first there’s just Quanathrik in his dragonborn form. In the second round, the shard of annihilation will start moving along the mosaic. In the third and fourth rounds, the dread wraith assassin will reveal itself and the characters will realize that Quanathrik is more than just a dragonborn in a fancy robe.
Tactics Only Quanathrik is visible at the start of the fight. In the first round, he moves into the mosaic area and says, “Behold the shard of annihilation!” The shard appears at the end of that round (initiative 0) and starts working its way along its path. (Be sure Quanathrik is not in a spot where he could be hit by the shard’s first move.) The shard of annihilation is part of the fun for this encounter, so try to keep either Quanathrik or the dread wraith assassin near the mosaic at all times, even if it would make tactical sense for them to both retreat to the balconies. Both need not be there, but at least one of them should be. Quanathrik: Quanathrik is built on an ancient blue dragon chassis, and in this adventure you’ll get plenty of practice running powerful dragons. The interesting aspect of the monster is flipping back and forth between gargantuan dragon and medium creature. Time the “big reveal”—Quanathrik becoming a full-fledged dragon—for maximum impact. In dragonborn form, Quanathrik can hurl lightning and teleport away every round, and that’s reasonable danger output, especially if he’s biding his time while his breath weapon recharges. In dragon form, Quanathrik has a push along with his gore attack—just the thing for pushing heroes into the shard of annihilation. Dread Wraith Assassin: In about the third round, Quanathrik cries out, “Servant of the Raven Queen, we call out to you. Honor the gift your mistress gave!” This brings the dread wraith assassin into play. With Stealth +29, you need only dim the lights a little at first. Have the dread wraith go after PCs who are trying to stay away from Quanathrik. Shard of Annihilation: As described in the trap section below, the shard follows the mosaic path on
the floor. If it reaches the end of the path while the battle is still raging, you have a choice. You can have it wink out of existence entirely, or blink back to the start of the path, or reverse direction . . . or you can have it break free from its path and make a beeline for the nearest creature, something it’s never done before and a great surprise to Quanathrik. Let your sense of pacing and drama decide which is right for you. Dread Wraith Assassin
Level 31 Lurker
Large shadow humanoid (undead) XP 23,000 Initiative +28 Senses Perception +21; darkvision
Shroud of Night (Necrotic) aura 5; bright light in the aura is reduced to dim light, and dim light becomes darkness.
HP 206; Bloodied 103
Regeneration 20 (if the dread wraith lord takes radiant damage, regeneration is negated until the end of the wraith’s next turn) AC 45; Fortitude 41, Reflex 43, Will 43
Immune disease, fear, poison; Resist 30 necrotic, insubstantial; Vulnerable 20 radiant (see also regeneration) Speed fly 10 (hover); phasing m Dread Blade (standard, at-will) F Necrotic Reach 2; +34 vs. Reflex; 2d10 + 10 necrotic damage, and the target is weakened (save ends). C Death Shriek (when reduced to 0 hit points) F Psychic Close blast 3; targets enemies; +32 vs. Will; 4d8 + 10 psychic damage, and the target is dazed (save ends). Miss: Half damage. Combat Advantage F Necrotic The dread wraith assassin deals 4d6 extra necrotic damage against any target it has combat advantage against. Shadow Glide (move; encounter) The dread wraith assassin shifts 6 squares. Spawn Wraith Any humanoid killed by a dread wraith assassin rises as a free-willed dread wraith at the start of its creator’s next turn, appearing in the space where it died (or in the nearest unoccupied space). Raising the slain creature (using the Raise Dead ritual) does not destroy the spawned wraith. Alignment Chaotic Evil Languages Common Skills Stealth +29
Str 24 (+22) Dex 28 (+24) Wis 12 (+16) Con 20 (+20) Int 14 (+17) Cha 28 (+24) Fe b r u a r y 2 010
|
D u n g e o n 175
20
Last Breath of the Dragon Queen
Features of the Area Illumination: This cavern has only the illumination the characters bring with them. Ceiling: The ceiling of the cavern is 40 feet high, placing it 20 feet above the balconies. Northwest Alcove: These double doors are barred on the inside, which should give the players pause. If unbarred and opened, the door releases a cascade of gems—the room was full to the brim with them. Any character standing in the 12 squares immediately between the doors and the dais is harmlessly knocked prone. The gems, which are predominantly rubies, emeralds, diamonds, sapphires, and black pearls, are collectively worth 5 million gp. It will take one person 45 minutes to gather them up. See the treasure section at the beginning of the adventure for an explanation of this adventure’s unusual treasure placement. Dais: This platform is covered with treasure, specifically 500,000 gp in equal portions of gold, silver, and platinum, plus treasure parcels A and F. The entire platform is difficult terrain. Statues: The statues have no special effect. They are 10 feet tall and can be scaled with a DC 15 Athletics check. Floor Mosaic: The mosaic is inlaid gems. The sphere of annihilation follows its path. Other than that, the mosaic has no effect. The gems can’t be pried from the floor without ruining them.
Fe b r u a r y 2 010
|
D u n g e o n 175
21
Last Breath of the Dragon Queen
Quanathrik, Exarch of Tiamat Level 28 Solo Artillery
Gargantuan natural magical beast (dragon) XP 65,000 Initiative +18 Senses Perception +23; darkvision HP 1,290; Bloodied 645 AC 42; Fortitude 46, Reflex 40, Will 40 Resist 30 lightning Saving Throws +5 Speed 10, fly 12 (hover) Action Points 2 m Gore (standard, at-will) F Lightning Reach 4; +34 vs. AC; 2d8 + 10 plus 2d6 lightning damage, and the target is pushed 3 squares and knocked prone. m Claw (standard, at-will) Reach 4; +32 vs. AC; 2d6 + 10 damage. M Draconic Fury (standard, at-will) The dragon makes a gore attack and two claw attacks. M Lightning Reformation (move, available whenever breath weapon isn’t available) F Teleportation, Polymorph The dragon teleports up to 12 squares and takes the form of a medium dragonborn. He can regain his gargantuan dragon form as a minor action. While in dragonborn form, he cannot use his breath weapon, frightful presence, or thunderclap, and his gore and claw attacks become Reach 1.
R Breath Weapon (standard, recharge ⚄ ⚅) F Lightning The dragon targets up to three creatures with its lightning breath; the first target must be within 20 squares of the dragon, the second target within 10 squares of the first, and the third target within 10 squares of the second; +34 vs. Reflex; 3d12 + 22 lightning damage. Miss: Half damage. This attack does not provoke opportunity attacks. R Hurl Lightning (standard, available only in dragonborn form) F Lightning Ranged 20; +34 vs. Reflex; 2d12 + 22 lightning damage. This attack does not provoke opportunity attacks. C Frightful Presence (standard, encounter) F Fear Close burst 10; targets enemies; +34 vs. Will; the target is stunned until the end of the dragon’s next turn. Aftereffect: The target takes a -2 penalty to attack rolls (save ends). C Thunderclap (standard, at-will) F Thunder Close burst 3; +34 vs. Fortitude; 2d10 + 8 thunder damage, and the target is stunned until the end of the blue dragon’s next turn. Critical Hit: As above, except that the target is stunned (save ends). A Lightning Burst (standard, at-will) F Lightning Area burst 4 within 20; +34 vs. Reflex; 5d6 + 8 lightning damage. Miss: Half damage. Alignment Evil Languages Common, Draconic Skills Arcana +22, Athletics +34, Diplomacy +22, Insight +23, Nature +23, Religion +23 Str 31 (+24) Dex 19 (+18) Wis 18 (+18) Con 26 (+22) Int 17 (+17) Cha 17 (+17)
Shard of Annihilation Hazard
Level 29 Lurker XP 15,000
A shard of impenetrable blackness floats along a path inscribed on the floor, leaving black motes of energy in its wake. Hazard: The shard of pure blackness fills one square but doesn’t provide cover or block movement. Perception F No check is required to see the shard. Arcana F DC 34: The character recognizes the shard’s nature and that it’s similar to a sphere of annihilation. Trigger When a creature enters any of the squares covered by the mosaic, the shard appears at initiative point 0 that round. Every round it moves 1d6 + 4 squares, attacking everyone whose space it enters. Attack Opportunity Action Melee 0 Target: One creature Attack: +32 vs. Fortitude Hit: 6d6 + 10 damage and ongoing 15 damage (save ends). A creature reduced to 0 hit points by the shard’s damage is destroyed, reduced to a pile of fine gray dust. Countermeasures F Destroying or disenchanting the mosaic is the only way to destroy the shard. Any square will suffice; they’re all AC 38, other defenses 35, hp 200; resist 15 all.
Fe b r u a r y 2 010
|
D u n g e o n 175
22
Last Breath of the Dragon Queen
G2: Red BroodMother’s Lair Encounter Level 30 (110,000 XP)
Setup
1 red brood mother (R) Magma geyser trap (M)
This chamber, one of five like it, is where the red brood mother keeps her lair, laying eggs for Tiamat as fast as she can. When the heroes reach the entrance to the chamber, read: The entire chamber glows with a crimson light, and the reason is obvious: the floor of the chamber is a roiling sea of magma. Three islands rise from the magma, and on the furthest isle is a gargantuan red dragon. It’s hard to tell at first because of the waves of heat distorting your vision, but when the dragon shifts, you see its massive, distended belly, made lumpy with ovoid shapes underneath the skin. Other parts of the body are as sleek as any dragon, but the belly makes this dragon look massively obese—or pregnant. Perception Check DC 33: The magma is bubbling near the edges. Dungeoneering Check DC 28: The bubbles in the magma could be a geyser of magma that will erupt after the slightest vibration nearby. The magma geyser should be something of a surprise, but the players already know that magma is dangerous and they may be warded against fire damage in any case. Of the brood mothers, the red one is the most dangerous. Next to Tiamat herself, this is the toughest dragon fight in the whole adventure.
Tactics As with all brood mothers, emphasize the dragon’s massive belly and use the underbelly crush whenever you can because it isolates a PC. Also, don’t forget the dragon’s fire aura, which deals a lot of automatic damage and will almost always give it concealment against ranged attacks. Red Dragon: The standard dragon strategy (use breath weapon as often as you can, then move and melee to try to gather the characters together while breath weapon recharges) works well here. Use the breath weapon whenever you can, remembering that
Red Brood Mother
Level 30 Solo Soldier
Gargantuan natural magical beast (dragon) XP 95,000 Initiative +24 Senses Perception +26; darkvision Inferno (Fire) aura 5; creatures that enter or start their turns in the aura take 20 fire damage. Creatures in the aura have concealment against ranged attacks. HP 1,390; Bloodied 695 AC 48; Fortitude 48, Reflex 43, Will 42 Resist 40 fire Saving Throws +5 Speed 12, fly 12 (hover) Action Points 2 m Bite (standard, at-will) F Fire Reach 4; +37 vs. AC; 2d12 + 12 damage, plus 6d6 fire damage. m Claw (standard, at-will) Reach 4; +37 vs. AC; 2d12 + 12 damage. M Double Attack (standard, at-will) The dragon makes two claw attacks. M Tail Strike (immediate reaction, when an enemy moves to a position where it flanks the red dragon, at-will) The dragon attacks the enemy with its tail: reach 4; +35 vs. Reflex; 4d10 + 12 damage, and the target is pushed 3 squares. M Underbelly Crush (standard, at-will) Targets an adjacent creature; +30 vs. Reflex; 1d12 +10 damage, and a Large or smaller target is grabbed, pulled 1 square into the dragon’s space, and restrained. A creature trapped underneath the brood mother’s bulk has line of
the secondary attack negates fire resistance for the rest of the encounter. Frightful presence is most effective when it’s used early—especially because stunned characters can’t move away from the magma geysers. But wait a round or two if it looks like the heroes will move closer to the magma and closer to the dragon. Let them come to you, in other words. Don’t be afraid to leave a flank apparently unguarded or even to practically entice a rogue into moving into a flanking position. As soon as a PC takes the bait, use tail strike to push them into the magma for their temerity. sight and line of effect only to the brood mother, and no creatures have line of sight or line of effect to it. A creature that escapes the grab is no longer underneath the brood mother and no longer restrained; the character shifts to the nearest square that is not part of the brood mother’s space. If the brood mother moves so that it no longer occupies the grabbed character’s space, then the character is no longer grabbed or restrained. Sustain Minor: The brood mother sustains the grab, and the target takes 20 damage plus 10 fire damage. R Breath Weapon (standard, recharge 5 6 ) F Fire Close blast 5; +35 vs. Reflex; 4d12 + 10 fire damage, and the red dragon makes a secondary attack against the same target. Secondary Attack +33 vs. Fortitude; the target’s fire resistance is negated until the end of the encounter. Miss: Half damage, and no secondary attack. Bloodied Breath (free, when first bloodied, encounter) F Fire The dragon’s breath weapon recharges, and the dragon uses it immediately. Frightful Presence (standard, encounter) F Fear Close burst 10; targets enemies; +35 vs. Will; the target is stunned until the end of the dragon’s next turn. Aftereffect: The target takes a -2 penalty to attack rolls (save ends). Alignment Evil Languages Common, Draconic Skills Bluff +24, Insight +26, Intimidate +29 Str 34 (+27) Dex 25 (+22) Wis 22 (+21) Con 30 (+25) Int 18 (+19) Cha 19 (+19)
Fe b r u a r y 2 010
|
D u n g e o n 175
23
Last Breath of the Dragon Queen
Magma Geyser Hazard
Level 29 Blaster XP 15.000
A geyser of super-heated, acidic liquid explodes from the ground. Hazard: The geyser becomes active when triggered. Thereafter, it attacks every round on its initiative. Perception F DC 33: The character notices the bubbling before moving within 6 squares of it. Dungeoneering F DC 28: The character recognizes the danger of magma geysers before moving within 6 squares of it. Initiative +3 Trigger The geyser rolls initiative when one or more characters move within 4 squares of any magma space in the room. Each round on its initiative, it attacks. A particular geyser goes dormant if it misses everyone or if there’s no one in the burst to hit. It’s possible for characters to trigger multiple geysers. They all act on the same initiative, but they might go dormant at different times. If all go dormant, roll a new initiative if another is activated. Attack Standard Action Close burst 3 Targets Creatures in burst Attack: +32 vs. Reflex Hit: 2d8 + 10 fire damage and followup. Followup: +32 vs. Fortitude Hit: Ongoing 15 fire damage and blinded (save ends). Miss: Half damage. Countermeasures F Acrobatics DC 28: A character in the burst can minimize the damage of the geyser with a successful check made as an immediate interrupt before the geyser’s attack. With a successful check, the character takes half damage if the geyser hits and no damage if it misses.
Talking to the Brood Mother As she fights, the brood mother is willing to talk, especially to taunt and scold the characters. Early in the battle, she’ll say, “You cannot dare to oppose me— me, who carries the Dragon Queen’s heirs!” This may be the characters’ first hint about Tiamat’s breeding plan. The brood mother has no particular interest in keeping her role secret—in fact she’s proud to serve as a surrogate mother for Tiamat. If the heroes question whether the plan is working—because it isn’t—the brood mother will fly into a rage and thereafter only roar at the PCs, not converse with them.
Features of the Area Illumination: The magma lights the room with an eerie red-orange glow. Ceiling: The ceiling of the cavern is 30 feet high. Eggs: There are 15 eggs here. About half are inert, but the other half will hatch red dragon wyrmlings in 1d6 months. Treasure: Buried in a shallow trench near the eggs are 200 adamantine ingots worth 2,000 gp each and weighing 50 pounds each. Magma: In addition to the geysers (described in the hazard box below), the magma itself can be lethal to characters who are immersed in it. Treat it like water (in that characters must swim their way out of it), but entering the magma or starting your turn in the magma deals 5d10 fire damage.
Fe b r u a r y 2 010
|
D u n g e o n 175
24
Last Breath of the Dragon Queen
G3: Dragonborn Honor Guard Encounter Level 30 (148,000 XP)
Setup
1 dragonborn annihilator (D) 3 champions of Tiamat, dragonguard dragon born champions (T) Rising and falling block trap
Most of Tiamat’s allies have deserted her, but a remnant of her dragonborn honor guard remains. They lie in wait in this chamber, ready to defend both the green brood mother and one of their ancestors—a dragonborn who clings to unlife as a vampire (found in encounter G4). When the characters reach the entrance to the chamber, read: This room’s basalt walls have ornate runic carvings in several languages, each inlaid with a precious metal like gold, silver, or orium. Several languages are represented, and it’s a mix of outdated wards against intrusion and imprecations against Bahamut and other enemies of the Dragon Queen. But what immediately catches your attention is the floor. It’s covered in silver and gold coins—deep enough that you need to dig your toe in to see the black marble underneath. Perception Check DC 28: Slight vibrations in the center walls (actually the blocks) suggest that they might be poised to move. Arcana Check DC 33: The air is full of tremendous magical residue— kinetic energy of some sort.
What makes this encounter sing is the interaction between monsters and the trap. Clever heroes will figure out the pattern of the moving stone blocks and can put it to work against the dragonborn. Naturally, the dragonborn will be trying to do the same thing to the characters.
to lure the PCs around and among the blocks. Don’t forget the extra damage from no remorse—the characters can go prone from the champions’ secondary attack, from the annihilator’s punishing strike or sweeping assault, or because they made a saving throw to avoid being caught in the rising and falling blocks.
Tactics The dragonborn annihilator is no pushover, but the real threat is the rising and falling blocks. The more that PCs and monsters alike interact with them, the more exciting the battle will be. Don’t be shy about letting a champion of Tiamat get pulped by a block if that’s what it takes to demonstrate the risk. Dragonborn Annihilator: Punishing strike will kill characters in this room—and as soon as the first character gets pushed into the falling block area, all the players at your table will sit up and take notice. Both punishing strike and sweeping assault set up the annihilator and the champions for extra damage from no remorse. You have powerful resistance from chromatic boon, but don’t use it until you’ve taken a given damage type twice, because it’s a choice you get to make only once. Champion of Tiamat: It won’t be apparent to the heroes right away, but the champions of Tiamat aren’t much of a challenge. They are durable, however, so they’ll stick around for a while. Use them
Fe b r u a r y 2 010
|
D u n g e o n 175
25
Last Breath of the Dragon Queen
3 Champions of Tiamat, Level 26 Elite Soldier Dragonguard Dragonborn Champion
Medium natural humanoid, dragonborn XP 18,000 each Initiative +20 Senses Perception +16 HP 470; Bloodied 235 AC 44; Fortitude 44, Reflex 42, Will 43 Resist 36 acid, 36 cold, 36 fire, 36 lightning, 36 poison Saving Throws +2 Speed 5, fly 8 (clumsy) Action Points 1 m Bastard Sword (standard, at-will) F Weapon +31 vs. AC (+32 while bloodied); 2d10 + 9 damage, and the dragonborn champion makes a secondary attack against the same target. Secondary Attack +29 vs. Fortitude (+30 while bloodied); the target is stunned until the end of the dragonborn champion’s next turn and knocked prone. M Dragonguard’s Protection (immediate interrupt, when an enemy adjacent to the dragonguard attacks its dragon patron, at-will) The dragonguard makes a basic attack against the attacker. C Furious Blade (free, when first bloodied, encounter) F Weapon Requires bastard sword; close burst 1; targets enemies; +32 vs. AC (includes the bonus for dragonborn fury); 2d10 + 9 damage. Dragonborn Fury (only while bloodied) A dragonborn gains a +1 racial bonus to attack rolls while bloodied. No Remorse The dragonborn champion deals an extra 2d10 damage on melee attacks against a prone target. Shake It Off (free; recharge ⚁ ⚂ ⚃ ⚄ ⚅) The dragonborn champion automatically succeeds on a saving throw against one effect of its choice. Alignment Any Languages Common, Draconic Skills Athletics +23, History +22, Intimidate +26 Str 29 (+22) Dex 20 (+18) Wis 17 (+16) Con 23 (+19) Int 15 (+15) Cha 22 (+19) Equipment: bastard sword, heavy shield, plate armor
Features of the Area Illumination: This cavern has only the illumination the characters bring with them. Ceiling: The ceiling of the cavern is 30 feet high. Remember that there are 30-foot high alcoves above each block section where the blocks fit in the “up” position. Rising and Falling Blocks: Described in the trap section below. Coins on Floor: Each square has 2,000 gp (in an equal mix of gold and silver) in it, and it takes someone 5 minutes to pick them all up. To save you from counting, there are 136 squares with coins on them.
Fe b r u a r y 2 010
|
D u n g e o n 175
26
Last Breath of the Dragon Queen
Rising and Falling Blocks Trap
Level 11 Elite Blaster XP 1,200
Massive stone blocks rise and fall in shafts near the center of the room. Trap: Depending on its position, each area can be a barrier or a pit, and creatures can also be squashed under several tons of stone. Perception F DC 28: Slight vibrations in the walls (actually the blocks) suggest that they might be poised to move. Arcana F DC 33: The air is full of tremendous magical residue— kinetic energy of some sort. Initiative +4 (roll A, B, and C separately) Trigger The trap is triggered by any movement into the room. Attack Standard Action Area All creatures within area A, B, or C (resolved separately) Target: Each creature in the area Effect: On the trap’s initiative count, blocks A and C move in the following pattern: 1. up into the ceiling (bottom of the block flush with the ceiling, top flat against the roof of the opening); 2. down to form walls (bottom and top flush with the floor and ceiling); 3. down into the floor (top flush with the floor); 4. down to the bottom of the 90-foot pit (top 60 feet below the floor); 5. up to floor level (top flush with the floor); 6. and so on in an endless cycle. Block B moves in the same pattern, but it begins with step 3. Creatures on the edge of a block can make a saving throw when the block moves. If they succeed, they can slide to any unoccupied square beyond the block area and fall prone there. Creatures not on the periphery and creatures who fail their saving throws are at the mercy of the blocks. Fall into a pit when the block is up: 9d10 falling damage Fall into a pit when the block is all the way down: 6d10 falling damage Crushed against ceiling: 2d10 + 40 damage. Crushed against floor: 3d10 + 50 damage.
Countermeasures F Thievery DC 28: A character in one of the block areas or adjacent to it when the block is fully in the chamber (at step 2) can jam it, thereby preventing further movement. F Arcana DC 33: Certain carved runes on the blocks can be defaced, which will send the blocks hurtling into the pits one last time.
Dragonborn Annihilator
Level 29 Solo Soldier
Medium natural humanoid, dragonborn XP 75,000 Initiative +26 Senses Perception +23; darkvision Tiamat’s Favor (Acid, Cold, Fire, Lightning, or Poison) aura 5; any enemy that starts its turn within the aura takes 20 damage of one of the following types: acid, cold, fire, lightning, or poison. The annihilator chooses which type at the start of its turn. HP 1,340; Bloodied 670 AC 49; Fortitude 44, Reflex 44, Will 45 Saving Throws +5 Speed 7, fly 10 (hover) Action Points 2 m Greatsword (standard, at-will) F Weapon +36 vs. AC; (+37 while bloodied); 3d10 + 10 damage. M Dragonborn Wrath (standard, at-will) F Weapon Requires greatsword; the annihilator makes two greatsword attacks, each against a different target; +34 vs. AC; 3d8 + 10 damage. M Punishing Strike (immediate reaction, when an enemy attacks the annihilator with a melee attack, at-will) F Weapon Requires greatsword; the annihilator attacks the triggering enemy; +36 vs. AC (+37 while bloodied); 3d10 + 10 damage, and the target is pushed 5 squares and knocked prone. C Conflagration Breath (standard; sustain minor, encounter) F Fire, Zone Close blast 5; +32 vs. Reflex (+33 while bloodied); 4d10 + 9 fire damage, and the target takes ongoing 10 fire damage
(save ends). The blast creates a zone that lasts until the end of the annihilator’s next turn (sustain minor). Any creature that enters or starts its turn in the zone takes 10 fire damage. C Fury of the Dragon (free, when first bloodied, encounter) F Acid, Cold, Fire, Lightning, or Poison Close burst 6; targets enemies; +34 vs. Reflex (+35 while bloodied); 4d10 + 6 damage of one of the following types: acid, cold, fire, lightning, or poison. C Sweeping Assault (standard, recharge ⚃ ⚄ ⚅) F Weapon Requires greatsword; close burst 1; +34 vs. Reflex (+35 while bloodied); 2d10 + 10 damage, and the target is knocked prone. Chromatic Boon (immediate interrupt, when an enemy attacks the annihilator; encounter) The annihilator gains resist 30 to one of the following damage types until the end of the encounter: acid, cold, fire, lightning, or poison. Dragonborn Fury (only while bloodied) A dragonborn gains a +1 racial bonus to attack rolls while bloodied. No Remorse The annihilator deals 2d10 extra damage with melee attacks against a prone target. Alignment Evil Languages Common, Draconic, Supernal Skills History +24, Insight +28, Intimidate +32, Religion +27 Str 31 (+24) Dex 30 (+24) Wis 29 (+23) Con 28 (+23) Int 26 (+22) Cha 32 (+25) Equipment: greatsword, plate armor
Fe b r u a r y 2 010
|
D u n g e o n 175
27
Last Breath of the Dragon Queen
G4: Green BroodMother’s Lair
the five dragon caves. The brood mother might order the vampires to “guard the Dragon Queen’s eggs at all costs!” for example.
Encounter Level 30 (109,000 XP)
Tactics
Setup
1 green brood mother (G) 2 dragonborn vampire lords (V)
Centuries ago (before she became part of Tiamat’s breeding scheme), the green brood mother dallied with two dragonborn champions of Tiamat. She couldn’t bear to lose them to old age, so she arranged to have them turned into vampires. They wait upon her to this day, both loyal to her and repulsed because she cursed them so. When the heroes reach the entrance to the chamber, read: This room is full of fetid, foul-smelling water upon which float hundreds of pine tree trunks. At the center of that floating mass is a green dragon. While it’s gargantuan, its swollen belly is grotesquely immense, and as you look, you discern curved lumps beneath its belly-scales. Its wings are spread wide, and on each sits a dragonborn. They seem to be conversing. Perception Check DC 23: The water doesn’t look deep—just enough to float the logs.
Talking to the Brood Mother As this battle plays out, both the brood mother and the vampires talk—both with the intruders and with each other. What they say (and what the characters say in return) doesn’t change the tenor of the battle, but it’s an opportunity for the players to learn more about Tiamat’s breeding scheme and the nature of
The trick in this battle is to play up the log-balancing, which should be easy for some PCs but more difficult for others. It will be tempting for characters to stay put rather than move, but the brood mother can punish that tactic with her tail sweep. Brood Mother: You want to force movement on the characters and deny them the ability to move for themselves—an “I must move, yet I can’t move” situation. Luring glare leads nicely to underbelly crush, of course. Beyond that, though, you have an aura that imposes difficult terrain, challenging terrain (the logs) that affects the heroes but not the monsters, and a breath weapon that slows its targets. And don’t forget the dragon’s aura, which has the side effect of making it impossible for most PCs to shift while near her. The other key advantage you have is ongoing damage from both your breath weapon and your bite. The longer the battle rages, the more automatic damage you’ll deal that way. Unlike most dragons, in this case you’ll want to save the frightful presence attack until midway through the fight. When you use it, have the vampires blood drain stunned characters to weaken them and regain vampire hit points. Vampire Lords: If possible, have the vampires keep their distance from the brood mother—they’re affected by the lashing tail aura, too. They likewise should avoid the brood mother’s breath weapon. They’re immune to the poison, but they’ll still be slowed. Beyond that, use dominating gaze whenever it’s available and don’t be shy about healing—using second wind, blood drain, or preferably both.
2 Vampire Lords (Dragonborn)
Level 28 Elite Soldier
Medium natural humanoid (undead) XP 26,000 each Initiative +25 Senses Perception +19; darkvision HP 408; Bloodied 204 Regeneration 15 (regeneration does not function while the vampire lord is exposed to direct sunlight) AC 44; Fortitude 42, Reflex 41, Will 40 Immune disease, poison; Resist 20 necrotic; Vulnerable 20 radiant Saving Throws +2 Speed 8, climb 4 (spider climb) Action Points 1 m Broadsword (standard, at-will) F Weapon +35 vs. AC; 3d10 + 5 damage. M Double Strike (standard, at-will) F Weapon The vampire lord makes two broadsword attacks. M Blood Drain (standard; requires combat advantage against the target, recharges when an adjacent creature becomes bloodied) F Healing +33 vs. Fortitude; 4d12 + 8 damage, the target is weakened (save ends), and the vampire lord regains 102 hit points. R Dominating Gaze (minor, recharge ⚅) F Charm Ranged 5; +33 vs. Will; the target is dominated (save ends, with a –2 penalty to the saving throw). Aftereffect: The target is dazed (save ends). The vampire lord can dominate only one creature at a time. C Breath Weapon (minor, encounter) F Poison Close blast 3; +29 vs. Fortitude; 2d10 + 5 poison damage. Mist Form (standard; encounter) F Polymorph The vampire lord becomes insubstantial and gains a fly speed of 12, but cannot make attacks. The vampire lord can remain in mist form for up to 1 hour or end the effect as a minor action. Second Wind (standard; encounter) F Healing The vampire lord spends a healing surge and regains 102 hit points. The vampire lord gains a +2 bonus to all defenses until the start of its next turn. Alignment Evil Languages Abyssal, Common Skills Acrobatics +28, Athletics +29, Intimidate +27 Str 30 (+24) Dex 28 (+23) Wis 20 (+19) Con 22 (+20) Int 18 (+18) Cha 26 (+22) Equipment: chain armor, broadsword
Fe b r u a r y 2 010
|
D u n g e o n 175
28
Last Breath of the Dragon Queen
Features of the Area Illumination: This cavern has only the illumination the heroes bring with them. Ceiling: The ceiling of the cavern is 30 feet high. Logs: The logs in this room are floating in water two to three feet deep. Accordingly, the squares with logs in them are challenging terrain, requiring a DC 28 Acrobatics check when the character tries to enter the first log square each turn. Characters who fail the Acrobatics check fall prone and end their move
action in that first log square. The brood mother is big enough to ignore the logs, and the vampires have Acrobatics +28, making a check unnecessary. Water: The water is strongly poisonous; a creature that drinks the water takes 4d10 + 10 poison damage and ongoing 10 poison damage (save ends, probably when the incautious PC retches the water back up). A character who is knocked prone in a water square may swallow some inadvertently; avoiding this requires a DC 24 Endurance check. Water squares are difficult terrain. Green Brood Mother
Level 27 Solo Controller
Gargantuan natural magical beast (dragon) XP 55,000 Initiative +23 Senses Perception +22; darkvision Lashing Tail aura 2; all creatures other than the dragon treat the area within the aura as difficult terrain. The dragon loses this aura while airborne. HP 1,250; Bloodied 625 AC 43; Fortitude 39, Reflex 41, Will 39 Resist 30 poison Saving Throws +5 Speed 10, fly 14 (hover) Action Points 2 m Bite (standard, at-will) F Poison Reach 4; +32 vs. AC; 1d12 + 10 damage, plus ongoing 25 poison damage (save ends). m Claw (standard, at-will) Reach 4; +32 vs. AC; 1d10 + 10 damage. M Double Attack (standard, at-will) The dragon makes two claw attacks. M Flyby Attack (standard, recharge ⚄ ⚅) The dragon flies up to 14 squares and makes a bite attack at any point during the move without provoking an opportunity attack from the target. M Tail Sweep (immediate reaction, if an adjacent enemy does not move on its turn, at-will) +32 vs. Reflex; 2d12 + 10 damage, and the target is knocked prone. R Luring Glare (minor 1/round, at-will) F Charm, Gaze Range 10; +30 vs. Will; the target slides 4 squares.
Eggs: There are 15 eggs here. About half are inert, but the other half will hatch green dragon wyrmlings in 1d6 months. Treasure: Scattered among the eggs are 200 jade figurines representing dragonborn soldiers, each worth 3,000 gp. Also present is treasure parcel G.
M Underbelly Crush (standard, at-will) Targets an adjacent creature; +30 vs. Reflex; 1d12 +10 damage, and a Large or smaller target is grabbed, pulled 1 square into the dragon’s space, and restrained. A creature trapped underneath the brood mother’s bulk has line of sight and line of effect only to the brood mother, and no creatures have line of sight or line of effect to it. A creature that escapes the grab is no longer underneath the brood mother and no longer restrained; the character shifts to the nearest square that is not part of the brood mother’s space. If the brood mother moves so that it no longer occupies the grabbed character’s space, then the character is no longer grabbed or restrained. Sustain Minor: The brood mother sustains the grab, and the target takes 20 damage plus 10 poison damage. C Breath Weapon (standard, recharge ⚄ ⚅) F Poison Close blast 5; +30 vs. Fortitude; 3d10 + 8 poison damage, and the target takes ongoing 15 poison damage and is slowed (save ends both). Aftereffect: The target is slowed (save ends). C Bloodied Breath (free, when first bloodied, encounter) F Poison The dragon’s breath weapon recharges, and the dragon uses it immediately. C Frightful Presence (standard, at-will) F Fear Close burst 10; targets enemies; +30 vs. Will; the target is stunned until the end of the dragon’s next turn. Aftereffect: The target takes a -2 penalty to attack rolls (save ends). Alignment Evil Languages Common, Draconic Skills Bluff +31, Diplomacy +26, Insight +27, Intimidate +26 Str 24 (+20) Dex 30 (+23) Wis 18 (+17) Con 26 (+21) Int 18 (+17) Cha 26 (+21) Fe b r u a r y 2 010
|
D u n g e o n 175
29
Last Breath of the Dragon Queen
G5: Hall of Vanquished Champions Encounter Level 30 (114,000 XP)
The heroes get to tangle with three very different foes: a spell-slinging lich, a golem that acts as a defender, and a deathshrieker that’s mobile even as it reduces the PCs’ ability to maneuver. This battle should feel as if the monsters are employing character-style tactics against the heroes.
Setup
Tactics
1 deathshrieker (D) 1 terrifying iron golem (G) 1 lich castellan wizard (L)
This room, rarely visited even before Tiamat’s defeat, was intended to honor those who’d given their lives in the Dragon Queen’s service. Tiamat isn’t known for her sense of nostalgia, so the hall is small. One of Tiamat’s last loyal advisors remains here, contemplating past victories and more prosperous days while awaiting Tiamat’s inevitable resurgence or demise. When the characters reach the entrance to the chamber, read: This grand chamber features statues of dragons everywhere, including rampant-pose dragons around the room’s edges and three dragons depicted in soaring poses attached to the ceiling with chains. At the far end of the room is a skeletal figure in robes, flanked by a shadowy undead on one side and an immense iron statue on the other. Perception Check DC 28: The room smells strongly of chlorine. History Check DC 23: You recognize several of the dragons as terrors from bygone ages, notorious for their rapacity and cruelty.
This battle is a triangulation challenge for you as the DM; try to keep the iron golem engaged with the characters, the deathshrieker darting in and out of harm’s way, and the wizard causing trouble from the periphery Lich Castellan: Ideally, the lich stays away from the fight and launches a shadow storm at the heroes every round, but inevitably the PCs will engage the lich in melee. When that happens, the lich responds with gaze of command. If the gaze doesn’t work or isn’t available, then it uses lich’s disdain, and if that somehow fails, it resorts to death touch. Near the midpoint of the battle, when combat has settled into a pattern, the lich will use a lightning storm, which thereafter becomes the best place to teleport someone to with lich’s disdain. The lich will place the lightning storm without regard to the position of the golem or the deathshrieker. It didn’t get to be a lich by worrying over friendly fire incidents. It’s easy to forget two small but important aspects of the lich: its regeneration 15 at the beginning of each turn and the free close blast 3 attack it can make when it hits with lightning damage. Keep those in mind.
Terrifying Iron Golem: Running the iron golem is simple: Mark as many characters as you can with cleave, then be alert for opportunities to trigger dazing fist. Don’t forget that the golem gains a poison aura once it’s bloodied, and both the deathshrieker and the lich are immune to poison. Deathshrieker: The deathshrieker has an aura that slows characters automatically. With f ly 8, it should be able to run rings around the slowed heroes. This is also a great way to pin characters in the golem’s noxious fumes. Set yourself up for screams of the damned as often as possible, but neither the golem nor the lich are immune to it, so keep them out of the burst. Deathshrieker
Level 30 Elite Skirmisher
Medium shadow humanoid (undead) XP 38,000 Initiative +28 Senses Perception +23; darkvision Despair (Psychic) aura 5; an enemy that starts its turn in the aura takes 10 psychic damage and is slowed. HP 386; Bloodied 193 AC 42; Fortitude 42, Reflex 44, Will 42 Immune disease, fear, poison; Resist 30 necrotic, insubstantial; Vulnerable 15 radiant Saving Throws +2 Speed fly 8 (hover) Action Points 1 m Slam (standard, at-will) F Necrotic +35 vs. AC; 2d8 + 10 necrotic damage. r Scream of Doom (standard, at-will) F Psychic Ranged 20; +33 vs. Will; 3d8 + 10 psychic damage. C Death Rattle (when the deathshrieker is reduced to 0 hp) F Necrotic Close burst 10; +33 vs. Fortitude; 5d12 + 10 necrotic damage, and the target is weakened (save ends). C Screams of the Damned (standard, recharge ⚄ ⚅) F Psychic Close burst 10; +33 vs. Fortitude; 5d12 + 10 psychic damage, and the target is dazed (save ends). Alignment Chaotic evil Languages Common
Skills Stealth +31 Str 26 (+23) Dex 32 (+26) Wis 16 (+18) Con 28 (+24) Int 10 (+15) Cha 27 (+23)
Fe b r u a r y 2 010
|
D u n g e o n 175
30
Last Breath of the Dragon Queen
Terrifying Iron Golem
Level 30 Elite Soldier
Large natural animate (construct) XP 38,000 Initiative +21 Senses Perception +16; darkvision Noxious Fumes (Poison) aura 2; while the iron golem is bloodied, each creature that enters the aura or starts its turn there takes 10 poison damage. HP 552; Bloodied 276 AC 46; Fortitude 46, Reflex 40, Will 38 Immune disease, poison, sleep Saving Throws +2 Speed 6 (cannot shift) Action Points 1 m Iron Blade (standard, at-will) Reach 2; +37 vs. AC; 3d10 + 7 damage, and the target is marked (save ends). M Cleave (standard, at-will) The iron golem makes two iron blade attacks, each against a different target. M Dazing Fist (immediate interrupt, when a creature marked by the iron golem and within its reach moves or shifts, at-will) Reach 2; targets the triggering creature; +35 vs. Fortitude; the target is dazed (save ends). C Breath Weapon (standard, recharge ⚄ ⚅) F Poison Close blast 3; +35 vs. Fortitude; 4d8 + 9 poison damage, and ongoing 10 poison damage (save ends). C Toxic Death (when first bloodied and again when the iron golem drops to 0 hit points) F Poison Close burst 3; +35 vs. Fortitude; 4d8 + 6 poison damage, and ongoing 15 poison damage (save ends). Alignment Unaligned Languages Str 30 (+25) Dex 17 (+18) Wis 13 (+16) Con 28 (+24) Int 3 (+11) Cha 3 (+11) Equipment: longsword
Lich Castellan Wizard
Level 30 Elite Controller
Medium natural humanoid, human (undead) XP 38,000 Initiative +21 Senses Perception +27; darkvision HP 556; Bloodied 278; see also indestructible, second wind Regeneration 15 (if the lich takes radiant damage, regeneration doesn’t function on its next turn) AC 44; Fortitude 42, Reflex 43, Will 41; see also second wind Immune disease, poison; Resist 15 necrotic Saving Throws +2 Speed 8 Action Points 1 m Death Touch (standard, at-will) F Necrotic +34 vs. Reflex; 3d8 + 10 necrotic damage, and the target is immobilized (save ends). r Lightning Bolt (standard, at-will) F Lightning Ranged 20; +34 vs. Reflex; 3d8 + 10 lightning damage, and the target slides 3 squares and is dazed (save ends). r Orb of Shadow (standard, at-will) F Necrotic Ranged 20; +34 vs. Fortitude; 3d10 + 6 necrotic damage, and the target slides 3 squares and is blinded (save ends). R Shadow Storm (standard, at-will) F Lightning, Necrotic The lich makes lightning bolt and orb of shadow attacks against two different targets. R Gaze of Command (minor, recharge ⚄ ⚅) F Gaze, Psychic Ranged 5; +34 vs. Will; 5d10 + 9 psychic damage and the target is dominated (save ends). R Lich’s Disdain (minor, at-will) F Psychic, Teleportation Ranged 5; +34 vs. Reflex; 2d8 + 10 psychic damage, and the target is teleported 20 feet above any unoccupied space within 20 squares. A creature that falls takes 2d10 damage.
A Lightning Storm (standard; sustain minor, recharge ⚄ ⚅) F Lightning, Necrotic, Zone Area burst 2 within 20; +32 vs. Fortitude; 3d8 + 10 lightning and necrotic damage. The burst creates a zone that lasts until the end of the lich’s next turn. The zone is considered difficult terrain. Any creature that starts its turn within the zone takes 20 lightning and necrotic damage. The lich can sustain or dismiss the zone as a minor action. Indestructible When the lich is reduced to 0 hit points, its body and possessions crumble into dust but the lich is not destroyed. It reappears (along with its possessions) in 1d10 days within 1 square of its phylactery unless the phylactery is also found and destroyed. (The lich’s phylactery is hidden in a secret temple in Everlost.) Second Wind (standard; encounter) F Healing The lich spends a healing surge and regains 139 hit points. The lich gains a +2 bonus to all defenses until the start of its next turn. Staff of Storms (free; encounter) After making an attack that deals lightning damage, the lich deals 3d8 + 10 lightning and thunder damage to every creature in a close blast 3. Alignment Chaotic Evil Languages Abyssal, Common, Draconic, Infernal Skills Arcana +31, History +31, Insight +29 Str 21 (+20) Dex 22 (+21) Wis 25 (+22) Con 30 (+25) Int 33 (+26) Cha 28 (+24) Equipment: staff of storms
Fe b r u a r y 2 010
|
D u n g e o n 175
31
Last Breath of the Dragon Queen
Features of the Area Illumination: This cavern has only the illumination the PCs bring with them. Ceiling: The ceiling of the cavern is 40 feet high. Columns: They’re solid ivory, inlaid with gold, and they’re blocking terrain. Statues: Each statue is encrusted with 10,000 gp in gems that take 30 minutes to pry off each statue. Placed at the base of the statues are treasure parcels C and D. Suspended Statues: The chains holding up the statues have 25 hp and defenses of 25. If the chains are destroyed, the statue falls to the ground, dealing 5d10 + 50 damage to any creature underneath it and turning all those squares into difficult terrain.
Fe b r u a r y 2 010
|
D u n g e o n 175
32
Last Breath of the Dragon Queen
G6: White BroodMother’s Lair Encounter Level 30 (120,000 XP)
Setup
1 white brood mother (W) 3 dread bonespitters (D) Thin ice hazard
Many of the white brood mother’s eggs aren’t hatching. Tiamat has suffused the brood mother’s chamber with necrotic energy, hoping to create half-alive, halfundead hatchlings. The white brood mother weeps piteously over her inert eggs but flies into a rage when anyone threatens them. When the characters reach the entrance to the chamber, read: A pool of frigid water sits in front of you. Beyond is a ramp of ice that leads up to a plateau upon which squats an immensely obese white dragon, its corpulent belly full of eggs—each as big as a human. Nature Check DC 26: Some of the ice on the lower part of the ramp is dangerously thin. Religion Check DC 33: The very air seems suffused with necrotic energy. The thin ice trap is a “gotcha” moment, pure and simple. The real surprise happens during the second or third round, when the deathspitters rise from the tainted water and give the characters something more to worry about.
Tactics Let your sense of drama and timing determine when to reveal the presence of the deathspitters. Ideally, you’ll wait until the heroes think they know what the encounter is all about, then have the undead dragons rise from beneath the water’s surface. If the PCs have reached the ramp, all the better. Brood Mother: The brood mother’s aura is quite effective, inhibiting movement and prohibiting most shifting nearby and gives her concealment against ranged attacks. Because they probably can’t shift, melee combatants will move to gain advantageous combat positions. Because the brood mother does Ancient White Dragon
Level 28 Solo Brute
Gargantuan natural magical beast (dragon) XP 30,250 Initiative +15 Senses Perception +21; darkvision
Aura of Winter (Cold) aura 5; a creature that enters or begins its turn in the aura takes 30 cold damage. The ground is treated as difficult terrain, and creatures flying in the aura (other than the dragon) move at half speed. Creatures in the aura have concealment against ranged attacks. HP 1,185; Bloodied 592 AC 42; Fortitude 47, Reflex 41, Will 42 Resist 30 cold Saving Throws +5 Speed 9 (ice walk), fly 9 (hover)
Action Points 2 m Bite (standard, at-will) F Cold Reach 4; +33 vs. AC; 2d12 + 9 damage, plus 3d12 cold damage (plus an extra 3d12 cold damage on a successful opportunity attack). m Claw (standard, at-will) Reach 4; +33 vs. AC; 2d12 + 9 damage. M Dragon’s Fury (standard, at-will) The dragon makes two claw attacks. If the dragon hits a single target with both claws, it makes a bite attack against the same target. M Underbelly Crush (standard, at-will) Targets an adjacent creature; +30 vs. Reflex; 1d12 +10 damage, and a Large or smaller target is grabbed, pulled 1 square into the dragon’s space, and restrained. A creature
extra damage with opportunity attacks, it may be worthwhile to lure the characters into making such moves—by leaving good flanking squares available, for example. The brood mother’s breath weapon is potent both because of the damage it does and because it weakens those characters it hits. If possible, save frightful presence for just before the brood mother is about to be bloodied. This requires both timing and luck, but breath weapon followed by frightful presence followed by bloodied breath (triggered by the few heroes that weren’t stunned) can be a devastating string of attacks against the PCs. trapped underneath the brood mother’s bulk has line of sight and line of effect only to the brood mother, and no creatures have line of sight or line of effect to it. A creature that escapes the grab is no longer underneath the brood mother and no longer restrained; the character shifts to the nearest square that is not part of the brood mother’s space. If the brood mother moves so that it no longer occupies the grabbed character’s space, then the character is no longer grabbed or restrained. Sustain Minor: The brood mother sustains the grab, and the target takes 20 damage plus 10 cold damage. C Breath Weapon (standard, recharge ⚄ ⚅) F Cold Close blast 5; +31 vs. Reflex; 8d6 + 11 cold damage, the target is slowed and weakened (save ends both), and the white dragon makes a secondary attack against the target. Secondary Attack +31 vs. Fortitude; the target’s cold resistance is negated until the end of the encounter. Bloodied Breath (free, when first bloodied, encounter) F Cold The dragon’s breath weapon recharges, and the dragon uses it immediately. Frightful Presence (standard, encounter) F Fear Close burst 10; targets enemies; +31 vs. Will; the target is stunned until the end of the dragon’s next turn. Aftereffect: The target takes a -2 penalty to attack rolls (save ends). Alignment Evil Languages Common, Draconic
Skills Athletics +29
Str 25 (+19) Dex 17 (+15) Wis 18 (+16)
Con 29 (+21) Int 15 (+14) Cha 15 (+14)
Fe b r u a r y 2 010
|
D u n g e o n 175
33
Last Breath of the Dragon Queen
Dread Bonespitters: These undead dragons ideally use bone shard and bone storm while flying around the periphery of the chamber, darting in to deliver tail slaps only when they have a chance of pushing a character into the water. The more immobilizing they can do, the better. The brood mother can more easily line up targets within the blast of her breath weapon if they’re immobilized. 3 Dread Bonespitters (D)
Level 29 Artillery
Huge natural animate (dragon, undead) XP 15,000 each Initiative +26 Senses Perception +20; darkvision HP 210; Bloodied 105 AC 43; Fortitude 42, Reflex 43, Will 39 Immune disease, poison; Resist 30 necrotic; Vulnerable 10 radiant Speed 10, fly 8 m Tail Slap (standard, at-will) Reach 3; +34 vs. AC; 2d12 + 10 damage, and the target is pushed 2 squares. R Bone Shard (standard, at-will) Ranged 20; +36 vs. AC; 4d10 + 10 damage, and the target is immobilized (save ends). C Bone Storm (standard, recharge ⚅) F Teleportation Close blast 10; +34 vs. AC; 4d10 + 10 damage, and the target is immobilized (save ends). The bonespitter can teleport to any square within the blast’s area. Miss: Half damage, and the target is not immobilized. Alignment Unaligned Languages — Str 28 (+23) Dex 34 (+26) Wis 22 (+20) Con 30 (+24) Int 3 (+10) Cha 15 (+16)
Talking to the Brood Mother The white brood mother isn’t as enthusiastic a participant as the other four brood mothers. If her eggs are threatened, for example, she’ll shriek, “Destroy them for all I care! I’m unworthy to carry those eggs! Everything here is taint and death and sorrow!” The characters can easily goad her into a hysterical rage. This doesn’t have any direct effect on the combat, but it’s a powerful roleplaying moment.
Thin Ice Hazard
Level 25 Obstacle XP 7,000
A slick sheet of ice isn’t as strong as it looks. Hazard: The thin ice is difficult terrain (like the rest of the ice on the map), but it also collapses with more than a few pounds of weight on it. Nature F DC 26: The character identifies the squares of thin ice. Religion F DC 33: The character senses the presence of necrotic energy somewhere below the chamber. Trigger The ice attacks when a creature enters it. Attack Opportunity Action Melee Target: Creature on the ice Effect: The ice gives way. The creature that triggered the trap immediately attempts a saving throw. If it succeeds, that character is prone in any adjacent square not in the thin ice area. If the saving throw fails, the creature is dunked into tainted, necrotically-infused water below the ice, taking 20 poison damage and 20 necrotic damage. At the start of every turn in the water, the creature takes an additional 20 poison damage and 20 necrotic damage. Countermeasures F Fire damage: If thin ice squares are within the area of any fire attack, the ice collapses, even if there was no weight upon it.
Eggs: There are 15 eggs here. All have dead wyrmlings within them. Ice Plateau: The squares atop the plateau aren’t as slippery as the ramp, but they’re still difficult terrain. Ramp: The squares atop the ramp are challenging terrain, requiring a DC 28 Acrobatics check to negotiate. Characters who fail the Acrobatics check fall prone and end their move action one square downhill from the square where they slipped.
Features of the Area Illumination: This cavern has only the illumination the heroes bring with them. Ceiling: The ceiling of the cavern is 30 feet high and covered in icicles. They fall at the slightest provocation. Falling icicles don’t cause any damage, but the players won’t know that. Describe the smashing ice dramatically for as long as it keeps the players on edge. Water: The water is cold (of course), but it’s also tainted by both toxins and death-energy, so that it deals 20 necrotic and 20 poison damage to any creature that enters it or starts its turn in it. Creatures can swim in the water normally. It is 15 feet deep at its deepest.
Fe b r u a r y 2 010
|
D u n g e o n 175
34
Last Breath of the Dragon Queen
G7: Gate Chamber Encounter Level 30 (93,000 XP)
Setup
1 runescribed dracolich consort of Tiamat (D) Far Realm gate trap
This room contains several portals that the gatekeeper, a dracolich older than anyone here but Tiamat, controls to enable Tiamat’s forces to come and go. Now no one wants to visit Tiamat (either from fear or because they believe her demise is imminent), so the gatekeeper finds itself with little business. When the PCs reach the entrance to the chamber, read: There’s a blue-green swirl of energy in the middle of this chamber, and magic portals of glossy black slate around the periphery. Within the energy field is a skeletal dragon of immense size, its eyes glowing crimson with hate. Perception Check DC 26: There’s a flickering near two of the gates. (Roll 1d8 twice and give the heroes advance warning of which two maddening gates open first.) Arcana Check DC 33: Runes around the portals indicate that each gate can be used in a variant of the Planar Portal ritual, and that a designated gatekeeper can turn them on and off at will. Anticipating interlopers from Tiamat’s rival evil gods, the dracolich has prepared an unpleasant surprise. The gates themselves are attuned to particularly frightening, maddening parts of the Far Realm— places horrifying even to behold from the safety of the gate’s other side.
Tactics Dracolich: Unless the characters are doing something truly unusual, you should get a chance to make a mesmerizing glare attack every round. That’s one of the most potent powers in your arsenal—and remember, the character that triggered the mesmerizing glare doesn’t necessarily need to be in the blast area. You’re also likely to get a chance to get a runescribed retaliation, but you can take only one immediate action per round. Unless the redirected attack from runescribed retaliation would be particularly potent, mesmerizing glare is a more effective choice. Runescribed Dracolich, Consort of Tiamat
Level 29 Solo Controller
Gargantuan natural magical beast (dragon, undead) X P 75,000 Initiative +22 Senses Perception +25; darkvision HP 1,335; Bloodied 667 AC 45; Fortitude 45, Reflex 43, Will 41 Immune disease, fear, poison; Resist 40 necrotic; Vulnerable 10 radiant Saving Throws +5 Speed 8, fly 10 (clumsy) Action Points 2 m Bite (standard, at-will) F Necrotic Reach 4; +34 vs. AC; 2d10 + 10 damage. Against a stunned target, this attack deals an extra 4d8 necrotic damage. C Mesmerizing Glare (immediate interrupt, when an enemy makes a melee attack against the dracolich, at-will) F Fear Close blast 3; +32 vs. Will; the target is stunned until the end of the dracolich’s next turn. Miss: The target takes a -2 penalty to attack rolls against the dracolich until the end of the dracolich’s next turn. R Runescribed Retaliation (immediate interrupt, when the runescribed dracolich is targeted by a ranged attack, at-will) The runescribed dracolich makes an attack against the attacking creature; +34 vs. Will; on a hit, the runescribed dracolich redirects the attack to a target of its choice within 5 squares of it.
Other than immediate actions, the runescribed dracolich uses standard dragon tactics: breath weapon when possible, melee otherwise. The dracolich’s bite is particularly potent against stunned enemies, and with mesmerizing glare, the breath weapon, and frightful presence, you have no shortage of ways to stun the PCs. Far Realm Gate Trap: The dracolich is most effective when it has enemies nearby (where it can use melee attacks, glare at them, breathe on them, and redirect attacks to them). The gate trap should keep characters away from the periphery of the room, and it also stuns, which sets up the dragon for extra damage from a bite. C Blackfire (standard, recharge ⚃ ⚄ ⚅) F Fire, Necrotic Close blast 5; automatic hit; 2d12 + 8 necrotic damage, and ongoing 15 fire damage (save ends). C Breath Weapon (standard, recharge ⚄ ⚅) F Necrotic The blackfire dracolich breathes a coruscating blast of necrotic energy: close blast 20; +32 vs. Reflex; 3d12 + 8 necrotic damage, and the target is stunned until the end of the runescribed dracolich’s next turn. Miss: Half damage, and the target is not stunned. Hit or Miss: The target loses any necrotic resistance it has (save ends). C Bloodied Breath (immediate reaction, when first bloodied, encounter) The runescribed dracolich’s breath weapon recharges, and the runescribed dracolich uses it immediately. C Glory of Tiamat (standard, while bloodied, encounter) Close burst 5; +33 vs. Will; the target is pushed 3 squares, knocked prone, and dazed (save ends). C Frightful Presence (standard, encounter) F Fear Close burst 20; targets enemies; +32 vs. Will; the target is stunned until the end of the runescribed dracolich’s next turn. Aftereffect: The target takes a -2 penalty to attack rolls until the end of the encounter. Alignment Evil Languages Draconic Skills Arcana +24, Endurance +27, History +24, Insight +25, Intimidate +23, Religion +24 Str 31 (+24) Dex 26 (+22) Wis 22 (+20) Con 27 (+22) Int 20 (+19) Cha 19 (+18)
Fe b r u a r y 2 010
|
D u n g e o n 175
35
Last Breath of the Dragon Queen
Far Realm Gate Trap
Level 26 Elite Blaster XP 45,000
The gates flicker open to show horrifying, impossible vistas. Trap: Every round, two of the gates (use 1d8 twice to determine which ones) reveal a passageway to the Far Realm. Nothing comes through the gate, but those who look at the horrors of the Far Realm put their sanity at risk. Perception F DC 29: The character sees a flicker indicating which two gates will open the following round. Arcana F DC 33: The character recognizes the Far Realm and knows it’s not safe to look at. Initiative +8 Trigger The gates open and close at initiative point 0. They attack anyone standing within 4 squares instantly, and they make an opportunity attack against anyone moving within 4 squares of them while they’re open. Attack Standard Action Close blast 4 Target: All creatures in blast Attack: +28 vs. Will Hit: 4d10 + 5 psychic damage and ongoing 5 psychic damage and stunned (save ends both). This is a fear effect. Aftereffect: Dazed (save ends). Countermeasures F Thievery DC 37: A character can engage in a skill challenge to shut down a gate. Complexity 1 (4 successes before 3 failures). Success causes that gate to stay dark even when it would be randomly triggered. Failure causes the gate to explode (close burst 8, 4d10 + 5 radiant damage and stunned (save ends) to all creatures in burst). The third failure sucks the character into the Far Realm, where he remains until someone rescues him—an adventure in its own right. F A character can attack the gate framework (AC 33, other defenses 29; hp 100; resist 15 all). When reduced to 0 hit points, the gate explodes in a close burst 8, as above.
Features of the Area: Illumination: The magical vortex illuminates this room brightly. Magical Vortex: While it looks dangerous, it’s just a visual effect. A DC 26 Arcana check is sufficient to realize that it’s harmless. Because the vortex is translucent and swirls randomly, it provides concealment in the squares it covers. Statues: Each statue is made of pure alabaster encrusted with diamonds. They’re worth 100,000 gp each, but each one weighs several tons. Gates: The gates don’t lead anywhere unless the dracolich activates them with specific rituals. A DC 33 Arcana check is sufficient to adapt a Planar Portal ritual to use one of the gates instead of the usual circle. During the battle, the dracolich opens gates to the Far Realm (see the Far Realm Gate trap section). Eggshells: If you’re planning on a link to your next campaign (as described in the Aftermath section of this adventure), then mention that some eggshells are scattered at the base of one of the gates.
Fe b r u a r y 2 010
|
D u n g e o n 175
36
Last Breath of the Dragon Queen
G8: Black BroodMother’s Lair Encounter Level 30 (101,000 XP)
Setup
1 Black Brood Mother (B) Death strangler vines
The black brood mother had the largest cache of eggs, but so far she’s hatched only ordinary wyrmlings from them. When the PCs reach the entrance to the chamber, read: You see a trench bisecting the chamber and an immense, obese black dragon lounging within it. Both ahead of and behind the dragon is a thin forest of twisted, denuded trees and black vines. “Intruders . . . in my lair,” she hisses. “Yet I suspect you do not know whose children you risk disturbing . . . mortal fools . . . .” Perception Check DC 28: The vegetation twitches and moves slightly of its own volition. Nature Check DC 33: Those vines are clearly death strangler vines: motile, carnivorous plants. Just moving around in this cavern will be a challenge, because of the death strangler vines and the bulk of the brood mother herself.
Tactics The brood mother begins by wallowing in the trench in the middle of the chamber. Once characters get stuck in the vines, she won’t stay there long. Brood Mother: Of all the brood mothers in this adventure, the black brood mother gains the most by staying mobile. She’s too large for the death strangler vines to affect her, so she’s happy to stand amid the vines and use vitriolic spray and her breath weapon until the characters come to her. Once they get stuck in the vines, she flies off to somewhere else and repeats the process. Remember that the brood mother has an immediate reaction that triggers on a missed melee attack. Like all immediate actions, you can use it only once per turn. Death Strangler Vines: Note that they attack immediately when heroes enter their squares, and all of them attack any creature they can reach during their initiative point as well.
Talking to the Brood Mother This brood mother will try to negotiate and tempt the players even as she fights. This is more roleplaying flavor than an offer the PCs will seriously entertain, because the brood mother has little to offer beyond the promise to put in a good word with Tiamat. She’ll try to tempt the heroes to give up on their assault and instead serve Tiamat and help her overcome “recent difficulties.” That’s laughably naive on the black brood mother’s part, but she’s been holed up in her lair laying eggs this whole time and is largely ignorant of how dire Tiamat’s situation is.
Death Strangler Vines Trap
Level 28 Blaster XP 13,000
The vines lash out at anything that approaches. Trap: When the trap is triggered, the vines grab intruders, hold them in place, and slowly squeeze the life out of them. Perception F DC 28: Just before a character enters the area with the vines, the vegetation twitches and slithers forward slightly. Nature F DC 33: The character recognizes the distinctive leaves of death strangler vines and knows what they’re capable of. Trigger When a Huge or smaller enemy enters a square with vines, they animate and attack that creature with the following attack, but as an immediate reaction instead of a standard action. Then roll for the vines’ initiative. They act each round on that turn, until no creature is within the trigger area. Attack F Necrotic Immediate Reaction Melee 0 or Standard Action or Opportunity Action or Free Action Target: One creature Attack: +28 vs. Reflex Hit: 2d8 + 10 damage, and the target is restrained and takes ongoing 10 necrotic damage. Countermeasures F Athletics DC 28 or Acrobatics DC 28: A restrained character can use an escape action to free himself and end the necrotic damage. F Each square of vines has AC 10, Reflex 10, Fortitude 28, and hp 200. When reduced to 0 hit points, the vines in that square are destroyed.
Fe b r u a r y 2 010
|
D u n g e o n 175
37
Last Breath of the Dragon Queen
Black Brood Mother
Level 29 Solo Lurker
Gargantuan natural magical beast (aquatic, dragon) X P 45,000 Initiative +27 Senses Perception +22; darkvision HP 1,208; Bloodied 604 AC 46; Fortitude 42, Reflex 44, Will 38 Resist 30 acid Saving Throws +5 Speed 10, fly 10 (hover), swim 10 Action Points 2 m Bite (standard, at-will) F Acid Reach 4; +35 vs. AC; 2d8 + 9 damage, and ongoing 15 acid damage (save ends). m Claw (standard, at-will) Reach 4; +35 vs. AC; 1d10 + 9 damage. M Double Attack (standard, at-will) The dragon makes two claw attacks. M Tail Slash (immediate reaction, when a melee attack misses the dragon, at-will) The dragon uses its tail to attack the enemy that missed it: reach 4; +35 vs. AC; 1d12 + 11 damage, and the target is pushed 3 squares. M Underbelly Crush (standard, at-will) Targets an adjacent creature; +30 vs. Reflex; 1d12 +10 damage, and a Large or smaller target is grabbed, pulled 1 square into the dragon’s space, and restrained. A creature trapped underneath the brood mother’s bulk has line of sight and line of effect only to the brood mother, and no creatures have line of sight or line of effect to it.
The characters can certainly string the brood mother along, however, and doing so may earn them temporary mercy (if the black brood mother gets the upper hand in battle) or more information about the other inhabitants of Tiamat’s lair.
Features of the Area Illumination: This cavern has only the illumination the characters bring with them. Ceiling: The ceiling of the cavern is 30 feet high. Vegetation: The vegetation is difficult terrain, and it has the death strangler vines described below.
A creature that escapes the grab is no longer underneath the brood mother and no longer restrained; the character shifts to the nearest square that is not part of the brood mother’s space. If the brood mother moves so that it no longer occupies the grabbed character’s space, then the character is no longer grabbed or restrained. Sustain Minor: The brood mother sustains the grab, and the target takes 20 damage plus 10 acid damage. C Breath Weapon (standard, recharge ⚄ ⚅) F Acid Close blast 5; +31 vs. Reflex; 4d8 + 7 acid damage, and the target takes ongoing 30 acid damage and takes a -4 penalty to AC (save ends both). Bloodied Breath (free, when first bloodied, encounter) F Acid The dragon’s breath weapon recharges, and the dragon uses it immediately. Frightful Presence (standard, encounter) F Fear Close burst 10; targets enemies; +31 vs. Will; the target is stunned until the end of the dragon’s next turn. Aftereffect: The target takes a -2 penalty to attack rolls (save ends). C Vitriolic Spray (standard, at-will) F Acid Close blast 5; +31 vs. Reflex; 2d10 + 7 acid damage, and the target is blinded until the end of the dragon’s next turn. Miss: Half damage, and the target is not blinded. Alignment Evil Languages Draconic Skills Nature +22, Stealth +33 Str 26 (+22) Dex 30 (+24) Wis 18 (+18) Con 22 (+20) Int 18 (+18) Cha 16 (+17)
Eggs: There are 20 eggs submerged in the water. About half are inert, but the other half will hatch black dragon wyrmlings in 1d6 months. Treasure: Treasure parcel H is submerged among the eggs. Tree Trunks: The trees are blocking terrain. It’s a DC 15 Athletics check to climb a tree; heroes can climb 20 feet up. If the brood mother moves through a square with a tree, she knocks it down effortlessly— it’s effectively not there anymore.
Deep Water: The water is between 5 and 6 feet deep. It’s considered difficult terrain, and creatures trying to fight in a deep water square suffer the penalties and restrictions of aquatic combat (described on p. 45 of the Dungeon Master’s Guide). Characters who can keep their heads above water (all but dwarves, halflings, and similar creatures) can walk on the bottom of the pool rather than swimming with the Athletics skill, if they wish. Gargantuan creatures like the brood mother ignore the water.
Fe b r u a r y 2 010
|
D u n g e o n 175
38
Last Breath of the Dragon Queen
G9: Observatory Encounter Level 30 (90,000 XP)
Setup
1 beholder ultimate tyrant (B) Kinetic blast trap
This room has a divinatory purpose; Tiamat’s fortune tellers and soothsayers use it for various rituals in an attempt to provide the Dragon Queen with oracular wisdom. Tiamat tends to eat unsuccessful soothsayers. The current master of the observatory has held this post for only a year, is regretting his recent prediction of Tiamat’s triumph at the City of Brass, and would love to kill intruders to get back into the Dragon Queen’s good graces. When the characters reach the entrance to the chamber, read: The walls of this room are covered in stars, but they’re moving across the false sky faster than ordinary stars would. Golden bridges connect floating steel platforms, and there’s a set of doors on the opposite end. An enormous beholder swoops up from below. You can dimly make out the floor 120 feet below. Perception Check DC 23: The bridges occasionally flicker out of existence for a fraction of a second. The characters will quickly realize that the bridges aren’t to be trusted, but limiting themselves to the platforms will give the beholder a significant maneuverability advantage in this battle.
Tactics This encounter is all about delivering the classic beholder experience one last time. Do that and you can’t go wrong. Beholder: It’s tempting to just use telekinesis ray, ray of attraction, and ray of repulsion, but that doesn’t make for a fun battle and will force the characters to fly, rendering the bridges irrelevant. Save those two rays for after the heroes have figured out how the bridges work or to force them off the platforms and onto the bridges where they’re vulnerable. The battle is the most fun when the heroes get to experience a variety of eye rays, so choose them based on which defense you’re attacking, not on the specific effect. If you choose eye rays randomly, that wouldn’t be the worst thing in the world. If nothing else, it would keep the characters guessing. Force Bridges: They seem complex, but if you take a minute to write down the pattern at the beginning of the battle, you’ll find it goes quickly. You’ll turn on one set of bridges, turn off one set of bridges (perhaps sending characters plummeting to their doom), and make the push attacks on one set of bridges (which might also send heroes plummeting). It’s 120 feet (and thus 12d10 damage) to the bottom. Magic Force Bridge Trap
Level 19 Blaster XP 2,400
Bridges of golden magic force blink on and off, connecting and disconnecting the floating platforms to and from one another. Trap: When the beholder reveals itself, the bridges start to cycle through their off-active-push-active cycle. Perception F DC 28: There seems to be a pattern to the timing: three rounds on, one round off. F DC 33: There are faint clouds of dust that move on each bridge in the second round of the bridge being on, as if there’s a wind there.
Arcana F DC 33: There’s a surge in kinetic energy at each bridge during the second round. Initiative +8 Trigger Once activated with a minor action from the beholder, roll 1d4 to determine which bridges will shut down first (1 = 1 and 5, 2 = 2 and 6, 3 = 3 and 7, 4 = 4 and 8). Then roll initiative for the bridges, and in the following round those bridges shut down. Each subsequent round at that initiative point, two more bridges close down (the next two numerically), and the bridges that were inactive become active again. Add two more bridges to the pattern until all have activated once (in the fourth round), then continue cycling through in order in the off-active-push-active cycle. For example, if the initial 1d4 throw is 3, then in the first round, bridges 3 and 7 shut off. In the second round, bridges 4 and 8 shut off and bridges 3 and 7 reactivate. In the third round, bridges 1 and 5 shut off, bridges 4 and 8 reactivate, and bridges 3 and 7 make their push attack. In the fourth round, bridges 2 and 6 shut off, bridges 1 and 5 turn back on, bridges 4 and 8 make a push attack, and bridges 3 and 7 remain active. In the fifth round, bridges 3 and 7 shut off, bridges 4 and 8 remain active, bridges 1 and 5 make a push attack, and bridges 2 and 6 turn back on again. This cycle repeats until the beholder is slain. Attack (during a “push” round for that bridge) Standard Action Melee Target: All creatures on the bridge Attack: +22 vs. Fortitude Hit: 3d12 + 5 damage and push 3 squares and knock prone. Effect: Target is pushed one square away from the center of the bridge and must make a saving throw to be prone and clinging to the edge; targets that fail take 12d10 damage. Effect (during an “off ” round for that bridge) Characters standing on the bridge when it deactivates fall, taking 12d10 damage when they hit the cavern floor. Creatures who are adjacent to a floating platform can attempt a saving throw; if they succeed, they can instead be prone in an unoccupied, adjacent platform square. Countermeasures F Arcana DC 33: An adjacent character can disable the trap with a successful check. The bridge no longer deactivates to cause characters to fall through and the whirlwind push effect ceases for the duration of the encounter.
Fe b r u a r y 2 010
|
D u n g e o n 175
39
Last Breath of the Dragon Queen
Features of the Area Illumination: The chamber is brightly lit by the starscapes—for characters who are standing on any of the platforms. Creatures on the bridges and down on the chamber floor see only the glow of the bridges, so the entire chamber is dimly lit for them. In other words, visible light depends not on the light source but on where the creature is standing. Ceiling: The ceiling of the cavern is 30 feet above the platforms and 150 feet above the floor.
Platforms: Characters see different starscapes when standing on each platform, but the stars disappear from view as soon as the character steps off. Chamber Floor: The floor is featureless stone 120 feet below the platforms. Unless the players insist
on it, avoid moving the battle down—it’s more fun on the platforms. At the bottom is a human skeleton and treasure parcel H. Bridges: Described in the trap box on page 39.
Beholder Ultimate Tyrant
3—Withering Ray (Necrotic): Area burst 1 within 10; +32 vs. Fortitude; 2d8 + 7 damage, and the target takes ongoing 10 necrotic damage (save ends). First Failed Saving Throw: The target is weakened (save ends). 4—Burning Ray (Fire): Area burst 1 within 10; +32 vs. Reflex; 2d6 + 7 fire damage, and the target takes a -2 penalty to attack rolls and ongoing 10 fire damage (save ends both). 5—Telekinesis Ray: Area burst 1 within 10; +32 vs. Fortitude; the beholder slides the target 8 squares, and the target is knocked prone. 6—Frost Ray (Cold): Area burst 1 within 10; +32 vs. Reflex; 2d8 + 7 cold damage, and the target takes a -2 penalty to saving throws until the end of the beholder’s next turn. 7—Petrifying Ray: Area burst 1 within 10; +32 vs. Fortitude; the target is slowed (save ends). First Failed Saving Throw: The target is immobilized instead of slowed (save ends). Second Failed Saving Throw: The target is petrified. 8—Disintegrate Ray: Area burst 1 within 10; +32 vs. Fortitude; 2d10 + 7 damage, and the target takes ongoing 15 damage (save ends). Aftereffect: Ongoing 10 damage (save ends). 9—Ray of Attraction: Area burst 1 within 10; +32 vs. Reflex; the target takes a -5 penalty to all defenses, and at the start of the target’s turn the beholder pulls it 2 squares (save ends both). Aftereffect: The target takes a -2 penalty to all defenses (save ends). 10—Ray of Repulsion: Area burst 1 within 10; +32 vs. Reflex; the target takes a -2 penalty to Reflex, and at the start of the target’s turn the ultimate tyrant pushes it 6 squares (save ends both). Aftereffect: The target is pushed 3 squares at the start of its turn (save ends). Antimagic Field A beholder ultimate tyrant takes no damage from zone effects. Alignment Evil Languages Deep Speech, Draconic, Common Str 22 (+20) Dex 22 (+20) Wis 27 (+22) Con 30 (+24) Int 34 (+26) Cha 38 (+28)
Level 29 Solo Artillery
Huge aberrant magical beast XP 75,000 Initiative +20 Senses Perception +27; all-around vision, darkvision HP 1,080; Bloodied 540 AC 41; Fortitude 38, Reflex 40, Will 42 Immune petrification Saving Throws +5 Speed fly 8 (hover) Action Points 2 m Bite (standard, at-will) +36 vs. AC; 3d8 + 10 damage. R Central Eye (minor 1/round, at-will) Ranged 30; +34 vs. Fortitude; the target is dazed and slowed (save ends both). First Failed Saving Throw: The target is stunned (save ends). Miss: The target is slowed (save ends). R Eyes of the Beholder (free, when an enemy starts its turn within 5 squares of the beholder, at-will) The ultimate tyrant uses eye ray against the triggering enemy. C Spasmodic Rays (when first bloodied and again when the beholder ultimate tyrant drops to 0 hit points) The ultimate tyrant uses a random eye ray attack against each enemy within 10 squares. M Eye Ray (standard, at-will) The beholder ultimate tyrant uses two eye ray powers chosen from the list below. The origin square of each area burst must be centered on a different enemy. Using eye ray does not provoke opportunity attacks. 1—Madness Ray (Charm, Psychic): Area burst 1 within 10; +32 vs. Will; 2d8 + 7 psychic damage, and the target must make a basic attack against its nearest ally as a free action. 2—Unraveling Ray: Area burst 1 within 10; +32 vs. Fortitude; 2d6 + 7 damage, and the target takes ongoing 10 damage (save ends). First Failed Saving Throw: The target takes 1d10 damage. Second Failed Saving Throw: The target takes 2d10 damage. Third Failed Saving Throw: The target takes 3d10 damage, and the ongoing damage from this power ends.
Fe b r u a r y 2 010
|
D u n g e o n 175
40
Last Breath of the Dragon Queen
G10: Blue BroodMother’s Lair
Tornado Alley Trap
Encounter Level 30 (114,000 XP)
Trap: As soon as the brood mother notices the characters, the trap triggers, and the cyclones continue until she is slain. Perception F DC 33: The dust is moving at the base of the cliff. Dungeoneering F DC 28: The air in this chamber seems far too restless for an underground cavern. Initiative +2 Speed 1d6 + 8 (Roll at the start of each cyclone’s move) Trigger The brood mother triggers the first cyclone, which appears and moves at its initiative point during the following round. Each round after that, move all existing cyclones at that initiative point, then place two new cyclones at the base of the cliff, rolling 1d8 to determine each cyclone’s path. If both rolls are the same, only one new cyclone appears that round. If both new cyclones appear in the same origin space, place the second one directly ahead of the first. Each cyclone fills a space that is 2 squares by 2 squares. Move When a cyclone moves, it follows the path that matches the number rolled when it was created. Cyclones can squeeze without penalty and can end their turns squeezed.
Setup
1 blue brood mother (B) Tornado alley trap
The blue brood mother has the largest clutch of eggs within her and already birthed at the moment, so she’s more cautious about putting what could potentially be Dragon Queen heirs at risk. When the PCs reach the entrance to the chamber, read: This long cavern has a dusty floor and rough but otherwise featureless stone floor. At the far end is an alcove atop a cliff where a gargantuan blue dragon rests. Its belly is swollen with eggs. As it roars, wind picks up in the chamber and the dust devils at the base of the cliff take on darker, more ominous forms.
Level 30 Minion Blaster XP 4,750
When this trap is triggered, cyclones head from the dragon’s perch toward you.
Attack Standard Action or Immediate Interrupt Area trample attack in squares entered by the cyclone Trample: Each turn, the cyclone moves its speed and enters creatures’ spaces. This movement does not provoke opportunity attacks. The cyclone can end its move in an occupied space. Huge or smaller creatures in a cyclone’s space at the start of their turns can act normally, but those squares are difficult terrain and the whirling dust within the cyclone blocks line of sight. When a cyclone enters a creature’s space, the cyclone makes a trample attack. If a creature enters a square of the cyclone’s space, the cyclone makes a trample attack as a free action. Gargantuan creatures such as the brood mother ignore the cyclone’s effects. Trample Attack: +17 vs. Reflex Hit: 3d10 + 6 damage, and the target is pushed 8 squares (always into a different cyclone lane) and knocked prone. Miss: Half damage and the target is knocked prone Countermeasures F Acrobatics DC 23: A character can voluntarily go prone as an interrupt action, forcing the cyclone to miss (and thus taking only half damage from the cyclone’s attack). F Acrobatics DC 28: A character pushed by the cyclone isn’t knocked prone.
Perception Check DC 33: Those dust devils are growing into full-fledged tornados. Dungeoneering Check DC 28: There’s no natural explanation for wind in this chamber. The cyclones that sweep throughout this room don’t affect the brood mother, but they make it quite difficult for the characters to get near the dragon and stay near her.
Fe b r u a r y 2 010
|
D u n g e o n 175
41
Last Breath of the Dragon Queen
Tactics When you run this battle, try to keep the cyclones active and interesting for as long as possible. Brood Mother: The blue brood mother is content to view this battle as a shooting gallery, using breath weapon and lightning burst from its perch to the north while the characters get battered and blown by the cyclones. When the heroes finally reach the brood mother, it will fly down to the middle of the map and wait for the PCs there, repeating this tactic as often as it’s effective. The brood mother is big enough that it can ignore the cyclones, so it doesn’t really care where it stands. The brood mother’s attacks are likewise more challenging when used in conjunction with the cyclones. Save frightful presence and thunderclap for a moment when cyclones are bearing down on several characters at once. If they’re stunned, they can’t avoid being tossed about. Using gore to push a character into a cyclone, which will then push that character farther away, is also effective. Cyclones: With a little luck, you can set up chains of cyclones that bounce a hero far away from the action. If one cyclone pushes a character into another cyclone, that cyclone triggers and can then push the character even further. Expect jaws to drop the first time you pull off that trick. Also remember that the cyclones block line of sight.
Blue Brood Mother
Level 30 Solo Artillery
Gargantuan natural magical beast (dragon) XP 65,000 Initiative +18 Senses Perception +23; darkvision HP 1,302; Bloodied 651 AC 44; Fortitude 48, Reflex 42, Will 42 Resist 30 lightning Saving Throws +5 Speed 10, fly 12 (hover) Action Points 2 m Gore (standard, at-will) F Lightning Reach 4; +36 vs. AC; 2d8 + 11 plus 2d6 lightning damage, and the target is pushed 3 squares and knocked prone. m Claw (standard, at-will) Reach 4; +34 vs. AC; 2d6 + 11 damage. M Draconic Fury (standard, at-will) The dragon makes a gore attack and two claw attacks. M Underbelly Crush (standard, at-will) Targets an adjacent creature; +30 vs. Reflex; 1d12 +10 damage, and a Large or smaller target is grabbed, pulled 1 square into the dragon’s space, and restrained. A creature trapped underneath the brood mother’s bulk has line of sight and line of effect only to the brood mother, and no creatures have line of sight or line of effect to it. A creature that escapes the grab is no longer underneath the brood mother and no longer restrained; the character shifts to the nearest square that is not part of the brood mother’s space. If the brood mother moves so that it no longer occupies the grabbed character’s space, then the character is no longer grabbed or restrained. Sustain Minor: The brood mother sustains the grab, and the target takes 20 damage plus 10 lightning damage.
Talking to the Brood Mother This brood mother will react strongly to threats made against its eggs by characters who are up in the alcove. If characters get there while the dragon is on the cavern floor, the brood mother will probably give chase. It will warn the heroes that each egg contains “the power of the Dragon Queen herself . . . power far beyond what you can even fathom . . . ”
R Breath Weapon (standard, recharge ⚄ ⚅) F Lightning The dragon targets up to three creatures with its lightning breath; the first target must be within 20 squares of the dragon, the second target within 10 squares of the first, and the third target within 10 squares of the second; +35 vs. Reflex; 3d12 + 23 lightning damage. Miss: Half damage. This attack does not provoke opportunity attacks. R Bloodied Breath (free, when first bloodied, encounter) F Lightning The dragon’s breath weapon recharges, and the dragon uses it immediately. This attack does not provoke opportunity attacks. C Frightful Presence (standard, encounter) F Fear Close burst 10; targets enemies; +35 vs. Will; the target is stunned until the end of the dragon’s next turn. Aftereffect: The target takes a -2 penalty to attack rolls (save ends). C Thunderclap (standard, at-will) F Thunder Close burst 3; +35 vs. Fortitude; 2d10 + 9 thunder damage, and the target is stunned until the end of the blue dragon’s next turn. Critical Hit: As above, except that the target is stunned (save ends). A Lightning Burst (standard, at-will) F Lightning Area burst 4 within 20; +35 vs. Reflex; 5d6 + 9 lightning damage. Miss: Half damage. Alignment Evil Languages Common, Draconic Skills Athletics +34, Insight +23, Nature +23 Str 31 (+25) Dex 19 (+19) Wis 18 (+19) Con 26 (+23) Int 17 (+18) Cha 17 (+18)
The blue brood mother delights in playing with her food, so to speak. She’ll ridicule characters who are thrown about by the cyclones and taunt them after every missed attack.
Fe b r u a r y 2 010
|
D u n g e o n 175
42
Last Breath of the Dragon Queen
Features of the Area Illumination: This cavern has only the illumination the PCs bring with them. Ceiling: The ceiling of the cavern is 30 feet high. Alcove: The blue brood mother starts here. Cliffs: It takes a DC 15 Athletics check to ascend these 20-foot-tall cliffs at half speed, granting combat advantage during the climb, as described on p. 182 of the Player’s Handbook. Creatures that take damage while climbing must immediately make a DC 15 Athletics check (DC 20 if the damage made the climber bloodied) or fall. Creatures about to fall can, as an immediate action, attempt a DC 20 Athletics check (with an additional +1 DC per point of damage) to make a last-ditch grab at the cliff face. Eggs: There are 25 eggs atop the plateau. About half are inert, but the other half will hatch blue dragon wyrmlings in 1d6 months. Treasure: Treasure parcels I and J are scattered amid the eggs, along with 200,000 gp in platinum and opal jewelry.
Fe b r u a r y 2 010
|
D u n g e o n 175
43
Last Breath of the Dragon Queen
G11: Tiamat’s Platform Encounter Level 30 (235,000 XP)
Setup
Tiamat (T)
This platform is where Tiamat spends most of her time, scrying on her erstwhile allies and negotiating, cajoling, or threatening them remotely. Getting here is difficult and deadly unless the characters have disabled the disintegration beams from the dragon heads in the lower fountain chamber. When the heroes reach the entrance to the chamber, read: Once you ascend past the lip of the platform, you see Tiamat in all her five-headed horror. Ten baleful eyes gaze at you, the hate within them almost palpable. Surrounding her on the rim of the platform are eight shimmering energy fields. “You’ve thwarted my plans,” says the blue head. “You returned Bahamut to life,” says the red. “You broke my army at its moment of triumph,” says the black. “You’ve slain my exarchs,” says the green. “And now, you’ve invaded my innermost lair,” says the white. “Cherish this moment,” say all five in unison, “because this moment is your high-water mark. Now, your pain, your fall . . . will fuel my rise, my rebirth!” Perception Check DC 28: The shimmering energy fields are translucent, but they seem quite solid.
Arcana Check DC 33: The energy fields serve as viewscreens for scrying or other divinatory purposes. This encounter appears elementally simple, but Tiamat is a complex monster to control in battle. It should place a memorable capstone on the campaign if you hold nothing back.
Tactics The key to delivering an exciting fight with Tiamat is to mix it up and never become predictable. Tiamat constantly changes tactics, even when things appear to be going her way. She has a formidable bag of tricks; use as many as possible. General Tips: Don’t forget the structural basics of Tiamat as a monster: the aura that deals 25 damage whenever anyone starts or moves within 10 squares and resist 15 against any of her five damage types. Tiamat has two key encounter powers. Use frightful majesty as soon as possible. Once its effects have worn off, use tail sting against a character that doesn’t have a strong Will defense. At this stage of the adventure, a dominated hero can wreak havoc. Breath Weapons: Chromatic breath is available sometime in the second round (probably right away, unless the characters employed stuns to keep one or more heads from acting). Thereafter it recharges on a 6; use it whenever it’s available. Breath weapons from the individual heads are encounter powers, and they’re often weaker than the other action a head can take. Use them only when the heroes cluster together or it’s otherwise advantageous. Individual Heads: The black head’s vitriolic spray is an effective breath weapon in all but name, and it’s at-will. The blue head’s gore is best used to knock a PC
off the platform (possibly killing them and certainly taking them out of the fray for a few rounds). The dominating gaze from the green head should be used every round; there’s no ally as effective as a helpful enemy. The red head’s bite is a devastating melee attack, especially if you can hit the same character multiple times. The white head has a relatively ordinary bite and a rather mundane breath weapon, so when you use a standard action to move, try to do so during the white head’s turn. Falling: The blue dragon head’s gore attack can push characters off the platform. Even level 30 characters will be killed by a 650-foot fall if they don’t have some means to mitigate it (flight, a teleport reaction, winged boots). Even if they survive, they might have no timely way to get back to the battle. By this point in their careers and the adventure, it’s possible that every character in the party will be capable of flight—how else did they get up here, anyway? (The level 20 Overland Flight ritual from Dragon #366 is especially useful in this regard.) While we don’t promote the idea of DMs pulling their punches, this is the last battle these characters will ever have, and no one wants to sit out the climax of their career and destiny because they fell down. Characters get a saving throw to avoid falling and to land prone on the edge instead, but even that leaves a 45 percent chance of going over and out. The point is, use this push attack judiciously! Timing and targeting are everything. Definitely push characters that can fly right off the platform, and shove characters that can’t fly up to the edge if they’re 4 squares in (then make threats like, “next turn, you’re going over!”). Once it’s clear that the gore attack is a potential game-ender for any vulnerable character, players ought to get the message and keep themselves
Fe b r u a r y 2 010
|
D u n g e o n 175
44
Last Breath of the Dragon Queen
at least 3 squares from the edge. Sometimes this will mean giving up an attack after being pushed in order to spend two move actions standing up and moving away from the edge; remind players of this if someone looks tempted to take a chance and test your good will, or remind them that an action point can get them out of danger. Under no circumstances should you let players think that you won’t push them to certain doom. If someone is determined to be foolish, you may find yourself backed into a corner with no believable way out other than to end their game. If that’s the case, then let the chips and the adventurers fall where they may. Here’s one last option for DMs with a real flair for the dramatic. The standard rule for falling is that a character hits bottom immediately. That’s fine for typical falls, but this plunge is an eighth of a mile! A D&D combat round is 6 seconds long, and a body falls just 576 feet in 6 seconds (but it takes less than half a second to travel those last 74 feet . . .). That means a falling character won’t technically hit the ground until the same initiative point for Tiamat comes around again on the following turn. The character has one full turn to try to save himself by, say, activating Bahamut’s golden canary to transform into a gold dragon beneath him or, if the dragon is already summoned, to command it to swoop down and catch him. Alternatively, another hero who can fly could dive off the platform and overtake the falling character in grand cinematic style, catching him and arresting his plunge just feet above the floor. Neither of these things is especially realistic or even truly within the rules, but they’re creative solutions that ought to be rewarded and they’re tremendously dramatic. No one will ever forget this battle if it involves such a heroic rescue, and that’s the real goal!
Discorporation: Normally, Tiamat discorporates when bloodied, thus removing herself from battle and preserving her life. This fight takes place at the heart of Tiamat’s domain and seat of her power. She will not discorporate here, but fights to the death.
Features of the Area Illumination: This cavern is brightly lit by the flame geyser below the floating platform. Ceiling: The ceiling of the cavern is 150 feet above the platform. Platform: It’s a long way down for creatures that get knocked off the platform: 650 feet, which means 65d10 falling damage. Energy Screens: While active, these screens are physical barriers that act like normal walls. Every round at initiative point 0, randomly choose an energy screen. That screen will depict a moment of heroic triumph from previous adventures in the Scales of War adventure path, then disappear. (You collected and these moments in the “Preparing the Adventure” section.) This reminds the players of how far they’ve come and it demoralizes Tiamat—but it also makes it easier for Tiamat to shove characters over the platform edge as the walls disappear.
Fe b r u a r y 2 010
|
D u n g e o n 175
45
Last Breath of the Dragon Queen
Tiamat
Level 35 Solo Brute
Huge immortal magical beast (dragon) XP 235,000 Initiative see quintuple actions Senses Perception +29; darkvision Tiamat’s Aura (Acid, Cold, Fire, Lightning, Poison) aura 10; any creature that enters the aura or starts its turn within the aura takes 25 acid, cold, fire, lightning, and poison damage. HP 1,610; Bloodied 805; see also bloodied breath and discorporation AC 51; Fortitude 51, Reflex 48, Will 49 Immune attacks by creatures of lower than 20th level Resist 15 acid, 15 cold, 15 fire, 15 lightning, 15 poison Saving Throws +5; whenever an attack applies an effect to Tiamat that a save can end, she immediately rolls a saving throw. Tiamat also makes saving throws at the end of each of her turns as normal. Speed 10, fly 15 (hover), teleport 5 Action Points 5; each head can use only 1 action point, and Tiamat can spend an action point only once per round. m Claw (standard; at-will) Fire Reach 3; +38 vs. AC; 4d10 + 12 damage. M Tail Sting (standard; encounter) Charm Reach 4; +39 vs. AC; 4d10 + 12 damage, and Tiamat makes a secondary attack against the same target. Secondary Attack: +42 vs. Will; the target is dominated (save ends). C Chromatic Breath (standard; recharge ⚅) Acid, Cold, Fire, Lightning, Poison Can be used only after each head has acted at least once; close burst 30; +38 vs. Reflex; 10d8 acid, cold, fire, lightning, and poison damage, and the target takes ongoing 25 acid, fire, and poison damage and is slowed (save ends both). Aftereffect: The target is slowed (save ends).
C Bloodied Breath (free, when first bloodied; encounter) Acid, Cold, Fire, Lightning, Poison Tiamat’s chromatic breath recharges, and she uses it immediately. C Frightful Majesty (minor; encounter) Fear Close burst 20; targets enemies; +38 vs. Will; the target is stunned until the end of Tiamat’s next turn. Aftereffect: The target takes a –2 penalty to attack rolls (save ends). Quintuple Actions Tiamat does not roll initiative. Her heads have set initiative counts of 45, 40, 35, 30, and 25 (Tiamat chooses the order each round). She cannot delay or ready actions. Each head can activate once per round on its initiative count to take a standard action and a minor action. Tiamat’s ability to take immediate actions refreshes on each head’s activation. Discorporation Tiamat will not discorporate in this battle. This is a fight to the death. Quintuple Brain Each time Tiamat becomes dazed or stunned, she loses her next head activation instead. Multiple such effects do not stack. Black Dragon Head Only c Vitriolic Spray (standard; at-will) Acid Close blast 5; +38 vs. Reflex; 2d8 + 10 acid damage, and the target is blinded (save ends). Miss: Half damage, and the target is not blinded. C Breath Weapon (standard; encounter) Acid Close blast 5; +37 vs. Reflex; 4d8 + 12 acid damage, and the target takes ongoing 30 acid damage and a –4 penalty to AC (save ends both). Blue Dragon Head Only m Gore (standard; at-will) Lightning Reach 3; +40 vs. AC; 2d8 + 12 damage plus 2d8 lightning damage, and the target is pushed 3 squares and knocked prone.
R Breath Weapon (standard; encounter) Lightning Tiamat targets up to three creatures with her lightning breath; the first target must be within 20 squares of Tiamat, the second target within 10 squares of the first, and the third target within 10 squares of the second; +39 vs. Reflex; 4d10 + 12 lightning damage, and one of the target’s acid, cold, fire, lightning, or poison resistance is negated (Tiamat’s choice; save ends). This attack does not provoke opportunity attacks. Green Dragon Head Only r Dominating Gaze (standard; at-will) Charm Ranged 20; +38 vs. Will; the target is dominated (save ends). C Breath Weapon (standard; encounter) Poison Close blast 5; +38 vs. Fortitude; 3d12 + 12 poison damage, and the target takes ongoing 20 poison damage and is slowed (save ends both). Aftereffect: The target is slowed (save ends). Red Dragon Head Only m Bite (standard; at-will) Fire Reach 3; +40 vs. AC; 8d8 + 12 fire damage, and the target loses 1d4 healing surges. C Breath Weapon (standard; encounter) Fire Close blast 5; +38 vs. Reflex; 5d12 + 12 fire damage. Miss: Half damage. White Dragon Head Only m Bite (standard; at-will) Cold Reach 3; +38 vs. AC; 6d12 + 12 cold damage. C Breath Weapon (standard; encounter) Cold Close blast 5; +38 vs. Reflex; 9d6 + 12 cold damage, and the target takes a –2 penalty to attack rolls until the end of this head’s next turn.
Fe b r u a r y 2 010
|
D u n g e o n 175
46
Last Breath of the Dragon Queen
Aftermath When Tiamat dies, the platform starts slowly sinking toward the ground. At the halfway point, Bahamut appears in his full draconic glory. Any remaining canaries flutter over to him and become full-fledged gold dragons that bow before him. Bahamut lifts one talon, and the characters are fully healed and recover from all conditions. “You have the thanks of a god . . . you have the thanks of all, all across the many planes, all who strive for good. “Yet I wonder whether you understand the enormity of your deed. Come! Grasp my wings. I’ll show you just what you’ve wrought.” Bahamut is a god, so he can fly easily with the characters lying prone and facedown on his wings, grasping the leading edges. With a silver flash, Tiamat’s Lair disappears and you find yourself flying over the town of Rivenroar, where all this started what seems like forever ago. Tiamat circles lower and lower over a particularly fine manor on the edge of town. “That belongs to Magister Tulm,” Bahamut intones. “He’s well into his eighth decade of life, and he’s amassed a fortune providing advice and counsel to various dukes and high priests . . . a fortune so great that he could never spend it all. So look!” As you watch, an old man heaves a sack onto the back of a wagon, wipes his brow, then clambers into the front of the wagon. “Magister Tulm has just realized that he has more money than he’ll ever need. He’s pulled his extra wealth out of his cellar—a cellar replete with fiendish traps, by the way—and he’s going to distribute it in the town square.”
What it means to have slain the goddess of greed, wealth, and envy is probably dawning on the players at this point. But try to get through the following vignettes without confirming their suspicions. Another flash, and you’re high above another familiar place: the city of Overlook. Bahamut soars to the town’s outskirts, where you see a farmer mending a hole in a pasture fence. “A simple, pastoral scene, but consider this . . . Farmer Collob comes to this gap every day to look at the thoroughbred horses in his neighbor’s pasture. How he wished he could have horses like that! Now Farmer Collob is fixing the fence so he can’t peer through it anymore. Not because he’s given up hope, but because he no longer envies his neighbor.” One more vignette, and then Bahamut will be in a more conversational mood. There’s another silver flash, and you find yourself flying over Hestavar. Bahamut lands atop his own temple. “See my own temple. My priests have melted down much of the gold filigree that decorates—nay, obfuscates!— the temple interior. We’re saving some for a rainy day, but the rest we’re giving away to our brethren at the temples of Pelor, Erathis, and Ioun, whose temples were damaged while I was away.” With another flash, the heroes find themselves in Bahamut’s chambers in Celestia. Bahamut regards you kindly with his platinum eyes. “When you killed Tiamat, you didn’t just defeat a god. You defeated the very wellspring of greed and envy. “This doesn’t mean the end of money, but gold coins are now merely a medium of exchange. No one wants gold coins or other riches for their own sake. That’s why Magister
Tulm gives away his extra wealth: He can no longer fathom a reason to keep it. It’s not strictly out of the goodness of his heart, but because he no longer has the concept of greed. “Farmer Collob is still fascinated with thoroughbred horses. It’s just that he doesn’t despise his neighbor for having horses that he himself lacks. That envy no longer poisons life on both sides of that fence. What’s more, it’s likely that his neighbor will sell one of those horses to Collob for no more than he’d charge for a common plow horse, because he, too, sees no reason to keep something to himself when it means more to someone else. “Good and evil alike are affected by the end of greed and envy—which you saw in Hestavar. Even bulwarks of virtue like the temple of Bahamut are not immune to greed.” Bahamut gives a low snort that might be a chuckle, might be a cough. “There’s still evil in the world, of course. The tree of evil has multiple roots . . . not just greed. But you’ve fundamentally changed the world forever, heroes. I encourage you to visit it and see what you’ve done before . . . moving on.” At this point, Bahamut’s role in the adventure is over, though he’ll continue to praise the PCs and answer questions about what it all means. Shake your players’ hands, engage in some back-and-forth about how the characters fulfill their epic destinies, and congratulate yourself on a campaign well run. Our authors may have set the foundation, but the guy at the head of the table was you, and you’ve accomplished something every bit as epic as your players.
Fe b r u a r y 2 010
|
D u n g e o n 175
47
Last Breath of the Dragon Queen
Epic Destinies One final thing remains for you to do: Go around the table and ask each player what ultimately happens to their character—how their epic destiny is fulfilled. Each epic destiny explains (often in the “Immortality” section) what happens after your final quest, but use that explanation as the starting point for this moment, not the final word. Some players will want to briefly roleplay the moment when they become gods themselves, when they die and pass into the great beyond, or when they settle down to govern a nation or a church. Try to make each last “moment in the sun” special for the player. Give each character a final sendoff that they can be proud of and reminisce about years hence.
Your Next Campaign If you’re like most DMs, you’re probably already thinking about your next campaign. Here are a couple of seeds you can plant which will grow and blossom in whatever you have up your sleeve next. Tiamat’s Replacement: Demigods scheming to “adopt” Tiamat’s portfolio of greed and envy could form the basis for a campaign all its own. If you want to carry over something specific from this adventure, simply put some eggshells in the gate chamber (G7). That will suggest to perceptive players that at least one of the brood mother eggs hatched and escaped. Is it truly a five-headed child of Tiamat? Only your next campaign knows for sure. Awakening the Dragons: As written, Tiamat’s death merely throws chromatic dragons into disarray, exposing their many seething rivalries. As the patron god of chromatic dragons, Tiamat may have had connections beyond the symbolic. Her death could mean something far more fundamental.
In your next campaign, you could start with a world where all the chromatic dragons are either utterly gone or deeply slumbering. Various cults and other villains are trying to restore or reawaken the chromatic dragons, and the heroes are trying to prevent their return to the world. Artifacts for the Next World: This option breaks the fourth wall a bit, but at the conclusion of this adventure, you can have Bahamut say upon his return to Celestia.
About the author
David Noonan has an extensive list of RPG credits, including Martial Power, Scepter Tower of Spellgard, and contributions to the 4th edition core rules. He lives in Washington state with his wife and two children.
“You have changed our universe for the better, but I suspect other worlds will need . . . an inspiration, if you will.” With a single talon, Bahamut points to a well in the floor of an alcove. “That well leads to a place beyond what is known, beyond all our planes, beyond all our gods. Even I know nothing of it. But I wonder . . . if you send some of your more potent items down the well, will they gladden the hearts of good’s defenders in that world as well?” In your next campaign, the gifts your PCs give to the well can wind up anywhere, transformed by the journey into full-fledged artifacts or powered-down into forms more appropriate for low-level treasure troves. In either case, they will form a familiar tie to distant legends that the players created themselves.
Fe b r u a r y 2 010
|
D u n g e o n 175
48
